.

··---·--·------- ----··----··· ·---· ······----·--····-------·---------·--·-----·-·-+----··---··------

0
COPY CEN...E-
\J 1

I
\.J . HA~SIVIUKH Shop No_z Sarna.rth Krupa,Apart_
'\__../
l 982067274-S Opp_ Thane Bharat: Sahakar~ Bank,

9920951860 . . . . l'
Collage Road, Chendani Kol~wada.,
I
Thane (W) - 4<;lO GO:L

B/W Xerox Back Tonback \

',

35 p -PERSIDE

·'· ~-::-~;, .
Only #or student: offer

.
. ;.·:
.·. [:::e:
.
:... . .....
· Std.: R~l no.:

.
I
i
I
!

><,E;rox,b~w pr:_in1:.: colour p_ri~t:, ~mbc;rssing,. larni.nat:io,,

: . .'. Spiral btndtn:g, hard band'tng, rub:b~r stamp I
 ~~---~-

0'
'
._)
·,
•··:i.:. SHEAR AND DEVELOPMENT LENGTH 83
·; >~ ,:·
_j where,. V, b, d, Tv.• are the same as before,
.. ·~. :_.,"
-·<~.U'.~; .·:~:,~: ··.;:,. .;:.;... ;o; ':: " .•.. ,. ;,."· ., . ''·. :U<.'i ;.::..
:__) .
M =bending moment at the section in N-mm,
t~""':.f{.) ·.•i , ' · .· c··; ~[ :' , . ~ -~ ., . ·;_-_.:-:;:· ..
:1.{>
•"t '::' .~ = is"the angle between top and bottom edge of the
-~'~~·.: . ,:... f:'. .,,.. '·J.::' I,,:.·
;. ":· ·-~;} :' .
})earn.
.__) " ··-~ .· !t:". :•>,'
·,11':·,
..\ '/: : _: :· ·The negative sign in theiformulaapplies, when the bending moment
·-~ :~~ ·.·_, \~~-- ·t';· ·.r\ -:, .,· M increases numerically in the same direction as the effective depth d
' CHAPTER 4 , .
and the positive .sign when bending moment deaeases in this direction.
.'1'"''' . ·:.. !
J f• .. ·. ' •

I~
·' ··; '' , . Sbear.'and. D~V,eloprnent ·Leng(b. ~ ·, . . 4.3. Shear sti'e)lgtb of concrete
. ~· ' . ' ·. .. ., ' . . .., . '" -~' " . :- ; . " . ~ '

_)

__) •
·r ·. ~~;
4~l·;§b~~,:~(J;~bl ~c. ;~e~tio~$ · ..•.·
~ .'. • ' ··' ' •••• .. ;', ............... '. -

Shear:: 1 stre!ise§~;1rt ·:·R:C sections produce;dilt~oDa1te11~ioir.· ·Rf:flitorc~­

'• f ,.,. ~- •••• ··" ' • ,';.I;;·' :;:
-:·,',:·.··
.... \
, .
Shear strength of concrete is to be considered in design. For bearris,
· the she~t stre~gth of con~rete varies according to·· the grade of con-

!
crete and the percentage of steel.
~.
men't1th~~··r:>ei:dines· n~cess~ry···for'diagoi1aJJt~risibn'.'The·:'heM\itb'Ur of · Shear strength of concrete in beams without shear reinforcement is
J concrete• ·.section:' in,, shear in: respect offailhre':mode '~ndi shear'resis- ,((
·'
'

as per:Table 4.1. ·. ·
tance offered by concrete is extremely · cbmplex~ Extbnsive research
J .· has been darried dtit, yC't ;it is not possible t<): :define the true distribu:- T~ll'4.l Sbea!' strength of concrete(....) in Nfmm•

_) . tion'< of\ shear stress.. accross the deptl1. of a. beatn. The IS: 4!W 19'78
giye~. ~· si¢pl~;Pr~~tip~l stand!lrd for the- P'u.tp()S~·· 9£ d~~~g~. ·This stan- IOOA,
p=hrl M'IS M20 M25 M30
dard,. ds .b~si~ally .. cleyi,s~d for 'limit state ()f·cql\apse., an,d th~" ~arne is
:.) .J,
· a4.9I*d'. Witti; modificati9tl for · the : ~wor.kiD;g · sh:ess' IIlethod~ The· i'
~·· -
changes in the design for shear are as. fol,l_d~s. f
.~·
0.25 0.22 0.22 0.23 0.23
_)
1. Sb.e~r stress iri concr~te isconsidered:
0.5~ 0~29 0.30 0.31 0 ..31
():15 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37
) 2. · '·J\1~,~imum stirrup spacing is defined. 1.00 0.37 0.39 0.40 0.41
, 3. Bent up bars are allowed for half the total shear.
'-./
1.25 0.40 0.42 0.44 0.45
__) · 4. Check fpr sfiear stress i~ slab is introduced. 1,50 0.42 0.45 0.46 0.48

4.2 Noa,ninal
Jf

s~ear stress (T")

[ 1.75
2.00
0.44
0.44
0.47
0.49
0.49
0.51
0.50
0.53
:J 2~25 0.44 0;51 0.53 ·0.55
0.57
Nominal sheai"sti;~~s in beams and :slabs of umform depth is calculat-
2.50 0.44 0.51 0.55
2.75 0.44 0.51 0.56 0.58
~ ed by th'e.formuli~ · . ·• . · . .
~.OO&above 0.44 0.51 0.57 0.60

,) 7i~-ia-· NOTE_:_A.... is the area of reinforcement whiCh continues, at least, one

where, . =nominal shear stress iri N/inm2
J T.v effective depth beyond the section ·under consideration. At support,
V;: shear force in N full area of tension steel may be used.
_) b=breadth·ofbeam inmm
d =effective depth of beam in. mm Solid Slabs
') . f . . . f Shear strength of concrete for solid slabs shall be Kx Tc, where K
-../
Nominal shear stress for beams having varying depth is calculated. has the value given in Table 4.2. ·
as
!
~
V ± M/dtan f3 ~
I
'T.v
·~ bd
'/j
'I
(-_)v
CONTENTS
Preface to the Fourth Edition.
:J
/ The fourth edition is to.tally revised, confirms to IS : 456 - 2000 and includes new chapters CHAPTER-1
. INTRODUC1JON
..- TO LIMIT STATE DESIGN 1-28
·Jon Design of beam, Foundation, Detailing of reinforcement and Miscellaneous problems thus 1.1 Elements of structural Design 1-10
.J increasing the chapters from 10 to 14 as per the suggestions received from the readers.
l.l.l Introduction, 1 .
The revised code added : - 1.1.2 Engineering Structure and Structural Design, I
.,
(_) ( a ) New clause on enhanced shear strength near the support. 1.1.3 Objective and Basic Requirements of Structural Design, 1
Accordingly detailed analysis and design of corbel has been worked out. 1.1.4 Basic Prerequisites for Structural Design, 2
~-,
( b ) Formula for crack width : The parameters required for calculations of crack width 1.1.5 Basic Structural Actions, 2
_)
have been explained and different types of problems have been illustrated 1.1.6 The Design Process, 8
( c ) The details regarding the exposure conditions, Nominal concrete cover, minimum grade 1.1.7 Elements of a R.C. Building Frame, 9
8 of concrete for R.C.C. works given in Table 3, Table 5, Table 16 and CL 26.4 of l.l.8 Computer Programming, lO
IS : 456 2000 have been given in a single Table No. 2.23 of the book for ready 1.2 Design Philosophies
!) 11-16
reference of engineers.
1.2.1 Historical Developments, II
8 Even the type and size of the book is also changed. The basic aim of the book continues to 1.2.2 Working Stress Method, 12
remain as before, namely : 1.2.3 Ultimate Load Method, 14
8 1. To explain in simple terms the basic theories. L2.4 Limit State Method,· 15
2. To explain the background of the equations given in I.S.Code and interprete the 1.3 Types· and Classification of Limit State 16-18
0 clauses aecordingly with detailed explanation.
1.3.1 Limif"State. of Coll!lpse, 16
,....., 3. To give comments on short - comings of the clauses with reasoning.
\.,_j 4. To show with worked examples to design the structural elements as per I.S. Code provisions. 1.3.2 Limit State of Serviceability, 16
5. Inclusion of variety of illustrative examples in all chapters. 1.4 Characteristic Strength· and Characteristic Load 18-23
\~ 6. Large number of figures, diagrams, illustrations, references have been included.
1.4.1 Characteristic Strength, 18
7. Bibliography given up to year 2008.
1.4.2 Characteristic Load, 20
'"
,__)
1.4.3 Application of Probability Theory to safety, 22
Students, Professors, consulting engineers, reaserch workers interested in having insight into
!) Reinforcement Concrete design will find the book very useful. 1.5 Partial Safety Factors 23
:] Sincere thanks to Dr. L.S. Sane, Prof Mrs. Gore for their indispensable help. 1.6 Partial Safety Factors for Loads and Design Load 23-27
./"

The author thanks to Shri Mangesh Kudle for drawing neat figures and DTP work. The
1.6.1 General, 23
~) publication of the book would not have been possible without untiring efforts of Shri Sharad
1.6.2. Load Factors for StructUral Stability, 24
Karve for helping the author in all jobs related to publications.
!") 1. 7 Partial Safety Factors for Material Strength and Design Strength 27
', ___/
Preface to the Fifth Edition -
·~ Fomulae for Bending Moment ancl Shear force for Beams , Reaction and Bending Moment 1.8 Concluding Remarks 28
Coefficients for Contiuous beams , Formulae for Portal Frames , Formulae for Gable Frames
•'] have been included to serve as ready reference for Design Engineers and Contractors . CHAPTER- 2 MATERIALS 29-60
They will also help to check the worked out examples for faculty members and Studenrs . 2.1 Concrete 29-31
'') The Author welcomes constructive suggestions which will go long way forfurJ1c1 improvement 2.1.1 Constituent Materials, 29
2.1.2 Testing of Concrete and Constituent Materials, 31
Q 7, Sneh Residency, Sannvadi, I.I.T. Road, Dr. V.L. Shah
Aundh, Pune- 411 007. Ph: (020) 258887·-:;.
vi Contents Contents vii C
2.2 Properties of Concrete 31-42 CHAPTER-3 LIMIT ANALYSIS OF ~C.STRUCTlJ:RES 61~98 c
2.2.1 Compressive Strength, 32
2.2.2 Tensile Strength, 34 3.1 Limit Analysis 61
C:
2.2.3 Strength Under Combined Stress Condition- Failure Criteria, 34
2.2.4 Stress- Strain Relation, 35 3.2 Limit Analysis of an Elastic- plastic structure under Flexure 61-66 C'
22.5 Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson's Ratio, 37 3.2.1 Rotation of a Plastic Hinge, 65
3.2.2 Redistribution of Moments, 66
22.6 Creep, 38
2.2. 7 Shrinkage, 40
c
2.2.8 Modular Ratio, 41 3.3 Application of Limit Analysis of R.C. Structures 66- 69 ,.-~
2.2.9 Durability, 41 3.3.1 Plastic Hinge in a R.C. Member, 66 \
3.3.2 Moment Rotation Characteristic of a R.C. Member, 68
- 2.2.1 0 Cover to Reinforcement, 42
2.2.11 Unit Weight of Concrete, 42 3.3.3 Resdistribution of Moments in a R.C. Structure, 69 c
2.3 Concrete Mix Propertioning 42- 45 3.4 Methods of Limit Analysis of R.C. Siructures 70-74 ( <

2.3.1 Design Mix Concrete, 44 3.4.1 General, 70

2.3.2 Nominal Mix Concrete, 45 3.4.2 I.S.Code Provisions for Limit Analysis of R.C
Structures and their Interpretation, 70
c
2.4 Production, Control of Control Strength Test of concrete 45-50
3.4.3. Advantages of Redistribution of Moments, 73 c
2.4.1 Proquction, Control of Concrete, 45
2.4.2 Strength·Test of Concrete, 47 3,5 Analysis of Structures 74-80 ('
2.4.3 Types of Tests, 48 . 3.5.1 Methods of Analysis, 74
2.4.4 Requirements for Statistical Determination of
Characteristic Strength, 48
'--
3.5.2 Computation-of Loads, 74
3.5.3 Loading Arrangements for Computation of Design Moments, 76
c
2.4.5 Acceptance Criteria for Concrete, 49 3.5.4 Generalised Method for Computation of Maximum Span
Moments and Points of Contraflexures, 78
c
2.4.6 Non - destructive Testing of Structures, 50

2.5 Design Strength of COncrete

3.5.5 Analysis using Moment Distribution Method, 80 c
50-51

2.6 Reinforcing Steel

3.6 Analysis Procedure and Illustrative Examples.
3.6.1 Analysis Procedure, 80
80-98 r:
_/· 3 .6.2 Illustrative· Examples, 81 ('
51-56
2.6.1 Types of Reinforcement, 51
2.6.2
2.6.3
Plain Round Bars of Mild Steel, 51
High Yield Strength Deformed Bars, 52
3. 7 Concluding Remarks, 98.
c
2.6.4 Properties of Round Bars; 55 CHAPTER- 4 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE- FLEXURE 99-182 c
2.6.5 Properties and Design Strengths ofReinforcement, 55
4.1 Introduction, 99 ('
2. 7 Role of Reinforcement in Reinforced Concrete 56-57
2.7.1 General, 56 4.2 Theory of Bending of R. C.Members at Limit State of Collapse, 99-102 r
2.7.2 Functions, Types and Location of Reinforcement, 56
4.3 Modes of Failure Io3-Io4c
2.8 Composite Action of Concrete and Reinforcement 58-60 4.3.1 Balanced Section or Critical section, 103 ·
2.8.1 Load Sharing by two materials , 58
2.8.2 Properties of Transformed Section, 58
4.3.2 Under- reinforced Section, 103
4.3.3 Over- reinforced Section; 104
c-
C'
r
 j

0 \!\h....:
vnr Contents Contents ix

0 ae- PYtRT- A SINGLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR BEAMS 105~132 4.12 Flanged Sections. 149-152

0 4.'4 Properties of a Singly ·Reinforced RectangUlar Section . ,0$~1,

4.12.1 Introduction, 149
· 4..12.2 Effective Width of Flange, 151

·~ 4.5 Properties of a Singly Reinforced Rectangular <Section . 4.13 Properties of Flanged Sections. 152-159
109~122 .. .... - 4.13.1 Under.- reinforced section, 152
according to IS: Code
·.~ 4.5.1 Under- reinforce Section, 110 4.13.2 Properties of a Balanced Section, 157
4.5.2 Balanced Section, 113 4.13.3 A Simple Aapproximate Method for Practical Design, 158
·:J 4.5.3 Comparison ofLimit State Design with Working
Stress Method, 119 4.14 Doubly Reinforced Flanged Section, 159
;__J
4.6 Types of Problems on Section Analysis and Design 122-128 4.15 Types ofProblems 159-169
-~ 4.6.1 Type- I ;.nalysis Problem, 122 4.15.1 Type- l Analysis Problem- General, 160
4.6.2 Type- 2a Design Problem, (Calculation of A51 ), 124 4.15.2 Type- 2 Analysis Problem, 163
4.15.3 Type- 3 Design Problem, 164
0 4.6.3 Typt:- 2b Design Problem, (Design of Balanced Section), 125
4.6.4 Tyep- 2c Desing Problem, (Design of Under Reinforced Section), 126
4.16 Accuracy of Design Calculations, 170
0 4.6.5 Type- 2d Design of an Under- reinforced Section, 127

C) 4. 7 Limitations on Design Parameters 129

PART D MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS 171-182

0 4.8 Analysis and Design of Beam Sections allowing

4.17 Other Miscellaneous Section, 171
-Redistribution of moments 129-132·
CJ 4.18 Illustrative Problems, 172-182
PART- B DOUBLY REOMFPRCED BEAMS 133-148
CJ
4..9 Introduction, 133
-'' CHAPTER- 5 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE- SHEAR 183-226
_)
4.10 Properties ·of a Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Section, 1j3-140
5.1 Introduction 183
CJ 4.10.1 Depth of Neutral Axis, 134
4.10.2 Moment of Resistance, 135
5.2 Shear stresses in Beams 183-187
4.10.3 Area of Tension an9 compressjon Steel, 136
J 4.10.4 Stress in Compression Steel, 137
5.2.1 Shear stress in Homogeneous Beams, 183
5.2.2 Shear Stress in RC. Beam, 183
4.1 0.5 Design Parameters for Doubly Reinforced Section, 139
0 5.2.3 Inclined Cracking,1l4.J"'
140-148
5.2.4 Different phases of behaviour of Beam upto failure
fl 4.11 Type of Problems
under the action ofFlexure and Dominating Shear, 186
4.IU Analysis of Problems, 141
4.11.2 Type- 2 (a) Design Problems, 144
CJ 4.11.3 Type- 2 (b) Design Problems, 146 .
5.3 Shear Failure 187-189
5.3.1 Modes of Shear Failure, 187
:::J PART-C FLANGED BEAMS 149-169
5.4 Ultimate Shear Strength of Beam Without 189-190
~ Shear Reinforcement,
5.4.1, Shear Failure Mechanism, 189
CJ
 'XI c
6.5 Check for Development Lengthfor Flexural.Bond 240-243 ~.
5.5 Factor Affecting Shear Resistance of a R.C Member 190-192 (
6.5.1 Critical Sections, 240
5.6 Shear Strength of Beam with Shear Reinforcement. 192-201 6.5.2 Development Length at Simple Supports, 240
6.5.3 Development Length at Point oflnflection in
('
5.6:1 General, 192
continuous· Beam for Mid - Span Steel , 242 ·.
··5.6.2
5.6.3
Shear Resisted by Shear Reinforcement, 193
Vertical stirrups, 194 6.5.4 Check for Development Length for Top Bars c
in Continuous Beam, 243
5.6.4
5.6.5
Bent- up Bars, 196
Minimum Shear Reinforcement, 197
c
5.6.6 Maximum Shear Reinforcement, 198 6.6 Standard Hooks and Bends as End/fiichotages 244-246 r--
5.6.7 Critical Section for Calculation ofDesign Shear, 198 6.6.1 Equivalent Anchorage Length of Standard \
Hooks and Bends , 244
5.6.8 Enhanced Shear near Support, 200
6.6.2 Bearing stress at Bends, 244 c
5. 7 Design Shear Strength of Concrete 201-202 6.6.3 Anchoring Bars in Tension , 245
6.6.4 Anchoring Bars in Compression, 245 (
5.8 Design ofShear Reinforcement 202-206 6.6.5 Anchorages for Shear Reinforcement, 245

6. 7 Bundled Bars 246

r
5.9 Some Special Problems in Shear Design ! 207-213
5.9.1 Shear Force Envelop- Maximum Shear diagram, 207 1
· •
6.8 · Curtailment ofBars 246-253
c:
5.9.2 Effect of Varying Depth on Design Shear- .
Beams of Varying Depth, 208 I 6.8.1 General , 246 ('
i\
5.9.3 Effect of Curtailment of Main Reinforcement 6.8.2 Rules for Bar Continuation Beyond foints Zero B.M., 247
on Shear strength of Member, 209
5.9.4 Shear in slabs under Concentrated Loads-
6.8.3
6.8.4
Curtailment of Bars in Simply Supported Beams, 248
Cultailment of Bars in Continuous Beam, 252
c
, Effect of Two - way action on Shear strength, 21 0 · 6.8.5 Cultailment of Bars in Cantilevers , 253 r
5.9.5 Design of Corbels or Brackets, 211 6.8.6 Remedies to Get Development length, 253 '

5.1,0 Illustrative Examples. 213-226 6.9 Splicing ofBars 253'-255

c
·r:
CHAPTER- 6 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE- BOND / 227-274 6.10 Illustrative Examples 255-274

6.1 Introduction 227-228. CHAPTER-7 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE- TORSION 275-318

c
6.1.1 What is Bond? Why Bond?, 227
6.1.2 Bond Stress, 228 7.1 Introduction 275 -278 c--.
6.2 types ofBond 228-238
7.1.1 Equilibrium Torsion, 275
7.1.2 Compatibility Torsion, 276 c
6.2.1 Factor affecting Bond Resistance , 228 7.1.3 Torsional Cracking, 277
6.2.2 Anchorage Bond - Anchorage Length, 234
l
7.2 " Plain Concrete Beam Under Pure Torsion 278-283
6.2.3
6.2.4
Pull- out Test, 236
Development Length, 238
7.2.1 Elastic Analysis, 278
7.2.2 Plastic Analysis, 281
c
6.3 Flexural Bond 238-239 7.2.3 Post- Cracking Analysis, Ultimate Strength, 282 c
6.4 Local Bond ~239-240 7.3 · Torsional Reinforcement 283·284 C:'
c:
r
-T) x;; Contents
Contents xiii
C) 7.4 ·Behaviour ofR.C. Beam under Pure Torsion
284-285
8.5 Long- term Deflection and Total Deflection 331-339
<J · 7.5. · U/tlnude Strength ofll.C Member unf!er Pure Torsion
285-290 8.5.1 Introduction, 331
7.5.1 Skew Bending Theory, 285 8.5.2 Deflection due to Shrinkage, 331
C) 7.5.2 Space Truss Analogy- Introduction, 287- 8.5.3 Deflection due to Creep, 334
,· ~·' 8;5.4 Total Deflection, 338
·_) 7.6 Combined Torsion and Bending
290-297 8.5.5 Deflection after Erection of Partition Walls, 339
7.6.1 Skew Bending Theory, 290 8.5.6 Measures for Deflection Control, 339
I ) 7.6.2 Space Truss Analogy, 293
'-.;

7.6.3 Interaction of Torsion and Bending, 293 'f .8.6 · Allowable Span Depth Ratio Approach for Control ofDeflection J40 .. J46
0 7. 7 Combined Torsion and Shear
8.6.1 Necessity of Approach, 340
297-299 8.6.2 .Relation between Maximum Stress and Maximum Deflection, 340
<J 7.8 Analysisfor Torsion
8.6.3 I.S. Code Provisions For Allowable Span I Depth Ratios, 341
299-304
(~ 7.8.1 General, 299 .8. 7 Illustrative Examples. 346-362
7.8.2 Distribution of Torsional Moment at Joint, 300
7.8.3 Torsion in Beams Cwved in Plan, 300 PART- B LIMIT STATE OF CRACKING 363-386
0
7.9 Design Procedure for Torsion 8.8 Limit State of Cracking 363-366
:J 7.9.1 Design Approach, 304
304-308
8.8.1 Cracking in R.C. Members : Causes, Mechanism and Effects
7.9.2 Design Steps for Design of Beam Subjected to Torsion, 306 of Cracking, 363
·~ 8.8.2 Classification and Effects of Cracks, 363
7.10 Illustrative Examples 8.8.3 Control of Cracking, 364
·:J 308-318
8.8.4 Calculation of Crack Width, 364
'
:.'..._
,-- 1 CHAPTER- 8 LIMIT STATE OF SERVIC~ABILITY AND 319-386 8.8.5 Remedial Measures, 366
.__; DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT
8.9 Rlustrative Examples. 367-373

·~ 8.1 Introduction 319

PART::. C DETAILING OF R.C. STRUCTURES 374-386
'] PART-A LIMITSTATE OFDEFLECTION 319-362
8.10 Detailing ofR.C. Structures 374-386
·:] 8.2 SignifiCance ofDeflection as Limit State 8.10.1 Introduction, 374
319
8.10.2 Basic Principles Guiding Detailing, 374
•:J 8.3 Serviceability Requirements for Control ofDeflections . 319-321 8.10.3 Requirements ofDetailing, 374
8.3.1 Types of Deflections, 319 8.10.4_ Normal Detailing Rules, 375
!)
-___.: 8.3.2 Allowable Deflection, 320 8.10.5 Some Typical Problems in Detailing, 379
8.10.6 Directional Changes oflnternal Forces, 379
J 8.4 Short- Term Deflection 321-331
- 8.1 0.7 Cantilever Slab Supported by Beam, 381
8.4.1 Factors Influencing Short- term Deflection, 321 _8.10.8. Main Beain Supporting Secondary Beam, 382
.'] 8.4.2 Stiffness Variation along the span and the Deflection 8.10.9 Anchoring of Shear Reinforcement ofinclined Bars, 383
Response of a R.C. Member to Flexure, 322 8.10.10 Bent:- up Bars in Beams, 383
:). 8.4.3 Properties ofR.C. Sections Relating to Stiffuess, 324 8.10.11 Shear Reinforcement close to Support, 384
8.4.4 . Calculation of Short- Term Deflections, 329 8.10.12 Splir.ing of Column Reinforcement, 384
'J 8.1 0. D Column Beam Cuiinection, 385
xiv Contents Contents XV
c
.CHAPTER- 9 SLAB 387-512 9.8 Y"re/d Line Theory 482-512 c
9.1 Introduction 387
9.8.1 Introduction, 482
9.8.2 Behaviour of Slab upto Failure, 482·
c
9.1.1 Difmition, 387
9.1.2 Methods of Analysis, 387
·i'J
9.8.3 Assumptions, 484
9.8.4 Guide Lines for Predicting Yield Line Pattern~ 484
c
9.2 ClassifiCation andDesign ofSlabs 387-390
9.8.5 Yield Criterion, 486
9.8.6 Methods of Analysis and Basic Principles behind Yield Line Theory, 487
c.
9.2.1 Classification of Slabs, 387
9.8.7 Virtual Work, 488
_ 9.8.8 Illustrative Examples, 490
·
c
9.3 Effective Span for Slab or Beam 390
9.4 One- way Slab 390-420
-9.8.9 Equilibrium Method, 505
9.8.10 Comer Levers, 511
c
9.4.1 Introduction, 390
9.4.2 Design of One- way Slab, 390
9.8.11 Circular Slabs, 511
c
9.4.3 Detailing of Reinforcement, 395 CHAPTER- 10 DESIGN OF BEAM 513-554
9.4.4 Illustrative Examples, 397 c
9.4.5 Concentrated Loads on Slabs, 416 - IO.I General Considerations 513
c
. 9.5 Two- way Slab
9.5.1 Behaviour of a Two - way Slab, 420
420-431
. -··
l I 0.2 Priliminary Analysis 5I3-5I6
c
9.5.2 Types ofTwo- way Slab, 421
9.5.3 Analysis of Two- way Slab, 422
9.5.4 I.S. Code Method, 424
J
l .-. 10.2.1 Beam Sizing, 513
I 0.2.2 Computation of Loads, 514
10.2.3-Analysis, 516 c
9.5.5 Support Conditions, 426
9.5.6 Design ofTwo - way Slab, 427
I I 0.3 Slenderness Limits for Beams to Ensure Lateral Stability 516 c
-~
9.5.7 Special Problems in Detailing, 428 I 0.4 Deep Beam 5I6 c
9.6 Illustrative Examples 43I- 440 I! I0.5 -?Jeam Design 517--520
,-.
(_
9. 7 Flat Slab 44I - 48I
!
9.7.1 Introduction, 441
9.7.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Flat Slab Construction, 442
I 0. 6- Illustrative Examples 520-553 c
9.7.3 Requirement of Slab thickness, Drops and Column Heads, 442
9.7.4 Bending Pattern in Flat Slab, 443
CHAPTER- 11 COLUMN 555-616 c
9.7.5 Two- way Shear in Flat Slab, 446
9).6 Methods of Analysis and Design, 448
Il.I Introduction 555-556 c
I 1.1.1 Definition, 555
9.7.7 Direct Design Method, 448
9.7.8 Equivalent Frame Method, 453
11.1.2 Short- coming and Necessity of Constituent Materials, 555 c
9.7.9 Distribution of Bending Moments in Column Strip ahd Middle Strip, 457 Il.2 Related Definitions for Column 556-569 ('
9.7.10 Reinforceme!lt Requir&.r.e:;.t;, ~58 11.2.1 Unsupported Length, 556
9.7.11 Moments in Columns, 460
9.7.12 Bending Moments in Panels with-Marginal Beams, or Walls, 461
11.2.2 Slenderness Limits for Columns, 557
11".2.3 Minimum Ecentricity, 557
c
9.7.13 Transfer of Bending Moments between Slab and Columns, 461
9.}:14 Openings in Flat Slab, 467
11.2.4 Effective Length, 559 (
11.2.5 Columns in Elastic Frames, SoO
9.7.15 !llustrative Examples, 467
c
r
:) xvi Contents CoJllents xvii

0 ·. i1.J Analysis ofAxially Loaded Short Column CHAPTER-12 Foundation

569-582 677-728
11.3.1 Basic Assumption, 569
11
\____.) ... 11.3.2 Column with Lateral Ties, 570 12.1 Introduction 677
11.3.3 Requirements of ReinforcementS, 574
0 11.3.4 Column with Helical Reinforcement, 578 12.2 Types offooting 677
11.4. Design ofAxially Loaded Short Column
u 11.4.1 Section, 582 582-589 12.3 Pressure Distribution under Footing 678

0 12.4 Depth offoundation 679

11.5 Column under Axial Compressio11 and Uniaxial .Bending 589- 607
I 1.5.1 Introduction, 589 12.5 Padfooting and Sloped Footing 680
CJ I 1.5.2 Stress Block Parameters, 592
11.5.3 Types of Failures, 596 12.6 PI'qin Concrete Pedestal 680
Q
11.5.4 Pu - Mu Interaction Diagrarn, 597
u 11.5.5 Analysis of Section, 600 .
·,,
12. 7 Design ofIsolated Footing
12.7.1 Proportioning of Base Size, 680
680-695

11.6 Analysis ofEccentrically Loaded Short Column 607- 631 12.7.2 Depth of Footing from Bending Moment Consideration, 681
0 11.6.1 Analysis by Using Equations, 607 12.7.3 Depth ofFooting for Two- way Shear, 683
u- 11.6.2 Analysis by Using Charts, 628 12.7.4 Area of Steel and Check for Development Length, 684
12.7.5 Check for One- way Shear for Bending about y- axis, 685
11.7 Design ofEccentrically Loaded Short Column- Unitixial Bending 631- 638 12.7.6 Check for One- way Shear for Bending about x- axis, 686
0 I 1.7.1 Design of Column Using Equation, 63I I 2. 7. 7 Check for Bearing Pressure at Column Base, 686
I 1.7.2 Design of Column using Charts, 633 12.7.8 Illustrative Examples, 688
0
11.8 Unsymmetrically Reinforced Column Section 639- 641 12.8 Moment Resisting Isolated Footing 695-705
0 12.8.1 Introduction, 695
11.9 Analysis of Circular Column Section 641-647 12.8.2 Uniform Soil Pressure Distribution ( Ec~eritric Footing), 696
(__) 12.8.3 Uniformly Varying Soil Pressure Distribution
11.10 Column. Subjected to Axial Compression and Biaxial Bending 647- 656 ( Concentric Fooring ), 696
0 ILl 0.1 Introduction, 64 7 12.8.4 Illustrative Examples, 699
I uo:2 Bresler's Reciprocal Surface Approach, 649
'J I l.l0.3 Bresler's Load- Contour Approach, 650 12.9 Combined Footing 705-728
1i9.1 Column Transferring Load to Soil Directly through
CJ 11.11 SlenderColumn 656-674 Footing Slab, 706
I l.ll.l Introduction, 656 ·I 12.9.2 Column Transferring Load to Soil through Longitudinal
f)
I 1.11.2 Slenderness Effect, ffi I Beam and Footing Slab, 707
'---"
ll.ll.3 Behaviour and Strength of Slender Column - Failure Modes, 657
lI 12.9.3 Strap Footing, 722
•:J 11.11.4 Design ?v!ethods, 6.59
CHAPTER -13 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 729-752
:_) 11.12 · Axial Tension and Bending 674-676 13.I Building Fr(lmes 729-735
11.12.1 Members under Axial Tension, 674
13.1.1 Analysis for Vertical Loads- Substitute Frame, 729
~ 11.12.2 Combined Bending and Axial Tension, 676
13.1.2 Substitute Frame- I: Floor Frames, 729
CJ
 /------
XVtll Contents \_

13.2 Analysis for Horizontal Loads

13.2.1 Portal Method, 736
736-744 c
13.2.2 Cantilever Method, 739 CHAPTER- 1 ('
13.2.3 Concluding Remarks, 744

13.3 Design of Portal Frame 744-752 INTRODUCTION TO LIMIT STATE DESIGN C

APPENDICES A-1 to A- 61 l.l ELEMENTS OF STRUCTURAL DESIGN

c
Appendix A Dead Load A-1 1.1.1 Introduction
c
Structures in concrete have become very common in civil engineering construction. Concrete ('
AppendixB Imposed Floor Loads for Different Occupations A- 2 toA-7 has established itself to be a· universal building material because of its high compressive strength
Appendix - C Interaction Charts and its adaptability to take any form and shape. Its low tensile strength is compensated by the use ('
A- 8 to A- 21 of steel reinforcement. Thus, the concrete is strengthened (i.e. reinforced) by steel and the resultant
Table C1 - ClO Interaction charts for Rectangular sections. A- 8 to A -18
Table C11 ~C14 Interaction charts for Circular sections. composite mass is known as Reinforced Cement Concrete (R.C.C.) It is this combination which _
A-19 to A- 21 allows almost unlimited use of reinforced concrete in construction of buildings, bridg~s, tanks, (_
Appendix- D Soil Data dams etc., with the result that almost every civil engineer is intimately concerned with reinforced ~
A- 22 to A- 24
Table D1 Bearing Capacity of soil. A-22 concrete (R. C.) structures. It is, therefore, necessary that every civil engi~eer knows the basic \
Table D2 Differential Settlement A-23 principles involved in design of R. C. structures. So, it will be appropriate to begin by reviewing
Table D3 Rock data A-24 the basic principles of structural design in general and then its application to reil)forced concrete ('
structures. I
Appendix - E Working stress Method - Salient features A-2StoA28 c
U.2 Engineering Structure and Structural Design r
Appendix - F Fomulae for Bending Moment and Shear force for Beams A- 29 to A -33 An engineering structure is an assembly of members or elements transferring load (or resisting '
Appendix- G Cntiuous beams - Reaction and B. M. Coefficients · the external actions) and providing a form, space, an enclosure and/or a cover to serve the desired ('
A-34toA-35 function.
Appendix- H Formulae for Portal Frsmes Structural design is a science and art of designing, with economy and elegance, a durable ,__
A-36 toA-39
structure which can safely carry the design forces and can serve the desired function satisfactorily \,_
Appendix- I Formulae for Gable Frames in working environment during its intended service life span.
A- 40 toA-43
c
Appendix- J Formulae for Ring Beams , Circular Plates and Domes A- 44 1.1.3 Objective and Basic Requirements of Structural Design
The objective of the structural design is to plan a structure which meets the basic requirements C
Appendix - K Reinforcement Data
A- 45 toA-46 of structural science and those of the client or the user. The basic requirements of structural design
Table K- 1 Properties of Round bars 1
A-45 are as follows : \
Table K- 2 Area of Bars for Number- Diameter combinations A-45 (1) Safety : It has been the prime requirement of structural design right from the history of
Table K- 3 Area of Bars for Diameter- Spacing Combinations A-46 civilization and construction that a structure shall be so designed that it will not collapse in any way C
during its expected life span. Safety of structure is achieved by adequate strength and stability. .
References Besides strength, ductility of structure is also nowadays considered to be an additional desired C
A-47toA-68
quality from a view point that if at all failure occurs; it should not be sudden but should give sufficient
Index prior warrting of its probable occurrence so as to enable one to minimize the consequences of C
A- 69 to A-77
collapse and avoid loss of human life. A brittle material like concrete does not give any prior
warning of failure. It is, therefore, necessary to obtain the ductility in the structure by providing ( ~
steel of such quality that it would yield prior to crushing of concrete. C

c
 Elements of Structural Design 3
J · 2 Introduction to Limit State Design Chapter I Sect.l.l

.:_) (2) Serviceability :As mentioned earlier that the structure shall not fail during its excepted (c) ShearAction: The shear a~on is caused by in-plane parallel forces including shear stresses.
life span. In addition to this it shall efficiently serve the intended function and also shall give a Fig. LU (c) and Fig.l.1.2 (c).
:J satisfactory performance throughout the life span. The performance is rated by the fitness of the
(d) Twisting Action : This action is caused by out of plane parallel forces i.e. forces not contained
structure to maintain deflections, deformations, cracking and vibration effects within accepta~!e
limits. It is achieved by providing adequate stiffness and cracking resistance. Large deflections in the plane of axis of the member but in a plane perpendicular io axis of the member inducing
:_)
and cracking give psychological feeling of lack of safety. torsional moment and hence shear stresses in the member. (e.g. Beams holding cantilever slabs,
(3) Durability : The structure shall resist effectively environmental action during its beams curved in plan and loaded vertically)Fig.I.l.l(d) and Fig.l.1.2(d)
;~
anticipated exposure conditions, such as rain, alternate wetting and drying or freezing, climatic
variations in temperature and humidity, chemical action of salts, abrasive action etc. In short it
-~
should perform satisfactorily in the working environment under its anticipated exposure conditions
during its service life span. (For further details see Sect,-2.2.9.)
~
(4)Economy: The design shall be economical. The economy shall be of material by optimum .
utilization of its strength or it may be the economy of cost which includes cost of construction as
J well as cost of maintenance and repairs. The cost economy has to be decided in relation to the X
required safety, durability, serviceability and aesthetics.
J (5)Aesthetics: The structure should be so designed that it should not only be safe, serviceable
X
and durable but should also give a pleasing appearance without affecting the economy to a great
8 extent. (c) Shear (b)Bending
(6)Feasibility, Practicability and Acceptability: The structure has to be so designed that

e
~ the proposed solution is feasible, practicable and acceptable. · -
r_- I

<J 1.1.4 Basic Prerequisites for Structural Design

I

'.__,
)
A creative sense, imagination, understanding and keen observation of structures in nature, X ~ !Forces notl
scientific knowledge of various aspects of structures, codal provisions, understanding of the various (d) Torsion
~\ structural phenomena on the basis of statistical and experimental data, and· finally the backing of
J the vast practical experience in the past are some of the qualities required of a structural engineer.
(a) Axial force action : (i) Tension, (ii) Compression,
So it is necessary that a structural engineer not having a background of long experience should try (b) Bending action about (i) z-axis (ii) y-axis.
•'j to acquire sound knowledge about the various basic structural actions and the design process. (c) Shear action
(d) Twisting action about x-axis. (b)Bending (b) Bending
.') 1.1.5 Basic Structural Actions (e) Combined action. -One way -two way
The various structural actions which a structural engineer is required to know are as follows : Bending and shear about (i) z-axis (ii) y-axis
:J (l) Types of Structural Actions : A structure is subjected to the following types of basic Fig. 1.1.2 Types of Structural Actions
Fig.l.l.l Types of Structural Actions
structural actions : -Two Dimensional Elements
-One Dimensional Elements
:) (a) Axial Force Action: This occurs in the case of one dimensional (discrete) members
like columns, arches, cables and members of trusses, and it is caused by forces passing through the
.) (e) Combined Ac(ion: It is a combination of one or more of above actions. It produces a
· J centroidal axis and inducing axial (tensile or compressive) stresses only Fig.l.l.l (a).
Membrane Action :This occurs i;; ~!:-:'of two dimensional (continuum) structures like complex stress condition in the member Fig. I.l.l(e).
:.J plates and shells. This induces forces along the axial surface only. Fig. 1.1.2(a).
(b) Bending Action: The force either parallel or transverse, to the member axis and contained (2) Types of Structural Forms: There are essentially four basic forms given below:
•.J in the plane of bending induces bending (tensile and compressive) stresses. The bending may be (a) Tension Form: It is a form in which transfer offorce is effected purely by tension only.
about one or both axes which are perpendicular to the member axis. (e.g. Beams.)F!g.l.l.I(b) . See Fig. 1.1.3 (a). (e.g. Cable).
. ·:; In the case of two dimensional structures like slab, the bend~ng action is essentially by (b) Compression Form: This form transfers the force purely by compression.
transverse forces or by moments about axes lying-in· the plane of the slab. Fig.i.1.2 (b). See Fig. 1.1.3(b). (e.g. Arch).
/J
4 .Introduction to Limit State Design Chapter 1.
(c) Bending Form: It is a form in which transfer of force is purely by bending.
See Fig. 1.1.3 (c). (e.g. Beam, slab).
(d) Twisting Form: It is a tubular form transferring twisting moments by tangential forces
acting on the cross-section. See Fig.1.1.3(d).
The forms given above are only basic theoretical forms. Practical forms consist of wall,
beam, column, arch, cable, frame, truss, girder, grid, plate, folded plate, stiffened plate, ribbed
plate, waffle plate, different forms of shells and membranes, etc.
Sect. Ll Elements of Structural Design sC
(3) Types ofSupports : Supports are essentially of the following three basic types : .C
(a) Simple Support: A support which offers reaction only in a direction perpendicular to
supporting. surface and allows rotation freely on loading is termed as Simple Support. A Beam ('
simply resting on a column with no interconnection is a classic example of this type Fig. 1.1.4 (a).
On the basis of this definition, simple support condition can also be obtained between a R. C. C
l beam and a R. C. column if top reinforcement in a beam is not adequately anchored in the column.
This lack of anchorage results in cracking of the beam on tension side and consequently the beam (':
rotates with respect to the column as shown in Fig.l.1.6 (b).
.
(b) Hinged Support: It is a support which offers reaction in any direction (and therefore has
~·
\

reaction components in directions parallel and perpendicular to the supporting surface) and also C
(a) Pure Tension form (cable) allows rotation on loadingFig.l.l.4 (b). This type of support could be obtained in R. C. construction
by crossing the bars as shown inFig.l.1.6 (c).Itis similar to a pinned or hi11gedjoint in a member:·· C

(c) Fixed Support: It is a support which offers reaction in any direction and resistance to ('
w bending or twisting and hence to bending moment and twisting moment Fig. 1.1.4 (c). In R.C. -
.
c
~·
~
construction, it is obtained by providing adequate steel on tension side of the member and anchoring
the same properly in the support see Fig. 1.1.6 (a).

(4) Types ofStructural Conne~tions: A structure is formed mainly by interconnection of members ('
(a) Simple Supporl
v meeting at the joints. These interconnections are mainly of the following three categories: C
(a) Pinned or Hinged Connection or Simple Connection : It is a joint which offers no C

Compression
~"~ (b) Hinged Support Otree
restraint to rotation and is described as a flexible joint. This means that original angle between the
connected members changes during loading causing relative rotation between the connected C
members. It transfers only axial and/or shear forces and no moments.
See Fig. 1.1.5(a). (Illustration : Joints in frames/ trusses) .~

\
0 ec

"ftJ
M( \

tK~~)~M c
Tension
(c)Bending form (Beam)
¢=3 (c) Fixed Support
B
' ;4·/'~:J c
Vl~jv 0M c
OBA = OBC
/;/D....-~
~[-j: u ~·
Fig. 1.1.4 : Types of Supports
OeA ,;o
BA / <t>= Wac -eBA l = 0
r
t
---t ~~~
A
t!J=(·Bac- eBA l =Bee
(b) Rigid connection
(c) Semi • Rigid connection
Figure same as (b)
c
(d) Twisting forms
*
eBA Oac
but angle between
members AB & BC
less than 90° &
c
(a) Pinned ~lion tP=Oac-OaA'H moment (say M')
Fig. 1.1.3 Types of Structural Fonns less than the (
-Two Dimensional Elements other moment M
Fig. 1.1.5 : Types of Stmctural Coonections
c
c
·:_)
6 Introduction to Limit State Design
:_) Chapter 1 · Sect.l.l Elements ofStructural Design 7
(b)· Rigid Connections: A rigid joint is a joint which transfers not only the axial and shear (5) Types of Member .End Forces t111d Displacements:
:J forces but also the moments (bending and twisting). In a rigid joint, th~ ends of members framing 1
11ie behaviour under the action of external loads· and displacements is known from the
into it undergo the same displacements with the result that the angle between them remains the li forces and displaCements, a~g at the end of its members; termed as nodal forces and displacements~
:J same even on loading i.e. it does not allow relative rotation between the members even though the r A member in space can be subjected to following types of nodal forces and displacements :
joint as a whole (together with connected members) may undergo rotation on loading as shown in
Fig. 1.1.5 (b). Axis X Y Z
-~ Forces Fx Fy Fz
_] (c) Semi-Rigid Connections: It is a coimection which transfers the axial and shear forces Moments Mx My Mz
fully but the moments only partially. It allows partial relative rotation between the members. Linear displacements u v w
Fig. 1.1.5 (c).
_] Rotational displacements x y z.
._) Monolithic Connections in R.C. Construction: Reinforced concrete members (beams,
(d)
y

_]
slabs, columns etc.) are usually cast together i e. monolithically. It might, therefore, be thought that
such monolithic connection is a rigid connection. However, this assumption happens to bejrue only .
when the required tension reinforcement is provided on tension side and is anchored adequately .
v
Fig. 1.1.6 (a). A joint with either inadequate tension steel or with inadequate. anchorage length r
J (L d) might transfer the moments only partially and such a connection tbo.l!gh monolithic acts like .. 1
~>

'
-~
. a semirigid connection. A connection with little or no tension steel and inadequate·ancfiorage can
.J be considered as a simple connection Fig. 1.1.6(b). A crack develops on the tension side of the
. · member which ailows relative rotation in such cases. Member with scissors crossing of bars gives
-~ hinged connection Fig. 1.1. 6 (c). The amount and detailing of reinforcement, therefore, decides
~
ji
ll
~;. z X z X
'_J isthegoverned
rigidity of the connection and thus govems the analysis also. Conversely, detailing and designing
by assumed type of connection. d
(a) Nodal forces (b} Nodal dlsplacemen~s
ai]'~ ,.
:J ~i
Fig. 1.1.7 :Nodal Forces and Displacements

_] The reference axes, nodal forces and displacements are shown in Fig. 1.1, 7. Knowledge of
IF; nodal forces and displacements enables one to know the. types of internal forces, stresses and
..) deformations that would develop in the members. Forces and displacements l;lt the ends of some
Tension at top
..s_Ast in
typical members are shown in Fig. p.8. As shown in figure members (1) to (5) are horizol)tal

)- C>KJ
8 beam members along x axis with loading in vertical plane, member in (6) is a vertical column
_J
!A member in a rigid frame subjected to load in vertical plane while member in (7) is a member in
)M'
I
I

J , ~D horizontal grid subjected to vertical loading. Melnbers in (1) to (5) are subjected to bending and
-.II
..... E shear, member in (6) is subjected to bending, shear and axial force while member in (7) is subjected
(~
ABC Hd to bending, twisting and shear. Member end forces and displacements for the structural elements
c shown in Fig. l.1.8 have been given in Tabl~ 1.1.1.
_J M <M'
(6) Staticallmkterminacy : A structure is said to be statically determinate when its support
.J (a) Rigid connection (b) Simple or Semi-rigid connection (c) Hinged connection .
reactions and member end forces can be determined only with the help of equations of equilibrium.
While in the statically indeterminate structures the reactions or member end forces cannot be
determined just by equations of equilibrium. This property of a structure decides 'the method of
·:J analysis and is, 1;herefore, required to be known before hand. A structure can be made statically
Fig. 1.1.6 : Types of Connections between R.C.Members
determinate or its order of indeterminacy can be reduced by provision of simple or hinged
0 connections for simplifying the inalysis.
 Sect. 1.1
---;ptfmenfi,()f~#*iUralJ)¢sign 9l
8 Introduction to Limit Siate Design Chapter 1
It consists of the following stages : c
(1)
T
tSf----
A1 (JA
·p VB Me
I
(6)
(a) Structural Planning (b) Determination of LOcii4., (c) Analysis
(d) Member Design

(G+~)",(98/l).
(e) Drawing, Detailing aru!, Preparation d/ Schedule
For further details refer to Author's book "Illustrated Design ofReinforced Concrete Buildings
. . c
C

-
f';----~----\--1
(2) I
I
I
I
•• Table 1.1.1 Member End Forces and Displacements for various Structural Members. c
I
vA (JA ()
B
VB
AL-HA ~

r{ r •. i
MA Sr. Member Node Forces ,Displacements
(3)
v~ ~-------~---> B~ VA
(b) Column in Rigid frame
No
c
(JA VB 1. Cantilever A Fy=-W,~z =0 v = fl/)z :=(}A

(4) M,~A •- t
---------~----- ~~
B M, B Fy=VB,Mz=-MB v=O, Oz "=0 \
VA V.B 2. Beam Simply A Fy =VA, Mz = 0 v=O, 9z =~9A i(r
lW_ Fy =VB M =0 v=O, Oz ='f!B
~
MA - (7) supported B
it -1
8 (
' z
(5)
~ ~---- ---------~
f:A
f8 -- / M
VA A B B 3. Propped A Fy= VA, Mz =0 v=O, 9z :=-9A r--
i
(c) Grid cantilever· B Fy =VB, Mz = -M B v=O, Oz =0
r
Fig. 1.1.8 : Member End F'!!~liJ~,nd Displacements
II
4. Fixed beam A
B
Fy=Vi\. Mz.=MA
Fy =VB, Mz =-MB·
v=O, Bz =0
v=O, Oz =0 \
1.1.6 The Design Process
The entire process of design requires conceptual thinking, sound knowledge of engineering, 5. Continuous A Fy = VA, Mz = MA v=O, 9z = -9A _ c
I

relevant design codes and bye-laws, backed UH by experience, imagination and judgement. The v=O, 9z o;=9B
codes of practice are compendia of good practice drawn by experienced and Competent engineers.
beam B Fy =VB, Mz =-MB
r
They are intended to guide the engineers and should not be allowed to replace their conscience and A Fx.=-HA, Fy=VA,Mz=MA u=J, v=O, 9z =0
competence.
6. Column in
rigid frame B Fx = -Ho ,Fy = -'81, Mz = ki11 u=J, v=O,ez. =9s
c
The design process commences with the planning of the structure primarily to meet its
functional requirements and then designed for safety and serviceability. Thus, the design of any
Fy = VA ) MX = 0' MZ = 0 v=O, Bxand 0 2
\
7. Member in a A-
structure is categorised into the following two types:
(I) Functional Design (2) Structural Design horizontal grid present. ('
': . B Fy,Mx,Mz present V, (}X and 9 z present
(1) Functional Design (87/1) :The structure to be constructed must primarily serve the
Note : Reference axes, positive directions of nodal forces and displacements are as shown in Fig /.I. 7.
c
basic purpose for which it is to be constructed to satisfy the need of the 'User efficiently. This
includes proper arrangement of rooms, halls, good ventilation, acoustics, unobstructed view in 1.1.7 Elements of a R.C. Building Frame c
cinema theatre/ community halls, proper water stipply and drainage arrangements etc. The principle elements ofa R.C. building frame are slab, beam, column and footing as shown in an
axonometric view in Fig. 1.1.9. · C
(2) Structural Design : As mentioned earlier Structural design is a.science :J.nd art of (a) Slab : It is a two-dimensional or a planer member supporting a transverse load and
designing, with economy and elegance, a durable structure which can safely carry the design providing a working floor or a covering shel~er. The loads are transferred to supporting beams or (
forces and can serve the desired function satisfactorily in working environment during its intended walls in one or both directions.
service life span. c
r
'_)
10 Introduction to Limit State Design Chapter '1· Sect. 1.2 Design Philosophies 11
·~ (b) Beam :.A beam is a one dimensional (normally horizOntal) flexural member which provides 1.2 DESIGN PBILOSOPWES
support to the slab and the verticill walls. 1.2.1 Historical ·nevelopmen~
~~
' · . ·. (c) Column : It is a one dimensional vertical member providing a support 'to beam; Load is Since the inception of the concept of reinforced concrete in. the last twentie~ of the nineteenth
trarisferred primarily by axial compression aecompanied by bending and shear. · centucy, the following design philosophies have been evolved for~esign of R.C. structures:
!~ (d) Footing : A footing can be considered as a horizontal two way cantilever slab providing
a ~ide base to a column for distributing concentrated column load over a large area <>f supporting (a) Workitig Stress Method (WSM) (b) Ultimate Load Method (ULM)
~ soil. Load transfer is effected partly by bending and partly by bearing. ·
(c) Limit State Method (LSM)
·~
The working stress methOd is based on classical elastic theory and is basically de;reloped for
,'_) R.C.C. Floor beam purely elastic-materials. Until recently; this method was used in English speaijng countries and is
still being U,sed inlndia because of the following reasons : .
."J (i) A theory appropriate to behaviour of relnforced concrete did not deve(op owing .to lack
: of adequate research and due to no~"availability of sUffici~nt experimental data, w4ile the classical
:_j ·• elastic theory was readily available. It was; therefore, applied to reinforced· concrete also assuming
reinforced concrete to be truly elastic~
~ (ii) The methOd was mathematically simple in application. .
(iii) It gave re:asonable safety and serviceability. .
·_) The research material that was available by the middle of 20th century had already brought
out the fallacy of using_ elastic theory to reinforCed concrete (see remarks of Manning (24/1) and
:J Malliert (38/1) and the method was phased <Jut ~ving way to ultimate load-method (63/1, 65/1)

:_] Manning: (24/1) -

Our knowledge of reinforced concrete structures has been very seriously hindered and obscured by the
development of the theory of elastic structures. The absolute mathematical certaiDty of the figured results when
:) ' the material is assumed to be elastic (in the : ..... S<:lentific meaning of the term) a~ to have fascinated many
' acad~mically writers on the subject imd has completely blinded them to the fact thaf ihe resemblance between a
:_) crincrete structure and a perfectly elastic structure is very slight. The only logical theory to apply to a reinforced
concrete design is that which is based on the conditions which exist in actu3I structure when it has just reached the
ultimate load, and there are very strong indications that such a theory will be evolved during the next rn'enty or
_) thirty years". -

'_) Malliert : (38/1) -

".The present customary means of calculations employ Hook's Law, a so called constant quantity (which
.) however in fact becomes a variable after a certain point), and the so called "permit1ed stress" that represent the
saf~ty region before the ultimate strength of concrete is reached, which is disproved by the fact that.breaking does
_.) notgenerally occur on reaching the presCribed multiple of the "permitted stress"; The preseni d!!y methc:! ::f
Flg. 1.1.9 : Eleaients of R.C. Building Frame ' calculation is therefore inadequate and iJ! addition undesirable in education as it !!!OOi<:!r.s rf!""'ideas of the
behaviour of reinforced coni:rete. A new procedme must be !m.ed on· its true be!la•>liour, and must eliminate the
_) 1.1.8 Computer· programming illusory 'constant quantity' and "permitted s~•; . . -
It is important to emphasize that in· every field. tb~ use of computers prevails. A~ to.
_) personal computers, due. to their affordable cost, has made it possible {OJ' alritost every eh~eer ; ·. .ne ultimateload method was based on collapse load for slftlcluresof plastic material like
and sl}Jdeilt-to be equippeclWith such a tool. The. need is more a~nt ~-~thispoweiful llteel. .l(was ~.,Plied to reinforced concrete ~uSe it gave tbe:real margin of safety which the
,_) tool for simplifying engineering ~ign work. It has now becotne practically()f)ligaroty for~.··
' ~ stress method did not. The growth ofknowledg¢ of reinfon;ed <;oncrete was very rapid
engi·neersorstudentsto getconvmantwitbtbe
. . . programmmg . : . ges and. tec~_·w
· · Jangua ·····~
·~~,.,.o:.•.·t ~"':'r!""" ·> '
·"'iOi_;;;• ....,
.::~g the periOd 1938~~~ ~hlch fuially led to evoJutiort of tbe limit state Ji.)Jllosoohv for/desiun in
aided design (98/3). · ·
~
 Chapter 1
£~ u ..• - W LU1Ur olWfe Uestgn
•
Russia in 1955 which was then accepted and further developed by CEBFIP (Comite European Du
Beton i.e. European Committee for Concrete and Federation of Prestressed Concrete) in 1964-
1970; and gave it an international recognition through their recommenda~i::mo;; (64/1, 70/1) and a
model code (78/1) for analysis and design of concrete structures. The method found its place in
design codes (71/1, 72/1, 74/1, 77/1) of the !idvanced countries of the world sinct' 1970. India has
adopted it in 1979 (79/1) and very recently revised in 2000 (00/1 ).
1.2.2 Workin~ Stress Method (WSM)
In the working stress method, a structural element is so designed that the stress resulting from the
action of service loads as computed by linear elastic theory does not exceed a prea;;;signed allowable
stress which is kept as some fraction ofthe ultimate stress to avail a margin of ~;<!fety. The salient
features are described below :
(1) The working stress method is logically not applicable to concrete structures.
The working stress method assumes that the materials of which the structure is made up,
namely, concrete and steel, both obey Hook's Law. The applicability of the Rook's Law or the
linear stress-strain relationship is rather limi:ted in respect of concrete Structures. The stress-strain
diagram for high yield strength deformed (HYSD) bars exhibit an almost continuous curvature
without definite yiel(l point. It is true that the mild steel satisfies the characteristics of an ideal
elastic material up to yield point, but from thereon, primarily in the yield zone, rather acts as an
ideally plastic material. The stress strain curve of the other constituent material, namely concrete,
is a continuous curve and not a straight line; .as shown in Fig. 1.2.1. Thus the basic assumption of
linearity of stress-.strain is in general very crude. It holds good only for a very small range OC of the
!curve.
I I
A_.~'e
;B
.,.,II / I : stress (in case of concrete) or yield stress (in case of steel) to allowable stress. This ratio does not (
l!!
iii
0
Strain-...
Fig. 1.2.1 : Typical Stress Strain Curve for Concrete
(2) Due to no~linear stress-strain relationship modulus of elasticity also varies,
therefore, .constant value of modular ratio cannot be used.
As the stress-strain relationship of concrete is nonlinear, the modulus of elasticity, and hen<;e
modularratio, of concrete is not constant; while -in the working stress method, most of the design
equations are derived using constant valut ui tite modular ratio. This is definitely erroneous.
(3)/t does not predict true margin of safety.
The metbod considers only the elastic part OA of the stress-strain curve (Fig. 1.2.1) and
ignores the plaStic region AB, and therefore disregards· the strength of material near faHure.
Consequently,·~ is Uliable tO predict the Correct load causing failure and, therefore, the true margin
of safety against failure. ,
\
Sect.1.2
Design Philosophies 13 C
c·
(4) Additional load carrying capacity in the plastic region is not taken into account.
The method assumes the linear elastic behaviour not only of the material and the member but
also of the structure as a whole, ignoring its inelastic behaviour and hence the redistribution of ('
forces/moments occuuing along the length of the structure as a result of member undergoing
plastic deformations at certain critical sections. The additional strength or load carrying capacity of c
,t.' the structure due to this phenomenon of redistribution of moments also, therefore remains
unaccounted (For redistribution of moments, see Sect. 3.2.3). The design of a structure using this C'
method, therefore, proves to be uneconomical. ~
(5) It considers ultimate stress as the limit ofsafety but safety is a ftmction ofdtimate strain C
~ and not ultimate stress.
The method uses the concept of stress as a measure of safety i e., the structure as a whole is C
considered by this method to be unsafe when maximum stress in any constituent material at any
point in any member of the structure reaches the ultimate strength of that material. The experimental \
research has clearly established that the structure neither fails nor becomes unsafe just by the
stress at some point in some member reaching the ultimate value of material strength. It shows that \ ·
the limit of safety of material is defined by the ultimate strain and not by ultimate stress (i. e., the
material fails when the maximum strain reaches its ultimate value).
(
(6) Since the structure is subjected to loads, then loads should form the failure criteria and
not the stress. l
The primary function of the structure is to carry loads safely. It is therefore, logical to use
the method based on load causing failure. Hence the safety of the structure can be truly related to. (
;I the ultimate load causing failure of structure and not to ultimate stress at a point in a material.
Besides, the stress is an abstract mathematical quantity which can neither be measured directly nor ('·
can be visualised. It is the strain which can be observed and measured.
(7) Factor of safety does not predict true margin of safety. c
The method, since relates safety to stress, defines factor of safety as the ratio of ultimate
give true margin of sa:fety against failure of a structure. For example, a stress factor of safety of 3
for concrete does not mean that the member or the structure wilf fail at a load three times the c
working load.
(8) The effect of creep and shrinkage of concrete is totally ignored. c
The method neglects the effect of creep and shrinkage of concrete which changes the
modulus of elasticity_ Ec, and transfers the load from concrete to steel with time. c
(9) Failure load computed by this method in majority of the cases is less than that obtained
by experimental results at collapse. ('
Values calculated by this method do not agree -,..,·ith the experimental results at coliapse. The
method, therefore, does not have sound experimental backing. C
(10) It is a Simple and Reasonably reliable m~thod.
The onl¥ point in favour of this method is that it is a well establiSlted method having a long C
standing of over 50 years and that the method is simple in application and reasonably reliable,
even though it is not realistic and lacks rationality~
. C..
c
('
-.__/
'_) 14 ·Introduction to Limit State Design
Chapter 1
·~ 1.2.3 Ultimate Load Method (ULM) (52/1)
In this method, the structural element is proportioned to withstand the Ultimate Load which
iStObtained by enhancing the service load by some factor referred to as load factor for giving a
~ (3) The effect on deflection due to creep and shrinkage is neglected.
desired margin of safety. The salient features including its relative merits and demerits are as
follows:
__)
(1) The stress block parameters,are defined by the actual stress-strain curve.
_J ~e method uses actual stress-strain curve (OAB in Fig.l.2.1) fully and not the nearly linear
part OA as adopted by working stress method. At the most, the auual stress-strain curve is idealized
. into a well defined geometrical shape amenable to computatifl:-•.
·~
(2) The calculated failure load matches with the experimental results.
Since the method is based on actual stress-strain behaviour of the material, as well as of the
_)
structure and that too right up to failure, the values calculated by this method agret well with the
experimental results. The method has, therefore, a sound experimental backing.
0 (3) It utilises the reserve strength in plastic region.
Since the method considers the plastic region of the stress-strain curve also, it utilizes the
__) additional reserve capacity of the member and of the structure in the plastic region, as a result of
redistribution of forces across the section of the member and along the structure. The design based
~ ·on this method is, therefore, economical.
(4) It tt;~kes ultimate strain as the failure criteria.
_) """' I.t uses'the concept of ultimate strain (and not the stress as used by WSM) as a measure of
failure of material which is very much true and hence appealing. The strain is not an abstract
~ mathematical quantity but a real quantity which can be measured and observed. Indication of
failure is given by a strain at which concrete crushes or cracks or at which steel yields or breaks.
~ (5) The load causing collapse is taken as the limit of safety.
The method uses the concept of load causing collapse of the structure itself as the limit of
:) safety and calls it an ultimate load from which the method derives its name. The safety factor is
directly defined by the ratio of the collapse load (or ultimate load) to working load (or service
_) load), an<V is known as the load-factor. Ultimate load is, therefore, at times also known as :
factored load= working load x load factor. Thus, the load factor(of safety) gives exact margin of
__) safety against collapse. For example, the load factor equal to 2 means that the structure will fail
only at ~ load twice the working load.
:~ (6) The method allows selection of different load factors.
The method allows varied selection of load factors - a lower value for loads known with
_) certainty and having little variation Qike dead load) and higher value for a less certain load and
having wide variation (like live load or wind load).
·_] The delflerits of the methods are essentially as follows:
(1) It totally neglects the serviceability criteria ofdeflection and cracking.
.) Utilization of large reserve strength in the plastic region and cf the uitimate strength of the
member results in slender or thin sections which lead to excessive deformations and cracking.
·~ The sw.cture thereby loses its functional utility and the serviceability (viz, excessive sagging of
slabs and beams and cracking of partition walls).
(2) The use of high strength deform bars affects in increase of deflection and crack
~
·-·.w;dfh. '
:)
Sect.l.2 ·Design .~l)plili$ 15
The use of high strength deformed bars effects large saving in quantity of ste~tbut ·reSults
in higher stresses in reinforcement and consequently higher strains in concrete also, resultittg in·
excessive deflections and wider cracking.
The ultimate load method also does not take into consideration the effects of creep and
shrinkage which though do not materially affect the ultimate strength, they do certainly influence-
the deflections.
The ultimate load methods, thus, ensures safety but disregards the serviceability aspect.
1.2.4 Limit State Method (LSM)
The discussions of the earlier two methods clearly show that the working stress method,
though ensures satisfactory performance at working loads, is unrealistic and irrational at ultimate
state and hence does not give true margin of safety, while the ultimate load method, though provides
realistic assessment of degree of safety in conformity with the actual behaviour of the structure at
or near the ultimate state, it does not guarantee the satisfactory performance of the structure at
.service loads.· The limit state method ensures the safety tit ultimate load and serviceability at
working load rendering the structure fit for its intended use. Thus, it .considers the fitness of the
structure to perform its function satisfactorily during its service life span.
The salient features and the merits of the methods are briefly given below:
(1) It considers the actual behaviour ofthe structure during the entire loading history up to
collapse.
(2) It adopts the concept offitness of structure to serve the desired function during the
service life span and defines the limiting state offitness as the 'limit state'. ,,..
l, (3) It attempts to define quantitatively the margins of safety or fitness on some scientific
mathematical foundations rather than on adhoc basis of experience and judgement.
The mathematical basis is derived from classicalreliability theory and statistical probability
(e.g. the reliability of the fitness of the structure and probability of attainment of a critical·
limit state).
(4) The method, adopts the idea of probability of structure becoming unfit, and attempts
to achieve the minimum acceptable probability of failttfe.
(5) The method is based on statistical probabilistic principles.
The method examines the factors which can be quantified by statistical method (such as
loads, material strength) and then they are accounted through characteristic loads and characteristic
strength on the basis of statistical probabilistic principles and the others which are abstract (such
as variation in dimensions, accuracy, variation in loads and material properties etc.) are taken into
account through partial safety factors.
In the limit state method, a structure is essentially designed for safety against collapse (i.e.
for ultimate strength to resist ultimate load) and checked for its serviceability at working loads.
The first part of design thus incorporates basic principles of ultimate load method. But at
the same time, it eliminates the drawbacks of ultimate load method by introducing the second part
of check for serviceability. Since this second part relates to working loads at which the behaviour
of structure is elastic, the material uses the principles of working stress method to satisfy the
 .a." •rnr.VUK\..U.VfJ 'V LUI"f, l.)f,Utt: Ueszgn .)eCt. L.J 1 ype~ UfiU \AU~~tjtt;UttUfl UJ Ltmtt JtUtt;;) ~ I ("'
Cht.pter 1
requirements of serviceability. The limit state method, thus, makes a judicious combination of (iii) It leads to misalignment of sensitive machinery and hence affects smooth functioning -
the ultimate load method and the working stress philosophy avoiding the demerits of both. and performance, and increases wear and tear of the machinery and thereby reduces (
~~ .
There are other limit states imposed by excessive vibration, fire hazards, environmentai'·
conditions, etc. These are rare and special types oflimit states, and should be handled by experts in' (iv) It leads to deformations of door and window frames and hence affects fitting of ('
shutters.
. .the respective fields. The limit state of collapse and serviceability are the most common ones for
normal structures and are detailed in the following sections. (v) It leads to objectionable cracks in walls, ceiling finishes, floor and roof slabs creating c
leakage problems in roof slabs which retain water.
(vi) It creates problems of poor drainage and ponding on roofs. (
This limit state is attended to by prescribing maximum allowable deflections or by prescribing
maximum allowable span to depth ratios. This limit state is critical especially in case of roof ('
and floor slabs.
(B) Limit State of Cracking : Design to this limit state safeguards the serviceability of the c
structure against damage due to excessive cracking. Attainment of this limit state has the
following adverse effects:
(i) It mars the appearance of exposed surface.
c
(ii) It creates a feeling of lack of safety when present in large proportions in walls and r--
beams.
(iii) It reduces the imperviousness, creating leakage problems in roofs, tank walls and (
floors rendering them unserviceable.
(iv) It leads to corrosion of steel and hence reduction in strength and durability of the ('
structure.
(v) It reduces the stiffness of the member and hence increases det1ections.
(vi) It creates lot of maintenance problems.
c
Cracking is not dangerous directly but leads to ill effects shown above. This limit state is ('
attended to by imposing restrictions on maximum crack width for important structures and by
ad~ering to appropriate detailing rules and restrictions on bar diameter, spacing, cover etc., for
commori type of structures. This limit state is critical for water retaining structures.
c
(C) Other Limit States : Structures designed for special or unusual functions need
considerations of appropriate Limit States. They are briefly given as under :
r
(i) Vibration : This limit state is applicable to structures subjected to dynamic loads.
Attainment of this limit state causes discomfort or alarm to occupants, structural damage and
c
interferes with proper functioning of the structures. Acceptable vibration limits are given in specialist
literature.
c
(ii) Fire Resistance : In this case a structure or a structural element should be' designed to
possess an appropriate degree of resistance to flame penetration, heat transmission and collapse,
c
to avoid loss of human life and damage to the structure. The requirements for fire safety depends
on the type of structure (e.g. hotel, paints factory, textile mills, electronic data processing installation
c
etc.). One may refer to IS : 1642(89/1) for details of construction for fire safety of buildings ('
(general).

--- --~· wmpression, axial tension, bending, shear, torsion, bond

(iii) Durability: This limit state relate to durability of concrete structures against exposure
conditions. (such as rain, continuously underwater, aggressive soil, sea water, freezing and thawing,
r
or their combi.Mtion. For safety, it is necessary to ensure that failure occurs by none of th{?se.
*Material failur~ cun oe due to crushing of concrete or yielding of steel resulting finally in crushing
of concrete.
exposure to aggressive chemicals, sulphate attack etc.) There is a need to emphasize durability in
the design and construction of concrete structures (85 /7, 86!4, 86!5). This limit state is attended to c
by increasing the durability of concrete. For further details see Sect. 2.2.9. ('

c
 J8:: ,/Jtm:oduction to Limit State Design CluJpter 1. Characteristic Strbtgth and Clulracteristic Load 19
CJ :seqJA·~
Nonnally the limit state of collapse and the serviceability limit *'tesof detleciioo and cracking is normal, the curve is called a normal (Gaussian) distribution curve (see Fig. 1.4.1). The value
0 under service load are considered in design, and ~urability is talCen care of by prescribing appropriate of the quantity corresponding to peak of the curve is known as the mean value. A normal
grade of concrete, the nominal cover for various exposure conditions. cement contents etc. frequency distribution curve is symmetrical about this value. The area of the curve from thebeginni~g
~ to any ordinate having a value say 'f' gives the probability of QCcurrence of a value less than 'f'.
1.4 CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH AND CHARACTERISTIC LOAD Thus, in Fig. 1.4.1, the shaded area indicates the probability of a value going below fck.
~~ It has already been seen in the earlier section that a structure is normiuly designed to provide i.i
r Assuming normal distribution curve for material strength (which holds good in case of steel
safety against collapse. The failure occurs when the load acting on the'structure exceeds its strength. and concrete strengths to a great extent), the value of characteristic strength corresponding to only
'~ Thus, the load, and the strength of constituent material forming a structural member become the 5% probability of not being achieved can be obtained as that value upto which area of curve is
two basic design parameters which decide the safety of the structure. Since both these factors are 5% of the total area. The particular value, as obtained from the properties of the normal distribution
·~ totally independ(mt of each other, they need separate treatment in the process of determination of
curve, is given by the following equation :
safety. Each of the above factors has hardly ever a constant value. Iris prone to variations and that ...... (1.4.1)
fk = fm - 1.64s
~ is its characteristic. These inherent variations can, however, be quantified on the basis of statistical
principles because either the data may be available or the possibility of getting the statistical data where, fk is the characteristic strength,
0 ifl terms of numerical values exists. Since collapse of a structure is related to simultaneous f is the mean strength,
m
occurrence of overload and understrength, the value to be assigned to the load has to be that value s is the standard deviation, and
·_J which has minimum acceptable probability of not being exceeded during the life time of the structure, 1.64 is a value corresponding to 5% probabilit';
and the material strength has to be that value which has maximum reliability (probability of being The value of the standard deviation 's' is given by
._J

~
achieved). Tbe'<y!lues assigned to loads, and material strength on this basis are known as
'characteristic wilues' on the basis of statistical probabilistic principles.*

1.4.1 Characteristic Strength

s=
g l
...... (1.4.2)

where, A = deviation of the individual test strength from the average or mean strength of n samples;
:_) The characteristic strength of material is that value of material strength below which not n = number of sample test results.
more than a minimum acceptable percentage of test result'> are expected to fall. Most of the design This approach of defining the material strength shows clearly the quality of material, and
codes, including I.S. Code, prescribe this minimum acceptable percentage equal to 5% for reinforced therefore, it is conducive to quality control. The quality is shown by standard deviation's' and the
~
concrete structures. lt means that characteristic strength has 95% reliability or there is only 5% spread ( f -f . ) of the available data. The designer can obtain a required mean strength to get
probability of actual strength being less than the characteristic strength. max mzn ·
:_) the desired characteristic strength; or if the mean strength is known for a given concrete, it
The characteristic value of a quantity liable to variations is obtained from frequency distribution I enables him to decide its characteristic strength and adopt corrective measures to increase the
curve. It is a curve obtained by plotting the frequency ordinates for different assumed intervals of I strength if it is below the desired value. This enables one to have a quality control over the material
·~ I
the quantity between the range of minimum and maximum values of the given data. If the variation l
~
Characteristic
Strength
~ and the work.
The design codes always prescribe a minimum nJmber of test results for arriving at the
~
standard deviation. They also prescribe the requirements for number of samples and the acceptance
l criteria. The values of characteristic strength and the LS. Code provisions for the acceptance
•___)
criteria are given in Sect. 2.4.6.
'"_) ~
Ex. 1.4.1 :Determine the characteristic strength of concrete which has given the following
·;;;
~ IS"io Results compression test results on 150mm cubes. 2
__) i;' below fd · 40, 45, 34, 41, 30, 39, 46, 37, 40 and 48 N/mm
.
c:
:J
CT
Solution: Number of results n = 10.
Arranging the results in ascending order, mean value fm' deviation ll of each value from fm,
~
:)
~

f.
Strength
""- standard deviation and the characteristic strength are obtained as follows :
f 30 34 37 39 40 40 41 45. 46 48, ]J = 400N/mm
2

2
Fig. 1.4.1 : Frequency Distribution Curve for Strength A -10 -6 -3 -1 0 0 1 5 6 8, f m = 400/10 = 40N/mm
~ A2 100 36 9 1 0 0 1 25 36 64,
2
"i.A = 272
• For treatment , 'stalistical probabilist'c principles, see refeences (7n!J, 77/2, 87/2,00.14.'
 ..c.v :~mr(IUU(;'"'" :fQ.:;JMw,;~e uestgn
CI!Ppter·J

,_Jx· n-1 L ,~10-172 - 5.5 Nlmm'

''/
in IS 875 (Part-1XB7/3). Dead load allowances for partitions and typical unit weights of materials ('
..
2
& 1. are given in Appendix A · . C
. (ii) LiveLoad (U) or 1mposed Load (IL) : Live loads or imposed loads are either movable
. It_ = fm- 1.64 X S = 40 - 1.64 X 5.5 OJ-lDOVing loads-without any acceleration or impact. These loads are assumed to be produced by ('·
fk = 30.98Nimm2 intended use or occupancy of the building including weight of movable partition or furniture etc.
~ The imposed loads to be assumed in design of buildings are contained in IS 875 (Part-2X~?/5). The ('
imposed loads t9 be assumed in design of buildings have been given inAppendixB, TableB-1.
Ex; 1.4.2 : What should be the average strength of samples of concrete if desired • (iii) Wind Load: Wind load is a primary horizontal load caused by movement of air relative .
charaCteristic strength is 15 N!mm 2 and standard deviation is 3.5 N/mmi ? to earth. The design wind load is a function of design wind speed, risk coefficient, terrain roughness, ("
Solution : ft. ;, jm- 1.64s fm =ft.+ 1.64s = 15 + 1.64 x 3.5 aspect ratio of building and local topographical features.
f.m = 20.74 N/mm 2 For further details refer to IS 875 (Part-3X87/5) also for studies on wind pressure distribution C
of low rise building refer to (91/4, 94!1).
1.4;2 Characteristic Load (iv) Earthquake Load : Earthquake loads are horizontal forces caused by earthquake and ("'
(A) Defination : shall be computed in accordance with IS:1893-(84/1) and IS:4326-(93/1).
A characteristic load is defined as that value of load which has 95% probability of not Either wind load and earthquake load is to be considered because their probability of simultaneous ('
occurrence is almost zero.
being exceeded during the service life span of the structure. It is given by the ordinate upto which
area of curve is 95% of the total area as shown in Fig. 1.4.2. r-
~uming normal distribution curve for loads also, the characteristic load Fk is given by : (C) Maximum Characteristic Loads: Ideally, statistical determination of all these loads ,.-.
independently and in combinations (8716) is required for arriving at their characteristic values. But (
Fk = Fm + l.64s
...... (1.4.3) because of i~adequate statistical data giving their magnitudes and their distribution, it has not been
where, F
. m is the
. mean value of the .load, pOSSible to express these loads in statistical form. And therefore, till such time adequate data is r
- s is standard deviation. available, the load commonly known as working loads or service loads, which have been arrived at
by judgement and accepted practice, are taken as characteristic loads. These loads are prescribed l
'., 1

!
Characte.ristic Load

s~ 1 in the loading standards (87/3 to87!6). These loads, in fact, have values higher than those occurring
normally to account for occasional increase in their magnitude under abnormal adverse conditions. r
t Mean Load ----..:.--1.64
I I
1• Besides, actual loads rarely reach the above values because they are specified in terms of over-
-~ -~ simplified and highly idealized loading patterns (e.g. equivalent uniformly distributed loads or point C
8,., "l.. loads). The service loads or live loads prescribed by the codes can safely, therefore, be considered
g -l
as the maximum characteristic loads. r
1l
"•::3"
OJ·
.;::
l
1 (D) Minimum Characteristic Loads : The characteristic loads discussed above ar.e (~
the loads on higher side of the mean load arrived at on the basis of 95% probability of not
.Fm being exceeded, and are, therefore, called maximum or higher characteristic loads (obtaihed c-··
Load---+- by Eq. 1.4.3). On the other hand, in certain situations where minimum value of the load
Fig. 1.4.2 : Frequency Distribution Curve for Load endangers the safety, stability or serviceability of the structure, it is necessary to define the C
(B) Load Types : lower value of the load which can be assured with 95% reliability occurrence. This minimum
The various types ofloads acting on the structures and requiring considerations in design are
or lower characteristic load is given by : r
essentially as follows : Fk = Fm- 1.64s ......(1.4.4)
(i) Dead Load (DL) : Dead loads are permanent or stationery loads which are transferred This is on the lines of assured minimum characteristic strength given by Eq. 1.4.1. (
to the structure or structural members throughout their life span. Dead load is mainly due to self However, because the minimum value oflive load that can be assured is zero, it is only the
weight ofstructural members, permenant partition walls, fixed permenant equipment and fittings. ·dead load of which minimum value is required in design. Now, since the dead loads when considered r
The magnitude of dead load is calculated from unit weights of different materials and are contained independently have very little variation as compared to live loads, they can be predicted with greater
accuracy. The difference between the maximum and the mi'nimum characteristic loads is also very C

r
c
'-"

_)
22 Introduction to Limit State Design Sect. 1.6 Partial Safety Factors for Loads and Design Load23
Chapter 1
•.__)
small and can be allowed for by slight adjustment of 'partial safety factor' for load. Since the Above disc~sion is for an ideal theoretical case involving single load, single resistance and
~ minimum value of live load is zero, the partial safety factor applied to dead load only can, therefore, single member and requires that R is directly related to material strength only. In actual structures,
safely be considered to give minimum characteristic value of the combination of dead load and live the situation is entirely different. There are number of inter connected members of different typeS
load.
_J with their strength. dependant on number of interacting variables. Determination of probability
1.4.3 Application of Probability Theory to safety curve for each variable by itself is very difficult because of number of reasons. Therefore, the
·.~ Probability of failture can be obtained by drawing the frequency distribution curves for force problem of interaction of all these influencing factors leads to an extremely complex situation. But
F and the the resistance Ron the same axis as shown in Fig.l.4.3 with the characters tic force Fk such theoretical approach is neither possible nor necessary to adopt because in practical design it
_) equal to characteristic resistance Rk for a factor of safety (R!Ifk) equal to 1.0 as represnted by the will be rejected or not followed by practising engineers due to lack of simplicity and will defeat the
point of intersection of the two curves. When two indepentant quantities with probabilities very purpose of introducing the new rational and realistic concepts in design. Further the quantitative
.__) P1 and P2 interact as: shown in the figure, the consenquence of their intersaction (i.e. failture in this determination of achievable minimum probability of failure is extremely difficult or rather practically
case) has a probability equal to (P x P ). impossible. This is because of lack of availability of statistical!experimental data of quantities amenable
1 2
to quantification, such as loads and strength: In addition to this there are large number 'Of influencing
._J factors which are non-deterministic, abstract and random in nature which can be defined only
qualitatively. In view of this application of probability approach has not been possible and therefore,
_) recourse is to use semi probabilistic approach in which probability principles are applied to define

.__)
f
~
the characteristic values of basic design factors and the others which cannot be quantified are
accounted through the factor of safety.
r
_)

J
t 1.5 PARTIAL SAFETY FACTORS
Since the safety of the structure depends on each of the two principal design factors (viz. loads and
material strengths) which are not the functions of each other, two different safety factors, one for
I·· Fk= R k ·I F&R ;ii
~~
load and the other for material strength are used instead of a single safety factor. Because each of
.__) ;i)
the two safety factors contribute partially to safety, they are termed as partial safety factors.

__)
Fig. 1.4.3 : Probability of failure
i
-~
It would be interesting to note here that the partial safety factor for load in limit state method
uses the principle of load factor in ultimate load method while the partial saJety factor for strength
In this case, by defination of characterstic force, there is a probability of the actual force
-~
exceeding the characterstic load by 5%(i.e. P1 = 0.05), and there is probability of actual resistance uses the principle of stress safety factor in working stress method. This is again an example of
:j to be less than the characterstic resistance by 5% (i.e. P2 = 0.05). Therefore, the probability ~ judicious adoption of only the good points of the two methods.
failture shown by intersection of the two curves is 0.05 x 0.05 = 0.0025 i.e. 1/400. But if the i!
_) minimum probability (or the risk) of failture that would be accepatable to the society at large is say ·l 1.6 PARTIAL SAFETY FACTORS (yr) FOR LOADS,·AND DESIGN LOAD (Fd)
6
10· (i.e. in million chance) the curve for resistance R must be shifted ahead so that the intersecting 1.6.1 General
_) ordinate of R and F curves has a probability value of 1/1000 as shown Fig. 1.4.4. In this case, Partial safety factor for load is a load enhancing factor (greater than unity) which when
acutal resistance R i.e. the design force Rd has to be quite higher than characterstic force Fk and multiplied to characteristic load gives a load known as Design Load for which the structure is to be
_) the required safely factor is given by Rd IFk" designed. It takes into account unforeseen possible increase in load, inaccurate assessment ofload
,.j effects, unexpected sfress redistribution and variation in dimensional accuracy. Thus, it makes
_) ~ provision for margin of safety. The partial safety factor for load is given by :
<Jl
c:

_J
0
Q)
rf= Fd/ Fk or Fd = Y/k
~ where, Fd = de<>ign load, and
c:
Q)
~
F k = cha.acteristic load.
:J l yt= Partial safety factor appropriate to the nature of loading and limit state being
:.__) considered
The partial safety factor for loads, which at times is simply known as Load factor, depends upon
_J (a) the type of load and the load combination (b) the type of limit state.
Fig. 1.4.4 : Factor of Safety based on Acceptable Probability of Failure
24 IntrOduction to Limit State Design Chapter 1 ·Sect. 1.6 Partial Safety Factors (Yp for Loads and Designf,oad {;J ·
The values of load factors as recommended by IS : 456 are given in Table 1. 6.1. c
Solution : This is a problem of anchorages of overhanging beams. Overturning will tal
Table 1.6-1: Partial Safety Factor (Y) for Loads (according to IS: 456-2000) place about support B and the overturning would be critical when BC is subjected to maC.u
characteristic load (i.e. DL + LL =40 kN/m) while load on AB which prevents overturning
Load Limit State of Collapse Limit State of Serviceability minimum characteristic dead load only (i.e. DL = 15 kN/m). See Fig. (1.6.1). . r
Combination
DL IL WL DL IL WL A ('

DL +I~
DL+ WL
1.5
1.5 or
1.5
--
--
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
--
--
1.0
~c ·4 m
8
p
2m --II
c
0.9 * Fig. 1.6.1 c
· DL +IL + WL 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.8 Let R be the downward reaction at A. ("
Minimum characteristic load on AB = DL = 15 k.N/m.
* This value is to be considered when stability against overturning or stress reversal is critical. Maximum characteristic load on BC = (DL +LL) = (15 + 25) = 40 kN/m.
Overturning moment about B = 40 x 2 x 1 = 80 k.N.m
c
Notes: (1)* DL =dead load, /L =Imposed load or Live load, WL = wind load. Assuming that the reaction R at A acts in the downward direction ('
(2) While considering earthquake effects, substitute EL for WL.
(3) Since the serviceability relates to behaviour of the structure at working load the partial
safety factors for limit state of serviceability are unity. j Restoring moment about B = 15 x 4 x 4/2 + R x 4 = 120 + 4R
Now for the purpose of anchorage, equilibrium is required to be maintained everc-h
(4) For. limit state {)f serviceability, the values given in this table are applicable for short term overturning moment is doubled.
effects. While assessing the long-term effects due to creep, the dead load and that part of the·
live load likely to be permanent may only be considered. 1
:.4R + ,120 =2 X 80
:. R = 10b7 downwards
c-
1.6.2 Load Factors for Structural Stability
--- -- - - - - - - --·-------

I c
Ex. 1.6.2 : Investigate the safety of beam in Ex.l.6.1 from the point of view. of stabil
(a)"Overturning : For stability of the structure as a whole against overturning, IS : 456-(00 1)
prescribes load fa<;tors as follows.
1 of the structure as a whole. ( ,

DL IL Solution : For stability of structure as a whole, load on BC causing instability shall('vc

Loads causing overturning 1.2 1.4 maximum value (1.2 DL + 1.4 LL) while load on AB shall be minimum (0.9 DL ). See Fig. 1.6.
Loads preventing overtm:r1ing 0.9 zero
where, DL is characteristic dead load, and
IL is characteristic imposed load.
In the case of overhanging members (during construction and service) counterweights or
I
~
I~
·~
f --lc 4m
8
2m r(
anchorages should be such that static equilibrium should remain, even when overturning moment is Fig.1.6.2 C
doubled.
(b)Slidutg :The safety factor of 1.4 is prescribed against sliding for most adverse combination
of the applied characteristic loads. In this case, only 0.9 times the characteristic dead load shall be
taker. into account.
' Load on BC = wmax = 1.2 DL + 1.4 LL = 1.2 x 15 + 1.4 x 25 = 53 k.N/m
Load on AB = wmrn. = 0.9 x 15 = 13.5 kN/m
Overturing moment = 53 x 2 x 1 = 106 kN.m.
r
For the purpose of stability calculations, wind load and seismic forces shall be treated as i Assuming reaction at A, RA upwards, and taking movents about B. ('
l
imposed loads.
Ex. 1.6.1 :.A beam ABC 6 m long is hinged at A and freely supported at B, 2 m from C. \
Restoring moment= 13.5 x 4 x 2 -RA x 4 =- 4RA+ 108 c-
~;
For stability, Restoring moment =Overturning moment.
The beam has fo carry a characteristic dead load of 15k.N/m and a characteristic live load
of 25 k.N/m. Determine th¢ mini1f!um anchorage force required to be exerted by the support at
;t! - 4RA+ 108 = 106 ,' .RA= O.Sk.N. ("
A to prevent overturning, providing a safety factor of 2. ~ Thus, even if support A is unable to offer a downward reaction, the beam will still be stal
~
j as a whole. C
~
~

c
....._/

Partial Safety Factors for material strength and Design strength 27

Sect. 1.7
_)
26 Introduction to Limit State Design Chapter 1 Maximui:nspanmomentin AB = 112.5 X l.875-60x 1.875
2
= 10H1kN.m n
~ (iii) In design, the third loading case of minimum load on AB and maximu,n load on BC will
Comments : On compariso11 of two examples, it is observed that though from stability requirements,
the beam is safe and not required to offer @wnward reaction, I.S. Code lays down an additional condition also be required to be investigated for possible reveral of signs of R and bending moment S~
'
__) of giving a safety factor 2 for anc;horage in overhanging beams, which necessitates that support A must be Fig.I.6.3(c).
in a position to offer a @wnward reaction of 10 kN as shown by Ex. 1.6.1:

.~~
_)
Ex. 1.6.3 :For the beam in Ex. 1.6.1, calculate (a) the support reactions and design
moments for the limit state of collapse; (b) loading arrangements for limit states of deflecUim . t=t~2m-\
.J
Fig. 1.6.3 (c)
_) Solution : (a) Limit State of Collapse :
Now, it is neither the problem of determining the required anchorage capacity of support A nor that This case is important in R. C. design to know the region of negative moment inAB, because
_) of stability, but that of usual equilibrium at limit state ofcollapse. For design, maximum values of the negative moment steel at B at top will be required to be continued in that region.
bending moments are always required to be obtained. Therefore, various loading arrangements will Load onAB·
=w.m111 =DL = 15 k.N/m
:__) be required to be examined which will prove to· be critical for different design force!\. Load on BC = wmax= 1.5 (DL + LL) = 60k.N/m
(i) For maximum support moment and maximum support reaction at B: M =- 60x2xl=-120k.N.m
The ~ntire beam ABC shall be subjected to maximum design load equal to 8
I:J 1.5 (DL + LL) =60 kN/m as shown in Fig. 1.6.3 (a).
RA = (15 X 4 X 2- 60 X 2 X lj /4 = 0 :. RA = 0
:. Entire span will be subjected to negative bending moment in this case requiring steel at
_)
top throughout the span.

A~c A~c
(b) Limit State of Deflection :
~ The load diagrams for maximum deflection in span AB and for maximum deflection at free

_)
'.
,._!
f 4m ·2m--j
(a)
Fig. 1.6.3
(b)
end Care shown in Fig. 1.6.3(d) and 1.6.3(e) respectively.

A
~·
~L•~l~L c
4m
·
8
2m_J
.A
C::=i3 4m
. 8 1c
2m--l
:J
r_J
Load onAB and BC = wmax = 1.5 (DL + LL) = 1.5 (15 + 25) = 60 k.N/m.
Taking moments about A,
RB.max = 60 X 6 (6/2)/4 = 270 kN
\ . "Fig. 1.6.3 (d) Fig. 1.6.3 (e)

Comments: Load factors applied to DL and (DL + LL) have just a value unity since it is a case of
'!fB.max =- 60 X 2 X (2/2) = -120 k.N.m
\ limit state ofserviceability.
,') Comments : Since the cantilever moment is a determinate moment for maximum support moment at
B, the span AB may carry any load, even zero load, but load on BC has to be maximum. Howe~!"> for \ 1.7 ·PARTIAL SAFETY FACTORS FOR MATERIAL STRENGTH (rm), AI\
_)

_)
reaction at support B to be maximum, only the condition of maximum load on both the regions AB a"lrd BC
is critical. In the solution, therefore, this loading case is considered to determine both the maximum values
simultaneously.
I DESIGN STRENGTH ( fd)
Partial safety factor for material strength is a stiength reduction factor (greater than unity)
·when applied to the characteristic strength gives a stre:1gt1i knowil as Design Strength. It takes
·account of diffetences between actual and laboratory values, local weakneSSeS~ variation in strength
_) (ii) For maximum positive moment in span AB, and maximum reaction at support A:
The load on AB shall be maximum i.e. 1.5 (DL +LL) = 60kN/m, while that on BC has to be
_) minimum i.e. DL =15 k.N/m as shown in Fig. 1.6.3(b) etc.
Ym =fdc /f :•• •.• (1.7.1)
Load on AB = wmax = 1.5 (DL + LL) = 1.5 (15 + 25) = 60 k.N/m. ' 4
_) Load on BC =wmm. =DL = 15 kN/m. \i The design strength is tftus given by ...•..(1.7.2)
Taking moments about B, RA x 4-60 x 4 x 2 + 15 x2 x 1 = 0 RA = 112.5 k.N.m td= fcJ: lr,.
_) Letxbe the distance from A ofpointofzero shear (and hence of maximum span moment), . \ ; where, -fct· is dc:E.igil strength, J~ i;; ~~aracteristic strength.
Then, 125- 60x = 0 x = l.l87m §
_) u
 --------,------ -- _ ... ........ _..._."' _."'..,•6'•
~
Chapter 1
-r
The' partial safety factor ym for material. strength recommended by IS:456 ar~ given in CHAPTER • 2 C"'
Table J;tl.
,----

·Table 1.7.1: Partial Safety Factors for Material Strength (y,)

.MATERIALS "
(According to IS : 456 ) ('
2.1 CONCRETE
·Material Limit State of Collap'Se Concrete is a stone like hard material obtained by mixing cement, sand and aggregate in c
some specific proportions, and water to harden and give workability to fill in the form of shape
Concrete
Steel
1.5
!
and dimensions desired for a structure. The chemical interaction between cement a~at:l water binds r
1.15

Comments : Since the properties of concrete are susceptible to large

the aggregate into a solid mass.
Concrete possesses high compressive strength but is weak i~ tension. This shortcoming is c
offset by providing steel bars at appropriate locations at the time of casting the members to take up
variations, the safety factors for concrete are specified more ('
than that of steel., · . ~ the tensile stresses, and sometime~ the compressive stresses)ifrequ,ired. Thus, the concrete is
strengthened (i.e. Reinforced) by steel and the resultant composite mass is known as Reinforced
Cement Concrete (R.C.C.). c
1.8 CONCLUDING REMARKS'· A brief discussion of materials and properties of concrete and steel are contained in the ~

subsequent sections to have proper appreciation and understanding of the behaviour of reinforced (

Sinct'concrete and steel form the main constituent materials in reinforced concrete structures concrete. Readers interested in the detail study of the properties of concrete may refer to specialist
the basic understanding of their properties is necessary. The same have been dealt with in texts (73/1, 96/1 ). {'
the next chapter. 2.1.1 Constituent Materials r
-~
The main constituent materials in concrete are :
(a) Cement, (b) Aggregates, and (c) Water.
'
r
l (a) Cement: Cement is a materi11l having property of binding mineral fragments into a solid
mass on its chemical combinatic· ....u water. Since binding and hardening actions are due to
presence of water, such cements are called as hydraulic cements. The cement used for
c

II construction is known as pqrtland cement. The name portland cement was given by John Smeaton
(in 1800) after noting the similarity between the concrete and the portland stone. The ingrt:l:lients of
cement primarily consist of calcareous materials in the form of limestone, chalk and marl, and
argillaceous materials consisting of silicates of alumina in the form of clays and shales. These
c
~
\..

l materials are mixed in a fixed proportion, ground, blended, fused in a kiln and crushed to a fine
r
J powder and the resulting product is the commercial portland cement The major·compounds in
1 ordinary cemeillt are tricalcium silicates (3 CaO, SiO:z), dicalcjum silicates (2Ca0, Si02), tricalcium ('
aluminate (3Ca0, Alp). tetracalcium alumino- ferrite (4 CaO, A1p3, Fep3).
The chemical reactJ.on of cement with water, by virtue of which cement becomes a bonding agent, c
is known as hydration ofcement and takes place in the water-cement paste (60/1 ). In the presence
of water, the aluminates and sili(;ll!es form piOducts of hydration and produce the hardened cement c
paste with tinie. The hydration process involved in setting and hardening liberates heat known as
·heat of hydration; This heat is required to be dissipated or controlled especially in huge mass c
concrete· construction, such as dam.s, to avoid serious cracking and weakening of concrete. Tlie
hyd;aulic cem~nt shall comply with the physical tests given in IS:4031 (88/2) and chemical tests ('
contained in IS: ~!)32 (85il)
c
r
 ~ · 30 MaterialS
Chaptrr 2
__) Sect. 2.1 Properties of Concrete 31
Cement is a material which absorbs moisture slowly from atmosphere whe11 exposed, loosing
its binding property and strength. If the absorption of water is more than 5% the cement loses its the bars are widely spaced. For most works, 20 mm aggregate is suitable. However, where there
,_) binding property and is not useful for normal purposes. Therefore, cemtnt is required to be stored is no restriction to the flow of concrete into section, 40 mm or larger size may be permitted. The
carefully as specified in IS : 4082 (96/6). specific gravity of aggregate particles depends on the mineral contents and it varies between 2.6 to
·_J Types of Cement: 2.9, for sand and gravel. It is usually taken equal to 2.6 and unit weight is about 1700 kg/Ml.
Aggregates are required to comply with the provisions of IS : 282 (70/4).
__) By altering the proportion of the ingredients of cement, further adding mher ingredients or
by changing extent of grinding, various types of cemer.ts useful for different purposes are (c) Water: Water plays an active role in the chemical process of hydration and in curing
manufactured. The different types of cements along with the relevant specifications are listed concrete. It is, therefore, necessary that water used for mixing and curing should be clean and free
__) below: from injurious materials like oils, acids, alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials, alluvium or other
(1) Ordinary portland c-~ment conforming to substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Drinking water is generally considered
~ (a) 33 grade IS:269 (89/2) (b) 43 gn.de IS:8112 (89/3) (c) 53 grade 1$:12269(8717) satisfactory for mixing concrete. Suitability of the water can be checked from chemical test or by
(2) Rapid hardening cement, conforming '[O IS:8041 (90/1) asCertaining the average cube compression test of concrete at 28 days which should not be less
__) (3) Portland slag cement, conforming to IS:455 (89/4) than 90% of the average strength of similar concrete cubes prepared by using distilled water. Sea
(4) Portland pozzolana cement, conforming to IS: 1489 (91/1) water shall be avoided for mixing and curing of concrete because of presence of harmful salts in it.
__) (5) Hydrophobic cement conforming to, IS:8043 (91/2) The pH value of water shall not be less than 6. The details of physical and chemical tests for water
(6) Low heat portland cement conforming to, IS:12600 (89/5) are given in IS:3025(84/2).
__) (7) Sulphate resisting portland cement conforming to, IS:12330 (88/1) 2.1;2 Testing of Concrete and Constituent Materials
(8) High alumina cement conforming to, IS:6452 (39!7) For quality control, the concrete used in construction is required to be tested for-its strength and to-
_) (9) · Supersulphated cement conforming to, IS:6909 (90/2) achieve the desired strength the constituent materials also need to be tested (93/4). The tests specified
(10) White portland cement conforming tc•, IS:0v42 (89/6) by I.S. Code have been given in Table2.1.1. The detailed description of various tests is outside the
__) Specialist literature may be referred to for properties of these different types of cement. scope of this book
(b) Aggregates : The aggregates have a definite influence on the strength of hardened Table 2.1.1. Tests on Concrete and its Constituent Materials
·_J
concrete. Hence, the aggregate used for concrete should be durable, strong, chemically inert and Type of Tests Reference
well graded. The properly graded aggregates give a well packed ..:oncrete. The dense packing
:J gives a better strength, good resistance to weathering and effects economy in the cost of concrete.
l. Tests for Hydraulic Cement :
(a) Methods of physical tests : IS: 4031 (88/2)
~J The aggregates are classified depending upon their size, weight and type as detailed below : (b) Methods of chemical test : IS:4032 (85/1)
Basis of classification Aggregates · 2 Standard sand for testing of cement IS.:650 (91/3)
3. Tests for Aggregate : IS:2386 (63/2)
,_) Size Coarse Fine 4. Requirements of aggregates IS: 383 (70/4)
5. Tests for Water. (Part l:to Part 37) IS:3025 (84/2)
Weight Normal Weight
_) Light Weight 6. Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete IS: 6461 (72/3)
Type
~~--

Natural
---, 7. Tests for sampling and analysis of Concrete: IS: 1199 (59/2)
Artificial
~ (Crushed stone, Sand etc.) I 8. Tests for strength of concrete : (A) Destructive tests :-
(Slag, Cinder Burnt clay etc.)

~
The classification based on size, viz., coarse and fine aggregate, is important from the point of view
of effecting proper grading and the same is, therefore, further elaborated.
Fine aggregate is a material such as sand (97/3), crushed stone or crushed gravel passing
i (a) Determination of compressive strength, flexural strength
and modulus of elasticity of cement concrete,
(b) Cylinder split test for tensile strength
(B) Nondestructive tests :- (9315)
IS :516

IS: 5816
(59/1)

(99/1)

__)

__)
through 4.75 mm size. ¥aterial coarser than this (i.e. retained on 4.75 mm size) is classified as
Coarse aggregate. Nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate is governed by the requirements
th~t tb concr~tc can be plaetd withoi.'t difficulty so as to surround all reinforcement fully well and
Ij
:
(a) Co;e test and load tests on parts of structure-
(b) Ultrasonic pulse velocity
(c) Rebound hammer
IS:456
IS:1331l!l
IS :13311/2
(00/1)
(92/1)
(92/2)

_)
thoroughly fill in the comers of the forni. For this purpose the maximum thick 1ess of the aggregate .:i 2.2 PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE
should not be larger than oneforth of the minimum size of the member, or 5 mm less than the
minimum clear distance between the main bars or 5 mm less tllan the minimum cover tv the Strength, behaviour under the load, and durability, in general, are considered as the most
_) reinforcement, whichever is smaller. This requirement need not be made applicable to slabs wherein l important properties of concrete. The designer is concerned with the following structural properties
 ('
32 Materials Chapter 2

r·
Sect. 2.2 Properties ofConcrete 33
r"
(a) Compressive strength, (b) Tensile strength, \
Incomplete
(c) Stress-strain relation (d) Modulus of Elasticity.
·e" hydration of
cement due to lack
Excess water for
workability leaves ('
~ 0 1.0 of sufficien! water more voids on evaporation

I
·. Besides the above mentioned structural properties related to strength, and behaviour under c .c
iii '5
the load, other important properties concerning the performance or serviceability are : = c ('
(d) Creep, and (e) Shrinkage. -"' -e o.9
.c (/)
C> •

~
c )(
g ~ 0.8 ('
.i rn -~ 0.8
These properties are discussed in brief in subsequent sections. ~
I < 0.7 0.7 ...____ ('
2.2.1 Compressive Strength
The main measure of the structural quality of concrete is its compressive strength. Th!!
I 0.6 0.6

compressive strength is obtained from crushing test performed on 150 mm cubes or 150$ x 300mm I
g 0.5'----l.-....L--J...___.J._..J..____.J_ _J 0.50 1 2 3 4 <
('
cylinder specimens, under axial compression. Due tci heterogeneous character of concrete and
other factors, the test results of 'n' specimens, having the same size and shape of aggregates,
!
Ii
0 0.1 .0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
water I cement ratio
0.7 hla-
c
mixed to identical proportions, cast and tested under the same conditions do not give a single vaiue Fig. 2.2.1: Effect of Water-Cement Ratio on Fig. 2.2.2 : Effect of h/a on concrete
Strength strength ('
of strength but invariably show a considerable scatter. The single characteristic value from' n' test
results is obtained on the basis of statistical concepts and complying with the specified acceptance
I
~ 2.2.1.2 Factors Influencing Test Results
~
criteria (See Sect 2.4.5). This characteristic strength is taken as the reference strength and the
~
For a given concrete mix, the compressive strength test results are influenced by the following C
other properties such as tensile strength, modulus of rupture, modulus of elasticity etc., are derived
from their interrelationship. II factors:
(a) Shape, and size of test specimens, (b) Age Effect, (c) State of stress, and (d) Confinement. ('
2.2.1.1 Factors affecting Strength Il (a) Shape and size oftest specimen :The stand:!Td specimen normally used for determining ('
The strength of concrete is decided by the following factors,
·I the compressive strt:ngth of concrete in laboratory is ~ither Cube or Cylinder or Prism. The cubes
(a) Water-cement ratio, (b) Aggn;gate-cement ratio, (c) Maximum size of the aggregate
(d) Grading, surface texture, shape, strength and stiffness of aggregate particles. I
! of 150 mm size are common in India, Europe and Asic.~ countries while cylinder of 150 rnm
diameter c
~ and 300 mm hei!!ht are used in U.S. and Australia. The specimens of concrete of the same
Hence, the information of all these factors is required to be provided while designing the
con~,Tete mix (refer Sect. 2.3). The most important factor determining the strength of concrete is
I composition and the same age, possess different strength in relation to the size and shape of the
specimen. This dependence is known as 'Specimen Effect'. The compressive strength of a prismoidal
( ,

the water-cement ratio. The water-cement ratio is the ratio of the weight of the mixing water to I~
that of cement in the mixture. Cement needs water of about 38% by weight for complete hydration
(60/1). But since the complete hydration is a long-term process, and under practical conditions,
the period of concrete mixing and casting being short, the cement combines with only 23% of
i•
water. Now if only 23% of water is added while mixing, the concrete will not be workable because
a~
the water cement ratio of0.23 will be too less. So additional water will be required for workability.
This water in excess of 23% by weight will evaporate on drying of concrete, creating voids in it
due to trapping of air bubbles insides, thereby reducing the strength of concrete. To prevent this, if
the cast concrete is cured by keeping it moist, maximum hydration (with 38% water) can take
place giving the contrete an optimum strength. The curve in Fig. 2.2.1, which shows variation of
concrete strength with water-cement ratio for well cured conditions. The water,-in excess of 38%
added to concrete mix for further improving the workability, ultimately C'\faporates (when curing
is over) and creates voids in cast concrete reducing its strength as shown in Fig. 2.2.1.
specimen[pr having a square base of side u' and height 'h' has been observed to decrease with the c
~ increase in the ratio of h!a till it reaches a Y~lue of 4 (i.e. h/a =4), beyond which it approximately
('
remains constant equal to 0.7 times the cube compressive strength for which h/a ratio equals to
a unity (Fig.2.2.2). This is due to the influence of the frictional forces developed on the contact
~
'.J surface of the specimen. The cylinder strength is taken equal to 0.8 times the cube strength. Since,
('\
in the reinforced concrete flexural member h/a ratio is quite high and it is subjected to bending, the
l strength for concrete in member is taken equal to 0.67 times the cube strength. c
(see Fig. 2.2.5)
(b) Age Effect : The strength of concrete increases with age due to continuation of the
c
process of hydration. Since the quantum of increase depends on many factors (such as grade, type
of cement, aggregate, curing etc.) the design should be based on 28 days characteristic strength
c
of concrete. An accelerated curing test (78/2) may be carried out for predicting the 28 days
strength within a short period after casting.
r
(c) State of Stress : The compressive strength depends upon the state of stress i.e., the
direction and nature of forces acting on it. Uniaxial compression, biaxial compression and triaxial
r
compression are the types of critical stress conditions. In general, the strength increases with ('
biaxial and triaxial compression since it prevents cracking and transverse tensile stresses.
c
:) 34 Materials
Chapter2· SeCt. 2.2 Properties ofConcrete 35
:~ (d) Confinement: Confinement ofa portioo of concrete by either the surrounding concret~
or surrounding reinforcement in the form of ties and spirals increases the strength of concrete 2.2.4 Stress-Strain Relation
~~ depending upon the amount of confinement i.e., the extent of surrounding concrete and strength, 2.2.4.1 Actual Skess-Strain Curve :
area and pitch of binding reinforcement. Confinement produces a state of triaxiill compression in Experiments have, shown · that the stress-strain relation of concrete is nonlinear and is a
.·:J both directions and hence the strength increases. function of several variables. The main factors affecting the stress-strain relationship are
2.2.2 Tensile Strength given as under :
.:) (a) Strength of concrete and ultimate strain, (b) Duration of loading,and
The ultimate tensile strength of concrete has comparatively very low value and hence it is (c) Rate of loading.
usually not taken into accou.nt in the reinforced concrete design. But it is an impOrtant property
_J (a) Strength of Concrete and ultimate strain: Fig. 2.2.3 shows typical stress strain curves
that greatly affects the extent and width of cracking in the structure. The tensile strength of concrete
is also required for the analysis of structures (such as tanks for storage of liquids, and pressure obtained from concrete cubes of different strength loaded in uniaxial compression. It will be seen
:) water pipes) which need to meet the requirements of crack resistance. that no curve is a straight-line even though the stress-strain relation for cement paste and aggregate
The tensile strength of concrete in direct tension can be obtained experimentally by when tested individually is practically linear. In concrete, the rate of increase in stress is less than
•_) performing the split-cylinder strength test as described in IS:5816 (99/1). For concrete mix normally that of increase in strain because of the formation of the micro-cracks between the interface of the
used in R.C. construction, the split tensile strength varies between 1/8 to 1/12 the cube compressive aggregate and the cement paste. The stress is maximum corresponding to the strain of about 0.002
:) strength. and further goes on decreasing with the increasing strain giving a drooping curve till it terminates at
ultimate crushing strain as shown in Fig. 2..2.3. The peak of the curve for high strength concrete is
The flexural tensile strength shall be carried out as per IS:516 (59/1}, The maximum tensile stress
relatively sharp but the ultimate strain is low, while for low strength concrete, the curve is flatter
~ called modulus of rupture is computed from the standard flexural formula.
M with high ultimate strain.
_J fer= fly 40
1.0
100 days
where, M = Bending moment at rupture ...... (2.2.1) .s::
0> 0.8 1 day
:) 1/y = Elastic section modulus of beam.
c
Q)
1 hour
. ~ 0.6
1 min.
The suffix 'cr' refers to cracking and hence the strength is also known as flexural
•:J Strain .:J
rat~
cracking strength. The estimate of flexural tensile strength (fer) from cube compressive 0.01% in
M 15
:) strength (~k) can be obtained from the relation :

':J
fer= 0. 7 VJ:: 0.1 0.2 0.3
% Strain
0.4 0.5 0 0.1 . 0.2
% Strain
0.3 0.4 0.5

...... (2.2.2)
2.2.3 Strength under Combined Stress Condition - Failure Criteria
··~
The tensile strength of concrete is also a function of state of stress. Biaxial stress has little
effect on tensile strength at failure. Combined compression and tension may reduce both the tensile
0 and compressive stresses. The failure criteria under triaxial stresses is quite complex (87/2).
Inspite of number of experimental tests carried out to understand the failure under pure or
~ combined stress conditions, it is difficult to arrive at a generally acceptable failure criteria for the
concrete because of presence of number of other factors besides state of stress. However, in many
:) of the cases of practical applications of failure of members like beams, columns, slabs etc., the
following simple failure criteria are considered to be adequate and on the safe side.
/:) These are as follows :
(a) Ultimate compressive strain in case of the state of bending compression; or combined
bending and axial force.
':J
(b) Principal tensile stress in case of combined bending, shear and torsion; and
·:J (c) Cracking str!ss in case of axial or bending tension.
·':J
Fig. 2.2.3: Effect of Strength on Fig. 2.2.4: Effect of Rate of Straining on
Stress-Stnin Curve Stress-Strain Curve.
The Ultimate Stmin is an important quantity in R.C. design because it represents failure of
I
~
concrete in compression (by crushing). The ultimate strain in axial compression varies from
0.001 to 0.003 depending upon the strength of concrete. The ultimate strain in axial compression is
i
G
taken equal to 0.002 for design. The ultimate strain in bending compression is found to vary from
0.,003 to 0.005 and in design calculations a value of0.0035 is adopted by I.S. Code. The variation of
i ultimate tensile strain is from 1/10 to 1/20 of ultimate compression strain and the value ofO.OOOl is
~
!i1 taken in design.
' (b) Effect of duration of Loading : The shape of the stress-strain curve of concrete of_
given strength also changes with the duration of sustained loading because of time-dependent
deformations due to creep and shrinkage under constant loads. The effect has, therefore, been
explained in detail in Sect. 2.2.6 along with discussion on creep and shrinkage.
(c) Effect of Rate of Straining or Loading : The shape of the stress-strain curve for a
given concrete of given age also changes with the rate of straining or loading. The effect of rate of
straining on the stress-strain curve is shown in Fig. 2.2.4. It will be observed from this figure that
 36 Materials
Chapter 2
Sect. 2.2 PropertiesofConcrete 37 ('
sharp rise and drooping character of the curve is greater when the rate of straining is high, while
the curve becomes flatter with the reduction in straining rate. The reason for this effect is also 2.2.5 Modulus of Elasticity* and Poisson's Ratio
('
attributed partially to time-dependent deformation due to creep. The short~term reference 2.2.5.1 Modulus of Elasticity (Short-term) :
stress-strain curve is obtained for a constant rate of straining of 0.01% per minute (test time 40 The eoncrete being an elastocplastic material, the stress-strain relation is not linear, with the
result that the modulus of elasticity which is defined as the ratio of stress to strain is not constant, ('
minutes) or for the constant rate of stress increment of 14N/mm 2 per minute.
2.2.4.2 Idealized Stress-Strain Curves : '~ but changes from point to point. Fig. 2.2.6 shows a typical stress-strain curve for concrete.
To enable the mathematical treatment possible, various investigators have pr'oposed ·different I The slope of the tangent at any point is called the Tangent Modulus and it gives the rate of
change of stress with strain at that point. The tangent modulus at the origin 0 is known as initial
('
shapes and expressions for an idealized curve in place of the actual stress-strain curve for concrete I~ elastic modulus. In practice, one is interested only in knowing the stress corresponding to the ('
under axial compression. Whitney (42/1) has pioneered a simplified rectangular stress block.
Both British Code BS: 8110 (85/4) and ACI building code (95/1, 61/1) make use of the concept of -~ strain at a point or the ratio of stress to strain at a point. To obtain this ratio for the use in design, a
H straight line is drawn from the origin to the desired point (say B) on the stress-strain curve. The ('
an equivalent rectangular stress block. This concept considerably reduces the computational efforts.
A commonly used curve is that proposed by CEB (70/1) which consists of a parabola for the initial slope of this line OB, which is the ratio of stress to strain at the point under consideration is called
ascending part followed by a horizontal straight line terminating at a prescribed ultimate strain,
J the Secant Modulus. Actual strain CB at a point (say B) consists of elastic strain CA (given by the ('
§
irrespective of the grade of concrete (Fig. 2.2.5). initial elastic modulus) and inelastic strain AR It is this strain AB that changes the angle between
cr the initial tangent line OA and the chord line OB causing a difference between the value of the ('

~
"'
.=
(f)
IL
amax= 1ck

-
------- -
Idealized curve

.......

Idealized curve
for concrete
I
in member
:
•
I
.......... J
B
'fmax = 0.67 fck
, fck
I
'I
I
·!
j
secant modulus and the initial elastic modulus. It is also a function of stress at a point.

- tangentatO
('

('

-------=--: . ('
fd ---
~design curve
ifd= 0.67fcki1.5
: = 0.446 fck I
I
I
I
I
I
I I A --l:B I
II
('
I I j II

l~:
I 0
lEmax "'~"' I 0
I I
f' I : Q I : .,_ f:" I I
('
0 0.001 n nnn

I
iii
/ l Secant modulus of elasticity at B
I I
O"j
Ej
Fig. 2.2.5: Stress-Strain Curves for Concrete 3 ' I
('
i
I I

,' Ec:'
The equation of the idealiied stress-strain curve is given by :
•ii~
I

. "= [ !: -CJ'] "o fo< O<e <Eo

} ...... (2.2.3)
i
~
~
~
0 ~; 1 · Shain
Fig. 2.2.6: Typifal Stress-Strain Curve for Concrete.

The secant modulus obtained by testing a concrete specimen at 28 days under specified rate ('
('

and a= a 0 for Eo s E < ccu ~ of loading (i.e., 14 N/mm 2 per minute) is known as Short-term modulus of elasticity because
where, c =strain at any point ~ inelastic deformations under this loadingare practically negligible. The modulus of elasticity obtained ('
a= stress at any point 1 on a concrete specimen subjected to sustained loading for a considerable period is known as ('
c0=gtrain at which parabolic part ends = 0.002 as per I.S.code. I Long-term modulus of elasticity and is discussed later in Sect. 2.2.6.

a0 = idealized maximum stress corresponding to c

0
It is experimentally observed that the short-term modulus of elasticity of concrete(£c) has
a definite relation with the cube crushing strength (fck) or the cylinder strength.
c
The effect of size and shape of test specimen with that of actual structural member in flexure is
taken into account (see Sect. 2.2.1.2) and the idealized stress strain curve for concrete in member Various design codes prescribe different relations between E and f k" IS:456 (00/1) gives ('
' c c
is obtained by multiplying each ordinate by 0.67 giving maximum stress. a. =f = 0.67 f k. the following empirical formula for the short-term modulus of elasticity for structural concrete.
0 max
In addition to this partial safety factor of 1.5 is applied to get the design curve. c
Ec = 5000 -{f;; N/mm 2 ......(2.2.4)
c
Thus, the design stress = 0.67 ~k I 1.5 = 0.446 ~k ... 0.45 fck •
where, fck =.characteristic strength of concrete in N/mm 2 ('

*for detailed discussion on modulus of elasticity of Concrete, refer to (71!2), (78/3), (96/1). ('

('
:-'

··~
38 ·Materials
Chapter 2 Sect. 2.2 Properties ofConcrete 39
_)
2.2.5.2 Poisson's Ratio :
\
(d) Age of Concrete at Loading: Loading at an early age causes high creep strain. With
'J Poisson's ratio varies generally betWeen about 0.1 for high strength concrete and 0.2 for the increase in age of concrete (at first loading), there is increase in strength, with tire result creep
weak mixes. It is normally taken equal to 0.15 for strength design and 0.~ for serviceability strain decreases. But, if the degree of hydration and hence strength remains substantially constant,
_) calculations. Many times the Poisson's ratio is even totally neglected with little error in strength the age at loading ceases to influence creep. ·
calculations.
Comments: This explain why erection of walls on newly cast beams should be postponed. Immediate
·J 2.2.6 Creep* construction of walls on newly cast beams leads to large crup deflections in beams developmg cracks in
Creep is defined as plastic deformation under constant load or stress. The creep, though, walls after a period of 6 to 12 months.
has very little effect on strength of concrete, it does increase the deflections considerably (e) Environmental Conditions: The environmental conditions include the relative humidity
(at times, as large as 2 to 3 times the elastic deflections), ihus affecting the serviceability of the and the temperature. Creep strains vary inversely with the percentage of relative humidity. The
~~ structure to a great extent.
effects of temperature on creep is not appreciable.
2.2.6.1. Factors affecting Creep : (f) Volume/Surface Ratio: Creep increases with decrease in volume/surface ratio i.e., _greater
·~ The magnitude of creep depends upon the following factors : is the exposed surface for a given volume, greater is the creep. Thus, thinner the rectangular
(a) Duration of loading, (b) Stress/Strength ratio, (c) Composition of concrete, member greater is the creep. When minimum width or thickness exceeds 1000 mm the increase in
\
'._/ (d) Age at loading, (e) Environmental conditions, (f) Surface/Volume ratio. creep is not noticeable.
(a) Duration of Loading: The variations of creep deformation with time, under cc:instant Creep strain, in general, is obtained from creep coefficient (B) defined as the ratio of creep
·~ sustained axial compression, is shown schematically in Fig. 2.2. 7. The creep increases rapidly strain ( &CC ) to elastic strain. ( &.I ).
and reaches highest intensity in the first three to four months after application of load and then the B= & I &.I = creep strain I elastic strain ...... (2.2.5)
0 rate of increase gradually reduces with time as the creep approaches its limiting value in period of
CC
The ultimate creep coefficient as per IS:456 are given in Table 2.2.1.
about five years. If the load is removed, the elastic strain is recovered immediately, but this recovery
;_J is less than the initial elastic strain due to increase in modulus of elasticity with time. The elastic Table 2.2.1 : Ultimate Creep Coefficients (According to IS:456)
recovery followed by creep recovery is only a small portion of total creep strain, leaving
J permanent deformation locked inside the concrete material. Age at Loading in days 7 28 365

~) Creep Coefficient (8) 2.2 1.6 1.1 :

Note : The ultimate creep strain, given above does not include the elastic strain.
j
<: ~
IS : 1343 (80/3) on Prestressed Concrete stipulates that, for the calculation of deformation at
~ Creep .recovery 5 some stage before the total creep is ·reached, it may be assumed that about half the total creep
J E I takes place in the first month after loading and that about three-quarters of the total creep takes in
..E!

j
0"'

+
8aslic deformation
Permanent
deformation
~

i
-~
the first six months after loading.
2.2.6.3 Loj}g.Term Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete :
The additional increase in the strain due to creep decreases the value of modulus of elasticity
Time of concrete. This reduced modulus of elasticity, ofte~ termed as an Effective elastic modulus of
.J Fig. 2.2.7: Typical Creep-time Curve concrete ( Ece ) or Long-term Modulus of Elasticity, is used for calculation of deflection due to
(r l Stress/Strength Ratio : Experimental evidence shows that for a sustained stress of creep. The effective modulus of elasticity is given by tbe following equation :
~ about..))% of ultimate strength, the creep strain is proportional to sustained stress. For different a E .c. E E
grades of concrete having the same cement paste content, creep is approximately proportional to E = -=-C_I = c :....-£... ...... (2.2.6)
_) ce &. &.+ & 1+ & / &. l+B
the stress/strength ratio, i.e. the ratio of the applied stress to the cube strength of the concrete, at IC ICC CCI
the time of loading. where ece =long term modulus of elasticity, a = stress in concrete
~ (c) Composition of Concrete : An increase in water/cement ratio and/or cement content &ic = initial elastic strain plus creep strain, ci= initial elastic strain,
increase creep.
_) Gtor detailed treatment refer to (70!1), (71!2), (87!3). &cc = creep strain, B = ratio of creep strain to elastic strain
1 I ( 1+B) =modulus reduction coefficient.
 "'V· cMIUC:T<IUI.J
Chapt~r 2 Sect. 2.2 Properties ofConcr.ete 41 r-
'l
E:r. 2.2.1. For a concrete of grade M20 calculate t· for their effect on structure, if required (71/3). c
J 2.2.8 Modular Ratio , :;~
(a) shOrt-term. and long-term moduli of elasticity assuming age of concrete at loading 28 Modular Ratio is the ratio of modulus of elasticity of steel to modulus of elasticity of concrete. ('
days and duration ofloading 6 nzo_nths,
As the modulus of elasticity of concrete changes with time, age at loading etc., the modular ratio·
(b) elasiic strain due to working stress of 7 N/mm 2,
also changes accordingly. I.S. cOde gives the following expression for the long-term modular C
(c) creep sirain for sustained load of60% , and ratio, taking into account the effects of creep and shrinkage partially. ·
(d) total strain. 280 .(
Solution': (a) Short-term elastic modulus : Long-term modular ratio = m = ~ .....•.(2;2.7) '
Ec = 5000,;/;; =5000-{20 Nlmm2 = 22360 N/mm 2 cbc
where, a cbc = permissible compressive stress due to bending in concrete in N/nurl c
This modular ratio is useful only in the working stress design. It is also required for calculating .
Now, from Table 2.2.1, The creep coefficient (0) at 28 days age at loading= 1.6
According to IS:1343(80/2), the properties of a transformed section of a R.C. member for the serviceability calcqlations (See C
creep coefficient on loading duration of 6 months =0. 75 x 1.6 = 1.2 Sect. 2.8.2). The value of 'm' obtained from Eq. 2-f. 7 will not be the, same as the ~odular ratio
based on the value of short-term modulus of elasticity of concrete. c
The long-term modulus of elasticity at 6 months =--.!s_ = 22360 :. E =10164 N!mm 2 Short term modular ratio = Es IE c ...•..(2.2.8)
(b) Elastic strain due to working stress
1+ 0
Of 7 N/mm 2, c.=
1+].2 ce

7/Ec = 7/22360 = 0.000313 where, Es : ;: m~dulus of elasticity of steel = 2 x I05N!mm 2 c

. . l
(c) Creep strain at 60% loading Ec == 5000 'I fJ:
- J ck N!mm2 -u·- . . ,
(E . .
q. 2.2.4) --
~
&cc =creep coefficient. x elastic strain
x 0.6 = 1.2 x 0.00031J·x 0.6 =0.000225 The values. of modular ratio based on short-term Eq. 2.2.8 and that based on Eq. 2.2. 7 for ·
(d) Total strain-
·
c.lC = c.+
l
cCC = 0.000313 + 0.000225
·
= 0.000538 different ·grades of concrete are given in Table 2.2.2. C
2.2.7 Shrinkage Table 2.2.2: Modular Ratio for Different Grades of Concrete
The property of diminishing in volume during the process of drying and hardening is Modular Ratio 'm'
termed Shrinkage. If a member is restrained against shrinkage, shrinkage strains are produced (
causing tensile cracks in concrete (58/1). Grade ofConcrete

Ii
Short-term Long-term
Factors affecting shrinkage are mostly those affecting creep, namely :
(a) duration of exposure (and not the duration of loading),
c
M20 8.9 13:3
(b) size of member and environniental conditions (essentially humidity and temperature)
M25 8.0 11.0
(c) total amount of water present in the concrete at the time of mixing.
(d) vohime surface ratio,
(e) percentage of reinforcement. Ir
2.2.9 Durability (01/4)
Durability of concrete (7715) is its ability to resist its disintegration and decay.
(-

Greater the percentage of steel lesser is the shrinkage, because the reinforcement restrains
the shrinkage. i~ Durable concrete should perform satisfactorily during its anticipated exposure conditions c
during its service life span.
It may be noted that the shrinkage is independent of stress/strength ratio and age of concrete
at loading. The ultimate shrinkage strain varieS from· 0.0002 to 0.0006. For normal conditions,
The factors that influence durability are : '- . c
(a) exposure conditions, (b) cement content and water/cement ratio ..
IS: 456 prescribes a,value of0.0003 for design purposes. IS: 1343 (80/2) for Prestressed Concrete,
however, allows to assume 50% of ultimate shrinkage occurring during frrst one month and 75% in
(c) workmanship to attain full compaction, (d) rover to embedded steel. c
six months from the commencement of drying. (e) type and quality of constituent materials.(f) effective curing of concrete.

Shrinkage causes deformations generally additive to those of creep.Creep and shrinkage

. (g) size and shape of member. (h) intended lifespan ofthestruc~e.(92/5) c
phenomena are interrelated and occur simultaneously. For simplicity, the deformations due to each ;. One of the chief characteristics influencing the durability of concrete is its permeabili!J to
'
ingress of water and other potentially deleterious materials. The temi permeability referS to· the ('
effect are calculated separately and added algebraically to arrive at the deformation which are often
termed as long-term deformations. Thus, total deformations in concrete consist of short-term
elastic deformation and long term deformation. In limit state method of design, it is necessary to
l · ease with which water can pass through the concrete. The desired low permeability in concrete is
achieved by having an adequate cement, sufficiently low free water/cement ratio, by ellSuring full C
.

compaction of the concrete and by adequate curing. Hence; according to eXposure conditionS ,-
assess deformations due to creep and shrinkage from serviceability point of view and compensate. \ (viz. mild, moderate, severe, very severe and extr~me) minimiun cement content and 1Jl8X.imum ·· (
l c
 _)
42 Materials Chapter 2
Sect. 2.3 Concrete mix proportioning 43
_)
water/cement ratio has been specified by the ~-The minimum cement content is required first '•l
!I
to ensure sufficient alkalinity to provide passive environment against corrosion of steel ; secondly k ·rable 2.2.3 Exposure Conditions and Nominal Concrete Cover and Minimum Grade of Concrete for
~ minimum cement and w/c ratio are so chosen that should result in sufficient volume of cement ¥ RCCwork.
/paste to overfill voids in compacted aggregates. It may be pointed otit that too high a cement Fmiroo- Exposun!Conditions Min. -~ Nominal
.J content increases the risk of cracking due to drying shrinkage or to early thermal cracking and to ment Concrete Cover
the increased risk of damage due to alkali silica. reactions. Therefore, maximum cement- content grade For
_)

:tmm
not including fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag has been restricted to 450 kg/"{ RCCwork
The exposure conditions in working life, minimum nominal cover (97/4, 97/5), grade of Mild I Concrete surfaces protected against weather or aggressive
.)
concrete are given in Table 2.2.3: conditions, except those situated in coastal area.

_) 2.2.10 Cover to Reinforcement Moderate I Concrete surfaces sheltered from severe rain or nun
Cover (97/4, 97/5) to reinforcement is the shortest disfimce between the surface of a concrete freerlng whilst wet
-, member and the nearest surface of reinforcing steel, excluding the plaster or other decorative Concrete exposed to rain and condensation.
.._)
finishes. Concrete continuously under water.
The cover is required : Concrete in contact or buried under .non-aggressive
._) soil/ground water.
(i) To transfer the tensile strain in concrete in flexure to the steel.
Concrete surfaces sheltered from saturated salt air in coastal area.
(ii) To protect the steel from corrosion process.
(iii) To ensure a fire resistance over a certain period. Severe f Concrete surfaces exposed to severe rain, alternate wetting and M30 45nnn
drying or occasional freezing whilst wet or severe condensation.
:j

·)
Since the concrete cover over the steel gives protection against penetration of salt to
reinforcing steel, different values of cover have been specified based on exposure conditions.
Lack of cover is an extensive problem which is of a chronic rather than a sporadic nature.
I
~
a~
Concrete completely immersed in sea water.
Concrete exposed to coastal environment.
Very Concrete surfaces exposed to sea water spray, corrosive fumes, M35 SOnnn
2.2.U Unit Weight of Concrete ~
_) ~ Severe or severe freezing conditions whilst wet. -..
The unit weight of concrete depends upon the type of aggregate and amount of voids. It I Concrete in contact with or buried under aggressive
varies from 22 to 25 kN/m3 for plain concrete with normal aggregate. The unit weight of reinforced ~ subsoil/ ground water.
g
_) concrete, obviously, depends on the percentage of reinforcement, and varies from 23 to 26 kN/m3•
The unit weights of plain and reinforced cona~te, as specified by IS : 456 are equal to 24 kN!m3
1l Extreme I Surface of members in tidal zone.
Members in direct contact With liquid/solid aggressive
M40 75nnn

:J
J
and 25 kN!m 3 respectively.
2.3 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
i l
In reinforced concrete construction, t~ concrete is known by its grade and is designed as
_) M20, M25 ~tc. in which letter M refers to mix and the number to its characteristic strength in
axial compression at 28 days on 150mm cube, expressed in N/mm2• The grade of co!:'crete is
J a function of exposure conditions and is designated in Table 2.2.3. Grades commonly used in R.C.
construction are M20 and 'M25, while M30, M40, M45 and M50 are common in prestressed
·')
construction. Grades M5, M7.5, M10, M15 ar-e reconimeil:ded only for plain concrete. With due
considerations of durability the minimum grade of concrete for RCC shall be M20 for mild
:J exposare condition. Since with the advancement of technology, it has been possible to produce
~J
higher grade concrete (> M55) with available resources and technology in India. Code has given
provision upto M80 grade of concrete. But in absence of sufficient data code stipulates that the
design parameters may be obtained from specialised literatures and experimental results. ·
.) The structural designer specifies the required strength and concrete mix to be used. To
achieve this, various ingredients of concrete are proportioned so that the fresh concrete has proper
·'] workability and the hardened concrete has desired strength, d11rability and surface finish.
chemicals.
Notes : I. Nominal cover is the design dept-h· of concrete cover measured from concrete surface t&l
all steel reinforcement including links. It shall not be less than the. diameter of the bar.. ·
2. For main reinforcement upw 12 mm diameter bar for mild exposure the nominal cover may
be reduced by 5 mm.
3. (a) For a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a column nominal cover -shall not be less than 40 mm
nor diameter of such bar.
(b) For columns of minimum. dimension of 200 mm. or under whose reinforcing bars do not
exceed 12 mm a nominal cover of 25 mm. may be used. ·
4. For footing minimum cover shall be 50 mm.
5. Unless specified otherwise, actllal concrete cover should not deviak!from the required nominal
cover by + 10 mm to 0 mm.
6. For exposure condition 'severe' and 'very severe•, reduction of specified cover by 5 mm. may·,
be made, where concrete grade is M35and atove
Comments:
(1) For mild exposure for main steel of 12 mm diameter· the reduced cover of 15 mm
(= 20 mm - 5 mm) for beam of any size is considered to be inadequate by the authors.
(2) Incre:1sed cover i.'l flexural members particularly for R.C. slabs is likely to lead increased
..____c_r._ac_k_w_.~dth affecting durability by permitting ingress of moisture and chemical attack (01!5).
 \"
44 · Materials Sect. 2.4 Production, Control of Concrete and Strength test of Conctete 45 ·
Chapter 2
The proportioning of the constituent materials namely, the cement, aggregate and water, to attain 2.3.2 Nominal Mix Concrete
the req~ength is done in the following ways: Nominal mix concrete is used on small works for routine concrete construction and for r~
(a) By designing the concrete mix, such conc..rete is called 'Design miX concrete', concrete M20 and lower. The proportions of materials prescribed by IS : 456 are given in·
or Table 2.3.1
(b) By adopting nominal concrete mix; such concrete is called 'Nominal miX concrete'.
Table 2J.l : Proportions of Constituents for Nominal Mix Concrete
(
Design mix concrete is always preferred to nominal mix. The latter may be used on the
work only for concrete grade M 20 and lower and for routine concrete construction, however, it
I Grade Quantity in kg.
requires high cement content. of . (
Concrete Cement futal dry aggregate water
While specifying a particular grade of concrete, the following information is required to be MS 50 800 60
provided: M7.5 50 625 45
(a) Type of mix i.e., design mix or nominal mix; (b) Grade designation; MlO 50 480 34
(c) Minimum cement content (for design mix concrete) (d) Type of cement; M15 50 330 32 ~~­

(e) Minimum nominal size of aggregate; (f) Maximum water-cement ratio; M20 50 250 30 '
(g) Mix proportion (for nominal mix concrete); and (h) Workability
Notes:

II
In appropriate circumstances, the following additional information IS desired : 1. Grades ofcom;rete lower than M 20 shall not be used in reinforced conc;ete.
(a) Type of aggregate; (b) Maximum cement content; arid 2. The proportion ofthe fine to coarse aggregates shall generally be 1:2 by mass, subject to upper limit of
(c) Type of admixtures required and the conditions for its use. 1: 1.J.1 and a lower limit of1:2 .J.1
3. The proportions of the fine to coarse aggregates should be adjusted from upper limit to lower limit
progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates becomes finer and the maximum size of coarse
Normally, proportion of concrete constituents is done by mass or weight. The proportion to aggregates becomes larger. Graded coarse aggregates shall be used, e.g., for an average grading of

I fine aggregate (that is Zone II of Table 4 of IS: 383), the proportions shall be 1:1 .J.1, 1:2, 1:2.J.1for (
be chosen is governed by the desired strength of hardened concrete and the required workability of
wet concrete. Adequate workability is desired so that the wet concrete, on placing and compaction, maximum size of aggregates 10 mm 20 mm and 40 mm respectively.
easily flows in the moulds and fills the form fully including the corners, and surrounds and grips
the reinforcement without leaving any voids in between. In general slump test shall be used for
~measurement of workability. Depending on the placing condition degree of workability the
slump is measured in accordance with IS:1199(59/2). However for very low workability, where
I
I
4. If quantity of water in a mix required to be increased for workability, the cement contents specified
above for any mix shall be proportiona[ely increased to maintain the prescribed water-cement ratio.
5. In case of vibrated concrete, the limit specified may be suitably reduced.to avoid segregation.

If the nominal mix concrete made in accordance with the proportions given for a particular
strict control is necessary, workability shall be measured by determination of compacting factor grade fails to givethe specified strength, it shall be classified as belonging to the appropriate lower
with a value between 0.75 to 0.80. For very high workability, it shall be measured by determination

I
grade. But, if it gives higher strength, it shall not be placed in higher grade concrete.
of flow.
; 2.4 PRODUCTION, CONTROL OF CONCRETE AND STRENGTH TEST OF
2.3.1 Design Mix Concrete !
CONCRETE
Proportioning of constituent materials for strength is done by designing the mix for
2.4.1 Production, Control of Concrete
'design miX' category of concrete. The process of mix design consists in selecting the optimum
The production of concrete involves the following operations :
proportions of cement, aggregate and water to produce the grade of concrete having required
(a) Batching, (b) Mixing, (c) Placing and Compacting (i.e. Casting), and (d) Curing.
workability, charaCteristic strength, durability and economy. Initially the mix design is carried out in
laboratories for selecting the proportions of concrete ingredien~ and final proportions are decided
(a) Hatching: While proportioning of concrete mix, the quantity of both cement and aggregate r
should be determined by mass or weight.' The water-cement ratio required to obtain the desired
by actual trials.
strength and workability should be fixed and maintained ;hroughout the work. However, the amount C
Mix design methods (82/1, 82/2, 90/4, 96/2) have been given by Burean of Indian Standards,
of water to be added shall be adjusted. to compensate far any observed variations in the moisture
Road Research Laboratory Road note No.4, UK (RRL method), Ariterican Concrete Laboratory
contents in the aggregates. Volume batcbing may lh~ permitted in small works and where weigh (
method, Indian Road Congress-44 etc. The detailed description of methods of mix design is hatching is not practical. In such a case the densities Of materials to be used should be established. ·
considered to be out of scope of this book and the reader may refer to books on Concrete Technology
The ready-mixed ccncrete (76/2) supplied by ready-mixed concrete plants shall be preferred to (
(73/1, 93/10, 96/2) or specialized literature.
bring quality in concrete construction. ·
c
 46 Materials Chapter 2 PrOduction, Control of Concrete and Strength test of Concrete 47 .
Sect, 2.4
(b) Mixing: Mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer IS:l791(68/1) for at least 2 minutes
) till the mass of uniform colour and consistency is obtained. If there is segregation after unloading
from the mixer, the concrete shoUld be remixed.
(c) Placing and Compacting: Before placing of concrete, the form work IS:14687(99/2)
of sufficient strength shall be constructed to the shapes and dimensions shown on drawing within Fig. Z.4.1 : Sequence of Prop. Removal
\
_) the allowable tolerance and shall be such as to prevent loss of slurry from concrete. Then placing
and compaction of concrete shall be done, before setting commences, in such a way as to prevent
Solution : In the case of cantilever beam the sequence of removal of the props shall be from
segregation and to avoid displacement of reinforcement. Vibrators complying with
IS:2514 (63/4), IS:4656(68/9), IS:2505 (80/1), IS:2506(85/3), IS:12468(88/3) may be used for prop No.1 followed by 2,3 arid 4.
compaction. Vibrator should be stopped immediately when the thin layer of slurry appears on the If one of the props excepting prop No. 1 is removed, the support conditions different from
top surface. Over vibration should be avoided as it leads to segregation of cement slurry from the those envisaged in the design would be created. The beam would act as a propped cantilever
aggregates. inducing tension at the bottom of the beam near the region of prop 2 and prop 3 instead of tension
in the top fibres of the beam and may lead to collapse.
(d) Curing: The placing of mix must be followed by curing. Curing is process of promoting Hence, the ci>rrect procedure would be to remove the props one by one starting from the
_) the hydration of cement, and consists of c.ontrol of temperature and of the moisture movement free end so that beam will be subjected to cantilever action progressively.
from and into the concrete. Once the concrete has set, wet curing can be provided by keeping the
Bearing the design principles in mind, in the case of simply supported beam the props shall be
j exposed surfaces of concrete damp or wet by either ponding or by covering with gunny bags or
removed starting from midspan and proceeding towards supports.
other similar materials, for a period of ten days from the date of placing of concrete. The concrete
._)
should be kept in the forms till the concrete attains the strength of at least twice the stress to which 2.4.2 Strength 'J;esf of Concrete
the concrete would be subjected at the time of the removal of the formwork. In normal circumstances The quality,of concrete to be used is required to be checked with respect to the following
___)

_)
and where ordinary portland cement is used forms may be removed after the expiry of the periods
given in Table 2.4.1. ! two criteria.

(A) Strength requirement (B) Workmanship requirement.

Table 2.4.1 :Minimum Curing Period and Stripping Time for Striking of Formwork
__) (A) Strength Requirement !",
Members Period
_j 1. Walls, columns and vertical faces of all structural members 16 to 24 hours In reinforced concrete design the members are designed on the basis of desired chai~cteristic
strength. Since properties of concrete frequently vary even for a given concrete mix it becomes
2. Soffit formwork to slabs (Props to be refixed immediately after 3days absolutely necessary to verify the strength by taking frequent test results during construction.
J removal of formwork) Codes, therefore, lay down the rules for sampling, testing, andthe acceptance criteria . As explained
3. Soffit formwork to beams (Props to be refixed immediately after 7 days in Sect.1.4; the relation between characteristic strength and mean strength is given by:
J removal of formwork) fk =f - 1.64s :. f =fk + 1.64s ...... (Eq.1.4.1)
c m ·m c
'J 4. Removal of props under slabs :
(a) Spanningupto 45m 7 days where f = mean strength, and
(b) Spanning over 4Sm 14 days m
) s = standard deviation.
5. Removal of props under beams and arches :
(a) Spanning upto 6 m 14days The quantity 1.64s is known as the CurrentMargin which represents the margin by which
J (b) Spanning over 6 m 21 days mean strength should exeeed the required characteristic strength. It depends upon the number of
, .. , test results; greater the number of test results, more accurate is the current margin. If, for some
J The props under the beams and slabs shall be removed and refixed i!J such a sequence as to reasons, large number of test results cannot be taken or made available,, a value higher than 1.64s
effect the same type of structural action and support conditions as envisaged in design·. should be taken. IS: 456 prescribes minimum of 30 test results for accurate assessment of standard
J deviation. If the number of results is less than 30, it prescribes values of standard deviation as given
Ex. 1.4.1 :State the sequence in which props shall be_ removed (a) for a cantilever
in Table 2.4.2.
J beam shown in Fig. 2.4.l.and (b) for a simply supported beam.
 ,/-
4lf Materials
Chapter 2 Sect. 2A Production, Control of Concrete and St;ength test of Concrete 49'
-~·
.- (
Table2.4.2 Assumed Standard Deviation
J ···-:.''!~~-- ..,.._
- ~ }1:', -
t
Table 2.4.3 : Number of Samples for Testing ,,.
I
\
Grade of Assumed Quantity 'of ~~crete in work in nr' -l._-5 6-15 16-30 31-50 Above 50
Concrete Standard Remarks
I
(
deviation MinimuPJ. nliniber of samples 1 2 3 4 4+x
.i.: .. ' . ._, .
Nlmm2
/
;;here, x iS the m~mber based on the rate of 1 additional ;ample for each cul(lifioPt~LSO nr1 or part thereof. (1
M10,M1_5 ~.5
41
(b) Test Specimens: Minimum of three test specimens shall be made from each saryiple of ,·.
These values have been specified assuming that there is
site control, proper storag~-eefilent, weight concrete for testing strength at 28 days. Additional (>pecimens may be wade for other tests like 7 '
M20,M25 4.0 days test or modulus of rupture test, etc. The average strength of the 3 specimens shall be called ..
hatching, controlled addition of water, regular 1
checking of all materials, workability and strength. Where the sample test strength. The specimen shall be tested as described in IS:516(59!,1).
M30, M35, M40, 5.0 there is deviation from the above, the values of
M45andM50 (c)Standard Deviation: For determination ofthe standard deviation, at least 30 test results r-
standard deviation shall be increased by 1 N!mm 2• should be available from the same mix. The standard deviation shall be calculated from Eq.l.4.2.
In the absence of sufficient test results·; standard deviations given in Table 2.4.2 may be assumed. C
However when past records of similar mix or grade. exist, t~e standard deviation obtained from ·
(B) Workmanship Requirements
~ii these records may be allowed.
After removing the formwork inspection should be carried out carefully and any defects
observed should be removed or made good before hardening of the concrete. However it is possible (d) Characteristic Strength :Th'is shall be obtained from known value of mean strength and
that it may be necessary to evaluate the quality of concr<:te or the capacity of an existing structure 11 the standard deviation, usmg Eq. 1.4.1. .
due to any one of the following reasons : '
2.~.5 Acceptance Criteria for Concrete
(a) doubt regarding quality of hardened concrete.
(b) anticipated over load. (a) Compressive strength : The concrete shaU be deemed to comply with the strength
(c) suspected deterioration of structure or its component.
}1 requirements when both the following conditions are met.
In such a case non-destructive tests may be carried: (i) The mean strength determined from any group of four non-overlapping COI}secutive test
results complies with the appropriate limits in columnA of Table 2.4.4.. , . ,
2.4.3 Types of Tests (ii) Any individual test result complies with the appropriate limits in column-{1p[,table 2. 4.4. ··
The priteria for acceptance of concrete shall, in general, be based on 28 days cube strength Table 2.4.4 Characteristic Compressive Strength Compliance Requirement (

of concrete tested in accordance with IS:516(5911) and the characteristic strength shall be arrived
at by statistical method as explained in Sect. 2.4.4. (
Specified A B
For getting a relatively quicker idea o(quality of concrete, optional tests on beams of modulus
of ruptute at 72 ± 2 hours or at 7 days, or on cubes for compressive strength at 7 days, m~y be
L

Grade. 1
The mean of the group of 4 non overlapping Any individual ·!

carried out. Alternatively accelerated curing test (78/2) may be carried out. However, the 28 4ays
consecutive test results in Nlmm 2 test results in Nlmm 2
compressive strength shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete. ' (
2.4.4 Requirements for Statistical Determination of Characteristic Strength M15 /~ (fck + 0.825s) or ~ (fck + 3) N I mm2 ~ (fck-3)Nimm 2
(a) Sampling: A random sampling (59/1) procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each I

concrete batch has•reasonable chance of ~ei!'g tested. The sampling shall be spread over the M20ormore ~ (fck + 0.825s) or ~ (fck + 4 )N I mm 2
'
~ (fck-4)Nimm 2
entire period of concreting. The frequency of sampling will depend upon the nature of work, the (
volume of concrete, and the importance of the location of concrete from view point of stress where, s = established standard deviation rounded off to nearest 0.5 N I mm2 ·_ ,. /.
'condition. For Example, higher rate of sampling will be required for highly stressed structural
member (like column). Also it will be appropriate to have higher rate of sampling and testing at the :!
; '
;.
Note:(i) If established standard deviation is not known, the values given in TabJe 2.4.2 may be ' .
assumed. . ....
start of the work to establish the level of confidence in the quality of concrete at the earliest.
(ii) Efforts should be made to establish the ·mh« of st011dard deviation from test re.mlts of (
The minimum frequency of sampling of c:oncrete of each grade at each- time shaH be decided from 30 samples as early as possible.
the volume of concrete as shown in Table 2.4.3. / (

r
\
 J

50 Materials
_) Chapter 2
Sect 2.6 Reinforcing Stee/51
(b) Flexural Strength : When both the following conditions are met the concrete complies
with the specified flexural strength.
_)
(i) The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds Table 2.5.1 Characteristic Compressive Strength and
the specific characteristic strength by at least 0.3 N/mm 2• Method:
(ii) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic
strength less than 0.3 N/mm 2• Grade of Concrete

I
)
_./
Type of Structural Action M20 I M25
Ex. 2.4.1: The following four non-overlapping consecutive test results in N/mm 2 for batch
.of M 20 concrete have been obtained: 29, 17, 25 and 27,N!mni. Characteristic compressive strength ( fck ) 20N/mm2 25N/mm2
Design strength in -
Check whether the concrete satisfies the compliance requirements . Assume standard
deviation of 4N/mm 2• - direct compression ( 0.4 fck ) 8N!mm2 lON!mml
''- Solution :Individual test result <: (20- 4) =16 N/mm 2 - bending compression ( 0.446 fck ) 8.92N!mml l1.15N/mm 2

In the present case minimum individual strength is 17N/mm2 > 16N/mm2

- flexural tension (0. 7{f;;) 3.13N/mm 2 3.50N/mm2
Now mean strength = (29 + 17+ 25 + 27)/4 = 24.5 N/mm 2
- average bond for plain bars in tension 1.2N/mm2 1.4N/mm2
As per Table 2.4.4 the average strength shall be greater of: -bearing ( 0.45 fck.) 9.00N!mm2 11.25N!mm2
(i)_(k + 4 = 20 + 4 =24 N/mm 2 or
Notes:
(ii) fck + 0.825 X S = 20 + 0.825 X 4 = 23.3 N/mm 2 1. Direct compressive strength 0.4 fck given above is for axially loaded columns only, taking into
The actual strength = 24.5 N!mm 2 > 24 N/mm 2 account the' effect of a minimum eccentricity. For pure axial compression, value is the same as that

J
:. The concrete satisfies the strength requirement.
2.4.6 Non-destructive Testing of Structures I for bending compression, namely, 0.446 fck .
2. For deformed bars confirming to IS: 1786 (85!2) value of the bond stress shall be increased by 60%.
For bars in compression, the value of bond stress shall be increased by 25%.

I
The detailed description of various· tests is considered to be out of the scope of the book 3. Design strength in diagonal tension or in shear is a function of percentage of tension steel and
hence brief details along with reference to specified codes have been given. The non-destructive grade. of concrete. The values of design shear strength of concrete for different percentages of steel
testing consists of following tests : and grades of concrete have been given in Chapter V on shear.

(a) Core test: Minimum three cores of concrete shall be prepared and tested as per IS:516
(59/1). The average cube strength of core should not be less than 85% of cube strength of concrete
grade specified for the corresponding age and no individual core has strength less than 75%. If the
above mentioned requirements are not satisfied or where it is not pessib~ to take the cores the
load test should be performed.
(b) Load test: The load test consists of actually loading the part'ofthe sttueture and observing
the deflection. The details are covered up in Clause 17.6 of IS:456-2000.
j
(c) The other non-destructive tests carried out near the surface of the structural member
comprises of:
(1) Ultrasonic pulse velocity measurement at surface, IS:l3311 (Pt.-1)-(92/1)
) (2) Rebouna Test using Schmidt hammer IS :133ll(Part-2) (92/2)
. 2.5 DESIGN STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
The values of characteristic strengths and design strengths ofroncrete for the limit state of
collapse and the limit state of serviceability for different structural actions, namely, axial tension
-aDd compression, bending tension and compression, shear, bond and bearing are given in
Table 2.5.1.
s 2.6 REINFORCING STEEL
I Reinforcing steel consists of bars, usually circular in cross section. These are, at present,
!
·~ available in three different grades viz., Fe250, Fe415 and Fe500, wherein Fe refers to Ferrous
~
~
,j
metal and the number refers to the specified guaranteed yield stress in N/mm 2•
j
~ 2.6.1 Types of Reinforcement
•~ Based on physical and mechanical properties, namely, ductility, yield strength, the following
three types of steel reinforcements are mainly used in reinforced concrete construction :
(a) Plain round bars of mild steel, (b) Deformed bars of high grade steel, (c) Steel wire fabric.
2.6.2 Plain Round Bars of Mild Steel :
They are usually of mild steel (grade Fe 250) conforming to IS:432(82/3). It has a well
defined yield point giving yield stress of 250 N/mm 2, and excellent ductility with percentage elongation
at failure not less than 23% and guaranteed weldability. The actual stress-strain curve and idealised
stress-strain curve for mild steel is shown in Fig. 2.6.1.
For mild steel, the stress is proportional to strain upto yield point. Thereafter the rate of
increase of strain is more than that of stress, reaching the maximum stress. Then the necking
continues to form with reduction of stress and increase in strain and finally the test specimen
 J<emJorcmg :>teet 53
Sect. 2.6
..,IIW .n.IW. .. C:.IJ.UJ3 Chapter 2
·-.·.
Characteristic Curve
(

'rr------r------- 'r(=415)~-----------!ll!!_e_4~~: ...-:=z ..

t 41. Up:~~~~~UNe
400 .. -····· ,'
-~
<: I .• I
G> I fy1.15 ________ ,.::.·_____""___...1 . . . - - - -
0>1
C::l

N l <tJI
-I
tul
0.8 fy -------/
300 : !\,'1 Design Curve
lor Fe415
~
3
~ ~-----------~~~~~~-c:_u_~~-----~ Breaking stress
:t::;l
·-I
.::1 0.8 fy/1.15 ----- : :
z r:-t:ower y.p. : I I
I I
I
I I I. I I
I I <f)
·I I <f)
I I
I I
I
I
I
I ~ "'E 200 I I
I 1
Ci5 ·E I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'z<f)
I
I
I I
I
I
I I <f) I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e
Ci5 100
,'
I
I
I
I I
10 20 27 30 ·I
I
I
I
Strain%- I
I I
I
I

Fig. 2.6.1 Stress-strain Relationship for Mild Steel. .001 .002 .003 ~ .004 .005
' 0
breaks. For the purpose of analysis an idealized curve is drawn in place of actual stress-strain '{
Strain- Strain- "=!
,;
curve, with the charige that the strain is considered to increase at constant stress after re~ching the Fig. 2.6.3 Stress-strain curve for Fe415
yield stress. Fig. 2.6.2 Determination of Yields-
stress from Tension Test.
2.6.3 High Yield Strength Deformed Bars. (HYSD)
Fig. 2.6.2 shows typical stress-strain curve obtained from tension test for cold-worked high
As the name indicates the high yield strength deformed bars have much high yield point, but 1
strength deformed bars. As mentioned earlier cold worked bars (HYSD) do not show a definite
the yield point is not weli defined. The yield stress or characteristic stress is given by 0.2% proof
yield point. The characteristic strength or yield stress refers to conventional value of 0.2% proof
stress. These bars possess ribs, lugs or deformations on their surface with the result their I>:_Ond
characteristic is improved. The bars are either hot rolled from steel billets or by cold working. In stress for design process.
Therefore, to obtain the yield stress of HYSD bar subjected to tension test the following
the cold working process. the bars having deformations are cold twisted. Twisting is continued till
the strains are in the elasto-plastic range and then unloaded. During this process the bar gets procedure should be followed (see Fig 2.6.2):
1. Plot the stress-strain graph f!om readings of load taken corresponding to elongation.
hardened with the result stress increases but ductility decreases. These cold twisted bars are
commercially manufactured under the trade name "TORSTEEL" and, at present, available in. two
varieties vizTOR40 ~nd TORSO of grade Fe415 and Fe500 respectively. The high strength deform
1 2. Draw a initial tangent from the origin to the stress-strain curve.
3. At a strain of 0.002, draw a straight line parallel to initial tangent.

l
bars shall confirm to IS:1786 (85/2). These bars have following advantages: 4. The y-coordinate of the point where it cuts the stress-strain curve represents the yield
(1) Because of the high yield strength the quantity of steel required in R.C. work is reduced. Since stress of HYSD bar.
the difference in its cost compared to mild steel is marginal there is reduction in the overall cost of IS code idealises the stress-strain curve and the one for Fe415 grade of steel is shown is
R.C. construction.
(2) HYSD bars have very good bond with concrete than mild steel so that they may be placed I Fig 2.6.3. For HYSD bars the stress is proportional to a strain upto a stress of0.8 fy and thereafter
without end hook and resulting in saving in steel. ' I the curve is nonlinear. It attains the yield stress at a strain of 0.002 +fy IE s in which the first part
(3) By cold working the strength of the bar is increased in a radially symmetrical pattern. During ~
~ of 0.002 is an inelastic strain and the later part (fy IE s) is an elastic
. .strain.
the twisting process the defects, if any, are noticed they are rejected. Thus, each bar is severely ~ The inelastic strain of0.002 is added to the elastic strain so that there is sufficient yielding of
tested for defectfi. ~~ steel before failure at cons~nt stress can occur. Applying partial safety factor of steel as 1.15, the
The disadvantages are : design stress, f d =f 11.15 i.e. 0.87 f . Thus, the design stress-strain curve is linear upto design (.
(1) With increase in stress level the cracking tendency increases. Hence for Fe550 or higher grade y y y
of steelitbecomes necessary to use high grade concrete. stress of 0.8 f y I 1.15 and nonlinear till it reaches a value offy I 1.15 at a strain of
2
(2) Due to reduction in percentage of tension steel, the design shear strength of concrete is reduced. 0.002 + 0.87 f IE . The modulus of elasticity of steel is taken equal to 2,00,000 Nlmm
• y s
Nou : In this book I# is used to denote ihe diameter of HYSD bars and; for mild steel i~ accordance The values of design stress and the corresponding values of inelastic and elastic sttains at 1
with the notation used {n SP 34 (8718). These symbol ; or # will be p/4ced on the left hand side of the some typical points for steel grade Fe415 and Fe500 are given Table 2.6.1. Intermediate values ·
numerical value of the diameter to avoid confusion that the diameter is multiplied by ~ or # e.g. bar of 8mm required can be obtained by linear interpolation. '
diameter will be denoted tis tP 8 or # 8 and NOT 8 tP or 8#.
r
' -./

\ __j 54 Materials Chapter 2 Reinforcing Steel 55

Sect. 2.6
\
'___/ Table 2.6.1 Salient Features on Design Stress-strain Curve or HYSD Bars
2.6.4 Properties of Round Bars
Design Inelastic Fe415 Fe500 Tbe.properties of round bars required in design are diameter, cross7sectional area, perimeter
~~
stress strain Elastic Total Stress Elastic Total Stress I
and weight per unit length. These properties are given in Appendix. The basic weight of steel is
strain strain N!mm 2
strain strain N!mm 2 taken equal to 7850 kg/m~. A quicker method to assess the weight of bar of circular section is given

o.o:m by the formula :

O.BOf/1.15 0.00144 0.00144
I
288.7 0.00174 0.00174 347.8 Weight of bar in kglm =; 2/162.2 ••••.. (2.6.1)
~
0.85//1.15 0.00)1 0.00153 0.00163 306.7 0.00185 0.00195 369.6
y where, ; is diameter of bar in mm.
0.9<if/1.15 0.00)3 0.00162 0.00192 324.8 0.00196 0.00226 391.3 2.6.5 Properties and Design Strengths of 'Reinforcement
0.95//1.15 0.0007 0.00171 0.00241 342.8 OJXl207 . 0.00277 413.0 The various structural properties of steel reinforcement useful in design as prescribed by IS : 456 .
y
0.975/y 11.15 0.0010 0.00176 0.00276 351.8 0.00212 0.00312 423.9 are given in Table 2.6.3.
f/1.15 0.0020 0.00180 0.00380 360.9 0.00217 0.00417 434.8 Table 2.6.3 Structural Properties or Steel Reinforcement
<..:

Property Value
, _1 Steels permitted for use as reinforcement bars, and their characteristic strengths fy' are given in
Table 2.6.2. L Ch.aracteristic yield strength - (fy)
(a) Mild steel- Fe250 250Ntmn1
Table 2.6.2 Types and Grades of Reinforcing bars. (b) High grade steel
415Nim~
_/ -Fe415
Type of Indian 500N/mm2
Bar Yield Minimum Ultimate -Fe500
steel standard Diameter stress elongation stress (y .s) Partial safety factor for material strength, ym 1.15
2
N!mm 2 nm N/mm 2 0.87/y
3. Design yield strength ( fyd = f y I Ym )
1. Mild steel IS: s 20nun 250 23% 410 Modulus of elasticity ( Es) 2x 105 N/mm 2
grade-I 432-1982 Over 20mm, up to and 4.
240 23% 410 I
0.002+ fy I (USEs )
,_/ Part I including 50mm ' 5. Minimum strain in bending tension at collapse
I

2 Mild steel IS: s 20nun 225 23% 370

The design strengths for steel reinforcement in Nlmm 2 as per Limit State Method are given
grade-II 432-1982 Over 20mm, up to and ~
215 23% 370 · Table 2.6.4
Part I including 50mm I
~ Table 2.6.4 Design Strength for Steel Reinforcement in N/mm
2 '

3. Medilun IS: s 16mm 350 20% 540 ~ Grade of Steel

'
Tensile 432-1982 Over 16mm, upto and 340 20% 540 l Type ofStress
~

steel Partl including 32 ffim ~ Fe250 Fe415 Fe500

~

__ )
~
Over 32 mm, Upto and 330 20% 510 250 415 500
1. Characteristic strength ( f )
including 50 mm 1l 2 Design Strength in N/mmr
_./
" 4. High IS·•, All sizes 415 145% l.lxy.s. ' - in tension, and bending compression ( 0.87 f y ) 2175 361 435
Strength 1786-1985 but'l!485. ~ 1675 278 335
J Deformed 500 12% 1.08xy.s.
~ - in axial compression ( 0.67/v )
Bars but'l!545 Discussions :
~) It may be seen from the Table 2.6.4 that the design strength ill axial compression (0.67 f.y ) differs
. 550 8% Ul6xy.s.
,._ but </.585 from the design strength ( 0.87fy) in axial tension even though fyfor tension and compression is the same.
----- -

This may be because of the reasion that the design value of 0.67/.y in axial compression is based on the.
,--
 Chapter 2 Sect. 2.7 Role of Reinforcement in Reinforced Concrete. 57
- "":" --:----- ~-._.

stress-straila properties of.high grade steel rather than those of mild-steel In the case of members under neutral axis as possible, keeping a minimum required cover. In a structure, its location is decided by
axial compression, the ultimate axial strain is 0.002 (vide Sect. 2.2.4.1). The stress in steel of grade Fe 500 the tension region which is best obtained from the deflected shape of the structure under all possible
co"esponding to ~ strain of 0.002 aS"per Table 2,6.1 is .nearly 0.75fy (actual value works out to worst loading arrangements and· combinations. Illustrations of some of the typical structures under ,
-~1
373.1 NJnun2). When further reduction of 10% is made to accqunt for the increase in stress for the effect of standard loading cases; indicating the tensio.n faces, are shown in Fig. 2. 7.1.
..
,%;

minimum eccentricity of the load the value of stress, on rounding off, works out to 0.67fy as stipulated in the ~·
code. Using this method of approach, the values for design strength for Fe250, Fe 415 and Fe500,
co"esponding to the maximum compressive strain of 0.002, could be allDwed as detailed below :
~.
~
~
)!
:t
~
~ff'!!!X,
-- ..
·----------- T

%
Table 2.6.5 : Design Strength Derived froin Strain of 0.002
I
!
'f
r.,XYY!!1
- ______
...... ... ... .,...,.
~
Stress f sc * in N/mm 2 Fe250 Fe415 Fe500 T T

T
Value corresponding to strain of 0.002 .· 217.5 (0.87fy) 327.7 ( 0.79fy) 373.1 ( 0.75fy)
~
~
Value allowing 10% reduction for the 195.7 ( 0.78fy) 294.9 ( 0.7lf/ 335.8 ( 0.67fy)
l

~
effeet of npnimum eccentricity \ ... ____ ...
(i. e., the value which can be allowed)
\
:-r
r-T-- I
I
/T
·, I I
I I
Value allowed as per oode. '·.. 167.5 ( 0.67/.y ) 278.0(, 0.67fy ) 335.0 ( 0.67fy) I
I
I
I

I I
' \
I I
I I
T I I I
* Subject to maximum of 0.87fy 1

!T
' I
; T
I

This indicates that the values allowed in the code are on the conservative side for Fe 250 and Fe 415. T ,_"~~"'_ ....... "
,
I I I

2.7 ROLE OF REINFORCEMENT IN REINFORCED CONCRETE

•
I
/I
2.7.1 General T Tension side
=
I I
I

Plain concrete, though strong in compression, being very weak in tension, does riot prove to -+- = Point of zero bpnding moment
T
be a good structural material unless it is given such a form that only compressive stresses are
induced in it (as in case of shell structures). However, it is made extremely useful by reinforcing
it with a material like steel having desired tensile strength and having good bond characteristic
with concrete, for resisting tension. Though steel can resist safely the tensile forces in the member,
II Fig. 2. 7.1 : DeDection Curves for Some Typical Structures under Typical Loading.

(2) To strengthen the concrete to resist compression as in case of columns. The steel

~
provided for this is known as main or longitudinal steel and the bars are located at the
it cannot, however, prevent fully the cracking of concrete due to tensile strains, even though wide
comers and on the faces running longitudinally. ·
cracks could be controlled by close spacing of reinforcement. '-
~ (3) To resist diagonal tension due to shear and to hold main steel in position. It is
The quantity of reinforcement required is also very sniall (only about 0.12% minimum to 6%
~ provided in the form of closed or open stirrups.
maximum) because of higher load carrying capacity of steel compared to that of concrete. Also,
though the unit cost of steel is high, its cost to carry unit magnitude offorce is not large as compared
~ (1) To prevent buckling of main bars in columns. The steel is provided in the form of
l rectangular lateral ties or spirals. ...
~
to that of concrete.
(5) To resist spiral cracking due to torsion. It is provided in the form of a box type mesh (
2.7.2 Functions, Types and Location of Reinforcement ~
of reinforcement with longitudinal bars along the faces and closed stirrups.
'
The reinforcement is required to serve the following different types of functions : (6) To distribute the concentrated loads and the effects of temperature and shrinkage
(I) To carry direct or bending tension as in case of f:Jeams, slabs, and walls of water uniformly over a large area and to hold main bars in position. The reinforcement is
tanks. This is a primary or main function of reinforcement and, therefore, such steel is known as known as distribution, temperature or shrinkage steel, and is uniformly provided in the
main steel. It is obviously to be providedpn the tension face of the member, as far away from the form of transverse bars or mesh on the exposed surfaces.

/~.
;,______;,

58 MaterialS Sect. 2.8 Composite Action of Concrete 'and Reinforc~ment 59

Chapter 2
Thus, the effective area of transformed section of a beam is the area Ac of concrete in
__/ 2.8 COMPOSITE ACTION OF CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT
compression, and transformed area of steel (into an equivalent concrete ar~ Ac.eq = mA 81 in
c The composite actions occurring in reinforced concrete structUres are of two types. tension), with the centroid of transformed area in tension remaining the same as that of steel area
__/

(l)The composite action between two constituent materials, namely,steelandconerete, itself. See Fig. 2.8.1 (a).
(2) The composite action between two constituent members of a structure (e.g. between In case, the entire cross-section is under compression as in case of a column member,
slab and beam, beam and column, wall and column etc.) because of monolithic
A c =Ag -A sc
construction.
c
~·
:

The basic principle u~derlying the composite action is the compatibility of strains between where Ag =gross cross-sectional area of entire section, and
two materials or members, at the interface. The composite action between the members is discussed Asc = area
. of steel. in compression.
later during the analysis and design of members. Here, only the composite action between the
concrete and steel reinforcement is discussed. Then the effective area of equivalent transformed concrete section in compression is given
by:
2.8.1 Load Sharing by Two Materials
A c.eq =(A g-A sc )+mAsc
When two materials, namely, steel and concrete, undergo straining action, on the basis of
assumption of perfect bond between concrete and steel, then, Ac.eq =A+(m-l)A . ,;, ...(2.8.4)
£ · g sc
strain in steel = strain in concrete. :. & = &
s c
~'

In the elastic range, &s = as IEs and , In case of beam reinforced on compression side by area A5~ and .on tension side by A 51, the_ .
&=a
c c
/E.c
effective equivalent area of transformed concrete section is given by
:. as IE= ac IEc :. as =(Es IEffI ac
s A =[A + ( m - 1 ) A in compression and ( mA ) in tension. See Fig. 2.8.1 (b).
:. a s =m.ac c.eq c sc st,
...... (2.8.1)
Actual TransfonncJ Actual Transfonncd
Also a
s
E
= &s.s Since &
s
= &c , Section Section ..Section Section
. . as =&c.Es ~:-.~ ~ ~· t-.. b -+1 .
~:-
·:.. -~ ::;
.... . -~ T []]~:-
·:.. -~ ::;
..... -~
...... (2.8.2)
,., ~i;..
where as =stress in steel, ac =stress in concrete ~ ~
,:;. ,. . txt~(til-
.. .-:-~~>....... ,,,, ;, -. N!C
,.,.t:~> .
Es =modulus of elasticity of steel, E.c = modulus of elasticity of concrete, and
'."~ ,. ...
,,
Nf--.:------
•
... Iii>.._......
Ad
t ,
X '"0
'
1/1> ...
.._li>o."
,
•

D
,,
·----""'---- A '
.......

J
m =modular ratio Es IEc. .!'" o" ..
:,. ·,. ,", ~d-x):I
t

:I
• I

1 '"
::"1).. ..
... ..

\ 'Ast '
IJ.
~ ' ' (d~x)
. •
t
I
'
1
I
I

ff
\ \ ' I t

Thus, stress in steel depends upon the modular ratio 'm' or the strain in concrete. It has been ~
.,
l ..
' mAst '
vz:uznaAzzt
•_________ 2 -
( H'l .luJzu'iYzzlzz1
._ ________ .!
)
observed in Sect. 2.2. that the strain in concrete under sustained loading goes on increasing with
(a) Singly Reinforced Section (b) Doubly Reinfot'Ced Section
time due to creep and shrinkage, resulting in increase in stress in steel and hence greater load is
carried by the steel with time. Since total load acting on the composite section remains unchanged, F1g. 2.8.1 : Transformed Section
the stress, and hence load, carried by concrete is reduced. There is, thus, internal transfer of force
) from concrete to steel with time. This phenomenon is known as 'redistribution offorces'. This is Reinforced concrete analysis and design is based on the assumption that concrete does not
an important characteristic of a composite section. take any tension, that is, the tensile strength of concrete, and hence area of concrete in tension is
_/ 2.8.2 Properties•of Transformed Sections ignored. Therefore, in the above discussion, A c refers to only the area of concrete in compression.
.

)
(a) EqUivalent Transformed Area : Area of steel Ast in tension zone of a composite section
I (b) Moment of Inertia of a Transformed: Cracked Section: On the t?asis of,principles
explained above, moment of inertia of a transformed beam section about neutral axis is given by:
can be transformed into an equivalent concrete area. Ac.eq in tension from the basic principles of
composite action explained above. ·
I
Force in equivalent transformed concrete area = force in steel area of the composite section ~ Ieq =Ic +Is
~
:. a!c.eq =a8 A st But a5 =m.ac from Eq. 2.8.1. ~ where I c =Moment of inertia of concrete about the neutral axis,
.
'l
1
. :. Ac.eq=m.acAst/ac i

l ~
:. ·Equival~nt transformed area of concrete intension (that is effective) is given by ~
Ac.eq =mAst ......(2.8.3) '~
J
60 Materials Chapter 2-

I s = Moment
.
of inertia of transformed steel area about the neutral axis.
For. a rectangular beam section shown in Fig. 2.8-1 (b).
CIIAPtER•J
b.~ 2
·I=-
3 - k sc (x-d)
•• c
LJMIT ANALYSIS OF R. C. STRUCTURES·
I
s
=mAsc ( x -dY + mAst ( d - x )2 neglecting the moment of inertia of steel al>out its own
· axis. 3.1 LIMIT ANALYSIS

b.xl 2 . . 2 1
Limit analysis deals with the study of strength and ·behavior of membef Qo\! ::tructure at
:.1 = - - A (x-d') +mA (x-d') +mA (d-x)- collapse. It is based on elastic-plastiC theory of structures of plastic material like steel, whik it is
eq 3 sc sc st
based on ultimate load theory (and its modified version is Limit St~te Method) f<!r structures/of
b.J reinforced concrete. The limit analysis when applied to steel structures is known aspl~stic theory.
:.1 =--+(m-1)A (x-;d') 2 +mA 1 (d-x) 2 ... ... (2.8.5)
eq 3 sc s The limit analysis was primarily developed for elastic-plastic material. We, therefore, first study the
limit analysis for an ideally elastic-plastic material for the forces and deformations ~~rring at ,
This is also known as moment of inert4z of a cracked section becaus~:mncrete in tension collapse and then see how it is applied to R. C. Structures. '
zone is assumed to be cracked and henee ignored. .
3.2 LIMIT ANALYSIS OF AN ELASTIC-PLASTIC STRUCTURE UNDER
For a singly reinforced beam section as in Fig. 2.8.1 (a), Eq. 2.8.5 can be used taking
' • ' I
FLEXURE

I
Asc = 0.. .
(c) Moment ofInertia of Transformed Gross Section : Since limit anjtlysis or ultimate load analysis concerns with determination of maximum load
In the case of column with the n¢utral axis lying outside the section, the whole section is · that the structure can carry before it fails, it is necessary to consider the behavior of the structure,
under compression. In such a case all the steel will be in compression and the mome!J( of inertia is and hence, that of its member, under the action of increasing load, right up to failure. To begin with,
tt
given by: we will study the behavior of a beam, under the action of transverse loads, right up to failure.

I= ..l_ bD~
12 . +I\ m-l)A ~ x
where A~ = Area of steel.in
=
....
2

compression,
x the distance ofthe steel from C.G. of sectiOn.
.,
.
... •.. (2.8.6)
II Consider a simply supported beam of elastic-plastic material of span L and of uniform
cros~-section, carrying a central point Was shown in Fig. 3.2.1.
Let the beam be made up of a perfectly elastic-plastic matl!rial of which the stress-strain
relation is shown by Fig. 3.2.2 (a). Lei the load be steadily increased from initial zero value to a
i certain value W. This causes proportionate increase in maximum bending moment at a critical
~ section {occurring at load point C in this example), which consequently causes proportionate increase
~ in maximum stress and maximum strain at the extreme fibres of this section. [See Fig. 3.2.3(a)].
i~ Since the curvature of the member or rotation (tft) of the section i:, proportional to maximum strain /
r
l and the moment of resistance M of the member is proportioral to· the maximum siress tf
~ moment-curvature or moment-rotation (M-tft) relationship of the member, shown in Fig: 3.2.2(b,
~~ is the same as the stress-strain relationship of the membc:. M flltJX EflltJX uflltJX M and ¢continue
1

~., to increase in proportion to W till the maximum stress umax in the outermost-fibre at tqe cenlfcl) (
·~
., section at C reaches the elastic limit (u1) of the material {shown by pomtA' in Fig. 3.2.2(ujj. The
~
.~~
·~ • This chapter /IIQy be omitted at tht first reading and also if the scope of the study Is rutricid lo
statistically determinate structures.
Readers attenti~n is invited to the fact that the limit analysis of a structure and the limit state.
philosophy of design are altogether different. The former is a method of analysis for the state of collapse, (
and is applicable to structures of ideally elastic-plastic material, while the latter, is a design philosophy
dealing with different limiting states offitness of a R.. C. structure. It does, however, make ~e of the former
for determining the design forces at the state of collapse.
(-
\
 ''-'-~-~.,..,

--'

J ·. 62 Limit Analysis of R. C.Structures Chapter 3 Sect. 3.2 Limit Analysis of an Elastic-Plastic Structure under Flexure 63
·:; w
~---~~~-~
IinksAC and CB, (Fig. 3.2.1) thus transforming the structure into a system of members which can
rotate at constant load. The resulting system is referred to as mechanism which causes the structure
._) 1~
Af ······ •- ··········· .. fB to collapse. Thus, development of a sufficient number of plastic hinges, and their rotation at constant

__)
···········t~~stic hinge load, are the primary requirements for transformation of a structure into a mechanism, and the
development of mechanism is a nec~ssary condition for the collapse of a structure. The load
l causing mechanism is, therefore, the load causing collapse of the structure, and is known as the
\ t collapse load. It is also known as the ultimate load because it is the maximum load that th¢
'-' ·~

.~.
structure can carry before it fails. This latter term is particularly common in R. C. design; while the
'---'
')
former is common in design of steel structures. The maximum moment that the member can resist
is called ultimate moment of resistance Mu or plastic moment ofresistance .
Mp (again the
S.M. Diagram
_)
Fig. 3.2.1

J .maximum moment M 1tUlX in the member at this stage is equal to its maximum elastic moment of Elastic

resistance MY [shown by pointA' in Fig. 3.2.2(b) corresponding to u1 ]. TheM- ~relationship is

·~) also linear up to MY. With further increase in load( i.e.M>M but less thanMu )partoftheouter Elastic

·~
section undergoes plastic condition while inner portion near the neutral axis still remains elastic L E cry

1
[See Fig. 3.2.3 (b)]. The section is, therefore, in partially plastic and partially elastic condition. y
'·
-~ (a) > l:
y cry
__) ·~
cry r-~.-~.--~----~----8 Mu --~------------8 r:-;
Plastic
crt My
•J '" Elastic

Elastic
J Plastic
L
~ E
>l:y cry
cry
CD (b)
E
0
_] ::;;
Plastic

J ~tv
Plastic
.)
Strain
(a)
Curvature-
(b)
w cry
Fig. 3.2.2 : Moment- Rotati"n Characteristics of R.C.Member
~ Section Strain diagram Stress diagram

When the load further increases, a stage is reached when practically entire section is subjected (c)

J to plastic strain [see Fig. 3.2.3(c)], with the result that with any further increase in load, the section Fig. 3.2.3 : Redistribution of Stresses Across a Section in a Ream
is no more in a position to offer any additional moment of resistance, and the section simply rotates. fonner being common in R.C. design while the latter in steel design). The limit analysis gives a
·,
J The maximum moment of resistance that the section can now offer is Mu [shown by point B Fig. relation between the ultimate moment Mu and the ultimate load Wu. In this case Mu = Wu L I 4.
3.2.2(b)]. The portion of the member near critical section, which has fully yielded in flexure and
._) It may be noted that the elastic analysis allows a maximum value of M equal toM only,
which simply rotates .at constant maximum moment Mu , is called a plastic hinge*. With the . y
. . whlie the limit analysis (or ultimate load analysis as it is ~ailed in R. C. C. and plastic analysis
development of a plastic hinge at the critical section, the member is divided into two segments or
J in steel design) allows a higher maximum value forM, equal to Mu or MP. The difference
• Plastic hinge may be considered as a rusty hinge which requires certain initial moment to cause it
to rotate, while a physical hinge is a well-oiled hinge not requiring any moment to rotate the same. between Mu and My is negligible in R. C. design. The ratio Mu I My ( or Mp I My ) is a property
:J
 Limit Analysis of an Elastic-Plastic Structure under Flexure ·65 · ('
Chapter 3 Sect. 3.2
64 Limit Analysis of R. C.Structures
The additional load, beyond stage-/, will now be carried by the span portion of the beam, arid C
of the section called 'sluzpe factor' in plastic analysis. The limit analysis, thus, gives the exact load not by supportA. Let the load reach a value Wu so that maximum moment in the span region (in this
at failure, and is, therefore, realistic and also economical. A mor~ realistic appraisal of the ultimate
case at C) equals Mu, developing a plastic hinge at C and dividing the beamAB into two segments
c
strength (or the load carrying capacity) of a structure, which leads to improved economy, can be
had when the limit analysis is applied to a statically indeterminate structure. . . AC and CB, thus forming a mechanism, and hence, the collapse of beam. Let this stage be called c
Consider, therefore, the same be~ AB in the above illustration to be fixed at A and simply stage- II. See Fig. 3.2.4(c). The load Wu which transforms the structure into a mechanism is,
supported at B. See Fig. 3.2.4(a). The elastic analysis of this propped cantilever will give reaction ('
thus, the desired ultimate load. From Fig. 3.2.4(c), it is observed that, '·
- . I
at A and B equal to 11 W I 16 and 5W I 16 respectively and a fixed end moment MA = 3WL /16.
M "' M = WuL _ Mu . W = 6Mu M = WuL ('
Now in this case, the maximum moment will occur at supportA rather than at the load point CAs c u , ,. u L or u 6
4 2
the load is increased from zero to a certain value, the maximum moment at A ( =3W1L I 16)
(
attains a value equal to ultimate moment ofresistance Mu *,the behavior. of the beam is elastic. "'J 16Mu wu =~ 9
Also MA = Mu = 3"'JL
= ·· w 8 or Wu =--"'I
8
16 ' 3L 1 C'
ArZ
c='+---- L
l
tW L
z --IB .!. x 100 = 1'2.5%
Jl
SW/16
(a)

Wu=W,+dW (c)
.: Increase in load ~W = Wu- "'! = "1 /8
Wu - "'J x 1()() =
WI 8 r
(·~~.... .,
Wt
A l B (
([M. c sf (b) 't;iu Hinges u
Thus, there is an increase in load equal to 12.5% over the load W1 obtained by elastic
RA.~1 RB.16W1
c
I
16
Stage I analysis at stage-I. The merit of limit analysis lies in this fact that it gives higher load carrying
T~--------3,~J,.-~~--
-r capacity for a statically indeterminate structure.
c
3Wtlty/~T
~t L
~
~L I It will be interesting to note, simultaneously, the two important phenomena associated with
the limit analysis, namely, the rotation ofplastic hinges and redistribution of moments occurring ('

Fig. 3.2.4
With the value ofMA reachingMu, the support section yields and the plastic hinge is formed at A,
destroying the full fixity of support A. It can, now, offer only a partial fixed-end moment equal to
I
I
I
along the structure till an ultimate load is reached.
3.2.1 Rotation of a Plastic Hinge
ln the above discussion (in Sect. 3.2.1) on the behaviour of a statically indeterminate beam,
it has been observed that the development of a plastic hinge at supportA.converts the beam into a
statically determinate beam at the end of stage-/, and the additional load dW causes the rotation of
("'
~

\.

Mu , and the beam now acts like a statistically determinate beam hinged at A (and carrying a ~
~ hingeatA by an amount e = ( 8W)I.2!16EI. Since 8W = Wl/8 = W)9, .·. e = WUL I 144£1.
2
c
constant moment Mu at A) and simply supported at B. Let this stage be called Stage-/.
See Fig. 3.2.4(b). However, by formation of just one hinge at A the mechanism is not developed,
I
~
It is particularly necessary that the section of the beam at A should have a capacity to rotate
through angle e, without rupture or breakage of the member, before the ultimate load is reached. (
~ The rotation capacity of a plastic hinge characterizes its ability to sustain or absorb rotations near
and the beam does not fail at this stage, and h~nce, at this load . The load is, therefore, requ~red to
be increased further till the structure is transformed into a mechanism by development of an additional
~
~
; the failure. The rotation, which asection can absorb, depends upon the length of horizontal portion c
hinge at the centre. AB of M-¢curite shown in Fig. 3.2.2(b), which, in tum, depends upon the uitimate strain and the
As seen earlier, a statistically determinate beam requires only one hinge for forming ductility of the section. An ideally plastic material like steel possesses large amount of ductility, and c
mechanism, while for 11 propped cantilever having or~er of indeterminacy equal to one, requires hence the rotation capacity ~'before rupture or fracture of material. However, that is not theca'
two hinges to be formed to transform the beiliU l:i~o mechanism. Therefore, for a beam having with reinforced concrete because of very low value of ultimate strain -of concrete. It is, therefore, (·
order of indeterminacy N, total N + 1 hinges are normally •• required for transforming a stri.\cture absolutely necessary to ensure this rotation capacity in case of a R. C. member. The advantage of r--.
into mechanism. the limit analysis can be accrued only if this rotation capacity is ensured. It is also necessary to see \..
in addition that the rotation of hinge, that occurs on accountofiricrease in load from. W1 to Wu, is
• Strictly specldng it will be My, but tlr.e difference between the two is ig-r~or:-d '.md M- ¢
relation ship i.~ idealised by dotted li!u: in Fig. 3.2.2(b). also not too large as to affect the serviceability of the structure by the way of large deflections and c
••J'hue are so1'e exceptional caS€s !ike par~l.collapse, ow:r complete collapse for' which
.. :· Specialised ia! /;ock..~ (56/1, 51514} on plastic a11aiysis may be referred to.
cracking, even a:t service loads. c
\
·:J 66 Limit AMiysis of R.C.Structures Chapter 3 Sect. 3.3 Application of Limit Analysis to R. C. Structures 67

A~B
~ 3.2.2 Redistribution of Moments
It has been observed in Sect. 3.2.1 ·that, with the formation of first plastic hinge at the end of
·_j

-~
stage-1, the additional load OW causes the first hinge to rotate, at constant moment, causing t~ansfer
.of additional moments due to OW to the span region (which has still the reserve load carrying
capacity), and thereby changing the distribution of moments along the ~p:ms. This phenomenon of
l X
Concrete in plastic condition
t
)
transferring additional moment to any other section which has reserved load carrying capacity
'---' "'IS <Tailed redistribution of moments. ·
It is a particular case of a· general phenomenon of redistribution or rearrangement of forces
:_) in the structure. In general, in a highly redundant structure, whenever certain section of a member,
or ce;tain member of a structure, is overstressed or loaded beyond its capacity the other sections of
·~ members, or other connected members of the structure, bear the additional stress or loads, causing
thereby what is known as redistribution of forces. In a member or a structure consisting of strong -J &cu 1-
J and weak portions, segments or elements, the former always cover the latter by sharing a greater -J&cyj---- 0
cu "cu

'~
/load, and prevent the failure of the member or structure as a whole. This is just a natural phenomenon.
InSect. 3.3.3, it will be seen how this redistribution of moments occurs in the case of a R. C.
structure.
lfZT
,, //IT ld
(d·Xu}
3.3 APPLICATION OF LIMIT ANALYSIS OF R. C. STRUCTURES _L
'J ' Having studied the limit analysis and the phenomenon of redistribution of moments, and the
1--J. "sy !- I II
rotation of plastic hinges which occurs along with it, in case of a perfectly elastic-plastic structure, ~'·su:....J
Strain Diagram Stress Diagram
J we will now see to what extent, and under what conditions, it can be applied toR. C. mP-mbers. For
Fig. 3.3.1 Plastic Hinge in a R. C. Member
this purpose, it is necessary to study how the plastic hinge develops in a R. C. member, what is its

I
~ I moments-rotation characteristic, and how does the redistribution of moments occurs in a R. C. as in case of distributed loads. It will be seen in next section that this length of plastic hinge plays an
'--'
structure. important role in plastic rotation capacity of the section.
:__) 3.3.1 Plastic Hinge in a R. C. Member (b) Rotation Capacity of a R. C. Plastic Hinge: Fig. 3.3.1 shows a plastic hinge developed
When a moment at a section in R. C. member (see Fig. 3.3.1) reaches its ultimate value, the in a simplysupported R. C. beam at C-the point of maximum bending moment. The section through
-~)
'---"
major part of concrete in compression is under plastic state while the concrete below the neutral
axis being in tension gets cracked and the steel reinforcement yields. The section is not able to
I
·~
~
C undergoes full plastic condition as shown by strain diagram line-Il. Maximum strain in concrete
at ultimate curvature is &cu and that in steel &su is greater than &sy• The stress in concrete beyond
~
~ offer any additional moment of resistance. Plastification of concrete in compression, and yielding ~
the elastic limit is au with au < acu and the corresponding strain in concrete is &c>c&y but less
of steel in tension, causes rotation of the section, at constant moment Mu , and with increase in ~,,
\~ than & • (& is a strain in concrete at the end of e4istic state). The concrete in this region is thus
~ strain, the section behaves like a hinge. Thus, in R. C. member the plastic hinge is defined as that a cu cy
in plasiic condition and yielded. The strain in the steel at yielding is &sy and the corresponding stress
_s_ection of the beam, where plastification of concrete in compression and yielding of steel in
j tension zone has occurred causing rotation of the section under constant ultimate moment. ;s a . The rotation capacity ((i) of a R. C. hinge is the rotation which the section undergoes from
sy .
Since ·me hinge is formed on account of plastification of the materials, it is called the plastic hinge. the state when the strain in steel is & (i.e., line-1 in the strain diagram) to that when the strain in
) sy
·-.,_/ The plastic hinge is deyeloped first at a section where bending moment is maximum. concrete reaches & (i.e. line-11 in the strain diagram). Actual strain diagrams at stage-1 and
(a) Length of Plastic Hinge : It is that portic:! of the member (Fig. 3.3.1) in which cu '
stage-II are slightly different from those shown in Fig. 3.3.1 because of difference in positions of
·__] .farthest fibre in compression and tension reaches plastic condition. It is the region in which maximum neutral axis at stages I and II. The neutral axis at stage-II is slightly higher as compared to that at
strain in concrete & is greater than the strain in concrete at the commencement of yielding &Y but stage-I, and theoretically therefore, xu2 < xur However, this difference being negligibl~, the same
:_j less than ultimate strain & • The central section of the hinge is practically in full plastic condition
. u is ignored for practical purposes.
while the section in any other portion of hinge length is under partial plastic condition. It may be
r:J observed from Fig. 3.3.1 that the length of plastic hinge depends upon the nature of bending
moment diagram and hence upon th : type of loading. It iE farge for flatter beil<iing m9ment diagram
:_)
 /'
Chapter 3 Sect. 33 Application of Limit AnalysiS to R.C.Structures 6<}_
Thus,
Fig. 3.3.2(a), the length of portion AB of the curve depends upon the extent to which section is(
¢ =( 8 cy ) LP = ( 8
cu - 8 cu - 8
cy ) LP under-reinforced (lesser the steel percentage, greater the plastic rotation ¢ ). On the other hand,
X k .d if the sectio"'-is over- reinforced, the strain in concrete reaches the ultimfte strain early and the("
where, L p = Length o~ plastic hinge, u moment rotatron relationship is similar to stress-strain curve for concrete as shown in Fig. 3.3.2(b).
xu =kud =depth of neutral axis below the compression face.
r
ku =neutral axis factor. M [
8 X k A B Mu
But, --S1'_ =__!!:__ = _u- k
8
sy
d-x 1-k
u u
8 - __!£_. 8
cy - 1 - k
u
sy ......(see Fig 3.3.1)
.·' B c
.
· ·¢ =
(
8
cu
8
ku - 1 - ku
sy ) Lp
d c
/·
where, ¢is the permissible rotation at the critical section. \

It has been reported by Research Committee of the Institution of Civil Engineers (U.K.) (64/3) that
- 1/ip .. 1 I-1/Jp-j ('
L varies from 0.5d to 2d. Taking the value LP equal to d when over-reinforced sections are
a~oided, the capacity of a R.C. hinge* is given by
c
¢ = (8cu
k - 8sy k )
1- ...... (3.3.1)
u u 1/Ju 1/J 0
1/iy 1/iu ~ (
This expression shows that the rotation capacity of a section is a direct function 8 and (a) Under-reinforced Section (b) Over-reinforced Section r~
. ... cu •,
inverse function of ku for a given value of 8sy i.e. the grade of steel. Thus ¢can be increased by
either increasing the value of by various means (97/1, 98/4) or by reducing the value of k i.e. Fig.3.3.2 : Moment Rotation Characteristics of a R.C. Member
8
ru u 1 \
the depth of the neutral axis. 8 is assumed to be constant equal to 0.0035 by I. S. Code for %
ru .·
common grades of concrete under normal conditions. It can, however, be increased.** by confining It shows very low.value of plastic rotation ¢P. . C
the concrete in compression zone by closely spaced stirrups or helical reinforcement. The neutral Having known that a R. C. section can offer only a limited amount of rotation, it will now be
realised how important it is to check that rotation ¢occurring at a plastic hinge due to redistribution ['
axis factor ku can be reduced by reducing the percentage of tension steel by increasing the
section, or by providing compression reinforcement if section cannot be increased.*** of moments does not exceed the rotation ¢ that the hinge can absorb before crushing of concrete.
Or in other words, it becomes imperative to design the section at the plastic hinge which can give C
3.3.2 Moment Rotation Characteristics of a R. C. Member a rotation capacity ¢greater than the rotation B that is likely to occur due to amount of redistribution
Relation of rotation of a section of a member with the moment acting on it, is known as the dM. If this is not ensured, the section will fail by crushing of concrete before an ultimate load is (
moment rotation characteristic of the section. It is observed in earlier section that the rotation of a reached. '
section is a function of neutral axis factor ku. ( = xu I d) and the ultimate strain in concrete. Now, 3.3.3 Redistribution of Moments in a R. C. Structure (~

actual strain in concrete depends upon the moment M on the section. Rotation ¢ of the section is,
therefore, related toM and and hence to the condition whether the section under-reinforced or
over-reinforced. In the case of an under-reinforced section, the rotation is essentially due to yielding
of steel and moment rotation curve is similar to the stress-strain curve for steel as shown in
*For further details of length of R. C. plastic hinge and rotation capacity of R. C, hinge, please
see references (56/2, 98/4).
** For additional information about the way and means of increasing rotation capacity¢ and the
amount of increase in ¢ , see above references.
*** For further details regarding rotation capacity and ductility of R. C. members, see reference
(64/4,77/4, 97!1) .
The phenomenon of redistribution of moments for a perfectly elastic-plastic material has ·
already been seen earlier in Sect. 3.2. Let us now see, how the same is applied to R. C. Structures. ('
In an ideally elastic-plastic material like steel, this phenomenon can be allowed fully till the C'
·J development of mechanism. However, the case of R. C. structure is different because it has
~ limited rotation capacity and further the large rotation cannot be permitted since it will affect ""
--~
~ serviceability (i.e. d_etlection and cracking). Hence, limitations have to be imposed on rotations and \..
~
-~ .
corresponding amount of redistribution i.e. on the transfer of moments from one section to the
other section of the member (from support to span region and vice-versa) maintaining
c
equilibrium betWeen internal forces and external loads. (86/2, 93/2). (~

'-

\
 1 Methods of Limit Analysis of R.C.Structures 71 .
J 70 Limit Analysis of R.C.Structures Chapter 3 Sect. 3.4
covering all appropriate combination of loads.
( Mu) provided ~ 0.7 MEU
' \
.__/ 3.4 METHODS OF LIMIT ANALYSIS OF R. C. STRUCTURES ...•.. (3.4.1}
3.4.1 General This clause makes it obligatory that design moment obtained after redistribution of moment.
~ From the discussion of the limit analysis in the earlier sections, it is observed that the application

I
should not be less than 70% of the elastic moment at ultimate load ( i.e.O. 7 M EU ). In order
of the limit analysis toR~ C. structures is not as easy as it is for the structures made up of perfectly
)
-~ elastic-plastic materials because of the limitation imposed on amount of redistribution of moments, words, the design moment after redistribution wiii not be less than the working
by available rotation capacity ofR. C.sections, and by the serviceability requirements. Experimental ~ moment ( i.e. MEW ) at service ~oad.
';1
) The redistribution of moments effects in shifting of points contraflexures towards the fixed
~

_)'
evidence shows that plenty of ductility, and hence the rotation capacity, is available in R. C. structures
also. It is, however, the restriction imposed by serviceability requirement that is more severe in
case of R. C. structures. This has therefore, given scope to evaluation of different approaches
i
&~
end or the continuous end of fixed/continuous beam. This results in the portion between the
two points of contraflexures (obtained before and ~fter redistribution of mornents) subjected
of analysis and design like Cambridge Method, Baker's Method etc. (77/4). Cambridge Method ~ to both sagging moment and bogging moment and consequently wide cracks would devel!JP
_j considers load causing mechanism as the ultimate load while the Baker's Method does not allow
formation of mechanism but considers that load as the ultimate load which reduces statically I (5)
at top under service load conditions. To guard against such cracking the above restriction has
been imposed by the code.
At section where the moment capacity after redistribution is less than that from the
J indeterminate structure to a statically determinate one (by formation of just sufficient number of
elastic maximum moment diagram, the following relationship shall be satisfied :
hinges). It, thus, not only avoids total collapse but also ensures lesser deflection.
__)

~
All these methods are lengthy because they not only involve analysis but also the design of
sections and because of the interdependent character of design moment, amount of redistribution
of moment and rotation capacity they are, therefore, not suitable for 'practical ..use. That is the ·
\I -xu + -dM < 0.6
d 100 -·
...... (3.4.2a)
.

reason why they have neither been used in practice nor have been adopted by the design codes. ~ where, dM = percentage reduction in moment.
__) The design codes allow use of conventional elastic analysis for factored (ultimate) loads, allow It This equation can be written as :

.. \
limited redistribution, and restrict the depth of neutral axis, in proportion to the amount of redistribution, ii'1 ku.limit <~.6 - ~~) ...... (3.4.2b)
to ensure required rotation .
J i
€ ~~ )
The recommendations of the I.S. code are given in the following section. ! 3
~ But ku.limit = xu.limi/ d < 6-
_) :. xu:limit d ··· ·•• ( .4.2c)

~
3.4.2 ·I.S. Code Provisions for Limit Analysis of R. C. Structures and their
Interpretation li Note : When dM = 30~the depth ofneutral aps works out to 0.3d which is less than the bahmced
I.S.: 456 makes the following provisions for limit analysis of R. C. structures
All structures may be analysed by the linear elastic theory to calculate internal actions
,.
It
neutral axis depth (x
·\
land hence called as x 1. ·r However, when say dM = 10%, x 11111
u.nwx' u. um . u.
. if may be
(1) ~
,,a
~j produced by design loads. greater than xJ.max . In such a case, the depth ofneutral axis shall be the one whichever is less between
In case of limit state method the design loads are ultimate loads. Thus, the structures should 1~ I

J be analysed by elastic theory to calculate internal forces (viz. B.M., S.F., torsion etc.) produced
by ultimate loads.
J (2) Equilibrium between the internal forces and the external loads is maintained.
The elastic moment at any section in a member due to a particular combination of
xu.max (lnd xu.limif
i This equation indirectly relates the rotation capacity and ductility of the member. As the
1 1. .t I d decreases, the section tends to be
amount of redistribution of moment ( dM) increases, x U.lllll
more and more under-reinforced with the result the ductility and rotation capacity of the member

I
(3)
) loads shall not be reduced more than 30% of the numerically largest moment given
anywhere by the elastic maximum moment diagram for the particular member, covering
:) all appropriate combination of loads.
The elastic moments at ultimate loads can be redistributed to the maximum extent of 30% of
:J the numerically largest moment. However, while effecting the redistribution of moments,
the equilibrium must be maintained. This means that where the bending moments are reduced
-~ at some sections they will have to be appropriately increased at the other sections. In other
words, moment redistribution may lead either to an increase or a decrease in the design
._) bending moment at a given section.
(4) The ultimate moment of resistance provide_d at any section of a member-is not less than
J 70% of the moment at that section obtained-/rom an elastic maximum momint dUlgram
increases~ The limitations of 30% on redistribution of moments bas been imposed to avoid large
i., rotation, and hence excessive deflection and cracking which affect the serviceability of the structure.
;~ It also helps to guard against the crushing of the concrete at the plastic hinge.
i The subtle meaning of all these prov;isions made in regards to redistribution-of moments will
1
~
_be easily understood from the following illustration of a fixed beam carrying a uniformly distributed
load over its entire span as shown in Fig. 3.4.1.
Consider a fixed beam AB of span L carrying a uniformly distributed load over the entire
span as shown in Fig. 3.4;1a. The elastic bending tnoment diagram for ultimate load is obtained
. 'i using elastic analysis according to condition (1) given above.
In this case, the elastic bending moment diagram at ultimate load (!JMD) is drawn in a little
 72 Limit Analysis of-R.C.Structui'es
Chapter 3 S«t. f;j:: Method of Limit Analysis of R. C. Structures 13 c-
A~
. c B . L
In other words if support moments are reduced by dM the span moment gets increased by dM. Now, (
if the moment at only one support is reduced by dM the increase in span moment will be dM/2. This
(a) is true if the maximl,lm span moment occurs at mid span, otherwise the increase in the span moment r··
will be slightly less tlian the maximum moment (See Ex.3~6.1 b). However, for practical puiposes
increase in the span moment can be taken equal to dM/2 in such a case. \"
A2
~
j Curve • III is obtained by reducing each ordinate of curve - I by 30% to satisfy condition-4
Ill Ill
which requires that the ultimate moment of resistance provided at any section is not less th~m 70% r
of the elastic moment at ultimate load.
.. c

I
A
v

8
Fig. 3.4.1 b shows that the region RS, which is under sagging moment at ultimate condition (
\(Curve -II) is under hogging moment at service condition (Curve -Ill). This region must be
provided'N"ith the positive as well as"negative reinforcement. In practice such minute details are ("'
c2 ____ -
~ hardly worked out. The abov~ condition is satisfied in practice by continuing the negative
(b) (c) reinforcement for some distance ahead of point of contraflexure s while the reinforcement is c·
designed for momentM 2 and CC2 continuing minimum steel at bottom beyond R.
Fig.3.4.1
I Comment:;: It may be noted that, in this case, the mid span moment CCi=O.BW L/12) happens to (
. u
be greater than the support moment BBi=0.7 Wu L/12). Now the question arises, how does one

I
different manner than the conventional method. The free BMD drawn taking A B as the base line select ·the percentage of redistribution of moments in a certain case ? This is difficult to answer; the (~
1 1 choiCe depends on the economics in a particular situation. Normally, greater the redistribution at ·
so that the ordinates drawn from the base line to any point on the curve represent the net bending
moment (either positive bending moment or negative bending moment). support, greater is the economy. This is because the mid span section of the beam normally acts as a_·(""
flanged section. It has greater moment resisting capacity with the result the amount of increase in steer
Curve -1 i.e. A1C1B1 shows the elastic moment diagram at ultimate load. (i.e. Mwdiagram) due _to transfer of moment from support is comparatively less than that required for a rectangular (~
taking the partial safety factor for load as 1.5.
I sectwn. ,
Total ultimate load Wu = 1.5 W where, W is total working load
:. MEu= 1.5 MEW
I But in the case of continuous slabs equalizing support moment and span moments· (to the
possible extent) can become the criteria for selecting the percentage of redistribution. \

where, MEw= Elastic bending Moment at Working load

.MEU = Elastic bending Moment at Ultimate load
I
~
i
3.4.3 Advantages of Redistribution of Moments
The distribution of elastic moment along a statically indeterminate beam shows peaks of
C

:.At supports the ultimate moments are given by: MEUA = MEUB = WuL /12
:.At mid span the ultimate moment (CC in Fig. 3.4.1b) is:
1 li
eel= MEuc= WUL18- WUL/12 = WULI24
Curve~ II i.t. A2C}12 represents the bending moment diagram after reducing the numerically
largest support moment by30% as per condition-3. In this process the points of contraflexures get
shifted towards the support. When the support moments are reduced the span moment gets increased
and h~ to satisfy the equilibrium equation given by condition-2,
viz. B.M. at supp<)'rt after redistribution + B.M~ at mid span =Free B. M. at mid span
:. BB2 + CC2 =WuL 18 or BB2 + CC1 + C C = Wzf I 8
1 2
But,BB~ =M 2 =0.7 WuL I 12 and CC1= WuL /24
:. C1C2 =wuL !8 -0.1 w; 112 - wuL 124 =0.3 (WuL !12) = o.3 MEuA
This means, due to reduction of support moments at both ends by 30% the span moment
increases by 30%. Thus, the curve A 2C~ can_be obtained by lowering the curve by dM.
2 '
~ maximum negative moments over small regions near supports, with relatively low values of span (
~ moments. Reinforced concrete beam normally acts like a rectangular beam at supports, requiring
~
either a large section or large ~mount of steel at supports to resist these high elastic moments. This C
results in congestion of steel at supports and an uneconomic design as well.
~ The tedistribution of moments offers the following advantages : (
~ (1) It reduces the sqpport moments and heJ:)ce absolute maximum design moment.It, thereby,
reduces, either the cross section, or the area of steel at support, and thus avoids congestion (
of steel, and facilitates better compaction of concrete at supports.
(2) R. c. beam, cast monolithically with the slab, normally acts as flanged beam at mid span and r
rectangular beam at supports. Therefore, reduction of support moments and increasing the
span moment is advantageous from the view point of better utilization of higher moment of C·
resistance of the flanged section at mid span.
(3) When different live load patterns are considered, adjustment of bending moments for each \
pattern can result in the reduction of design moments not only in support region but also in the
span region as well. (See Ex.3.6.3) ( ·
c
\
 ~··,,·.- ;~::

Analysis of Structures 15
_) 74 Limit Analysis of R.C.Structures Chapter 3 Sect. 35· .
. Fig. 3.5.1 shows the area of the slab transferring the load to the beam and is :
~ But this modification of moments does not mean a reduction in safety margin below that
implied in code provisions. Rather it means utilization of excess strength which would otherwise =L (Lx1!2 + Lx2 !2) ......(~.5.1)
~ remain unused in elastic analysis. Load on the beam = w.L ( Lxz I 2 + Lx2 I 2)
(4) The end result also gives a better distribution of moments along the length of the member and where, w = -Inten~ity of load on the slab.
J better detailing of reinforcement, and economic design. L = Span of the beam
Lxl' Lx =Spans of the slabs on either side of the beam. (Normally, Lxi =Lx2)
.__; 3.5 ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES l 2
Since the slab is designed taking its width equal to unity the load transferred to the beam for its one

II
3.5.1 Methods of Analysis
meter length will be equal to the sum cif the slab shear on two sides of the beam (see Fig. 35.lb)
_) The analysis of reinforced concrete structure is done by linear elastic theory as recommended
by codes to calculate the generalized internal forces produ~d by design loads using varions methods This can be expressed as :
of structural analysis. The matrix stiffness method is idealJor computer aided or program based (i) For slab-beam system load on intermediate beam/m = w( £xi I 2 + Lx2 I 2) ... (3.5.2a)
~ (ii) For beam srpporting cantilever slab. (Fig. 35.1c), Load on beamlm = wLx ... (3.5.2b)
J
automated analys)s. Moment distribution method is most popular for manual calculations. The
analysis using standard coefficients simplifies the computations to a large extent. [See Author's I
t;!
In addition to this the beam is subjected to torsion of wL} I 2

-~
R. C. Design Handbook (97/6)]. LS. code allows use of a substitute frame method consisting
of beams at floor level together with eolumns above and below assuming thei~ far ends fixed, for
Iu '(b) Loads on beams supporting two-way slab :
In the case of beams supporting two-way slab supporting UDL the load distribution is trapezoidal ·
calculation of design moments and shears cue to vertical loads at any floor or roof level. For lateral
loads simplified methods (Cantilever Method or Portal MethoJ) arqJl_owed for symmetrical.
I °
on long beams and triangular on short beams with base angle of 45 as shown in Fig. 35.2.
_)
and moderately tall structures (For details see Chapter -13). Irr practice, they are used tor structures I If the intensity of uniformly distributed load is w,
up to ground plus two or three floors. For tall and unsymmetrical structures, rigorous methods may ~ The ordinate of trapezoidal and triangular load = wL )2.
J
\

preferably be used.
i The triangular and trapezoidal loads are converted into an equivalent uniformly distributed
~
~ load by using equivalence factors. ·',
The equivalent UDL for bending moment is calculated by equat~ng the maximum bending moment
\ However, before restoring to analysis it is necessary to transfer the loads from slab to beam. ~
-._/
Once the loads are transferred the analysis process can be commenced. The details of transfer of F.
at mid span due to trapezoidal/ triangular loading; to the bending moment due to equivalent UDL.
loads from slab to beani and different loading arrangements for finding maximum moments are ·'
_j ~
given in the foliowing sections. The transfer of load from slab to beam depends on the type of slab
viz. whether it is a one way slab or a cantilever slab or two way slab.
i;~
_) ~

1
3.5.2 Computation of Loads ~
~

:J (a) Loads on beam supporting one-way slab : In the case of a one-way slab the load from the !~
~
slab is primarily transferred to the beam in the short direction along which the main steel is provided. ~
Ly
J Lx1 Lx2
~2
.__)

~
Cantilever slab

._/
) t
r-;~
riJ 1 co"' 1' BeamB 1
1m
,) T1m

A
X
T
_) I.Lx1+f-+Lx2+) wLx1 wLx2
- - wLx
w =intensity of UDL on slab
~ ,:J1:, L
)
(a) Slab Area Transferring
-a= sea~
Slab

(b) Load on beam/m (c) Load on beam/m

w5
8 Beam~
w_i:i
8
v
Load to the beam from slab shear from slab shear FiaUJ.l: Loads on Beams Supporting Two-w'ly Slab
.) Fig.3.5.1 : Loads on Beams Supporting Q.ne-way Slab
 Chapter 3
s_ect.3,5 Analysis of Structures 11 c
The equivalent UDL for shear is computed by equating the maximum shear at the end d,\le to ~

trapezoidal/ triangular loading to the maximum shear due to equivalent UDL. load and live load. Deadloads are pertnanent and occur on-all the spans, while live load being (

Short Span Beam : moving load may or may not cover all the spans. Therefore, the different arrangements of live load
are required to be cpnsidered for Calculatin~ maximum forces in the members. (
The load
·
on the short span beam is triangular having length LX and heightLX /2 giving Io:!~ .· The maximum positive moment producing tension at the bottom will occur when th~ deflection
equal tow Lj2 where, w is the intensity ofload on the slab. Therefore, to obtain equivalent unifonnly is maximum or curvature producing concavity upwards is maximum. This condition will occur (
'-
distributed load for bending moment (weqb), equate the maximum B.M. at mid span of short span when maximum load (i.e. both DL and U) covers the whole span while minimum load (i.e. only
DL) is on adjacent spans. r
Lx to maximum bending moment due to equivalent UDL on the same span Lx and is given by: \

The negative moments producing tension at the top will be maximum when the curvature at

-(~x xL~x (!_x !:)

r-.

( wL/ Lx) x WLx = w

eqb-x
L2
support producing convexity'upwards is maximum which requires maximum load should be appli~d
on adjacent spans. Accordingly, IS:456 recommends the following loading arrangements on structural
\.

8 2 2 2 2J 3 2 8 frames: (~

wLX wLX 2 k wLX (a~ Consideration may bt; limited to combination of:
:.weqb= J = 2 XJ = 1 X-2 ... · ... (3.5.3a) (1) Design dead load on all spans with full design live loads on two adjacent spans; for obtaining c
maximum hogging moment.
where, w Lx/2 =rate of loading, Equivalence factor for B.M. = 2!3.
·-w b = equivalent unifonnly distributed load for bending moment.
~·

f
(2) Design dead load on all spans with full design imposed load and on alternate spans to get
maximum span moment.
c
Afio ~
the maximum shear will occur at the end of the beam.
wL 2
~;

•~
(3) When design imposed load does not exceed three-fourth of the design dead load, the load
arrangement may be design dead load and design imposed load on all the spans~ This condition
c
Equating maximum shear for the above two cases = T = weqs ___.!_
L l' is not applicable when redistribution moments to be carried out. r
Lx wLx 2 .!:;:
or weqs = w4 = kz x - - where kl = !/2 1
2 ...... (3.5.3b) ~- At ultimate limit state, the load combinations giving maximum design moments are·shown in (-
and, weqs =equivalent unifonnly distributed load for shear. Fig. 3.5.3. The loading arrangement giving maximum span moment, say span AB is shown in
Long span beam : Fig. 3.5.3a and Fig. 3.5.3b gives the loading arrangements for maximum negative moment at
support B.
r
Proceeding on the same lines as for short beam by equating 1he maximum values of !;::::ding
moment due to trapezoidal load with that due to equivalent uniformly distributed load, we get, c
wLx ~1 _ __
=__ =k1 _x_ j ~ j r
~
w 1 wL where, k1= 1 - -1- , equivalence factor for B.M.
eqb 2 JJ32 2 3p2
· · (3.5.4a)
c
weqb
wL {,
=~\1 - 2J3 7 =k2
1 _\
wL) ~ 1\
where, k2= \ - 2fJ equivalence factor for S.F.
( --:- (
(3.5.4b) (a) L_oading for maximum positive moment ( in say AB)
where w = intensity of load on slab
Lx = short span of the slab
r r (

II
Ly = long span of the slab ~ DL \ . \1.5 (DL+ LL) ""' OL \
= LX I Ly = Long span/ short span
('

~~
wLx I 2 =rate of loading per unit length , weqb =equivalent intensity of UDL for B.M.
weqs = equivaient intensity ot UDL for shear. ~~fc r
3.5.3 Loading Arrangem~nts for Computation of Design Forces
For designing a continuous beam or a one-way continuous slab, it is necessary to determine
is (b) Loading arrangements for n(.'gc!live moment at B
\
the maximum positive moment in the span-region and maximum negative moment at supports, by ~ ('
~
considering various pos8ible loading arrangements. In geners!, loads on beams wnsists of dead ~. Flg.3.5.3: General Loading arrangements for maximum moments
~ c
c
 Analysis of Structures 79
78 Limit Analysis of R.C.Structures Chapter~3 Sect. 3.5
- 'J
,.J Bending moment at any section at a distance x from end A is :
3.5.4 Generalised Method for Computation of M:udmum Span Moment andc' ...... (3.5.6)
J
Points of Contraftexures. (9813) Mx =RA.x - wxl/2 ~MA
The analysis of a structure using any method of analysis gives the end forces co!lo:isting of To find points of contraflexures, equate Mx = 0 ,
axial force, bending moment and shear force (or reaction). The next step is to analyse the beam to
~ :.RA.x-wJ?/2-MA=O or x2-(2RA/w)x+2MA/w=0
determine the maximum span moment and points of contraflexures, if any, and then to design the
,_J

._/
I

'!
beam at different sections. The end sections subjected to hogging moments require provision of
steel at top while the mid span section will require steel at bottom face to resist sagging moment. fn
some cases the end moments are so large that the negative (or hogging) moment may prevail over
the whole span· and it would be necessary to provide steel at top only or in some cases even
The solution of quadratic equation gives :

Xz = --RA
w
(
R.I\
w -,
i_ 2MA, x=
w 2
RA+
w
e:J- 2:A ...... (35.7)

j negative reaction may develop at one of the ends for which proper an~;horing arrangements may
.( RA)
\
become necessary. Further, in some car;es the end moments may be zero or only one end may be
subjected to moment because of the other end being simply supported (e.g. penultimate span of 2 Now, ( x2 :_ xl) = L 0 = 2 x - - -2MA
w
-
w
...... (3.5.8a)

J C(}ntinuous beam) or end moments having the same or different magnitudes may act at both ends
(e.g. intermediate span of a continuous beam). In order to consider all these prolJabilitie~ i.t is
J neA;;essat'y to derive generalised equations for calculation of span moment aud poiniS of contraflexi.liCS
From Eq. 3.5.8a and Eq. 3.5.7 we get, x 1 = RA I w - L) 2
•••..• (3.5.9)
for a beam loaded by a uniformly distributed load subjected to end moments. :. xmax =x1+L)2 =RA/w or RA=W xmax
:J Consider a beam AB of span L loaded by a unif01mly distributed load of intensity w, and ...
subjected to end moments MA and MB as shown in Fig. 3.5.4. It is assumed ·that MA ·is greater Substituting xm~ for x and RA for (w xm~ ) in Eq. 3.5.6 we get:
j •..... (3.5.10)
~n .. RA Xmax I 2 .- MA =wLo Is
2
than M8 . M,....,. =
_) x1, x2 = distances of the points of contraflexures from end A. Now Eq. 3.5.7can be rewritten in terms of xmax as:
L0 =Length of beam between points of contraflexures X 2 2MA ...... (3.5.7b)
max--
\ -..; X 2 2MA
__;
=distance of the section from A at which sagging moment is maximum.
X max
x=X
1 max - max--;- ' X=
2
X
max + w
Mm~ =maximum sagging moment occurring at distance X max from end A.
'\
'---'
RA, RB"= end shear forces.
Taking moment of forces about B we get, and, L0 = 2
{x 2max_ 2:A ...... (3.5.8b)
,__)
RA =wL 12 + (MA -MB)IL and R8 = wL 12- (MA- M8 )!L ...... (3.5.5) Note:
(1) These equations are valid for any value of MA and M 8 provided the bending moment is not
'i
__./
negative throughout the span.

.t=::i ··~··
(2) These equations are very useful for calculating maximum sagging moment and points of

~~
j contraflexures to get the length of reinforcement at continuous Sl!pport.
(3) In using these equations it is immaterial which end is called A, it can be either right support or left
hand suppori. Therefore, whichever end is called A, the reaction at that end is to be considered
.:J RA Rs RA Rs
and the distance viz. x , x , Xmax are to be taken from that end only .

1~
1 2

1~--=?J},
) --I
I--_!:.._ The bending moment will be negative throughout the span, (See Fig. 3.55), if one of
~ -----------~~2-f-------~------- ~

e: )-. :1
the following conditiOns is satisfied :
..)
c j_: I 8 1 L2o ! T l-11?. ----4 c..-. I :If [
2
"negative
_j : I '-o._...l..l._.
:-x1+2--tt
: _ Xmax -!_:_,___ Condition· 2 : If either RA or RB acts in the downward direction irrespective of
_) : xz
condition-! is satisfit(d or not.
In these cases the span moment is calculated at mid-span at a distance L/2 from the support.
~ FigJ.5,4: Sagging and.Hogging Moments in Beam Fig.3.5.5: Negative moments in Beam
 (
80 Limit Analysis of R. C. Structures Analysis Procedure and Illustrative Examples 81
\
Chapter 3 Sect. 3.6
(
3.5.5 Analysis Using Moment Distribution Method (2) Draw the bending moment diagrams for each of the above loading cases considered\
allowing desired redistribution of 1110ments within permissible limits 30%, satisfying simultaneously '
The method of moment distribution is used for the analysis ofcontinuous beams. The Rotational ('
the equilibrium condition so as to minimize the values of maxirnum~itive and negative bending
Stiffness Factor (RSF) for a prismatic beam of Length L and flexural rigidity EI for different end
moments. This requires careful and simultaneous consideration of all the maximum moments for
conditions are given as under :
Case- I : One end fixed and the other end continuous or both ends continuous, the rotational
different loading cases. From this redistributed moment diagram, obtain maximum design moment c
stiffness factor is 4 EIIL envelope. ,----,
(
Case -II: One end simply supported or hinged and the other end continuous, the rotational (3) Draw 0.7 MEU diagram by multiplying each ordinate of MEU by 0.7. The points of
stiffness factor is 3 EIIL coritraflexure of MEU and 0. 7 MEU diagrams are bound to be the same. Now obtain traces of ("
In the case of perfectly symmetrical structures, it is possible to reduce computational efforts by o.7MEU moment diagram which lie outside the maximum moment envelope.
using some shortcut methods. Such structures are categorised into two types. This step is only theoretical for rigorous calculations. It may not be followed in practice ("
Type - I : Odd Span Symmetry or Mid span Symmetry : In symmetrical structures as provided negative reinforcement is continued beyond the point of contraflexure of elastic moment
shown in Fig. 3.5.6a, the joint rotations on each side of the axis of symmetry are equal but opposite envelope. (
in direction. In such cases the rotational stiffness factor of a member AB, which is common t.o each (4) Note down the percentage of redistribution allowed at each critical section, if negative,
half of the structure (i.e. lying on the axis of symmetry) is taken equal to 2EIAB I LAB and dis!{ibution
need only to be carried out for half portion and there will be no carryover moments across the axis
il,.
~·
(i.e. reduction in elastic moment), and set the limiting values of depth of neutral axis at these
sections to satisfy the condition under clause 2(d) of the code given by Eq. 3.4.2.
c
of symmetry. The procedure of limit analysis of R. C. structure according to above steps is illustrated in
(~
Type - II Even Span Symmetry or Support Symmetry : For symmetrical struc-tures with the following examples.
3.6.2 Illustrative Examples
p1 i p1
This section illustrates the following types of examples on limit analysis of statically
{
"
~~ ~ici~ indeterminate R.C. beams according to I. S. Code provisions allowing redistribution of moments.
c
~
A f 8 f C

I
12
2
L1
l1 . .. ~~
11 12 12 11
~:
(1) (a) A beam fixed at both ends. Ex. 3.6.1(a)
(b) A beam fixed at one end only.
l

lT~
B p Ex. 3.6.l(b)
t;~~=+->J6
ei e·8 (2) A continuous beam of 2 equal spans-UDL. Ex. 3.6.2
H I' • I ('
(3) A continuous beam of 3 s,pans-UDL. Ex. 3.6.3
L j-L
(4) A continuous beam of 4 equal spans-UDL. .Ex. 3.6.4
l Ex. 3.6.1. Determine the design moments at support and in the mid span region, before
{

(a) Odd span symmetry tlA = Oa

(b) Support symmetry ()B = 0 and OA =He
and after redistribution of moments of 30%, for a beam AB of span L, carrying a uniformly
distributed load, when
r:
Fig.3.5.6 (a) it is fixed at both ends A and B; (b) it is fixed at end A and simply supported at B. c
even number of spans as shown in Fig.3.5.6b joint rotations on each side of the symmetrical
support are zero. This condition is the same as the member having fixed end. Therefore, assume
full fixity at the symmetrical support and distribution will be carried out for half the frame.
II Draw the bending moment diagrams in each case, and show the points of contrafle.xures
and points of maximum bending moments.
Solution:
(

In these cases the moments on each side of the axis of symmetry will be equal but opposite in sign. I (a) Beam Fixed at Both Ends : r
i (i) Before Redistribution of Moments :
3.6 ANALYSIS PROCEDURE AND ILLUSTR<\T!VE EXAMPLES
3.6.1 Analysis Procedure
~
ll
j By elastic analysis, for ultimate loads, r
i Support Moments: MEUA = MEUB = wuL 2 I 12 = MA
The general procedure of limit analysis ofR. C. structures according to I. S. Code provisions
shall be as follows.
:~
.;
·l Mid span Moment:
c-
(I) Obtain the elzstic moment MEU diagram using elastic analysis for ultimate or factored Free mid span moment (for a simply supported beam) = wuL2 I 8 c
load for all possible ad"erse load combinations, and hence obtain the maximum ciastic moment :.Mid span moment for fixed beam MEUC = w/ 2 I 8 -wi2 I 12 = w} 2 124
diagram, i.e. the elastic moment envelop•: for i!.ftimate state. (-
\

('
 ''--"
82 Limit Analysis of R. C.Structures
.:r--- -.·
J
· Points of Contrajlexures : Chapter 3
Sect; 3.6 Analysis Procedure and Illustrative Examples 83
~

__) ByEq. 3.5.7a,

RA

L
X 1 =;-- v(
=wuL /2;
\2
or
2
L ) --;-
2MA
RA/w=L/2,

or xl=:__y(L J- 2w~2 The final bending moment envelope for design is A p 3, D

Fig 3.6.1 (a) (ii)
F zE2 and E~3 as shown in
·~ :.x1=0.211£ 2 \' 2 W X 12
u
L0 =L -2 x 1 =0.578 L and
_) Xmax= RA I w = L /2
Maximum Span Moment:
~ A2 A3 82 83
By Eq. 3.5.10, . Mspan.max= wu Lo2 18 = wu ( 0.578L) 2 18 = ~
wu£2 I 24 \ 'l
I
__,.) \ \ { 0.7MEu Cwve I
(ii) After Redistribution of Moments (30%) 01,03 I
Support Moments : A 0
J 2

dM = 0.3 MEUA = 0.3 'wuL 2 112= wuL 2 !40 = B B II Moue = MEUC + dM

1 2
~ MDUA = MDun= MEUA - dM =wuL 2 112- wuL 2 I 40 =wuL 2 I 17.14 =BB
·,,
···c;- ----Ill
J c2
or MDUA =0.7 MEUB =0.7 'wuL 2 I 12 =wu£2 I 17.14 =BB 2
~ 2 ~ L0=L·2x1

Mid span moment :

) Fig.3.6.l(a)(i) Fig.3.6.1 (a)(ii)
2
'----'
Mnuc = wuL I 8 - wu L 2 I 17.14 2
=wuL /15 =CC2 (b) Beam Fixed at A and Simply Supported at B
or Mnuc = MEUC + dM
~ 2
= wuL 124 + wuL2 I 40 =wUL 2!15 =cc2 (i) Before Redistribution of Moments :
Points of Contraflexures :
Normally, the reaction atB is worked out applying the condition of compatibility atthe propped cantilever
·_J Maximum span moment occurs at a distance = x
max
=L I 2 end B and then obtain MA. (For details see author's book on "Strength of Materials 9815).
_)
x1 = - - .
L ~(L)2 -
2 w/2
--x-!!.._=0.135L
However, the moment distribution method can be used to get the moment MA directly as under.
The support moments are calculated using moment distribution method.
... ... (Eq. 3.5.7b)
_) 2 2 w
u
17.14 Fixed end moments: MFAB = w~£ 2 I 12 = MFBA= w/2 112

) L0 = L - 2x 1 = L - O.i7L Member AB BA
= 0.73£
Maximum Span Moment:
InitialFEM -wu£ 2!12 + wuL 2!12
~
Mspan.max =W// I 8 = wu ( 0.73£) 2I 8 = w/2115 =Mmidspan. Distr. - wuL2112
_) The bending moment diagrams for both the cases are shown in Fig. 3.6.1 (a)(i), the one with c.o. - wu £ 2124
base line A1C1B1 represents the diagram before redistribution, while that shown by dotted line :t
·~ Final Moments -wu£218 0
A2C.J32 is the diagram after redistribution of moments. As mentioned earlier, for understanding the
phenomenon of redistribution of moments, ana iu, 0::;t:ining the bending moment envelope covering
Note : In the case of a continuous beam loaded by UDL and simply supported at ends the FEM will
~ 0. 7 MEU segments, the bending moment diagrams have been drawn with horizontal base iine as
be directly taken as zero at the simply suppotted end and wL2tB at the outer face of the continuous beam.
the reference Iine.as shown in Fig. 3.6.1(a) (i). In this curve- I (A D C E B ) represents elastic
.__) moment diagram for ultimate load before redistribution, 1 1 1 1 1 (See Ex. 3.6.2 case - II)

Curve- II: (AfJ2CzE:,f12) represents the bending moment diagram after redistribution, :.The final moments are: MEUA = wu£ 2 I 8, MEUB = 0
~
Curve-IH: (AfJ1C~,Bi represents the 0.7 MEucurve (CC =0 .7CC ; AA = 0.7AA = BB}- RA =w/12+wuL/8=5wuLI8 : R8 =wuL12- wll8 =3wll8
3 1 2 1
__) From Eq. 3.5.9, xmax = R8 I w = 3wuL I ( 8 x wu ) = 3 I 8L from end B.
 {
\
~""" nnatysts of R.C.Strucfures
sect. 3.6 Analysis Procedure and Illustrative Examples 85
Chapter 3 ~

Maximum span Moment: (

Point of contrajlexure from support B :

FromEq. 3.5.10, Mmax= --f-

3w L x (TXTL
I 3 ) -0- =9wi!128 2 x1 = 0.4125 L + ~(0.4125Ll =0.825 L or 0.175L from A (Eq. 3.5.7) c
The bending moment diagrams before and after redistribution of moments are shown by
Point of contrajlexure from support B:
(
curves-/ and II in Fig. 3.6.2b. Curve- III for 0.7MEU is obtained by reducing the ordinate of
curve-/ by dM equal to 30%. The bending moment envelop or design moment curve is shown in ,---..
(
3
s}J-0 == }__L=
Fig. 3.6.2c.
x2 : }__L+J(
s 075 L and x =0
4 · 1

Comments :Note that the inaximum span moment does not occur at mid span but slightly away from
Comments:
(i) When 30% redistributiqn of moment is done the mid span moment works out to : c-
the mid span towards the simply supported end. Mid span moment = wuL2!8 - (0.0875 wuL2)!2 = 0.08125 wuL 2 or wuL2!12.3 ,--.
\.
Thus, the % difference between the maximum span moment and mid span moment
Now,midspanmoment = w L !8 -(w
u
2
u
=wu[2/16:::: 8 wuL 2!128
L 2/8)12
= 100 X (0.085 - 0.08125) I 0.085
.·.Percentages difference .between maximum span moment and mid span moment is : = 4.4 % only as against 11% obtained before redistribution (
2 2 As mentioned earlier, the difference between maximum span moment and mid span moment has
== (9wuL 1128-8wuL 1!28) xiOO= lf.l%
9w uL21128
reduced with redistribution of moments.
(ii) It may be seen that the moment curve - Ill drawn for 0. 7 MEU governs in the negative moment
c
The difference goes on reducing with redistribution of moment i.e. with reduction in support
moment. This is the reason why, in practice, only mid span moment is considered instead of
region, AE shown in Fig. 3.6.2c. c
Ex. 3.6.2 : Obtain the maximum elastic moment diagram (BM envelop) for ultimate
calculating location and magnitude of maximum span moment using rigorous computations. If no
limit state before redistribution of moments, and design moment envelop after 30%
('
redistribution is done, one may safely add an allowance of say 10% to the mid-span moment to
redistribution of moments for a two span continuous beam ABC, 8 m long, freely supported
make up the difference.
(ii) After 30% Redistribution of Moments
,fli
at A and C, and continuous over the central support B, 4 m from A, The beam carries dead c
load, (inclusive of self weight) of 20kN/m and a uniformly distributed live load of 28kN/m.
dM = 0.3 MEUA = 0.3 wuL2!8 = 0.0375wuL2 Note : The maximum elastic moment diagram at ultimate state (before redistribution of moments) is c-
obtained by drawing BM curves for different loading cases and superimposing them all. The analysis may be
:.Support moment =MEUA -dM=0.7MEUA =0.7 wuL2!8 = 0.0875 wuL2 or wuL2!l1.43 § done by using moment distribution method1or by using BM coefficients given in Author's Hand Book (9716). ("
~ = wuL/2 + 0.0875 wuL = 0.5875 wuL,
~
RB = wuL/2- 0.0875 wuL = 0.4125 wuL In the following cases moment distribution method is used.

:.xmax = 0.4125 wuLiwu = 0.4125 L from end B (Eq. 3.5.9)

Solution : For ultimate load analysis the maximum and minimum design loads are required
which are, therefore, calculated first.
c
Mmax=-(0.4125 wuL)x(0.4125L/2)- 0 =0.085 wuL2 = wuL2!11.75 (Eq. 3.5.10) wmax = 1.5 (DL + LL) = 1.5 (20 + 28) = 72 kN!m , wmm . = DL = 20 kN/m (

~
The elastic bending moment diagram at design loads (i.e. ultimate loads) is obtained by drawing
A~oa~B bending moment curves for different loading cases. (
(a) The three cases that are required to be considered are shown in Fig. 3.6.3.
(
C
aseMaxzmum
.M oment
L ocatwn
. ~
~

Maximum hogging moment at B A

8
c ("'

A
'--;:-<;n: - - - - - - - B
I~
II Maximum sagging moment in AB
At
~ 8
mm

C
r
c-
~
~

J III Maximum sagging moment in BC.

c1
1
~

i!
This case is transpose of case - II.
A 8

(c)
C
c
(b) (c) Design Moment Envelop ~
Fig.3.6.2 Propped Cantilever Fig.3.6.3 c
c
·y
i
) ' 1
(.;/ T
.88 Limit Analysis of R.C.Structures Chapter 3
i
Sect. 3.6 Analysis Procedure and Illustrative Examples 89
__) support will be 100.8/cN.m only. Therefore, the support moment of ease-l/ (=92/cN.m.) is adjusted
to design moment of 100.8/cN.m. of case-/'. The maximum redistributed sagging moment in span comments : (1) It will be observed from the above exJJmple that in case of continuous beam of equal span
·~ AB becomes 98/cN.m. in both cases. This follows from the laws of equilibrium as the span AB now ~ually the ease-l' (i.e. maximum support moment after 30% redistribution of moment) only gives the
supports maximum loads equal to 72/cN and is acted upon by end moment of 100.8 kN.m. at the design moments. Even though the actual maximum span nwment in case-// is greater than that in case-/',
30% redistribution is carried out to bring it in conformity with that in case-/ only. However, case-/ does
~ continuous support B. The redistributed moment diagram is shown by curve-!/' in Fig. 3.6.6b.
not give location of the negative moment region.
Case-III The maximum sagging moment in span BC is a case which is transpose to curve-fl.
(2) Alternatively, the bending moments at supports and mid spans can be obtained directly using
_j Hence the
case-[[ get : moment diagram is mirror image of case-fl. Referring to details given for Be in
webending standard coefficients given in design handbooks (Author's Handbook (97!6) on R.C. design may be seen
for ready reference). The use of coefficients has an advantage that the span moments can be directly
~) :. Mspan. max = 7.22 kN.m. acting at 0.85 m fo11 A obtained and there is no need to calculate them using formulae as done in the case of moment distribution
and x1 =0, x2=2x 0.85 m =1.7 m from A. method. However, in using coefficient method the loads are required to be simulated corresponding to
The details are shown by curve -Ill in Fig. 3.6.6b. standard design coefficient given in the tables.
_)
Approximate Method for Practical Design.
) Since the rigorous method of finding out design moments is too much involved therefore
'--'

_j
·I approximate method is given for obtaining the results quickly. This method will give the results
erring on the safer side.
The steps are given as under :
.~ Ill (1) Calculate the maximum support moments with wmax acting on the adjacent spans.
1-.1700--1 (2) Decrease the support moment at any one end by dM and increase the span moment by
__) ~ 1480--1 dM/2. When the redistribution of moment is dMA at one end and dMBat the other end (with
I dMB may or may not be equal to dMA ) , the increase in the span. moment is
__) I ''-- ~·~ :3
I I / (dMA /2 + dMB/2 ). There is a need toconsideronlyoneloadingcasefor getting maximum
I 'I I
·~ I 1-10oo-; span moment for equal span continuous beam.
I
I
I
I
(3) When dM = 30%, both span loaded with wmax (i.e. ease-l) governs.
I
_j '--1500~ I As an illustration the same example is solved and compared with exact values.
I

l--1680-:
I I
I For ease-l (see Fig. 3.6.4)
~
(a) Elaslic Moment Envelop
I
~
I
I
2350 1650 ---1 MB = wuL2!8 = 72 x 42/8 = 144 kN.m.
Span AB: RA = 72 x4/2- 144/8 = 108 kN.
(b) Redistributed Moment Envelop
.J xmax = 108/72 =1.5m from A., Mmax =108 x 1.5 I 2 =81 kN.m.
Fig.3.6.7
~ The revised moments due to redistribution of moments are worked out as under. fA tB cf
Support moment =100.8 kN.m. w . =20 kNJm. Final moments 0 81.0 -144 81.0 0
.J mm d.M=30%@ B - - 43.2
:. RA = 20 x 4/2- 100.8/4 = 14.8 kN xmax == 14.8 I 20 == 0.74 m from A Increase in span moment = dM/2 - 21.6 21.6
_j Mspan.max== 14.8 x 0.74/2 = 5.5 k.N.m. x 1= 0, x2=2 x 0.74 = 1.48 m from A Final moment 0 102.6 -100.8 102.6 0
The diagram showing redistributed moments is shown by curve -Ill', in Fig. 3.6.6b. Exact values 0 98.0 -100.8 98.0 0
~ The ela8tic moment envelop before redistribution of moments is shown in Fig. 3.6. 7a which If will be observed that the span moments obtained by approximate method are on the higher side.
·is constructed from continuous curves in Fig. 3.6.6. The redistributed moment envelop shown in
._) Fig. 3.6.7b is obtained from chain-dotted curve in Fig. 3.6.6 and trace of0.7 MEu· Ex.3.6.3 : The span lengths of three span continuous beam ABCD, simply supported at
The percentage redistribution of moment at support = 100 x (144- 100.8)/144 == 30% ends are :'exterior spans AB and CD are 6m each; and interior span BC, 8 m. The characteristic
J The percentage redistribution of moment near mid-span ofBC = 100 x (101.64- 98)/101.64 = 3.6%. dead load (inclusive of self weight) is 32 kN!m and characteristic live load is 24 kN/m. Draw
Thus, the design support moment = 100.8 k.N.m. and design span moment = 98.0 kN.m. the bending moment envelop for the ultimate load condition, such that when redistribution of
_) moment is carried out it approximately equalizes the bending moments at various critical
~~,-hn .. .-
 r
" -- -J ............ ~"ucmres Analysis Procedure
. and Illustrative Ex4mples
. ·.
91 ~
"
Chapter 3 (
Solution: For ultimate load analysis the maximum load , and minimum load are calculated. Joint A B c D
wmax = 1.5 (DL + LL) =1.5 (32 + 24) =84 kftllm , wmm. =DL =32 kNim \ :' -:·~:
l
- Member .WJ BA BC CB CD DC
The bending
the following cases.moments at ultimate load are obtained by drawing bending moment cmves for
D.F. 0 112 112 1/2 i/2 0 (
Case Maximum moment location FEM 378 - 448 +448 -144
Loading Distr. 35 35 -}52 -152 l
c.o. -76 + 17.5
c
~0
I Maximum negative moment at B Dist. 38 38 -8.75 -8.75
A 6m B Bm C 6m
c.o. -4.4 +19
(a) Distr. 2.2 2.2 -9.5 -9.5 l
8 Maximum sagging moment inBC Final Moment 0 453.2 -453.2 +314.25 -314.25 0 r
Span moment 185.3 288.9 29.65 '
m Maximum sagging moment in
Computation of Sagging Moments . l
ABorCD SpanAB: Span BC:
RA = 84 X 612- 453.216 = 176.47 kN, R 8 = 84 x 8/2 + (453.2- 314.25)/8 =353.4kN c
xmax = 176.47/84 = 2.1 m xmax = 353.4/84 = 4.2m from B or 3.8m from C (
Since the maximum moment at Cis transpose of case-/ is not considered. Mmax= 176.47 x2.1/2 =185.3 kN.m. Mmax = 353.4 x 4.2/2 - 453.2 = 288.9 kN.m.
The fixed end moments for maximum and minimum loads are calculated :
Span AB and CD : L =6 m ·
X1 =0, X1 =4.2- "1/4.2
2 -2 x453.2/84 c
Maxinium: = 4.2- 2.62 = 1.58m from B,
(
MFBA = MFCD =wmaxL 2I 8 =84 x 62 I 8 = 378 kN.m. x2 = 2 xxmax= 2 x 2.1 = 4.2m fromA x2= 4.2 + 2.62 = 6.82 m from B,
Minimum:
MFBA =MFCD =wmin L 2!8=32x6218=144kN.m. or 1.8 m from B or 1.18m from C l
SpanBC: L =8m Span CD:
Maximum:
MFBC = MFCB = wmaxL 2I 12 = 84 x 82I 12 = 448/cN.m.
RD = 32 x 6/2-314.25/6 = 43.6 kN, xmax =43.6 I 32 =1.36 m r
Minimum: M max = 43.6 x 1.36/2 = 29.65 kN.m. x 1 = 0, x 2 = 2 xmax = 2 x 1.36 = 2.72m from D
MFBC = MFCB = wminL2112=32x82112=17lkN.m.
Case -I Maximum Negative (or Hogging) Moment at B.
The BMD is shown in Fig. 3.6.9a by curve I. c
(The loading condition is shown in Fig. 3.6.8a)
Distribution Factors :
Arsi:f.:f'm 453
6 88 c6 m
(

(.j,
Joint Member ~!

* RSF SUM ~ii

D.F. \ ,•
BA 3EI!6 A
.r
B
Be E!
112 rl,
4EI18

c
CB 4EII8
112
c-
1/2
CD El ( li
3EII6
1/2 I
• RSF =Rotational Stiffness Factor (~!J
Fig.3.6.9a
~II
r;
' >:
;J!
92 Liinit'Analysis ofR.C.~tructures Chapter 3 Sect. 3.6
Analysis Procedure and ·lllllstrative Examples 93.

·1
1 Case • II Maximum positiVe (or sagging) Moment in BC (See Fig. 3.6.8b). Case -Ill Maximum Positive Moment in AB or CD (See Fig. 3.6.9c)
,_) This.case also corresponds to odd-span symmetry. The distribution factor will be tbe.same
TJrls case corresponds to odd span symmetry (Sect. 3.5.5 Type-f). The modified stiffness
for BC is 2EI/L. The distribution factors are worked out as under and the distribution will be carried as ease-l/ and distribution will be carried out for half the frame.
~ out for half span. A B
Joint
BA BC
~ Joint Member RSF SUM D.F. Member AB
0.33
0.67
BA D.F.
3El/6 0.67
~ 0 378 -171
B 3El/4 FEM
-139 -68
BC 2£//8 0.33 Distr.
~
Joint A B l Final Moment 0 -239 239
17
'

_) Member AB BA BC 268.4
Span moment
D.F. 0.67 0.33 Computation of maximum Sagging Moments :
J FEM 0 + 144.0 -448.0 Span AB and CD : Span BC
Distr. +203.7 + 100.3 RA = 84 X 6/2- 239/6= 212.2 kN, RB = 32 X 8/2::.128 kN,
_)
Final Moment 0 +347.7 -347.7
324.3 Xmax= 212.2/84= 2.53 m from A. xmax =8/2 = 4 m.
__) Span moment 22.64
Mmax= 212.2 x 2.53/2= 268.4 kN.m. Mmax= 128 x 4/2 - 239 = 17 k.N.m
Computation of unum Sagging Moments :
x =0, X1 =4-142 -2x239/32
_) Span AB and CD Span BC
1 = 4 - 1.03 =2.97 from B
RA =32 X 6/2-347.7/6 =. 38.05 kN, RB = 8_4 .X-8J2. -::'336 IN,
x = 2 x 2.53 = 5.06m x2 =4 + 1.03 =5.03 from B.
j
Xmax = 38.05 I 32 =1.19 m xmax = 8/2 =4m 2 The BMD is shown in Fig. 3.6.9c by curve Ill.

M max= 38.05 x 1.19/2= 22.64 kN.m. Mmax = 336 x 4/2 347.7 =324.3 kN.m. 317
~ 317

_)
xl =0, X1 =4- V4 -2 x347.7/84
2
A~:i~i:i:m
I

=4-2.78 = 1.22m fromB or C 6 8 6 m

x2 =2x 1.19= 2.38m from A and D x2 = 4 + 2.78 =6.78 from B.

_j

)
The BMD is shown in Fig. 3.6.9b by curve II.
A .--
_ _-i-1.1-=r,/
.
1.,___">--"'r
A---1 j<::::471
7
1~ '.~ ~o
A~~
c 8
0
t
:..... 2.97
I
---rl 1
0.94
\ \.1u'
. /
8 8 6
.J m
- \ - 4.0 ___J '· !)5/

_)

_) Fig.3.6.9c Maximum Positive Movement in i\8 and BC

_) Redistribution of Moments :
Case -I' Maximum Negative Moment at B.
__] ·--- '236 The maximum support moment of 453.2 kN.m corresponds to ease-l. The maximum redistribution
of moment allowed is 30% of the elastic value. Reduce the moment at B to 70% (i.e. 30%
.) redistribution)
F1g.3.6.9b
 ~w• .... nnu,y;,,,,. UJ n.~.~1rucmres
Chapter 3 Sect. 3.6 Analysis Procedure and Illustrative Examples 95 C
:.SupportmomentatB after 30% redistribution = 0.7 x 453.2 =say 317 kN.m.
Increase the moment at C to the same value of 317 kN.m. Span BC: c-·
Computation of maximum sagging moment.: R8 = 32 x.8/2 = 128kN, xnMX = 4m
Span AB Span BC l
:.Mmax = 128 x 412-317 = 61kN.m.
RA = 84 x 6/2- 317/6= 199.2 k.N.m.
xmax = 199.2/84= 2.37 m from A
R8 = 84 x 8!2
xnMX = 812
= 336 kN, The BMD is shown by dotted line in Fig. 3.6.9c by curve III'.
The bending moment envelop before and after redistribution of moments is shown inFig. 3.6.9d.
c
or = 3.63m from B
=4m !f Approximate Method for Practical Design :
~ Only case- I is considered and the proced~re given at the end of Ex. 3.6.2 is followed.
l
Mmax =199.2x2.37!2=·236k.N.m. =355 klV.m.
i
MnMX = 336 x 4!2- 317
xt =0,
xt =4-"V4 2 -2x317/84
The bending moments obtained for Load Case-/ (i.e. maximum load on AB and BC and
minimum load on CD) are:
c
:~.1

x2 = 6 - 2 x 2.37 = 1.26 m from B

= 4 - 2.91 = 1.09m.from B or C A
t
B
t
c
t
D
t
Xz = 4 + 2.91 = 6.91 from B. 6m 8m 6m
/
Span CD: 0 185 -453 289 -314 30 0
i
MEU
R0 = 32 x6/2-317/6 =43.2kN, XnMX=43.2/32=1.35m dM = 0.3 MEUB 68 +136 68
MnMX = 43.2 xl.35/2 = 29.2 kNm Mvu=Mw+ dM 253 -317 35.7
The bending moment diagram is shown in Fig.3.6.9a by dotted line in curve/'
Case- II' Free Mid span Moment :
Maxim~m Sagging Moment in BC : For span AB and CD: (
The support moments atB and Care 317 kN.m. Maximum BM = 84 x 62 I 8 =378kN.m., Minimum BM = 32 x 62 18 = 144 kN.m.
.·.By equilibrium span moment in BC will the same as in ease-l' for span BC : For Span BC:
Maximum sagging moment = 355kN.m. Maximum BM = 84 x 82 !8 =672kN.m., Minimum BM = 32 x 82 I 8 = 256 kN.m:·.
And the span moment for AB or CD will be the same as for span CD of case-/' = 29.2 k.N.m. For span AB and CD :
The bending moment diagram is shown by dotted line in Fig. 3.6.9b by curve II'~ Net minimum mid span moment = 144 - 317/2 =- 15 kN.m.
Case- III' For Span BC:
Maximum Sagging moment in AB or CD Net minimum mid span moment = 256-317 =- 61 kN.m.
Span AB and CD : The comparison of results obtained after 30% redistribution of moments by exact method
Span moment ofAB =Span moment ofAB of.case-1' = 236 kN.m. and approximate method is shown below.
453
A 6m B 8m C 6m D
348 t t t

Exact Method. Max. 236 -317 355 -317 236

I
Min. 29 - -61 29

Approx. Method. Max. 253 -317 357 -317 253

i
~
~
Min. -15 - -61 -15
fj
~ It can be seen that approximate method gives fairly accurate results on the higher side.
~
~
Ex. 3.6.4 :A continuous beam ABCDE of four equal spans, each 6m, is to be designed
~
~

~
to carry a dead load of 40 kN!m and a Live load of 32kN!m. Obtain the design moment
Before r¢isl~
After redistribution after 30% redistribution, by exact method and also by l.S. Code Coefficients and
Flg.3;6.9d compare the results.
(
~~

Analysis Procedure and Illustrative-Examples 97

'_j ?fJ Limit Analysis· of R.C.Sttuctures Chapter 3 sect. 3.6 ··
{. ·~:.\r< ..
_] SOlu$)Ji: ·· .(B) Design Mome.n~ after Redistribution of Moments :
For d¢tennination Qf maximum elastic moments, the bending moments will be required for The maximum negative moment is reduced by 30% at Band D (i.e. 0.7 x436 = 305 kN.m)
_) the following loading cases, shown in Fig. 3.6.10. . forco.se-1 and case-111 and atC (i.e. 0.7 x 365 = 256kN.m) for case 11 and increasing the support
*Loadin for
~axu!um
moments at B and D to 305 kN.m. in case IV and case V we get :
_) (i) B.M. at B tE J-
Design Moments After-Redistribution
__]

__)

J
(ii) Maximum B.M. at C

(iii) Maximum B.M. at D

-
~-
A

40 kN/m

A
108kNim_.
·

·
8

8
, C

C
D

D.
\
. fe

E
I
.II
Ill
IV
A
f, F
345 ..:305
79 -242
53 -137
B

345 ...:305
f G
C

240 -190
f

239 -256
17.4 -190
-61 -190
H
D
t
17.4 -137
239 -242 79
I
53

240 -305 345

240 -305 60
E
t

(iv) Maximum span moments v 60 -305 240 -190 ' -67 -305 345
J in ABandCD A 8 C D_' . E
. \'
345 -305 240/-67 - 256 240/-67 305 345
J . •Moments
(v) Maximum span moments in kN.m.
oin BC and DE A 8 · c o : 1:.
~) . Fig.3.6.10 .. . (C) Design moments as per I.S. Code Coefficients :
. = DL = 40 = 40kN/m .
wmax = 1.5 ( DL + LL) = 1.5 ( 40 + 32) = 108 kN/m , wmm Dead load ~ 40 kN/m , Live load =32 kN/m
~ Bending moments at different sections as per IS coefficients are ~iven as under :
By symmetry of ioading, spans and support conditions, the loading case (iii) is transpose ·or· A
t F
B
f G
C
t
J loading case (i). While loading case (v) is transpose of loading ease (iv). Therefore, only 3 cases
need be considered. · ·
,j The bending moments at supports are obtained by using moment distribution method and the 1!12 -1/10 1/16 -1/12
BM coef. for DL ad
span moments and points of contraflexure are obtained by equations given in Sect. 3.5.4. The 1/10 -1/9 .1/12 :...1f9
BM coef. for LL aL
J detailed intermediate steps of calculations, as worked out in Ex. 3.6.3 are left to the reader.
(A) Elastic Ultimate Moments-before Redistribution of Moments: . 353 -408 279 -372
The design moments obtained before redistribution of moments for loading cases I, ll, Ill, IV, • Design Moments in kN.m.
~
V are given as under :-
Design Moments Before Redistribution * The details are worked out as under :
J 2
2
BM at any section is given by: Mu =L.F. (adwdL + aLwLL )
-~)
Case
A B c D E
where, L.F. =loaded factor= 1. 5
t F t G t H t l t 2
BMatmiddleofouterspan(i.e. atSect.F), MuF = 1.5 ( 40 x 6ll 12 +32 x 6 /10) = 353 kN.m.
J
293 -436 181 -190 17.4 -137 53 2 2
j 79 BM atpenultimate support(i.e. at Sect. B), MuB = 1.5 (40> x 6 I 10 + 32 x 6 /9) = 408 kN.m..
II 79 ·-242 184 -365 184 -242
III 53 -137 -~'
l!."T -190 . 181 -436 293 2 2
_J IV 351 -292 -61 -190 252 -279 68 BMatmiddleofinnerspan(i.e. at Sect; G) , MuG = 1.5(40 x 6 /16 +32 x 6 /12) =279 kN.m.
IV 68 -279 252 -190 -61 -292 351
_). , Mue = 1.5 (40 x 62 /12 + 32 x 62 /9) = 372 kN.m.
.. . BM at interm~iate support (i.e. at C)
*Moments 351 ' 436 252/-61 -365 252/-61 -436 351
_) inkN.m. Comparison of Design Moments obtained by Exact Method and by Using I.S. cOde ·
Coefficients :
.J
 c
.,. (
Chapter 3
98 Limit Analysis of R.C.Strudures
(~

A iB C D E ;<';, ...

f F t G f H t---I" f CHAPTER- 4
(
Before redistribution 351 - 436 252/-61-365 252/-61 -436 351
Mter redistribution 345 - 305 240/-67-256 240/-67 -305 345 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE- FLEXURE (
As per Code 353 - 408 279 -372 279 -408 353
Table 3.6.1 Comparison of Design Moments :r4.1 INTRODUCTION c-
Location At Sect M0 nMoA Moc!M/JB In limit state design, a reinforced concrete structure is normally designed for limit state of
MDB MDA Moe MDA/MDB (8)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (!) collapse and is checked for limit state of serviceability. The collapse of structure occurs by failure l
0.93 of its member either in t1exure, shear, bond, torsion, axial compression or tension, or by
Support BandD 436 305 400 0.7 134 combination of these actions. This chapter deals with limit state of collapse in tlexure while shear, (
c 365 1.45 1.02
256 372 0.7
bond, toriion and compression are discussed in chapters 5, 6, 7 and 11 respectively. Limit state of ,
Mid span Fand I 351 345 353 0.98 1.02 1.00
1.11
servic~ability is discussed i~ chapter~- The strength of a member ~t li~it state of ~ollapse is known (
GandH 252/-61 240/-67 m 0.95 1.16 as ul~1mate strength and this term will, therefore, be used hereafter for convemence. ·
Where, MDB . moments B
=Design . etore . MDA =Destgn
., red"Istn"b ut10n, . momen ts After redistribution,
. I 4.2 THEORY OF BENDING OF R. C. MEMBERS AT LIMIT STATE OF (
MDC= Design moments as per Code
ASSUMPTION~ :
. COLLAPSE:
Discussion of Results :(1) On redistribution even though the design moments at s~pports are BASIC (
reduced by 30% of elastic ultimate moments there is practically no increase in maxzmum span
moments (See Col. 6 of Table 3.6.1), the ratio is 0.98 and 0.95 only. i
@
Extensive research carried out in the past several decades has established the ultimate strength C
theory of tlexure of reinforced concrete members (60/2). On the basis of findings;of this research,
l~
(2) Col. 7 of table 3.6.1 shows that moments obtained by I.S. Code method (MDC) are higher by the design codes make the following basic assumptions for the theory of bending of (
about 40% of redistributed moments (MDA) at supports and marginally higher at mid span. .• 1
l R. C. members at collapse :
(3) The moments obtained by maximum elastic moment ( MDB) compares well with codal design (a) A normal section plane before bending remains plane after bending right upto collapse. (
llloments as can be seen from Col. 8 of Table 3.6.1. (b) The ultimate state of collapse is said to have reached in tlexure when the maximum
(4) The loading condition of minimum DL and maximum (DL+LL), on alternate spans ~auses compressive
. strain in concrete in the outermost fibre reaches the ultimate crusting strain Ew . 1~
negative moments (with comparatively small value at mid span) over entire inner spans. ThiS goes l.S. code prescribes the maximum compressive strain in concrete equal to 0.0035 eventhough
Unnoticed if only 1.5 (DL + LL) is considered on all spans for simplicity or when moments are it varies with the grade of concrete between 0.003 to 0.005 (Sect. 2.2.4.1) c
calculated by I.S. Code method.
(c) Concrete under tension is ignored.
3.7 CONCLUDING REMARKS: Tension is assumed to be carried entirely by reinforcement. C
(1) I.S. Code method does not give fully a correct picture of the distribution of moments along the (d) The distribution of compressive stress in concrete across the section is defined by an '
(
structure, and does not cover all critical cases of loading in ultimate load analysis, because of use of idealized stress-strain curve of concrete.
single value of ultimate load. (e) Perfect bond exists between steel and concrete right upto collapse.
(2) Redistribution of moments is economical. It evens out the distribution of moments along the (f) The design stress in steel reinforcement is obtained from the strain at reinforcement level (
spans removing peak moments at supports, gives economic designs and avoids congestion °~ steel using idealized stress-strain curve for the type of reinforcement used.
at support making detailing and construction easier. But the large safety factor may not be available (g) According to I.S. code, the maximum strain in steel in tension shall not be less than : (
because the maximum moments at span awl .;;;pp0rt are likely to reach simultaneously (8~(4)· fy
(3) It may be pointed out thatEq. 3.4.2 is indirectly related to the rotation capacity and duct!l!ty_of a i 0.002+
( 1.15Es)
at collapse. c
structural member. To present excessive demand on the ductility of a structural member, about l5% ~
"
~
to 20% moment redistribution may be normally taken as reasonable limit (88/4, 87/2, 93/2) though IS The first assumption is a well known Bernoulli's hypothesis. It means that strain at any point (
~de permits up to 30% moment redistribution. This will give some additional margili uf safety· ~ese
lilllits apply where the moment redistribution leads to a reduction in bending moments at a giVen j
~
in a section is proportional to its distance xu from the neutral axis where the strain is zero.
r
section but where it le:: ds to an increase in bP,nding moment, no restriction is necessary (87/2). :~

(
 Theory of Bending of R. C. Members at Limit State of Collapse ·101
/

100 Limit State of Collapse - Flriure · Clu1Ji#t4 sect. 4.i

'~ ~- ..~~.~~.~ \~ .
'.
k =Average compressive stress in concrete (fav ) :. tav ==. k 1 x fck
Mathematically, E a xu, and the strain diagram is triangUlar as shown in Fig. 4.2.L ·· 1 Cube crushing strength of concrete ( fck) .
___)
_l~y assumption (c), concrete in tension is ignored because of its negligible tensile strength~ and· Distance of centroid of stress block from compression face
whatever is available is only in the region very near to the neutral axis and, therefore, does not = . -
'-o) k2
Depth of stress ·block ( x }
c<intribute any moment of resistance. However, the contribution. made by concrete in tension to
stiffness has been considered later in discussing the serviceability aspect.
·"
) .:. Distance of centroid of stress block from compression face= k2 . xu
,_J
The compressive stress in concrete in a ineinber cannot be measured' or obtained directly. It
is obtained from the strain using the stress-strain curve for concrete cube tested· under axial Maximum ordinate of stress block. (fmax) :. f :: k x f
J eonipression, and applying a correction factor to account for the differences in the conditions ofthe
k, = . . - 3 d
Cube crushing strength of concrete Uck)
concrete in the cube and those of concrete in the member. For the maximum stresS(fmax), I.S. As soen in this section oadi«, k =0.446. The values of oth<r """'·block p,...mcte" shall
J Code adopts a correction factor of 0.67 and a partial safety factor of l.S giving design strength for 3
the limit state of collapse as : now be obtain~d.
J The idealized design stress-strain curve for concrete as prescribed by l.S. code is
rectangulru-·par.lbolic " shown in Fig. 2.2.5. Acro<dingly, the sh3pe ofthe slre»-block is shown
0.67 fck =0.446 fck"" 0.45fck (For details see Sect. 2.2.4.2)

foe~
,) fmax= 1.5 in Fig. 4.22.lt oonsists of a pambola eme<ging from the neotrat .xiS with its apex at a point having
The distribution of compressive stress across the depth ( xu ) of eoncrete in compression sttaio of 0.002, and a <Cctangle in the ,g;oo beyond that point upto comp<C'sion whc"
' . .is 0• tl
_)
maximum strain in 0.0035. ( 002 ) 4x ·
~.
often referred to as stress-block. Since the strain diagram is linear overtl}is depth xu, the shape of
the stress-block is the same as the idealized stress-strain curve of concrete with strain taken'along . of parabolic part of the stress block. ::::
Thus, the depth 0.0035 x!I ::: - 7.
__) 3x u
__)
the vertical axis (parallel to the depth of section) and stress taken along the horizontal axis.
(perpen(}icular to the depth ) vide assumption ( d ). The shape of stress-block (55ii,17!4) is.
· characterized by its maximum ordinate, area and position of its centroid which are defined by
:. The .depth of rectangular part = x11 - ....-'!-
7
4X
=- 7
I ·coefficients k , k , and k known as stress-block parameters given below (Fig. 4.2.1);
J 1 2 3 --1
0.446/ck
B.--
!---b--1 ~
kfck T
T
__J ~
-t .:?_xu
]_ D

T 1---· A
t
_)

J d-1---A--~­
N..
~l __ ~xu
7
j_
l

lI••••
I
(d -x,)
_)

j
. Ast

!--&s-1
l Tu=fsAst
Beam Section
Strain Diagram
Stress Diagram

. (a)
Stress Diagram
Fig. ~.2.2 Stress Block across a Beam Section
_) Strain Diagram

Fig. 4.2.1 Stress Block Parameters · Having known the ,hape and ma<imum 01dinato_ of the """ block, the valu<' of k, .,d k,
_)
Maximum ordinate of stress-block=· k3 fck =!max, · are
AJ<>obtained
of"""as block
follows :
(OABCDO) =A = Ar<>
. of rectangular
3 ABCD
. + AJoa of pambola
4 OAD
2
.J Area of stress-block = k1 fck x u =fav . xu 11
:. A= ( 0.446 f ck) X -7Xtl + ( 0.446 fck X -7 X ) X-3
Distance of centroid of stress-block from compression face .= k2 . xu
_) = 0.361 X f .X ""0.36 f .X ••• ••• (4.2.1)
where; xu =depth of neutral axis below the compression face, ck 11 ck 11

_j
=depth of concrete in compression, or depth of stress block,
 r-- ... """u.tc;
H ..

. Chapter 4' '"sed. ·4.3 Modes of Failure 103 c-

:. Average stress··= f = 0.361 xfck ;. k =fav
- =0.361 ""0.36 ;t;3 . MODES OF FAILURE l
av 1 f

taking its moment of areas about compression. . face.

ck
Similarly the distance of centroid of stress-block from compression face is obtained by
.
~
~·
The maximum strain criteria has been accepted as failure criteria for a reinforced concrete·
member under flexure, as it agrees well with the test results. Therefore, a reinforced concrete
member is considered to have failed when the strain in concrete (& ) in the extreme compression
l

r'•
Jxu\ (I 3x) r2 in
.' . c
4xu\JG 3 4x]
\0446[,, x7) \2x---:- +[3 ~-446!,. 77 EdsX7]
fr
X
fibre reaches its ultimate value &cu ( = 0.0035 ). Wh.en this maximum strain in concrete is reached
the actual strain in steel can be equal to its failure strain (balanced section) or more than the failure ("
X·= strain (under-reinfored section) or less than the failure strain (over-reinforced section) depending

= 0.416x
0.361~k xu 00 the relative proportion of steel and concrete. Thus, based on the percentage of steel in the c-
u section three failure modes occur viz. balanced failure, under-reinforced failure and over
reinforced failure and the corresponding section are called balanced, under reinforced and (
""0.42.x over - reinforced section.
u

I r
= 0.416 =0.42!,
X
k2=- 4.3.1 Balanced Section or Critical Section
X
u When the ratio of steel to concrete In a section is such that the str~in in steel and strain in ('
•.•... (4.2.2) concrete reach their maximum values simultaneously the section is referred to as a balanced or
The three parameters fully define the stress-block, in the sense that they enable us to get total
compression on concrete, and moment contributed by concrete compression. critical section and the percentage of steel in this section is known as c~itical steel percentage. 1

Comments : B.S. :8110 (85!4), AC!: 318 (95!1) and CEB - F!P (90!7) model code specify both
·Thus, in balanced section
.
cs = &sy and
·
&
c
=
& .(Fig.4.3.la).
cu
'
parabolic and rectangular stress block. But IS:456 (00!1) continues to adopt only rectangular parabolic c
stress block. Rectangular stress block simplifies design and analysis without compromising any
advantage of parabolic stress block. It is not clear why IS:456 has not specified rectangular stress blo_rjc -.1 Li;u 1- c
ll~~~-
-IL"ctl- --.jecut...__
Remaining assumptions (e) and (f) give information about the contribution of the steel in
tension. r-
1T ---n; r-
\
Assumption (e) regarding perfect bond between concrete and steel implies that the strain in
steel cs is equal to the strain cc in surrounding concrete.
Balanced
T !Actual N.A.
1!
"' ::J
E'<

Bai.N.A
~ ~
±~ _,---
\
N.A. d
~------

I Bal. N.A. AciilaiN.A.-- _

By assumption ( f), the stress in steel is obtained from this strain cs using idealized
stress-strain curve representative of the grade of steel used for reinforcement ( Fig.2.6.J for mild
steel and Fig.2.6.3 for high grade steel ).
Ast.max
I• • • •
· --l&sy
t-_
1-
li • ••
Ast <Ast.max

. -.-11- l:sy 1-
(st >Ast.max
•• • •• 1 -.es
. I
I
I

t
c
r·
\
&s--1 -.jL"sy
In addition to above six assumptions, I.S. Code prescribes an additional condition (g) that
the strain cs in steel in tension shall not be less than 0.002 +0.87fy I Es at the limit state of flexural
collapse. This condition ensures that the flexural failure must be initiated by yielding of steel in
tension and the strain in steel, therefore, reaches the yield value. lI
i)
( a ) Balanced (b) Under reinforced ( c ) Over-reinforced

Fig. 4.3.1 Balanced under-reinforced and over reinforced section

('

c
As the HYSD bars (Fe 415, Fe 500) do not have a well defined yield point, a value of
csy = 0.002 + 0.87 fy I Es has been prescribed, wherein 0.87 fy I Es represents the maximum ~ 4.3.2 Under-reinforced Section c
s~el.
i
A section having steel percentage less than the critical percentage is known as
<la.tio strnio, aod 0.002 tho 'dditio"'J mioimom ioel"tlc "rnio to """" '"'""'"' yioldlog of under-reinforced section. c
""' tho"by '"'"" """'"'""'of l"g' po<reptiblo dofmmatio, of tho mombo<, glviog p<io< w'miog Since steel is insufficient to balance compression in concrete, the tensile strain in steel
of impending failure before concrete reaches its ultimate strain and starts crushing. The value of
minim om ioola&btrnlo '' takoo <q"'lto 0.002 bocaoso it is this voloo that ffi reqoi"d fo, yieldiog
reaches yield value while the maximum compressive strain in concrete is less than its ultimate r
crushing value. The strain diagram at this initial stage is shown by Fig. 4.3.1 (b). The ultimate (
iri ''"" of HYSD b'" acomdlog to dofio!tioo of 0.2% proof "'"s. (Soo F;g. 2. 6.2). By applyiog moment capacity of the section has not reached at this stage because maximum strain in concrete ·
it to all steels, the same is ensured in the case of mild steel also.
r
c
,...'
104 Limit State of Collapse- FleXure Chapter 4 \'l
PART-A
j' has: not reached its ultimate crushing value. The section, therefore, continues to take additional

~
moment till Ec equals Ecu i.e., till concrete starts crushing. This is the final stage. Since steel has SINGLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR BEAMS
already started yielding at initial stage, it is not in a position to offer any additional force greater than
TII = ( 0.87fy . AS1} Therefore, by equilibrium the total compression Cll also remains unchanged '
'_) . .
However, since strain increases from initial stage; the stress in concrete increases, and maximum 4.4 PROPERTIES OF A SINGLY REINFORCED REcTANGULAR SECI10~
~ stress fmax =( 0.446fck ) penetrates inside across the section over a greater region, while Cu Consider a rectangular section of a reinforced roncrete member of width b and total depth D

\
remains constant. Consequently, there is an upward shift in the position of a neutral axis and also reinforced with total area ofreinforcement A51 only on the tension side (Fig. 4:4J(a)), Such a
.J upward shift in position of total compression C causing slight increase in lever arm z , and hence section is often called a singly reinforced section. The depth 'd' of centroid of the tension
~ection.
', . II II

marginal increase in the resisting mo'me.ntM11• (the moment atthe initial stage of commencement reioforcement A st below the compression face is called as .effective depth ofthe The bars
.) are provided with an effective depth of d '. The strain diagram showing linear variatiun of-strain
of yielding of steel
.
may be called My. The ratio Mu I My is a property of the section like the shape

1M
_) factor in plastic design . of steel structures. In concrete, since increase in M ll is marginal, this ratio across the depth is shown in Fig. 4.4.l(b). ·

'--'

_)
)
is ta~en equal to 1). The section undergoes large rotational deformations from the initial stage of
yielding of steel to the final stage of crushing of concrete, giving sufficie~t warning of
impending failure. Since this failure is initiated by yielding of steei in tension, it is known as .· . -~ -~
_L -- -~~
primary tension failure. d-1--N.A. ~-

__) Thus, in under reinforced section f.·' =0.87 fy' =fydbut 85 > Esy· . Zu ={d· k2 xJ
(d-xJ

_)

_j
4.3.3 Over-reinfo~~ed Section
A section having percentage of tension steel greater than the critical percentage is
H. ••• Ast

(a)
\-Es-\
lL t..,.ru='sAst

(c) Stress Oiagram

known as over-reinforced section. . (b) Strain Diagram
')

---' Since the amount of steel is more than that in balanced section, the neutral axis moves below
the balanced neutral axis to satisfy the equilibrium condition (Fig.4.3.1 c) resulting in the concrete
_j reacli1ng·its ultimate strain while the strain in steel remains less than its yield value.
Fig~ 4.4.1(4)
Siggly reinfon:ed Rectangular Section : General Flexure theory
The maximum strain in concrete !lt extreme fibre· in compression is Ecu at collapse. The

As the compressive strain in concrete reaches its ulimate value first, sudden failure of depth of neutral axis xu and the strain 8 in.steel are obtained from the strain diagram as follows :
j 5
section occurs by crushing of concrete in compression, without giving any warning by way oflargc xu . Ecu . .. .... (4.4.la)
J deformation and cracks as it does in case of an under-section reinforced section.
Since this failure is initiated by compression in concrete, it is known as primary compression
---=--
d -x
!I
Es

J failure. In an over-reinforced section E.< S

Esy , fS < fyd but EC = E.CU, . X
u
8 cu
...... (4.4.lb)
_)
This type of failure is usually avoided in ultimate strength design (I.'S. Code totally forbids this :.--;;=£cu + £s
type of section).
d -x
_) Design codes, therefore, restrict the percentage of tension steel in R.C. beams to that of a and £s =____!. 8 cu ...... (4.4.2)
balanced section, thus disallowing over-reinforced section. Consequently, the depth of neutral X
u
_) axis is also restricted to that of a balanced section, and hence the depth of critical neutral
The stress diagram is shown in Fig. 4.4.1 (c). Having known the section, the strain diagram,
axis has been called as maximum depth of neutral axis xu.max
.) the stress diagram with its characteristic parameters, and the stress-strain curve for steel, the
internal forces are obtained as given -below.
_)
 r-·
\
Chapter 4 ~,
seCt· 4.4 XII fs Asl . fs
Position of Neutral Axis : -"'-x-=--'-·Pr c
The position of the neutral axis is obtained considering equilibrium of internal forces. Dividing both sides of Eq. 4.4.5 by d we get , d kJck bd kzfck
Total compression Cu =Average compressive stress in concrete x area of concrete (
......(4.4.10)
= Area of stress block x b, , klfck XII
r·
:. Cu =fav (bx) =k1 fk.bx ...... (4.4.3) p=-·- \
, u c u •• t fs d
Similarly, total tension Tu =fs .A s1 ...... (4.4.4)
Where fs is the stress in steel corresponding to strain & s in steel, which is obtained from the Balanced Sections ~ sy , s y , c
1 1
c-
for balanced section, & ::::: & f "'f d & ::::: &c x =x M =M
u , 11 u max , ur 11r.max . max
and P "' P
stress-strain curve for the type of steel used. ('
By equilibrium of forces, when no external force parallel to the axis of the member is acting, Substituting x for x ,x is obtained from Eq. 4.4.1,
u max u lt max
Total Compression = Total Tension M ;, obtain«! from Eq. 4.4.7 and Eq. 4. 4.8 , P, is obt>ined !mm Eq. 4.4.1 0 (
:. Cu = Tu :. k1 fk . bx = fA ur.maX . max
, c u s st
(
fs· Ast
.".X~= kf . b
...... (4.4.5)
Under-reinforced Section :
' under-reintorced section, &5 > &sy' but f s = f yd and &c
For Ecu ,
x11 < xu max , Mur < M11r.max and Pt < P'.max
;~. ('
1 ck
is not known •nd fq. {4. 4.1) am not, therefore be osed fm detennining x,,. But
Lever Arm:
The lever arm ( zu ) between Cu and Tu is given by zu = ( d- k2 xll ) ...... (4.4.6)
Thus, E,
c
since f, is known to be equal tn f,.;• x, e.n be obtained [rom fq. 4.4.5. ...... (4.4:Sa)
Moment of Resistance : (
The moment of resistance is obtained by taking moment of total compression ahout the fydAsl
resultant tension and vice versa. Thus, the ultimate moment of resistance is the moment of a couple xu=-
kl fck .b ...... (4M~a) (
formed by · Cuand Tu acting at a lever distance zu.
M·::::f A(d-kx) ('
...... (4.4.7) ur yll . si 2 11
· · Mt., =Cu. 2u= ki fck .bxu ( d- k2xu ) and
=Tu. zu =fs .Ast ( d- k2' xu )
~
or :. Mur ...... (4.4.8)
Over-Reinforced Section ~ 1
For Over-Reinforced
• . Section x " > x """ and P1 > P1."" , &' < & , , , f ' < f'" and &' = &" tr-
FromEq. (4.4.1) and Eq. (4.4.5!, it w_ill be evident that the depth of neutral axis x 11 depends
on the strain &s and hence on the stress fs in steel, neither of which can be known in advance unless Therefore botO & and fare not knovin. The pro«'' of t<i•l and error oeeds to be resorted
• '
to fm calcub\ing x wbon moment of resistance;, required to be worked out [o< a given ""'ion
r
'
the external moment M 11 acting on the section is known.
•rnl given area of steel (s" Ex. 4.4.1 c). Howevec, when il>C area of steel (•nd sl<e5' f,) arc to be
momen~ x, can he obtain«! !tom tbe ,;olutk>n <Jf
Determination ofxu , as a property of section in general is a process of trial and error in which \
"
, x u is assumed and Cu is found out from Eq. 4.4.3. Tll is found out by substituting in Eq. 4.4.4 the ealculated for given section to resist • given •
value of fs corresponding to &s obtained from Eq. qu•dmtie fq. 4.4.7 and the required f and Ast ean be wmked out !rom Eq. 4.4.2 and 4.4.5 (
- 4.4.2. The value of xll giving Cll = Tll is the s
correct solution. Having known xu , Mur can be obtained from either Eq. (4.4. 7) or Eq. (4.4.8). ~t (s" Ex.
It is4.4.ld).
empbasiz<d here •gain tbat ovei-ttinfmced sections are not •llowed in design because of (
The trial and error procedure could be partly avoided if the properties of a balanced section 91
~ b<ittle fmctu<e of sections teoding to sudden f•ilure of member. [.S. code also fori>ids .
are known, so that the given Ast could be compared with that of a balanced section and inferences ~~
ove<-<oinfmced sections by impOSing tbe oondition t\llit &,< &"(See assumption (g) in Sect. 4.2). C
. of fs or xll .
could be drawn regarding the value
In tbe problems that follow (Ex. 4.4.1 {c) and {d), tbe ove<-reinfurced seetion bos been conside<«l \
Steel factor ( p1 ) :
::: only to illustrate the solution from academic point of view.
Steel factor is the ratio of area of tension steel (A ) to area of cross section (bd) Ex. 4.4.1 ' A "'"ngul<' b<am. h.,mg 200mm width and 40\lmm efi"tive depth, is C
' A Sl •
. Sf
Expressmg, :. P1 = - ...... (4.4.9) "info"cd with steel A on te"'i"" side only. Taking st<esS block pammetas r
,11 \
bd \
"~"
__ ~ L'mu .ltate of Collapse ~ F/4w:e
•i

~) 1 Chap.tc!r 4
k " of0.36,
steel
2
0.42 and E.,.
gradekFe" 415, =0.0035 obtaU. fot concrete of gtade M2JJ and Properties of Singly Reinforced Rectangular Section 109
_J
(a) X u max , Mur.max and Ast. max of a balanced section, 286-276
_j' (b) Mur for Ast. = 600 mm2 · From Table 2.6.1, f = 351.8 + x ( 360.9-351.8 )= 352.67 Nlm. m2
(cJ .. · s . 380~276
(c) Mur for and Ast. = 1000 mm2
) J.'FromEq.4.4.4, T =352.67x1000x10- 3 =352.67kN., ::T > C (=316.8kN.m)
'--./
(d) f S alld ASt when external moment MU = 90 kN.m. u u u
Solution: , :. x11 shall be increased so that C11 will increase and T will reduce. By similar trials and
~
11
,, prOceeding on the same lines. ·
(a) For a balanced section, C "' C and f '==! = 0.87 f, x = x For xu=238 mm, CU =342kN, C·S =0.00238,/.s =342 ·N/mm2 and TU =342.1 kN
_) s f sy/ E for.s Fe 415 y1 y u u max ·
Now, C = 0.002
sy
+ 0.87 y s . •·• Cu =Tu andx
. u=238mm

__) From Eq. 4.4.7,

= 0.002 + 0.87 X 415 I ( 2 X 105 ) = 0.0038
Substituting X11 = X11 max in Eq. 4.4.1, M1 .· = 0.36 X 20 X 200 X 238 X ( 400- 0.42 X 238 ) .·10"6 = 102.83 kN.m > Mur.max ( = 88.32 kN.m)
,) X ccu
'---'
u max
0.0035 =
(d) M" 90 kN.m.
From Eq. 4.4.7, Mur = 0.36 X 20 X 200 X 11 (400- 0.42 xu)
~ -:::
d £--;-:::
cu + sy 0.0035 +- - ::: 0.48 ,
0.0038 X11 max:: 0.48d ":
· 0.48 X 400 :: 192 mm
but Mur =Mu = 90 x 10 6N.mm
Substituting Ast. =A st. max in Eq. 4.4.5a,
_) :.90x10 6 =0.36x20x200xu (400-0.42xu ), :.xll 2 -952xll +148809=0
kl /;;k_.bx u.max
0.36 X 20 X 200 X 192 From which, x u = 197mm>xu.ma.x ( = 192mm).
__) Ast. max : : : - - : : : =766mm 2 400-197
f"yd 0.87 X415 :. The section is over-reinforced, From Eq. 4.4.2, C5 = X 0.0035 ::: 0.00361
197
Substituting Mur :::: Mur.max in Eq. 4.4.8a,
~ ·
From Table 2.6.1, fs = 359.2Nimm2; '
,_j From Eq. 4.4.5, Ast = k1 fk. bx If= 0.36 x 20 x 200 x 197 I 359.2 = 790 mm 2
Mur.max .
:::0.87 .X 415 X 766 ( 400-0.42 X 192).. X 10- 6 ::88.32 kN.m. ,' c · u s
~)
.___/
(b) An: :: 600 ,;,m2, · 4;5 PROPERTIES OF A SINGLY REINFORCED RECTA..~GULAR SECTION
2 ACCORDING TO I.S. CODE
Since given A st.. <A st. max ( = 766. mm ) the section is under-reinforced.
_) 0.87 X 415 X 600
From Eq. 4.4.5 (a), X,::: = 150 mm The characteristic properties of a reinforced concrete section are as follows :
_) 0.36 X 20 X 200 xu = Depth of neutral axis below the compression face or depth of concrete under compression
From Eq. 4.4.8 Ia)' M"' " 0.8], 415 X 600 ( 400 - 0.42 X 150) w- 6 = 73.00 kN.... representing useful concrete. It is also the depth of stress-block .
j = 1000 mm2.
·(c) A Sf M ur =Ultimate flexural moment of resistance of the section. By equilibrium, it is also equal to
the external design moment Mu.
_) 1000 > 766 mm 2) the section is over-reinforced.
,Since given Ast >A st. max · (i.e.
Ast = Area of tension steel representing useful tension reinforcement.
The value of xII·will, therefore, be determined by trial and error.
_) The other geometric quantities are: b =width of section., J = ciicclivc Jcvlit uf:!ic ~;~c!lon.
. Fot ovu-re;nfO>"Ced -on, x" > x" =· Thetefore, a val"e of x. greatenhan x.... •hall
be tried depending upon the extent by which A is greater thanA . The characteristic quantities described above are usually expressed in a non-dimensional
_) · Try xu = 220 mm form, as follows, for their convenient use in design.
st st. nrux
Expressing, xu = kItd ...... (~.5.1)
_) From Eq. 4.4.3, C = 0.36 X 20 X 200 X 220 X 10 ·J ::316.8 kN.
. II . . :. kU =XII I d ...... (4.5.2)
From Eq. 4.4.2, Cs = 0.0035 x ( 400 - 220) I 220 = 0.00286 ·
,_j Expressing M.. in general which is equal toMM as :
Mu = iiiur = Ru .bd2 ...... (4.5.3)
~
 -., - ........_Yo.JL - .~.·,e.xure
Properties of Singly Reinforced Rectangular Section 111 ('

:. Ru =Mu I bd2 0.7 r-

\
Expressing,
Ast = P1 .bd 0.6
j}i'-::
('
:. PI =AS( I bd ...... (4.5.\i) t 0.5

Here, ku is termed as!fleutral axis factor, Ru is termed as moment. of

. res.istance factor ~ 0.4 r
~ l<'lbed 'I""'' facto' onhe reinfonoemenUrulox, and ~ "'ually '"'"""d
!

;,,: ,-..
0.3 r
in terms of percentage of reinforcement i.e., 100 p • \.

1
The design quantities and the design parameters defining properties of sections are derived below: 0.2 '<!"
4.5.1 Under-Reinforced Section (')
lO
('
0.1 0
The section with its geometric dimensions, strain diagram and stress diagrarn are shown in I
Fig. 4.5.1. For an under-reinforced section, l
J, = ~-d = 0.87 ~- and cs shall be taken ~ 0.002 + ( 0.87 ~- I cs) and k
0 .2 .4 .6 .7574.95871.2 1.4 1.61.76472.0 2.2
::: 0.36 (
1 Pt%--+-
~=cu= 0.0035
1-- b --1 1--f

rr~r
3r_,Bt0.446fck~T
('

I
Fig. 4.5.2 Variation of k" with P, % -Singly Reinforced Section
]xu 0.42 xu
if
~
Cu=0.36fckbxu (b) Ultimate Moment of Resistance ( M ur ) and Ultimate Moment of Resistance ('
factor ( R 11

fiLG'"
) :
(
(d· 0.42xu)
As mentioned earlier, the moment of resistance of the section is obtained by taking
moment of total compression about C. G. of steel and vice-versa. (
The moment of resistance is a couple formed by equal and opposite internal forces Cu and Tu
1 f+Tl
(£5 ::.0.002 +0.87 1 1 E )
Tu = 0.87 '0st acting at lever arm distance zll . c-
1 5
:. Mur = Cu .zu or M ur = T u .zu where, zu = lever arm = ( d - 0.42 xu ) r'
Strain Diagram. Stress Diagram \
Fig. 4.5.1 Properties of Under- reinforced Section. (i) M from Tension in Steel :
(a) Depth of Neutral Axis ( x ) and Neutral Axis factor ( k ) : ur Mur = Tu .zu or Mu =Mur=0.87 fA
y st
(d -0.42xu ) ...... (4.5.3a) (""
u u
Considering equilibrium of internal forces, when no external axial load is acting, Mur can be expressed in terms of Ast only, by substituting the value of x u from Eq. 4.5.1 a in r-
\
Total Compression C =Total tension T the above equation.
ll ll

From Eq. 4.4.3, eli = Area of stress block X b =0.36 ~k • bxli :. M

. ·" fA
= 0.87 ~d -0.42 x0.87 fy Ast~ f . - A5-1
:. M = 0.87 fA d ( - _Y ~* ( 4.5.3b) C
and T
u
=fdy x Ast =0.87 f.Y . Ast. ur y st 0.36 fck .b ur y st fck bd ('

:. 0.36~k. b\ = 0.87 ~· A 0.87 fy A

Sl
InordertoexpressMur intheformR
/ u
bd 2 ,wesubstituteA st =pt .bd intheaboveequation, (\
51 .. X=
/ li ...... (4.5.1a)

The neutral axis factor k u =~

X
. _ 0.87 ~· Aw
0.36 ~k. b
0.87 fy
. _
.. M -0.87fp
ur y t
( fy)
--.p
f I
bd 2 =Rbd 2, ... R-0.87fp
ll
_
ll y I
fy)
( -~p
f I
(4.5.3c) \1
.. k - d d
d
li 0.36 -~k • bd
=-.pt
0.36~k
...... (4.5.2a)
Rll· is known as moment of resistance factor and has a unit of N I mm 2• C'
Eq. 4.5.2a shows that variation of k with p is linear.
II I

Fig. 4.5.2 shows variation of P1 % with k for different values off lor concrete grade M20. * Though the value of 0.42 x 0.87 I 0.36 works out to 1.015 but the exact value is
c
li y 0.4161 ( 1.15 x 0.361) = 1.002 which is taken equal to 1.
r
c
1-'1 ~- ""'"' "'"'' of Coliap,e - Fknue Chapter ' ,

. . .
f )
~,
Eq_ 4.5.3a shows that the <elation between M and A is quad.,tic in A ; and ouuuaw• Properties of Singly Reinforced Rectangular Section 113
_) Eq. 4.5.3c also gives a quadratic relation between R and p . The variation of R with p "

shown in Fig. 4.5.3 for different values

, off ·for concrete
u. M20I and M25. · u . I
(c) Area of Steel (A) and Steel factor ( P1 ) :
$ . • .
y In design problems, usuatfy the reinforcement is required:to be determined for resisting a
3.75.
3.50
!:>
;:,><:i
::.>
'<'""' 1:1 1 uiven Mu . The expressions for Ast and pI have, therefore, been obtained in terms of xu and ku
tr'
:: &> '!,'? / respectively by rearranging Eq. 4.5.1 a and Eq. 4.5.2a and in terms of A from solution of
,~ III '<"'/~ I
325 51
~'!,., /<t' quadratic Eq. 4.5.3b. These are as follows:
• If I~ /~0
3.00 !<::> t,. /ftl 0.36 fck. bx,
1~1/«"'/ /-~ 0.36 fk.
c
ku
2.75
I"'
I~'<. I""
I{P
!:>
I /
/ A
st
=-- or pi= ......(4.5.6b)

t
__/ "'E ~I /
/ 0.87 fy 0.87 fy
~
"
2.50

2.25
/"/ It I// 1!:
1:: 0.5 fck 4.6 M11 ]
_, cr: I //.
0
o; Asl == - 1- 1 - - - bd ... (4.5.6a)
2.00

1.75
/ //"'// "'"'
<'<i
I fy fk
c bd
2

I I
-~· 1-'\J~]'
/"'ll ;;:
1.50

1.25 /)
~
ll
~
~
M
~

I
I I pi=
0.5fckt
1- --r:---
fck
... (4.5.6c)

1.00 J ff I I I
0.75 ~ "'~ I
~ I I
"' o;·
"'
0.50 ~ .2 .4 .6 .7~7 )', 11? (
1.77
_jl 4.5.2 Balanced Section
~"
.947 2.206 The strain distribution and stress distribution diagrams are shown in Fig. 4.5.4. As per
Pt%- assumptions given in Sect. 4.2(b) and (g). The maximum compressive strain in concrete is 0.0035
Fig. 4.5.3 Variation of Ru with p1 % -Singly Reinforced Section and the maximum strain in tension reinforcement at failure shall not be less than ,
(ii) from Compression in Concrete : 0.87 fy
~-
Mur
0.002 + 0.002 + - - -
Mllr == CII .zII == 0.36 fk or M llr == 0.36 fk
C bxII .zII C bxII ( d- 0.42 xIt ') ...... (4.5.4a) 1.15 x Es E.\"
2
In order to get Mu in the form R\a bd , we substitute xu == k11 din the above equation.
,Since I.S. code does not allow over-reinforced section, the depth of the nculral axis is
.·. Mur == {0.36 fk
c ku ( 1 - 0.42 ku )}bd 2 == Rubd 2 restricted to that of a balanced section and hence the depth of the critical neutral axis will be the
:. R/{ == c ku ( l - 0.42 kll )
0.36 fk ...... (4.5.4b) maximum depth of the neutral axis, xu.max .Therefore, all the design parameters, k1,, R11 , p1 , for a
Eq,4.53c ~CvosRII in l«ms ofpI , thot is from steel side while Eq.4.5.4h gives RII in ten.,
of kII , that is from concrete side.
balanced section will be the maximum values, and therefore, they have been appropriately termed
asku.max ' Ru.max and pt.tflax .
_J Substituting x u == xu.maxcu
, & == 0.0035 and &s == 0.002 + 0.87 fyIE , in Eq. 4.4.la we gel,
Talcing exoct val"' of/ev" "m zll " (d - 0.4 IfuIt ) , lbe sol,.ion of the eqwllion, namely, . s

M11r == 0.36 fk
c bx11 (d- 0.416 xu ) which is Quadratic
· in x11 ,· is given hy : X
11 max
0.0035 xu.max 0.0035
= ----
_) X
II
:: 1.2 - ( ~1 - 4.62M) lJ f
ck
bd2
ttr ... (4.5.Jo)
d- XII max. 0.002 + 0.87 fck I £ 5 d

700
0.0035 + ( 0.002 + 0.87 fck IE, )

.d
Es == 2 x 105 N/mm 2,
(-\Jl,-~
~)
Substituting Xumax == ... (4.S.lc)
1100 +0.87 fy
_/"
.
kll:: 1.2 . X
J
700 ll.f!/UX

... (4.5.2b) and k, max --- ... (4.5.2c)

1100 + 0.87 fy d
 J - - .,-r~'- - ~ tt;.A..UTC

Chapier .'6eii!:.-·4,5 Prooerties of Sinl!lv ReiliforcedRectangular Section 115 (

1- b __,

TIJ. ..L~-f-
;.45fck.:Jj_ rtf.\,_- Table 4.5.2 Singly Reinforced Sections-Summary of Equations
~--

rcu ~ .36 'ck bxu.max _~y·.

0.87
x __ _ Ast
__ ..... .4.5.la
d -- - __j_ u- 0.36 fckb
( d-0.42 xu.maxl
0.87 f Ast 0.87 fy
_j Ast.max
ku =-·-Y. _ _ . P,
.... :.4.5.2a
•••• __ •- Tu~O.Blfy Ast.max
0.36 fck bd 0.36 fck

~
(a)
lt-40.87fy 4.62 M )
0.002+ - E - x=l2- 1-" d ...... 4.5.lb
( b ) Strain Diagram
s u • fbd 2
( c ) Stress Diagram
ck

{ ~ 4.62R)
Fig. 4.5.4 Balance Section

Replacing x u , Aget,
Sect. 4.5.1 we st ,· Mur , Ru by xu .max, Ast .max , Mur .max , Ru .max respectively in equations given in
·
k:=ur!- · fck
...... 4.5.2h

700
Mur .max =0.36 fk
c bxu.max ( d- 0.42 x11 .max ) =Ru .max bd2 = Mu ...... (4.5.5a) X =k X .d = .d ....•..4.5.lc
u.max u.max , 1100 + 0.87/.
. . y
Ru .max =0.36fkk
c u.max (1-0.42k u.max ) ...... (4:5.511) 700
k = ..;..__ __
......4.5.2c
0.36 fk 0.36fck bxu.max ·":max <'t100 :!- 0.87 f
y
_ -fc- ku .max
pI max = - - or Astmax = 0 .87fy ...... (4.5.6d) >
0 87
Mur =0.87 fyAst (d- 0.42 x) =M11 ...... 4.5.3a
The values of design parameters tor a balanced section are given in Table 4.5.1.

Comments : It may be noted that ku.max is dependent on the grade of steel only and not on the grade
of concrete since lieu = 0.0035 has been taken constant irrespective of the grade of concrete.
M =0.87
ur
f. A
y s 1.d~ __f J._Y ._A_st)
bd
...... 4.5.3b
ck

Table 4.5.1 : Design Parameters for a Balanced Section Mur =0.36 fck b.xu ( d - 0.42 xu ) = Mu = Rubd 2 ..... .4.5.4a
Concrete Grade
M20 Ru = 0.36 f ck kll ( 1 ...., 0.42 kli ) ...... 4.5.4b
M25
Steel Grade Fe250 Fe415 Mur.max =Rll.ntaxbd 2- =0.36 f clc. b.xu.max (d- 0.42 xu.max) ...... 4.5.5a
Fe500 Fe250 Fe415 Fe500

t ·
k R,.lflllX = 0.36 fck ku.max (1 - 0.42 ku.max) ...... 4.5.5b
u.max 053 0.48 0.46 053
~.6MJ
0.48 0.46 \
R 2.97
u.max 2.76 2.67 3.71 3.45 A = 0.5f
__ck 1- 1:... - - bd 11
...... 4.5.6a
orR 334 _st f fbd2
u.max 0.149f,k 0.138f,k y ck
0.133..t:,k 0.149/ck 0.138/ck o.m..t:,k
Pt. max 1.76 0.% 0.76 ASf =0.36 fk b.x I (0.87 fy ) or pI = 0.36 fk kII I ( 0.87 f)' ) .. .4.5.6b
220 120 C U C
0.95

~-~I- 4.6 R"·]

Note: Values of R have been obtained from the rounded values of k
u.max · u.max

.
.
The values of equations for the design quantities x , M arid A and -for the' design
u ur
parameters kli , Ru andpI are given in , uble 4.5.2 for ready reference.
n
P, • A• • 0.5 f"
bd fy r . fck
... 4.5.6c

L ,. .
As1.max =0.36 L b.xu.ma.i1(0.87 fy ) or p t.ma.\ = 0.36 fk
U\
k
c u.max
/(0.87 f)
y .. .4.5.6d
 j 116 Limit Stale of Collapse - Flexure Cil4pter 4

Ex. 4.S.J 'Dnive from ftm prindples, the ,.lues of design parameters (constants) Sect. 4.5 Properties of Singly Reinforced Rectangular Section 117
___)
u.max · u.max t.max .
Fe415.
k ,R and p for a balanced sect«m of concrete of grade and steel of itad. Mio Solution : By Eq. 4,5.2b,
_j

=1.2 t\- "\11~\ ( ~)

2
Data : fc/c ::: 1y ::: 415 N I mm2. Section - balanced.
20 N I Jnm ,
Required : k ,R and p . k., - --;::-) = 1.2 ~-"\11 - 2i:l, = 0.32
Solution : u.max u.max tmax

~-
From Eq. 4.5.2c,

From Eq. 4.5.5b,

700
kumax ::: - 1100+0.87x415 =0.48

Ru.max ::: 0.36 fck ku.max (1 - 0.42 ku.max)

By Eq. 4.5.6c, P, = 0.5fck
-
~·
t
For Fe 250, kU.IIIQJC =0.53 > kII :. O.K.

1-'\J~]
1- -
7fck
,: : 0.5- 1-'\J~]
250
x2f··
1- 20 .
0

:::0.36 X 20 X 0.48 (1- 0.42 X 0.48) =2.16Nimm 2 - 0.0106 i.e. 1.06%

From Eq. 4.5.6d, 0.36 fk kII Alternatively, using k ·obtained in earlier step,
C 0.36 X 20 X 0.3 u •
P,= 0.36 fk kII 0.36x 20 x 0.32
By Eq. 4.5.6b, p =
0.87f
y 0.87x250 1 -----------
0.87f
C

0.87x250
= O.oi06 i.e. 1.06%
y
::: 0.0096 i.e., 0.96%

~"''-ten
Ex. 4.5.4 : Obtain the value of kII and RII if a R. C. section of a singly reinforced rectangular
Not<' This fNO<Cdure will h< "<ry wd/ "memben>J by the Uudem f" daiuing <k>ign of bea~ is to be designed for a steel percentage of only 0.5%. Assume f.-k == 15 N!mm 2and lrixh
,__/
if
a the
balaMed swian
same is as Mey a" fr,q.,ntly required. The"''"" may be ""'ain.t fmm Table 4.5./ di"ctly
available.
yield strength deformed (HYSD) bars having 0.2% proof stress equal to 415 N!mm 2•
)
.i
: fck =15 N/mm 2,~. = 415 N/mm 2, p1 = 0.5% i.e. 0.005.
Ex. 4.5.2' De/'Fmine the design cons/ants R and p when the neU/ra/ axis factOr k t!.
II
limited to 0.3.' Assume clwracteristic strength of concrete
I
equal
II
to 20 N/mm and that of steel
I.
...
g
Data
Required
·
.: kII and RII. ·
equal to 250 Nlmm 2• 2 ~;
' Solution :
~·, 0.87 ~· 0.87 X 415 X 0.005
Data : fk
.. . 2
== 20 Nlmm ; f::: 250 Nlmm , k ::: 0.3.
2 ~; By Eq. 4.5.2a, k,; =- - p = 1
::: 0.334 - 0.33
c y lt 0.36 fck 0.36 X 15
kequired : R and p .
u I
ForFe415, kILiiriU--048>k
• II
:.O.K.
Solution : for Fe_ 250 kumax ::: 0.53 >given ku . :.O.K.
From Eq. 4.5.4b,R11 = 0.36 x 15. x 0.334 (1 -0.42 x 0.334) =1.55 N/mm 2
By Eq. 4.5.4b ;- RII ::: 0.36 x 20 x 0.3 ( 1 - 0.42 x 0.3 ) ::: l.888Nimm 2 ,. 1.89Nimm
2
Ex. 4.5.5.: A singly reinforced concrete beam 200 mm wide and having effective depth
By Eq. 4.5.6b, 0.36 f;;k k" 0.36x 20 x 0.3
pI ::: 400 mm is of concrete grade M20. The steel is of grade Fe 500.
= 0.99% "' I% (a) • Calculate the ·maximum ultimate moment of resistance, the section can offer, and tire
' 0.87 f 0.87 X 250
J y
corresponding area of steel (i.e. Mltr.!IIDX and Ast.max for a halanced section).
Ex. 4.S.3 'Caktdate the '"lues of design Parameters k and p if the 'Olue of R for (b) What will be the values o'
2 1 MM and A. 1
if the depth o'
1 neutral axis is restricted to 0.3d
. "!
ll I u
cerlain section is2.00 N/mm , Concrete is ha,ing a cube rrushing strength 20 N/mm , and the (c) If the. section is reinforced with 0.4% steel, determine the depth of concrete in
reinforcement is having a yield strength of 250 Nlmm 2. 2
_) compression to balance given tension steel at collapse. Hence calculate the moment of
Data·
2
C ::: 20 Nlmm , fy = 250 Nlmm 2, RII = 2.0 Nlinm 2.
: fk resistlmce of the section.
Required : k and P • (d) Determine 1M depth of neutral axis and area of tension steel to resist an ultimate
11 1 i
~
lltOifleiJI of 6o kN.m. .
~
~
;~
(e) Clr«lt whet/tD: an ultimate design moment of 100 kN.m. can be ~ on thL'I sectiorl.
*Limitation on k11 occurs due to redistribution of moments. See Sect. 4.7.
~';j

~-
If not, suggest an alternative. ·
.f
_./ • Nola : This problem lflllJ be considered to be con~tituting 5 indepe!Uknt short probletns
 I
Chapter 4 Sect. 4.5 Properties of Singly ReitJ/Qrced Rectangular SeCtion 119
{a) 2 2
Data : fd =20/!1/mm ,fy = 500N!mm , b = 200mm, d= 400mm., Balanced section. Solution
Required : M and A
By Eq. 4.5.4a, Mur = 0.36 fk.b xu ( d- 0.42 xu )
ur.IPlaJ: s1.max . c
Solution : 700 x 400 6
60x10 =0.36x20x200xx (400-0.42x) :.xII =119mm
By Eq. 4.5.Ic, Xu.max =
· U U

1100 + 0.87 x 500 == 182 mm** For Fe 500,. xu.max = 0.46 d = 0.46 x 400 = 184mm > xu :. O.K.

By Eq. 4.5.5a, M = 0.36 fk bx ( d - 0.42 x ) 0.36 fck b.xu 0.36 X 20 X 200 X 119
ur.max c u.max u.max By Eq. 4.5.6b, Ast = = = 394mm2
0.87x500
= 0.36 x20 x 200 x 182 x ( 400 - 0.42 x182) xl0·6 == 84.80 kN.m* 0.87 fy

J
0.36 x20 x200 x182 .
By Eq. 4.5.6d, Ast.max = ".87 x 500 = 602 mm2 6
or A = 0.5-
X 20t
- 1-
4.6 X 60 X 10 X 200 X 400 : 394mm2
1- 2
(b) st 500 20 x 200 x400
2
Data : fk = 20 N!mm ,f =500 N/mm 2, b = 200 mm, d = 400 mm, xII == 0.3d.
Required : MC and A . y .
(e) Data : fck =20 N/mm 2, fy =500 N!mm 2• b. = 200 mm, d = 400 mm, Mll = 100 kN.m.
ur st
Required : To know whether the section can resist the given moment. If not, suggest an
Solution : xII = 0.3 d = 0.3 x 400 = 120 mm
alternative.
Fot Fe 500, xu..max = 0.46 d > xu :. Section is under-reinforced. Solution : Mur.max for a given section= 84.80 kN.m. (See Part (a) of this problem)< given M11 .
By Eq. 4.5.4a, M = 0.36 fk bx ( d- 0.42 x ) :. Since Mu > Mur.max the section should be increased. or it cannot be allowed on the
ur c u u
given section according to I.S. Code provisions. The section shall be doubly reinli.>rced.
==
6 x20 x200 xl20 x(400- 0.42 xl20) x 10·6
0.36 == 60.41 kN.m.
Ast = 0.3 ~k b.xu 0.36 X 20 X 200 X 120 *4.5.3 Comparison of Limit State Design with Working Stress Method :
By Eq. 4.5.6b,
----=------------
0.87 fy 0.87 500 X =397mm2 The critical percentages for a balanced section defined by Working Stress Met~od (WSM) and by.
Limit State method (LSM) (See notes on next pages) are given for comparison in Table 4.5.3.
(c) Data
~k = 20 N!mm , ~· =500 N!mm 2, b = 200 mm, d = 400 mm, P, = 0.4%
2
: Table 4.5.3 : Critical percentages of Steel by Working Stress Method and Limit State Method
Required : xu and Mu,-
l Concrete M20 M25
Solution : A = p .bd = 0.004 x 200 x 400 = 320 mm 2 ~q· ,.

Sl I 0.8 7 fy AS/ 0.87 500 320

Steel Fe250 Fe415 Fe500 Fe250 Fe415 Fe500
:. x11 == - x -X-=97mm
By Eq. 4.5.la, 0.36 fck. b 0.36 20 200
%
Ptcr 1.000 0.4393 0.3225 1.2143 0.5334 0.3916
WSM
For Fe500, xu.ma.x = 0.46 d = 0.46 x 400 = 184mm > xu .·. Section is under-reinf(>rced.
By Eq. 4.5.3a, Mur = 0.87 fy Ast ( d - 0.42 xu )
· Pr.max % 1.767 0.9587 0.7574 2.2059 1.1983 0.946
= 0.87 X 500 X 320 ( 400 - 0.42 X 97) X 10·6 == 50.00 kN,m L___LSM ____ I

.
----- - - --- --- I

Alternatively, M could also have been found by using 4.5.4a which gives the same
.
value. Comments : From the above table it wifl be seen that the critical percentage ( P~_ cr) by working stress
(d) 2 2 method as compared to the corresponding values ( P 1 ) in the limit state method ( LSM) are very less.
Data : fkc = 20 N!mm ,Jd y = 500 N!mm , b = 200 mm, d = 400 mm, Mll ·== 60 kN.in.
. max
Required : xu and As!' For example for concrete M20 and steel Fe415, P~_ cr = 0.4393% whilePwwx = 0.9587%. In WSM when

**Note :All linear dimensions k ~ - the percentage of steel exceeds critical percentage ( i.e. P1 > P,_ cr) the section becomes over-reinforc'ed.
.&
u, d · are taken in full integer value in mm roumjed off as per normal Such a section is required to be designed either as over-reinforced section or doubly reinforced section, /.

..i•
u, .;,

rules. Area is taken in full integer. *M is taken in kN.nr, upto twiJ decimal pl(/ces· and requiring a large quantity of steel thus becoming uneconomical. It would, therefore, be evident that the '
the~efore, the factor of 10 ·"is applied to com·ert Nmm to kNm.
II

Jij
percentage of steel which can be used economically has been enhanced by limit state method.
(
~--.
,,
;·
* Readers not interested in comparison of WSM with LSM may skip this section.
~
-~
(

-~~~-·- ~~~-
J

120 Limit State of Collapse - Flexure

··-I
~
Chapter 4 $¢ Properties of Singly Reini(Jrced Rectangular .SectiOn 121
~keo
_] A valid <omparisoo of IJ>e.se IWo methock cao be made wheo - . . , pa<ame""' Whicl
the pmpen;,. of tbe ""tioo are into account. These parame""' are moment of
~ re.istance of the section of mlher moment of resistance fact<" R ( =M I lxi') and the Jlel«:nta~ (b) $teel Fe415
Table 4. 5. 4b Critical % of Steel by WSM and LSM

of Sleel pt . Therefore, the values of Rand pt obtained. by these IWo methods have beeo
. compared
~ commencing ·.from minimum percentage of steel required P·~. % ( == 85 I [y ) to maximum Concrete M20 M25
·~ . . sle.d P, max % required by balanced section of limit state method. The value
percentage-"Of . of R of
1
- P,%. 1.5 R R u. % 1.5R Ru %
WSM has been DMdliplied by 1.5 fon:ompatisoo with R, bocause the beodiog momeo"' oblainedio increase .increase
~ limit state method are obtained aft., multiplyiog the bendiog momeot at workiog load by a load
0.2048 0.6576 0.7077 7.62 0.6616 0.7139 7.9(}
(actor of 1.5. These details have been shown in Fig. 4.5.4 and Table 4.5.4
3.00 0.3000 0.9502 1.0152 6.84 0.9571 1.0287 7.48
_)
~' ~· - - -
'i
0.4393 13697 1.4408 5.19 .
~"'
-1' "'" -~ 0.5334 - - - L6631 1.7544 5.49
~ <II

~
E 2.25
2.50

"i
"'
~·~·
~'I)

·t.~
0.6000
0.8000
1.5334
1.6925
1.8956
2.4077
23.62
42.26
1.7367
1.9239
.!_.9496
2.sea~.
12.25
30.13
·~ cr
2.oo,L « I F
- .. 0.9587 1.7957 2.7714 54.34 - - -
~

3
;'1
" 1.50
cr
1.25

1.00
}""""' r--'""'""'
'
~/

~<t
. "
_·_-..::::
. ~ o,rreinforced 8edion

M20· Fe 415 (WSM)

o,.,r reinforced sedion
1.1983

(c) Steel FeSOO

- - - 2.2007 3.4641 57.41

Concrete M20 M25

_] PI% 1.5 R R % 1.5R R % increase
increase
':J
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 0.1700 0.6565 0.7077 7.80 0.660 0.7140 8.14
_) Pt OJo.....,.. 0.2000 0.7684 0.8261 7.50 0.7731 0.8348 7.98
Fig. 4.5.4 0.3225 1.2179 1.2891 5.84 - -
.J - - -
Table 4.I 5. 4a Comparison of Moment of ~esistance Factor with Percentage of Steel 0.3916
0.5000 1.4364 1.9022 32.42
1.4789
1.6235
1.5693
1.9565
6.11
20.51
_] (a) Steel Fe150
0.7574 1.6617 2.6695 60.65 - - -
Concrete 0.9467 - - - 2.0376 3.3367 63.76
M20
_]

I
M25
P,% 1.5 R R.II % increase Notes: (1) The percentage increase is obtained over 1.5R using for.
1.5 R RII
~ %increase
%increase= 100 x ( R. -1.5R) /1.5R
~
0.34 0.6523 0.7077 8.49 it (2). .'[he following formulae have been used to find P1 and R
_] 0.60 .· 1.1223 0.6572 0.7140 8.63 "~~
I 1.2065 7.51
1.00/ 1.8200 1.1327 1.2261 8.24 e (a) Working Stress Method
1.9022 4.51 ~
J 1.2f43 - - -
1.8399 1.9565 6.34 N.A. factor k= ~(mp/ + 2 mp1 - mp1 where, m -
280 A"
- - - 'P,=-d'
b
1.30 2.2100 2.3192 4.94 30
1.9728 2.3668 19.97 cbc
ma
~ 1.60 2.0947 2.7826 32.84
2.2580 2.4587 8.89 Balanced N.A. Factor, k _ cbc
2.4052 cr-
1.767 2.1521 2.9217 21.48 · macbc +asf
2.9901 38.94 - k
_] 2.2059 - -
,, \(l-~
- - 2.6338
-
when k < kcr the section is under-reinforced, M. R. Factor= R =a. x P,
3.7376 41.91 37
_]
 .Types of Problems. on.·SectiiJn Anplysis .anilJ>eSii!f~ C
JLL LimifState of Collapse- Fleiure Chapter 4 _ sect..4;6' c
l · 0.87 fyAst ... ...'(Eq. 4.5.la)
solution : ('
when k > k,., the section is over-~einforced, M, R_ Factor= R =O.Sx ocl.C X k ~-:~ (l)Oettillline xu ' xu= 0.36 fek. b
.. d l·x 700 ('
(2) (JJ>IaDt x· - , tbe depth for ba]ance neutta ax" " - = 1100 . f . .d (Eq,45JC)
+0.87.
(b) l-imit State Method . ' Jy
('
Balanced N. A. factor = k,,.,,x
700
, N. A. factor = k, = xP, f o r - · grades of steel tbe values of X"- may be remembered. They are givOn bi:low
~100+ ~·.j ('
\ us) for readY reference
Fe250 Fe415
_._
Fe500 I
Steel ('
0.48d 0.46d
Comments: Moment of resistance offered by any given section is represented by 1.5R ill WSM and R11 0.53d
in LSM. From Table 4.5.4 it will be observed that LSM gives moment of resistance factor larger by abow
X
unuu = c
7 % to 8 % of the minimum percentage of steel ( =851 J;.) , hducing to 5 % to 6 % at critical percentage
(3) (oinpare Xu with Xu max ('
of steel ( p
l.cr
) level of WSM. After this the section in WSM becomes over-rei4~~~~d while it continues to If x · < x ihe section is under-reinforced.
remain under-reinforced in !.SM. The percentage difference between .the moment of resistance factor u umrv:' ,
If x = x the section is balanced: -('
increases at a faster rate from p level of WSM to p level of LSM. Therefore WSM is very
~cr ~m~ If X u > Xu max ' the section is over-reinforced and is not permitted by the code
unecmwmical for m·er-reinforced section. u ultUU' · •
('
In short, chec).( that
umrv:, If Xu > · Xu mrv: , take Xu. =. X unwx
4.6 TYPES OF PROBLEMS ON SECTION ANALYSIS AND DESIGN X < X
u
The various types of problems that no·rmally occur in the analysis and design of a singly (4) Calcul!ite Mur, M , =0.87 f/st ( d- 0.42x) ...... (Eq.4.5.3a ) ('
11
reinforced rectangular sections are shown by a schematic diagram below. or Mur =0.36 fck b.xu ( d- 0.42 Xu)· •.•••• (Eq.4.5.4a)
Types of Problems
I (5) If die intenoilly of the load is ""iuired for given - •ml end conditions ' . C''
3~ 1~"'.; ·.u . (~

'I
I
Section Analysis Section Design
Obtain Mu in terms
. of w u and L , ' . it witb·calculated value· of Mu ~
to '*et thew
(Given material properties Given material .properties ( fck , f)
y and hence the working load.
and the section ( fck , ~· ) and the design momenJ · ( M11 ) Ex. 4.6.1 , A R.C. beam of re<tangular sedion .250mm wide atrd 60o,;.. deej> is l
and ( b, d, Ast ) I ~R reinforced on tension side by 4 bars of 20 mm dzameter. The beam IS subjected to mild
I
r ---------------.
I ey
~ apo,ure conditions. The ch«,acteristk "rengths of concrete ar.d "ee/jlsed are 25N/mm' (
To tindMfir To find load To find ASf To design To design
~
•!

and 460N/mm2.
;i
("
Type-l(a) for given for given a balanced anunqh- reinforced (a) Calculate the ultimate moment ofresistance of the section. .
( Ex.4.6.la) span and end section. section section for given pI (b) Determine the maximum uniformly distributed load a simply supported beam of this. C
.
condition Type-2(a) Type-2(b) Type-2(c) section can carry over a span of 6m. 2
Type-l(h) (Ex. 4.6.2) (Ex. 4.6.3) (Ex. '-..4.6.4) Given ; fck = 25 N {mm 2,/y = 460 N /mm ' b =250mm, D =600 min, ("
~•· _ =4 -::1!' nnn =4 x ~ x 2ll) =125<\.C\ mm~ L =6nr, Mild envirorimetU. (
(Ex. 4.6.lb)
The procedure for solving these types of problem is explained in the following subsections.

4.6.1 Type-1: Analysis Problem (Calculation of M

ur
of a Given Section)
-
Required Mur UDL
:(a} (b)
c
Given : fck, ~·, b, d, A51 •
Required : (a) Mur
Solution : From Table 2.2.3 nominal cover for mild exp<)sure condition =10 mm. c
· Assuming lOntm diameter links, and 20 nun diameter bar.
(b) Allowable load on given span and end conditions. effective cover'= 20 + 10 + 20/2 =40mm., :. effective depth= d = 600 ~ 40 = 560mm c
c
 ('__)
124. · Limit Sttlte of Coil4pse - Flexure
u
Sect. 4.6 TypfS of Problems on Section Analysis and Design 125
~
0.8l
By Eq. 4.5.1tl;---x--:---,- fy Ast =--:-:-~~~=-::~-
0.87 X 460 x_l256.6
"'* .b
,:__;
. . . u'

700 ,
0.36 0.36 X 25 X 250

70() X 560
=223.5 mm

·.
required to be doubly reinforced.
· .
~]
0.5 fck •·
t.
U M, > Mur.nuu' the section is either required to be increased or the given section is
4.6 Mu
1- - - . . bd
:J (4) Obtain A from Eq. 4.5.6a, A 1 = - - 1--
· -= l100t0.87
X , fy Xd:_1100t0.87x460=2613- .·.X• <x· - :·. 01(
· . . st s f .f bd2
y . c/c
From Eq. 4.5.3a, M =0.87 f A ( d- 0.42 x ) (5) Check that tbe calculated Ast -<- 0.85 I fy which is the minimum steel prescribed by the Code.
:J ur y st 11
Ex. 4.6.2 : calculate the area of reinforcement required for a singly reinforced
::J Comments: =0.87 X 460 X 1256.6 (56(}- 0.42 X 223.5) X JO-(, : 2J4.4kN.QJ, concrete beam 230 mm wide and 380 mm deep to resist an ultitnQte moment of 50 lcN.m.
Assume M20, Fe 500 combination of concrete and steel and effective cover equal to 35 mm.
(1) M., can also be obtained from Eq. 4.5.4a, as :
,:_) Given : fck .= 20 N I mm2 ,fy = 500 N I mm2 ,
M,, =0.36x 25 x 250x 223.5 ( 560 -0.42x 223.5 )x 10 -,, = 234.4kN.m b = 230 mm, D = 380 mm, d' = 35mm, Mu =50 kN.m.
:_)
Tb, """' of M• "'"" ""' w h< <h< - I Uo~w. WSM) ",.,,;._d !'- liq. H3a.
Required : Ast'

"'""'IT""'' m""""·";'if~«d ,~;,., r...,~ '" f"''"" ""'"" ""'";,,"! .....,cr•.

Solution : d' = 35mm, d = D- d' = 380- 35 ::!: 345 mm,
l_j
See Sect. 4.3.2. hy For Fe 500, ku.max =0.46 , Ru.max =' 0.36 x 20 x 0.46 (1 - 0.42 x 0.46 ) = 2.67 N 1mm 2
:__)
~mplymoment
For adesign
ultimate
(b) '"PI""Ied "'- of"''" L """Ying a uoifoonly di•rihu!od ''"" w. lho
is given by,
M
11r.max
=R
u.max
bd 2 =2.67x230x345 2 x10-6 =73.1kN.m,:.M <M
:. The section is under-reinforced.
· ur. ur.max
:.OK
• •

u
·:__)
w [2 . . J

MII = .::.8___ where W11 IS ultimate load =1.5wL -/8

- fck 1-
A= 0.5
st f
y
t ~.6M"] 0.5 20t
1--
fbd2
ck
x 1-
.bd=--
500
1-
4.6 X

20x 230x345
50 X 10
6

2
.] X 230 X 345

wllere, 1.5 is a load factor to be applied to working load w to get ultimate load.
::__)
.. . 1.5wL2 l.Sw x 6
=378.5 mill.
MII. =MliT by. oqo•hbnom. b"' MII = _ 8 .·. 234.4 = _ 8 2 , :. w = 14.73kNim
C) 4.6.3 Type - 2(b) : Design Problem (Design of a Balanced Section for given M )
w,
&If woighl = 25b D KN/m ( b >odD in melon; ) = 25 x 0.25 x 0.6 = 3. 75 KN/m. Given : fck , fy and Mu.
II

·'_) Imposed load W11 = w- wd = 34.73- 3.75 = 30.98 kN!m. Required : b, d, D, Ast for a balanced section.

:J 4.6.2 Type.2(a) 'De.ign Problem (Ca/ou/ation of A, f., gi""n

Given : fk , fy ,MII , b and D or ( L I d and. L )
Sec~;<m and M.,) Solution Procedure :
(1) Calculate design parameters ku max , Ru.max and p1.max for a balanced section.
C
Required : Area of steel
.:_) 700
Solution Procedure : ku. max
= , Ru.max =0.36 f ck .ku.max (1 - 0.42. k11.mar\
:__) (1) Assume effective cover d' and obtain d 1100+0.87 fy
Comments : (1) After sufficient practice of problems, the values of design parameters k ,R
If ratio L/d is given then, Obtain d = -.!:__ _ II IHO.t
given in Table 4.5.1 I1UIY be remembered and can be readily taken as the standard reference vulues for a
II 1111U

:_)
( L I d) balanced section.
· (2) Calculate M =R bd 2 (2) Either assume width b from practical considerations or
::_) ur.tnQ.K ll.max
assume ratio bid (say between 1/3 and 2/3).
By Eq. 4.5.5b,R =0.36 !* .k . ( I - 0.42 k ) and k = --700
-- (3) Calculate effective depth d required.
:J
llOOt0.87 f.
~ R M• ; ~ 3~~ ld ) ~ "'•med.
. •·- ' - •·- """"
0 (3) Compare given M,, with M,,_max Check that M,, < ~~r.max d= when b "'umOO. o' d = whon nllio (bid)
~Q
,
u.max

(4) Calculate the area of reinforcement. Ast =0.36 fck b.xu.max I 0.87 fy
 ('

Chapter 4 \.
Sect. 4.6 Types of Problems on Section Analysis and Design 127
(5) Assume appropriate cover d'and determine a practical total depthD = d +d' c:
Ex. 4.6.4 : A singly reinforced beam of grade M20 has to resist an ultimate moment of
Note : It is worth to note an importalit fact in a R. C. design that the b_alanced design alwt~ys gives che 36 kN.m. Design the section usin_g 0.45% steel of grade Fe250. Assume b = 230 mm.
smallest concrete section and maximum area of reinforcement. The balanced section is many times not
desirable from economy point of view because of high cost of steel. Since an under-reinforced· design
.
'' Given : fk=20N/mm
c
2
,f.=250N/mm
y
2
, M =36kN.m,
u
c:
always gives a larger concrete section and lesser area of steel the same is normal:y preferred to a balanced
design and it works out to be economical.
,
~
·p1 =0.45 % i.e. 0.0045 , b = 230 mm. c:
Required : d, D and Ast'
Ex. 4.6.3 : Design a smallest concrete section of a R. C. ~eam to resist an ultimate c:
I
Solution : 0.36 fck kll.max 0.36 X 20 X 0.53 _ 0.0176 i.e. 1. 76%
moment of 62 kN.m., assuming width 230 mm., concrete of grade M20 and HYSD bars. of For Fe250, xu.max = 0.53 , p - -
grade Fe415. t.max 0.87 fy 0.87x250 ('
Given : fk=20Nim,f,J.=415Nimm 2
, MII =62kN.m, b=230mm. ~
C
Required : minimum d.
y {t~

tl Given P1 < P1 :. The section shall be under-reinforced.

c:
Solution : The smallest section corresponds to the balanced section. ·'
.m~,

. kumax
For Fe 415, =0.48, Rumax =0.36 x 20 x 0.48 ( 1-0.42· x 0.48) =2.76
. N 1 mm 2 Ji
0.87 fy
k11 = - · P r
0.87 X 250 X 0.0045
=0.136
c:
0.36 fck 0.36 X 20
P1 max= 0.36 fk
c k u.max I ( 0.87 f.y ) = 0.36 X 20 x 0.481(0.87 x 415) = 0.0096 i.e., 0.96%
c:
. ~ ·62xl06 R = 0.36 x 20 x 0.136 (1- 0.42 x 0.136) = 0.923 N I mm 2
Requxred d= R b =
u.max
II

2.76 X 230
= 312 mm II

(a) Forb= 230 mm. c:

Ast = P1.maxbd =0.0096 x 230 x312 =689 mm 2

~
Required
·
Assuming cover
.
i =38mm., ProvideD =312 + 38 =350 mm. Required d = =
36 X 106
0.923 x 230 = 412 mm
c:
4.6.4 Type-2(c) Design Problem·
I

Required Ast = p1. bd = 0.0045 x 230 x 412 = 427 mm2

c:
(Design of an Under-reinforced section for given M and given
Given : fck , f. , M , P1
. II PI ) Provide D =450 mm assuming d' = 38 mm. c:
y ·II

To find : b, d, D and Ast for an under-reinforced section.

Solution·Procedure:
4.6.5 Type-2(d) : Design of an Under-reinforced Section c:
(Calculation of ASl for given MU and kll or Rll )
036 /,;k kll.max
700
.

When a neutral axis factor ku or a moment of resistance factor Ru is given as data, it

c
(1) Calculate Pr.max = - - - - - k =
0.87f.y max 1100 + 0.87 ~· necessarily means that the section is required to be under-reinforced for economy; because the c:
I!.
11

under-reinforced design gives a larger section and lesser steel by limiting ku orRIt·-to a value less
Check that given p1 < p t.max to ensure under-reinforced section.
~
than ku.max or Ru.max of a balanced section. c:
0.87 fy ~
Besides, many times, the value of kII is required to be restricted to allow for redistribution of
c:
~
(2)Compute k _ _ pl
II - 0.36 /,;k and R11 = 0.36 l,;k k11 ( I - 0.42 k,) moments considered in the analysis. This has been discussed at length in Sect. 4.8. But it may be
clarified that the design of a section taking lesser value of kII does not necessarily mean that the (
(3) Either assume width b or assume ratio bId, and calculate required effective depth d. redistribution of moments has peen done or is required to be done. It only indicates that the
I M..
Required d =...,. I R ·b if b is assumed. , or d =
3
.
,'yf
if ratio bid is assumed.
redistribution of moment can be done if desired. c:
11
Given : fk , f}' , MII , kII orRII .
"! II

(4) Calculate area of steel. A =p .bd

R (b ld)
II.
C

Required : b, d, D and Ast for an under-reinforced section. c:

I
Sl
Solution :
(5) Assume appropriaie cover i and determine the total depth D = d + i. (1) Calculate ku max for given steel grade , ku max = 700 I ( 1100 + 0.87 f r ) ,
c
Check that k < k
u
.
umax
- c:
c:
 ') ! 28 Limit State of Collapse - Flexure

, R, ~ 0.36 t, <,
~ Chapter 4
(2) Calc•l•le R, fu, givo" <, {I - 0.42 k,) •••••• (Eq.4.5.'<b) Sect. 4.6 Types of Problems on ·section Analysis and Design 129

~
11
When R is given instead of k11 , the preceding two steps be omitted. Only check that
givua R < R
•4.7. LIMITATIONS ON DESIGN PARAMETERS .
.
u umax (Due to Redistribution of Moments in Statically Indeterminate Beams)
') (3) Assuming b, calculate the effective depth required. The mairi feature of limit state design for collapse is the redistribution of moments in statically

~
Required d= {;;~~ indeterminate beams. It has been observed in Sect. 3.2 that the redistribution of moments causes
the rotation of plastic hinges in proportion to amount ofredistribution, and ther~fore, it demands that
Ru. b
the section should possess that much rotation capacity. But in R. C. members the rotation capa~ity
~ i~ require<~ to be limited from serviceability considerations. Further, it is also seen in Sect. J.J that
(4) Calculate A
st A = ~ 1-'\11-
05ff ~]
-~ .bd this rotation capacity is an inverse function of depth of neutral axis and therefore the design codes
~ ' st f 'i f bd 2 impose limitation on the depth of neutral axis in proportion 1?_ the amounrof redistribution of
y ck
(5) Assume appropriate cover d' and determine total depth. D = d + d'. moments as given by the following equation : . ..
~ x 11
dM
Ex. 4.6.5 :A R. C. beam has to resist an ultimate moment of 90kN.m. Design the section - + - s 0.6 or k s fo.6- dM\ ...... (4.7.2a)
:_.) if for some reasons (a) depth of neutral axis is to be restricted to 0.3d, or (b) R, ,.;· 2.2 Nlmm • d 100 II \ wo}
Assume b = 300 mm, fk = 20 Nlmm1 and f = 415 N I mm.2 2
c y where, dM = percentage reduction in moment s 30%
__j 2
Given :fk=20N!mm
c ,fy =415Nimm2,Mu =90kN!m, b=300mm, Also since, over-reinforced sections are not allowed, x11 sxumax or ku s kumax
(a) xu < 0.3 d or ku < 0.3 (b) Ru = 2.2 Nlmm 2 Limiting depth of neutral axis is given by :
__) Required : d, D and As(
Solution : x .. s fo.6 - dM) x d or xu.max , whichever is less ...... (4.7.H
.J u.llllltl \ 100
(a) For Fe415, ku.max = 0.48. Since given ku < ku max, the section is under-reinforced;
__j RU = 0.36 fk kU (I - 0.42 kU )
C dM)
or k .. s ( 0.6-- or k , whichever is. less ...... (' '. Lh)
11./mut 100 . u.max
Taking kII = 0.3 , RU = 0.36 x 20 x 0.3 ( 1 - 0.42 x 0.3 ) = 1.89 N I mm2
__j

__) Required d =
& = 90xl06
= 399 mm
Also dM = ( 0.6 - ku.zmzt
1
. . ) x 100 but s 30% ..... (4.7.3)

J. _
*4.8 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF BEAM SECTIONS ALLOWING

f
11 1.89 X JQQ

~k ~-6
.REDISTRIBUTION OF MOMENTS
,) 0.5 M"] 0.5 20f X 4.6 X (90 X 106
~· ~k bd
A = - - 1- 1 - - b d = - 1- 2 1- 300x399=714mnr2 The procedure tor solution of problems involving redistribution of mOiucnts is the same as
__j st 415 20 X 300 X 3992 given in Sect. 4.6 except that the depth of neutral axis to be used is X u. ['mlll. instead of X u~max
Assuming cover d' = 50mm., provideD= 399 +50= 450 mm. . . <x
provided x1111mll otherwise x u. 1mut
. . is taken equal to x . The corresponding design
u.max tt.max
.J (b) Ru.ma.r =0.36 x 20 x 0.48 ( 1 - 0.42 x 0.48) = 2. 76 N I mm 2 parameters can be obtained replacing ku.max, , Ru.max. , p1. max by ku. 1mu
. ., , P . .
-:. 1zmu
and· pt. 1milt
. .

2 respectively. .
__j Given Ru = 2 .2 N I mm < Ru.max , .·. The section is under-reinforced.
The values of kII. 1tnlll
. .,R . and p . . are given by :
11. 11... 11 /. 1tmtl
6
90x 10
~
Required
= -
~
d
2.2 X 300 = 37U mrn kll.ftmtt dM)
.. s 0.6 - - . s ku.max Else take ku.limit = k11.max ...... (4.8.1)
100
..)
0.5 X 20f ~ 1- 4.6 X 90 X 106]
. . = 0.36fk k . . (1- 0.42 k . . )
Rll.lmll ...... (4.8.2)
A = - 1- x300x.370=79Imnzl
.J st ·• 415 20 X 300 X 3702 .
1 c 1
u.zmll 1
.zmzt

-~ Assume cover d' =:;o mm.Provide D = 170 t 50= 420 mm. . .,·= 0.36 fk
P,.1zmz . . I ( 0.87 fy
c ku. 11mtt ) ...... (4.8.3) '
*Sect. 4.7 and S-;ct 4.8 may be skipped at the first reading and if reader has not gone though Chapter 3
 (
Analysis amlDesign of Beam Sections 131
-secf,•. -4.8 (
Maximum dM = ( 0.6- ku) x 100 but j;, 30%
Similarly,x limu· ,M limi.1 andA t/im· ,shallbeusedinplaceof x , ,M andA (b) dM = 10% ku!imit s (0.6 - 10 I 100) =0.5 -~.46 c
u. ur. s. zt u max ur.max

Ex. 4.8.1 Derive from first principles, the values of limiting design parameters k ·k '=k :0.46
, . '• ulimit 11.max r ::
R ,. . and "~'· for a reinforced
2
U.dmzt pt."""', concrete
section with concrete grade· M20 and steel
. · u. 1unu · M
••
. . =
ur. 1111111
M
11r.max
=84.8 k.N.m. and A . . =A
st. 1111111
=
sl.max .
602 mm See Ex.4.5.5 " li,

Fe 415 if redistribution of moments is allowed to the extent of (a) 30% (b) .10%. (:
2 Ex. 4.8.3 :A R.C. beam 250 mm wide and 450 mm deep is to be reinforced with 0.6%
Data :fc/c == 20N I mm , fy= 415 N I mm 2 , (a) dM == 30% (b) dM == 10%
steel of grade Fe500 with an effective cover of 40 mm. If the concrete is of grade M20, what (
Required: ku.limit 'Ru.limit 'Pr.limit moximum percentage of redistribution of moments could be allowed and what is the ultimate
Solution :
(a) dM = 30% For Fe 415, ku.max == 0.48 (See Table 4.5.1)
moment of resistance of the section·? ·
2
c··
Data : f ck = 20 N/mm 2, fy= 500 N/mm ,'b = 250 mm.
ByEq.4.8.1, ku1zmzt
.. s (0.6-dMI100) but 'i>k
u.max
,ku tmll
1
.. s (0.6-30/100)=03
· D = 450 mm, d' = 40 mm, p1 ~ 0.6% i.e. 0.006. c
4 0 36
By Eq. .8.2, Ru./imil == · J;,k ku.limit (1 - 0.42 ku.limi1) Required : dM and M,.,
Solution : d = D - d' = 450- 40 = 410 mm.
c
=0.36 x 20 X 0.3 ( 1 - 0.42 x0.3 ) = 1.89 Nlmm 2
0.36 /;;k ku./imit 0.36 X 20 X 0.3 .
By Eq. 4.5.2a, k = 0.87 f/ 11(0.36 fck)
11
= 0.87 X 500 X 0.006 I (0.36 x 20) = 0.36 c
By Eq. 4.8.3,
pl./imit _ == 0 87 X 415 = 0.00598 I.e. 0.598 0% == 0.6 % For Fe 500, k11.max = 0.46 /'
0.87 f . \
y
(b) dM =10% k ,.. s (0.6 - 10 1100) ::: 0.5 > k :. k ,. . == k = 0.48
. . <k
:. k11. tnlll
1 11.max
:. O.K.
c
u mut u.max u Lmlf u.max
.
.. =0.36
k11./mul =k 11
2
:. Ru. 1uml
.. ::: Ru.max = 2.76 N I mm , pt. zmu
. . == pt.max == 0.96%
1 See Ex. 4.5.1 By Eq. 4.8.4, Max. gM = (0.6'- . . )x 100 hut < 30%
kII. 1tnlll (
•

Ex. 4.8.2 : A singly reinforced concrete beam 200 mm wide and having effective
depth 400 mm is of concrete grade M20. The steel is of grade Fe500. Calculate the ultimate
= (0.6- 0.36) X 100 = 24% < 30% :.O.K.
c
RU = 0.36 fk kII ( 1 - 0.42 k) =; 0.36 X 20 X 0.36 (I - 0.42 X 0.36)
moment of resistance M11, and area of reinforcement, ifredistribution of moment is to be C . II ·
(
allowed to the extent of (a) 25% (b) 10%. 2
2 = 2.2N/mm
Data : fck == 20 N I mm , fy = 500 N I mm 2
(a) dM = 25 % (b) dM =10%
, b = 200 mm., d = 400 mm.,
Mu = Ru bd 2 c
6
Required : Mu.unu
1. . and Ast.rmu
1
. . in each case.
::: 2.2 X 250 X 410 2 X J0 -
= 92.46 kN.m
c
Solution :
(a) =
dM 25%. For Fe 500, k
u.max
= 0.46 Ex. 4.8.4 : Desixn the smallest section for a R.C. beam 230 mm wide, to resist a design c
... (Table 4.5.1) moment of 63 kN.m. allowing 30% redistribution of moments. Assume characteristic strength
r
1.. s (0.6 - 25 I 100) = 0.35 < 0.46
By Eq. 4.8.1, kuzmu 2 \
:. O.K. of concrete equal to 20N!mm 2 and that of steel =. 460Nimm • Assume moderate environment.
4
By Eq. -8.2, Ru./imit =0·36 /,;k ku.limit (l - 0.4 2 ku.limit) r
Data : J,. =20 N I mm 2• f}'= 460 N I mm 2, MII =36 kN.m b = 230 mm, dM =30% ',
C•
== 0.36 x 20 x 0.35 ( 1 - 0.42 x 0.35 J = 2.15 N 1 mm 2
2 Required : d , D and Asl (
,.. == Ru.zmrt
:. Mur.zmzt ,.. .bd = 2.15 X 200 X 4002 X 10"6 = 68.8kN.m.
Solution :
By Eq. 4.8.3, pt.zmu
,.. = 0.36 fk ,.. I (0.87 f y )
c ku.tmtt ::: 0.36 X 20 X 0.35 I (0.87· X 500) = 0.0058
For the section to he smallest, the reinforcement has to be maximum as allowed by
redistribution of moments.
c
As. 1mut
.. = pt.tnlll
1.. . bd :: 0.0058 X 200 .
X 400 = 464mm 2
c
(
 _)
132 Limit State of Collapse- Flexure
__..) Chapter 4
700
.J For Fe 415, k = = 0.467 PART B
umax 1100 +0.87 X 460
_)
.
k .. = 0.6 - -
( dM) "j. k .
DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS
11./znm 100 11.max
~ 4.9 INTRODUCTION:

\
-" Normally, steel is provided in concrete beams to resist tension, while the compression is
k11/imil 30)
= ( 0• 6 -100
- =0.3 "i>0.467
:. O.K. resisted by concrete. But it has been observed in Sect. 4.5 that a given concrete section with steel
~ only on tension side (i.e., a singly reinforced sections) can offer only a limited moment of resistance
Ru. 1.lnlll. =: 0.36 fk ku. 1Jnut
. . (1 - 0.42 k . . )
equal to that of a balanced section. On many occasions and under varied conditions, the size of
_) c u. Inut
1 concrete beam has to be restricted due to architectural and practical requirements, but the same
:;;: 0.36 X 20 X 0.3 ( 1 - 0.42 X 0.3 ) section is required to resist a moment greater than that ot a balanced section. Under these
\
J circumstances, additional moment of resistance is obtained by adding steel on both tension and
= 1.89 N lmm 2
compression sides. Such a section with steel on tension as we!! ::!~ 011 C('mptession side is known as
0.36 fk k ,..
j c u.tmtt a doubly reinforced section.
Pl.limil The doubly reinforced section is normally required under the following circumstances. ,.
0.87f /
_)' y
(i) Sectional dimensions are restricted due to requirements of head room, apptarance etc.
0.36 X 20 X 0.3 and the strength of given singly reinforced section is inadequate.
J 0.87 x460
I (ii) The beam which acts as a Hanged beam at midspan becomes a rectangular beam at
')
'-"""
= 0.0054 i.e. 0.54%
II supports of a continuous beam. At support tension occurs on top making the Bange inclkctive,
and therefore, the section becnF.cs inadequate to resist large peak value of support moment.

~
Required. (iii) Basement with lower plinth level and combined with ventilator compels one to design a
_) d-- m
doubly reinforced plinth beams.
u.lt i
« (iv) Compression steel is provided sometimes to reduce the det1ection i.e., to increase the
_j
63 X 106 ~ stiffness and also to increase the rotation capacity (97/1).

.)
=
-
1.89x 230
i:l

~~ 4.10 PROPERTIES OF A DOUBLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR SECTION

=38lmm2 A rectangular section with reinforcement on tension as well as on compression side is shown
'I 11
--' in Fig. 4.10.1.
;i
From Table 2.2.3 for modtrate environment nominal cover = 30.mm. ~
_) A doubly reinforced section may be looked upon as made up of two sections l and 2 given below :
Assuming lOmm stirrups and 16 mm. bars,
Section -1: a singly reinforced section with concrete resisting compression C111 balanced
.·. effective cover = 30 + 10 +16 I 2 by tensile force T111 provided by tension steel Asri· This section is assumed to
J
=48mm ressist part moment Mu1 out of total moment Mu .
_) Provide total depih = 381 +"48 Section-2: an imaginary section (shown dotted) consisting of compression steel providing
=say 430 mm. additional compression force cu2 which is balanced by tensile force 7;,2 given
-~ Effective depth provided = 430 - 48 by tension steel An2 .This section is assumed to ressist balance moment
= 382mm Mu 2 = ( M11 - M,11 )
~ This has been shown in Fig. 4.1 0.1 a. This type of idealization is helpful in deriving properties
. . X bd = 0.0054
ASl = pI. 1tnll X 230 X 382
-\ of the section.
J
= 474 mm2. While deriving the properties, the following additional assumptions over and above ihosc
 c -- ... ·~ute
(
Chapter 4 Properties of Doubly Reinforced . Section 135
made in Sea. 4.2 for a singly reinforced section are made. Sect. 4.10
(i) Sfre.s-stmin cum fo' •leel ;,; the same in te.,rion '"d oomp.-"'ion; I 0·87 fy Ast- ( f se - f ce ) Ase
('

Yield'"''"
(li)compression.f, in '"'I '"d modoio' of el.,licity of '!eel E, i' the'""' in te.,ion and JJ~ .'.Xu =
0.36fck. b
..... (4.10.lb) I
\

-/~:~+ 0.87 fA
yst-fA
sese (

I
or ... (4.10.lc)
X s

m
e u
j_ r-·

I
r------ 0.36fek' b
T It • ~~~
\

.
A5 c where, fse = stress in steel in compression. r-
II II !
d
fee = stress in concrete in compression at level of Ase == 0.45 f ek'
:;·~!
I I
I I
+
Jll. '• ••••
=
• • •
Ast1
I

ASI2 f
I (d-d)
I

l
c
f:
~
-feeAse =deduction for reduction of compression in concrete, which is displaced by
compression steel.
Comments: (1) In actual practice the refinement of deduction off A
ec se
is not considered necessary
('

c
Section subjected to
momentMu Sect-1: Resisting
•
~-----.J
• I
i and is usually ignored without much loss of accuracy. (See Eq. 4.10.lc).
(2) From Eq. 4.JO.lb it will be seen that the depth of neutral axis decreases with the increase in c
~
balance moment Mu Sect eN:. Resisting
1 balance moment Mu
2 -~.
compression steel thereby increasing the rotation capacity and ductility. Structures with high ductility
(a)
c
-·.·~

:""j
respond beller to . seismic/ wind forces (97!1).
The brillleness of the flexural member increases with the increase in amount of tensile steel.
cu T ~­
-l
·:r 4.10.2 Ultimate Moment of Resistance /""
\
N___,...--- .,

=
l (d·dc)
-~t

1
~
,.
The ultimate moment of resistance ( Mur = Mu ) of a doubly reinforced section (required in
analysis types of problems) is obtained by taking moments of cui and cu2 about the centroid of ('
(d-0.42 xu) + tension steel, (Fig. 4.10.1b ).
Now,Mlt =Mll 1 +Mll2 c
Tu

(b)
Tu 1 = 0.87 fy AS II
Tu2 = 0.87 'r Ast2
where, M111 = Ultimate moment ofresistance offered by Sect.-1 which consists of a couple
formed by clll and Till at lever arm ( d - 0.42XII )
c
Fig.4.IO.I: Doubly Reinforced Section
Mll2 = ( MU - MII1 ) =Ultimate moment of resistance offered by Sect.-2 which c
4.10.1 Depth of Neutral Axis consists of a couple formed by Cll 2 and Tu2 at lever arm ( d- dc ), in which
c
forces, With
(Fig.no,extenmJiongitOOinal
4.10.Jb) foree O<ting on ~e =ion, by "Joili!wiom of longitOOinal iotemal i de is the effective cover to compression steel .

Ii M 1 = C 1 x(d-0.42x )=0.36fkbx (d-0.42x)

ll "

Mu2 -- Cu2 x(d-de )-(f

u c u u
...... (4.10.2a) C
Totarcompression ==Total tension i.e.C == T. or C + C == ( T + T ,) == T se -fee )A se (d-d) ...... (4.10.2b)
where, CIt1 ==compression provided by concrete
II II1
in IISection-I. II2 It1 11- It
~

or Mu2 sfsese
A (d-d)
e
- e
...... (4.10.2c) c
It2
Mur == M=0.36fkbx(d-0.42x)+(f -f )A (d-d) ...... (4.10.2d)
C ==compression provided by compression steel in Section-2 making due allowance u cu u
s0.36fkbx
scccsc c
(d-0.42xu )+fA (d- d) ...... (4.10:2e)
c
fe< lo" of oompre,,ion doe to replaoement of"'""""'''''" by "eel area A". c u sc sc c
1
T ==tension provided by tension steel A in Section-] to balance C . Comments : It may be noted that M , the additional moment of resistance given by the couple C ('
It
2
Sf1 It u2 ll 2
T == tension provided by tension steel A in Section-2 to balance C 1, .
Exptes~ing
and T 2 cannot be increased indefinitely by indiscriminate increase of A and A . If more steel is provided 1\
It Sf2 11- u u a2
forces in terms of)'tresses in concrete and steel as: 1 in concrete section it causes congestion. This creatr.s practical difficulties in compaction of concrete
( 0.36fckb.X.. - f A ) + f A == 0.87 f-A resulting in air pockets and voids which reduce the effective bond between steel and concrete and also
u cc sc sc sc y st weakening of the section. Besides provision of more steel tends to increase the cost of the section for given (
...... (4.10.Ia) moment and hence bec()mes uneconomical. l.S. Code, therefore, limits the area of tension as well as
compression steel to 4% of gross cross-sectional area. (

c
'_J·
136 Limit State of Collapse - Flexure Properties of Doubly Reinforced SectiOn 137
~ Chapt<•r 4 sect. 4.10
4.10.3 Area of tension and Compression Steel :
! 4.10.4 Stress in Compression. Steel
'
·___) The area of steel is required to be obtained for resisting a given ultimate moment M . The The stress in compression steelfsc depends on the strain ssc at the level. of compression steel
moment Mu is equal to .the ultimate moment of resistance of the section, M• . II and is obtained from the appropriate stress-strain curve of the type of steel used.
_) M11 =Mur Mttl +M112 =
The area of steel A 1 and A 2 are obtained by laking moment of T about C and T ahour c
1- b-ll
T
_J
(see Fig. 4.10.Jb)Sl Sl M I11 II
1
II -,
2
·~t
~-
.... 11

-~-
~

\
'-" Mttl = O.B?fy;Asll( d;9A2x,) or Astl =0.87 f (d -0.42 x ) ··· ··· ( .10.3a)
For balanced section ; Y 11
4 d

__)

J
In design problems the section is kept balanced to make full utilisation of resistance of
concrete (see Fig. 4.10.2). Therefore A511 is worked out for balanced singly reinforced section.
Thus, for a balanced section,
l,..... Strain Diagram

_)
\
x11 =xtunax'·Mttl =Mur.max andA stl =A st.max =p/.max bd Fig.4.10.3
-d {. d\
.446fek
~
1
From Fig. 4.10.3 &sc· = 0.0035 T·=
X
0.0035 ~-+J
...... (4.10.4a)

r
_, .L X
J r::J.... T I fQ42xu Jde u . 14

~cut =0.36fckbxu.max
~
1 Tcu xu.maxl Cu2= (fsc ~'eel Asc d !d)
._)
X = ku.d & = 0.0035 1-~ ...... (4.10.4h)
Substituting u sc k
+ II

J
")

)
L Tu
rut =0.87 'Y Astt Tu2 =0.87 fy As/2
For balanced design, xu = x llmax ,
.
&sc =
(. d
0.0035~-~r o.0035 ~----;--}
\ (. d !d\ ...... (4.10.4c)
'-..-/
u.max u.max
.,
_)
Mu
Mutf=Mur.maxJ + Mu2=Mu-Mu1 In case of mild steel (Fe 250 ), the stress-strain relationship is linear and hence the relati<.m
Fig.4.10.2:Design of Doubly Reinforcement Section
Therefore, Eq. 4.10.3a can he rewriuen as : between x,. and fsc can be obtained as under :
For mild steel ,f = E x & s 0.87/. Substituting E = 2 x 10 N/mm~ and from Eq. 4.J0.4a
5
.J
Mur.max sc s sc y s
A _
.) f SC = ( 2 x 10"') x 0.0035 ( 1 - d I x ) = 700 ( 1 - d I x ) ...... (4.10.4c)
sri - 0.87 ~- (d - 0.42 xll.max )
...... (4.10.3h)
C II C II

)
Let us try to find out the relation
, between dc and x u so that f sc is not less than OJP f.,r and
._) andMu2 =M11 -Mttl =Tu2 (d-d)=0.87fA
c y st2
(d-d)
c
thus, ensuring that full strength of compression steel is used. ·
. A _ M u2 ·
J For f 1. 0.81f :. 700 (1- d I x ) 1. 0.87 x 250 i.e. 217.5 ,
•• .w2 - 0.87 f (d -d ) SC y C II
y c
(1-dC /x II )-t.211.5!700or dC JxII "}> 1-217.5/700(odl.69), :.dC j>0.69x II
~ Total area of tension steel A =A +A ) ...... (4.10.3c) .

.W1
.1"1 Sf.
Now normally, the doubly reinforced
. sections are provided when M u exceeds M ur. 1mut
. . , and
~) Byequilihrium, C 2 = T)
II ll_
:. (f
.t('
-J )A
CC .\"("
= 0.87Jr A )
y S/_ therefore, xu is normally equal to xu.zmll
. . • Assuming lowest value of x 1. . = 0.3 d
1 u. tnlll
cor~esponding
_ 0.87 ~_A,.12 0.87 ~.A
t")
---./
.
.. A - -----
512 ...... (4.l0.3d) to maximum 30% redistribution of moments,
or d I d "J> 0.21
sc ( f,.c _ ~) 1> (0.69 x 0.3d) i.e. 0.2ld c
f,c dc
""'I or
-" _ Mu2 _ Mu2 ...... (4.l0.3e) In actual practice, normally d /d hardly ever exceeds 0.2, and therefore, if it can he ascertained
A c
sc- ~. -
·:] (fsc - fcc ) (d -dc ) fsc (d -d~ ) that X is not less than 0.3d, f,.c in most cases, can safely be taken equal to 0.87 /,.·
11
 i sect::4.10
~\~\II\
Table 4.10•3 : values of 0.87 f, I fsc for lligb Grade Steel ~(\\

--
r-,- • "'""""""'e Chapter 4'. J \

Fe 500 '\
However in case of high yield strength deformed bars ( Fe 415 and Fe 500 } as the direct
Fe 415
' ' .\ '\'
1\
'.' \i

relation between & and f is not available, the inter-relationship between f and x cannot be 1--" dc I d
·SC SC SC U (. :.\!\.
established. Therefore, Eq. 4.10.1 which contains both xu and fsc is required to be solved by trial dc I d 0.20 '!
0.10 0.15 -- !

0.20 0.05
and error procedure to obtain the depth of neutral axis X11• For design problems the stress in ~ 0.10 0.15
0.05 1.247 1.864
1.103
compression steel is obtained from stress-strain curve of corresponding steel. The stress-strain ktl
.....-- 1.151 1.549 1.042
1.166 1.450 '· \\
·\
relationship is asS.umed to be linear for stress less than or equal to 0.8fyd, where,fyd = f/1.15 . For ~· 1.062 1.035 1.083
y ~ 1.024 1.227 1.126 1.247
0.30 1.046 1.101 1.069
stress greater than 0.8fya.... the curve is non-linear and hence the value of fsc is obtained corresponding • 1 1.020 1.150 1.030 U79
'· 0.35 1.081 1.058 1.103
1.018 1.037 1.027 1.171
to & using Table 4.10.1 while Table 4.10.2 gives values off for different values of d fd 0.40 1.062 i.111 1.100 l
1.028 1.057
-
'· sc
correspanding to ku.
Table 4.10.3 directly gives values of 0.87 fyu
sc

If which when multiplied with A~2 gives Au .

c
o.4S
0.46
0.48
1.017
-
1.017 1.026
-
1.056
-
1.097
- 1.026
- - -
J i

\
Table 4.10.1 : Stress-Strain Relation for High Yield Strength Steels Notes:
(1) Total strain consists of elastic strain and inelastic straw (s

Fe 415 Fe500
£1•"'""';' , ""'" '""" (2• lfr' J , :. /Ml'"" """' , rm•l ,.,,;, - "'"" ''""' ~

<-< F<>' F<4 15 ,mJ " '"'" Je.</ •I U91J 1,, , '"''' """' ' 0.00192 (S<e T<bl< 4.10.1 J
Stress level Total Strain Stress N/mm 2 Total Strain I Stress N!mm 2
El•"'" """' ' 0.9 ' ( 0.8h 415 )I( 2 ,!0')' 0.00162 • :. J.-W•< "";' d.OOI92 - 0.00!62 .0.0003

•b~<
0.00144 288.7 0.00174 347.8 { For further details see Table 2.6.1) y
0.80 fyd
0.85 fyd 0.00163 306.7 0.00195 369.6 ill u u "'"'""' lmm "'"'-'"'"' ""'"""'''I" high '"" "'"' 1r •I o.87f
4.10./J '""' ''' """
sc
""'"" "'' " , "";' of o.ooJs 1" F<4!5 " ' o.Oi!4I7 1•""00- Th<.,f<><< ''' ""'' t ;, ""'"""""
~'" ,.,.,;,g •I '"'""· b«~" w"""
0.90 fyd 0.00192 324.8 0.00226 391.3
0.95 t,d 0.00241 342.8 0.00277 413.0 ""' M><< ""''" •I 0.87{y "'""" l•lh '' ' ,.,.,;, «[ /~

!
0.975 fyd 0.00276 351.8 0.00312 423.9
0.0035.
1.00 t,d 0.00380 360.9 0.00417 434.8 4.10.5 Design Parameters for Doubly Reinforced Section
Th< <W;ign P""m''"' R, p and p for doubly reinforcrd ,;ectlons are obtained as under-
" t c
for balanced design , MH1 =Mur.max
Table 4.10.2 : Values of f sc for High Grade Steels in N/mm 2 l
~
M11 ==M ttr :::M ttl +M u2
Dividing both sides by bd we get ,
1
(
Fe 415 Fe 500 ! Mu =M ur.max +M112
t.
~ M11 Mur.max Mtt2 l
did
c
did
c .. -::::. + - 2-
kll 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 bd2 bd2 bd 2 (
1
Putting Ru = M11 f bd 2, Ru.nrax =Mur.max I bd
2
and R112 : M11 I bd ......(4.10.5a)
! {
0.30 353 340 314 233 417 393 349 233 2 \.
0.35 354 345 328 294 420 401 373 300 :. Ru :: Ru.max + R112
0.40 354 348 334 314
In design problems b, d arid design moment Mu are known, and therefore, Ru :::: Mll. I bd is known
422 407 386 349
0.45 355 351 340 325 423 411 394 369
0.46 - - - - 424 412 395 371 For given f and f R can be calculated. (
:. R
y , 'Rck ' - u.max
R . --- .•.(4.10.5b)
0.48 355 352 342 329 - - - - u..:. u u.nltl.\
--- --- ---- (
r~:"'

·140. Limit State of Collapse - Flexure

~-;:enapter Sect. 4.11 Types of Problems 141

{. d~
--J
Also M112 = 0,87 fyAst2( d -de)
··-=
•M
bd
087 ·f. -
u2
2
A1
y bd
c
--;;-•
st2 . 4.11.1 Analysis of Problem
Type-l(a) Analysis of problems using mild steel reinforcement.
_j
Given :/_., b, D, d', de' AS1, AX and mild steel reinforcement.
:. Ru2 = 0.87 fy p12 (1- de I d) R. . ~

~) or
Pa = . -# - -· Required: Mur
Now, A.S1 =A.s,ti +AS12 =At
S,max
+At·~ S<:
0.87 1, (1 _ dj d) ......(4.10.Sc) Solution.:
1
~
1. Obtain effective depth d = D - d' Assume f X = 0.87fy and calculate xU.
. Ast Ast.max Ast2
··-=- - + - 2. Substituting.fsc = 0.871, in Eq. 4.10.1c.
bd bd bd 0.87 f A I - 0.87 f A
__) Putting Ast I bd =pt , Ast.max I.bd
· =pt.fiiQ}c andAst21 bd == "' we get; P,~, • X

.. u
= _ _Y:.._s_ _ _ _
0.36fck b
sc_sc_ Ifx >x
u u.max
; takex
u
=X
u.max
·,

=
/, Pa Pr.max + P12
:; AJso by Eq. 4.10.3d, 3.calculate.fsc• fsc = 100(1-d)x) ...... (Eq. 4.10.4c)
......(4.10.Sd)
·:J 0.87 fyAst'2
A=---- Asc 0.87 fA (a) Iffsc :<! 0.87fy , then take fsc =0.871.y and the assumption is correct.
sc (fsc - fcc ) ··--= y
' st2 \
__) bd (fsc - fcc )x bd (b) 'If fsc < 0.87fy then the assumption is wrong.

''; Putting A I bd =p 0.87 f. 0.87 f. Recalculate xu by substituting fsc = 700 ( 1 -dc I xu ) in Eq.4.10.1a and neglecting[cc for
.___) sc c
:. Pc = Y • P12 .. ..! · P12 .....(4.IO.Se) simplicity and without much loss ofaccuracy. The Eq. 4.10.1a can be written as:
~j
where, f = 0.45
cc
L
c~
~c - fcc ~c

') These equations are useful in prepa'1ltion of d.,;gn ,;ds or ;n """""fer ,;ded des;gn. . . c b.xu +
0.36fk 700~- de~ Asc = 0.87 fA sl y
..__/ 4.11 TYPES OF PROBLEMS X
u

__) diagramVarious
below.types ofproblems that occur on doubly rcinforced sections'" shown ;n • sch-r;, or 0.36 fck bxu2 + (700 Asc· - 0.87 f ys
A 1 ) x u - 700 desc
A =0 ...... (4.11.1)
Obtain x" from solution of quadratic equation.
-~)
Type of Problems-Doubly Reinforced Sections 4. Check xu < x , section is under-reinforced. Calculate f x corresponding to xa.
I .
r
&~

J Type-I Type-II
1 5. Calculate Mur , M,., = 0.36fckbxu ( d- 0.42x") + f,cAsc ( d- de) ... (Eq 4.10.2e)

_j SECTION ANALYSIS SECTJON DESIGN Ex. 4.11.1 : Calculate the ultimate moment of resistance oJr R. C. beam of rectangular section ·
Given material properties (/, f ) Given material properties (f , f. ) 300 mm wide and 380 mm deep for the following cases :
C~ y CK J
J and sectional proper_ties ( b, D, A t' A )
s sc
and the section ( b, D; and M )
u
(a)A S1 =6Nos .. ¢20mm,A SC =2Nos.¢20mm,. (b)A Sl =5Nos .. ¢20mm,A SC =5Nos.¢16mm
To find Mur To find Ast and Asc Assume steel of grade Fe250, concrete of grade M20 and effective cover 40 mm on both sides.
J
r
1
1 r I
~ c = 20N/mm ,fy = 250N/mm , b =300 mm, D =380 mm, dc == d' =40 mm.
Given : fk 1 1

J Type ·I{•) Type-t(b) Tyt>e • 2{•) Type • 2{b) (a)A st =6-¢20mmandA sc =2-¢20mm, (b)A
,st =5-¢20mmandA sc =5-¢16mm
Ush>g mild steel Us;ng HVso b•rs To find ,.d A, A~ Also g;venA•. Required: Mur in each case.
~ re;nfon:emenr Ex. 4.11.2 .!or dM = 0. To find A• Solution :
_) Ex. 4.11.1 Ex. 4.11.3. Ex. 4.11.4.
d' == 40 mm, :. d =380-40 =340 mm, de= 40 mm.
The solution procedure. is given below separately for each type of problem.
(a) Ast = 6 of¢ 20 mm =1885mm2 , Asc = 2 of¢ 20 mm = 628 mm 2
'
._/
I
 Types of Problems 143 ·;:--111
·chaPter li
Assume fsc = 0.87 fy .. .sect. 4.11
·(F' ·r-~ .
~IJ
\ Hr
Hint : Guide lines for assuming approximate value of f,c to reduce iterations. l\1
0.87 fy A 1- f A 0.87 X 250 X (1885- 628) ··sume ku =03, xu =03d . , Calculate A~ 1 = 0.36 f ck b ( 0.3d) I ( 0.87'[.y ) rii\
~ ti
X::: sc sc = = 126.6 mm. A . ilj
J
u s
0.36 f;k. b 0.36 X 20 X 300 . For given (A" -A sc ), calculate, k11 =0.3 x (A,, -A,) I Awl "
rti
. \)
Calculate £ sr = 0.0035 [ 1 - de I ( k, d )]
'For Fe250, xu.max = 0.53d = 0.53 x 340 = 180mm. > x 11 !i
Determine approximately !, corresponding to £ sc from Table 4.10.1 and use it for calculations. ,-- ~ \
:. The section is under-reinforced. J! 0.87 fA - f sese
A
J,
. ij
!

yst
Check for fsc,sc
f = 700 (1 - dcu
I x ) = 700 ( 1 - 401126.6) =479 Nlmm 2 > 0.87 fy ( =217.5Nimm!) i. 3. Calculate xII = :II
\ i
.·. Take fsc =21 7.5N!mm 2 0.36 fck b
4 Recalculate & andf and iterate till assumed value is equal to the calculated value. I
-~!1.'I '
:. Mur = 0.36 fckbx11 ( d -0.42 xu) + f scAsc ( d- dc ) . sc sc ' . \ '[;
5. Calculate M w by taking moment of Cu about Tu using Eq. 4.10.2e. I!
::: (0.36 X 20 X 300 X 126.6 ( 340 -0.42 X 126.6) + 217.5 X 628 ( 340- 40 )} J0-6
=78.4 + 41= 119.4kN.m. Ex. 4.11.2 : A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular section is 230 mm wide and
c:: ,;
I!
530 mm deep with an effective cover of 55 mm for both tension and compression reinforcement
Note :If refinement for deduction off = 0.446fk is done, then M = 117.9/cN.m. The consisting of 5 Nos. 20 mm. diameter and 5 Nos. 16 mm: diameter bars re:,pectively. Calculate c 1
i\
.. cc . c
refinement shows an error of 1.4% which is negligible.
ur
the ultimate moment of resistance assuming concrete M20 and steel Fe 415. li·
c''l
. ·I
i!
(b)A X =5 -j616mm=l005mm2,AD =5-rP20mm=1570mm 2• Gl·ven : b = 230 mm, D = 530 mm, d' = dc = 55mm, A~ = 5 Nos.# 20 mm., Asc = 5 Nos. # 16 mm
2 2
~nl
0.87 X 250 X ( 1570-1005) fk =20Nimm ,f = 415Nimm .\ l·n.
II
c y
~x=
11
0.36 X 20 X 300
=~9mm Required: M ur.
Solution: d' =55mm,d=530-55=475mm, dc ld =551475=0.116
cl)
r:
:. fX = 700 (1- 40./56.9) = 208 Nlmm 2 < 0.87 fy A
~
= 5 Nos. # 20 mm =1570mm 2 , A = 5 Nos. # 16 mm =l005mm
K
2
r:l !:I

2 ! ~
:. Assumption is wrong. Calculate x using Eq.4.ll.l
2
II
(A -A ) = 1570- 1005 = 565mm
st sc
.
c!.i
.As per given guide lines calculate fsc as :
0.36fkbx
C y Sl )xII -700dC ASC =0
II +(700A SC -0.87fA ... ... (Eq.4.1J.l)
(~ .. ·
2 0.36 f.k/J ( 0.3d) 0.36 X 20 X 230 X (Q.3 X 475) ?
0.36 X 20 X 300xII + ( 700 X 1005-0.87
.
X 250 X 1570 )X - 700 X 40 X 1005:::0
U A = ' = =653mm-
2 For k, =; 0.3,
0.87 f\' 0.87 X 415
:.x +167.6x -13028=0
u u
, :.x =57.8mm.<x
u u.max
(=180mm) sll
r
J:c = 700 (1-40 I 57.8) = 215.6 Nlmm 2 <( 0.87fy)
For given (A,., -A_.), k, = 0.3 x 565 I 653 = 0.26 (
2
Mur = 0.36 fkbx
c u
( d- 0.42 xu ) + fscAsc ( d - dc ) From Table 4.10.2 fordc I d = 0.116 and ku=0.26, f ~ may be taken nearly equal to 340 Nlmm •
::: [0.36 X 20 X 300 X 57.8 (340- 0.42 X 57.8) + 215.6 X 1005 X (340- 40))10-r. Try f_., = 340 N I mm 2 .
= 104.4 kN.m.
:. 0.3f/'1 ckhx
· u
+f scAsc = 0.87 fA
y st !
Type-J(b) Analysis Problems- HYSD bars 0.36 X 20 X 230 X X It + 340 X 1005 = 0.87 X 415 X 1570, Solving X
ll
= 136 mm ..

Given :fie'c b, D, d'.' d,c Ast' Asc. and HYSD hars Check for f
sc
, &
sc
= 0.0035 ( 1- 55 I 136 ) = 0.00208 r
Required: M 2 2
From Table 4.10.1 by interpolation fsc = 331 N/mm , <assumed/sc ( = 340 N I mm )
ttr
\~
Solution Procedure : In second trial, assuming fsc = 332Nimm 2, x = 141mm.
1. Calculate d =D - d · .. ll
(
For x u = 141mm., £ sc = 0.00213.
2. Assume J:c
From Table 4.10.1. f,c = 332.8Nimm-' =assumed value. ( = 332 N I mm-)
7
r-'
I,
For Fe 415, xu.max = 0.48d = 0.48 x 475 = 228mm. :. xu < x u.max
c
 j1ii'!f
' .
L-.Ji!
}
.~- 144 Limit State of Co/lapse - Fi'XHre
·~;
./ ~

-._)
:. The section is under-reinforced.
Types of Prob.lems 145
·J
\
:. M =0.36 fkc b Xu ( d -0.42 Xu ) +fsc Asc ( d- dc )
w~
ur
., . Required:
,
Ast and Asc in each case.
=. 97.08x+20140.13
"(0.36 141 (475- 0.42 x 141) t 332 x 1005 (475 -55)) x
x 23o=x 237.21kN.m.
J
4.11.2 Type-2(a) Design Problems
-~olulion
jf\!1' ~> .. :
(a) fy = 250 N/mm 2
'-'
) Given : fk , f , b, D, d', d and M Let d' =55 mm =cover to tension steel. , d = 300 - 55 = 245 mm.
c y c u
Required: Asc' Ast
_) Solution Procedure :
for M20 - Fe 250, from Table 4.5.1, R = 2.97 N lmm 2, p == 1.76%, k
u.max t.max u.max
=0.53.
( orR u.max = 0.36 x 20 x 0.53 x (1 - 0.42 x 0.53) = 2.97 N lmm 2•
_) ( i) Calculate ku.max , Ru.max using Eq. 4.5.2c and 4.5.5b Mur.max = Rumax.bd2 = 2.97 X 300 X 245 2 X 10-6 ::: 53.48kN.m.
ii) Calculate M == R bd
· ltr.max u.max 2 Mur.max < Mu (== 87kN.m.) :. The section shall be doubly reinforced.
\
0 (iii} Compote A,a fut b<>laoooed •ootioa ( Soo Sect. 4.1 0.3 ) Mu2 =Mu - Mur.max = 87 -53.48 = 33.52 kN.m.
A =A ::: M Tension Steel:
~ stl st.max
0.87 f (d- 0.42x ) or Mur.max
u.max ·A = where, xu.max =0.53 x 245 = 130 mm.
~ (iv) Compute M == M y- M Astl ::: P,:maxbd ... ... (£q. 4.J0.3b) • · stl 0.87 fy ( d - 0.42x )
2 u.max
u u ur.ma.x
53.48 X 10 6
=._; lfthe spaa aad loadiog is givea calcobte oltim•te momeat M . A =1291mm2
2
(v) Obtain ASf by taking moment ofTII about CII • using Eq. 4.10.Jc stl 0.87 X 250 (245 - 0.42 X 130 ) .
,'-, Total area of tension steel ==A A2 + A 2
II

= Mu2
'-../ Alternatively,:. A =p bd = 1. 76 x 300 x 2451100 =1293 mm 2 , A,1J =
Sf Sf1 s/ "1 t.max. . ·- 0.87 f (d -d )
(vi) Calculate Asc either from M,, or from As as2 follows. 33.52 X 10 6 Y c
J 2
12
Assummg c -
· d -40
mm.
* A st2 == 0.87 x 250 (245 - 40 )
=752mm 2

~
2

~ if~ - f~ )( d- d, J
A ::: M ...(Eq.4.10.3e) 0.87 f. A
or A ::: --!___:!_
:J Ast =A st 1 +A st2 = 1291 +· 752 = 2043 mm 2* :.
'' If" - !,,! 2 O.K.
... (Eq. 4.10.3d)
_) Compression Steel :
For Fe 250, f sc = 700 ( 1 ·- dc / xu.max ) but "J> 0.87 fy

"'·~
.
j f may either be taken equal to 0.45fk or may be ignored. Iff is ignored, A ::: 0.87 f .A 1f--------
For mild steel (Fe250), f == 0.87[ and, therefore, A ::: A . =700(1-401130) =485 N I mm 2
but "J> 0.87 x 250
" _ SC y '' sc Sf "
I 2 2 = 217.5 N I mm2
'-' Fot HYSD b•" (Fe 415, Fe 500), the v.loe of '"io 0.87 1,.1 f" m•y be oh,.ioed fmm
0.87f.A 512 0.87f.A 512 • . ,

:J Table 4.103. Othenvi<e,fu m•y be obt•io"<J oorrc<poodiog to cu from the "'"' st,.ia '""''· Now A = ·Y = > :. In th1s case A ==·A = 752mm- •
sc f 0.87f sc
7
. _,r_
wh«e Csc "0.0035 (1-dc /xu.max} ...... ( Eq. 4.J0.4c)

'""'~ '"""'"~"'" >hoi/"~ "M.<-~"icn.

sc y
')
-' (b) For Fe 415, since A51 required would be less, the cover d' may be assumed to be less.
Hints' The"""""""' oe <einfoe"mem aeeed 4% of Mot
The rompeenio" ""' shall he loreeo 1/y '"!'!"'Ned by "ieeop.< ""''di"g lo '"les of lore, I ""' '" Let d = 40 mm and dc = 40 mm. :. d =300 - 40 =260 mm
~ be provided on both sides.
<olomos. /, ""e of m<mhe" Whkh "" likely w h< Whfec!ed W ""·''"" "" ei1hee <ide, equo/ aeeJ shoO
For M20- Fe 415, from Table 4.5.1, Ru.max = 2.76 N I mm 2 and pt.max = 0.96%
J Ex. 4.11.3 'De"):n the '<info"'"""' fo, a 'einfo"ed conc<ete beam 100 mm wid• Mur.max =Ru.max bd2 =2.76 x 300 x 260 2 x 10"6 = 55.97 kN.m < Mu (= 87 kN.m.)
(a)-Fe
and 100250
mmand (b)of
deep Fe 415. M20 lo 'esist an ali'""'" m•m-.t of87 kN.m. a•ing steel of g'ade
geode
~)
:. The sectiOns hall be doubly reinforced. M 112 =M 11 - Mur.niax =87- 55.97 =3!.03kN.m.
Da~a(a) ' fb "== 300 t m, D
1
~ 300 nun, M;, " 87 kN.m. , 1,, ~ LO N!mm , \ . , 2 * Comment : Since usually Asr required is large, it may be reqU!r· ed to be provided in two layers
:J ")' 25r !11un:_, (b)f == 'l_J ·. l :nm
)' 1 2
•
while A
K
can be accomodated in 1 layer. Therefore, it is likely that cover d' on tension side is greqter 11·r
- .
cove~ d, required on compression side. It is not necessary to assumed,= d'. On the contrary, lesser value of
' r I I ~-- - - 1----- ~- ........ A ;.,. rnnuirbA
 Types of Problems 147
--~~

~~ ... ... (Eq. 4.10.2a)

146 Limit State of Collapse - Flexure -~'
Chapter;{i.~ Sect. 4.11 M
ul
=o.36fckbxu( d - 0.42xu )
";f (2) Determine xu by relation

~
. ,.,.., Stell : Ji ... ... (Eq. 4.5.lb)
4.62M )
A
111
=
0.87
M
ur.max
fy (d ...: 0.42xu.max )
where x u.max =ku.max.d· =0.48 x 260 =125 ''"'•
...... ' n.esotutiono!wbich~give"by xu =1.2 - fck bd •L .d
1--
2

55.97 X 10 6 (3) l)el<nnin"•- lot given f"' f, ' Checl< that x• < x -
=747mm2

- ~- ~j
:. A - =
stl 0.87 X 415 (260- 0.42 X 125} ... ...(Eq. 4.1 0.4c)

,., M 2 31.03 X 10 6
4) Check for fsc. For Fe 250,
·
fsc =700 - Xu
but 'J. 0.87f.y
A = u =391mm2 (

~- _£\x7
512
0.87 f
y
(d _ d )
c
= 0.87 X 415 (260- 40)

Ast = Ast1 +A st2 = 747. + 391 =1138mm2 For Fe 415 or Fe 500, £ sc =0.0035 u

Compression Steel : ,od f ~ obtoinod from Table 4.10.1 .,..,spnnding lU &><.

dC= 40/260 = 0.1538, &X = 0.0035 ( 1 - dC I d) sc M A fA .
In this case xu= xu.max = 125mm. as calculated above. :. £sc = 0.0035 ( 1- 40 I 125) = 0.00238 (S) eatculate
A
,n ~ Q.8'iT,1d- - ".!..---:-::-
o.42x, )
and
,a
= sc sc
0.87 f, ' A, ~ A,a + A"'
(342.8 - 324.8) '
f = 324.8 + x ( 0.00238-0.00192) = 341.7 N I mm· 45
Ex.1.11.4: A. R. C. beam 300""" wide and 0mm deep lw to "sist a d"ign
sc (0.00241-0.00192) ~~ -ent of 150 kN.m. at an inte'metfial' sUfP"'t of a contmUoUS beam. A'-<uming conmte
0.81fy.Astl 0.87 X 415 X 391 ·i J' Sl '
of wade M20 and mild steel "'""''cement (g'ad' Fe250), calculate A ot top tf 3 N
OS.
Asc = 341.8 = 413 mm2 i
fsc ~ 916 mm a" ,equu-ed to be continUed at boffO"'_frD"' one span tooth", with an effectW<
I~ cow' 40 mm. to comp"ssion S1Ul. Ass"'' efl"""
cove' to ""'""" steel equal to 50 """
~­
'* ~ WN!mm' .1, ~ zsoNtm..' , b dOOmm, ~
2
The factor 1.056 can be used to get Asc directly as Asc = 1.056 x 391 = 413mm from
~ Given : f D 450 mm, d' =50 mm
Table4.10.3 fordc I d = 0.15 and ku = 0.48 for Fe415. ~ M = 150 k.N.m. A =31'los. ~ 16 mm with dc = 40mm.
u ' ~ .
4.11.3 Type-(B) : Design Problems
Given : fCKY
, f, b, D, d(J ;M,
II
Asc, Required: Asl
Required: Ast when Asc is also given.
Solution :
Comments : This type of problem occurs when due to requirements of detailing A sc happens to be Let d' =50 mm' dc = 40 mnt.
over and above that required. For example, in a continuous beam, some of the bottom bars from adjacent .. d =P - d' = 450 -50 = 400 mm.
Nos.-~ 16111111::603 mm
spans instead of curtailing are continued at bottom over an intermediate support or even some of them are 2
curtailed the area of steel is in excess of the requirement as compression reinforcement. In such a case, the Asc =3
section no more remains balanced section. but becomes under-reinforced-and A sl is no more. equal to
1 Assuming f = 0.87f (because steel is of grade Fe250
472
)~
A of a singly reinforced section. Problems w·ising out of such situations come under this category. M'sc =fA
>< K (d.:.d <)::0.87x250x603(400-40)x10·6_
y
st.max ' - • kN.m.
Solution Procedure : 2
M = M - M = 150-47.2 = 102.8 k.N.m.
When Asc is given and Ast is required to be calculated. u u u2 ·
1
(_1) Assuming/
. sc
, obtain Mu2 =f sc Asc ( d - i)
c
(Eq 4.10.2c) But Mul = 0.36 f ck b xu ( d - 0.42 xu )
and hence Mul =M11 -Mu2
 _ .,_,_ure
The solution of this equation is given by

PARTC
\"1.2(_~) .d
From Eq. 4.5.1 b,

~lc btf
j
FLANGED BEAMS
_)

f
-_ l ·z J-
\

1- 4.62 X 102.8 X
lOJ X.
20 X 300 X 400 2
400
.
·'': :~tifiii:~~'
-. 4.t2tFLANGED SECTIONS
_:.1.4.12.1 Introduction
~ 138.8mm < xu.max(== 053 x 400 ::: 212 mm)
,.~,~ ·'.
·' ·r: ·.,,With the exception of precast systems, reinforced concrete floors, roofs, bridge decks, consisr
of~ and slabs which are almost always cast monolithically. Forms are erected for beams and
Check for ~c :. xu. < xu.ma.x :. The section is under-reinforced. sl~ (9gether and concrete is poured in one operation from bottom of the beam to the top of the
~iab. Stirrups and bent up bars also extend into the slab. This results in an integral connection
k~eenthe slab and the beam due to which certain portion of the slab acts along with the beam in

:i_~
ForFe250, ;esiStingcompression, in sagging (positive bending) moll?-ent regions of the beam and it acts like a
fsc == 700 x (- but 1> 0.87 fy fl~~ge of the beam. The total resulting section is a flanged section in the' span region as shown in

. u.
X
1/
Fig. 4.12.1.

~
P,

fsc " 7(}() X \ 4- 138.8) b"t > 0.8Jx 250(" 217.5) ..-------------:: r -----------:
I
t T-Beam\.
1'1
!:1 l-Beam'\.
I
1

:
I
~=:
I 'I
~:I
2 ·: I ;I I
I ~ 1! 1 c-- I
== 498 N lmm but 1> 0.87 x 250 ( ::: 217.5 N I mm 2 )
:. Assumprion torf is correct. : oi·:~JL !
sc :

11--- L1
1,
.

.
--t:
.!:!.
I ·I

I::
1

L2
L2 --+1
I

A :::-
M
II] -
I :
I
1- 2 -+,
I•
I 2'-+1 I

I I!:
sf! 0.87 f (d- 0.42 XX ) · .~------------J :. I
)' li
R L', L2 _1
~B=-'-+--
102.8 X 10 1' 1 2 2 I
--0.87 X 250 (
-
400 - 0.42 X 138.8)
--- I I
I j-bt---t>j I

== 1383mm 2
Since
~c ==0.87f,
)' L-beam
(b)
:. ASf2 ==A SC == 603mm 2
Fig 4.12.1 : Flanged Action
ASf :::A Sf1 +A Sf2 == 1383 + 603
Thus, in the case of a flanged section, part of the slab ( bf ) acts along with the beam
::: 1986mm 2 in resisting compressive forces, provided slab lies in the compression zone wiih respect to

~ihfonW •oc<km i< "qoi"' A, • 21 15mm'

bending of the beam and provided both slab and the beam are effectively bonded together.
Comm,., ' If th, »m, =liM U de,;_ "' dooh/y The portion of the beam below the flange is known as web or rib of the beam. The slab thus
and Asc == 89mm'. Thus the excess quantity of steel in tension == 2204- 1986 == 218mm'.
performs twd functions. It transfers the load to the beam by spaning across the beam and also
assists the beam in transferring the load longitudinally. The two actions are slab action and the
i.e. about 10% excess over actually required qua'ltity of steel of !986 mm in this case. beam action causing normal stresses in slab at right angles to each other. 'I!
2
• Stresses acting transversely to the beam due to slab action generally do not affect the longitudinal
strength to any appreciable extent.
 i:;r·:. .:~·::~~\.;~: 0 ~~'')?t langed Sections 151
"'"~"'of ~~~~1~~·:.~~ .in~~
1

~~~~am
umm ,:,rate of Collapse : Flexure Chapter4 the §lab rot>'J"'allel to the t><am a s not adequate to.b

~heretore,
ond b?m together and the ,tab - not a nul"' the ,lob
At intermediate supports of a continuous beam, the beam is subjected to negative or hogghig bOnd<d with the beam ttan,.erselY. t • " ' ' <, Uth<'lab ffi required to act
moment causing tension in the slab region at top with the result that the slab portion becomes ". nange. uan,V""' rein[orcemont (ptrpendicular to the bean!) i' required to be provido:d at the

mi~an
ineffective in resisting compression and the effective section of the beam is simply a rectangular iPP in the [lange portion for a length equal to L/4 011 each ,;de ofth< beam where L ;,; the ,;pan of
section. Thus, at supports ofa continuous beam, the beam no more acts like a flanged beam but just the ,tab .nd the tom,;verse reinforcement ,hall not bel<" than 60% of main !Oie<l at of
a rectangular beam with total depth from top of the flange to the bottom of the beam (and NOT the
depth below the flange of the beam) even though the slab and beam are cast monolithically. · slabUas
the maY he rementbero:d
shown in general that since the area of tonclete in compres,ion of a Oang<d
in Fig. 4.12.2.
When the slab occurs on both the sides of the beam as in the case of an intermediate beam, IJeOlU;,; quite la<g< " oomparo:d to that of a rectangnla< ,ecrion, the flanged section"'" offtt large
the section looks like aT-section and the beam is known as T-beam. When the slab is only on one
t~
-ent of resi,tance than the rectangular section. It is, thttefore, alwaY' economical and
side of the beam as in the case of a spandrel beam (an outermost beam at the end of floor slab) the ;d,antage<>US to design beam" a Oang<d beam utilizing the romposUe (integral) actio• between
seetion becomes an inverted L section and the beam is kno~n as L-beam. In a flimged beam, the
flange provides compressive resistance while the web provides the depth, and hence the lever arm, the beam and the slab.
shear resistance and' the stiffness. The width of web mainly serves to accommodate the area of
4.12.2
In a beamEffective Width "ction,
of rectangular of Flangethe cornpte"i" stre" acting normal to the ,;ection ;,;
tension steel. The entire slab-beam system is also looked upon as a stiffened or a ribbed plate in
which web acts like a rib or a stiffener. con'tant along the width of the "ction becouse the width h small in compari,on to span of the

~h< ~
beam. In tbe 1\ango:d beam, ,;nee flange is su!Hciently wide, the normal rompre<iive stt<S' is not
Comments : Will a cantilever beam with a slab cast monolithically at top act as. a flanged beam
under the action of downward load ? Obviously not. Because the slab lies in the tension zone and hence oon,tant along the width oftbe Oaoge. stre" is maximum ( fmax ) oqua! to the'""" in beam
ineffective in. resisting compression. For the cantilever beam ·to act as a flnnged beam, the slab shou/J be at the contre of the beam width and it reduces with the di>;tance !mm web, with minimum valuo
provided at the bottom of the beam. ' occurring at midspan of the slab. It is found tbat tbe j>&rt of the flange away [rom th< t><am is

It may be noted that normally a slab spans across the beams and, therefore, the main
reinforcement of slab runs at right angles to the beam which further helps in bonding the slab and
the beam together thereby ensuring the monolithic action between them. The bonding of slab and
beam in the vertical direction is a(;:hieved by continuing stirrups and bent up bars in the beam into
the slab portion also. Therefore, for composite action between the slab and beam, not only the
monolithic casting of slab and beam is necessary but the vertical and transverse reinforcement
connecting the two is also necessary. However at times, a situation arises when the slab does not
~he
re!ievo:d of some j>&rt of the normal streS' due to shear defomtation of ,tab between the beams (in
the plane of the slab). Tbi' phonomenon i' known " shear lag. • portion oftbe flani,e width
(), 12 + L 12) acting with the boam ;,, therefore, 'objected to va<ying normal ,tress " ,bown in
2
1
Fig.
1 4.12.3.2 The total compte''ion o!fero:d by tho flange over awidth (L 12 +L 12) with varying
""'' di,tribution can be rop!aced by an effective flange width b1,objected to unifomt str<" equal
to f · at the centre ofthe beam. !tidireet!y th<'lab ;,aid to contribute only a width equa\to bf to

r ;
span across the beam but parallel to the beam AB '(Fig.4.12.2). In such a case, the main beam for resisting compression, with a stress fmax .
themax
\ - - L1-\-= L2 - \

~·
I
I I
- - - ________ I I B
---------------------
. I , ,:
-----~,a~s~:s-e--1
steel i: (0.6 A ) 1 ~-------l-
I ---------
----:
. i! LIJ I" :

~~~~~~~~~~t=~~--L~
.J

\ I

: :A
I I
--- ----- _-_-_:-::::~--J
--1
! L\L __lL
Area ABCOE = Area pQRS
-==-.!

I , II
Fig 4.11.3 : Effective Width of Flange
I "ooks on advanced strength of materials (5111. 5913)
(
* Note : For details about shear lag please refer to "
Fig 4.12.2 : Provision of Transverse Steel for Flanged Action
 Properties of Flanged Section 153

152 Limit State of Collapse -·Flexure Chapter f: sect. 4.13

'C4Ise .1 : Neutral axis lying inside the flange i.e. xu< D1
i~
,.
1
x, > v .
_.)
·The res~lti!l~ction i~JLtlange_d_~~Jl..OJ~Jfectivellange..width-br- CIS'. 2 : Neutral axU lying ..,ide the jlange or inside the web
j
The study of eomposite action of slab and'beam indicates that normal stress-distribution along 'Ibis- is furthu subdivided into tw<> sub-parts depending on wbetbettlie rectangulaJ part
the width and hence the effective width of flange depends upon}he following factors. · of tlie sttess block (3x,17) is less tban D1 or gteate< than D1 as given belOW :
1
j (a) Distance between centres of adjacent slabs (L !2 + L !2 ),
1 2 c.se-2 a : -gulaJ part of the suess block less than D1 i.e. 3x J 1 < D1 orx, < 7D /3
(b)' Depth of slab or flange ( D ) ,
1
(c) Span of the beam L, ease . 2 b : p.ectanguhu part of tbe stteSS block greater than Dr idX, /1 > Df orx, > 7Df I 3
(d) Width of the beam bw , (e) End conditions of the beam, and ease-l. Neutral Axis lying inside the Flange (xu< D1)
(t) Nature of loading on the beam. Since the concrete below the neuttal axis is assumed to be crack£d, the flanged bealU can b<
-idered as a rectangulot beam of width b" b (Fig. 4.13.1) and the elq)fession for x,,
1
The recommendations given by IS:456 for using effective width of flange (00/l) for practical " and A fotsingly reinfo<ced rectangul.r beam can be used bY replacing bt in place of b.
design may be written in the general form.
lfJur'
J
st
(a) Depth of Neutral Axis (xu):
bf" k ( : ' + 6 D + bw <actwd width (B) ...... (4.12.1) F - <:qui\ibrium condition C"' " T, whe<e. C•f " compression resist<d by flange
... (4.13.1) ,\
;'i
0.87 fA
y s1

For Isolated Beams: b1 = k (( L ~1 0) +) + bw s actual width (B) ...... (4.12.2)

X =
u 0.36 fck. bf
:'\.\\\\
\!w
0 ~ ......(4.13.2a)
(b) Moment of Resistance ( Mur ) :
The bracked value in Eq. 4.12.1 and Eq. 4.12.2 represents the contribution due to outstanding
flanges. Thus, k =1 for T-beam , k =1 I 2 for L-beam , k = 0 for rectangular beam
where , B =actual width equal to the breadth of the beam bw plus half the clear distances to the
Mur : 0.36 fck bf Xu ( d - 0.42
or Mur= 0.87 fy Ast (d -
X )

0.42 x u )
u
......(4.1~
\\
i\1,.
J ......(4.13.2c)

~
· adjacent beam on either side. · fy A 1 I
b = effective width of the flange ,
1 or M ur =0.87 fA
y st
d --·__:__
f ck bf d
i
i
L o = dis~te between points of zero bending moments in the beam. \

t.(4~.13.2c)
4
~:o;e, which is quadratic in A ~.'i\I ·
1
For continuous beams and frames L 0 may be determined from actual BMD or in absence of (c) Area of steel (A sf ): .,.
actual value it may. be taken equal to 0. 7 times the effective span as specified by the code. It is given by soluti: o; Eq st' ·\\
.., ... (4.13.3) ~- j
bw =breadth of the web , D =Depth of flange= thickness of slab.
Comments:
1 A =~
5
1- 1- - " .b d
f . fd bf d
(l~lt may be noted that, the rep_Eesentation of b a{i per Eq. 4.12.1 and Eq. 4.12.2 are from the point
1
st
y
f
1'
l
_/
of view of understanding and for preparing computer program for analysis and design of both rectangular
\- -bt___, l }
-pWNPPA1 ,
and flanged beams ( 98/3). This is because all the equations used for flanged section automatically become
Cu = 0.36 fck 11t. X0
applicable for rectangular section because for rectangular section k =0, therefore bf = bw with the result .. T ~
the contribution from outstanding flanges ( bf - bw) automatically gets cancelled being equal to zero.
) (2) One of the examples of an isolated T-beam (Eq. 4.12.2) is a foot-bridge consisting of a beam (d-0.42xul
simply supported at its ends with cantilever slab pnvided at the top of the beam.
D d

lT \
4.13 PROPERTIES OF FLANGED SECTION i__,_Tu=0.87fy_Ast

4.13.1 Under-Reinforced Section ( xu < xu max )

In case of a flanged sectio,n, following different cases arise depending on the depth of flange
Dt in relation to the depth of neutral axis x u and in relation to the rectangular part 3xu I 7 of
i d.--~
1-bw-l
Ast_

Fig 4.13.1: Neutral Axis Lying inside the Oanges

rectangular-parabolic st!ess distribution.

 ,-
\
The biftlrcatioa betweea ease-l and case-2 ,4;13 Properties of Flanged Section 155

The bHiJreation betw..., ca.e-1 oqd =e-2 shan he the condition, x, = D

lying at the junction of flange and web as shown in Fig. 4.13.2.
i~ neutrnJ This stress distribution across the section can be taken equivalent to web subjected to·
1 . stress distribution for a depth equal io i u;and the outstanding portion of the
The mo-t
by replacing xu= n,as:
of resmtance of the section and the.,,. of steel""' be obttined finmEq.4.13.2, ( b - bw) subjected to rectangular and partly parabolic stress distribution which can be
1
...nnstaered to be equal to rectangular stress distribution of width 0.446 fck"" 0.45 fckover the reduced
for xu= D1 ,
From Eq. (4.13.1),
MurJ = 0.36 ~kbf D ( d- 0.42 D )
1 1 y ($ee Fig. 4.13.3b).
1
where, y
1
=0.15xu + 0.65 D1 s D1 ...... (4 . 13.6)
(
0.36~k b D
AstJ=----- 1 1
oj:s';1 .L
0.87f ...... (4.13.5) c
y ;TE3xull
_j_ _lXull
1- bf
---..1 c
} <'I~ 'T
Xu=D
l '-- fi·
-Jbwi--
Tu

c
~-bw~. :'\.0.45f0 k

D
,__
----;Trr·~
-A+--• J!:. W./4[-WMfr 'tt~rr:; (

1 J~
.:.-~.,.;_-:;·
d Cuw .
rd -0.42 o,J - N -·1-'-
1 I
d ( d • 0.42 xu) I I Y2) r·
\.
1 . + I I
1Asttl
10 ol
Tuw l~~l Tuf

fl bw f- ~ Tu =0.81yA
51
-!bwl-
(a) .
•,
(b)

Fig 4.13.3 : Parabolic Part of Stress - block inside Flange

Fig 4.13.2 : Neutral Axis Lying inside the flanges ~ c-
Case-2 Neutral Axis lying in Web xu> D : (a) Depth of Neutral Axis:
In th~ 1
~
""·the shape of con"''' und" compressron i!Self a T-secUon (Fig.1.13.3 and
cons~ts
The expression for the depth of neutral axis x u , can be written by considering equilibrium of \

cons~ts
Fig. 4.13.4 ). FO< convenience of oakulations, it is divided into two parts, one ofconcrete internal forces:
io the web portion of width b and depthxu , and the oth" of p<ojeotiog flanges of width Total compression C = C + C if = total tension T . (
( b1 - bw ) and depth D . w u - u u
1 where, Cuw = compression resisted by web , Cuif = compression resisted by flange
As mentioned earlier this case is subdivided into two sub-parts namely, Cuw + Cuif = 0.87 fy Ast
Case-2a: Jxu/ 7 < D 0.36fkb X +0.45xfk (b -b )y =0.87fA ...... (4.13.7a)
1 c w u c 1 w 1 y st
and Case- 2b: 'Jxu I 7 > D
1 Substitutingy = 0.15 xu+ 0.65D in the above equation we get,
Tbe properties of tbese are derived as given below: 1 1
Cas. • 2a ' Depth of "ctangu/ar pa" of stms block is less than the <kpth of the flange 0.87 fy A51 - 0.45 x 0.65 fck D ( bf - bw)
1
i< Jx, I 7 < D1 or x, < 7D /3 .
X =
u .. .... (4.13.7b) r
0.36fkbc w
+0.45x0.15fk c
(b -b w )
1 1

flange~
Since the depth ofthe rectanguJa, part of the scress block 3x /7 is less than the depth of the (b) Moment of Resistance :
1 u
flange
as ( D in) the
shown stress distribution acros, the depth of the
Fig.4.13.J. rectangular and panly parabolic The moment of resistance is obtained by taking moment of compressive forces about the
I
C. G. oftension steel and is given by:
Mur =0.36fkb c · w x u (d-0.42x u. )+0.45fk(b
c -b)w y (d -y !2) 1
.. : ... (4.1.3.8)
1 1
 _,,,_ ..
.--- - ~·texure
~
~-'
:·"'·'·
•:"'
•.'

~
__) (c) Area of steel .- 0.36f h X+ 0.45 f. ( h - h I Y Properties of Flanged Section 157
From Eq. 4.13.7a , A "" • • "" t • t
st
0.87 f.y A• - 0.45 X fck ( bl - bw ) D
0.87f
y ....... (1.13.11b).
_j 0.36fckbw
The bitiu<aring case between Case - 2a and Case • 2b is 3 x. I 7 c D .
tfll)l'~omem of resistance :
u f
.·. The limiting value of x in this case is x == 7D I 3 ::c.PJ1i<·!•,c0.36 fck bwxu ( d- 0.42 x) + 0.45 x~k ( b1 -:- bw) D1 ( d- D I 2) ...... (4.13.12)
u u 1
1 1
when 3x, I hD1 or x, o 7D1 I 3 , y o 0.15 , 7D I 3 + 0.65 Df oD fcJ Area of steel from Eq. 4.13.1Ja-:
_j :.
2
Mw ~0.36J;r 1
1
h.(? Df 13)( d -0.42n D 13) +0.45J;,( h -h.)D <! d-
1 1 D 12) 0.36 fck b w Xu+ 0.45 fck ( bl - bw ) D1
...... (4.13.13)
1

~
2 1 0.87 f.y
_) 1
or M., 1
0.84 fct h• D (d - 0.98 D1 ) + 0.45 f" (h - b• ID ' ( d- D 12) ......(4.1J.JOb)
(4.13.10a)
1 1 4.13.2 Properties of a balanced Section : For a balanced section, x = x . •
__; 1 u umax
This expr.,sion is ""f•l in bif•rcaring Case 2a and Case 2b. Wilen xu= xu max. the case is usually either Case-2 (a) or (b) ~epending upon the value ofratio
Case • 2b : Depth of 'CCtangu/a, pan of stms hWck gmuer thin the depth of/ku.ge lYid
,:L and Xumax
. I d. The limit dividing Case-2 (a) or 2 (b) is X =7DI I 3 (i.e. X I Dl= 7 I 3 ).
u u
3xu I 7 > D1 or X > 7D I 3
11
1 xu.max 7 Xu:max Id ·7 D 3 X ·
·rlliangxu
cons~nr
_) In this <:ase the stress distrib•tion aero, the depth of the tlange is kctanguJar and is subjected _,
=xu max -- = - or _ or I u.max

to stress of 0.45 J;, . Hence, •II the design eq,.rions can be obtained from Eq. 4.13. 7a
D
1
3 D
1
1d -J d=l--d-
~

to~! to~!
and Eq. 5.13.9 by replacing y1 by D1 or the eq••tions for x, and A• can be obtained by equating
The values of D I d dividing case-2(a) and Case-2(b) for different grades of steel are given below.
1
_/
compression
of tension steel. (see 4.13.4)•nd M,, by taking moment of- i v e fun:es •boot tbe C.G.
to Fig.tension
Steel X ld D ld
(a) Depth of Neutral Axts: umax 1
__j Fe250 0.53 0.227
0.36 f.,. h x + 0.45 fk ( h - b ) D == 0.87 f A Fe415 0.48 0.206
c•wu c 1 w
1
Yst
_, i
Fe500 0.46 0.197
...... (4.13.1Ia)
~--1 f- 3-Lt,_,
I 0.45/Ck I.S. Code recommends only a single value of 0.2 for D I d for calculating values of M urmax
T .. 1
and states that if D- I d s 0.2 , Equation for Case - 2 ( b ) shall be considered taking x u =x umax.
:::.I_t yxu Cu x 1
- --
j IN A Lu If D I d > 0.2 , Equation for Case - 2 (a ) shall be consideted taking xu = xumax.
1
Comments : This condition can be interpreted as: If the depth o_{ the flange is comparatively less, ihen
ru the rectangular part of the stress block will be greater than D1 ( i.e.3x.t 7 >D1 ) and therefore Case - 2b
~bw/-
will govern etc.
== According to I.S. Code recommendations, therefore, the equation for. Mur max and Ast max
.
_/
' I

r-;,--1
l_
.......,.._ ~ _, ~·.....c
-
'[3f'nd7x"
-- I
xu uw
~ l tl~
~-"17.7:77n!
,__., ~T
• f'lb,·b,.J.

I
Dr· t 1
1 0451

/ ·
I Cut
are as follows.
For Dl Ids 0.2 ' substituting Xumax for ·Xu in Eq. 4.13.12.
·

~dr--1-
N A L-
_)
d
-L
a·d·0.42xu) + I :
-- -
(d·DIJ2) M
ur.max
.
=0.36( bx
• ck w u.max
(d-0.42x.u.max )+0.45/k:(b
c
-bw )D
1 1
~d -Df)
- ......(4.13.14a)
sr J IAsrtl 2

~.!.1 u~
i • • Tuw • • T.
J
••
fig 4.13.4: Parabolic Part of Stress· Block Lyi!ig Outside t.be Flmge
.
M
ur.max
=0.36 X~ ~ _ 0.42
1
X Xu.m ~ fck bw fi+0.45fck. (bI . w f
D)
-b )D ~d -_._[_ (4.13.14b)
d d 2
 IJpes UJ rrov1ems l;JY (
·Ast.max ::: {0.36 fk c ( bf - bw ) Df } I 0.87 fy
c bw Xu.max + 0.45 fk 1

For D1 I d > 0.2, substituting xu.max for\ in Eq. 4.13.8

A = 0.5fkt
__ c 1- ~.6Mu~
1- - - .b d ... ••.(Eq. 4.13.3) \

Mur.max =0.36 fkc bwxu.max (d- 0.42 xu.max ) + 0.45 fkc (b - bw''y ( d- y 12)
st f·y ·
fbd2
ck I
I
\
1

M~·-" 0.36 •;':'.~ _-042

1
X (, X X •\ •
d '7/dbwd'+ 0.45 /d( b - bw) y
1 1
\--!-;c\
1
{, y
(4.
j3)r%en xu> D , Obtain A51 by relation A51 =M 11 I { 0.87 fy ( d- D I 2)}
JVrr ~~.
1 1
......(4.l3.18)

~is gives higher steel in most of the cases for xu s 7D I 3. It does, however, give slightly lesser
1
1 ·,~t~((to the extent of 5% to 10%) than that given by the exact approach for xu> 7D I 3. I
where, y = ( 0.15xu.max + 0.65D1 ) but > D ...... (4. 1
1
.U"··-·'(4) Check thatx11 <xu.max. If not, it shall be doubly reinforced.
c ( b - bw J y } 10.87 fy
c bw xu.max + 0.45 fk
Ast.max = {0.36 fk
1 1 Remarks: (1) It may be noted that in general the thickness of the slab is comparatively more.
4.13.3 A Simple Approximate Method for Practi<;al Dosign
~e
Case-] (i.e. xu< D ) always govern in design problems.
1
· ('

~e ~e
It may h< interesting to look towams pmblem of JJ,goo S<ction design liu,n haskprincipks_ (2) The doubly reinforced flange section occurs very rarely in practice and it can be considered
. merely an academic exercise.
AU expr.,;.., comidered earlior in the ana!y,;,, moment of resistance h"' been cal'"iato! (~

tension~. A~,
by talting mom"'" ofcomp'<Ssive f<>rels about e.g. of steoJ from ihe compr.,sion side bocause tt
~e
is difficult to Compute M.R. from since out of the total steel A- is having o.,
lev<r ann while A'if is having another lev,, ann The disllibutioo ofA, into A,if and A,. is no<
knOWn while tb< levor am,. are deoidod from positioos ;;l total com,.,,;,, forces C and c ·rf.
The Problem of d.,ign "'"be made extremely simple ifsingle lever ann is talreo fur steel and
uw
some simplitj>ing assumptiom aro made. For this PUipose, it will be necessary to note some poin•
u compared to that ofrectangular section. Therefore, for a doubly reinforced flang~d section the
so as to assist in making simplifying assumptions. These are as follows :
(a) For usual depths of beams adopted in l>'actieo (45/Jmm to 900mm) the flanged Sections are
iov.,iably uodeHeinfuoced. The doubly reinfurced flangid beam very mrely oecum in l'ractke.
~
(b) The contribution of moment of resistanCe offlaoge in total moment of resistance of the section.
is quite hu-ge compared to that of M moment of resistance of web.
4.14 DOUBLY REINFORCED FLANGED SECTION
c-
If the applied ultimate moment exceeds the ultimate moment resisting capacity of a singly
.reinforced balanced flanged section then the section can be doubly reinforced. It may be remembered
that since the area of concrete in compression of a flanged beam is quite large as comp~r~d to that \
of a rectangular section, the area of steel required for a balanced design will also be quite large as ,~
\
area of tension stee! will be very large and therefore, there will be too much congestion of tension
steel in web. For design of such cases it is preferable to increase the beam size. As already
mentioned earlier that doubly reinforced flanged sections are very rarely provided. For design of
doubly reinforced flanged sections the procedure for calculation of area of steel is similar to the one \
given in Sect. 4.10.3 and it is illustrated in Ex. 4.15.3d.

4.15 TYPES OF PROBLEMS

• (c) The
thanminimum
this for x lever
< 7Darm
I 3.forM>¢ when x, > 7D1 /3 is ( d - D/ 2 ) while it is always greater
11
1 The types of problems encountered in case of flanged beams are shown by a schematic \
diagram given below.
assumptions.
Ao appmximate approach to practical d.,ign c, be Workoo out on the basis of following (
Types of Problems
I
(•) Compression in web below flange and iffi moment of resistance is neglected and only flange of
·full width is considered to offer the moment of resistance.
r --1
(ii) Section is under-reinforced. Analysis Problems Design Problems
(Given material (fk,f ), Given material Propertiesfk,f and design moment \,
Ast may be determined by proceeding on following lines. c )' c y

M~
Section properties b , D , bw , D and Ast Mu or span, end conditions and load (
1 1
(I) Obtain M,1 (i.e. for\" D1 ), .!1., " 0.36 f., b Dtf d- 0.42 D )
(2) Compare M11 with Muri . 1
I
1
1 ... (Eq.4.13.4) I --1 I I c
_ If Mu > Mu1 , xu > 1J1 in which case only go to step 3.
Type-1 Type-2 Type-3 Type-4
u ur1 u
1 ·
M , x <bfD, in W!Uch case P«>coed accordiog to usual prOc<dure for rectangular
If M <taking·b'=:
section TofindMur To findMur.max To find Ast To find A st and A sc
for given Ast and Ast. max Ex. 4.15.3 (
Ex. 4.15.1 Ex. 4.15.2 Ex. 4.15.4 Ex. 4.15.3(d)

(
 Types ofProblems 16 f

w.m~ using Eq.4.13.14a and A~- from

160 Limit State of Collapse -Flexure
,..
~,.,.J
1f x > x -·v put xu= x -··and calculate M
·· • •- -
The detailed procedure to be followed for each type of problem to obtain the solution is
below with illustrative examples. ,fq. 4J3.15. . . .
4.15.1 Type-1 : Analysis Problem • General ··
-····t
If x < x -n• calculate, Yr and then M , y1=0.15 x + 0.65Df ... (Eq.4.13.8)
u u........ ur u
While analysing a given section, the question always arises right in the beginning as to 1
·. M.,. =0.36 f., bJ,f d -0.42 x,) + 0.45 f" ( 61 - b.) y1( d- y /2)
tA\ ~~ -·

~
equations of the three cases discussed in Sect. 4.13 be used, since the value of x itself is
' u
known. As usual, one may adopt a process of "assume and verify" here also (i.e. assume xu.< «
\ . (3) uoLon the bo>m reqoil<d to be catcu\at«< then obtain oltimate mo-tM in temtS
and use equations of Case-1. If xu actually comes out to be greater than.D by that equation, " .
'iifUftUttate ' hen«
toad wu , span and end ronditions. Equate Mu with Mur to getonkOOWO wu and
1
means that the assumption is wrong and, therefore, proceed to equations of Case-2(a) and so .,.kUiate t\te working toad. by m.ndin'g ultiro>l£ load by the load factor.
Type-1 : Analysis problems procedure Jlt. 4.15.1 Ca}adate the uJrimate _ , of'""'""'' of a peam foY the following data '
Given :fck'fy, bf, Df ,bw, D andA 51 width of the flange = 1200 mm , Depth of slab "' 110 mm
Required: Mur
Solution procedure : The chaYacl<'~ti<
Effective depth = 600 mm, , width of web "' 300 mm
strength c<m"'" of
from teSf ,esultt obt~in<d ~ 22Nimni' and yi£1d
(1) Assume xu < Df and calculate xu by equating Cu = Tu
s~ess of steel is 460Nfmm .
. 2
__ / 1
0.87 fA Area of tension steel provided as ;
0.36 f b x = 0.87 fA or x = . Y st ••• ••• (Eq.4.13.1) (a)4-#25mm (b) 7-#25mm (c)S-#32mm
1~00
\ 2
ck f u y st u 0.36 fck. bf Given : f ck-= 22 N I mrrf , ft 460 NJmm , b1= mm ,
Depth of flange =Depth of slab = DI = 110 .,;;. , d = 600 rom bw = 300 mm
-/ If xu < D then the assumption is correct. Calculate Mur by taking moment of Cu about Tu;·--
1 Required : Mur for. three different va\ues of A•
__.; M = 0.36 fckfu
b .X ( d - 0.42 X ) ••• .•• (Eq. 4~13.2a)
ur u
Solution : 2
If xu> D then the assumption is wrong proceed to step 2. (a) A 5 =4.- # 25 mm0.87
~ ~
1 :-1963
f Amrn 0.87 X 460 xJ963
_/ 1
(2) Assume xu > 1D1 /3 and calculate xu by equating Cu =Tu Assume x, < DI ;. x = = = 82.66 mm < D (=110 """)
" 036f"bl
0.36x22x1200 I

10~
_j 0.36fckbw.X 11 +0.45xfck (b1 -bw)Df=0.81 fyAst ..•... (Eq.4.13.1la)

:. M :. Assumption is correct.
::: 0.36 f kbf X ( d • 0.42 X ) = 0.36 X 2Z X \200 X 82.66 (600 • 0.42 X 82.66)
_) fy Ast - 0.45 fck ( _.·b:1. .__
:. X =0.87
_______ - bw ) Df
___:_ ... ... (Eq. 4.13.Ilb) u.max c u 11
u
_) 0.36 fckbw :: 444.10 JcN.rn 2
Note: Instead of assuming 3x) 7< Dr we have assumed 3x,f 7> D1because the computations required (b) A :: 7 - # 25 rnrn:: 3436 rnrn
_.;' to be performed in the second case (xJ 7> Dr) Me simpler than the first case. viz. 3x) 7< DI
Check that xu < xu.ma.r , if not put xu = xu.max and calculate Mur.max using Eq. 4.13.14a and
st
Assume x < Df
I<
:. x =
u
0.87 1( 460 1( 3436
\).361< 22 x1200
~
= 144.68 mm > D1(=110 mm)

Asr.max from Eq. 4.13.15. Calculate M11r by taking moment of Cu abm:t T.u 1
:. Assumption is wrong. Now, a,;smne3x,l 7 > o1 oY x, > 7D 13
.J M
ur
=0.36 fkb .x ( d- 0.42 x ) + 0.45 xfk ( b - b ) D ( d- Df I 2) ... (Eq.4.13.12)
c w u u c 1 w 1 ; .x =0.87/y A" -OA5fk(bf
' w ... ••(Eq. 4.13.116)
-b )D1
If 3xu I 7< D then first calculate xu by equating Cu =Tu.
0.36 fkb X+ 0.45 fk ( bf - bW ) ( 0.15 XU + 0.65 Df) =0.87 fAt ... ...(Eq.4.13. 7a) u 0.36 fckbW
CWII C )!S .,. = = 166.24 mm < 7D I 13(= 256.7 mm)
j
., 0.8/ X 460 X 3436- 0.45 1< 22 (1200- 300) X 110
0.87 J,.A 51 - 0.45 X 0.65 fck D/ bf- bw)
• X u-
- ......(Eq.4.13.7b)
.. 0.36 X 22 1< 300
0.36 fck b,:. + 0.45 X 0.15 fck ( bf - b,.)
 ~., -~·--r~"" - ~·,t:A.ure

Chapter 4 ,;;:,$ect. 4.15 Types of Probkins 163 '

:. Assumption is wrong. :. 3xu I 7 < D
1 4.15.2 Type-2 Analysis Problem
For 3xu I 7 < D1 or xu < 7D1 I 3 calculate the depth of neutral axis by equating Cu == Tu ( Determination· of M.ur.max and Ast.max )
. 0.87fyA51 -0.45x0,65fck D/bf -bw)
" --~------------~~-----
X :: .
Given : fck, fy , D , D, d 't span, end conditions.
1
0.36 fck bw + 0.45 X 0.15 f.:k (b - bw) ... ...(Eq.4.13.7b) Required: Mur.max' ws (max. allowable imposed load).
1
Solution Procedure :
IV.,.: This eqwtion can =Uy be obtained from equilibrium <ONlitinn ofc, • c•• + Cwf" r. 1. Calculate L0 from given span, end conditions and bending moment diagram, else take it '
(see Eq. 4.13.. 7a and Fig. 4.13.3) and hence need not be remembered. Similarly themo.ment equal to 0.7L.
of resistance can be obtained by taking moment of C about T . ·'ill!~

u u Calculatebf' b = kx (L 0 16 +6.D )+ bw) s B ... ...(Eq.4.12.1)

1 1
• X - 0.87 X 460 X 3436- 0.45
, X 0.65 X 22 X 110 (1200- 300) k = 1 for T-beam , k = 1 12 for L-betim , k = 0 for rectangular beam
•' u - 0.36 X 22 X 300 + 0.45 X 0.15 X 22 (1200- 300) B = distance between centres of adjacent spans of slabs .
•~ where, L0 = Distance between points of zero bending moments.
:. xu== 198.8mm < 7D I 3 (== 256.7 mm) :. O.K.
1
700 700
I
~
2. Determine x u max = kumax d for ·given grade of steel from Table4.5.1
I ku.max = 0.53 for Fe 250 , 0.48 for Fe 415- and 0.46 for Fe 500.
xu.max == 1100 + 0.87 fy d== 1100 +0.87 X 460 x600=279.96mm ......(Eq.4.5.2a) I
~ 3. Calculate D I d , If D Id > 0.2 , calculate Mur.max as,
~ 1 1
:. xu < xu.max , the section is under-reinforced. ~
I Mur = 0.36 fk bx ( d- 0.42 xu.max ) + 0.45 fk ( b - bw ) y ( d- y I 2) ..(Eq.4.13.16a)
I- c w u.max c 1 1 1
Now, y1 = 0.15xu + 0.65 D1 == 0.15 x 198.8 + 0.65 x 110= 101.32 < D (==llOmm) I
2 where y = (0.15 xu.max + 0.65 D1 ) but > D1
c ( bf - bw ) yf ( d- yf I 2) 1
c bwXu (d..,. 0.42 Xu ) + 0.45 fk
Mur = 0.36 fk 1
f

Mur == [0.36 X 22 X 300 X 198.8 (600- 0.42 X 198.8)

•
~

·.~r
4. Compu te A ,A __
0.36 fck bw Xu.max + 0.45 fck ( bf - bw ) yf
.. (E q. 4.13.17)
st.max st.max
0.87 f y
+ 0.45 X 22 X (1200- 300) X 101.32 X (600 -101.32 I 2) JX 10·6 ~
:. Mur. = 739.89 kN.m
. If D I d :S; 0.2 take y = D in the above equations.
1 1 1
2 5. Calculate the allowable load w by equating M ur.max with Mu expressed in terms of wand
(c) A st = 5- #32 inm = 4021 mm , Assume 3xu I 7 > D or xu > 7D I 3 · .
L for given end conditions. Apply load factor 1.5 for ultimate load.
. _ 0.87 fy A51 - 0.45 f.:k ( b - bw) D 1 1
u
.. x -------------------------
1 1 Mur =Mu = 1.5 w x L2 x a
0.36 f.:k bw where, a is the B.M. coeffici~nt depending upon the end conditions.
Determine self weight wd =25bD (band Din meters) and hence w5 =(w- wd)
0.87 X 460 X 4021 - 0.45 X 22 (1200- 300) X 110
Ex. 4.15.2: A R.C. T-beam having total depth 380mm, width 230mm is cast monolithically
0.36 X 22 X 300 with slab 110 mm thick. The beam is simply supported over a span of 4.44m and spaced 2m
clc. Concrete mix M20 and steel of grade Fe500 have been used. Calculate the maximum

I
:. xu = 264.77 mm > 7D I 3 (256.7 mm) uniformly distributed imposed load the beam can carry and the corresponding area of steel.
1 :. Assumption is correct.
Given : A simply supported beam of span L = 4.44m, c/c spacing = 2 m
From = 279.96
xumax Eq. mm as obtained above , :·. xu < xumax , the section is under-reinforced.
4.13.12, D = 380 mm, D = 110 mm, bw= 230 mm. f ck = 20Nimm2 , fy = 500Nimm2.
1
Required : Allowable maximum imposed u.d. load and Ast.max.
Mur = {0.36 X 22 X 300 X 264.77 ( 600- 0.42 X 264. n)
Solution :
+0.45 X 22 (1200- 300) X 110 ( 600 -110 I 2 )J10'6 For maximum load, when Ast is not given, the section has to be a balanced section.
= 841.65 kNm
:. XII= xu.max 'M,, = Mur.max and AS/= Ast.max
Assuming d' = 60 mm, d = 380 ·'":" 60 = 320 mm
 Types of Problems 165
.. \IT, LUntt State of Collapse - Flexure Cfaapter 4. · 4.15
2
As the beam is simply supported, L 0 =L =4.44 m M = a. w L2 =a. ( 1.5 w) L
where,
II a·isII bending moment coefficient depending upon the end conditions.
ff>r'f-beam k=1, :.b = k{Lo+6D)+b ={4440+6xll~ +230=1630mm (:" , -UM" and b are given, directly start from Step - 2.
f \6 f w \ 6 J 1
(2) calculate Murl forMurl
Xu= Df ,
b1 < 2000 mm ;·. O.K. :. (bf- bw) =1630-230 =1400 mm =0.3n fck blr ( d- 0.42 Df) ... ...(Eq.4.13.4)

For fe 500,xu.max:: 0.46 d = 0.46 x 320 =147 mm > Df (= 110 mm)

Also Df I d = 110/320 =0.34 > 0.2 :. yf will be calculated. (3). Compare given Mu with Mw
· 1•
_lf.M >Muri ,x >Df ,andhencegotoStep-4.
y1 =(0.15 xu.max + 0.65 x D1 ) = 0.15 x i47 + 0.65 x 110 = 93.55 mm < 110mm :. O.K. 11
11

Mur.max = o.36 f ck bwxu.max ( d - 0.42 xu.max ) + 0.45 f ck ( b - bw >y ( d - y· 1 2) If Mu~Murl ,Xu~Df

1 1 1
= (0.36 X 20 X 230 X 147 ( 320-0.42 X 147)
. + 0.45 X 20 X 1400 X 93.55 X (320- 93.55/2 )) 10-6 (a) Calcu7>5~t-f-
f .
~3~.b
f b d2 f
d
... ...(Eq.4.13.3)

=
384.93 kN.m.
. st
y ck f
0.36 fkb c <b1 - bw ) y1
c w xu.max +0.45fk (b-) Calculate x11 from Eq. 4.13.1.
Asr.max =
0.87fy 0.87 fyAst
0.36 X 20 X 230 X 147 +0.45 X 20 X 1400 X 93.55 x=---
= . = 3269 mm2 u 0.36 fck. bf
0.87x500 Check xu < x umax
Load Cakulations :
NowMur =Mu =wL 2 2
u !8=1.5wxL !8, :. 384.93=1.5wx4.44
:. w = 104.14 k.N/m
·
2
/8
(4) ComputeMu2forx11 =7Df /3
. M,., "o.SA b,p ( d-r.. o.98~1
+ o.•s '" ( b1 - b.l o1( d- o1 12) (Eq.4.13.IOb)
1
:___<_S.elf weight wd = 25bD = 25 x 0.23 x 0.38 = 2.19 k.N I m (5) Compare given M11. with Mu2 •
:. Allowable imposed load ws =104.14-2.19 ==101.95 kN I m If M > M~- •\, > 7D 1_3 then go to Step -6.
11
1
1f~ sM ; ,X11 S 7Df/3 ·
4.15.3 Type-3 : Design Problem (Determination of As1)
In the problem of design also, the same question arises as to which equations of the three (a) 1 1 corresp>nding to given M, (by process of Uial and wor ) . ...(Eq.4.13.8)
Calculate~,
cases be used because exact position of the neutral axis is not known before hand. In this case also, . M =o.36 f k b x ( d - o.42 x ) + o.45 f k ( bf - b ) Yt ( d - Yr 12) ... ...(Eq.4.13.6)
instead of using 'assume and verify' approach, authors would recommend to calculate M111 and !"' c wu· u c w

Mu2 corresponding to xu = D and xu = 1D I 3 respectively. Comparison of given Mu with these where, y = 0.15 x11 + 0.65 D1
1 1 . 1
valnes immediately }ndieates the approximate location ofx11 and enables one to choose an appropriate · xu = xu.max
Check thatx u s xu max . If xu > xu.max , take
equation to determine the exact value of xu . (b) Calculate Ast. ... ...(Eq.4.13. 9)
Given : fk ,f, b , bW , D, D , d' and MII or span, loading and end conditions. 0.36Jckbw_X11 + QA5 fck { bf - b~) Yt
C y 1 1
Required : Ast. A=- -
st 0.87 fy
Solution Procedure : (6) For M u > M u . Determine xu corresponding to given Mu .
2
(1) lfM11 and blre not given directly but span, load and end conditions are given, calculate b
1 =
M 0.36 f k b X ( d- 0.42 X )+ 0.45 f k ( bf - b J Df ( d- Df /2) ... ...(Eq. 4.13.12)
andM. II
u c wu u c w

where, h == kx (L 0 /6 +6D )+ bw s B ... ...(Eq.4.12.1) Check thatx u s xu.max . If

1 1 · xu > x u.max , take xu ::: xu.max
_./.
B = distance between centres of adjacent spans of slabs.
L0 =distance between points of zero beni!ing moments
 .~unu .liate of Collapse - Flexure

:"?) Calculate A from known value of x .

M u
Chapter< I Sec.t. 4.15 Types of Problems 167

J (b) Given: Mu = 750 kN.m

Ast = c bw Xu + 0.45 fk
0.36 fk c ( bf - bw ) D!
. li Mu > Mur·I= ( 544" kN.m) calculated in part (a) above.
.
:. xu > D
1

r
... ...(Eq. 4.13.13)
0.87 fy Let us now, therefore, find Mur2 for x u =7D I 3. (= 7 x 120 I 3 = 280 mm)
1
Mu,2 = 0.84 fck bwDf ( d- 0.98 D ) + 0.45 fck ( b - bw) D ( d- D I 2) ... (Eq. 4.13.10b) .
Comments : In most of the cases of beam-slab construction x the thickness of the slab is sufficiently 1 1 1 1
r~sult i., == {0.84 X 20 X 250 X 120 (680- 0.98 X 120) + 0.45 X 20 X 750 X 120 (680- 120 I 2)} X 10 -6 •
u ·
large with the X 11 works out to be less than D and generaliy Case-/ governs the design.
== 283.4 + 502.20 == 785.6 kN.m
1
Alternatively, a simple approximate approach may be followed as under: I
·~ Sirrce given M.u ( == 750 kN.m) < Mw2 = 785.6 kN.m :. xu < 7D I 3 (= 280 mm).
(~) Calculation of M11 and b1 as in step-! of exact approach. tt The depth of neutral axisxu will now be determined by trial and error process.
1

(2) Calculation of Mui as in step 2 of exact approach. -~Y

t~.6MJ -~ Since given Mu is nearer to Mur2 , xu will be nearer to 280mm.

(3) IfM > M 1 , x > u . Proceed to step-4.
1 Try xu== 255 mm , yf = 0.15 xu+ 0.65 D
-~ 1
= 0.15 x 255 + 0.65 x 120 == 116.25 mm < D :. O.K.
~
0.5f

~
u u II
If M s M I , x s Df. A : 1- 1- - - 11 .b d 1
11 u 11 st f bd2 f Mur =0..36fkbxc wu (d-0.42x u )+0.45fk(b c 1
-b w )yf(d-y
_ 1
12)==Mu /
fy ck f
.·. L.H.S. (left hand side of the equation is) :
(4)Whenx11 >D1 ,ohtainA usingexpression A = Mu .
Mur == {(0.36 X 20 X 250 X 255) (680- 0.42 X 255)
'' 0.87 fy (d - D I 2 ) st
1 + (0.45 x 20 x 750 x 116.25) (680 - 116.25 12)} x w-6
Ex. 4.15 1 Calculate the area of reinforcement required for an L-beam of flange width
IOOOmm, {!onge thickness 120mm, width of rib 250mm, total depth 750 mm and effective =[(45.9000) x 572.9 + (784687) x 621.87]10-6 == 750.93 kN.m ""R.H.S. == MII == 750 kN.m
cover lfJ mm, to resist an ultimate bending moments of (a) 400 kN.m. (h) 750kN.m.
(c) 800 k''m. (d) 850 kN.m. Assume concrete of grade M20 and steel of grade Fe 415.
:. xu == 255 mm , xu.max == 320 mm as obtained in part (a) above. :. xu < xu max

f;iJ,-;: :L beam,b1 = 1000mm, D1 = 120mm, bw =250mm, D= 7.50mm,d'=70mm, cuw == 0."36 X 20 X 250 X 255 = 459000 N =
' cuif= 0.45 X 20 X 750 X 116.25 784687 N
fk=20N!mm
2
,[=415N/mm 2 · c + c11if 459000 + 784687
c y . Now A = uw 3445 mm2
Required :A Sl forMll equal to (a) 400 kN.m, (b) 750 kN.m, (c) 800 kN.m, (d) 850 kN.m. st 0.87 f -.., 0.87 X 415
y
Solution :
Note : While calculating M,., always first calculate in 0.36 fck bw x,, = c,. .. Newtons and
d = D- d' = 750- 70 = 680 mm , ( b - bw) = 1000 - 250 = 750 mm 0.4> f...k ( bf - bw) Yr = c.r in Newtons, since these values are required later in calculating A,,. This will
1
To locate x , let us obtain M . tor x = D avoid repetition of calculations and possibility of making mistakes and will result in saving in labour. In·
ll II 1 ll
(a) Given Mu 400 kN.m .= 1 the above problem, c.w = 459000 Nand c.r = 784687 N.
Alternatively, using simple approximate approach :
For x11 = D1. , (M11r I)= 0.36fk h D ( d- 0.42 Df )
c
1 1 M ~Oxl0 6
A = II =- - - - - - - - -
= f0.36.x 20 X 1000 X 120 X (680- 0.42 X 120 )j-X 10-6 = 544 kN.m st] 0.87 iy (d- Df 12) 0.87 x415 (680 -12012)
MII = 400 kN.m < Mll I , :. xll < D
1 == 3351 mm2 < 3445mm2 (i.e. about less by 2.7%)
For Fe 415, xu.nzax = 0.48d = 0.48 x 680 ==· 326 mm.
(c) Given: M0 = 800 kN.m .
Since x < D1 and D < x :. x < x :. O.K.
1

t-
u u.max u u max
Mu > Mur2 = ( 785.6 kN.m) calculated in part (b) above.

A -_ 0.5
st
-
fy
~k ~ 1- -4.6
~k
bfd
2
M~ b d -
. f - 415
X 20f
!J.5- 1- ~-6 1- X (400 x 106
20 X 1000 X 680
a
2
X
1·()()(} X 68()
:. X
11
> 7D I 3 == 7 x 120 I 3 == 280 mm
1
Now x ll will be obtained for Mw == Mu == 800 kN.m .
= 1720 mm 2 M ur == 0.361ck hwxu ( d - 0.42 xu ) + 0.45 f c *(h1 - hw ) D1 ( d - D1 12) == Mu
== ( 36 X 20 X 250 X U ( 680- 0.42 XII ) + (0.45 X 20 X 750 X 120) (680- 120 I 2) ': 800 X 106
 Types of Problems 169

168 Limit State of Collapse - Flexure Chapter 4

Total A required = 3869·+ 126 = 3995 m,(
_j
:. xII2 -1619xU +393915 =0- :. xu =298mm st
<,if eompressi<m Steel , dJ d." 40 1680 "0.059 , F<>< dJ d "0.059 and k," 0.48 ,
ziUIIIU = 326 nun as obtained in part (a) above. ,,,o.lf/ f, If~ "1.0186 fionl,Table 4.10.3. :. A." 1.0186 x' 126" 12llmm'
:. x, < X11 max , :. The section is under-reinf(lrced. '".l•'' Ex. 4.15.4 Design the reinforcement for a T-beam for the following data :
--,
J
0.36 f.clcb X + 0.45 fk ( bf - b ) D Span s'm, ends simply support~d, spacing of beams =3m, 2
A= _wu c w f ... ...(Eq. 4.13.1Ib)
st , superimposed load= 5 kNJn2, floor finish = 0.7 kNim ,
0.87 fy thickness of slab = 130 mm, weight of wall on beam = 15 kNfm.
0.36 X 20 X 250 X 298 + 0.45 X 20 X 750 X 120
As,_ width of w<b 230 mm. total depth 680mm. concrete · M20 and steel -Fe250.
2
2
= 0.87x415 = 3729 mm Given : Simply supported beam..L =8 m , ws = 5 kN I m , c(c spacing = 3 m
Floor finish (FF)::: 0.7 kNtm2, wall load =15 kN/m,
Using simple Approximate Approach : >. "23(lmm ,D • 680 mm,D " 130 mm, f"" 20 Nlmnf. f, • ?:iONfmnf.
M 800x 106
1
A - u -~~~~~~~~ Required : Ast •
stl- 0.87fy(d-Df/2)- 0.87x415 (680-120/2)
Solution :
Let d' =80 mm, d = D - d' =680 - 80 = 600 mm
=3574 mm2 < 3729 mm2 ( i.e. about less by 4 %) 2
Calculation for Mu :
(d) Given MII = 850 kN.m . Total toad I m" =Weight of slab+ FF + w = ?:5 x 0.13+ 0.7 +5 = 1!.95 kNJm
-toad
. on beam fioDll\oOT = '""d intoositys x boom spacing = 8.95 x 3 = 26.85 kN I m
Mu > Mu2 =( 785.6 k.N.m) calculated in part (b) above.
Load from wall = 15,00 kN I m
When difference between Mu2 and given M, l.s appreciable, it is always advisable to calculate Weight of rib =25 (0.68- 0.13) x 0.23 =3.16 kN I m
Mur.max before calculating xu , because in such a case xu is likely to be greater than xu.max . Total working load =w =26.85 + 15 + 3.16 =45.01 kNim
For a balanced section, xu.max = 326 mm as calculated in part (a) above. Ultimate load w =
1.5 w =1.5 x 45.01 :::67.51
2 kN I m
Mur=0.36 fc1c bwu
x ( d- 0.42 xu) +0.45 /_.,_( b - bw ) D ( d- D I 2) ...... (Eq. 4.13.J4a) / designumoment M = w L 2 I 8 == 67.51 x 8 f 8 == 540 kN. m
Ultimate
1 ~~ 1 1 · u lt

=[( 36 x 20 x-250 x 326 X680- Q.42 x 326 ) + (0.45 x 20 x 750 x 120) (680..:. 120 / 2 )} 10-6
=820.88 k.N.nf.. 0
Calculations for bf : b ::: (_L + 6 D\ + b
~~j

Since given Mu =(850 k.N.m) > M ur.max , the section will be. required to be doubly reinforced. · · 1 ~6 ~ w

Let additional moment of resistance by compression steel = Mu2 . '\(i ~ + 230 = 2343 mm <3000 mm
; = ( __8000 + 6 x 130}
..~ = Mu - Mur.max =850- 820.88 = 29.12· kN.m
. M"" 1
Tension Steel · , ·
A =0·36 fckbwxu.max+0.4 5 fck(bf -b..,) Df ... ...(Eq. 4.13.15) Calculations for Ast :
•
st.max
0.87 fy For X ::: Df , Murl =0.36 fck b{Dj ( d- 0.42 D1 ) 6
11 = 0.36 X 20 X 2343 X 130 ( 600 - 0.42 X 130) 10· =1196 kN.m
~; 0.36 X 20 X i50 X 326 + 0.45 X 20 X 750 X i20
= =3869mm2
0.87x415 Given M u < M ur1 and hence xu < Df .
M2
Assuming de =40 mm
A ::: ~ ~- ~l---4-.6-x-54_0_x_l_{fl X 2343 X 600
Additional tension steel = "
0.87 fy (d- de)
.
st 250 t 20 X 2343 X 60~zJ
29.12x 106 2
Additional tension steel = = 126 mm2 = 4306. mm ,
0.87 X 415 ( 680- 40)
 · ·-- - ................. ...,., -vuup.:1c. - r tt:xure Chapter 4 W

f 4.16. ACCURACY OF DESIGN CALCULATIONS

l . . The design examples have been included in th,e fo~thcomi~g chapters.. For that P\~e
It Is necessary to know the extent of accuracy necessary m carrymg out design computatu~ns. PARTD
It may be mentioned that exact or rigorous analysis and design of R.C. structures
are far from possible due to number of factors listed below :
(i) Want of accuracy in exact assessment of loads.
MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS
(ii) Non-uniform and unreliable material strength due to heterogeneous charactet of concrete,
(iii) Large variation in design strength obtained by tests and the strength of concrete OTHER MISCELLANEOUS SECTIONS
in the member in the structure. 4.17
(iv) Want of accuracy in construction due to non- reliability of uniform and excellent Beams of sections other than rectangular or flanged sections are ofteri used in
workmanship R.C. construction for special purposes ·such as beams of rectangular sections with recesses
(v) Simplified assumptions. at corners to support precast slab, or beams with ducts, or beams of circular, trapezoidal, or
Advant1lge of maximum accuracy in design calculations is offset to a great extent notched sections or of variable depth. (98/6)
by various factors shown above. Obviously, therefore, R.C. design calcHlations do not. This situation particularly arises in precast concrete construction. In case of such sections,
demand too much of accuracy. Following degrees of accuracy are considered sufficient for one is required to proceed from first principles because equations, charts or design aids are-,
different design quantities, in the design of R.C. structures. usually not available for such non-standard shapes. The general procedure for such section
Table 4.16.1 : Degree of Accuracy Necessary in R.C. Design shall be as follows.
Quantity Accuracy upto
(a) Analysis of Section
(i) Span, length of member Olm In the case of analysis problem, when the sectiou and area of steel are given, the depth
(ii) (a) Sizes of member 5mm of neutral axis x" is assumed with rectangular parabolic stress distribution acting over this
(b) Distance of neutral axis, cover etc. lmm depth. The area is divided appropriately into suitable number of parts, and compression over
(uy Loads- Slab 0.05 kN/m 2 each part is determined. Compression over that part, over which the stress distribution is ·
-Beam 0.1 kN/m rectangular, can be found out directly by taking product of constant stress OAS fck and the
-Column 1.0 kN
(iv) · Bending· moment 0.05 kN.m corresponding sectional area, while compression over the remaining parts on which the stress
(v) Shear force 0.1 kN . Total compression Cu is
distribution is parabolic is required to be obtained hy integration.
(vi) Compressive stress in concrete O.Ql N/mm 2 equated with total tension Tu . lf the two forces balanced, assumed xu is .correct, otherwise
(vii) Tensile stress in steel 0.5 N/mm 2
(viii) Shear and bond stress in concrete 0.01 N/mm 2 revise the assumed value ofxu. till Cll =Tu . For this correct value ofxu , calculate the mome ,.
(ix) Area of steel 10 mm1 of resistance hy taking algebraic sum of the moments of compressive
. forces Cul , Cu2 ... c"
(x) Spacing of bars 5 mm
--------- about the centroid of tension steel.
Checks : To verify the correctness of design calculations approximately and to avoid
possible carryover of mistake in calculations to final results, it is always advisable, (b) Design of Section
particularly on the part of students, beginners and engineers having little e_xperience of R.C. - problem where design moment Mu , ana nence M ur , is giv~:n and
In the case of design
design to apply checks to the calculated values at different stages. This should be done by Ast is to be found out, assume
. xu equal to xu.max as a first trial and determine Mur.max· of
just observing the numerical values of different design quantities. and verifying that they are balanced section according to procedure explained in step (i) above. Compare Mur.max with
more or less within the expected ranges. If a calculated value js far outside the range,
accuracy of calculations shall be doubted and calculations rechecked to trace out the probable given M . If M "'M , repeat the process by changing x by judgement till M equals
u ur.max u u • ur
occurrence of some mistake. in calculations or mistake· in design procedure. Even then if the given Mu . For the correct value ofx u , Cu is calculated as explained in step (i) above and An
value is far outside the range, it need not be assumed to he wrong hut it may defi:--•:tely is obtained by equating T with this C . The procedure is explained by illustrative problems in
u u
be considered as abnormal, uncommon, impracticable or otherwise hypothetical.
subsequent section. --
 '!''l'fi
.,.
/ '

n!
: :.''.•;I~.~ ../'..-

, ) ' '. - 172 Limit State of Collapse - Flexure

\ Chapter4 Sect.4.18 Illustrative· Problems I 73
·-./
4.18 ILLUSTRATIVE PROBLEMS
cu2 = widthof Part II X area of shaded parabola = 100 X hx? (3a -X) I 3a2
·_J Ex. 4.18.1 Determine the ultimate moment.ofresistance of a section shown in FigA.l7.J
assuming concrete grade M20 and steel of grade Fe500. where, \h = 0.45 fk
c
, x u = -140 mm (<lssumed) , a= 4 x ll 17 = 4 x 140 I 7 = 80 mm
~ From Fig. 4.17.1 in truncated parabola , x = 140 - 100 = 4o mm < a ( = 80 mm )

1
100 X (0.45 X 20 ) X 40 2 X ( 3 X 80 - 40 )
_,l :. C 2 = xlO ·3 = 15.0 kN
u 3 X 802

r~
_ _) :. cu2 = cui + cu2 =201.6 + 15 =216.6 kN
_)
4-#12 Tu =0.87 fy Ast , Ast = 4 x 113 =452 mm2
• • • • ,oc
.. Tu = 0.87 X 500 X 452 X 10 ·3 = 196.6 kN.
_)
Fig 4.18.1
Fig4.18.2 :. Cll < Tll :. Reduce xu for second trial.
Solution :.
Let x II = 130 mm in second trial.
d =350-40 =310mm,Ast =4 x 113 =452 mm 2,
a= 4 x 13017 =74.3 mm, x = 130- 100 =30 mm
For Fe 500, x u.max =0.46d =0.46 x 310 =142.6 mm
Try xu = 140mm, :. 3xu I 7 =3 x 14017 =60mm and 4xu /7 = 80mm
CIII= 0.36 X 20 X 200 X 130 X 10 ·3 = 187.2 kN
Let us divide* the section above the neutral axis into Parts I and II as shown in the 100 (0.45 X 20) X 302
Fig. 4.17.1. Check that the depth of Part II is less than 'a', the height of parabolic part,
e?=
11
( 3 X 74.3 - 30) X 10 '3 =9.43 kN
- 3 X 74.3 2
cu .= cui + cu2
.. ell= ell]+ ell2 = 187.2 + 9.43 = 196.63 kN.
cui = 0.36 /ck ( 100 + 100) Xu = 0.36 X 20 X 200 X 140 X 10"3 = 201.6 /cN.m. T = 0.87 X 500 X 452 X 10 __, = 196.6 kN
II
For Cuz it will be necessary to obtain the properties of a truncated parabola as under :
This gives C "" T , :. x = 130 mm
__) Let the vertex of parabola shown in Fig. '4.18.2 with axes of reference x vertical andy u " u
horinzotal is given by: · For calculation of moment of resistance, let us obtain the centroid of shaded p:m1bola.
According to Eq. 4.18.3,
hx '
x (8a- 3x) 30 (8 X 74.3 - 3 X 30)
y=-(2a-x) ____ ...... (4.18.1)
a2 -- i=--- - - - - - - = 19.6mm
4 (3a- x) 4 (3 X 74,3 - 30)
Area of portion of parabola shown in Fig. 4.18.2. = A
Taking moments about centroid of tension steel;
X XhX ·h X
A =fy. dx = J-(2a-x). dx=- [axl -xl13] M ur =M.urI+ Mur2 = euI ( d- 0.42 Xu ) + eu2 ( d- xu + x)
o oa2 a2 o
= {187.2 (310- 0.42 X 130) + 9.43 (310- 130 + 19.6 )} X 10 -J = 49.69 kN.m.
:. A = ~ ( 3a- x) I 3a 2
......(4.18.2) Hints for Division of Section Into Parts : Always divide the secti'Jn and mark the parts in
Centroid of parabola ff{)m origin 0 is given by :
such a way· that every part touches the neutral axis, so that calc:.:!::~ion of coU.piC~~ion due to
X Xh X parabolic stress distribution from the origin oflhe parabola i.e., from G.., neutral axis becomes easy.
_)
x= f y .x. dx I A =f~ 2a -x) .xdx/ A As an illustration, for a hollow rectangular section with neutral axis lying inside the hole as shown
0 0~
in Fig. 4.18.3(a), the division and marking shall be as shown therein.
=-h_f2ax1-
a2 [
.tl
3 4J
IA
2
h xl (8a- 3x) I 12a =x (8a - Jx) ...... (4.18.3)
Corollary*: Find D so that the section becomes a balanced section for the sameA
hx2 (3a - x) I 3a2 4 (:kl - xj · st

Hints : given , x. =130 mm which is required to be equal to xu.max for balalnced section.
_/
* See hints at the end of this problem for division of sections into parts For Fe 415, xfO'lltU = 0.4Bd. :. d = xu.max I 0.48 = 271 mm
·
 -
wuscrarzve rromems I /J
.,.,,.,I'I
,.~,

IPf Llllijl :itate of Collapse - Flexure it ·_.Secl.4.18

, Chapter 4
-1 80 1- 200 -t 80 1-
TDn·fc T
i!
1 A 1777. J )' )' 2 )' 718 T -::.-1
1
Xu T 0.45 fck

1l
_l 1
+ 't:,t;;i:- x[A .
c 200

36Q.4
160.4=X
720 _i_
• • • • • • f) •

(a)
(b)
Fig 4.18.3
Part 1 =ABCD with complete rectangular parabolic stress block over depth x,,
Part 2 = EFHG with shaded parabolic stress block, •• •• ••do
Part 3 =.GHJI with rectangular stress distribution. 1-aso --1 f
Section Stress diagram
C, = Cu1 - Cu2 - Cu3and Mu = MuJ -Mu2 -Mu3
Fig 4.18.4 (a)
For hollow rectangular section in which neutral axis lies below the hole as shown in
Fig. 4.18.3(b), the division shall be as follows:
Part I = Complete rectangular parabolic stress block, (2 x80 )9.0 x 160.42
'Part II = Rectangular stress distribution, :.C = 3 X 206- 160.4) X 10 ·3 = 133.17 kN
2 2
Part III = Part parabolic stress ~istribution. u 3 X 206

C, =Cul+Cu2+Cu3 :. C =C +C 2 =519+ 133.17=652.17kN

u u1 u
It may be noted that any other division will be difficult than the one proposed.
_ X (8a- Jx) 160.4 (8 X 206-3 X 160.4) _ ... ...(Eq.4.J8.3)
Ex. 4.18.2 :Design the reinforcement for a precast beam shown in Fig. 4.18.4a for x - = - 102.2 mm from N.A.
a building floor system to C(!rry an ultimate moment of 357 kN.m. The corner recesses u - 4 (3a - x) 4 ( 3 x 206- 160.4)
80 min x 200 mm have been provided to support the precast slab units. Assume M20
concrete and mild steel reinforcement and effective cover equal to 40 mm. :.Mur.max =Cu (d-x)+C u2 (d-x + x)
u
1
Solution: = {519 (680- 151.37} + 133.17 (680- 160:4 + 102.2} x 10 · = 357.2kN.m.
3

As a first trial, assume xU = xU./1UlX = 0.53d for Fe 250

d =720 - 40 =680 mm, xu.max = 0.53 x 680 =· 360.4 mm
Cul = Compression resisted by middle rectangular portion.
C,1 =0.36fckbxu = 0.36 X 20 X 200 X 360.4 X 10 ·3 :: 519 kN
·x= 0.42xu = 0.42 x 360.4 = .151.37- mm
.
from top.
Cu2 = Compression resisted by end rectangular portions.
. .Cu2 =(2 X 80) X area cf shaded faraiJola
= 2 x 80 x hx 2 ( 3a- x) I 3a2
Here, h '"'$>.45 fac = 0.45 x 20 = 9.0N 1mm2
x = 360.4 - 200 =160.4 mm
a=4xII 11=4x360.4!7=206mm
Since this is nearly equal to given Mu of 357 kN.m., second trial need not be taken.
(see Fig. 4.18.4) Now Cu = Tu = 0.87 fy A st , :. 652.17 x 1000 = 0.87 x 250A st
:. A st =2998 mm2
Comments: (1) If the bending moment to be resisted is less than Mur.max calculated above, the section
will be under-reinforced. Actual value of x. will be required to be determined by trial and error as to give·
M., =M•. For this value of x., A., should be calculated. If the given M. is greater than Mur.max, the secti~n
will be required to be doubly reinforced. For additional tension steel A,, and compression steel Asc' the
shape of the section does not pose any problem. The procedure explained earlier for doubly reinforced
... ...(Eq.4.182)
section can be followed. ·
(2) If the depth of corner recesses is less than the depth of rectangular portion of str-ess block, the
problem becomes much simpler. In that case theM., can be found by co.nsidering the entire section without
recesses and then subtracting Mur of the portion of recesses. See Ex. 4.18.3.
')--:-' , --··"¥"~; - rtexure ·Chapter 4
Illustrative Problem< ' · '
':J & 4.18.3, Design the '<"'forcement fw the pecast bwn unit.& 4.18.2, if the depth ,
. of corner recesses is only 120 mm. Use concrete M20 and stee/Fe250. The design moment. ! :'::r_r;ucRX·/·18.4: Derive. a~ expressions for ultimate m~ment of resistance of a baia'> "•1
; is 300 kN.m. . . ' .
:J Assume effective cover equal to 40 mm.
section and the correspondmg area of steel for the sectzon ofa beam shOwn in Fig. 4 }8.5
.Assume maximum concrete stress 0.45 fck and steel of grade Fe 415.
Solution : d = 720 ...:·40 == 680 mm
~ Hence or otherwise, design the reinforcement for a sloping top column footing to resist
Assuming
. =
xu xumax = 0.53 d = 0.53 x 680 == 360.4 mm a design ultimate moment of 480 kN.m. Assume - concrete - M20, D =600 mm, d =540 mm,
~ Depth of recess = 120 mm < 3xu /7 (= 154.4 mm)
B =1250 mm, b =450mm, Dmtn. = 150 mm
.·. The recess lies in the rectangular portion of the stress block 1" . Solution .:
'---"
)
·c ··. Divide the trapezoidal portion above the neutral axis into different parts as shown below to
Mur.max == Mur1 - Mur2 , Mur1 = 0.36 fk c b Xu.max ( d - 0.42 Xu.max )
facilitate calculation of Cu and M u •
,_) ur
M 1::0.36 X 20 X 360 X 360.4 (680- 0.42 X 360.4) X 10' 6 =493.8 kN.m, Part- 1 : Rectangle ABFE in Fig. 4.18.5 under rectangular parabolic_ stress distribuiion as
__)
-~ T--IN'~ol-20<l..j~~-:_;: .~- usual.
: Remaining triangular portions ACE and BFD combined into a single triangle ACD.

J
~
t ! 1120 .

'~ ±' ·-·

120

"
this triangle is further divided into two subparts shown below.
Part- 2 :Triangle AGH under the rectangular stress distribution.
, . Part- 3 :Trapezium GHD'C subjected to parabolic stress distribution.
1- B-b-+- b -J- B-b --J j'-h---oj

~~~:_:, I[---
720
__) ··,··
T
~

._J

.J
l •••• ,_360
··I~------
-It- · J- b
LE~--~-
·?~-----------.---.--.~

--1 ~h-11Q42xu
.{d·xu)

..j
JL

Fig 4.18.4 (b) WJ')/j I r:+,: Cut

J Mur2 ::0.45 X 20 X ( 2 X 80) X 120 X (680- 120/2) X 10 -o :: 107 k.N.m. ~1
r .I
'_) M ur.max = 493.8- 107 = 386.8 kN.m > Mu (= 300 kN.m)
.·. The se<;tion shall be under-reinforced.
I
I
I
I

I
I
{d- O.if20xu)
{d·r1 (d • 2xul7)

I I L..__4Tu1 Tu2
L----
:_) For any value of 3x11 / 7 ~ 120 mm, Mur will remain unchanged.
2
Now Mu = Mur = Mur1 -Mur2 , Mur1 = M u +Mur = 300 + 107 .= 407 k.N.m.
__) 2
x(
But Mur1 =0.36 x 20 x 360 x u 680 - 0.42 xu ) =407 x 106
The solution of this quadratic equation gives
j
xu ::: 279 mm , . 3xu I 7::: 3 x 279 /7 = 120 mm :. O.K.
(see Fig. 4.18.4b)
b~u- 0.45fck X 2 X 80 X 120
)
._/
Cu:: 0.36 fck
Fig4.18.5
:: (0.36 X 20 X 360 X 279 - 0.45 X 20 X 160 X 120) 10·-' :: 550.4 k.N.m.
J But Tu = CU :. 0.87 f V ASl =550.4 x 103 . (B-b)/2
550.4x lW From Ftg. 4.18.6, lane=·___
J .·. A = · . ·· ::·,2S3t~m~ (D -Dmin)
st 0.87x 250 . ·
·__) GH ='2 x (3 x H 17} tanB = ( 6 x II 17) lane

__;
 Chapter 4 ',s
(''
We now calculate the total compression C .on each part and its moment M about the Sect.4.18 Illustrative Problems 119
centroid of tension steel.. ' u '· u
_ . ha2 tane ( 25 x u· - 18a ) I 30 (25xu ~ 18a) a
r-
Let Cu1 = total compression on Part-1 acting at x -from top,
Cu2 =· total compression on Part-2 acting at x from top,
1 :. x3 = · ha tane ( 8 xu .:.:. Sa ) I 6
S ( 8xu -Sa)
c
2
Cu3 = total compression on Part-3 acting at x from the neutral axis. - (
3 Substituting a=4xu I 7
Let Mu 1steel.
tension , Mu2 and Mu3 be the moments of Cu1 , Cu and Cu3 respectively about e.g. of
2
_
X _
( 25 x u -18 x 4xu I 7 ) x4xu I 7 ('
= 0.327 Xu
~- 5(8x-5x4xl7)
. u u
Cu1 =0.36 fk
c b xu , acting at x1 =0.42 x u from top. \._
r-

:. M 1 = 0.36 fk bx ( d- 0.42 x ) :. Mu3=Cu3 (d-xu +~)

u c u u
2
X . j· [1 6
C 2 = h XArea of AGH = 0.4S fk _ x ___!!_ • tan ·.,..._Xu
7 . 7
3 = 0.4Sfck· xu2 tane (24 I 49 )(d ~ xu + .0.327 x u )

= 0.45 fckxu 2 tan8 (24 I 49 )(d..., 0.673xu)

i
c
u c ('
2 Now Cui= Cui +Cu2 + Cu3
c x u 2 lane( 9 I 49) acting
= 0.4S fk . at x2 =(2 /3) x ( 3/7 )xu =2xu I 7from top. =0.36 fkbx + 0.45 fkx 2
tane (9 I 49) + 0.45 fkx 2
tantf (24 I 49) ('
Mu2 = 0.4S fk
c
xu lane( 9 I 49 )( d- 2xu /7) c u c u c u

For Cu3 , consider a small strip of width bx and thickness dx at a distance x above the neutral axis.
bX = 2 ( xU - x) lane
= 0.36 fck bxu + 0.30 fck Xu taniJ
2
......(4.18.5) c
Stress on this strip is given by: Eq. 4.18.1, y = h ( 2 ax- x 2 ) I a2
Similarly, Mur =Mu1 +Mu2+Mu3
=0.36fkbx ( d- 0.42 x u ) + 0.4Sfkx 2
tane (9 I 49) (d- 2xu.17)
c
where h = 0.45 fk and a = 4 x I 7 I'
u c u c u

a
c
a h
u 2
+ OAS fkx tane (24 I 49) (d.- 0.673x )
c u u r
cu3 =fo y.b.dx=f-(2ax-x2)x2(x -x)tan8.dx = 0.36 fck bxu ( d- 0.42 x) + 0.30 fck x} lane ( d- 0.567xu) ...(4.18.6)
o a2 \

I
x u

=- 2h tanfJ ~ax . x2 - 2 a _x3 -X X} + x4 )D. a

Corollary : For an isosceles triangular section, having semicentral angle (}, the expressions for
c.and M., can be obtained by putting c.1=0 and M. 1=0 in the above equations respectively.
r-
~.
a2 \" 3 "3 4
0
I~ c. =0.30 fc1r. x.2 tan8 ...... (4.18.7a) r-
c.= 0.30 fck x} tan8 ('d- 0.567x.)
1.
:. cu3 =hatane(8xu-Sa)l6 and ...... (4.18.7b)
Substituting h = 0.45 fk and a = 4 x I 7 In the example under consideration,
c u (
cu3 = 0.4S fk
c
( 4 X u /7 ) lane (8 Xu - 20 X u I 7) I 6 B = 1250mm, b = 4SOmm, D = 600 mm, Dmzn. = 1SO mm
=0.45~kx}a (d-xu+~)
(
\
Cu3 lane (24149), Now, Mu3 =Cu3 ( B - b ) /2 ( 1250 - 4SO ) 8
tane = = -
. where
j(Y .bx. dx) x
x3 = -~o_ __ 2 (D - Dmm. ) 2 (600- 150) 9 c
cu3 d = S40 mm, fck = 20 Nlmm 2 (-
a a h
For first trial, let us assumexu= x u.max , For Fe415,xu.max = 0.48 d= 0.48 x S40 =259.2mm
Now j(Y .bx. dx) x = J--;-'-( 2 ax- x 2 ). 2 (x - x) tall8 .x.dx ·
(
o oa u Using Eq. 4.18.6,
2h lana a
Mur.max = {0.36 X 20 X 4SO X 2S9.2 (S40- 0.42 X 2S9.2) r
= a2 o 2xu . ar
j( - 2 ax~- X .X1
u
+ X 1 ) dx 2 6
+0.30 X 20 X 2S9.2 (8/9) (540- 0.567 X 259.2)} 10· = 502.9 kN.m > Mu = 480 kN.m
2
=ha tan e ( 25 x II - 18a ) I 30
This means thatxu < xu.max . Therefore, trial will be continued assuming another value of xu c
till M ur comes out to be equal to 480kN.m.
r:
l
 180 Limit State of Collapse -Flexure
iy!' Clulpter 4. Sect.4.18 Illustrative Problems 181
:15 For xu = 245 mm, Mur = 475.37 kN.m < 480 kN.m ,
= strain in the bottom tension steel
For xu = 247 mm , Mur =479.27 kN.m;;. 480 kN.m, . 8
52
-_; Hence acceptable. :. x 247 mm
u
= 82
s
= 0.0035 (d- Xu ) I Xu =0.0035 (d I Xu - 1 )
Using Eq. 4.18.4,
8s3 =strain in middle tension steel.
J C = 036 fck bx + 0.30fckx 2 tan8 = T = 0.87 fA
u u u u · y st =0.0035 (O.SD- xu ) /xu ~ 0.0035 (O.SD I xu - 1)
0.36 X 20 X 450 X 247 + 0.30 X 20 r2472 x 8/9
I :. Ast = -~-----...:.._ _ _ _._ _ _ = 3118 mm
0.87x250
_;
0.87x415
2 For Fe 250, yield strain 8
~
= 0.87 f
Y
IE
s
= 2x lOS
= 0.0010875

__)
Ex. 4.18.5: Determine the ultimate moment capacity of a beam of square. cross-section If8<8, f=8 E,
S ~ S S, S
with its side 300 mm for bending about its diagonal axis. The beam is reinforced with 4 Nos.
__) 16 mm. diamefer bars distributed eqiwlly at the corners and placed with an effective cover If 8s > 8sy fs = 0.87 f.y
of 50 mm. Use steel of grade Fe250 and concrete of mix M20.
Therefore,
J Given :b=300mm,D=300vl=424mm,d'=50mm , d~424-50=374mm, fsi = 0.87 fy if 8 > 0.0010875 i.e. 0.0035 (1 - d0 /Xu ) > 0.0010875
51
·-./
'I
=
do =50 mmAS 4 Nos., $ 16mm 804 mm 2 ' = e=45°' fck =2_0N!mm2 I,= 250 N!mm 2 or d < 0.69 xu ......(4.18.8a)
Required: M 0
ur Similarly,
~ Solution :
~2=0.87 fy if 8 s2 > 0.0010875 i.e. 0.0035 (d I x u - 1) > 0.0010875
Since the beam is reinforced on tension as well as on compression side, the section is doubly ......(4.18.8b)
J i.e. x u < 0.763 d
reinforced. The depth of neutral axis can be obtained from the equilibrium condition Cu =Tu • f =0.87 f if 8 > 0.0010875 i.e. 0.0035 (0.5 D I x ) > 0.0010875
s3 y s3 u
Let the depth of neutral axis be xu below the top of the beam. For Calculation of forces iri ......(4,18.8c)
J i.e.
. Xu < 0.381 D
bjlrs, stress in steel and, therefore, the strain in steel at the level of bars wiU be required to be..
) obtained from the strain diagram (Fig. 4.18.6). Comments: The above conditions normally hold good for mild steel reinforcement Fe250. But for
Let- 851 =strain in the top compression steel.
-..-'

r
high strength stee~ it may be necessary to calculate from the stress-strain curve.
lt is assilme4 that f, = 0.87 f,. ,then after the determination of x. , it shall be checked that above
~ •
8 1 = 0.0035 (x -
s u
d ! xu )
0
conditions given in Eq.4.18.8 are satisfted, otherwise one has to calculate f .t = &s x E ,'i for Fe 250 and f :r from
·I
J
J
!11 1-- ~r-1 _j_ : T
I
b

-1-do I
--IEcu 1- -j 0.45fck
_j_ -h
1-
-
+
stress-strain curve corresponding to
Position of Neutral Axis :
s, for Fe 415, Fe 500.

Assuming above conditions in Eq. 4.18.8 to hold good, the forces in bars are
I
1 3xu/7 1
I
As
• I
I
aJ I
1
j -;;gust 2xu/1
3xu/7 Cuc1 C I= fis As1 =0.87 f.s As I 4 Compression
__) - - I
:I T I
I
1 xu ~

Cus2 = fs2 As2 =0.87 fA

s s
I4 Tension
J
~ ~A, . A,? Tus3 =f.s3 A s3 =0.87 fA
For equilibrium,
s s
I2

C u = Tu
Tension

J fs2 As2 + fs3 As3

J ·,\:/(/. d'
..____ rus2 wliere
Cuc +C us! =
Cuc = compression in concrete in trangular portion = CucI + Cuc2,

__)
-..j Es2
Fig4.18.6
r-r The value of the compressive force in triangular portion in the same as (Cuc.2 + Cuc3) given
in Eq. 4.18.5
_j
 - .,........,.MfC::
r·
'-
Chapter 4
Cusl =compression in compression steel.
cue_ = 0.30 fc~cx} lana
c
In this case
e::: 45° :. lana ::: 1 CHAPTER-5 , ..
\

Cuc = 0.30fkx
c u
2
('
For equilibrium , Cuc + Cusl = Tus + Cus3
LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE- SHEAR
.;,_..,.
2 2
.·. 0.30f*x +0.87fA 14=0.87/A 14+0.87/A 12
cu ss ss ss 5.1 INTRODUCTION
(
\---
:. 0.30 fckx 2 0.87 fA I 2
u s s
= :C
Reinforced concrete members are normally designed for the limit state of collapse in flexure
Substituting values of fk, f and A ......(4.18.9) •r.
rather than in shear. Shear failure, which in reality, occurs under the combined action of shearing \
c y s forces and bending moments, is characterized by very small deflection-and lack of ductility. This
2
0.30 X 20. X Xu = 0.87 X 250 X 804 / 2 ·~~~: failure is, many times, sudden and without any warning. For this reason, the shear failure is (
?~~
:. xu = 120.7 mm considered very undesirable and is usually avoided. The code provisions for shear are, therefore,
Check for Condition in Eq. (4.17. 7) : ~~'
more conservative as compared to bending. (
Now dc =50< 0.69 x 120.7 t
:. Condition in Eq. 4.18.8a is satisfied. 5.2 SHEAR STRESSES IN BEAMS (
X :::120.7 < 0.763 X 374
u '
:. Condition in Eq. 4.18.8b is satisfied. 5.2.1 Shear Stresses in Homogeneous beams
X :::
.u 120.7 < 0.381 X 424
:. Condition in Eq. 4.18.8c is satisfied. Shear in a beam is caused due to the change of bending moment in the span. For a beam of c
:. Assumption (~ = 0.87 fy) is correct. homogeneous material, the shear stress at any section is given by :
Moment of Resistance : 't = -
VAY c
a~out
bl ......(5.2.la)
Taking moments of all forces e.g. of the bottom tension steel, where, V = shear force at any section. c
Mur ::Cuc x(d-0.567x
· u )+Cus1 (d-d')-T us (0.5D-d') · AY= moment of area above the section, about the neutral axis.
2 3 b = breadth of the section. ("
:: 0.30 fckxu ( d- 0.5(!?;.-fu) + 0.87 fy (As/ 4) ( d- d'}
I = moment of inertia of beam section, about the neutral axis.
- 0.87 fy (A sc.I 2) ( 0.5D- d') The distribution of shear stress across the homogeneous beam of rectangular section is shown ('
2
in Fig. 5.2.1 a. The variation of shear stress is parabolic. It is zero at top and bottom face of the
=0.30. fkx
( d- 0.567 x u ) + 0.87 fy (A s I 4 )( d- d'- D
c u + 2 d')
beam and is maximum at the neutral axis. r-
.But d+d'-D=o \.

2
c u ( d- 0.567 xu )
:. Mur = 0.30 fkx 5.2.2 Shear Stress in R.C. Beam ;-'
\

Comments : It may be noted that ~M is zero. ... ... (4.18.10) , The elastic theory of shear for beams of homogeneous material is applied to R.C. beams.
In this case, urs A~ordingly, the distribution of horizontal shear stress across the depth ofthe beam, of rectangular (~
\.

2 cross-section, is parabolic with zero value at the top and maximum at the neutral axis. Further, as
Mur ::: 0.30 X 20 X 120.7 X (374- 0.567 X 120.7) X 10 " 6 the R.C. Section below the neutral axis gets cracked offering no flexural resistance, the shear (
=26.7 k.N.m stress distribution is assumed to be constant below the neutral axis, and abruptly reducing to zero at
Comments on Irregular Section Problems : the centre of gravity of steel as shown in Fig. 5.2./b. ('
Under elastic condition, the total shear V is given by the area of the stress diagram
It will be <Vident from H!"'"""d exampb th" O>lution of pmb!enu; of irreguhu shaped
seotions fmm fi"'t principl" is a lengthy, laborious and a time <nnsuming pmcess involving
multiplied by the width.
V= i x:t.b + (d-x)t.b = t.b(d- x/3)
c
repetitive calculations of trial and._ "peciolly when Steel of gmd., Fe4!5, Fe500 are used
(~
This is due to non-availability of a simple direct relation between s - and '"'in. It is here that or 't = VI bz ......(5.2.1b)
the <nmputet aided artalysis and design that finds iO place aod students should be kained to write where, z =lever arm= (d- x/3)
('
(98/3~
<nmputet pmgr.un, fot such <omp!icated COSes. This is possible when they are oonv....,, with x = distance of the neUtral axis from compression face.
writiog simple pmgm.., which can be developed initially fmm flow 'han
d = effective depth.
(
t = maximum sh~ stress.

c
r,I
'\ Sect. 5.2 Shear Stresses in Beams 185
._)
'~ 184 Limit State of Collapse - Shear Chapter 5
~
· The principal stress trajectories al~ng a. homogen~u.s beam are shown in Fig. 5.2.2(a). The
':J csngeat to a stress trajectory gives the. d~~on of~ p~ctpal stress. Therefore, the directions of
~b-l 1--b--l
-~

' ,_J' 1 . T
T~-A_:_ +
principal tensile stresses are given by p~ctpal ~ensto? hnes and the direction of cracks due to this
tension is obviously perpendicular to tenston trlljectones. It may be noted that the principal tension
tra,jcdOries GtOSS the neutral plane every where at 45°.
d
Lll H l ~'* U
0

1
~·')

l ... I
I { -
.J
Plane

l
._/. Neutral-[/~ 7 ~, \ tl
( a ) Homogeneous Beam ( b ) Reinforced Concrete Beam
_) - - - - - compression trajectories
Fig. 5.2.1 : Shear Stress Distribution in Beams
Tension trajectories
I The research (93/6), over the past few decades, has revealed the fallacy of the above
.J Fig. 5.2.2 (a) : Principle Stress Trajectories

.)
assumptions (67/1} but, due to complexity of the problem, it has not been possible to determine the Now, depending upon the ~atio _of b:nding moment to shear at different sections, three
.__) exact stress distribution across the section at ultimate state of shear collapse. hi fact, the designers · different types of regions can be tdenttfied m the beam as shown in Fig. 5.2.2b .
are not interested in knowing the actual shear stress distribution across the section. Therefore, a
'I simple concept of nominal shear stress has been introd.uced and is expressed as :
---/

Nominal shear stress = 't = VI ( bd ) ...... (5.2.2a)

.,J Using Limit State. method the above formula can be written as:
't u = Vu l(bd) or Vu =tu bd ...... (5.2.2b) /[/ ·\· II- ·I· /~
J where, Vu = ultimate shear force Fig. 5.2.2 (b): Different Cracking Regions in Beam
. I d = effective depth
--'
b = width of the member, which for flanged section it will be taken as the breadth \ In type-1 region, where the bending moment is large and shear force is small, flexural cracks
appear on the tension face and extend more or less vertically in the beam. This c(llcking behaviour
of web, bw will be clear when we consider an element at the bottom fibre at the central section of the beam.
~
5.2.3 Inclined Cracking The bending stress a x• acting on the element is maximum while shear stress is zero. Substituting
. '
_) A simple elastic analysis of a beam of homogeneous material shows that the bending stresses t = O, the
Eq.5.2.3 reduce to : a =ax' a2 = 0 and $ = 90° i.e. the principal plane acts
1
are maximum at the extreme fibres decreasing linearly to zero at the neutral axis, whereas the perpendicular to the beam axis. Further, when the principal tensile stress a I reaches the tensile
J shear stress is maximum at the neutral axis and decreases to zero at the extreme fibres.
strength of the concrete, which is very low, tensile cracks develop vertically ( ~ = 900) in the beam
., See Fig. 5.2.1.
.._) If an element is taken in between the neutral axis and the extreme fibres (at top or bottom), (Fig. 5.2.3a). Thus, the crack formation in the region I is primarily due to flexure only and hence
it is subjected· to both bending stresses and shear stresses. The shear stress t, and flexure stress the cracks in this region are called as flexure cracks. Diagonaltension

.,-Q-•, 10! =1[~":,"~

J a , acting on the element combine into principal tensile or compressive stresses which are given by t- B
X
the expressions : a .
.J a = _x_+ _[(a 12 )2 + ! 2 ...... (5.2.3a)
I 2 -~ x c
.J a = .5:.._+ . I (a I 2 )2 + '2 ...... (5.2.3b)
) 2 2 " X (a) Pure Hexure (b) Pure shear
~...J Fig. 5.2.3 : cracking Under Pure Flexure and Pure Shear
2-r
and tan 2$ =cr- ...... (5.2.3c) In the adjacent type-II region near the quarter span, where the bending moment is still
~~ X

·where.-+ designates the angle which the principal plane makes with the vertical plane considerable but shear force is also significant) the cracks are initiated at the tension face in the

.J carrying the normal stress a :x• in an anti-clockwise direction.

 Shear Failure 187 ('
\~;~(
__ ,) ~!Sect· 5.3 . . .. . · t~e
h develo ment of diagonal crack m
,-----.
Chapter- J!~ ~--_ To sum up, shear failure ts mthated essentially:~t e t od! of shear failure in which thts
\.
I 86 Limit State of Collapse - Shear
. . . . . . .; . ar. We now therefore, study the t eren m
vertical directton due to flexure, and gradually tend to develop m the mchned direction towards the _- _ ._•- :regton of heavy she 'd leads to failure. c
··-···~-.--- ..
neutral axis as the shear stress goes on increasing towards the neutral axis (Fig. 5.2.2b). SinC'eJ.I·· . _ diagonal crack deve1ops an
(-
these cracks develop under the combined action of shear and bending, they are tenned as~: \
flexure-shear cracks. /I /
5 ,
/ B .
earns wrth shear
reinforcement ,~
In type-III region near the support, where shear force is predominant, inclined cracks starty
developing at the neutral axis because shear stress is maximum and bending stress is zero at the·
neutral axis, with the result, the element at the neutral axis, near the support is subjected to the
QJE3 ~.::--- ------4-
/ 3 r-
',_
\

Yielding of stirrup /
action of pure shear and Eq. 5. 2. 3 give : 0
..J
'.l
/
/

~2
/
cr 1 = '• cr 2 = -• and$= 45°
Fig. 5.2.3b shows an element at the neutral axis acted upon by pure shear. The principal
(
tensile and compressive stresses act along the diagonals, and the fonnation of cracks is along the Diagonal cracking_
\
diagonal. These cracks are referred to as web-shear cracks or diagonal tension cracks.
The finite locations and the extent of the three cracking regions depend on the loading
conditions, types of supports, cross-sectional dimensions of the beam, and the presence of axial
compressive or tensile force.
F91
Flexural cracking
oeflecuon

(
The above analysis, in regard to the development of cracks at different regions, clearly brings Fig. 5.2.4: Behaviour of Beam under Flexure
out an important point that the tensile stresses which are, in particular of great concern in concrete (
~
members, not only occur at the extreme fibres due to bending but also in the inclined direction near
the supports due to shear. This tension, produced by shear and acting in inclined direction, is known 5.3 SHEAR FAILURE l
as' diagonal tension. Shear failures originate by development of diagonal cracks due to diagonal 5.3.1 Modes of Shear Failure
tension. Thus, in the region of high shear, diagonal tension becomes significant and may lead to The different modes of shear failure can be studied from the test results nonnally conducted
(''
failure, if transverse reinforcement is not provided to resist it. So, a study of phases in the behaviour on a simply supported beam symmetrically loaded by two equal concentrated loads acting at
of beam upto failure under the action of dominating shear becomes important. distance 'a' from the supports as shown in Fig. 5.3./.a The reactions are obviously equal tci Wand
5.2-4 Differenf Phases of Behaviour of a Beam up to Failure under the Action of
a constant shear (V=W) is achieved in the region between the load and the reaction for any value r
of 'a' and any length of beam. The maximum bending moment = M = W x a = V x a is also ·
Flexure and Dominating Shear
The behaviour of a beam subjected to combined bending and shear is shown by the load
independ~;:nt of span L. The moment M and the ratio MIV can be chansed simply by varying 'a'
without change in V. Thus, the distance 'a' (=.WV) represents the dominance of shear over flexure
deflection characteristics in Fig. 5.2.4.
and is called shear span. Many tests on shear (69/2, 73/2) have established that diagonal tension in r .
There are three distinct phases of beam response. The first phase is marked by a change in
a function of WV and hence on the shear span 'a '.It also depends on the effective depth 'd' of the (
curvature {the first kink marked as 1 in Fig. 5.2.4) with the development of flexure crack, due to
beam because the inclination of diagonal tension is not only a function of shear span 'a' but also on r
bending moment in the beam reaching its cracking moment. The second phase shows pronounced
the effective depth 'd'(66/2). Therefore, the diagonal tension failure i.e. shear failure is a function '
defonnation with the fonnation of major diagonal crack near the support due to diagonal tension ('
exceeding the tensile strength of concrete. With any additional load, the crack penetrates into the of the ratio ald.
compression zone leading to diagonal tension failure. This phase is indicated by second change of Test results (73/2) show that different modes of failure can be identified into four distinct
curvature at point 2 in Fig. 5.2.4. If the transversereinforcement (i.e. the shear reinforcement) is regions depending on aid ratios : (
not provided, the beam fails suddenly without giving any warning. This sudden failure can be
avoided by providing shear reinforcement. When shear reinforcement is provided, the beam can
carry additional load till the phase 3 is reached when the shear reinforcement crossing the diagonal
crack yields, and large deflection {shown by horizontal flat curve 3-4 in Fig. 5.2. 4) and excessive ~
I (a) Large Values of aid > 6)
In the case oflarge values of aid> 6, (i.e. M!Vd >6}effect of bending moment is predomi-
nant and the failure essentially occurs due to flexure (starting with yielding of main steel and finally C
('

cracking occurs giving warning of impending f11i!itte. Thus, it can be said. that the load carrying ~ by crushing of concrete) and formation of vertical cracks on tension side in the region of maximum
capacity is increased by provision of shear reinforcement. Again, if excess shear reinforcement is
:a
bending moment. The ultimate failure of beams under this category is dependent solely on the r
provided, the load carrying capacity of a member does get increased but !)hear reinforcement does
:~
i maximum bending moment and not on the shear force.
r.
not yield prior to crushing of concrete under diagonal compression with the result the failure is
again sudden, explosive and gives no warning. This failure is indicated by point 5 in Fig, 5.2.4.
r
 ..... ~•w•c: UJ LOIIajJse - Shear
. "lI
' '~
I (b) Intermediate Values of a/d {(2.5 to 3.0) <old< 6}* Ultimate Shear Strength of Beam Without Shear Reinf'drcement 189
'
Beams having values of aid< 6, fuil due to -b;,,.,d eff<ct of bending and shear. A explosively). This mode of failure is called she11r-compre:ssion j11ilure
say PQ in Fig. 5.3. Ih is fust inm.t.d by flexure in the vertkaJ direcUon. wMch furth., fH1>pag,
comb;no<~ and~-s~~e~,
1d). The load at failure is practically 2 to 4 times the load causing diagonal crack. This
\ . in an inclined <firection QR fowan!s the load due to the at6orrofflexure is prevented by limiting the maximum shear at the section ( see Sec. 5.6.6 ). ·
._;
a aack is known as fl-.-shear crack, or many times, simply a diagonal =ct. IV"rth further Deep Beams (a/d < 1)
increase in load. the crack further PO>gresses up to point-s in the compress;on "'"' and at som, '\~-:For deep beams (75/2, 1716, 86/3), shearing stresses predominate and need more
'- ..)
stage it becomes Unstable, splitting th< beam into two segments I and nFig. 5.3. I h. 11Jis mOd, of ~n~iderations than flexural stresses. The magniiude of principal compression and tension
failure is termed as diagonal-tension failure or shear-flexure failure. ~g alo_ng and across the !ine jo~ing the load and the reaction respectively is signifi~tly
'
~ w w ".'tlf~' the inclmed cracks occur tmmedtately near the support, and the beam gets transformed mto
~· __, 1:-· --j ~r - tied.~h, wherein the_lo~ is ~ed by direct com~ion ~shown by shaded area) and the tension
~

..J E ll~wl
,.

:=:a ('1it!JUried by the longttudmal remforcement as shown m F1g. 5.3.2a.

of,.._

~
-L (b) lfpe

.:•' 1. Ancho!age failure

~ (a } ( b } Diagonal tension faiiure 2. Crushing failure at support
3. Flexural faHure
L
\~ _; 4. Tension cracking failure at support
w 2 4
~
5. Arch rib crushing failure
\
( a ) Tied • arch action
~ Fig. 5.3.2
1
~ w~o===:::-J This tied-arch can fail in number of ways. The numbers in Fi}!. 5.3.2b correspond to the
following modes of failure :
(I) Anchorage failure of tension reinforcement, usually combined with dowel splitting effeet
_) (point- I),
( c } Shear- bond failure ( d } Shear compresSion failure (2) Crushing failure at support (point-2)
Fig. 5.3.1 Modes of Shear Failure
~ (c) Small Values of a/d {1 <aid < (2.5.3.0)} * (3) Flexural failure arising from either yielding of steel (point-3) or crushing of concrete near the

P'<dominan~
crown of the arch (point-3)
..J For beams with values of aid between say I to 2.8 (84/31 sh<ar being fh< (4) Arch-rib failure due to eccentric compression causing a tension crack at support (point-4) or
diagonal c"'k (in Fig. 5.3.2h) is developed along with fl<xure crack PQ. The beam usually crushing of concrete rib at point-S. The ultimate load at failure by this mode is several times
..J one ofthe.table
remains after modes.
following this diogonaJ cracking. But furthor increase in V can load to sh<ar hilure by that due to load causing diagonal cracking.
Provision of minimum tension steel at bottom, minimum anchorage, and limitation on
F., b;ghor value ofaid, with any in"""' in load (and hence in sh"' furee 1'), th< diagooal
~
upwanJ~
maximum shear stress prevents this type offailure.
"""" instoad of JH1>gressing towards fh< load stops at some point T (See Fig. 5.3.2c) Discussion of all these failure modes indicate that in general, while designing for limit state of
~ and fl/Upagates backwards from Qto UValmost horizontally along the longitodinal ieinfureement collapse in shear, all other modes of shear failure, except the diagonal tension failure, are eliminated
due to s(>litting caused by pressing down of the longitudinal steel by inc""""' sh.,... 11Jis through appropriate codal provisions. If at all the beam fails due to diagonal tension exceeding the
~ results into destruction of the bond b"'-t the con- and the longitudinal steel, leading to limiting value the design provisions are such that the failu.re commences wit.h the yielding of steel
faiiW< by splitting ofcoocn:te along the reinfureement and pulling out of main ""''· This type of giving sufficient warning ofthe impending failure. )
_) failure is known as sheRNensJon failure.; sh"""-hondfoilu,.. The ukimate load causing this

-es
type offailure is not much higher than the load causing drago!lal crack. This type of failure is 5.4 ULTIMATE SHEAR STRENGTH OF BEAM WITHOTJT
prevented by providing adequate anchorage and minimum steel beyond the suppOrt. SHEAR REINFORCEMENT
..J For lower values of aid, if the longitudinal reinforcement is well anchored beyond the centre
5.4.1 Shear Failure Mechanism
ofsupport, the diagonal crack O,side the compressro. region canying load higher tha,
~ that which causes diagonal crack, and failure occurs by local crushing of concrete
It will be evident from the earlier discussions on modes of failure that the load causing
diagonal crack corresponds to initiation of shear failure mechanism and the ultimate load at
* The /imitinv vnl>~o "-"··-·n (h) and~-· ··-- · •
..J n"a fC) VQrteS }rom 2.5 /0 ).fl. collapse is not much different from the load causing diagonal crack. Therefore, the load at which
the diagonal cnck fonns is taken as the strength of beam in shear. The mechanism fonned in the
)
-..../
 beam at lhe nltimale- of~ due to lhe fonn.Uon oftho d;.gonaJ C<1lck, ~ lhe Factors Affecting Shear Resistance o; K.C~ MemtJer JYJ
(_'
.

into two_...,, I

and nalong tho diagona] is shown in Fig 5.4.1a. The mochanJsm is tn....,
mechanism of shear transfer at ultimate state.
.
(1) Characteristic Strength of Concrete

~~
tensile strength of concrete (see Sect. 2.2.2), dowel shear resistance, aggregate ('
I
~
Extoosive OXJ>OrinreotaJ studios (6812, 8312) havo revoalod thatlhe load (Y) .......,..,., and concrete strength in compression zone. aH increase with the concrete strength.
crack is resisted bylhe beam, consisting oflhe fullowing canying """"""-(Fig 5.( higher the grade of concrete, greater will be the resistance to shear (98/7). Cl
(jJ S""' resistod by tho dOWel ""ion, Y, (i< fore, inducod to""""'' slipping of Sleol '>'(2) Percentage of Longitudinal Tension Reinforcement .
The increase in the percentage of tension reinforcement increases the shear strength of a C'
I
"""""""i-) oflhe flexurnl reinfureomont. This is known "dnwel-shea, """ity
(87/IO).
n:lnforced concrete beam reaching the maximum value depending on the grade of concrete mix
~"
r
(ii) Sh..,. cani<d by lhe vortkal «>mpon"'t of tho in"rfo<• slrear (Y ) along tho ornck duo ~. \.
aggregate interlock called as interface shear transfer (81/3). . The dowel shear (6813, 7114, 8616, 98/7) contribution increases with the increase in the
~
a
~tage of tension steel and strength of concrete. Therefore, the design codes make the shear C
(iii) Sit..,. ""isled by unccookod ooOorete in """'Pression in rompression- (1', ) (91/S). 1
strength a· function of percentage of steel p1 and the grade of concrete. (See Table 5. 7.1); Of _
Therefore, lhe load oausing di•gonal crnck, ""d ltenco tho sh..,. resisting <opaoity of the
beam without the shear reinforcement, is given by : course, it is taken for granted that the necessary anchorage to tension steel is provided to derive (
assistance of dowel-shear capacity. For low percentage of longitudinal tension steel , the dowel (
\
V= Vd+ Va + Vc ...... (5.4.1) . shear capacity is reduced while it increases with increase in percentage of tension steel pI . It may

!---a --1
.
be interesting to note that according to test results, the grade of steel has little effect on shear r
·strength (7312). On the contrary, since percentage of steel required for high grade steel happens to

~-Vc
.
c ,be less than that required for mild steel, the shear resistance of a R.C. member with high grade
steel will be less than that of mild steel. c
r (3) Shear Span to Depth Ratio (old): 1

1 The discussion in Sect. 5.3 has already clearly brought forth the effect of aid ratio on the
-shear capacity. The variation of M = V u. a, and hence that ofthe shear strength, with aid ratio has
\.
('
·been shown in Fig. 5. 5.1. It is evident from this figure that for values of ratio from 6 to say
(a)
(b)
2.6, the shear capacity, being governed by inclined cracking strength, goes on reducing with . r
reduction in ald. For a value of a/dless than 2.8, the shear strength increases rapidly, because now,
Fig. 5.4.1 Shear Failure Mechanism
the C.
resul~
shear failure is governed by shear-bond or shear compression capacity rather than by diagonal
shear Tost (7412,
resistance are 9213) h•vo
as detailed shown that tho relotivo magnitudes of tho contributions to the
below: tension.

Contribution (Vd) by dowel action 15% to 30%

Flexural moment
capacity r
Contribution (V)
a by aggregate interlock 33% to 50% _r--~

I I \.
Contribution ( Vc) by concrete in compression zone 20% to 40% I
Inclined cracking
capacity Vue

t r
:_--~~-!-
The ._.,.,h h" shown tbot the mech,.ism of sh= fuilure comm-s with dowel Oction
reaching ilscapocity fim, thereafit,._ inteclock is dostmyed, resulting in lrnnsfec oflocge
. shear force to compression zone leading to sudden and explosive failure. "'·
-:,."'
II -f - Shear- tension and - -
I~ - - -J c
ThO, lhe sheac fiiluce of reinfoccod conccete beam is not only aJrected by a'd ootio, bot •!so c., 1

P•rnnuo~.
Shear- compression failure

All th.,. fuctoouffecting " - resis""ce of RC. E

c
~ct ~
on numbe, of •bove mentioned 0
.,E
- a r e detailed in the
strength of R.C. beams without web reinforcement.Network model;;.,..,,
next ""'"on . Ne,..aJ the ~
~ c
MEMBER I i I ! I I ! I
5.5 FACfORS AFFECTING SHEAR REsiSTANCE OF A R.C.
The important
reinforcement footo"
are given belowoffeoting
: the sh,., resistanco of • R.C. membec without she"
0 0

aid-
4 5 6 7 c
(
Fig. 5.5.1 Variation of Shear Strength with aid Ratio
(

c
 /

II -
~J·.
~(;, 192 liimii State of Collapse - Shear Chapter 5
{
...
Sect. 5.6 Shear Strength of Beam with Shear Reinjorcerfl~nt 193
!I The additional shear resistance is provided by the transverse reinforcement. This trafisversc
(4) Compressive ]?orce
Presence of an axial compressive force prolongs the inclined cracking and increases the reinforcement is known· as web steel or shear reinforcement. The shear reinforcement inclases
shear strength of concrete. This effecthas been taken into accountbythe c(Jde by increasing the the ductility of the beam and reduces the possibility of a sudden and catastrophic failiJI'e. ·

~~ design shear stress bya modifieation factor given by Eq. 5. 7. 3. The sli'ear resistance is found to . Nonnally the shel\1" reinforcement consists of:
increase with the increase in the percentage of corttpression steer(9U!3). · · · (a) vertical stirrups, or links, atright angles to the longitudinal reinforcement,

~.~.
(S) Axial Temile Force (9614) : · · · · (b) incline.d stirrups making an angle greater than or equal to 45°, with the longitudinal steel,
AXial tension does not affect· the cra~k pattern but only reduces marginally the shear (c) inclined bent up bars obtai!led by bending some of the main longitudinal bars at an angle of
resistance of concrete. . . 45° or more, with the longitudinal axis of the member,
Hadd8din et al (7l/5)have recommended that shear carried by the' con~tete be taken equal to (d) combinations of (a) or (b) with (c) (see Fig. 5.6.2).
zero if the average axial tension stress exceeds; 4fl; while ACl code (95/l) considers the effect
Jffi of axial tensile force arid recommends to take ' ·
. : .. p ·. ··:· ·.,. ·. '· . ·· .·· ' ': . '.'· . ·:.' .
·~ Tuc =2{1+0.002 Au}{!; whe~e,f~,== ul#mate cyljnd~rstJ'ength in 1/)lilf, :·

l
. :· .•... K. . ·. :.; :.·•' :·. < ,..•. ·.· .·· ··' ..
PJ .4g-~.x~re~sed ·~ M,L arid Pu. is,"e~tiv~ foqe11sion. .1-
I!owever since tS. Code does· not make any provision f9r the effect of axial tension, the Fig. 5.6.2 Combination of Vertical or Inclined Stirrups with Bent- up ~ars
)( sh~ strength ofcon.crete ( Tlic) !Jllder aXial tension may be assunied·to be equal to zero for
conservll!ive design.
:;,

~"
In case of beam with shel\1" reinforcement, the external shear at ultimate state is jointly '
carried by the concrete and the web steel, and the equilibrium equation can be written as:
J( (6) l}f/ect of Cross-sec{!on
The shear strength""ofbeains (without shear reinforcement) decreases as the effective ~epth
vu = vuc + vus ......(5.6.1)
where Vuc = ultimate
.
shear resisted by the concrete member without shel\1" reinforcement, and
.. incre,ases; No. significant -effect on shear strength. of beams has been observed for: rectangul~
· beems having bid ratio. ranging from 114 to J.In slabs. some strengtbenh~cemep,t has·been V
us
= ultimate shel\1" carried by the web steel.
observe}d it} the ~?ritical rnnge of Mi from 4 to 19 (73/2) ~~haps <Jue to membrane: effect llltd.th.e. 5.6.2 Shear Resisted by Shear Reinforcement
anti-efastic benging eff.ect~. This· .increas.ein strength has been ac~ounted for in :Code by The ultimate shear resistance. ( Vris.) offered by the shear reinforcement is' obtained by
in:ultipiyjn~tlt~sh~str~Pstl!.?~s.l~b~~yJactQrJfqr.slabsasgiveninSect, 5.7.: , · ., · considering the truss analogy. According to the analogy, the R.C. member is assumed to be made
:,? i.\
' (7) Effect of sr.ear Reinforcement- - ' .' .. ' ..
Concrete. gets eonfllled b¢tween the stiQJJp spacing, resultins in increase in the shear
up of an analogous truss in which. concrete compression zone acts as a compression chord, the
longitudinal tensile reinforcement acts as a tension chord, the transverse reinforcements (stirrups)
capacity {89/8,'97/2)~ ·Theref$-e, ·the shear ~trength of beam increases with the shear correspond to the tension web members, and the concrete between the inclined cracks form the
( · reififorcementratio\9817).' .
(B) Effect of Two-wayAf;tiOn ' .- .
·· •
compression web members (Fig. 5.6.3).

rr~I..
The,two-way tJendingllbd shem: actiqn increa8es the shear strength of slabs. ·For details Web.tension members
, see Sect~ 5.9.4. · :, . .
s.i SHEAR STRENGTH OF BEAM: wl:ru SHEAR ~INFOB.CEMENT:
j .

~
. · · 5.6.1 Geperal
AS seen earlier, whe~-'the shear acting on the section is· greater tf1an· the she!!{, capacity of

r
concrete ( . vuc ), the 4iagonai crack
....•... " emerges. In
order. to .'t>revent. the fonnation
. of
. the diagonal
) cracJcing and its widening, ~ditional shear resistance is required to hold tdgether the two parts of Fig. 5.6.3 : Truss Analogy J9r R.C. beams
, the beam, on opposite sides ofthe possiJ'.le p~cJc. f<> :P~v:ent s4ea:rfailure as shown in Fig. 5. 6.1. . The shear resisted by shear reinforcement can,fie worked out by considering the equilibrium
', of forces across a potential diagonal crack, which is assumed to eXtend at an angle of 45° with the

r::
)(
[Olllll) Fig.5.6.l
·."
horizontal. Fig. 5. 6. 4 shows the diagonal crack intersecting 'n ' number of web reinforcing bars;
inclined at an angle a. with the ixis of the member; and spaced at distance 's ··apart.
 }1
c
194 Limit State of Collapse -Shear
Chapter 5 i Stet. 5.6 Shear Strength of Beam with Shear Reinforcement 195 ('
Since any design of a R.C. member (either for flexure or shear) has to be such that the failure
iJ not sudden and brittle, but slow and ductile giving prior warning, the shear reinforcement is
I B#mcWbls the suffix 'v' only ftom symbol \ ' for spacing of stirrups to avoid confusion* ('
&.lsned in such a way that shear failure shall occur by yielding of shear reinforcement Therefore, i , .. . ·. 0:87/;J~·d. . . . 0.81fyAsv.d c
at failure 'n' number of web bars crossing the diagonal crack reach the design yield strength/yd. •· ·Y. ··•
H·:.,;
·:I. . . t.
.:. Spacmg of vertical stirrup s = v ......(5.6.4)
Forequilibriwn, · usv
shear carried by shear reinforcement = sum of the vertical components oftensile forces
r'·
where, V = Ultimate shear resisted by Vertical Stirrups
· developed in the shear reinforcement. ""' = total area ofVerticallegs of Stirrups at a section
Asv c
Thus, Vus = nAswfyd sina.
· where, Vus = Ultimate shear carried by the shear reinforcement.
......(5.6.2a) J,
= characteriStic strength of steel '1- 415 Nimml
From Fig. 5.6.4, it can be seen that to avoid shear failure the diagonal crack must be C
Asw = total cross-sectional area of steel in web within a distance 's ', .intercepted by at least one stirrup. ,.....
=
fyd = design yield Stress of steel (fyd 0.871y ), Putting n = 1;and a.= 90° in Eq. 5.6.2b, we get MaXimum spacing of stirrup= d. l
=
n number of bars cir links crossed by the cra<;:k, and But the tests (73/2) have shown that the links which intersect the diagonal crack near the top ~
a. = inclination of the web steel with the axis of the member (a. 45°) are relatively ineff~tive and that a link, in addition to the one crossed by the diagonal crack and (·
~~ with~ a close. distan~ to ~t; !U~er increases the shear strength of the link. Therefore the C
maxunum spacuig of stirrup IS lumted to 0.15d. .. .... (5.6.5)
Maximum ~acmgofstirrup'/- 0.75 dor 1-300 mm. ~"
Collllllelfts :/(I) The code does not specify the minimum spacing of stirrups. It is considered that the "- ·
min~mum spacing ,bf the stiri'up should IJe preferably not less than 100 mm to effect better concreting and to
p~nt congestion of steel near the support. Thus the first stirrup can be provided at a distance of half the. ('
~' itim~p spacing (s/2) from the face of the support since each stirrup is effective for a distance of s/2 on each

l-s4-s-.j--s~ side_rf the stirrups. If minimum spacing of I 00 mm is adopted the first stirrup should be placed at a distance C
j- dcot_4s0+ dcota --J of SO mmfrom the face of the support which is shown in Fig. 8.11 ofSP-34 (87/8).
(2) The inclined stirrUps are rarely used in practice because of high fabrication and labour cost ~
,.., . ns .· . ~ ilil>o~d The commoil'typeS ojvertical stiri'ups' aie shown in Fig. 5.6.5. . . . \
Fig; 5.6.4 : Shear Resisted by Web Steel
· From geometry, (3) It ~ay IJe noted that the derivation ofsheat resistance (Vw) of web reinforcement has been based ~
on assumed iruss analogy-and not on the actual complex behaviour of R C. beam with shear reinforcement, (_ ~
lis = ( d- d) cot 45° + ( d- i) cota. at. collaps(1. The truss analogy is an oversimplified model of RC. beam failing in shear. 1t ignores the
interaction between the web reinforcement, the aggregate interlock capacity, and the dowel shear ('
= ( d- i) (I + cota. ) ( ·:cot 45° = I ) :~
capacity. This analogy assJtmes that shear failure occurs by yielding of steel but, in fact, for thin webs and ·
or n = d(l+cota. )Is (·: d-i'.::.d) ......(5.6.2b) flanse.d sections, the shear failure may IJe initiated by diagonal web crushing. However, for want of any
· The dimension i is small in comparison with din most of the cases, and hence neglected. simplified model, this anOJogy, which is conservative, is used in practical design.
' · C
Substituting the values Of fyd.;;, 0,87 1y, and n = d(l+ cota. )/sin Eq. 5.6.2a,
' IDilin.otlliin(l.
.
t;.._.
.
· . .
.

we get, Vus = ·
0;81/.A d . .
·. y sw .
s, . . (sm a. +cos a. )
.
......(5.6.3)
This equation can be uSed to find ·the shear strength of inclined stirrups or series of bent-up
bars at different cross-sections.
•ioHOCI•""IeioMdi
rw.
~
<~z..W ti .. llld ...,
D.' ~HSC.....r,pa~v~- ~
zlogiod•ma (opori)
.· l J

5.6.3 Vertical Stirrups * Remiuki : The symbbli $' and An have IJeen used, in the initial discussion, to match them with (j
. ~ . . . . .· ..
RepresenWtg verticality of stirrups br-suftix 'v' and substituting Vui = V~~.rv• s = sv' Asw·= Asv the mnations given in the Code; Th,ese ~symbols are interpreted by the tnithors as follows : In the symbol
s,, 's' referi to horlzonta{ spacing and 'v' refers to vertical stirrups, while in the symbol A...,. suffu 's' ,~.
~d a.= 90° in 'f;q. 5.6.3 we get, 0.81/.A .d
refers to Shear reinforcement ari4 'v' refers to Ver:tical stirrups. Thus; use of small letters 's' ' "
. . y sv
vusv = -~·--·---- sini!lltali~fJUSl)l in dif/.erenfsymbols together. with· iv· and 'V' carl')'ing different meanings, create (
sv confusion in the minds of readers. ;4s ~ch, in the opinion of the Authors A.,.. and only 's' without suffix· , ..J
'v' would have been ·appropriate symbols for web steel and horizontal spacing. Hereafter, symbol;c's_,',.
without suffix.. 'v' will be used for spacing of stirrups. . . (',
 trrrr'!i
"~· 196 Limit State q{ Collapse - Shear
5.6.4 Bent-up Bars (87/10)
·~
ben~up
Ckapter 5 Shear Strength of Beam with Shea.··Reinforcement 197
-~ For single bent-up bar or a group of J>aralleJ bars (all bent,up at the Sante
5.6;5 Minimum Shear Reinforcement (92/3)
<:ross-section) crossing the cmck as shown in Fig 5. 6.4, the relation can be ol>bined by J>Uiting
n ==I, Vus == Vusb, Asw == Ash **in Eq. 5.6.2a. · '· . (~)Reasons for providing ~inimum shear reinforcement:
..J .:i!D ' the shear r~inforcement in the fonn of stirrups (i.e. web reinforcement) remains stress free

~ V~b ~~V., 0.87iy A., sb.a ......(S.6.6a) J~til diagonal crack occurs at which instant the web bars intersecting the diagonal crack
:J
~
For, a 45°, 0.87iy A,. X 0.707 ..... ,(5.6.6b) ~~ives a sudden increase in stress. If the member is not provided with web steel sudden
shear failure occurs without giving any warning. Codes-; therefore, prescribe the minimum·

v~, ~
This 'Y"em of bent-up bars is known as Single System. Ukewise, for n 2, i.e. double 'YStem.
~:J shear reinforcement in the fonn of minimum vertical. stirrups for the following reasons :
fy A,. sin a
2 X 0.87 •.....(5.6.7) (i} . To prevent sudden shear failure with the fonnation of inclined crac"ing and iittpart invaluable

f, ~ ,haroct..,w
:J ductility to give warning of impending failure.
Note ' In a/ /he abo.e """""'"' ""•gth a{ /he sn""P « '--up bar •hick •hall [n) To prevent premature failure if the concrete cover bursts away and the bond to the main
:J he,.._
notthe
in 0an 415 Nl-'.
shear reinforcement failure. <haws thm ,_""'"'than 4/J N/mn,> U nat <kwlaped
beforeRue=h !---· - reinforcement is lost.
(Jil) To act as ties for holding the beam reinforcement in position while concreting, and thus
maintaining the minimum requirements of cover, clear distance between the bars etc.
··:J From by it can every diagonal cmck mwt be (iv) It perfonns the function of preventing the pressing down of the longitudinal-reinforcement
intercepted Fig.S.M,
at least one (n :::be1)seen that bar.
bent-up to avoid sh..,. fuilure

~I ~ bar~
~ ··- and hence maintaining the dowel capacity.
:J
bar~ towan~s
Putting n and a 45" in Eq. 5. 6.2bwo got, maximum spacing of bent-up U. (v) To confine the concrete and increase its strength (97/2) and rotation capacity.
Thus, the maxim\!m effective region liJ< 45° bent-up U from the bend the
~) SUJ>port. The therefore, he bent at a distance nat <ttceeding ld fram
(b) Amount of minimum shear reinforcement
the·centre offir" bent-up
support, har should,
for resisting shear. Available test data shows that the vertical stirrups shall be able to offer a stress at least
:J 0.4 N/mTif to avoid sudden development of a diagonal crack. I.S. Code, therefore, prescribes that
When any tension steelis no longer required to resist flexure, the main reinlbrcement fro"!
Asv 0.4 0.87 fyAsv
bottom of the beam can be bent-up to act as sh.., reinfun:ement and aJ..o to se.-ve as an additional -b- :2:: . f. or s S: ...•.. (5.6.8)
_) main steel at top of the beam st the SUpport. I.S. Code requires that shesr at a "'ction shall not be .s . 0.87 y 0.4 b
Ciitried entirely by bent-up b.,, only. The bent-up bars shsU shall invariably be used in combination
From Eq. 5.6.5 and Eq. 5.6.8, the ultimate shear resisted by minimum vertical stirrups is
:J ''"'h stirrups. Howev.,, their .,.fitl contribution to sheanesistance shall be considered not more given by:
the
thanfollowing reasons
50% of the. : . required to be carried by both. The restriction is impo,.d because of
total shesr
~
vusv.mm. = 0.4bd ...... (5.6.9)
This means that minimum stirrups shall be such· as to provide a shear resistance of 0.4 bd.
_) (s) Bent-up b.,. ,_,d to csuse longitudinal crocking or crushing at bent points
(b) They are less effective in tying the comvression flange and web together. where, Vusv.mm. = Ultimate shear resisted by Minimum Vertical Stirrups
(c) . They fail to confine the concrete in shear region.
_) b = width of member which for flanged beam shall be taken as breadth of web bw
(d) interlock prevent widening ofdisgonal cmck but do not assist the dowel '<lion or sggreg..,
They onlyaction. s = spacing of stirrups which shall be lesser of (0.75d or 300mm)
_) A = total cross-sectioned area of stirrup legs effective in shear.
(e) Bent-up bars Only (without stirrups) are not effective it> preventing shoar failure. sv
f. = characteristic length of stirrup reinforcement which shall not exceed 415Nim11f.
:J The shOar resisted by ben>up bsrs can be calculated from Eq. 5.6.6 or Eq. 5.6. 7 depending y

~up ~
upon their type and mrnngement The total sh..,. ""istance of tbe combination Qf stirrups and

mode~
bent-up bars talcen equal 1o aJ..,braic sum of :be resistances of the Vertical stinups 1"" the However, in members of minor structural importance such as lintels, or where maximum
:J bars.· . Neurat Network the shear slrengtb of Rr '--- · · shear stress calculated is less than half the design shear strength ofconcrete this provision need not
be complied with. Therefore, in the case of beams when the shear resisted by concrete is less than
:J tlo~ -~--**Re~~rarks:
• 1nouflh IS rA"- ·-- -· -· v"auus With stirrups.
half ultimate concrete strength (i.e. Vu/ 2) only nominal shear reinforcement having minimum
"''df~
_ .. _v..., uoes symbol A... for_bent-up bars also, the authors have not used it for
"-~·
__ ••"'f'" ""''" '""' d.e "'"·•p hars an""' Wntea/ and A. "-s aU<ady ""• the,.... af diameter at.the maximum pennissible spacing should be provided to hold the longitudinal bars in
.:J "'1kaJ-., w;,h 'uf/ix ·,· "'""•#ng
bent-up bars from that vertical stirrups.
8ym00! A0 '""been"'"' ta d;j)>,,,,/at, "" """ af
- position. This will effect economy to some extent in long span beams. However, in practice such
'_) minute details are not worked out and only minimum shear reinforcement is provided.
 \
C\
--~ m.a.umum Shear Reinforcement
Shear reinforcement can prevent the diagonal tensile crack from spreading, but ,cannot control
-"""""" by • Y"" • ReactiOn at support - lhe load over AB in Fig. 5. 6. 7a
Sbea<
It is given
""• s'hear
sb<a' at B. acting at sectiOn m - mat a distanCC 'd' from the face
c\,
~
I force
r_ .\~
'' failure due to diagonal compression by crushing of the concrete in web (See Fig.5.3.J \ \',
ofsupport. _ . I'
Therefore, I.S. Code specifies an upper limit on the maximum value of nominal! . 1'\le.nucal section for shoat at SUI'P""' off&ing compressivo reaction is, thus. lhe section at \\
-stress ( = 't uc.max ), even for a member with shear reinforcement. -~
"'~~ 'd' from the face ofsupport i.e. ( b,12 + d) from lhe of support. b, lhe centre v;bere is
!\\
\, \\
'~~ofSuppod·
Maximum allowable shear on the member is thus, limited to Vuc.max = 't uc.max.bd ......(5.6.10)-
. the d~agonal
\I
1\\

~ runs baCkWards at 45• in the support togion itself (Fig. 5.6.6b). The fo"" oausing diagonal
where;t uc.max-= MAXimum allowable Ultimate shear in Concrete -given in Table 5.fl,.J. . tenSile
•,:, , . In - of support> o!fermg . reactKm. . , omok ·starts from fa<:e of support
\ \\
•.• \I\
5.6.1 : Maxim_um Shear Stress in N/mm 1
: .tiiliton failure is lhe load up to th< faoe of support. For oaloulation of design sb<a', lhe oritioal ( \\
M35 """"" is theiOfore. oonsidered at the fa<:e support. In - of a seoondary beam conneoted (>I
Concrete Grade MIS M20 M25 M30
,uboolithioally to lhe main beam of -ly s:une height with their tops at same level, the load from
't UCJ nax Nlmm 2 l 2.5 I 2.8 It
3.1 I 3.5 I 3.7 I 40
iiooadary beam is transferred at bottom of the maio beam inducing ,..silo reaction in lhe oadn
- · The critical section for sb<a' in this oase also is considered to be at the fa<:e of maio beam ( \\
'11
,\

•Remarks : This value of 't uc.max for M30 seems to be distracted from the apparent
variation of 'tuc.max right from MI5 to M40_ The value of 3.4 fits in this variation appropriately. The
value -~hown in the figure appears to have distracted due to roundin g off values to one decimal
(i.e. supporting beam).ln such a case,
VuD :::: shear force at face the of support.
r \\1,
------------------------------- Wu r\\\
\.
5.6'.,7 \...ritical
~ Section for Calculation of Design Shear VuD 1;
B
Nonnally, a support may offer either a compressive reaction, as in case of beams resting u r\\
. 1!
on walls or columns (Fig. 5.6.6a) or a tensile reaction, as in case of tank walls or slabs/ \i
beams connected to under side of supporting beam, (i.e. hung supports) or secondary beam
connected to main beam at the same level (Fig. 5.6.6b). c \\t
- \\
( '\
\!
ll

'Ctl.
Boil"' Beam ( \\",,

(
'--f--'
.Column
Vuma
l Vuo
·

( a ) Cr~ical Section at Distance d from the Face of Support

(b\ (
\..E;+d-1
(al (~
Fig. 5.6.7

RCCbracket I
Thus, V _- w ( b 12 + d) for support> offering oompre<sive reaction, ......(5.6.\ Ia)
V in• general, \.

Water tank floor slab

11
and V 0 •
u...-
Y 11 s_
forsupport> offering tensile reaotion. ~-.. ....(5 .6.\ Ib) ('

,,.~
(b) Critical Section at Face of Support u0 u.max
(
Fig. 5.6.6 : Critical Sections for Shear Nm• , """"'''""''· "" ""''' "' ''' f"'' of_,. "' "' •'"'"oc' """ '" (b, 12+ d J Jim"
Tests show that in ·case of supports inducing compression in the supporting member, the '" ,..... of'""'"" ,, '"' ''"' '" •"'"""' """' v•.:. "' '" """ •f """""'' ,, """'""' '"'""' (
diagonal crack nearest to the support starts from the face of support and runs upwards at 45° _.,., r · - u ,..,..-'""'"' """'""""""' V.., ,fix ''""""'" - · • w!U" .,;dem
approximatelytowards the load. In such a case, th-e design shear is the force causing relative fr""' "'""""" """""" "'"' "'" "''""'"'"' ,, '"" , _....... """ """" ""'" ...- ""'"" of r
v.ertical stirrups. though. in fact, it is not necessary.
sliding of end portion-! and inner portion-II along the diagonal crack. (See Fig. 5.6.7)
 - ~v ~•mrr llltlle of Collapse - Shear
5.6.8 Enlaaneed Shear Near Support

oiiJoams~
Design Shear Strength of Concrete 201
S,..,.liUJ...,. wm
caati1e..n. wilh!'"f.,..,. reinfureemeot liOnnalty """"'
plane inclined atan"'8le ofJO'tO lbo horizomaJ. iflhe aogJe ofliri!ure pJao. is fun:ed to be imolltied Approach for Enhanced Shear Strength near Supports.~
_~ carrying-generally uniform load or where the principal load is located further than
~
more sfoeply because lbo section 10 be <onshfered is clo,e to lbo "'PP<>rt or m.. Olher reason, the
· · faCe of support the prOcedure given in Sect. 5.8 may be followed and no further
m-furce ""'liiredlo J>roduce liUJ,.. is increased. <This 0cc1us when lbo mtioofsh...--
remro.-...., ·· sh~ at such sections are required.
(F"~g 5.~8)
:_) em..;.. clepd, (old) is less lllan 2). For beams wfflrout.,..,. festn:suJts show !bat
m..lhe mtio of shear- to eft'e<tive deptJ, (aid) less lbari 2, lbe.,..,. "'Pacily 5o7 ;-DESIGN SHEAR STRENGTH OF CONCRETE . .

This-._... of.,..,. Slrength may be ta1ren in~ acconnt in design ofSection.-lbe

_) ......... )!allobolicallywhiJe for aid> 2, lbo .,..,.capacjly almOst remains constant
!As mentioned earlier in Sect. 5.5(2) that shear resisted by concrete member without shear
'_)
SllpJiort by increasing de.ign shear Slrength o f - "~by V~
x (2d I a) provided that design
.~inforcement depends on the grade of concrete and the percentage of tension steel at the section
~det.~nsiderations. The ultimate shear resisted by concrete or design shear strength of concrete
is given by (72/5):
/', .,..,. '"=at &ce ofsni>P<N1 is less than_.,,., allowable sJ,ea,. V.,_. (&e Eq. 5.6./0 and

~ e~ent ~0.8~k ({1+5jf -1)

~
Table Ml). VenicaJ stinups are not v"'Y effective in beams in which aid< I, in which case
/ -, stim.ps parnJJel to the main tension "inf.._.,. should be Provided within the middle t
uc
= 0.85 X
613 -- •••(5.7.1)
~
314 of 'a'. This is J>articulady USeful f<>< COlbeh (See Sect. 5.6.9) or pile caps or
r"\
wften: IIJedepth.
effective section considered is ciO<er to the &ce ofa SUppoq or "'-..red load than twice lbe A
0.8fk
c
IOOAst
~ :: where, = 6,89 p ~I , P1 = ~
p
7 1

~ · and Vuc = Ultimate shear resisted by Concrete without shear reinforcement

~I
6
= t uc bd ......(5.7.2)
·~ Using the above formula the design shear strength of concrete for different values of
percentage of tension steels p, %, and grades of concrete are given in Table 5.7.1.
C)
Table 5.7.1 Design Shear Strength of Concrete Tuc in N/mni'-
·::_] .2_a IOOAst Concrete Grade
tuc ·~

CJ 2
bd Ml5 M20 M25
~
0.15 0.28 0.28 0.29
0 0.25 0.35 0.36 0.36
(J 1 2 3
0.50
0.75
0.46
0.54
0.48
0.56
0.49
0.57
,a/d-- 1.00 0.60 0.62 0.64
CJ Fig. 5.6.8, 1.25 0.64 0.67 0,70
(J In such
supports than by
cases IIJemechanism.
shear - - load,""'
- .n.,ferred more by direct comp=ion to the 1.50 0.68 0.72 0.74
1.75 0.71 0.75 0.78
·' \
If shear reinforcement· is required the total area of this is given by : 2.00 0.71 0.79 0.82
J
{'t xax."h-211}. (0.4xaxb) •· 2.25 0.71 0.81 0.85
f \ '
't" A == :......u
s ·- .·)
~~~ ~ - - - ---
U8if . 2.50 0.71 0.82 0.88
. "y y 2.75 . 0.71 0.82 0.90
'.__, where, a < d
3.00 0.71 0.82 0.92
and a =sh.;.. - 0, distance of concentr.Ued load fium lbe fuce of '"PPort. and above
() This "inforeement shonld 1M, provided Within middle Ji4 of 'a' and ho•izrintal.,..,. Note : The term As, is the area of longitudinal tension reinforcemenT
c·" . will be effective
reinforcement . than vertical. which continues at least one effective depth beyond the section being_
considered except at supports where .fo/1 area of tension steel may be used,
vrovided bars are anchored vrooerlv accordinl! to code reauirements.
 \1
'·t;J.B
;;o.\~

~ve....,.... (S.&.2al
. LUl Limit State of Collapse - Shear Chapter 5· \1
(2). Compute design shear, VuD
=
y..o Y•""'- w.( b, 12 +d) for support offering
Tests have shown that shallower members fail in higher nominal shear stress and this is taken ~·
:~

into account by prescribing multiplying factor k > 1. Thus, for solid slabs, the design shear strength ;;,.
~
V"" V•""' for support offoring rensioa reaction ......(S.S.lb) (- I
\

of concrete shall be k x 'tuc where, 'tuc to be obtained from Table 5. 7.1 and has the following where, b == Breadth of Support,
values: •· s
d == effective depth
(3). Obtain the maximum allowable ultimate shear Vuc.max ......(5.6.10)
Overall Depth of ;:?:300 275 250 225 200 175 s;l50 I
slab inmm II
v
uc.max 't
where,
== 't
uc.max
bd
to be obtained from Table 5. 6.1. b =width of beam·

~·
Values of k 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
uc.max

,,,~\
Under no circumstances, the maximum shear acting on the solid slab shall exceed
.
' 0.5 vuc.max = 0.5 't uc.maxbd b +d
( ..§. A I
where, b= 1000 mm and 'tuc.max is given in Table 5. 6.1. This restriction is imposed to reduce u.max Ix r
the congestion of shear reinforcement. Sec\i011 X • X at whie11
shea' {ore is zero
Shear Strength of Members under Axial Compression :
For members under axial compression Pu the design shear strength given in Table 5. 7.1 shall
be multiplied by the f,actors : 3 pu '
B = 1 + -A- '! 1.5
gfck
......(5. 7.3)
~
\ I
I

p,~
where, Pu = ultimate axial compressive force in Newtons,
A = gross area of concrete section in mm2,
fck
g '
= C.~irracteristic strength of concrete in N/mm2 Llll_ ,., qr
I
1 Design shear
I
1
,d r_
Minimum shear reinforcement zone
I
1 Nominal
reinforcement zone a.87f A' · S.R.ZOII& •
5.8 DESIGN OF SHEAR REINFORCEMENT ( 96/3, 92/4, 98/9 ) 1 s-~
Consider a beam loaded by a uniformly distributed load giving compressive reaction over the
1
I S= ~lyAsv.d - 0.4b

I
She~r
Vusv
support:. Fig. 5.8.1 shows a beam simply supported at ends carrying a uniformly distributed Fig. 5.8.1 : Design of Reinforcement
ultimate load of intensity wu . In general the section x-x is taken at which the shear force is (4). Check that VuD ~ Vuc.max , If VuD > Vu.max , increase the section.
zero.The steps for design of shear reinforcement given below are valid for the general case of a
(5). Calcul•t< tho <hoar "''~ by coooret<, V " bd .....(5.7.2)
~
100A uc t uc
beam carrying a unifonnly distributed load subjected to end moments, in which case the shear
force will be zero at any section x-x and not at the mid-span as in the case of a beam simply \ t
K
to bo ubrniood oorrospoodiogn % "
rt bd
aod thOt)'ll' of co"""'" usod from Tobie 5. 7.1;
.
! usv.mm
supP9rted at its ends. (6). Compute Ultimate shear resisted by Minimum Vertical Stirrups, V .
I \ v . " o.4bd ..... .(5.6.91
The steps for design of shear reinforcement for such a beam ,loaded by-DDL are given as under: l
usv.mm ur.mm ·
(7). Thorofor< Ultim.rto <hoar Rosistaoce ofR.C. mombe< with l\linimum Stirrups, V . i>
~
(1 ). Calculate the maximum ultimate shear, Vu.max at the end of the beam.
For a beam.AB of span Land simply supported at ends and loaded with ultimate UDL of givoo by o Vw.min " V + V-""' ......(5.SJ)
intensitywu, Vu.max = wu.L/2 ......(5.8.ia) (8).lf V ~V . provide minimum stirrup5 at spacing given by
In general in the case of a beam AB of a span L, simply supported at ends, loaded with UDL u0 ur.nun ......(5.6.8)
ofintensity w11 subjected to end moments MUA and MuB . (see Sect. 3.5.4)

. w,L
(MUA - MUB) b
0.87 fisv
s == - 0.4 b --
where, b == "idth of be:o~m or breadth of web ( bw) for flanged beams.
v u.max
= --. ±
2 L
...... (5.8.1 )
(
 i04 Limit State of Collapse - Shear

eve~
· Clltlpter Design of Shear Reinforcement 205
Note: If, v.,.nun:' < V.,r.mitf it is not necesswy to calculcte VliD hut onlj niinimrun sh!ar
reinforcement is necessary to he provided In such a ~ase
proceed to step !fi (ii). ·
If VuD > Vw:min, design the shear reinforcement else procee<f to Step IO(it). Eq. 5,8.8.is obtained by equating decreose in she/Ir ( = w. x Lsi ) with reduction in resisting shear
{9). Design of shear reinforcement ( =·J:'..- - vw.•ln ~
( ··Working on the same lines the zone Ls2 can he obtained For obtaining zone Ls3 , increase in shear
J i) Shear carried by shear reinforcement V = V D - V
- liS u uc L~-its zero value = w L 3 which shall he equal to V I 2. :. L 3 = 0.5 V I w
(ii) If bent-up bars are used caiculate shear carried by bent-up bar,· Vusb f7''""'.( ·~ . 11 S • IIC • • S • 11C • If
\ L.. ___;':JS Code does not make any mention about the nommal st1rrups m the reg~on of length Ls3"
_) VliSb = 0.87fy Asb sina :$ 0.5 VliS : r.(ii} It may be noted that Eq. 5.6.9 will be obtained by equating Eq. 5.6.4 and Eq. 5.6.8, since the
where, A86 = area of bent-up bar ... ...(5.8.5) j spacftJg at the junction of zone I .and zone II will be the same.
_/ ( -;(iii) In beams of small spans (say < 5m) the minimum reinforcement works out to 6mm bars at
a = angh between bent-up bar and beam axis = 0. 707 for a =45° (·maxinium permissible spacing with the result zone III is absent. In practice shear reinforcement is designed
j
If bent-up bars arc not provided Vusb =0 l fo~ Z(}~ I and zone II and minimum links_ are provided considering that zone - III is absent. Also in practical
(iii) Ultimate shear to be carried by Vertical Stirrups, Vusv j ~ign shear is taken equal to maximum value of end shear, Vu.mm: , instead offinding shear at the critical
., ' .section to reduce computational efforts. It will be observed that thtt region of design shear, in general, is
_) vusv = vus - vusb ~ 0.5 vus i small and no appreciable saving in stirrups is obtained by using exact method.
--. OR Vusv = VliS when bent-up bars are not provided. ......{5.8.6a) ! (iv) Even though the code does not mention about the minimum spacing of stirrups, it is
...... (5.8.6b) i recommended that minimum spacing of the stirrups should not be less than ·1 00 mm. See comments given in
Spacings of stirrups of area Asv.
\ sect: 5.6.3.
0.87jA d All these steps mentioned above for a beam loaded with UDL and without the provision of ·
y sv
s =
vusv - :$ (0. 75 d or 300mm) whichever is less
...... (5.8.7)
, bent-up bars, are shown in Fig. 5. 8.1.
Table nos. 5.8.1, 5.8.2 and 5.8.3 have been given to serve as design aids for design of shear
where, fy "f 415 N!mm 2 for stirrups or bent-up bars. reinforcement. (For details see ref. 97/6)
(I 0). Calculate zones of shear reinforcement
(i) Zone - I : Zone of design shear reinforcement L
Table 5.8.1: Ultimate Sbear Resistance(Vusv.min) of minimum vertical stirrups in kN for different
v
u.maxw_ _
Lsi= ___ ur.mm
_
- v . s1
widths and effective depths of beams
u ... (5.B.8) Effective Depth ·vvidth of Beam bin mm
(ii) Zone- ii :·Zone ofminimum shear reinforcement
v . - 0.5 vuc
L = ur.mm
dinmm 230 250 300 350 380 400 450
s2
wu 250 23.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 38.0 40.0 45.0
vu.max ... ...(5.8.9a)
300 27.6 30.0 36.0 42.0 45.6 48.0 54.0
or L _ L L
s2 - ----;--- - sl - s3 330 30.3 33.0 39.6 46.2 50.2 52.8 59.4
u 42.0 49.0
... ...(5.8.9b) 350 32.2 35.0 53.2 56.0 63.0
If Vu.max < Vur.mm. or VD . then Ls =0 400 36.8 40.0 48.0 56.0 60.8 64.0 72.0
u < Vur.mm
1 450 41.4 45.0 54.0 63.0 68.4 72.0 81.0
and Ls2 = ( Vu.max - 0.5 Vuc ) j wu .
480 44.2 48.0 57.6 672 73.6 76.8 86.4
I
(iii) Zone- III : Zone of nominal shear reinforcement 500 46.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 76.0 . 80.0 90.0 I
i
0'\V 550 50.6 55.0 66.0 77.0 83.6 88.0 99.0
•J
.
Ls3 =w-
--- ··uc
600 552 60.0 n:o 84.0 91.2 96.0' 108.0
u ......(5.8.10) 630 58.0 63.0 75.6 88.2 95.8 100.8 113.4
83 650 59.8 65.0 78.0 91.0 98;8 104.0 117.0
In L zone minimum diameter of stirrups shall be 6 mm and maximum spacing shall not
exceed 0)5d or 300 mm whichever is less. 700 64.4 70.0 . 84.0 98.0 106.4 112.0 126.0
Notes : (1) Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation.
(2) For flanged beam:b =h.,= breadth of web
--·-·-
,; . ,;11
%'£.:;'!_ r
I.

206 Limit State of Collapse - Shear -Chapters Sect. 5.9 Some Special Problems in Shear Design 207 r
(~

5.9 SOME SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN SHEAR DESIGN

Table 5.8.2 Shear Strength of Two-legged vertical Stirrups per ubitlength values of v,.., I d in N!nun Some of the special problems in shear design are as follows :
( 1) Shear force envelope; (
Spacing Fe250 Fe415 (2) Effect of varying depth on design shear : Beams of varying depths; ·
s Diameter in mm Diameter in mm (3) Effect of Curtailment of bars on shear strength;
, ~6 ~8 ~10 +12 #6 • #8 #10 #12
'
(4) Shear in Slab under concentrated loads-Effecf , oftwo~way action on shear strength
' (5) Design of corbels or brackets. 1~
75 164 291 455 656 272 483 756 1089
c These are explained below in brief. ·
80 154 273 427 615 255 454 70!} 1021
90. 137 243 380 546 227 403 630 907
5.9.1 Shear Force Envelope - Maximum Shear Diagram
100 123 218 341 492 204 363 567 817 In any design, whether for flexure or for shear, one is always interested in knowing the (
llO 112 199 310 447 185 330 515 742 maximum values of design quantities. As live load can occupy any portion'of the span, or any span
120 102 182 285 410 170 302 472 681 of a continuous beam, the shear at any particular section may happen to be maximum for different
125 98 175 274 394 163 290 453 654 load positions, just as it happens for maximum bending moment at a section. It is, therefore,
130 95 168 263 :178 157 279 436 629 necessary to obtain a diagram, covering the maximum values given by all possible critical loading
140 88 156 244 351 146 259 405 583 cases, known as the maximum shear diagram or the shear force envelope. It can be drawn by
150 82 146 228 328 136 242 378 544 using an approach adopted for drawing a bending moment envelope (see Chap. 3). The drawing of
160 77 136 213 307 127 227 354 510
'· shear force envelope is more important in case of a continuous beam than a simply supported
180 68 121 190 273 113 202 315 454
l;jf beam. As an illustration, let us consider a two span continuous beam carrying a uniformly
I f. 200 61 109 171 246 102 181 284 408
J . 225 54 97 !52 219 91 161 252 363 distributed load.
~ Fig. 5.9.l(a) shows the shear force diagram for three different loading cases. The shear
250 49 87 137 197 . 82 145 227 327
ft force envelope is fmally obtained by combining all the three loading cases. ·
300 41 73 114 164 68 121 189 272
Notes : (/)Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation. I
(;
A~C.
i
(2) Values of spacing to be rounded in multiples of JOmm or in 3" module on the lower side.
(3) The maximum spacing shall not be greater than 0. 75d or 300mm whichever less. - .5625 S.F. CoeffiCients
~
~
.375 .625 S.F. Coefficients

Table 5.8.3 :Shear Strength (Vus,) of Bent-up Bars in kN. ~

~
~ ~ .0625
~
~.:-~.375 -~.4375
Diam. Fe250 Fe 415 ~
~~

mm a =45° a= 60° a. = 45° a =60° :.~

Max. S. F. Coefficients

10 12.08 kN
~I A B C
14.79 kN 20.05 kN 24.56 kN ~ f.4375 .625f .625 .437~
-~
12 17'.39 21.30 . 28.87 35.36
16 30.92 37.87 51.33 62.87 .4375 S.F. Coef.
18 39.14 47.93 64.97 79.87 ~ .0625. • -~5

~5625
20 48.32 59.18 80.21 98.23 ;:
22 58.46 71.60 97.05 118.86 ,,
. 25 :t
75.49 01 At:
-""-'•-,-V 125.32 153.38 Fig.5.9.1a
28 94.7Q 115.98 157.20 192.53 Comments.: For practical design of shear reinforcement, the maximum shear force Vu.max is taken
32 123.69 151.49 205.32 251.47 equal to 0.45 wL at the end supports, and 0.6 wL at the continuous support, with shear force reducing at the
.. NoteS: (1/a =angle between the bar and the axis of the member. rate equal to the intensity of loading (w J towards the support. If the last support of the unloaded span is
unable to offer downward reaction, then the maximum shear at the discontinuous support of the loaded
(1tl'he values lunie been derived wing relation VIL<h = 0.81f,,A_,hsina. t"nrr.., ..... ,..~.lrl l..n;oo-n ll ,,.Jf int!lonrl nf n 4~75wl..
!C) Some Special Problems in Shear Design 209
i[
', '
208 Limit State of Collapse - Shear Chapter 5 -~ct. 5.-9·
Mu
;J _) HII
Another illustration of a simply supported beam is also worth examining. One is usually under . V< VII - HII tanP l!Jld HII = - Z
1r . .B1Jt::- C11 = ..,___ • .:. 'uD II
,~
the impression that the shear force at mid-span is always zero. However, it can be seen from . cosj3
) __ ; Fig. 5.9.l(b) (Case-II and Case-III) that there can be a shear force of0.125wL at mid-span when Mu
only ha:Ifthe beam is loaded. This also explains the necessity of minimum shear reinforcement in M vuD = v - ___... tanf3 ......(5.9.1)
=V - ~ tanf3
' ___ !
• V II d
the mid-span region if0.125wuL exceeds 0.5 Vuc. uD II zII

At= ~--iW~
~· ::t~(i;)
2 2 .
(a)

.125 .125 S.F. Coefficients

L.x r-....

ff.
Hu
.5 ~.375
8q
u
. u rfJ usinp
Vuo=Vu-CusinP
.5 .125

A
~e-n B(ii)
'..__ __.--!
~~~=t .5
2 2 (b) - JM decreasing
.375
~ S.F. Coefrteients ~-
~(v).
l D decreasing

{~
~
"" - L125
.125
.5 ru ..
S.F.Envelop 4
zu
Fig. 5.9.1 (b)

5.9.2 Effect of Varying Depth on Design Shear- Beams of Varying Depth

\_ :u
u
ta: ~in P
= r.u
..L

Many times, in R.C. structure, the members are of varying section (98/6). Vuo=Vu+Cusin f3
\ _ ___/

Here, we study the effect of varying depth of a member on the value of design shear. When Fig. 5.9.2
the depth of the member varies along its length, the magnitude of the shear force will change due
to internal longitudinal forces caused by flexure becoming inclined. This situation arises in the case (!»)Bending moment decreasing with decrease in depth
When the. bending moment;depreases as the effective depth decreases as at a haunch
of continuous beams with haunches-at supports, cantilevers and sloped footing etc. Two cases
adjacent to free end support. This c&se is opposite to the previous one (Fig. 5.9.2b). Therefore,
arise depending upon whether the vertical component of internal compressive resistance acts in the
the value of 13 must be taken with a negative sign, and the expression for this case takes the form
direction of vertical shear or opposite to it. Both the cases are considered below.
Mu
(a) Bending moment increasing with the increase in depth .. V =V + - tanf3
uD u' d ......(5.9.2)
'-· Fig. 5.9.2(a) shows the condition when the bending moment increases numerically in the
5.9.3 Effect of Cu~ilment of Main Reinforcement on Shear Strength of Member
same direction as the effective depth 'd' increases, as in the case of tapered cantilever beam. This
is a more usual case. From Fig. 5.9.2(a), it is evident that the vertical component of the inclined
As the bending moment reduce$, the area of main reinforcement, designed for maximum
compressive force Cu due to resisting moment will be in the opposite direction to the extemai bending moment is not required, the surplus bars are curtailed at intermediate point along the length
~·
shear V11 acting at the venical section. of the member. This has, however, adverse effect on the shear strength ofthe member at the point
The design shear force VuD can be expressed as : of curtailment, requiriug special attention foc shear design at the point of curtailment. This is one of
the important findings of the latest research which has necessitated introduction of special design
V·uD = VII - CII sinP
·
provisions for shear at point of curtailment. Since curtailment of bars has been discussed at length
where CII = the total
.
internal compressive force having inclination f3 .with the horizontal, in Chapt.-6 this effect, and the corresponding provisions for shear design, have been discussed in
and ·- Vu = the ultima ·e vertical shear a': the section under consideration. Sect. 6.2.1 (viii), and 6.8.
 \
Some Special Problems in Shear Design 211
., v .ulfmt ~tace OJ collapse - Shear Chapter$ Sec;t. 5..9
't~ = 0.25 f1;
where fck is in N!mm ,
2 ......(5.9.3c) c
'
1
5.9.4 Sliear in Slabs under Concentrated Loads - Effect of Two-way action on Shear
Str~ngtb
Shear is generally not critical in slab, when the slab _is supported by beams and parries
unifonnly distributed loads, because the maximum shear force per unit length of slab is relatively
p = perimeter of the critical section, and
0
d = effective depth of slab at the critical section.
(3) When the ultimate shear VuD exceeds V uc given above, but is les.s than 1.5. 't~·Pi,
("

c
small. However, when a slab is subjected to heavy concentrated loads (as in the case of column shear reinforcement shall be provided in the region, from, the face of load to a section
("
footings or flat slab supported on columns), the maximum shear force per unit width of slab is where VuD ( = 0.5 't ~ ' .p d )and it shall be designed to carry a shear V equal to
0 ~
relatively high around such loads and the shear can be critical in the vicinity of concentrated· loads.
The two-way action in the slabs under p(>int loads gives rise to a peculiar punching shear ( VuD -0.5 'C~.p 0d). •
failure of slab in the vicinity and around the concentrated loads (80/2, 74/3), with potential diagonal (4) If, VuD > 1.5 't 'p d the depth shall be increased. ~
~ 0
I
cracking along the surface of a truncated cone, or a pyramid, as shown in Fig. 5.9.3. Tests have
5.9.5 Design of Corbels or Brackets
shown that the shear strength of sla~s under two-way action, i.e. the punching shear ·strength The corbel or bracket (85/6, 88/4, 96/S) is a shorter cantilever projection which supports a
depends upon the tensile strength of concrete, the ratio oflengths of sides of the concentrated load
(
load bearing member which is below the corbel (i.e. column or wall). In the case of corbel the ratio
and the effective· depth of slab (7717). aid is less than unity and the depth at the outer edge of the contact area sho~ld not be less than
one-half of the depth (i.e. D/2) atthe root of the corbel as shown in Fig. 5.9.4. The failure of the
_l ..,..,rcritical corbel is principally by development of vertical crack starting from the reentrant comer proceeding
d/2 ~----y- j Section towards its lower fibre. Bearing failure can also occur if adequate bearing area is not provided.
The design of corbels comes under the case of shear design with aid ratio less than 0.6. The
t J77}.l

I
I I
I ~ I design of corbel was not included in the earlier Cody IS : 456-1978 ( 79/1 ). Now the provision has
I I been incorporated in IS 456-2000 (0011-) which is alinostthe same as given in BS:8110(8S/4).
L----'-J
The design can be done as follows :
The width' b' of bracket shall be decided from the practical considerations and the size of the
I
I bearing plate based on bearing strength. ......(5.9.4)
I Area of bearing plate = Vu I a cbr r
!
Punching where, a cbr = bearing strength of concrete = 0.4Sj . ck"
around column
( 1) Section Design : design sll_ear VuD = -load carried by corbel.
(a) Width of corbel b =width of column.
I' j/ \; lj} (b) Depth shall be decided by following two criteria : ...... (S.9.Sa)
(i) For corbels, aid ';f0.6 :. df. a/0.6
Fig. 5.9.3 : Critical Section for two - way Shear
I.S. Code makes following recommendations in this regard.
v ......(S.9.Sb)
( 1) The critical section shall be taken at a distance d/2 from the periphery ofthe concentrated
(ii)Forshear, d -t:. ~ x b)
uc.max \,
load (or the column, the capital or the drop panel in case of flat slabs), where d is the effective
Total depth D = d + effective cover
depth of the slab. (Fig. 5. 9.3)
Depth at free edge f:. D/2
(2) When shear reinforcement is not provided, the ultimate shear force V11D at the critical
(c) Main steel: A81
section shall not exceed the shear· strength of slab given by The basis for designing horizontal main steel at top shall be, that it behaves as a tie member
vuc =(k.'t'')pd
s uc 0
......(5.9.3) in a simple triangular tie-strut system shown in Fig. 5.9.4 in which the force in the inclined
where, ks = (0.5 + t30 ) but ';f 1, ......(5.9.3a) compression strut F , the eccentricity 'a', the force V and the depth 'd' governs the design.
c u
length of shorter side of column I Capital From force triangle, ......(5.9.6a) r
~0 =
......(5.9.3b)
length oflonger side of column I Capital Vu = Fe sin 13 ......(S.9.6b)
F = 0.36jk b(x cos 13)
( i.e. fer b > 0.5D, k8 = 1.0) <# c c u
r·
~-
 _,.
r~ 212 Limit State of Collapse - Shear

•__)

_j
cotp = -
a
zu
• sinp =

Vu = Fc sinp :. Vu = ( 0.36 fk
~tl+zu2
z
u

c bxu.cosp ) sinp
• cosp = ;::=::=
...ftl+z 2
a

u
ChapterS

......(5.9.6c)

.......(5.9.7a)
r
'

~f!
-~:
- Sect. 5.10

(2) Shear Design:

Rlustrative Examples 21 ~

Shear to be resisted by horizontal stirrups of area Ash is given by :

Vush =V-V
u uc'
-~ Substituting the value of cosp and sinp from Eq. 5.9.6c, .I where, Vuc is that corresponding to ( 'tuc x 2d· I a) and l uc is correspondirig
-
to An
az
~ V = 0.36fk bx. - - " .....~(5.9.7b) Vertical spacing of these stirrups is given by: s=0.87f:y Ashd IVush
u c "tl+z2
u Also, total area of horizontal ties shall not be less than A51 12.
~ Zu = { d- 0.42xu)
......(5.9.7c) Ash [2d] 1. Ast ......(5.9.ll)
._, Vu a s 3 2
',.._,/ T = C = F cosp = - . - x cosp = V cotp = V x --,:.
u u c smj3 u u z ......(5.9.8) A h ( 4d I 3)
u :. s 1- s . . ......(5.9.12)
-~ _ Using Eq. 5.9. 7b and 5.9. 7c, the depth ofN.A. (xu) will first be obtained by trial and error Asl

procedure. Having known xu , the tension in horizontal steel will be obtained by using Eq. 5.9.8. ·
These will be provided over a distance 2dl3 from Ast"
__) The area of steel will be given by: A81 = Tu I~~ ......(5.9.9) (3) Development Length

. ;vhere, ~1 -= stress in steel corresponding to ~~to be obtained from the strain diagram shown in
Main steel Ast shall be anchored for an anchorage length equal toLd on both sides of the face
of support.
'--i'ig:-5.9.4, by using the following relation: & 1 = 0.0035 x (d- x ) I x ......(5.9.10)
- s u . u
':-] The main ~ension ~tee! shall not be less than 0.4% and not more than 1.3% of the sect~on ~t 5.10 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES:
the face of the supportmg member and should be adequately anchored. Ad~quate anchormg IS This s_ection includes examples of the following types:
yected either by welding th~einforcement at the face of the corbel or by bending back the bars
Ex. No. Type
to form a loop. In either case the bearing area of the load should not project beyond the straight
yrtion of the bars of main steel. · 5:10.1 Design of stirrups forgiven shear, section and Ast
(a) without curtailment of bars, (b) with curtailment of bars. h
-~'
:_) 5.I 0.2 Design of shear reinforcement for given shear, section and Ast

l ~t t !, ,y, /Tf r (a) without.~e use of bent-up bars, . (b}using bent-up bars.
•
-l J
f.-l'st-;
_) r, 5.1 0.3 Design of shear reinforcement for entire length of a simply supported beam, for given
uniformly distributed load, section and Ast and no bar curtailment,
_) 1 1 •• ! r 1[ (d-''' (a) using vertical stirrups only, (b) using bent-up bar also.
5.1 0.4 Design of shear reinforcement for a tapered cantilever, without bar curtailment.
I ~-1 ~"-A~ _._l
J
_) ll !:,iV) /
/ 10
r u 5.1 0.5 Design of shear reinforcement for an inclined beam subjected to axial tension and vertical
load.

J ~-/ ¥ l 5.10.6 Designofcorbel.

Ex. 5.10.1 :A R.C. beam, 230mm wide and 450 mm deep, is reinfo!r:.ed with 3 Nos.
0.003& #16 mm bars of grade Fe415, on the tension side, with an effective cover of 50 mm. Design
.. . ., vz-T. a . the shear reinforcement, consisting only of verticals stirrups, for each of the following
J · . Zu
SIOf}=<-
(l Vu= Fcsmp .J a2uS sections:

[1
)
-.-/
Tu=Fccosp
.
Q a
cos.,=- (a) Ultimate design shear force = 20 kN. Full tensioiJ steel is available.
Vu = Vucotf} Zu ~ (b) Ultimgte design shear force =80kN.
_) =v,.,,, ""'= ''' (i) Full tension steel is available.
(ii) On~y 2 Nos.#16 mm bars are available, the third bar being curtailed
-l Fig. 5.9.4
-._/ Assume concrete grade M20.
 r ,
I_

214 Limit State of Collapse - Shear Chapter 5 Sect. 5.10 . lllustrative Examples 215
('
.Given : fy = 415 N/mmz,f;;k = 20 N/mm 2 , b = 230mm, D = 450mm, tl = 50mm s= 0.87 x 250 x 56 = 132 mm say 130 mm < 300 mm .
Ast = 3 -#16
0.4 X 230
:. Provide $ 6mm 2-legged Fe 250 stirrups at 130 mm, c/c
r:
Required : Design of Stirrups.
Solution : Effective depth d =I>- tl = 450 - 50= 400 mm (b) (U) ..4 = 2 Nos. +16 mm available= 2 x 201 = 402mmz,
81
C·
(a) Design shear VuD = 20kN. pt = 100 Ast I bd = 100 X 402 /( 230 X 400) = 0.437%
Maximum allowable shear Vuc.max = 'tuc.max.bd ......( Eq.5:6.10)
~-

Shear strength of concrete of grade M20 as given by Table 5. 7.1 for p1 = 0.437 % is , c
From Table 5.6.1, t uc.max = 2.8Nimm2 for M20 concrete * t = 0.36 + 0.437 - 0·25 x (0.48 - 0.36 )= 0.45 Nlmrrr
uc 0.50-0.25
c
:. Vuc.max = 2.8 x230 x 400 I 1000 = 257.6 leN> Vu .. O.K.
0 Shear carried by concrete= Vuc = 't uc .bd = 0.45 x 230 x 400 I I000 = 41.4 kN. c
Ast = 3 Nos. #16 mm == 3 x 201 = 603mm2
p I = I00 AsI I bd = 100 X 603 I ( 230 X 400 ) = 0.655% Shear carried by minimum stirrups Vusv.mm
· . = 36.8 kN as in part-(b) (1) above. ("
Shear strength of concrete of grade M20 as given by Table 5. 7.1 for pt = 0.655% is Shear resistance of member with minimum stirrups ( ' !'
0 655 050
t
uc
= 0.48 + · -
0.75-0.50
x (0.56 -0.48 ) = 0.53 Nlmrrr vur.mm. = vuc + vusv.mm. = 41.4 +36.8 = 78.2 kN. < vuD ( = sokN)
Shear resistance of concrete Vuc = t uc .bd = (0.53 x 230 x 400) I 1000 = 48.76 kN.
.·.Minimum stirrups are not sufficient. r .
Shear to be carried by stirrups (without bent up bars) Vusv = VuD- Vuc = 80-41.4 = 38.6 kN
Design shear Vu0 = 20 kN < Vuc I 2 (i.e.= 48.76 I 2 = 24.38 kN) ("
Assuming ~ 6 mm 2-legged Fe250 stirrups, Asv = 2 x 28 = 56 mmz
:. No shear reinforcement is necessary theoretically. However, in practice, nominal stirrups
of grade · Fe250 of minimum 6mm diameter at maximum spacing of Spacings =
f 0.-87 J;,Asvd
Vusv
0.81 x 250 X 56 X 400
_x = 126 mm say 125nun < 300mm :. O.K.
r:
38 6 1000
0.75d(=0.75 x 400) =300mm maybe provided.
(b) ( i) Design shear VuD = 80kN.
Comments:
(1) Since design of stirrups requires assumption of bar diameter and grade of steel and calculation
c
Vuc.max = 257.6 kN as seen in part- (a) above. > VuD :. O.K. of pitch, and since there are restrictions on spacing as seen in part-(b) (i) above, many limes additional r
trials are required to be carried out either by changing the diameter of stirrups and/or changing its grade '·
As1 = 3 Nos. #16 mm, Vuc = 48.76 kN as shown in part-(a) above. to suit the desired pitch. For this, Table 5.8.2 is useful. It gives various possible solutions simultaneously,
Shear resistance of minimum stirrups from which appropriate solution can be chosen depending upon the available diameters for stirrups, and c
Vusv.min = 0.4 bd = (0.4 X 230 X 400) I l 000 = 36.8 kN. restrictions of pitch.
Shear resistance of member with minimum stirrups
( Eq. 5.6.9)
For example in part-(b) (ii) above, V = 38.6 kN , V I d = 38.6 x 1000 1400 = 96.5
~ ~ .
N I mm r ',
Select the spacing (in multiples of 10 mm or in module of 3'J from table which gives the value of
Vur.mm. = Vuc + Vusv.mm. = 48.76+36.8= 85.56kN. > Vu (=80kN)
Minimum stirrups are sufficient.
0 V.Jd greater than the required value without resorting to interpolation. \
This gives following possible solutions from Table 5.8.2.
:. Assuming# 8mm 2-legged vertical stirrups of grade Fe415, A = 2 x 50= I00 mm2 Fe250 _ ~ 6mm@ 125mm,, ~ 8 mm@ 225mm c--
sv
0 87 Utility of these tables is evident for getting multiple choices of diameter spacing for given. V~I d
. · fyAsv 0.87x415xl00 ratio without resorting to computations.
Spacmg s = = = 392 mm ......( Eq.5.6.8) (
0.4 b 0.4 X 230 (2) Minimum pitch less than JOOmm should be preforably avoided (but shall not be less than 75 mm)
to prevent congestion of steel to effect better concreting.
According to Code, sj300 mm or 1 0.75 d (i.e., 0.75 x 400 = 300 mm.) (.
:.s = 300 mm Ex. 5.10.2: ARC. beam, 300mm x 450mm in cross-section, is reinforced with 3 Nos.
Since spacing required from design calculations comes out to be quite higher than that 20 mm diameter bars, of grade Fe250, with an effective cover of 50mm. Tlfe ultimate shear at c-
permitted ~rom requirements of s'i 0. 75d, either the diameter of stirrups may be reduced and/or the section is 138kN. Design the shear reinforcement.
stirrups of lower grade steel may be used to avoid unnecessary wastage. (a) using only vertical stirrups without bending any bar for resisting shear. (
Using$ 6 mm 2 legged Fe250 stirrups, A =2 x 28 =56 mm2 {b) bending I bar $ 20mm at 45° to resist shear at the section.
sv Assume concrete of grade M 20. c
(
 ::]216 Limit State of Collapse - Shear
Chapter·Jc,Z Rlustrative Examples ·217
0 (a) Using Vertical Sti"ups Only

~ Given : b = 300mm, D = 450mm, d' = 50mm, A = 3- f 20~941tmir, ·r.... = 138lN Shear strength of concrete of grade M20 as given by Table 5.7.1 for is p1 = 0.523%
fc1c = 20Nimm2, fy = 250Nimm2
Sl · ....,
tiiC = 0.48 + ~:~: x (0.023 ) = 0.487 Nlmml
:_) Required : Design of stirrups
Solution ·: Vuc = 0.487 X 300 X 400 X 10-3 = 58.44 kN . .". Vus = 138-58.44 = 79.56 kN.
:_) Design shear VuD = 138 kN, Effective depth d = D- d' = 450 - 50 = 400 mm Shear resistance of l No.+ 20 mm (Asb = 314mm2 ) bent up at'45° is given by
Maximum allowable shear on the section with shear reinforcement V = t .bd Vusb = 0.87 f.y Asb sin 45° = 0.87 x 250 x 314
. x 0.707 I 1000 = 48.28 kN · ......( Eq.5.6.6)
:_) . uc.max uc.max
From Table 5.6.1 = 2.8Nimm2 for M20 concrete. AccordingtoCode, Vusb ':f Vus 12 i.e. 79.5612=39.78kN.
.._)' :. vuc.max = 2.8 X 300 X 400 I 1000 = 336 kN> vuD .. ~ O.K. :. Useful contribution ofbent-up bar= 39. 78kN. only.
:.Shear required to be resisted.byvertical stirrups, Vusv = Vus/2 = 79.56 I 2 = 39.78 kN.
100Asl '100 X 942
~ A51 =3 Nos.~20 mm = 3 x 314 = 942 mn?, P1 ~ bd = x 0.185% Shear resistance of minimum stirrups ·
300 400
,'. Vusv.mm. = 0.4bd = 0.4 X 300 X 400/1000 = 48 /cN > Vusv (= 39.78 /cN)
Shear strength of concrete of grade M20 as given by Table 5. 7.1 for p = 0.785% is
.J 0 06 . I
:. Minimum stirrups are sufficient.
t = 0.56 + · x O.G35 = 0.568 Nlmm 2
uc 0.25 . Assuming~ 8mm Fe250 2-legged stirrups (A sv = 2 x 50= 100 mm 2 )
J Shear resistance of concrete Vuc = t uc .bd = 0.568 x 300 x 400 I 1000 = 68.16 kN. 0·87 .t;,Asv
. 0.87 X 250 X 100
, .. -,.)
:. vusv.mm' = 0.4 bd = (0.4 X 300 X 400) I 1000 = 48 kN. Spacmg s = _b = 0.4 x = 181 mm
·-' 04 300
Shear resistance of minimum stirrups say= 180mm < 300 mm < 0.75d (=300mm) ;·. O.K.
.J Vur.mm
. = Vuc + Vusv.mm. = 68.16 +48= . 116.16/cN<
· VD(=138kN)
u :. Provide ~8mm 2-legged stirrups at 180 mm etc
''
.._)
:. Minimum stirrups are not sufficient.
EX 5.10 3: A simply supported RC. beam, 380 mm wide and 750 mm deep, carries a
Shear to be carried by stirrups without bent-up bars
uniformly distributed load of 84 kN/m (including self weight) over a span of 6 m. The beam
J Vusv = Vus = VuD - Vuc = 138.00-68.16=69.84kN is reinforced with 6 No. 22 mm diameter bars of grade Fe 500 on tension face. Design the
Using~ 10mm 2-legged vertical stirrups of grade Fe250, Asv = 2 x 78.5 = 157 mm2 shear reinforcement.
__) (a) using vertical stirrups only and no curtailment of bars,
(].87 fyAsiJd 0.87 x 250 X 157x 400
Spacing s = = = 195 mm < 300mm < 0.75d (b) using bent- up bars.
Vusv 69.84 X 1000
J -
Assume concrete grade M 20 and effective cover 50 mm, load factor= 1.5 , width of
:. Provide~ 10 mm Fe 250 stirrups at l90mm clc. support 380 mm.
J Alternatively: Vusv I d = 69.84 x 1000 I 400 = 174.6 N I mm Given : b = 380 mm, D = 750 mm, d' =50 mm, L.F. = 1.5, L = 6 m, b5 = 380 mm,
A~ = 6- #22 mm, w = 84 kNim., fk = 20 N lmm2
~ From Table 5.8.2, following possible solutions can be obtained directly. c
GradeFe250, ~8atl25, ~IOati80, ~I2at250 .t;, = 415 Nlmm 2 (but eyen though .t;, = 500 Nlmm 2 for shear design .t;, ':f 415 Nlmm 2 )
:_) or Grade Fe4I5 #8 at 200, #I 0 at 300 Required : Design of shear reinforcement.
(b) Using Bent- Up Bars Also : V D < V ·
u uc.max
( = 336 kN) Solution: Effective depth d = D- d' = 750-50 = 700 mm, wu =1.5 w = 84 x 1.5 = 126 kN/m
___,) Given : Same as part-(a), but As1 = 2- ~ 20 = 628 mm 2, one bar bent up Maximum shear Vu.max = wu L 12 = 126 x 6/2 = 378 kN
Solution : VuD < Vuc.ma.x (=336kN) as obtained from part-(a) above. Critical section occurs at a distance of effective depth (=700 mm) from the face of support
:J One number~ 20 mm is bent-up to resist shear. i.e. 700 +breath of support /2, (i.e.700+380/2 = 890 mm)from the centre of support.
:. Area of steel continued beyond the section on tension side is
J Asl = 2 Nos.~ 20 mm = 2 x 3I4 = 628 mn?
:. Ultimate design shear VuD = Vu.max - wu x 0.89 = 378- 126 x 0.89 = 266 .kN
Maximum allowable ultimate shear strength for M20 concrete
.
,_)
' PI = 100 Asl I bd = I00 X 628 I ( 300 X 400 ) = 0.523 % 't = 2.8 Nlmm 2 from Table 5.6.1
uc.mat
 218 Limit State ofColkipse- Shear Chapte,. 5 Sect. 5.10 Rfusf,.Qtive Examples 219 c
:.Maximum allowable ultimate shear ZONE-ll c-
2.8 X 380 X 700 . In Zone-m, in which VU < V11C 12 theoretically, no shear reinforcement is required
VIIC./IIQX =t IIC.maJC .hd = t nnn = 744.8 kN> V..n
uu ( =; 266 kN) .'. O.K.
c
:. L83 = ·o.svuc I w" = (0.5 x 155.77 /126) x 1000 = 618 mm
(a) Design of shear reinforcement Using Vertical Stirrups and No Curtailment
of Bars: . 2280 x 100 .
Zone- II. :. L82 = L/2- L81 (provided) L83 = 6000/2-930-618 =say 1450 mni
In this zone only mitiimum stirrups need be provided.
c
ilr
Alt = 6Nos. # 22 =6 X 380 =2280 m11f' pt% = 380 X 700 ~ 0.857% ·r Using 18 mm 2legged vertical stirrups of grade Fe 415, Asv = 2 x 50.26 = 100.52 ,.2 c
Shear strength of concrete of grade M20 from Table 5. 7.1 for p = 0.857 % is : r 0.87 f. A 0.87 X 415 X 100.52
1 ! Spacing s = · Y sv = = 238 mm say 230 mm (
t IIC = 0.5856 Nlm11f by linear interpolation. 0.4 b . 0.4 X 380
Provide 6 Nos. - # 8 mm stirrups at 230 c/c. covering a length of 1380 mm. Each stinups is
Shearresistaneeofconcrete, VIIC =tIIC .bd=0.5856x380x700/1000 = l55.11kN. effective for a length of s/2 on each side of stirrups. · c
Shear resistance of minimum vertical stirrups, :. region covered by these stirrups= 1380 + 230/2 = 1495 mm which is greater than the
. =0.4bd=0.4x380x700/l000 = l06.4kN
Vusv.mm
l
length of the zone L52 ( = 1450 mm) :. O.K.
Shear resistance of member with minimum stirrups,
V117.mm. = Vuc + Vusv.mm. = 155.77 + 106.4=262.17 kN< VD(=266kN)
u
r~ (')
II
rVusv.min= 106.4 c
~
:. Design shear reinforcement is required. E
';::.,;
r
Shear to be carried by vertical stirrups without bent up bars, .i_ I ! ! ! f =:..,j
vusv = vus = vllD - vuc = 266.00-155.77 = 110.23 kN 19o-..t-+-700 --1
Actual Actual Actual
r
Using2legged #8mmstirrupswith.fy=415N/mnr,Asv = 2x50.26 = I00.52m11f j-L51 =930+- L52 = 1380 -+ts3=690-- ~

Theoretical Theoretical
!
1 Theocetical
0.87 fyAsvd 0.81 X 415 X 100.52 X 700 \.-L51 =920+-Lsl?= 1450 ~ L53=630--
Spacing , s = = 230 mm < 300 mm and < 0. 15d (
Vusv 110.23 X }000
2-#12
Note: (i) Alternatively the spacing can obtained directly from Table 5.8.2
VILW I d = 110.23 x 1000/700 = 157.5 Nlmm !I 700
('
From Table 5.8.2 the following solutions are possible :
Fe 250 -$ 8 at 130 mm, or$ 10 at 210 mm, or# 8 at 230 mm. by interpolation.
~ • , 1_1.o I J
6
It I I I
I
1 1 1 j 1T c
19 2
230c/c=-t--6. #8@230c/c _J..+6~>3oo.! 50
6-#8@1 ·#2 I '
(ii) The table has been prepared taking exact values of area of steel used for stirrups. in the
example if the area of two legs of 8mm bar is taken approximately equal to 100 mm2, the
spacing works out to 220 mm instead of230f!lm.
r-
I
930---'-- 1380
I
1
c
2310 I
Determination of zones of shear reinforcement along the length of beam: -1380)+- \
Fig. 5.10.1 shows the shear force diagram for half the span length. Fig. 5.10.1
ZONE- 1: Comments: 1n this case it is a coincidence (which is not the usual case) that the spacing of stirrups .~

of zone - I and zone - 11 is the same. This is because: the shear carried by vertical stirn~ps
Let L81 be the length of zone - I in which shear reinforcement is required to be designed ( = vu.max- wu X Lsi = 378- 126 X 0.92 = 262.1) atthe junction of zone 1 and zone lJ is equal
(i.e., where minimum stirrups are not sufficient). to shear resistance of minimum stirrups = Vur.min = 262.17 kN
\
Ls 1 =Vu.max - Vur.mm. lwu ~(378-262.17)xi000/126 =919mmsay920mm ZONE ill: c
:. Provide # 8 mm stirrups at 230 mm, starting the first stirrup at 50 mm from the face of In the remaining central zone, in which only nominal stirrups, say~ 6 mm minimum
support i.e. 50+ 190 = 240 mm from the centre of support. diameter at maximum spacing 300 mm. shall be provided. c
Note: Sp 34- 1987 (87/9) Specifics to start first stirrup at distance of 50 mm from the face of support. Actual length :. L~2 = L 12- L81 - L82 = 6000/2-930-6 x 230 =say 690 mm
This implies indirectly, that the minimum spacing of the stirrups :f 100 mm. Provide 2 No. anchor bars of 12 mm diameter. c
Provide L81 = 240 + 3 x 230 = 930 > 920 mm from the centre of support. The details of 3hear reinforcement are shown in Fig. 5.10.1
c
r
 J
220 Limit State of Collapse - Shear
(J Chapters ·Sect 5.10 0/ustrative Examples 221
I (b) Using Bent- ap Ban
Shear raistance of minimum stirrups,
':J VuD = 266 kN < Vuc:~ as checked in part- (a) above.
v111'./fUII. = vuc + vusv.mrn. =· 155.77+ 106.40 =262.17 kN > vum.
On bending 1 No.# 22 mm barto resist shear, areaofJllllin steel remaining on ieusion side is :. Minimum stirrups are sufficient beyond.
J just of 5 Nos.# 22 mm . 900 x 100 Provide 9 Nos. of# 8mm 2legged Fe415 stirrups at 230mm spacing as obtained for zone- I above.
1
Ast=5Nos.22mmdia=5x380=1900mlfl, ft% = JSOx "" 0.714% :. Length covered by these stirrups from the centre of support= 190 +50+ 9 x 230 = 2310 mm
·:J 700
Shear strength of concrete of grade M20 as given by Table 5~ 7.1 for p = 0.714% is (See Fig 5;10.2) But each stirrup is effective for a length of s/2 = 230/2 = 115 mm
·._) 'tuc = 0.548 Nlmlfl by' linear interpolation
1 .·. Actual length covered by these stirrups = 2310 + 115 = 2425 mm

Shear resisted by concrete is: Vuc.1 = 'tuc .bd = 0.548 x 380 x 700/1000 = 145.77 leN. ZONE-ill : This is the region in which VuD < 0.5 Vuc and, theoretically, no she:1r
·~
Shear resisted by I No. #22 nu_n (Ash= 3~0 mm2 ) of grade Fe415 bent~it 45° is:
reinforcement is necessary, though nominal stirrups are provided in practice.
~) Let the length of this region be LsJ from the centre of span.
'-./' Vusb = '0.87 fA
y s'b sin 45o = 0.87 x 415 x 380 x 0.707 I 1000 = 97.00 kN
:. Ls3 = O.SVuc I wu = (0.5 x 155.77/126) = 0.618 m = 618 mm::; 620 mm
VIIS= vuD - vucl = 266-145.77 = 120.23 kN
.J Provide nominal~ 6 mm 2-legged stirrups at 300 mm c/c in this region .
Shear contribution of bent-up bars allow1:d by ihe Code
:. Actual length of zone-3 Ls3 = 3000-2425 = 575 mm while length for which nomial stirrups
') Vus I = 120.23/2 = 60.11 leN instead of 97.00 k.N.
/

...._,. to be provided= 3000 - 2310 = 690 mm The details of reinforcement are shown in Fig. 5. 10.2
Shear required to be resisted by Vertical stirrups, Vusv-= Vus/ 2 = 60.11 leN. T
·:J Shear resistance of minimum stirrups VLsv.min = 106.4 leN as shoWJt in part- (a) above.> VU$11 ~
0)
It
:. Minimum stirrups are sufficient.
~ t

r ~~
..,\ Vuc2 = 155.77

11
'

~"'
~1
·..../
Using#8mm2-leggedverticalstirrupsofgradeFe415, ASII = 2x50 =100mlfl-
0 87 Vuc1=145.rl iuc2
:._) · fyAst 0.87x415x100
Spacings= 0.4 bd = 0.4x 380 say230mm<lesserof[300inmand0.75 xd] 190 I
--1 I-- 700 ----1 I
~ ---...J- L52 =980-!-Ls3 =620---j
~ Determination of zones of shear reinforcement:
L51 =1400

._) ZONE-I
2·#12 t

This is the zone with bent - up bar. The bent-up bar is effective over a regioil2d from the
j centre of support and will be bent at this distance from the centre of support.
)
:. Lsi= 2 x 700 = 1400 mm > 920 mm obtained in case_ (a)
'---"
In this region minimum stirrups# 8 mm at 230 mm shall be provided starting first stirrup at
50 mm from the face of support. t
·~ ZONE-II
------2310
This is the zone beyond zone - I in which no bent-up bar is available See Fig. 5.1 0.2 --~---·
._) t---------3000
Design shear at the end of zone- I i.e. at 1400 mm (1.4m) from the centre of support Fig. 5.10.2
._) vuD2 = vu.max- wu.( Lsi)= 378- 126 X 1.4 = 201.6 kN 2200 X 100 Comments: In prat:tical solution, design shear is taken equal tq ,;;;;;;:f:::!!m shear Vu.mat instead of
In this zone A = 6 Nos #22 = 6 x 380 = 2280 mm2 Pt% = on, "GO = 0.857% shear at the critical section (which is at distance d from the fat:e of the support). In general region
' st ' 3uvX 1 requiring shear reinforcement is usually very s;;,a/1 for un[fi:>rmly loaded beams and no appreciable saving
._) =
Shear strength of concrete of grad M 20 as given by Table 5. 7.1-for p O.S57% is
1 -in stirriips is derived by using e::act methocfHowever, detailed calcultitions sholild be made for beams with
'tuc2 "" 0.5856 Nlmrrfl by linear interpolation. concentrated loads. Also, for beams having small span (say less then 6m) the nominal shear reinforcement
_)
Shear resisted by concrete in this region is given by; zone LsJ is also very small and hence only minimum shear reinforcement is provided

.J vuc2 = T:uc'bd = 0.5856 X 380 X 700 I 1000' = 155.77 kN. In practical solution. assistance is taken of design aids feir obtaining values of Vue, V...,., and Vushfrom
which stirrups ca.1 be designed. to save computational efforts. (see Author's handbook 97/6). -
 ••• Ltmn .lrace OJ L.Oltapse - ;:o;near Sect. 5.10 lllustrative Examples. 223 \
Chapter 5 :':.:

Ex. 5.10.4: A tapered cantilever beam (sha;r11 in Fig. 5.10.3) Qjconslant width 2JOnun, :. Minimum stirrups are sufficient. ('
_and depth 450mm at the cantilever end and 300 mm at the fixed end, is reinforced with 2 Nos.
Using 2-legged ¢6 mm stirrups of grade Fe 250, Asv = 2 x 28 =56 mm2
· '16mm and 2 Nos. '12mm bars at top. The hf!am carries a uniformly d~!rihuted load of 2C r
kN/m and, a point load of 6 leN at its free end. 0·87 fyAsv. 0.87 )';: 250 X 56 '
Spacing s = 0.4 b = 0.4 x 230
Design ihe shear reinforcement of.grade Fe415. Assume load factor equal to l.S,
effective cover= 50mm and concrete grade M20. = Say 130 mm < 300 mm and< 0.75d ( = 300 mm) :. O.K.
c
Given : b = 230mm and D = 450mm at fixed end and 300mm at free e:nJ. d' =50 mm .:. Provide ¢ 6mm 2 legged stirrups of grade Fe250 at 130 mm c/c. through out the r
A st = 2- $I6 + 2-$ I2 at top. length of the beam. '
w = 20 kN/m and point load = 6 leN at fre:: end: Notes : Even though main bars are of grade Fe415, mild steel stirrups are provided because #8mm (
L.F = 1.5, d =50 mm,J;;k = 20 Nlmffii, fy = 415 N/mm'- stirrups gives spacing (=390mm) which is greater than 300mm and, therefore, become uneconomical.
Required : Design of shear reinforcement.
Solution : Ex. 5.10.5: An inclined beam of length 10m, and rectangular in cross-section, 3.50mm ·
r
The ultimate load carried by the beam : wu = 20 x i .5 = 30 kN I m Point load = 6 x I .5 = 9 leN ' wide and 700mm deep, carries a. uniformly distributed factored vertical load (including its r
own weight) of 30kN/m acting vertically downward.s as shown in Fig. 5.10.4. The ·
Area of steel =Ast = 2 x I l3 + 2 x 201 = 628 mffii
longitudinal re.inforcement consists of 4 Nos.# 20mm. and 2 Nos.#I6mm bars e~tending r
Maximum shear force at the fixed end, V = 30 x 2 + 9 = 69 leN. throughout its length. Design the shear reinforcement. The characteristic strengths of '
u.max
9kN concrete and steel are 20Nimm 1 and 500 N/mm 1 respectively. Design th.e shear (·
2-~16

,--.- f6tHrb~: ;+12 .·

reinforcement. '
Assume effective cover of 50mm.
Given: b = 350 mm, D = 700 mm, d' =50 mm,
c
. L = I 0 m, wu = 30 kNim,
300
_) _._ 300 2-.10 .i
Jl " _ _i_ -~ Ast = 4-#20mm + 2-#I6, mm,fk c
= 20. Nlmm 2 ,jy = 500 Nlmm2 r
_J Required: Design of Shear reinforcement
2000
I
Cross section at end
Solution: ·
Resolve the vertical load into two components, one parallel toAB and the other perpendicular
c
Fig. 5.iii.3
to AB. The transverse component on horizontal span causes SF and BM while the component (
Bending moment at the fixed end,Mu = 30 x 2i I 2 + 9 x 2 = 78 kN.m. parallel to AB will cause axial tension.
Effective depth , d = 450 - 50= 400 mm. at support
The transverse component ofUDL = wu cosO = 30 x cos 26.57° = 30 x 0.8944 = 26,83 kNim C
The slope of the compression fibre, tan p = (450- 300) I 2000 = O.o75
The component paralleltoAB = wu sinO= 30 x cos 26.57° = 30x 0.4472 = 13.42 kN!m
As the bending moment increases in the same direction as effective depth increases, the
design shear force, vuD is given by Eq. 5.9.1. as follows,
c
(-.

vuD = v u.max - d tan

M p= 69- 78000 X O:o75 I 400 = 54.37 kN. 1--Jso--l ~

p,=
IOOAst
bd
I00 X 628
230 X 400 = 0.68 %
0.08 . 2
T_ T
650 2-# 12 700
(

('
From Table5.7.1, Tuc = 0.48+ _ x0.18 = 0.5376N!mm ·

J 1
0 25
Shear resisted by concrete Vuc = 'tuc .bd = 0.5376
. x 230 x 400 I 1000 = 49.46 leN. c
1,
Shear resisted by minimum stirrups V . = 0.4 bd = 0.4 x 230 x 400 I I 000 = 36.8 leN A f« ----+~ T
usv.mm
Shear resistance of member with minimum sti~os
.·
8944
c
vur.min. = vuc + vusv.mm. =· 49.46
· +36.8 =86.26kN > 1(uD(=5431
, leN)
Cross section
c
Fig. 5.10.4
c
c
·~
Illustrative Examples 225
224 Limit State ofCollapse- Shear Sect. 5.10
ChizpterS
:J Given : Column 300 mm x 300 mm, :. b = D = 300 mm, V = 300kN, a= 200 mm,
Horizontalspanisgivenby: AC =10cos26°34'= l'Ox0.8944 = 8.944m 2
fk = 20Nimm2, f. = 250 N!mm , /,b = 0.45 x 20 Ni",nd = 9 N!md
~ Maximum transverse shear force c y t
Required: To design the corbel.
VuD = ( wu cosO)AB I 2 = (30 x 0.8944) x 10 I 2 = 134.2 kN
Solution :(a) Design of Cross-section:
_.)
Axial tension at B = ( 30 x 0.4472) x 10 = 134.2 kN. Design ultimate force = Vu = I.~ x 300 = 450 kN
l Effective depth of the beam d = 700- 50= 650mm. . . . Vu 450x 1000
-./
From Table 5.7.1 for M20 concrete, 'fuc.max = 2.8 N/mm2 Reqmred length ofbeanng plate = - - = = 167 mm say 170 mm
· b xfbr 300 X (0.45 x 20)
~ :. vuc.max = ruc.max .bd
· = 2.8 x 350 x 650 1 1000 = 637 kN. > vuD :. o. K.
Width of corbel : b =Width of column= 300 mm Vu 450 x 1000
Even though I.S.Code does not make any provision for shear strength of concrete under axial Depth:d2.al0.6i.e.20010.6=333mm, Also d 2. 2. =536mm
-~ · 't .b 2.8 x300
tension, it is assumed to be equal to zero for conservative design. i.e. 'fuc = 0. or Vuc = 0 uc.max
·. .
Shear resistance of the section with minimum stirrups Try D = 800 mm*, d= 750 mm, Assuming effective cover equal to 50 mm
_)
= vusv.mm. = vur.mrn. = OAbd= OA x 350 x 6501 1ooo = 91 kN < vuD (=134.2 kN) v = 0.36/ b.x X azu ...... (Eq. 5.9.7 b)
u ck u if+z2
_) (Vusv.mm. is taken equal to Vur.mm. because Vuc is taken
·
equal to zero) u
:. Shear resistance is necessary, 200z 200z
= 0.36 X 20 X300.x X u. = 2160 X X X u
:J From Fig. 5.20.4 the length of beam in which shear reinforcement is necessary u 2002 + zu2 u 2002 + z 2
u
L51 = (134.2- 91) I 26.83 = 1.61 m i.e. 1610 mm inclined distance.
-~ Shear to be resisted by transverse stirrups V = VuD- Vuc = 134.2 kN C Yuc = 0)
. ~ Z = d- 0.42xu = 800 - 0.42 X u
u
,j Using #8mm, 2 legged stirrup of grade Fe500 , Asv = 2 x 50 = I 00 mm2 The values of x u is obtained by using trials to get Vu = 450 kN as
.
shown below.
(0.87 X 4J5*) X 100 X650 Trial Values of : z (mm) V (kN) V (kN)
Spacings= 134 _2 x 1000 = 174.8 mm x (mm)
-~
u u uD
u
say 170 mm < 300 mm and< 0.75 x 650 i.e. 431.5mm. :. O.K. 561 307.4 <450
0.6d =450
~ Provide 9 Nos. # 8mm 2 legged stirrups at 170mm clc of grade Fe500 upto a distance of 0.8d = 600 498 448.19 > 450
(170 x 9 = 1530mm which is effective fordistanceofl530+17012 = 1615 mm> 1610 mm) 497.37 449.72 ::::450
0.802d= 601.5
_) from supports and in the remaining portion of the beam, provide minimum reinforcement as :. x u = 601.5 mm and zu = 497.37 mm
given by Eq.5.6.8.
J Spacing of #8mm 2 - legged stirrups (A sv = 2 x 50 = I 00 mm2 )
(b) Main Steel:
0·87 fyAst 0.87 x415 x 100 T = vD X = 450 x 200 = !80.95 kN
-
a ... ...(Eq. 5.9.8)
'i
-._/
s = 0.4 b = 0.4 x 350 = 257 mm u u zu 497.37
2
750-6015
.__;
\ say 250 mm < 300 mm and< 0.75 x 650 i.e. 487.5 mm :.O.K. f = (d-x)u x0.0035x(2x105 )= · x350x2= 172.8Nimm
Use #8mm 21egged stirrups at 250mm clc for a distance of 3470mm (5000 - 1530) on st X 601.5
u 2
-./
i both sides of mid-span. RequiredA = T lf 1= 180.95 x 10001172.8 = 1047 mm
st u s
Provide 6- $ 20 mm giving Ast == 1206 mm2 . The bars will be bent back to form a loop.
Note : As is taken equal to zero, the ::;f .'!l)minal shear reinforcement is absent.
~
-rue ZOfle

1206 X J00
P% = = 0.53 % > 0.4% and less than 1 3%
Ex. 5.10.6: Design a corbel to carry a girder reaction of 300 kN at a distance of 300 X 750 .
~ 1
200 mm from the face of column 300 mm x 300 mm. Assume concrete of grad.z M 20 and
*Note : Greater the depth, lesser is the area of main steel required. If we provide total depth of 650
.:; mild steel (Fe. 250) reinforcement. Take bearing strength of concrete = 0.15 fck·
mm instead of 850 mm required area of steel works out to 1889 mm requiring 6 -~20 mm bars which cannot
2

* Even though st1 el grade Fe500 is iJSed,still Code limits the characteristic of strength qf steel for be accommodated in one layer in the width of 300 mm
~ design of shea/ reinforcement to 415Nfl'lrt/
 --~·- -J -'-'••wyt.J~ "":' urn:ur
Chapter 5
c-
(c) Shear Design:
I
For ·M20 and· p I = 0.53 % from Table 5. 7.1, 'tuc = 0.49 Nlmm2 '
Enhanced shear strength on account of a < 2d
CHAPTER-6 ("
V = 't x 2d I a= 0.49 x (2.x 750) I 200 = 3.67 N/mm 2 1 't (= 2.8 Nlmm2) LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE- BOND
uc uc uc.max · ('
:. vUC = vE~ = 'tE~ .bd . = 2.8 X 300 X 750 I 1000 = 630 kN. > vU (= 450 kN)
.·.Minimum stirrups are sufficient
6.1. INTRODUCTION ('
Spacing of$ I 0 mm 2-legged mild steel stirrups is given by: 6.1.1 What is Bond ? Why Bond ?
Reinforced concrete can act successfully as a composite material only when both the ("
y sv I (0.4 b)= 0.87 x 250 x 157 I ( 0.4 x 300) = 284 mm.
s = 0.87 fA
constituent materials, namely, concrete and steel, deform and carry force together.
Also total horizontal stirrups in a distance 2d/3 from main steel at top shall not be less than Ast I 2
:. Minimum area of steel= As/ 2. = 1047/2 = 523.5 mm2
Normally, in R.C. structures, the load is not applied directly to the reinforcement but it acts c
on concrete. The steel can receive its share of load only when the same is transferred to
A
--2!. x -
2d A A
<f _!!__ or --2!. x -
2d A
= _!!__ it from the surrounding concrete. This transfer of force from one material to the other can r
s 3 2 s 3 2 be effected only when there is no relative movement (or sliding) between them when any
A x4d/3 l57x4x75013 one is -strained. The force which prevents this relative movement between the two r
constituent materials is known as Bond. This force, since it acts parallel to the reinforcement
c
s = sv A
st = 1047 .r;ay 150 mm < 284 mm calculated above.
:. Use4 Nos. $10mm closed horizontal stirrups, area provided= 4 x l57=628mm2 > 523.5 m~
and prevents the impending shearing action j?ytween the two at their interface, is also c
known as the interfiieial-shear(6114, 7513, 7713, 78/7, 79/3). The reinforcement, in a R.C.
spread over a distance. of2d I 3 i.e. 2 x 750 I 3 = 500 mm :. provide spacing of 120 mm
.·.Provide 4-$10 mm 2 legged horizontal stirrups at I20 mm c/c
member w\11 not be effective in carrying any tensile or compressive force in absence of
bond. This will be evident from the following illustration.
c
(d) Development Length : Required Ld =46 $, for M20 -Fe 250, Ld = 46 x I 6 = 740 mm Consider a simply supported beam (Fig. 6.1.1) in which tension steel is provided in a (
auct.or a hole having diameter greater than the diameter of the bar, so that the bar can

Main steel
r-aoo easily'·pass through and slide. When the beam is loaded, there are no means by which steel
can be put tQ action by streching, because there is no connection or bond between the steel
c
61J16 and the conc~et~. As a result even though concrete is strained, the reinforcement remains r
unstrestched and, 1herefore, does not contribute to the beam strength. The beam, thus, acts
as if it were of plaln·.~oncrete. Therefore, the basic requirement for a reinforced concrete __.-..
~

m
element is that there shitU be a perfect adhesion or bond between the concrete and steel so
that both act together and'\ both contribute to the strength of the section.
c
00]
II :e
r Ductf\l r \

u L+-'-
..

'\_Bar

Fig. 6.1.1
4-
\_ Bar~ (

c
,.-
~

Thus, bond is related to transfer of forces (or precisely to transfer of strains) from one
material to other without causing relative bodily moment. This results into an~assumption c
that strain in steel is equal to strain in surrounding concrete. Bond force does not cOme into .
action unless there is a transfer of force, and conversely, there· cannot be change in the bat
('
Fig. 5.10.5
force in absence of bond.
c-
('
 SeCt 6.2 Types of Bond 229

I~
228 1Limit State ofCollapse Bond Chapter6
I
/
The bond resistance developing at the interface of a ribbed bar having ribs of height
6.1. 2 Bond Stress 'a' altd spacing 'c' depends on the type of failure that may occur. The failure modes in
Bond stress (6614) is the shear stress acting parallel to the bar on the interface between borid .for defonned bars are of the· following types :
.J the bar and the concrete. Bond stress may be considered as the rate of transfer of force (a)' By crushing of concrete which bears against the concrete ribs when actual
__) between concrete and steel. In other words, if there is bond stress there is change in steel
bearing stress fb exceeds the crushing value a cbr (Fig. 6.2. I)

-
stress and vice - versa. Bond is due to combined effect of adhesion, friction and bearing Splitting & Shearing of Concrete
(for deformed bars). The adhesion between concrete and steel is provided by concrete
_,'i
during setting. The bond due to friction gives considerable bond resistance. With increasing \~8
')
force in the bar, the adhesion is lost first then the friction between concrete and steel. In
'---' deformed bars with transverse ribs (or lugs) the bearing of concrete against ribs contributes T+dT
most of the bond, while the resistance to slip offered by adhesion and friction is T
_J comparatively small.

-~ 6. 2 TYPES OF BOND Ratio of c/a Large

Ratio of cia Small

Bond stresses in reinforced concrete members. are induced due to the following three (a) Bond failure in deformed bars by ( b ) Bond !a~lure defo~ed
in bars
_J di_gi!!l<t situations : · · crushing of Concrete by Splitting & Sheanng of Concrete

(a) For transferring the force from- the bar to the surrounding concrete before it is Fig. 6.2.i: Bond Failure in Deformed Bars by crushing of Concrete
_) terminated. The bond required to be developed is.._called Anchorage Bond. (b) By splitting and shearing of concrete along a cylindrical surface ABCD between
(b) The change in the bar force along its length due to v;rlation,in bending moment the ribs when shearing stress at the failure surface exceeds shear strength 1:c of concrete
~ ·-~ in this length. The bond force developed is called Flexural Bond. In fact, "·,..

flexural bond is one type of development bond. (Fig. 6.2.1 b)

The shearing stress developed at the interface due to adhesion, being very small, is
:_) (c) For transferring the force to the bar from surrounding concrete, the bond neglected. The bond resistance is maximum when forces causing both the types of failures
required to be developed is called Development Bond. are equal. Equating the forces for two failur.e-- modes viz. crushing of concrete and shearing of
~ 6.2.1 Factors Affecting Bond Resistance concrete.,
Various factors affecting bond resistance are as follows : dT = 1t (~ +a).a.a cbr also dT = 1t (~ +2 a).c.'t c
-~ (i) Grade of Concrete: Bond strength increases with the increase in concrete·grade. or nearly,·
Since bond resistance is essentially an interfacial shear, it is a function of she~ 1t~.aa cbr = 1t$.c.'t c
~ strength of concrete and, hence of grade of concrete. Secondly, the interfacial shear strength ignoring terms in cl and ac which are small* compared to $a and ~c respectively.
is also a function of cracks at the contact surface. When the actual stresses in concrete
_J exceed the tensile strength of concrete, cracks develop. And once the cracks are formed and • C
a·
cbr
widened, the bond at the cracked portion ·is lost. Therefore, bond resistance also depends ··-a=-:rc
J upon the tensile strength and, hence on the grade of concrete. Higher the grade, greater is
")
the bond strength.
~-
(ii) Diameter of Bar : Bond decreases with increase in bar diameter.
_) Bars of larger diameter lead to greater cracking, bar diameter (+-) proves to be one
of the factors affecting bond strength. The bond strength is inversely proportional to -{f.
·,
0
Greater is the bar· diameter less is the bond resistance for the same surface area.
, (iii) Bar Profile Condition : Deformed bars give greater bond resistance because of
.__) the interlocking of ribs with surrounding concrete (67/2).
Since deformed bars have usually high yield strength, they have to develop,
.J simultaneously, greater bond strength for maximum utilization of the fensile strength. Actually
that is why bond resistance is drawn through bearing resistance of ribs and shear strength of *Note.':Titeribheight a zs=gserun:.; .,, :ne _fill.;;;. ..... --.
'
.._r coJ}crete between the lugs.
'

_j
 TypesofBond 231
~F Sect. 6.2
Chapter6 ('
------ ...,J _.., •• ..,..f"utv ...._,VIIU
11
besides, they create problems of longitudinal splitting and cracking of .C()ncrete
the bars which was not noticed in the case of plain round bars.
(iv) Nature of Force in the Bar: The bond strength also depends upon the naiUI"e
surroundias
,.
il
.~:-1

:$-
"'ub I
I
1
I
c
c
$ 1 1
of force (whether tension or compression) in the bar. 1 1
Bar under tension is subjected to lateral_ contraction inducing transverse tension· on r
surrounding concrete, and therefore reducing the frictional resistance and, hence, the bond
... t... I
I
I
1
'

Increased frictional resistance

1
I
I
I
I
I
c
·.-
....:. . -·..
~·.; ~::-:~--
____..
.; r·~
~
·l··.~l~l
:~ ~·. -.·~
. . ....
~ --- . -.
Lateral expansion
I
I
Slip-
1 Bond • slip a1 working load
I
I c
c
of bar 2 Bond • slip at Ultimate load
c-.
t t t t t 1-(c+dc)
Fig. 6.2.3 : Effe~t of Stress - level on bond : Bond - Slip Curve c
.-
.. .~t--;-t ... .. . t-t--. When number of bars are grouped in bundles, full surface area of all the bars does __.-.

.......... .. .
• • .. f I,
:.
# • • .. -

~..... -
•••

....~
.._
• # ~

....
::

~ ,
~ •

•.
•

... ,
.... i not come in contact with concrete for resisting the force by bond. The bond resistance of
bundled bars is, therefore, less than the sum of the bond resistance of individual bars forming (
\
a group. Reduction in bond resistance is accounted ·for by increasing the development length. For
Transverse pressure from concrete
Fig. 6.2.2 Increase in Bond due to Compression
details see Sect. 6. 7. c
{vii) Bends and Hooks in Bars: The bond resistance increases with the increase
resistance, while bar in compression laterally expands and induces transverse compression
on surrounding concrete, thereby increasing the grip and frictional resistance (Fig, 6.2.2). tS. in bend angle. c
The bond resistance of a bar increases when the bar is bent at a certain angle. This is
· Code, therefore, allows 25% increase in bond strength for bars in compression, Since bars
under compression have a tendency to expand laterally, it is obvious that they should have because of increase in frictional resistance at the bend due to confinement of concrete inside c
greater concrete cover than the bars in tension. the bend by the radial component of the bar tension (Fig. 6.2.4).
,- ('
(v) Stress Level in the Reinforcement: At the ultimate state the bond resistance is
greater than at working load.
T
' c
The design bond strength is considered as the shear resistance corresponding to preassigned
relative shear deformation of concrete with respect to steel, which is known as slip.* Since 'T ~~

slip is a function of the stress level in the bar(see Fig. 6.2.3), the preassigned slip at ul~imate load {a)
is bound to be greater than that at working load. That is why the design bond strength at ultimate (
state is taken to be greater than that at working state. At higher loads; the resistance due Fig. 6.2.4 : ·Effect of Bends and Hooks on Bond
_,-
to bearing. against ribs becomes more thereby increasing the bond resistance. That is the l
Considering a 90° bend, let the equivalent anchorage length provided by the bend be L'.
reason why I.S. Code allows only 40% increase in bond strength for deformed· ·bars in
working stress design at working loads, while it allows 60% increase in bond strength for
the same deformed bars in the limit state design (Fig. 6.2.3 ).
Theil, by equivalence,
Anchorage force provided by length L' = bearing resistance provided by the bent. c
(vi) Gl'(}uping of Bars or Bundling : For bundled bars (7414) the surface area
'tiNf 1t~ .L' = 0 cbfr+ c-
coming in contact with concrete is reduced with the result bond resistance decreases. where aer
b = average bearing stress;
(
r = internal radius of the bent, \,

* Nqte: The relative shear deformation at the interface between concrete and steel is loosely deftrted 't bd = average design bond strength.
aulip. It is not the bodily sliding 'fJjthe bar ;.,lth respect;to concrete as indicated by colloqt~ltJlfRanlrlf of
the ier111 'slip '.
c
I~!
132 Lindt State ofCollapse Bond
Chapter6 Sect. 6.2 Types ofBond 233
(J ..... (J .
. L'= ...!!!!:_ • -""- = ...!!!!:_ • .!_ To effect this transfer of stress ·group P bars are required to be continued upto point C
•. tbd 1t~ tbd 1t
Taking r = k$
'<' called as actual point ofcut off (APC). Thus, in the region BC there is redUctioa in ber
':J
-
]

:J
:. L' = [
0
;: ·: l $ = k'. $ i
i
strain frorp. F.-/2 to zero in group P bars, while there is an increase in bar strain &om
F. · I 2 to a value reaching nearly F.
... . -
in group Q bars. This creates a condition of
differential strains in adjacent bars, and hence cracking, which is extremely detrimental.
to
~t~)
bond and shear strength in the region BC. Special attention is, therefore, required to be paid
:J where, k' = [ cr;br · ..!:_ ] is a bond factor indicating additional anchorage provided by
bd 1t . to compensate for the loss of shear and bond in this region. This has been disc~ ai
length in Sect.6.8 on bar curtailment.
_J a bent or a hook. I.S.Code gives value of k' = 8 for 90° bent and 16 for I 80° bent
(For 180° bent, bearing resistance is 2r$ .crcbr ). For further details, see Sect. 6.6. (ix) Cover and Proximity ofAdjacent Bars
'---"
1 . The proximity ofbars and inadequate cover causes side splitting and/or horizontal
(viii) Curtailment of Bars in Tension Zone : The curtailment of bars creates the splitting and loss ofbond resulting in ultimate total cracking.
J condition of stress conceniration and differential strain at the point ofcut off, The research on ribbed bars for bond resistance (81/2) shows that on stretching the
resulti"ng in loss of shear and bond deformed bar, while the reactive bearing forces from concrete on bar ribs act inwards, the
__) For illustration, let the total area of steel required at mid-span of a simply supported forces from bar ribs on to surrounding concrete act outwards (See Fig. 6.2.6 ).
beam· be Asl to resist maximum moment equal to Mmax . The area of steel Ast may_ be
___) considered to consist of half bars forming group P and half bars forming group Q. All the ::;:~~;~, ~~~ ..."j:

~
~
bars in group P and Q will carry maximum stress and hence maximum strain Emax at A.
_j (Fig. 6.2.5) I T ·t Inward bearing reactions ~::;.;:~2..-:~-~
on bar Inclined forces on Parallel and lateral force -
~ I d concrete

:J
c 8 1 (i) (ii)
(a)
components on concrete
(Iii)
A
Bar group- 0

:J B Theoretical point of cut-off (TPC)

C Actual point of cut-off (APC)
BC =12 ~ or d which ever is greater
_)'

· Axis of bar-,
J ---------------- Mmax ·-·-·----~----·-·-·
Separation between
1
bar·and concrete
~ Horizontal spUltlng for iow
(b) Side splitting for low
B value ol'c' value ol'a'
~ (c)
Fig. _6.2.5 : Effect of Curtailment on Bond ··: Fig. 6.2.6 Effect of Cover and Proximity of Bars on Bond
1 Let thebendingmomentatBbe half of the maximum moment at A so that half the bars The radial componentofthis force acts like an internal outward pressure on the concrete
-../
i.e. the bars in group P can theoretically be curtailed at B. The point B is called as theoretical cylinder having inside diameter equal to the bar diameter and having thickness· equal to smaller
:J point ofcut off or TPC. Since the area of steel at B before curtailment is Ast but the moment of, clear bottom cover, or clear side cover ('c' in Fig. 6.2.6c) or half the clear spaeing between
the adjacent bars ('a' in Fig. 6.2.6c); and it causes longitudinal splitting of the surroundiilg
is M-12 and therefore, the stress and hence strain in both the groups of bars P and Q is ,
__)
-
half that at· A Le. E /2. Now, the average stress in group P bars is required to be
'
concrete. (Fig. 6.2.6b)
Lutz and Gergely (67/2), Goto (71/6) and Orangum (77/8) have shown the sequence

-
..) transferred to group Q bars through bQnd so that the stress in group P bars is reduced to of formation of secondary cracks in between primary surface cracks and separation betWeen
mro and group Q bars will carry maximum stress and hence maximum strain E . bar and concrete due to development of cit:cumferential or hoop tension (Fig. 6.2.6b). This
,
.__)
 Types ofBond 115
,.-
-., -----rw'"" _..,,..w Chapter6 ·Sect 6.2 [

' Consider a unifonnly loaded cantilever, as shown in Fig. 6.2. 7 designed to carry a
CJ;acking or splitting requires particular attention in case of bars close to peripheral surface giVen load~ Let, (for the p~ of illuStration of principle of bond) the main tension ('
because the amount of. splitting and cracking depends upon the amount of cover and
·· rejnforcement at support .consists of only 1 bar of diameter $.
proximity of bars (i.e.; spacing of bars). If cover is small or inadequate or when adjacent
- tdk~-1 '~-~ ~.
c
-
bars are very closely spaced, the splitting occurs resulting in ultimate total cracking as

1
T
shown in Fig. 6.2.6c. This cracking also reduces the bond strength to a great extent. It is,
therefore, one of the reasons why Codes specify minimum concrete cover· and minimum
( II
~dx--1
. c
clear distance between the bars. However, increase in cover or spacing ofbars is not alone
useful beyond certain limits. i
I b )FIIIlural Bond
I
c
A
ro- Lr.-1
B
P t ;- I
a -C
(x) Position of Bar during Casting: c
The bond strength of bottom bars, with 300 mm or more of concrete above, have
Cantilever beam ("'
better strength because proper compaction can be effected by using vibrators while the top Column

bars exhibit reduced strength.

; =Diameter of bar ,--
1
(xi) Confinement of Concrete and Presence of Transverse Compression: 'tb<J '•

If the concrete surrounding the steel bar is confined, the folmation and widening of AI------ 1-~
the splitting cracks get restricted. So, in the regions where transverse compression exists,
JB
...-~+-
!-Ld-+1
1 r·
as in case of simply supported ends of beams resting on columns or walls the bond conditions
get improved. The increase in bond resistance is to the extent of30% to 40%. I.S. Code recognises
( a ) Anchorage bond
Fig.6. 2. 7
The maximum bending moment in the cantilever, and hence maximum tension in the bar,
c
this and makes allowance of 30% in development length (See Sect. 6.5.2).
occurs at the face of support, i.e. at point B shown in Fig.6.2. 7. 2 c
(xii) Repeated or Cyclic Loading and Vibrations: The maximum tension T which occurs at B is given by : T crs x 1C $ I 4 =
In case of repeated or cyclic loading and vibrations, the frictional resistance diminishes,
resulting in deterioration ofbond (6815).
This force must be transferred from steel to concrete through bond acting over the c.
During earthquakes, alternate forces in tension, and compression at a critical section, such perimeter of the bar in a length AB = Ld (
1C~ xLd = as x(~ x~ )
2
as column- beam interface, can occur. Due to this, there is a gradual loss of bond which can For equilibrium (Fig. 6.2.7a): "Cbdx
,-.
result in penetration of yielding of bars into the anchorage zone, drastically diminishing the cr l
effective development length (72/4). That is why Cl.26.2.3.3(b) of I.S.Code specifically states or Ld = ;bd · $ = kx $ ...... (6.2.1a)
4
that in case when a flexural member is a part of a primary lateral load resisting system, the
where, 't ~ = average design bond stress acting over the surface area. (
bottom (positive) reinforcement shall extend into the support for full development length Ld and
crs = actual stress in bar at the section considered at design load. ,-,
notL/3 as envisaged in part(a) of the same clause for other systems not resisting lateral loads. l
~ = nomial diameter of bar.
cr .
6.2. 2 Anchorage Bond - Anchorage Lenlith
Anchorage length is a length required to transfer the force from steel to concrete.
k = - s · = development length factor. c
4'tbd
Anchorage bond stress ""arises when 'a bar carrying certain force F is to be terminated. In
Ld = anchorage length = development length. c
such a case, it is neeessary to transfer this force Fin the bar to the concrete through bond. Let the
length required to transfer a force Fin the bar to the surrounding concrete by means of bond,
before it is terminated, beLd. _Then bond considerations require that the bar must extend beyond
ln working stress design , crs =
cr
ast and Ld = 4 't: $ ....;. (6.2.1 b) ('

that seetion by a length Ld' befQre it is terminated, so that it does not get pulled out. This length where, 'tbd is design bond strengthatworkin~. load. _ ,.-.
\,
In limit state design for collapSe, the design stress in bar- = 0.87 f. . and
Ldof embendment ofbar beyond the theoretical termination point is known as Anchorage lengtk
I~ is asslim~ that bond stress acting along its length is uniform. The average bond stress acting
over this bond length is known as the development bond stress or the design bond stress t bd.
Ld =
0.87/.
4
't: ·+ . . y
...... (6.2.1c) (

c
The design bond stress is assessed experimentally by conducting pull- out test. (see Sec/6.2.3). where 't:bd is design bond strength at uitimate load given in<fable 6.2.1.
('
_J 236 Limit State ofCollapse Bond
Chapter6 Sect. 6.2 TypesofBond 237
_J Anchorage length is also required to be provided for bars in compression. However,
the design bond strength 'tbd shall be that for bars in compression. ·1n this pull - out test, the surrounding concrete is in compression, and hence this test
does not truly represent the state of stress in the beams. Therefore, other type of test
_) 6. 2. 3 Pull- out Test
known as beam .test has been iimovated and detailed by the ACI Committee 408 (66/4).
The value of design bond strength ( 't bd ) of a bar in anchorage is traditionally assessed See Fig. 6.2.8b. Whatever may be the nature of test, the usable or design bond strength is not
~ from a pull- out test, (66/4). Fig. 6.2.8 (a) shows a bar of diameter~ embedded in ooncrete based ontheultimate bond strength causing pull·- out, butonthe.preassigned or theaecqr.abl'
for a length equal toLd. If a gradually increasing tensile force T is applied· at the free end of the ·deformation or slip governed by limit state of cracking. Tests by Fergusson (65/2) have
._) indicated that bars of 25 mm diameter and above required slips larger than 0.25 mm at the
bar initially slip (i.e. shear deformation of bar) occurs at the loaded end A (Fig. 6.2.8a (i)).
But as the load is increased, the bar deformation propagates from the loaded end to loaded end to develop stresses of the order of 415 Nlmn1.
_)
unloaded end B. In the elastic state, the bond stress is maximum at loaded end, and zero.at The values of design bond strength prescribed by I.S. Code are shown b Table 6.2.1
·, the other end (Fig. 6.2. 8c (ii) ). But at ultimate state, there is redistribution of stresses so that for plain round bars in tension. Code recognises the increased bond strength capacityof
·._}
the bond stress becomes nearly uniform over entire length except at small portion of bar deformed bars, and bars under compression and permits appropriate increase ··in bond
at the end as shown in Fig. 6.2.10a (iii). For all practical purposes the bond stress can be strength as shown in the notes below Table 6.2.1.
J assumed. to be uniform over the entire length.
-1 1-•b.av Table 6.2.1 Design Bond Stress in Limit State method for Plain Bars in Tension
_)
Grade of Concrete M20 M25 M30

I
M35 M40
~

_J ld 'ro T
ld
Design bond stress tbd inN!mn?- l.2 1.4 l.5 1.7
Notes: 1. For deformed bars, these values will be increased by 40% at working loads and by 60%
in case of ultimate loads.
1.9

1
2. For bars in compression, the above values shall be increased by 25%for all load levels.
cJ
J'
--Jl-
tbmax =tbu
1 Comments: I. /.S. Code does not give the formula for design bond stress but BS 8110 gives equation
relating characteristic strength of concrete and type of bar as : 'tbd = ~ '£ where, ~ is a coefficient
dependent ofthe bar type. According to J.S: 456 the bond stress for tensile reinforcement is 1117 to 1121 of the
_J characteristic compressive stress of the appropriate grade of concrete.
(i) (ii) (iii) 2. American Code ACJ- 3/8 gives modification factors for various influencing factors
( b ) Aexure bond test
., ;:ba =Average bond stress in elastic state like excess reinforcement, spirals, effect ofconfinement due to stirrups etc. LS. Code does notj give any
)
-'
;:bu = Ultimate bond stress at ultimate state such modification factor.
( Practically average all along LJ 3. Authors are of the opinion that the values of bond strength should have been given
\ ( a ) Pull out test for anchorage bond upto 2 places of decimal to give more exact idea ofvariation of bond strength with the grade of concrete.
._)

Fig.6.2.8 For example, the values given in the Table for ultimate load give false impression that variation of r;hd
is linear from grade M/5 to M25 and again from M30 to'M40, while in the range M25 to M30, the
._) Assuming that the bar does not break but gets pulled out by a force T, then by equilibrium, increase is just half the increase in above two ranges.
\ Ultimate bond force = Pull - out force.: .'tbu X Ld = T n+ .
0
T/1t L)
:. 'tbu =
Table 6.2.2 : Development Length Factor k = L /$ = 0.87 1y 1(4tbd)
/ ...... (6.2.2)
\ For the purpose of design, 'tbd· = 'tb I Ym Concrete Grade M20 I i;.125 '
I
J u ...... (6.2J)
where, 'tbd = the design bond strength, and Steel Grade Fe250 Fe4l5 Fe500 Fe250 Fe4l5 Fe500
~ Bars in tension 46 47 57 39 41 49
ym = partial
, safety factor for material strengtlj. for the action of bond.
I
T!'tm · Bars in compression 37 38 46 31 33 39
'-.../ .• 'tbd = - -
1tLd$
Notes : (1) Vail!es are rounded- off on higher side.
.._,) In this case, ( T! ym ) is taken as the force required to cause a preassigned slip or the (2) Plain round bars are assumed for grade Fe:i50, and deformed bars for grades Fe415
shear defomtation of the bar at ultimate state. ana' Fe500.
._j
 The values of the non-dimensional development l~ngth factor k =L/ +=0.87~/ (4t bd ).for
(Jvo grades of concrete, namely, M20 and M2S and for three ·grades of steel-are-given in
Tllble 6..1.2.
6.2.4 Development Length
The development length is defined as the length of the bar required on either side of
the section to develop the required stress in steel at that section through bond. In other words,
development length is an embedded length of the bar req~ired to develop the design stress
in reinforcement at the critical section. In the cantilever beam shown in Fig.6.2. 7 the length
BC of the bar must be sufficient to develop the stress from zero at C to its maximum
design value at B. In other words, the length BC shall not be less than the development
length La Thus, the development length and the anchorage length are in fact one and the
The derivations of anchorage bond stress- given by Eq. 6.2.1 and of flexure bond stress
given by Eq. 6.3.1 are based on highly idealized situations, where in the bond stresses are ('
assumed to be uniformly distributed , the effect of cover is ignored, the effect of transver:se
flexural cracking is neglected. Bond resistance, in fact, is developed over a finite length and any ('
attempt to visualise this bond stress as a local bond stress at a particular cross-section, is totally
("
erroneous which will be evident from the discussions on local-bond in the subsequent section. \.
6.4 - LOCAL BOND c
Eq. 6.3 .1 does not provide an adequate measure of margin of safety against bond
(or splitting) failure. This is because: (I) the flexural bond stress given by equation (Eq .6.3.1) ('
ignores the complicated condition that arises due to cracking of concrete intension zone
( 2 ) It does not take into account localised slippage. r---
\,

same except in the former, the force in toe bar is developed by transfer of force from Consider a portion between two cracks in such a region of constant bending moment M
concrete to steel while in latter case, there is dissipation of force from steei to concrete. as shown in Fig. 6.4 .I (a)( i ). r
In case of R.C. members, the development length is required to be checked at all
sections of maximum stress in reinforcing bars, on both sides of the critical sections* (: ) (:_ )M+dM c:
6. 3 FLEXURAL BOND
This type of bond arises along the length of the bar when the change in bar force is due to
(i) ~) r
~iation in bending moment. -
r
· Consider a segment PQ of a R.C. member under flexure between two sections dx
-apart as shown in Fig. 6.2. 7b M _ _ ~
Tension in the bar at sect. Q = T = z
where , z = lever arm (ii) 1st
1
s2 c
+ +
Tension in bar at P will be greater th~n at Q because B.M. at P is more than th!!t lit Q Tensile stress in bar Tensile stress in bar
\
M+dM
Tension in the bar at P = T + dT = --z-
c
:. Change .m bar force = dT = M+dM
z - z- z-
M = dM (iii)_
.-----.
\
If 'tbd is the bond stress action along the surface of the bar then for equilibrium
Bond force action along the periphery of the bar = change in bar force dT ('
(b)
or \d ( 1t x $) dx = 'dT = d~ :. ~ =V = 'tbd (1t$ )z
(a)
Fig. 6.4. I Local Bond - -- (
Eq. 6.3 .1 indicates that bond stress should be zero in this region, because--tiM I dx( and -
If there are N bars of equal sizes then N (1t$) = 2:0 and the above equation can be
hence dT I dx) is zero. However, the tests by Mathey ( 61/ 2 ) and Fergusson ( 6211 ) have (
.
wntten as : V = 'tbd x z x
-2: 0 ..
v
'tbd = z l:O shown that there is actual variation of bond stress known as LQ(;al bond stress , between
...... (6.3.1)
the two cracks as shown in Fig. 6.4.1 (a). The diffrence' in actual stress condition ('
where
V = Rate of ch:mge of bending moment ( dM I dx), (Fig. 6.4.1 (a) ii) and that given by Eq. 6.3.1 arises because of the assumption made in derivation: ·
i.e. vetrtical shear at the section, ofEiJ. 6.3.1 that tension is entirely taken by steel. In fact concrete in between the cracks does ~sist ("
z = lever arm , some tension reducing the stress in the bar be~een the cracks. Sinee bond stress. at a point is
"' This dnP.< nnt nnnl•
2:0 = Sum of perimeters of all reinforcing bars. actually the rate of c~e g_f_stress ( = dT/dx) , it isgiven by the slope of the bar. stress
curve, r
decreasing from zero at A to its maximum value at D, the point of inflection of the l;lars stress -
' curve, again increasing further ti-om D to C , becoming zero at C and so on. Fig. 6.4.1 (a) (iii) , (
therefore, truely represents the variation of actualloeal bond stress.
c
r
 Check for Development Length for Flexural Bond 241
·.~ 240 Limit State ofCollaps~Bond Chapter6 Sect~6.5
.-, The variation of actual bond stress and variation· of tensile stress in between cracks
._)
in the region of beam with varying bending moment is shoWn' in Fig. 6.4 .1( b} (ii1) and
Fig. 6.4.1 (b) (ii) respectively. It shows that the average bond stress represented by sh~
~
force V= ( T2 - T1) I dx is actually the difference between the positive and negative areas ·.~f
-,)
the bond distribution curve. Simply supported beam
._,
The illustration explained above clearly shows that the bond stress given by
<¢. L _I
)
._/
Eq . 6.3 .1 is only an average bond stress and not the locl!IJX>nd stress, However, the lQCal d --:----]
bond stress peaks have practically no effect on bond failur~ by slipping, orbar pull-otit Fig 6.5.1 Development Length at Simple Support
_) as a whole , so long as adequate bond length is provided for transferring all force T in th~
bar. Therefore, in flexural bond , it is not the local bond stress but the development length T = M /z = t:bd BC'f.O or M1 = (t:bdz'f.O)BC
1 1
·~ that controls the design. That is the reason why Codes eliminate computation of bond stress ··By Eq. 6.3.1, 'tbdz 'f.O = V, :. M1 = V x BC or BC = M/ V
and replace it by development length concept. Now, as per. the requirement of (ievelopment _length,
) Another location where the above flexural bond formula does not apply is in tension AC>Ld i.e.BC+AB>Ld :. M/V+L/Ld i.e. Ld<M/V+L0
zone where bars are terminated or cut off. The curtailment of bar reduces greatly the shear or as Code puts it, Ld-;f M 1V + L or ( M1 1V) + L0 ~ Ld ...... (6.5.1)
and bond stresses locally at cut off points as seen in Sect 6.2.1 (viii). Check for flexural 1 0
.__) where, Ld = required development length which can be obtained from Eq. 6.2.1 c
bond at such section comes in the special form as check for flexural development length
at such section. This has been explained in Sect. 6.5. M = moment of resistance of the section corresponding to the area of steel
~ 1
(A ), continued into the support and stressed to design stress equal to
6. 5 CHECK FOR DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR FLEXURAL BOND 81
__) 0.87 f. (since, B.M. = moment of resistance)
)I .

6.5.1 Critical Sections V == Shear force at the section due to design ·loads.
~ We have already seen the requirement of development length for anchorage bond at L = extended length of bars beyond point of zero bending moment which is
the end of a bar in Sect. 6.2.2. Now we study the requirements of development length for
0 equal to the sum of anchorages beyond the centre of the support and the
\ equi':alent anchorage value of any hook (see Sect.6.6) or mechanical
~
flexural bond at critical section along the length of bar. It has been observed, in the
-derivation of flexural bond Eq. 6.3.1, that the average flexural bond is directly proportional anchorage at simple support. At the point of contraflexure, L0 is . limited
~ to the shear force or the rate of change ofbending moment, and inversely proportional to to the effective depth of the m_ember or 12 ~ whichever is greater.
the sum of bar perimeter and hence to the amount of steel. So, the sections where flexunll In simple supports of beams resting on walls or columns the reaction induces
_) bond is likely to be critical are the sections, where shear force is large and where B. M. compressive stress due to which bars get confined. These bars have less tendency of
is zero or less, and therefore, the amount of steel is likely to be minimum due to either splitting and the bond resistsance is increased. In recognition of this increase in bond
')
J curtailment or bending up of bars. The locations of these sections are : strength due to confinement the Code a\Jows 30% increase . in the value of M/V·
)
(i) Simple support at discontinuous en~s of beam;
"-" Therefore Eq. 6.5.1 then can be written as:
.,
(ii) Points of contraflexure in the case of continuous beams.
Ld :/> 1.3MV 1 + L or l.3M V 1 + L0 ~ Ld ......(6.5.2)
0
,_/
6.5.2 Development Length at Simple Supports It is easy to understand that the full anchorage requirement will not apply to any excess
\ Consider a beam simply supported at its ends shown in Fig. 6.5.1. The bending moment at reinforcement provided at the support. Eq. 6.5.1 is not applicable in the case of secondary beams
-./
B is equal to zero hence tension in the b:!!' ::~t B is also zero. The bending moment increases supported on main beams and in the case of support offering tensile reaction, because in these
._) towards the mid-span. cases there is no increase in the bond stress.
Let T1 be the tension at C corresponding to the bending moment M1 at C so that
.._) T1 = M/ z. The tension T1 i? the bar must develop in the length BC or in other words BC · Check For· Developnumt Length at Simple ·Support
. The number of bars required at support from the requirements of development length,
_) must be equal to the d-evelopme~t length Ld. If BC falls short of Ld then the bars can be shall be obtained by using following equations.
extended up to A so :hat AC IS equal to development length Ld
_)
 .&.¥.t; umu .)COle OJ c·ollapse Bond ·ili sect.o.:> c·nec/C Jor uevetopment Lengtnjor nexure JJona UJ ( ·
Chtipttt-6.
For simple support not offering compressive reaction
, Also at the point of contraflexure, check for flexural bond using Eq. 6.5. i is not r
required for negative moment bars at top COII!ing from the support and continuing beyond
Required M1 ;::: V(Ld-Lo) ......(6.SJa) point of inflection towards mid-span towards which shear force goes on reducing. However, (""
For simple supports offering compressive reaction, Required M ;::: V(Ld- L ) 11.3 -··· (6.S.3b) the check for development bond will be required for curtailment of top bars.
1 0
Now M1 = 0.87 f.y Ast 1.zu Assuming zu . the lever aim, to be constant H"d
'-- It--+-I --..,
.I
r
M
max
= 0.87/A .z
y st.max u
.. MMl
max
Astl
= ~=
st.max
Nl
......(6.S.3c)
\ ~·"1 ,; ' l
~ruol. ~-·
t D
A· ho-I
E
('
'
where M1 = moment of resistance of bars at support,
Nmax
,
• 1 1
1 rto:~~r
I
vt ·.:..t
~ ld-+j c
Astl =Area of bars at support, N = No. of bars at support. •t+lt ~ T- Theoretical points of cut off for
1
Mmax = maximum moment of resistance of all bars at, mid-span,
bars P at distance x1 from support
A- Actual point of cut off tor bars P
r
D· Point of Inflection
Ast.max = Area of all bars at mid-span
· , Nmax = No. of bars at mid-span E· Actual point of cut off tor bars 0
\
For beam/slab carrying UDL of intensity wu, substituting value of M from Eq. 6.5.3a
we get : V( L - L )
d
A
o stl
1
l
0
{(12+ordorctearspan/16)
is
which ever greater
r
M =-A-
max st.max

V = end shear · = ·Y w L and M = a w L2

lll . ,, ::·....,,..... r·
u max u
where, y is shear coefficient and a is moment coefficient. l
~ ~
Shear Force Diagram

(ywuL)( Ld-L) =
a wu L2 Ast.max
or y ( Ld-Lo) =
aL Ast.max
...... (6.5.4a)
Fig. 6. 5.2 Fig. 6.5.3 c
For simply supported beam with UDL, y = 1/2 an~ a = I/8 and offering compressive ("
. 4(L-L) A
= ~
reaction, Eq 6.5 .4a can be written as :
.
d
IJL
0
A
.•.... (6.S.4b)
s.max
1
6.5.4 Check for Development Length for Top Bars in Continuous Beam
M1
r
6.5.3 Development Length at point of Inflection in Continuous Beam for In this case Eq. 6.5. I namely ( V + L0 ;::: Ld ) does not govern the check for ,-..
\
mid-span steel development length becau~~. the rate of moment development, (i.e. shear), is zero at point of
Since an inflection point is a point of zero bending moment occurring away from the contraflexure unlike simply supported beam. The development length in which bond is to be ,
support, bottom tension bars from mid-span and contiimed beyond the point of inflection are
\
developed is span x0 itself..
required to be checked for development length based on Eq. 6.5.1. This equation cannot be used i
Therefore, the condition to be satisfied for development length Ld shall be as follows: \

directly because L0 does not represent the actual length of bar extended beyond the point of
Length of curtailed bar P, (see Fig, 6.5.3) from the centre of support to the point. of
contraflexure (Fig. 6.5.2) but useful anchorage length. It may be noted that these bars may not be
tennination shall be not less than the development length Ld i.e. CA 1:Ldand also shall have (
confined by compressive reaction. The shear force is to be considered at the point of inflection. ·
Therefore, Eq.6.5.1 can be rewritten in this case as: 1
a length not less· that the greater of effective depth or 12 times the diameter of bar from ,-..
M the theoretical point of curtailmentx1 at (TPC) i.e. CAt (x 1 + L1 ) See Fig. 6.5.3
7 1
+ L0 > Ld or M1 =- :'1(La- L0 ) :·· ••• (6.5.5) . Now for .the bars Q which continue beyond theoretical point of cutoff (TPC), are C
i

subjected to maximum stress at TPC, Therefore, the continuing bars, Q must extend a
where, ~= moment of resistance of the curtailed bars which ex;nd beyond the point
of inflection. · distance not less then the development length Ldbeyond TPC i.e. TE-¢: Ldin Fig. 6.5.3.1t shall r
V1 = ultimate shear at the point of inflection. also have minimum length L0 not less than effective depth , or 12 +or clear span 116
L0 = Uf;eful L0 ":f (12' or d) whiChever is greater. whichever is greater beyond the point of contraflexure, i.e. CE1: (x0 + L0 ) (

r
•
c
:J 244 Limit State ofCollapse Bond
Chapter6· Sect .6.6 .Standard Hooks and Bends as End Anchorages 245
_J 6.6 STANDARD HOOKS AND BENDS AS END ANCHORAGES Fig 6.6.2a shows that the concrete is subjected to bearing stress on th~ inside of a bend in a bar
6.6.1. Equivalent Anchorage Lengths of Standard Hooks and Bends under tension. A bar carrying tensile force F61 is bent through an angle de . The resultant of the
~ In situations, wherein straight development length or anchorage length cannot be two bar forces F61 acts along the bisector of the internal angle has a tendency to split the concrete.
provided due to lack of space, or when it 1s required to develop the full capacity of the bar
~ in a minimum embendment length, standard hooks or bends may be provided. The bends
The bearing force acting on the projected length at bend is equal to rde x +x t cbr
.\ and hooks shall conform to IS : 2502 - (63/3). The common types of end anchorages provided . Fbtxde Fbt
._/
are U type 180° hook and L type 90° bends. The anchorage value of bend is taken equal
Therefore bearmg stress on concrete t cbr = rde x $ = rq;-
to 4+ for· every 45° bend from starting point of the bend;- in addition to actual straight length l.5fk
_) The calculated bearing stress should not exceed + ; Ia
.of bar provided, subject to maximum of 16+ wherein +represents the bar diameter. The 1 2
specifications and dimensions of the hooks and 90° bends are shown in Fig. 6. 6.1. The
_) Fbt l.5fk
straight portion of development length required becomes (Ld- anchorage value of hooks or or Bearing stress on concrete 'tcbr = ~ "f __c_ ...... (6.6.1)
bends). The bend or hook allowance (H or B) given in the figure is the additional actual
~ length of bar required for hook or bend for cutting -of bars. where, F61 = tensile force in a bar, or group ofbars,
_) The total actual length of bar required = L + Hook or bend allowance.
s r = internal radius ofthe bend, and +
= diameter of the bar.
. where, Ls is the straight length of bar measured end to end as shown in Fig. 6.6.1. fck is characteristic strength of concrete and 'a' shall be centre to centre distance
_J Deformed bars may be used without end anchorages provided development length (a in Fig. 6.6.2) between bars, perpendicular to the plane of the bend; for a bar adjacent to
requirements are satisfied. Plain round bars of mild steel should invariably be provided with 2
the face of the member, 'a' shall be taken equal to a1 =clear cover+~ as shown in Fig.6.6.2b.
J books ~~~hHe 90" bend< m•y be o<ed foe defonnOO bee< if n""""Y·
6.6.3 Anchoring Bars in Tension
,_j Fbt Since the deformed bars have more bond resisting capacity they may be

~ :L(C ~
used without end anchorage provided development length requirements are satisfied. The
provision of hook should normally be made for plain bars- to meet with some uncertainty
,
~.A~Causes
regarding mobilization of bond strength.
~-o' -·-
..
J -jr+~r- ~ bt 1- rde Bearing
• Ls -~ 6.6.4 Anchoring Bars in Compression
. ·a· stress
The anchorage length of straight bar in compression shall be equal to the development
_) ' (a) 180° Bend Fbt
F(J(ce triangle for bar length of straight bar in compression. The projected length of hooks, bends and straight lengths
( a)
\
beyond bends, if provided shall be considered for development length.
J

i
... . ..
{;L~·: ~ ::=.; .: i; 6.6.5 Anchorages For Shear Reinforcement
(a) Stirrups : The stirrups form main reinforcement for resisting shear. Therefore, it is
'-' Ir~ ,-I ~ ; . . . :· ~ ~
c1 <I •. a2 •• necessary to anchor the ends of stirrups properly. According to the Code, the stirrups are
....,....._ ~ .r-::-1·.
_) considered to be properly anchored when the stirrup bar is bent through an angle e round
(b) goO Bend :"®·:·@.;®.:.
. . ·:::... ·•.·.: • ·=
the longitudinal; top bar of at least its own diameter and continued beyond the end of the
l H&B Allowance lofactuallength of hoOks and bends curve for a certain length as detailed below. See Fig. 6.6.3
·.../ A Actuallenglh L =slraigth length Ls + (Hor B)
HG2H
• • . tLo · hmo b1soo

f.j_
H B
_J M.S.Bars 2' ~ 541 a1=c1++.a 2 =«::!++

-F r ~
HYSDbars 4' 13~ 6~ (b)
:__)
Fig. 6.6.1 Bends and Hooks Fig. 6.6.2 Bearing Stress at Bends
~ 4'
'-'
) 6.6.l ~ring Stress at Bends ' •T
Ifbends or hooks having specifications or dimensions other than standard bends or hooks shown Fig. 6.6.3 Anchorage for Stirrups
~ in Fig. 6:6.1 are used, the bearing stress in concrete inside the bend is calculated as under: Internal radius ol bend • +
 246 Limit State ofCollapse Bond
Chapter6 Sect.6.8 . Curtailment ofBars 247 (
Angle of bend around the bar (8)
Continuation length beyond bend
90°
8~
135°
6~
180°
4~
The design of bai cUrtailment comprises of the following :
(a) Prepare the scheme of curtailinent from the requirements of bending moment.
. r
When a bend of 90° is provided the bars has a tendency to straighten out under over (b) Review the scheme to ·see
whether the advantage can be taken for resisting shear: .r:-
loads. In such a case cover equal to twice the diameter of the stirrup bar should be provided 11sing bent - up bars.
otherwise either 135° or 180° bend should be provided.
(b) Bent- up Bars The development length required for bent- up bars is the same as that
· (c) . Keep the track of minimum number of bars required to be continued beyond the
points of zero bending moment.
r
J
required for main tension bars except that measurement of development length shall be as under:
(i) In tension zol)e, from end of the sloping or inclined portion of the bar.
(d) Check for development length at critical section.
(e) Check the shear strength of beams at the points of cut off.
r
(ii) In compression zone, from the mid depth of beam. We willnow study in detail each of the above steps of curtailment of bars in {
\.
6. 7 BUNDLED BARS simply supported beams, continuous beams, and cantilevers.
{
Normally, main bars are used singly and separately (67/3). When total number ofbars 6.8.2 Rules For Bar Continuation Beyond Points of Zero B.M. for End Anchorage \.
is large, and space available to accommodate these bars is restricted bars are provided and Development Length {
e!ther in groups of 2, 3 or 4 bars bundled in contact. Bundles shall not be used in a member (a) Continuation ofPositive Moment Reinforcement in the Span Region of Simple Supports \
· without the use of stirrups. The bundled bars shall be tied together. Not more than 2 bars
shall be in contact with each other in one layer. See Fig. 6. 7.1. Bars larger than Jomm shall I.S. Code requires that at least one third of positive moment reinforcement (Asf3 ) at r-
not be bundled except in columns. I.Did-span shall be continued on the same face to simple support (discontinuous end), and at

8
t-
8o
Admissible
m
-j
CfJJ
In admissible
least one-fourth of positive moment reinforcement at mid-span (A sf 4) be continued on the
same face to an intermediate support, beyond the inner face of support by at least a length
r
grouping
grouping
equal to L/ 3. This requirement provides for minimum steel required for tied arch action ('
Fig. 6.7.1 : Grouping of Bundled Bars (Sect.5.3.1 (d)), development of dowel shear Vd (Sect 5.4.1) and minimum anchorage required ~
While applying the rules 1egarding cover, spacing and detailing one bundle of bars shall be treated to prevent shear- bond failure (Sect. 5.3.1 (c)). See Fig.6.8.1. (
as a single bar ofan equivalent diameter giving area equal to the total area of all the bars in bundle. . 1--
While considering the development length requirements, the development length !--- { Ld ---.j
iLd-
r
required for each bar in the bundle shall be increased by I0% for 2 bars in contact, 20% rAst' f Ba~Q ~ Asti3 J.-LJ-
for three bars in a group and 33% for four bars in the bundle, to account for reduction if) (
contact surface area. {BarP I o TPC APC c E
I -t~(dor12+Jt+- ,--..
Bars in bundle shall terminate at different points spaced apart not less than 40 times the bar \
diameter except for bundles stopping at a support. -l~xiAsf/4 ' £Asi ' (--IAst/3

6.8 CURTAILMENT OF BARS

·-fi~/3J" L
/- .....
\

ContinuO'; support CE = L1 i x0 + Greater of (12+ or dor U16)

6.8.1 General () Bars may be in the same layer End support l
Many times bending moment varies quite appreciably along the span. From the point of Fig. 6.8.1 : Detailing Rules for Bar Continuation into and from Supports
view of economy, it is logical to reduce the moment of resistance of the beam along the span When a flexural member is part of primary lateral load resisting system, as in case of C
according to the variation of bending moment, especially in case of large span beams. The frames under sway, the positive moment reinforcement, which is required to continue into
reduction in moment of resistance of the beam can be effected either by reducing the 1
the support on the same side, shall extend for full development length Ld instead of L/ 3 ·-
cross - section of the beam, or by reducing· the area of reinforcement. The former solution is
beyond the face of that support. This is to assure ductility response in the event of unexpected c-.
impracticable and in fact it may not achieve desired economy. Recourse is, therefore, taken
over stress such as from an earthquake. · \
of economising steel by curtailing the area of reinforcement along the span. Since moment
of resistance of a section varies in proportion to area of r~inforcement (arid the lever arm
(b) Continuation of Negative Moment Reinforcement at Support Beyond
whiCh can be assumed to be constant for all practical purposes), the reduction in area of
Point of Contraflexure c
steel c_an be worked out from the B.M. diagram (on the tlnes of curtailment of flanges in I.S. COde requires that at least one- third of the total negative moment r~orcement (
nlate llirder). . ~Hhe intermediate support or a ftxed support shall be contlm,Jed beyond the point of
. inflection (Point C in Fig. 6.8.1) for .a distance L1 not less than the. effectiye d~l?-th of tile r
(
 Curtailment ofBars 249
t~ 248 Limit State ofCollapse Bond Cbopter6 Sect.6.8
'. , 1be --~·in bending moment M1 at distance x2 from mid-span is equal to ~I 2.
-~ member or 12+ or one - sixteenth of the clear span whichever is greater. 2
In the case ofcantilevers, at leaSt one- third the support steel shall extend upto the free end. NowNIIIIZXnumberofbar$.corres}l()llds to maximum bending moment M=wL !8
-~
(c) Continuation of Curtailed Bar beyond Theoretical Point of Cut-off while N number of bars corresponds to reduction in moment ~ /2
1

.J
I.S. Code requires that every bar, that is to be curtailed, shali continue for a distance ~/2-_-N
{}/8
- N
- 1 ..· x2=L2- ~~
-N
--- 2- ~
- -L -A-
stl ...... (6.S.la)
equal to the effective depth ofthe member or 12+ whichever is greater, beyond the theoretical W max max st.max
\
point of cut - off except at simple support or end of cantilever. This requirement has to be
·._./ satisfied to provide for the following : Distance of theoretical point of curtailment from support,

)
----'
(i) To transfer force in the curtailed bar to the surrounding concrete by bond.
(ii) To provide relief from abnormal stress condition that occurs at point of XI = i - =i - i ~
X2
. max
cut - off in the tension region.

i [~-~] = i [~-~]
_) ...... (6,8.lb)
(iii) To provide safety against possible shifting in bending moment diagrams due to
redistribution of moments for various load combinations.For details see chapter-3 max st.max
_) (iv) To allow for inaccuracies in detailing and laying of bars.
where, x = Theoretical point of cut off from support
The above requirements are clearly illustrated in Fig. 6.8.1. 1
_) N = Number of bars to be curtailed corresponding to area Astl
1
6.8.3 Curtailment of Bars in Simply Supported Beams Nmax = Number of bars having the same diameter at mid-span corresponding to area Ast.max
~ Before deciding the scheme of curtailment, it is necessary to determine first the minimum The Actual Point of Curtailment (APC) shall extend beyond the Theoretical Point of
number of bars required at supports for end anchorage and for development length. Curtailment (TPC) towards the support for a distance equal to 12~ or effective depth d of the
J (a) Determination of Minimum Bottom Steel at simple Supports beam whichever is greater. .
· (i) For End Anchorage: Graphically, x can be obtained by intersection of moment of resistance diagram with B.M.
_) . This will be decided by applying the rules ofbar continuation given in Sect. 6.8.2 (a) 1
diagram as shown in. Fig; 6.8.2 (b).
(ii) For Development length it should satisfy the requirements given in Sect. 6.5.2.
.J (b) Determination of Scheme of Curtailment :)
Scheme of curtailment includes determination of:
J (i) stages of curtailment,
{ii) number of bars to be curtailed at each stage, and
:J (iii) the actual point of curtailment.
Normally, curtailment is not possible in more than 2 stages.
J Having decided the scheme of curtailment, the distance of theoretical point of curtailment
is obtained either analytically by equating the moment of resistance (M.R.) of the uncurtailed
~ bars to bending moment (B.M.) at that section, or graphically from the inter- section ·point of I-- U2 T~ Xt =--:!
moment of resistance diagram of the uncurtailed bars and the B.M. diagram.
_) For a very common case of a simply supported beam carrying a uniformly distributed ( b ) Bending Moment Diagram

load, an expression can be derived for points of curtailment as follows :

.J Consider a simply supported beamAB of spanL loaded by a uniformly distributed load r c. m. u••••u:p i <:::::::::. • I '1
..e
~
~
of intensity w. The bending moment diagram is shown in Fig. 6.8.2b. Let the beam be
reinforced with Nmax number of bars at mid-span having area -Ast.max_ such that the moment of
resistance of bars is just equal to the maximum bending momentMmax at mid-span. Let N1
r
~~
)(

~"

~ the number of bars to be curtailed at distance x from the support. Let the reduction in
1
.J moment of resistance due to curtailment of N1 number of bars be Mr This reduction in
bending moment occurs in the distance (L I 2- x1 ) = xT Fig.6.8.2
~
 CurtailmentofBan 251 \,

-.- - --~- "J _.., •• ..,.f'.,'"'- .UVIIU Chapter,6, Sect.6.8 ,.-. ':

\.
Fig.6.8.2 (b) shows the B.M: diagram together.w~ M.R: diagrams of bars, for different In other words, moment of resistarice of continued bars shall be greater dian or equal
percentages of bar c~trailment, and the distanc~ Qfitieir cut - off points from the centre of
(

· M ~2M,
to 2 times the B.M. at cut - off points i.e. \,
...... (6.8.3)
support. ur u .
(c) Design of Shear Reinforcement. This will be carried out as given in Sect. 5.8. While and the shear resistance at cut- off points shall be greater ·than or equal tO t.33 tiniei c-
designing for shear, calculations for Vuc and hence Vur.mm. will be required to be done separately
Vur ~ 1.33 Vu
. the shear force acting at the section i.e.
...... (6.8.4} ('
in the regions
·. where Ast changes on account of curtailment.
(d) Checking the Shear Strength of Beam at the Point of Cut- off. It has been observed
Condition III : - If Conditions I and II are not satisfied, excess stirrups areas over aDd ('
in Sect. 6.i. (viii) that curtailment of bar adversely affects shear strength of member at the
point of cut- off. Code, therefore, does not permit curtailment or termination of flexural above that required for shear and torsion, shall be provided, for a distance e.qual to 0.75
reinforcement in the tension zone unless some provision is made to make up for the reduced
('
d from the theoretical point of cut - off.
shear capacity. Excess stirrup areaAsv ;::: 0.4b.slfy or s = f y x Asv /(0.4b) ...... (6.S.Sa)
Flexural cracks tend to open early at the point of cut- off due to stress concentrations
and the resultant spacing of stirrups s s _.!!._ ...... (6.8.6)
c
occurring over there. If the steel stress in the continuing reinforcement reaches its 8{3
maximum design value, and shear force at the section reaches the shear resistance of the section,
Area of bars curtailed
c-
diagonal tension cracks develop prematurely joining the widened flexural cracks, thus causing
reduction in shear capacity. To avoid this, any of the following measures could be adopted : where 13 = .
Total area of bars before curtailment r
(i) To compensate for reduction in shear strength of concrete by adding the shear
d = Effectiv.e.depth at the section
reinforcement above that normally required when bar is not curtailed. That is, to increase ('
Comments.: (I) It may be noted that excess stirrup area stipulated in this condition is actually the
the shear resistance of the member over and above the shear force acting at TPC by adding
some shear reinforcement.
(ii) To reduce the differential strain between the curtailed and the continuing bars by
area of minimum stirrups .
If s is the pitch of stirrups designed for resisting shear at the section and s2 is the pitch of the c
1
extending more bars than required, and simultaneously having some reserve shear strength excess. stirrup area i.e. the pitch. of minimum stirrups, then ('
. . I I
over and above that required to. resist shear force acting at the section. total area of stirruP per umt length = I + 2 s s and
(iii) To increase the shear and bond strength of concrete and also the shear strength
, of member by confining the concrete in the· region by providing additional stirrups. the resultant spacing is given by. .; ~- I
...... (6.8.7)
c
Therefore, I.S. Code stipulates that any bar in the tension zone may be curtailed only j__+- '"'
sl s2 C,
if shear. strength at the point of cut - off is increased by satisfying ANY ONE of the (ii) If the stirrups required for resisting shear are themselves minimum, addition of minimum
following three conditions.
Condition I : The shear at the theoretical point of cut- off does not exceed two- thirds
stirrups would simply double the stirrups.
(iii) Even though the specified excess stirrup requirement pertains to minimum shear reinforcement jt has c·
that permitted, including the shear strength of web reinforcement provided. not been updated as per Eq. 5.6.8. ,.-
The Eq. 6.8.5a shall be corrected as (00102) :Excess stimips arecr ;;:: 0.4 b.s. I (0.87fy) , ...... {6.8.5b) l
Symbolically, this condition may be written down as follows :
Vu ~ j (Vue+ Vus) or (Vue+ Vus);::: 1.5 Vu ...... (6.8.2) The correct interpretation of these provisions of the Code will be clear from illustrative c
If actual resistance ( Vuc + Vus ) happens to be less than 1.5 Vu . web reinforcement shall
. examples: ('
be increased according to Condition - III. Comments : Code states that ANY ONE of the three conditions shm<:& be satisfied The quu#!HI
arises as to what should be done when Condition - I, or Condition- II is not satisfied ::shouiu uii.;;;;p: be
Comments : This condition thus ensures in the beginning that the shear strength of member at point made to satisfy condition- 1 by increasing Vur to I.5 Vu? Or should Condition- /1 be made to satisfy C
of cut- off including shear resistance of web reinforcement provided is 1.5 times the shear force acling ! by continuing double the area required theoretically and increasing VM, to I.33V• Or shOIIld
at the section thus, having 51J"Ai additional shear strength.

Condition II : For 36 mm and smaller bars, the continuing-bars shall provide double the
I
!
Condition: Ill only be made to satisfy (i.e. providing acl:litional stirrups). Theoretically, there does not
appear any reason to take objection in attempting to satisfy Conditions I or II by increasing V,.,
lfowever, application of all the 3 conditions to some problems shows that Condition -III is conservative,
r·
·
('
area required for resisting moments, Mu at the cut-off point (thereby ensuring 50% stress in and besides, it is also simple to provide a practical solution using Condition- III without' going in for any
.

contipued bars), and the shear at the section shall not exceed three - fourths that permitted. special design. Therefore, authoi's have used the same in mos~ of the .problems, ("

c

254 IJmit Stale ofCollapse Bond Chapter6
I~J
ever is le.ss (Fig. 6.9.1b).Tbe lap length is obviously the length required for transfer of force'
- ,· ftom one bar to another, or the length required for developing full ~ strength i.e. Ld • .
._)
1ust as in the case of curtailment of bars, critical stress condirioiE prevail in the splice
.) . reSion·llso, because oflarger differential strains between two adjllC(:ntbars (Fig. 6.9.1c) leatjing
to;transverse force and widening of flexural cracks. Therefore, two adjacent bars should not
'----'
l be spliced ·within· a close. distance. They should be staggered well, because nearness of two
splices and their overlapping enhance the transverse force eff~As leading to splitting.
) The experimental research (66/4) has shown that:
-....../
(i) all tension splices fail by splitting of surrounding concrete;
_.1
) (ii) splitting starts at the splice ends near the flexural cr-clcks;
(iii) near failure state, splitting may extend over 30 to 80% of splice length;
(iv) fmalfailure is sudden and catastrophic unless the region of splice is confined by
) helixes or stirrUps; ·
. )
(v) considerable increase in cross- section is reported showing presence of large
splitting ·forces; and
(vi) when several highly stressed bars are spliced at the same section, splitting
J effeds are cumulative. .
Confining of concrete surro~nding the splice improves bond performance of splice.
_J Additional stirrups and spiral reinforcement should be provided surrounding splices where
lapping is extensive.
_) In case of splices in bars under compression following are the experimental observations :
{i). Force is transferred. by end bearing also besides by interfacial shear (i.e. bond).
_J Majority of compression splice failures are by crushing .of concrete at· the tips.
(ii) Bearing capacity of concrete is improved by its confinement by stirrups and helixes.
_.) (iii) Increase in cover has .no effect
(iv) Direct transfer of load end to end of bar is best achieved by providing appropriate
~ sleeves at the joints.
The provisions of LS. Code for splicing are as follows :
.) (a) General :Position and Amount of Splicing : Splices shall, as far as possible, be
J away from sections of maximum stress and they shall be staggered. It is recommended that
splices in flexural members should not be at sections where the bending moment is more
, than 50% of the moment of resistance (i.e. where stress in bar is greater than 50% of its
._) strength ), and that not more than half the bars shall be spliced at a section.
~ Where more than one - half of the bars are spliced at a section or where splices are
~ade at points where stress exceeds 500/o of the strength of bar, special precautions shall be
.J taken such as, increasing the length of lap and/or using spirals, or closely spaced stirrups
· around the length of the splice.
_)
(b) T"P Splice~ .
(i) Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than 36 mm in diameter. Larger
\ development length, curtailment design, shear design and check for shear at points of
diameter bars shall preferably be welded; but when welding is not possible, additional spirals
1
._) shall be provided around the lapped bars.
(ii) Bars under tension shall be provided with hooks at the ends. The lap length of
.J tension splices including anchorage value of hooks shall be equal to , ·
lllustrative Examples 255
$ti;t·.6;10
L or 3~ whichever is greater for bars in flexural tension.
2Ld or 3~ whichever· is· greater for bars in direct tension.
4
Here Ld = development length defined by Eq. 6.3.1, ~ = bar diameter.
The straight length ot' the lap shall not be less .than 15~ or 200 mm whichever is greater.
Lap length shall be increased by a factor L4 when lap occurs for a tension bar located at :
(a) top ·of the section as cast and the minimum cover is less than twice the diameter
of the lapped' bar.
(b) comer of a section and the minimum cover to either face is less than tWice the diameter
of the lapped bar or where the clear ~istance between adjacent laps less than
75 mm or 6 times the diameter of lapped bar, whicheveris greater.
Where both above mentioned conditions (a) and (b) apply the lap length shall be increased
by 2 instead
Note: Splices inoftension
1.4 mem~rs shall be enclosed in spirals of bars not less than 6 mm diameter
24~
with pitch not exceeding 100 mm.
(iii} For bars in compression, the lap length shall be equal to Ld in compression or
whichever is greater.
(iv) When bars of two different diameters are to be spliced, the lap length shall be
calculated on the basis of diameter of the smaller bar.
(v) Lap splices shall be considered as staggered if the centre to centre distance ~f; the
splices is not less than 1.3 times lap length given in b (ii), above. · ~
(vi) In case of bundled bars, lapped splices shall be made by splicing one bar at a tiine ;
such individual splices within the bundle shall also be staggered.
(c) Strength of Welds :
(i) Splices in compression-For welded splices (89/9) and mechanical connection, the design
strength of splice be assumed as 100% of the design strength of jointed bars.
(ii) Splices in tension - The design strength of splice shall be assumed as :
(a) 80% of the design strength of welded bars. (100% if welding is strictly supervised
and if at any cross-section of the member not more than 20% of the tensile
reinforcement is welded.
(b) 100% of design strength of mechanical connection.
Welding of reinforcement shall be done in accordance with I.S. : 2751 (79/2)
6.10 The
U..LUS'l'RATIVE EXAMPLES
types of problems illustrated in this section have an emphasis on check for
curtailment. TheseSimply
Ex. 6.10.1: are as supported
follows : beam without curtailment of bars: Unifonn load.
Ex. 6.10.2: Simply supported beam with curtailment of bar : Unifonn ·toad
Ex. 6.10.3: Overhanging beam with heavy point loads, including bar curtailment
Ex. 6.10.4: Cantilever of varying depth carrying unifonn load and point load,
including bar curtailment.
 256 Limit State ofCollapse Bond 8¢.6.10
Illustrative Examples .l)l {·'
\, .
Chaplf?r.~ ~:· !, ~ .: '· • . •

Ex. 6.10.1 A reinforcement concrete beam 500 mm deep and .230 mm wide, is
(c) . Mmimum number of bars required at support for flexural development length
Form Eq. 6.5.2, fo_r reaction offering compressive reaction,
r
reinforced with 8 Nos. 20mm diameter bars at mid- span to carry a uniformly distributed
load of 22.5 kN/m (inclusive of ·its own weight), over simple span of 8 m. . Required M1 = V (Ld-Lo )/1.3 c
Assuming concrete grade M20, steel grade Fe 415, load factor 1.5, and width of Taking L = Ld/3 - b 12 = 313 - 230 /2 = 198 mm
support 230 mm,
0 s
135 (940- 198) r
(a) determine the minimum development length required for 20 mm diameter bar to Required M1 = .3 x 1000 = 77 kN.
develop full strength; 1 r
\
Midspan moment Mmax = 270 kN.m
(b) apply check for flexural development length at support assuming all bar to
continue at support (i.e. for no curtailment of bars); Required No. ofbars at support is obtained by Eq. 6.5.3c r
(c) determine the minimum number ofbars required at support for development length N = -Ml -x N = -77x 8 = 2.28 say3Nos.
. in flexure; and · .I M
max
max 270 c
. (d) apply check for development length if only 2 bars are continued to support. (d) Developmentcheck when 2 bars are continued to support
Data : beam - D = 500 mm, . bw = 230 mm,. A s1 = 8 Nos.#20 mm , w = 22.5 kN/m From part- (c) above, the minimum number of 20 mm diameter bars required at support
is 3 Therefore, when only 2 bars are continued to support, check for Ld will not be
c
L =8m, fk c
=20Nimm2 ,fy = 415Nimm2 , bs = 230mm. r
Solution : available. In order to get this check, one of the following alternatives may be adopted. \

(a) Minimum development length for 20 mm diameter of bar, (i) Increase L0

0.87/
For 2 bars,M1 = 270 x 2/8 = 67.s-kN.m
\
L =--y$
d 4tbd
From Table 6.2.1 for M20 and round bars, tbd = 1.2 N/mm 2
tI 1.3 Ml
Required ~o = Ld - -V- =940 -
1.3 X 67.5
135 x 1000 = 290 mm c
- u
For grade Fe 415, deformed bars 60% increase in tbd is allQwed, The bars shall have an anchorage of 290 mm from the centre of support or (
290 +·115 = 405 mm from the inner face of support. Since width of support is just 230
0;87 X 415
·
.. tbd = 1.2 x 1.6 = 1.92 Nlmm
2
, .. Ld =
4
x 1.
92
·$ ;= 47 + nun this much straight length is not available. Therefore, provide a standard 180° hook
giving anchorage value = 16+ = 16 x 20 = 320 mm. (Fig. 6. 10.1a). Start of hook from the
c
For+= 20 mm, Ld = 47 x 20 = 940mm:
outer face for Fe 415 bar = (4+ + +)
+end clearance (see Fig. 6.6.1a) C
(b)Check for flexural development length at support. = 5+
+ 40 mm (end cover assumed)
The simple support in this problem offers compressive reaction, = 5 x 20 + 40 = 140 mm c
1.3Ml
-V- + Lo :<: Ld

maximum B.M. at midspan,

M1 = M.R. of 8 bars = Max. B.M. at midspan
...... (Eq. 6.5.2)
Since all 8 bars at midspan continue at support, assuming M. R. of 8 bars equal to
40
_Lj I
eo ~ I lT 465
c--
(

c
1.3 Ml
2
= wuL ! 8 = (1.5 x 22.5) x 82/8 = 2JO kN.m
V = W uL/2 = (1.5 X 22.5) X 8/2 =. 135 kN.
1.3 X (27~ 1000)
;2a
l 35
('

.. - - +L =
v 135
'I(
+L
0
90 I T \
= 2600 + L0 > required Ld ( = 940 mm) :. O.K. 115
(a)
~(b)
c
Theoretically, L0 is not necessary. However from requirement ofend ::.'lchorage, bars
shall continue a distance of L/3 = 940/3 = 313mm say 320mm inside theinner face of
('
support. Fig. 6.10 .1
c
r
·~·
Illustrative Examples 259
258 Limit State ofCollapse Bond ChiijdtWi' ~ct.6.10
'·:J Here N~ = Total number of bars at midspan = 6, and
Straight length available inSide the inner support = 230-140 = 90 mm.
___) Total anchorage length available = 320 + 90 = 41 0 mm > 405 mm required N = Number of .bars curtailed = 2.
1
(ii) If instead of 180° hook, only 90° ·ben~ is provided, available anchorage length :. x = (U2) (1- ...fi]6) = 0.211L
1
'\
-._..)
=8+ + 90 = 8x 20 + 90 = 250mm i:tnly = 0.211 x (6 x 1000) = 1266 mm say 1260 mm
Therefore, the bars will be required to be extended beyond the bend by distan~ of (ii) Actual point of cut - off (APC) : (Point Q in Fig. 6. 10.2)
., 405-250 = 155 mm in addition to a length of 4+ ('= 4 x 20 = 80 mm) required as part bf · The bars are required to be extended a distance equal to 12~ or d whichever is
___;
standard bend as shown in Fig. 6.10.1b. greater beyond TPC towards simply supported end. . J.
J
) Comments : It has been noted earlier that the straight portion of the bar useful for strength
development is only d or 12~ whichever is greater when a bar terminates in a tension zone. However,
full length is effective if the extended portion, beyond the bend for a hook extends in compression region.
A~·
IW··"'""' ~, .

_) Here, the stress condition in the region of beam above the support-is worth noting. It is wrong to assume
~ L =3m
12
-----------.1,I
_)
that the portion of beam below neutral axis above the support is in tension. This portion is in fact under
compression on account of transfer of compression from beam to support in an inlined direction like a
thrust from an arch or from the end diagonal of a truss. See Sect. 6.2.1 (xi)
. I lz , 711 \ 1,
_)
Ex. 6.10.2 A simply supported R.C. beam; 380 mm wide and 750mm deep, carries a
uniformly distributed load of 60 kN/m (inclusive of self weight) over an effective span ~
jA-'4-If«V
a v Pt T
6- #20

tj~:
·::

~ of 6 m. The beam is reinforced with 6 Nos. 20 mm diameter bars of grade Fe 415 at the
midspan. It is proposed to curtail 2 Nos. and continue 4 Nos. to supports.
__) I
/jt ·-.
·····'<...:
IT·
I

_) (a) Give calculations for (i) the position of the theoretical point ofcut- off (TPC), (ii) ''
1.. I 1260
the position of actual point of cut- off, (iii) check for development length at support, (iv) '
_) design of shear reinforcement, (v) check for shear at points of curtailment. Fig. 6.10. 2
(b) Determine the minimum number of bars that should be -.continued at bottom. at PQ = (12 x 20) or 710 mm., whichever is greater = 710 mm.
__)
support to satisfy the check for development length , DistanceofAPCfromthe centre of left support is x1 = 1260-710 = 550 mm
Assume concrete of grade M20, load factor 1.5 and width ofsupport 230 mm and.mild Length ofcurtailed bars on each side of the centre of the beam = 6000 /2 - 550 =2450 mm
~ exposure conditon.
\
Dllla : simply supported beam. having effective span = L = 6 m,
J 2 (iii) Check for Development Length at Supports :
w = 60 kN/m, Load factor = 1.5, jk c = 20Nimf1l-, f.y = 415 N I mm Required development length Ld = (0.87f/ 4tbd H 2
_J A• '"' 6 Nos.#20 mm = 6 x 314 = 1884 mm2 , D = 750 mm, bs = 230 mm,
For plain round bars concrete M20, from Table 6.2.1 tbd = 1.2 Nlmm
Clear cover for mild exposure from Table 2.2.3 = 20 mm. Assuming 20 mm diameter
main steel and 10 mm diameter stirrups. effective cover = 20 + 10 + 20/2 = 40 mm :. Ld= 0.87 x X 415
x = 47~, For.= 20mm,Ld= 47 x 20 = 940mm
+
J 4 12 · 16
· 1.3M

~
:. Effective depth =750-40 = 710 mm ·
Since support here offers a compressive reaction, by Eq. 6.5.2, + L01 > Ld T
Solution: Number of bars continued to support = 4. Assuming moment of resistance (M.R.) of 6 ·
J (a) Ultimate load wu = 1.5 x 60 = 90 kN!m bars at the centre· equal to maximum bending moment at midspan (because from ·data, it is
. Maximum shear at centre of support =V = w L/2 = 90 x 6/2 = 270 leN. .. not known whether the beam acts like a flanged beam or a rectangular beam in the span
~ ~ u
Maximum ultimate ~oment at midspan==
2
Mu.max = wuL2/8 = 90 x 6 /8 = 405 kN.m
region), the M.R. of 4 bars continued to support is given by :
·
M = (4/6) x 405 == 270 kN.m
_) (i) Theoretical Points of Cut- off:(TPC) (Point Pin Fig. 6.10.2)
Shear at the centre of support is V = Vu.~
1
For a simply supported beam of span L carrying uniformly distributed load, the = 270 kN.
__J distance of TPC from the centre of su,port is given by , l.lMl.+ _ 1.3 x270x 1000 . =(l3GO+L )mm>L (=940mm) :. O.K.
_) x1 = -'~ [1 - ~ ....,. (Eq.6.8.1b) y Lot - 270 + Lol ol d

max
 ~ -J -....-,..,.......,....u~ .LIVIIU·

Chapttr'i Sect.6.10 lllustrative Examples 261 C

Theoretically, no extension L01 is required beyond the centre of support for
development length check. However, according to rules of bar continuation, a minimum..
Shear resisted by minimum stirrups,
vusv.max =
0.4 bd = 0.4 X 380 X 710 I 1000 = 107.92 leN.
r
anchorage length equal to L/ 3 is required to be provided from the inner face of suPPort. Total shear resistance of seetion with· miti.imum stirrups, \
End anchorage required= L/3 = 940/3 = 313mm say320mm vur.mm. = vuc + vusv.mm. = 124.97 + 107.92 = 232.89 leN.
Available width of support bs = 230m,;, only. Therefore, either provide a 9()0 ben4 or > v~ (= I95.75kN) r
a 180° hook.
Using 90°- Bend ~ :. Minimum stirrups are sufficient.
(
For Fe 4I5 HYSD bar, the distance of start of bar from the outer face
= 5 ~ + 40 mm (end clearance)
= 5 x 20+40 = I40mm.
II s
Provide ~10 mm, 2legged mild steel (Fe 250) stirrups (A sv = 157 md) at spacing,
0.87 t;,Asv
-- =
0.87 x 250 X 157 '
= 224 mm say220mm <(300mmand0.75 x715) '
r

Straight length of bar available from the inner face to start of bend
= 230-140 = 90mm •..~
-~

~
ZONE OF NOMINAL STIRRUPS : r
Anchorage value of 90° bend = 8~ = 8 x 20 = I 60 mm The minimum stirrups are not required in the middle portion where Vu < 0.5 Vuc.. r·
I
.
'
Available anchorage length = 90 + I60 = 250 mm < required 320 mm. Itmaybenoted
-
that Vuc near the midspan region will not be 124.97 leN calculated. above
The bars wilL be required to be extended further beyond the 90° bend. at supports for 4Nos.+20 mm. It is the value corresponding to 6Nos +20mm in the midspan region. ("'
Extension of bar required beyond the bend 1 A51 = 6Nos. +20mm = 6 x 314 = 1884mm~ '
= exte.qsion r~_quired to make tip Ld I 3
+ excess length required as part of the bend(=~).
II P, = (1884 X100) I (380 X 710) = 0.698%.
0.198
r
= (320-250) + 4 x 20= 150mm.
Ii
From Table 5. 7.1, tuc = 0.48 + 0_25 x 0.08 = 0.543 N!md r
The figure for bend will be same as Fig. 6.10.1 (b) except that straight length beyond vuc = 0.543 X 380 X 710 I 1000 = 146.5 kN.
the bend shall be 70 + 80 mm instead of I40 + 80 mm shown in that figure for that example.
Osing 180° Hook : I
~- Length of region of nominal stirrup on each side of the centre line,
r
"t,
Anchorage of hook = 16~ = I 6 x 20 = 320 mm Straight length = 90 mm. -~~
~
Ls3 = 0.5 Vuc lwu = 0.5 x 146.5/90 = 0.81 m say .
800mm ('
·t;
Available end anchorage= 320 + 90 = 4IOmm > 320mmrequired :. 0.1( Provide $6 mm M.S. stirrups at 300 mm c/c for a length equal to 800 mm on each side
¥i
of the centre of beam. '
·(v) Design ofshear reinforcement: '·
Since support offers compressive· reaction, the critical section occurs at a distance (vi) Chec~ for shear at points of curtailment : At theoretical* _point of curtailment, ("
d = 710 mm from the face of support. any one of the following conditions given in see Sect. 6. 8. 3d will be required to be satisfied.
Design Shear VuD = Vu.max - w ( b 12
u s
+ d) *Comments : Code does not state in specific terms whether the conditions are to be satisfied at (''
TPC or at APC (Points P and Q respectively in Fig. 6.10.2). However if we consider the shear failure
= 270-90 (230/2 + 710)/IOOO = I95.75 kN.
Allowable maximum shear V =t . bd mechanism at point of curtailment shown in (Fig. 6.10.2), it may be noted tha( the reduction in shear ('
u.max uc.max strength occurs between Sect. 1 - 1 and Sect. 2- 2 on account of differential strain condition between the
From Table 5.6.1 for M20, t = 2.8 Nlmm 2
uc.max curtailed and uncurtailed bars. The shear failure crack though passes through Sect. 2 - 2 at the APC at ('
bottom in the tension region, it starts from Sect. I - I at TPC at top and the shear which causes failure
Vuc.max = 2.8 X 380 X 7J0/ 1000 ,, along the crack ·is the shear at Sect. I - I i.e. at TPC and not at Sect. 2- 2 (i.e. at APC). .---
755.44 kN > VuD (= I95.75 kN)
= :. O.K. (2) Also Code does not in specific terms say whether the additional stirrups be provided for a ~

At supports, As1 = 4Nos # 20mm = 4 x 314 = 1256~ region 0. 75d beyond APC towards support or towards midspan. The above figure makes this also clear
that the additional stirrups shall be provided in the region between APC and TPC. ("
P, = (1256
100)/(380 X 710) = 0.465% X

0.215
From Table 5. 7.1 for M20,. tuc = 0.36 + o:25x (0.48- 0.36) = 0.4632 N/~ Condition - 1 : Shear at the point of' cut off > 2/3 that permitted
i.e ( Vuc + Vus ) ~ 1.5 Vu (Eq. 6.8.2)
c
Shear resisted by concrete, Vuc = t uc.bd = 0.4632 x 380 x 710 11000 = 124.97 kN. ('
Distance of TPC from the centre of support, x1 = 1260 mm.
r
\.

c
,._.-
l6J.·.L~MU State ofCollapse Bond
'J Shear at this point, Chapter,~· Sect.6.10 Rlustrative Examples 263
'\
· 'leN.
.__) Vu = Vu.max - W XXI = 270-90 X 1.26 = 156_6 Comments : In actual practice, such regorous tendious calculations go against the requirkrents of
·
.". 1.5 VU = 1.5 X }56.6 = 234.9 leN - simplicity in practicm design and are, therefore, not justified in relation to the output ofcalculations.
Shear resistance A~ therefore, recommend that .without going into details of investigating satisfying CoRdition -1 or
._) Condition- 2, , one irlay directly add stirrups having area ofminimum stirrups or make it further simple by
doubling the stirrups (i.e. reducing their spacing to half} that are designed for a distance equal to 'd'
.J
\ V11r = Vuc + Vusv.mm. because only minimum stirrups exit at the section. (instead of0.7Sd) from theoreticai point of cut- off towards midspan, of course, satisfying simultaneously
(Note: Vuc is that corresponding to A81 of contifl.Ued bars 4 Nos. +20 mm i.e. V.., = /24.97 kN) /he condition that resultant pitch :f d/8~ . For SfP/0 curtailment s > d/4:
~ vliT
= 124.97 + 107.92 :: 232.89 leN.< 1.5/
.
vu ( :: 234.9 kN) In the above case, designed pitch s= 220 mm (See Part- V of this problem). Doubling the stirrups
:. First condition is satisfied. according to above practical recommendation would give s = 22012 = I IO mm satisfying condition
s > d/8~ ( = 266 mm) also This is less than I 70 mm for condition- 1. This rule is even easy for checking
~ the stirrups on site and it can be given in the form of a note in the drawing.
Condition - 2 ·
~ MilT > 2 Mu by Eq. 6.8.3 and VliT > 1.33 Vu by Eq. 6.8.4 (b) Determination of number of bars required at support to satisfy development check:
In this problem because 2 bars are curtailed at the point where they are not required 1.3 M1
~ Required Ld = 940 mm = -V- + L0
and MliT of 4 bars is equalto Mu at the section. :. MliT <2Mu and the Condition- 2 is not
~tisfied.
Assuming L0 = Ld/3 -b)2 = 940/3-230/2 = 198 mm
~ Even though Condition-! is already satisfied, the application ofcondition 3 is shown.
., * Comnrents : Hereafter if either condition 1 or 2 is not satisfied, calculations will be done for Required M 1 =
V(Ld-L )
1.3 ° =
270(940-198)
1.3 x . = 154.1 kNm
"-"' 1000
Condition • 3 only which is simple in application.
Condition - 3 : No. of bars required at supports from development length criterion ,
~ M1 154.1
Stirrups having area equal to that· of minimum stirrups shall be provided in addition N = -- x N = - - x 6 = 2.28 say 3 Nos.
to those required to resist shear at the section. I M max 405
max
~J · At TPC, VuD = 156.6 kN , Vue = 124.97 kN Also from the rules of bar continuation to support, minimum number of bats
~ = V = VuD- Vuc = 156.6- 124.97
Required Vusv.us = 31.63· kN required at support = No. of bars at midspan/3 = 6/3 = 2.
Required area of stirrups per unit length :. Minimum barsrequired at support satisfYing both requirements= 3.
.)
Asvi = Vusv = 31.63 x 1000 = 0.205 mm2 I mm Ex. 6.10.3 An overhanging beam ABC, 4.8 m long, is supported at left end A, and at
Sl y d · 0.87 X 250 X 710
·0.87 jx a point B, 0.8 m from right end C. The beam carries two point loads, one 78 kN at D. the
._) ' Required additional area of stirrups .per .unit length ,J centre of AB and another 60 kN at free end C. The beam section, 230 mm x 450 mm

:J Asv2 =
s2
~
0.87j y
= 0.4 x 380 = 0.7 mm2/ mm
0.87 x 250
throughout, is reinforcement with bars as given below :
Midspan section at D - Bottom 6 of $ 16 mm
Top 2 of $ 12 mm
~ Total area of stirrups required per unit length Support section at B - Bottom 4 of $ 16 mm
Asvi Asv2 Asv .2 Top 4 of$16mm +2 of$12mm
~ - 1+ - = -=·0.205 + 0.7= 0.905 mnr/mm
s s2 s . Effective cover on tension side is 50 mm and on compression side 40 mm; The ultimate
moments of resistance of the beam sections at midspan D and support B may be talcen
Spacingof+IOmm2-legged Fe250stirrups (Asv =157m,?-) isgiven by=(Asvls)x0.905
·~ 157 equal to bending moments at those points respectively. Assuming width of support 230 mm,
s = Q905 = 173.5 say 170 mm Also s should ~ less than d/813 concrete grade M20 and steel grade Fe 250,

~ In this case, f3 = 2!6 = 1/3 :. s < 710 I (8 x 113) i.e. 266 mm,Provide s = 170 mm.
(a) design the curtailment of bars giving distance of actual and theoretical
points of cut - off from supports;
_) . Conditi~n-3 is~uiredto be providedoveradistanceequai~.75 d =0.75 x 7_10:532mm (b) check the barsfor de!1elopment length at supports;
from. theoretical pomt of cut- off towards APC. However, Jt may be provtded over a (c) design for shear reinforcement for the entire beam;
~distance between APC and TPCi.e.foradistanceof d = 710mm. (d) check for shear at points of cut- off.
Give separate calculations for positive moment region and the negative moment region.
._)
... .,.,. ~" ~Hwe OJ.'--Oilapse JJond
.. --~ .,_-,_~;}
Chapter· a_, .. Sect.6.10" . Rlustrative Examples 265 ("
Data An OV<lrbanging beam. Span-4 m, overhang= 0.8m Loading as shown in Fig. 6, iO,.Jq. I
I. POSITIVE MOMENT REGION ADE : \
b=230mm, D=450mm, de== 40mm, d' = 50mm, bs =230mm,JCA: = 20N/,;,iJ}..
=
f.y 250 N!m,,. . . .. · (a) CUTIIlilment Design : Before deciding the scheme of curtailment, it will be necessary
Solution: : ·-:.i~~.·.
to determine the minimum number of bars required at points of zero B.M. i.e. at the point of C
Loads at ultimate state : ·contraflexure from the criterion of continuation of minimum bars to support for end anchorage.
("
Point· load at D = 78 x 1.5 = 117 kN. , Point load at C = 60 x 1.5 = 90 leN. ii According to rules of bar continuation given in Sect. 6.8.2 (a) minimum No. of bars
required to be continued
Self weight of beam at ultimate state wu = 1.5 x (25 x .23 x .45) = say 4 kN/m - to discontinuous end = N/3 = 6/3 = 2 ('-
117x2 + 90x
4.8 + 4x4.8 2 /2 - to continuous end N/4 = 6/4 = 1.5 say 2.
r
R8 = . 4 = I 78.02 kN Now, the distsance of point of contraflexure from A = 3.118 m. \
RA = ll7+90+4x4.8-I78.02 = 48.18 kN Since at point of contraflexure, no compression reaction exists, by Eq. 6.5.5
Required_M1 = V1 (Ld-Lo) ('
The shear force diagram is shown in Fig. 6.10.3b
Moments : MuB = 90 x 0.8 + 4 x 0.8 2/2 = 73.28 kN.m V1 = Vu at points of c~ntraflexure = 48.18 - 4 x 3.118 - 117 = - 81.29 leN ("
MuD = 48.18 x 2 - 4 x 2 x 2/2 = 88.36 kN.m = 81.29 kN in magnitude ·
Distances of point of contraflexure {E) .from C = x L0 = 12$ or d i.e. 12 x 16 ord=450- 50= 400 mm whichever is greater ("
:. 90 x x + 4 x ~I 2 - I 78.02 (x- 0.8) = 0 . . 0.87 fy 0.87 X 250
~ -44.0Ix+ 71.21 = 0
For M 20 Fe 250, required Ld= 4tbd "' 4 x 1.2 = 46$ 46 x 16 = 736 mm = (~

.. x = 1.682 m. :. Required M1= 81.29 x (736- 400) I 1000 = 27.3 kN.m

Distance of point of contraflexure (E) from B = x = 1.682- 0~8 = 0.882 m. :. Required number of bars at point of contraflexure by (Eq. 6.5.3c)
("
0
Distance of point ofcontraflexure from A = 4.0-0.882 = 3.118 m Ml . 27.3
The bending moment diagram is shown in Fig. 6.10.5c N = - - x N = - - x 6 = say2Nos.
I Mmax. max 88.36 c
117kN
:. Minimum number of bars required at the point of contraflexure = 2. ("
A C 4 bars of $16 mm will be continued into the support. 2 bars of $16 mm will be curtailed in a
:~l..
RA=4B.1~2000 ---+--- single stage. r-
1--_14.--
- - 2760 ---.......,j
THEORETICAL POINT OF CUT- OFF ON LEFT (TPC- LEFT) : Let x 1 be the r-
(a)
93.2 distance of TPC Left (Point P in Fig. 6.1 0.3) from the centre of left support. Since the \
90
bending moment diagram in this case is not a standard parabola (which is only for uniformly -"'"'·
distributed load over the entire span) the distance x1 will have to be obtained from first ~-
principles. ("
RA.XI - wul-12 = MI = Mu.max X (2/6) = Mu.max /3

88.36
48.18x1- 41x (x 1)2/2 = 88.36/3 = 29.45 kN.m c
xf-24.09 x1 + 14.72 =0 .'. x1 = 0.627 m say 620 mm from A
(
· ACTUAL POINT OF CUT- OFF ON LEFT (APC- LEFT) - (POINT- Q):

c
Distance of Q from left support A , x1 = x 1 - d = 620- 400 = 220 mm. c
"!<Comments : It is normally not advisable to do curtailment in more number ofstages because as
the number of stages goes on increasing, M.R. of curtailed bar at each stage (i.e. M in the equation for (
1
73.28 development length) goes on reducing thereby reducing M/ V also. Then it becomes difficult to satisfY the ("·
Fig. 6.10.5 development length check. One may bear in mind.the fact that the minimum Mt required at each stage of
curtailment is V (LJ- L0 ).
("

r
 mustra~We~ 267
~~ Limit State ofCollapse Bond Sect.6;}0
-· C/tapter-'6
'J At left support, A.st =4Nos.+l6mm = 804mnf
:TPC RIGHT (POINT;.R)
P, = so4 x 1001 (23G x 400) = o.s74%
':) Let distance of R from centre of left support A be x
2
48.18x2 ~ 4x22 /2-ll7 (x2 -2) = 29.45 :. x22 + 34.41x - 102.27 = 0 From Table 5.7.1 for M20,
':) 2 0.124
:. x2 = 2.76 m i.e. 2760 mm from A or 4000 - 2760 = 1240 mni from supp_ort 11 'tuc = 0.56 + Q.2S x 0.06 = 0.59 Nlmrrf
APC RIGHT - (POINT-S) VU = tUC.bd ::: 0.59 230 X 400{\000 ::: 54.2S leN
J Distance of s from the centre of left support A
X

VllSV.min = 0.4 bd = 0.4 x 230 x 400/1000 = 36.8 kN

_) x1'= x2 + d =-~760 + 400 = 3l60mmor 4000-3160=840mm fromsupportB Vur.min = Vuc + V!LIV.min = 54.28 + 36.8 = 91.08 kN > VuD ( = 46.12 f.N)
r~ (b) Check forDevelopment Length (Ld) :. Minimum stirrups are sufficient
Check for Ld is required to be applied at - ~8
Provide mm 2 legged, Fe 250 gr.uie stirrups (A sv =100 mttf)
'_) (i) points of zero B.M. and maximum shear, i.e. at left support A and at .,Oint of . (}.87fisv 0.87 X 250 X 100
contniflexure E ; Spacmg s =
. 0.4b
= 0.4 X 230
= 236 mm.

--the
f_) Check for Ld at point of contrajlexure : say = 230 mm < 300 mm < (0.75 x 400 = 300) :. O.K.
Since minimum number of positive moment bars required to be continued at bottom beyond This will_ be provided upto midpoint D. Incr~ase
in Vuc beyond first TPC ori left
J .·
J
point of contraflexure E has itself been decided from the criteri~n of Ld. in Part (a) above,
check for Ld at E, has already been obtained. It now, remains only to check for Ld at A, _
(t~ PoUlt P)lJecauSeOf .,.,._;.,_umber of bani ;,of liD stirrupS designed
in ·this region are themselves minimum even for lower value of V prior to point P.
l.3M . . .. uc
1
r· Since support offers compressive reaction, by Eq. 6.5.2, -V-· + L0 > Ld ' Region DE : ·
Distance of point of contraflexure E from left support A= 3.118 m,
__) v = v = 48.18 kN.
u.max At this point, VuE = 48.1 S - 4 x 3.118 - 117 "' - 81.29 kN = 81.29 kN in magnitude
~
M1 = 88.36 x 4/6 = 58.9 kN.m
1.3 Ml 1.3 X 58.9 X 1000
(": 1/3 bars are curtailed)
\ HereA = 4 Nos.
V . 31 = V + V
~16 .mm= 54.28 + 36.8 = 91.08 kN > VuD(=81.29kN)
·
. . - - + L = + L = 1589 + L
':) v 0 48.18 0 0 ur.mm uc usv.mm
:. Minimum stirrups are sufficient.
> Ld ( = 736 mm) :. O.K.
/J Theoretically, L is not necessary, However from requirements of end anchorage, the Region EB:
0 \ The bending moment is negative.
No. of bars available at top = 4- ~16 giving Vuc = 54.28 kN
J bars to be continued to support shall extend a distance Ld /3 ( = 720/3 = 240 mm) inside the
inner face. of support. vuB "' 48.1& -4 x 4-117 = 84.82 kN < vur.mu:. ( =91.08 kN)
·J Provide 180° hook giving anchorage value of hook = 16 ~ = 16 x 16 = 256 mm. :. Minimum stirrups are sufficient.
Start of hook from outer face Provide ~ 8 mm stirrups at 230 mm c/c between DB.
/)
'--.-/
c1 = 3~ + (assuming clearance of 30 mm) = 3 x 16 + 30 = say 80 mm.
Available straight length of bar. inside the inner face (d) Check for Shear at Point of Cut- oft
~
J = b' -c I = 230-80 . .= 150 mm 'I Condition - I
LEFT TPC :(Point P in Fig. 6.10.3) x1 = 0.62 m from 1\.
. Total anchorage available = 150 + 256 = 406 mm. > required 240 mm. !

At this point, V., = VuA- w,ft = 48.18- 4 x 0.62 = 45.7 kN

J Available
.
L-from
0
centre of support = 406-230/2 = 291 mm.
_I,
.:J '(c) D~ign for Shear ' LSV = 1.5 X 45.7 = 68.6 kN
· Regzon ·AD :
II
V = 91.08 kN > 1.5 V ( = 68.6 kN) :. O.K.
UT U
' j Left support offers compressive reaction . Therefore, critical section for shear occurS at a First condition ·is sataisfied. There is, therefore, no need to check Condition - 2 or
distance equal to 'd' from the face of support.
VuD = Vwt - w u ( b/2 + d) = 48.18 - 4 (230/2 + 400)/l 000 = 46.12 kN Condition -3.
~
 Chapzer6 Illustrative Examples 269 (
Sect .6.10
RIGIn TPC : (Point- R) x2 = 2.760 m from A
At this section ('
Yu = 48.18-4 x 2.76- 117 = -19.86/cN .= 79.86 leN in magnitude
1.5 J'u =: l.S X 79.86 = 119.79 kN A =(4-$16)+(2-$12)=4x201+2xl13 = 1030m~
st · ('
Here Yw at point of contraflexure E = 91.08 kN < 1.5 Vu ( = 119.79 kN) p = 1030 X 100 I (230 X 400) = 1.12%
. I 0~5
· Condition - 1 is not satisfied. From Table 5.7.1, for M20, tuc = 0.62 _ x 0.12 = 0.644Nlm~
+ ('
0 25
Condition- 3 will be required to be satisfied.
V = "t .bd = 0.644 X 230 X 400/1000 = 59.25 kN.
uc uc
At the section, V = 79.86 kN , V . = 91.08 kN > V ( = 79.86 kN) ('
i.e.~
u w.mm u Vusv.mm. = 0.4 X bd· = 0.4 X 230 X 400/1000 = 36.8 kN
Minimum stirrups 8 mm Fe 250, 2-legged stirrups at 230 mm etc are sufficient
V . = V +V . = 59.25 + 36.8 = 96.05 > Vu0 (= 93.2kN) ('
!But on account of curtailment additional area equal to that of minimum stirrups is required ur.mm uc usv.mm
to be added to satisfy Condition- 3. :. Minimum stirrups are sufficient.
Total stirrups in this region will be doubled and pitch is reduced to half Provide$ 8 mm 2-legged stirrups at 230 mm c/c ('
{i.e. 230/2 = I I5 mm) say I IO mm· (2) Since advantage of Vue has been taken in deciding the stirrups in the overhanging
Provide ~ 8 mm Fe 250, 2-legged stirrups at I I0 c/c. ('
portion, it is necessary to verify that an end anchorage equal to (L/3) is available beyond
This pitch is required for a distance equal to 0. 75 x 400 = 300 mm from APC i.e. critical section towards the end of the bar.
Point- S towards midspan (Point D). or approximately between TPC and APC ('
Total Ld available= 800 mm
II. NEGATIVE MOMENT REGION Distance of critical section from the face of support = 230/2 + 400 = 515 mm
(a) Curtailment Design ('
Available end anchorage beyond critjcal section= 800- 515 = 285 mm
Curtailment in negative moment region is decided more by requirement of Req!lired end anchorage L/3 = 736720/3 = 245 mm < 285 mm :. O.K.
.development length rather than that of bending moment. ('
The details of reinforcement are shown in Fig. 6.10.6
For M20-Fe250, Ld = 46~ = 46x 16= 736mm. , I 2·~12 ~ 400 j-882-J 4~16+2·~12 ('
Sinoe reg;on of nogative moment on both sid,. of'"Pport B is m"ghllllly grea""d.an Ld
no curtailment of bar is proposed T
400
(b) Check for Development Length : ('
(i) At Point of Inflection (E) in Fig. 6.10.5. ~~====~~~=±so ('
According to rule of bar continuation at least l/3rd of the steel a support should continue
fo<a distanoo eq""l In 12+ or d or clear span 16 whkhev., ;, greare,, beyond the point of ('.
inflection. Sffice no curtaHment is pmposed, •II negotive moment steel ot top shall extend ( d ) Reinforcement details
beyond centre line of support for a length equal to : ·
x' = x0 + ( 12 ~ or d or clear span /16, whichever is greater) Fig 6.10.6 ('

== 882
882 +(12
+ 400x 16 = 192,or400,
= 1282 mm or (4000-230)116 = 236mmwhicheveris greater. Comments : This check is necessary because in V there is a contribution of dowel acti n. 1
(ii) At Free .End C : (See Sect. 5.4.1) to a maximum extent of 33% on the basi~c of which Code prescribes a ~inimum end '
enchorage of L/3 inside the face of support, i.e. inside the bottom point of diagonal crack at ('
Sinoenecessary.
not projection n.e1f is grea<e< than th0requhed Ld of 720nun, book "the end is discontinuous end for bottom bars. Similarly, the top - negative moment bar must extend a distance
Ld/3. beyond the upper point of the diagonal crack i.e. beyond the critical section in the overhanging ('
(c) Design for Shear port10n
{i) Region BC: ,........
Ex. 6.10.4 A cantilever beam projecting 2.25 m from the face of support carries a ',
Sinoe
the faceSUpport
of support calculated . reactino,_ critical -"" nccurs at a distance d fiom
offusis compressive uniformly distributed superimposed load of 20 kNIM over its entire length and a concentrated ,........
§hear- to the right of B = 90 + 4 ,x 0.8 = 93.20 leN load of 6 kN acting atthe free end. Design the beam. Use M20 mix and torsteel reinforcement \
with 0.2% proof stress of 415 N/mnl Assume width of beam 230 mm and width of ('
v.fd) = 93.20-4 {23012 + 400)!tooo= 93.20-4 x o.5Is = 9I.I4 kN.
support = 300 mm.
Assume extreme exposure condition. ('

('
 ·110 Lbitit State ofCollapse Bond
,:> S~ct .6.10
Data : A cantilever L .= 2.25 m. h = 230 mm, h = 300 mm Chapte~6 11/ustrative Examples 271
_J
s
Load;,g "' <howu in Fig.6.J0. 7a. f,. • UJ Nlm.?, 1, • 415 Nlm.?. Assuming6mmdiameterstirrupseffectivedepthd1 =405 -15 -6-20/2=say 3l0mm (> 12~) .·
·:J Cleo, oover
Required requiredoffo,
: Design extreme exposure condition
beam. fium Tah!e. 2.2.3 = 75..., •. Average total depth o(beam t>eyond TPC for the purpose of approximate calcuiation
Solution: of"dead weight of beam beyond TPC, and its moments about the section is calculated
:_) (a) Design for Flexure : Average depth of beam = (405 + 250)/2 = 327.5 mm
B:M. at TPC = M1 = 9 x i.4 +30 x 1.42/2 + (1.5 ~ 0.3275 x 0.23 x 25 x 1.42/2)* = 44.77 kN.m
~
·_J
Trial section : Let the depth be 250 mm at fi<e end fuoreas;,g to 500 mm at the
face of support and width of beam = 230 mm
Self weight of beam wd - (0.25 + 0.50)/2 X 0.23 X 25 X 2.25 = IN. 4.~5
Required A t
$
= 0.5
'!.y
fck
[ v. l
I - I -
4.6 M.
"
f ck bJl .
.bd ~'
~

v l .
I

_J .
Dulance ofC.G.
Taking load of
• beam fium the fi<e of "'I'P<>rt •
tne
factor = 1.5, 0:
0.5 ++0.25 X2- x "3':
2.25 = 1.0 m 0.5 X 20 [ 4.6 X 44.77 X J0 6
5 025 415 1- 1- 20x230x3102 x230x310=462mm2
Maximum shear at the face of support
J At least 2 Nos. # 20 will be required to be C()!J.tinued curtailing I bar at this section
Vu.max = 1.5 X (20 X 2.25 + 6 + 4.85) = 83.78 /eN.
Maximum ultimate moment at support Area provided = 2 x 314 = 628 m,l
_J :·~.: Distance of the actual point of cut - off (Point D in Fig. 6.1 0. 7c) from theface of
2

F<>< a balanoo~ section of M20 - Fe 415, fium Tah!e 4.5./,

M._ =(I.S x 20) x 2.25 /2 +(I.Sx 6) x 225 + I.Sx 4.85 x I • 103.46 I<N.m support,= x 1 +d1 =850+310= 1160mm. ..,r
.:J Distance betWeen TPC andAPC =CD = 310 mm or 1090 mm from.fh.e free end
\ 103.46
k =0.48, Ru.maxxcf2
10 6 = 2.76X230
X u.max
=1.76Nim.?, MIJJ'.max • Ru.max· x M- =Mu.max (c) Check for Development Length of Uncurtailed Bars :
._)
Because of curtailment of bars, the problem of checking the development length of
. ~3.46x
2 x JoT uncurtailed bars arises in this case. Now, the uncurtailed bars must extend a distance equal
J Required d111in = -
76 230 = 404mm,
toLd beyond TPC. ,
Provide total depth or support D = 500 mm
:J Required Ld = 940 mm, Distance of TPC from the face of support= 850 mm.
Effective cove.- • 75 mm + 6 mm (sfurup diam-) + 2012 • 96 mm
·. ·. effective depth = d = 500 - 96 = 404 mm
I Available length beyond TPC
.
= 2250- 850 = 1400 mm > La(= 940 mm) :. O.K.
I
:J
Since Pn>Vided depth ;, equal to required depth the section is a balanoo~ Section. (d) Design for Shear : Vu.mar = 83.78 kN. .
Since support in this problem offers compressive reaction, the critical section for shear
~
Ast= 0.5 x
415
~[1- y;_ .!6 x 103.46 x
20 X 230 X 404 2
l~)x
230 x 404 = 884 mn?
occurs at a distance d from the face of support. For a beam ofvarying depth in which
bending moment increases in the same direction as the depth increases ( as in the case of
.) Provide 3 - # 20 mm giving A = 3 x 314 = 942 mm cantilever under consideration), the design shear is given by :
{h) Curtailment Design : 81 2 . M
•.) Eq; 5.9./ as: V11D = V11 - d .tan 13
Development length required fo, M20 Fe 415 to develop full strength It may be observe from Fig. 6.10. 7 (a) that the diagonal crack causing shear failure
+
Ld = 47 from Tahle 6.2.2. FO< 4> = 20 mm, Ld • 47 x 20 • 940 mm . occurs along AEwith distance AE (= 404 mm) equal to effective depth at A.
.) AotoaJ poiitt of cutoff (APC) cannot be within a distance of Ld (940 mm) fium the filce The design shear is given by :

I
M
of SUpport, and the d;,""'" x1 of the nearest theoretical poitrt of cutoff (17'C) fium the filce VliD = V11 - / • tan 13 ...... (Eq. 5.9.1)
--1fsupPort cannot be Je.s than (941l-e1T=ive depth at lPC). smce effective depth at 11'!;
.f"U' depends upon the distance xl' which;, not kn<>wn,itwillbecakulatedby guo, and by
'-approach. In this equation, VII is the load causing shear along crack EA which consists of point
lpad atB, and unifonn load over only EB (and notAB) and the weight of portion EBB'A'

~ Let x
1
=850 mm fium the face of SUpport {i~ 2250-850 =1400 mm fium the fi<e end) of the beam. Moment Mll is the moment of above forces about point A' and d is obviously
the effective depth at A because the tenn tanJ3.
.) At TPC, total depth D1 = 250 + -500-250
- x 1400 = 405 mm.
. 2250 *Exact calculations for moment due to 'self weight, of tapering beam beyond this ~ection, are not
:_) warranted because its contribution to total moment is very small.
 Chapt~r· '6~ Stct~6.10 11/ustrativeExamples 273 ~
Mu ld is the vertical component of total compression C acting· at A'. ThOugh· the
11 (c) Checkfor Shear .at Point of Cut- off: In the case of check for shear atthe point ('
external load shall be considered over region EB; for simplicity, weight of beam .A!JB'A'
shall be considered instead of that of part A'EBB' ··ofcut-off in the negative moment region, the shear causing diagonal failure is that at actual
point of cut:- off (APC) (i.e. at· point D only in Fig. 6.1 0. 7c; which means· the uniform load C
over region BDonly (and not BC) together with point load at Band weight of beam portion
_ A _ 1846 ~91114
'• - - ..... ·-aokN!m~ DBB'C' ). The problem of check for shear at point of cut- off in negative moment region C
f '
-.-=~::::::!!:9:~f isthus,exactlyoppositetothatfor positive moment region shown in Fig. 6.10.7c, where shear
251J is. taken at TPC. C
v I~ ~f
Again proceeding on the same -lines of calculations done for shear design at support
CB = L - x l == 2250 - 850 == 1400 mm
500-250
~~
'

Fig. 6.10. 7 (a) Total depth· at C = 250 + 1< 1400 == 405 mm ('
2250
AE = 4{)4 inm = 0.404 m, EB == 2.25 - 0.404 == 1.846 m. Effective depth at C = 405 - 75 - 10 - 20/2 = 310 mm
Dividing portionABB'A' into two triangles ABB'and AB'A', theweightof beam is given by Distanc~ CD == 310mm*, and DB== 1400.::-310 == 1090nim ('
*Wud == (25 X 0.23 X 2.25 X 0.25/2 + 25 X 0.23 X 2.25 X 0.50/2) X 1.5 As seen above, shear causing diagonal failure
2.42 + 4.85 == 7.27 kN VvD = UDL overlength DB+ point load at B + weight of beam DBB' C'. ('
Moment ofthis weight about AA'
Again for simplicity, taking weight. of beam of entire portion CBB' C' instead of that
*Mu = 2.4.2 X (2.25 X 2/3) + 4.85 X (2.25 X l/3) = 7.27 kN.m of DBB'C' on safer side, and dividing the same triangular portions CBB' and CB'C'. ('
Vu = 9 + 30 X 1.846 + 7.27= 71.65 kN 9kN
r\.
x 2.25 + 30 x 1.846 x ( 0.404 + 1.846/2 ) + 7.27 = 101 kN.m
Mu == 9500-250
D~B~
~anf3=
~B'j_
,"
=O.II1 ('
2250
101
lT•'f
405 - ·-
VuD = 71.65 - "0:404 X 0.111 = 43.9 kN c
At support, A51 == 3- # 20 mm = 942 m,?- , p = 942 x 100/230 x 404 = 1.014% ('
1 C TPC
From Table 5.7.1 for M20, tuc = 0.62 + 025
0.014 x .2
0.05 = 0.6228 Nlmnr 0 APC
Fig. 6.10.7b
('
Vuc = t uc .bd == 0.6228 X 230 X 404/1000 = 57.87 kN
Weight of beam == [(25 x .23 x 1.4 x 0.250/2) + ( 25 x 0.23 x 1.4 x 0.405/2)] x 1.5
Vusv.mm. == 0.4bd = 0.4 X 230 X 404/1000 = 37.17 kN ('
== 1.5 + 2.45 == 3.95 kN
vur.mm. vuc + vusv.mm.
. == 57.87 +37.17= 95.04kN > vuD (=43.9 liN) Moment of this weight about CC'
= .

M;nUnum stinul" '" odoqna1e Pmv;de 4> 6 mm 2 loggod, Fe 250 gi;!de """""' (A,. 56 non(-) ~ 1.5 X 1.4 X 2/3 + 2.45 X 1.4/3 = 2.54 kNm c
0.87 J;,Asv _ 0.87 X 250 X 56 vu == 30 X 1.09 + 9 + 3.Q~ = 15.'i5 kN ('
s = 0.4b - 0.4 X 23 0 = 132 mm say 130 mm Mu == 30 x 1.09 x (0.310 + 1.09/2)
.
+ 9 x 1.4 + 2.54 == 43.10 kNm
< 300 mm < 0. 75 x 404 mm .·. 0 ..!<:. Eff. depth at CC' == 31 0 mm ('
Comments : In the above shear design, had V~r.min
been calculated prior to calculation ojv:.u it VuD == Vu- ~u
tan J3 == 45.65 -
4
~_·;~
x 0.111 == 30.2 kN
c
would have saved all the calculation ofVuD (which are quite labourious) because Vw.,.;,; in this case is
even greater than v•. max crt support and VuD at critical section is obviously less tha11 Vu """'. 1M above
1.5 vuD == 1.5 x 30.2 = 45.3 kN
('
l~e
calculations have been 1'iven only to illustrate the procedure. In practice, such short - cuts and
*Note : Code does not state iii specifi~ terms as to what value of effec;ive depth should be taken
observations
labour from previc : experience have to be noted and used in
involved later designs to avoi" !at of
for a tapering beam while calculating the percentage oftension steel. However, it can be understoodfrom ('
the figure of shear failure that the effective depth shall be taken equal to vertical component of the
inclined crack length upto reinforcement i.e. effective depth at CC' in this case (= 372 mm). ('

('
 274 Limit State ofCollapse Bond
~ Chapter6
Shear Resistance between APC and TPC :
._]
As1 = 2Nos.#20mm =2xJJ4 =628m~
_] P, = 628 X 100/230 X 3l0 = 0.88% CHAPTER 7

_]
From Table 5.7.1 for M20, tuc =0.56 + ~-~~ x 0.06 = 0.5912Nimm2
LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE- TORSION
Vuc = 0.5912x2JOxJJO/l000= 42.15kN
_] 7.1 INTRODUCTION

:J
Vusv.mm. = 0.4x2JOxJJO/IOOO= 28.52kN
vur.mm. = V
uc
+v .
usv.mm
I
'~,
Torsion forms one ofthe four major structural actions besides axialforce,-shear and bending.
Members in a~structure are rarely subjected to pure torsion. Normally, torsion is acCompanied by

__) = 42.15 + 28.52 = 70.67 kN > 1.5 VuD ( = 45.3 kN) :. O.K I
~:..
shear arid flexure, and it has only a secondary effect. Of course, in certain cases; the torsion does
forin aprincipal force on a structUral member as in case of a beam carryiilg a projecting cantilever
([)Anchorage of Bars inside the Support: i porch. Torsion may occur either d~e to eccentric loading notlying in the bendtng plane, or due to
__) Required Ld = 940 mm. i' transfer ofrotation between interconnected members. Based on its type ofaction, torsion is classified
Bend bars at 90° giving anchorage = 8~ = 8 x 20 = I60 mm
.J Distsance of start of bend from the outer face for Fe 415 J
t.t
J£
into two categories.
(1) Compatibility torsion and · (2) Equilibrium torsion.
c1 = 5 ~ + 40 mm (end cover) !<;~
~ Each of them will be discussed briefly.
~ For~ = 20 mm, c1 = 5 x 20 + 40 = 140 mm. ·~
;~

Widthofsupport b' = 300mm. 7.1.1 Equilibrium Torsion ·

J Straight length of bar available from the inner face of support =300- 140 = 160 fr,m '1 It is the. torsion ·induced as a result of maintaining equilibrium of a structure. This type
Required straight length beyond bend = 940-160-160 = 620 mm occurs mainly in statically determinate structures, and it is determined only by equations ofequilibrium-
imd is independent oftorsional or flej(Ural. stiffness of members. A cantilever or a beam carrying·an
~ Since this extension goes in the compression region, additional straight length of 4'
ecc¢ntric out of plane transverse load, a beam curved in plan under vertical load, and a helical stair
beyond bend as a requirement of a standard bend is not necessary.
are soine of the examples of structures subjected to this type of torsion. See Fig. 7.1; 1.
'J The details of reinforcement including the curtailment are shown in Fig. 6.1 0. 7c:·-·.
· .This type of torsion has to be transferred to supports by torsional resistance of members and
cannot be ignored. Neglect of the same would result in violation ofequilibrium leading to disastrous
_] collapse. ·

'J I ru
8

Ta
250"
1
-1 230

..
I-

.
2·#20
~2
84

D-
I 12 ., 4>60130
I - . 2·112
" I St!ction al 8
__) 850 .. ,. 310:1 -1 230 1-
'1+--~:-
:~-~-------- 2250
1160 4 I 1090 .. , T 3 120
.)
ECriticalsectionforshear
CTPC
1
500 +60130
2·#12
·._) DAPC
Section a1 A

:) Fig. 6.10. 7c

~ The practical problems on design of beams have been given in Chapter·lO.

~ Fig. 7.1.1 Examples of
\ Beam curved In plan
J (d) Structures under
Equilibrium Torsion
·.J
 -·--r·-· ,
~uiiibri!JDI
~~I?'· ,. .&

Some Cases of torsion normally occurring in practice are discussed as under: \

(a) Cantilever slab inducing torsion in supporting beam : . 1_ _.. Consider a spandrel beam ACB connected rigidly to a cross beam CD at C shown iD
The porch slab of length L1 is cantilevered ~ut
from the beam B of width hw as shown in fjg. 7.1.2a. In this case, vertical load on beam CD causes bending in CD and twisting in ..4B ('
Fig_. 7.Ua. lfthe intensityofUDL on slab
width hw is given by :
is~~ 1
then thetwistinginomentactingon the beam of
because of rotation at point C about an axis of AB. Thus, load transfer in this case is not only by
-b~~dirtg-resistance of cross-beam but also by torsional resistance of spandrel beam. The value-of ('
~rsionalmoment in beam AB would depend upon magnitude of the torsional stiffitess of AB in
Torsional moment on beam/m =(w xL ) x (L/2 + h)2) reiation to bending stiffness of cross beam CD. Besides, it cannot. be determined by equilibrium ('
1 1
(b) Cantilever bea,m inducing torsion in supporting beam: AAuations alone. It requires use of compatibility condition at the joint: (e.g. bending rotation of cross
Fig. 7.J.Jb shows that the balcony is simply supported on beam B and B • The beam B is ~am CD at the joint C is equal to twisting rotation of beam AB i.e. (ec.cv = ec.AB). If sp~ndrel c
1 2
~
""'tilevered out fmm beam B1 • The beam 8 1 ofw;dth bw '"baU.od agaWst rotationsat columns 2
2 3 l>eam cannot provide torsional restraint due to lack of torsional stiffitess it will rotate freely at C
and it will become more or less a beam hinged at A and B. Bending moment in CD in this case will c
C - C • If the length of the beam B2 is 'a\ the UDL transferred from slab,to beam be lar0 e. On the other hand, if spandrel beam is rotationally stiff, cross beam CD will act more or
2 2
B = w = q x L/2 kN!m. Where; q is the intensity ofloading on the slab and L its effective span. less like a beam restrained against rotation at C. ('
1
These loads are further transferred by beam B2 to B and consists of a concentrated load equal Consideration of this type of torsion can be optional is design, because neglect of torsional
2 1
(w x a) and torsional moment equal to (w x a) x (a/2 +h) 2).
2
stiffitess of spandrel beam, would only under estimate the ~ctual strength of the structure. At the
saPle time, it will lead to simplicity of analysis. In such a case, spandrel beam will not be designed
c
It may pe noted that ifthebeam B2 and B3 are not provided and the slab s is designed as _ to provide torsional resistance, but cracks, will invariably occur at the joint. However, the failure
('
cantilever spanning along its short length, the beam B will not be subjected to 1torsion and the will not occur ~ecause equilibrium will be maintained despite release of restraint. Thus,· the
design will prove to be economical. 1
CO!Ilpatibility torsion maybe ignored in design calculations at the discretion of the uesigner. But
('
7~1.2 Compatibility Torsion _
a
care has to__~~ taken in such- case to -control this undesirable cracking from the requirements of
serviceability-andJo ensure ductility (and hence adequate rotation capacity) in the memberily
('
It is the torsion induced in a member due to compatibility of rotations at the joint of prrviding minimum ti"'ansverse reinforcement.
interconnected members.
Normally, a continuous slab is designed assuming its ends over the beams (AB, CD in
Fig. 7.1.2b) to be simply supported. Tl!)Js, torsion gets eliminated due to release of end restraints
('
A spandrel beam rigidly connected to a cross-beam; intereonnected bridge girders, horizontal
grids, Seeboams
torsion.,;ng 7.1.2.•re "'me
Fig. ole. · of the mu,..tio.,
· of"""'"""' clctnen" sul!jccted to this iypo of and the beam acts as simply supported. Hmvever, the beam can be designed as L-beam for &xure r-
,
and shear only because of monolithic construction but sufficient slab main steel due to alkmate
A bent up bars or otherwise should be available perpendicular to the section of the beam.
c ('
Fig. 7.1.2c shows a circular ring beam supported on columns. In this case, the center of
gravity ofload line lies outside the line joining the supports and therefore induces torsional mom~J.lt
...... ...... ......
in the beam in addition to bending moment and shear. (See Ex. 7.10.5) . r
B ......
7.1.3 Torsional Cracking ('
A B i0 It is a well-known fact that torsion produces shear stress, which in turn produces diAgonal
(b) tension. Concrete being extremely w~ak in tension, a plain concrete beam without any reinfo~~ent ('
when subjected to torsion fails suddenly along a diagonal crack running spira//y()n the s~e.ce of
the member. This type of failure can be easily observed by twisting a piece of chalk. Fig. 7.1.3 ('
shows a spiral cracking of a plain concrete beam subjected to pure torsion.

0
0· ~
T ~
2r--
r
("'"'
(c) \.
·Fig. 7.1. 2 Examples of Structures under Compatibility Torsion
./
("
Fig. 7.1.3 Spiral Cracking

('

('
 Sect. 7.2 Plain Concrete.Beamunder Pure Torsion 279
278 Limit State of Collapse - Torsion Chapte~J7
(>'
. Ftii' aconcrete beam, failure occurs when the principal tension exceeds the tensile strength of
J Nonnally; concrete beam is reinforced longitudinally;as well as transversely. The failure ofare~orced COI)Cide. A member under pure torsion, and hence under pure shear on the periphery, the principal
concrete beam under torsion is bound to be different than that of a plain concrete beam. 1iie ·ten$ile stress of 0' tis equal to shear stress 'tmax itself and it occurs on a plane inclined at 45° to the
_) designer has to attempt to design a member in such a way that the torsional failure does not ~ur. norinal plane. The tension crack, therefore, develops spirally making an angle 45° with the normal
> >> For deciding the approach to torsion design, it is ftrst necessary to studythe behaviOur ofR.O. plane and the member fails by rupture along this surface. The torsional strength prior to cracking is
~ beam under torsion right up to failure. The process of study of torsion in R.C. members includes
initially the study of strength and behaviour of a plain concrete beam in the elastic state (i:e. in the given by: T = (nd/16)/cr ...... (7.2.3)
~ pre-cracking stage) and then at the ultimate state followed by the study of reinforced concrete
m~mber under torsion up to collapse; and finally the behaviour of the member under Combined where, 1tlY /16 is called the torsional section modulus, and
~
I effect of torsion, >shear and bending. Large amount of research in the past decade •has mad~ .fa ::: modulus of rupture or cracking strength concrete.
.
available plenty of information in this regard and the same has now been included in the various The torsional stiffness is defined as torque per unit twist and is given by :
...... (7~2.4)
_) design codes as well.
T GJ
:) 7.2 PLAIN CONCRETE BEAM J]NDER PURE TORSION
e-=T
The study of behavior of a plain concrete beam under torsion is necessary prior to study of (b) Non-circular Sections
Normally, reinforced concrete members are rectangular in cross section. The assumption, of
j that of a R.C. beam, because for small values of torsion T when the members is in elastic range, normal section plane before twisting remaining plane after twisting considered for circular section
reinforcement does not play any part in resisting torsion in the precracking stage. It comes into does not apply to such members. The section of such a member undergoes warping
J action essentially after the development of crack in concrete. Besides, the contribution of concrete (Fig. 7.2.2 (b)) with the result that Eq. 7.2.1 derived above for circular section does not apply in
to torsional resistance in the precracking state is also not negligible. At the ultimate state also this case. The distribution of shear stress across a beam of rectangular section~
under pure torsion
concrete does offer some plastic resistance, and therefore, its study in the plastic range is. also
>:; . useful.
is given by St.Venant's classic\!.\ torsion theory (70/6). Accordingto this theory, maximum shear
stress occurs at the middle of longer sides (i.e. wider faces of beam) and zero at the comers as
j shown in Fig. 7.2.2(c). The shear stress at middle of shorter side is also maximum on that face but
7.2.1 Elastic Analysis (Pre-Cracking State)
it is less than stress at middle of longer sides. L_
·~
The mechanics of elastic bodies shows that the behavi·our of a member under the action of
torsion is different for circular and non-circular sections. Since the analysis of circular sections is
r·.'-.. .1~
':+
b .\

,,

_)

)
.
based on well known hypothesis that plane s~tion before twisting remains plane after twisting, it
. gives better understanding of the behaviour of member In torsion, hence the same will be considered
flfSt followed by behaviour of non-circular sections .
(a) Circular Sections
The relation between twisting moment T, the shear stress t and the twisting deformation ein-
Jttt1ttl (b)
r-
l ... o:= '~
L---1---~
(c)
0

_) terms of geometric propertY, and the physical or elastic property is given by the well-known formula:
(a)
Fig. 7.2.2
.L ""..:!__"" ae ...... (7.2.1) The ptll,gnitu.de of the absolute maximum shear stress is given by,
~ J r L ...... (7.2.5)

) where, T = Torsional moment, ·c

"IIIIU
= TIZT ...... (7.2.6)
2
'--"
J = Polar moment of inertia= 7t D4 I 32 for circular sections,
. Zr ... -= o.b D
D = Diameter of the circular section, ~ .D = longer side of rectangular section,
.) :b. ,.,. shorter side of rectangular section,
"t "" Shear stress at a distance r from the axis of the member, .« ···:;: numerical factor depending upon the ratio Dlb and is given in Table 7.2. 1;
'__) G "" Modulus of rigidity ~£I [2 ( 1 + v)),
v = Poisson's ratio(= 0.15 See, Sect.2.2.5.2),
. zt· -== is knoWn as Blastic torsional section modulus.
.AJU\mJtivoly,-bvalue of a can also be obtained approximately from the relation:
_) E = Modulus of elasticity , e = Angle of twist in a length L.
The shear stress 't is maximum formaxim(lm valuer, i.e. at periphery, and is given by: ~'.
"\. ·.· J + l2b I D ...... (?.l.1)
J t = T X D/2 = jg_ ...... (7.2.2) For ·lm r.., t, a== 1/5, and For biD =0, CL == 1/3
)
max 7tdl32 7tfi3
._/
 Plain Concrete Beam under Pure Torsion -281
Sect, 7.2- ('
-•••_••• uouo<O VJ vVUUpSe -' 1 Or$l0n Ci!(Jpt~rJ~
7.2.2 Plastic Analysis - Ultimate Strength
Cowan (65/4) gives the following expression for maximum shear stress in T and L sections. A member of a ductile material like steel fully yields across the section at ultimate state of c
Txb w ~torsion. The ultimate or plastic torque in such cases is obtained usingNadia's (SOil) sand heap
tmax
b3 D (bf- b ) D
3 ...... (72.8) analogy. Experimental evidence has shown that an ultimate torque in a reinforced concrete beam c
_w_+ w 1 can also be obtained reasonably by plastic torsion capacity (78/6).-
3 3 According to Nadia's sand-heap analogy the slope of a sand heap at the edge of a box of such ("
where, bw = width of web, D = Depth of beal11, section gives the torsional shear stress, and the torsional moment at yield state is equal to twice the
bf = width of flange, D = Depth of flange, volume enclosed by the sand-heap. ·
(
1 Consider a rectangular section b x D (with b <D) in plastic condition under torsion as shown
Rigorously, for reinforced concrete beam ofT and L sections, contribution of overhanging (
flanges towards torsional strength is difficult to assess. A yield line or a crack can develop along ;n Fig. 7.2.3 ~l
the edge of beam due to hogging moment in the slab destroying the monolithic action between the Ultimate shear li ('
flange and web. Therefore, conservatively, I.S. Code recommends to treat the flange beam of stress tur /{ - 1

r
rectangular section having b equal bw· Thus, neglecting the contribution of outstanding flanges. ,-
\
The torsional stiffness of rectangular section is given by:
T GJ Db 3G (
k =-e=y=P -L- ...... (7.2.9)
1
b
where, J = pb 3D
ll/ ; ;e •fh
,..--
\
Values of p also depend upon the ratio Dlb, and are given in Table 7.2. 1.
A ~ 0 (
Table 7.2.1. Values of Numerical Factors a and~ for Rectangular Sections l- H -1 j- bl2 -+tD -b)-;-b/2 -1
~ ~
Dlb a p Dlb a p
1
D

Fig. 7.2.3 Torsion in Non-Circular Sections. Plastic Analysis: Sand-Heap Analogy

c
1.0
1.2
0.208
0.219
0.141
0.166
2.5
3.0
0.256
0.267
0.249
0.263
I
'
'l-, . ofsand heap= H = "CuT
Slope ...... (I)
(
4.0 -
'
l 612
1.5 0.231 0.196 0.282 0:281 \
1.75 0.239 0.214 5.0 0.291 0.291 ! Torsional moment is given by, (
2.0 0.246 0.229 10.0 0.312 ().312 T" = 2 x Volume under the sand heap.
<X) 0.333 0.333 = 2 x Volume of triangular prism BCFG (
·+ Volume of a square pyramid formed by CDEF and ABGJ taken together
For beams of rectangular sections, the torsional stiffness can obtain approximately using the
following expressions (82/5): 2r
= 2 Lb(D-b)H b H \ = bH(D-b/3)
+-3-j
2
...... (ll)
c
b3D (
For Dlb $ 1.6, k1 = _55 ( b2 +D2) From Eq. I, H = (b/2) x "Cur
3
:. Tu = _!_( 2D't =a. u b2D't uT = ZuT:t uT r
3 J_
2 1- _L)b3D uT \

For Dlb -> 1.6 k1 = -b3-(

D b
1 -0.63 I)) \ ...... (7.2.11)
', or 't u T = Tu IZuT (
...... (7.2.12)
ZuT = a. u b2 D
~
In the case of beams of sections composed of thin rectangular elements (such as T, Lor I .~. ...... (7.2.13) \..
a. = -*"<: l -_!_)
sections), the value of torsional constant k; can be obtained approximately by expression: u 2 3D
k1 = 'Lb 3 D 13 ...... (7.2.10)
where 't ur = Ultimate shear stress due to Torsion, ("
ZuT = Torsional modulus at ultimate state, ,---.
where, D and b are greater and smaller sides of each component of a rectangle. l,
a. = ultimate modulus factor
II.
(
I
k)
282 /.imiJ Stale af Co!laf,se - Tors«m C/ropttr' 7
1._/ Sect. 73 Torsional Reinforcement 283
i For h=D, a = 113 andforhiD=O,a = l/2
u .. . . u .
Eq. 7.211 k"IU<id by Bs : 8110 (85/4) fuc-jluting~ shear- It limit- of
_..) The approximate sectional modulus of the failure plane about the axis of bending a- a is
collapseforrectangular section. · · · ~~ T o
.J
\
Z = (D {2) b216 and Bending tensile stress ~~ = Zh = T cos 4; =_I._
7.2.3 Post-Cracking Analysis (D..ff)h 16 h2D!3
T
~
'~ . +
Smce Jbt='tmax , ;. 'tmax = b2D/3 ...... (7.2.14)
C.,...., b neither an el"'ic material oor aductile material. Therefore, lloougb pl8stic
)
givesareasonably""""""blevaluefo,theplasticlnnion._ity, theaa<:kinglo!queiaa- On comparing Eq. 7.2.14 with Eq. 7.2.5, it shows that the approximate torsional section
---- beam has, however, some value in between those predicted by elastic and plastic theories. modulus of a plane concrete member at cracking is equal to b2D/3
In the ca5e of plain concrete member ofrectangular section subjected to pure torsion, maximum It will now be interesting to compare the values of torsional moduli factor obtained earlier.
_)
s1oea,. stresses t _acting a1 lloe middle of Wide< faces causes diagonal COtnplossive and 1eosiJe (See Eq. 7.2. 7, Eq. 7.2. 13 and Eq. 7.2.14)
_.)
\ stresses ofequal value t _on planes inclined at 45' to the direotions ofsloea,..l/owe...,.,.since Elastic Plastic Plain concrete Experimental
nature oftorsionid shear stresses on the two faces is opposite, the diagonal tension on one face Theory theory cracking
J
\
occurs at + 45° while that on the other face occurs at- 45° to the axis of the member, and thus,
the diagonal tensile stresses on two faces are at right angles. Therefore, in Fig. 7.2.4(a), if there
ForbiD= I
biD 0
115
I/3
l/3
l/2 } T
I I
3.2

--/
') happens to be tensile stress on line AB on~arer face of the viewer, on the far face there occurs Thus, the value of a = l/3, taken for plain concrete, is maximum for elastic theory and
the comfl'<SSive s1ress on line CD. When diagonal tonsile stress exceeds tensile """'&th ofcone...., minimum for plastic theory and is nearer to experimental value. .
,) a crack fonns at some weaker location and it develops further diagonally across the section as McHenry and Karni(58/2) have shown that tensile strength (i.e. the modulus of rupture) of
shown in Fig.7.2.4. On the 'two narrower(top and bdttom) faces the diagonal stresses being Jess, concrete is reduced by about 15% in case of state of biaxial tension-compression.
'., the cracks are not well defined at 45°, but the fracture on these faces connects the diagonal cracks Taking 't max = 0.85fcr , the cracking torque is given by, Tcr = 0.85fcr h2D/3 ...... (7.2.15)
J on two opposite wider faces. This completes the fonnation of entire fracture surface across .the
beam and along the member. The fracture surface so fonned is also not a plane one but a warPe<J Regan (73/3) states that the design value for f cr (i.e.fcr I ym ) should be taken equal to
-'I
'--" surface. Test observations by Hsu (68/11) show that on such fractured plane, failure predomin~tly 0.2 fJ;; N/mm 2 where, ~k is the characteristic compressive strength of concrete in Nlmnr
occurs by bending rather by twisting. For the purpose of analysis, the fracture surface is idealiZed
_j
into a diagonal plane A' B 'C 'D' inclined at 45° to the axis of the member neglecting the effect of 7.3 TORSIONAL REINFORCEMENT
warping (see Fig 7.2.4h)
\ It has been observed in Sect. 7.; ~iw a plain concrete member when subjected to a cracking
0
I
(\ torque, fails along a spiral inclined at 45° to the axis of the member. It is obvious that reinforcement
in the fonn of a 45° rectangular spiral will be most effective in resisting torque in case of'a member
J of rectangular section. However, providing such a rectangular spiral is not easy and besides, required
'\ pitch of spiral may vary with different loading conditions. Moreover, both types, namely, left hand
....) 0 and right hand spirals, will be required to be provided for beams, which are likely to be subjected to
the reversal of torsional moments. Provision of only transverse 3tirrups without longitudinal bars
_J does not serve any ?Urpose in resisting torsion, while provision of only longitudinal bats without
i stirrups increases torsional strength to the extent of 15% only as observed from the tests. The most
A'
_) (b) appropriate system of torsion reinforcement shall consist of longitudinal bars together \\ith closed
transverse stirrups (i.e. hoops)
.) The longitudinal bars resist the longitudinal component of the diagonai tension ;vhile hoops
Fig. 7.2.4 resist the transverse component. It may be noted that the diagonal tensile stresses due to torsion
, The applied torque Tis resolved into two components-a bending component t =T cos4S occur on all the fout faces of a rectangular section. Consequently, U-stirrups (i.e. open stirrups)
J causing bending about centtal inelined axis a-~
and a twisting component I; •
0
T sin6 45' causing II and bent-up bars are totally unsuitable for resisting torsion. Only closed hoops properly anchored at
.J twj,ting in lloe fuilure pi',"": Si~
diagonal tensile crack OC<ur.l ~ntia!Jy
on. -uni of,..s~e ! the ends must be used. Hoops inclined in the direction on the diagonal tension on one face would
run in a wrong direction ofthe opposite face. Therefore, the hoops have to be vertical or transverse.
· stress actmg nonnal to A B whtch ts due to component T , the fadure surface JS analysed for th1s Also since the maximum shear stress due to torsion occurs on the periphery, torsional reinforcement
'
.J tensile stress . 6
shall be provided as nearer to the exposed surface of the beam as possible. The longitudinal
J
 (

cnapter 7 :;ect. 1.:> U/timare Strength of a R.C. Member under Pure Torsion 285 \

reinfore4:mentsbaU be provided on all four faces, p~ferab!y at mid width or evenly spaced along ('
· ~orsionaltesiStaDceofconcrete Tc is given by Eq. 7.2.15.
the periphery and at each comer of the hoop to provide proper anchorage to the hoop. See
Fig.1.5.2.
:. TotalJorsional resistan~ ofR. C. member is given by, T == Tc + Ts ...... (7 .4.3)
1.4 BEHAVIOUR OF A R.C. BEAM UNDER PURE TORSION These eip~ions formed the .basis of working stress design in the earlier codes. c
The behaviour of a concrete beam reinforced, with both longitudinal aPd transverse Turner and Davis (34/i) had shown that the torsional capacity of a R.C. section, having equal
reinforcement, under pure torsion is shown by a typical torque twist curve shown in Fig. 7.4.1. percentages oflongitudinal and vertical steel could be taken as:
(
c T = T (l+0.25p) ('
c .

~ D
where, Tc == to.-sional strength (cracking torque) of a plain concrete section,
p == Total percentage of longitudinal steel ( f 1.5%) c
For percentage oflongitudina1 steel greater than 1.5% Marshall suggests the following empirical
""
l!
expression (74/5) based on test results.· c
t2 T == Tc (1.33 + O.lp)
(
'
7.5 ULTIMATE STRENGTH OF A R. C. MEMBER UNDER PURE TORSION
o~------------------
rw;,re- r
With the development of ultimate strength concept, it is logical to study the behaviour ofR.C. '
Fig. 7.4.1 Behaviour ofR.C. member under Pure Torsion members at ultimate state. .
(
A large number of theories have been developed in the last two decades (68/6, 74/6) based
The curve shows two distinct phases of beam response. The first precracking phase is sho\"n
on different conceptual models and failure mechanisms. Of these, three alternative approaches,
by line OA upto development of the first crack (Point A) and the second phase of post-crack ...g /
namely, the equilibrium theory, the skew-bending theory, and the truss theory have received \.
behaviour is shown by ABC upto a stage wh<:re maximum torsional resistance is developed
greatest attention. The equilibrium approach introduced by Lessing (59/4) forms the basis of Russian
(Point C) followed by a drooping curve CD upto failure. At the onset of diagonal crack shown by ~~·
Code: The space-truss analogy has received acceptance in Western Europe. The ACI Code \
point A, sudden increase in twist occurs at constant torque (shown by lineAE) and there is sudden
procedure is based on skew-bending theory (68/6). The provisions ofiS: 1343-1980 are based on
change in the equilibrium of forces causing redistribution of forces between concrete to steel. A
part of twisting moment is now transferred from concrete to steel and the remaining torque skew-bending theory while IS: 456-1978 has adopted space truss analogy as well a skew-bending c
theory (82/4, 82/5). These theories used by IS: 456 have been discussed in the following sections.
(less than the torsional capacity of plain concrete section) is resisted by concrete. Atl:er tilis
redistribution of forces, beam continues to resist additional torsion, but at a slower rate, till the 7.5.1 Skew-Bending Theory
c
ultimate strength of the member is reached.
The diagona:J cracking occurs even at working loads. The post cracking behaviour is, therefore,
·Hsu first developed the skew-bending theory (68/7) on the basis of test results. This theory is
based on the assumption that a R.C. member subjected to torsion fails by bending on a
c
applicable at working loads also.
For the region just after transfer of force from concrete to steel on cracking, but prior to
skew-surface which is not plane but a warped one, as discussed i,n Sect. 7.2.3 for plain concrete
beam. The failure is by development of such several spiral cracks at close spacing (of which only
c
failure ofmember, i.e. in the region near B prior to C in Fig. 7.4-1, a space-truss theory developed
one is shown in Fig. 7.5.2). On cracking, the torsional resistance of concrete drops to practically l
by Morsch and rationalised by Cowan (50/2) gives the following expression for torsional resistance half that of the plain concrete member, transferring the remaining torque to steel. Any additional
offered by vertical stirrups at working loads.
T5 == 0.8 O'sv. X 1 y 1 (Asv! s) ...... (7.4.1)
torque is now carried by steel only and the final faiiure is by yieiding of reinforcement and crushing
of concrete alorig a line AD as shown in Fig. 7.5.1.
c
. where, crsv == design stress in stirrup, The ultimate torsional strength ofreinforced concrete membc:-ll> obtained bv idealizing wa.rped ~-
'.

x 1 ==smaller centre to centre distance between (vertical) legs of stirrups, surface to a skew (inclined) plane (Fig. 7.5.1.b) and considering equilibrium of forces~ The faiiur~;;
. y 1 == larger ce10tre to CeHirt: ciisrance between (horizontal) legs for stirrups,
is considered. basi<;ally due to beJlding about an inclined axis in the skew plane. Since failure plane
is inclined at 45° to the axis of member, the longitudinal component of crack length is also equal to
c
.4~ == area of both the legs of stirrups,
·s == spacing of stirrups. depth Dand longitudinalleng'Jt between extreme stirrups within this-length is P.qual toy1 (the height "\.
of vertical leg of stin-up i.e. nearly vertical distance between corner bars)
An amount oflongitudinal reinforcement required simultaneously is given by,
As/ == Asv(x1 + y 1) Is ...... (7.4.2)
Number of stirrups within this length is Y/S where s is spacing of stirrups. At collapse, each r:
vertical leg of stirrup yidds.
c
c
 .eao Limit State of Collapse - Torsion
,.--, \
._)
Chapter 7 Sect. 7.5 Wtimate Strength of aRC. Member under Pure Torsion 287
-~
Tc = 0.4 Tcr -where Tcr is given by Eq. 7.2.15. ...... (7.5.1e)
The total torque resisted by reinforced concrete member is:
:J
T = Tc + Ts _ - ...... (7.5.1£)
~) The role oflongitudinal reinforcement in providing torsional resistance is not 'exactly known.
But it is known from test results that torque T can develop only if there is adequate longitudinal
I reinforcement. Tests indicate that torsional resistance given by Eq. 7.5.Jc is achieved only if
------ 8 FaiUillplane volume of longitudinal steel per unit length lies between 0. 7 times to 1.5 times the total volume of
in tension zone
')
N.A. For skew bending
stirrups within that length. Customarily, torsional members are designed in such a way that the
----./
volume of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement is equal. Thus,
F"
(a)
•g. 75
••l (b)
As/ X s = Asv ( x, + Yr) or As/ = Asv ( x, + yl) Is
__..I
Total tensile force Fv in vertical stirrups within the fracture plane, is :
where, As/= areas oflongitudinal reinforcement for torsion.
\
__)
Fv = 0.87f.y X A2sv X 21.
s where, A.. is area of two legs of stirrups,
The longitudinal reinforcement serves the following functions :
(i) It anchors the stirrups at their comers and enables them to develop full yield strength.
",)
_; By"JUilibrium of vertical furees, eqWllvenicai COIDpressjve fu<,e;, developed oo - - (ii) It provides some torsional resistance due to dowel force induced in them at the cracked ·
edge CD. The couple funnod by !hose venical fa>sile.<omprusive forees is !be tonional resistance surface.
offered. by vertical legs of stirrups. It is given by- -
_) (iii) It restrains the lengthening tendency of the members on widening of the spiral cracks. It,

=F, ·x1 ~ 0.871y x ~n x ~ x x1

thus, prevents widening of cracks and controls the crack width.
:; Tn •••• (7.S.1aj Eq. 7.5.l(c) derived above is based on the assumption that inclination of the failure plane is

\
Thehorizomai legs ofstiJTUps crn.ssingtbe aacl«llllop and bottom lioes do_not yield~ 45° with the axis of the member. This is possible only when the volume.oflongitudinal steel and
,_/
....... in tbese legs eqWllm 1,. to.-sional ruiS!ance offured by hodzonfallegs """ be e>1obUne.f . transverse steel intercepted by the fracture plane are equal. When this is not so, the torsional
eXactly on the above lines and can be written as : - resistance of reinforcement is given by :
'I A X
.---------:--
._/
Tsh =Fxy=f.x-E..x-l.xy - / AsJyv As/fyl ...... (7.S.Ig)
n I s 2 s I
Ts = xlyl x ·y--s- x (xi+ yl)

J
~
' The total torque provided by stirrup is :

Ts = TSVsh
+ T = 0.87f.y X
Asv X -Y1 X X +f.
-2 SIs Asv XI
x T x s-xy
...... {7.5.1&)
Lampert has shown that this equation is valid for a compact non-symmetric section in the form,

T = A _/ Asvfyv x Aslfyl
...... (7.5.lh) ,_
'--)
-, = ·r 0.87J.2+f; ]
Y X.A xxi
-YI-
sv s
1 s o.\J s P
0
where, A0 = area enclosed within the comer bars,
'I
---" 1
P0 = Perimeter of lines connecting corner bars.
= a Asv x Y/s ......(7.5.lc)
where, x1 = Center to centre distance between vertical legs of stirrups (which is nearly 7.5:1. Spac~Truss Analogy- Introduction
Just as the shear strength of reinforcement is based on plane truss analogy (Sect. 5.6.2), the
_) the center to center distance ( b1) between the comer barstin the direction of torsional strength of reinforcement is obtained by space truss analqgy. This is an obvious outcome

I
width)
because torsio~ produces shear in both horizontal as well as vertical planes and torsion reinfo~cement
.) The - a caonot be derennined analytically and n:soun:e ha. to be tal<en to make use is also a closed ring with pair oflegs in horizontal as well as vertical planes. The analogy was first
of experimental results. ruu h.as shown from his tests that a primarily depends upon the ratio of developed by Raush in as back as 1929 and by Morsch in Russia. It assumes a traditional rectangular~
__) CJ:Oss sectional dimensions and particularly the quantities x and y • It is taken as :
1 1
space truss model consisting of longitudinal comer bars acting as stringers, the legs of stirrups.
a =0.66 + 0.33 Y/x 1 •••••• (7.5Jd) acting as vertical and horizontal tension members, and the diagonal concrete portion between the
J flkingThe resisted b y - is about SO% of !be c:rncking tw-que To.. Coo-vely, longitudinal stringers (in horizontal as well as vertical planes) acting as diagonal struts. See
_) the lonjue
same equal to 40%, Fig 7.5.2. This theory assumes yielding of stirrups prior to crushing of concrete, i.e. an
under-reinforced section.
J '·
 &)C::"'· 1.(}
~..-umumc::u .1. ur;nun unu oenu1ng ~ oY (
Chapter 7
each leg of the link about the centre line of the. section, that is : .--.
',
r= (F ~~ X ) X 2 + (F X ~1 )
2 = Fx, + Fy, X

Since the cracks are assumed to be inclined at 45°, the total torsional resistance of the system c
X
:~· oflinks is obtained by multiplying moments due to each leg by number oflegs cro~ingtho crack. r-·
I
1...~ When ;links are provided at spacing s, the number of vertical legs crossing the crack 'is y ls and
-r-,
number of horizontal legs crossing the crack is xi/ s. I

:. Total torsion~! resistance of steel (T) is given by:

(
Asv Yt Asv xl xl Yt \.

-~1 Ts = (/.yv X -) X
2 -
s X XI +f.yv X - 2 X -
s X yI =ASV)'I'
f. X --
s (7 s 2b)
••••.•••
(-
T xs
s
or A ...... (7.5.2c)
·~~
sv fyv x xl x Yt
Vertical leg of stirrup ~ *In l. S. Code,jyv = 0.81J,andxl'y1 are approximated to b1 and d1,
'] I ~
~s--'
(
crossing the crack
I :. A
Ts xs
...... (7.5.2d)
\

Let Ts = ultimate torsional

.
Fig. 7.5.2
resistance of the reinforcement,
As/ = total area of longitudinal reinforcement,
• Il SV Q.87fy X b1 X d1
:. Total torsional resistance ofR:;C. section is given by,
T= Tc +Ts ...... (7.5.2e)
c
r\
·~ where, Tc = Torsional resistance of concrete =0.4 Ta
Asv,= area of two legs of stirrups, .-.
s = spacing of stirrups, ~ . The equation derived above for Tsholds good Oitly if spacing ofstin11ps does not exceed xi , (
J (xi +y1) /4, or 300 mm, whichever is less (7117). It has also been suggested thatthe minimum
~y, = yield strength of!ongitudinal bars,
diameter of longitudinal bars should not be less than s/16 to prevent bulging of concrete between (
fyv = yield strength of stirrups.
the stirrups (or in other words s > 16 times diameter oflongitudinal bar). This provision is the one
X. (~

= centre to centre distance between vertical legs ofstirrups (taken nearly equal t9 corresponding to that of spacing oflateral ties in columns. \

horizontal distance b1 between the comer longitudinal bars). ,
yl
centre to centre distance between horizontal legs of,stirrups (taken nearly
equal Vertical distance d1 be~een the centers ~f COmer longitudinal bars.)
to
The above equations were also developed by Lampart (72/7) assuming the R.C. beam as a
thin wall tube or a box instead of space truss made up ofline members. It was obser~·!d that in the (
case ofR.C. beam of solid rectangular section, nearly entire torsional strength is de,.;ved from-that
of transverse reinforcement and the concrete surrounding it (such that legs of cti.mps are at the (~

The originJI space truss rheory derives expr"ssions assulping inclination of diagonal cracks middle of this concrete wall thickness) forming a closed thin wall tube. The equat~nns were derived
equalto a with fue longitudinal direction. Hs: ~ (69/3), and Lam part and.Collins (7 l/13) have shown '!!Si~g the shear flow concept for the tube walls. (
'·
that it is desirable that the longi·•Jdinal bars and transverse links yield simultane-ously. To achieve Following points are noted on the basis of observation made in the wsc·ruch on torsion using
this the product o{.steel volume .•1il yield stress, per
steel, i.e. f.
un~t
length, should be equal for both types qf
x +y
space-truss analogy.
(i) The space truss analogy is applicable to under-reinforced s&:tinn. onty The design codes
A f S · •. yv I I 1
~{' r.r• ('··I·'·' = -f.• make provisions to avoid over-reinforced sections and, hene1', i':l' iure by Crushing ofdiagonal (
s{" =Asv-''Vv"' ' .,
. .. ,. .·As,,
.. .vi x ---.;:...
s x "\.
-4sv
······ (752a)
..
concrete struts.
. . .
Lamp:trt and Collins have shown that if this condition is satisfied, the diagonal cracks are
inclined at-4 5° with the longitudinal direction just as the diagonal cracks occur in the case ofshear.
(ii) The torsional strength is proportional to dirr.ensionsxi andy r r
(iii) The torsional strength of solid rectangular section is practically equal to that ofbollow box
Moment of force F about the centre line = F x !2 for vertical leg. section (6917) of wall thickness not less than 11411o the overall thickness of the member in that C
1
direction. Torsional resistance of actual box section with wall thickness less than% the transverse
= F Yf 12 for horizonta!Jeg.
Total torsional "1oment provided by one closed link is giverrby the sum ofthe moments due to
outer dimension, is less than that of a solid rectangular section of the same outer dimensions. To ~
avoid excessive flexibility and buckling of wall, the ratio of wall thickness to width of member in
c
r
 lfiT''i

'r? JW 'llmitlilale ofColiap.e _. TOI'Ston Chapt.;-~1.

.lhat diroefion. should ... he 1,;. d>an 1/W. Desig~~cofliox S<\ction fw ""'ion is made~ .
~)
.,
t .·because failure ofsuch section is likely to be brittle. Sect. 7.6 Combined Torsion and Bending 291

concrete~ ignored.
'1
'J
(iv) The dowcJ.oction ofJon8itudinaJ bar. and aggregate inledock of It will be evident from the behaviour of a beam under pure torsion that the torsional moment,·
{v) Thougli some of 1be .....,...,.,. mode in above th00<y cannot he rigw-nusJy iostilie<!, when acts in addition to bending moment has an effect of skewing and warping the failure surface
._) ' they are, however, substantiated by the experimental evidence (69/3 ). ·' · with the result that for small twisting moment T, a~d large bending moment M, the compression
edgeAB in Fig. 7.6.J(a), which is nonnal to the axis of the beam at top face under pure bending,
.__,) 7..6 COMBINED TORSION AND BENDING
now becomes inclined at an angle e as shown in Fig. 7.6.1 (b). (In fact, M and T do not act in
-~.

\ 7.6.1 Skew Bending Theory isolation. It is the resultant moment vector that acts on the beam causing skewing of the failure
~}
surface). Because of warping compression edgeAB is inclined at a greater inclination witb nonnal
In mn" of 1be i>rnctical cases of reinlbre..J <oncrete beam., to'Sion h.roJy ever ex;,. in than the bottom tension edge CD. The periphery of the failure surfaceABCD formed by compression
_j isolation. It is invariably accompanied by hendUii\ Rathe.-, it would he correct to say that heruJing is region (called compression hinge at ultimate state) above the neutral axis and cracked region below
nonnally predominant and IICCOmponied at times hytoBionaJ moment We bave already-ed 1be the neutral axis, thus has a spiraling nature. The skewed failure surface now intersects not only the
J
\ failure of a R.C. beam in pure flexw-e in Chapter-4. The failure surface under pure bending is a longitudinal steel (Ast) but also the web steel Asv in the fonn of hoops or closed stirrups.
nonna) section with compression edge" at the top and tonsion edge nt the bottom under positive
Z~
The sequence of failure may differ from beam to beam depending on the relative magnitudes
~) bending 1'\'ee Fig. Io) and vice-versa for negntive bonding. Aiso in Sect. 7.5. I, we have - of M and T, sectional dimensions b an.d D, the percentage of longitudinal and _hoop steel. If the
that for lhe case of n beam subjocted to pure to"ion, the failure surface is skew wilh compression failure is initiated by yielding of one of the steels followed by yielding of the remaining steel
_j edge on one of\be side fuces nnd tensile crock on lhe olher face mnking an nngle of45' to 1be nxis (e.g. hoop steel yields first followed by yielding of longitudinal steel or vice-versa), the beam is said
of lhe member. Under the nction of combined !oBion and bending, the failure may occur by nny to be under-reinforced.
.~
one of lhe above two types (vU. compression fnce on lhe top/bottom edge or on 1be side face). If the concrete crushes prior to yielding of any one of the two reinforcements, the beam is
said to be fully over-reinforced. But if concrete crushes after yielding of any one of the two steels
but before yielding of the other, the section is said to be partially over-reinforced.
.J For economy, and the desired ductility, it is always advantageous to design the areas of both
,..- \ ~} >~B

_J reinforcement in such a way that both ofthem yield simultaneously and prior to crushing ofconcrete.
(a) The analysis is, therefore, based on this assumption of a section being fully under-reinforced.
(b)
The modes of failure under combined bending and torsion depend upon the ratios MIT and
_J
biD. These are of the following three types.
_)
Fs/2 Mode-1: This mode of failure is characterized' by failure in compression at top, along edge "
AB, making an angleS with the normal, and helical cracking along the other three edges below the
.J
neutral axis, and yielding of bottom longitudinal steel and vertical legs of stirrups intercepted by the
·, (c) ¥JAmB skewed warped failure surface (See Fig. 7. 6. 1c). This mode of failure occurs when bending is
.__/
large compared to torsion (M> 2.sn and for high values of biD.

_) Mode-2: This mode offailure is characterized by failure in compression on one of the side
·, faces, say along edge AD, making angle e with the normal, and helical cracking along the other .
._) three edges with yielding of longitudinal bars on the other face and yielding of legs of stirrups as
shown Fig. 7.6.1d This mode of failure occurs when twisting moment is large compared to
\
J bending moment and when beam is narrow compared to depth (low values of biD) with nearly
(e) equal longitudinal steel at top and bottom.
_)
Mode-3 : This mode offailure is exactly opposite to Mode-l failure and is characterized by
~) compression zone at the bottom connecting spiral crack along the remaining three edges, as shown
in Fig. 7.6.1e: This mode occurs when either the top steel is less compared to bottom steel and
D torsi()Jl is large compared to bending moment with high value of biD; .or when negative bending
J ~g. 7.6.1
accompanies tOrsion with low values of biD. \
 292 Limit State of Collapse: Torsion Chapter /7~ Combined Torsion and Benamg .t•n (
. Sect. 7.6.
The strength ofa reinforced concrete section in comblned bending and torsion can be derived
by analyzing the forces on the f&ilure·~and
using equilibrium equations. The detailed analysis
7.6.1 Spac&-Truss An~ogy
The space truss analogy·applied to R.C. members under pure torsion as explained in
I~
book
Bud one may refer to reference {76/I,84/4Jfot
is considered to be outside the scope of this
d~led derivation. :fbe equations are[ as fo~;( ·' · J Sect. 7.5.2 can also bC modified to make it applicable to a case of combined bending and torsion.
While deriving the equations in Sect. 75. 2, the equilibrium was considered about the longitudinal c
MODE-I: T\ll
.
~
2y
I +2a .y ~ 2 I · .· ·' 1+ 2a
+ y
· · I .·
- jl Mo(l)
. ··
.., .•• (7.6.!)
axis only to give the resultant torsional resistance. Similarly, in the case of combined·torsion and
bending, equilibrium is considered not only about the longitudinal axis but also awU( the axis of
r
where, · T (I) = torsional resistance of beam for mode~ I failure,
bending and the interaction equation between T and M is obtained.
Again, as in Sect. 7. 6~ I, the detailed derivation of equation is considered outside the: scope of r
Mo{l) = pure bending resistance ofbeam for zero torsion for mode-l (for positive thiS book, and one may refer. to reference (76/l) for the same. The resulting equations are given /""'
'
bending) (i.e. usual moment of resistance considered for pure flexureJ, below for ready reference.
a
P
= Dlb,

= TIM where, Tand Mare torsional and bending moment acting externally,
0.9 Asv~ . x 1 J
For Mode~ I : T(l) = I +a.
2y • [_/ 1
'J j32 +
1 +a
y l
-t M~ 1 ...... (7.6.4)
(-·
r
= .
y
[~ f
[
t]
X
. 2s As/fyf 2y. I I +a' x R3 +
Asv = area of two legs of vertical stirrups ,
For Mode-3 : T(3) = 1 +a' ·v j32+ --.
y Mo(l) ...... (7.6.5) c
fyv = yield stress for vertical stirrups ,
· s = spacing of stirrups, where, a
. _·
- Y/x 1 ,
• _ [ Asvfyv
y - - - - x A /,
Xi ]
Mo(3)
,R3=~.P=M
T
c
2s sf yl 0 (I)
(
1 It may be noted that these equations are very similar to Eq. 7.6.1 and 7.6.3 derived by \,
x = length ofhorizontalleg ofstirrup (which is nearly equal to b - the horizontal
distance between centres of corner bars), 1 skew-bending theory except that the term a· replac@s a and y ' replaces y (the difference
A,, = area of longitudinal tension steel at bottom betw~en y andy' is negligible) and except that (I +a') takes the place of (I+ 2a) in Eq. 7.6. I r
J;, = yield strees for longitudinal steel. and 7.6.3. The numerical values given by two theories are very close to each other even though (~
approaches are different. The skew bending theory applies better when bending is predominant
MODE-2: while space truss analogy is applicable when torsional moment is predominant.

[.Y + ~a
T(2) =
4 (
7.6.3 Interaction of Torsion and Bending
1 •• R, ] Mo(l) ...... (7.6.2) The interaction of torsional strength T and bending strength M for a given section can 'be (
where,~= Lateral flexural strength of beam obtained by drawing curves corresponding tv each of the three equations in Sect. 7.6.1. It will be
M
Normal flexural str~ngth of bea;;- = Mo (2~ ..... (7.6.2a) noted that since Tand Minteracti.on depends upon the properties of the section including the area ,- \.
MODE-3: o (I) of top steel, bottom steel, vertical stirrups and their spacing, there will be a set of three curves (for
the three modes of failure) and one resultant interaction diagram, for each beam cross-section. r

1(3) = ~
2y [.Y jiT+
I I + 2a
y-x ~ +p
I L
fo(I)
Fig. 7.6.2 shows different sets of interaction diagrams for different types of cross sections. They
clearly bring out the effect of beam cross-section and reinforcement on the T-M curve .
... ···. (7.6.3) Fig. 7.6.2(a) shows T-Minteraction curves for a narrow beam with top steel less than the bottom
where, R Normal flexural strength of section for n ..n ..tiu.,. bendin steeL Each point on the curve represents a combination of rand M causing failure. Three curves ,~
3 ---··-ow........ ._. ·are ~ hown for three modes of failure, AB for mode-l, CD for mode-2, and EF for mode-3. The '
Normal flexural strength of section for positive bending resultant interaction curve will be represented ty parts of curves giving least value of T-M ('
M (3)
~
= Mo(l) ...... (7.6.3a)
combination. Thus, in Fig. 7.6.2{a) failure by mode- 3 will not occur at all because T0 ) is.greater

faihi~;e
than lesserofT< 2>and T(I)' fur all values of M. The failure will be. by inode-2 for the region CD and l
Since can occur by an: of the above three modes, the required tensional strength Twill by mode-l for the region DB. The resuitant interaction 6iagram is, thus, given by CDB. The external
be given by the least of 1( ), 1( ) and 1( )"
1 2 3 moments acting on the section shall be such. that intersection point (say P) of external momonts M (
and Tshall be lie within the resultant intersectJon curve CBD. ..

c
 Sect. 7. 7 Combined Torsion and Shear 295
~~~
294 Limit State of Collapse : Torsion --...::.....-._
Ghapierc.1io
i.)~,)
fn.design, ifcertain restrictions are imposed for the area and disposition of reinforcement and
.,J
moments acting on the section shall be such that intersection point (say P) of external moments M for the ratio Dlb, failure by mode 2 and 3 can' be totally avoided and the design can be done for
"_) and Tshall be lie within the resultant intersection curve CDB.
; ~>'
mode-l failure
Large only.·of research has been carried out on the study oftorsion and bending interaction.
amount
T T .J·•fJ
The detailed report is found in Reference (68113). Selected references appear in (84/4) also. The
J
equations given by Lampert and Collins (72/7) give clear picture about the torsion bending interaction.

0
-)
~ The related equations are :
(a) For Mode-l i.e. yielding ofbottom bars (7119, 74/8, 85/S)
E

l 12\ 1
.'__.,
)

__)
I
' I; Tu
y Tuo
Mu
- + -Muo
=1 l f 2 ... (7.6.6}

~
}
I M
{b) Fo• Mode-He. yielding oftop barn,. l ~:, 1- l ~:,1~ 1 + ...... (7.6.7)
I

)
I
8 where, ru ==ultimate torque acting on the section.
(a)
M
(b) M T00 == pure torsional resistance of the section..
I
M == ultimate bending moment acting on the section,
Fig. 7.6.2
·._/
Mu = pure ultimate bending resistance of the section under positive bending.
. -,
,J
Fig. 7.6.2{h) shows interaction diagram for rather'a square section. Greater width increases
the mode-2 strength. It may be noted1hat for such a section mode-2 failure is not at all possible
uo Asc x 1; __ yield force in top steel (Asc)
because for all values of M, r;2) is greater than lesser of r;l) and r;J)" The .resultant. interaction y= As x fy "' yield force in bottom steel CAst)
1
_) curve is EFB. Failure is by mode-3 in the region EF and mode-tin the_region FB. Similarly,
where, f and f = yield stress of top and bottom steel respectively
Fig. 7.6.3(c) shows interaction diagram for a rather square section but with equal steel at top and y
The above equation arey plotted in Fig. 7.6.4for y= I (equaltopand bottom steel) and fory =0.3. _
j bottom. Increasing the top steel increases the strength of mode-3, and
failure occurs only by
1.6~
Tu J" 1
/ 2

~ ~ +1 -Mu-
mode-l because T(t} is lesser than T<2>or T(J} for all values of M.-Foracase between {a) and (b), )
J an interaction diagram can also occur as that shown in Fig. 7.6.3d, which shows a resultant 1.4-1- /""--'~..
-
Tuo r Muo
interaction diagram EFDB. The failure in this case is governed by mode-l for the portion BD, by
J mode-2 for the portion DF and by mode-3 for the portion FE. This possible wheit-top steel is too 1.2
less and the beam is neither too narrow as in case_ (a)_ nor wider as in case (b).
J T Mode-3
T
-

___)
.. ' 1.0

c I ,..c < 0.8

-.../
'>
f1 Tu
Tuo 0.6

)
b_J ;'·

Asc.1t£,.
0.4 r= Ast.ly
J
0.2'-t----------\
__) B ·a·
M (b)
M
02 0.4 0.6 0.8 ro
't (a) 0.0
J
~-
Muo
Fig. 7.6.4
Fig. 7.6.3
J
 196 Limit State of Collapse : Torsion i~· <.
Chapter 7 Sect. 7.7 Combined Torsion and Shear 297
~'
They show excellev.t agreement with the test results (72/6). It may be interesting to· note that 1 \.
range covei-ed by interaction curve fory = 0.3. is greater than that covered by curve for y = l.O. ~J
~~
Putting ~ 1 for Mo(l), Mel= M11 + M,
)" where, M, = TJ'/1 + 2a..) = 1'11 ("i,_l-+2D_..._{b) · · ....... (7.6.12)
C:
· IS code has based its provisions on mode-l and mode-3 types of failures (82/4). From the r
detailed derivation of the truss analogy for mode-l failure it can be shown that , M, represents equivalent bending moment showing tbe effect ofT~. This equatiOn is adopted !
T (xi +yi) by Cl. 22.5.3.1 ofiS : 1343-1980. Similarly between Eq. 7.642 above ofiS: 134l'Md Eq. 7.6.9 of
~S : 456 given earlier may be noted. (·,
As,fyiYI = Mu + u 2x ...... (7.6.8) '
I
The left hand side expression in the above equation represents the effective bending moment 7.7 COMBINED TORSION AND SHEAR . (-
\
for design of longitudinal steel for mode-l failure, which is. equal to ultimate bending moment acting In most of the cases encountered in practice, torsion is usually accompailied by transverse
on the section, plus an equivalent bending moment~ replacing the effect of.torsion. shear. Shear stresses due to transverse shear and torsion often have their maximum values at the ('
. _ (I +yi!x1) same points (mid-way between the vertical faces). Als.o the diagonal tension cracks make an mg1e
.. M - T X of 45° to the iongitudinal axis in both cases, But the main difference between the two is that !".:
I u 2
Approximatingylx 1to Dlb and multiplying the right hand side further by partial safety factor transverse shear produces diagonal tensile stresses on tl)e two vertical faces only, while torsio11
for steel strength equal to 1.15 (because in Eq. 7. 6.8, design stress f 11.15 will replace f )
y yl
produces diagonal tensile stresses on all the four faces of rectangular section spiraling round the
beam. Therefore, torsion shear and verticalshear are additive on one vertical face ofthe beam and
c-
M =·T X (l+D/b) X 1.15= T X "("l"+D!b):. M = T X (I+Dib) ...... (7:6.9) oppose each other on the other vertical face. ~-,

\
I II 2 II 2 I l.15 I u 1 .., Very little test data is available on shear-torsion il)teraction. Collins (68/11) has introduced the •.
term 'equivqlent shear' to rt'lp(esetit combined e-ffect of torsion and shear. It is given by,
\
CI. 41.4.2 ofi. S. Code gives this expression for equivalent bending moment. V11e = Vu + 1.6 Tu I b ...... (7.7.1)
· ,
ci .41.4.2.1 provides for mode-3 type of failure and suggests to provide longitudinal steel
for difference in- MI and, Mu because of mode- 3
where, Vue = equivalent ultimate vertical shear, r
Vu = actual ultimate vertical shear acting on the section,
("'
. - (xi+yi) . Tu = actual ultimate torsional momentacting on the section,
AscJ;,IYI - Tu 2
x - Mu ...... (7.6.10)
I b = breadth of the section. (
The detailed explanation on I.S. code requirements for torsion in R.C. beams has been I.S. Code and Australian Code A.S. 1480 have adopted this equation as the basis for design
presented by Iyengar and Ramprakash. (7418), Pandit and Venkappa {8215) and by
Rajsekaran (8214). .
of transverse reinforcement for torsion because this equation is even more conservative than
simple linear interaction adopted by other codes. According to linear interactions, transverse
c
I.S. : 1343-1980 (80/3) has adopted the equation derived by the skew bending the01; as the reinforcement is calculated· separately for resisting torsion only and shear only, and the total
basis for torsion design as adopted by the Australian Code AS : 1480. It has been shown tliat fairly reinforcement to be provided is just the summation of two.
economical volume of steel results when, As detailed inSect. 5.3.2c, shear-compression type offailure for beams subjepted to torsion (

y= I is avoided by limiting the equivalent shear stress in concrete (V I bd) to .t. . Shear
...... {7.6.11) ue UC.IIUU
4+--4 reinforcement is designed by considering Vue in placeV11 . Thus, the transverse and longitudinal
.
f3 ~I+ 2a reinforcement is designed if Vue exceeds shear strength Vuc of concrete. ·
~
(~
If this is substituted in Eq. 7. 6.1, we get , T1 = [ +. llf3 ] x Mo( ) The transverse reinforcement is required to carry a shear force equal to :
1
Vuse = Vue - Vuc , but , Vue = V11 + 1.6 Tu I b

In design T(l) = T11 and f3 = TJ M11 :. Tu = [~I+ Mu I rJ x Mo(l)

Vuse
or Vuse
=

=
(Vu +1.6Tu/b)- Vuc = (V-
Vus+ 1.6 TJ b
11
V)
ur.
+l.6T11 lb
...... (7.7.2)
('
r-
<,
Total effective bending resistance for mMode-1 failure is then gi~en by:
M0 1 =Tu (,.YI +2a +MIT)=
u u
Mu +Tu ~ where, VliS = shear to be carried by reinforcement for vertical shear only. r
The transvers reinforcement is required to be designed for Vuse .

r
 • Sect. 7.8 Analysis for Torsion 299
298 Limit State of Collapse: Torsion Chapter,.(k. . •• understanding of the shear-torsion interaction. From the similarity of first term of Eq. 7. 7. 7
Let transverse reinforcement be Asv at spacings. ··WithY Eq. 7.5.2c it will be observed that design of transverse reinforcement is based on mode-
'of<.'• • . . '

, 'I Then, V = 0.87 f. A .dIs .1 failure

111 for torsion. The shear-torsion interaction curves for Eq. 7. 7.4 and Eq. 7. 7. 5 are
! ...... (1.13)
'(~\I Dividin~both sides ~f lq. 7. 7.2 by Eq. 7. 7.3, we get shown in Fig. 1. 1.1
I~ V L6 T I b . V 1.6 T 0 Lyalin .
liS + . .u . = u.r + u ·" Lessig
•
;·
t\ilf"r'.
i!\lli,
l
0.87 f.ysv
= 0.87 f.ysv
A .dIs 0.81 f.ysv
A .dIs 0.87 /.A
ysv .dIs 0.81 /.A .bd
ysv · I a'
1.5
• .• Me MuUen •
Pandit 0

I' I Denoting Vuso A .dIs when Tu = 0 ; i.e. shear strength of reinforcement in

..
~r
.0
absence of torsion, • • •
And Tuo = 0.81fyAS'Jb 1d11s when Vus =0 i.e strengthofreinforcementinpuretorsi«m.

L...
0
a.l: ..
;ij
1r in absence of shear.
Substituting these new teims in the denominators of the above equation , and approxima~g
. .. A ~ A6.

ijr!1 bd by b1d1 we get , ..

5L
.'"'',
'" 0
1 \
V 1.6T
Il~y r
_!!!.._ + - T
v .u = 1 ...... (7.7.4} Tuo
~
kJ uso uo
This is the interaction formula for combined torsion and shear. 0.5
AI·........ .. 9v.,~o>?__,
' , "-,
'-,·~s

e
. ··--...• <:;
'1\1' . If simple principle of addition of reinforcement required for resisting pure torsion and pu¢ ··-...flviift.· ,
·•· .. Oq;> '
shear acting independently, is used as adopted by some design c~~~ the.simple linear interaction ······<:-:,.>,,
formula is obtained as under, -
V T ,j. ·····-'\~ B

J
;
uso
+ T uo
=I ...... (7.7;5) 0
0.5 1.0
o Vus
-1 Comparison with test results (82/5) show that Eq. 7. 7.4 is highly conservative and Eq. 7. 7.5
Vuso
'---' is also conservative for majority of cases, (See Fig. 7. 7.1). 0.4 v T

J If Vus is taken equalto 0.4 Vu, Eq.7.7.5 reduces to, + T T ""

l ...... (7.7.6)
lL'lO UO'
Fig. 7.7.1

l ANALYSIS FOR TORSION

Substituting the values of Vuso and Tuo we get, '*7.8
J ·.I
'li
(
· V T '(. 7.8.1
Prior toGeneral
design, the torsional moment to which the member is subjected is required to be
.J u + u =1
2.5 (0.87 fyAS'J.d Is) 0.87 fyAsv.b 1d1 ! s_ determined by analysing the structure for torsion. Analysis of a statically determinate structure is
\
done simply by using ti'luations of equilibrium. Analysis ofa statically indetenninate structure requires
~ Taking d1 instead ofdin the denominator ofthe first term, and interchanging the positions of determination of torsional stiffness and bending stiffness of members meeting at a joint for applying
first and second term on the left hand sjde, the conditions of compatibility of angular rotations. For a R. C. member prior to cracking, these are
·-, Txs Vxs
J
Asv = (b d } : (0.87 fy) +. 2.5 d u (0.~7 fy) ...... (7·7·7} given by the following expressions:
1 1 1 Flexural stiffness kb = 4El/L for far end of the member fixed I continuous } ... (7.8.1 a)
J This is the equation used by IS: 456 under C1. 41.4.3 for design.oftransverse reinforcement or kb = 3EIIL for far end of the member rotationally free
I
_, (except that spacing represented in the Code iss. instead of s) . The first term in Eq. 7.7.7
.E = Modulus of elasticity of concrete,
represents reinforcement required for pure torsion . The second terni of the equation shows that I = Moment of inertia of the gross cross-section about the axis of rotation,
,_) I.S. Code requires that stirrups shall be designed to resist shear not less than 0.4 Vu . Test results
(82/5) also show that Eq. 7. 7. 7 used for design of reinforcement and based on Eq. 7. 7.5 is quite L = Length of the member.
-.-/
'> conservative. The high degree of conservative pr~s in the Code is due to inadequate
 Chapter 7 Sect. 7.8 Analysis for Torsion 3 01 ()
Torsional Stiffness for rectangular section k1
= { = ~J = ~ DtG ...... (7.2.9) balconies and other similar structures. The beams may be of single span or continuous over number ,-'"""'\
\..~I

where, G =
Modulus of rigidity of concrete, = E I 2 (I + v) of supports (Fig. 7.8.1 a). In ail cases, the centre of gravity ofloads lies outside the line joining its
()
,I
v = Poission's ratio
= 0.15 for concrete, supports. This.cauieS an overturning ofthe beam, which can be prevented ifthe beam is fixed at its
J = ~Db ,
3 ends or continuous over the supports. Since the ·centre of gravity of all loads and reactions on one
side of the section does not lie on tlie axis of the beam at that section, the beam is subjecte-d to {\
~ = Constant obtained from Table 7.2.1 "' '
.;, torsional moment in addition to bending moment and shear force.
D = Total Depth of section,
Normally, curved beams are subjected to uniformly distributed loads and .supported on (
\
\.
b = width ofrect;mgular section, = bw (the width of web) fortlanged section. symmetrically placed columns. Consider a uniformly loaded curved beam circular in plan, and
simply supported on vertical column supports placed equidistant along the circumference. A portion .--,
Note: As regards the post cracking torsional stiffness is concemed Collins and Lampert (71113, 71114) \.. !
have proposed the following expression. of such beam ACB between two supports A and B subtending an angle 29 at its centre is shown in
/
Es Asv (bl dl) 2 Fig. 7.8.Jb. The moments are shown by double arrow head notations.
GJ = -- X (I +y) (''
cr
where, E =
S 4(bl+dl)
modulus of elasticity of steel reinforcement ,
...... (7.8./h)
Vo ' M+
~
T+
(';.
y ·' = (Volume of lnngitudina/ steelj I (Volume of stirrup per unit len:;th)
This equation is not very useful for design because it .requires knowledge of reinforcement data in (""';
advance. However, the research has shown that the reinforcemenJ though increases torsional strength, has
little e./foci on torsional stiffness. And therefore, in desig_n, the reinforcement may be designed for flexure
and shear assuming zefo·wrs.ipnalstiffn~ss and then the ·designed reinforcement may be checlcedby analysis
for torsion arising by use of Eq. 7. 8.1 b.
c
7.8.2 Distribution of Torsional Moments at Joint
0
c
In a case of main beam, (in a horizontal grid) supporting cross-beam, the bending moment in (
cross beam at the joint due to its rigid connection with the main beam acts as a torsional moment for
the main beam. The torsional moment in the main beam is obtained by distributing the unbalanced ., r
\

joint moment in proportion to the ratio of torsional stiffness of main beam divided by the sum of the 0
torsional stiffness and bending stiffness of the members meeting at the joint and is given by:
kt •
( a ) Circular Beam in Plan { b ) Segment of Circular beam c
Fig. 7.8.1
T "Lkt + "Lkb X M
= ...... (7.8.2) (
Let M = bending moment at any pointP, T = twisting moment at P,
where, k1 I ( "Lk1 + l.,kb) is the distribution factor.
V = vertical shear force at P, w = intensity of uniformly distributed load, (
M = unbalanced moment at the joint
29 =Angle subtended by supports at the centre 0,
k1 = torsional stiffness of the member
~
"Lk1 = sum of the torsional stiffuesses of the members meeting atthe joint,
= Angle subtende!i_,by the arc AP at the centre, R = Radius of a circle.
By symmetry of loading and support comlitions:
c
L,kb = sum of the flexural stiffnesses of the members meeting at the joint, ·. . . . Total k:ad on girder
(1) Vert1cal reaction at each column = · N be ·nf'C
At the column beam junction, if the beam is subjected to twisting moment, obtained by urn ry• o1umns
(ii) Twisting moments at supports are zero. ·· (
assuming full fixity at the joint, then the actual twisting moment to which the beJ:n wi,II be subjected
will be obtained after distributing the joint moment in the ratio oftorsional stiffness of the beam to (iii) Shear force and twisting moment at the centre of each span is zero.
the sum
at the ofthe flexural stiffnesses of the columns and torsional stiffuesses ofall the beams meeting
joint.
Thus, only unknowns at supports are hogging moment M0 and shear force V which can be
obtained froin two equations of equilibrium, name!:!, L, V= 0 and L,M = 0.
0 c
7.8.3 Torsion in Beams Curved iu Plan
Total load onAB= W= w X lengtlt·ofarcACB = w(R X 28) = 2 w R e c
It acts at centroid C1 of the arcACB at a distarlce OC1 = R (sin 9) I 9
Beams circular in plan are required to be designed to support circular reservoirs, •curved
By symmetry V0 =. W/.2 = w R 9 c
The shear is acting verticaliy upwards and is shown by dot in Fig. 7. 8.1 b.
c
('
 - -J ... vuupse :Torsion

Tolring mom.,t offorees about the chomAII""" equ,t;og them to zero:

~-"11
Chapter 7
M, '"' 9 (at A)+ M, ... 9 (atB) .. Load OQ Ail X c, .. Analysis for-Torsion. 303
2~sin0-2wRO(OC -0C )==
:.
1 2
2 ~Sine- 2 w R e{¥- -R coso) =:
0
0
...... (7.8.8)

equations
.•Theofequthbnum,
end ~ons
boing known, the forcos A(:.T. P. at=="'Y
wRpoint ~
2
P can bo0)obtain.d
(I -()cot USing
.....• (7.8.3)
...... (7.8.9)

Load on AP == w x length of arc AP

== w R$ acting at centroid Q of arc AP
R sin~/2
OQ ==
-m-=-
Shoar fon:e at P ~equal
to .Ugebm;c sum of aU vo<ticaJ foreos on ono s;do ofP,
:. VQ == ~ - w R$ == w R e- w R~

the
VQ • wR (0 - ) ~ ..•... (7.8.4)
axis OP.at Pis obtainod by !>king .Ugotna;., sum ofm....., of.Ul the fureos about
radialmomont
Beod;ng
M = V AP - M cos~ - wR$ x QP
R •in+ 12
~
1
I '
• wRe x R sin+ - wR' (I - ecnt e) cos+ - wRe - +
2 '
x siJJ +J2
Putting 2sin ($12) == (I -cos$), we get
~
• wR' 9 sin +- wR' [cos - 0 cot 9 c.,+ + 2 sin' (9 12)]
2 12 From Eq./.8.3, a2

"'+ to •be wR'

ForM~ resin>d~+ld$
maximum. eCO/==oecoz4> .. I 1 ...... (7.8.5)
) .. d~ /d $ = () COS$ - () cot ()Sin $ == 0 -..
or cot$ == cote i.e. $ == e i.e. at mid-span
_j .or$ == 0 i.e. at support

~e
2
·max ··· sm
_) + M == wR ( esin 0 + ()cote cose -I) = wfil ( - I) ...... (7.8.6)
The max;O.ists negat;ve
2 momont wm occu"t tJ,. '"PJ>Orts where , 0 +•
\

momen~
,0 .. M_ • wR (0 cote -1) . .. .... (7.8.7)
TOJ>iooal momont at any point P is obtainod by taking of .Ul the fureos about the
_) . ,be_
will axis through
asswned P. The to"Wnal momont that twists the boam lowanJs itsce"'le ofcul'Valure
to the positive.

~ T• .;. M0 sim~ + wR$ x PP - V0 x PP

•OP-OP1 •0P-OQ~f2
1
2
i!o!.PP; • (R-Reos+hmd PP1 0.023 I 0.045
_)
R R sin$I2
= -- - x. cos ( "'!2
'I'
)

~
. +12 _,
""*aod substituting ':, • wRe DllliM, • "'"" (I·- 9 cvt 9)
-sin~)- wRe (R- R(os +)
Using Jdotioo 2oin(+i2)2 cat(9i2) • The variation in shear force, bending moment and twisting moment in one span of the beam is
:_) lj = wR (1 .. 9 cot8) •in+ + wR (9 2 shown in Fig. 7.8.2

~
 Design Procdure jor Torsion JU.5 0
;;,, ..
__ Sect. }.9
-·;I J04 Limit Siate of Collapse : Torsion Chilpier·7 <Ben4ing eqliivalent Me foi: torsion induces tension on both faces of beam along the length of 0
!l.II ...,. ~- M, < M, tension doe toM, adds to tension due toM, an<11be steel fur
;! ;·,;
0
total W\Sion due to ( Mu + M ) is provided on bending tension side only. The tension effect ofM1
(
··jl A e 1
bcD<liPg compression side being b th.n bending compression doe toM, no additional steel is c)
r
H 011
,;
· required on bending compression side. (',
~ ~ On the other hand, when, M > Mu the resultant tensile force on bending tension side \,

continues to remain equal to, ( Mu + M ) but on bending compression side, th~'tension due to M
1
1
0

·~·
1
bein"1:> greater than compression due toMu, there is resultant tension due to ( MI "'" ·Mu ) induced

B _ C 0 on the'!his
compressinon side.
...,uressteel on bonding oomp<"'ionsido .tro to withstand"" equivale« !<ndingmomonl ~
given by: Me = M - Mu ...... (7.9.lb) (:.
,_/

( b ) Bending moment Dlagtam 2 1

In design, when it cannot be assured that Mu will act at all the time, it can be MuD only due to

AL B. :::::......~e dead ioad~ Therefore, Me should be taken equal to ( M

2
1- MuD) or even equal to M1 on ~afer side (':;
. C . 0
for simplicity.
When the cross-sectional dimension b or Dexceeds 450 mm, additional side face reinforcement C >

( c) Twlstfng moment Diagram

equal to 0.1% of web area shall be provided equally and uniformly distributed on two wider faces,
Fig. 7.8.2 Varaitionof S.F.,B.M.andT.M.In()neSpaa. (':
at a spacing not exceeding 300 rom or web thickness whichever is less.
7.9 DESIGN PROCEDURE FOR TORSION

7.9.1 De8ign Approach

(c) Computation
.
of Equivalent Design Shear V~ :
Vue = Vu + 1.6 T u I b ...... (7.9.2) c
The equivalent ultimate design shear is given by:
The approach to design of ~ection (90/5) subjected to torsion is as follows :
where -v' u
= ultimate transverse shear at critical section. r\
(a) Calculation of Torsional Moment Tu : . T = ultimate torsional moment at critical section.
The torsional moment for design shall be determined by conditions ofequilibrium for statiCally
Acconli:g to Cl. 41.2 of IS. Code, .,ctioO' looated at a dm.nre loss than d from the fare (
of support may be designed for the same torsion as ~oniputed at a distance d, where d is the
detenninate structures, and by conditions ofcompatibility,in caSe ofstatically intenninate structures,
when torsional stiffness is considered in the analysis. .
As discussed in Sect. 7.1.2, the designer is at liberty to consider compatibility type of torsion effective depth.ln otbe< wo«<s, o<iti"l scction fo< torsion ~Ibe taken at a dm.noe 'd' from the (
in statically indetenninate structures, or disregard the same. If it is to be considered; th!l torsional face of support. Critical section for shear also happens to be the same (See Sect. 5.8.l).It may be
moment is calculated as per Eq. 7.8.2. ---- noted that this is true only for supports offering compressive reaction. For supports offering tensile C
~-
C/.41.1 of IS. Code states that for indetenninate structures where torsion can be eliuiinated reaction, the critical section is at the face support, which may conservatively be taken at centre of
by releasing redundant restraints, no specific design for torsion is necessary, provided torsional support. <
stiffness is neglected in the calculation of internal forces. However, for structures, where torsion is
(d) Calculation o• 'J Maximum Allowable Shear Vuc.max - and Comparision with Vue
required to maintain equilibrium members shall be designed for torsion.
to check the adequacy of the concrete section:
Torsional reinforcement is not calculated separately for bending and shear. Instead the total
longitudinal reinforcement is deterinined for a fictitious equivalent bending moment replacing the
This has to be, done, to begin with, to check whether a given or assumed cross section is r
adequate or. not to avoid shear-compression failure. The maximum allowable ultimate shear on a '
actual bending moment and torsion. Similarly shear reinforcement is designed for a fictitious
equivalent shear replacing the actual shear and t~:sion. R.C. member is given by : C
(b) Calculation of equivalent bending moment
A member subjected to combined bending and torsion is designed fora total equivalent bending
\vuc.max =t
uc.max
xbxd c
where- t. = maximum allowable ultimate shear stress given in Table 5.6.1
momentMgivenby, Me 1 = Mu + ~ wh~re, ~ = T( ~~.~lb) ...... (7.9.1a)
' uc.mat
d· = effective depth of the section
' \
,--
Actually, the entire section including dimensions band D,. and reinforcementASl and Asc shall l,

be designed for this total equivalent bending moment.

r
 ~Il i
306 Limit State ofColiapse : Torsion
7.9.2. D~ign Steps for Design of Beam .Subjected to Torsion Chapter ·" · Sect. 7:9 Design Proedure for TDI'8101f 307
The to
de.ign of a reinforeed
Steps; - memoo. fur !oBion "' !"' I. S. oode shoJI be <JQo, 0.87 f A d . 0.87 f A d
,-,~
'i .
according the following I ·., · ·
In other words spacing of stirrups, s = Y sv i.e. s = · Y sv 1 ... (7:9;3d)'
II <(I) Calcularelhe equivalent ben<fing moment M,, given by Eq. 7.9./ and calculate lhci .,;,i, vue - vuc vus
req~irciiJ
·-.!..__

of -1 required on lensioo face. If A<; > M, calcuiare the area of reiof"'-ent where, V~ = tue xbd,V.=t uc xbdandVus =V~ -V.
~w
uc uc

I l
corresponding to moment ~2 ~ ~)
(= - and proyide it on compression face, also.
From Eq. 7.9.3b and Eq. 7.9.3d it will be obvious that according to IS code
0.87fy Asv d
(2) When, cross-sectional-dunensions (b or D) exceed 450 mm provide side face reinforcement s =
1'1'1'( v. /., .... (7.9.4a)
equal to 0.1 x b x Dll 00 distributed equallyon two wider faces with spacing not ¢cceedittg
f 300 mni orb~whichever is less.
Ul

:lp) where, Vus =( T/ b1 + Vul2.5)(d ld1) or( Vue- Vue) whichever is greater....... (7.9.4b)
:IJ; (3) Calculatt·t~quivalent ultimate shear given by Eq. 7.9.2.; V =V + 1.6 T l.b where Tu =Torsional moment,
. ~ u u .
); where, VU.and TII are, the ultimate shear and ultimate torsion .
at the critical
·
section.
.
Vu = ultimate shear force.
·•:) The critical section is at distance 'd' from the face of the· support for support offering s = spacing ofstirrup::;,
J! !. compressive reaction otherwise it shall be taken at the face of the support. b = breadth of the member.
:-J' {4) Check that Vue < Vuc.max. otherwise
. increase the section. b1 = Centre to centre distance between comer bars in the direction of the width. ,
(5) Calculate shear, Vuc , resisted by concrete :
I d1 = Centre to centre distance between comer bars in the direction of the depth
.. _ / V~ = t uc . b.d where t uc is obtained from
. Table. 5.7.1 Vue = equivalent shear given by Eq. 7.9.2
i
i\ (6) Cillculate shear carried by minimum stirrups : V . = 0.4 bd vue = shear carried by concrete.
,.__; usv.mm
{7) Therefore, shear resisted by concrete and minimum stirrups : V . =V + V . The spacing of stirrups shall satisfy the following rule:
'
~___) , ur.mm . uc usv.mm s5, [x or(x +y )14or0.75dor300mm] whicheverisless.
1 1 1
.. .... (7.9.5)
-
· (8) If, V < V . provide minimum stirrups, given by Eq. 5:6.8 as s = 0.87J.Y Asv here. x. andy, = shorter and longer dimensions of stirrups respectively,
)
._;
~ ur.mm . 04b
If V~ > Vur.mm. design the shear reinforcement. · 1-- X1 -

J (9) Design of shear reinforcement. : Shear carried by stirrups =V ·- V •f--b1 -

I

The code stipulates the following equations for design ofstirrups. ue uc ,- -

,_j Twobe
bars shilll !egg~ closed
provided vertical
such that stirrups in the form of hoops going round the comer longitudinal I Asc-
T xs V xs
.) A = u +--"'"~~--- D
0.87.fy X b1 X dl 2.5dl (0.87f)

LL ~.
'"' X ...... (7.9Ja)
1
._;
but the total transverse reinforcetiJ.entilhall not be less than, {tve - 'tuc ) \ X b· X S

J Eq. 7.9.3a can be written as : A ~

sv
s(Tu I bI +· Vu I 2.5 )
0.811, dl
0.871,

I+-- b ----!
--Til
_)
. 8. O.S7J,Asvdl 0.87-(vAsvd 0.87 J;, Asv d Fig. 7.9.1

,. or ~. ( T I b--+ V 12.5). = ( T I b + Y 12 S)' ·a' =

u ' ,a I l).
V ...... < · .3b)
79
(i) The spacing of stirrup shall satisfy Eq. 7. 9. 5. This requirement is intended to control spiral
cracking and to prevent the comer bars from bursting outwards due to resulting diagonill compression
:~here.
._/
u I u u I us
vliS= ( T,J b1 + v.,t2.S)(d /dl) . . . ' in ~ncrete stiuts (7613).
~ · Also from practical considerations of concreting , sf. 75 mm.
At the"S81Jle time minimum tol!lhransverse reinforcement shall not be less th1m :
(tue- tuc) x b x s . , . '0,81 !,Air d (ii)As the shear due to torsion occurs on all the faces, only closed :stirrups shall be provided
'_J so that even if 41egged stirrups are required all the four legs shall not be in one vertical plane but
o.s7t.y 8
P' · =· Xt- ;;;..t.·· ) h x
. ·.{:.&!11; ·:.~
;r ...... (7.9.3c) two legged double hoops encircling all comer bars shall be put side by side To hold stirrup in the
~ form of a hoop, at least one bar shall be provided at each comer. It is recommended that the
 \_j
Sect, 7.10
JVO Llmll ollOie OJ (.;Ollapse : J"orlioil Chapt"' t~\ For M20 ,Pt:max = 0.96% > p (= 0137 %) :. Section is under-reinforced. l,f
____\

"li,,
__
q
II
diameter of these bars shall not be less than 1116• ofstirrup spacing; ne
provision is al$0 used to
1
fyAst
r~
n., prevent bulging of longitudinal bars outside due to diagonal cornpressioo coming from the COiicrete Me2 = Mur = 0.87 fyAi ( 1 - fck bd )
struts. 415 X 157 _6
(iv) The longitudinal bars shall be adequately anchored at the ends and shall have necessary =0.87x415x157x265x(1- 20 x 250 x 265 )x 10 = l4.28kN.m ('
development length so that it can develop yield· stress where maximum torSion occurs~
The various dimensional details of the hoop steel are shown in Fig. 7.9.1. r\..
(I+ D!b) Tu (1 +300/250)
Comments:
I.S. Code does not make provisiof! for Mu = 0 :. Ml = Me2 = . 1.7 = 1.7 x Tu
("'
(i) Torsion combined with biaxial bending. :. 14.28 = 1.294 Tu or Tu = 14.28/1.294 = 10.03 kN.m
(ii) Torsion combined with bending in horizontal plane,
(iii) Torsion combined with axial compression or tension, ("'·
Ex. 7.10.2. A. R. C. beam rectangular in section 230mm wide and 400 mm deep is
~J6mm nos.~
(iv) Torsion co111bined with axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial bending as in case of
columns subjected'td torsional vibrations. reinforced with j nos. bars at top and 4 20 mm bars at bottom, with an effective ('
· For such cases, specialist literature (7818, 7914) may be referred to. cover of 35 mm from the nearer face. Calculate the strength of the seCtion in torsion when it
is also subjected to an ultimate shear of 10 kN and ultimate bending moment of 42kN.m. .-.
'\
7.10 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES jilso design the transverse reinforcement for the section. Assume concrete of grade M 20
-The following types of illustrative examples have been presented in this section.
Ex 7.1 0.1 Determination of Torsional Resistance of a given section under pure torsion.
and steel of grade Fe 250.
2
c
b=230 mm, D =400 mm, d' =de =35 mm, fct = 20Nimm
Ex 7.10.2 Determination of torsional resistance of a given section in presence of V, and M. Data: 2
2 l
Ex 7.1 0.3 Analysis of a spandrel beam in a horizontal grid for torsion. f = 250 N!mm2 ,A =4- $20 mm = 1256 mm ,A = 3-$16 mm = 603 mm
y • X ,..-.
Ex 7.1 0. 4 Design of a beam for given pure torsional moment. c
Ex 7.1 0.5 Design of a beam circular in plan under uniform load. V = 10 kN, M = 42 kN.m
u u

Required: (a) Allowable T,, (b) Transverse reinforcement. l

Ex. 7.10.1. Calculate the resistance in pure torsion, of a concrete beam rectangular in
section 250 mm wide and 300 mm deep when reinforced with 2 Nos, #10 mm at top and 2 nos.
#12mm at bottom provided at an effective cover of 35 mm. Assume steel of grade Fe 415 and Solutions:
c
concrete of grade M 20. (a) Calculation of Tu : (
d = D- d' = 400-35 = 365 mm.
Data: b = 250mm, D = 300mm, As1 =2-#12mm, Asc =2-#IOmm (i) Calculations for Mur = Me with bottom steel as tension steel. ~
2
fk = 20 Nlmm , f = 415 Nlmm
c y
2
For determining the1position1of neutral axis in a given doubly reinforced.section, it will first be ( ·
necessary to verify whether the stress!X in compression steel reaches 0.87/y or not. r
Required : Tu.
x = 0.53 x 365 = 193.4 mm (
Solution: u .max
When a section is under pure torsion, th·e torsional resistance is governed by Mel or ~ Whichever Assume f u = 0.87 f.y and calculate xu by. Eq. 4
~~
2 0.87 fy Ast- 0.87 fy Asc _ 0.87 x 250 x 1256-0.87 x 250 x 603 I
.
'
where, Mel is bending moment of res~ce of the section with bottom steel acting as tension X QJ6 fck b - 0.36 X 20 X 230 (-
u ',
steel.
= 85.76mm<x u.max
~
2 2
Me2 is bending moment of res~ of the section with top steel acting as tension steel. f = 700(1-d !x )=700(1-35/85.76) = 414.3Nimm :f>217.5N/mm (=0.87 x 250)
sc c u (
Since top steel is having lesser area than the bottom stee~ M,~ will govern.
:. f = 217.5 Nlmm 2
'·
For Me2 , As1 = 2 Nos. #.10 mm = 157 ~ . sc
M ur = Me = 0.36fkbx
c u (d-0.42x u )+fsc Asc (d-d)
c (,
d = 300-35 ::;2~~.• p, = 157.x lpc)l(ZSO X 265) = 0,237% 1 ,-.
\.

r
~r 110
·.. . . }.w• .OfCollapse : Torsion
~I
.._;. ~: ~

..
>:; Chaptei-f
~ Sict. ·7JO - Rlusstrative EXample 311
%!1.1
·.,_;
!·.
·,)."'

·.:._:.
.·
= [0.16 X 20 X 230 X 85.76 X (365- 0.42 X 85. 76) + 217.5 X 603 X (365.- 35)] I0-6 .
= 90kN.m ·
Assuming mild environment and 8 mm diameter of stirrups,
b1 = 230-..2 x (20+8+ 16/2)= 158mm, d1= 400-2 x 36 =328mm
1:
j!
'.'. 7HJCaladatlonfor
steel
.
M~, =M, with lop•ted as ""''on •tee( and bottom Mee/ as C""'f»'eufon
~
:. v ·= (29.8/0.158 +10/2.5) (365/328)=
~ .
214 kN .
. ..J '
!' 2 > ( vue - vuc = 166.1 kN) '
Au = 603 mm and Are == 1256 mm2·
":,._) 0.36LC« hxU + 700 (I - dC I xU ) ASC == 0.87 f.y AS
:. vus = 214kN
1 Assuming +12 mm 2-legged Fe250 grade stirrups.
.__) 0.36 X 20 X 230xU + 700 {1- 35/x) X 1256 == 0.87 X 250 X 603 Asv = 2 x.JlJ 2
2 . =226mm
Xu + 451.7xu - 18582 == 0 0.87 X 250 X 226 X 365
:J :. xu = 37.9mm s :f =. = 84 mm say 80 mm.
214 X 1000

) -..:.~2 == Mur2 == {0.36 X 20 x 230 x 37.9 (365- 0.42 x 37.9) + 700 x (I -35/37.9) Now s 0.75d, ( x1 + y 1) 14, or 300 mm, whichever is the least.
X 1256 (365- 35)] X J0-6 x1 == 230-2 (20 + 12/2) == 178 mm , y 1 == 400-2 (20 + 12/2) == 348 mm
== 44.1 kN.m (x +y 1)/4 == (178+348)/4 = 131mm, 0.75d == 0.75x365=274mm
__) 1
~~ = Mu + ~- least value = 178 mm.
'I :. Provides = 80 mm < 178 mm :. O.K.
·-' . M1 = Mel - Mu =90-42=48kNm
alsoM = M -M Provide $12 mm two legged stirrups at 80 mm clc
e2 I u
:J MI = Me2 + Mu = 44.1 + 42 == 86.1 kNm Ex. 7.10.3 :A beam CD in a horizontal grid is rigidly connected two spandrel beams
:. Allowable ~ == 48 kN.m AB and EF rigidly fixed at their ends as shown Fig. 7.10.1. The beam CD carries a uniformly
J distributed vertical load of 20 kN/m over its entire length. All beams are of uniform cross
But~ = (I + Dl~) T (I +4001230) section 250 mm wide and 500 mm deep. Neglecting the self weight of the beam calculate the
. ._) --.:.._·-'-'"-u = x T == 1.61 T ~~~
1.7 1.7 torsional moments and bending moments in the spandrel beams assuming Poisson's ratio for
1~
u u
:. Tu = ~ I 1.61 == 4811.61 == 29.8 kN.m concrete = 0.15. ,s <.. F
·:J ~£

. - . /i
(b) Calculation of Transverse Reinforcement :
vue == vu + 1.6 Tu lh = 10+ 1.6 X 29.8/0.23 == 217.3 kN !2
T
. ·j(~~~-:mai';.·== tuc.max . hd "'
_) 2 Cl! 'I I' I' I! I;
_,,. ,, =.,_ 2.8 N!mm for M20 from Table 5.8.1
t:uc.max·
._/
,I
vuc.max = 2.8
X 230 X 365/1000 = 235.1 > 217.3 kN :. O.K.

Asl ==804mm 2
I
._/
PI == 804 X I 00 I 230 X 365 = 0.96%

~)
From Table 5.8.2, for M20 concrete, t = 0.61 N/mm 2
. uc
vuc
== t uc .hd = 0.61 X 230 X 36511000 = 51.2 kN
\
.._/ v~ == v~ - vuc == 217.3-51.2 =='166.1 .kN
0.87 fyAsv d Fig. 7.10.1
._) From Eq. 7.9.4, s == v
. ~ Data: Cross beam L == 5.5 m, w == 20 kN Im, v == 0.15, b = 250 mm, D == 500 mm
..) where V·~ == ( Tu lh 1 + Vu 12.5 )(dli) or ( Vue ,.. Vuc ) whichever is gr~ter Spandrel beam L = 5.0 m, Cross beam supported at 2m from one end.
b == 250 mm, D = 500 mm.
~ Required : T and M for spandrel beams.
 Rl~~Sstrative Example 313 C
~., -- ··~r-- . .. uo ...... " ••
.Chapter 7 ,: Stet. 7.lf !".
'I . verticll.point load at Con beam ACB = Reaction of C of beam CD = {30) x 5.512 =82.5 kN. <, I

1!\ 1',.1:
p!
Solution:
ll
!!
I; , For each beam , I = blY /12 = 250 x 5003 /12 ,; 2.6 x 109 mm4
Fixed and moments for AB : 2 2
c
i~ l: /MF.BC = 82.5 x 2 x 32 /52 = 59.4 kN.m MF.AC = 82.5 x 3 x 2 /5 = 39.6 kN.m
.! i=
:i' I··
= 3
Dl b = 500/250 =2; J {3Db where, {3 = 0.229 from Table 7.2.1 . ....·~=- Maximum span moment at load point C, r'
:.j \
"
J =;: 0.229 X 500 X 2503 = 1.79 X 109 mm4 . Wab 3 ·
= -L-- l MF.AC + 5 ( MF.BC - MF.AC) 1
\.

G = E/2 (1 + v) =E/2 (1 + 0.15) = 0.435£ /·

:,
As the frame is symmetrical and also the loading is SYJllmetrical about the centre ofCD, only 8l.5 X 3 X 2 _ [39.6 + ~ ( 59.4 - 39.6)]
half the frame will be analysed using half* the stiffness for CD,
Modified flexural stiffness of CD :
c
9
= 47.52 kN.m
_ l[4EI]- 4Ex2.6x 10 _ x 6 Reactions: . ~
KF.CD - 2 L - 2 X 5500 - 0.945 10 E R = 82.5 X 2 - 59.4-=- 39.6 = 29.04 kN ' RuB = 82.5 - 29.04 = 53.46/cN ·. \.
uA (--
Torsional stiffness of AC and CB:
9 Ex. 7.10.4: Design aRC. member of square section to resist a pure ultimate torque of
K ·= GJ = 0.435£ x 1.79 x 10
0.259 x·I 06 E
r.et LCA 3000 15/cN.m. Assume concrete of grade M 20 and longitudinal steel of grade Fe 250. r
9
Data: b = I5, T = 15 kN.m, fk = 20 N!md ,f = 250 Ntmd.
- GJ - 0.435£ X 1.79 X 10 6 . . u c y
Requi~ed: To design the section and reinforcement.
X I
KT.CB - LCA - 0.389 10 E ',
2000
('
Solution:
'f.K = KF.CD + KT.CA +KT.CB = (0.945 + 0.259 + 0.389)106 E = 1.593 X 106 E For member under pure torsion r-
The distribution factors are M = M = M = M = (1 + Dlb) T 11.7 = (1+1) x 15/1.7 = 17.65 kN.m l
6 uD e1 e2 u u ·
DCD
= KF.CD = 0,945 X 10 E = 0 3 For M20 - Fe 250 , R.u.max = 2.97 Ntmd
L.K < .59 · I
l
6 Assuming d' = O.ISD, d = 0.85D 2 3
KF.CD 0.945 X 10 E, 17.65 X 106 = 2.97 X b X (0.85Dl = 2.97 X D X 0.72i5D = '2.146 D
DCB = L.K = 1.593 X 106 E = 0·244 c
DCA ~ 1- DCD - DCB = 0.163
D= ~J17.6Sx 106 = 202mm.
('
2.\46
Factored load on CD = wu = 1.5 x 20 = 30 kN/m
ProvideD= 250mm, b=250mmd' = 40mm, :. d = 250-40=2l0mm
Fixed End moment at C due to factored load on CD is <:
MF.CD = wu£2 112 = (30 x 5.5 2)/12·= 75.63 kN.m A = 0.5x20 ~1- 1- 17.6Sxl06x4.6]x2SOx210 = 431mn?-
Joint A B
st 250 l 20 X 250 X 210
2

Member AC CA BC For Mode-3 , Asc = 431 mm

2
c
Distribution Factor 0.163 :. Provide 4- $12 mm bars on tension as well as on compression side
2
Area provided = Ast = 4 x 113 = 452 mm i
Initial F. E. M.
-- Design of Transverse Reinforcement :
Distributed Moments 12.33 I 44.85 I 18.45
Equivalent shear Vue = Vu· + 1.6Tu lb
Carry-over Moments I 12.33t 18.45t I = 0 + 1.6 X 15/0.25 = 96 leN r
Final moments 1 12.33 1 12.33 1 -3o.7s 1 18.45 1 18.45 v = 2.8 X 250 X 210/1000 = 147 leN> 96 kN :. O.K. \.

uc.max
* Refer to any standard textbook on theory of Structures and the Moment Distribution Method
A = 452 mm2 , p = 462 x 100 I ( 250 x 21 0) = 0.86%, 't = 0.586 Ntmd from Table 5. 7.1
s
1
I uc c
for symmetrical frames. V = 't . bd = 0.586 X 250 X 210/1000 = 30.76 leN
t cqrry-over factor for torsional moment is I and not 1/2. uc uc
 Rlusstrative Example 315
ltull '·I
314 · Limit State 'of Collapse : Torsi~ Chapter7 &cL 1.10
'n'l ':~:~ L = R- (29) = 4.2 x 1t/,4 = 3.3 m
lu,l
I ,,,
v113
= vue - vuc· = 96- 30.76 = 65.24 kN .:Self weight= 0.5 X 1.0 X 25 = 12.5 kNim. Imposed load ws = 450.0 kN/m.
r+ Vusv.mrn. . = 0.4 bd = 0.4 X 250 X 210/1000=21 kN Tota.l working load w = 462.5 kN/m 'Ultimate load wu = 1.5 X 462.5 = 693.75 kN/m.
l!''
.I '\·.
1,..._)
v1/T.mm. = 30.76 + 21 = 51.76 leN< v113 (=65.24 leN)
I' . :. Minimum stirrups are not sufficient.
,I.. ; (a) Jtnalysis of Forces :
Now, b1 = b- 2 x (Clear cover+ diameter of stirrups + + n)
'\
,_j
(i)Maximum Hogging Moment (at the Face of Support):
! = 250-2 x (20 + 12 +1212) = 174 mm In the problem under consideration, width of coluqm support(= 550 mm) is greater than
', span/12 (i.e. 3300/12 = 275 mm). Therefore, critical section for hogging bending occurs at the face
,._}
i
dl = bI .;:, 174mm of the support rather than at the centre of support; and maximum bending momc:it will not be
:. v = ( 15/0.174 + 0)(210/174) = 104A:N > V
113 Ill
= 6514 kN calculated above. obtained by using Eq. 7.8.11, but by using Eq. 7.8.5.
:. vus = l04lcN Let the face of support make an angle ~ 1. at the centre,
~ Using +12 mm 2-legged sflJTUpS, s = 0.87f. A d I V + -_ Column Rwidth /2 _- 5~0/2 -_ .0.0655 .rad., . cos$ _- 0.9978, .szn$
1
. 1 -_ 0.0654,
· = 0.87xi5ox226~210/(104x 1000) =99.3mm 1
4200
Try +12 mm 2-legged stirrups ofFe250 at 90 mm c!c a = n/8 =22.5° =0.3927 radians, cote= 2.414
J ' <7
\-:,,, M = w k (a sin$ + 9 cot 9 cos$ - 1)
...... (Eq. 7.8.5)
x1 = 250-2(20+ 1212) = 198mm, ' y 1 = x1 = l98mm u u
_) = 693.75 X 4.22 (0.3927 X 0.0654 + 0.3927 X 2.414 X 0.9978 -1)
( x1 +y 1) /4 = (198 + 198) /4 = 99 mm, 0.75d = 0.75 x 210 =157 mm
= -347.86 kN.m = 347.86 kN.m in magnitude.
Spacings shall notexceed.x1, 0.15d, (x 1 +y 1) /4, or 300 mm, whichever is the least. Tu = wuR ($- e+a cos$- ecot9sin$ ) ....• ; (Eq.7.8.8)
__)
.:. s = 94mm> 90mm ., = 693.75 X 4.22 (0.0655- 0.3927 + 0.3927 X 0.9978-0.3927 X 2.4\4 X ()']65)
~
+
:. Provide 12 mm 2-legged stirrups at 90 mm c/c
I

OBSERVATIONS: = 32.29 kN.m

It will be observed from above that in design of transve~ reinforcement for torsion. M = (l + Dlb) T 11.7 = (l + 1000/500) x 32.29/1.7 = 56.98 kN.m.
) I u
M = M +M = 347.86+56.98=404.84kN.m.
(i) Vusv.min i.e. shear resistance of minimum stirrups being very less as compared to design
e1 u s
.. ___) shear Vus for stirrups; minimum stirrups are normally not sufficient
(ii) Maximum Sagging Moment (at Midspan):
(ii) Many-a-time~. the value( x1+y 1)14 governs the spacing oftransverse reinforcement; and This occurs at midspan and can be obtained directly by use of Eq. 7.8.11.
'
...J for spacing .of stirrups to be maximum, biD ratio shall be made as large as possible. At midspan, M = a w R2 (29); a = 0.033 from Table 7.8.1 for 29 =45° and N = 8
u.max 1 u 1
..._/
·,
Ex. 7.10.5 A ring girderfor a circular water tank is supported on 8 equispaced = 0.033 wuR.2(29)
columns 550 mm in diameter to carry a peripheral .uniformly distributed load of 450 lcN/m. = 0.03Jx693.75x4.22 x(2x0.3927)=317.18kN.m
J The mean diameter of girder is '8.4 m, and the section of girder is rectangular having width Tu = 0. Mel = Mu.max = 3 17.18 kN.m.
500 mm and depth 1000 mm. Design the reinfdrcement for the girder assuming concrete of
'I
..J grade M 20 and steel of grade Fe 415. (iii) Maximum Twisting Moment (at point of contraflexure):
Assume effective cover equal to.50 mm. It occurs at an angular distance of 9.so from support.
\
...J Data : A ring girder R = 8.412 = 4.2 m,. w = 450 kN/m, No. of columns= 8, Let $ = 9.5° = 9.5 x 1t/l80 = 0.1658 radians.or at a distmce R$ =4.2 x O.lb)ll =0.7 iii
b=500mm,D=l000mm,d'= SOmm :.d:;:I000-50 = 950min 2
from the centre of support i.e. at the point of contraflexure.
.J Diameter of column support= b' = 550 mm, T = a w R (29) ...... (Eq.7.8.13)
.;,
·fck = 20 N/mm2' f.y = 415 N/mm2• U.IIUU 3 .U
~ where, a = 0.005 from Table 7.8.1.for N = 8
3
Required: To design the reinforcement for the girder. T = 0.005 x 693.75 x 4.22 x (2 x 0.3927) =48.06 kN.m
_) :. M = {l + Dlb) T 11.7 = (1. + 1000/5000) x 48.06/1.7 = 84.81 kN.m.
u.max
I u
&,lutions : .: • : .•. . · · ... , · .
_) .,.;Angle subtended by consecutiVe~ at the~ = .29 =: 360/8 =45° =x/4
. ·_:,_.:;.;<;· . • . . '·
 ( '
Chapter 7 'sect. 7.J.o Illusstrative Example 31 7
At this section , Mu. = 0 , ~ = ~ = 84.81 kN.m. ("!
Assuming mild environment required d' =20 + 12 + I6/2 =40 mm <assumed 50 mm .·. O.K.
(iv) Maximum Shear (at Critical Section):·· PI = I256 X IOO I (5.00 X 950) = 0.264% (-
'-

Shear force at support = vu.max = totalload/2 = ( wR X .29)/2 = (693.75 X 4.2 X n/4) I 2

= II44 kN ( ii )At Midspan: Mu = 317.18 kN.m. ~
\
Since no data is available regarding the floor connecting the girder, the beam section shall be
Theoretically, according to IS:456 where aid< I (as in this problem), the value of Vue shall be r
increased by a factor. (2d/a) where a = MJVu . However, th~ same has not been allowed here
assumed as rectangular instead of a flanged one. Besides, the span being very small, the distance ~
L between the points of zeros B.M. will also be less and hence b1 will also be very small even if
because the above increase of shear strength is specified far only transverse shear. The increase
in shear strength in combination with torsional shear for low values of aid is not fully known.
0
floor exists on one side. Therefore, it is justifiable to consider the beam as rectangular instead of a c-
Therefore, the critical section for shear is taken at a distanced from the face of support i.e at a
distance of I225 mm (= 55012 + 950) from the centre of support. But the point of contraflexure
occurs at a distance of 700 mm from the centre of support, where twisting moment is maximum.
flanged beam.

Required Ast
0.5x20
415
[I- ~I- 4.6x3I7.18xi0 ]
20 X 500 X 950 2
6
xSOOx 950
('

Therfore, maximum shear at the point of contraflexure governs the design.

= 966mm2 < Ast.mm. = 1024mm2 :. A·= 1024mm
2 r
Shear force at the point of contraflexure = V - 9.5 x w /9 st
2 ,----.
· u.max u Provide 4 nos. #16 mm· + 2 Nos. #12 mm (A st = 804 + 226 = I 030 mm_ ) \..
= I I44 -9.5 x] 144/22.5 = 66! kN
Twisting moment T
u
= 4K06 kN PI = 10JOx I00/500x950 = 0.217% r-
( iii ) At the Point of Contrajlexure : (i.e. at the Point of Tumax) <..
:. Equivalent maximum design shear = vuD = 66 I + I.6 X 48.06/0.5 = 814.8 kN
Maximum allowable shear stress = V lbd .-i.e. 700 mm from support,= M1 ; 84.81 kN.m and Mu = 0 ,..
ue \

= 814.8!(500x950) =l.7IkN!mm2 <t

. uc.max :. O.K. Re uired A = · 0·5 x 20 [I-
q. st 4!5
~I - 4 6 84 81 106
· x · x
20x500x9502
] x 500 x 950 (
~

(h) Design of Longitudinal Steel :

= 251 mm2 at top (
( i) At Suprports: Mu =347.86 kN.m, Tu =32.29 kN.m, Me = 404.84 kN.m. \.
Even though 2- #16 mm (=402 m~ ) are sufficient at bottom at the point of contraflexure,
2

For M20 and Fe 415, Ru.max = 2.76 Nlmm 2 , b =500 mm 1

}404.84 X 10 6
but the bars are required to be extended by distance d beyond TPC towards the support which is
greater than 700 mm. Therefore; all the bars will be extended along the same face of the member
c
:. d = '\ 2_76 x 500 = 542mm< 950mm into the support. r
At top 4- #12 mm are more than sufficient beyond the point ofcontraflexure and 4- # 16 mm
Comments : In ring beam shear is very large compared with bending moment. Therefore, the depth of
the beam is many times governed by shear considerations. That is the reason that the depth is kept much
can be curtailed after extending for a distance of d ( = 950 mm). This distance works out to (
moregets
thant;educed.
the requirement of 600 mm from B.M. consirferation. Also with large depth the shear requirement 1650 mm (= 700+ 950) which is equal to 1/2 the span. therefore, no advantage will be obtained in
also
curtailing the bars, Hence extend all top and bottom bars throughout the span.

:. As, =
0.5jk [
fy c I -
-v 4.6 xM ]
l - fck.bd2e 1 x bd
(c) Design of Shear Reinforcement
c
(l) Critical section for shear
0.5 X 20 r -v 4.6 X 404.84 X 106 ] Critical section for shear at a distance d from the face of s!!pr::rt happen~ t~ ~.. beyond the
point of contraflexure towards the midspan. Therefore, shearreinfufc.;ment will be designed atthe
l
= 1 - 1 - 20 X 500 X 9502 x 500 x 950 = 1249 mm2
, c
·-
point of contraflexure for the combined effect of Vu and Tu.
Required A . =
0.85
-~.
y
:. A
0.85
. bd = -415 X 500 X 950 = 973
-

Sf__
= 1249 mml
. ~-
2
mm
< required A
. . (ii) Atpoint of contrajlexure
Vu = 661 kN. Jlu = 48.06 kN.m Vue = 814.1! kN.
- - .. II ---,- .- .... -- ·- ·- -- . .
~
I.

('
Provide 4 Nos.# 16mm + 4 Nos.# 12mm= 1256 mm2 in one layer. *Remarks : Check for Develop"ment length and determination of actual point of cut off and check for
shear at point of cut off etc. islejlto the reader. It may be done on the lines cf Ex. 7.10.9. r-
l

c
 1flTI
:5 318 Li"!ft State of CoiJ.Pse .: Toniow Chapter 7
'(f.'?
'I
IW
eontnflex.,~ Y·~ w;n bo
~:
~;t:!
iy) Since 1he actual critioal section hopperu, tn be beyond tho point or .,:I
,.,
!''!! based on A;1 of bottom bars for the purpose of calculation oft .
:r· For M20 mix and p1 = 0.217 %, t =OJ N/mnf. uc
; !• :. Shear resisted by concrete uc •CB'APTER .. 8
J '
vue = tuc hd = OJ X 500 X 950/1000 = J42.5 kN.
-, VUSV.mm, = 0.4 X 500 X 950/1000 = J9Q kN. LIMIT STATE OF SERVICEABILITY
,_)
:. Vurm,·n
, V + Vusv~. = 142.5 + 190 = 332.5 kN < VW_
= .UC AND DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT.
\
,__; :. Design shear reinforcement is required.

;J vus =vue -vuc =8I4.8-I42.5=6723kN

. • · 8.1. INTRODUCTION

= [~~~] [f]
'· It has already been observed in Chapter-1 that the Limit state philosophy ofdesign considers
or V the performance of a structure or rather the fitness of a structures to serve the desired function
us h 251 I
.) satisfactorily, i.e. the serviceability of the structure, as one of the important criteria of structural
hi = 500-2 (20 + 12 + 1612) = 420 mm design besides safety, economy and durability.
;__)' d1 = 1000 :_ 2 (20 + 12 + 16/2) = 920 mm One of the various limit states mentioned in Sect.J.J, those of deflection and cracking are
Vu - = 661 kN. , Tu = 48.06 kN.m important inR.C.design, (84/6, 85/9) and therefore, have been discussed at length in this chapter,
~
[ 48.06 661] [ 950] '- PART- A
'__j :. vusv :: 0.42 + 25 900 = 391 kN < 657.85 kN.
:. vuse = 672J kN LIMIT STATE OF DEFLECTION
~ Using #12 mm 2- legged stirrups, Asv = 226 mm2
8.2. SIGNIFICANCE OF' DEFLECTION AS LIMIT STATE

I
Spacings = 0.87 x 415 x 226 x 9501( 672J x I 000) :: I 15 mm say 110 mm
~ Permissible spacing is least of xl' Yp (x +y )14, 0. 75d and 300 mm
a
Deflection forms one of the important criteria or'assessing the performance of structure
under service load. The time dependent factors like creep and shrinkage (explained in
x :;:: 500-2 (20 + 12/2) = 448 mm , y 1 = 950 -,~ (20 + 12/2) = 898 mm
1 1
1
_) Sect. - 2.2.6 and 2.2. 7) further increase the deflections under sustained load. This may result in
1
(x +y1)/4 ~(448 ~
+ 898 )14 336 mm. 0.15d
:. Leastvalueis300mm> llOmm
~0.75> 950~
112mm o• 300 mm excessive deflections which may not be detrimental to the safety of the structure but may
J considerably affect the serviceability or utility of the structure, and also the load distribution
Provide# 12 mm 2- legged stirrups, at I I 0 mm clc. _ among the interconnected members. The adverse effects of d¥i:lections have already been given in
~ Region ofdesign stirrups Lsi ~._______ Sect .I. 3.2. The code takes cognisance of these bad effects an[ limits the deflection on the basis of

~ ~. ~ ~
available information and experience .
·, . Ld (Y-- Yw.mol,l (I 144-332.5 Y 693.75 !.11m from eacluldeofsuppoJt
__)
In the """inlng
12mmdiameter, port/on of0.96 ~ - sthrups of
m ( 3.3 -2 x 1.17). provide mininuim 2 • legged 8.3 SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTROL OF DEFLECTIONS

40~mm>300mm
._/
\
Spacings= 0.87x4I5x226/(0.4x500) = 8.3.1 TYPES OF DEFLECTIONS
:. Provide minimum# 12 mm 2- legged stirrups; at 300 mm clc. The study of the types of damages and their causes, and the knowledge of behaviour of
J

I
reinforced concrete members under loads showed that, the deflection ofR.C.structures could be
(d) Side face Reinforcement divided into the following categories :
..J
with spacing not exc'~~ding h or 300 mm whichever is less.
&iDee total depth exceeds 450 mm, side face steel= 0. I% of sectional area will be provided (lj Short -term Deflection : Short- term (or instantaneous or immediate) deflection is dite to
_)
w ~ initial elastic deformation of the member due to load and permanent iniposed load under service

~
Area required =O.Lx 500 x 10001100 = 500 equally spaced on both faces. conditions. This type of deflection leads to bad effects mentioned at Sr.Nos (i) to (iv) given in
___,l Provide.] Nos./l,Z mm bars (339 mm ) on e~t:h face at spacing
2 Sectl.3.2.
s = (95:0-'- 50) /(3 + I)= 225 mm < 300 mm :. O.K. (ii) Long - term Deflection : Long - term deflection is caused due to creep and sbrinbgc
~ under sustained load and additional short - term (elastic) deflection due to temponuy live loads.
J
 i Chapter 8 Sect.8.4
. -----····; (ii) The deflection (a in Fig. 8.3.1) including the effect oftemperature, creep and sbrink.aie C
of
occurring after erection partitions and the application of finishes'. should not normally exceCcl.
whicheVer~
This type of deflection leads to bad effects mentioned at Sr. No.(v) and (vi) in Sect.J.3.2
l . The eff~t of former type of deflection can be avoided by providing initial camber especially spanl350 or.20 rom less. C
appropnate~ea-
L· .in the case of large cantilevers, but the effect ofthe.latter cannot, however, be avoided without Ifthe frrst condition oftotal deflection is not satisfied, it can be made to satisfy by provisiQil of

1;
,
~
,
special measures or special deflection control provisions.
(iii) Total Deflection : The total deflection includes short- term and long -term deflections.
initial upward deflection or camber. However, if second condition is not satisfied,
sures as:e required to be adopted to reduce the deflection. The comprehensive analysis of the
factors governing allowable deflections is given in the report of ACI Commi~-
('

435 (68/10), ('

This quantity requires overall control.
The methods of computation of deflection are given in the following section. r
:
Consider a simply supported
- beam to carry a pennanent load w~m and temporary load
w . From Fig. 8.3.1 it will be observed that permanent load first causes an initial elastic
lemp
deflection a; given ~y deflection Curve -I. On keeping this load over a longer period, the .creep .
8.4 SHORT - TERM DEFLECTION '
c
and shrinkage in concrete causes further increase in deformation of beams under sustained load 8.4.1 Factors Inftuencing Short- Term Deflection
Short - term deflection is an instantaneous elastic deflection due to service load. r
leading to new deflection profile - II which gives additional deflection a due to long - term Since at working loads, reinforced concrete member practically behaves elastically, the short l
effects of creep shrinkage and tempo~ live load. This has been found to~ quite large. It is this term deflection can be calculated using elastic theory as the basis and it can be modified to take into ,----
deflection that causes cracks in walls and fmishes. The total deflection aT is obviously (a.+ a ) -account the properties peculiar to R.C.members. \
which gives total sag in the members. ' P For a beam of elastic material, deflection is given by : r
A~B a = ~· WL /EI
3
~ = a coefficient accounting for the effect of support condition and the
~

(
load distribution along the span. (

where, W = total load on the span, ~

L effective span,
modulus of elasticity ofmaterial(i.e. concrete in this case = Ec.) ('
E
moment of inertia of the section about the axis of bending,
Fig. 8.3.1 : Types of Defiedions I r
The main difficulty in calculation of deflection of a R.C.member. is determination of EI \
8.3.2. Allowable Deflection
The serviceability limit state of deflection requires control of excessive flexural deflection.
because of the properties peculiar to reinforced concrete. These are :
(i) amount and extent of flexural cracking of concrete in tension. The cracking changes
r
In practical design the requirements of deflection are met with by limiting the span to depth the effective section and hence the moment of inertia of concrete. c
ratio a8 explain!l(i inSect.8.6.3. This is because the span is the principal factor governing the (ii) variation in E modulus of elasticity of concrete.

resis~
magnitude of deflection (deflection varies with cube of span). However, for important c
structures it may be necessary to see how the structure behaves and also to predict the It bas been ot=ved in Sect 6.4. thot the oone<ete between two flexure .:.acks l
deflection. In such. cases deflection is calculated by using analytical method. The computed tension partially reducing the stress in the steel to the extent of20% to 30% . Reduction in stress ,
deflection shall be within the limits specified by the cOde.
in steel increases the effectiveness of the section and, therefore, the stiffness of the member. All "
-· From: the study based on testing of ~ctures; a committee of the Institution of Structural
these special points peculiar to concrete are incorporated in the stiffness parameter EI. The first C
1 Engineers (64/2) has recommended a limit of11250 for total deflections.
term E is short- term modulus of elasticity of concrete as given in Sect 2.2.5.1.
A survey carried out in Germany (66/9) on more than SO structures bas shown that in majority
(96%) ofthe cases, the damage was caused d~ to actual deflections exceeding the limiting value Ec = 5000 .Jlck Nlmrtt ...... (Eq. 2.2.4) C
lllso
of m
while· only 4% of the taSCs, the deflection less than mso bas caused measurable The moment of intertia of a member being a function of amount and extent of cracking, it
damage.'l'herefore., a limit ofL/250 is considered to be quite satiSfactory. alsO varies along the span depending upon the magnitude and distribution ofload and the sectional \
I.S. Code gives the. follOwing recommendations for allowable deflections : pro~rties.ln order~ llff_ive-ata-single.Yal~e-_of moment ofintertia (Jeff) repre~e~tin~ the effect of
· (i) The fmal (total) deflection (a1 in Fig. 8.3.1) due to 0llloads including the effects of
teal~, shrinkage and creep and measured from the as - cast level of the supports of floors,
varymg moment of mertta along the span, lt lS first necessary to study the vartabon m I along the r
roofs and all other horizontal members should not normally exceed span/250. span. r
r
~I
Short- Terrn Deflection 32'3
322 Limit State ofServiceability Chapter &
-Sect.BX·
. -~ on moment of inertia of concrete.
.. ·. :.

Stiffness Variation Along the Span and the Deflection Respoue ~ of area
in compression and that of transformed steel area in
.. t,eiJSion about the neutralaXt~}n partially cracked region- II (Section 2 - 2 in Fig. 8.4.1), the
8.4.2
_). a R. C. Meinber to Flexure.
moment· of iittertia obviouslyli~s t>etween I at one end (Sect 1 - 1 in Fig. 8.4.1) and I at other
I·,,
ii
!L;,.
in~ia
A R.C.member in flexure exhibits distinctly different sectional properties and streSs
:I~: distribution along the span. To understand this, let us consider a simply supported beam carrying a a
end(sectionJ- 3 iDFig. 8.4. l).Thus, R,Cb is a beam with varying moment of even
uniformly distributed load. The effect of cracking at various cross- sections along the span of the
:) beam and the stress - distribution is shown in F{g. 8. 4.1.
though cross - SeCtion and area of steel may be the same throughout. .
However, for calculation of deflections, it is necess&y to have a single value of moment of
inertia which may be called as effective moment ofinertia (IeJI which can be expressed in terms of
_affecting variables such as M. M Ir' and I . To decide such a value, it is necessary to study the
deflection response ofa R.C.member under~creasing moment right up to failure. This is known as
1
.,
_) moment- curVature relationship because the deflection is a direct function ofthe curvature. This is
( ~,,
Actual deflection CU!V8
-../
shown in Fig. 8.4.2a.
!-Region I ~egion II E·-
c 0
I

TTE;
I' I
J .E

. l
.0-
0 d Uncracked
~
I Partially cracked
~
1 1
Fully cracked~

'
.___)

.. , M
_)
Ull
'
2 3
M
:.J crc= crcbc
rcryc<crcbct fcrc<crcbc.
_)' IVFI Bt Ct

'.J
:;
1 jT -"-''
Stross diagram : 1-1
r crs<crst
2-2
.~/:Ul
crs =crst
3-3
0 cwvature-
( a ) Moment • curvature (M - ~) relationship
OefleCiion -
( b ) Moment deflection (M - 5) relationship

at section
_)
Fig. 8.4.1 : Variation of Sectional Properties aloag the Spaa
· . The beam can be broadly diyided into two regions. In region-I (from ·support to section 1-l),
J thebendingmomentis.lessthanthecrackingmomentM;.*.ofthesectionwiththeresultkeYely
section in this region remains fully uncracked and the complete section is effective in resisting
.J bending moment: Therefore, the moment of inertia I of the section for deflection calculations is
I gr- the moment of inertia of concrete gro~s cr<>~s .~.section or..of.tho tRmsfurm~gross- seetron.
)
In region - II, the bending moment Mbeing' greater than cracking.moment M,, the section.
_J gets partially cracked depending upon the difference between M and M,- The section is fully
cracked nearly up to the neutral axis at the point of maximum bending moment- the other extreme
.__)
end (Sect. 3-3 in Fig. 8.4.1) of region n. The moment of intmia I,* of ~lly cracked section is
Fig: 8.4.1 Moment- Curvature Relation for R.C. Member under Flexure
Various segments of the curve have the following significance.:
SEGMENT OA : The concrete is uncracked and the gross cross - section is effective.
M < M ; I = I where, M is cracking moment and I is moment of inertia of gross
r gr · r gr ·
cross section. ·
SEGMENT AB : The concrete in tension has cracked . In spite of section being cracked, the
beam still behaves elastically up to B. The zoneAB depends upon the percentage of steel required to
resist the given load which controls the rate at which the crack penetrates towards the neutral axis.
SEGMENT BC : It represents non - linear behaviour of both steel and concrete, and the
section at point of maximum bending moment is partially elastic and partially plastic. In other
words, it is in an elastic - plastic condition.
SEGMENT CD : Steel at the point of maximum bending mqment yields and deflection

._) *Note : l.S. Code uses suffix 'r 'instead of 'cr 'for cracked section even th~ugh rhe latter appropriately increases at cons~t yield moment value..
represents the cracked section. Logically, it is uied by other' codes. Ho.',ever, because suffix 'cr' is also used
for critical sectional value, the same notation might not have been used by /,S. Code to avoid confUsion. SEGMENT DE : Falling branch leading to failure.
.J Here suffix 'r' nu:ly I>! /:)()ked upon to represent 'reduced' tial!IJ!.
 Short- Term pejlection 325 0
material~ fur
Chapta-'8,_ $ect.8.4
...., .... " .... ~wuiiiiY
- - -J
design .,.,.W. ;.cludiDgl.S:code ignore ""'I and its oontribution to siro- ('
· Since deflection requirements are to be satisfied only at wotking loads, the portioris O.A and plicity on a safer side. ·
(

ABare of interest to us. For-computational purposes, the curve OAB needs to be well defiDecl·lbil_ ' (i) Rectangular Section : ·( Gross uncracked section )
has, therefore, been shown separately in Fig. 8.4.2b (The forms of M~+curve and M- ~ c:uryo ~ · . Ignoring reinforcement, I gr = biY/12
1
...... (8.4.1) . '
the same because deflection is a 4irect function of curvature ... Therefore, in Fig.8,4.2b, M- f'· _ , (iO Flanged section: Using standard notations given in Chap" 4 and ignoring reinforcement, \
curve is shown for portion OA instead of M- +curve). The portimr OA shows the behaviour of~ ·
wrl·
uncracked -section and OA 1 gives the deflection when the moment. M just reaches cracking . b/Yf2 + ( b - bw) D}l2 ...... (8.4.2) C
li x=
1
bwx D+(b ~tlDr
1
,.
ll
,, moment M.r The slope of the line OA may be represented by angle e which corresponds to. r,
bt'~ _ (brb.){x-D/ + b.(Dcx!'
~
w '
li,, moment of intertia of gross cross section (Igr)**.The deflection OC 1 in Fig.
. 8.4.2 (b) represents • ...... (s.•Jl (.
h the deflection based on I r (the moment ofinertia of fully cracked transformed section). Since the
. 1gr 3 3 3 \
i\i contribution of concrete (below N.A.) to moment of inertia decreases with increase in internal .
.C
I

cracking due to increase in moment, the moment of inertia Igr at A goes. on decreasing and (b) Moment of inertia of cracked ·section ( Ir ) :
\:
H becomes equal to Ir at B. Thus, defl~tion A I BI represents the actual deflection due to (M- M,) (l) Rectangular Section Fig. 8.4.3 \
Initially the depth of neutral axis is obtained by taking moments of equivalent areas of (,

!,
i.e. the difference between applied moment and cracking moment. C1 B1 is the reduction in
deflection due to contribution of the additional stiffness by concrete between flexural cracks in ·
tens_ion zone. The actual deflection OB1 can be considered as the. deflection given by effective .
·. 1--b --1 d
1

~:
h
transfon'ned section about the neutral axis. (see Fig. 2.8.1)

. . . . . T-
:.r·
• (m·1lAsc
r- b--\
..p·. o
1 ,
l

•••••
r
(
moment of inertia Jeff which may be taken as representing the combined effect of e~ for potion
OA- and efor portion AB. The slope ofline OC indicated by angle er corresponds to Ir the moment
T
1 :~ ~-:;.:.~ - .~ .{~
•• .l•A .•

xl (x·dJ
·.Q·
•
i, ~;.~·-:·~.·.\;: ,.-..
\,

NI~::.:.:.!>!-'...:· --
d
of inertia of the cracked section while the slope of line 08_ represented by angle eeffcorresponds to 0
I
A l __ :_: __
'
,!'__ ...: ,.-.._
\.
.resulting effective moment of inertia Jeff-required in determining the actual deflection OB 1 • Thus,

l
I I
I I t
due to stiffening effect of concrete in tension zone, the effective moment of inertia Jeff is greater
than the moment of inertia of cracked section and the ratio Ieffllr can be called as d' • •
Ast
• •
I
I
I
mAt
5 I
( ~ _______II
I
c
stiffni!$S f1f1Provingfactor. Since deflection is inversely proportional to stiffness the ratio I II ...is
r e.n T Cracked sec~on
Fig. 8.4.3.R.C. Rectangular Cracked Section
Equivalent section
,----.
(

'·
.

tJte deflection reduction factor which corresponds to ratio OC1 I OB 1 in Fig. 8. 4.2b. Thus Ieffcan
be obtained if slope eeffof the line OB can be well defined in terms of M, M1 Ir and I . For this it Then the moment of inertia of a cracked section is calculated using transformed section r'
is necessary first to establish the shape of the curve OAB from number of test resufts, and then
approach.
using some simplified assumptions, the expression for Jeff can be obtahted. . (a) Singly Reinforced SeCtion : r
Obtain the depth of neutral axis by taking moments of effective areas about the axis (x) \.
In short, in the process of calculation of short - term deflection, it is necessary to fiiSt
, b-212 = mA st (d-x) ...... (8.4.4)
- '',(
determine the properti;s of sections related to stiffness or rigidity namely I . I andJ
gr'r elf
Moment of inertia of the cracked section is given by :
8.4.3. Properties Of R. C. Sections Relating To Stiffness (II" I,. 1.1 lr = b,}/3 +mAst ( d -oX J2 ...... (8.4.5) (
(a) Moment of Inertia of Gross Cross- section (lg) · (b) Doubly Reinforced Section : ,-
While deciding the moment of inertia of gross cross section of a reinforced concrete beam, In this case the additional term will be for area of compression steel A~. Obtain- depth of \
ne~l axis by taking moment of effective areas under compression and tension about the neutral C
-- '

theoretically the section to be cons~dered shall be a transformed section. However, many, design
ax1s b?/2 + ( m- 1) A ( x- d ) = mA 1 (d- x) ...... ( 8.4.6)
** Note : Slope of line in Fig. 8.4.2b = tanS = M /'& sc c s (
But'&,= ~- ML /E1 :. tane = Ell~
L = (EI~L ). I= C.I 1
2 2
Moment of inertia of cracked section is given by : ... ( 8.4.7) I'
where, C = Constant = El~ L2 , and Ir = b,!!3+(m-l)A sc (x-dc yl+mAs1 (d-x/ .u.

/ :. Slope of line represents moment of intertia I to some different scale.

c
 Short - Term Deflection 32 7
}~6 .Liinit State of Serviceability Chaptel~ Sect-8.4
····.·> The effeetive moment of inertia Jeff is given by the following equation:
(c) Flanged Section ": (Singly _Reinforced)
i Neutral Axis Lying mWeb : 1r
= Cr
I
but Ir s; Jeff :;;; Igr ...... (8.4.10)
(

b D (x-D 12) = mA (d-x) 1eff ==

,~: f f f st
Mz
r ( ,. x )b w
IR' bf Df 2 12 + mAst d 1
.;
p!t I
X =
b1 D1 + mAst
.. ··~.

...... (8.(J).
:. ...

· ·.· - -M
1.2 -Ai 7
z, ( xt
-d" T
...... (8.4.10a) .,
wbcrC, c =1.2--' M
.;.._ 1 - -
d d
w
b
3 - (b - b_ )(x- D/)3 t) x·l2
...... (8.4:9)
I= f X- f
b- W
1
· + nzAst 1u - 1
I r . ··= moment of inertia
r 3 - of cracked section,
-
M, = _cracking moment= fa Igr ly1 ,
In derivingEq: 8.4.9portionofweb between theflangeandneutralaxis is ignored for simplicity..
Neutral Axis Lying In Flange : f cr =.modulus of rupture of concrete,
I gr = the moment of inertia of the gross cro~s- section about the cent:rOidal axis
For x < D , I, is same as that of rectangular section replacing b = b
_)' 1 1 y = distance fiom centroidal axis of gross cross - section, (neglecting
Note : (I) All the above equanons can he obtained in non- dimensional form by putting 1 the reinforeement) , to extreme fibre in tension, ·
_) k =xld,p1 = A,lbd andp.=A,Jbd
(2) Since deflection calculations are done for service loads under whiCh the beam is in elastic
M = maXimum moment under service toads,
z = r lever arm _
,-._/
I
' I condition, the depth of neutral axis may be obtained from usual elastic theory by taking
moments of effective areas about the neutral axis , or by the method used for determining x = depth of neutral axis below compreSsion face,
I
\ centroidaf axis of the section. d = effective depth of section,
_)
(3) In worlciiig stress method while obtaining, the depth of the neutral axis the equivalent area of b = breadth of web, and
\
compression steel (A.. ) is multiplied by (1.5m -I) to cater for long term effects of creep and bw = ·breadth of compression face.
•_j
shrinkage. But since we are calculating short term deflection the multiplying factor for Asc
shall be ( m - I) only. ·
_) (ii) ACI 318 :American Code (9511) _
American Code adopts Branson's (65/3) proposition given below.
-fc) Effective Monient of Inertia of Section (Jeff) _ When expressed in symbols of I.S.Code :
~

-J
\)
It has already been noted earlier that the effective moment of inertia for calculation of
deflection (corresponding to Oeffin Fig. 8.4:2b) is greater than the moment of inertia of cracked I<ff
M,)3I, + E- (M
~-c· M..,. )3
M.:, ] I, * I,
section (corresponding to 0, in Fig.8.4.2b). 3
... ···- (8.4.11)
~ It is interesting to study pr:opositions suggested by different codes for determining the
= I + (I -I ) ( M, )
,effective moment of inertia ( IeJi i.e. defming pointE on the curve in Fig. 8.4.2 (b), because these r gr r M
)
mar
.._) propositions differ appreciably to the extent of 20 to 30%. This shows that deflections cannot be
calculated exactly. This will also be evident from discussions in Sect. 8.6 where it will be Gali (93/9) has suggested new formula .
~ obserVed that the calculated deflections are always on the higher side as compared to actual
II. Fixed and Continuous Beams :
J
deflections. In the case of fiXed or continuous beams, determination of effective moment of inertia is
As mentioned earlier, the effective moment of inertia Jeff is a function of M, M, I, Igr' and further difficult because of the fact that in a R.C. beam, moments of inertia of sections at supports
supporting conditions. The formulae adopted by l.S: 456 and ACI are given below. and near the mid-span are usually different on account of difference in percentages of steel
.J reinforcement and diff~rent actions of sections at mid - span and at supports. For beams cast
L Simply Supported Beams and Cantilevers : monolithically with.the slab at top, the section acts as a rectangular one at supports while it acts like ;
J Beams with single curvature (i.e. same type of bending- sagging or hogging- throughout flanged section at mid-span. Thus, it becomes aproblem of beam of varying moment of inertia. In ·
the span) such a situation, it becomes necessary again to arrive at a single effective or equivalent moment of
~
 .,::.·.. ·· {"'"'-,
( .
Chapter-,8 Sect.8.4
- --- .O:J _..,..,. ,..."~UUIIIl Y 8.4.4 . Calculation of Short - Term Deflections
It lias been well "'"'blisbed in the structnml elastic thoo<Y that the m.ximum deflection· r--i
"
\
(_
inertia from the values of Jeff at mid-span and at supports. Different codes give different (in which a d.,igner is inte-d tiOm servioeability point of vieW) o=rs onljtwithin a d -
propositions again for this also. Howev~ only the I.S.Code recommendations are presented here. ol J}Jl on either side of the centre of the span and that the dif[erenc<> t;etween the mid-span r-.
l
.!
!i deflection -.;Rd the maximum defloctioo is vezy small (not e=edins 3%) for ve<tical downWBf1l
\
According to I.S.Code, all the quantities, namely, I,. Igr' and M, shall be modified by the
! f'·
following equation : . . loads and therefore. for all practical purpos<S of design. the defi<Ctionis normally calculated at r
\;!:
> I
xe = . kl (Xl + X) + (1- kl X.o
12 ...... (8.4.12)'
only.defl<Ction under the transv- load is obtaiund teadily with the help of standard
mid-spanThe
\

,.--..
,>

~ ' !
.
1 !
where, X =.- _value of quantities Ir' Igr or M, as appropriate (__

formUlae in struCtural theorY. It is usually expressed in the form :

Xe · = modified or equivalent value of X
X 1, X2 = values of X at the ~upports,
1 a= r.{}l-
WL3_. ... ~.(••4.14) (':

~ is the deflection coe(ficient wbiclt varies with the type o!loodiDB and snpport
1
EI ,...--.
X0 = value ofX at mid-span, Where. \
k = coefficient or weightage factor which depends upon the ratio k of actual
~t ~ c
1 conditions.
support moment to ftxed end moment given in Table 8.4.1 and Fig. 8A.4. The valUOI of
standard design ...,.,.~o
for - · standard """ ... gi- in robk'8.4.2. For gcocnl
or llan<ll><><>b mayhetefen<d 10. The,........,. sip is used,...,..,... r--
·able 8.4.1 :Values of Weiglltage ~oefficieot k1 for detennioiog lc for Fixed and Cootiouous Beains . ',
for several different types of loads on the beam.
1:.: I .0~: 1 0.7 1 0.81 0.911.0
sinoe deflection, at-· occurs due,. owlied momems also, .....--a pi8diOe of
k, 11.1 11.2113 11.4 expressing the mid-span defleclion in the - o f momentMo is ptofeaed .wbeiO
. M0 is the mid- r
kl , VoVJ I 0,08 I 0.16 I 0.30 I 0,50 I 0.73 I 0,91 1 0,97 I 1.00
l span moment in~ s~atends andsupportmomentin~ ~.
...... (•.4.1~)
2
,.--..
\.
M1 + M2 - -- -. ~f.\.
M0 L
where, k2 =
a·=.. --"v·-
2
. ('.
· · El ,
MFI + MF2 The vaines of ll, for some standard cases have also been given in Tabbl 8.0 aloug with
M1 ; M2 = actual support moments, and MFJ , MF2 =ftx¢ end moments. I 0
M.the deflection occurs not due rolunds onnillllenls but due 10 -
-

\ . those
Manyoftimes r.idors lib (
I
, ~
- aeep, sbriJtkage ""·AnY r.ctor whi<h- some """ature in the .,.,nbcr causes deflc<:tioO. ·r
o. I
v For iuclt cases. therefore. ft is ptofeaed 10 express defi<Ction in the fonn o f - llll gMol
... r·
o. I ; ... , ... '(8..4.16) .

t:
1.. .
' below.
I a ~ r. ~2 \II L2 r
0.
;
j
v 1 M
\.

/ where \If • = -"- =- = curvature

exampl~'
.,f 0. ~
o. ~ / R EI
/ For in the case of a simply supporl<d b<am corrying uniformly distriiJuied load C
0.2
0.1
l.--'
w over the entire span L ,
r
o.o .......!-,. S WL3 5 ,.....
.- where, W= wL, :. {}1 ~ JSi
4
0 - -~ "" "" 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 S wL = 3s4 El .\..
k2 ___...
a =wET '. 5
Fig. 8.4.4 : Coefficients for Moment of Inertia of Fixed I Continuous Beams
2 5 . wL2 L2 5 M/ ~ '"'4[ c:-
wL a = 4f xT xET = 4$ "EJ ..
Accordingly, equivalent modified moment of inertia is given by Also, M0 =T
I = k
e 1 (/+I)
1
-.-_--
2
2 + ( 1- k ) I
I o
...... (8.4.13)
andalso, a =4fET
5· MJ} == 4; \II L2 :. ~2
5
= 4f
c
c
where, 11 and li are effective moments of inertia of sections at supports and I is the effective
moment of inertia of s~tion at mid-span . ,.
\.
 LOng- Term Deflection and Total Deflection 331
330 Liniii State of 8erviceability Sect .8.5
Deflection of fixed or continuous beam can be obtained by method of superposition as follows :
__ -DIS for DefledioJJ Calculatici·- a = ass - a - d . ••• (8.4.17)

Sr. No.£·.. J.:oediDa Cise . I

Total Load
W
1 Midspan/Support
Moment M.
I p-
•
I p
1 2
where, ass = deflection of a simply supported beam due to external loads or moments,
a = deflection due to actual end moment M j at left support (using case- 12 in Table 8.4.2)
2
w

,,,._.1
\ •• • I J w WL a1 = deflection due to actual end moment M at right support (again using Case - 12 only
2
,,\t 2 of Table 8.4.2 ex~t taking moment at right end).

~
' )
.J 2 W=wL wL2 8.5 LONG - TERM DEFLECTION AND TOTAL DEFLECTION
!i
H 2
:J 8.5.1 Introduction
3 !lt.
M
A concrete member under the effect of sustained loads over a tong duration exhibits
J~ L \,1}
\ additional deflections with time ca.lled as long - term deflections due to the phenomena of.Creep
J
and shrinkage which is typical to concrete. This causes formation of new cracks and widening of
) W= wL w£1 the existing ~cks. The additional time- dependent deflections, due to creep, at times are as large
~

2 -6- ;li2: to 3 times the elastic deformations (See Sect 2.2.6) and hence the additional deflections can
J
\ be at tinies equal to or more than the short - term elastic deflections..

~
5 wL2 · The computation of total deflection due to combined effect of load, creep and shrinkage are
\
·;:;; W=wL -8- quite laborious and complicated. Therefore, empirical methods are usually employed considering :
.J
the effects oftoad, shrinkage ana creep independently and then obtaining the resultant deflection •.
J
6'
;. f.~
l/2 r
L
l/2
, ,t
w WL by adddlg all the tm<e (99/4). The defloction due to lo.ds hos alreody been <tiscussod earl"" io '
>
'?i.
4 preceding section. In this section the deflections due to shrinkage and creep will be dispussed •
\ p p . followed by total effect ofall the three. . '
.J
1
~
too- kL.,
L
t kl+j
,,
W=2P P xkL
8.5.2 Deflection due to Shrinkage
_)
(a) Shrinkage and curvature
-Shrinkage of an isolated plain concrete member merely means its volumetric free

~
w£2
._/'"'· 8
W= wL
2 12 contraction (for details see Sect. 2.2. 7) and is uniform along the• length of the member and across ·
its cross - section. When the reinforcement is embedded in it, the bond between concrete and steel .
' restrains shrinkage and produces curvature. For detennination of deflection due to shrinkage it is
J
~
't!M L My M necessary to first detennine the shrinkage curvature. If the reinforcement is unsymmetrically placerl
~ in a member, as in the case of a singly reinforced beams the shrinkage is restrained to a maximun•
(1-k) L
w extent on the reinforcement side while it is minimum at the unrestrained face. In Fig.8.5.1.
I 10 ' kl w WkL
.J
t-.- L •t 2
E represents the concrete free shrinkage and there is unifOim shortening for an unreinforced

_)
1
beam over the unit length. Es is the actual shortening at the level of tensionreinfo~ment
and &cs

t~
II W= ~L wU 5 5 is the actual shortening at the top surface.

rl
2 16 384 48 The shrinkage curvature for a singly reinforced bea:n shov.-r. i:: Fig. 8.5.1 is given by :
._)

12 , M 1
_) ;1/M
M/~ L ,j 2
I
16
.•

'cs=•.vcs=
Ecs- Es
d
Ecs (
=d• l-~cs
Es ').

) Notes: (l) W= Total load on the span (2) M" = Be•Jdtng

· moment at support in cantilevers and at .
\ E
...... (8.5.1)
---' i E k cs
m1d- span in simply supported beams (3) Deflection at free end of cantilever and at Mid-span of . ·
=k4 x~= 4
D
~
. . . ·
s1mply supported beam IS g1ven by : Deflection = a= A -
~~ Mu
= A - · - = A '¥ U
\ d
"' EI ~-' 2 EI ~-'2

~ ~
illill'I
. ,.,~. ....._ ~ UJ .llf:f"VICeatJUJty
1!1
'l
•.,,."'· > ........ - ••

i 1 I I C/JQpter .:8 Sect ;8.5 Long~ Term'])ejlection and Total Dejlectton JJJ (1
·,_./
i·! i
hi: Deflection due to shrinkage = acs = k3 \jlcs L2
,,. ;Iii,, ,--c.· •••••• (8:5.4) !'\

TT
f
J I ,. ES \.. :
wh~, k = constant representing effect of support conditions.
: !i: 3
Dd 0.5 for cantilevers, Z'
/: = 0.125 ·for simply supported beams,
0.086 for beam simply supported at one end ~d continuous at the other. r
1L . 1 XJ \ .

g . ._- = 0.063 for beam continuous or ftxed at both ends

Fig. 8.5.1
The presence of steel on compression side, obviously prevents shrinkage to a greater
-1
e~nt
I 'I'cs = .shrinkage curvature given by Eq. 8.5.2 -
Comments : The derivation ofvalues of k3 given above do not hold good if p1 and pc are not constanf
along the length. In such cases, if at all exact calculation are required acs may be determined from firsi
(\
\

,----._
\
The curvature due to shrinkage, lherefure, depends -lhe dilfereooe betwem ........... and
compression steel and support condition . IS Code bas given the same (Elf: 8.5.1) formula for
obtaining
of tension curvature ofsinglysteel
_and compression reinforced
as: section and the formula is modified et•Dsidering the effect
I principles on tne lines shown in (c) . The values of k3 given above have been derived in (c) below.

(c) End Condition Constant ( k3 ) for Shrinkage Curvature :

This is obtained by using curvature- area theorem (as derived from Mohr's moment area c
l'
\.

E
= theorem for calculation of deflection) as follows.
ljf
cs
k
4
-E_
D
..•..~'(8.5.2) .
Fig.8.5.2 gives the curvature diagrams for four cases under consideration which may be c.
where, k4 = 0.72 (pt- Pc) :$;.)
regarded as the equivalent (M/EI) diagram because M/El is the curvat1,1re due to bending. For
i
for 0.25 :S; ( p1 - Pc) < 1.0 •beams of constant depth \Ifcs diagram may be assumed to be rectangular for simplicity. '
-~Pt.
k:--L--jj_ ~ ,r-
\

k4 = 0.65
{pi- Pc)
r- ~ .., ~·· (8.5.3a) A~ · ~ acs A~13
"J PI
S: I for ( p
1
- pc) 1.0.
T
j_
c-
=100 A r-------,j_
where, p 1 = percentage of tension steel
and pc = percentage
. of compression steel
31
I hd
= I00 A~ I bd I
Curvature Diagram
't I ---,l!f
Curvature Diagram
\ "'
where, pc = 0, (a) Cantilever Beam (b) Simply Supported Beam (-

k4 = 0. 72 ..JP: for 0.25 s: p < 1.0} 1 l--x0-;..x =(L- XJ1 -.1 U4 j.- U2-J U41- ,.-.
•
I
1

0.65 = for pt _;;:: LO...JP;

. ...... (8.5.3b) Ai~B A~~~B
D E ·
'·
D = Total·depth of the member,. D C
1--x0 ....!1 .
j_
c c
shrinkag~ strain of concrete,
Ecs = Ultimate free
= 0.0003 in absenee of any test data see (Sect. 2.2. 7) ·
J.[:j
~D
'l'cs
+ I~ j_ A 1+3 Bj_
Bt ~L:JD El:=:Jt \
,.-
I

The ahovefunnuJa is a siinplified Venion of Branson's W<ldc (68/12)" put furtb by

Ganekar {77110) without much loss of accuracy T Curvature Diagram
( c ) Propped Cantilever
Curiature Diagram
d) Fixed Beam
c
(b) Shriabge Der"'~.oa : Fig. 8.5.2 Shrinkage Curvature Diagram, for Typical End. Conditions "'
~

(i) For cantilevers (Fig. 8.5.2a) ,.--.

Having known lhe shrinkase -atore 'VQ , lhe defloo&n due to shrinkase for a R.C. acs = Deflection at free end B.
(

~in
• ""'mil<r, with )lf8<:ticaJiy cons..,. .,.. of reinforeement and at COflstant •-mcity of
CX)JreasbJ: lhe"''!!lli>e as well in positive momeotreg;ons, may be ob1ainod bylhefullowing
Moment of \jlcs diagram between A and Babout B.
2
c-
\jl . L. L/2 = \jl L x (I i2)

:. k3 =
C-S

112 = 0.5
CS
c
r-
\
,.-.
 ~j/1
~~~
)J4 limit St4te of&r.iceohflity

(ii) For simply supported beam (Fig. 8.5.2b)

~a
Sect.8.5 Long- Term Deflection aiuJ Total Deflection 335

~
'I acs == Deflection at mid-span C
.~ .IIi,.
',,;. (beeaus¢'there l_s no change in the external load). With the increase in Strain, but stress remaining
constani, there is ~ decrease in the modulus of elasticity. See Fig. 8.5.3. The- modified or the
11 Moment of 1J1cs (i.e. MIEJ) diagram between C and B abo\."! !l
ii L L l reduced modulus of elasticity of concrete is known as effective elastic modulus of concrete

·~·: 8 IJIcs L2
== 'I' X - X - == -
cs 2 4 (Ece) or the sustained modulus or the Long- term modulus of elasticity.
~~I
k3 '7 l/8 == 0.125
nj
.k~:; _ (iii) For beam }ix.d ot one end and simply '"£'PPrted ot ether end {Fig 8.5.2c)
'ii
,,__/·i.
fnllris case, pos;tion o( pomt of maxUnum detlectron and, hence, Posmon of the pomt of Instantaneous loading

';...~.
~
"'lllndlexurew;u be reqnu..J to be delemdned. Trus oi>Wned byblcing- of 'Y" Wag..., CJ
1,-------:,
between A IUld B eqnating ;, to ""• """'"" , defleotion of B fiom tangeDt about A : 0.
,t'"'\ :. Moment of IJIcs diagram between A and B about B == 0.

>l
.. X X X I/2
• 1J1cs X ·1
:. x 1 == L/{2
- 1J1cs (L -x)
I
t XI

Distance of point of contraflexum D from fixed support

--.!_JJl 0.
f. (L-x
2 ==

e-
! -('
'A
xo == L - xI == L - L/ -,Jz : :
(I - 1/ Vl) L
Fig. 8.5.3 : Effect of Creep on Stress - strain Curve of Concrete
It is gi~en by Eq. 2.2.6~hi~h is reproduced here.
For the tangeDt at the po;nt of maxBnum doflect;on C to be hori,.ta( tho dmtance AD ·" DC. E .· ,
. c
:.· AC == AD + DC == 2x == 2(1- l {2) [. Ece ...... (8.5.5)
r'\ 0
1+e
y
CB. == L- 2 (I -II {2) L == L ('{i-.t) where, e = creep coefficient = & I&.I = creep strain/elastic strain
CC
;.-.:'\ Deflection at C == moment of IJIcs diagram between C and B about B
-'
&
cc
creep strain in concrete, and
== "'cs { L < 12- w12 == ljlcs L2 rfi.- 1 }2 : 2 &.
I
= initial elastic strain in concrete.
.. k3 == (12-Ii/2 == 0.086 Ece = longtermmodulus·ofelasticity.
The· value of e· depends upon number of factors but principally on the age at loading and duration
""·
.j
(iv) For beam fixed at both ends of!oading.
!"''\
By symmetry X == L/ 4 Now let us study the effect of creep on the strength and stiffness of a R.C.member under
0
flexure. The effect of creep is to cause additional strains (known as creep strains) and to change
"\ D~flection at the centre == moment of 'I'cs diagram between C and B about B. the strain diagram across the section. Since creep strain is also proportional ro stress which itself
varies linearly across the section at service loads, the modified strain diagram is also like the initial
= IJI XL- x 3- L-'1' - Lx -
L
""'\ es 4 8 cs 4 8 strain diagram. One would obviously think, therefore, that in Fig. 8. 5.4, the line - I representing the
_./

\II X
2
L 116 == 0.0625 'I'CS. L2 initial strain distribution across the section prior to occurrence ofcreep would change to line- II on
.-\
T CS
occurrence of creep. However, because of higher resistance of reinforcement to strain, .there is
_j :. k3 == 1116 or == 0.0625 ::: 0.063 practically very little increase in strain at reinforcement level, and consequently, the modified strain
.~
diagram after the oCcurrence of creep becomes the one shown by line - II in Fig. 8.5.4 which
8.5.3 Deflection. due to Creep
indicates that the neutral axis shifts towards the reinforcements, besides causing increase in slope
,.-, (:a) Effect of Creep on Stiffness and Strength of a Member from ·$.to
I
( $.I +$CC ), where, $CC represents the increase in slope due to creep. The effect of creep
.
Before proceeding to determine the deflection due to creep, it will be interesting to stUdy how
stiffue~s
is thus reduction in modulus of elasticity of concrete, increase in depth of neutral axis and increase
·-"
actually creep affects and strength of a RC. member.· As seen. earlier in Sect. 2.2.6, ' in curvature~
creep is a plastic deformation under sustained load, and its effect is to incrr..ase the Strain in·
concrete (proportional to sustainl"..d stress, unde~;
the service load conditions) at constant stress - Effect ofcreep· on stiffness : The effect of creep on stiffness can be understood by noting its
'
_./' effect on each of the two quantities E and I constituting the stiffness. It has been already noted
 Sect .8.5 JJU"o - £~ . .•• --rc-~
rt:
' /

336 Limit State of Serviceability Chapter8.·

initial deflection due to permanent loads. The formula given by J.S. code is : r-
earlier that there is decrease in Ec on account of creep. But simultaneous increase in depth of a (p ,, = a. (pe .• - a. (pe ,, ...... (8.5.6)
\_ j

. cc. erm rm1 rm1

, ~
. ICC 1 . ·
neutral ax~s i~crea~es the momen~ of inert~a Jeff~fthe section on occurrence of creep..However, a (pe . ,,1 ,= creep deflection due to permanent loads
(

acc_~
1 ~
\.
;,. the reductiOn m E iS greater than mcrease m I, With the result, that final value of the stiffness E
I.~r~ is less than its initial value E 1.117 and thus, there is increase in curvature and, hence, th':
rm1,
_ initio! dofloction plus creepdeflo<:tionduo to verm-' loodsoblained bY
~~ c ~· using long- term effective modulus of elasticity Ece c;
deflection due to creep.
~2 Mo(penni2 ~i W (penni
3
...... (8.5.6 a) c
f Ece xieffl Ece x Ieffl ci,
X

¢i+¢c; l
__ !~-------------- ---
where, E
a. ce
= E I ( 1 +e ), where e is creep coefficient
= Short-
c term deflection due to permanent load obtained by using the
,.....:;.,

I Before creep 1 (penn) short - term modulus of elasticity Ec

II After creep
A Mo (perm) L2 13 I w(perm). L
3
...... (8.5.6 b) c
•••• 1-' 2

Ec X 11JI Ec X 11JI c
Cross-section Strain diagram Stress diagram e e
Fig. 8.5.4 Stress and strain Diagrams before and after creep
where, Ec = 5000 {[:k
c N/m,( r"""

Effect of creep on strength : The effect of cr-eep on strength is practically negligible, I = effective moment of inertia based on depth ofN.A. 'x' and I obtained by using
because of marginal increase in tension in reinforcement accompanied by reduction in lever ami) eff.l
short- term E c • m = E sc
IE and M = M orm
(pe .• or W =W(perm,, in Eq. 8.4. 10
r 1
\
('"'

<fP~- elf«~ve momentofinerttll bosi'! On depth ofN.A. 'x' and I, obmined by usUig
1 ·
due to increase in depth of neutral axis. Consequently, there is practically no change in moment of · I
resistance. long- term E ce , ·m = E sIE ce and M = M-, ,, or W = W(perm1)n Eq. 8.4.10
o.,perm1 ~r-
Shifting of neutral axis nearer to reinforcement brings more area of concrete under
~
t... ~ "'t '
compression. But since total compressive force across the section is practically constant on Comments : (1) It may be noted here that Jeff and I, change with the change in depth of NA. 'x' as a
account of constant load on the beam, there is a reduction of stress in concrete. One is likely to """ uf ,lumg< b> •"""'" rotio 'm 'fr""' EfE, to E,iE" _ /lis . thd<fm'. """"""" I<IJ' I

~""byE,
(2) It may further be noted that for determining short - term deflection, short- term modulus of r''
think as to how stress reduces when the strain increases. But this situation arises because of
reduction in modulus of elasticity with increased strain. ..,••• , 51/00 {J,; om/'"""""""'"""""''"' "
m , E,i E, , 2 ' 10' /(5000 {f,;) '-

1~
Theoretically, it is very difficult to determine deflection due to creep because it requires . shall be taken in calculation x, I, and Jeff. I and not m = 2801(3 cr,b) which is given by I.S. Code for ,.--.

~ ~mi/orly
creep - time history of the R.C. member. But creep is dependent on number of factors "''"gth wJ,/M<mi -""' "re"
m•thml """"'' th< a/Nody Ia"' ""
ialo """""' th< o!fo<t t""'" I
(see Sect. 2.2.6.1) and in addition to this the stress in the member varies notonly across the uf m•PI'"'""'Iy. C""' d<fi"'' II tire '""" - """ modvlm- milo m ' E/E" x/wll 00 taka .
section but also along the length. Therefore, approximate methods are being used for practical to "''""' x.l,. ond 1 ,.,!" '""' -
tum d<jkdiM -loll,., oad am m ' 28111(3 o.,! '-"" th< '""'' C
design.
(b) Calculation of Creep Deflection - Sustained Modulus Approach
does not include the effect of creep fully.
m
71re '"""' , alx<> ,.,.,. '" '""'· by "''""· ·~ "'""'~ "'· (ol . . , _ st"") '"pi- (
ofx (at service state) while calculating I, or Jeff because the deflection calculations are carried out onlyfor ('
~
At the outset, it must be borne in mind that creep is caused by loads that are sustained for a service load conditions. The depth of neutral axis 'x' has to be obtained by elastic theory only using Eq.
long duration i.e. by permanent load only and not by temporary loads or luads acting for short (
8.4.4. and all parameters, namely, x, 1 Jeff M etc. shall be based on this value of 'x' an not of 'x.'.
duration. Therefore, while calculating the deflections due to creep (or long-term deflections only) 1

the permanent loads shall be taken into consideration. (c) Calculation 9f Creep Deflection - Multiplier Approach
The approximate methods used for calculating long-term deflections are basically of two . It has been observed in part (b) above that the sustained modulus approach is an indirect C
types. In one type, the use is made of the sustained .or the long-term or the effective modulus of approach (requiring lengthy calculations) for obtaining creep deflections. 'fhe type of ~econd
elastiCity of concrete and the approach is known as the Sustained Modulus Approach.Yu and opproaoh, nomdy tho MullipU" Appoach, is • sUnplified but oppmximote ,;,oth<>oif"' _.,btaining ("
Winter (60/6) suggested this for combined effect of creep and shrinkage. However, I.S. Code has directly the creop deflodion from initio! olastio defloctioR- Thi> •PP"""' is "'"" on tho wn<k of ·
adopted this approach for calculation of deflections only due to creep. Branson (65/3) and Ghali (93/9) and is also used by ACI (95/l). ('
According to this approach the creep def!ection is obtained after deducting short term or c-
(:-
 ·~ 'T'~:
w
tr/;
338 Limit State of Serviceability

8.5.4 Total Deflection (AT)

Chapier'8
:'!ll
nl ·$Bet •.8.5 Long - Term Deflection and Total Deflection 3 3 9
(a) LS. Code Approach:
;,!~'''i:
I
!l' · ·• (1/rit- 1/r;) = instantaneous curvature under temporary loads,
The total deflection is obviously an algebraic sum of the instantaneous (short- term) elastic
:i
!i '!•'
~·r
.
'-/
= u!
)
ii
detleotion due to Jl<I1Danontloa<f, long-- defleotion due to creep and shrinkage
neous elastic deflection due to temporary or live loads. Thus, ·
and.._ 1/rlp = long tenn curvatuie under permanent loads based on Ece
1/r. = shrinkage clirvature,
:J aT = ai{perm) + acc{perm) + acs + ai(temp) ...... (8.5.7)
:CS
1/rci:p = (1/rlp - llrip) is curvature due to creep under pennanent loads.
OR a, " ·a'"'-'moJ + "a + a11..,) """ (8.5.8) : . .Total curvature: . .
:.J
_)
where, a1.(perm,,1 = short term elastic deflection due to permanent load•obtained using short
term modulus of elasticity, E
c
1
-·=-
r
1 1
'lp
+-·- +
rcs
-
1 - -rip
[ rit
I J ...... (8.5\9)

= creep deflection due to permanent loads

+
ace{perm) Having known the CurVature, the deflection can be found out by the exP.ression :
~ a
cs
= deflection due to shrinkage = k 'I'csL2 aicc{perm) - ai{perm)
a = 132 L
2
·...... (8.5.10)
3
...... (Eq.8.5. 4)
where, 'I' = cs
k4 scs
ID ...... (Eq. 8.5..J)
) 8.5.5 D~fledion after Erection ofPartition Walls (a,)
.. a.,-.
1
1 temp
,,
1 = short term deflection due to temporary. or live load. using
·
Ec
cc temp1
a 1,-. ,, = initial plus creep deflection due to permanent loads obtained using an elastic This is the deflection which causes cracks in partition walls and finishes. It is, therefore,
J analysis with an effective modulus of elasticity, E
required _to be separated out from the total deflection. It includes deflection due to creep and
= ai (temp) +acc (temp) .. shrinkage and instantaneous elastic deflecti9ns due to temporary live loads.
,J ce
. Thus, it is given by : ·
The complete load deflection history is presented in Fig. 8.5.5. · = · a cc + +
!J a a a. ...... (8.5.11)
r--aT 9
tcc!Penn) --/
p cs 1(temp) ,

• {ai.cc{perm) - ai{perm)'} + 0 cs + ai(temp)

•J /-

Wtotal ~·~~~~~c~~~~--1
f- I __
While calculating acs only that part of shrinkage deflection shall be taken which occurs due
.~ I I
to shrinkage after application of permanent loads. See Ex. 8. 7.1
I I
wperm I
\ 8.5.6 \ Measures for Deflection Control
J
When calculated deflection exceeds permissible deflection, following measures may be
1 adopted for controlling deflection :
J Load

..___;
\ (a) Increase the cross- sectional dimensions. Increase in depth is more useful than increase
a1 Corresponding to short·term Ec in width. However, if former is not possible due to restrictions of headroom, ·the latter
J Sc Corresponding lo long·term E;:
may be adopted,
8
(b) Take advantage of the flanged action of the beam if the same is not taken in design of
~ reinforcement,
Deflection

Fig. 8.5.~ Lc~d - Deflection Curve (c) Use h_igher grade of concrete,
~
(b) BS : 8110 Approach . (d) Use mild steel reinforcement (grade Fe 250) instead of high grade steel
_) BS : 811 0 uses the method of curvature due to loads, creep and shrinkage a..id summation of (Fe 415 or Fe 500). This reduces deflection by 25%
curvature for total deflections.
(e) .Provide an initial camber of span/250 to span /400. This will control the total deflection
J llr.d= instantaneous curvature under total load based onEa but not the deflection after erection of partition walls.
1/r. = instantaneous curvature under permanent loads based on E
~ (f) Delay erection of partiti~ns, flnish;s and fixed imposed loads as long as possible. Delay
J a
of 12 months will reduce the creep deflection by about 30% .
 ( '
340 Limit State of Serviceability \'
I 1/1' Chapter· B.''~ Sect .8.6 Allowable Span/Depth Ratio Approach for Control of Deflections 341
1/:!
r

~ . IJI 8.6 ALLOWABLE SPAN I DEPTH RATIO' APPROACH FOR CONTROL.

L aT E (1- k)
c
' t' ll
,. '
OF DEFLECTIONS [82(6), 15(8), 83/4, 89/10) d == T x__s_ x -~- ...... (8.6.3)
fji
8.6.1 Neassity of the Approadi
r ~2 s c
!j,
This. is the basic equation relating Vd with all the vanable influencing factors given below.
Satisfaction of the serviceability. requirements for deflection is one of the principal (1) The neutral axis factor k, or indirectly the factors deciding the depth of neutral axis, de- c
requirement in limit state design. However it has il<len observed from practical expCiience that
pends on,
the deflection normally does not control the design except in ·case of slabs. The depth of the beam -
(a) percentage of tension steel (p1 ),
c
required from flexural requirements are between l/8th to I/15th ofthe span. These depths usually
satisfy the deflection limits under normal conditions. However; pnu:tical depths ofslabs required
for strength are usually. between L/25 to L/40 which many times are found inadequate from the
(b). percentage of compression steel ( pc ), c
(c) ratio of flange - width/web - width ( b/ bw ) in case of flanged sections.
requirements ofstiffiless especially when high grade steel is used. When deflection turns out to be
a criterion governing the cross - section, the calculations for deflection prove to be quite lengthy
c
(ii) Actual stress in steel "
and tedious not suitable for practical design. For bringing simplicity required in field practice, Codes ·
attempt to adopt· an approach of arriving at the dimensions of the member which can be safely Thus, allowable Vd ratio can be made a function ofp1,f,s p c , and b1 I bw. This is what.has
c
been adopted by design codes. We, therefore, examine how· the provisions ofi.S.Code as regards
assumed to satisfy the deflection requirements. The principal dimension of the beam deciding its
stiffuess is the depth because moment of inertia of the section forming a principal factor ofrigidity to the allowable span I depth ratio satisfy the deflection requirements. · c
E/ varies with cube of the depth, and the other prime factor deciding the actual deflection is span of
the beam since deflection also varies with the cube of the span. Thus, span and depth pi:ove to be 8.63 I.S. Code Provisions for Allowable Span I Depth Ratios c
Cl. 23.2.1 of I.S. 456- 2000 (0011) relating to control of deflection states that for beams and
critical variables deciding the stiffiless. The attempt of design codes is to arrive at an appropriate
span to depth ratios which would satisfy the stiffiless condition for. serviceability and avoid slabs, the vertical deflection limits may generally be assumed to be satisfied if span effective depth c
calculation ofdeflections. The span/depth ratio controlling the deflection ·can be arrived at if the (i;·e. Vd) ratio of the member does not exceed the allowable values obtained as below:
deflection is expressed in te.nns. of the maximum bending moment 'in the-member or, to be more '
(a) Basic values of(Span I effective depth) ratio (Vd) basic for spans up to 10m are given
c
precise, in terms of the maximum stress in the reinforcement, in case of R.C. beams. Ltit us,
therefore, examine this correlation between the stress in the reinforcement and the deflection. in Table 8.6.1 · c
Table 8.6.1 Basic .Values of Span to Effective Depth ~tio
8.6.2 Relation between Maximum Stress and Maximum Deflection
As seen in Sect. 8.4.4, elastic deflection can be expressed as End Condition Basic Lid Ratio
c
ML 2 Cantilever 7 \.
2
a.I == ~ ---!!._
E! ...... (8.6.1)
c elf
where M0 is the maximum bending moment in the beam, ~ to be obtairied from Table 8.4.2
2
Simply supported member 20
c
·Expressing total deflection as some multiple ofelastic deflection we get, Fixed or continuous member 26
r'--
aT == y x ai
...... (8.6.2).
where y == aT I ai (b) The basic Vd ratio given in (a) above shall be modified by a modification factor a!' which
accounts for the effect of percentage of tension steel p1 and steel. stress fs of service loads. The
c
aT y~2 [ E!~ c elf
J
Lz modification factor (M.F.) a 1 is obtained as per Fig. 8.6.1. .
It may be noted from Fig. 8.6.1 that the modification factor a 1 reduces with increase in
C
Mo 1 Es /; p 1 %. This is because with the increase in required p1 , the depthx of the neutral axis increases. It C
But ~
c elf
·== R == d- kd == E(l - k)d can be seen from Eq. 8.6.3 thatVdreduces with the increase in value ofx (i.e. k) whenfs is kept
where, f s is the actual maximum stress in steel corresponding toM0 .
constant. It may further be noted that as p 1 increases M.F., a 1 reduces and the required effective C
depth increases. In the case of flanged section, since in most of the cases neutral axis lies in the
, :. aT=
[ " J
Y~zLE(l-k)~L
2
:.
aT
T == Y~2
r f. J
LEs(l-k)dj
flange and since beam acts as if it is a rec~ngular section of width b the percentage p1 deciding
1
a 1 is based on area bfQ Therefore for flanged section pi% = -100 As/ (b x d)
r
1
c
c
ui1
Jj ··34~ Limit. State of Serv.iceahility
., ..
il:l Chapter 8;'(, ~t-8-~
. Allowable Span/Depth Ratio Approach for Control oj Deflections 343
Jl
l;, j
Rnrwua: 1) Sinc~thefactoroj0.58hosbeenarrivedasf.=f. 1(1.5 x 1.15) (see Eq.8.6.6),
:·:.
,- :· _ ::(~.~.on the area of compression reinforcement the value ofUdis further modified
!l : y . ... ·
:;· .
in - II
,~(1~ g/1111 Flg.8.6;Jfor fs =. 290 Nlmm 1 , / 1 = 240 ·, and / = 145 Ni,m 1
11
by Jn.UltipJYing'
.
with the modification factor
.
a 2 obtained
.
as per Fig.8.6.2. As p %increases
c
~"'-&-·2.Stl>l(l.5. X 1.15) .. U5 N/;,z} Cllll be directly IISedjor steefgrad4'F~ 500, Fe 415 tl1ld Fe 250 .. modification factor also increases and the required effective depth decreases: This is because the
~-~ to the percentage if te_nsio, steel reqvir~d (0012, 0113). increase in p %reduce the depth of neutral axis and, therefore, increase the allowable Lid ratio.
. (2) i7Je dePtJt uf the slab in majority casu is governed by tkjleciion criteria. -Initially actual itreu . "..-
SeCOildty, presence of .compression steel also reduces deflection due to creep and shrinkage~
. c

J Iii; ~lui fs cailnot be predicted with the 1'UIIit M.F. a 1 cannot be qbldined and henee the slab depth fro, :~;Lid ratio is bound to increase with percentage of compression reinforcement p c %.

- --
t!ii/liilion of criteria. Further the diskince between two curves in Fig 8.6.1 is small in comparison with.\
\ •'iJ». ~--of stress between them which is as large as 50 N/m,Z with the ~i proper ass~ment of f 1. i
f..- ·, ·:.~

' Wdw of f. corresponding top; % will be too approximate. Therefore, initi~ assume p %_ , Dnd .
J
1
C\11. I
v v
· de~ a 1 from the correspondence given for the different grades of steel ,and the service streSs, a.r·
tl
J detaikd above, sp t/jat the tkpth of the slab can be assessed ~ 1. 3 /
.!
(3) It is_·tdso licit known t(l what graik of steel the va/ues of 120 N/m,Z and 190 N/m,Z. c~spotul
/
. ~- 1.2
J v'"'
.B 1.1
""
·j ::E I/
"8 1.0 IC.-..J---L-.1.--...1---'-
0 0.5 ,1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Percentage of Compression Reinforcement
J 2.
1\ \ Fig. 8.6.2 Modification Factor for Compression Reinforcement

_) 1.
1\ \ 1\ .I\ (d) In the case of a flanged beam, a third modification factor a 3 is required to be applied as
\
'
.\ \. '\

I
per Fig 8. 6.3
"
_1. I t\.
J 1\ \
' I'- 'r-.. 1.00

J
1. ~
·-,
1\
·\
1'.. -~ r-...
r-.. f-...
~
r-- ~"'t~o l 0.95
L
; 1.2
" r-...
I'
1---~-..
1"-- t.....
~ .. 146
r-.:.: ,.... .._ ~ I
.J 2~ :-..;, j-..

- !"'"' t- ...... ~

r--- .s 0.95
IL
1:0
" f"". !--. t- ,_ '- '""" 's"' 19() 0
.l!!
I
- ~"'~40
.. \
_) c t- I""'- r-+- c
,g 0.8 .... .9 0.85
/
I~ ::,~91: (U

_j ~ ,g
;;
-I I
'8 0.6 0
:::0 0.80
~
_j 0.4I Note : fs = Steel Stress of Service Loads in N/mm2
0.75
_) 0,2~
0.70 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
J 0 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 . 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 Ratio of by;t1- - •
Percentage Tension Reinforcement Pt% Fig. 8.6.3 Modification Facton for Flanged Beams
J
(e) For beam and slabs except cantilevers with spans more than I0 m, a fourth modification
f =0_58 t Area of cross-sect~on of steel requ~red =O.SB f. Ast (regd.l
_) s Y Area of cross-sectiOn of steel provided Y Ast (prov.) factor a shall be applied. It is given by:
4
a = IO/span.
'I Fig. 8.6.1 Modification Factor for Tension Reinforcement 4
-._./ For spans greater than I0 m, the deflection after erection of partition walls becomes more
critical than the total deflection. So to avoid damage to walls and finishes, Vd ratio is reduced by a
_)
 Allowable Span/Depth Ratio Approach for Control of Deflections 345
c
!!'1'I1r:
344 Limit State ojSiirviceability Chapte/8 Sect .8.6
1U'C different than those of either simply supported or a fixed beam. Therefore, a modifiC!ltion
c
: ~\
•il!!i
';]
factor a 4. For cantilever with span above I0 m, the deflection calculations are obligatory. {actor is required to take into ~unt the case of partial fixity also. This situation is particularly ('
~! very common when redistribUtion· of moments is allowed. The design moments in that case is
:! Thus; final allowable Ud ratio taking all the factors into consideration is given by
at\vays less than the maximum elastic moment and I.S.Code allows redistribution of moments at
:!'''
!
(II~ allowable = al.~.a3"a4 (IJCQbasic ··· ··· (8.6.4) setvicle load condition also. B.S.811 0 has already taken this into consideration by incorporating a
('
~1
factor 1\ representing redistribution of moment, in the relation forfs- the maximum stress. l
For two- way slabs with short spans up to 3.5 m and for loading class up to 3000 N/m2• i./
for a live load up to JkN/m2, I.S.Code makes s¢'cial provision \>y Cl. 24.1. In this case the ratio is,' ~ Secondly, the Ud approach adopts the deflection formulae, based on one way bending.

however, span/total depth and not span/effective depth. The allowable LID ratio is given in Table
However, two - way bending reduces the deflection to a considerable extent. It may be observed
from Eq. 8.6.3. that allowable Vd ratio varies inversely with the factor !32 in the expression
c
\
~-}1/IEI. For a ~o way square slab simply supported on all sides a= 0.00406 wL /EJ'
8.6.2 4
~ a= ('
Table 8.6.2 LID ratio for Two-way Slab for.Short Span Lx ~ 3.5 m and Lo~ding class~ 3000 Ntm2 3
{where I' = blY/{12 (1-v 2 )} = 0.00406 WL /EI if Poisson's ratio (v) is taken equal to zero on
Grade of Steel ('
End Condition safer side giving /'= I and W = wL. Also M0 = 0.0479WL (59/1). Therefore,
Fe 250 Fe 415 13 = 0.00406/0.0479 = 0.08476 as against a value of 132 = 5/48 = 0.10416 for one-way simply (
'
Simply supported slabs 35 28 2
supported slab. Since !3 for two-way slab is less th\lll that for one-way slab, and since allowable
2
Continuous slabs 40 32 J}d ratio varies inversely with 13 , the allowable Vd ratio has to be higher for two-way slab than ('
2
that for one- way slab. In the present case Lid approach applied to two-way slab will lead to large
thickness (0 I/6). Thus, the modification factor to account for the two - w,~y action is also
'ode does not specify any factor for steel of grade Fe 500. r'
\
In calculation of IJD or IJd ratio of a two-way slab, L shall be taken as short span. For
two-way slabs with short span greater than 3.5 m and/or live load greater than 3 kN/m 2, the
necessary.
~.
c
allowable IJd ~tio will be the same as those for beam and one way slab discussed earlier. (2) RATIO FOR OVERHANGING BEAMS I SLABS ,,
In case of overhanging beam I slab no separate value of basic Vd ratib 'plfu: be given, because (
Comments : The Code has used the wording 'class of loading not exceeding 3000 N/m1 ' in the above in this beam both maximum span deflection as well as maximum deflection at free-end of
clause. But it will be seen from the following examples that the wording of the clause is ambiguous and overhang, will govern. For the portion between supports, basic Vd ratio shall be interpolated ('
unrealistic. The given VD ratio would be applicable to a slab with floor finish 1 kNim 2, partition wall between IJd = 20 when moment at supports (M') is zero, to Lid= 26 for mom~nt at support nearly
allowance of 1 kN!m 2 and a live load of 3 kN/m1 giving total imposed load of 5 kN/m 2 while it will not be equal to fixed end moment, considering portion between the supports as a' fixed beam. Thus,
J)d= 20 for M'IMF =0 and Vd= 26 for M'IMF = 1. The allowable Lid ratio for the overhang may
c
allowed for a slab with floor finish 0.5 kNI~ and a live load of 4 kN!m 2 and no partition wall allowance
giving total imposed load of 4.5 kNI~ only, simply because live load is greater than 3 kN!m2. be conservatively taken equal to 7 for cantilever if M'IMF < 1. For M'IMF > 1, J}d shall be less (
Similarly the clause would be applicable to slab with span 3.5 m and total impos~d load 5 kN/m1 shown than 7, and it would be appropriate not to use Lid ratio for such cases. Deflection check shall be
in the first case above giving moment due to imposed load M1 = p wsL1 = p x 5 x 3.52 = 61.25P , but not taken by actual deflection calculations: (
applicable to a slab, with span 3.6 m and total imposed load ofhardly 2.6 kN!m 2 (LL = 2 kN!m 1 and floor finish As already pointed out in our earlier edition ( 93/11 ) that Lid should be made as a function
0. 6 kNI~) giving moment due to imposed load l.fs = p x 2. 6 x 3. 6 2 = 33. 7p. . Both these cases bring ·.of actual stress in steel and aiso the ratio of Ast.reqd'!Ast.prov· should be taken il).tO account. ('
about the lack of preciseness and clarity in thrt wording of the clause.lt would have been proper that instead
,,I. Accordingly graphs have now been given in LS: 456-2000 for steel stress at service load. The
of referring simply to class of loading and spah( the limit for applicability of the clause was imposed on total (
imposed load and span or more precisely on the design moment since Vd ratio depends upon the stress f. rather expression for computation of service load given takes into consideration the ratio of
than on the live load or span. (
. ·.· _!AsJ.prov.
.A.....,.,. , as follows :
Comments on Inadequacy of Sub - Clause (a) relating to Basic Lid Ratio : fs = O.SS f Area ~f cross-section of steelrequired ...... ( 8_65 )
('
While giving values of basic Lid ratios only for the three standard support conditions, Code Y Area of cross-section of steel provided
has connived at presence of other types of support conditions requiring special modification factor This expression can be derived as follows. (
to account for the effect of change in support conditions represents by ~ 2 in Eq. 8.6.3. For Mur = 0.87fy Ast.reqd x zu = Mu = MEu ...... I
example, a beam fixed at one end only, requires special modification factor to give a value of basic
Lid ratio in between 20 and 26 ; because deflections in these two cases
Also MEw
· = fs. Ast.prov x z c
c
I!~·
II..!I"1
_).
_346 Limit_ State of Serviceability

But MEU
.
= l.S M..w
"'"·
= 1.5 f..A:..•..prDV. X--' z
. I
Chapter 8

... ..:u
,
...

\
.
.

r.
.

Sect .8.7
Rect. Section"' b = 300 mm; D = 550 mm, d' = SO.mm;
:. d = 550- SO= SOOmm.
Illustrative E;xamples .347

'· Ast = 10-# 16 mm ' . Asc = 3-# 16mm · ·• ·

l ',,
!l: q From Eq. I and H, - · Concrete- M20, Steel - Fe 415, Creep coefficientS= l.6, &5c = 0.0003.:
i'l;

'··v·-' Pb x 1.5 f..A:..

...prov
• x z= 0.871y A......requ x z II
J
\

it:i
I

:
j ..
lgnoriitg the difference between zII and z and taking z = zII
. 0.811, A;,_req _ l
I. = - - ·- _A___ X -
· I Reqlllred (a) Total deflection arand
(b) Deflection after erection of partition walls (a 2).

j 1
l.S · 1Lprov (3b

J
\
A
· J, = 0.58 J, Astreq X
stprav
t b
... (8.6.6)
1
Solution :
Time independent quantities :
w = DL + LL/4 = 16 + 16/4 = 20kN/mUDLand 17kNpoint1oadatfreeend
perm
where, (36 = factor' representing amount of redistribution of moments = MDU I MEu L = 3m
J 1- 300 -l
However , the code ignores the effect on J, due to redi~tribution of moments.

_)
BS : 8110 ( 8514) has taken into account the effect of redistribution of moments and
multiplies I, given in equation by factor l/(3. where, (3 is the ratio of design moment after.
~--"~,,.. ::··::11
lto-#16~

., redistribution to elastic ultimate moment before redistribution therefore, the allowable Lid ratio t- 3000 . 4 d=550

81
J , increases and hence depth required is Jess. This is just logicaL
Permanent toad =DL + LU4+17 kN
_) 8.7. ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES Section
/
·,- i
. Fig. 8.7.1
2
_) · The following types of problems have been Illustrated in this section. M = B.M.atfixedendduetopermanent1oad.= 20x3 /2 + 17 x 3 = l41kN.m
o.perm ·
J Mtotal = (16 + 16) x 32/2 + 17 x 3 = 195 kN.m
Ex.8. 7.1 Total Deflection.
A5 = 10 of16mm= 10 x 201 =2010mm2 , p1 = (2010 x 100)/(300 x 500) = 1.34%
- Cantilever beam with point load and U.D.Ioad.
_) Ex. B. 7.2 Siinplysuppoitslabwith UDL. A 1 = 3 of16mm = 3:.- .l01 = 603 m,il, p = (603 x 100)/(300 x 500) = 0.4%
$C c
Ex.8.7.3 Total Deflection.
~)
(p - pc)= 1.34- 0.4= 0.94%
- Two- span continuous beam with overhangs, central point loads and U.D. 1 ,/
E = 200,000 Nfm,il , b = b = 300 mm
loads at overhanging ends. s w
~ Rectangular section - doubly reinforced at supports. Now Mr =fer· lcrly1 .
fer = 0.7 ~ = 0.7 ..[20 == 3.13 Nfm,il 6
.
- T section - singly reinforced at mid-spans. 4
_) ' Ex. B. 7.4 · Beam in Ex. 8. 7.3 Check by allowable Lid ratio approach. I = biY/12 = 300 x 5503/12 = 4159.4 x 10 mm
cr .
' 'I Ex. 8. 7.1 : A cantilever beam 3 m long carries a uniformly distributed dead load of y = D/2 = 550/2 = 275 mm 6
J
16 kN/m and live load also·of 16 kN/m together with a point load of 17 kN acting M1 = 3.13 x (4159.4 x 106 )/275 = 47.34 x 10 N.mm = 47.34 kN.m
r
~ pennanently at the free end. The beam, rectangular in section of width 3QO mm and total ·"
.1

-. ··_dqth 550 mm, i& reinforced with 10 Nos.# 16. mm bars on tension side, and 3 Nos.# 16 mm
_) illl COIIIj11'eUion side, with an effective cover 50 mm on both the faces. Assuming concrete of
groiie M 10, steel of grOde .Fe 415, permanent load equal to dead ioad plus 1/4th live load,
:; creep coefficinlt .;, 1.6 and ultimate_ shrinkage strain 0.0003, calculate the total deflection
~ing deflection due to creep and shrinkage and deflection after thf! erection of parti-
~wcrlh
**Note : While calculating x for short term dejlec(ion, modular ratio !I•
~ not (1.5 m --1) which . is taken for calculating equivalent area in compression for steel in working stress
Data : A cantilever. L = 3m , DL = 16 kN/m, LL = 16 kN/m, ~ethod. ,- _,::-~·
I
'-../
permanent point load = 17 leN, at free end. Permanent load = DL + LL/4.
,_)
 Illustrative Examples ·3 49

l
Chapter 8 v ,Sect.. 8.7
c
t\ .·.-
.. qcs ::: k 'VcsL1 := 0.5 X {0.319 X 10-6) X 3
2
X
6
10
II :. 300 ~/2 + 7.94 x 603(x- 50)= 8.94 x 20lO(SOO- x), :. x = 183.5 mm ~~-··
a = 1.44 mm
3
r
I! z= d-x/3 = 500-183.5/3 == 438.8 mm cs
:Ir, Ir = bXJ/3 +(m-l)A sc (x- ctl == m:A st (d-xl Long t~ deflections due to creep : ('
:I = 3oo x 183.5313 + 7.94 x 603(183.5- soi 1-. ss4 E = E l(l + e ) = 22360 I ( 1 + 1.6) = 8600 N/mnf
·:~
x 2010 (500 -I83.sy I(_
. i = 617.88+85.33+ 1800 == 2503 x 10 mm
6 4
ce c
m = E I E = 200000/8600 = 23 .26 c
~,.~\·.fw~·-·
· s ce
I I (m -1) = 22.26 (
I = r = L J: l ... .. .(Eq. 8.4.10) b212 + (m-1)-A sc (:X- d') = mAst·(d-x)
eff Mz xb C'r
12--r·-(1 --)....!!
. M d d b ·_.:,:";.r 300~/2 + 22.26 X603(x- 50)= 23.26 X 2010(500 -X) (
'i.~:

For total load, .. x = 241,mm

M = Mtotal = 195 kN.m
'·'·
'
~:{.J Ir == bX313 +(m-l)Asc (x- d'Y c + mA st (d-xY r
= 300 X 24i/3 + 22.26 X 603(247- SOY + 23.26 X 2010 (500- 247i
47.34 438.8 ( l 183.5 ) 1 = •l.065 > 1 ... ... (Eq. 8.4.JQal!!
c = J. 2 - T9S X 500 - 5QQ X
= 5020 x l0 mm
6 4 c
6 4
= I = 2503 x 10 mm z = d -x/3 = 500-247/3 = 418 mm
r
•• (
111
e.JJ. r
bw
For pennanent load, C == 1.2
Mr
-M Z X
x d ( 1-d )b ...... (Eq. 8.4.10a).
M == Mo(perm) = 141 kN.m ,-
\.
= For creep, M = = 141 kN.m
1 013 > 1
- 47.34 X 438.8 ( 1 _ 183.5 ) X } :: MO(perm)
C 1. 2 141 500 500 . 247 c
I effl = I r = 2503 x 10 mm4
6
;, C = }.2 - w
47.34
X
418
500
(1 "SQQ ) X 1 = 1.058 > 1

. L~ W
1
--~pe_r_m_
L3 For cantilever, 1\ = 1/8 for UDLt (Table 8.4..2)
·
.. I
, eff
= I
r
= 5020
·
x 10 mm
6 4
r
~1 = 1/3 for pointload 1
:. ai(perm) = EJefJI and
I }:~ I WpermL
3
c
1 (20x3)X3 3 xl0 12 1 17x33 x !()12 •• ai.cc(perm) = Ece I ejJI
·a
•• i(perm)
=-x
8 22360 X 2503 X J06
+-x
3 22360 X 2503 X
.
106 12 11 x 33 :do 12
r
1 (20x3)x3 3 x 10 +1- x - - - - - -
= 6.35 mm
1 (32x3)x3 3 xJ0 12 1 17 X 33 X 1012
-X
8 8600 X 5020 X 10
6 3 8600 X 5020 X 10
6
c
=- X
+. J
ai {lola/) .8 22360
= 8.52 mm
X 2503 X J0 6 X 22360 X 2503 X '106 aLcc(perm)
acc (perm)
== 4.69 + 3.54 = 8.23 mm
= ai.cc (perm) - ai (perm) = 8.23 - 6.35 == 1.88 ·mm
c
0 i (temp) = 0 ; (total) - ai (perm) = 8.52 - 6.3 s = 2.17 mm
(a) Total Deflection : ·
Long term deflection due to shrinkage ~
'(
aT = a.1.cc(perm) + acs +a.1.temp
.... , (Eq. 85.8}
c
acs = k3 'VcsL2. For cantilevers, k3 = 0.5 ...... (Eq. &5.4)
·== 8.23 + 1.44 + 2.17 = 11.84 mm ,-
'Vcs = k4Ecs ID ...... (Eq. 8.5.1) \
Alternatively
Since (p1 p) = 0.94% <I%
- ..: ... (Eq. 8.5.Ja) ...... (Eq. 8.5.8)
.. k4 = 0.72 (pi - P) f ..fii; 1- 1 = 0.72 X 0.94 I ~JI.34 = 0.585
aT = a.
1. total
+ a
cc(perm)
+a
cs c
== 8.52 + 1.88 + 1.44 = ~1.84 mm
'Vcs = k4 EjD = 0.585x 0.0003/550 = 0.319 xi0-6 (·;Ecs=0.003)
Allowable deflection
c
t Note : Here since 1~ are of two difforent types (namely , UDL and point load), the values of~ 1 are r= L/25\J = 31..\00/250 = 12 mm > 11.84 mm :. O.K. r
different for the two typetTherefore, deflection shall be calculated by using Eq. 8.4.16 and not ~Y Eq. 8.4.17
r
 \
Illustrative Examples 351
\IT! 350 Limit State of Serviceabilitj .~s~~~.... .s. 1
,__; Chapter'8 ~::; ·. ·' '
/, = bx'/3 + mA. (d- X)' " 1000 X 29.3s'/3 + SX 558 (126- 29.J8)'
li !\ (b)· Deflection after erection of partition walls : = ( 8.45 + 41.67) X 10
6
=
6 4
'j 50.12 X 10 mm 2
i·
·II: aP = shrinkage deflection after load transfer i.e. after 28 days Total load = 25 x 0.16 + 1.5 +4 = 9.5 k.Nim :. MtDial = 9.5 x 3.5 /8"" 14.55 k.N.m
\
·,...}. = a cs + a~(perm) + ai(temp)
Shrinkage strain occurring in 1 month = 50 % (See Sect. 2:2. 7) For Total load:
_)
:. ap . = 0.5 acs + acc(perm) + ai(temp)
· C:::ol2-~x
14.55 ~
126 (1 - ~)
126 x-
l - 0.476 ... ...(Eq. 8.4.10a)

J = 0.5 x 1.44 + 1.88 + 2.17 = 4.77 mm

Allowable Deflection = U3 50 or 20 mm whichever is less
/<If " 50.12 X tlf
1).476 s 105 X io' .... v =341 X 1o' ,..•) ruu\ > /,( = 492) X 1o'

_) = 3000/350 = 8.57 mm >ap (= 4.77

.
:rnm) :. Safe 4
. . Jeff• ;;.lOS x Iff mm
._) A simply supported one- WaY slab'3.5 m spw1 carries live load of 4 kNlnl
Ex. 8.7.2.: For permsment load :
and floor finish of 1,5 kNlnl Concrete and steel grarJes used are M 25" and Fe 4n The 9.65 kN.m
1.2 - ~ X~ l~
Mo(perm) ""
_) depth of 'the slab provided is 160 mm with a clear cover of 30 mm. The steel consistS of# C ::: ( ) x} "' 0 108
9.65 126 126 . 4
Bmm @ 90mm de. Assume permanent load equal to dead load plus 20 % of live load. 6 6 4
_] Calculate the total;·maximum deflection and check by allowable Ud approach. .. 14/1 = 50.12
O.lOS
xl0 464 x 1o' ,..• J 1.,. (= 314 d0 mm ) :. 1,.111 = 341 x 1o' mm

= 2.~1WpermL = -5
3 3 11
_) Given: L = 3.5m, LL=4kNlnl, FF= 1.5, jck= 25 N/111111-, f, =415Nimnr, a. x
(6.3 x 3.5) x 3.5 x 10
6 = 1.444 mm
D = 160 mn_1, clear cover= 30 mm :. effective depth = d = 160- 30 - 8/2 = 126 mm ·'(perm) E1 384 25000 x (341 xl0 )
.J AS/ = #8@ 90 etc Area provided = Ast = 1000 X 50.26/90 = 558 mnr a =
c effl
-_5 x {9.5
--
3
X 3.5) X').$ X 10\2
6 = 7 07 mm
P, = 100 X 558/( 1000 X 126) = 0.44 . j (total) 384 25000 X (\05 X 10 ) .
._)
Pennanent load ,;, 25 x 0.16'+ l.5 + 0.2 x 4 = 6.3 kN/nr •. ai (temp) = 7.07- 1.444 = 5.626 mm
___) . Temporary load = 0.8 x 4 = 3.2 kNinr
(b) Long term deflection due to shrinkage :
1
Requir.ed : Maximum deflection ,·and check depth by Lid approach. acs = k 'P cs L2 , for simple support k3 = .125
_) 'I'a = k 3 'aID ... .•.(Eq. 8.5.1)
Solution : For details ofdesign of slab see Ex. 9.4.1
_) Wperm ~ DL +. 0.2 LL= 25 x 0.16 + LS +0.2 x 4 =6.3 kN/m Fo• P, < 14 ond P, = 0, k = 0.12-fP, = 0.72 .[[44 = 0.4776 ...(Eq. 8S3b)
4
Mo. perm/,, = 6.3 x 3.52/8 = 9.65 kN.m = 0.0003
J 0
fer = 0.7fJ; = 0.7{25 =3.5Nfm,Jl
t
.". 'fcs • 0.4776 X 0.0003/160 " 0.8955 X JO-' ......(Eq. 8.5.2)
2
I = 1000 x 1603 /12 = 341 x 106 mm4 , y1 = D/2 = 160/2 = 80 mm .. aacs • 0.125 x ( 0.8955 x Hr') x (3.5 x 1000) • 1.37 mm ......(Eq. 8.5.4)
_)
gr 6 .
Mr =f.crgr I ly,I
Mr = 3.5x(341 x}O )/80=14.9x 1~ N.mm= 14.9kN.m
J (c) Long term deflection due to creep. : 9615.4 Nl mrrf
Short - term deflections E = E I ( l + e) = 25000 I ( l + 1.6 )
_) Ec = 5000 -fJ; = 5000 {2s,;, 25000 Nfm,J mce = Ec IE = 2 x 105 /9615.4 = 20.8
._)
,, . c = 2 X 10 I 2sooo =
m = Es IE
Depth of neutral axis :
5
. 8 \ Depth of neutral axis :
s ce

\000 x 212 = 20.Sx558(l26-x)

b.;tl ~mAst (d-:-x) :. toooxxl/2 = Sx558 p26-x) b}/2 = d-x) mAs/
J :. .; - 8.92x- 1125 = 0 :. x = 29.38 mm .
:. x = 43.7 mm
.; + 23.2x- 2925 = 0
)
·Lever arm= z=d-x/3 =:: 126--29.38/3= 116.2mm
,_)
 -- ~·-- -J ......... r•'-''J;.WU''''Y
i.
3
chapi~ir ~~f$ecJ, ..B. 7 · Illustrative EXamples 353 /
\_

Ir = IOOO _i< 43.7 /3 + 20.8 x 558 ( 126-43.7 )2 = 106.42 x 106mm4

z = d-x/3 = 126- 43.713 = 111.43 mm _,._ . .Ex. &1.3 Calculate the maximum instantaneous elastic deflection due to permanent [
,...
for Creep, M = ~(perm) = 9.65 kN.m ·. JodJ and tOta(lood, deflection dJie to creep, shrinkage, total deflection inclziding long - term
~ep and shiinkage de}fections, ·and deflection after erection of walls and finishes, for a ('
continuous beam OABCD, 14 m long for the following data.
(I- ~
14.90 111.43 43.7 .
c = 1.2 - "'%5 X 126" ) X1 = 0.308 Suj1ports at A, B andC , OA =CD= lm, AB := BC = 6 m.
6
Beam is an end beam of a sla_b beam floor system with slab 130 mm thick.
c
Ieff2 = I,JC = 106.42 x 10 ! 0.308 345.5 x 106mm4 j- Igr ( =341 x 106 mrif) Beam section : Rectangular - width 230 mm, total depth 450 mm
Ieff2 = 341 x 106 mm4
=
·
• Reinforcerrrents : -
c
Ir.~ W L3 Outer supports (A and C) and overhangs (OA and CD)
~-'1 perm 5 I
ai.cc {perm) = = - (6J X3.5) X3.5 3 X10 12
E I 384 A:,1 - 3 Nos.# 16 mm at top = 603 m~ '
ce eif2 X 9615.4 X(34J X106) = 3"754 mm
acc (perm) =ai.cc (perm) -ai (perm) Inner ~port (B) : A51 - 6 Nos. # 16 mm at top = 1206 m~ I\_
= 3.754 - 1.444 = 2.3I mm
. and A51 - 3 Nos.# 16 mm at bottom = 603 m~
Total deflection ('
' . Mid~spans (AB and BC): A51 - 5 Nos.# 16 mm at bottom = 1005 m~
aT = a.1.cc (perm) +acs + a.1 (temp) Grade of concrete- M20, grade of steel- Fe 415, ,.-,
OR 3.754 + 1.37 + 5.626 = 10.75 mm
Effective cover = de = 50 mm. Creep coefficient e = 1.6, c
aT· = a.(1 Iota,I" +acc (perm J +acs == 7.07 + 2.3 I + 1.37 = I0.75 mm Ultimate shrinkage strain E cs = 0.0003, 50% shrinkage occurring at 28 days. ('

Allowable deflection = L/250 = 3.5 x I000/250 = 14 mm >aT ( = 10.75 mm) :. Safe Loading: The totallQlld, pennanent load on the beam are shown in Fig. 8. 7.'la and /'
',
Fig. 8. 7.2b respectively.
Check by Allowable Ud Ratio Approach
('
M = 1.5 x 14.55 = 21.8 kN!m . Solution
u
(Ast)requd == -O.SJ::k
f X ~I - ~ I -.
~-------
4.6M
----.!!..
j bd2
J bd
In an overhanging beam, maximum deflection can either occur at the free end of the
overhang, or in the mid-span region. In this problem, since the overhang is small, the maximum
l
Y ck deflection will be calculated at mid-span. For the purpose of calculations, mid~span deflection will ('
be obtained in AB.
= 0.5 X25 X [I- ,..,.---1---4-.6-X_2_J._8-X-106] 1000 X 126
415 2 .
= 515mm 25 X1000 X1262 v .
Calculation of support Moments : c
1 For Total Load
Steel provided = # 8@ 90 mm c/c, A5 = 558 mm2
1 Fixed end Moments :
PI = 100 X503 I ( I000 X130 ) = 0.44 % MFAO = 24 x 1 + 16 x I x 1/2 = 32 kN.m , MFCD = 40 x 1 + 16 x I x 112 = 48 kN.m
(A ) . 64 X6 16 X62 c
f == 0.58f x st reqd =0.58 x 415 x 211.= 222 Nlmm MFAB = MFBA = --8- + -u = 96 kN.m r-
s y -(Ast ) prov 558 2 \.
X62
for p1 = 0.44 x and fs = 222 N!.~.rn.2 , MF = 1.4
32 X6 I6
MFBC = MFCB = - 8 - + -~-2- = ?2 kN.m
Basic Ud ratio = 20 ...... (Fig. 8.6.1)
I·,

:. Allowable Ud ratio == 20 x 1.4

Distribution factors ( DF) r
~
:. (d)requd == 3500 I( 20 x 1.4) = 1.25 mm < I26 mm :. O.K. At A, (DF)AO = 0' (DF)AB = 1.0 '

c.__, ' It a""' that Ud app;-oodo U "'Y •impk ;, 'Pp/i,•Uoo mui U <>n II• •af< ,;a,_ "=""'Y ""'
At B, (DF)8A 0.5 , (DF)8 c = 0.5 c
"' """"'d if toh/e, ""_.,..dfir fiN!ing""' dq<h of•lab meDwd, - In tkU - ~~.,. a~1 At c ' ( DF )CB = I ' (DF)CD = 0 c
/'
\

r\..
 Illustrative Examples 355
~~~~ : 354 Limit State of SeJ;Viceability Chapter '-8 Sect .8.J
For fixed or a continuous beam, the procedure for deflection calculations shall be as follows :
l~
i\
; '"·i
it M~ Mm ~~ ~~

·~·
(A) Short term deflections :
:ll~ ;l: (i) Obtain L0 and b if beam is a flanged beam. Obtain Ec and m.
1
j, -41m A 3m •I• 3m
6
3m ---4-3m «tmj.:- (ii) Obtain f , x , I , y and M of gross section, and x and I of cracked section
cr gr c r r
(a) Total Load on Beam at left suppOrt, mid-span, and right support. Also find z at mid-span.
\
'
J (iii) Calculate MFl' MFJ, k , k , and weighted average value of Mr, Igr and Ir
24kN 2 1
and hence Ieffl for total load and for permanent loads separately.
__)
(iv) Calculate aT and ai(perm) using Ec and Ieffl·
; \
J Obtain ai(temp) = aT - ai.(perm)
( b ) PermanenU Load on Beam
(B) Long- term deflection due to shrinkage (acs) :
__) - This shall be on lines of simply supported beams.
Joint 0 A B c D (C\I Long - term deflection due to load and creep (a.I.CC1,permfl.
~ Distribution Factor 0 1 0.5 0.5 l 0 The values of weighted average values of Igr and Mr will remain unchanged.

J Initial FEM '+32 -96 +96 -72 +72 -48 (i) Obtain Ece , m for long- term.
(ii) Obtain x and I at left support, mid-span and right support and z at mid-span.
Balance A and C +64~ -24 r
_) / (iii) Calculate weighted average of Ir and hence Ieffl,
Carry over moment +32 -12
J (iv) Calculate a.1.cc1,perm) using Ece and Ie.~~~
.m ,

Initilll Moment +32' -32 +128 -84 +48 -48 Obtain

· acc(perm) = a.1.cc(perm) - a.1 ,(perm)
. (D) Calculate Total deflection aT, and deflection ap after erection of walls
~ Distributed Moment -22 -22
The problem under consideration will now be solved on above lines.
__) Final Moment +32 -32 +106 -106 +48 -48
(A) Short - term Deflection (Total load )
')
.__./
Thus finally, MA = 32 kN.m, M = 106 kN.m, Me = 48 kN.m (i) Calculation of L0 , b1 , Ec and m :
8 bf = L 112 + 3D .+ bw for L-beams (the beam being an end beam)
2
. 64x6 16x6 106+32 1
_) Mtd-span moment, ME = --
4
+---g- ., = 99 kNm for spanAB 0
L = distance between points of contraflexures.
0

_; II. FOR PERMANENT LOAD :

Proceeding on the lines of total load, the moments for span AB are obtained as under, for the POrNTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES :
' l
J
loading shown in Fig. 8. 7.2 (b). A = ~ + 16 2x 6 - 106 32 == 67.67 kN.m
R i
MA(perm) = 32 kN.m , MB(perm) = 92 kN.m , ME{perm) at mid-span = 58 kNm Let the distance of second point of contraflexure in AB from A be x1 .
j Finally the problem reduces to calculation of mid-span deflection for beam portion AB x = RA I w = 67.67/16 = 4.22 m >3m ...... (Eq.3.5.9)
subjected to loads and moments as shown in Fig. 8. 7.3. max
~ 32-kN
. . Maximum B.M. occurs at mid-span
...... (Eq.3.5. 7)
64kN 2
~

·~
l67.67l = 0.5 m

A~
_ 67.6L _
~ XI - 16 - t 16 "j \6
W~3m 3m 3m -+-3m

_j MA = ·32 kN.m ME =99 Ms = -106 ~=-32kN.m Me +<iS Ms=-1.2

Let the distance of second point of contraflexure in EB from B be x2 .
( a ) Loads and end moments due to total Load. ( b ) Loads and end moments due to Permanent Load. RB = 64 + 16 X 6-67.67 = 92.33 kN
\,
..__.-
Fig. 8.7.3.
 Chap•'er~'ll;;,, Sect .8.7 Illustrative Examples 357 \,

'1111r
I! ! I:
!f J
I !•i
j I.:
X
2
=
2 3
916.3 - e92.33
-
16
-.y J
2 X-106
16
2
= 1.29 m from B \{)'4 (a) FOR GROSS SECTION WITHOUT REINFORCEMENT;
· b/Yi2 + (b - bw) Dj/2
c
lH H'I L0 = 6 - 0.5 - 1.29 = 4.21 m 1
!! f J::' ('
!i :rJ ... X = bj) + (bf- bw) Df
rlf·!!i Rei1Ulrks : {!)Since xmax > U2, the maximum bending moment occurs at mid-span and Eq. 3.5.6 is 230 X 45ol/2 +(970- 230) X 13<if2
= 148
r
fli not applicable and x1 , x2 cannot be obtained using Eq. 3.5. 7b. .
.". Eq. 3.5. 7 is used to get the Values of x and x .
1 2 I
230 X 450 +(97~- 230) X 130
970 X 1483 - 740 X (148 -130)
=·
3
mm

+ 230 X (450- 148)

3
c
. ;, (2) Instead of doing rigorous calculations as shown above, L can be directly obtained using 3 3
,,i•
gr.o 3
0
approximate expression given by IS. Code that L0 = 0. 7L for continuous beam. According to this. .. I gr.o = 3158.42 6
x 10 mm
4 I
. '
L0 = 0.7 x 6000 = 4200mm.,
y1 = D -x = 450 -148 = 302 mm I\
Mr = f crgr
I I yI = 3.13 X (3158.42 X 106)/302
b1 = 4210/12 + 3 x 130 '+ 230. = 970 mm ,_
.,, Mr.o = 32.73 x 106 mm4 = 32.73 kN.m I,
;: Ec = 50oofJ:: = 5000 ""2Q = 22361 Nlmm 2
:r
m = E,JEc = 200,000/22361 = 8.94 1,~
(b) FOR CRACKED SECTION:
Assuming x < Df'
~
(ii) Calculation -of Sectional Properties I , M , x , I at supports and at mid-span. bXl-!2 = mAst (d-x) :. 970Xl!2 = 8.94x 1005(400.-x) (
gr r r
Left Support A (i.e. Outer Support): .. x = 77 mm
Section is singly reinforced rectangular with b = 230 mm, z = d-x/3 = 400 - 7713 = 374.3 mm
Ir.o =- b ;13 +mAst (d -xl
D = 450mm, d=400mm,Ast == 3of16mm(603mm2 ),MA == 32kN.m 1
= 970 X 773/3 + 8.94 X 1005 (400 -77)2 = 1085 X 106 mm4
r
(a) FOR GROSS UNCRACKED SECTION WITHOUT REINFORCEMENT : r
'
f cr == 0.7 x {jk
c == 0.7 x ""20 == 3.13 Nlmm 2 Right Support (B) (i.e. INNER SUPPORT):
y1 == 450/2 = 225 mm. Section is rectangular - doubly reinforced.
3
I gr(/eji) == 230 x 450 /12 == 1746.56 x I0 6 mm4
bw = b = 230 mm, D = 450 mm, d = 400, d'c = 50 mm,
r e1 t1 == f cr Igr I y t = 3.13 X l746.56 X 106 /225
M(l·"' A• = 6of16mm~(=1206mm\ AX =3 of 16mmH=603md) c
6 (a) FOR GROSS- SECTION WITHOUT REINFORCEMENT :
= 24.3 x 10 N.mm. = 24.3 kN.m.
Properties x , y 1 , Igr and Mr are same as those at left support.
c
(b) FOR CRACKED SECTION :
6 2 r
b~/2 230~/2 e1 t; = 1746.56 x 10 mm
I gr,ng. h•'1 = I gr (l·m
= 115.5
mAst (d- x) , .. = 8.94 x 603 (400- x) 1 1 '
Solving x = mm Mr(right) = Mr(lefl) = 24.3 kN.m.
3 \
r eJ(1 = bx /3 ·+ mAst (d- x)
I(l·"' 2
3
(b) FOR CRACKED SECTION:
(
= 230x 115.5 /3 + 8.94 x 603(400-115.5i= 555x 106 mm4 bXl-12 + (m-1) Asc (x-d' c ) = mA st (d-x)
Mid-Span : 230Xl-/2 + 7.94 x 603 (x- 50) = 8.94 x 1206 (400- x) r
x = 142mm.
Section is singly reinforced- L section b =. 970 mm, b = 230 mm
2 1 w . I = b;/3 + (m- I) A (x- d' i + mA• (d - x)2 I
\,
Ast = 1005 mm , D = 450 mm. d = 400 mm, D = 130 mm., M£ = 99 kN.m r
= 230 X 1423/3 + 7.94
x
X·
c
603 (142 - 50)2 + 8.94 X 1206 (400 :_ 142)2
1
I r(right)
. = 977 · 7 X 10() mmz r
"\
c
[I HI I!. Illustrative Examples 359
\Jr~:
llljli' 358 Limit State ofServiceability sect :8.7
/( 1:
~~~ (b) For Permanent Load :
(iii) Calculation of Weighted average values of M , I , I and hence l.m for
~ 92 kN.m, =72 kN.m;
lil~j load and permanent load
. r gr r e.u• M = 32 kN.m, M
1
32 +92
2
MFI = Mn

:~i: (a) For Total Load : k2 = 72 +72 = 0.861

) M1 = 32kN.m, M2 = 106kN.m, Mm= Mn = 96kN.m, ...... (Table 8.4.1)
'':--":";
k = 0J6 + 0J4 X 0.061/0.1) = 0.245
M, + M2 32+ 106 1
_) k2 = M + M = 96 + 96 = 0.7188 .. , ... (Table 8.4.1) :. (1- kl) = 1-0.245 = 0.755
Fl F2
The weighted average values of M, , I gr , and I, , shall be as follows.
k 1 = 0.08 + (0.08 X 0.0188/0.1) = 0.095
_) 0.245 X 24.3 + 0.755 X 32.73 = 30.66 /cN.m 6 4
(I - k 1) = I -0.095 = 0.905 Mr.(av} = 6
[0.245 X 1746.56 + 0.755 X 3158.42] X }0 = 2812.51 }0 mm

. .7 J+ 0.755 J
X
=
_)
Calculations for average values are as follows.
Igr.(av)
c~.245 [555+977
2
X }085 X 10
6

/g(av}
_) Xe = { k1 ( X 1 + X2 )12} + (l - k1) X0 •••••• (Eq. 8.4.12).
4
where, Xe = the average value of X such as Mr • Igr , and Ir 1007 x 106 mm
=
I, I .
·.~ X 1 and X2 = values of X at supports. I.« =
e.u
M
Z X
b = c' f. I and '$- I
r gr
X0 = value of X at mid-span. 12 - - ' ·- (I - _:.) ~
. M d d b
_)
•• Mr.(av) = {0.095(24.3 + 24.3)/2 } + 0.905 x 32.73 = 31.93 kN.m
_) 1gr.(av) = [o.o95 [
1746 56 174656
· 2+ J
+ 0.905 x 3158.42] x 106
· At mid-span
M = 58, kN.m ,for pennanent load, z and x being same as those for total load

3 ~·~
·,
,__.) . = 3024.27 x 106 mm 4 .. C = }.2 - X
3
~3 ( }- ~ ) ~~ = 1.1 05> 1
6 4

--./
' I Ir(av) = [o.095 [
555 977 7
· ~ J + 0.905 x- 1085 Jx 10 6
:. I
e.f!I
= I
g.av
= 1007 x 106 mm4 <I
gr(av}
(= 2812.51 x t0 mm )
·

= 1055 x 106 mm4 (iv) Calculation of a.1. r , a(i1~'~~"'nn',, · and a., ·'
11temp1
-...-/ I I · (a) Initial Deflection due to Total Load: . 2 M~2
\ Jeff = Mr Z X b = C -{:. I, but } Igr a. =
WL3
+
5wL4
-
ML
I -
.J I 2 - - ' ·- (I - - ) ~
. M d d b 1.T 48 EJeff.l 384 EJeff.l 16 EJeff.l 16 EJeff.l
_) At mid-span.,
M = 99kN.m, z = 374.3 mm, x = 77mm,bw = 230mm
L2
EJeff.l
[ WL 5wL
4s + ~ - 16 - 16
2
M, M2 J
_) M = 31.93 kN.m, b = b = 970 mm, d=400 mm 2
J~.av 1 62 xl0 12 [64x6 sxi6x6 32 106]
31.93 374.3 77 230 \
_) :. c = 1.2 - ~ X 400 ( I - 400 ) 970 = l.I 4 > 1 ...... (Eq. 8.4.10) l 22361 xl055 x 106 48+ 384 - 16 - 16

_;

_)
·,
.•

Values
Ie.f!I = Ig.av = 1055 x 106 mm4

XI X
0 x2 x3
I
\,
ai.T

62 xJ012
10.49 mm
(b) Initial Deflection due to Permanent Load :
rJ2x6 5xl6x6
2
.32 92]
l~
Left Support Mid-span Right Support Average
aiUJerm) = 22361 xi007 x 106 + 384 - 16 - 16
,J Mr kNm 24.3 32.73
.
24.3 31.93
== 5.99 mm
I x 106 mm4 1746~56 3158.42 1746.56 3024.27
gr ' 0 i(temp) = ai.T - aiUJerm) = 10.49 - 5.99 = 4.5 mm
J Ir x 106 mm 4 555.00 1085.00 977.70 1055.00
_j
 Illustrative Examples 361 · \
~,, Sect .8.7
!I
JJU LllfiU tJIUie tl1' "·.---·
Chapter 8 ;~ ,- (i) Left Support (i.e. Outer Support) :
(

I! I :fi
~·~. Singly reinforcement rectangular section Ast = 603 mtrf r
\

flil
1'11
.I serviceability
\ ·!!H 360 Limit State. o, anent Load :
b;/2 = mAst (d- x)
2 ('
ii 11 tion due to Penn · ~~~: 230;/2 = 23.25 x 603( 400-x}
!!
i;l 'b) sbJlnl<age De ec 2
' -lt'l'L,
'l' ==- k &cs I I>
cs 4 / x = 168mm c
At ~;fl (oute~) ;pport . I ·= b}/3 + rnA (d-xY
0 x 400) == o.655 o/o , pc == o // r ~
: (603 X \00)/(23 230 X 1683/3 + 23.25 X 603 X (400 - 168Y r
p, . . •!· < \ o/o ,/ I = 1118 x 10 mm
6 4
' - P' == o.6SS . 72 {Q.6fs == o.ss~= o.6ss% r(/ejl) (
\Pt If - 72 r-:::-p ::: o. . /C
k - (). ~ l't
4 t . (ii) Mid-span :
. . ,\ suppor , _... . -,-;-;:-;-
At right (1nner, . :\l(230 x 4Mu.12 x 0.655) h 1.31 = 0.412
::: (1206 X 100J' _.. - 1 Singly reinforced L - section, Ast = 1005 mtrf, b1 = 970 mm ,
Assumingx < Df' :. b1 l12 = mAst(d-x)
P, 11 < 1/
- ()655- ~. / . ; r
(p - p)- · __..{t30x400) = l.09%,pc=O 970 XJ-12 = 23.25 x 1005 (400 -x)
1 1 ,--.
.
•• k4== ().~~
/ 1 Solving, x = 116.8 mm < D/130 mm) :. O.K.
{

At ,.v.os{p; = o.65 {f.09 = o.679 ...... (Eq. s.s.3bJ z = d- x/3 = 400- 116.8/3 = 361.1 mm 2
. ..diformula for acs given above is not applicable when the values of pt and pcare not I, = b }13 +mAst (d-xi = 970 x 116.83/3 + 23.25 x 1005 (400-116.8) ('

.....-diroughout.I.S. Code does not give any procedure for calculating the average shrinkage 1 4
~

6 \
I = 23&9 x 10 mm
Aature when values of pt and pc vary along the span. On extreme conservative side, the r.c

maximum value of k4 at mid-span may be taken in calculations. For approximation, one may take r
(iii) Right (i.e. Inner) Support :
average value of k4 if k4 for mid-spari is not maximum. In this case since k4 at mid-span is = 603 mM-
maximum, the same will be taken for calculations on conservative side. d'
.
Doubly reinforced Rectangular Section At=
s 1206 mtrf , Asc

= 50mm, (m-1) = 23.25-1 = 22.25

\.

\IICS = 0.679 X 0.0003/450 = 0.453 X }06

In using the expression for acs' difficulty again arises about selection of the value of k3 for
c
b}/2 + (m-1) Asc (x-d') c = mAst (d-x)
-
c
the problem under consideration. It is because supports at A and C can neither be considered to be 230 }/2 + 22.25 x 603 (x- 50) = 23.25 x 1206 (400 -x)
\
freely supported nor can they· be considered to be fully fixed . Therefore, the span AB cannot be x == 188mm
2
taken as fixed at both ends or fixed at one end and simply supported at the other. The actual value Ir = b}/3 + mA sl (d-xi + (m-1) Asc (x-d'\ r\
c/ .
of kl in fact will lie between 0.086 and 0.063, and will depend upon the ratio of support moment • = 230 X 1383/3 + 23.25 X l206(400-188i + 22.25 X 603(188--., soy
MA to fixed ertd moment MFA . Assuming larger value of 0.086 to err on the safer side. 6 4
acs = 0.086 X (0.453 X 10-6) X (62 X }06) = 1.40 mm Ir(righl) = 2025 X 10 mm
[ 1118 ~ 2025-]+0.755 x 2389 Jx
...... (Eq. 8.5.4) 6 6 4
I,_(av) = G.245 10 = 2188.7xl0 11Un
(c) Creep Deflection Due to Permanent Loads :
The values of M1 Igr and hence Igr(av) for permanent loads will remain the same. But ~ I r
Jeff= M b = ~ -/: I, but } lgr .... ,. (Eq. 8.4.10) '
defmitely, however, there will be a change in the value of lr along the beam due to change Ec and
12·--r ..!_ (1 _!..)...!! (
m. The values of I r and I, ,, will now, therefore be calculated. . M d d b
r av 1 1
361.1 ( 1 _ 116.8 ) 230 = 1 12 l
Ece = Ec /(1 + 0) ,; 223611(1 +1.6) = &600 N!mttl :. c 1.2
_ 30.66
58
X
400 400 970 . >
r
4
m' = E)Ece = 200,000/8600 = 23.25 . I I = 2188.7 x 106 mm
·· effl r.av

(
rn. \rlj ' "~~;62
i Limit State of Serviceability

Iiii! :
I.

i
~ .J!_ WL ~ -~ -~
Chapter 8 Sect .8.8 Limit State df Cracking 363
14' i
1
nrd'
!•ll1j
I1 •.._.,.. E. I"'' [ 41 • 384 16 16 ] .PART- B.
~.u:J;!' =
2 12
+ ~X LIMIT STATE OF CRACVNG
--);
-, :r

li a1-~(pe~~- =.
6 X 10
8600x2188.7xto6
7.17-,
[32 X 6
48 ---
6 2
-.R.-~J16 16 8. 8 LIMIT STATE OF CRACKING
_) 8.8.1. Cracking in R.C. Members : Causes, Mechanism aad Efledl qf Craekilg
a.,) = ai.cc(pe,J ~ ai{pmnJ = 7.17 - 5.99 = l.I8 mm Cracking is an important phenomenon peculiar to reinforced concrete IJleiDbers. Study of
-_J behaviour of R.C. members cannot be complete without the study of cracking. Micro - cr.acks
(d) Total Deflection due to Permanent Load: Occur in a R.C member even before the application of loads due to enviromner.tl! dfects of
_) temperature change and dryness by way of thermal strains, and s~e. Prof. Joe Kelly, -o;vhile
aT = air_ + acc{pennJ + acs
comparing effect of environmental conditions on concrete with that 911 human-beings, has aptly
j = 10.49 + l.I8 + 1.40 = l3.o7 mm remarked; " Most of us get colds and coughs and mdst of the· concrete cracks. ·In spite of
AUowable deflection = 6000/250 = 24 mm >
p
= 13-07 mm) :. O.K. ar ( colds and coughs we go about- and carry on oui' business. Concrete goes about its business
) in spite of cracks. But we all agree that colds and cracks are both things to avoid for the
,'~
(b) Deflection after erection of Walls : .health ofthe two. " Having accepted this, an engmeer has to ensure that a cracking though cannot·
be elitpinated totally in a R.C. structure it must at least be arrested and controlled.
__) ap = acc{pe1'111;•• + partial acs + a.~te ,
1 , mp 1 I Not much attention was paid to this aspect until the use of ultiinate strength design with _
-, Shrinkage OCCUlTing up to I month (28 days)
1 1
= 50 % i HYSD bars which allowed stress at service loads 500" to 60% higher than that in conventional mild
___)
Shrinkage occurring after 1 = 50 % 11 steel bars. Cracking being a direct function of stress in steel, use of high grade steels necessitates
~~
-~
the control of CfllCkiiig nearly, if not equally, as important as deflection control. Limit state method
';j :. ap = l.I8 + 0.5 x 1.40 + 4.5 = 6.38 'mm ofdesign considers cracking as one ofthe important limit states ofserviceability, the attainment of·
Allowable deflection = 6000/3 50 or 20 mm whichever less which makes the structure unfit. This recognition has come as an outcome ofextensive research in
I
·___./

= 17.14 mm > ap ( = 6.38 mm) :. Safe this field during the last decade.

Ex. 8.U (a) Causes of Cracking : Cracking in concrete occurs- generally as a result of
Check the beam in Ex. 8. 7.3 for deflection by allowable Ud ratio approach. (i) volumetric change, including that due to drying shrinkage, creep under_ sustained loadS, and
._)
Solution:· thermal strains, (ii) direct stress and I or flexural stress due to bending, shear, (iii) internal or
For continuous beam external strainS due to continuity, and differential movement of support and adjacent structural
Basic Lid ratio = 26 members, (iv) stress cOncentration due to curtailment and splicing of bars and (v) corrosion of
~
AS/ X 100 reinforcement.
~ at mid-span P1 = bf .d 1005 X lOO
for flanged beam = = 0.259 % (b) Mechanism of Crocking : V~ible cracking is generally initiat.ed by internal-micro-cracks due
970x 400 to volumetric change, or by flexural micro-cracks. The micro-cracks are surface cracks which an'l
•,
j
Assuming (As1 ) reqd. = (As1 )prov. ,fs = 0.58 x 415 = 240 Nlmn?-, a = 1.48 (Fig. 8.6.1) not directly visible except by close examination. Once micl'o-cracks ha''fe fomted, a slight increase
1 in the external forces causes these cracks to open up suddenly to measurable widths.
J hj b1 = 230/970 = 0.237 , a 2 = 0.8 ...... (Fig. 8.6.3)
Allowable Lid ratio= 26 x I.48 x 0.8 = 30.78 (c) Effect of Cracking given in Sect. 1.3 and its Significance : ~;:. iJupv,i..ww ;::! ::!':!ddng
in R.C. design becomes evident on knowing its adverse effects on strength, behaviour and
J '
. :. Required d= 6000/30.78 = 195 mm < 400 mm :. O.K. performance of the !itructUre as a whole. The bad effects of cracking have been given in secf1.3.2
_j 8.8.2. Cltisificaticn and Types of Cracks
I CoinmenJs : It will be observed from all problems solved earlier that deflection calculations are
independent of the grade of steel used (i.e. whether it is ofgrade Fe 250 or Fe 415). This is obvious because Cracks in reinforcemtnt concrete are classified into two main categories.
~) deflection depends upon the load and hence the stress level in steel instead of grade of steel. (i) Cracks due to external forces and resulting structural actions and deformation Flexural
cracking due to bendii~g, inclined cracks due to shear and torsion, nonnal cracks due to direct
,_..)
 Limit State of Cracking 3 65 C·
· 364 Limit State of Serviceability Chapter·£. Sect .8.8
C . minimum cover to the tension steel,
=
c
tension and cracks due to stress concentration come under t1is category.
(ii) Cracks which are independent of load:; and which are caused due to ~"W..a.ined dt;iui
mm
D = total depth ofthe me~ber,
x = the depth of neutral axis at working load.
r
shrinkage or temperature expansion I contraction are normally on expoF.od ~rfaccs.
b (D -X ) ( a- X ) ...... (8.8.2) (
These are normally on exposed surfaces.
m = E1 - 3 Es Ast (d-x)
E

where, ~; = strain at the level under consideration ignoring the stiffening effect of the
1
8.8.3 Control of Cracking I\
I.S. Code prescribes the following serviceability requirements for cracking :
(a) For practical design, compliance ~vith the detailing mles given in Sect. B./ 0.4 are .. concrete in the tension zone,
In calculating ~; , the concrete modulus Ec should be taken equal to half the short- term r
sufficient to control flexural cracking. 1
(b) If greater spacing, as specified above are required or where the adverse dfects of
cracking on strength, stiffness and durability are likely to·occur, the surfac:e cr..ck width s~all
modulus of elasticity, to allow for creep effects,
b = width of section at the centroid of the tension steel,
r
a = distance from the compression face to the point at which the crack width is being
be calculated and it shall not exceed :
1) 0.3 min in members where cracking is not harmful and does not have any serious adverse calculated since maximum cracking occurs on tension face of beam, then a= D c
effects upon the preservation of reinforcing steel nor upon th~ durability of the structures. area of tension reinforcement.
2) 0.2 ·mm in members where cracking in tensile zone h: harmful either bec.a•.tse they are 5 2 \
modulus fo elasticity of steel = 2 x 10 N/mm •
exposed to the effects of weather or continuously exposed to moisture or ground water.
('
3) 0.1 mm for aggressive environment for severe, very server, and extreme cr.tegories b

n
specified in Table 2.2.3.. /""

The restrictions on crack width are from rtquirements of appelifaDCf\, prevention of ',
corrosion and reducing the adverse effects of cracking on strength and stiffness.

11~
(,
-------
8.8.4 Calculation .of_ Crack width.
Several researchers worked on this and have propounded different theories and expres- r
sions. The fo!ll1ulae given in IS: 456 are based on the work of Beeby ( 71110) .The work shows Wcr
that as the load on a beam increases, the number of cracks and, hence, the crack spacing rapidly
reach a nearly constant value which does not change appreciably with any further increase in the ( b ) Cross-sectiOn
load. For a beam in such condition, it is found that the crack width over a reinforcing bar increases : c
(I) with concrete cover ;
l~c
(

(2) with average strain at the level at which cracking is considered ; \-- b-l \

11~-A
(3) with increasing distance from the bar; and
(4) with the height of crack penetration ( D- x)
wher~, Dis total depth and x the depth of neutral axis below the compression face at working
load. The width of crack wcr is given by: DTt-----1
J?Jitx T
[,'~~:)(~~)l. ,,...; t I
(

j..-~-

3 acr Em
r
wcr
1+ 2 acr - Cmin
[ D-x.
J ...... (8.8.1)
Tmin H
Em in !
\

where, \
I
(c) (d)
Strain Diagram
acr = distance from the point under consideration to the surface of the nearest Cracked section l
Fig. 8.8.1 Parameters for Crack Width Calculation~
longitudinal bar, (Fig. 8.8.lb)
('
..
c; = average steel strain at the level where cracking is considered illlo\\-ing for the The pa~ameters req•1ired for calculation of crack width are shown in Fig. 8.8.1
c-
stiffening effect of the concrete in tension zone and is obtained from Eq. 8.8.2

r
 __ .., ... ~ct:.,:8.9
.... •'
- '-'.)' Chapter:8
8.9. ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
·'!\\1 Using the flexural fonnula and taking concrete moduius equal to half the short tenn modulus
Crock width is calculated as per the steps given below :
\ii! ofelasticity (i.e.E/2) the strain atthe level Wider consideration is given by,
1{i !' .w.
1. Calculate working momentM
d! , MwX X
1
2. Modular ratio== m ==Esl Ece
~:'!,· £1= Ef2xf
c c
...... (8.8.3)
where, Es ::: 2 X105Ntmrr1- 'E c ::: sooo..fr:k
c ' E :=
.ce Ec12 and
where, M11' = B.M. at service load. 3. Co~pute depth of neutral axis at working load.
x1 = distance measured from the elastic neutral axis to the point at which the strain e1 4. Moment of inertia of a cracked section"' I c
is required , 5. Obtain strain (t ) at the \eve\ under consideration usingEq. 8.8:3
Ic = moment of inertia of the cracked section. 6. Obtain average 1steel strain (em) at the \eve\ considered using Eq. 8.8.2
A negative value of Em indicates that the section is uncracked. 7. Calculate crack width W from Eq. 8.8.1
Considering the fonnula at different positions of the beam, the following points could be . cr
noted. TbefoiJowingtyposofproblomShov•- ;n.,.....t IDthis-for.,.lculationofaack wid<h.
{l) Directly under a bar on tension face, the distance acr is equal to com:rete cover C..._.rn
and Eq. 8.8.1 reduces to Ex. 8.9.2 A tw<> - oontinuOUS beam """"'g
Ex.8.9.1 A beam simply supported and loaded by UDL
UDL ,.d Wlttal poUrt load.
wcr = 3 cmin em ...... (8.8.4) The details are as under :
(2) When the distance acr is large Eq. 8.8.1 approaches the fol!owing limit, Ex. 8.9.1 A simply supported floor beam has .a span of l0.2m. It supports a
Width away from the bar= 1.5 (D- x.) em; ...... (8.8.5) . cmotinUOOS ..,._Way slab of span. 4m. The}iw load is 4 tNml oaJjlocr finish l.l /cN/ni'.
(3) Moving towards the neutral axis, acr goes on increasing while f:m goes on reducing. The The tlticlc»W ·oflh< sial> is- UO mm. Desi8n the section of th< beam iiJuat.d in th< moJeraJe
maximum value of the crack width occurs at distance of ( d- x )/3 from the bar (Fig.8.[1.1a) exposure condition and calculate the surface crack width.
(4) Attheneutralaxis a=xande m =0 :. Wcr = 0 (a) directly under a bar on tension face

mid~
x ) is sufficiently small, .for the (b) at the bottom corner of the beam
~
(5) Em is maximum at the tension face. Therefore, if (D- . (c) ·at a point on tension face way between two bars.
crack width at tension face less than or equal to t'ie allowable limit cf0.3 mm, it will not exc<:>':"n that (d) At a distance 2 (d - x )13 fro"' th< neutral "'is the crock width is lilrel)' w be
limit anywhere. This is the reason that excessive crack width rarely occurs in the slab having
thickness not greater than 200 mm. maximum.
Use steel grade Fe 415. Assume the width of be8m of 450 mm

_,/
8.8.5 Remedial measures. (01/S)
Cracking can be minimized by adopting the foliQwing remedial measures:
·'Gtw.: L~ l0.2m.LL' 4/cNinf ,FF ~ t.5tN/nl,b~450""",c/cdistanC"­
beams 4 m. SP"' of slob' 4 mm, Slob thickneSS' !30 nun. i ,415 Nlmnf Formodenll<"''""""
1. Use more number of smaller diameter bars. This has the effect of reducing the distance acr" oondition minimum uade o f - isM 25 and clear cJver' JO """(See Table 2.2.3)
2. lncreasiil$ the grade of concrete. But the reduction in crack width in slabs on account of
increase. in compressive strength of concrete is marginal. :. fck"' 25 Ntmrr1- and d' == 30 mm ,
3. Place additional bar directly adjacent to the point where the crack width is excessive.
·b
4. Satisfy the detailing rules regarding spacing, curtailment, splicing and anchorage. For fck == 25 N/mm2 and f y == 415 Nfmm1 Ru.max == 3.45 Nfmnf (See Table 4.5.1)
Solution:
5. Limit 1he tensile stress in reinforcing steel.
6. Maintairiinga thorough control and Cllr~fl.!! ~!.!r:rvision during mixing piacing and
Assuming depth ofthe beam equal to 800 mm = 7.SkNim
Se\fofthe beam"" 25 x 0.45 x ( 0.8 ~0.13)
curing -ofconcrete.
The above poi.11t plan is an excellent guide towards efficient control of cracking. = 19 k.Nfm
Dead toad transferred from slab== ( 25 x 0.13 + 1.5) x 4 "' 26.5 k.Nim
It may be noted that the provision of large cover can result in significantly large crack widths
in R.C~ slabs and in such a case special measures are required to keep the crack width within the Tota\D.L.'Onthebeamfm"" 19+7.5
all~w~Jilnits. ·
.m
, I1'
!~i 368 Limit State of Serviceability
kt\~~

HJ r-
Chdpter'8~- Illustrative EXamples 369
Secr.-8.9
!/ir I L.L. transferred from slab = 4 x 4 = 16 kNim
:; Total working load on the beam = w =26.5 +16 =42.5 kNim ~ 450 ----1
::t
._,
t
:. Ultimate load on beam= w11 = 1.5 x 42.5 = 63.75 kNim T f
.: 1 Maximumultimatemoment=MII =63.75 x 10.2218 = 829 kN.m

T-r:-
<') <')
-i -i
.'i! o; o;
Maximumworkingmoment=Mw =42.5 x 10.22/8 =552.7 kN.m II

-rt 1
)(

d = "\/r-8-2-9_x_t...,..o6,_ = 731 mm
3.45 X 450
Provide total depth of800 mm
N ~
c T .- t- fA :;;
,;;
::: ,..:
Q) ,....
Assuming 8 mm stirrups and 32 mm main steeL
Effective cover d' = 30 + 8 + 32/2 = 54 mm
:. effectivedepthprovidedd= 800-54 = 746mm
~~
II
')(

~
Nl l ~ ~

~----~.L
L
l._
b1 = -f+6D1 + bw = 1020016+6x l30+450=2930mm
54
(~

A = 0.5x25
415 [ 1-..Y l-4.6x829xl0
6
Jx2930X746=3155m~ T ---1 0.001507 I+-
st 25 X 2930 X 746 2 . - Cross • section Strain Diagram
Provide 4 bars of 32 mm, Area provided A = 3217 m~ > 3155 m~ ·~ Fig. 8.9.1
st
Vu.max. = 63.75 X }0.2/2 = 325.1 /eN Mw (800-x) (552.7 X 106). ( 800-314.3)
p1 = 100 X 3217 I ( 450 x 746) = 0.96% = 0.001507
&1 • -c • E I
ce c
ti5oo x (14250 x 106)
t uc = 0.629 N/mm 2
...... ( Table 5. 7.1) _ 0.00}507 X 287.8 = 0.000893
Vuc = 0.629 X 450 X 746/1000 = 2JJ /eN. &288 - 485.7
V . = 0.4 X 450 X 746/}000 = 1J4J /eN 6
--~·mm (552.7 X 10 ) X 287 ·8 = 0.000893
vur.mm. = 211+134.3 = 345.3 kN> vu.max (=325.1/cN) or &288 = }2500 X (14250 X }06)
.·. Minimum stirrups are sufficient- Using# 8 mm 2 legged stirrups. (a) Crack width directly under a bar on tension face
, 0.87 X 415 X 100
Spacmg s = 0.4 x 450 = 200 mm < 0. 75 d < 300 mm a = c . = nominal cover + diameter of stirrup = 38 mm ...... (Fig. 8.9.2)
cr mm
450 X ( 800-314.3) X ( 800-314.3) .l',
Provide# 8 mm 2 legged stirrups at 200 c/c & = 0.001507 - . = 0.00138
As1 = 4-#32 = 3217mm2 , Mw = 552.7 kN.m m 3 X (2 X }05 ) X 3217 X (746-314.3)
Ec = 5000 {f;k
c = SOOOW = 25000 Nlmm 2 Crack width = 3 cmm. &m = 3 x 38 x 0.00138 = 0.157 mm
Ece = Ec12 = 2500012 = 12500 Nlmm 2
(b) Crack width at bottom comer of beam
m = Es IEce = 2 x 105 I 12500 = 16 a = ( 542 + 542 )- 32/2 = 60.37 mm (Fig. 8.9.2b)
Detennine the depth of neutral axis at wcrking loads. cr

h;/2 = mA:tt
(d-x), :. 450;12 = l6X3217(746-x)
·. '·- -.-.
·Wcr = E
. 3 X 6037 X 0.00138
I + 2 X ( 60.37-38)
~ = 0.229 mm ......( Eq. 8.8.1)
x2 +228.8x-l70658 = 0 (x+ll4.4i-(428.7i = 0 :. x = 314.3mm 485.7
(d-x) = 746-314.~: 43l.7mm , (D-x) = 800-314.3 = 485.7 mm 5:fc) Cr'ack width at a point on tension face midway between two bars.
2( d-x )13 .""' 2 >\ 431.7/l = 287.8mm - ...... (Fig. 8.9.1)
. ~cr = ~. ( si + 542)- 3212 = 62.5 mm ...... (Fig. 8.9.2c )
•113 X.450 x 314.3 + 16 x·32t7(746~Jl4.3 i = 14250 x 10~ mm4
3
I.=
c
~c.,.
 ..:~, --~,-.
' ~7Q Limit State of Serviceability Chapter 8
Sect. 8.9 Illustrative Examples 3 71

the width of crack at :

( i) a point on tension face just above the corner bar,
450 (ii ) corner of tension face,
(iii) a point on tension face where crack width is likely to be maximum.
(iv) ~point on side face cit the level of tension steel, and·
(v ) a point on side faee where crack width might be maximum.
~
~
~ Data: Twospancontinuousbeam,AB=BC=8m,b=300mm,D=800mm, d' = 40mm.
Central point load W = 86 leN. on each span ,
+-114 ~~~I As1 = 2 Nos. 25 mm at inner support. , f ck = 20 N/mm 2 , f y = 415 N/mm
2
·

~ o~o
• 1-~ ~
I ~
Required : (a) Check for flexure and bar spacing.
(b) Check for deflection from 1/d ratio.
(c) Calculation of crack widths at different points.
.....::.'-'
(b) (a) (c) (d)
Solution :
(a) Check for flexural Strength :
ac1=60.37

W =
cr
ac..=38
Fig. 8.9.2

3 x 62.5 x 0.00138 . 0. mm
1 + 2 x f( 62.5- 38 ) J =
235
acr=S2.5 · acr137.7
.
effective depth= d = D- d' = 800- 40 = 760 mm
A = 2 of. # 25 mm = 2 x 491 = 982. mm2
Self weight wd = 25 x 0.3 x 0.8 = 6 kN/m.
l 485.7 . ; Elastic moment for Ultimate load at support
(d) Crack width at = 2( d- x) /3 = 287.8 mm = (a-x) MEu = 1.5 {(3/16) X 86 X 8 + 6 X 82/8 } = 265.5 kN.m
450 X( 800-314.3) ( 287;8)
& = 0.000893-
m .
-----=-------
3X(2X}05 )X32}7X(746-314J)
...... (Eq.8.9.2d) Design moment for Ultimate load
= 0.0008175 Mu = 0.85 MEuallowing 15% redistribution
. of moments.
~ (431.7 -287.8 i + 542
,,\.,
:r:} acr = -16 = 137.7 mm = 0.85 x 265.5 = 225.67 kN.m ·

wcr 3 X137.7 X0.0008175

} + 2 X1(137.7 -38 >] = 0.239mm
(Fig. 8.8.3d)
RequiredA
s1
0.5 f c_k [ 1-
= __
fY .
--v I 4·6 Mu
f ck bd 2
J . bd
·
l
'J
.485.7
Maximum crack width;;. 0.239 mm < 3 mm :. Safe = 0.5 X 20 [· _
415
~ }_ 4.6 X (225.67 X 10 )
20 X 300 X 7602
6
J X
.
300 X 760

Ex. 8.9.2 A continuous beam ABC of two equal spans,· each span 8m long carries a = 896 m~ < provided A• = 982 m~ :. O.K.
central point load 86 kN. in addition to self weight. The section of the beam is rectangular of
width 300 mm and total depth 800 mm. The beam is proposed to be reinforced by 2 Nos. 25 Check for spacing :
mm diameter bars of grade Fe 415 at top over inner support with an· effective cover of Maximum permissible clear distance between bars for 15% redistribution for steel of grade
40mm. : Fe415 = 155 mm ...... (Table 8.10.1) .
Check the adequacy of main bars from the requirement of strength allowing 15%. Actual clear horizontal distance betw~n parallel reinforcing bars
redistribution of moments at 1! and also from the requirements of bar spacing. Tf not suitable, = 30(}-2 x 40-25 =195 mm>155 mm
propose alternative solution. Assume concrete of grade M 20. · :. 2 Nos.# 25 mm will not be allowed. Number of bars shall be increased to satisfY the
Check.the section for deflection by allowable 1/d ratio approach and also .calculate condition of clear spacing. .
:. Provide 3 Nos. # 20.mm to give Ast.= 942 mni > 896 mrrt required
 /~
. ~' '.·•

372 Limit State of Serviceability Chapter 8 . Std.,8.9. Dlustrative Examples 3 73

Actual clear horizontal distance between parallel reinforcing bars
= (300-2x40-3x20)/2 = 80mm< allowable155mm :. O.K.
(b) Check for Deflection :
Basic Vd ratio for continuous beam = 26
p1 = (942 x 100)/(300 x 760) = 0.41% :.
( i) Crack width at Point (A) on the tension face just dbove the bar: ...... (Fig. 8.9.3c)
£ = 0.00 1489 _
300x ( 800-241 )( 800-241) = 0.00 1169
• Jx(2x10S)x942x(760-241)
c,.
= 40-20/2 = 30mm
Crack width = 3 cmrn. E111 = 3 x 30 x 0.001169 = 0.105 mm
fs = 0.58 x 415 x 896/942 = 229 Nfm,( /·-.

For pI = 0.41% and f s = 229 Nlmm2 , Modification a 1 = 1.36 (Fig. 8.6.1) (ii) Crock, width at Point (B) on tension face at comer : ...... (Fig. 8.9.3c)
:. Required d = 8000/(26 x 1.36) = 226 mm < 760 mm provided :. O.K. acr = 4<f2 +4oZ- 20/2 = 46.6 mm.
M w = (3x86X8/16+6x82/8)=177 kN.m a =D=800mm ,(\~

Ec = 5000{J:"k = 5000 -flO= 22360 Nlmm 2 Since a is the same for points A and B, Em will be the same for both.
c
Ece = Ec12 = 22360/2 = 11180N/mm2 Em = 0,001169
W = 3 x 46.6 ~ 0.001169 = O.l 543 mm
m = EIE
s ce
= 200000/11180=17.9
D = 800mm,d'=40mm,d=760mm,As1=942mm2
cr 1+ 2 J(
46.6- 30
l 55.9 J
n
Depth of neutral axis under working load :
(iii) Crack width at Point ( c} on tension face midway between two bars
b:l/2 = mAs1 (d-x)
where, crack width happens to be maximum at the level: ...... (Fig. 8.9.3c)
300J-/2 = 17.9X942(760-x) :. x = 241mm
= 4if+(ll0/22 )-20/2 = 58mm

T
a
cr
1408 1401~~~~v1o. 1 --1

. :·.,! T. :
.oo14a9 1-- D = 800 mm same as that for A. , Em = 0.001169
c A B w =: 3 x 58 x 0.001169 = OJSS mm.
J
I
g
II
-; g

.;~
~
.U)

11"'
1 ~

I· b:.3oo---l
cr 1+2x [1?.8- 30)
559
(iv) Point (D) on side face at outer most bar level
a = C . = 40- 20/2 =- 30 mm.

~ ·-·-·-· ·u+ -tN

cr mm

. 0
~
{ c) acratA,B and C (a-x)= 760-241 = 519mm
E = 0.001382 -
300 X ( 800-241) X 519
. - = 0.001085

l l-b=300 -j
"'
~ I... m a
.• X (2 X 105 ) X 942 X (769-241)
W = 3 X 30 X 0.001085 = 0.1 tnm
cr
(v) Crack width at ·Point (E) on side face where crack width is likely
Sttpport Section Strain Diagram
to be maximum, i.e. at 2(d-x)/3 distance fromN.A. ...... (Fig. 8.9.3b)
(a) (b)
Fig 8.9.3 (a-x)= 213(d-x) = 2(750-241 )13 = 346mm
(d-x)= 760-241 = 519mm, 2(d-x)/3 = 346mm ar.r = ~ 1732 +4if - 2012 = 167.5 mm
( D -x) = 800-241 = 559 mm ...... (Fig. 8.9.3) 300 X ( 800-241) X 346
= 0.0007238
= 0.0009216-
[c = [ l/J X 300 X 241 3 + 17.9 X 942 X ( 760-241)2 ] "" 5942 X 106 mm4 E
m Jx (2 x 105 ) x 942 x 519
( 177·X 106 )( 800- 24kj
EB = 0.001489 ...... (Fig. 8.9.3 v'
,, = 3 X 167.5 X 0.0007238 / = O244 mm
I 1180 x.( 5942 x 106 ) ?cr l+ xr{l67.5-30)l .
2
ED (0.001489/559) X 519 =0.001382 L 559 J
E...~.·­ (0.001489/559) X 346 = 0.0009216 Maximum crack width = 0.244 mm < 0.3 mm :. Safe
-,.o -

374 Limit State of Serviceability Chapter 8
PART- C
DETAILING OF R.C. STRUCTURES
8.10 D~TAILING OF R.C. STRUCTURES
8.10.1 Introduction
Detailing is a process of evolution based on an understanding ofthe structural behaviour and
1
material properties. A clear concept of flow of stresses within the structure, especially in the
cracked region along with practical considerations of method of construction, are necessary to
acquire the art of design and detailing. Detailing primarily refers to determination of
number- diameter combination ofbars, their spacing, provision of sufficient cover, layout, location -
and correct placement of reinforcement etc.
The good detailing ensures that the structure will behave as designed and should not mar the
appearance of the exposed surface due to excessive cracking. The skillful. detailing will assure
,satisfactory behaviour and adequate strength of structural members. It will effect efficient
'interaction of concrete and steel. The good practice in detailing will I~ to improved structural
, __/
'behaviour.
8.10.2 Basic Principles Guiding Detailing
(1) Structural detailing should cover and reflect idealisation made in structural analysis and
design, and hence the possible behaviour of the structure.
(2) The method of working of workers or field persons and their speed of construction
should be kept in mind while detailing. . ·
(3) Congestion of reinforcement should be avoided which otherwise make placement of
concrete difficult, resulting in low quality of concrete. , The rules for bar detailing are formed to satisfy the serviceability requirements for
There should be sufficient clear gap (usually not less than 75 mm) for pouring of
concrete from top. If steel is congested there is a tendency to vibrate the bars using
vibrator in contact with bars. This results in over vibration of mortar around the bar,
which drives larger aggregate to sink away from the bar. Hence poor bond and plastic
'J
settlement is likely to OCCQr.
(4) The detailing should besucli that internal forces are safely transferred between concrete
to reinforcement and vice - versa and also from one member to the othe~.
(5) Detailing should ~e care of regions of stress Concentration such as junctions of
members, near concentrated load, change in section etc.
· (6) Detailing should control cracking and hence deflection at seririce loads. It should
impart ductility to members and structure.
8.10.3 Requirements of Detailing
The requirements of good detailing are :
(1) It should be easy for fabrication and placing of reinforcement.
{2) The cover should be sufficient for the exposure conditions to which it is subjected.
{3) The crack width should be within acceptable limits under service conditions. In normal
structure this is achieved by adheringto detailing rules given in Sect. 8.1 0.4
(4) There should be sufficient space for pouring and compacting of concrete. This requires
to limit the minimum spacing between bars avoiding congestion of reinforcement.
J
Detailing of R. C. Structures 37 5
Sect. 8.10
(5) Curtailment of steel in tension zone should be staggered as far as practicable.
(6) Joints should be equally strong to withstand the· same forces to whiCh connected
members are subjected.
(7) Do not use Fe 415 and Fe 500 steel side byside as this practice will lead to confusion and
~~at* . . I
.( (8) Overlap for tension bars are provided for not more than 1/5 of the total number Qfbars
·• at any section and shall be staggered.
(9) In columns additional stirrups should be provided at change ofangles.
(10) Ensure that the top bars {in case of cantilevers and continuous $lab) are properly
supported by riders so that they do not bend down or sag during concreting.
( 11) Keep number of different sizes of reinforcing bars minimum. Also keep number of
different sizes of beam, and column minimuin to enable one to reu~e the same
form-work.
(12) To achieve good detailing the structural drawing should be complete, crystal clear and
unambiguous providing necessary notes for site engineers.
Note that safety factors conceal many defects but it may not be charitable.
(13) Detailing should be done in such a way that_secondary stresses caused by support
conditions, shrinkage, handling methods etc. are counteracted.
{14) As the rates of smaller bars are higher than those of large diameters, use large available
bar sizes within the design requirements. Larger bars also produce stiffer cages and
cannot be displaced easily. ·
. ..
8.10.4.. Normal Detailing Rules
cracking and to meet the requirements of durability of normal structure. They include the
rules regarding-
(a) Cover to reinforcement,
(b) ,Reinforcement requirements,
(c) Spacing of-reinforcement.
(a) Cover to Reinforcements
Evecy reinforcing bar in a R.C. member must be surrounded by concrete ·of
minimum thickness, known as clear cover, for the following reasons :
(i} To ensure suffiCient contact between steel and concrete along the sUrface of •
the reinforcement throughout to develop desired bond.
{ii) To provided protection to bar against corrosion, frre and other· environmental ·
forces and thereby ensure the durability of .member. · ·
The details of the requireme~~ of cover life given in Table 2.2.3.
' . ;• .
· (b) Reinforcement Requirements
A reinforced concrete member is required to be proYided with some minimum
reinforcement not only for arresting the cracking but to arrest sbriDkage and to reSist tensile ·
streSses that develop due to riSe in temperature a due to heat of hvdmtinn
 .r--

oif Serviceability Chapter 8 Sect. 8.10 Detailing of R.C. Structures 3 77

. . it State
;76 Ll11l
·..,mens t of reinforcement in Slab and Beam as given by I.S. Code are as under : reinforcement shall be spread into the slab as shown in Fig. 8.1 0.1. It has an added advantage of
q u!Jv
rtte re . giving sligMiy larger lever arm (1971/16) and result in reduction of crack width (1959/S).It also
. ,;. cement m Beams gives sufficient space for access of vibrator in a normally overcrowded beam - column junction.
}{ezn;or
For an efficient truss action to develop, it is desirable to put major part of the negative steel within
(!} Minimum tenswn. rell!JOrcement.
. ·" It rs. grven
. by
the cage of stirrups.
(i} As/ J- 0.85 J- 85 ''1.'
01
-.,.. - or p 10 .,., -- ...... (8.8.4)
bd fy I fy
=== minimum area of tension reinforcement
where, Ast === breadth of beam or breadth of web . ( bw) of flanged beams.
. b ~-

=== effective depth

d
!y === characteristic strength of steel in N/mm2

.. Maximum reinforcement: The maximum area of reinforcement in tension or Fig. 8.10.1 Detailing ofTop Reinforcement in Beam (;t~l,
(ti) ·compression shall not be more than0.04bD (i.e. p1 orpc':f 4%).Compression
reinforcement shall be enclosed by stirrups for effective lateral support. (c) Spacing of Main Reinforcement : Spacing of bars, in general, is for controlling ·
· Side face reinforcement : (99/3), When the depth of web in a beam exceeds cracking. Unless the calculation of crack widths shows that a greater spacing
. (iii) 150 mm; side face reinforcement shall be provided along wider vertical faces. is acceptable the following rules shall be applied to flexural members in normal
The total area of such reinforcement shall not be less than 0.1% of the web .:' )
internal or external conditions of exposure.
a and-shall be equally distributed on each of the two faces at a spacing \,.:
~exceeding 300 mm or w~b thickness whichever is less. .......
(1) Minimum Clear Distance :
~ini/1111111 shear reinforcement : Area of minimum stirrups is given by : (i) The Horizontal clear distance . between tWo parallel main reinforcing bars
(it'} A 0.4 0.81fyASV shall usually be not less than the greatest of the following :
-f;
~- 0.87 fy or 8 s; 0.4 b ...... <8·85) (a) The diameter of the bar,
): '.·.~

of
(b) The diameter the.larger bar if the diameters are unequel' J [~~
== total cross • sectional area of' stirrup legs effective in shear , (c) mm s more
thaD the nominal maximwn &ize of coarse aggregate. \I'

«~tere, Asv == stirrUP spacing along the length of the member, . . . Greater horilpntal distance than the minilium\'ipecified above
~hould aiWays be ·.
s == breadth ·of the beam or breadth of the web of flanged beam ·provlded · wherever possible. However, when needle vibrators are used, the horizontal
b == cbaracteristic ~trength of the stirrup reinforcement in N/mm2 which shall distance between bars of a group may be ~uced to two- thirds the nominal maximum size.
fy not be taken greater than 415 N/mm2 • . ~f the coarse aggregate, provided that sufficient space is left between groups of bars to
~le immersion and working of the vibrator. ·
. Sheafreinfo~ementis,howeve~, not necessary in member of_minor structural Comments: Normally the maximum size of coarse aggregate for beams is 20 mm. Therefore this rule:
}.{in:~ as fuitels, or where the maxunum shear stress calculated rs less than half :Shows that minimum clear spCICing shall not be less than 25 mm or diameter of bar whichever is less.
,itllpof1811 'ble value. . Note: These rules do not preclude the use of large size of aggregates beyond the region of bar
\ penu.iSSI stimJpS are required to resist any tension that might develop due to
: congestion. Smaller size may be used in congested region to meet this requirement. ·\
the }dinitiiUIII ent the reduction in shear strength due to development of such tension.
~e~d~~shall~otexceed0:7Sdor300~m
0
:-"hichever i~less.
Spacing of stirrups (ii) Vertical Clear Distance : When there are two or more rows of bars, the bars
· Sp8CIIIS. tateral restramt to bars In compressron In doubly remforced beams shall not shall be vertically in line, and the minimlim vertical distarice between two rows shall be :
. inS effectiVe 'ddt of beam, 16 times diameter of main bar or 300. mm, whichever is less. (1) 15 mm
' 111ore tbaD VII rse. reinforcement for torsion : The details are gi_ven in Sect.. 7.9.2. (2) Two- thirds the nominal maxintum size of aggregate
(v} Tr~ ment in j/ti11ges of T and L - beams : It shall satisfy the requirements (3) The maximum diameter of bar,
(vO ]letnfi~~1(Fig. 4.12.2). Where flanges are in tension, a part of the main tension
4 WhichAVPr io ..,...n._,..
'Jl) sect. ..
"'! ' Detailing of R. C. Struclw'es 3 79
Sect. 8.10
% 378 Limit State of Serviceability Chapter 8
(ii) Slabs : Spacing of longitudinal bars shall not ex,ceed Jhe following values:
TTJ. For the purpose of these clauses, diameter of a round bai shall be its nominal diam• .
and in the case of defonne4 or crimped bars, the· diameter shall be taken as that of a cirtle
Main steel .
Distribution steel
- 3d or 300 mm whicher is smaller.
- 5d or 450 mm. whichever is smaller.
~IT . giving an equivalent effective area. Similarly; in case of group of bundled bars, the diameter where, d is the effective depth ·
shall be that of an equivalent single bar giving the same total area. In practice the range of spacing is kept as $own below :
Main steel - 100 mm to 200 mm. .
\I (2) Minimum Clear Spacing of bars : The minimum clear spacing of bars in slabs, Distribution steel - 150 mm to 300 mm.
til
.... -.,
stirrups in beams and ties in columns is decided by ease of concreting. It should not be
too less to make ·casting difficult. Code does not recommend any specific value foF such
'-~:·:
I 8.10.5 Some Typical Problems In Detailing
cases. However,in practice, itis not kept below 75 mm (preferably lOOmm) in normal type Some typical problems in_ detailing occur especially at thejoints which need ~WJil s1ace
f ofwork. This does not apply to spaCing of helical reinforcement in columns. 1
joints are often the weakest link in a structural system. The detailing of typical structural members
'1( (3) Maximum Spacing ·of bars in tension : requires special attention because there is little scope for rectification after construction. The do-
(i) Beams : The horizOntal distance between parallel longitudinal bars, or groups, near
'"· the tension face of a beam shall not exceed the values given in Table 8.10.1 depending
tails are limited to a few cases most frequently occurring in building coliStruction.
i upon the amount of redistribution of moments and the characteristic strength of reinforcement.
' 8.10.6 Directional Changes of Intefnal Forces

r
.!
Table 8.iO.l : Maximum Clear Distance d11 (in mm ) between Main Ban in .Beams.

Grade of Percentage of redistribution of moments

When a concrete member is not straight or its depth abruptly clWiges, ·the change in
direction of internal forces, either tension or compression, induces a resultant force action outward
tending to split the concrete. ·
steel bars The closing comers do not present major problem but opening comers require proper
J, in N/mrrt -30 -15 0 +15 +30 de~iling (see Fig. 8.10.2).

250 215mm 260mm 300 mlil JOOmm 300mm T

'
:I·
·L 415 --. .. - 125 . JSS · .. 180 210 235 c
...

500 ., 105 130 150. 175 195 Resuttantlensile force Resuttaitt compressive force
Note : (i) The spacings given in the table are not applicable to members subjected particularly I(}
I~
aggressiw environmenis unless in calculation of the moment of resistance J, is· limUed
to 300 N/mrtf in limit state design. ·
(ii) Negative sign indicates reduction in moment. ( a ) Opening Corner ( b ) Closing Comer

RemJUks : On negative redistrihl!tion o[moment (as at supports) the design nioment is redilcft ~g. 8.1&.1
thereby redut;ing the· area of steel. As a result actual matimum stress at service loads is higher: ,_, ·
the stress if redistribution. was not done. Therefore, the bars are required to be. closer. -~
When the tensile forces at the kink of a reinforcing bar Fig. 8.10.3a !lit oot
in the same
redistribution ofmoment is done ·on positive side (as done at mid-span) the design moment and, .Ire~.
direction, the resultant force (R) acts outward tending .to split the concrete aitd open thejomt.
area of steel.is increased ret/ucing the actual stress in steel; and therefore higher spacing of J,;n When such angUlar changes are large (say a > 15° ), the reinforce!Jlent. should .anchored· by .
can be allowed · extending the bar in the same direction for a ·length eqtml to development ieng1h (LJ.from the
(II) Reinforcement for slab : intersection point so that the resultant outward force is not generated at the kink.
(see Fig 8.1 0.3b ). One of the examples is the type of arrangement I'P.r:niroo m~ rmvided at the
(i) Minimum reinforcement : The reinforcement in either direction in slab m.ll no&
be less than : · junction of landing slab with the waist slab ofstairs.
Where the imgular change is small (say a.< 15°) stirrups at and in the vicinity of the kink
0.15% of the total cross- ~tional area for mild steel reinforcement, .Le•..
(Fig 8.1 0.3c) can be used for transferring the (orce Into the comp~ssion zone of the ·member. ·
LSD where, Dis the total depth of the slab in m and )
The same pririciple is applicable whlm ~ internal compression force changes its direction
0.12% of the tOtal cross - sectional area for HYSD bars:i.e.-
(see Fig. 8.10.3d) the outward force R actS at the crown tending to break the flange. The
! l.2D . where, D is the total depth ofthe _slab. in m and
>
(ii) •Maxi~um diameter : · .· · remedy is to'provide closely spaced stirrup and additional transverse reinforcement in the flange
to prevent breaking away of the fl~ge. In the case of cranked beams meeting at large angle at
The di~eter of reinforcif18 bar in sla.P shall not exceed D/8 Where D is total thickness otllab.
It • u

,~

380 Limit State of Serviceability Sect. 8.10 (Jetailing ofR C. Structures 381
Chapta 8
top, the bars from each side can be bent back and anchored in the compression zcne 8.10.7 Cantilever Slab Supported 'by Beam
(Fig. 8.10.3e) (a) Cantilever slab at the bottom of the beam : When the beam is supporting a

~~===!
cantilever slab at its bottom or in the vicinity of its mid- depth proper care of de~iling needs to be

~T v~
taken. :
Where the cantilever slab is supported at the bottom of the beam the detailurg shoul.d conform
to the basic principles applicable to opening of comer.. The diagonal compression is directed
1
(a) Outward force (A) tending to toward the.bottom edge of the supporting beam . The reaction is required to be carried £rom this
open the joint (b) Main liars Over-lllj)p!ng for Large
angular chan~ a > 150 region towards the top ofthe beam. This can be achieved by providing the reinforcemellfshoWI1 in
Fig. 8.10.5a The design ofstirmps in the beam should provide for moment, shear, hanging tension
C tR C and torsion, ifrequired. The reinforcement of the cantilever slab, preferably, should not be threaded

~
f:lli~~~.-l.r with the main beam steel. The reinforcement of the short cantilevers is similar to that of corbels
(see Sect.5.9.5)
(c) Use ties for small angiJarchange a<15°
(b) Cantilever slab at mid - depth of beam : When the cantilever is in the vicinity of
( d ) Directional Change of compression for...,
mid.:... depth of the beam and the floor slab at its top the arrangement of reinforcement is shown in
Fig. 8.10.5b

;,~\
. Fig. 8.10.3

Opening Corners at 90 ° : At 90° opening comers the bars shall be turned back
(like a knot) and extended as in the case of water tanks see Fig. 8./0.4a or provide Ubars for the

steel should be provided.

w
case of portal frame as shown Fig. 8.10.4b. Additional splay steel equal to 50% of the main
·

c
r,~ 9
-J
?
( b ) CartiiMr slab connected near
mld-deplh of beam.

~
~ slab- beam connildlon

(a ) Cllir1tfMr slab II bollom ~ bllam

i:!:o{;:
··\··

Provide transverse stage

If relnforc.emerit > 1%
'~~t-rr/ J d' • Dllf. bet flOOr llab
/-·-

!Uid cantllver llab.

. ( a ) Water T8!Jk
( b ) goo Opening Corner CcJ Cantilever near Beam Top
(d)
Fig. 8.10.4 R.C. M~mbers with 90° OpeniDg Cracks fig. 8.10.5 Typkll Slab- Beam Connections
 ~. I
I)).r 382 Limit State of Serviceability Chapter 8 I Sect. 8.10 Detailing of R.C. Structures 383

When reaction to be transformed from the secondary beam is large bent up hanger bars
e) Cantilever slab near top of the b--..:=
When the difference between the flQOr slab and cantilever slab is less than 30 mm the tension should be used along with the closed rings as shown in Fig. 8.1 0. 6c
· . When the secondary beam is to be provided at the bottom of the main beam
steel may betakc:n into the tioor slab giving slope not more than I in 6 through the supporting beam.
(Fig. 8.lo.Jc) But when difference is greater than 30 mm it may be terminated inside the floor (e.g. Connection between latrine slab supporting beam and inverted floor beam ) saddle type of
bars may be provided for effectiv~ transfer of force to the main beam. (98/1).
t: slab providing required development length and floor slab anchored in the beam depth
(Fig. 8.10.5d) 8.10.9 Anchoring of Sh!!ar Reinforcement of Inclined Bars.
The requirement for developp1ent length for inclined bars in shear shall be the same as for
8.10.8 Main Beam Supporting Secondary Beam.
'When the secondary beam B frames into the main beam A the reaction from the secondary bars intension. The development length shall be measured as under :
(a) In tension zone, from the end of commencement of the slopping or inclined portion ofthe
beam is transfefted to the main beam through the arch action. In such a case, the stimips in the
. main beam A are required to perform the function of transferring the secondary l.~eam reaction to bar. See Fig. 8.10. 7a.
(b) In the compression zone , the development length shall be measured form the mid-depth
the compreSsion zone of main beam. If there are no adequate suspenders in .the vicinitY of the
junction with the main beam, it may lead to failure. Therefore, to hold down the compression zone of the beam see Fig. 8.1 0.. 7b.
of such beam .or other beams in which load does not act directly on the top sunface, suspender
stirrups see Fig. 8.1 0. 6a are provi~ed in the main beam in addition to those fCGilired for resisting
This point Is to be treated as
the shear. If the depth of the niain beam is Dm and secondary beam D8 , then the shear to be cut·off point lor the purpose
of development length
resisted by suspender stirrups is given by Vs = V x D8 I Dm, where , V is the shear transferred by In tension zone
, secondary beam. In absence of suspender stirrupslarge stains are produced in stirrups (provided This point is to be treated
to resist shear in the main beam ) which can lead to horizontal splitting along the flexural _ as cut-off point for the
purpose of development
·reinforcement ofthe supporting beam leading to ultima!e failure. length in compression zone
r
i
.. When beams of equal depth meet the bottoni steel of secondary t>eam should be taken above' ( b ) In Compression Zone
the bottom reinforcement of the supporting beam for effective transfer of force. See Fig. 8.10.6b ( a ) In Tension Zone
Anchorage Inclined Bend-up Bars

:;econaary oeam - rMt:Unueam Mainb--·-· ""'V""':"OIVMIJU-111

Fig. 8.10.7 Anchoring of Shear Reinforcement oflnclined Bent-up Bars

,, T t
Dm·
I
B
~!::!
~
A
~"!

B '
8.10.10 Bent-up Bars in Beams
A,s mentioned in Sect. 5-:6.4 that the first bent up bar shall be bent at a distance not
!I ·A exceeding 2d. from the centre of support to obtain its contribution for resisting shear. The

1 _____.
Suspender stirrups
subsequent bar shall be bent at a distance not exceeding (d I 2 + d /2 cota.) i.e. dfor a.= 45° see
Fig8.10.8. These bent up bars shall be considered to resist shear provided they are anchored for
a distance equal to Ld from the mid depth of the beam in co~pression zone.
. ( a ) Beams of unequal depths { b ) Beams of equal depths ld
LINE OF CRACK

I- Hanger Bars :secondary Beam

.5d
I
(i~
1
r
r·" ., I
I

!i-~
---
I
I

I~
r

v
lI BEAM
(c),
Cloae Rlnllll - ·
f_\

~
L...a....r.. D--
Fig. 8.10.8 Bent-up Bars in Beams ,· t,
Fig.· 8.10•.6 Conaedlou betweea Malll Beim iad SftGildarf Beam .
!1!!
.... 1
384 Limit State of Serviceability ~.

Chapter 8 · Sect. 8.10 Detailing of R.C. Structures 385

·lI 8.10.11 Shear Reinforcement Close to Support
! The splicing of column bars is normally required to be done, at the floor level. Wlien the
I When the load is applied close to support, the ratio of shear span to depth ratio is low, arch
i column at the floor level is of the same size approximately there is not much difficulty in splicing
i action becomes predominant after diagonal cracking (See Sect. 5..6. 8). The provision of horizontal
or inclined stirrups as in Fig. 8.10.9 improve the conditions around the reaction an\q increases the the column steel above the floor level. The lower column bars can be cranked at a slope not (i~
shear friction strength along a potential diagonal crack between the load and the su~rt reaction exceeding I in 6 to lie within the upper column. The splicing is effected by the lapping of bars as ..
shown in Fig. 8.10.11 a But when the size of the upper column is considerably less say
Hairpins to control.._ p
p D2 < (D 1 - 150 ) as shown in Fig. 8.10.11 b the longitudinal bar in the lower column should be
splitting cracks
\ terminated at the floor slab and separate dowels used .

T 1-Drl

PJ??:F~ I I ~_j_ B lower

bars ,
colum~
1
---1
1 J-0

~,2
Top column

-·1
+
bars 2
1fA>-
1~
column bars

Dowel bars
02< (01·150)
~
,~,Js ,__ .!.
D lWei bars s l?fV'

Fig. 8.10.9 Inclined or Horizontal Reinforcement for Load Applied near Support 75
p
1--
1-::' .fsT~
8.10.12 Splicing of column Reinforcement
When the column verticals are offset bent (Fig.8.10.10) the concrete in the vicinity of the
4 512
f- Floor slab

bar end may be incapable of absorbing the stresses. Due to cranking of bar the steel force changes -
its direction resu.lting in generation of transverse forces (shown by dotted arrow in Fig. 8.10.10)
ln such a case transverse reinfOrcement at and near the ends of spliced bars becomes imperative
to give confinement to the highly stress concrete at the ends. The additional ties shall be placed at '
a spacing not more than 8 bardiameterfrom the point of bend with minimum 3 closely spaced ties
. The number of ties to be designed should resist 1.5 times the horizontal components of the normal ,__ o1--l·
stress in the inclined portion of the bars. The different methods of cranking into upper bar and into
lower bar are shown in Fig. 8.10.10.
t-o~
1-- 01--l

Column
face
.II~jl II.£ · c ~1
Outer face
t, of column (b) (c)
~o.l'""l Fig. 8.10.11
Horizontal component of}
j the force in the Inclined . Additional
portion to be laken by - - }
fies at bent When the bar arrangement changes between floors, bars may extend through or stop off
1111~!
/inksAt'A' Construction
Joint
steel equal an area and bond capacity to that in the column above shall be extended Fig. 8.10.11
No links are
required at '8'..,_
B.t 8.10.13. Column Beam Connection
Lap
Length Where the beam does not frame into the column on all four sides, transverse reinforcement
j_ ( i.e. links) are provided in the column for the full depth for the beam or alternately U- bars are
provided with the beam to restrain the coi~Jlln bars from buckling and confine the concrete at a
joint (Fig 8.10.12a and b). This helps iri ensuring failure of a ductile nature which is more
important in earthquake resisting structures. Ductile structure yields, absorbs and dissipates very
(a) f large amount of el)ergy by moving out of elastic range well into the inelastic range. However, wheri
(b)
Fig. 8.10.10 Splice with Offset Crack Bar .in Column the beams frame into all four sides of the column, the main bars of the beams are stonnecl <i:hort of
 386 Limit State of Serviceability Chapter 8
column bars to:~wpid congestion at the joint and clashing of beam bars with column bars. The
transfer of force fr<>m beam to column is ensured by providing splice bars to beam reinforcement CHAPTER- 9
later on, after the complete reinforcements of column and beams are placed in position. The details
are shown in Fig 8.10.12c. SLAB
lcJ 9.1 INTRODUCTION
·~,s~
9.1.1. Definition
A slab is a flat, two- dimensional, planer structural element having thickness small compared
~~~In tens•or \ to its other two dimensions. It provides a working flat surface or a covering shelter in buildings. It
Ld r~ 4,~.~, r , , 1 \M supports mainly transverse loads and transfers them to support primarily by bending action in one
or more directions. Reinforced concrete slab covers relatively large area compared to beam or
column. Therefore, volume of concrete and, hence, dead load is large in the case of slab. A small
reduction in depth of slab therefore, leads to a considerable economy. But care has to be taken to
see that its performance (serviceability) is not affected due to excessive deflection and cracking..

(a) A Fixed End Joint in column 9.1.2 Methods of Analysis

The analysis of slab is very complicated because of the influence of number of factors such
as shape of the slab, boundary condition, loading and state of stress (elastic, inelastic, plastic) with
( b ) Typical Details of Beam-column
Junction at Exterior Column
the result rigor.ous or exact (closed- form) solutions are not easily available. Various methods of
analysis, evolved are as follows :
· (i) Classical methods of elastic analysis,
(iQ Semi- empirical method based on coefficients.
These are normally prescribed by design codes for practical design in lieu of classical
methods (e.g. Westergaard's method, Rankine- grashoffs theory including Marcus'
·corrections, and Piegauds' theory).
(iii) Yield line theory and Hillerborg strip method (8217) for the ultimate load analysis.
Anchor bars
short of column (iv) Numerical techniques requiring use of computers (e.g. Finite difference method, Finite
element method etc.). The use of these methods is helpful for slabs with complex lo!lding
and boundary <;onditions.

9. 2. CLASSIFICATION AND DESIGN OF SLABS

9.2.1 Classification of Slabs /

Slabs are classified in general as follows: ./
(a) Ontlie basis of shape : Rectangular, circular, other shapes.
(b) On the basis of spanning directions:. Spanning in one direction i.e. One -way slab,
spanning in two orthogonal direction i.e. Two- way slab.
(c) On the basis oftype ofsupport: Slab simply supported on walls, slab cast monolithically
with the supporting beams, slab supported directly on columns. .
(d) On the basis of support or boundary conditions : Single span slab, cantilever, slab
simply S\lpported atboth ends, slab gverhanging on one or both ends, slim flxed.or C(')ntinuous
at one or both ends; Multi-span stabs.
~}' (c)
(e) On the basis 'of use : Roof slab, floor slab, wall slab, or foundation slab like footing or raft
etc.· ..
:·,.·, Fig. 8.10.12 Beams Columns Connections.
 . ;· ':.~
··~ 11 ;'
A#

388 Slab
Chapter 9 Sect. 9.2 Classification and design of slabs 389
(f) On the basis of Sectional configuration of the plate : Solid slab, ribbed plate. waffle In the .case of a rectarigular slab supported on all four sides, the two- way bending is predominant
plate, stiffened plate, corrugated plate, folded plate.
Solid slab is a flat horizontal plate without ribs or stiffeners. only when LY I LX is· less than 2. When Ly I LX exceeds 2*, practically entire slab excepting a small
Ribbed plate is a plate with longitudinal ribs in one directions. portion near short edges spans only across short span and is, therefore, designed as one-way
Waffle plate or stiffened plate is flat plate with ribs or stiffeners in one or both directions. slab.
Corrugated plate is a thin plate bent to corrugated shape to get stiffness in one direction.
Folded plate is a plate folded to get stiffness in one or two directions. Fig.9.2. I (a toe)
(g) On the-basi; of composition across the thickness : Homogeneous plates, layered or
sandwich plates. Layered or Sandwich plates comprise of with more than one layer of
thin plates glued together. Fig. 9.2.1(!)
(h) On the basis oftheoretical solution for analysis : Thin plates subjected only to bending One-way slab Two-way slab
action analyzed by small deflection theory. Thin ·plates subjected to· bending as well as
membrane action (in plane forces) analyzed by large deflection theory; and thick plates Mainsteel Mainsteei~L<n<Bauu
involving shear deformations besides bending. "' j 1m .~ m . . 1! :~ -,_,.

1
I
I I
8 al-
l
BJar- ~"'
I
• r I I
~ 7 1.., V m 'm'

LriririFU
t
( a ) Solid Slab ( b ) Ribbed Slab Ar--f--18 Ar--r--18
( c ) Stiffended Plate f4- Span --1 i'o-L,c--1
( a ) One -way slab ( b )Two -way slab

/\JVv\.1\ /VVVV\ ~mmsmnmss'O~.

( d ) Corrugated Plate
( e ) Folded Plate (I ) Sandwitch Plate
Fig. 9. 2 .1 Different Types ofSI!Ibs based on configuration
In practical <tesign,rectangular slabs ar~ mosfcommon. They are categorised as under :
( i) One - way slab, ( ii) Two - way Slab, (iii) Flat slab ' of the bottom distribution steel in long span direction to top of ~hort supports.
When a siab is s1,1pported only on two opposite parallel edges, it spans only in the direction
perpendicular .to two supporting edges. It bends in one direction and the deflected surface is
primarily,of sjngle curvature. The main reinforcement,is only provided in the direction of the span
to resist o~e way bending. Such a slab is known as a one - way slab or slab spanning in one
·direction. Fig. 9.2.2a.
A slab supported on four parallel or non- parallel edge supports, which may either be walls or
beams, bends in more than one direction. When the supports are orthogonal, the slab spans in two
dirt:ctions at right angles to supporting edges. The deflected surface is of double curvature. The
load is carried in both directions to the four supporting edges, hence the slab is called two- way a span to depth ratio: In some critical cases actual deflection may be worked out and checked with
. slab or slab spanning in two directions. (Fig. 9.2.2b ). In this slab, main reinforcement runs across
both the spans to resist two- way bending. The two- way bending action is not only a function of
non- parallel support conditions but also on the ratio of long span Lv to short span LV.
Fig. 9.2.2.
Remarks : A rectangular slab with ratio L I L < 2 and supported on all sides can also be made to
behave predominantly as one way slab (i.e. by m~king it to bend mainly along the short span) by
providing main steelfor full one way bending (i.e. to transfer full load across the short span only).
However, this solution though favoured in practice to a large extent because of simplicity of design, it may
not be economical and further it leads to cracking at top· along the shorter edges because of differential 1.:.
deflections between the slab and supporting beam or wall. This is partially prevented by bending 50 %
A R.C. slab supported directly on .the columnswithout any intermediate beams is called a
flat plate or a flat slab. 'It gives pleasing appearance and larger clear ceiling height. It is also
provided with steel in both principal directions. But portion ofslab close to the supporting column is
often required to be thickened to provide adequate strength in shear and flexure. (See Sect. 9. 7)
The design of slab is made to satisfy both serviceability and strength requirements. Since the
depth of slab is small it is generally governed by serviceability requirement for deflection rather
than the flexuntl strength ofslab. The deflectiol) criteria is nomially satisfied by adhering to effective
:·,_.,,
Note : *Students many times blindly give emplwis. on the ratio L/ Lx without reference to support conditions.
A sqrtore slab wit/1 L,, Ly =· 1 will also act as one way slab if it is supported only on two oooosite edl!es.
~:·

r', One-way slab 391

r 390 Slab Chapter 9
the pepnissible value (see Ex, 8. 7.2 ). The serviceability requirement for crack is met with by
Sect. 9.4

Mfing L/ Lx > 2, acts as a one.- way slab bending primarily along the short span. The design steps
adhering to normal detailing rules. The reinforcement is provided to satisfy strength requirements. are as under :
In sOlid slabs the shear strength of concrete is greater than the nominal shear stress. Tests 1. Span :Depending on' end conditions determine the effective span (see Sect 9.3) of the slab.
have shown th~t shallower members fail at a higher nominal shear stress and hence shear Since the effective span is also dependent on effective depth, assume effective depth between
reinforcement is generally not required. Normally solid slabs are safe against shear and therefore, L/22 to L/28 for Fe 415 and L/28 to L/34 for Fe 500 type of steel.
L shear check is even not taken.
Comments : Normally the width of support is greater than the effective depth of the slab, hence in practice
9.3. EFFECTIVE SPAN FOR SLAB OR BEAM effective span is taken equal to the centre to centre distance between the supports on the safer side.
Initially the effective span is computed depending on the supporting conditions.
(
(a) ·For simply supported slab or beam which is not built integrally with its supports, and for 2. Trial Depth : The total depth of the slab is equal to effective depth plus effective
I continuous· slab or· beam having breadth of support less than 1112 of clear span. cover(= clear cover+ half bar diameter). As mentioned earlier the effective depth is governed by
·.Effective span = L = (centre to centre distance between supports or clear span +effective serviceability requirements of deflection. Calculate the effective depth of slab based on Lid ratio.
depth ) whichever is less. Span
(b) For continuous slab or beam having breadth of support greater than l/12 of clear span or Required Effective depth = d = (Lid) x Modification .factor a.
600 mm whichever is less, the effective span shall be taken as under : 1
( i)Forend span with one end fixed and the other continuous or for intermediate spans:
Effective span = L = clear span between supports. The basic of Lid ratios are given in ~s~ct.8.6.3. Use the graphs given in Fig. 8.6.f for
(ii) For end span with one end free and the other continuous, f=290 N/mrr?-, 240 N/mm 2 and 145 N/mm 2 directly for steel grade Fe 500, Fe 415 and Fe 250
s
Effective span = L = (clear span + \6 effective depth of slab I beam or clear span + half respectively (00/2).
· the width of discontinuous support)whichever is less. Initially assume the percentage of steel as given below ~
(fu) For cantilevers : Grade of steel Percentage of steel.
(a) Effective span = L = Length of a cantilever to the face of support +half the effective Fe 250 0.5% to 0.90%
!~
depth. Fe 415 0.25% to 0.45%
(b) Cantilever at the end of continuous beam : Fe 500 0.2% to 0.35%
Effective span = L = Length of cantilever to the centre of support.
(iv) Continuous Frames: Total depth= D = d +clear cover+ haif bar diameter
Effective span = L = distance between centers of supports. Clear cover or nominal cover to be provided depends on exposure conditions and it given in·
,- .
In practice the centre to centre distance between the supports is taken as an effective span for
simplicity and on the safer side.
Table 2.2.3

(' 9. 4 ONE- WAY SLAB

3. Loads : Consider one metre width ofthe slab :
Dead load/m = selfweightofslab +floor finish=. 25 D+ FF where, Dis in metre
·9.4.1 Introduction ' Live load or imposed load (LL), are given in Appendix -B
I As stated earlier, one - way slab bends only in one direction across the span, and ac~ like a Compute total working load: Total working loads = DL + LL
.wide beam of unit width. A slab is assumed to be made up of such small strips placed side by side Total (maximum) ultimate load = wmax = wu = 1.5 (DL
.
+ LL)
and acting independently. In fact, the compression acting on the concrete above the neutral axis and Minimum design load = wmm. = DL
makes the slab strip to·expand laterally i.e. causing increase in width at top. and reduction of width·
at bottom due to Poisson's effect But this lateral expansion is actually prevented by adjacent strips 4. Design Moments (Mj
creating a condition.ofconfinement ofconcrete which increases the stiffness. However, this beneficial Critical Section for Bending Moment :
effect derived fr~m tliis Poisson's effect is ignored making the design more safe. ., . The critical section for positive or sa_ggingbending happens to be at the point of zero shear.
llowevet, the maximum negative or hogging bending moments are calculated at the centre .of
· 9.4.2 Design o( One way Slab supports assuming point support. In R.C. construction, the support to slab is given either by wall or
'..__/

.. The analysis lllld design ofone .:.. way slab is the same as that. of beam of width l m. As beam or column whiCh has width quite large compared to thickness of s1ab. These supports give
:JDenti.i:lliCd
. .. . the slab supported
.earlier, . - two opposite edges is a <in~~ way
- Gn .. slabandalso the slab distributed re8ctions:causing reduction in maximum support moment. .This decrease in bending
:111.
:1. J·
one-way slab 393
·392 Slab 1 Chapter9 Sect. 9.4
· moment is accounted for by taking the critical section for negative moment at the face of support. .If M >M the section is adequate from bending moment requirements.
· ur.max u.max
But the computation of moment at the face of the support involves tedious calculations and he~ce, Alternatively, obtain Mu.max
bending moment is normally calculated at the centre of support. d ="'- / which shall be less than d provided
For simply supported slab, Mu = wu L2!8 Ru.max X 1000
For continuous slab : If the above condition is not satisfied provide the depth required from BM considerations.
(a) The design moments can be worked out using different combinations of loads (see Ex.9.4.4)
or 6. Main Steel
(b)_Design moments can be obtained as per the coefficients given in the code as : For Slabs; Substituting b =1000 mm in Eq. 4.5.6a we get,
Mu = a.d wud1/ + a.L wuL L2 where, wud = 1.5 DL and wuL = 1.5 * LL
The coefficient for bending moment and shear force are given in Table. 9.4.1 Required Ast
O.S fck [
=- - 1-
1-
4.6M
u
J
. x1000xd-fA.
stmm
... (9.4.1}
fck 1000 X tf .
fy X

Table 9.4.1 Bending moment and Shear force coefficients for continuous beam/slab with three
or more equal spans. A . = 0.12% bD for HYSD bars (Fe 415 or Fe 500}
s.mm
1
(a) Bending Moment Coefficients : f-'r I
or A . = 0.15% bD \for Mild Steel, (Fe 250}
1
s.mm
1
End Penultimate Interior ...... (9.4.2}
Support support · ·supports- Required, spacing , s = 1000 ast I Ast

f ' f t
t ' f~ where , ast = area of bar used, Ast = total area of steel required.
\
DL ad 0 +1/12 -1/10 +1/16' -1/12 +1/16 -1112 Maximum spacings (3d or 300 mm) whichever is less.
LL a.L 0 +1/10 -:-119 +1/12 -1/9 +1112 -1/9 ':',.

(b) Shear Coefficients:

7. Check for de}lection
'!+~
Calculate , p % = 100 Asf(bd) where, Ast is the maximum area of steel provided at mid-span.
DL 0.4 0.6 0.55 0.5 0.5 0,5 I 1
' Calculate steel stress = 0.58.fy x Ast(reqd)' I Ast(prov)'
LL 0.45 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 From Fig. 8. 6.1 cal~;ulate the modification factor and required depth which should be less than the
Nott;~: effective depth provided.
( 1) DL =bead load , LL =Live load or imposed load not fixed. The other shortcut method is to check that (p 1) reqd < (p (assume
I d.·,because as p1 increases
·
( 2) For obtaining the bending moment, the BM coefficients shall be multiplied by the total design load and span. modification factor decreases with the result required depth increases. .
( 3) For obtaining the shear force, the shear force coefficients shall be multiplied by the total design load.
( 4) These coefficients are applicable for three or more spans which do not differ by more than 15% of the 8. Distribution steel :
longest span. In other cases ~act analysis should be made. Required Ast = 0.12% b D for Fe 415 and Fe500 and
( 5) At supports where two unequal spans meet or where the spans are not equally loaded, the average of the two
= 0.15% bD for Fe250
values for the· negative moment at the support may by taken for design.
where, b = lOOOmmandDistheoveralldepthoftheslab.
( 6) When coefficients given in the above Table are used for calculation of bending moment redistribution of
>MaxirilUm spacings (5d or 450 mm) whichever is less.
moments shall not be permitted.

9. Check for shear

5. Check for· concrete depth Calculate maximum shear V taking· Into consideration continuity coefficients given in
Since the depth of the slab is obtained (in step 2) from serviceability considerations it is . u.max
required to be checked.from bending moment requirements. Table 9.4.1
Calculatemaximummoment carryingcapacityofthesection.Mur.max = Ru.max bd2 ... (Eq.4.5.5a) Obtain the design shear stress 't uc corresponding top1= -100 Astl I (bd) .from Table 5. 7.1
· · .
Fof slab, b = IOOOmmandRu.maito be obtained from Table 4.5.1 or Eq. 4.5.Sa where,_. A..• =area of tension steel at the section nnrlP.r rl'ln.,itiP,.,.tinn
 394 Slab
Chapter 9
Sect.· 9.4 One-way slab 395
Calculate
. shear resistance
.
of slab = V = k 't bd
~ ~

Where, k accounts for increase in shear resistance due to membrane action of slab and is given in (b) For support steel or negative moment steel:
Table --
9.4.2.
---· · The lengths of the bars provided for resisting negative moment should not be less than the
Table 9. 4. 2 Values of k for Slab development length given by: Required, Ld = k$ = ( 0.87 fy I 41bd)+ ... ...(Eq. 6.2.lc)
Depthofslabinmm I ~300 I 275 J 250 J 225 I 200 I 175 J <150 where, 'tbd =Design bond stress given in Table 6.2.1
Multiplyingfactor,k I 1.00 j 1.05 I 1.10 I 1.15 I 1.20 I 1.25 I 1.30 The available development length is the actual·length of the bar from the face of intermediate
support of a continuous beam/slab or a cantilever.
Normally depth of slab in building is less than 150 mm therefore factor k equal to 1.3 is used and In case of continuous beam,
-V~ works out to be much greater than V~~ and therefore, shear check is not taken. Required length= x0 + ( 12 $or d or clear span/16) whichever is greater
If Vuc > V then safe else increase the thickness of the slab.
u.m~ where, x0 = distance of point of contraflexure from the centre of support.
In practice top bars in slab are provided for a length equal to 0.3L or 50% curtailed at 0.15 L from
10. Check for development length
the face of support, (see Fig. 9. 4. 2 ). These lengths shall be greater than Ld.
(a) For positive moment steel i.e. bottom steel at support :
Ldat discontinuous end < 1.3 M/ V + L0 ...... (Eq.6.5.2)
9.4.3 Detailing of Reinforcement
where, M1 = moment of resistance of the section assuming all bars stressed to fyd ( = 0.87 f) In the case of a continuous slab of equal spans and loaded by a uniformly distributed load the
when 50 % bars are available at supports,M1 ~n~s: a]pproximately taken equal to Mu.max/ points of contraflexures occur at a section away from the continuous end at a distance varying
2 between 0.2 L to 0.27 L. In view of this 50% of bottom tension steel can be curtailed or bent up at
lf distance of 0.25 L from,the centre of support and the top bars can be continued for a length of
~· or. M1 = Mu = 0.87 fyAs1 x d - /bd
-- ... ... (Eq. 4.5.3b)
0.3L from the face of the supports. Based on these, the detailing of reinforcement in the slab is
ck
Lo = sum of anchorage beyond the centre of support plus hook allowance (ha) (seeFig.9.4. 1) made. The different methods used in detailing of one way or two way continuous slabs are given
L0 =x2 +haand x2 = b/2-x -(r+$) below:
1
x 1 = endcover, bs =BreadthofSupport,r=2$forFe250 andr= 4$forHYSDbars 9.4.3.1 Type - A Detailing
ha = 16 $for 180° bend and ha = 8 $for 90° bend In this case all the bars provided in each row are bent up in one direction. If the bars in the odd
rows are cranked to the right, the bars in the even rows are cranked to the left. Additional steel to
resist the negative moment, if required, is provided at the top of support. The typical details of bar
bending is sho~n is Fig. 9.4.2 a in ~hich even though the bars are in the same layer they are
shown in separate layer for clarity. The fabrication ofbars in this type of detailing is much simpler
for slabs having equal spans, because diameter of bars required are normally less than 16 mm
diameter so that they can be bent-up easily.
~

··.·; 9.4.3.2 Type - B Detailing

bs
In this type the required diameter- spacing combination of bars is provided at top face over
r-~ of support the support to resist negative moment and independent diameter spacing combination of the bars is
Fig. 9. 4. 1 Details of Anchorage provided at the bottom face of the mid span region to resist positive bending moment as shown in
Using 90°bendforHYSDbars,L
. 0
b/2-x
s 1
=
-(4$+$)+ 8$ = b/2-x
s 1
+3$ ... ... (9.4.3a) Fig. 9.4.2b. This avoids completely the cranking ofbars thereby fa&rication is very simpi.: resulting
Using 180°bendforFe250, L0 = bj2-x1 -(2$+$) +16$ = bp-x +13$ ... (9.4Jb) in reduction in time and cost of fabrication. However, chairs are required to be provided for supporting
1
.. Notes : top bars during concreting. This type of detailing is particularly convenient in case of slabs of
,j

(1) The check for shear is mostly satiSfied in all cases of slabs subjected to uniformly distributed load and irregular pattern.
therefore, omitted in design calculations. ·
··~
(i) · The check for development length is also normally satisfied .in case of slab and hence they are also 9.4.3.3 Type -:- C Detailing .
skipped in. design computations. . . ..
~.::.'~j It is a running type detailing in which each bar runs from one end Of the support to the other
t&Y
end of the support as a continuous bar. The alternate bottom bars are bent up at the supports, and
 ·,~\£'·

/"c

One-way slab 397

396 Slab Chapter 9 Sect. 9.4

the remaining half number of bars run as continuous bars at the bottom. Fig. 9.4.2 c shows 9.4.4 Illustrative Examples
reinforcement details for this type ofdetailing. In this case the bottom bars are designed for maximum The Following types of examples have been covered in this section
positive monient and extra bars are provided at top of support to meet lite requirements of steel to Ex.9.4.1 Design of simply supported slab.
resist negative moment. Since the diameter spacing combination of bars is decided based on Ex.9.4.2 Design offive span continuous slab using I.S. Code coefficients.
maximum moment at mid span ofthe end span, this reinforcement will be in excess of requirements Ex.9.4.3 Design of cantilever porch
at mid span of interior supports. Therefore, the quantity of steel required is more than the other Ex.9.4.4 Three span continuous slab designed by three different methods
!:fl.~
cases. (A) Exact method (B) Exact method with redistribution of moments
(C) I.S. Code method

Ex. 9.4.1 :Design a simply supported one-way slab provided over a clear span of
2
3.37 m. I{ carries alive lotid of 4.0 kN I m2 and floor finish of 1.5 kN I m . Width of
supporting walls is 230 mm. Steel grades used Fe 415. Assume moderate environment.

Lt L2 , Given : For moderate environment required clear cover from Table 2.2.3 is 30 mm and
( a ) Reinforcement Type - A Detailing
grade of concrete is M25 :. fck = 25 N I m~, _. ,
415Nim~, LL=4kNI~, FF=l.5kNI~,
:-1 j-O.tL1
j-o.aLr-1
h1.tstrl
1-o.aLr-!
H!.tSLrf
j- 0.3L ;;!
HI-t
f=
y
bs
=230mm
Clear span Lc = 3370 mm.
-
Solution:
~.2~Lfi±t0.25L~ 1. Trial Depth D:
Lt ~ Assuming effective depth d = 130 mm,
( b ) Reinforcement Type - B Detailing Effective span = ( clear span + d) or ( c/c distance between supports ) whichever is less
Effective span= lesser of( 3.37 + 0.13 or 3.37 + 0.23) :. L = 3.5m.
-t j+-o.tL1 j-0.3L 1-j j-o.aL2-j j-0.3Lz-j Assumingp1 = 0.35 %
Modification factor= 1.4 from Fig .8.6.1 corresponding to fs = 240 N I mnf and p1= 0.35%
Basic LId = 20, Allowable LId= 20 x 1.4 = 28 :. Requited d = 3500/28 =125 mm
Provide total depth of 160 mm. · ·
Lt L2 Assuming 8 mm diameterofbars Providedd= 160-30-8/2= 126mm
-,,
(c) Reinforcement Type- c Detailing
Note : 0 AI bars may be in the same layer. For clarity they have been shown in different layers 2) Loading: Total load w = selfweight+floorfinish +live load
= 25x0.16+4+1.5 = 9.5kNI~.
Ultimate load wu = 1.5 w = 1.5 x 9.5 = 14.25 kN/m.
Fig. 9.4.2 Different Methods of Detailing of Reinforcement for Sllibs
2
3) Design moment: Mu = wuL218= 14.25
'.
x 3.5 ,1!
' '
= 21.8 kN.m
9.4.3.4 Type-D Very Conservative Detailing (94/2)
For M25- Fe 4l5 R = 0.36 x 25 x 0.48 (1-0.42 x 0;48) =3.45 N lmnt
In the case of cantinuous slab simply supported at ends, the diameter and spacing of the bar u.max
is calculated for the maximum moment at penultimate support. The same diameter arid spacing is 6

provided at all !Jlid-spans and top of interior supports. This type ofdetailing is very uneconomical. - ... /<2~18x10 )= 79.5 mm. -
The only advant,age, for slabs ofequal spans, is the fabrication of bars and their placement is much
Required d
-'J 3.45x1000 (:a~-
· simpler and very I~ superVision is required. Even though this type of detailing is provided by
some engineers . in practice but authors do .not recommend the same due to unnecessary extra Required. D for strength.= 79.5+30+ 8/2.;.ll3.5mm< I60mm
.quintity .Qf ste¢1 required and cons~dera~le increase in cost .
,..-.--..
\

'lil·' 398 Slab

Chapter 9 ~.9:4 One-way slab 399
ill I

1\1[ i:
(4} Main steel: 05
A= - 1 -
st j
fckf 1-
J;,k
4.6Mu J
X 1000 Xcf . X1000 Xd (Eq. 9.4.1)
~f Check for Development length :

r:
y
0.87 X 415
Ld = ~=41~ ==41 x 8=328mm ...... (Eq. 6.2.1 c)

o~G- Jo6l
.. , I
4 X( 1.4 X 1.6 )
= ]- 4.6 X 2).8 X
'IIi'( 415 [ 25 X1000 X J26~J000 X 126 = 5)5 mml
• 1,
Ld < 1.3 M1 I V+L0 ...... (Eq. 6.5.2)
t!ii'
l;i!l'
Pt,req,
t. d)=J00X5151(1000XI26)=0.4%
Since the alternate bars are bent up at support available¥1 = MJ2 = 21.8/2 = 10.9 kNm
1:1\li.
~. !£; Provide 8mm diameter bar at s =1000 x 50 I 515 = 97 mm say 90 mm c/c Assuming L0 = 0, 328 mm < 569 mm (= 1.3 x (1. 0.9 x 1000) I 24.9)
-
Area of steel provided =I 000 x 50 I 90 =556 mm2 · :. Theoretically no anchorage is required however the bar shall extend for a length of 110 mm
( =Lj3 ) from the inner face of support.
~) Check for deflection.

Steel stress =js =058 xjy x (A st )reqdl Comments :

- . (A st )prov. =058 x 415 x SIS/556=223Nimm2
-
(p) provided = 100 x 556 I ( 1000 xi26) =0.44% I. Whe~ ck spacing between colfnnn is given, it can be taken as an effective span for the slab which
I . ..
is on the safer side and hence the centre to centre spacing will be used as an effective span for
Actual modification factor
--
corresponding
·-
to-pI =0.44% andjs =223 N!mml from
further design calculations.
Fig8.6.1, a ,;, 1.4
1 2. It will be seen from the above calculations that the slab is over safe in shear and adequate
:. Required depth= 35 x 1000 I ( 20 x 1.4) = 125 mm < 126 mm. :. O.K. development length is also available after bending 50% bars at support, Therefore, these checks
Comments: are left as an exercise for the reader for further problems.
3. In long narrow slab or passages designed as one- way slab, the effect of temperature and shrinkage
· (I ) Since the depth of the slab is governed by deflection criteria , initially assume the percentage
of steel and obtain the modification factor for!, = 290 , 240, and 145 Nlmm2 corresponding to steel grade ~tresses is· visible. In such a case provide either cross beam or control joints at regular internal.
Fe 500, Fe 415 and Fe 250 respectively.
(2) Ifassumed value of p1 is greater than required p1 i.e p1 (assumed) > p (required) the deflection The details of reinforcement are shown iir Fig. 9. 4~ 3
chec;k may be considered to be satisfied This is because as p1 goes on increasing, 1 modification factor goes
on decreasing with the result required effective depth increases.
The detailed deflection check may be carried out if p1 (assumed) < p required. In the present case
PI assumed= 0.35% < 0.4% ( = pI required) the detailed check for deflection1 is carried out as given above.
\.

(6) Distribution steel: Required A31 = 0.12 .x 1000 x 160/100 = 192 mm~
:. Provide# 8 mm at 260 mm clc givingAst = 193 mml.

(7}' Check for shear: Desig~ shear vuD = wu L I 2 = l4.25 X3.5012 = 24.9 kN
Design shear stren~h '~f concrete= t uc = 0.46 N!mml for p = 0.44% and concrete grade Fig. 9;4~3 One- way Simply Supported Slabs.
1
\
M25 (Table 5.7.1)
For slab forD= 160 mm, k = 1.28 by linear interpolation ...... (Table 9.4.2) _ Ex. ,.4.2 :·Desfgn the roof slab oj'a,multipurpose hall having height of6 m above the floor
level arid inside dimensions of 19. 77 ;;,_ x,~ 9. 97 in~ The· thickness_ of the wall_ is 230 mm. The
Shear resisted by concrete = Vuc =.(tuc x L28) x bd= 0.46 x 1.28 x1000 x 126/1000 ·
centte to ce~tre distance between the beams is 411i. Theiive load on the slabis 1.5 kN/ml and
= 74.2/cN» vuD( = 24.9 leN)
/ jlo~r finish of 1.5/cNITif. CM.crete grad~ us~d i~ M20 and steel Fe 415. Assu;,e.,mild
eiiYii-oirm,f!t. . . .
 __.,

Sect. 9.4 One-way slab 401

400 Slab Chapter 9 -•\"'
2 2
G~ven: fck = 20 N/mrrt .fy = 4I5 Nlmm 2,
Hall size I9.77m x 9.97m Ultimate moment at any section is given by : M11 = ad wud L + a L wuL L
2 2
LL = I.5 kN!m , FF= I.S kN/m , bs = 230 mm.
. For mild environment with bar size not exceeding I2 mm, Nominal cover = 20-5 = I5 mm. Ultimate moment at middle of outer span i.e. at Sect. I
~· Required : Design of roof slab S2 M = 7.125 x 42/12 + 2.25 x 42/10 = 13.1 kN.m
!I 111
Solution : . Ultimate moment at penultimate support i.e. at Sect.2
I.
iI, The centre to centre distances between end supports. Mu = 7.125 x 42/10 + 2:25 x 42/9 = I5.4 kNm
2
I. = ( I9.77 + 0.23) x( 9.97 + 0.23) =20m x I0.2 m Ultimate moment at middle of inner span i.e. at Sect.3
'' .t Mu = 7.125 x 42/16 + 2.25 x 42/12 = 10.13 kN.m = Mu5 "
I: 3
I'
i'
The beams will be placed at distance of 4 m. The structural plan is shown in Fig. 9.4.4a Ultimate moment at interior support i.e. at Sect. 4
!I . The effective span will be taken equal to centre to centre distance between the supports for Mu = 7.125 x 42/12 + 2.25 x 42/9 = 13.5 kNm
4
!, conservative design. The design is given in the following steps.
I The slab S2 is five. span continuous slab. (5) Check for depth of slab from B.M. consideration.
!
~ .
Span : L = c/c distance between supports = 4 m.
(I) Trial Depth: Assume · p1 = 0.35 %, Modification factor= I.4, Basic Lid=: 26 M = 2.76 x 1000 x 111 2 x I0- 6 =34kNm> M 2 (= 15.4/rN) :. Safe
I: :. Required effective depth = 4000/ ( 26 x 1.4 ) = II Omm
ur.max u

li
L Provide total depth = I30 mm
(6) Main steel: The area ofsteel at-different section are calculated using Eq. '9.4.1
If Using# 8 mm oars effective d((llth provided d= I30 -15-8/2 = IIImm.
u (2) Loads: Consider one metre width of the slab i.e. b = lOOOmm 0.5 X 20 [ 4.6 X (13.1 X
6
JQ )] 2
:\·~ Dead load = 25 xO.I3= 3.25 kN/m A = - - 1- 1-
2
x 1000xlll = 350mm
:I stl 415 20 X 1000 X 111 .
~ Floor finish = 1.50 kN!m
I"'. Working dead load == wd = 3.25 + 1.5 "'4.75 kN/m

l
jll
Ultimate dead load = wIId = 1.5 x 4.75 = 7.125 kN/m 0.5 X 20 [
-1-
J- 4.6 X (15.4 X }06)].
20x lOOOx 1112 x lOOOx Ill= 417mm2
I' Live load = wL = I.S kN!m Ast2 =
415 .
ii Ultimate live load = wuL = I.S x 1.5 = 2.25 kN/m
IIj
~ (3) Design moments : Ultimate moments are calcvlated at different sections using I.S. Code·
x!0 ~x IOOO x Ill= 266 mm
i•! 6
coefficients given in Table. 9. 4. 1 and are given as under : 0.5 X 20 [ 4.6 x (10.13 !
i·I'.
1: 1 =Asts
Considering symmetry design moments are worked out for half portion. Ast3 = -- 415
1- 1-
20 X J000 X 111
2 .

II•

B.M. Coef for

t ·
-
2
t ~
3
--
-- -- -
~-
-- -- - -
-r----
4
- -- -- - - -
5 .
_..__]
~-~ A
st4
Qj X 20
= --
4I5
[
1- 1-
4.6 x (13.5 xi06) Jx 1000 x Ill= 361 mm4
20 X 1000 X 1JJ
2

·D.L. ad 0 +l/I2 -l/IO +I/16 -I/l2 +l/16

2
Using bent . ilp bars ( Type - B) all of size # 8 mm, ( Area =50 mm ) the spacing is
L.L. aL 0 +I/10 -l/9 +l/12 -119 +l/12 calculated:
2
(a) At middle of end span ,Ast = 350 mm ,
Ult.Moments in kN.m +13.1 -I5.4 +I0.13 -13.5 +10.13 s = 1000 x 50/350 = 143 mm say 140 mm < (3d or 300mm) c
Area provided= 1000 x 501140 = 357 mrrt
"){',{',
Asfmrrt 350 417 266 3t'l1
 •.,.,
!;--::.<

402 Slab ..
Choptg 9 .......;···.·: One-way slab 403

\r· ( b) At middle of interior span , AstJ;,. 266 m11f

Spacing of# 8mm bars = 1000 x 501266= 188 mm say 180mm < (3d or 300mm)
(9) Checkfor shear :
· w1111 1.125kNlm,= wuL = 2.25 kN/m.
Area provided= 1000 x 501180=278 mm2
S~ear force at any section is given by, Vu = ad wud L + a.L wuL L,
(c) At support next to end support, As12 = 417 mm2• ·(
Values of ad,aL taken from Table9.4.1
The alternate bars from mid-spans will be bent up at 0.25 L ( = 1000 mm) from the
centre of support and extended for a length ofOJL ( = 1200 mm) from the face of support
on each side oftop of support.
Section: at 0 2 4
Area of steel available at top of support due to bending of alternate bars from middle of end·
span and middle
ofinterior span = ( 357 + 278) 12 = 317.5 mm2 DL shear coef. ad 0.4 0.6 0.55 0.5 0.5

Extra steel required= 417-317.5 = 99.5m11f , :. Required spacing= 1000 x 50199.5 = 502 mm
DL shear= coej x wud x L 11.40 17.10 15.68 14.25 14.25
Provide extra bars of# 8 mm@ 500 clc over the penultimate support.
Total area provided= 317.5 + 100 = 417.5 m11f
LL shear coef aL 0.45 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

jl
(d) At interior support , Ast4 = 361 mm2
•' LL shear= coefx wuL x L 4.05 5.40 5.40 5.40 5.40
!" Area of steel avaihible aHop of support due to bending of alternate bars from middle of
rJ interior spans = (266 +266) I 2 = 266 m11f, ·:.Extra steel required= 361-266 = 95 m11f
Total shear in kN 15.45 22.5 21.08 19.65 19.65
II Required spacing = 1000 x 50195 = 526 mm say 520 mm
Provide extra bars of# 8 mm @ at 520 clc for a length of 0.3 L ( = 1200mm) from the face
on both· sides of support. Maximum shear occurs at support next to end support. Vu.max = 22.5 kN
Note:
(I) The requirement maximum spacing of (3d or 300mm) whichever is less is not applicable for the %ofareaprovided atsupport-2 = 100 x 417.5 I (IOOO x 111) = 0.37%
extra steel at support.
.For p = 0.37% and M20 ~de of concrete,
(2) From practical considerations it is preferable to use the same diameter of bars instead of bars of 1
different diameters and tufiusting their spacing. The details of reinforcement is shown in (0.48 ... 0.36)
Fig. 9.4.4 't = 0.36 + X (0.37 - 0.25) (Table 5. 7.1)
1/C 0.25 .
{7) Check for deflection : =. 0.417 N I m11f
The deflection can be maximum at mid-span ( and not at support). . Permissible shear=k'ti/Cbd= 1.3 x0.417 x1000 X 11111000= 60.17 leN» VU./IIdX ( =22.5 kN)
Therefore, the maximum steel provided at midspan is taken for computation.
Area of steel provided at midspan of end span= 357 mm2 · (10) Check for development length for + ve moment reinforcement.
'-'d= 100 X 357 I( 1000 X• Ill )=0.32%
(p(prOVIue
l

f s = 0.58 x 415 x 3501357

. = 236 N I m11f 15.45 leN'
VILIIIQ%::;:

FromFig.8.6.1, For_fs= 236Nim11fandp1 = 0.32%, modificationfactor= 1.48. Since SO% bars are bent up :. M1 = 13.112 =6.55 leN
'-.-/' :. Required depth = 40001 ( 26 x 1.48) = 104 mm <Ill mm :. Safe.
Conunetlts : Providing 90°bend, by Eq. 9.4.3a, L0 = b/ 2 -x1 +3 + = 230 I 2-25 + 3 x 8 = 114 mm
Initially P, assumed was = 0.35% (see step.1) P, required = 100 X350 I (1000 Xf11) = 0.315%
Since ( p1)r.qtl < ( p1) assumed the check for deflection checlred can be conSidered to;~e satisfied and Ld :: 47+ :::; 47 x 8 ::= 376 mm ...... (Table 6.2.2)
there is no need to calculate fs, .. modification factor and the. required depth, as per the check given_
. above. ·
:Ld < 1.3 M1 1 J1 + L0 i.~;, 3i6 < 665 mm ( = 1.3 x ( 6.55 x 1000) /15.45 + 114) .·. safe
!i!1'1l
iJ!\
. ·i
r
404 Slab
Chapter 9 !t Sect. 9A
The details of reinforcement is shown in Fig. 9. 4. 4 One-way slab 405 ~

/
n.
rl
I Solution:
I. Span : Cantilever span LI = 2.5 mm.
\

.,..._... ~ .,..._... .,..._...

T
0
Effective span L == 2500 + [(200 + 100)/2- 20]/2 = 2565mm (See item - 2)
<:.,

(:[$'-
~
2.
"'"' "'J"
0

~ulti- pu
m• 1p.2m1 -
gj ·.t Trial Depth : Since mild steel reinforcement is being used it will help in reducing the depth of
the slab to some extent.
_]

/+---<~oo<>-t-4ooo""t:-4ooo ....,~oocr-+j-4ooo1
(a ) Structural Plan
4 1 Assumingp1 % == 0.4%, Modification factora 1 = 2 corresponding to!,= 145Nimm
Basic Lid ratio == 7, :. Allowable Lid ratio =a x 7 = 2 x 7 = 14
Required d == L/14 == 2565/14 =say 180 mm.
1
. 2

Assuring I0 mm diameter of bar, effective cover= 15 + I0/2 = 20 mm

Provide total depth of 200 mm, :. d = 200-20 = 180 mm.
Let the overall depth of the slab be reduced to I00 mm at the cantilever end where bending
moment is zero.
·· .. ,.
3. Loiids : Consider one meter width of the slab.
Selfwt. of slab== ( 0.20 + 0.10 )/2 x 25 = 3.75 kNim ~'&
-··.··
1 ~--JJ Weight due to finish = 0.80 kNim
1 '-a##
~

1----- . c .
J"#JL@...i1!:i!L e20
# 8 @ 3601'----
8@ 280 g #8 @5oo h # 8@ 5 d "' Live load (since unapproachable) = 0. 75 kNim
# 8 @ 36 f #8 @ 360

~
b 8 @ 280 J d
Total == 5.3 kNim
I 1'-.-0J c ,-g , "'- !-
!L--. ·.Ultimate loadlm == wu == 5.3 x 1.5 = 7.95 kNim.
!!•

A.
_/
rd I ,, Maximum -ve moment at the face of support:.Mu = wu L2! 2 = 7.95 x 2.s212 = 24.84 kN.m
-v _A_ I I I 1
'lv

I
-v -y
4. f.heck.depth from B.M considerations :
(c) Plan Showing Reinforcement Details
Mur.max =2.97 x 1000 X 18()2 x I0- 6=962kN.m » 24.84 kN.m
;f, Distribution steel not shown ,for clarity
1,
/. Section is under- reinforced.

~~~
Fig. 9.4.4 .:::
5. A""lifSteel:
Ex. 9.4.3 In a multipurpose assembly hall a cantilever porch of size 2500 mm wide and
5000 mm long is to be provided at a height of 3 mm above the floor level. The porch slab.
A.·,
sl2
:~,,: :~·5 x 20
·· . 250.
[l- l- 4.6 x 24.84 x}06]
20 x}OOO x 1802 . x}OOOx 180 = 666 mnr
which overhangs 2500 mm beyond the face of the beam is to be cast in flush with the
top.face of the qeam.
Assume the following additional data :·
Usmg;+t 0 mm bars, area= 78.5 mrrl , Spacing= 1000 x 78.5/666 = 117 mm
Live load == 0. 75 kN ( m' . Floor finish == 0.8 kN I m1, Use COf!crete grade M20 and mild ,<.: · say 110 mm ~ (300mm or 3d= 540inm)
steel reinforcement.
/
Pro\iid~ 10 mm bars at IIOmm c!c, Area provided= 1000 x 78.51110 = 713 mm2

Given : f'ck = 20 N I rrl, ly == 250 N I mrrl, LL = 0.15 kN I m1, FF = 0.8 kN I,? , Curtailment of steel :
Cantilever span LI = 2.5 m · It is proP<>sed,tO curtail 50% ofthe steel required at the support. Since the depth pf the slab is
·tapering and .J;l,1-f. variati()n.parabolic the _area of reinforcement will get reduced to half at a
Required: Design ofcantilever slab S distance gr~ter fh8Jl. half~.~
3 .· . .... , from the free end.
 406 Slab Sect. 9.4 One-way #ab 407
Chapter 9
Let us check the requirement of steel at a distance 1.6 mfrom the free end. The details of reinforcement are shown in Fig. 9.4.5.

(Mj = 7.95 x 1.6 2/2 = 10.176 kNm

. --·~
\~i
Total depth of the slab at 1.6 from free end = 100 + 1.6 x ( 200- 100 )/2.5 = 164 mm. ~
n. .r+10@110 • • !U<Y«U / "

T
..: :.d = 164-20 = 144mm.
i ~ r • ., • • •1T1oo
I
u g ' Jimm
l'i' -
0.5 X20 it_ 4.6 X10..176 X1Q ]
1- - - - ' - - - -
6
8
J'
2500
Can1ilever Porch
1
I
Ast2 = 250 [ X 1000 X J44 "'
20 x1000 x1442

1
Note :Chairs to be provided for supporting Top Steel

= 335 mm1 < (713/2) provided at support.

Distance of TPC from support= 2500- 1600 = 9oomm.

Curtail 50% of the bars at a distance greater of the following:

(a)900+12$ = 900+120 =1020mm., (b) 900+d= 900+144 = 1044mm.
Curtail 50 % steel at a distance of 1050 mm from the face of support.
6. Distribution Steel :
Area required= 1.5D= 1.5 x (200+ 100 )/2=225 m~ Spacing= 1000 x 28/225 = l24mm
:. Provide$ 6 mm@ 120 mm c/c.
7. Check for. deflection :
. .
Pt(re d)'= 100 X666 /( 1000 X 180) = 0.37 %, < 0.4% :. O.K.
This checJiis e<>nsidered to be sufficient as stated under comments in Ex. 9.5.2
As per the nonnal procedure the check is again carried out as under :
fs = 0.58 x 250 x666/713 · = 135 N/m~
(p(l prov. = 100 X .713 /( 1000 X 180) = 0.4%' MF. = 2
:. Required d= 2565 /( 7 x 2) = say 180mm
Comments:
(I) Since depth -Of the slab is governed by deflection criteria it is preferable to use Fe 250 steel
which has got much "!iigheF value. of modification factor than HYSD bars. If HYSD bars are to be used
distribution steel inay be provided at the bottom of the slab which will act as compression steel and
reduce the deflection. This would also be helpful in counteracting possible reversal of stress.
(:Z} The top steel of cantilever slab must be supported by chairs to prevent their bending downward
during concreting.
Ex • 9.4.4 : A one- way three span continuous floor slab ABCD with ends simply
·supported is to be designed for the following data :
Spans are equal with centre to centre distance of beams = 3.4 m
. Live load onfloor = 5 kNI~ Floor finish = 1 kNI~
Materials used are M20 concrete and Fe 415 steel. Assume mild exposure condition.
Design the slab using :
(A ) Exact Method Without allowing redistribution of moments.
( B) Exact Method Allowing redistribution of moments
( C) Using IS code coefficients.
... (Fig. 8.6.1)
Given: L =3.4 m ,LL= 5 kN/~, FF= I kNI~ fk =20Nimrrf ,f. =415Nimrrf
For mild environment
I
wit6 bar diameter less than 12 ~m, nominal co!er = 20-5 = 15 mm

8. Solution:.
Check for development lengih
1. Trial depth ;
~
Required Ld = [0.87 x 250 /( 4 x 1.2)] $ = 45.3 $say 46 t~ 46 x 10 = 460 mm. Basic L ld rati"O = 26 ....,
~

- 2
Assumil)g p1 = 0.4%, Modification factor . = 1.32 correspon~ing_tofs = 240 Nlmm . ·
(a) The available length of curtailed bars from the support up to . TPC = 900 mm >Ld
Required effective depth = 3400 I (26 x 1.32} = 99 inm
(b) The available length of uncurtailed bars from TPCto end of cantilever:= 1600 mm Ld >: Try total depth = 120 mm. Using 8 mm diameter main stee~
. Provide anchorage length of 460 mm from th~ outer face of beam.
·~) :. .effective depth provided'='d = 120 -15 - 8i i,;;, 1 or mm .
! ..

<;~
"T\<'

408 Slab Sect. 9.4 One-way slab 409

Chapter 9
2. Loads: Consider one meter width of the slab Moment Distribution.
.I
Selfweightofslab=25D =25 x 0.12 = 3 kN/m
Floorfmish =I kN/m Joint A B c D
Total dead load = wmm. =3 +I = 4 kN/m
Ultimate dead load= wuD = 1.5 x 4 = 6 kN/m Member AB BA BC CB CD . DC
Live load = 5 kN/m D. F. 317 417 417 317
Ultimate live load = wuL = 1.5 x 5 = 7.5 kN/m
T.otiil
· · · ultimate load = wmax = wu = 6 + 7.5 = 13 .5 kN!m Initial FEM 0 +19.5 -13 +13 -5.78 0 I
Siijce LL > 314 DL different load combinations are required to be considered for obtaining Balance -2.79 -3.71 -4.12 -3.10
·Jriaximum +ve moment and maximum- ve moments
.The bendirig moments for different load combinations will be obtained using moment distribution c.o -2.06 -1.86
method.
Balance +0.88 +l.l8 + 1.06 +0.80
3. Computation
i
of Distribution factors :
" Final moments 0 + 17.59 -17.59 +8.08 - 8.08 0
--- --
Joint Member R.S.F. Sum D.F.
BA 3EI I 3.5L
vAB = 13.5 X 3.4 I 2 - 17.59 I 3.4 = 17.78 kN
B 317
BC
7EI /3.5L yBA = 13.5 X 3.4 I 2 + 17.59 I 3.4 = 28.12 kN
4EI/ 3.5L 417
CB VBC = 13.5 X 3.412 + (17.59-8.08)13.4 = 25.75kN
4EI I 3.5L 417
c 7El I 3.5L VCB = 13.5 X 3.4 I 2 - ( 17.59-8.08) I 3.4 = 20.15 kN
li• CD 3EI I 3.5L 317
i;'
vcn. = 4 X 3.4 I 2 + 8.08 I 3.4 = 9.18 kN
j!!
4. Fixed End Moments : vDC = 4 X 3.4 I 2 - 8.08 I 3.4 = 4.42 kN
1]: (a) Maximum moments due
. to wmax = 13.5 kN/m
2 2
::1\ MFBA ='MFCD= WmaxL 18 = 13.5 x 3.4 18= 19.5 kN.m SpanAB :xmax =VAB ·lwmax = 17.78113.5 = 1.32mfromA ...... (Eq. 3.5.9)
I'
2
MFBC =MFCB = wmax L /12 = 13.5 x 3.4 112= 13 kN.m
i! 2
f!.: Maximum positive moment = 17.78 x 1.3212 = 11.73 kN.m ...... (Eq. ~.5.10)
il'
I'
I
(b) ·Mfuimum moments due to wmm. = 4kN/m
. Span BC :xmax = V8clwmax = 2~.75 I 13.5 = 1.91 m from B
MFBA = M~ = wmin L 18
2
= 4 x. 3.4218
·. ~~ . :, .i
. r'2!12 =4 X 3.42/12
· FBC = MFCB = wmm
M.
= 5.78 kN.m
= 3.85 kN,in . . .
Maximum positive moment= 25.75 x 1.91/2- 17.59 = 7.0 kN.m
/

sup~oments
,,;..,'!,.-;

~~~~~Method Without allowing redistribution of Moments. Remarks : The beam moments including the mid-span
.
moments and \ /
can be directly
·:..':·~e- I : Maximum moment at Penultimate support -B. obtained by using B.M. coefficients given in the design hand books. The advbntage. is that there will be no· r
{pi.iJiiS casetheiQadingconditiori shall be maximum load on adjacent spanAB andBC and minimum need to calculate· the span moments from support moments as required in the above case. But the loads tire
.~as
:T-
~·CiHs.shown
. •
in Fig.9.4.6a
.',·~- ~
required to be simulated to the B.M coefficients for different loaded spans. The same is illustrated for load
<~('' Case - I for maximum moment at penultimate support.
·•

Maximum design load= wmax = 13.5/cN/m , Minimum design load= wmin= 4/cN/m
·(~: - 'Let wu3 = wmax - wmin = 13.5- 4 = 9.5/cN/m
,._., ·.' . · Fig. 9.4.6a :a:r___ _. --'-~--'----' : ...,:,.. ...
))

410 Slab Chapter 9· Sect. 9.4 OM-~ s/Qb· 4Ji

I 2 3 4 S VAB = 13.5 3.4/2- 10.87/3.4 = }9.75 /eN
X
f. • f • t •}' VBA = 13.5 X 3.4 - 19.75 = 26.15 /eN
B.M Coef VBC = 4 X 3.4/2- 10.87/3.4 = 3.6 kN
(X
2
0.08 -0.10 0.025 0.1 0.08
~
~
SpanAB:
(X 0.,073 -0.117 0.054 -0.033 -0.017 ~4 ~· I
Xmax = VAB /13.5 = 19.75 I 13.5 = 1.46 m from A
3 5 t Mmax = 19.75 X 1.46/2 = 14.42 kN.m
2
M
ul
=(X
2
xwmin X L 3. 7 -4.62
'
us -4.62 3. 7
SpanBC~·

2 Mmax = 4 x 3..42/8 - 10.87 = -5.09 kN.m

M =(X' X w X L 8.01 -12.85 5.93 -3.62 -1.87
u2 3 u3
Case - IV Maximum span moment in BC
M =M +M
u · ul u2
11.71 -17.47 7.08 -8.24 1.83
~ 1 2 3 4 5
For this case the loading condition she will be maximum load on BC and minimum loads on
AB and is as shown in Fig. 9.4.6 c
The values of the moments obtained match well with those obtained by moment Di~tr.ibution method
l(
i
Maximum mo~eni iii C.- This case is transpose of Case - I
Case - II
•.-··-
~
J-"
\! __ . ::-"'~.-~
Case -Ill Maximum span moment is AB or CD. .
j
A ~~~D
For this case the loading condition will be maximum load on AB and CD and minimum load on 3.4 m . 3.4 m 3.4 m----.1
~h ··· BC as shown in Fig. 9.4.6b
[ i'
···-;'
Fig. 9.4.6c

~oint A- B c D

~ember AB BA BC CB CD DC

D. F. 3/7 4/7 4/7 311

'
Joint A ..
_/
\
B c D Initial FEM 0 5.78 -13.0 +13.0 -5.78 0
Member AB BA BC CB CD DC
D. F. 3/7 Balance 3.09 4.13 -4.13 -3.09
4/7 4/7 317
Initial FEM 0
; -~/
\

Balance
+19.5 -3.85 +3.85 -19.5 0
c.·
c.o -2.07 2.{)7.
-6.71 '-8.94 +8.94 +6.71
IJ c.o Balance ;0.90 1.17 .-1.17 0.90
+4.47 -4.47
!Balance -1.92 -255 .. '' +2.55· 1.92
I__/ Final moments ·o 9.77 -9.77 ''!"9.''/.7 :.9.77 o· '···
."":·r
i
}!ina), moments . 0. ' ' +10.87 .-l0.87 + 10.87 -10.87
...) ' 0 ''
r""
/""'.

(
,,_.:::'-.·.
412 Slab Chapter ') s~~t/9;~ · One-way slab 4~3

.Span BC : VBC = 13.5 x 3.4 I 2 = 22.95 !CN, Mmax = 13.5 x 3.42I 8-9.77 = 9.74/:N.m ·.MidSpan moment in BC due to redistribution of moments :
·'fhe moments at Band Care 13.68 kN.m.,
Results for Beam moments. 2 2
t6fequilibrium ,MidspanmomentinBC=wmaxL 18-13.68= 13.5 x 3.4 18-13.68 =5.83 kN.m.
. I
Case
I
f -------, The final moments afte~ redistribution of moments are :
no. A E B F c G D
f • . f • f • -,
0 11.73 - 17.59 7.0 - !:.08
A E B F c G D
II 0 - -8.08 7.0 - 17.59 11.73 0
Final moments kN/m 13.68 -13.68 5.83 -13.68 13.68 0 (
III 0 14.42 -10.87 -5 .09"'* -10.87 14.42 0
As/ 410 410 i66 410 410
IV 0 - -9.77 9.74 ·-9.77
':;
In this case dM = 2 x 5.86 I 3 = 3.9 kN.m
Design moments 14.42 - 17.59 9.74 - J7.59; 14.42 0
:. Percentage redistribution = ( 3.9 I 17.59) x 100 = 22% < 30% ~f.~
Required Ast mrrl 435 544 284 544 435
i Check for section :
~ ..
**Remarks : When LL > 314 DL different loading conditions are reqkireo! to be considered. In the ctise of ku. /'1m1't = 0.6- 0.22 = 0.38 < ku.max ( = 0.48)
;i multiple span slab, when the central span is loaded with the minimum load wmin ( = DL) and the span on M l' . = OJ6x20 xOJ8 (l-0.42 x 0.38) x 1000 xJ01 2 x I0-6 =23.4kN.m» 13.68kN.m
ur.1m11
,both sides of it are loaded with maximum load, Wnax ( = 1.5 DL + 1.5 LL ), the central span is subjected
to negative moment through out the span with r.:ir.imum value at the mid-span. If ·the minimum
II
1'll
reinforcement is not provided at top of the slab cracks may develop for this specific loading condition
whenever it occurs. These cracks are not of serious nature but may create leakage problem for the roof slab.
:. Section is. under- reinforced

ii Area of steel required at support and midspan of AB and CD

L' Area of steel at different sections have b1:en obtained using Eq. 9.4.1
I
li.
.(B) Allowing Redistribution of Moments;
The ultimate objective of redistribution of moments is economy. As the moment at penultimate. A
st
=
0.5 X 20
415 ·
~1- 4.6 X 13.68 X 106
I------
20 X 1000 X }012
J X 1000 X }0} =410 mm2
,.(\f"'

support is maximum the redistribution will be done to such an extent that the midspan moment in
II end span is equal to the support moment.
l. Comments : Since the difference between the support moment and span moment is small, there is no point Area of steel required at midspan ofBC :
in working out the span momt:nt accurately after reducing the support moment. Therefore, the span moment
is assumed at midspan and redistribution is carried out as under :
For equalising the two moments , calculate the numerical difference between support moment ( M' ) and
the c'o"esponding span moment ( M) for any one typical loading case. Decrease the support moment by
2 ( M'- M) I 3 and increase the span moment by ( M' - M) I 3
.Asl =
. 0.5 X 20
415
t 1-
4.6 X 5.83 X }06
1-20 x IOOOx 1012
J x 1000 x 101 = I66mm2·
,..--
1\,

.Thus, in Case -I,

M'-M= 17.59-11.73 = 5.86kN.m
(2M'-M)I3= 2 x5.8613 = 3.9kN.mand(M'-M)I3 = 5.8613 = 1.95kiv.m
· Design moment at support = 17.59-2 x 5.86 I 3 = 13.68 kN.m ('(:) Design using ·IS code coeffiCients
MidspanmomentinAB and CD = 11.73 + 1.95 I 3 = 13.68 kN.m As ~btained.in.step 2: wud= 6 kN !m·and wilL= 1.5 kN!m. .
I ? · . Bending moment coefficients are calculated.ftl difft:rent sections.
I· Note: Using exact analysis, the midspan mome.'1t in AB and CD worb out to 13.27 kN.m. instrad
;! of 13.68 kN.m corresponding to.support moment. of 13.58 kNim
r-.
'!rt'
a: 1 ,'. ,
,U\
· ~'a··
;!ll~ .,,,
·!"'·
b.

Chapter 9 'sect. 9.4 One-way slab 415

1m~ f t • t • t 1
Check for concrete depth :
2 6
Muv.max= 2.76 x 1000 x 101 x 10' = 28.15 kN.m > 16.57 kN.m :. safe
A E B F c G D
a.M..
coefD.L.
for
L.L.
a.d

a.L
1/12

1/10
-1110

-119
1116

1112
-1110

-119
1112

1/10
Main Steel:

A atE-
. st
0.5 X 20
250
t1- 1- .
6
4.6 X 14.45 X 10 ]
20 X 1000 X 101 2
X
.
1000 X 101 =435 mm2 (Eq. 9.4.1)

M.kN.m
.. u
14.45 -16.57 1L56 -16.57 14.45 (p1)reqd.= 100 X 435/ (1000 \10~~-= 0.43%

.. .
Ast mvf 435 508 341 508 435 Using # 8 mm diameter bars, s = 1000 x 50 /435 = 114 mm Say 110 mm
Area provided= 1000 x 50/110=454mm2 >435 mm2
/'
N· ~

;.rea provided mm 2
#8~110

454
#8~220
+#8~280
extra #8~450

518
#8~140

359
#8@220 . #&~llO
+#8~280
extra #8~450

518 457
A atB
st
0.5 X 20 t
.. 1-
250. , , , ·
1-
4.6 X 16.57 x' }Q
.
20 X 1000 X 10} 2
J6
xtOOOx101=508mm2

}3ending moment at any section is given by: Mu ~ L.F.

At middle of outer span atE: MuE=

(a.d wud

At penultimate supportB and£: MuB = [(1110) x 6 x 3.42+ (1/9) x 7.5 x 3.42] = 16.51kNm ·
x L2 + a.L

[(1112) x 6 x 3.42 +(1110) x 7.5 x 3.42] = 14.45kNm

wuL x£2)

A 1atF
s
0.5 X 20
250
t
.
I-
,,
_ 4.6xll.56xt06]
1 20 x 1000 x1012 x 1000 x 101 = 341 mm2

Provide # 8 mm at 140 mm c/c, Area provided = 359 mm 2 > 341 mm2

At middle of interior span atF= MuF= ( 1116 x 6 x 3.42 + i/12 x 7.5 x 3.42) = 1!.5·5.!::.11/:m
Bending alternate bars from mid span of E and F, extra steel required at top of support
I = 508-( 454+ 359) /2 = 102 mm2
CottiPtirison of Results. I
of moments f • f • i

A E
t }lrovide # 8 ~ 450 mm c/c, Area provided= 111 m~ >100mm 2
B F c Total area of steel provided at support = (454 + 359) /2 + 111 = 518 mm 2
(I) Without redistribution · 14.42 __: 17.59 9.74 kNm Note : This is the extra steel at support and hence the limitation of spacing of 300 mm or 3d
(Z) With 22% redistribution 13.68 is not applicable.
-13.68 5.83 kN.m
. (3)As per Code 14.45 . -16.57 Check for deflection :
11.56 kN.m
Since (p1) reqd = 0.43.% is greater than (p1assumed therefore, the detailed check is carried
comments : . .' . . 0~ '
l wiil a/so be observed that moments obtained as per cQ</e are slightly.on the over safe side .
: ~
· . TIIP'
the !edistrilndtd moments. That is the reason that when coefficients given in the code are used,
· J:.·tribu_tion of moment is not allowed
p1 provided atE= 100 x 454/(1000 x101) = 0.45%,
· · f.= 0.58 x 415 x 435/454 = 230 N/m~ ·
I .
Modification factor corresponding topt = 0.45% and.fs = 230 Nlm~, from Fig. 8. 6.1 = 1.33
.·'Jbe ~culations ofreinforcemen! and deflection cheek have been carried out for solution (c)
.. te.. design as per IS code coefficients. . . · .. . . . Required effective depth= 3400/(26 x 1.33) = 98.3 mm < 101 mm provided :. Safe
:;·~
 i/
~/\
;,,1
1 416 Slab
!/
iJ C1tapw9 Sect. 9.4
/"",

One-way slab 417

Distribution steel: Area required== 0.12 x 120 x 1000/100 = 144 mm2
Using# 8mm bars. , s = I000 x 50/144 say 340 mm < ( Sdor 450 mm) In the case of a. load near the unsupported edge of the slab, the effective width shall not
Provide # 8 mm bars at 340 mm c/c. · · exceed the above value nor half the above value plus the distance ofthe load from the unsupported
;j The reinforcement details are similar to the one shown in Fig. 9.4.4 edge whichever is less.
ii
Table 9.4.3 :Values of k for simply supported
9.4.5 Concentrated Loads on Slabs and continuous slabs
The effect of a concentrated load applied to the slab is partly local partly distributed. A point Values of kfor
load deflects the slab in the form of saucer producing high moment in both directions. The classical
LIL,1 Simply Supported Continuous
theory of plates indicates that moments under the point load tend to infmity. The moment gradient
Slabs Slabs
:j in the vicinity of the load is very steep with peak values under the load and the gradient falling
with the increase in the distance from the point load.
off 0.1 0.40 0.40
I
'I 0.2 0.80 0.80 r··

II Actually, any concentrated load has some finite contact surface through which the load is . 0.3 1.16 l.l6
transferred to the slab. Extensive research has shown that a concentrated load acting on a one
I way slab simply supported on opposite edges gets distributed in the direction parallel to the supporting
0.4 1.48 1.44
I
··~

0.5 1.72
t edges over a finite width called as effective width.

(a) For a single concentrated load the effective width is calculated in accordance with the
0.6
0.7
1.96
2.12 )
1.68
1.84
1.96
,/"'

'·

11
following equation (Fig. 9.4. 7) provided that it does not exceed the actual width of the slab. 0.8 2.24 2.08

b,1 • k.x L:l

L- efj
a
...... (9.4.4)
0.9
~ 1.0
2.36
2.48
2.16
2.24 ,/"'

(b) For two or more concentrated loads placed in a line in the direction of the span, the
where, bef == effective width of slab, . bending moment per metre width of slab shall be calculated separately for each load according to
Lef == effective spiln , its appropriate effective width of slab calculated as per Eq. 9.4.4 and added together for design
calculations. c
k = constant having the values given in Table 9.4.3 depending upon the ratio of the (c) For two or more loads not in a line in the direction' of the span, if the effective width of
j
width of the slab (L') to the effective span Lef - slali for one load does not overtap the effective width of slab for another load, both calculated as
'li' x = distance of the centroid of the concentrated load from nearer support, . per Eq. 9.4.4, then the slab foreaeh load can be designed ~eparately. If the effective width of slab
!! a == width of the contact area of the concentrated load from nearer support measured for one load ov.erlaps the eft'ectivt'width ofslab for an adjacent load, the overlappirig portion ofthe
parallel to the supported edge. slab shall be desigMd for the combined effect of the two loads.
(d) ·FOr cantilever solid slabs, the effective width shall be calculated in accordance with the
/: followhig,~: · .

li
111
a~
T
bet
T . b ._ .• .,_+ '
.: 9''"7. ~~ a .
wh~ b · ;,. effective width;
·II/' '. : ... ·· . '
·
' .
...... (9.4.5)

Tu.J l_ :;., =.
ai d1iliace ofdte concentrated load from the face of the cantilever support,
j, X~ a; ::::: width ofcontact area ofthe c<incentrated load measured parallel to the supporting edge. (·
\ ....
, P.rovid~tti'llt:b, :t- i/31ength of the cantilever slab measured parallel to the fixed edge.

,1
!'
Aild provided further that when the concen~ted load is placed near the eXtreme ends of the (
let .. length of cantilever slab in the direction pafallel to the fixed edge,1he effective width shall not '--•

exceed the above value, nor shall it exceed halfthe above value plus the distance ofthe concentrated

I Fig. 9.4. 7 Slab under Concentrated Lt.1ad ioad from th~ extreme end measured in the direction parallel to the fixed edge.
I
)/}IJ $1r,~b Sect. 9.4 One-way slab 419
) Chapter 9
-,/

Ex.: 9>4. 5 : A_ simply supported slab for d room 4m x' 3m spanning across 3 m has to

r
_.c:a#jra wali 125'rii#z thick and 1.2 m long from one end, weighting 5 kNim. Design the slab
for the floor in general and under the wall assuming concrete M20, steel Fe 415, live load
2 kNinr and floor finish 0.6 kNim2. Assume supports 250 mm wide, and effective cover 20 mm.
. 2
Given : Room 4 m x 3 m spanning across 3 m, fck = 20 Nlmm , .fy = 415 Nlmm2 ,

'l
__)
4m
bs =250 mm , Effective cover= 20 mm , LL = 2 kNim2., FF = 0.6 kNim 2

~
.
wall thickness a= I25 mm, length I.2m and weight 5 kNim,
(a) Design of Slab for the Room
Effective span :L =de distance between supported edges or (clear span+ d) whichever is less Jl,, 777 777,,,,,v
Assumingd= I IO mm, L = 3.25 (= 3 + 0.25) or 3.I I (3 + O.I I) :. Lif=3.I I m Fig. 9.4.8
Trial Depth : Concentrated load due to each segment of0.2 m length is:
Assume p1 = 0.35%, Modification factor· taking f s = 240 Nlmm 2 from Fig. 8.6.1 = aI =1.4 w = weight of wall per metre x 0.2 = 5 x 0.2 = I00 kN/m
Required depth= 3.Ii x I000/(20 x 1.4) "=say I IO mm. Try total depth= 130 mm The detailed calculations are given below
Effective depth provided = d = 130- 20 = I I0 mm Segment No. from support: 1 2 3 4 5 '6
Distance
..
X from. support : O.I 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9 l.I
Loads : wu = L.F (self wt.of slab+ FF + LL)= 1.5 (25 x 0.13 + 0.6 + 2) = 8.78 kNim
befin metres 0.365 0.798 1.166 1.471 1.711 1.888
Ultimate moment =Mu = 8.78 x 3.I I2/8 = I0.6I kNm
xl bef 0.274 0.376 0.429 0.476 0.526 0.583
Check for concrete depth. Bending moment at centre of the span due to segmented concentrated load :
2 6
Mur.max. = 2.76 x 1000 x I I0 x 10' = 33.4 kN.m > Mu (= I0.61 kN.m) :. Safe w.x L· w.x
'r-- ~ =-L-xl = 2 = 0.5wx
Area of steel : Bending, moment per metre width due to one segmental load = 0.5 wx( xI bef)
Bending mome~t per nietre width due to all segmentalload = 0.5 x 1.0 xI( xI b, )
0.5 X 20 [ _ 4.6 x10.61 x 106] . 1
Required A 1= ·.1~ 1 = 0.5 (0.274 + 0.376 + 0.429 + 0.476 + 0.526 + 0.583) = 1.332 kN.m.
s 415 20 x 1000 x I I 2 x I000 x I 10 = 283 mm2 Ultimate moment due to wall load at centre = I .5 x 1.332 = 2.0 kN.m.
0
Totaldesignmoment=2.00+ I0.6I = 12.61 kNm.
Provide# 8 mm at 175 mm c/c, Area provided= A.,= 287 mm2
Main steel:
~1-
(h) Design for slab under the wall : . 6
0.5x20 · 4.6 x 12.61 xi0 ]
WidthofsiabL'=4m, L,1=3.II mm: :. L'IL, =4!3> I :. k=2.48 ... (Table 9.4.3) A I· . · xiOOOx1J0=340mm2

rJ
1 st 4I5 20 X 1000 Xll0z .
bif= kx (I -xI L,1 ) +a= 2.48 x x (1-x/3.11) + 0.125 .. , .. ~ (Eq. 9.4.4)
= 0.125 + .7974 x (3.11-x)
Provide# 8 at 140 c/c, Area provided= 359 mm2
r-j Calculations ofdesign moment may be done as follows : Checkfor Serviceability :
The wall is from one end. Now, divide the line load due to wall into number ofsegntentalloads. P,7' lOOx359/(1000 X II0)=0.33%, f.= 0.58 x4}5X340/359=228Nimnr
each say 0.2 m long, as shown in Fig. 9.4.8. Now each load can be taken as a point load. The
for p 1 = 0.33% and f.= 228 Nlmm 2, from Fig.8.6.1 g. 1 = 1.42 ·
distance, X, of each point load from the nearer SUpport Will vary and COrrespondingly bef. Will be
. :. Required d=3110/(20 x 1.42)= 109.5 mm < I IO mm :. QK
different for each point load. The bending moment per unit width for each segntentalloaa at the
Provide# 8 mm at 140 mm c/c for a maximum width of 1.888 m (corresponding to bff for
· centre of the span can be worked out and added to the slab moment to get resultant maximum segment no.6)or2 m i.e.1 m Qn each side of the centre of wall thickness and in the remaming
'-._j
moment. ·
portion provide# 8 mm at 1~5 mm clc:.
',_J
 r-
._:,

Chapter 9 . ·Beet. 9~5 Two-way slab 421

42oSlab ... Sin¢tbending moments are functions of curvatures (M=JJR x EI), they depend upon the
comments : It m<l}' happen that the required depth under the wall may work out to be more by
rnrn (i.e. say 140 mm in this case). In such a case provide total depth of slab 140 mmfor a distance d4tlection profile of a member i.e. deflection surface in case of such two- dimensional member.
ab,oJJ110
on each side of centre of wall thickness merging additional thickness of 10 mm with ·the floor finish From the behaviour of slab seen above, the deflection surface is that of a dish or saucer. The
of~he same area of steel obtained corresponding to depth of 110 111m (i.e 340 mm in this case) even
2 deflection contours obtained from these deflection surfaces are shown in Fig. 9.5.1 (c) for ~
an h the total depth is increased to compensate for increase in dead load moment.
1 ~ifferent shapes. From these contours, it is seen that the curvature is more steep in the shorter ·
tholl& . ' dlrection (because contours are·closely spaced) than those in the longer direction (as contours are
widely spaced). Since bending moments are proportional to curvatures, steep variation of slopes
I!. fWO~ WAY SLAB along short span implies large moments in the short span direction than those'in the long span
9·;:> .
direction. For.the ratio of L JL < 2, bending moments of comparable magnitude occur in both the
.s.1. Behaviourorar:wo-WaySiab . . ·. .
9(a} Two - way Bendmg : A rectangular slab· supported on four stdes and subjected to :.4ir00tions necessitating provisio~ of main steel in both directions. Determination ofbending moments
verse toad spans in both directions perpendicular to the supports and deflects in the fonn of a 1if{alid ·It) in two directions has been discussed under analysis of two- way slabs in Sect. 9. 5.3. .'"
tr~~ or saucer. It transfers the load to all supporting edges by bending in both the directions.
dtS 'der a slab element atE common to two central stripsAEB and CED in Fig. 9.5.l(a). This ;. (b) Lifting of Corner: A slab resting freely on all sides when subjected to transverse load
Co~sllement is subjected to bending .moment mx due to bending of strip CD along span Lx, and gets lifted at the corners as shown in Fig. 9.5.1 (d). To understand lifting of corners, let us
sla d~ng moment my due to bending of strip AB along the span Ly. This action of occurrence of examine the behavim\r of a strip PQ near Aand perpendicular to AB in Fig.9.5.1 a. Since entire
bell 'rein two perpendicular direction in a two- dimensional planer element is known as two -way
slab is acting as a unit, as strip AB bends along span L1 the portion R which is common to AB and
6e"a0 ·ng see Fig. 9.5.1(b)
ben 1 • ·
·
· PQ undergoes certain rotation eequal to slope ofAB at R. As a result of rotation of portion R. the
(a) (b) entire strip PQ also rotates about an axis parallel to strip PQ. If it is assumed that the strip PQ just
0

~) md
simply rests at the two edges, rotation of PQ along the longitudinal axis causes the face 1 - 2 of
strip PQ to get lifted up when face 3- 4 gets support at point 4.See Fig.9.5.1 (e). Consequently,

j,l>nn"l~;;onnl." l
p .c
· vt 11

0
mx
m
y
Element atE
the effect of two- way bending is to cause lifting of slab at corners as shown in Fig. 9.5.1 (d).As
a result, the slab looses its support over some region near the corners. This phenomenon is known
as lifting of ·corners.

,m~
w.--~.y___...J (c) Torsion in Slabs : When the corners of slab are restrained from lifting, downward
A~B
R E
\(__y' (d)
reaction results at corners and the ends P and Q of strip PQ gets restrained against rotation. .
However, when ends P ~Utd Q are restrained against rotation and as the rotation of strip AB still
1 ~· occurs causing rotation at R, the strip PQ is subjected to torsion Fig. 9.5.1 (f). The torsion is

2~
maXimum at the corners only at the intersection of strips PQ and P' Q'. The twisting moments in
(e) two perpendicular directions causes bending about an axis m- n perpendicular to the diagonal as
I 4 myx. shown in Fig. 9.5.1 (g). Since provision of reinforcement along the diagonal is difficult, torsion
'~// reinforcement is provided along two directions perpendicular to supports in the form·of grid at top

~
and at bottom.
When the corners are restrained from lifting, the downward forces induced, reduce the span.
~!
. ' . F ·Comer reaction
m '*>; . m m, ·torsional moments moment and develop negative moments about the direction perpendicular to the diagonal and causing
yx/ 'l · m~h},ng moment about dtgonal axls m-n
tension at top in the direction of the diagonal. Torsion reinforcement resists this tension.
(f) (g)

~lfa-\((c ~
9.5.2. Types of Two -way Slabs
Two- way slabs are categorised into following two types depending on support conditions.
These are as follows : · · ~

(c)
(a) Slab's simply supported on walls and corners free to lift.

Fi
------
.5.1. two-way Slab: (a) Plan, (b) Two- way Bending, (c) Deflection contours, (d) Lifting of
(P) Slabs supported on beams cast monolithically or slabs supported on walls with "'"-"-·
. not free to lift.
J~ers,
9 (e) }lotati?ll. o!...;,edge strips, (f) Torsio,~ _in Edge -Strips for Sla~s restrai•ed at corners,
 422 Slab Cllopllr 9
'i
r
Stet. 9.5 Two-way slab 423

;, _;;
The supports in above two cases are assumed to be sufficiently rigid and n0.11- yielding. The
beams are considered as rigid when the depth of the beam lies between 2.5 to 6 times the thickness I &t··by 'F$fibrium, w = wX + wy ...... III

of the slab (73/3). If the supporting beam are flexible having shallow depths, the deflections of
these beams significantly alter the distribution of moments· in the slab panel (59/3).
\ . AssmniJlg .k =•L/Lx and substituting w for (wx + w)
9.5.3 Analysis of Two- Way Slab ,
I ,,;;·.
1
'k' 1 ...... IV
i '. :'·W :::: X W and W X W
1. .i /11 (1 + /r:t) y (1 + lr!)
(A) Elastic Analysis : ... ftoui ~of w and w .maximum bending moments m and m can be worked out as under:
. X y . X y
Two -wa~lab, even simply supported on all sides, is a statically indeterminate structure
because it requires determination of not only moments mx and my but also magnitudes of support w L1 lt
reactions on all fours ides and their variation along a given edge. Usually slabs are analysed as thin m =~ =___,._-- wL2X = aX w L2X
x 8 8 (I + lr!)
plates of homogeneous, isotropic, elastic material using small deflection theory (59/3). The rigorous
mathematical solution is too much involved and are not suitable for application in practical design.
The approximate methods based on simplified assumptions are used for practical ~esign. These w L2 w L2 k} k}
_; are of two types. One based on elastic analysis and the other based on ultimate load analysis
m · = --l.-L =2 x -L x L 2 = - wL2 = x wL2 =a wL2
·,
.y 8 8 L1 . X 8 y X 8 (1 + lt) X y X
known as yield - line theory of slabs. · X

mX = aX wL2X and my = ay wL2X ...... 9.5.1

. (B) Ranking - Grar,hoff Method (for Slabs with comers free to lift) :
The flexural behaviour of shib is assumed to consist of series of interconnected intersecting J(f k}
strips of slab. The load acting on the slab is assumed to be transferred to strips in proportion to their where • and a·= ·a k= .-...l...
an L
y
" _______, flexural stiffnesses. This assumption is based on condition of compatibility ofdeflection of the two 8 (1 + lt) LX
cross strips at their junction. Consider two central strips AEB and CED of a slab simply supported
on all four edges and free to lift at comers, subjected to a uniformly distributed load as shown in On the same lines, the equationsfor other boundary conditions can be derived by replacing
Fig.9.5.Ia the coefficient 5/384 in Eq. /by an appropriate value.
'-'~ Let the intensity of loads transferred to short and long span be w and .w respectively . The bending moment coefficients for a rectangular slab simply supported on all four 'edges ·
. X y . ,With comers free to lift or the slabs not having adequate provisions to prevent lifting ofcomers and
Deflection atE for strip AB =Deflection at E for strip CD tesist torsion at comers, are obtained from Eq. 9.5.1. These coefficients have been given by ,
LS, Code, and are reproduced in Table·9.5.1
o{fJj 5 wL
__,__ ____
4
X X
5 wL4
--.2...1::. ...... I
Tlble9.5.1Beadlllg moment Coefticienfs for Rectangular Two-way Slab-Simply Supported on Four Sides
384 EIX 384 EJ, Lflx 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 . 3.0

Assuming moment of inertia o~slab in two directions to be equal i.e. Ix = IY =I, we get, ax 0.062 0.074 0.084 0.093 ·o.099 0.104 OJ13 0.118 0.122 0.124 I

J
wX L4y
a 0.062 0.061 0.059 0.055 0.051 0.046 0.037 0.029 0.020 0.014
''-._,/
wL 4
X X
= ·wL4
y y -·-=--
w £4 ....... fa '
Nllli : AtleasiS00/6 of the tension reinforcement provided at inid - span should extend to the supports.
y X
Tlte remaining 'so% should extend to within 0./L, or 0.1 LJrom the support, as appropriate.
w £4 Lf I £4
X Y ' y X Bending IJloments determined by this method are grea~er than the moments in the slab when
...... lla
\._/
.. w-'+--;
X y
= 1/X + L4y = I + L4JI X
L4 torsion is CO.!ISi(Jerett Marcus propbsed correct~9n to the moments by Rankine~ Grashoff method
to take into.~approximately the torsional effect. The analysis of slab based on these methods
w L4 1 could not ~t fot its behaviour at failure. Wegtergard (26/1) modified the moment coefficient
·s·. iiarly . y - x -
.Obtained by classical plate theocy by incorporating experimental results. Since the, load causing
llll ' - - ...... lib
. wX. + w)' L<~
X
+ L4.)1 1 + L4 !L4
y X·.
failure has beconie.the crittriafor design and also inelastic behaviour to be considered the need
moment' coefficients~ on con(:ept ofyield line theocy hilVe been adopted by IS: 456. ·
 ~,

424 Slab
9.5.4 I.S. Code Method
The method is based on inelastic analysis ofR.C. slabs using yield lineJ}leory taking into
account the redistripution of moments on account ofprovision of main reinforcement in the central
strips only as explained later. It also takes into account the effect of torsion at the comers.
Therefore, the method makes it rather obligatory to provide torsion reinforcement at comers. The
coefficients, given by I.S. Code have beenbased on the work ofTaylor et.al (69 I 4) taking uniform
distribution ofsteel over middle strips.
According to this method, maximum bending moment per unit width is given by :
2 The 50% of tension reinforcement at the continuous edges shall be provided at the top of the
MX =a wL X and My = a )'·w L2X
X ..••.••
where, MX ,M}' =maximuin span moments along spans LX and Ly
a X and a)' = B.M. coefficients for span moments MX and MY given in Table 9.5.2
L.. and Ly = lengths of short and long spans respectively · moment tension reinforcement equal to 50% of mid-span steel shall be extended into the span for
w = intensity of uniform load i.e. load per unit area.
Table 9.5.1 Bending Moment Coefficient for Rectangular Slabs Supported Four Sides
with Provision for Torsion at Corners.
Chapter 9 Sect. 9.5
Two-way s/ilb 42J
The rules governing provision of reinforcement are explained as under :
(a) Slabs are considered as divided in each direction intollliddle strip of width equal to3/4of
total the width and two edge strips on two sides, each strip having width equal to one- eight
of the width of slab as shown in Fig. 9.5.2, One half oftension reinforcement provided at
mid-span in the middle strip at bottom sh~l be tenninated at a distance of0.25L ofa continuous
~
support and at 0.lSL of a discontinuous support and the remaining half shall be continued up
to the support.
(Eq. 9.5.1)
support extending in the slab for a distance of 0.15£ on each side from the face of support and at ~~
least 50% shall be provided for a distance of 0.3£ on each from the face of the support.
At discontinuous edge due to partial fixity negative moments are inducted . To resist the negative
a distance of 0.1 OL at top. ·
the distribution steel in the edge strip parallel to that edge shall be provided for holding the
main steel and to take care of shrinkage, temperature etc.

1~- . f I I I I I
case
No.
Types of Panel and
Moments Considered
1.0
Short Span Moments Coefficients a..

11.1 11.2
ValuesofLviLx
11.3 11.4 11.5 1!.75 12.0
Long Span Coef.
a/or all
Values of Lyl Lx
~ ; __i~_~ : : H: : :I Liin,gEd,geCiontinluous
17I
l
1 1
Ill

I Interior Panels:
I -ve moment at continuous edge
I! _ _L_ I I I I I I I I I

J~frJJ~r~1111 uw~
.. , +ve moment at mid- span o.032I0.037I0.0431 o.0471 o.o511 o.o531 o:o6ol o.065 0.032 f\"1:
0.024 0.028 0.032 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.045 0.049 0.024
Ont ihon Edgt Disc11111inuous :·
2 I -ve moment at continuous edge
+ve mo~t at mid- span
o.o37 0.043 0.048l o.o5I I o.055I 0.057! o.064I 0.068
0.028 10.032 10.036 0.039 0.041 0.044 0.048 0.052
0.037
. 0:028 L -- I 1-1-,- '·I:;J'..J"
jL~--
I l.i. I I I
I I
I I
I . . ,j,
One Long Edge Discontinuous:
3 I -ve moment at continuous edge 0.037,0.044,0.0521 0.05710.06310.06710.07710.085 0.037 +---- li I I I I
+ve moment at mid· span o.ozs o.on o.o39 o.o44 o.o47 o.osi o.059 o.o65 0.028
U-----
i~
.
:s~
TwoAcgacentEdgesl>isccntinuous:
I
.,n -'"
4 1·VCI moment at co~tinuous edge bS'O'I
~1-o:---
M'ddl t.
r esrrp A
o.047 0.053IO.o6ol o.065I o.o7I I o.o75l o.084I 0.091 0.047
+ve moment at lllld -span O.o35 10.040 0.045 0.049 0.053 0.056 0.063 0.069 ! j :S Six-~· UJ
0.035
Two Short Edges Discontinuous:
5 1-vemomentatcontinuousedge 0.045 0.049 o.os2l o.056I o.os9l o.o6o Io.o65l o.o69
+ve moment at mid- span
f.lr(JJ·---
li ..
ffr-~· --
Ij w
t As~-
~L
0

I'-0.15Ly
I
.
0.035 10.037 10.040 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.049 0.052 0.035
Two Long Edges Discontinuous: rtr-----
6 l·vemomentatcontinuousedge
+ve moment at mid -span 0.045
~
.t-_;-:--
·I-0.1Ly ~ .
ll
0.03510.04310.05110.05710.0631 0.06810.08010.088 O.o35
Three Edges_Discontinuous
7 I (One LongEdge Continuous):
-ve moment at continuous edge
f-----·in=cr4
.., ~L'..- . .,. -i
l J.i_LLLLJ I
j __l_ll .l
I 1111
+ve moment at mid· span
o.057 0.064 0.07I Io.076I o.osol 0.084 o.o9'l 0.097
0.043 10.048 10.053 0.057. 0.060 0.064 10.069 0.073 0.043 .. r
..rJ<l"'
~'1-J-~l..-l!
I I I 1I I I I I I I
! ! ! I ! ! •.r I I
, f-->.Edge Strip
.ILl
'!41''SIJI
1 1I!
ho
·1

Three Edges Discontinuous ~ 13_-r:r'l I I I I I I I }_j I 'I I-

8 1(One Short Edge C?ntinuous ): t tt-:H. + .:tt".:±-..:1=:1-+. + + .- .-;-' -t-. -t-. -I-'__,.
-vemomentatcontmuousedge
+ve moinent at mid - span
0.057 ~ys~ 1

~18 ~.ly
0.04310.05 I 10.05910.06510.071 I 0.07610.08710.096 0.043
.:. lyta-
Four Edges Disco_ntinuous: . 4~ .
·91 +ve momeilt at mid~ span 0;0561lL064Ill.072I0.079) o.oasl o:os91 O.IOOI 0.107
PlanatTop. ·. or.... _,n_ .... _
0.056
 .. -~.'

Sect. 9.5 Two-way slab 427

426 S/Qb Chapter 9
Torsion Reinforcement at Restrained Comers : Torsion reinforcement shall be provided in the 9.5.6 Design o'f Two -way Slab.
The design oftwo - way slab can be carried out as per the steps given as under :
fonn ofgrid, one grid of steel at top and one at the bottom of slab with bars in each layer parallel to
1. Span: Determine the effective span Lx' LY i.e. short span and long span respectively.
the sup}>Qrting edges. The area of torsion steel; in each layer in each direction at any corner where
· the'slab in simply supported (or discontinuous) on both edges meeting at that corner, shall be equal Check that Ly I LX < 2
. to 3/4 of the· area required (A 51) for maximum mid-span moment in the slab. This reinforcement
· ·shall extend from the edges for a distance of LX15. The area .of steel shall be reduced to half 2. Trial Depth: It is decided by deflection criteria based on short span Lx
(i~e. 3/8 Asa) at corners containing edges over only one of which the slab is continuous (a) For slab with shorter span,L up to 3.5 m with mild steel reinforcement and loading class up
X
(see. Fig 9.4.2 ) · ""' to 3 leN I m'-, the effective span to overall depth ratio (L/D) shall be as specified in Table 8. 6.2.
9.5.5 Support Conditions \
j~
(b) If LX > 3.5 m or loading class Jive load> 3. leN I m2, the ratio of shorter span to effective
:
The various types of support conditions given in Table 9.5.2 are illustrated diagrammatically depth ( L I d ratio) will be the same as stipulated for one - way slab.
in Fig. 9.5.3a.. X

The support conditions encountered in practice are shown in Fig. 9.5..3b. It shows how these Calculate the ultimate load in leN I m for one meter width of slab.
boundary conditions occur in floor system. In some situations, a slab may be continuous or free 3.
over part of the length or may have different boundary conditions. Such slabs have been studied wu = 1.5 ( 25 D + LL + fF) , where, Din metre.
and detailed analysis have been given using finite difference method (77 I II) or finite element .·
method (79 I 5) or analytical solution may be obtained using yield line theory. 4. Obtain design moment coefficients (a , ay.) along short and long span, depending on the

Q LLl i~t .tz;l LlJ.

. X
boundary conditions given in Table 9.5.1 or Table 9.5.2 as applicable.
Calculate the bending moments by multiplying the coefficients by wuL}

.'1 5. Calculate M
ur.max
=Ru.max bcP which shall be greater than the absolute maximum
·
ultimate
Panels -" Dlsconlliluous : Discontinuous . Edges Discontinuous Discontinuous
moment ( Mu.max ). This condition is normally satisfied.

OIP-D D
ltlllflllll

Discontinuous edge
6. Calculate the area of steel at mid - span and 11-t support if the slab is continuous over that
edge using the formula.
~

J
6. Two Long Edgee
Discontinuous
7. Three Edges
Discontinuous
(One Long Edge
Continuous) ·
8. Three Edges
Discontinuous
(One Short Edge
Continuous)
(a) Difle.reniTypes ol Support Condttions lor Rectangular Two ·way Slabs
9. Four Edges
Disconllnuous
Continuous edge

•
Ast-
- o.ifck
f
y
~- I
- /ck
4.6M
XI000 uX tf
J
X 1000 X d
...... (Eq. 9.4.1)·

1-am-1
The short span bars are provided in the bottom layer and the iong span bars m provid~

0 T· above the short span bars in the mid-span region, giving higher value of effective depth in the
shorter direction.
~m
~
7 ·I 6 5 I 1 I 3
·I
i I Thus, for long span steel at !Jlid-span , d = D - ( clear cover + ~ /2 ) " ~
.._;;i-• I 'f I I
:"'· While for calculating steel at all
. other sections . . cover + ~ /2 )
d = D - ( Clear
The main reinforcement shall be provided in the middle strip ~fwidth equal tn 314 slab
4 ~
1.
2.
I 8 T
~4.5m
width at right angles to the slab i.e. steel along the short span shall b:: provided in the width of
(314) LY while steel along the long span shall be provided in the width of(3/4) Lx.In the remaiiling ·

l--am~3m
1 width ofL/ 8 and L) 8 distrib11tion steel will be provided.

·7.. · Checkfor·dejlection:
( b ) Praclicallllustration of the Support Coiufdions
If LX < 3.5 and LL < 3. leN/. Ttf- the deflection check (given in item 2) is normally satisfied, else ·.
. · ,, : ~ FJc. ~~ oure.._.~ S!ippc;rt ConditionsforTWo-way Slab increase the depth; ·
"-' ·~ -·. ., .. . .. . . ... ..: ~-·
~···

.; Two-way slab 429

· 428 Slab Sect. 9.5
Chapter 9
. · Consider a two-way slabSI and S2 having equal spans of Sm x 6m but end condition of SI is
For other cases apply the deflection check as per the check given for one - way slab. In
this case span to effective depth ratio shall betaken as L/dand percentage ofsteelshall be ~0 adjaeent edges discontinuous while S2.has all three edges continuous, and one long edge
maximum mid - span steel. discontinuous. Assuming the thickness of the slab equal to 140 mm and superimposed load of
4 fcNirrf,andfloorfmishof 1kNITiilforLyILX = 1.2 andLX = 5 m, the bending moments inkN.m. at
8. Torsional steel : mid- spaJ) and at supports (using Case- 3 and Case - 4 from Table 9.5.2 along the long span ' ·"~'
At corners where slab is discontinuous over both the edges, A1 = (3 I 4) Astx are obta~~daS'tinder:
At corners where slab is discontinuous over one edge, At = (3 I 8) A tx
Wu = l.5(25x 0.14+4+1) = 12.75kN/m
5

At corners where slab is co~tinuous over both edges, At= 0 (i.e no torsional steel is required)
wL 2 = 12.75 x 52 = 318.75 kN.m.
U X
For slab SI = Midspan moment = 0.035 x 318.75= 11.15kN.m.
where, ASIX =area of steel for maximum mid-span moment.
Support moment = 0.047 x 318.75 = 14.98 kN.m.
For slab S2 = Midspan moment = 0.028 x 318.75 = 8.92 kN.m.
This area oftorsional steel will be provided at comers in the form of mesh one at top and the other
Support moment = 0.037 x 318.75 = 11.79 kN.m.
at bottom for a length of LX I 5 in each orthogonal direction, parallel to the sides of the slab.

9. Check for shear: Maximum shear force at the edge of two- way slab is given by the At common support :
Thesupportmomentf~slabS = 14.98 kN.mwhilethe support moment forslabS2 =11.79 kN.m
following expressions : \ 1 .
- At middle of- short edge Vu.max = qLx I 2
-At middle of long edge v-u.max = qL.x kl (2k + 1) where, k = Ly I Lx

The check for shear is mostly satisfied in all cases of slabs subjected to uniformly distributed
load and therefore skipped. T
Sm
10. Check for Development Length L
The check for development length should be carried out as outlined for one- way slab.

· Comments : .
(I) If the area ofsteel provided is more than the area ofsteel required then the requirement/or development
l 1--- 6m 6m ---\
length will be reduced since the development length is a function rJ/ stress in steel. The modified expressioti I Values of Initial moments in kN.rn I
for development length ( Ldm ) can be approximately written as: ·.
Fig. 9.5.4 Different Moments at Common Edge of Continuous slab
L.., = [ (A11 ),..qd. I (A.,) prov~ Ld
There are three different ways in which the final moments at midspan and at support are calculated
(2) For slab loaded by a uniformly distributed load, the checks for shear and development length are
nor~~~ally satisfied hence omitted in design calculations. and reinforcement designed. .
.'·. (a)· Method- I: Maximum Moment Method
9.5.7 Special Problems' in Detailing The simplest method is to design the steel for maximum support moment of 14.98/cN.m. without ~
·"!' There are some problems which pose difficulty in detailing. changing the midspan moment in two adjacent spans. This method is uneconomical.
They are.discussed as under:
I (b) Method- 2 : Average Mdment Method
I (i) Different nwinents at the common edge of continuous slab Provide the steel for average oftwo moments i.e. (14:98 + 11.79)/2 = 13.39 kN.m
II
I
The two - way continuous slab meeting at the common support may have unequal spans on As the support moment of SI is reduced by 1.59 kN,m (=:= 14.98'- 13.39), half of this moment
j; either side of the support and /or ~e end condition may bC different with the result the moment at (= 0.795 kN.m.) will be added to the midspan moment of slab SI giving design midspan moment
Ii
:Ill,
each side of the common support will be different. The other case will be a one-way slab and
tWO • way slab meeting: at the common SUDDort. . .
eorui.lto 11.95kN.m(= 11.15+0.795) · . ·
 ..,..-
\

i- Two-way slab 431

j··
Sect. 9.5
430 Slab Chapter 9
It will be seen that the sum of revised moments is equal to the sum of moments obtained
. Since the support moment of slab'S 2 has been increased by 1.6 kN.m (= 13.39 • H.79) its. earlier. e.g.for slabS , sum. of revised n}oments = 11.83 + ( 13.61 + 0) /2 = 18.64 kN.m
1
11\idspan moment may be decreased by 0.8 kN.m.( = 1.6/2) giving design moment of8.12 kN.Tif. forslabS , sumofrevisedmoment = 13.61+7.10 =20.7lkN.m
(= 8.92- 0.8) or may be kept the same for conservative design. This method is simple in application. 2

-~~-'
(c) Method - 3 : Logical Method
The logical method is to distribute the unbalanced moment in proportion to th~ relative rotational .
stiffnesses of slabs meeting at the common edge and obtain the revise support moment. Then
adjust the span moment. The detailed steps are given as under : .. ·
Step 1 : Calculate the algebraic sum of moments at mid-span and supports.
Step2: Treat the values of the support moments calculated from tables as fixed end moments.
Step 3 :Distribute the unbalance moment in proportion of distribution factors across the common
support and obtain final inoment.
Step4: Adjust the mid-span moments such that when added to the final moments (obtained in
step 3) should be equal to the initial moment calculated in step 1
In the present case, sum of mid-span moment and support moments are:
fotslab S1 , the support moments at its ends 0 and 14.99 kN.m and mid-span moment= 11.15 kNm
Since we are interested in overall moment, we take average of support moments plus span moment.
:. For slabS1 sum of moments at mid-span and supports = (14.98 + 0)/2 + ll.l5 =18.64 kNm.
:. ForslabS2 ,sum of moments at mid-span and supports =(11.79+ 11.79)/2 + 8.92 =20.71/cNm.
(ii) Two - way slab panel Cantilevering on edge :
Consider a two- way slab panel ABCD (Fig.9.5.5) cantilevering beyond AB. Now, the
question arises whether the edge AB should be treated as continuous or discontinuous for the
design of slab ABCD. For this case following procedure may be adopted.
Since the bending moment at the support of a cantilever is a detenninate moment calc,.Jlate
the design moment Mmax at support for full design loads of l.S(DL + LL)and obtain the
reinfor~ement for slabS and extend it into slabSI for a distance ofLio give adequate anchorage.
2
For the slabsS assume the edgeAB as discontinuous due to which its span moment Mewill be
1
more than that obtained by assuming slab to be continuous over AB.
Since the span moment for SI has been obtained on the assumption of d!scontinuity over
the edgeAB, red~ce the span- moment a byM/2-where M is. the cantilever moment on AB
due to minimum load w~ · :. Design mid-span moment= Me- Mf2
8
(j

in thiscase, rotational stiffness factor for S1 =3 EIIL as the far end is simply supported.
·· -- --rotatiqna.! stiffness factor for S2 = 4 EIIL as the far end is continuous.
Since the thickness of the slab and spans are equal the values ofEIIL is the same for both the spans. +s, ,l ~-
/
/
/

3EIIL
Distribution factor for S1 = . = 0.43
(3 EIIL ·+ .4 EJ/L) )
A
and Distribution factor f~ = 1-:._ 0.43 = 0.57

The unbalanced moment at the common edge is distrib~ed and final support moment of
'
·v --'

Fig. 9.5.5. Two- Way Slab Panel Cantilevering on Edge

in
13.61 kN.m. is obtained as shown the distribution table.
.
/

Member BA BC ; -9. 6.ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES .:--......

•.

D.F. 0.43
.-~
0.57 Ex. 9.6.1 Design a R.C. slab for a room measuring 6.5 m x 5 m. The slabs is to be cast
Initial moments 14.98 ,-11.79 mqno!ithically over the beams with corners held down. The width of the supporting beams is
Dist. -1.37 1.82 2~0mm. The slab carries superimposed load of 5 kN/mrrl Use_M20 grade of concrete and ·
ste~(grade Fe 500. ·
c

'
Final moments 13.61 -13.61 . . /

Given : f ck = 20 N!mrrl, J, = 500Nimnt, bs = 230mm:- w1= 5 kN!rril

Clear spans= 6.5 m and S,m, · ~ ··
:. Final moment at mid-span of S1 =18~64 -13.61/2 =11.83 kN.m \ .. ,, ~

=
Similarly,· fmal moment at mid-span of S2 20.71 -13.61 = 7.I 0 kN.m as obtained earlier. Requ_ired : Design ofslab~
~·

fllustrative Examples 433

SeCt. 9..6
432 Slab Chapter 9
U:sipg 8 mmblirs (area= 50 mrtf ), clc spacing= 1000 x 50 I 408 = 122 mm
Solution say 120 mm < ( 3 x 200 or 300 mm)
The length of the slab is less than twice its width it is to be designed as a two- way slab. Widthofmiddlestrip= 0.75 x 5.2=3.9 m, Width of edge strip =Lxl8 =520018 = 650 mm
The breadth of support ( = 230 mm ) is less than clear span I 12 ( = 5000 I 12 ),
.provide# 8 mm at 120 mm clc in the middle strip of width= 3.9 m
:. effective span = ( clc between supports or clear span +d) whichever is less. Bend alternate bars at 0.15 x 5200 = 780 mm from the centre of support.
As the effective span is dependent on effective depth, the trial depth will be determined first.
Trial Depth: Assume effective span Lx = clc between supports= 5000 + 230 = 5230 mm.
Area of steel along long span :
Since the span is greater than 3.5 m the serviceability requirements for deflection is governed by Since long span bars are placed above the short span bars, effective depth= 200-8 = 192 mm
Ll dratio.
6
For simply supported slab basic Lid ratio= 20 4.6 X 24.08 X } 0 ]
0.5 X 20[ 1- · x 1000x 192 = 300mrtf
For p1= 0.25% and steel Fe 500, (fs= 290 N I mrrf) Modification factor= 1.3 ... (Fig. 8.6.1) A = 1-
:. Required effective depth = 5230 I (20 x 1.3) = 200 mm . sty 500 20 x1000 x 1922
Try total depth of225 mm :.effective depth provided =d= 225-20-812 =Say 200 mm
Using# 8 mm bars, clc spacing = 1000 x 501300 = 166 mm Say 160 mm
:. effective span = Lx = 5000 + 200 = Say 5200 mm, Ly = 6500 + 200 =Say 6700 mm
~
= Ly I LX = 6700 I 5200 = 1.29 , Width of middle strip= 0.75 Ly = 0.75 x 6.7 = 5 m
Loads: Consider one meter width of the slab. i.e. b = 1000 mm Width of edge strip = L I 8 = 6700 18 Say 840 mm
Dead load= 25 x 0.225 = 5.6 kN I m. Provide# 8 mm@ 160m~ clc in the middle strip of width 5 m
Superimposed load = 5.0 kN I m. Bend alternate bars at 0.15 x LY = 0.15 x 6700 = 1000 mm from the centre of support.
Total working load = I0.6 kN I m. 2
Ultimate load wU = 1.5 X 10.6 = 15.9 kN I m. :. wUL2X = 15.9 X si = 430 kN.m Reinforcement in edge strips is given by: As1= 0.12 x 1000 x 2251100 = 270 mm
Using# 8 mm bars, s = l 000 x 501270 = 185 mm say 180 mm clc
'
,: Design Moments : Provide# 8 @ 180 mm clc along the short span and along the long span in the edge strips.
I
II
il: The boundary condition for slab is all four edges discontinuous i.e. cas_e 9 in Table 9.5.2
The design moments are worked out using the formula Check for deflection :
1: MU =a wII L2X where, a= B.M. coefficients given in Table 9.5.2 case 9. Area of steel required along short span = 408 mnt, (p1) reqrJ. = 100 x 4081(1 000 x 200) = 0.2%
·
Area of steel provided along short span= 1000 x 501120 = 417 mnt
\
0.079-0.072 :.fs =0.58 X 500 X 4081417 =284Nimrtf
For L I L = 1.29, a = 0.072 + x (1.29- 1.2) = 0.0783 and a = 0.056
y X X O.l ' y (p ) =lOOx4171(lOOOx200) =0.21% <(0.25%assumed)
I B.M. at mid-span of short span MUX =aX wII L X 2
:. MUX = 0.0783 x 430. = 33.67 kN.m
·
1 prav.
:. From Fig8.6.1 , for p; = 0.21% and fs = 284 N I mrtf , at= 1.35
Required d=52001(20x 1.35)= 192mm<200mm :. Safe
I MUJ' = a y wU LhX = 0.056 x 430 = 24.08 kN.m.

Check depth from B.M. considerations :

Note: As mentioned earlier, since ( p );.qd < ( p1
1
)~ (i.e. 0.20% < 0.25%) the deflection check will
rfii'

·
be satisfied and there is no need to do further check as given above.
Eu.max = 2.66 N I mm2 for MlO and Fe 500 ... ~ .. Table 4.5.1
I M
~max
=R
u.max
xbcf=2.66x 1000x 2002 x 10-6 = l06.4kN.m. > M (=33.67kN.m.)
ux Torsion Steel :
I All the ed_ge are containe~ I>Y discontinuous edges.
~08
/ ..;..-_

I
I·
:. Section is under - reinforced
:, Required, area of steel =
0.75 x Asu = 0.75 x = 306 mrtf

l. ". '
Main Steel : Area of steel along short span.
I UsiJlg# 8 mm bars, s = 1000 x 501306 = 160 mm clc.
l
A
0.5 X 20
= - - - I-
J, I-
4.6 X 33.67 X J06
X 1000 X 200 = 408 mm 2
.
Size of torsional steel mesh= L/ 5 = 520015 = 1040 mm
Six 500 20 X I000 X 200 2 . .
 r
\

434 Slab Sect. 9.6 Illustrative Examples 435

Chapter 9
Stlmmary of Results : Ex. 9.6.2 The part plan of a double storeyed office building to be constructed in moderate
. Total depth ofslab=225 mm Middle strip3.9 x 5 m, edge strip650 x 840 m exposure condition is shown in Fig.9.6.2 a. Design the slab S4 and S5 for the following data :
Short-span steel : # 8 mm at 120 mm clc in the middle strip of width of3.9 m. live load= 4 kNim2 Floor finish = 1.5 kN I m2 Floor to floor height = 3m steel Fe 415 is to be
Long-span steel:# 8 min at 160 clc in the middle strip of5m. used. For moderate environment minimum grade of concrete is M 25 and clear cover of
Edge strip steel : # 8 Trim at 180 c/c 30 mm ( Table 2.2.3 )
Torsion Steel : # 8 mm at 160 mm clc in both orthogonal direction at discontinuous supports
for a length of I 040 mm.
The details of reinforcement are shown in Fig. 9. 6.1
Given: fck =25 Nlmm2, fy =415 Nlnun2, lL=4kN lmm2, FF=L5 kN lnun2, Lx= 3.4 m, Ly=4.1 m
\_ Required : Design of slab S4 and S5

Solution:
1. Span :Long span= Ly = 4.1 m, Short span LX = 3.4 m, Ly I LX = 4.1 I 3.4 = 1.2 < 2
:. The slab will be designed as two - way continuous slab.
\ __ /'
2. Trial depth : In the case of two - way slab the shorter span is used for calculating L I d ratio
2
for deflection check. Since live load in this case 4 kN I mm2 which is greater than 3 kN I m the
\..
serviceability requirements for deflection should be worked out as given in Sect. 8.6.3
In the case of two - way slab the loads are distributed in both direction, the design moments
are small compared to one - way slab. The percentage of steel required, in general is less between
0.2 % to 0.35 % for HYSD bars.
'-·' --p;:ssume p - O:jo/0____ ·
1
For pt =0.3%, Modification factor, a 1 = 1.45 for Fe 415 corresponding to f s = 240 N I mm2
Now, Basic Ud =26 for continuous slab.
Required d = LX I (26 x 1.45) = 3400/37.7 = 90.2 mm say 100 mm
l~ :/ Required __ __E_ __'=_lO~+ 30 + ~~-~~1_J?.Z~-say_0~-~~---
l'i
li! :. Effective depth provided = d = 140 - 30 - 8/2 = 106 mm
Effective depth for mid-span steel in y direction = 106- 8 = 98 mm
if
n 180120
3. Loads: Consider one metlilr width of slab : wu = 1.5 ( 25 x 0.14 + 1.5 + 4) = 13.5 kN I m.

n· 8
~
•
J' 4. Design Moments: The boundary conditions for slab S4 are three edges discontinuous with
'f:( the one long edge continuous (i.e. case 7) while slab S5 will have two short edges discontinuous
( i.e. case 5 ).
lir f The design moment are worked out using the formula :
::1>
i: lUIIIIIIllllllllllllllllllllll]
1:1040-+l =8700 . f.- 840 ~
MU = a wU LX2 where, a bending moment coefficients
and wU LX2 = 13.5 x 3.4.
2
= 156.06 kN.m.
•
a given in Table 9.5.2.

1·1
!' (a) Plan of Rel~tit Bottom For LyI Lx =1.2 , For.· slab S4 : a'x =0.071 , ax = 0.053 , a'y = 0 , ay = 0~043
·
Fig. ?·6.1 Reillforeemat Details of Two- -qy Simply Supported Slab. For slab S5 : a'X = 0.052 , aX = 0.040 , a'y = 0 , ay = 0.035
.
 Chapter 9 Sect. 9.6 R/ustrative Examples 437
6 stab
43 fbecatcu lation of bending
. moments at various section are shown in the following Table : Compari~on of moments s(

---
ss
,. B.M. Coef. B.M.in kN.m.
Initial moments at worked out +817 -11.08 -8.11 6.24
LIL wL 2 Average moment method
stab L1 y x u x Case Short Span Long Span Short Span
9.01 -9.6 -9.6 4.75
Long Span
Logical method 8. 91 -9.8 -9.8 4.55
No. a' X aX a' ay M'IIX
y M M'uy MU.)l
IIX Since the difference in moments between these methods is < 5 %. The average moment method which is much
v~
s . 1.2 156.06 7 0.071 0.053 - 0.043 -11.08 +8.27 simple can be used.
41---
- +6.71
v 34 1.2 156.06 5 0.052 0.040 - 0.035 -8.11 +6.24 - +5.46
5. Check the depth from B.M Considerations :
Ss ~ Mur.max = 3.45 x 1000 x 1062 x 10·6 = 38.76 kN.m. » 11.69 kNm. :. Safe
~..--
0b erved that at the common edge of slab S4 and slab S5 the negative moments are
6. Main Steel :
witl be sskN.m and- 8.11 kNm respectively. The main steel at different sections is calculated using the formula:
It ; Jt.O 1 e of negative moment has been worked out and mid-span moment modified by two
0o;l"ooeva
differell
t meuthods. (see Sect. 9.5. 7) as detailed below:
Required, A
sl
0.5 X 25 [
415
1- 1-
4.6 M
25 X
u
X

1000 X Jl
6
10 J x I 000 x d .J: 168 mm2 (= 1.2 x 140)
omen! Method : ;.r;~
1 erage }.li of moments over the common long edge
"v Average . = (11.08 + 8.11) /2 = 9.6 kNm and spa<;ing :!> 3 x 98 = 294 mm
The area of steel and diameter- spacing combination of bars are calculated as under:
pecrease in negattve moment for slab S4 = 11.08- 9.6 = 1.48 kNm.
moment for slab S4 = 8.27 + 1.48/2 = 9.0 I kNm. Span Position Mu d (Ast)reqcl Dia - spacing
Mid-span . (Ast) Provided
. moment mcreased from 8.11 kN.m. to 9.6 kN.m. = 9.6- 8.11 = 1.49 kN.m.
kNm mm mm 2 mm mm mm2
]'Jegauve SLAB -S4
. g span moment by 1.49 kNm. for span S5 we get,
pecreastn (a) Along Short- Span*
Support -9.6 106 262 # 8@400+# 8@ 580 299
:. Span moment of S5 : 6.24- 1.49 = 4. 75 kNm. extra # 8 @ 580
}Jethod: Midspan 9.01 106 245 #8@200 251
Logical Stiffuess of slab S4 = 3EJ I L , Stiffness of slab S =4 EI I L ~~;;:;-
5
(b) Along Long- Span*
. p1.strt'buted moment for S4 = 0.43 , Distribution factor for S = 0.57
5 Support - - - - -
· ·.. ·stribution table is given below: Midspan 6.71 98 197 # 8@ 250 201
'fbe dt
SLAB-S
D.F. 0.43 0.57 (a) Alori/short- Span*
Initial moments ', -11.08 8.1l Support -9.6 106 262 # 8 @ 400 + # 8@580 299
Distribute · extra # 8 @ 580 !

1.28 1.69
Final moments -9.8 9.8 Midspan 4.75 106 168* # 8@290* 173
I

bS :Sum of midspan and support moment= 8.27+ 11.08/2 = 13.81 kNm. (b) Along Long- Span*
forsaI 4 . .
Support - - - - -
. tmomentatmidspanofS4 =13.81-9.8/2 =8.9IkNm.
:. ftna ..MidsPSn' 5.46 . 98 . 163* . .#8 @290* '173
· ilemtll'ks : • See Fig. 9.6.2a. Minimum spacing of 3d and minimum reinforcement governs. The area of
forsaI. bS5:Sumofmidspanand
•
support moment= . 6.24 +( 8.11 + 8.11)/2 = 14.35 kNm.
eXtra ~eel re(Ju.~d along the short spatl support= 262- (251 + 173) I 2 =50 mml only. The spacing of
,'. finaJmomentatmtdspan Of S5 =14.35- 9.8 =4.55 kNm. ## 8mm bari woru QUI to 1000 mm_clc. But the. spacing of 580 mm hils been provided so that these bars can
be JJlaatli1t the ·JJtJ.rition of bent UD bar. to save labour cost
 438 Slab R/ustrative &tltltples 439
Chapter 9 StfiJ1J.6
7. Check for deflection :
AssuDiing 50% bars bend up to resist B.M. due to partial fixity,
p1(re = 100 x 245 I ( 1000 x 106) = 0.23 % < 0.3 % assumed :. Safe.
d) 100 x 125.5
How~ver, detailed check is carried out for verification.
2
A tl = 251/2 = 125.5 mnr, p1% = = 0.12 %
S (1000 X 106)
p(p
I rov. ) = 100 X251 (1000 X106)=0.24%• /.s =0.58 X415 X245 1251 =235M, = o.29 N lmmz, k = 1.3
t uc
:. for p1 = 0.24% and fs = 235 N I m,?- , a 1 = 1.6 ... ... (Fig. 8.6.1) ;V = lJ 0.29 1000 }06/}000 = 39.96 /eN» }4.6 kN. :. Safe

•
X X X
_ :-;·.uc
:. dreq.d = 3400 1(26 x 1.6) = 82· m,?- < 106m,?- :. Safe
(b) Short Discontinuous edge : Slab S4
-8. Distribution Steel :Using Fe 415 grade steel
vu.max = w L I 3 = 13.5
u x
X 3.4 /3 = 15.3,/cN.
Asl = 0.12 x 1000 x 1401100 =168m,?-
Assuming 50% bars bent up at support,Astl =201/2 = 100.5 mmz
Using # 8 mm bars, spacing= 1000 x 50 I 168 =say 290 mm c/c.
. 100 X 100.5
P1 % = = 0.1 % , t = 0.29 Nlmmz
9. Torsion Steel : 1000 X 98 uc
(a) At the cof!J.er contained by discontinuous edges V = lJ X 0.29 X 1000 X 98/1000 = 36.9 kN » }6.2 /eN :. Safe
uc
Torsional steel required= 0.75 A = 0.75 x 245 = 184 mm2
81
10. Check for Development Length : slab S4
"...t...-_,.1
Provide# 8@ 270 mm clc in both directions atrigfit angles in each of the two meshes one at (a) Long Discontinuous edge :
the top and the oilier aftne·bottom for a length.of Lxl 5 =340015 =680 m;,. Vu.max = 14.6 kl!:__, For 50% bars bent up, M1 = 9.0112 = 4.5 kN.m.

(b) At the corner at which one edge is discontinuous and the other continuous 0.87 X 415
L = ~ = 40 ~- = 40 x 8 = 320 mm
Torsion steel required =318 A = 0.375 x 245 = 92 m,?-
81 d 4 X ( 1.4 X1.6)
Provide# 8 @540 mm clc for distance of LX I 5 =680 mm in both directions. L0 = bs 12 - x1 + 3 ~ , L0 = 230 /2 - 30 + 3 x 8 = I 09 mm. (Eq. 9.4.3a)
La < 1.3 M/ V + L0
10. Check for shear - Slab - S
4 < 1.3 x 4.5 x 1000/14.6 + 109 ( =509 mm)
(a) Long Continuous-edge.
:. 320 < 509 mm -,.. Safe
k 12
vu.max = 1.2 w L ,;, 1.2 X 13.5 X3.4 X = 1.2 X {16.2)
u X 2k + I (2 X 1.2 + 1) (b) Short Discontinuous edge :
= 19.5 kN Vu.max = 15.3 kN. , Ld = 320 mm, M1 = 6.7112 = 3.36 kN.m. Lo = 109 mm
· 320 < 1.3 x 3.36 x 1000/15.3 + 109 (= 394 mm) :. Safe
l Area of tension steel provided = 299 m,?-
100 X 299
As mentioned
onlitted earlier, the check for shear and bond
. are normally satisfied and hence are normally
. .
'r\ p,%
1000 X106
= 0.28%, :. tuc = 0.37 Nlm,?-, k = 1.3 Comments:

r Vuc . = ktuc bd = 1.3 x 0.37 x 1000 x 10611000 = 50.9 kN » 19.5 kN :. Safe

When the development length check is not satisfied then one of the following methods may be used .
(i) Do not bend alternate bars but bend only third bar thereby the area of steel available at bottom gets
increased.

r Lo_ng Discontinuous edge :

!,..:
(ii) If alternate bars are to be bent, as per usual practice, reduce the bar spacing so that area provided
increases and development length requirement reduces. Use Eq.4.5.3b for getting actual moment ofresistance
of the &tee/ available at bottom. .
vu.u = 0.9 x (16.2) = 14.6 kN
t-1 (iii) In the case of two - way slab having small span ( L. < 4 m) there is no point in dividing the slab into
middle strip and edge strip. This is because the width .of the ed# strip works out to be iess than 500 mm
r
Xi_···
.A.m = 251w at mid- span which can hardly c¢commodate 2 bars. /tJSJead of this oiuy nM/IJ steel with alternate b(JI's bent up can be
prtivltkd. ~is_ also saveS
. ·.·.' . . · .
some labour
. c0$t. ·
 r
440Slab Chapter 9 FlatSlab #1
Sect. 9.7
--, ;i li
~ X 9.7 FLAT SLAB
o· 0

9.7.1. Introduction
Mu kN.m + 9.01 -9. +4.75 A reinforced concrete flat slab;. also.f.f!.l~ed as beamless slab, is a slab supported directly
I
0
0
; +5 + +
(!)
~
I!)

+ + ·);· by columns without beams. A part of the slab bounded on each of its four sides by the centre line
of column is called panel. The flat sJab is,.often thickened close to the supporting columns to
84.
85 .... gl-o

1
84 C\1
provide adequate strength in shear and to reduce the amount of negative reinforcement in the
support regions. The thickened portion i.e. the projection below the slab is called drop or drop
;Jf
o. 0
panel. (Fig. 9. 7.1 a). In some cases, the section of the column at top, as it meets the floor slab or
I+-- 3400 3400 -r 34100 ----1 a drop panel, is enlarged so as to increase primarily the perimeter ofthe critical section, for shear
(a )Key Plan
and hence, increasing the capacity of the slab for resisting two - way shear and to reduce negative
#8@ 400 + # 8@580
Extra= #8@ 580 ( b+c+e) bending moment at the support. Such enlarged 9J flared portion of column at their tops are called
ll--1o2o-.J the column heads or column capitals. (Fig. 9. l. i b). A flat slab inay have a drop panel and a
u

tJ -·-
• \.

I
\ k . . . /,
#8@ 200 lo•h\
!', a.
Jt j
)... • ",
Jj_
• 1ro capital both as shown in Fig. 9. 7.1 c or it may be of uniform thickness without a ~rop panel and a
capital (See Fig. 9.7.1d). Slabs of constant thickness which do not have drop panels or column
capitals are referred to as flat plates. The strength ofthe flat plate structure is often limited ~ue to
230

punching shear action around columns, and consequently they are used for light loads and for
relatively small spans. ...,,
_____ _.
I - I

® ~
rcapital

0
_A_ Capital

.."' ."' I
C"
~
II- .,.. o.
.
0 I \. .{

0
"'or Q)
@
(11
1§1 84 ! 85
I "'
(11
1§1 0

I
0
iii 0 0
(!)

2.
:D
"'5'0'
I
0

I 7
~ l #8@4001 fb
.----1020--J

~ @) ~
a 0
#8@@ ·I ¥e
7!,#8@580
"'
3
"'::l.
0

I ~ ~@4001 ra I
1.C I .
I I
"#8@580 0
#8@ 290 c/c _
alt -bent up
i I
I,

1~ 1 i L __ ,_f11tt_l_l. ___ .r·-"-

l-s8o:rs8o-J · L~t,ofwall (d)
3400 .· .
(b) ..... (c)
... (b) Details of Reinforcement
(a)

Fig. 9.6.2
;:;:···

4/Z:SJab Chapter 9 Sect. 9.7 Flat Slab 443

9;7.•2· A,&Jvantages and Disadvantages of Flat Slab Construction ,:·1

.. For exterior panels, the width of drops at right angles to discontinuous edge and measured from the
(A} The aavtiitt(lges of flat slab construction are as follows : centre line of the columns shall be equal to one- half the width of drop for interior panels. The
(1} It provides a large clear ceiling height. thickness of the drop (projection below the slab) shall not be less than 114 the thickness of slab
(2) The construction is simple and economical because ofthe simplified form work, the ease
of placement of reinforcement. ]; ....••.1•.

(Fig.9. 7.2b).

;
(3) .The plain ceiling gives an attractive and pleasing appearance. ::;

(4) In absence of beams, provision of acoustical treatment is easy. 31

(5) In general flat slab construction is economical for spans up to 1Om and relatively light loads. Any concrete in this
area to be neglected
L L
(B) The disadvantages of flat slab construction are given below : 0 9 = (1/4 to 1/5) of J..:!:.2.
(a) Slab without Drop 2
and
(1) The stiffness of the structure comprising of flat slab and column is much less than the Column without Column head ( c ) Slab wnh column head
slab- beam column construction with the result significant bending moments due to
horizontal loads cannot be effectively transferrelF or these reasons, flat slab construction
is used in low rise and medium rise buildings which are not tall enough to be subjected to
large horizontal wind loads. They are also unsuitable formultistoreyed office buildings
having width less than the height. . ,
(2) Serviceability problems arise with excessiv~ long- term deflections ofsuch relatively thin
slabs. However, they are not so serious if ~rops or column capitals are provided.
/ ( b ) Slab with Drop ( d ) Column with Drop and Column head
9.7J Requirements of Slab Thickness, Drops and Column Heads De= Diameter of column head or column d =Effective depth
(a) Thickness of Slab : The thickness of flat slab, for control of deflection shall be such that the AA'= Critical Section for Shear L1 or L2 = Span Lengths between columns

span to effective depth ratios are limited to the values given in Sect. 8.6.3a. The provision of
thickness has been made more stringent by specifYing that for the span to effective depth ratios of
the flat slabs, the long span (and not the short one) shall be considered. For slabs without drop
panels, the span to effective depth ratios given in Sect. 8. 6. 3 shall be multiplied by 0.9. The value
,ofVd shall be modified as per Sect. 8. 6.3 (b) depending on the area of tension steel required. The
area oftension steel shall be,computed by taking the average percentage of steel across the whole
width of the panel. The minimum thickness of the slab shall not be less than 125 mm.
(b) Drops : The drops shall be rectangular in plan and have a length in that direction not less than
. 113 of span length between centre lines of columns in that direction.
Forinteriorpanelsizeofdrop =L j3 x LJ3,
Foroxtemal pane~ width ofdrop perpendicular to discontinuous edge from the centre Ifuepf~mn
=l/2 x: width of drop for interior panels. 1
Fig. 9.7.2
(c) Column Heads or Column Capitals : The diameter of column heads is usually .about
1/4 to 115 of the average span length between columns. The primary function of a column head is
to strengthen the slab against punching shear. Assuming that the shear failure surface is formed at
maximum inclination of 45", I.S. Code specifies that the effective column capitals for strength
purpose shall be that portion of the column head which lies within the largest circular cone or
pyramid with a 90" verte* angle that can be included entirely within the outlines of the column
capital, and any ofconcret~_oJltsidiHhe~nti~nedpofttonsha;ltbe neglected for the design calculation
(See Fig. 9.5.3c)_,~-/ .
,___....-.....--
9.t4. Bending Pattern in Flat Slab
The bending pattern of flat slab is similar to those of two- way slabs resting on beams. In flat
slab some pQrtion of the s1ab along the col~mn lines called strip, is considered to act as flexible
wide beams. The strip of slab acting as beam along the centre line joining the columns is called the
column strip having a width ofL2!1 but not grater than LJl4~n each side of the column centre line,
where L1 is the span in the direction in whicl!. moments are being determiiied, measured centre to
,'
 (~
v

Flat Slab 445

444 Slab Chapter 9 SeCt. 9.f

centre of supports, and L2 is the span transverse to L1 measured centre to centre of supporb. If
the adjacent transverse spansofpanels A and Bare unequal, then the column strip shall have a
width equal to (L2A /4 + L2n {4) with L2A :1> LJ/4 and L2n} L/4 (.See Fig. 9. 7.Jo)

1--·-·- ·- 'i

~[9-
T ill PanelS
I ~< \ ~- I / "'f-.... 0~

~~~ 8 I (\/
...J
I I '- I I ......_ "-. I I / ........ ,...-

LI
A
c:
~ts
ol.,
(,)

~~g. <(
(\/

~~ ...J

c:
§l.g-
l_ -~Lc--l
om
(,)
Panel A
·-
(b)

·~~-
• ve Tension at top
_/

1--"-- L1
I I

(a) • Points of inflections

Fig. 9.7.3
The middle portion of slab between column strips is called middle strip (See Fig 9. 7.3a).
The column strip acts as a continuous beam supported on column. It bends primarily in one direction
along the column support, producing concavity upwards~ the middle portion andconvexity upwards
near the supports. The portion of the slab between the column strips (i.e. middle strip) may be
considered as a slab suspended across flexible column strips. It deflects like a two - way slab
supported on flexible be~s on four sides inducing positive.moments in the central portion and
negative moments over the column strips at right angles to the column lines. The deflected profile
of the panel will be like a saucer in the middle portion (with eoncavity upwards) and an inverted
bowl near the column with convexity upwards. Thus, there will be a change of curvature from
convexity at the column to the concavity towards the centre of the panel. The locus of points of
change of curvatures, called points of inflection, have been shown by dotted lines in Fig. 9. 7.4.
.,i
Since the middie·strip is supportedon flexible column strips the resultant maximum central deflection
ofa flat slab is generally more thali that in the case of slab supported on beams and walls. Also the
·transfer ofload occurs from middle strip to column. strip and then to the supporting column. nius .
the column strips get more loaded than the middle ship with the result the moments-developed in
the column stripS are larger than those in the middle strips.
Locus of points of inflections
Fig • 9,7.4 Deflection Profile of Flat Slab
From the deflected profile shown in Fig. 9. 7.4 it will be clear that the column strip AMENB will be
subjected to negative( or hogging) moments between AM andNB with maximum value occurring
at supports A and Band positive moment (sagging moment) between MN with maximum value at
E. The middle strip HJFwill have negative momentsbetw~nHP and QF and positive moments
r-·
betWeen PQ with maximum value at J. I
'----
Comments : It will be realised that though the deflection is maximum at J, the relative deflection is less
than the deflection in the middle of column strip with the result positive moments in the mid-span of
column strip will be greater than thcise in the middle strip.
Thus, thdlat slab .is primarily a flexural member and is designed for two - way bending
action by different app{Oxim~te methods. However, many time~ the two- way shear in the slab
by~:$kfesofcolUilllt~mes critical and govern$ thetbic;kness of slab, and decides the necessity
of.&tlpor:a'~lumn c;apital. Therefore, it will be proper to stUdy the shear action in the slab prior
 ~-

G r
, /
il'
·~·\"
446 Slab
Chapter 9 ;,$let.
';..,_.
9. 7 Flat Slab 447
"
!i" 9.7.5. Two- Way Shear in Flat Slab
.·. Whe(.tthe openings are located at a distance less than ten times the thickness of the slab, the
· Two - way shear ( perceptibly known asJ!.unchi!Jubepr ) is critical in flat slab, footings, perittieterp.v ..is obtained by deducting the length of perimeter intercepted by radial lines drawn
pile - caps and two - way slaGs. carrying--co-ncentrated loads. The failure of flat slabs due to fu)m the centre of column at the opening, from the total perimeter as shown in Fig. 9. 7.5b.
two - way shear occurs by piercing or punching of column through the slab forming a failure .Ji
surface which looks like a truncated pyramid. The critical section for shear is taken at a distance ·~:
~;
Opening ' Large Opening
Subtract
d I 2 from the periphery of the column/capital/drop panel ( Fig.9. 7.2 ). When the flat slab is from
provided with drop panel and capital both, shear is required to be checked at two sections, one at ~- periphery

~-f:;,; r. ; :;:- 'b· f jfJ~~~r [-~(,;'; ~, ~;~:l\:?Y ;2;1 i

.__ ./
distance d I 2 from the face of column capital and the other at distanced I 2 from the face of drop
where, dis the effective depth of drop or slab as appropriate as shown in Fig. 9. 7.2d
The procedure for design of shear reinforcement for flat slab is carried out according to the I .,, ..:,,:.:., ... :·.:·. .•.:. I Section! ··:.•·::::••• .'··.:.. II ··::·'.:::. ·: :··.·. · · · · ::·'. ·: :.;;:.•:: I
j
' I
followfug steps. ~
I :··:·· ~ :-.~CoJumn' ' .. ·
I ··;:.:.,/::.:_··.:·.';;:::·
1 ---1
I j_ I
·:... ··:.; J{Qiumn···.
:~:::-:-,:.;:.:~;'~··__ :,,.:.;::_:
II
II
·:.Colufrfn · .:. • • -.·.
:{.;/,:.;:_:~-.'~··.-:·.. :.;::.:
I
;c;itical
I :·· . ·. ·.. C(>fumn.:
~ :_::;.''.::-:--:-l::;:x:.':-;': :
I. Compute ultimate design shear VuD at the critical section. 1
-------.::Tci,~j+T
ld/2 I
... _________11----------~ section 1
3W t ________ _

2. If VuD< Vuc (=the strength of concrete in two-way shear), shear reinforcemeDt is not required.
The shear strength of slab ( Vuc ) without shear reinforcement is given by : Fig. 9.7.5 (b) Effect of Openings on Critical Section for shear

Vue= ( k/, 'ucP/) (Eq. 5.9.3) The factor ks (= 0.5 + p0 ) accounts for reduction in shear stress due to increase in the ratio
where, ks = ( 0.5 + ~0 ) :f. 1, (Eq. 5.9.3a) oflonger side to shorter side. Tests on flat slabs failing due to punching shear action have shown
Short side of Column I Capital that for rectangular columns having short side less than 112 oflong side(~ < 0.5) the shear stress
) at failure varies· from a maximum· of0.25~ near the shorter sides to 0~15 ...j7';k or less along
~0
= Long side
. of Column I Capital
. (Eq. 5.9.3b) the longer sides of the section. .
t' uc = 0.25·~Jck c is inN I mrif,
fjk · where, fk Normally shear reinforcement is not provided for slabs having thickness less than 200 mm
I: p0 = perimeter at the critical section,
(Eq. 5.9.3c) from practical considerations.
d = effective depth at the critical section. (2) If VuD > 1.5 t' uc p0 d, the depth of the section shall be increased.

The computation of perimeter p0 at critical section around support having different shapes (3) Now, ifVD< p d but VD>
1.5 t' uco Vuc (=ksuco
t' p d), shearreinforcement,shall
and boundary conditions shall be done as shown in Fig. 9. 7. 5a u u
be provided in the form of a closed or castellated stirrups (See Fig. 9. 7.6)
~-~ along the perimeter of the column at a spacing not exceeding 3d/4 such that ·
JL. ~---------,y
-~~l:t. ,--,<~ ~t~t- VliD- 0.5 't'ucP/ = Vus = 0.87 fyAsv

~f~!.~j~@_! /~'\ ~
(
.';\j_
where, Asv =total cross- sectional area of all stirrup legs in the perimeter.

r \~/ ~§!,,,.,. :z
! V""L ne of stirrups of type I
!
't:;_'""'""' [~~=_:~~~
Support section column
( T
'17}'77
~V-

L~ /
/r----,
-~': 'j_ rFree edge=:\
~~
:a;~
rr ~:~..f 1!1!1?[1 l
I I
· "--, I r-,__---,

f;;~ !-L
I :,:.;;; '
-:;·~\l' ··~·: •. .
I . ............ t.
ldt2 . Stirrups
: ~-:·:f -~~~J.;: : .: I Type II J

' l~'i~~~.::,:<d :
1 H [[ [j[[ [ t
~:.:, ) LJl.fUl.J1_
' '-·---_,d / 1___ ---4~ ~:*
---~~!X
'"i '"'II
,_;· 2b
· Dotted lines represent critical periphery around support D-....__.........1+-
Typel·
Fig.9.7.5 (a) Critical. Peripheral ~tions for Shear
Fig/!).7..6 Shear Re~forcement in Flat Slabs
 ""

448 Slab FkitSW 449

Chapter 9 'Sect. 9.7

Design shear VuD shall be calculated at successive sections more distance from the support Consider an interior panel of a flat slab of size L1 x L2 supported, at the edges by circular
column capital of diameter 'c '(Fig. 9. 7. 7) and loaded by a uniformly distributed load ofintlnsity
preferably at an interval of3d/4 and shear reinforcement shall be provided up to the section where
w per unit area. Since this panel is surrounded by other panels and are similarly loaded, then by
VuD = 0.5 't' uc p0 d. While designing the shear reinforcement the shear stress carried by the symmetry, the shearing forces and twisting moment along all sides except at the circular interfaces
concrete shall be assumed. to be 0.5 't 'uc and reinforcement shall carry the remaining shear. Prac- with the column are zero.
tical difficulties preclude the use of stirrups in .slabs less than 200 mm thick and therefore, these ""' lt -----1
F
slabs have to design~d without shear reinforcement. The spacing of stirrups shall not exceed 3d/4
and will continue at least for a distance 'd' beyond the critical section.
D

9.7.6. Methods of Analysis and Design

Two approximate methods are adopted by the codes for the design of flat slab or flat plate.
These methods can be used provided the limitations specified therein are satisfied. The two design
methods are: (a) The direct design method
(b) The equivalent frame method
Both these methods are described in the following section. A :G
(c) BMD
--1 f f ( lnt~rnal
a) Panel
9.7.7. Direct Design Method
· } Panei_Load
9.7.7.1 Limitations of Direct Design Method : The direct design method is applicable to a given
M 14-1:~1j)Mct
flat slab system if it satisfies the following conditions : s'(_! l 1tc2
.£~
1t R R=w(~- B)
(1) There shall be minimum of three continuous spans in each direction.
( b )Free body diagram -Forces on haH Panel
The reason for having three continuous span is that the support moment in a·two span
continuous slab can be more than the values specified in the method. Fig. 9.7.7
(2) Panels shall be rectangular with the ratio of longer span to the shorter span not greater Let M and Mel be the negative and positive moments acting in the direction ofL (Fig 9. 7. 7c).The _.
1
free body !Jagram of the panel ABDEFG is shown in Fig. 9. 7. 7b. The midspan line FG being axis
than· two.
The direct design method gives the distribution of moments in twQ orthogonal directions of symmetry will be free from shear force and torsion. · . _
along the span length and along the width. But when the ratio oflong to short span exceeds Total load on the panel =w L L is supported by reactions acting along the circular areas of
2 1
column capital. · .
two, the slab acts as a one- way slab and, hence, the method is not applicable.
(3) Columns shall not be offset or staggered more than 10% of the span in the direction of the Total load on half panel
= sum of reactive forces along arcs AB and DE
offset, notwithstanding the provision specified in 2 above.
This provision is based on the work of Van Buren (71/11) who has provided analysis for
= w(L2LI_. 1tc\
staggered column. For staggered columns, finite element method is ideal. \2 8) r·-
(4) The successive span lengths in each direction shall not differ by more than one- third of
the longer span. The end sparis may be shorter but not longer than the interior spans. wLfi Lt· w1td ~2 c )
Moment of this load about BD = -2- x -4· - -- x -
8 3
x -
1t
This restriction comes from the prevention of negative moment at midspan, on account
of different loadings on spans of continuous beam as seen in Section 3.5.3 (Its two- W!lY
version is known as pattern loading). wLf .. we?
(5) The design live load shall not exceed three times the design dead load. = -1- -
This restriction has been set out with due consideration of the effects of pattern loadings. ' 8 12
i
_ . wL/ 1 we' . (-Lf-I 1tc\ c _ __
9.7.7.2. Analysis : The direct design method is based on statical analysi&. it was first put -• .L • ..C. Dn = II ~ 'U. _ ---- +- -+ W '-r.:'- .- -:;-)-=..,. 0
 i'
r:.·'
i

.·/,SO Slab
Chapter 9 Sect. 9.7 Flat Slab 451
Denoting Mol Mcl + Ms1 we get:

Mol
wLJ}1 (
-I---+-
4c c )
3 I -
j+-o.ago-1 f-0.930-l

8 L1 1t 3L2 L2 ..
1

~ wLf2I (1 -~)2 / ......__...,.

1--o-J
I

8 3L 1

= -s wL2 (
L1 - -
2c)
-
2

...... (9.7.1)
Fig. 9.7.8 Equivalent Square Sections for Typical Column Cross- sections

3 When the transverse span of the panels on either side of the centre - line of supports are
different, L2 shall be taken as the average of the transverse span. In Fig. 9.5.3, the transverse
_j
Similarly-algebraic sum of positive and negative moments in the direction L spans of panel A and BareL A and 12.8 respectively. Therefore, L = (L 2 + L28 )/2. When the span
~
2 2
wL L 2c )l adjacent and parallel to an edge is bemg considered, the distance trom trte edge to the centre -line
M0 2 = --..!__} 1 - - ...... (9.7.2) ofthe panel shall be substituted for L2. .
lli'
n·~
8 3L
2 The above analysis indicates tliat in a rectangular flat slab, there is large moment in the
direction of lo,nger span than in the direction of shorter span. This is in contrast to moments in
I
~~·
,! .
The above equation can easily be obtained by considering the reactions to be two -way slab\supported on beams. This is because in two -way slabs, longer beams supporting

~ (~ :) from tho rentre of the support ruuJ in • such case the SJlliO in tbe
short spans can;y greater load and, therefore, maximum moment in longer beams is greater than
<L_I concontrntOO ot that in short beams. In flat slabs, these moments are taken by slab itself.
/l.j il The solution given above b.ased on statics does not indicate the actual distribution of bending
1 '1
1j:,.j!!I
I i

I direction of moments is
~ --;-c)and
\L 2 .\
1
wL ( 2c y
the moment m= - -2 \L --;J
0 1
moment along the span i.e. how much is the negative support moment and how much is the positive
span moment. Also it neglects the possible torsional moments around column capital.
1
lm1 ! which is the same as given by Eq. 9. 7.1.
8 9.7.7.3 Distribution of Total static moment M in the Slab into Positive and
Negative Bending Moments (i.e. spa~ and support moments )
11rr The equation given by I.S. Code follows directly from Nichols derivation with the simplifying The semi - empirical direct design method uses Eq. 9. 7. 3 to calculate the total design moment
assumption that the supports are rectangular and the reactions are concentrated along the faces of M due to a uniformly distributed load and stipulates the proportion in which the total design moment·
the support. Thus, replacing the term (L 1 .:__ 2c/3) in Eq. 9. 7.1. by the clear span L we get equation is distributed into negative and positive moment, as under :
fiW given by I.S. Code as : n
The. total moment M. ,obtained using Eq. 9. 7. 3, is distributed into central moment or positive
'~#
~~t WL moment Me and support moment'or neg.ative moment~ as follows (see Fig. 9. 7.9)
M - n = wLf2n

u-~-~
0

/It~ 8 8 ...... (9.7.3)

where,
M = Total static moment (absolute sum of +ve and- ve moment in the
0
En~ s~ ~ter;rspan
,
6
direction under consideration),
/lim W = design load on area Lf = w x L L
. l d •
w = oa per umt .area, n 2 n _[o.6sJM
Ill~ L = clear span in the direction of moments extending from face to face of Mpa-~+11aJ \ pi '< u ' II~- '• J' / '

rm~
·columns, capitals, brackets or walls but not Jess than 0.65L ,
n I J -

L1 = 1
length of span in1be direction ofM0 measured centre to centre of supports,

~ 1t1/~ ~ Map=r!5'tt1/ajMo
.MH=0.35M0
. L2 .=,Iength~fs~an~~versetoLr .
-~]]I . : ·
As ment10ned-earher, the Eq. 9.'7.1ts g1ven for rectangular column supports. The supports
_ M -
e-
63-~ M
0
·
I 0.1

i{~r which are not rectangular are converted into equivalent recttugular, square supports '.laving the
same area as-shown in Fig.9.5.8
• A •/: '
· ·. · · DesignMoment=Mo= wtin
. 8 .
Fig. 9.7.9 Divi!i.ion !lf'Total Static Panel Moment M. into Positive and N~gative Moments
 ~
~\~f::

' ~-·

452 Slab

Interior spans :
Negative design moment ~ = MQR = 0.65 M
0
Chapin- 9

...... (9.7.4)
'
f
!
Sect. 9.7

· These design moments can be modified by 10% provided that the total design moment M for
the panel in the direction· considered is not reduced. If two adjacent spans Ln are unequal~ the
Flat Slab 453

Positive design moment M = MH. = 0.35 M

. c . 0 negative moments on two sides of an intermediate support are bound to be different. For the ~- .

... ... (9.7.5).

End Spans : purpose of design, larger;of the two moments shall be considered unless unbalanced moment at the
support is distributed)n proportion to the stiffuesses of adjoining slabs. For stiffness of slabs and ~-;--

. 0.65
0.65 moment distribution in slabs see Reference (84/5)
Exterior negative design moment MPQ = M = --M
...... (9.7.6) ?il'¢.
· I + 1/a
0
~ 0
9.7.8. EquivalentFrame Method (71112)
Interior negative design moment MQP =r.
. 75
0.1
c
I + 1/a o
~ ~ 0.1
~ o
j
. M = 0. 75- - · M ... (9. 7. 7)
9. 7.8.1. Introduction :
c Equivalent frame method is a more comprehensive and logical method of design for
two- way and flat slabs. It can be used where the slab system has unequal span or which does not
~ ~
Positive design moment
MG
+3 I 0.28 0.28)
--M= 0.63--· M ... (9.1.8)
+ 1/a o
c
~ o
meet the limitations of direct design method, or where the structure is subjected to horizontal loads
or where pattern loadings change considerably the distribution of moments and shear from that due
to uniform load. Equivalent frame method is based on theoretical analysis supplemented by test
where, ac is th~ ratio of sum of flexural stiffness of the exterior columns above and below the results (63/7). In the recent versions of the codes, the method is rationalized based on extensive
floor to the fl-exural s~iffness of the slab at a jointtaken in the direction of moments. Thus, tests carr!ed out by Hatcher, Sozen and Seiss, Guralnick and La Fraugh, and others (63/7, 69/5)
. . l}c
c 9.7.8.2. Method of Analysis :
ac = - -
(9.7.9) Equivalent frame method consists of approximating the actual three dimensional
ks
!
\ slab- and- column system to two dimensional frames on column centre line in both, longitudinal
I I · where, lJcc =sum of flexural stiffuess of the exterior column above and below the slab,. and transverse directions, and analysing the same for the loads acting in the plane offrames. Thus,
!!! . .
i•j each planer .frame consists of a row of columns with connecting slab - beam strips at each
I].·!
4 Elcu . 4 E/cl floor I roof levels having ;width equal to the distance between the panel centre lines. Fig. 9. 7.10
jl -+-
LCll Lcl
.. , ... (9.7.10) · .shows the idealization of the frame in the longitudinal and transverse directions.
I
I.. in which the subscripts u and I refer to the upper and lower columns respectively, and
Lcu and Lcl are the upper and lower column lengths between centre to centre of floor slabs.
ks =flexural stiffuess of the slab (

~·~11811-
= 4EJs = 4 Ec (L2 f/12)
...... (9.7.11)
L1 L
1
I' where, II = the moment of inertia 1>f the slab of width L • j__
· In the above expressions, _it is assumed ~at the section ofthe column is uniform ·betWeen 2
storey heights and also the slab ha8 constan~moment of inertia This is a simplified assumption. Since
the use of direct design method is limited by requirements given in Sect 9. 7. 7.1, the value of ac (a)

even though computed taking uniform cross - section for columns and slab, the design moments
· obtained give fairly accurate results. ·
However; the abrupt change of moment of inertia along the axis of the slab on account of
i E JfslabJ E i
provision ofdrop panels and variation of moment of inertia along the length offlared columns need
to be taken into.acc9unt·for working out the moments using equivalent frame me!hod
(See Sect. 9. 7.8.2)~ For any method of analysis, it is adequate to assume the gross concreteCI'OIS
Jl 1l Jl 1 1 -1 (b)
.:.:.~

section for comoutation of flexnnil dr..~-.. · ·

~- " .. •" ... _ .._fthftft Ar • 11lat 'Plat• 14'1nnr intn lift-· Eouivalent Fraine
~.

· Flat Slab 455

Chapter 9
454 Slab
The code specifies that each such frame may be analysed ,in its entirety especially when it is
subjected to lateral loads. For vertical loads with non- sway condition or when structural elements
such as shear walls or bracings are provided to resist lateral loads, the frame may be analysed
separately as a substitute frame consisting of each floor slab with its column above and below
taken as fixed at their far ends (See Fig. 9.7.10 and Chapter 13). Where slabs are analysed
separately, while determining the bending moment at a given support, it may be assumed that the
slab is fixed at any support two panels distant from there provided the slab is continuous beyond
that point. This is on account of obvious reason that the carry over moment from any support
which is beyond two panels from the support under consideration will be negligible. The spans used
for the analysis shall be the centre to centre distance between the supports and not the clear span.
the frame analysis starts with determination of fixed end moments at various supports and
I I working out the values of relatives stiffnesses of the members as detailed in the following sections.
The moment of inertia of slabs and columns may be worked out on gross unqracked cross- section
of the concrete.
9.7.8.3. Evaluation of stiffnesses :
For the purpose of determining relative stiffnesses of I.S. Code specifies that variation of
moment of inertia along the axis ofthe slab on account of provision of drops shall be taken into
account while the stiffening effect of flared column may be ignored. This appears to be
inconsistent. The commentary on IS: 456 (SP- 24) (84/4) has accepted this inconsistency and has
recommended that, the stiffness may be worked out either by considering the variation of moment
of inertia due to provision of drop panel and column capital as well, as adopted by
ACI3l8- (95/1). The provisions inAC/: 318 are based on theoretical analysis, supplemented by
test results and have been accepted by majority of the codes. It will be appropriate to include the
stiffening effect of flared column heads in the analysis procedure, and also the effect of torsional
flexibility of the slab in the transverse direction on the column stiffness needs consideration.
(A) Stiffness of slab: For the case of flat plate (with no drop panel or flared column head),
the computation of slab stiffness is fairly simple excepting the portion ofthe slab embedded inside
the column due to monolithic construction. This part of the slab lying between the centre line of
illll\ p,
column and the coiumn face, oflength c is stiffer than the portion of the slab lying between the
~~mr column faces (i.e. contained' in the clear span). The increased stiffness is accounted by dividing the
moment ofintertia of the slab (Is) outside the column face by a factor (I- C/ Lf, where cl and
c2represent sizes of the columq at the column- slab interface in the direction of the span and in the . .
lliJ\:
transverse direction respectively. If Is= L2 f /12 is the moment of inertia of the slab between the .
<;Sect. 9.7
If the flat slab with drop panel is supported by column capital, then the moment of inertia in
.· tM·~olumn region will be equal to Is/ (I- c2/ L2/ but now c2c is the capital dimension in the
. 'traJ(sverse direction. Obviously for column with column head only, the moment of inertia, where
':the slab. enters the column capital, becomes 1/ (1- c2/ L2l Due to the variation in moment of
inertia along the span, the problem is that of computation of stiffness coefficient of a member
having stepped moment of inertia along the length. The stiffness of such sections can be
calculated using column analogy method or can be obtained from relevant tabulations (70/8, 71/12, 84/4,)
(B) Stiffness of Column : The column is taken infinitely stiff over the thickness of the slab
and of drop panel, if provided. The moment of inertia of a flared column head may be assumed to
vary linearly along.the length of the column. Ifthe stiffening effect due to capital is neglected, the
·moment of inertia is constant over its length. The length of the column shall be taken equal to
centre to centre distance between the slab.
(C) Equivalent Column: If the analysis is carried out using the stiffness obtained above, it
has been observ.ed that slab moment does not always match well with the experimental values
(63/8). This is because, the basic problem with the flat slab is that the column may be rigid but that
does not mean that it can provide fixed edge for the slab, since the rotation of the slab panel can be
prevented only at junction with the column and not across the entire panel width. The restraint
provided by the torsional stiffness of the slab to the column is very small with the result that joint
rotates in longitudinal plane shedding the negative moment, with corresponding increase in the span
moment. The effect of reduction in capacity for transmission of moment is taken into
.consideration by reducing the column stiffness depending on the torsional stiffness of the slab
framing into the column from the transverse direction. The reduced stiffness is referred to as the
~tiffness of an equivalent column and is given by the expression :
1 =1- + - 1 ... (9.5.12a)
k ec I.k c kt
.where, k
ec
= stiffnessoftheEquivalentColumn,
· I.k c = sum of actual stiffnesses of the column above and below the floor slab,
k = sum of torsional stiffnesses of the shib/ be11m which frame into the col-
1
wnn from the transverse direction.
The value of k for each element on one slde of the column is given by:
1
9E J
k ·-
I - . c ... (9.5.12b)

~~~ C/
3
L2 (1- L2)
column faces having width L2 and thickness t, then the moment ofinertia of slab from column
centre line to the face of the support will be equal to Ij(l- c/ Lf. where. . c2 = width ofrectangular column, or capital at the junction w;••·.
il 1 r
For a ~at slab with drop panels, the moment of inertia equal to Isd =cld s/1 2 where, cld
~11 •
measured transverse to the direction morrY--
represents the width of the drop in the transverse (L2) direction and tsd is the total thickness J .. ;::' Torsional constant (See Se"1 -:"-

. :i: (l- 0.63_.bJP~- -·

il comprising of the thickness of the slab and the drop. In the stiffer region of the column(i;e, from· . ~.Q11U~
lllln.l ·. ..:iJi which band D ..- .. ·: .
centre -line of colllQln to column face) the moment of inertia becomes Isd I (1 ~ c/L j;~;
2
~i:Jlfipl.
\UII'tl,
I
_,i . ,·· .
 r·

456 Slab Sect. 9.7

Chapter 9 FlatSlab 457
The ratio of flexural stiffness of equivalent column to combined flexural stiffnesses of the considered and measured centre to centre of supports. This stipulation in other words means that the
slab and beams at ajointtaken in the direction of the span for which moments are being determined clear span, Ln may be taken for calculation of support moment and it shall not be less than 0.65 LJ. as
is given by (84/5) : ~ified in direct design method.
At exterior supports provided with bmckets or capitals, the critical section for negative moment
k in the direction perpendicular to the edge shall be taken at a distance from the face of the
a = ec
ec
L (k8 + k~
... ... (9.7.13) • supporting element not greater than one - half the projection of the bracket or capital beyond the .~
face of the supporting element.
The equivalent frame method is more rigorous but may give moments greater than those
where, ks and kb are the flexural stiffness
.
of the slab and beam respectively, and k• is the obtained by direct design method for cases which satisfy limitations specified in Sect 9. 7. 7.1. This
eqQivalent stiffness. However, the I.S. Code does not use the equivalent stiffness even though it is means that for the same problem, the moments worked out by two methods are different. To
founded on sound theoretical background. It simply specifies the ratio of stiffnesses by parameter remove this anomaly, the Code specifies that the larger moments obtained from equivalent frame
ac expre~sed'
. . as : method ltlay be redu<;ed in such proportion that the numerical sum of the positive and negative
a c = rkc lks moments is not less than the value of total design moment M0 =wL2 L2n/8 specified for direct
design method. This indirectly means that the direct design method is reliable and even though the
.where, . rkc = sum of the flexural stiffnesses of the columns meeting at the joint, and moments obtained by using direct design method may be less are acceptable· because they are
. . ks = flexural
' stiffness of the slab, expressed as moment per unit rotation. confmned by past experience.- .
In the direct design method, if ratio of live load to dead load exceeds 0.5, the value of Lkc
9.7.9. Distribution of Bending Moments In Column Strip and Middle Strip
.shall be modified to account for effect of pattern loading.
The longitudinal moments, whether obtained by direct design method or equivalent frame
! ?Jethod, are for the .en~ width. It. is ~nsisting of ~um of two halfpanel width.( LM + L2.B) I 2
9.7.8.4. Loading . · m the transverse direction for an mtenor column hoes. These moments are distributed m the .,
When the loading is known,. the structure shall be analysed for the concerned load. When the transVerse direction along the width ofthe panel to the column strips and middle strips as specified
live load is variable but does not exceed three- quarters of dead load, or the nature ofthe live load below: See Fig. 9.7.11.
is such that all panels will be loaded simultaneously, the maximum moments may be assumed to
occur at all sections for the condition of full live load and dead load acting on all spans. The use of
uniform live lmid is based on the relief provided by redistribution of moments in continuous
strllctures. When the structure has to carry live loads which may or may not come on the panel, the
dJ~,
I
I
' I

OJ
I
I
y

m-I
.1
~:-

.maximum values of negative and positive·moments are not likely to occur simultaneously and I I I
I MIDDLE I STRIP I
·therefore advantage of redistribution of m()ments can be taken. When the live load exceeds I I I I L2
three- quarters of dead load and when all the spans are not loaded simultaneously, it is sufficient I +0.4C3 ..0.25~ I .0.26C4 +0.4C5 .0.25C41
to design the members for three· quarters offuJl live load ()n alternate SpanS for maximum pOsitive
moment, and on the adjacent spans for maxiJnum negative,ntoment. The use of only thre(: -:quar~
I
I I .: I .
l :
I
<
/-<C

I COLUMN 1 .STRIP I
teJ'S ofthe design live load instead of full live load is again-based on the above fact that maximum·
positive and negative moments do riot occur simultaneouslY and redistribution ofmoment m11,y be co~~ .. ..o.sca ~.7~m .o.1sc4 ...o.s~s .o.1sc4CJ. >'·'-
1,. I i I
assumed before failure. Consequently, no further redistribution ofmoment is allowed in the I L, . I L.,, I
,q\
.. alent frame method. . ;
~···· . l.'· ,. I
I" . . If· I I
9.7.8.5 · Desip · moments . . ( 0.65 J u · ,._ · t; ·· J.:l_1Mr r;. 0.28 ] M
The supportmomentS are determined by Moment DistriJMion method as usual.
: C
t '".U+11acJ mo -:z=t>·15-1+ 1/GcJ o ca= 1!1·63- ~ o
In eq~valent frame method, the negative moments are ~-eel out at the t!entres ofthe·
suppOrts but the sectio~ at the support may be d~igned for reduced ~~;~omcnt • 'the face of the. . C4=0.65M0 C5=·0.35M0 Mo=~
8
(

·actual or equivalent rectangular support, but in no case at a distance,grea(erthan 0.11SL1 from the.:
111•- Q_'U1 na.i-1........-- ...:.
·.centre of the col~ where L1 is the length of the span in·tbe "ireCtion oftnoinenf N.inir •--!.1...!....--
-r-

Sect. 9. 7 · Flat Slab 459

458 Slab ·
9.7.9.1. Column Strip (Negative moments) : '
(a) Negative moment at Interior Support ;
,"
. .
Columnstrip.mornent=0.75 ~ , Middle strip moment .=,0,2SM~ · · ,... :.. (9.7.14)
Chapttf 9

I (c) Detailing of Reinforcement: The t:einforcementfor maximum moments are provided

along the span of slab and curtail® wli~h~yer not required adhering to the curtailment rules
specified earlier. There are mainly twp.types ofdetailin,g used in practice.
The detailing with bent bars is shown in Eig 9. 7J 2a. As per new practice of reinforcement
(b) Negative moment at Exterior Support: . .

in the panel at that support.

.. · ·
At an exterior support, the column strip shall be designed to resist ~.total
..
.
·.·
neptive . moment .
,
detailing, ,separate reinforcement is provided at bottom in the positive moment region and at top
over negative moment region. The -detailing with minimum lengths specifie-d by the code
( See Fig 16 of Code ) is shown diagrammatically in Fig. 9. 7.12b. ..
Where the exterior support consists ofa column or a wall extending for a distance equal to or
greater than three " quarters of the value of L2 , the length of span transverse to the direction
t-
WITHO.l1T DROP PANEL
14-GJI..~ • .
0.3Ln -1
r- 0.3Ln -II\ rl
t- 0.331,;
WITH DROP PANEL
• • ::n
. 0 33ln02j--1~
moments are being determined, the exterior negative moment shall be cogsidered to be unifonnly I"* • II "' • .nc:-....!Hl.2L..-+Iv~'$¥--50% ~~
distributed across the length L2•

9.7.9.2. Column Strip (Positive moments) : ( a ) Section through Column Strip

Positive moment : Column strip= 0.6 Me ·, Middle strip = 0.4 Me ...... (9.·7.15)
lo-o.22Ln--\ r-o.22Ln..1 ._D.22
I --to.14Lnl---!o.14LJ+- I
j--o22Ln--l
r·
:i.
9.7.9.3. Middle Strip (Positive and Negative Moments) ;
The distribution.ofthe moment in the transverse ~irection to middle strip shalf be as under :
(a) The balance des1gn-moment-(i.-e. total design moment minus that resisted by column
strip) i.e. 25% of total negative moment and.40% of the total positive panel moment sliall be l."v Ln ---~
Ln. L ..
assigned to the adjacent middle strips. L
(b) Each middle strip shall be proportioned to resist the sum of moments assigned to its two QBars In the 'same Layer
· balfmiddle strips (L2AI 2 or LtBI 2 ). (b) Section Through Mtddki Strip
··~;;·_ \ '\ (c) The middle strip adjacent and parallel to an edge supported by a wall shall be
IIi Jli proportioned to resist twice the moment assigned to half the middle strip corresponding to the first
Fig. 9.7.1la Detailing with Bent bl!!'S

~nJ~ 'i··'
row of interior columns.
With Drop
With Drop
j+-0.33'-r, --!
\~1[\' 9.7.10. Reinforcentent Requirements jo-02~
(a) Area of reinforcement : Ifthe slab is provided with dtop, the area of support
I~!II . reinforcement Can be worked out taking tl>tal thickness consisting of slab and drop thickness into
consideration. It is ~ssible that in some cases thicknesses of the dr9p is governed by punching
l !l shear consideration or more thick drops may be provided to reduce support reinforcement.

1:~1
However, Code does not allow to take undue advantage arising from providing very thick drops End Support
End Support
only for reduction of support steel. Hence for computation of supj)ort stee~ Code specific~ that the ·

~[~
· thickness of the drop panel shall be lesser of the following : . . J-"0.22ltl
(i) Actual thickness of the drop.

~ij; (h) · Thickness of slab

.
plus I/4th of the- distance
.
between edge of drop and edge. of capital.

ml\
(b) Spac"'g ofreinforcement: The horizontal distance between parallel main reinforcing
· bar is limited to 2 times the slab thickness, except for Cellular or ribbed slab.
ti .·
'I"'..
'-n ~ .!.F
L.l!lli:!J~ · ..
·~:n.·
-L ~ w
( b ) Section throUgh middle atrtp
~1liII ' .. This provisions for flat slab is more stringent thait that ofordinary solid slab, to provide for .· Fig. 9.7.1liJ DetaUIDg with straight ban
_,;I craek control and for ensuring slab action and provide againsfthe effect of concentrated loads.·
..._...,._,ql
 !II!.
~ l!Ii!. Chapter 9 Sect, '9.7
. When adjacent spans are unequal, the exte;::;i;;;: of :1egative reinforcement beyond each face Flat Slab 461
of the common column shall be based on the longer span. This requirement is applicable when the
slab is subjected to vertical loads. But when the frame is reC(uired t~ .r~~ist lateral loads, the
~ . I
.111·1.; Table 9.7.1 Minimum Permissible Values ota .
iI . c.mm
i·i equivalent frame method shall be used and detailing of reinforcement shall confonn to that of ~olid
slab. Imposed load I Dead load Ratio L2 I L1
'"·.li.l"
(d) Anchoring of Reinforcement: All shb reinforcement perpendicular to :~ discontinuous
0 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.25 2.0
".li·!I' edge shall have an anchorage (straight, bent or otherwise anchored) past the ittt~mal fa·~e of the 0.5 0.0 0.0 -o:o- -o;o
spandrel beam, wall or column, of the fo11owing amount. 0.0
.I,[!
n (i) For positive reinforcement not less than 150 mm cx~ept that with fabric reinforcement 1.0 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 1.2
ij!i having a fully welded transverse wire directly over the suppor~ it shali be pennissih!f; to reduce this 2.0 1.3
11 1
length to one half of the width of the support or 50 mm whichever is greater; and 1.5 1.6 1.9 4.9
i!l
il
fil r J (ii) For negative reinforcement- such that the design stress is developed at tile internal face, 3.0 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.8 13.0.
Ji't' ! it will be anchored for a distance equal to development length.
Where the slab is not supported by a spandrel beam or wall, or where th.- ~lab cantilevers
'j!

beyond the support, the anchorage shall be obtained within the slab. The above provision, based on the analytical and experimental studies o{Jirsa (69 I 8), for
'lll: ' limiting the possible increase in moments due to pattern loadings at the_ service conditions.
•::•.! 9.7.11. Moments in Columns See Fig. 9.7.13. ·
il'' i'
1,!
1Ill· f Columns of flat slabs shall be designed for the following mom€mts arising out of vertical loads
on slab.
1 .1 2. 3 4 5
I,. I ·I I
111
At an interior support, the supporting members above and below the slab shall be designed to
I resist the moment M given by the fo11owing equation, in direct proportion to their stiffuesses unless 2
a general analysis is made : 2 .e~
Ill 2
(wd+ 0.5w,) l,L -w'dL',L' 2 ·
Ill''::!r.
1
M = 0.08 -"' " n " n
3
i :·!
(I + 1/a) ... (9.7.16) 4
l
ji I
where, w11 wL = c
Intensity of dead load live respectively per unit art!a,
L2 = length of span transverse to the direction ofivi,
5
·( a ) Negative moment ( b ) Po~itive moment ( c ) Positive moment
Ln = length ofthe clear span in the direction ofM, measured face to face ofsupports, at A in panels 1,3,5 · •.In panels 2,4
Lkc .
111
1
a c = - - where kc and ks are the flexural stJffuesses of column and slab
Fig. 9.7.13 Pattern Loading on Slabs
I 1:k8 respectively, and w 'd L '2 ·and L 'n refer to the shorter span.
Effects of pattern loading : 9.7.12 Bending Moments In Panels With Marginal Be:uns or WaDs
In the direct design method when the ratio of live load to dead load exceeds 0.5 : Where the slab is supported by a marginal beam with a dfpth greater than 1.5 tiines tl-.e
thickness of slab or by a wall then : ·
(a) the sum of the flexural stiffuesses of the columns above and below the slab, (1:kj shall
(a) the total load to be carried by the beam or wall shall comprise those loads directly on the
be such that ac is not,less than the appropriate minimum value ac.mm. specified in Table 9. 7; 1or wall or beam plus a unifonnly distributed load equal to one quarter oftho total load on the slab, and
(b) if the sum of the stiffnesses of the columns, 1:kc does not satisfy condition in ( b ) the bending moments on the half- column strip adjac.~nt to the beam cr wall shall be
(a) i.e. r.k·c I r.ks <ac.mlu,_,the positive design moments for the panel shall be multiplied one - quarter of the bending moments for the first interior column s~ip. ·
,.f by the coefficient Ps gi~~n by the fc!k,-n:ing equation :
·9.7.13. Transf~r of Bending Moments Between Slab and Columns
. 2-w/wL) In flat slab floors carrying gravity loading, slabs a~~ often required to transfer both shear and
~::::}+· ( 4 + wdhvL,
·· (1-a/a .\ unbalanced tnoment This problem is normally met wifu in case of exterior columns or in some
s c c.min' ...... (9.7.17) interior columns for slabs with unequal spans or slabs carrying unsymmetricalloa~ing, framing into
•where, ac =r.kc l r.k:s =sum of 11exural stiflhesses ofcolumns I sum of flexural stiffue_s~Jes of slabs
the colunin on opposite faces. The design aspect becomes in ore important when the lateral loads
due to wind or earthq~ake cause~ ~·hstantial,unba]anced m~mentto be 1:nmsferred at slab- column

l
 462 Slab Chapter 9
Sect. 9.7 Fiat Slab 463
interface. However, if slabs are provided with edge beams, there Will be no difficulty in effecting
the transfer of these forces.
In the case of square columns a1 = a2 which gives a= 0.6. Thus, 60% of unbalanced
The mechanism of moment transfer is still _under active research. The reader is referred to moment will be taken by flexure in slab.
Park and Gamble {80 I 2) for the summary of the research in progress. As unbalanced slab
moments at a slab - column junction is transferred to colUmns ( lower and upper ifany) partially Eq. 9. 7.18 accounts for the change in transfer of moment by flexure due to inequality of the
by flexure in slabs and partially by torsional shear across the slab- o:>lutpn mter~iu:es. ( 00/S),Each column side; greater the values of a2, greater moment will be transferred by flexure and hence
of the two is discussed in detail below.
value of a. will be greater.
(A) Transfer of Moment by Flexure : -A slab width between lines that are one and one half slab or drop panel thickness ; 1.5 D, on
each side of the column or capital may be considered to be effective, D being the size of the
Consider an internal column (Fig. 9. 7.14) at which unbalanced moment .M~ = ( M, .::.. Mu2)
column. Concentration of reinforcement over column head by closer spacing or additional
each
is to be transferred to the column. The critical section is taken at a distance d/2 from 1 colwnn
face. reinforcement may be used to resist the moment on this section. Thus, when unbalanced gravity
i load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral loads cause transfer of bending moment M between slab
~ u
yi/
11 and column, the flexural'
stresses shall be investigated for the moment a. Mu, where a. is given by
;i!
- {: Eq. 9. 7.18.
If,"I
i;l'iJ (B) Transfer of Moment by Torsional Shear :
The balance moment (1 -a.) Mu =~is transferred to the column from the transverse
direction through the slab framing into column. This moment is, thus, transferred by torsion and
f -produces shearing stresses t' of constant intensity over the parallel faces of width a2 = (c2 + d)
T of critical section and of linearly varying intensity on the transverse faces of width aI = (cI + d)
where, d is the effective depth at critical section as shown in Fig. 9. 7.15a for the case of an
' I-
1:
internal column.
Fig. 9:7.14 TI'IUlsfer- of ~oment between Slab_ and an la!erior Column In addition to this, vertical shear acts producing shear stress t" of constant intensity acts

As the portion 9ftbe colimui strip abuts directly on the colllDUl over its critical ~-~Pa«t
on the critical section along the periphery ( See Fig. 9. 7.15 b ) . The resultant shear stress
of the unbalanced momenta M11 is transferred tO the co'11D111, ~d~ ~diliS,iwhe.re distribution on account of combined action of torsion and shear is shown in Fig. 9. 7.15c.

l
a-=
,.-r--1""7"""~..!..
I t -·" , t -t" '

{?;a--] ....... '(9.7.l8)

tl
G

Vl/t\sL_L~T_J
CD- t co· t CD G AB- AB+ tAB

f
}-
+-
2 -
'
3 '
- -a2 ''
· if ~B_L
qJlt + =
and -a1 = overall dimension ofthe critical section for shear in the direction in which moment acts
= cI +d 1E!41
'f'~
T
.
8
1 ----1
A

·0 a2 =overall dimension ofthe critical sectio11 for sheaf transverse to the direction in which ( a ) Shear Stress due to ( 1 - a)Mu (b) Shear Stress due to Vu (c) Resultant Shear Stress
moment acts = c + d
2
~= moment transferred to the column by direCt bending.
Fig. 9.7.15 Shear Stresses .at Junction of Slab and Interior Column
 ~
rt
464Slab Chapter 9
''\<

i' Chapter 9 465 Slab

Mathematically, the stresses at the faces AB and CD at the critical section can be expressed 1
:i as:
tAB
't
max
= t _ Vu
AB ---+
(i - a) M G
. u AB
... (9.7.19a)
sr
!Mux Vuxg)
Ac Jc

and t .
mm
= 'tCD _ Vu
--- -
(1 - a) M G .
u CD
... (9.7.19b) D
Ac Jc : (Mug•!Mu-Vuxg)

where, (1 - a) lfu = moment transferred by eccentricity of the shear about the centroid of (b) Edge Column .x l_
:'I: the critical section. ~a -l
'I
Vu = shear at the centroid of critical section r- ~~~x__ 18_J~~ ts

B~ v .,,.. )
T ~~ -_(__I"Nlz
tj _ur c';/-{-~Y
----+-+---'- ( Mux - u """.
Jl[ GAI!GCD = distances of the faces AB and CD respectively from the centroidal 1.- -
lll I

1~[l
il:,, axisGG, 32

I 0 ..: tA
! Ji Ac = area of concrete at the peripheral critical secti()n, T
• j;
Jc = property of section analogous to polar moment of inertia. 0 C I~ r-
Ct1-____......j!!_A ·(M -Vu9zl
I· I Ul

'
(lj For the case of an Internal Column :
Gco~A;l
11-.t 9xl-'
(c) Corner Column
21 I
,, ... Ac = perimeter at the critical section x effective depth resist~g shear,
i i:l
l ~j
(a
= {2 1) + 2 (ai)} d ~::{9.7.19c) Fig. 9.7.16

:I = 2d (a1 + a2) Since M is the unbalanced moment acting about the centroidal axis of the column along with
I The value of. polar moment of inertiaJc of the shear surfaces about the centroidal axis can be
evaluated ,as under :
11
the shear V , the unbalanced bending moment acting about the centroida! axis of the critical section
i u
is(Af ~Y"~). Hencethemomentto be transferred by eccentricity of shear is·(l-a){M11- V11 xg).
,,
r For the faces AD and BC, each of siZe al: 1
The shear stresses in the slab face AB and at point C and D of the critical section are given by :
~z = Ixx + IYY where, xx is the horizontal, and»' is the vertical axi~.

j V (1-a) (M-Vxg)G

t 3 3 't = 't =-" + u • AB ...... (9.7.20a)

a d a 1 ad J
= 21- + - = - -1 ( a 2 +d')
2 max ABA
c c
I. ' 12 12 6. 1 . '-- ,.,_
'fl)' vu (Mu- Vuxg) GCD
:..... (9.7.20b) •"'-'
For the faces~ and CD, each of size ajl: = 'teD = - - ,,f\,..

tj 'tmin
,,L Ac Jc
il, Izi =2ajl. (a/2)2
Hence, Jc = Iu = al(a 21 +d 2)!6+a 2 a d!2
1 2
where,''• Ac '= ap + 2a d = (1. a1 + a} d =2(C1 + d/2) +C2 +d =2C1 + d + C2 +h;
1
. and A~ "'= 2d (a1 +·i9 as obtained earlier. a = C + d/2 and a~ = (C2 + d) = 2 C1 + C2 + 2d .
~' Here 1 1
11 (ii) 'For the case of an Edge Column : . . _;---.

~ 01 -~
2
I

. Fig 9.(; 18 (b) and (c) show the critical sections, and th~ distribution of shear stresses which · 2di;l
J =~+-+a2 dG +2ad - ..--G
2a/ 2 . ... ,.. (9.7.20c)
is. unsymmetrical with respect J~_ the centroidai ax!~- parallel to the sides c 9f the c 12 _ 12 . · ..4B l 2 ..411 .
IIIII collimnlcolumn capital. The centroidalaxis ofthe critical,,section will be at a distance e 2from the
.·_ -~ ... ~- -'I - ·. ~.
i::':t'
466 Slab
Chapter 9 Sect. 9.7 Flat Slab 467
g = distance between axis of the column and the centroidal axis of the critical section
9.7.14. Open,lngs in Flat Slab
ci d C1+d According tp I.S. Code, openings of any size may be provided in the flat slab if it is shown by
analysis that the,requirements of strength and serviceability are met. However, for openings of
= - + - - GAB = - - GAB = GCD -CI /2
2 2 2 following types, !fiO special analysis is required.
(a) Openi~gs of any size Jpay be placed within the middle half of the span in each direction,
lW GAB = fl/IAc and GCD = a - GAB
provided thb total amount ofreinforcement required for the panel without the opening is maintained.
1 ... (9.7.20d) (b) In the area common to two column strips, not more than one- eighth of the width of strip
l!.
II'
!! (iiij For the Case of Corner Column :(Fig. 9. 7.1 6c) in either span shall be interrupted by the openings.The equivalent of reinforcement interrupted
shall be added on all sides of the openings.
The solution becomes more complicated, because now biaxial moments acting about the
t centroidaJ axis of the column are required to be transferred. Now, the centroid of the critical (c) In the area common to one column strip and one middle strip, not more than one- fourth
-;,I section will have double eccentricity with respect to column centroid. The moment transfer of the reinforcement in either strip shall be interrupted by the openings. The equivalent of
reinforcement interrupted shall be added on to all sides of the openings.
coefficients (1 - a) will have different values viz. yxand yz about x and z axes respectively
j/ Where' yX = (I - aX ) and yZ = ( 1- aZ ) (d) The shear requirement shall also be satisfied.
. il,
, ,
. .~ 11
9.7.15. Illustrative Examples

I :~ II
lr The shear stresses at the comers B, A, D ofcritical section aie given by :

vu YJMuz- Vu gz) Yx (Mux - Vu g) GAB

In genera.! there can be different types of problems with following parameters as variables.
' 'tA (I) Type offloor :
'r:i Ac
X GAC + ------,.. ...... {9.7.21a)
l:ht Jcz Jex (a) Plate Plate -without drop and without column capital.
(b) Flat Slab -without drop but with column capital.
·~'l""IJ. .
II· ..
,. •j··
(c) Flltt Slab -with drop but without column capital.
Vu Yz (Muz- Vu. gz) . Yz (Mux- Vu.g) GAB (d) flat Slab -with drop and with column capital.
l;'~:,,r!I:.!l Ii.
I
'tB =-+
A
c
J
cz
X G
BD
+-------
J
ex
...... (9.7.21b) (2) Shape: (a) Squaare (b) Rectangular
(3) Panel:· (a) Interior (b) Exterior.
l~lii:· (4) Design method: (a)DirectDesignMethod(b)EquivalentFrameMethod
Vu Yz (Muz - Vu.gz) (5) Assu.mptions : (a) Ignoring the effect of drop and column'Capital on the stiffness and,
~~1: t
D
=-- +
A J X GBD-
y (Mux- Vu.g) GCD
...... (9.7.21c)
hence, on the analysis. (b) Consid~ring this effect.
(6) Presence of edge beams: (a) without edge beams (b) with edge beams.
l~m,
c cz Jex
(7) Difference in DL and LL:. (a) LL small compared to DL, not requiring consideration
where, ,
· · of effect of pattern loading. (b) LL quite appreciable compared to DL ( LL > 0.5 DL)
t~rr A, = (a1 + a} d , a1 = C1 + d/2 , a2 = C2 + d/2 ...... (9.7.21d) for direct .design method and LL > 0. 75 DL for equivalent frame method) necessitating
consideration of effect of pattern loading.
PIln'I·.'i' Jcx = da/112 + a1 tf/12 + a2 d G 2AB + a d (a/2- GAB/ (8) Presence of Openings: (a) Slab without ope'nings.(b) Slab with openings .
1 ... ... (9.7.2Ie)
fiil: . Jcz = du- /12 + ap-'112 + a1 d G~BD + a d (a/2- G
,_l . J3 ' •
D)
2
2 8
However a few typical examples are only considered for illustration due to lack of space.
These are as follows :
11{1\li GAB= a/ di2A,, G8D = if2 di2Ac, GCD = a
1
- GAB" GAC =a -G D
I 2 8
C1 +d Ex. 9:7.1 Design the flat slab for middle storey floor of size 7.2m x 6.4m shown in
11m1i C2 +d
g =~-GAB , g z = - - G B D Fig. 9. 7.17 uiing direct design m~thod It is subjected to liVe loadof 4/cN/~ and floor finish

~mil
X 2
2 of 1/cN/nf .The grade ofsteel wed is Fe 415. The exposure condition is mild The diameter of
the supporting column is 450-mm. Floor to floor height of columns 3.35m.
\_<il
 r
f
~·
Sect. 9.7.
Flat Slab 468 469 Slab Chapter 9
Given : L1 = 7200 mm, L2 = 6400 mm, LL = 4/cN I m2, FF = 1 kNim2
Check for requirement of direct design method :
.From Table (2.2.3) : for mild exposure, fck = 20 N I mm2 and Clear cover= 20 mm ( 1 ) No. of spans is more than 3 (2) Long span I short span =7.2 I 6.4 < 2 . ~' '

f.y =415 N lmm2, Column diameter=450 mm, Floor to Floorheightofcolumn

. = 3.35 m ( 3) Columns are not staggered · ( 4) Successive spans in each directions are equal
( 5) Design Live lo~d = 6kN!m2 < 3 x D.L. ( = 3 x 10.5)
r-7200~"1200 -+-7200 --1
@ f@Vdl . <oN \IV'r
.·. A¥ the requirements ate satisfied and, therefore, empirieal direct design method can be used.
' i ;
Drop : Drop is provided to increase the slab depth for resisting punching shear and avoiding shear
1 reinforcement. . ·. · · .
•il The minitndtn dimensions of drop in each directio,n is given by :
Length ofdrop along long span , { L1 I 317.2 I 3 = 2.4 m
II~,( Length of drop along short span -{: L2 I 3 = 6.4 I 3 = 2.13 m
Size o~ the drop is conveniently selected such that it lies along the column strips.
lri Width of column strip= minimum of ( 7.212 or 6.412) = 3.2m
f"' J\
li!
. /!! :. Proviae dr~p of ~~ze 3.2 m x_ 3.2 mas shewn in fig. 9. 7.17 •
Thic~~s ~- dtop;j,/Thickn~ss of slab I 4 i.. e. 240 I. 4 = 60 ~.m
,.' •'"\""

I I \' ,, · :. Totalthicknes~atdrop~240+60 . =300rnm

I ,
. '

\\ \
-
Cohlmn Head :
I 'I .
'
' 1
·

, 'Diameir~fcolumncapitalattopofintemalcolumn =-;-to Sof average span

1
Fig. 9.7.17
;i \.
l ·· · Required: Design of flat slab. \- I 1 1 7.2+6.4
=~to -:-::..of-·--=1.7mto136m
!
I Solidion : . . · \
4 5 .2

. ' ' The advantage ofth~ symmebj is taken a,nd only one- fourth portion requires to be designed. P~ovide col~mn capital of f5?0 mm diametefwith inclination of 45° . .
· Trial depth1: Since .the depth of the slab,_ is governed by servi<;eability criteria, the thickness will . SIZe of eqUivalent square capital= 0.89 D = ~.89 x 1500 = L33511i = 1335 mm
be determmed by deflection consideration baSed on IJd ratio. ·
I DESIGN MOMENTS IN LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION :
Basic IJd ratio for continuous slab ·=26, Assume required percentage of steel = 0.4 %
M<xtifi~tionfactor_correspc)ndingto.f.=
. · . I
240Nimhf,pI =?0;4%-ftom Fig. 8.6.1 a J =l.33 Total design moment in longitudinal direction =Mol =wL
11 2
L2n 18 ... (Eq. 9. 7.3)
Required d =12001(26-x 1.33) · .="208mm .
where , Lnl = clear span in longitudinal dir~btion between face of column capitals
. Provide total depth · D = 240 mm, Assuming maximum diameter ofbar = 12 mm ,.....-,
:. Effective depth provided "'i d = 240-20-i212=214mm = L1 - 0.89 D = 7200- 1335, = 5865 mm > 4690mm ( = 0.65 x 7200)
:. effective\deptliintransverse4irection
.. :,; ' = 214-12=202mm M01 = 16.5 x 6.4 x 5.8652i8
. ' = 454 kN.m
1
UJods ..,· . ' ·. The total design moment is distributed ini$lly into total negative and positive moments in the panel.
r . .
~-·loacf;
.·. .~- ..., . : gn . :
< :'···
·. wlid =1.5 (25 x 0.24 + 1) · =
1
:10.5 leN lin Distf!bution of Total Design Momen~ in Longitudinal. Direetion as Panel Moments
The division of positive and negatives m9ment depends oil' the ratio of a c = Uc I k8
· . w~ =l.S x_4 = 6/cN!m ·
I \Vhere .1fi"c'and k, are Stifihesses of columns lind slab regpeetively: While calculating kc and k8 the
w.: = w...~+~.... = l6.5kN!m
·effect of drop on stiffuess of stab and effect of column capital on stiffuess of column is ignored.
 470 Slab Sect. 9.7 Flat Slab 471
;
'
' Chapter 9

a c =Lkc I ks=Sum of stiffnesses of columns meeting at the joint I stiffness at slab (Eq. 9. 7.9) (B) Interior Panel (Strip Moments)

Equivalent side of circular column= 0.886 x 450 = 400 mm Tota1-ve moment = 295.1 kN.m
At the floor level we have columns above and below the. floor level having the same size of Total +ve moment = 158.9 kN.m
equivalent square of side 400 mm and height of 3.3 5 m (a) Total-ve panel moments = 295.1 kN.m is distributed in the transverse direction
:. Lkc = 2 X (4EIc ILc ) =[2 x4E x.(400 x 400 3112)] 13350 =5.09Ex 1066 N.mm - ve moment in the Column strip = 0.75 x 295.1 = 221.3 kN.m ... ( Eq. 9. 7.14)
~J}·!
= 221.3 I 3.2 = 69.16 kN.mlm
ks = 4EIs1 1Ls1 = [4xEx6400x240 3112]17200 = 4.1Ex 10 N.mm -ve moment in the middle strip =0.25 x 295.1 = 73.8 kN.m
:. a c = Lkc I ks = 5.0914.1 = 1.24, factor~ = (l+ 1/ac ) = 1+ 111.24 = 1.8. =73.8 I 3.2 = 23.1 kN.mlm
(b) Total Positive panel moment = 158.9 kN.m is distributed in the transverse direction
(A) Exterior Panel (Panel Moments) + ve moment in the column strip = 0.6 x 158.9 = 95.3 kN.m
\I~,' I) =95.313.2 =29.8kN.mlm ... (Eq.9.7.15)
Tota!Negativemomentatexteriorsupport = 0.65 x M 1~
~·.,II
:. l,'Il 01 + ve moment in the middle strip = 0.4 x 158.9 = 63.6 kN.m
= 63.613.2. = 19.87 kN.m I m ... ( Eq.9. 7.15)
= 0.65 x 45411.8 =164kN.m ... (Eq!J.7.6)
r;·l'/)j
I !•1
Total Negative moment at Interior support.= (0. 75 - 0.11 ~) x M
' 1:'II 01 II DESIGN MOMENTS IN TRANSVERSE DIRECTION
= (0.75- 0.1/1.8) x 454 = 315.3 kN.m .... (Eq. 9. 7. 7)
t.f
K)J
Total Positive moment at miq~pan . = (0.6~ - o::.2:8 I ~) X Mol
=(0.63 -0.2811.8) x 454=215.4kN.m ... (Eq.9. 7.8)
Total moment in transverse direction = M02 =
2
wu L 1 L n2 I 8
i.
; . . 4 where, Ln2= clear span in transverse direction between face to face of column capitals
!._
(B) Interior Panel (Panel Moments) Ln2= L2 - 0.89 D ; 6400- 1335 = 5065 mm
nl·
j!l Tot;il Negative moment =0.65 M01 . .'. M02 = 16.5 x 7.2 X 5.065 I 8 = 381 kN.m
=0.65 x 454 = 295.1 kN.m
w Total Positive moment = 0.35 M01
... (Eq.9. 7.4)
Total design moment is distributed initially into totai negative and positive moments in ~he panel
= 0.35 x 454 = 158.9 kN.m
I~ Distribution of Longitudinal Panel Moments into Strip Moments · (See Fig. 9.7.11)
... {Eq.9. 7.5)
Distribution of Total Design Moments in Transverse Direction as Panel Moments
(A) Exterior Panel (Strip moments) ~- ·
fl-·
t Total-vemomentatexteriorsupport = 164 kN.m
~

The division of Positive and Negative Moments in the Panel Depen<!s on the Ration of a c
~~
Total-ve moment at interior support = 315.3 kN.m LkC = 5.1 Ex 106 as obtained earlier, since the column is circular having IXX =I)Y
~' Total +vemomentatmid- spant = 215.4 kN:m
ks = 4EIs2 1Ls2 = (4xEx7200x240 3!12)16400= 5.184Ex 106

f (a) Negative Panel Moment

Negative moment at the exterior support is to be taken fully by column strip .. ac = Lkc lks 6
= 5.1Ex 10 1(5.184Ex
.. ~ = ( 1 + 11 ac) = I + II 0.98 = 2.02
. 106 ) = 0.98,

1- = 164 kN.m = 16413.2 = 51.25 kN.m/m

Negative panel moment of 315.3 kN at interior support is ·distributed in the transverse
direction as :
r; - ve moment in the column strip = 0. 75 x 315.3 = 2365 kN.m
=236.513.2 =73.9/cN.m/m ... (Eq.9.7.14a)
i'
'
(A) Exterior Panel (Panel moments) :
Total negative moment at exterior support = 0.65 M02 I~ = 0.65 X 381 I 2.02
= - 122.6 kN.m ... (Eq. 9. 7.6)
I
' '
- ve moment in the middle strip = 0.25 x 315.3 = 78.8 kN.m · · ~- · ""'·'' · Total negative moment at interior support = (0.75- 0.11~) M02
r (b) Total Positive Panel Moment
+ ve moment in the column strip
=- 78.8 s/3.2 =- 24.6 kN.m I m
=215.4 kN.m is distributed in the transverse'direction.
= 0.6 x 215.4 = 129.2 kN.m
= (0.75 ~ 0.1/2.02) X 381
= - 266.9 kN.m ... (Eq. 9. 7. 7)
~ +ve moment in the middle strip
= 129.2 I 3.2 · = 40.4 kN.m I m
= 0.4 x 215.4 = 86.2 kN.m
... (Eq.9. 7.15) Positive moment at mid-span= (0.63 - 0.28/~) M02 = (0.63 - 0.28/2.02) ~ 381
~- =187.2kN.m ... (Eq.9.7.8)
 ~i

ii,
f
f!j : . 472 Slab <1h

Chapter 9 Sect. 9.7 Flat Slab 473

{B), Interior Panel (Panel'inoments):
i; Total Negative moment =0.65 ~2 = 0.65 x 381 = 247.65 kN.m i, The distributed moments are shown in Fig. 9. 7.18a
Total+vemoment = 0.3SM = 0.35 x 381 = 133.35 kN.m
02

Distribution of· Transverse Panel Moments into Strip ;Moments

(A) Exterior Panel(Strip Moments) 1 -ta~

_ED -51.2~ __
1200

+40.4,-·73.95]-69.1~
noo
_ _ +29.8 r-
-~-1

--69.16 Ea-69.1.6 _
Total-ve moment at exterior support
Total-ve moment afinterior support = 122.6kN.m ~ I 0 ~
I 8
~
II
\\ !l
"! o "! "!
·'I

Total + ve moment at mid - span = 266.9 kN.m ; .? ~ 0 ~

= 187.2 kN.m ,-~---T--~-~---~---r-r-
(a) Negative moment' 1 I ~, l I ~ ·~ I
:ri I .; :!i I .;+ ~ I
Negative moment, at the exterior support is taken fully by column strip 'g ~ + + +
;z --1- -o.oo-1- ·+26.94· T- -24.6 i -23.1 1- -+19.871-- -23.1 ·1·23.1 ·I--
= 122.6 kN.m = 122.6 I 3.2 =- 38.31 kN.m I m '\!
Negative moment of266.9 kN.m at interior support is distributed in column strip and middle I I I I I .I I I
strip. ' ' .."'"? I . . .. ..'I'~ I ,. .. ..'I'CC! I
-ve moment in colum~ strip I "' ";" . "' ";"

!" -·73.9f!J-69.1~--
I

: = 0.75 X ( 266.9) = 200.2/cNim e:J·51.25- -+40.4 +29.8!" --69.16ffi-69.1~-

= 200.213.2 = 62.6 kN.m I m ~ .I ~ ·~ I ~ ~ I.
-ve moment in middle strip = 0.25 X ( 266.9) = 66.7kN.m
=66.714 = 16.7 kN.mlm
--
lil
~I
an .
_j ";'
---~----~------~---
~
cti
;
~I
an
I ' ";'

~
(f)
~
~I
an
' I

!iI<!, (b)Total Positive Panel moment= 187;2 kN.m & <.:! I ..:I <.:!
1 I +I <.:!
I I
t-
.... I '
,,
+vemoril.entincolumnstrip = 0.6 x 187.2 "' I I . I I·
ii '= 112.313.2
= If2.3 kN.m l-o.oo-1- ·+26.94· ·24.6 - -23.1 i~ -+19.67T- -23.1 • ~ -23.1 ~
1
I!'•
l1
+ ve moment in middle strip = 0,4 X 187.2
= 14.914
= 35.1 kN.m I m
= 74.9 kN.m
= 18.7 kN.mlm
j ....,~I
. I
' .,~
~
• ffi
+- --73.9
~I
...
u:»
.,....~ .
~I
...
'9
en. -.
~
$.
I •
- -sus·- - +40.4 - -~:29.8 L --s9.16w -69.16-
I
-69.16 -

!"
I
(B) Interior Panel (Strip Moment)

(a) Negative Moment

~
1
I
~-~---r-~l-l---r---c-~
~
;
~
~
I
I
~
t
~
~
I
. 1
II
;
-ve moment in column strip
= 0.75 x (247.65) =- 185.74 kN.m N, I I L

= 185.74 I 3.2 =58.04 kN.m I m

.cooo -r
-ve m~ent in middle strip = 0.25 x (247.65) =61.91 kN.m
= 61.91/4 = 15.48 kN.m I m
1-1800'+
Column Strip Middle S.
3200 -~ .cooo
Column Slrlp · Mkllk s•-!- C::--1 Sfrlp

(b) Positive Moment

Total Positive moment = 133.35 kN.m Fig. 9.7.181 Diltrlbdoa ofUIIIiute M•ats
+ ve moment in column strip = 0.6 X 133.35 = 80 kN.m ~ip Moilleats .·. .,
= 80/3.2 =25 kN.mlm
j' +ve moment in middle strip = 0,4 X 133.35 · · = 53.34 kN.m .•.. ·~Will be seen'that the negative·mOmeatS at the commOn edges of..,. are not equal.
!:
/:,, = 53.34/4 'J'he~ of negative momentS at the COIIlllion edges' of the slib are considered for .
= 13.33 kN.m I m

'~:a~~:::Q:76•l*EI~~-~2i4~ . M~
I,

l/1
 )/ 474S!ab
j Chapter 9 Sect. 9. 7 Flat Slab 475
The design moments have been shown in Fig. 9. 7.18.b.
Effective depth of the slab in the transverse direction (assumed)= d = 204 mm
Q·51.25 C1_ .c.:J_ I :. Area of steel in the transverse direction is given by:
T LUm -----:--- LJ.I -~-- - - , - U.J -~-
1

~~ · I ~ I ~ 01/m T
B I
t
wlii
-t -'?
.,.,
"! f8
+40.4
ssr- .
. Ij .
-73.9

_1_,_ -,-- _,_ -,- -~-- :5

1067
Oijffl
g? "' •0< 991 gJ "'
0

j :.A =0.5 X 20 ~- 4.6 X M X 10

6
]

j I~~
,---

... 1 I~ I .. 1 1~1 t st 415 l 1

20 X 1000 X 202
u
2
IOOOx202=4867.47 fl-..JI-0.005637xMJ
L
1 .n/ :g
+26.94 a:i b I -24.6 .,;j ~ I +19.87 :ril., I
~
.s1
~ "' 362 '+IN 329 7 "' 264 +j"' 308 ~ "'
-23.1 .,;/ :g 0
0
(\/ Since the moments in the column strips are greater than in middle strips, the detailing with
::o I I 1 I I I I I "' straight bars have been kept different. In column strips# 10 mm have been used ann # 8 mm in

',_i,./IJ''i
i -+- -l-:--- --r--f- -t- - - --l--1--1- middle strips.
:'

:!
I

:,I
I I ~+ 40.4 "'I"' I 1067
~~ -73.9

i er~---_:__-t-Rl--t-- -~ ~-ffi-1-
E
Q.

~If)!
29.8 "'I"' I
I +402 ~~ -69.16
991 I

I ~~~I ~ ;;:1~1
+0
0
:+ ED- @Sf~ t- - - - 1 - ED- 0~ ~- -t - ru- --1 ~~® T
t
(\/
1 "'
I I
;i~·djiII!
- - -
8 I ~
t
-51.25 .g>g-10@110 1 10@140 10@75 @ 1 10@19o 1 10@75. I
._ +- - - - _J_ -I- '-1-
- com wm com
De_. --I - - - - -+ --.- -l - 714 ~
+~--t----~-~--~---~-~-~-
Ul"' ---ssr- . '1047"""" ~ -----;n-3'" 1047 ~
iii
% I ! 1 I I I I I
I F'I ~ ~ II 8@160
iu·;/!': ..
1D 0/
.n"'
II N)!l ~ "'"'~/... I J29N.,
"! . ..n0/ :g I 264.,.,
-24.6 +19.87 "'/
"!r- I ~. 0/
.n ill :;
.9- II §F II ~:e,
. I ~ I II t!ll F ."'~
§ §
~ +~ I
i5 362 308 "'"'
1
.,,1
.
·. I .
+ + I I + I I + I i5
'0
I§> 359 335;;;
~C\1
1;;
287 l!ll
co
314 · @
0 0

~1~1 I ~1 I,~+ .
I

1il ...
!'· tJ_j ____ ~-~--L ____ I__ L~L- ! tJ--L---~-4--~---~-~-~-
"' I I
1 I ~.o:. . 1 1 ~j.o: . . I ~ 1 ·'
~i OJ~ ~-'" ~c;;
+40.4 -73.9
rh "/'~ -- -553 .g- I I 1 I I I I - I
- . --+ - EP- ~ ~ L - - . :J- P+ ~ ~ -
1.11:!

Iilii1.,1 8 -51.25 • I
1067 "/

!
402

I
991

~
"/

I
10

8
EP-
~ · :wo~ L - - ~r-+-w "'L m_ :wo~ L ---~"' - 11 - .Dl
~ I 10@140 ~ 1 10@75 ~ I 10@190 ~ I 10@75 I ~
L:J -I-;o~ o~
0

'
1111
~ ~ ~·
1
~ -1'I ~-----1-+-t----+-:-+
I ~ I •
t I -- 1-
0.
.l L -------ser- ~
---4-~------ -~-~-
I ~ _j 1047
1 I I I I I
lrn' ~" I 1\lF I 8@140 :e~ I 8@150 1\l~ I ~ "' I
~
!!1§9.. I "'~~ 8~
Fig, 9.7.18 b Design Moments and Required area of steel
'C
~
I (\/~ I
I§>
359 ::;; "'
"'~ I
335 "'
l!ll I
I -~
287
"' , I I§>
314
I I~
I§>

t +-}---~-++---++-:- +
111
1 Area of Steel : ·

If -v· 6

I $- -'-;~
, 0.5 X 20[ 4.6 X 69.16 X 10 ]
Areaofsteelrequired =
. 415
. 1- 1-
20 X 1000 X 2W
xJOOOx214=1067mm2
~ m-~~~ L--
I ~~-!.-
I $-~~~---
I -~ J- I ~
li E
.;! o"'
T"" I§>
CX) oT"" I§>
co o
..... "'

1~--}---i-++---~-++ 1
Provide# I0 at loo mm c/c, Area provided= 1131 mm2
The moments in the longer direction are more than that in shorter direction therefore, the steel
w in longer direction . will be placed below the steel in shorter direction to get higher value of
~f·.·~ effective depth. The _rt)(luired area of steel can be worked out using Eq. 9. 4.1 as under : I I 1 .t'-1 I t\.J I I I
I; Effecting depth of the slab in the longitudinal direction (assumed) = d = 214 mm
. .·. Area of s~l iri. the longidutinal direction is given by :
·,:

Iii Fig. 9. 7.18c Diameter· Spacing of Bars and Area Provided

Minimum area of steel= 1.2 x D,; 1.2 x 240 = 288 mm2 • Th~ spacing in longitudinal direction
. 0.5 X 20f 4.6 X M 106
~( lOOOx2I4=5156;626~-.YI-0.005022xMu]
X ] . .
1 should not be greater than 2d or 300 mm i.e. 300 mm. To satisfy the requirement of minimum area
AS . .
415 1-. ·- 1-_20 X 1000u X 2}·4"2 L
-;
of reinforcement , # 10 mm .bars spacing is limited to 270 mm_ and for # 8 mm bars the spacing is
175 mm. In the middle strip i~ the transverse direction minimum reinforcement governs.
 .Jif?'

,----
. 476 Slab Chapter 9
Sect. 9.7 Flat Slab 477
Detailing with seperate steel for negative and positive reinforcement has been provided and shown
in Fig. 9. 7.18c giving diameter spacing of bars and area provided below it The detailing using Check for shear around colulinn capital :
straight bars should be done as shown in Fig. 9. 7.12.b · Since effective<tepths of slab _in two directions are different lesser of the two is considered
Check for .depth for deflection on, safer side though average of the two can be taken without any loss of accuracy.
Area of steel required for maximum positive moment of 40.4 kN.m is : Effective depth of slab = 202 mm , Effective depth of drop = 202 +60·= 262 mm

J
·Critical perimeter for shear is at a distanCe d/2 around the column capital.
0.5 X 20[ 4.6 X 40.4 X 106
:l~ll.l
The projection of drop beyond column capital =
(width of drop- column capital width) I 2
- I- 1- . X 1000 X 214 =( 3200-1500 )/2= 850 mm.
415 20 X 1000 X 2142 Since this happens to be greater than d/2 (= 262/2), the critical perimeter lies in the drop portion.
Diameter of critical perimeter= 1500 +262 = I 762 mm.
·Ji•l =553mm2 While calculating design shear, the weight ofthe drop will also be considered.
Weight of drop projection below slab = 25 x (0.3- 0.24) x 1.5 = 2.25 k.Nifril
1 Provide# 10 mm at 1000 x 78.5 I 553 =say 140 mm Area provided= s61 mm2 Design shear at critical section around capital
l,11
11 p% = 100 A 11bd = 100x561/(1000x214)=0.26% VuD = 16.5 (7.2 X 6.4 ·1t X 1.7622/4) + 2.25 (3.2 X 3.2 ·1t X 1.7622/4)
Ji I s 2 2
f = 0.58 x 415 x 5531561 = 237 N/mm say240N!mm = no.t + 17.6 = 737.7 kN
.,1' - fJ:k
/,;
From Fig. MJ fur P, • 0.26% and!, = 24QN!mm2 Modificatioo faotor =«ti.4S Design shear strength of concrete t 'uc = k. t uc where, t uc = 0.25 'V'ck
I'·
;·,
Required depth= 7200/(26x-J.2J5) = 191 mm <2I4mm :. Safe tuc =0.25~= l.I2Nimfril and .
= (0.5 + ~) but t 1.0 i.e. (0.5 + 450/450) but t 1.0
.,
k :. k = 1.0
Check for Shear t'
uc = t uc = 1.12 Nlmfril
'·! · .(a)_ fnterior column: As the unbalanced moment in slab is very small, the shear stress due Shere resistance of concrete,
i to the transfer of fraction of unbalanced moment to the column is neglected. The critical Vuc ~ t 'uc x Pi
= 1.12 x (1t ><1762) x 262/1000 = 1624 k.N> VuD ( = 737.7 kN) :. Safe
I•
sections for shear are shown in Fig. 9. 7.18 d
(ii) Check for shear around the drop :
II The critical section is at a distance d/2 =202/2 = 10 I mm from the periphery of drop
Design shear at critical section
VuD = 16.5 {(7.2 X 6.4) • ( 3.2 + 0.202) X ( 3.2 + 0.202 )} = 569.4 k.N
Shear resistance of cOncrete Vuc = 1.12 x 2 ( 3402 + 3402) x 202/1000
= 30791cN. > VuD ( = 569.4 k.N) :. Safe.

ll Check For Shear for edge /column (See Fig. 9.7.18e)

In the case of exterior column, the transfer of moment from slab to column has to be
'oonsidered because it is not balanced by opposite moment from slab on opP<>site side as it happens
, in the case of an interior column. The unbalanCed moment is partially transferred by torsional
. ~tion. The shear induCed by torsion is required to be considered in addition to vertical shear.
,The maximum unbalanced moment in slab at interior edge of column =202.2lcN.m. 1he part
of moment to be transferred by torsional action= a times 202.2lcN.m.
'"""!''
,.__ _ _. 3200
J .··
( a ) Interior Column. a >~~~.~ where a1.· and a2, are sides of critical section ·for shear perpendicular
1
Fig. 9.7.18d 3 ,'J~
. . . :.:
lind parrallel to free edge.
 I

478 Slab
Chapter 9 Sect. 9.7 Flat Slab 479./
The size of column capital is 870 mm. x 1335 mm., C = 870 mm. C = 1335 mm. V (1 - a)( M - V xg )G
Smaller effective depth at critical section is that at the 1drop = 262 mm 2 t =_.IL..+ u u · AB (9.7.20a)
max Ac J
a1 = C1 + dI 2 = 870 + 26212 = 1001 mm, a2 = c + d = 1335 + 262 = 1597 mm c
2
~x 353.8 X 1000 (1-0.654X200.2 X 106 -353.8 X 1000 X 287.6) X 278.4
~~fj_ +
t-----1500
942938 }05.1 X 109

11
1
ol-~~:~:,;---~ r t uc
0.375 + 0.09 = 0.465 Nlmm 2
Design shear strength
= 0.25 {Z;
t' = k.t ,
= 0.25 ~= 1.12"~ I mm2
r/r·
, i I 1 :q Si I o
k5 = (0.5 + ~) -~. 1 Now, k5=(0.5 + 1001/1597) > 1 :. ks = 1
I 1 ~ !'! I i:il t'uc = t uc = 1.12tl N lmm2 > t max (= 0.46 N I mrif) :. Safe .
I 1 ~ ~ I "'
,,I
. ··I

·'~l! !
I
ilolm
1
i
I
Ex.9. 7.2 : D'etermine the m(}ments in the exterior panel along the long span by
equivalent frame method. Data the same as given in Ex. 9. 7.1. The number of panels along
f-l--.-,1--'1 I"'"' I
1 .. 11';;
=--rr-, T 1 the long span is four.
I I 1 I
I ,,'I I I 1 I
1-,f:
I I'
i 'J. or-;;1-:;;r-.. ~~f=2:2--~
Gco~GAB'+
r Given:
Long span
Coiumn
= 7.2 m, Transverse span= 6.4 m, Load
= 450 mm diameter. Exterior column = 400 mm x 400 mm
= 16.5 kN I,(-
I
l.l,i 722.6-+1278.~-·
Thickness of slab = 24 mm
I' c1f2~·Jg t+
I Capital = 1500 mm, Equivalent square size = 1335 mm
:1~1 3600---_,
I Required: Moments in the .exterior panel along long Span
!jr,.: Fig. 9.7.18e
I
H:~ a = . = 0.654 Solution : The equivalent frame along the long span is shown in Fig. 9. 7.19a. Each frame shall
consist of a slab section of width equal to the distance between the panel centre lines ( =6.4 m)
lj,
i + 213 A flOOl and columns above and below the slab with their far ends fixed. As the total number of panels in
I[ ·v~m the longitudinal direction is even (equal to four), only half frame will be analysed considering th~
,:~ Sffi<eJl"'imeter along the critical soction " p, " 2a1 + a2 " 2< I00 I + 1597 " 3599 mm.\ slab at the axis of symmetry to be fixed.(Fig 9. 7.19b)
Design shear at critical section VuD = 16.5 (6.4 x 3.6)- 1001 x 1.597) = 353.8 kN. ·
~.' J' According to the I.S. Code, the stiffening effect of flared coltnnns heads will be neglected
,, Area· at critical section =Ac =p0 d = 3599 x 262 = 942938 mrif
and the column will be considered to be of uniform moment of inertia throghoutthe height. Though
l) GAB = if1d I Ac = 1001 2 x 262 I 942983 = 278.4 mm

I
the Code requires that the effect of variation of moment of inertia of the slab due to presence of
... (Eq. 9. 7.20d)
GCD = a 1- GAB = 1001 -278.4 = 722.6 mm drop should be condsidered, the commentary given in SP ( 24) ( 8414) on I.S 456 has acepted to
''-'iJ. g = GCD - C1 12 = 722.6- 870i2 = 287.6 mm use a consistent approach of either considering variation in section of both, slab and column (due
:1 to drop and capital respectively) or ignoring the effect of variation in bOth . 'fhe latter approach is
r 3
Jc ,;. 2da\112 + 2a1d 1I2 + a2 d xaJAB +2a d(a/2-GABi used here for simplicity though it i~ accepted that former approach would give more correct results ·

l
fl) 3 1
= [2 x 262 x 1001 1 12+2 x IOOix 2623 1 12+ 1597 X262 x 278.42 (Eq. 9.7.20c) but at the cost oflenghty calculations. However, it may be noted that ifthe eolumn capitalis absent
II) + 2 X 1001 X 262 ( 1001/2 • 278.4i]
,;, :C43.8 + 3 +32.43 +25.87) x l 09 = I05.1 xI 09 mm4
but drop is present ( or the other way capital is present but drop is absent}, effect of variation in ·
section shall be considered usll.lg either the column analogy metliod or coefficients given in
11__) I.
references ( 84 I 4, 85 I 5 };
);!
''Ill
~
Flat Slab 481
:WI Slab Chapter 9 Sect. 9.7
'\., Rate ofloadingpermetre length of slab= 16.5 x 6.4 = 105.6 kNfm .
I SiiffneMes ; (K) Reaction at left support = 105,6 x 7.2/2- (529- 259.8)17.2 = 342.8 kN.
oi 4E )( ( 400 X 4003) = 2.55 X 106E Negative panel moment for design at critical section at exterior support2
Exterior coluinli
·. : Ifc.ex
. ·;: = 342.8 x·0.435- 259.8- 105.6 x 0.435 12 = -120.7 kN.m.
L 12 X 3350
At interior support, the critical section for flexure occurs at the face of rectilinear column
d
j.' 4E X 1t X .4504 = 2.4 X 106 E capital. In above problem, it occurs at a distance 1335/2 = 667.5 mm from the centre line of cob,unn.
Interior column
· : Kc.m.

4E
64 X 3350

X 6400 X 2403
\ - - 7200 -+- 7200 "'-t- -~ 7200 7200 -+- -1 7200

:·i.
j'i,
Slab : Ks = . = 4.1 X 106E T

,r;
12 X 7200 ftl 0

71177777/!d~
7 7 7
Distribution Factor .

.":+
Joint Member
1A
RSF
2.55
Sum DF.
0.275
7
+
tz"l /'l I I I / I / / / / / / j *
.'j·•· 1 1"2 4.1 9.2 0.45
. ...
~:
J...
1C 2.55 0.275
2B 2.4 0.185'
23 4.1 0.315
2 2D 2.4 13 0.185 ( a ) Idealisation of Equivalent Frame

~
21 4.1 16Sx64)kNfm
0.315 2 529 259.8 ~
RSF =Rotational Stifness Factor
259

m
_n
;;::y
Fixed- end moments: (FEM) MF = (165 x 6.4),x 7.2 /12 2
=456.2 kN.m. _.. R1 -342.8 L...R1 =342.8
Moment Distribution : All vaues of moments are in leN.
( d ) Interior Column
Cols 1-Z 2-1 Cols. 2-3 3-2 ( c ) Exterior ColUmn
( b ) Flame AnalySis • Exterior Panel
D.F. 0.55 0.45 .0315 0.37 0.315
Fig. 9.7.19
FEM -456.2 4561· -4561 456.2
Bal. 250,9 205.3 Reaction at interior support due to load on eX!erior panel (Fig. 9. 7.19d) .
c.o 102.6 = 105.6 X 7.2-342.8 = 417.52 kN
Bal -32.3 -38.0 -32.3 Negative ~el moment for design at critical section in exterior panol-ia.teriot
2 support .
= 417.iix 0.6675- 529-105.6 x 0.667S fl= 273.7 kN.m. .
c.o '
-16.2 -16.2
\
Bal 8.9 7.3
mom~tatmidspan
~~~
2
c.o. 3.7 ' . Positive . . = 105.6 8
x ?.2·. --"2 _..
- (529 + 259.8)
_~·· =
290kN.m.
:G,,-;:

Bal -1.2 -1.3 -L2 . •

Final 259.8 -259.8 529.0 -39.3 ..:.489.7 i 440.04 Exterior panel
lt • moments Comparision of results : Interior support.
Exterior support Midspan
:The above.moments are at the slab- column junctions. The design moments are to be taken -315.3 kN.m 1
- 164 kN.m 215.4 kN.m
ah:ntiCal section fodlexure. . Direct desigli .method Ex. 9.5:1 -. 273•7 kN.m '
- 120.7 kN.m 290.0 JcN.m

l . · · At ~r Support, the critical section for flexure occurs at adistance from face ofcolumn
~~to ofie- halfofthe projection ofthe capital bey<;mdthe face ofcolumn. In abcve problem, the
. .critical. sectiOn i~ at a distance (870 - 400)12 =:= 23 5 mm from the face of column i.e.
. /23,5':+'400/2 =' 4JS mm from the centre of colultl11. (Fig. 9. 7.18e) ·
I . , '
.Equivalent .rrame method Ex. 9.5.2
Conduslo~ : fn this-example eqiiivalent frame. method gives moments higher than those by Direct dui8'i ( ,
· -ailuvl R"t tlti.• nh.tervation -~not hold g~od in all cases. .. .
 482 Slab
Chapter 9.·
9.8 YIELD LINE THEORY
9.8.1 Introductjon
The yield line theory is an ultimate load theory for design of ltC. slabs. It was introduced by
Ingerslev (23/1) and later extended and advanced by Johansen (43/2), :With the result that it is
commonly called as Johansen's yield line theory. The early literature on yield line theory was in
Dannish Hognestad (53/2) published the summary in English and set momentum to its study. Re-
cently, the yield line theory has been accepted by many Codes as a method of an analysis and
design ofR.C. slabs. It has been treated extensively in publications by Wood (61/3 ), Jones (6211 ),
,il. Park and gamble (80/2), Shukla (73/9), and many others. The yield line theory is a powerful tool in
,JI~
r
analysis as it enables determination of failure moment in slabs of rectangular as well as irregular
shapes for different support conditions and' loadings. In this theory, the strength ofa slab is assumed
to be governed by flexure alone, other effects such as shear and deflection are only required to be
checked, if necessary.
1{ The yield line is defined as a line in the plane of the slab across which reinforcing bars
have yielded and about which excessive deformation (Plastic rotations) under constant
Jl,i ultimate moment, continues to occur leading to failure.
Therefore, it wouid be of interestto-understand how a yield line forms, develops and propa-
F!Jl
I gates, and finally transforms a structure into a collapse mechanism.
fl
~-'"'l
9.8.2 Behaviour of Slab upto Failure
Cl (A) One- way Slab :
(: As discussed earlier in Sect. 9.4.1, a one-way slab is considered to be made tip of series of
parallel strips placed side by side, each strip acting like a beam. As seen in Sect.· 3.1, ll. I_tc,:. beam
has to be under- reinforced for the application of limit analysis so that a plastic hinge can form at
ultimate state. Thus, the slab is also designed as under-reinforced members.Now, if we consider a
unifonitly loaded one-way under-reinforced slab, simply supported along opposite parallel edges, .
every strip of the slab, just like a strip say AB in Fig. 9.8.1, develops a plastic hinge at the point of
maximum benditig moment on loading, at ultimate state. The plastic hinges in all strips join together
as
_ and form what is knoWn. yield line CC'. The resultantdeformations caused due to plastic rotation
(8A+ 80 ) at hinge C' i.e. at,the yield line,, are s~Jarge that the elastic deformations cait safely be_
neglected and segments AA'C'C and BB'C't:; in Fig. 9.8.1 ·can be considered just as p)ane
segments rotating about CC' (just as a simply supported beam AB is considered to be m~de up of
two straight segmentsAC and CB) at failure. At this stage, the collapse mechanism is said to have
- formed; This mechanism is represented by arrangement of yield lmes -in the ·slab known- as
yield-line pattern.For a oite-way supported siab, it consists of a single yield line (called positive
yieid line due to positive ie.sagging bending) parallel to supporting edges~ ·the ultimate moment
c:ipacity of a- on~way supported slab is the same as that of a beam of unit width.
. It is known that the real advantage of ultimate load analysis is derived in a statically
indeterminate structure. A two-way slab being an highly inditcrminate one, the t ~a! advantage of
·. ultimate load design is obtained in atwo-way slab. We wi:l now observe the behaviour of a
two-way slab at ultimate load.
Yield Line Theory 483
Sect.9.8
·:i
·'"'
.~?
A~!! l ttlJ: Ill k ~,B.
TA' . c·. -- -
'TJ ~kl,
B'
Yield line /\cracks
~
Ac· B
B.M.Diagram
At~i~
eA c - 9~+9a9a
Plastic hinge at C
Fig. 9,8.1 Development of Yield Line Pattern in One- way Slab
(B) Two-way Slab
The development of yield lines and their propagation in case ofa two-way reinforced slab
differs from that of one-way slab. Consider an under-reinforced rectangular R.C. slab, simply
supported over its edges uniformly loaded upto failure. Let the slab be orthotropically reinforced
(i.e. reinforced along two perpendicular directions with amount of reinforcement different in the
two directions). On initial loading, the slab behaves elastically. But as the load goes on increasing,
__ cracking of concrete on tension side starts in the direction parallel to the longer span at mid-span
region which is subjected to maximum bending moment. With the increase in the load as the
maximum moment along short span reaches ultimate moment, the tension steel at the cracked
section yields ( Fig.9.8.2a) and large rotation takes place at that yielded sections with moment
remaining practically constant and equals the ultimate moment of resistance. As the load is further
increased, the yielded portion of the slab acts as a plastic hinge and carries no further moment, with
the result that the increased proportion of moment has to be carried by the section adjacent to the
central yielded· area, and consequently redistribution of moments takes place. This causes the.
reinforcement in the adjacent region to yield on loading further. The lines of intense-cracking,
across which tension st®l has yielded, continpe to grow, fork (Fig. 9.8 2b) ~d reach the.comer8
of the slab forming a oollapse mechanism at ultimate state. The system of yield lines or fracture
m
lines, shown Fig. 9.8.2i:, which divide, the slab into segments, forming a collapse mechanism is
called a yield line pattern. At failure, the steel has already yielded along the yield lines and the
plastic defortl)ations which are much greater than the elastic deformations occur 1along the yield
lines while the region l:ietween the yield lines still behaves elastically. . · ·
The el~~Stic deformations are very small. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that the sla~
segments between the yield lines remain plane and all excessive plastic deformations take place in
the yield lines only. Sinee the sla6 segments between yield lines suffer excessive deformations
_atong yield lines; th~y will obviously rotate about the supports. Thus, the supports fo~ the axes of
.l'()tation.The elementAED rotates about AD, and elementABFE aboutAB. Therefore, a yield line
say AE ~etween two rigid segm~nts AED and ABFE must pass through A, the ~~j;rsection -of
axes ofrotation. AD- and AB.I:Ience,
. . it becomes a. necessary .condition
. ofdefonnation that the
'r! !

Sect.9.8 Yield Line Theory 485

'i 484 Slab Chapter 9
"~
;
! .
!I These rules will help us in predicting the yield line pattern for different configurations of'-
slabs with different boundary conditions, and different loading. Th~ symbols, signs and conventions
A1 «< 1 ct"' ,,,,,,,,,.,,,,,,,B A-J"'I'" Utftcccutc• ''« 0 ""-t used for showing boundary conditions, axes of rotations, and yield lines are shown in Fig. 9.8.3.
';~: - - - - Free or unsupported edge • Positive moment yield line

..........
~ "ltV' tuuu Si!llply supported edge

nxxxxxxxxxxxx Fixed or continuous 11dge

- - - - - - - Negative moment ylel~ line
- ---·- Axisofrotation

0
( a )Initial yielding
C 0 -- ............. ., .....,C

( b ) Dwelopment of yield lines ( c ) Formation of mechanism

Fig. 9.8.2 Development of Yield Line Pattern in Twf)-Way Slab

• -- -- - -- Qirection ot yield line produced

~B
'It, yield line must pass through the intersection of the axes of rotation of these plane slab elements. ..
! II: These axes of rotations lie along the lines of support and/or pass over the columns .
. :·1:
::.
,j ~ .

9.8.3 Assumptions (iii) '

I The preceding section describes how the yield lines emerge, propagate and finally lead to (i) (ii)
I
failure. The failure mode is arrived at on the basis of certain assumptions which are summarised
I below: . ~'-"
~ ;t 1. The failure is due to complete yielding of reinforcing steel along the yield lines. I'\\ ' ....- ,,ptumyt«l«ll~
l " ".-
ta~J,::~"
'I~ Thus, the slab is designed as under-reinforced , and the yield line occurs on the tension face.
,,
!i:
Skew
·•( ~ 2. The bending moments and twisting moments at ultimate state are uniformly distributed
;.:li Free OR f 2 ; J r e.e \ support

q .along the yield line.

.3. At failure, the yield line divides the slabs into individual segments. [ ]. TXj -
.
~
~ -4,5~~ .
-
.\'::.~ Jnnm;n;nnn
I '
:::~-~
The slab deforms plastically but the individual segments behave elastically. .1. .
II 4. The plastic deformations are much greater than the elastic deformations which can be consider (vi) l vii)
(viii)
(v)
as negligible;
Fig.9.8.4 Ty~ical Yield Line Patterns. (a) Rectangular Slabs
The plastic deformation takes place in the yield lines only, and the slab segment between yield
lines remains plane and rotates as a plane segment at collapse. Some. illustration of yield\line patens for slabs of various shapes and boundary conditions
·loaded by a uniformly distributed load are shown in Fig. 9.8.4. Fig. 9.8.4a gives patterns for
9.8.4 Guideline! for Predicting Yield-Line Patterns rectangular slab, 9.8.4b gives the same for triangular, circular and polygonal slabs and 9.8.4c gives
Iri analysing the slab using yield line method, it is necessary to predict the possible yield line

~~~~~-®®
patterns or failure meebanisnis at collapse. The properties ofthe yield lines, assumptions made, and
.the observed experimental phenomenon, help to form the guidelines for predicting ·the yield line
patterns, and are detailed bek>w : .
1. Yield lines are straight lines. ,, .
·. This is obvious because they are at in~tions of planer segment of the slab.
1Yield lines end It tile slab boundary. ·
. H this is nOt so, the fajlure mee~ will not be complete.
or
j l, Yield lines, yield --~uced, pasS through the intersection of axes of rotations of adjacent
' · elements. . . . . · . r .
4. Axes ofrotations generally lie along lines of supports and pass over the columns.
. . ·
.

A'A($>,/A_.
·· _Th'is, in other words, means that linear supports form the axes ofrotation and column supports
form the pivot point, with the resplt that the axes of rotation can pass over the column support at ..~~'· '· " . . ..
llliY anglo. Ifan edge is fixed, a negative yield.line may form along the support due to negative or Fit!. 9.8.4 (b) Trianl!:ular. Circular. and· Polv!!:onal Slabs
hogglngbending. :..
 486 Slab Sect.9;8' Yield Line'Theory 481
Chapter 9
·;. Fig. 9:8.5a shows the equivalent stepped yield line in which x andy are the principal
:.-:.:~:.:::~~ft~
'~l
directions of reinforcement and the yield line in the direction t makes an angle in the anticlockwise
~ direction with they axis. The ultimate moment of resistance per unit width in the orthogonal x , y
~
directions are mu.r and muy respectively. The moment of resistanCe perunit width mun and muJ in the
directions normal and tangential to the yield line can be found out by considering the equilibrium of
)IV a small triangular element shown in Fig. 9.8.5b~
~
Lett and n represent the tangential and normal directions to the yield line.
-. -·
....... .._. Total. ben~ing moment acting on sideAB = moment per unitwidth AB
~---...;,- _-::. -=:·... m. u.r .AB
......... ,.,.,.·"""' ..............
.d, _... ...-· Total bending,moment acting on side BC muy.BC
......................
ill\:.! )~;w4~,~4~~~~7JJ7,7.,~,7,,7~n7rn·~
nn;;;J
------:.._~~-
•• · - · - · - · - Totalbendirig moment acting on sideAC mun .AC.
Total twisting moment acting on sideAC mu1 .AC
;:'I
I Equi~ibrium of moment in the tangential direction gives :

~
ll i; ·.u.·~.·
mun.AC = mu.r . AB cos a + muy . BC sin a

:'[rf·(•::~ J '
.
. ~] or mun = mu.t . cos a .ABIAC + muy . sin a . BCIAC
i.e. mun = mu.r cor a + muy sin2a ...... (9.8.1) .
:1' v·
r ·! .JI 1: Similarly, equilibrium of moments. in the normal direction n requires:
.,~j!: Fig. 9.8.4 (c) Non Rectangular, Slab with Four EdgJ mu1 .AC = mu.r . AB sin a . :_ muy . BC cos a
Iii 9.8. 5 Yield Criterion or mut = (m u.r - m ) sin a .cosa ...... (9;8.2)
r~i!
·ll)l
The yield criterion defmes the strength ofa given slab element subjeeted to general moment "·If m muy' then froni Eq. 9.8.1,
u.r
field. The Johansen's stepped yield criterion (67/6, 73110, 74/11) has be.en considered to be = (col' a + siif a) = mu.r = muy and
m mut =0
sufficiently accurate in general use when in-pl~e forces in the slab are absent. It assumes that a mun u.r
straight yield line can be replaced by· a stepped yield line and with small stepped length
.tv This means that when ultimate moment of resistance per unit width is equal in all directions,
perpendicular to the principal directions of reinforcement and all reinforcement crossing the yield
line yields due to the principal moments acting in the direction of reinforcement. · ·.· ,the torsional moment at the yield line is zero. Such slabs are called isotropic slabs.
But when mu.r # muy ' from Eq. 9. 8.1 and 9. 8.2 , it will be seen that both bending
. moment
01 JJf ... X ( mun> and torsional moment ( mlit) exist sat the yield line. In such slabs, reinforcement in both

~
I I

1$'-:s q. directions is also not equal and the slab is said to be orthotropic.
·Equivalent
stepped yield line . muy The yield line criterion for orthotropically reinforced slab has not yet been · rigorously
muy defined. Also, there are many objections to the Johansen's ·yield line criterion. The interested
. Actual yield line ·- _,._.._ reader may refer to books by R.H. Wood (61/3), Park and Gamble (80/2) for detailed discussions.

~
!II I
.
l> E':l
)(
9.8.6 Methods of Analysis and Basic Principles behind Yield Line Theory
The ftrst step in obtaining the solutions using yieldJine method is to postulate the yield line
't . 11-J/~::i~mut patterns by using the guidelines given in Sect. 9.8.4. There may be more than one possible yield
6'1i) '
q. line pattern for a given slab and each pattern in genetal will contajn Uilknown dimensions which
. "i
y
A
locate the position ofyield lines. All possible yield line patterns need to be analysed and the correct .
(a) . pattern is one which gives the. lowest ultimate load or highest ultimate moment. In other
. (b)
F1g. 9.8.5 Yield CriteriOa ... . words, this means that the yield''line theory is based on upper bound approach. The upper bound
...
I( r~
i
\'•,._,

~.;.:G.~
Yield Line Theory 489
488 Slab Chapt~r 9 Sect.9.8
From Fig, 9.8. 6.it wiii be seen that the moment vector at positive yield line is anticlockwise
approach states that the ultimate load computed on the basis o{ an assumed yield line patttm Ia.
either greater than or at the best equal to the true collapse load. · and rotation is clockwise, and the moment vector at ~gative yield line is also anticlockwise and
rotation clockwise. Thus, internal work done by.both·ofthem will be negative but additive.
Generally, two methods are used for determming the ultimaki ~ngth of slab using yield line
analysis. These methods are known as Virtual work method and Equilibrium method. The See Fig.9.8.6.
A
i virtual work method, as the name indicates, is based on the prirtciple of virtual work and makes the
use of the equilibrium eqUations to e~blish the equilibrium of various segments'formed by the
•I:

·ii + ve yield nne

~mt
yield line. Both these solutions are upper bound and are discussed in the following sections.

9.8.7. Virtual Work Method ~x1-\ uT

9.8.7.1. Principle of Virtual Work m11 J1117'.. ,E Section HH
It states that "If a rigid body that is, in statical equilibrium under the action of set of forces is H
given a virtual displacement, the sum of the virtual work done by external forces and· by the
Fig. 9.8.6 Plate Segments Rotations and Yield Line Moments
internal actions is equal to zero."
In the case of a slab when the yield lines are formed, the slab gets divided into a number of Let m~ represent the moment of resistance per unit length of the yield line of length Ln
segments. Each segment of the slab can be regarded as rigid body because it undergoes only the
undergoing relative rotation en about the yield line i.e. along the direction of bending (Note that
plastic deformations along the yield line (elastic deformations bei~g neglected). Also each
direction of bending is perpendicular to the axis of bending which is direction of yield line itself)~
segment is in eq\Jil!brium under the action of appli(xt .load and bending moments, torsional
momen~ and shear forc-es actiqg .!dong the yield lines. Thus, each slab element can be treated as a Then, the internal work done F -L m~Ln en'
rigid body which is in statical equilibrium under a system offorces. Therefore, to analyse the slab j The total internal work done = -lin ~ Ln9n Therefore, the virtual work equation can be written as
by virtual work method a small arbitrary displacement A is given at some convenient point in the
.direction of load. Then the resulting displacements at all points of the slab can be expressed in L Wu.flg- Lm~Ln en =. 0
terms of fl. ...... (9.8.5)
or t munn•
L 9 = L Wug
fl = L Wusg
.A .fl
The external work done by a uniformly distributed ultiiriate load of intensity . wu is given by : ·
·External work = wu.fldxdy = L Wu. flg ...... (9.8.3) 9.8.7.2. Computation of Internal Work along Orthogonal Axes.
Most of the slabs are rectangular with steel placed along their co-ordinate axes x andy. For
where, W11 is the total load on the segment and A is the vertical displacement at its centre ofgravity.
design Of such slab, it would be necessary to know the values of moment of resistance per unit
The extenial work done by a uniformly d'istributed load may be considered as the ultimate width along x andy axis ( i.e. mux and m ). Therefore, it would be more convenientto express the
load per .unit area (wu ) multiplied by the volume swept out by the displac<:d segments. Hence, internal work done, m 9 L in tenns cif components ofthe moment m and m , components of
rotations 9 and e ' :d pr~jections of lengths of yield line (x ' y )in the j andy _direction
. "
Eq. 9.8.3 can be expressed as :
. X y 0 0
L WII.flg = LWu x volume swept out by each displaced segment. respectively. X
L w~.flg ~LwxAxfl ...... (9.8.4)

~{I
u s g
where, wu =
intensity of ultimate load per unitarea, ·
As = Area of each segment.
of a yield line pattern,
fl . = Vertical displacement of the centre of gravity of the segment.
g

Due to virtual displacement fl, the rotation ofthe slab seginent that occurs along the yield line . Relnton;ement
can be found in terms of fl. The relative rotation between the segments on two sides of the yield .I ·a
line correspond to bertdiiig nioment while there is no relative movement between the slab elements
by shear force or torsional moment. Therefore, the intem:al work done is due to bending moment F.g. 9.8.7 Resolution of Yield Une Moment --
only, 'Also the moment rotation vectors along positive and negative yield lines have the same into its Orthogonal Components
1:. direction. Hence, the internal work done at positive or negative yidd lines has the same sign.
~

/- ' I

Yield Line ~ary 491

490 Slqb Chapter ·9 Sect.9.8

From Fig. 9.8. 7, it can be seen that

Data A beam AB continuous at A and' B. Uniform loading wu
t·.
x=Lsina, y0 =Lcosa, , L = 4m. muA = 80 kN.m/m., muB = 60 kN.mlm , muc = 50 kN.mlm
o II n I ..:~5

and 9x = 9n cos a ; e
9y = n sin a ' 1
l Required wu
. where, 9 , -~ aJ'e the rotations in X andy direction respectively and 9 is the rotation in the Solution The negative yield lines will develop at the top of continuous· supports A and~. TI\e
' . x 'F n 1
direction of normal at the yield line. . _/ positive yield line will not necessarily form at the centre ofthe span but at a distance x from the
2 support A because the moment capacities and reinforcement· at supports A and Bare different
Form · Eq. 9:8.1, mun = muxcoSl a + muysin a.
Using the above relation, the internal work is ( See Fig. 9.8.8 (1) ); · 1

WI = L munnn a L =L(m uxco? a + muy siif a ) nn e L Using the mechanism method i.e. Virtual work method,
= L(m .9 cosa.L cosa + m. . 9 sina.L sina)
Internal work done WI = muA. eA + muB. eB + muC' (9A + eB)
A·
'''"~
ux n n
= Lmux. 9x y0 +Lmuy. 9y.xo
uy n n
...... (9.8.6)
= (muA +muC) eA + (muB + 'r!ue)eB
wL
~~r~ w w ,
.>.,.. \
This virtual work equation will not require computation of ultimate m,oment of resistance in External workdone WE= T x 1:. + T
(L-x)!:. = T ·
1:.

Jl
th~ direction normal to the yield line.
'}I r WukN/m
,tf'f
")(
9.8.7.3 Determination of Configuration of Yield Lines Pattern causing Collapse
With exception of some simple cases, the geometry of an assumed yield line pattern causing •(WI Ul p~~!Ill~)
collapse cannot be determined uniquely because the configuration of yield line involves some muA • L=4m muB
I):
I .~~~
p~
Unknown dimensions. Fig. 9.8.4a (iv) shows some examples in which unknown dimensions are
I; shown as xi' x2 , x3 and so on. As per upper bound theorem, the correct configuration of yield line
. .c=
1
'"'''a~.
T
fl is one which gives lowest ultimate load or highest ultimate moment. To determine the maximum :.·----
1m

]J
r:~.\-·,1
mol,llent, the work equation is expressed in the form :
mu·'·,=:=:: wu f(xl' x2 ' x3) ...... (9.8.7)
For highest ultimate moment, maximization procedure of differential calculus requires
Yield line pattern ·

1r1
~
omu = 0' ' omu = 0 ' amu = 0 ...... (9.8.8)

,-~
oxl ox2 ax3
The values of xl' x2 , x3 obtained from the solution of Eq. 9.8.8, when substituted in
muA ~ \J .- .· · mus

Ultimate Moment Diagram

Eq. 9.8. 7 gives the maximum value of ultimate moment mu.
Alternatively, instead ofmaximumiation Of ultimate moment, the minimization of ultimate j-x •I• L-x --I
~
~
load also gives the collapse load by solving the following equations
wu = mu f(xl' x2 ' x3)
Collapse Mechanism
aw aw aw
u
-~-=0,
u
-~-=
0 u
.~=0,
vx 1 vx2 vx3 ...... (9.8.9) Fig. 9.8.8 (i)

As per virtual work principle, _ W1 .;, WE

9.8.8 Dlustrative Example . . ~L
,', (muA + muC)aA + (muB + muC) aB =-2-·/:.!
Ex. 9.8.1 A one-way continuous slab of 4 m span carriesa uniformly distributed load.
The thickness of the slab · and the reinforcement are such that the ultimate moment of . 1:. 1:. wuL
or (m ilA + muC ) -x- + (m
. uB + m ) -
uC_L-x - = -2- ·A
resistance' of the slab at support A, support B and in the span region are 80 .kN.mlm ,
60 leN m(m and 50 leN. mlm respectively~ Using yield line theory, calculate the collapse load.
......- ~

Yield Line Theory 493 r·

492 Slab Chapter 9· · Sect.9.8

w = 2- [ milA + mue + muB + miiC

" L x L-x
. J ...... (I) I
Ex. 9.8.2 An isotropically reinforced square slab of side 'a' is simply supported over
' its edges. It has an ultimate moment capacity per unit width equal to mu , in both span
directions. Determine the ultimate uniformly distributed load the slab can carry under given ,
(A) MathematicalApproach : . . . :ui!
conditions.
:y};l
The correct configuration of yield line pattern is one which givesthe·IQwest ultirpate load i.e. }!I
Solutwn
ow, As the ultimate moments of resistance in two orthogonal directions (viz. x andy) are equal
-= 0
ox and as the slab is symmetrical about both these axes, the yield lines will also be symmetrical
crossing each other at the centre as shown in Fig. 9.8.8 (ii) on the basis of guide lines given in
:~ [.12x- (milA + mue) -
L2 1
(L-xi
( muB + mue)l
J=0 Sect. 9.8.4. In this case, the length of the yield line L and its rotation can be found out easily. Let
. n
the centre of the slab be given a virtual displacement 11 in the downward direction. f"'
or ( muB + m,c )l- - (L- xf ( muA + mue j =0
Length of each diagonal yield line = Ln = f2 a
Substituting the values of muA = 80 kN.m, muB 60 kN.m • mur~ = 50 lcN.m and
L = 4m, we get, llO.?- 130 (4 -,.x)2 = 0 The internal work done = 4 x internal work done at each segm.ent of y~ld line
W = 4l:m L 8 = 4xm ({2a)- _r;;- = 8m 11 J,•":C
: . .?-52x + 104 = 0 I un n n un a / -v 2 un "·'·~"
mux =·muy = mu
(x-26 )2 =: 262 -104 = 572 x-26 = ± ...J 512 = ± 23.92 . :·. ,x = 2.08 m. As the slab is isotropic, mu is same in all directions ,. . mun
Putting the value of x ·m Eq.l, wu = T
j
2- [no +
2.os
no
(4~i.os)
J= 59.9 lcN/m
W./ = 8m u 11

(
(B)- Trial and Error Method :
The mathematical approach illustrated above may in some cilses be too much involved and a
r·
trial and error method becomes more convenient. As per trial and error method,·different values
are assigned to the variable parameter x and corresponding values of ultimate loads are worked out a
using· Eq.I. The value of x which gives the minimum value of wu is the required value of the
ultimate load. It can be realized that it is difficult to get the exact value of x_which will give the I
l~ccc«««<«H<<««" R
. .-;;:"~}·

lowest wu' Therefore, from the values worked out, the variation of the ultimate load with x may be

··~
plotted and a smooth curve be drawn; Ute lowest point ofthe curve gives the correct ultimate load.
Substituting the values of muA , muB and muc in Eq. I we get, 9
X
.

.
wu ,=
2 [ 130 +
4 x
llO
(4-x).
J= x +
65 55
(4-x)
6
9x=lii'
-~ r-

The approximate value of x= L/2 =2.00 m. So values of x are taken from 1.9 to 2.2 Fig. ,.... (II)

x in metres wu inkN/m As the central point is given the displacement 11 , the vcl1.:::::e Swept i~ th~t l)f a square

1.9 60.40 I pyramid given by a . a.ll/3 = J t,./3 . .

2.0 60.00 External work done =WE= wu x volumeofpyramid = w,J 11/3

2.1 59.90 Using virtual work principle, W1 = WE . :. ·8 m,/1 =· wu.J 1113
2.2 60.10
,! ;. W' = 24 m 't J
. . .. ·. • · U II

Minimum value of w, = 59.90 1cN/m is the desired answer.

 r
stct9~8 Yield Line Theory 495 ·
49~lab;, ·· ·--cliapte~ 9
The yield line pattern dividing the ~lab into plane segments is shown in Fig. 9. 8. 8 (iii). Let d
·..
In this speqific case, it is si'mple to write down the internal work equation by taking the

. ,. . . . . . . . . .,. .,r ·. .
· bt.the virtual displacement given to the pouits E and F (the junctions of segments A,B,D and
'l product of normal moment mun and the rotation 8n in the normal direction. However, same
...\ , segments B; C, D ~tively) .
]J res!llts can be obtained by dealing with the components of moments anci rotations along the
co-ordinate axes. This latter procedure is nonnally very convenient in dealing with the problems cf
j
;;•
;t!
·· , ·r . .~.x . · ...1
'~ orthotropic plates. This problem will be solved again using Eq. 9. 8. 7. il

,;. ilyL+
_-
-~
: ~ :
Fig. 9.8.8\(ii}l shows a segment A which is supported along y axis. When a virtual
"'~1
~ displacement L\~is given to the centre of the t~lab in the downward direction, the s~gmentA roJates
along x-axis w~h rotation eX = d I (al2), while the rotation along the supported edge along y ~~I
·~ mux
v dir-ection is zero. On the same lines, the rotations of the remaining segments can be determined and
using Eq. 9.8. 7, the internal work for each segment A, B, C, D taken in order ~an be written as :
~~
jl ~us;;;>J!; >JPIJ>)JIJ}//fllf;)_Y
.-~ ~ !ilx---\
WI · = L m '6X y 0 + L m ey X0
~ ~ i·~· "\u(muy = 1/Jl = y
B111
,.J.. = 2 ( m~a. -
L\ . .
a + 0) + (0 + m -
L\ I
a) ~-
,. . 1
y Lyllx=«
\\
-G
~
II1\ ,,: 12 uya 12 .J
\
From Eq. 9.8.1, and using symmetJy m~ = m~ .
~~ \
m = m co? a + m sir?- a = m (sin2 a + co?a) = m
un ~ ~ ux ~
Fig. 9.8.8 (iii)

1tl .:.~:·,;~I
'-. I
, \·
.. mun =mux =muy =mu
Hence, W1 = 8 m11 L\ (A) Computation of internal work (W t
i,i'
I
External work done"" WE= W 11a 2L\ I 3 · -~-"---- - . . t.nn..TT
S_EGJ.Vl.CI.'II. -I: e.X = -PL
d
' ey = 0 , y0 = Ly

~
"'! Equating W1 =WE, Sm11 d = W 11.ifL\l:J
X

L
'.
. . wu = 24 mu la 2 same as obtained previously. or m
. u u
a
= w 2124 ·From Eq. 9.8.7
e y + muyyo
mKXXO
.. L\
e X = m·JIX pL LY + 0
·. m ...-L
!IX PLX u
A - y muy
_!!:_ d
p
il Ex. 9.8.3 A rectangular
.
slab oifsize LX x Ly (with Ly I LX = a) is simnly sunnorted
7:' ••
. X /
I

~·· along its edges and reinforced orthotropically with an ultimate moment of resistance per unit .. ·
sooMENT-n: e.y· ·= -d.
L , e = o , x. = LX
· Y12 X · 0
'L 2m
width equal to xux along x direction and m uy along y direction.· It carries the ultimate uni-
·r· 1-·.
fl i
lmi
.
formly distributed load of intensity w11 over its entire surface. If the moment of resistance per
unit width in x direction bears a constant ratio (it) with moment of resistance in y direction
- ex~o·
m.a + · e G+
. muy yxo = .· m~~y ill x = muy
..
L\ L
.
2 ·
y
L x
y
L\ _!!!..L\
= a ...... (II)

Taking Symlnetry into consideration, total internal work done is given by,_
:It::~_-;·_·
(i.e. muy/m~ = J.l.), then, . ·
(a) Determine the ultimate moment of resistance of the slab in co-ordinate directions
·
W _ = 2{
2m ·
a
ymii.YT. +.·a-
uy} L\
;;
JiX,:
( i.e. mux and muy ) .in terms of the 'given ultimate load intensir wu.
(b) Determine the ultimate uniformly distributed load w for given values of m~ and muy·
11 ·..-.· ..
,,·.
1
·-2m C.l.
uy [a
+ya
. p·
'
J 6 =2m r_ 2p + ya l6
IIYL a~ "J
2
(Ill)

Solution
m
. I
i
I
Consider a rectangular slab ABCD, size ( Ly x LX ), simply supported along all edges and
\ (BJ. CtJ~aiiim ofexternaJ work done by uniform·load
m !
!
~
loaded by a uniformly distributed load qf intensity w11•
mux .= ultimate moment per. unit length in x direction.
j
-~E.GS~~J-~· w;,1tAg'~Tw•LY
" . . :.< '
PLxT= w,~ylx(p!6)6
1 . ... 6 . . . . :·..
...... (IV)
lrf muy ::: ultimate moment. per unit length in y direction.
. ~soo~ . n-~ This segment~ be considered to consist ofmiddle rectangular portion
~
·-il!' L IL =a
m m
--..2'.. =J.I. -2!. = j_= y with tWoatd
. 1riaii~~
~ of eqUal
.. sizes. .' · · · · 1- , h
y x ' mux ' muy . J.l.
'!
(~; i ! I

·'lr·

496 Slab
Chapter 9 Sect.9.8 Yield Line Theory 497
External work done = r(l
L~
-2~ )LX!L
22
.A_ + 2 ( -2
1 X ~L
X23
!LA)] wu w L2
1 muy ; / [ {3 + a 2 ) - 2 ~ 3
r + ra 2 . -{y;f + ra 2 J
.. wA.1
u s g =wLL uxy ( 4- _JL 2 +JL 6.
).1=wLL uxy ( - 1 -L).1 ... (V)
4 3 w L2
Since segments I, III and II, IV are similar, total external work done is equal to double that u y ~ 2 _r---y . .
given by Eq. IV and V. muy ~ { 3+ya - "'ya- )2

WE = 2w,Lxly (+++-f) .1 or Wi = w,Lxly (+--f) .1 w L2

;/ d 3 + a2lf..l _ ~ a2lf..l )2 sincey =~
1
.. ~·

w L2 (3- 2~) ~I
Putting LX =Ly Ia , WE u y
.!I if -a 6 .1 wL
;4~
2

d3J..l + (l2 - (l )2 ...... (9.8.14}.

j• Equating W1 and WE
w L2 where f.! muylmux
[2~
l 2m
uy
+ ya2J .1
al3 -a
u y (3- 2~)
6 .1 24J..l·muy
2 or wu ...... {9.8.15)
muy w,LY [<3 ~ _ 2 ~2)] L2y {~ 3f..l +a2 - a )2
u- (2~ +ya 2) ...... (9.8.11)

or wu 12m, [ (2~ +ya2)] Comments : ..(i) The mathematical process obtaining. the value of B from solution of quadratic
equation and substituting .u in Eq. 9.8.11 or in Eq, 9:8:}2 to get ultimate moment or ultimate load is
Ly
2
(3~ - 2~ 2 ) ...... (9.8.12) cumbersome. And the main virtue of yield line method, viz. simplicity, is marred Alternatively, a trial and
om aw error procedure as detailed in Ex. 9.8./ may be used to give different values of mvyfrom Eq. 9.8.l/ for
,;jol
Li Formaximumvalueofm,, a: = 0 (orforminimumvalueofw,, ol3" .. = 0) assumed sets of values ofp. The value ofP which gives the maximum value of mvy is a true ultimate moment.
'i' Similarly, w. can be obtained for assumed sets ofp using Eq. 9.8.12 and the true value ojtiltimate load Is
I
1,1:
· Eg.. 9.8.11 ,
From a
()A [<313 -213 )]·
2
= 0 one which· has a minimum value. However, with the advent of high speed computers, it is necessary to have.
il'· "" (213 + ya 2 ) explicit expressions for ultimate moment and collapse load to save computational efforts and hence an
2
.,
or (2~ +ya ) {3- 4~)- (313- 2~ 2 ) (2 + 0)
explicit Eq. 9.8.14 and Eq. 9.8.15 have been obtained after going through involved mathematical process.
(ii) It may be noted that the dimensions Lx and L have been taken as span measured along
0
{213 +ya 2 i 1
x andy co-ordinate axis respectively. As such, it is not necessary that LY should be greater- than Lx
or
(3~ -213 2 ) =
(3- 413) s (Note that in two- way slab L, is a long span while LX is a short span with the result L, > L) .
(2~ +ya 2) 2 ...... (VI) Also the moment per unit length in x direction and contained in the· vertical xz parallel planes is
or 4~ + (4y a2 ) ~
2
- 3y a 2 = 0 designated as miDI and that in y direction as mvy. The ratio mvy I miDI is defined to be equal to Jl . Thus Jl
can be greater than unity or even less than unity.
The solution of the quadratic equation in ~ gives
13 = (112) cJ r 2a 4 + 3y a 2 - Ya 2 ) For an isotropically reinforced square slab.
... ... (9.8.13)
· Onsubstituing p fromEq. 9.8.13 intoEq. 9.8.JJ and noting that m1/X = muy = mU . fl = 1 •.and Ly =. LX = L·' Ly I LX = 1
Hence Eq. 9.8.14 reduces to ·
(3~ - 2P 2 ) ( 3 - 4~ ) .
or (21-'A +.'V(l 2) = we get m · = m = w L2 124 ...... (9.8:16)
2 2 . . uy " "
I
andEq.9.8.10gt'ves, w =.24m/L2 ...... (9.U1)
w L " rectangular
. "
m, 1
= ~/ xy[3~4xy{vy 2a 4 +3ya 2
· 1 .1
-ya 2 }] For an isotropically reinforced slab,
mux = m, = m, i.e. fl = 1. Eq. 9.8.14 gives,
wl 2
= ;/ [3 - 2 vr a. 2 4
+ 3ya 2 + 2y a.2 1 wu L'V2 - • '1 '1
 Yield Line Theory 499
Sect.9.8

Chapter 9 SEGMENT I : 9X = Mb , 9y = 0
498 Slab Internal work done along negative yield line + Internal work done along y direction
Ex. 9.8.4 An Orthotropically reinforced'rectangular slab is fzxed or continuous along projection of positive yield line= External work done by load on the segment,
~
.its four edges, and is loaded by a uniformly distributed load of intensity w• . Obtain an .
1 ·m
11 11
L - + m L - = -w ·L · b -
1 11
:nprunonjor wu in terms of moment capacities mwe and muy in xandy directions. Assume :~i I wey b weyb 2uY 3
...... (I)
2
negative ~ments at four support~·as.t1• i2' i3' andi4 times comsponding positive momenL :. (1 + i1) mwe = wu b I 6
capacities as shown in Fig. 9.8,8 (iv) ·
'----Lx On the same lines the virtual work equation can be written for Segment- III.
B
SEGMENT -III: 9X = Me, 9y = 0
.A ..... (II)
T
~ .~

(l+i )m ux = wu 216 2
.·\~ ~) .
3
!i.r
1!
~ ~ 'i
I f SEGMENT-II : 9 = 0, 9 = Ma
. 11 X 1 y 11 1 11 wu
i"i] 0 + m ( 1+ 1 ) - L = - b. a - w + - 2 c.a. - 3 w + (L - b- c) .a
kt X}'
2 a X 2 3
wu a
U
2
U X

...... (Ill)
ill ex= '6- ex=.~
:. (1 + i ) m L = - 6
2 uy X (3L X - 2b - 2c)

IJI'I ~~
fi
"y=a
4 e --4-
YlLy- a) Simi~arly the virtual work equation for segment IV can be obtained by replacing i2 by i4 and
'ill Fig. 9.8.8 (iv)
'a' by1, (Ly -a).
i·

Solution
SEGEMENT - IV
!tift Consider a rectangular slabABCD, ( LY x Lx) fixed or continuous along all edges and loaded
2
wu<LY- a) (3Lx - 2b - 2c) ...... (IV)
by a unifonnly distributed load of intensity wu. (.1+i 4)m uy LX =
· ··
.
\Ji!:1
.''\v;.'"'
1fi:!
~ .; ! Let mwe = ultimate +ve moment capacity per unit length
. in x direction. Dividing Eq. I by Eq. II
1::·~'\
muy = ultimate +ve moment capacity per. unit length in y direction. 1 + il b2
i1mwe, i 3 mwe = ultimate-ve moment capacity per \mit length at supportsAB and CD 1 +i3 = 7
= c ~.-(-1-+-i_)_/_(-i-+-i3-) ...... (9.8.20)
respectively.
i.2 muy , i4 muy =: ultimate
•
-ve moment capacity per unit length at supports BC and AD
Hence, b
1
'
respectively. · Similarly, dividing Eq. III by Eq. IV
~ 1'+ i2
m L 't
1 i2 a2 a.
J.1 = m uy ·and a = -f- -
1+li4
=
(LY-a)2
or
(Ly-a) ..J 1 + i4
we x
· The yield line pattern is shown in Fig. 9.8.8 (iv). The yield lines divide the slab into four . ~ 1+ i2
segments, I, ll, ill and IV~ Dimensions a, b, and c defme the position of yield lines. Let !l be virtUal · Ia = ·L
.. i ~ 1 + i2 + ~ 1 + i4 y
'displacement givtm'to pints E and F. From Eq. 9.8.5 and 9.8. 7, the virtual work equation can be
written as : ·. Let)P = ~1~i 1 + ~1+i3 and Q .= ...f1+i2 +..fl+i4

l: mwe 9'.i.yo +l:muy.ay.xo:::: l:wu.As. !lg

R = PIQ = (~1+i 1 +~l+i3 )/ {..Jl+i2 + ..f1+i4 )
n~ "----·
- .Applying the above virtual work equation to each segment we get
v~
lj
 pr'

·""'
500 Slab Yield Line Theory 501
'

Chapter- 9 Sect.9.8
Hence, a = ~I+ i1 x LY I Q Eq. 9.8.23 is a generalized equatio)lapplicable to a slab reinforced with +ve and -ve steel. It
...... (9.8.21)
can be applied to rectangular slabloa:ded by a uniformly distributed load with any combination of

l
On substituting a and b fro\D Eq. 9.8.21 and Eq. 9.8.20 in to Eq. III we get-: fixed and simply supported edges. To illustrate its appllication to rectangular plate with simply
,j
m ·L ·rJ Ly2
=-
wu
3L -
~ 1 + i3 + ~ .]
2c ---='-----~
supported edges, put i = i = i = i = 0 in Eq. 9.8.23. Then-P = Q = 2, R = 1 and Eq. (9.8.23)
1 2 3 4
--
uy X 6 X ~ 1 + j3 .. reduces to
L2 24 J-l muy
~
6
[3L X
_lE!_J
- ...fT+i: ...... (V) wu = L: ( ~ 3J.1 +a 2 . - a)
2 ...... (9.8.24)
"
3
Eliminating w between Eq. (II) and Eq. (T1 and putting a = L IL and- which is the same as Eq. 9.8.15
u y X

'I if. m ·L
J.1 = muy I mux we get :

·rJ =
(1 + i3) L2
Y •m
~3L 2p
- _E__
J Ex. 9.8.5 An orthotropically reinforced rectangular slab is simply supported along
three edges and is loaded by a uniformly distributed load of infinity wu . (Fig. 9.8. 7 (v)) .
i 1" UJ' X C2 UX X ..JT+T. Derive an expression for wu in terms of moment capacity muy . ("'
'•
!'
1:! j' or
c
2

L: (1 + i3) +
2Pa[ c
Q2
3
T LJ' ...j (l+ i3) . -:- llQ2
J 3
·
=0 Solution The slab ABCD shown in Fig.9.8. 7 (v) is supported along three edges and free
1:.I ' ' along the edge BC. As seen previously (see Sect. 9.8.4), two different yield line patterns can be
I ' '
predicted and the one which gives maximum ultimate moment is a true collapse moment.
~·~~'I
L,j

I'' '
'
Solvingthequadratlcequationin [ c ].
r.r. Ly ...j (I + i3 ) MODE I- One possible yield line pattern is shown in Fig. 9.8. 7 (v) a. In this case the yield
;
lines are symmetrical and hence they can be located by the dimension ~LX which is unknown.
_, , :Q [~m' + ~ - ~ J Let ll be the virtual displacement given to the points E and F . r'

y X =aand muy /m UX =Jl

LetL/L
= J-lQ [ ~~ + 3)-l I a 2 - R] The virtual work equations for each segment are as follows :
aL
..
c = ~1+i [~R2 llQ 3 +3J-Lia 2 - R] l--p~1-2~)lx+~~

~<1
...... (9.8.22) F C X B F
From Eq. II we have 1r-

~
c u.
~ I
!i
u·
II'
il:

ti
1
wu = 6 (I + i3 ) mux I c2
and on substituting 'Value of c from Eq. 9.8.22 and noting that J-l = m lm
6rj J-lmuy.
uy ux·
mux ~
n

~..l
t
""' _,.-1
l.
>-
r

wu 'A'71771}}11/177'f5
L: [
cP
i.
.V ~ + 3)-lla2 -
2
a 2 R]
,,
y
1-~+-t--1
rx
6 rj ll muy
i w
u
L2 [.V R2 a 2 + 3J.1 - Ra]2
...... (9.8.23) . "J E
B. ~1::.--.
.
---}f'- C
fl { e~!_:;;fc
i.: y . Ox a; f -ox
" where, ll mlm
UJ' UX
,a=LIL
y X
Ox .
,. . ..

(b)Mode·2
·(a-) Mode -1
I' p = ~ + ~1 +i3 'Q =~l+i2 + ~I +i4 and
.
R=
P . cff+i; + ~>
Q=(~I +i2 + ii+i~l Fig. 9.8.8 (v)
mli
 )

502 Slab Yield Line Theory 503 ·

Chapter 9 Sect.9.8
8 2
_) SEGEMENT-1 eX = - ande =0 wuLx 3 -413
PLX y -·-x-
mux 12 2y 13
8 I 8
~
2
m
ux
-
PLX Ly + 0 = -2Ly PL-
X 3
wu
wL
.U X 1 {
3 . 4
12 'F( ( ~ 4 + 9y - 2)/3y -
. . mux 8 a IP = wuLyLx p
·
8 I6 ..~
...... (I) ;;~1
Simplifying the term in the bracket
j
·SEGEMENT - II By symmetry the equation will be same as (I) i.e. 2
w L
.;;)il

m = -U -X ( {4+'
4+9y-2)
mUX 8 a lp = wU Ly LX p8 I 6 ux 24y
·~· ...... (II)
Substituting the value of y from Eq. (Va)
~:~> ·. SEGEMENT - III
2
w, e = o> ey = 81 Ly wU LX a 2
)~! . X
mux = ( ~ 4 + 9J!/a2 - 2)

~r
24J!
0 + m A 2p L = 2( -2I P L . L 8 ) w + ( I - 2p )L . L 8 w
UJIL x X y 3 U X y
2 u w L2 a 2 · ··
Y·
( ~ 4 + 9J!/a
2
:. 2mUJI 8 pI a = wU Ly . LX 8 ( 3 - 4p ) I 6 or muy = ;/ - 2)
...... (III)
IIf
Now Im unnn
L e = l: wuAs g
8 :. (I) + (II)
. + (III) gives : w L2
1
lG· or muy =·~
24
( ...J4 + 9J!/a2 - 2) ...... (9.8.26)
2mUX A a IP + 2muy 8p I a =. wU Ly . LX 8 ( 3 - 2p ) I 6
...... (IV)
l¥f On substituting muy = J.l mux in to Eq. IV, MODE-II

~Jr
In modeii type offailure (Fig. 9.8.8 (v) b), the yield lines emerging from the intersection of
A2 . ,
a ( J!JJ ) . . ·axes ofrotations cut each other at pointE and the third yield line EF is formed. Let line EF be
~
--;:;--- I + - a 2-
2muxl-' = wuLy. x
L ( 3 - 2p ) I 6
.( . .'
given virtual displacement 8. The segments I and II are identical. The virtual work equation for
!Ill or m =--
wuLx
2
3p -2P 2 these segments are as follows.
lf; uy 12 (I + y p2) ...... (V)
SEGEMENT-1
\""~/ 8
! !
where, y J!la 2 ex = L 12 ' ey = O
For maximum vahieofmux,
am .. ·.
amA ux = 0
a'"'
...... (Va)
I
m 8 - [ 1 LX 8 LX 8
--L+0--13L-.--+(1-13)L--
ux L 12 Y 2 Y 2 3 Y 2 2
X

J w
u
X
2 ........ (I)
:. apux = (l+yp )(3 -4p)- (3p -2P 2 )2yp = 0 2mwe a = wu Ly Lx (3- 213) /12
3 -4P 3p -2p 2 .
or 2yp = I+yfp2 ( ...... (VI) SEGEMENT- II
i.e. 3y P 2 + 4P - 3 = 0 ' The virtual work equation is same aS (I) i.e.
2mUX a = wU Ly LX (3- 213) /12 ...... (II)
The possitive root ofabove equation is

t<~ 4 + 9y -
8 0
p = 2) ...... (9.8.25) SEGEMENT - Ill ey ~ 13L , ex
. y
~,,. '' On substituting 13 from Eq. 9.8.25 in to Eq. (V) and noting that
313 -213 2 3 -4P
8 1
m · - L =2- LX I3L-
uy 13L X
8
Y 3
wU
. = A we have , y
I+yl3 2
,.
2YP or muyl a 13 = wULy LX 1316 ...... (III)
1li
\,
_[_ ___ _
 504 Sial?
Chapter 9 Sect.9.8 Yield Line Theory 505
Adding Eq. I + II + Ili , we get
4a 111Ia +muy I a p = w
·u [( LYX
L ) I 6 ] ·(3 - 2p + p ) 9.8.9 Equlibrium Method
but muu = llm '
-, ICC 2 9.8.9.1 Introduction
ll L
. . a mux { a 2 p + 4) = w, · a -f (3 - p) In this method, the ultimate load or ultimate moment is obtained from the yield line pattern,
considering equilibrium of each segment of the slab formed by yield lines, under the action of
_l_ 2 (3-p) - .1::_ external load and internal forces consisting of bending moment, torsional moment and shear force.
or mux - 6 w, · Lx (yip + 4) where y - a These equations are solved simultaneously to arrive at ultimate load or ultimate moment. But
2
=l_w (3p-p2) ·L2 the check is not exerci8eto ensure that the moments within the segments between the yield line do
not exceed the ultimate moment of resistance of the sections. Therefore, in this yield line theory,
6 U X ( y+4p)
'I' . ...... (9.8.27) the equilibrium method is not a lower bound solution in a true sense.
'I''j
,', [,
I om
For maximum value of miCe' op = 0 ICC
In the virtual work method, since there is no relative movement between two segments on
om two sides of yield lines, the corresponding shear forces and torsional moments are equal and
•I"
opposite in, the adjacent elements and the internal work ·done by them is zero. However, in
:. opux = (y+4P)(3-2p)- (3P-P 2)(4) =o equilibrium method, since the equilibrium ofeach segment is considered separately, all the internal
ill! 2
3p- P 3 - 2p forces (viz. bending moment, torsional moment and shear force) are required to be taken into
:rJ,t· or y + 4p = 4 account. Thus, for equilibrium-method it is necessary to know the magnitude and distribution of all
:II!
2
...... (IV) the internal forces before the method can be used.
ill: or 4p + 2yp - 3y = 0
The positive root of this equation is 9.8.9.2. Nodal Forces
Consider a rectangular slab supported along its edges and loaded by a uniformly distributed

p - 2
_ Y[~fr----1
v 4 + y3 - 21] ·
...... (9.8.28)
. load. A general yield line pattern dividing the shib into four segments A, B, C, D is shown in
Fig. 9.8. 9 (i). The variation of shear force, bending moment al!d torsional moments along the yield
line be is shown in Fig. 9.8.9 (ii), wherein moments have been shown using vector notation
On substituting the above value ofp into Eq. 9.8.27 and using Bq.IV we get
wu Ly2 (right hand rule). Since any system of coplanar forces can be replaced by two equivalent forces,
mux = ~ (3 -2P) the actual shear forces, acting along the yield lines due to transverse shear and torsional shear can
... ii
...... (9.8.29) be replaced by two equivalentforces, one at each end of the length of a yield line . Thus, for a yield
·,. But (3 -2P)
=l-y [Y t+f - +J line be, the shear forces are replaced by single force qbc at b and qcb at c , where be or cb
represent yield line under consideration and the first subscript denotes the end at which the force
acts.
The statically equivalent force acting on the segment A are shown in Fig. 9.8.9 (iii). It will
=3-yxyj_+_! +l be seen that for the ·segment A, the total forces acting at b, known as nodal force, is equal t0.
' ' ' 4 y 2
(qba +que) and willbe referred to as QAb'

=3 + .:L-
4 -vr
-rr V3 + ·4r + L4 Hence' QAb = qba + qbc

J = a~ '
2 In the symbol for nodal force, first sufftx ( A in this case) refers to the segment and the
. '=[v-.. · . 3 + 1._ 4 - rr
2 putting y secqnd (b in this case) to the node. Similarly, the nodal force at b in segment B is QBb and at bin

:;:.
;::' 1#'~. ... · . ·w,-L2[
.... ·. 24
·=·.·---.
.
:~,;« ;,LIL and j.l = m lm
. Y. .X· '• .,, ' uy ICC
..
v
~· ,' . '
.
3
4a-
ll '
·2 ,.. - 2a
+ .,._.,
ff ]2
·
...... (9.8.30)
segment Cis QCb as shown in Fig. 9.8.9 (iv). Equilibrium of the slab requires that the sum of
stationary equivalent force at the point of intersection of yield line must be equal to zero.

:., QAb + QBb + QCb · = 0

 J

._) 508 Slab

Chapter 9 Sect.9.8 Yield Line Theory 509
Let the yield line ce make an acute angle with the free edge.
2
From Eq. 9.8.32, the nodal force ate acting on segment p having actue
(acting downward) and is given by:
angle~ i.s -ve m~ <-yl _ p2) m~ [1-y~
y
] = w ~2L2/6
u y
Q8e = - (mh e cot~ + mM)
cot ~ = PLX I Ly = pI(Ly I LX) = p/ a .
.. m~
=[ y
1-yf32
Jwu ~2 L/
6
.. .... (II)
.;_,· mhe = Bending moment for yield line along the direction of fi·ee edgtl = m~
Elliminating m from Eq. I and II

~
mre = Twisting moment along the direction of free edge = 0
QBe = -m~ Pia w~L 2 ~} -~ 413
24 f3
J= wu 1-'r:t2 Ly2
6
[ y
1-yf3
2
J
QAe = + muy P/a acting upward on segment A at e.

: r~l
' llj
Similarly,
.QAJ = QAe = m~ PI a acting upward on segment A atj.
3 - 4f3
f3
= [ 4yf32
1- yf3 2
J
~- 1,,,

,!· 1
Consider now the equilibrium of segments A and B. :. 3- 4f3 -3 y 13 2 + 4 y f3 3 4 y f3 3
2
SEGMENT-A .. 3y f3 + 4f3 - 3 = 0.
':Jr~ Taking moments about the axis of rotauo.'l he, .. f3 = ( ..[4 + 9y - 2) I 3y ...... (9.8.33)
~!,:.",,
iii·'
li'' [:
(Component in the direction he of the moments along yield line lengths h/and ec) +
(moments due to upward forces atf and e about he)- (moment due to downward uniformly Substituting this value of 13 in Eq.l we get the value of m uy. Let us first obtain the value of
"'~;,~Iq distributed load acting over area bfec about' he)= 0. (3 - 4f3) I f3 by substituting the value of f3
iii I 9y-4"4+9y +8
:. 2m~·PLx +2muy·(Pia)·Ly -2(7Swu PLLL/3)-(l-2f3)L·L·wLI2=0 3 - 4f3 3 9y
llliifl
d:•ll
xyy xy uy
f3 = If - 4 = ~ 4 + 9y - 2 - = 4
~4+9y -2
) =
(213 L + 2p LX
:. m~X w p a 2 LX 3 I 3 + (I - 2p) wll a 2 LX 3 I 2
l:.~l i·I', {~4+9y }2 4~4+9y +4 d4+9y -2)2
U
2 2 -
:. 4P m~ = wU a LX ( 2p + 3 - 6B ) 16 = wUa 2 LX2 (3 - 4r:t) I 6
1-'
~4+9y -2 {4+9y -2
llif:!!i or m
~
wuL/ [3 -4p
24 p
J 3 - 4f3
"4+9y -2
·nnl SEGMENT-S:
...... (I) / f3
.wL
2
wL 2
1.,Y:.;j; u y u y .
Taking moment about axis of rotation cd, FromEq.I,m~ =~ N4 + 9y- 2}=~(~ 4 + 9JL/a 2 - 2) (9.8.34)
.IW• (Component in the direction ofcd of moment along yield line length ce) :-- (moment due to As worked out in Ex. 9.8.5, mode - II type of failure is possible and its solution using
l !i'· downw aJ:dnodal.fbmeQ
cde about cd) = 0.
8 • ate about cd)- (moment due to downward uniform load on area equilibrium method on the same lines can be obtained and the maximum value gives the ultimate
moment
iIF' mIa ·Ly - m~ (f31a)·f3LX - YlwU Ly f3LX f3L.X 13 ·= 0
Ex. 9.8. 7 A rectangular slab ABCD of si$e ·6m X 5m as shown in Fig. 9.8.1(vii) is
Substituting m I m = 11 and L I L = a
freely supported on side AD and continuous along the remaining edp,es. The moments
~r
~ux · Yx
2
mu(a
; t/u) x - m!.~' (p Ia ) L
· rL ·..( - wuai - L 2I 6 = 0
r:t 2' x (m' ) at the restrained edges AB and CD are 1.33times the niaximUl."'
~ .
mid-span moment mIa
IlL 2
:. m"Y(a/11- 13 /a) = wuaf3 2 L/16 · and the moment ( m' ) at edge BC is 1.32 times the maximum mid-span moment nr
.~ . ~
The ratio of maximum span moment m~ I m~ = 0.7777. Determir~e the design
~~· .. mll)l(a2/JL- 132)
=
2
wU a 13 2 LX2 !6. = wU 13 2 Ly2 16 moment m when the slab is loaded by a uniformly distributed load of intensity .wu.
~ .
Substituting JL/ a2 =y
IM ·
*
These ratios correspond to ·ratios' of B.M coefficients a.y 'la.y and a.X 'Ia.X for Ly I LX. = 1.2 for,
Case-2 of Ta~le '1.5,2 prescribed .bjJJ.S. Code.
llru..
 !"

~
s~o Slab (~-,

*'·"~
r Chapter 9· Sect.9.8 Yield Line Theory 5]] ' +\: ~

r
12=1.32 c L
I!
. I .x This is based on the assumption of main steel over the entire portion of the slab. However, !i
code modifies the values of B.M. coefficient so that the entire moment in a width L is provided

~;
y
only in middle strip of width o/4 Ly . Therefore, the B.M. co-efficient is modified as follows :

.~~ ~11
II rn
rnl'
ay = 0.20821(114) = 0.028. and a X = 0.026771(314) = 0.036

L
\ /-- I

~
!

This corresponds to values of ay and aX given in Table 9.5.2, i.e. the ultimate moment of
... ,,, D resistance mIIJ' and mux provided by slab in middle strip L 2 and
. .per unit width is equal to 0. 028 wux
2
.14=0 0.036wU LX respectively corresponding to Ly I LX = 1.2
11! I yj-- Lx=Sm -...j The above comparison is valid because the values of i 1, i2 , i3 and the ratio muy I mux have
been taken as per code values ( IS : 456- 2000. Table - 26. Case - 2)
Data Fig. 9, 8. 9 (vii)
I· 9.8.10 Corner Levers
·Y I LX = a = 6/5 = 1·2 ,
L The elastic analysis of plates shows that the comers of a simply supported plate tend to lift
1.1 = m'IIJ'Imux=o.nn off the support if not held down. In such plate, the axis of rotation, cutting the corners
diagonally, is fonned and the positive yield line tends to fork near the comer. These are known as
il = i3 = 1.33, i2 = 1.3 2
and ;4_= ~ corner levers. The triang~Jlar portion of the comer region rotates about diagonal axis across the
Solution supporting edges and lifts offthe support as shown in Fig. 9.8.1 Oa. If the slab is held down without
From Eq. 9.8.23 ,

+he"· ~··
+
wu 6Qll.lm'IIJ'
=
l
,'J;
['
p
L
y
2
( -.J fila 2 + 3J.l
-
=
- Ra)2
I
= ...fl+il + ...j 1 + ;3 T~ xl- .
II
li :~·
( a ) Up lilt portion ( b ) Corner restrained no top steel ( c rcorner reStrained top steel present
1: = ...j 1 + 1.33 + ...j 1 + 1.33 = 3.053
. Fig. 9.8.10 Corner Levers
Q = .YT+ ;2 + ...j 1 +;4 provision .of top steel, the slab tends to crack along this diagonal (Fig. 9.8.1 Ob). However with
provision of necessary top steel and comers held down, the comer levers do· not fonn and the
= " 1+ 1.32 + ...j 1+ 0 . = 2.523 diagonal yield line reaches the comer without fonnation offork as shown in Fig. 9.8.10c. The
R
=P/Q :::: 3.053/2.523 = 1.21
overall effect of these comer levers is to reduce the ultimate load ,capacity of the slab. For an
isotropically reinforced, unifonnly loaded square slab simply supported along its edges, with
1'.,

6 X. 2.5232 X 0~ 7777 mU)l comers held down an:d no top steel, ·the redu~tion in ultimate load is 9.6%: The reduction in strength
w
.II =· -L-;2;-.:-
.. ""i·r-;::::==:==:;:: increases with the decrease in comer angle. Hence the effect is more significant for triangular
2 2
y1.21 + 1.2 + 3 X 0.7777 -1.21
( '/ X J.2i slabs with acute angle comers.
.~ 69.13 m IL 2
. . . •\ .-.m'IIJ' ·=·(}.Oi446 I. ;.L II y
9.8.11 Circular Slabs
A circular slab can be regarded as a polygonal slab with sides tending to infinity. Therefore,
, . or /, )n
9 ;..o.o2o82 w L/ sin~_Ly = 1..2Lx
11
co~ider an isotropically reinforced regular sided polygonal slab fixe<\ along the edges and loade4
and mux by a unifonnilly distributed load of intensity w11 •
=:(().02082/0.7777) w L 2 = 0.02677w L 2
. II X, II X .Let the positive and negative Qltimate moment of resistance per unit width be equal tom, and
 .:_)

512 Slab
Chapter-9
m' . Let the length of each side of polygon beL and radius of inScribed circle be r. The postulated
yield line pattern is shown in Fig. 9.8. 1I. Since the yield linesm~ting in the interior of the slab
are all positive moment yield lines and are governed by the same niesh, the nodal forces at the
centre are zero. Consider the equilibrium of segm_entAOB. · · CHAPTER 10
Taking moments about the axis ofrotationAB,
DESIGN OF BEAM
!'
i';
,: 10.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
The layout of the beams are often controlled by positions of columns and the architectural
considerations. The beams are normally provided over the columns, under the walls and under
iI
( ' I• 'heavy concentrated loads to avoid these loads directly coming on slabs. Since beams are
primarily provided to support slabs, their spacing is decided by the maximum span of the slab.
ml Slab requires maximum volume of concrete to carry a given load and hence it is economical to
! , 'I
keep the thickness of the slab minimum. Therefore, adjust the spacing of beams such that the
Iff!· 1
Fig. 9.8.11 Yield Line Pattern for Polygonal slab thickness of the slab preferably does not exceed 200 mm.
Beams are primarily flexural members and their cross-sectional dimensions are determined
'>\j 1[11.
!'I
(m u + m·')L
u ---= w.(Lr/2).(rl3)=
u wu .Lr 2 16 . from bending moment considerations. Since the bending moment varies with the square of depth,
~!!J:;:.,1i,; :" or wu ;,- 6Tm·u +iii~)
u Ir
2
...... (9.8.35) its strength is affected more by its depth than its width. Reinforced concrete beam requires
determination of its cross- sectional dimensions and area of steel to resist the bending'moment,
Eq. 9.8.35 can be applied to a wide range of cases of regular sided slabs fiXed along the shear force and torsion. At the sapte time serviceabilitY requirements need to be con~idered to
jll'~] edges by substituting appropriate values for r. For example equilateral triangular slab having n = 3, ensure that the member will behav~. satisfactorily under working loads.
r =L/2 {3; square slab having n =4, r = L/2; hexagonal slab having n = 6, r = {3 L/2 ; _·
\i[iil and a circular slab having .n = co , r = r . 10.2 PRELIMINARY ANALYSIS
~;~~)-_]:
.ill i For circular slab as n --+ co , L --:-+ 0 and r becomes the radius of the circle. Therefore. 10.2.1 Beam Sizing
l)ll:tlll W11 = 6 (m11 + m '11) I?- ...... (9.8.36) · The cross - sectional dimensions of the beam consist of fixing of breadth and depth of the
f!/i beam. The breadth of the beam is normally determined.from practical considerations. Since from
1 where , r is the radius of the circle.
functional and aesthetics considerations it is undesirable to have offset Inside the room, the width
This can also be applied to study the effect of comer levers (Sect. 9.8.9) wherein r =has · of the 'beam is taken equal to the thickness of the wall. Further for effective transfer of:load from
1m I
Up_''
shown in Fig. 9.8.10. The region of uplift..; x is maximum = 0.16 L 'and h'.is x beam to the column the breadth of the beam should not exceed the width of the column. It is
normally taken in multip)i_es of 50 mm or in modules of3" for brick size of 9" x 4~ ". Sometimes
~~-111 2
minimum= 0.52 L giving maximum m11 =W11 L 122 for a square isotropic plate when no comer .
I the shallow beams are provided to meet the special requirements of getting necessary headroom
reinforcement is provided .'
(1[1 and rarely hidden beams having depth equal to the thickness of slab are provided to avoid
I·
For further advanced topics like effect of point loads., line'loads, openings, affmity,theorem, appearance of rib of the beam from the underside from aesthetics considerations. Initially the
!I,
jj; · lower bound solution, and Hillerborg strip method, readers attention is drawn to suitable breadth equal to one third to one half the depth of the beam is taken and rounded out in
II. multiples of 50 mm or in modules of3". '

~rr references- (62/4, 6717, 6913, 7112, 7l/17, 72/10, 73/9,7517,7718,8012, and 84/l ).
Remarks:
..: ,..;
.,

The code does not specify the minimum wid!h of beam I column. The present practice is to use;-fJ.:ilJJ~Jm
,,m~ width of beam/ column to get more floor area and to avoid offset inside the rooms. It would be realized tl,at .
with the provision of 150 mm_ width, leaving aside the minimum cover; one would hardly be'tJjt with
required core concrete which plays an important role in durability response. There exists possibility of
\lllf! operative slenderness damage. Therefore, the authors discourage the use of 150 mm width of column and
recommend to use minimum width o/ 200 mm for column (preferably 300 mm) from serviceability and
.11m1 durability considerations. Authors,. also do not recommend provision of hidden beams.

~mi
 /"'-:..!

!HI! Priliminary Analysis 515

Sect. 10.2
514 Design of !Jearn Chapter 10 Since the slab is designed taking its width equal to unity the load transferred to the beam for
The effective span ( L ) of the beam is calculated as detailed in Sect. 9.3. The depth ofthe its one meter length will be equal to the sum of the slab shear on two sides of the beam
! :I beam is taken between L 110 to L 116 depending on the span and loading. The lower value of 10 (See Fig 3.5.1b ) ·
to be ~dQ}ned for heavy superimposed loads and/or long spans and the larger value of 16 for small This can be expressed as :
spans and light loads. Alternatively, the depth of the beam is taken equal to 2/3 the depth required (i) For slab- beam system load on intermediate beam/per meter length
[, ...... (10.2.1)
/'
~ I to resist maximum sagging moment obtained for superimposed load, assuming a balanced section. = w (Lx I 2 + Lx2 12)
1
The adequacy of the depth is checked from ultimate moment considerations. Since the depth of (ii) For beam supporting cantilever slab. (Fig. 3.5.1 c)
...... (10.2.2)
the beam is normally greater than L I 16Jhe deflection requirements get satisfied for most Load on beam !m = w x LX
situations. If the depth is less than L I 16; deflection check is required to be taken because for In addition to this the beam is subjected to torsionofwL/ /2
bw lbf < 0.2 which is the normal case the reduction factor is 0.8 and with increase in percentage (-

of tension steel modification factor for tension steel reduces and may become less than unity. The (b) Loads on beams supporting two- way slab :
rare possibility of design shear exceeding the permissible maximum shear is avoided by increasing A two - way reinforced slab is supported on all four edges and the main reinforcement is
the section of the beam. provided in both directions and hence load distributions is trapezoidal on long beams and ·. ' ·
The types of the beam having different sections are kept minimum from practical triangular on short beams with the base angle of 45° as shown in Fig 3.5.2. The ordinate of
considerations so that the same formwork can be reused. Once the cross-sectional dimensions trapezoidal and triangle load is equal to wLx I 2. These trapezoidal and triangular loads are
are determined the area of steel is calculated to resist ultimate moment ensuring that the section converted into equivalent uniformly distributed loads by using equivalence factors and are
does not become over -reinforced. The shear reinforcement is designed to resist shear force and
torsion, if any. The development length requirements are checked and the cracking is taken care given by:
off by adhering to rules pertaining to detailing ofreinforce!Jlents such as minimum clear cover, Short span beam : ......( 10.2.3a)
minimum quantity of reinforcement, maximum distance between bars etc. Arrangement of weqb = wLx 13
...... ( 10.2.3b)
reinforcement is also constrained by practical considerations such as construction tolerance, clear and, weqs =wL/4
x
distance between bars and available bar sizes and length.

10.2.2 Computation of Loads

This is one of the most important step in the design process. The correct estimation of the
load leads to safe and economical design of the beam~ The load on the beam consists of dead load,
Long span beam :

weqb -
wLx
2 ll-
l -3 ~2
1
J ...... (10.2.4a)
..
,.;:-\

live load and some special fixed load if any. The live load on floors changes depending on their
functional use.( See Appendix B )
In the slab ~ beam system or framed structure the loads are transferred from slab to the
beam and then 1o the column and finaily to the footing and soil underneath. The transfer of load
Weqs -

w
wLx
2 t- ~]
= intensity ofload on slab LX= short span of the slab
...... (10.2Ab)

from slab to beam depends on the type, of slab viz whether it is a one - way slab or a cantilever where, .

slab or a two·- way slab. LY = long span of the slab ~ = L/ Lx =Long span I Short span
weqb = equivalent intensity of UDL for bending moment
(a) Lqads on beam supporting one - way slab
w = equivalent intensity of UDL for shear.
In the case of one-way slab ( either supported on opposite edges or for L I L > 2 and · slab iscontinuous
If the eqs over the beams continuity factors are applied for accurate analysis.
supported on all four edges) the toad from the slab is primarily transferred to the blam i~ the short In addition to the loads transferred from the slab the beam may carry wall load and/or
li . direction along which the main reinforcement i:; pr':wided. Fig 3.5.1a shows the area of the slab concentrated load transferred from secondary beams. In majority of the cases the plinth beams
l!li carry only wallload.The next step1s to assume the section of the beam as per the guide lines given
transferring the load to fJle beam and is equal to L ( Lxl I 2 + Lx2 I 2)
1: .. Loe4onth~beam = w.L(LX1 12+L ~12) ...... (Eq. 3.5.1) in Sect. 10.2.1 and calculate its self weight. It may be noted that for slab- beam construction the
i . ~
self weight of the beam is due to rib portion of the beam only. The total load, consisting of self
where, w = Intensity ofload on the slab. weight ofthe beam, load transfepooo from sla\:1, and wall load, is calculated per meter length of the
L · = Span of the beam
I !;1• I'xi =·Spans of the slabs on either side of the beam. (Normally, Lxl =L.,.,)
beam and concentrated load fu:im secondarv beam. if anv. is added to it.
 516 Design of Beam Chapter 10
'!
10.2.3 Analysis . 10.5 BEAM DESIGN
(a) The analysis is made for ultimate load which is equal to service load multiplied by lOad
factor of 1.5 The structural analysis is made assuming an elastic system eventhough the ultimate
load may cause non - linear effects. So, once the loads are deteiniined the elastic analysis for
ultimate load is carried out to obtain bending moments and shearing forces at various criticai ·
sections. In the case of continuous beam the different loading arrangements are required to be
considered when live load exceeds threeforths of dead load or when the stability is critical or
when the redistribution of moments are to be considered.
The various methods of analysis normally used in practice are given as under :
(i) Moment Distribution Method or Kani 's Method
. ... ·~
These methods are normally used for hand computations.
Sect. 10.5 Beam Design 517
The design of beam can be carried out as per the steps given below :
l. Span : Determine the effective span ( L). For details see Sect. 9.3. The effective span can
be approximately taken equal to cent~t9 center distance between.ne supports provided supports
are not tQO wide. · ··
2. Loads imd Trial Section ~· Calculate the superimposed load transferred the from slab, wall,
and the load from secondary beam, if any. Assume the width and depth of the beam as per the
details given in Sect. 10.2. Assume effective cover:between 40 mm to 70 mm, narrower the
section greater is the cover d'. Decide whether the beam is acting as a flanged section or a
rectangular section (see Sect. 4.12.1 ). It is again emphasized that in the case of a flanged
· section part of the slab acts along with the beam in resisting compressive forces provided slab lies

. l/
Hill (ii) Matrix Method or Finite Element Method
in the compression zone with respect to bending ofthe beam, and provided both slab and beam are
effectively bonded together. .
. ,.-·:!. . : These methods are more accurate and are preferred, when there is easy access to computer
< ji . 3.2
and required software is available.
/
I~ l '1· · (iii) Approximate Methods. 3. ~
v
/
(a) Coefficient method: The analysis of colltinuous beams, which support substantially
ull:'·· UDL over three or more spans which do not differ by more thari 15 % of the longest span, is v ~

carried out using I.S. Code coefficients given in Table 9. 4.1. For moments at supports where two
v v ~
...... .......
fl unequal spans meet or in case where spans are not equally loaded, the average of the two values I/ 1/ !.;"
v ~ (;i== p 1,...- """
b=o=

IUfl
for the negative moment at the support may be taken for design.
(b) Substitute Frame Method :
l 2.
5

L:: ~
·~
v v:: ~ ~
p ...,.I--" """'
~

This method is used for analysis of non - sway frames, subjected to vertical loads. (See Sect. 13) ...,... ~~ .v
lill( (c)Cantilever method or Portal method: The sway analysis of framed. structures are
~ /~ lLv
carried out using these methods. (See Chap. 13) · w
JW.r Q 2 .l~ ~
u..· ·~
u..
w ./
10.3 SLENDERNESS LIMITS FOR BEAMS TO ENSURE LATERAL STABILI'fY(69/6)
A beam is primarily a vertical transverse load canyingmember. However for long spans the
0
0 ~ 'I v
Jml compression face of the beam may bend laterally. This behaviour is required to be taken care of
J.rf_ /
~ lL

,~1
especially for steel beams and struts. J.'lj
The code specifies slende,rness limits for lateral stability as under : 1.5
IJV
A simply supported or continuous beam shall be so proportioned that the clear di'stance r1 . t--bf---1
between the lateral restrains does not exceed 60b or 250 b2 I d whichever is less, where dis the
effective depth of the beam and b the breadth of the compression face midway between the
j.

I
·Tf~
L_.
lateral restraints. For a cantilever, the clear distance from the free end of the Cantilever to the .\
-lbwl-
t .0 ..
Jlf;' lateral restraint shall not exceed 25 b or 100b2 / d whichever is less. I Ig,= k1bw D3/12
/
!> .5 10 15 20
lfi' 10.4 DEEP BEAM RATIObtlbw-
l~i j
r '
A beam shall be deemed to be a deep beam when the ratio of effective span to overall 11 . Flg.lO.S.l MOIIleat oflllertia ofFiaage ~a .
Ill depth, LID is less than :
·:rnlb.~.~·~~ fl9ilr System, continuous beam actS 8S a T- ~on at the mid- span and
! (i) 2.0 for simply supported beam, and (ii) 2.5 for a continuous beam.
i··~

;J_;i'·(·
U·.H: The deep beam rarely occur in practice. The design and analysis of deep beam is out of the scope . as: ~~lar· beaut at the 5uppo!f, due to development of tensile stresses at the top. For the
of this book. . .. of~ss
coinpi,ltation . .the question
•/ arises whether one shc:mld take 'the moment of inertia of a
il:i!
 ~~~
:r;
'
t !~
518 Design of Beam Chapter 10 · Sect. 10.5 Beam Design 519

fl~ge - section or a rectangular section ? With regards to flange - section there is considerable

~
lOOAs) 85
ditterence of opinion ( 83/ 5, 85 /5, 88/4 ). Flange- section certainly provides more stiffness in p .% =--=--% (Eq;-&8.4)
the positive moment regiori.. The true stiffness is that of a span with variable moment of inertia. t.mm bd f
y
The moment of inertia of flanged section based on gross area of concrete can be determined with ;t
the use of coefficients shown in Fig. I0. S.l The assumptions of rectangular section is easier for for Fe. 250, p .mm.
1
= 0.34% Fe 415, p1.mm. = 0.205%,· Fe SOO, p,,.,Ill. = 0.17%
calculations. It gives highermo~ents in oolumns. Calculate the self weight of the beam. Thus
asswning the trial section calculate the ultimate load on the beam per meter length. (iv) Check for width : IfN is the number ofbars that can be accommOdated in one row then
required width of beam is given by :
l Design moment : Using appropriate method of analysis calculate design moments and Required width
shearing forces at various critical sections. If live load exceeds 3/4 of dead load or if stability is = 2 c + N~ + ( N -J) c ...... (IO.S.I)
critical or if redistribution of moments to be done then consider various loading arrangements 1 2
...., where, ~ = diameter of large bar
( See Sect. 3.$.3 ) to arrive at maximum positive moment, maximum negative moment and
maximum shear. Carty out the redistribution of moments in case of indeterminate structures, if C1 = clear cover +dia of stirrup
\I desired, limiting the percentage of redistribution of momentto 30 % perferably between 15% to c2 = clear distance between main bars
i.'.t
ilf 20% ( See Sect. 3. 7 ) , = [ ~ or ( maximum aggregate size + 5 mm ) ] whichever is greater
\ ~I· N = number of bars in one row
'i 4. Calculate the Depth from B.M Considerations :
(a) For a rectangular section calculate the required depth of the beam for maximum sagging
moment assuming balanced section and revise the assumed depth if necessary.. (v) For two or inore rows ,
'
Minimum clear vertical distlmce between bars shall be (15mm or 2/3 x maximum
\.'' ~i·
\ ·,
(b) For flanged section calculate the flange width ( Eq. 4.12.1 ), moment of resistance of
the section for xu= D1using ( Eq.4.13.4) anddecide whether the neutral axis lies inside the
flange or outside flange and accordingly calculate M using appropriate equations. For continuous
aggregate size or maximum bar diameter} whichever is greater
'·
\1· beam calculate maximum span moment and poin~of contraflexures, using equations given in (vi) Total area of Side face reinforcement for depth of web > 750 mm,
n Sect. 3.5.4 · · = 0.1 o/o of web area, distributed equally on two faces at
uI'
spacing :1> 300mm or web thickness whichever is less.
\I 5. Main steel arid Shear Reinforcement :
Depending on the type of beam (whether rectangular section or flanged section) calculate (vi) Curtailment of .Reinforcement : .
jil, the area of steel at mid- span. For continuous beams design the support section as doubly The curtailment ofmain steel in beams is related to the bending moment diagram, co~ppta;.
·I
reinforced seetion or rarely as a singly reinforced section and obtain the area of tension and tion of points of conttaflexures and adhering to the conditions specified for continuation of bars
il
as
':\\\·
compression steel if required. The bar detailing rules given inSect. 8.10.3 should be adhered to.
I beyond the theoretical point of curtailment and requirements of development length discussed
in Chapter- 8 under detailing, and the steps given for design of shear reinforcement in S,ct. 5.8.
:\1 ' I - Reinforcement Requirements for Beam : However , simplified ,curtailing rules given in Sec. 8.1 0. 4 may be used provided the beams ate
;ill•·r' . Eventhough the details of main steel, shear reinforcement have been given in the respective designed. predom~antly for uniformly distributed loadS and in the case ofcontinuous beams the
i~ I
:\j! chapters, the same have been reproduced as per the notations adopted for ready reference. spans do not differ by more than 15% of the longest span.
il'
·;q
:~.1!1 I (a) MainSteel. ,
6.Design of shear reinforcement :

t
(i) Required area of steel for singly reinforced sections : If the reactions at the ends of the beam are not the sanie design of shear reinfOrc:einent
n~ to be calculated for both ends..
fc~c
A = 0.5
st
fy
1- 1- f
ck
bcf Jbd ! 1
(Eq.4.S.6a)
(i) Spacing of stirrups for Desiin shear reinforcement is given by : ·
0.87 fA d
i
s = ' sv. < lesserof(0.75dor300mm) ... ... (Eq.5.8.7).
for flanged section with xu ,:s D , substitute b in plac;e of b in the above equation . VII& .
1 1
(ii) Maximum area of tension or compression steel+ 0.04 bD
(iii) Minimum percentage of steel 1 I For beam with UDL of intensity wu the length
. of design shear reinforcement/zone is given by;
1
'li Illustrative Examples .521
l! ~20 Design of Beam ~}>fer~JO ..:-..-;;.. Sect. 10.6
\!(
-!! L1/ =(Vll.mat -Vur.mm.)lwu fl!#•tB) G~en fc1c =20 N/m,Z, fy = 250 N I m,Z, Effective span L= 4.6m
Wall thickness = tw = 230. mm, wall height = H = 4m
where, vIO'.min = v~ + vUS\I.min
Unit weight of masonry = · ~ = 20 kN I M'
where, Vlliv.min = shear resisted by minhnum stimips = 0.4bd . (Etj,$.6.9)
Jttuiml: Design oh plinth beatn.
(ii) rSpacing of stirrups forMinimum shear reinforcement
l
. 0.87f A I solutloi.:
s = y sv (Eq-.5.6.8) Loads :
0.4b Width of the~ . = b =width of wall= 230 mm. , d = L /15 = 4600/15 = 307 mm
Assume total depth of beam =D = 400 titm

.
7. Check for deflection : Load on the beamlm·:
II
•''' Calculate the allowable Vd ratio as per the details given in Sect.8.6.3 and check th8t Wallload = ~x t x H · = 20 x 0.23 x 4 = 18.40kNim
·'
.
I.
(d) d <(d) ''dedelse increase the depth. In the case of a simply supported beam or continuouS
~ .
'II'
=
Selfweight ofbeam 25 x b x D = 25 x 0.23 x 0.4 = 2.30 kN I m
~~ : beam having depth greater than L I 16 the deflection criteria is normally satisfied. Total working load == 20.1· kN I m.
If required actual deflection should be calculated and checked with permissible value as Ultimate load = wII =15 X 20.7 = 31.05 leN I m.
J: -,,
detailed in Sec. 8.5
'Yj 8. Check for cracking : Design Moment : MII = wII L2 18 = 31.05 x 4.62 /8 = 82.13 kN.m
For practical design, compliance with the detailing rules are sufficient to control flexure
r cracking. For important structures actual cracked width should be calculated and checked with the
permissible value as detailed in Sect.8.8.4
Design CQnslllnls :
700

r\j 9. Check for Bond

kll.mat = >
1100 + 0.87 X 250
= 0.53 ... ... (Eq.4.5.2c)

Bond is not very critical in beams. If required check for development length may be carried
.out at the end of simple support, at the point of contraflexure and at the end of cantflever · Rll.llltU = 0.36 X 20 X 0.53 (1-0.42 X 0.$3)= 2.97Nin~trf ... (Eq:4.5.5b)
~earn, as detailed In Chap. 6
/
;- M 82.13 x 106
~\r = 346,1mm
10.6· Illustrative Examples. Required d. = __!_ =
R~~.max b 2.97 X 230
'· The different types of the problem!! giv.en are practical oriented illustrating design for
flexure, curtailment, shear design, check fo~ development length and serviceability.. These are Provide.total depth ~400 mm,
Assuming +25 mm diameter bar. Diameter of stirrup 6 mm
as follows : . ·· ·
effective cover =clear cover+diametdof stirrups+ +t2 =· (20 + 6) + 25 /2·= 38.5 mm
EX. I 0. 6.1 Design of simply supported plinth. beam of rectangular .section carrying wall ICHJd.· Provided effective depth= d = 400- 38~5 361.5 mm =
Ex. I 0.6.2 Design of ovef'hanging floor beam.
Ex. I !J. 6. 3 Design of si,;ply supported . T-beam in a multipurpose hall. /
Ex. I 0. 6.4 .Des;gn of three - SPflll. contimlotl& beam without I with redistribution of moments.
Ex./0.6.5 Design of three- spaii cOIIIimlous beam with central beam subjected to torsion
Main steel:

~~~ =0.5
250
x20 t
1-
.
i- 4.6. X 82.13 X lW}·.
20 x230 xJ6l.S2 30.x 36l.S = 1299mnr2

due to o~erhanging con()py.

Provide. 3 :". 25 mm' . Area provickd = 147,2 mnl .
' 'BX.· J0.:6.1 De#ign a plitith' beonOo carry 230 mm thick bricklnaronry wal/4.0 min ~ight.
. ~'.bemn is ;f/mPJy&upported at ils.,nds and has·an effective sJ'OII of 4.6 nL .. Assis¥-iht C.htck for width : . . . . . .
-iredwid1h=l )( (20+6)+~ xlS:::Hl,.,t)x 2S=.l77mm<230 mm ... (Eq.I0.5.1) •
. ,W'Jiht ofbr.ici:;~.~.·.·:.:~qlltlflo 20kN ('Ill, .Use concr.ete grade M 20.QIIi(11fiJP)t~l ·•.·· .
·. ,~ment,\Jf:f#/'.~Mteqilo/ to 20 iiun. . .· . . . . .. .
 ."'·
522 Design of Beam
Design for shear : Chapter JO Sect. 10.(5 llustrative Examples 523
Maxhntim shear force at support
Ex. 10.6.2 The structural plan of a single storeyed assembly hall is shown in Fig 10.6.2,
v11./IUU = wII L/2 =31.05 X 4.612 = 71.42 kN The thickn(!ss of the wall is 230 mm.The he·ight of parapet wall along the periphery is 1 m
. P, =lOO X 14721(230 X 361.5) = 1.77% and thickness 230mm.The thickness ojone-way slab is120 mm. Liveload = 0.75kN I m;
t llc = 0. 75 +(0. 79- 0. 75) x 0.0210.25 = 0. 7532 N I mml Floor finish= 1.5 kN I~. Concrete grade of M20 and steel grade Fe 415 is use¢ Assume
... ... (Table 5.7.1) density of masonry equal to 20 kN I of. Design the overhanging beam ABC.

shear resisted by concrete = Vuc = t ucbd = 0. 7532x230x36.511 000 = 62.62 kN

-~,.~

Shear resistance of minimum stirrups= Vusv.mm. = 0.4 bd = 0.4 x 230: x367.511000 = 3.26/cN
f0 T' T
0 s1 0
Shear resistance of concrete with minimum stirrups · 10 ~s1 ~ ~ ~ ~s1
0

t
. ·i''' C\1
8
v . v v .
:. Minimum stirrups are sufficient,
v..
= 11r.mm = ·uc+ lltll.nun = 62.62+3.3:26 =95.88/cN > u max (=71.42/cN)
· ,J

'1li i
Using~ 6mm 2-legged stirrups,A.rv =2 x 28 =56 mml
0
jl! 8-.t
s1
spacings =0.87 f.y Asv 1(0.4b) = 0.87 x 250 x 56 1(0.4x 230) ~
. =132 mm sayl30 mm < (0. 75 d or 300 mm )
supportstirrups.~ 111nJ . 2 - legged stirrups at 130 mm
Provide~ . -··clc. and achor bars 2 Nos. ~· 1'0 mm to
0
0
0
co
~ ~ ~ ~ 1
t
0
0
0
-.t

Check for Deflection : L..~

A
...s J
... J'l L
Since actual L'd = 4600 I 361.5
= 12.72 <Basic LId ratio of 20
:. O.K.
j-aoo~oo~oo~oo~ooo-1-
Fig. 10.6.Z St~ctura\ Pl;n of o~er - hangi~g beam
4BOo -I
Check for Development Length ·
Given:
Ld =[0.87~1(4T~)]+=0.87x2501(4xi.2)=45.3~= 45.3x25 =Il32.5mm Simply supported span ofbeam L =8 mm, Over-hang =2.5m,
(..:-
.Assume width of support = 230mm
c/c distance. between
.
beams = L =3m
X .
LL = 0. 75 kNI~, FF = 1.5 kN I m;. ·
Now, Ld <I.3M/V+L
ji
0
...... ( Eq6.5.2) fat. =20Nim~,~ = 415Nim~ 11ticknessofslab =120mm,
il M1 = 82.13_kN.m., V = 71.42 kN. Thickness of wall = 230 mm, · Height of parapet= 1m
~I L0 = bs 12 - x + 13~
i
1
= 23012·- 2 x 25 .+ 13 x 25 = 390 mm
... ... ( Eq.9.4.3b) Required : Desig4 of an overhanging beam ABC
ll32.5 < 1885 mm ( = 1.3 x 82.13 x 1000/71.42 + 390) Solution : Since the slab is at the top of the beam, it will act !If, a T- beam. at midspan and a
li :. safe.
{i rec~gular section at support and over the cantilever.
;1
The details of reinforcement are shown in Fig. 10. 6.1 The width of the beam= thickness of wall= b = 230 mm; ·
Depth ofBeam forservieeability criteria :
i. Required depth = d = 8000 I ( 26 x 0.9 ) = 34Imm from deflection criteria.
f~2+10
I
!I'
li
I' Commena : As· menti~d 11i Sect. 8;6.3, comments on clt111Ses of basic LId ratio, separaie vui~«o.; cf L I d
li !~@130c/c cannot be giyenfor an ovtrhmiging beam when the cantilever moment is less thun the fixed end moment at
II . 3-+25
B (for span AB ); In slic/1 a case LId 1¢o is taun 7for cantilever and 20for .dmply supported portion of
In
beam A,B. this case si~ tile cqntilever moment will be approximately equal to fu:ed end moment, Ud
'I
.ratio is ;ak,en as JJ6 ksuming modification factor equal to 0.9, for petcentage of steel equal to 1.5 %
r
L
,, BUtthe depth of the beam is generally governed by the limif state of collapse.
ilI, Fig. 10,6.1 Reinforcement Details for Plinth hm Assumedepth ofili.e beam ;,. 450 mm. '
'I
 524 Design of Beam Jl/ustrative Examples 525
Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6
Loads :
Design of beam :
Slab load= L.F.x(25D + LL + FF)xLX = 1.5 ( 25 x 0.12 + 0.75 + 1.5) x3 = 23.61 k.N /m (a) At Mid- span
Self weight of beam due to rib portion = 1.5 :< 25 x ( 0.45- 0.12) x 0.23 = 2.84 kN I m For span AB : The section acts as a T- beam. Mu.max = 149;95../cN.m
Total ultimate UDL = wu = 23.63 +2.84 = 26.47/dl[ / m S"y 26.5 kN I m L = 6.73 m = Distance between the points of contratl~xures
0
Concentrated load at the free end due to parapet wall. = 1.5 ( 20 x 0.23 x·J.o ) x 3 '= 20.7 kN. b = (6.73 x 1000 I 6 + 6 x 120 +230) =2071 mm < 3oorimm
The loading diagram is shown Fig. I 0. 6.3a 'J.. 1
Assuming diameter of main steel of20 mm and 8 mm stirrups,
Effective cover = 20 + 8 + 20 I 2 = 38 mm
I Effective depth = 450-38 = 412mm,
lf·. i"
For xu = Df, Murl = [0.36 x 20 x 2071 x 120 (412- 0.42 x 120)] x lo-6 ,,; ( Eq. 4.13.4)
= 647 kNm > > 149.95 kN.m :. xu < D1
j1i1l/
89.15kN
J 1
Main Steel : [
I.Ofj1
r , ~
A c::::--:--__ D
,~ A =
0.5 X 20
1-
4.6 X 149.95 X 10J
. 2071 X 412= 1035tnnt
f;-3.364--+r • 415 . 20 X 2071 X 4122
JliW 89.2

hll·l'' (b) SFD

. '
; 1!
Provide 4 bars of# 20 mm, Area provided A81 = 1256 mm2
149.95kN/m

Ml
t(.::···
PI%= 100 X 1256 I (230 X 412) = 1.32%

!filli.l Al-3.364m-+jD E'\ IR .....----c (b) At Support : The section acts as a rectangular section
Support design moment = MuB = 134.6 kN.m.
IH. i (c) BMD 134.5 :CN!m
M =R bcf = 2.76 x 230 x 4122 x 10-6 = 107.75 kN.m. < 134.6 kN.m..
ur.max u.max ·

m·I The section is doubly reinforced

Fig. 10.6.3 SFD and BMD of Over-hanging Beam..
IJtj, xu.max = 0.48 x 412 = 197.76 mm

I~! Reaction RB = ( 26.5 X 10.5 X 10.5/2/+ 20.7 X 10.5) I 8 = 209.8 kN A = · ·

107.75 X J06
· = 907.3 m~
RA = (26.5 X 10.5 + 20.7)- 209.8 = 89.15 kN. stl 0.87 X 415 X (412 • 0.42 X 197.76)
lfi
Iii,
.;~· '

Ultimate Moments : Mu 2 = 134.6- 107.75 = 26.85 kN.m.

MuB = 20.7 x 2.5 + 26.5 x 2.5 x 2.5/2 = 134.6 kN.m
26.85 X 106
xmax = 89.15/26.5 · = 3.364 m from A ... ... ( Eq. 3.5.9) A = =199m~
Mu.max = 89.15 x 3.364/2 • 0 = 149.95 kN.m. .., ... ( Eq. 3.5.10) stl 0.87 X 415 X (412-:-38)
Midspan moment= 89.15 x 4-26.5 x 42/2 = 144.6 kN.m:
Distance Qfpoint ofcontraflexure from B = 8-2 x 3.364 = 1.27 m. Total area of tension steel ;;, 907.3 + 199 1106.3 tnnt =
Provide 3 ~ # 20 +2. -# 12 bars at top., Area provided = 1168 11Vff
Distance ofpointofcontraflexure from A = 2 x 3.364 =6.13m Since the length of the beapl is more than 6 m, 2 - # 12· nim bar$ are provided aS anchor bars
The ·SFD and BMD are shown i~ ·Fig. ·10.6.3 to avoid its bending due to stimips during concreting operation. ·
1
01
!' ~ I i ;

526 Design of Beam

Chapter io Sect. 10.6 Illustrative Examples 527
Now d/d = 38 I 412 = 0.092 say 0.1 :. f'sc = 352 N I mnr j
... (Table 4.102) -~ (B). Curtllilment of Negative Reinforcement in (i.e. Top Bars) between BA
Asc = 0.87 X 415 X 199 I 352 = 204 mnr
,~1 For20mmbar Ld = 47 ~ = 47 x 20 = 940 mm
Provide 2 - # 20 mm bars, after curtailing 2 # 20 mm bars at bottom.
Point of centraflexure ( TPC} from B = 1270 mm
Arell provided = 628 mm2 > 204 mml :. OK - -· .. 3 - # 20 mm bars will be extended beyond the point of inflection for a distance not less
Curtailment of Bars. +
than ( d= 412 mm or 12 = 240 mm or [ 8000-230] I 16 = 485 mm)
(A) Curtailment of Positive Reinforcement Continue 3 - # 20 mm for distance of 1270 + 490 = 1760 mm from support B.

Before deciding the scheme ofcurtailment it is necessary to detennine ihe minimum number (C) Curtailment of Reinforcement (top bars) in Span BC
of bars required at the point of contraflexure from the criterion of continuation of minimum Since L/2 = 1250 mm > Ld ( = 940 mm), curtailment is proposed at L /2 (i.e. APC)
.,i number of bars to support for anchorage.
TPCfromB=l250-greaterof(d= 412mm or 120+= 240mm) = 1250-412 =838mm
According to the rules of bar continuation(Sect.6.8)minimumnumberof hars required
to be continued. Distance of TPC from end C ·= 2500 - 83 8 = 1662 mm

t
- at discontinuous end == N/3 == 413 == 2 No, at continuous end =N 14 = 4 I 4 = 1 No. MomentatTPC;,20.7 x 1.662+26.5 x 1.6622/2= 71 kN.m.
Since the left support is a simple support the maximum bending moment shifts towards this
end ( xm~ == 3.36 m < 4 m). Therefore, there. is not much advantage in effecting curtailment
towards left support . On the other hand it will give an advantage in reducing the shear
Required A =
st
0.5 X 20
415
1- I-
4.6 X 71
-20x230x412
X
6
10
2
J
230 x 412 = 541 mm
2

reinforcement(: as A 1 increases t also increases)

s uc J·,
2
Continue 2 - # 12 mm + I - # 20 mm giving area of 540 mm upto the end C and
Now the distance of point of contraflexure from A =6. 73 m curtail2- # 20 mm at 1250 mm
Since at the point of contraflexure, compression reaction does not exit therefore, by ( Eq 6.5.5)
MI · Check for Development Length at Simply Supported End
-+ Lo >Ld Since at supports ends are confined by a compressive reaction.
VI :. Required MI = V1 (Ld-L ) L =1 3M I V + L , Considering L = 0 ...... (Eq. 6.5.2)
0 d ' I o o

where, 940mm< 2186mm(= 1.3 x 149-95 x 1000189.15+0) :. OK

VI== Shear at point ofcontraffexure = 89.15-26.5 x 6.73 = -89.2 /eN. /

~ 0.87j~ ~ Minimum length of bar to be embedded into the support = Ld I 3 = 940 I 3 = 313 mm
and (· 0.87X4}5
Ld · == --2.... ' = 4. X (1.2 X 1.6) . ' = 47, = 47 x 20 = 940 mm Provide L - bend providing anchorage length of 160 mm ,.:'.:;
4 tbd Embedded length available = ( 230-28) + 160 = 362 m;n > 313 mm :. OK

L0 = Greaterofl2,(=240mm)oi' d(=-412mm) :. L = 412mm

; Design for shear
1
:. M =V 1(Ld:.{) = 89.2x(940-412)/1000= 41.IkN.m 0 Region AE: 2
Required number of bars at pOint of contraflexure , Maximum Shear= V = 89.15 kN. At left support, A 1 = 4- # 20 mm = 1256 mm ,

N~ M1 I Mmdx_
u.max s
· :::: ( 4 x 47.1/149.95) = 1.26 Say 2 Nos. PI = 100 X 1256/(230 X 412) = 1.32%
•. . - . . 2
't = 0.67 + (0.72- 0.67) x (1.32- 1.25) I 0.25 = 0.684 N!mm ...... (Table 5. 7.1)
. The Curfaibnent Of2.bars (i.e. 50%) will be done in a Si11gle s+&agc ~ .
Let tlte.4isfance of n'C. from A be equal to x · V = 't bd = 0.684 X 230 X 412/1000 = 64.81 kN.
uc uc
.·. : R~ x.x- wuy} l2 = M~~.,a/2 o~ 89.15x - 26.5 12 = 149.9512 r V . :f 0.4 bd = 0.4 X 230 X 412/1000 = 37.90 kN.
usv.m111
.· ;'; r ,.;.: 6.73x .. 5;66 = 0 :. X =5.15 m &om A or 0.98 m from .A V . =(V +V . )=64.81+37.90 =102.7lkN>V
ur.m111 uc usv.m111 u.max
(-=89.15kN)
:~ce Of APCfroniA = 5.15+0.412 = 6.16m 5ay6:2_m
' .'. eurta1n·2 ~- # 20 mm at 6.2 mm from A or 1.8 m from 1J :. Minimuni stirrups are sufficient in the region AE
. . .. .
 -/

ii:· 528 Design of Beam

Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6 Illustrative Examples 529
Using~ 6 mm 2 -legged stirrups of Fe 250 ( Asv =56 m~)
s = 0.87 x 250 x 56 I ( 0.4 x 230) = I32 say I30 mm Forp1 •l00 x 1256/(2071 x 412)= 0.15%and fs = 198NI mlll, a1 = L8 ... (Fig. 8.6.1}
Provide~ 6 mm 2 -legged stirrups at I30 mm clc in the regionAE b lb =23012071 = 0.11, Modificationfactor a 3 =0.8 ... ... (Fig. 8.6.3)
1
w In this easeL I d ratio( either 20or 26) depends on whether the cantilevering moment is
Region BE · : In this region the tension is at top.
equal to fJXed end moment assuming AB fJXed m· not ( See Commen~ in Sect. 8. 6. 3)
Therefore, tension reinforcement at support B shall be considered,
In this .case cantilever moment = MuB = 134.6 kN.m
;~:
At support, Ast = 3 -# 20+2 -# I2 = 1168mm2 p = IOO x 11681(230 x4I2) = 1.23% ~),,

As~uming AB fJXed, fixed end moment= 26.5 x 82 I 12 = 141 kN.m . .

1 ·~}
t uc = 0.62 + (0.67- 0.62) x (I .23 - 1.0) = 0.25 = 0.666 N/ mitt ~"F
Siilee cantilever moment is approximately equal to fixed end moment, the basic L hlratio is
--.>/'
vuc = 0.666 X 230 X 4I2 I IOOO= 63.1 kN i~l
taken equal tQ 26.
Vusv.mm. = 0.4x 230x4I21IOOO = 37.9kN BasicL/d=26, Required d= 8000 I (26 x 1.8 x 0.8) = 213 mm<4I2 mm :. Safe.
lll I
~~~~ Vur.mm
. = 63.I + 37.9 = IOI kN < Vu.max (=122.85 kN.) :. Calculate
· ' VuD
·I' :. Check'dejlection at Cantilever end.
VuD = Vu.max-wu (bsl2+d) =122.85-26.5(115+412)11000
; I

=108.9kN> Vur.mm. (=10IkN)

p1% = 0.57% , fs =0.58 x 415 x l = 240Nimlll, a 1= 1.15 (Fig. 8.6.1)
/II: Design shear reinforcement is required. requiredd=2500/(7x 1.15) = 310mm < 412mm :. Safe.

Shear to be resiste~ _by stirrups Vus = VuD - V-ue ~ 108.9 - 63 .I = 45.8 kN.
ii., Using ~6 mm 2 -leggeO, StirrU!Js (Area= 56 mm2 )
The details of reinforcement are shown in Fig. 10. 6. 4
fiji
~.. ( s =0.87 x 250 x 56 x 4I21 (45:8 x IOOO) = I09 mm say IOOmm < (0.7$d and300mm)
fj , I Ls1 =(Vu.max -Vur.mm. )lwu =(122.8-IOI)I26.5=0.83mor830mm·
ra
~6
r- 2·#12
Provide mm 2- legged stirrups at I00 mm clc for 830 mm from the centre support and
rest ~6 mm 2 - legged stirrups at 130 mm clc in span AB '
Region BC I• I --1 +6 2-leggJd stirrups@ 130c/c
A

In portion BF 1.25 m from B the area of steel is the same but shear is only 86.95 kN
( < IOI kN) therefore minimum shear reinforcement is sufficient.
In portion FC, As1 =,=I-# 20 + 2- # I2 = 540mm2
r:;c:J 1--- so ,
1
L 4-#20
62oo
,.
la 8000 -------~
!: ..
pI = 100x5401(230x412) =0.57% t uc= 0.48+(0.56-0.48)x0.0710.25 = O.SN!m,Z
'· Vur.mm. =Vuc + V · usv.mm
. = 0.5x230x0.412+37.9= 85.28kN
Shear at 1.25m from end = 20.7 + 26.5x 1.25 = 53.8 kN < 85.28 kN. -
- .·. Minimum stirrups,are sufficient. . 2m "11- 2-#12+ 1·#20

T . TI
~.~

i
[, Provide ~6 mm 2 -legged stirrups at I3 0 mm clc in portion BC.
+6@100c/c
I: +6@ 130c/c . 400
400
Comments : Since 6 mm dia. HYSD bars are not available at present in mar/ret 6 mm dia. mild steel stirrups

I have been used Ij8 mm dia. Fe 415 stirrups are used the minimum spacingoj300 mm governs eventhough
required spacing is more than 300 mm and therefore it is uneconomical.

Check fo~ serviceability

l 1 +6@130c/c

~:~ ~ . Fig. 10.6.4

~-~~ -1 230 1-
The deflection can be maximum at the midspan or at the cantilever end.
Check for midspan deflection : ,.;. Section a:a Sectionb-b Section c-c

J, "058 J,> A""reqfiired/""Pim1dedo( 0.$8 X 415) XIOJS/1256" 198 N!mn:'

.Fig. 10.6~dteinforcement Details of Over- hanging Beam
-:'i.
Illustrative Examples 531
530 Design ofBeam Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6
DESIGN OF PUBLIC BUILDING Ex.l0.6.3. Design the roof beam B of multipurpose hall shown in Fig. 10.6.5 for the
1
Fig. 10. 6. 4 shows a structural plan of a single storeyed, double height multipurpose hall following data. c/c spacing of beams = 4.0 m
attached with double storeyed offices. The further details are as under: t~ Span of the beam = 10:2 m ,
Floorfinish. = 1.5 kN I 11f
Multipurpose Hall: Live load= 0.75 kNim2, FF = 1.5 kN / 11f floor to floor height = 6.0 m, Live load on roof = 0.75 kN I~ == 230mm
Breadth of support
Wall thickness = 230 mm, fk = 20 N I m11f, f.y = 415 N I mm2 Thickness of slab = 130 mm
c
Concret;e M20 and steel Fe 415
Assume that the beams are simply supported over columns.
Other Structures : Floor load = 4 kN I m2, FF = 1.0 kN I m2 floor to floor height= 3 m,
wall thickness= 230 mm, fk = 25 N I mm2, f.= 415 N I mm2. Design the roof beam B1 for the following three cases :
c y
(a) No curtailment and no bent up bars i.e. all tension steel continued into the support.
,,. .,1'1
Note : Different values off.:k have been assumed in the same struc!ure to get the reader conversant with the (b) Use of bent up bars and stirrups. (c) Curtailment of bars.

IIll
method ofworldng with different types of grades of concrete.

Given :
!I The different typical beam elements viz. beams Bl' B2 - B - B and B - B - B have been fck = 20Nim~, fy = 415 Nlmm2, L"' 10.2m, c/cspacingofbeams = 4m.,
3 4 5 6 7 2
designed in the following exlll11p1es. The slab s2 is designed in Ex 9.4.2 's3 in Ex 9.4.3 and Slab thickness= 130 mm, LL = 0.75 kN I m FF = 1.5 kN I rr?-,
S4 - S5 - in Ex 9.6.2 Breadtll,of-Supv.~rt = bs = 230 mm.
_..,_ I'"V""'11 ovv1+-
-~-~ . --- -- - - -

T
0
T T T Required : To design the section of the beam
ts1
t
I

I
I
I I Solution : The beam is simply supported and cast monolithically with the slab. The slabS2 is on
a
both sides of the beam and it lies in the compression zone with respect. to bending of the beam.
'<t
m Hence, the beam will act as aT- beam. The slab is one- way continuous having span of 4 m and. ·
0
t-.
+ S4
t
(.) 0

J::. S2
......... 82 S2 82 S2
m thickness 130 mm.
~ ~ ~ ......... ......... Therefore, the thickness ofthe flange ofT- beam= D1= 130 mm.

+
;il
& S3 Multipurpose Hall 20000 x 10200 x 6000 (height)
~ ;-£
>
.!!!
"'
m iii "' "'m
en
........ +s5 g'<t 6'
0
1.
2.
Effective span : L ':" 10.2 m.
Loads : Assume,J!idthofbeam = widthofsupport =bw=230mm

1 .. ~
~ m

+S4
+~
Depth of beam = D = L 115 = 10200/16 = 640 mm. say 650 mm
Assume,.effective cover= 70 mm
effective depth = d = 650-70 =. 580 mm

l
(\1
:il
f~~
~
m

'
I
I
I Sanitary 0
Load transferred from Slab= L.F. x ( 25 x D + LL. + FF) x c/c spacing of beat)\s
= 1.5 x ( 25 x 0.13 + 0.75 + 1.5) x 4 = 33 kN I m.

[ S1 I

i
Block .comments : Alternatively, as given in Sect. 10.9.1, the appoximate depth of the beam can also be wcirked
1 ,1,
I
,., I
....!,
out taking the 213 of the depth required for maximum sagging moment for superimposed load (including

!+-: + 4000 ....j... 4ooo + 4ooo-+- 4000 -l14ool-41oo--j

self weight of beam) as gwen below :
Superimposed load = 33 kNim. , M.· =. 33 X JO.il 8 = 429.2 kN.m
25500
2 ~ 429.2 x ul
Notes : (1) Floor to Floor height of Multipurpose Hall= 6000 mm d= - x . = 550 mm
(2) Floor to Floor hei(Jht of remaining structures= 3000 mm 3 2.76 X 230
(3) Wall thickness = 230 mm Self weightofbeam due to rib portion= 1.5 x 25 x (6so.:..no) x 230 x 10-6 = 4.48 kN I m
. Fig. 10.6.5 Structural Plan of Multipurpme Hall Total ultimate load = w =33 + 4.48 = 37.48 kN I m. sav 38 kNim
 532 Design of Beam Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6 Illustrative Examples 533
3. Design Moment : Assuming ~6mm 2- legged stirrups of grade Fe 250 , Asv = 2 x. 1t x 62 /4 = 56 mTif
Mu = wu L2 I 8 = 38 x 10.22 I 8 = 494.2
. kN.m. Required, s = 0.87f y Asv d IVusv = 0.87 x 250 x 56 x 580 I (65- 99 x 1000)
L0 =.L = I0200 mm for simply supported beam. = say 100 mm < 300 mm and< ( 0.75 x 580)
h1 =(L0 16 +6D1 )+ bw =( 10 200/6+6>d3.0)+230=2110 mm<4000nun
Zone of design stirrups is given by :
For xu = D1 ,Mwl = 0.36x20x2710tX 130(580.,..0.42 x 130)xlO~. 13331N:m.> Mu =

A =
st
·'·xu< Df
4. Main Steel :
0.5 X 20
415
1-
t
l _ 4.6 X 494.2 X lQ~
20 'X 2710 X 5802 X J
.
2710 .X 580 = 2440 mnf
Ls = ( Vu.mar· - Vw.mm. ) I wu ;, (193.8- 154.76) /38 = 1.03 m say 1 m
1

Provide +6 mm 2 - legged stirrups at 100 mm c/c for a distance of 1.0 m from the support.
Minimum shear reinforcement :
•../'
,

tl' Using +6 mm two legged stirrups

r!, Provide 5- # 25 in two rows with 3 bars of25 ~min the bottom row. ·
Area of steel provided= Ast = 2454~m~
Required s = 0.87 f Asv I (0.4 x bw) =0.87 x 250 x 100 I ( 0.4 x 2~0 ) = 132 mm
= say {30 mm < 300 mm and < ( 0.75 x 580 = 435 mm)
Zoneofnominalstirrups, Ls3 = 0.5 Vuclwu = 0.5 x 101.4/38 = l.33mm from mid-span
~~L\ Check for cover :
Zoneofminimumstirrups,Ls2 =L/2-Ls1 -Ls3 =:10212-1.0-l.33 = 2.77 say 2.8m
Assuming ~ 6 mm diameter of stirrups , for two rows of bars ,
ll Required cover = ( 20 + 6 ) + 25 + 25/2 = 6~.5 min< 70 mm Provide $6 mm 2 -le-gged. stirrups.@ at no·,;,;;rc/c for a length of2.8 m (i.e. from 1.0 m
:r 5. Design for Shear:
from support to 3.80 m from support) and {or the remaining central portion of2.6 m provide
+ 6 mm nominal stirrups at 300 mm c/c.
MaximumshearforceatsupportVu·mar= wuL/2 =38xl0.2/2 = l93.8kN
I Maximum allowable ~hear stress = 2.8 N I mml for M20 Note.; -In-beams having small spans ( say less than 6 m ) the Zone LsJ of nominal stirrups1s--s.mall and hence
Maximum allowable Shear: = 2.8 x 230 x 580/1000 = 373.5 kN > 193.8 kN. :. Safe omitted i.e. only design shear reinforcement, if required, and minimum shear reinforcement is provided.
L: Shear force at critical section which is at distance 'd' from the face of support.
)1.,~.:
. vuD = v. umax - · wu (bs 12 +d) · = 193.8-38 (230/2+580)/looo = 167.39 kN
(B) Bent - up Bars along with Stirrups
l~ I
·t"
Since 2 - # 25 mm bars are to be bent up, area of steel available at support
The shear reinforcement will be designed for all the three cases viz. =Astl =3-#25 = 1473mm2
(A) No curtailment and no bent up bars, = 100 x 1473/(230 x 580)= 1.1%, t· uc = 0.64Nimml ...... (!'able 5.7.1)
PI
(B) Combination of bent - up bars and stirrups
(C) Curiailment of main reinforcement. Vuc = t uc bd. = 0.64 X 230 X 580 /1000 . = 85.4 kN.
vusv.mm. = 0.4 bd = 0.4 X 230 X 580 I 1000
~
= 53.36 kN.
(A) No Curtailment and ne Bent- up Bars Vw.mm. = 85.4 + 53.36 = 138.76 kN < VuD ( = 167.39 kN }
Area of tension Steel avaiiable at support= Ast = 2454 mml :. Design shear reinforcement is required.
p1 =100As/bd=100 x 24541(230x580) =1;84% ... ... (!'able 5.7.1)
.~
vus = vuD.;.. v = 167.39-85.4 = 8L99 kN.
uc
\c = 0.75 +. (0.79- 0.75) x ( 1.84- 1.7~ ) I 0.25 = 0. 76 N I mml cj
Before deciding the scheme of bending of bars , it is advisable to determine the zone of shear
~ reinforcementS. ·
vue "". t 0 Cbd ~ 0.76 X230 X 580/1000 = 101.4kN. ij

Vusv.mln=- 0.4 ic 230 x 58~ I 1000 = 53.36 kN.·

Ls1 = (Vu.mar -Vur.mm. )/'wu = (193.8-138.76)/38= 1.45in , ·
For bars to be effective in resisting shear the maximum distance from which the bar can be
v· ur.mm
·. = vuc + vusv.mm
·. =101.4 + . 53.36= 154.76. kN< vuD =(167.39 kN) bent is 2 d preferably not greater than 1.5 d. · · .
\, Design shear reinforcement is required. · : In order to cover whole shear zone 9f l ,45 m, bend one bar at a distance of 1.5 d i.e, 0.9 m
Shear
.
resisted by stirrups= Vusv .=.VidJ- V. uc= 167.39""' 101.4 = 65.99 kN · from the .support and the other one bar at/ a distance of0.6 mwhich is equal to d, from the point of
.
frrstbend bar. (See Sect. 8.10.10 ) ·
 /~

l rrr . 534 Design of Beam

'.If
:jr Chapter 10 Sec/. 10.6 Illustrative Example~ 53$
il
:~!
Shear resistance. of one bar of# 25 mm ( Asb = 491 mm2) bent at 45° will be:
.'. Minimum stimlps are not adequate.
id
,:1 Y,.. =0.17J,A,.sin45" = 0.87 x 415 x 491 x 0.707/1000= 125 IN> V..,(= 81.991N)
Using t6 ,; 2 -legged stirrups ( Area== A.rv =S6 W )
E.~
:iJ

though
up bar:.is limited to P the
12 bent up bar is capable of taking all shear the contribution of the bent
s, = ().87Jj.4,.d I yuc = 0.87 X 250 X S6 X 580 I (81.99 X 1000) ==.a~.- say 80 mm
118

ThestirrupswiUhavetobeprovidedfor P ==0.5 P ==0.5 x 81.99==41 leN.< P . (==53.36kN.) Zone of shear reinforcement L81 == ( 193.8-138.76) /38 = 1.45m .from support
:. Minimum
·
stirrups
·
are sufficient. IUV liS
· IUV.tnm

Using 96 mm 2 -legged stirrups, Provide +6 mm 2 -legged stirrups @ 80 mm clc from support upto diStance of 1.45 m from
s =0.87 x 250 x 561(0.4 x 230) = 130 mm < (300 mm or 0. 75 x 580) the support. .
,, ;!tt'
Zone of nominal shear reinforcement L83 =1.33 m as obtained earlier.
the support.mm 2- legged stirrups at 130 mm clc from the support upto distance of900 mm from
Provide#
r1 Zone of minimum shear reinforcement L82 = 10.2/2-1.45-1.33 = 2.32 m
I Shear at 0.9 m from ·the· support Pu = Pu.max· ..:. 0.9 wu = 193.8- 0.9 x 38 = 159.6 kN
· At thiS section 4 bar> of25 mm are available lllldtherefore, shear resisled ! > y - V~
:~·'
Using$ 6 mm stirrups, spacing= 0.87 x 250 x 56/ (0.4 x 230) =say 130 mm
.tiI
will be gl'e!lter than at support
neglectedforsimp~city. · corresponding to ( 3 - # 2.5 ). However, this smali increase
· is
!!.i · Provide$ 6mm 2 -legged stirrups at 130 mm c/c from 1.45 m to 3.77 m ( 2.32 + 1.45) from the ;:\;!;:
ru c = 85.4AN., vliS = vuuc
-r =159.6-85.4= 74.2 kN center of support and in the remaining central portion of2.66 m provide nominal f6 mm 2-legged
c .
. Again shear~trength of I bent- up barof25 mm diameter= 125kN.
stirrups at 300 mm clc.
Shear resistance to be provided by stirrups, Since the reinforcement is curtained in tension zone, Cl. 26.2.3.2 of IS 456stipulates that
any one of the following three conditions must be satisfied to limit the stirrups spacing between
.
p1UV =::.pliS 12 = 1/2
.
X 14.2 = 37.IkN<VIUV.tnlll. (::53.36kN.) TPCandAPC.
i
I
:. Minim\un stirrups are also sufficient in this zone of0.._9 mto L5
' Condition- (a)
The zone of nominal stirrups (:::: ~.3m) will be' the same as obtained in part (a) above.
:~

Shear at cut oft' (Vu) < 2/3 that pennitted (i.e. 2/3 VIll' )
;!!
Provide +6 mm 2 -legged stirrups at 130 mm c/c from the support upto 3:8 m (::::1 0.2/2 -1.3) and where, 1.u = Shear at TPC = 193.8- 38 x 1.875 = 122.55 kN
,:1
in the remaining central portion of2.6 m("" 2 x1.3) provide +6 mm 2 -legged stirrups at 300 mm clc. TPC is aya distance of 1.875 m from the support
. ' '

(c) Cll11ailment of !Jars : Vur = Shear resisted by concrete and stirrups at TPC ( =, Vuc+Vusv ) "'"
. Assuming 2 bars of25 mm diameter are to be curtailed. Area of curtailed bar= A = 981 mm2. :. MTPC, · ) d= (Vuc + Vusv.
(J1.urreq. ) > 1.5 Vu , But Vuc = 85.4 as obtained in (B)
Theoretical point ofcut offfrom suppOrt, 811 ;_t! > (1.5 V - V ) > (1.5 X }22.55- 85.4) > 98.42 kN. '
1' usv u uc
put Vusv is 53.36 kN < 98.42 kN :. Condition -(a) is not satisfied.
TPC"" (t-.YA /A 81 81{provJ) X Lf2:.,(l-V98l/2454) x 10.2/2 = 1.875 m (Eq. 6.8.lb) 1In order to satisfy the condition, the required spacing of $6 mm 2 -legged stirrups; is given by:

Note: / =0.87 X 250 X 56 X 580/ ( 98.42 X 1000)

· S

= 72 mm say 70 mm
0) lf""otiomet..otoll &os• ""-"'""""'"""""'"" bo-..,.,
x • L/2 [1-..JN/ N..,J Provide $6 mm 2 -legged stirrups at 70mm c/c betweenAPCto TPC i.e. between 1290 inm
. where, N1 =No of bars to be curtailed , Nmax = No of bars atmidspan. 1 to 1880 mm from, the support.
(2) This fonnulais valid only when the beam is supply supported. Condition - (b)
Stirrups having area equal to that of minimum stirrups shall be provided in a,ddition to those
Actual, Point of Cut off :::: APC = 1.875 - 0.58 :::: 1.29 m from the support. required to resist the shear at that section and the resultant spacing shall not exceed dl ( 8 ll). ·
1
Area of steel a~ailableatsupport=A, ==2454-981:::: 1473 mm2 w~ere .~ i~ the ratio of theareaof bars at cut off to the total area ofbars-at the section, and dis the
Now,. Vu.max == l93.8kN,
·
~-n :::: 167.39 kN, Vuc =85.4kN,Vwv.mm
IOU
· . :::: 53.36kN.,Vur.mm. :::: 138.76kN.
.
effeCtive dtpth. · · ·
v . = 167.39 ...: 85.4::::81.99 kN > v . ( == 53.36 kN) AtTPC,VU =122.55/cN,
·
VUC =85.4/cN,
.·
VIUV =·122.55-85.4=37.15/cN
· ·.
us .wv.mm Required area of stirrilps to resist the shP.:~r nf':l7 ~" J..llr -~- •• _:d~- ~·
 536 Design of Beam Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6 Illustrative Examples 537

·. An/ lsr* r,,./(0.87 fyd)= J1.1S X 1000/ {0.87 X 250 X 586)=0.294 mml lmm
/,
The d6bi!s of reinforcement (for part C) are shown in Fig. 10.6.6
Required !Wiitkm<il fl.f·~~ of minim~ stirrups per unit length -

. An2/s2 = o.~b i (0.87 I,) = 0.4 X 230 I ( 0.87 X 250) = 0.423 mmll mm ,, I
I
SJ)acing of +6 mm 2- legged stirrups of Fe 250 is given by : (
I I
Asvls = Asvl I s1 + Asv I s2 = 0.294 + 0.423 = 0.72 mnl I mm.
s =56 /0.72 say 10mm t.12&?--I.L
1450 2320
41 .
125.!- J2 -.125 2660 J 2320 J~~~~~
1450
I +so8o c/c .I
+6@80 c/c I +6@130c/c I +eo3oo c/c I +60130c/c
. Also, s <di8P [=580/(8x98l/2454)]>70mm
10200
Provide '6 mm @70 c/c between TPC to APC. _,
-I
..../.
If,

II!
Condition - (c)
At TPC, moment of resistance of continued bars shall be greater than or equal to twice B.M +so300 etc
1 650
+6@80 c/c

at the point of cut off. i.~. M111' > 2 Mu and V111' > 1.33 Vu
Since the area ofextende<! bars is just equal to that required beyond the point of cut- off this
'1
l
; i! 2-1125
3-1125
condition in not satisfied and will also not be satisfied in general because the bars ar:e normally
l curtailed at the point where they are not required from B.M considerations.
~n
~..j
o Mid§Pan-
i.£3o+l
Section A-A
,,
:l

[ 6. Check for Deflection :

+
Note : Provide 6 mm 2 -legged stirrups at 70 mm c/c between 1290 inm to 1880 mm from support

Basic iJd ratio= rb = 20 Fig. 10.6.6 Reinforcement Details ofT- beam of Multipurpose Hall
=100 x ?454/ (2710 x 580)= 0.156%
Required (Ast.prov)
Ex. 10.6:4 Design the floor beam B5- B6- B7 ill Fig 10.6.5 for the following data:
f s = 0.58 x415 x2440/2454 =2429 = 239 Nlmml say 240 NI mrri (i) All beams have equal span L = 3.4,m. Assume the beam size 230 mm x 300 mm.
For A81 =0.156% and.fs = 240 NI mml,a = 1.8 (Fig. 8.6.1) (it) SlabS6 one - way simply supported, Span = L = 1.4 m, Thickness = 100 mm.
1
bwl b1= 230/2710 = 0.08, Reduction factor= a3 = 0.8 (Fig. 8.6.3) SlabS4 andS5 , Two-waycontinuousLx =3.4m,LY =4.1 m, thickness= l40mm(seeEx. 9.6.2)
For span> 10m, a4 =10/"10.2=0.98
LL = 4 kN 1m2, FF=1.5 kNinal,
Required d= 10200 I (20 x .1.8 x 0.8 x 0.98) = 361 mm < 580 mm :. Safe (Iit) Masonry wall 230 mm thick. Floor to floor height= 3.3m. ,Unit weight ofmasonry = 20 kN I nt
(iv) ConcreteM25andsteelFe415, LL= '4kNim2, FF=l.5kNinl,
7. Check for development length : Assume moderate environment.
Ld < 1.3 M/ V + L0 , , Ld = 0.87 x 415/ ( 4 x 1.2 x 1.6) J+ = 47 x 25 = 1175 mm
~ =(Mjmax x(Areaofcontinuingbars!Areaatmid-SPaJ.1)=494.2 x 1472/2454=296.4kN.m Solution:
At rPc, v1 = 193.8 - 38 x 1.875 = 122.ss kN. 1. Span : L = 3.4. Three span continuous ~>!lam.
Considering L0 = 0, 1175 < 3144 mm ( = 1.3 x 296.4 x 1000/122.55 + 0) :. O.K. 2. For moderate envirOnment nominal cover= 30mm and grade ofconcrete M25 (See. Table 2.2.3)
' . . .
Assuming# 8mm stirrups and# 20 mmmain steel,
Effective cover = 30 + 8 + 2012 = 48 mm say 50 mm
Provide 2 No. anchor bars of# 12 mm diameter since the span is large. 3. Section : Assum~ 230 mm x 300m, d '=50 mm, d = 300-50 = 250 mm.
4. Loads : Fromone-waysimplysupportedslabS6 ,
HIM : The deflection <:heck lll4l development clleclt are normally satisfied and therefore, it is not necessary
+ LL + FF) x 1;~12= 1.5 (25x 0.10+4+ 1.5) x .1.412 = 8.4/cN lm.
wul =l.S (DL
tO C!III'Y c;ut these cbecb in ptai:tiCe
From Two-~ayslabS4 orS5 , w112 =l.S ~wL:/3 )= 1.5{25 x0.14+4+ 1.5)x 3.4/l = ISJ lcNim.

.; :~ . /
 .~

538 Design of Beam

/ Illustrative Examples 539
Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6
Wall230 mmthick, height of wall from topoffloortotheunderside of beam= 3.3 -0.3 =3m (a) Analysis without allowing Redistribution of moments:
. .
wllW = 1.5 (20 x 0.23 x 3.0) = 20.7
-
kN I m. Shear :SpanAB: fAB = wu L/2-Mn/L = 46x3.412-53.17/3.4 = 62.56/cN.
~lfofoo.m, W113 ': 1.5 [25 X 0.23 X (0.3 -0.14)]= 1.38 kN/m VBA = 46 X 3.412 + 53.1713.4 = 93.84kN.
Tomlde5!gn, wu = wu1+wu2+wuw +w141 =8.4+l53+20.7+1.38=45.78kN/m say46kN/m VBC = 46 X 3.412 = 78.2 kN. = VCB
Design Live load = 1.5 (4 x 1,4/2 +4 x ~.4/3) =11 kN lm. DesignD.L=46-11 = 35 kN lm.
Maximum Span Moment :
$ince design live load ( =11 kN/m.) < (314 x design D.L ) the loading arrangement shall be design Span AB : xmax=VA/ wu = 62.56 I 46 = 1.36 m from A.
(DL + LL) on all spans. :.( M)max = 62.56 x 1.36/2 = 42.54 kN.m
·.··~ Point of contraflexure from support A
r ·ir'" 4. Design Moments: = 2Xmax = 2 x 1.36 = 2.72 m from A or 0.68 m from B
II : F~r odd- span symmetrical beam, modified moment distribution method will be used taking
2
rotation/.!} stiffness factor for BC = 2EI I L and distribution will be carried out for half portion of Span BC: xmax=L 12 by symmetry,
· ( Mu)max = 46 x 3.4 /8-
· 53.17 = 13.3 kN.m
:,I
beam ( see Sect. 3.5.5 ). The quantity Ell Lis the same for all the spans.
Details of Maximum B.M and SF
.d Distribution factors :
A E B F C G D
1
.-·· '
Joint Member RSF Stirn D.F f I f ' I t
BA 3EIIL 0.6 -53.17 13.3 -53.17 +42.54
BMkN.m 42.54
B 5EIIL 93.84\78.2 78.2 \93.84 - 62.56
·SFkN 62.56
I
;I BC 2EIIL 0.4
RSF = Rotational Stiffness factor Main steel :
----
(a)AtMid-spanofAB:(Mu)nuu= 42.54 kN.m.
Themid-spansectionactsasaT-section, b = 0.7x3400/6 + 6x(l40+100)/2+230 = 1346mm.
1
Fixed End Moment : For x =D , M =0.36 x 25 x 1346 x 120 (250-0.42x 120) x 10-6 =282kN.m»42.S4 kN.m
U 1 UT
MFBA = wuL2 I 8 = 46 X 3.42 I~ = 66.47 kN.m. :. xu< Df
MFBC =·wu L2 1 12 = 46

Distribution Table
x 3.42 112 .;, 44.31 kN.m
0.5 X 25[
A = - 1-
1- 4.6 X ~2.54 X 106 J
. 25 ' ])46 X 2511' _\ JJ46' 250 ° 483 mm'
st 415
Member' AB BA BC II >
-Provide2- #12mm + 1- # 20 mm, Area provided= 540nurt 482mnl
Distribution factors 0.6 0.4
Check for the width :
InitiaLE.E.M 0 66.47 -44.31 Requiredb=2 x 38+(2 x 12+ I x 20)+2 x 25 =110mm<230mm ;·. OK.
-PislribUtion -13.3 -8.86
(b) At intermediate. support ·
Final moment in kN.m. 0 53.17 -53.17 Mu=53.17 kN.m. ,xu.max =0.48 .-
d=0.4S x 250= 120mm.
·
·-.
Mur.max =3.45 x 230 x 2So2 x10-6 = 49.6 k.N.m < M.. ( =53.17 kN.m.)
 I
P1
i[r 540 Design of Beam Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6 illustrative Examples 541
,;i Tension steel
415 X 226]
49.6 X J06 = 0.87 X 4J5 X 226 50- X 10'6 = 19.1 k:N.m
A = ----------------- = 688mm 2.
stl 0.87 X 4J5 (250- 0.42 X 120)
E 25 X 230

Mu2 = Mu -Mur.max. = 53.17-49.6 = 3.57 kN.m (iJ) Bottom Steel

Letx be the diStance from the left supportAwhere B.Mis ecPw
to lllQIIlent ofJ'!'Sistance of 19.1 /rN.m.
3.57 X 106 19.1 = 62.56x-- 46 x212 :. I- 2.12x + o.s3 = o
Ast2 = = 49.5 mm2
0.87415 (250- 50)
X TPC trOIJl A = x = 0.35 m . or 2.31•m (or 1.03 m from B)
A 81 = A 811 + A 812 = 688 + 49.5
APC form B = 1030-250 = 780 mm; oi' 2620 mm from A
= 737.5 mm2.
Curtail 1 - # 20 mm at distance Of2620 mm from A
: ·./~ There will be no advantage in curtailing bottom bar from left support, since TPC is only 350 mm
)i': Provide 2 -# 10 mm + 2 -# 20 mm at top of support, Area provided= 785 mm2 > 737.5 mitf frotnthe.support. _
-I
Length of l - # 20 mm bar= 3400-780 =2620 mm.
II!: Cqmpression steel :
Top Steel,·
E
sc = 0.0035 X 50 I 120 = 0.00146 The points of contraflexures from support Bare 1030 mm toWards simply supported end and
IE· f sc = 290 N/mm 2 (Table4.10.1) 940 mm towaids mid~pan of BC. Extension of the bar required beyond points of contraflexl1re is
;!}: A = 0.87 x 415 x 49.5 I 290 = 54 mm2 greater of ( d or 12 +or clear spail/16) i.e; 250 mm. .
,, sc ---
,;;n; - Provide 2- # 20 mm bars for distance of 1280 mm ( = 1030 + 250) on left ofsupport and

r Provide 2- # 12 Area provided = 226 mm 2

(c) At mid-span of BC: Mu = 13.3 kN.m. Designed as aT-section with b = 1346 mm.
1190 mm ( = 940 + 250) towards right of support B
Total length of2- # 20 mm
bar required is equal to 2.47m.

1
-~!j
,, 1 ~

~.6 ~
6 Ast requirl'.d /A st provided Support Midspan Intermediate · Midspan
; 0.5 X 25 [ >: }3J X )Q _
A of AB support B of BC
1
1
,, A = I- I- - ' 1346 X 250
S/ 4J5 25 X 1346 X 2502
~: ,' ',i.
i!:t
At Top· - - 737.5/785
~'r_;,;. = 149 mml >As.mm 2
1 . (= 0.85 x 230 x 250/415 = 118 mm ) At Bottom -/_540 '482/540 . 54/226 l49ti26
Provided 2 - # 12m111, Area provided = 226 mml > 149 mm2
At top 2-#10 2-#10 2-#10~·2-#20(2.47m) 24#10
Point of Contrajlexure : Ai Bottom . 2-#12 +1#20 . . 2#12+1#20(2.62m} 2#1t 2#12
h- xmax = 78.2/ 46 = 1.7 m
t!l
= 1.7-~ l.72 ~2x53.17146 = 0.94m fromB.orC
r
x1 Design of, sheQI' reinforcelll#nt: ·
· (a,) Support A : Y~~ ;,.. 62.56 kN
Curtailment of bars in span AB :

l Since the mid- span of BC requires only 2- # 12 mm and also compression steel provided at
support is 2- #12, therefore, 1 bar of# 20 mm in the span AB can be curtailed and remaining
. Ast
t 11c
= s4Q~';p1 =too x 540/(230 x 2so) ·;, o.94%;
= 0;~7-f0,07·x~O.l9/0.25 = 0,62Niw.l (Table.5.7.1)
2 - # 12 continued throughout.
Vuc . = 0.6fx 23~ i< 2SOI1000= 35.65 kN.
The moment of resistance 2 bars of 12 mm ( area = 226 mml) is given by : Vusv.mm
. . =· .0.4· •>< 2.30
· X 250'/1000
· = 23.0 kN.·
v. ur.mm. . = , 35.65. . + . 23.0 =58.65 kN. < vu.IIIQJI (=62.56 leN)
M . = 0.81f.A
". [d-
fy Ast] ·

ur y . fl .
-
fck b ...... (Eq.4.5.3b) Calculate vuD at distance ( b /;'2 +d) ftoni support
VuD = 62.56 ~ 46 X (:!30,1 2 + 250)/1000 = 45.77 kN. < V~·.min ( = 58.65 kN)
 /-

1'11'
Illustrative Examples 543
542 De$ign of Beatn Chcpter 10 Sect. 10.6
·..\Minimum stirrups are sufficient (b) Analysis allowing redistribution of moments :
Since the mid- span moments for span AB ( = 42.54 kN.m.) and for span BC = 13.3 kN.m.
. :1\~g ~6 mm Fe 250 2- legged stirrups. -~~
are considerably less than support moment of 53.17 kN.m. redistribution of moments will be done.
Spacing= 0.87x 250 x (2 x.28 )/(0.4 x 230) = 132 mm say 130mm < { !P5x250J O.K.
·~ .
"l'
Allowing20% redistribution of moments at intermediate supports. (See Sect. 3. 7)
(b) Left of support B· (Span AB): Design moment at support= 0.8 x 53.17 = 42.54 kN.m.
.~;­
Vu.ma.t = VBA = 93.84_kN., VIID = 93.84-46(0.115 + 0.250)""' 7i.'J5kN. ·'?
Maximum span moments :
Ast = 785mnr, p1 = 100 x 785/(231) x 250) =L36%, "tuc == 0.71-7 Nlmm2 (fableS. 7.1) ~l

,:: Vuc : 0.71 .X 230 X 250/100 = 41.231cN.

Span VAll
AB •
>
46 <3.412- 42.5413.4 • ~5.7 IN. , YBA =M; • 3.4- 65.7 =90.7lN.
i'··
Vusv.mm~ = 0.4 X 230 X 250/1000 ;,_ 23 leN. .... = vAll /W.- 65.7146 = 1.43 ... ( lA,)""' " 65,7 X ·L43 I 2 - 47lN...
./. Vur.mm. =' 41.23 +.23 ' = 64.23kN.< VuD(=77.05kN.). Point of.contraflexur'e from left support
=2xmax = 2x1.43=~.86m i.e. O.S4.m from B.
1' •1. !.

Design shear reinforcement is required.

II l~i
I Vur =VuD- Vuc =.77.05-41.23=35.82 leN.
. Spa_rt. BC
Using 4t6 nun 2 -•legged stirrups. Asv = 56 mnt , . VBC = 46 x 3.4/2 = 78.2 kN = Yes
- (Mu)max= 46x3.42 /8-42.54 = 23.93kN.m.
0.87 X 250 X 56 X 250
s= · . = 8S mm say 80 mm. A ----- B C . D

L81
35.82 X 1000
= V~~.u- Vur.maxlw11 = (9•3.84-:-64.23)/46 = say0.65m
r ·
47
dl
-42.54
•
23.93 --42.54
1 • .
l
B.M. kN.m 65.7 90.7\ 78.2 78.2 \90.7 65.7
(c) Right of support B (Span BC) : SF' kN
V11.max = VBC =78.2 kN, VliD= 78.2-46 (0.115 + 0.25) = 61.41cN. ···- ·DiStribution of Maximum moments aitd shear force
VliD < Vur.min ( = 63.82 kN.') :. Minimum stirrups are sufficient
Main steel :
(a) At ,;&pan of All ( M,),.. • 47 kll.m. The ,;&pan-'"'"'
a f- ie<;tioo .
Provide 4t6 mm 2 -legged stirrups, at 130 mm c/c . b = 0.7 x 3400 /6+6 x (140+ 100) +230==1346mm
· · Provide +6 mm 2 -legged stirrups at 80 mm c/c for distance of 650 mm from supportB towards . 1 x, . • Dr u. ·036 x 25 x t346 x 120 (250-0.42• t20)tlt' -mm.;>47_ m..
For
simply supported end and rest ~6 mm 2 - legged stirrups at 130 mm c/c.

t
1

n·,
il:
The ~etails of reinforcement are shown in Fig. 10.6. 7 :. x < ·v,
·"
1 '-
. 1.
4.6 X 47.0 X 106 ·. . .. · .· . ·
. . . · . . . . 1346 x 2SO =535. mrr?-
·. .
'!; :::: 0.5 l( 25 1- . 25 x 1346 x 2SIP ·. . .
i! A, 415 . ..

\I
: +601~clc 2420' ProVide 2- # 12 ...... \0. 2ll ... - - ,....,.a,= 540 .....
2-112+1·'1120 (b) At intermediate support .
=o~-dllltori
2620 (MtfI mill =- 42.54 kN.rri. and ,dM = 20% .
3400
~
·i:i± 1700
. k. _,,
. . .
•0.6-0.2•0.4<k,.,.(=0,4S)':...... 0.4x:!l0 = IOOiJI<IJ
~
=
'I
00

= R,.,u bd' • 2995 ~ 230x 25o' x Itr' • 43.0 lN.mc > 42.54 1~-~;1~, I
Wldllt of beam = 230 mm -j 230 1+- R 11• · =· ().36 x 25 )( 0.4 (1 0.42 x 0.4),;.2.995 Nlmrrf
. .
u. 1m . .·
1 11
)lw/JmU
Fig. 10.6.7 Reinforcement Details for Beam 85 • 86 • 87
 Illustrative Examples 545
Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6
.544 Design of Beam
:. ~-2.86x+0.83 = (x-1.43i-(l.li = 0
Tension Steel : ~ TPC from A, x = 0.33 m and x2 = 2.53 m (or 0.87 m from B)
A =
0.5 X 25
1-
. 4.6 X 42.54 X }06
1- 2
~X 230 X 250 =563 mm2 APC from
1
B == 870 - 250 = 620 mm
st 415 25 X 230 X 250 Curtail! - # 20 mm bars at distance of 620 mm from support B while there is no advantage in
curtailing it from support A.
Provide 2 - # 10 mm + 1- # 25 mm, Area provided = 648 mrrt Length of 1 ~ # 20 mm bars= 3.4-0.62 = 2.78 m.

Note : When an intermediate support acts as a singly rf!inforced section. the advantage , of tension steel Mid span of BC
provided at mid - span and bars required to be continued along the same bottom face at support, cannot For 2- # 12 mm bars M = 19.1 kN.m. as obtained above
ur ,.,
'\'•
be taken, because the compression steel in such a case is not required. Therefore, some economy is lost in 19.1 = 78.2x- 46 ~ /2-42.54 \';\:
~·t; this process.
;9 •
,. .:, .xl-3.4x+2.68 = 0 ~ ·~~
tl
v~>.
···-\'-! (c) At mid- span of BC : x = 1.24 m and x = 2.16 m, L0= 2.16- 1.24 = 0.92 m \t
\:\
i!, 2 ~ ·)
I~i Designed as T-section with b == 1346 mm. Mu == 23.93 kN.m. 1
Length of l # 12 mtil bar = 0.92 + 2 x 0.25 = say 1.5 m ,.,
t\
1
\''\ ~
A =
0.5 X 25 [
1- 1-
4.6 X 23.93 X
6
}0 ~
x 1346 x 250 = 269 mm2
-lY
Detailing of Reinforcement Intermediate Midspan I.
Midspan 1:
I'•
,.
"
st 4}5 25 X 1346 X 25~ A st required fAst provided Support
A of AB support of BC
r \

2 563/648 0
Provide 3-#12 mm, Area provided= 339 mm
At top 0 0 \
0/226 268/339 \
,.,
~~ I
Curtailment of Bars Intermediate support Span BC : 0/540 534/540
At bottom \
~·.;: Points of contraflexures.
2-#10
2-#10+1-#25(2.0m) 2#10
'
xmax= 78.2/46 =1.7m, :. x1 ==1.7- ~l.72 -2x42.54/46 == M8mfromBorC At top 2-#10 '
~: : 2-#12+1-#12 (1.5 m) \I
2-#12+1-#20 2-#12+1-#20(2:78m) 2-#12 l
The points of contraflexures from support Bare 540 mm towards simply supported end At Bottom
and 6&p mm towards midspan. Extension of bar beyond point of contraflexure is greater of ( d or
Design of shear reinforcement
12 ~ orclear span/ 16) i.e. 250 mm. :·· Required length= 680 +'250 = 930 mm
(a) Left of Support A .
f .max = 65.7 kN., f uD = 65.iJ- 46 X ( 230 /2 + 250) /1000 = 48.91 kN.
ButLd= [0.87 x 415/(4 x 1.4 x 1.6)J+ == 40~ = 40 x 25 = 1000 mm A11 ~ 628 mrrf, p F 10~ x 540 /.(230 x 250) = 0.94%, tuc = 0.62%
1
:. Provide l - # 25 mm for distance. of l 000 mm each side from the centre of support. 81
f = 0.62 X 230 X 250/1000. = 35.65 kN.
Midspan of AB : f
1/C
. = 0.4 X 230 X 250/} 000 =, 23 kN.
1/SV.mrn
Since support section does not require compression steel, 1- # 20 mm bars can be curtailed v . = 35.45 + 23 =· 58.45 kN > vuD ( =48.91 kN)
but the remaining 2- # 12 mm are to be continued to satisfy the requirement of minimum As/ 4 of w.mm
:. Minimum stirrups are sufficient.
positive steel to extend along the same face of support. 2
Moment of resistance of 2 # 12 mm is given by : Using+ 6 mm 2- legged stirrups, Asv = 2 x 28 =56 mm

· 1'-
M = 0.87 x 415 x 226 x 250
w
~ 415. x226
~xmx~
. J x to·6 = 19.1 kN.m.
Spacing = 0.87 x 250 x 561 ( 0.4 x 230) =132 mm.say 130 mm < 0.75 d
.

(b) . Left of support B (span AB)

VJI./II(Ll = 90.7 kN, :
•

vuD
. I

=90.7-46 (0.115 + 0.25) = 73.9 kN.

Let x be the distance from the left support A at which B.M = Mur = 19.4 kN.m. A = 648 m,? , p =·100 x 648/ (230 x 250)= 1.13%, tu~ = 0.66 N I .fnirt
1. .
81
19.1 =65.7 x-46x2!2
r
r1 11'
II!

.• :1[
~ !\ !
.

546 Design of Beam, · Sqet. 10.6 Illustrative Examples 547

: !ti Chapter 10
I "'
[i;ti! V = 0.66 x230 x 0.25= 37.95 kN , V . = 23 kN. Sollllitllf: Assumes~ pfbeam)50 .mm x 500 mm deep and all columns 350 mm x 350 mm. The
~ -~
~r \\ Vur.mm. = 37.~5 + 23 = . 60.95 kN < VuD ( = 73.9 kN)
.
waUCilf230 mm willbe provi~ in flush with beam from i11$ide so that the dead load of wall
=
u.nsferrecl to the beam will have an eccentricity of 60 mm ( 350/2-230/2 ). This will reduce the
:. ~sign shear reinforcement is required.
torsiOn on the beam B3 to some extent.
Vus . = VuD::-V ..... uc. --- .. = 73.9-,-37.95 =35.95kN
Using~ 6 mm 2 -legged stirrups, Asv =. 2 x 28 =
56 m,Jl· Loads I m of b'eam :
. s = 0.87 X 250 X 56 X 250 I (35.95 X 1000) = 86 mm say
80 mm The thickness of wall is 230 mm and height above the beam will be 3 m.
ILd = ( 90.7- 60.9 5) I 46 = 0.65 m from B towards support. A =
WaUI0$1 = WIIW .1.'5( ~ x twx Hw) = !.5 (20 x 0.23 x 3) =20.7 kN lm
Selfweigbtofbeam = 1.5 { 2Sx 0.35 x 0.5] = 6.56 kN I m
c) Right of support B (span BC) : Total load on AB and CD = 20.7 + 6.56 = 27.26 kN I m say 28 kN I m
vu.max= 78.2 kN., vuD = 78.2-46 X 0.365 = 61.41 kN Porch load =. w"' :;;l.S [(9.2 +0.1)/2 x 25 +0.8 + 0.75] x 2.5 = 19.88 kNim 47.88 kNlm
Asobtained in.(b)above, V . =61.5kN> VD(=61.41 kN) Total load on BC = 28 + 19.88 = 47.88 kN I m say 48 kNim
ur.mm u
.·. Minimum stirrups are sufficient
Thus, the vertical load on b¢am B2 and B4 = 28 kN I m and on B3 = 48 kN I m
Provide ~ 6 f1!m 2- legged stirrup at l30mm clc"
· 'The substitute frame (see Sect. 13.1) consisting of beams with all connected upper and lower
Provide~ 6 mm 2 - legged stirrups @ 80 mm clc to left of Band right of C for a distance of columns ftxed a:t their far end is shown in Fig. 10. 6. 7
·'·'·
640 mmtowards sin:tp~y supported end and rest~ 6 mm4. -legged stirrups at 130mm clc.
.. H
Checkfor deflection . . T
Lid = 34001250 = 13.6 << 26 ·.
:. Safe. 0
0
0
"'
EX· 1~.~.5: Design the supporting beams B-2, B- 3, B- 4 for cantilever porch provided .
~~ th~ entrance of mul~ipurpose ha~l at ~ height of 3. 0 m above the floor le~el and 3 '!' be~ow .
the roof level. The he1ght of the plmth 1s 300 mm above the ground level. Assume un1t we1ght ·
kl'!
o/ ]30 mm thick brick masonry equal to 20 I m3• Use concrete grade M 20 imd steel
dhm ' · .
gra ~e details of the cantilever porch designed in Ex.9.4.3 are as und~r :
Cantilever span -= 2.5 m, Live load= 0. 75 kN I rrl , Floor finish =. ();8 kN I ;n2 J L K M
Thickness = 200 mm reducing to 100 mm at the cantilever end, Fig. 10.6.7 Substitute Frame
Porch size = 2500 mm wide .x 5000 mm long.
·. Calculation of stiffn~es : ( i) Beams
,aJysis and Disc":''~ils : This is very typica.l examp~e in wh~ch the beam B 3 will ~
a
Aubjected to a l~ge ~isting magmtu~e ac~ng o~er ~ho!e
moment ofconstant tts length. To restst
· Torsional stiffness :·
~e m~re.
torsion required Width oftbe beam should be t~rs1on
Thts Will be .dtstri~ted between the ·J\~~ional stiffllessofbeams = k1 =~Tie= ~Db3 GIL (Eq. 7.2.9)
. beaJI1 /12, B3, ~upper column and lower col~ mproportiOn to the torst~nal stdfues.s of~s · i ;(1' ·;::;.£./[{I+ v)], Taking·v =0.15, G= 0.43 E, Dlb =500/350 =1.428
11

dbending stiffi.tesses ofcolumn. All beams WJII carry the wall load ofhetght 3m and m addttion
1an this beam B3 will be subjected to verticai load t:'linsfered from the cantilever slab. Thus, the.
~ ltJ11111S atjoint B ~ Cwill be subjected to bi - axial bending. · · · · · .. Bending stiffness :
co The oth~r alternatives to the provision ofporch slab are :_:. . .
( i) to provide beams cantileveriqg out ~in column Ban~ C. But in such acase the slab will.~
eSigned as ~ne - way of span 5 m. requmng very large thtckne~s OR . . . • . •· .
d.. ) to provtde beams along all the three edges ofthe porch slab With slab spannmg mthe direction
~~Z.S m. [for detail.s see chapter 8 of our book ( 9811) 1 ·
For Dlb =· 1.428, ~ =OJ66+(0.l96-0.166) x 0.228/0.3 = 0.18~8 (see Table 7.2~1) ,
:. Torsionalstifthessofbeam= k1'=9.1888 x 500 x 350~x 0.43E/SOOO = 0.348Ex 106 Nmin
. .
· M9ment of inertia of rectailgular seetion of beam of width 350 mm and d~pth 500 mm is :
I .;· ,' · I =350 x 5003/12 .;,3646 x 106 mm4
The frame has odd - spari symmetry and hence only half frame will be analysed using moment
distribution methott The modifi~ bending Stiftness for BC will be 2 Ell t . (see Sect. 3.5.5)' ·
• • l ' '
;-."'I

n/.
,I 548 Design of Beam Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6 Illustrative Examples S49,

lI'i t/'
1
Bending stiffness for beam AB and CD= 4IEI L =4E x (3646 x 10-6/2600 = 5.61 x 106 mm3 AtJointB:
Bending stiffness for beam BC= 2 EI I L=2E x (3646 x .10-6 I 5000 = 1.46 x 10-6 mm3 Torsion in beam BC =T8 c =60.6 kN.m.
l:!i E being common ·is omitted
Torsion in bam BA =T8A =6.0 kN.m. .
(iR) Columu.
Bending moment in column BFabout axis AC =28.6 A:N.m;
The upper column has a length of3 m while the lower column is 33m ( =3 +0:3 ). .;1', Benditi.g moment in .column BL about axisAC =26.0 /cN.m;
BendingstiffnessofuppercolumnBF=4 x (350 x 35@ /12 )l3000 =1.~7 x 106 mm' · .~,,~

'c~~
Bending stiffness oflowercolumnBL= 4 x (350 x 35@/12)/3300= 1.51 x 106 mm3 Distribution of Bending Moment
Since the column is square its stiffness about both the axes will be the sam~.
Computation of Torsion -~
-~~
Fixed End moments.
2 2
M;BA, = MFAB = w11 L /12 = 28 xH /12 = 15.8 kil.m ~MFCD = MFDC
2
"
... -./~~~ Effective length ofcantilever L1 = Length at column face +effective depth= 2500 +180 = 2680 mm :$ · MFBC. = MFCB = 48 x 5 /12 = 100 kN.m
1t ;:i Twisting moment kN.mlm = w x L/ 2 = 19.88x 2.68/2 = 26.64 kN.m I m
Torsional moment at each support. ~ 26.64 x 5/2 =. 66.6 kN.m ·Distribution Factor for Bending Moment . .
'lj ';r
!~ -: I II l..,:,
! I Ill
t I l ;~ · The frame-has odd- span symmetry and hence only luilffram.e willbC considered. '"
Distribution of Twisting moment : . ~~ The modified
.
stiffness
.
faetbr for BC =2 EI
' .
IL · · ·· r::
I.
'I 'I •I' '
\,
I .<'!
,I This will be distributed at support B between beams BA, BC and columns BF and BL. in the ratio "
Joint Member . RSF SUM DF. \
·~·I<'
••;•I
of torsional stiffness of beams and bending stiffness of columns.
' .. .A_Q. .~ ....---- ~· OJ9
'"
h·
1.67
y~:;\1 Distribution Factors for Torsional ·moments': A AB
·-·
~--

-s.6i 8J9 .0.64 !;'

!\i
1,".,
.'I AJ '1.51 0.17 ., ~·
I rr:
Joint Members Stiffness Sum D.F. '
. BF 1.67 0,16
'ti,., I
r.;'
.J., B BC 1.46 0.14
BF 1.67 X 106 o.43 · 1
i'
,,,
""1''1
B BC BL i.SI 10.25 OJS. !!),,,
;: :~'' 0.348 X 106 3.876 0.09 '.
BA 5.61 0.55 k',
BL 1.51 X }06 0.39 ~~ l
~~: BA 0.348 X 106
"I
0.09 Moment Distribution Table :
,,
,,~:
'.:J
The distribution of torsional moment is shown in Fig 10. 6. 8
Joints A B ,.

F Members .. _ AE AJ .4B ··. BA. .· _BF BL. Be . . :,·

Distribution factors. 0.19 Q.I7 0.~'- 0.55 .· 0:16 .OJ$ 0;14

1
-~
.

Initial FEM
.

·- - .:..ts.so 15.80'
'.
"

-100.

A c
ii Distri.
c.o.
3.00 . 2.69 10.11
23.20
4630
5.06
13.50 ··t2.60
;
Itl(t

~ Dislri -4.40 . ~3.90. ..:.14.90 . .:..2;~ :-{).81 -0.16. .~•71

·.:.,. ,-;J .. ''-<.
~
c.o
11 :

' -1.40 :..,7~45 ,· ,

.· .· ...
'
Distri {);26 0.24 . 0.90 4.10 .U9 1.12 t.o.i ·,

I
('.,

Fig.l0;6;8 ·.·DiStribution of Torsional moment

Finaf01o1Dents -1..14 .~.97 . 2.11 _61.03· 13.88 12.96 -37.tf.-,
 ruv
550 Design of Beam Chapter 10 Sect. 10:6 lllustrative Examples 551
:: -.;1
Maximum span moments :
~n . -}~
X T·u = ( 1 + 500 /350) x 37 = 52.86 kN.m
VAB = 28x2.612-(61.03+2.11)12.6=12.11kN, VBA = 28X2.6-12.11 == 60.69tN' 1.7 1.7
xmax = 12.11128 == 0.43 mfrom A -·
1- 4.6 x 52.86x l(f J
Mrna = 12.1tx0.43+2.11-28x0.43· 2 12 = 4.73/cN.m
· ~
t)
Required A
sl
= . 0.5 x 20. [ 1-
415 . 20 X 350 X 46Q2 J X 350 X 460
333m~

Span BC .
2 I
Mrna = 48 x 5 18-87.87 = 62d3
·
kN.m Provide = 2 # 12 + 1:__ # 20 Area provided = 540 m,Z
vBC = vCB = 48 X 5 12 = 120 kN This will be required on both faces.
Therefore, 3 - # 20 mm can be curtailed from top steel
Pointsofcontraflexures: 120x-87.S7-48~12 =0 :. x2-5x+3.66==0 :. x ==0.89.m Actual point of cut off = APC = TPC+(dorl2' or clear span I l6)wbichever is greater
1
:i! At the points of contraflexures :
1
APC = 890+ [460 or 12 x 20 or (5000- 350) I 16]
i: = 890 + 460 = 1350 mm from support> Ld( =47 x 20)
1; Bending moment Mu = 0, TPC is 890 mm from support. \
I'' Curtail3 # 20 at 1350 mm from support Bin span BC
! ;
ltl
1, '~
vu = 120 - 48 X 0.89 = 77.28 kN, Tu = 60.6 - 26.64' X 0.89 = 37 kN. r··:
i:lil At mid- span ofBC : Since the slab is provided at top of beam it will act as L- section. But
Longitudinal Reinforcement (Main steel) · ~.
'!
i (a) .Span BC Mur.max is much greater than Mu the rectangular section is considered.
I
I ( i ) At support.
ii Mu = 87.87 kN.m, Tu = 60.6 kN.m Mu = 62.13 kN.m, Tu = 0
i
I + Dlb
0.5 x 20[ .---4-.6-x-6_2_.1_3-x-10~
1 + 500 I 350
Mu X Tu = - - - - x 60.6 = 86.57 fcN.m As/ 1- 1- X 350 X 460 = 395 mm2 \i
415 ' 20 X 350 X 460Z .,,
1.7 1.7
. .·· '

lt Equivalent
.
m"Oment· = Mue.= Mu +. MI = 87:87 + 86.57 =, . 174.44 kN.m Provide 2- # t2)m, + 1 - # 20 mm, Area provided= 540 m~
~:1. In this case Mu > M1 , therefore it will require reinforcement on tension face only.
.,'
l Assuming dia of stirrup = I 0 mm and main steel 20 mff'! and clear cover= 20 mm J . Since at points ofcontratlexure the a!>ove steel is required it will be continued 9troughout the
Effective depth , d = 500- 20 - 10- 2012 =460 mm span at bo1:Wm. ·
A?ur.max = Ru.max bd2 = 2.76. x 350 x 4602 x 10-6 = 204kN.m . > Mue (= 174.44
· kN.'m)
.~'
·Side face Jremforce~nt. '/

:. 'The section is singly reinforced Since D > 450 mm side face reinforcement is required to be provided.
. Area ofside facereinforcement=o:tx 350 x 500/100=175 ~,equally spaced on both faces.

1253~~
4 6 174 106
0.5 X 20 ['. Provided 2 no~# Smm (100 ~ Qll' eaeh fiu:e at Spacing
l- l-
Ast
415
' X .44 X
, 20 X 350 X460 2 Jl.: X350 X460 =
s = (460-40)/(2+1)= 140mm<300mm

Transve~e Reinforcement Span BC · .

Provide 20 m~,, Area provided ,; 1482 m~,
2 # 12 mf'l + 4 - #
Critical section is at a~ 'd' ftom the face of $Upp0rt.
P,% = 100 X 1482/( 350 ~ (60~ = 0.92% Shear and torsion at distance of 3S0/2, +460 == 635 mm from~ the centre of support are'
. i .. ob~as follows: ,· . · ·
(ilj At point of contrajlexure i.e. 890 mm from support.
--..:.
Jl
.. ,,
·=·t20-48K0.635 = .89.SkN
'. . '

Mu = o, Tu = 37 kN.m · T . ='60;6-26.6Jt0.63S·=43.7kN.m
: II '
 552 Design ofBeam
Chapter 10 Sect. 10.6 Illustrative Examples 553
' Equiwilent shear = Vue = Vu + 1.6 Tu I b = 89.5 + 1.6 X43. 7 I 0.35 = say 290 kN. $ince the difference is only 20 mm ( = 140-120) therefore the same spacing of#10mm
Since all top steel continues for a distance 'd' beyond the critical sections 635 + 460 = 1095 inm 2 - legged stirrups at 120 mm is continued
< 1350 mm ). we will takeAs1 =/1482mml or p = 0.92% Let
1 . the distance of a point where Vue = Vur.mm. be x from the left support.
t uc ~ 0.56 +(0.06 x 0.17/0.25) = 0.6N /mm 2 Yur.mm. = V11e = Vu + 1.6 Tu I b
-{Table 5.7.1)
V11C . = t UCbd = 0.6 X 350 X 460/1000 = 96.6 /eN 161 = [(120- 48x)] + [ 1.6 (60.6 -l6.6x) I 0.35] :. x = 236 I 169.6 = 1.39 m
vu.rv.mm
.. = M bd = 0.4 X- 350 X 460/1000 = 64.4 kN. . Provide minimum stirrups in the central portion of 2.22 m (=5-2 x 1.39).
vur.mrn. = vuc + vusv.mrn. = 96.6 + 64.4 = ·161 kN < vue(= 290.kN)
· Using # 8 mni 2 - legged stirrups :
:. Shear reinforcement is required . Spacing= 0.87 x 415·x 100 I (0.4 x 350) =257 mm > 180 mm
.. .. Provide # 8 mm 2 -legged stirrups at 180 mm de for the central portion of 2.22 or
; •I ~
vus = vue - vuc = 290 - 96.6 = 193.4 kN from 1.39 m jroin each end support.
'rI I·i Also, Vu.r
T V d
Anchor 3 # 20 mm top bars and I # 20 mm bottom bars into the column to prevent
..... _u_ + _u X . ·'
·~--: .·;
i hi 2.5 d1 (Eq.7~9.4b) possible. rotation of the beam due to torsion.
!' bl = 350-2 x 20-2 x I0-20.=270mm ,d1 = 500-2 x 20.,-2x l0-20=420mm Note : Since the beam BC is s11bjected to large torsion, the joints B and C are /ilwly to rotate transversely
) il
43.7 89.5) 0.460 res11lting in deflection of cantilever porch slab thereby releasing some torsional moment. So while
··. :/
VIIS =( ~
0.27
+ -
2.5
X --
0.420
= 2lfi.5kN < l93.4kN ::VIIS =216.5kN pr(JIJiding jormwork it should be lifted 11pwardi to compensate for possible downward deflection. Further
'iii)
;
the props should not be removed till the roof slab is cast. The wall shall be pr(JIJided flush with the inside
face. This will effect in reduction of torsion of abo11t 4.9 kN.m [moment of wall load at o11ter face of beam
n
Using lO mm 2legged stirrups = 1.5 ( 20 x 0.23 x 3) x ( 0.350- 0.230 I 2)]. If necessary computation ofactual rotation at the joints
111 Spacing= 0.87 x 415 x 157 x.460! (216.5 x 1000)= 120 mm may be parried out and the porch slab lifted upwards correspondingly.
,;:i x1 =350-2 X20-l0=300mm, y1 =500..:.2 X 20-10=450mm
';~I
sim~ing < x1 =350-2x20-I0=300mm Design of Beam AB

·w < (x1 +y1 )14=(300+ 450)/4 =187mm(sayl80mm):· ·

< (300mm, or 0.75x460) : · ·
RA = 12.11 kN,
MA = 2.11 kN.m (clockwise),
RB = 60.69 kN,
MB = 61.03 kN.m (clockwise)
.\
:!

Provide# 10 mm 2 -legged stirrups at 120 mm c!c. . .

:!•'
TuB = 6 kN.m, xmax = 0.43 m, Mmax =4.73 kN.m
:-...'
·This spacing will continue upto point ofcontraflexure(TPC) i:e,8901nn(: To find point of contrajlexure
At point of contraj/exure : · ·· ·
M = 12.llx + 2.11 - 28 xl/2 = 0
X •
V11 '=17.2$.kNandT,=37A:N.mand.M,·=.o .. :.xi= 1.01 m fromA andx2 = O.I5m from A
Equivalent Vlie ,.;, 77.28 + L6 x 37 I 0.35= 24(! kN. · Support section at B
At. TPC, available area bf steel 540 mnl . ·:.',
'/ M11 = 61.03 kN.m, _
p1 =IOO·x540/(350x460) =0.33%· · . M1 = T11 x ( 1 + D lb )I 1.7 = 6 x ( 1 + 500 I 350) /1.7 = 8.57 kN.m
tiiC = 0.3~+(0.t2·x 0.08/0.25) ,= 0.3'98NI~ Me1 = 61.03 + 8.57·= 69.6 kN.m < Mur.max ( = 199.5 kN.m)
VIIC ' ~ 0.398 X 350 X 460 /1000 = 64.1 kN. :. Section is signly·reinforced.
v"' = 246;.., 64.1 = IB1.9 kN.
.( 37 . 17.28) . 0.460 . . . . .. ' ' .• : . . •. . . A =
0.5 X 20 ~-1 - I-
4.6 X 69.6 X 10
·
6
. ~ x 350 x 460 = 445 mml
vliS =0.27
- + -
. 2:5 .
x -
0.420
=184kNorV~l8UkN.wbicbever-isgreater
. .
st 415 ', 20 X 350 X 46o2
. . '
:. V =I84A:N.
liS . .. • . .
liS

. .
.

. . . .
. ' .

Provide 2- # I2 +I - #20 , Area provided = 540 -,,t .

s:= 0.87x 415x I57x 460/(184x lOOO)=I4;limnsayi40nim
pt% = 350 X 454.5
OJ4% > Ptmin {=0.2%)
tf'JW~ "'
r~ r>: 554 Design of Beam
'I !I
I
I
1/
!.,
I
Curtailment of bars
Chapter. io,
'
Moment resistance of2- #12 mm, bars (area"" i26 mnf )is: . .'; ..

226 '--~-; '

' ;:~·1

x 10~ 36A kN.m (Eq.4.5,Jh)

415 ' '
=
M 0.87 x 415 x 226 x 460 ( I - - x
ur 20 350 X 460
= .
CHAPTER-11
Let x be the distance from the support B at which BM == 36.4 kN.m
-36.4 ==60.69x-28x212-6I.03 :.x=0.453m
COLUMN
TPC ==453 mm fromB, APC==453 +460=913 mm 'i:Ld
Curtail!- # 20 mm bar at a distance of 940 mm from B i·JU INTRODUCTION
/ 1
Provide 2- # 12 at bottom. In the major portion of the beam 2.17 m( == 2.6- 0.43) the tel)sion
1 is Iat the top While•.the positive moment is only 4. 76 kN.m which requiresA == 29 mm2 only.
1 11.1.1 Definition
~ Transverse Remforcement : 91 "!.1.. In reiilforced concrete construction, acompression member having its effective length greater
c 'Ji
E
"i:
(I) At support B- Span AB -than 3 times its least lateral dimension is called as a Column or a Strut . A vertical compression
:: member coming under -above definition is usually called a column, while that in any other
== 60~69 kN. , , Tu == 6 kN.m . p == 0.34%
;:.:
i: Vu
!;J:I 1 direction; as in case of frames and trusses, is called a strut. A column with an effective length less /~\<'.

'-1
J~
t~ - + 0.12 x 0.09 I 0.25 ::, 0.403 N I mnf
== 0.36 . than three times th!lleast lateral dimension is called a pedestal. For further details see Sect. 12. 6
. I'
Vuc == 0.401x350X46011000==64.9kN.
"• ,,
·'I·
.j'
11.1.2. Short - coming and Necessity of Constituent Materials
':j'
'j' vusv.mrn. == 0.4 X 350 X 460 I 1000 == 64.4' kN
·~!
.(
vur.mm. == 64.9 + 64.4 == 129.3 kN (a) Concrete: Concrete being very strong in compression should not theoretically, require any
:(
d·r· ..
/
i ,,-:
- vue . == vu + 1.6. Tu-I b == 60.69 + 1.6·
:. Minimum stirrups are sufficient
6 I 0.35 == 88.1 kN < vur.mrn. (== 129.3 kN)
X reinforcement but for a given load the column may require a large section, further its
short - coming is that it is very weak in tension, and therefore, in all circumstances leading to
:I'
if:~ · Provide # 8 mm 2 -legged stirrups at 180 clc as obtained earlier for the whole span. development of tension need to be _examined. In view of this reiilforcenient is required to be
~~~I
f: The details of reinforcement is shown in Fig. 10. 6. 9 provided to resist tension and to reduce the size of the colu~n.
,,/,
d:!
.,, The tension is likely to develop in ::--;!....;,m due to accidental transverse loads, eccentric loads,
and the end moments which cause bending in the member; Further since bending can occur in any
·direction, inducing tension on any face, the· ~illfor~nient is requir~ on all the extreme faces
. running parallel to the axis of the m,ember. This, thus,.fonns a longitudinal steel. For short mem-
bers, there is a possibility of failure by longitudinal splitting due to development oftransverse ten-
' T sion, or failure by shear i.e. diagonal tension. This therefore, requires transverse reinforcement
The two reiilforcements are obviously required to hold each other. -
. ·· . The various functions served by the longitudinal and transverse reinforcement can be
(a ) Longitudinal section
summarised as under.

1
1.-aso -1
180180c/c~l12 r·
500
(b) .Longitudinal Reinforcement : . . _
1. To assist c:Oncrete, in resisting compression, so as to reduce the overall size, of the column.
Fig. JJ.l.la:{;) _ .
4·18 .
2•1121 2. T9 resiSt any tension that might dev..elop due to bending caused by transverse load, eccentric
1 : load or the m.()iriems;· Fig .11.1.1ti (ii j . .
Saci.A·A Sect. B-11 Sactc-c .3. ·to· Riduce the effeCt of creep and shrinkage due to sustained loading.
( b ) Cross ·sections 4.. To: prevent or delay sudden britt!~ collapse. .
Fig~ 10.6.9 (. s; To~n~ dw:tilitytothecolumn..
""' ;:.;... ·;-' :.?·""1."" .. ""''T,.,. ........,,.. ·.•••.• - ••
 556 Column
Chapter 11 Sect. 11.2 Related Definitions for Column 557
i] p p
let......_ In the case of columns in a framed structure, unsupported length is taken as follows for the
(· different situations.
,, /· I I MI (a) In beam-slab floor construction, it is the clear distance between the floor and the underside
·i····~ I I I
of the shallower beam framing into the columns in each direction at the next higher floor level.
:~:·.} I
I I
!
I
:.r.J ..· ~ .:· w- I
I Fig. ll.2.1a.
I I
I I (b) In flat slab construction, it is the clear distance between the floor and lower extremity of
...00:•0 . . .i
·'. 0

!
I I I the capital, the drop panel or slab whichever is the least. Fig.11.2.4b.
fl 00~ I I
:.: ,.
0 :

I (c) In columns restrained laterally by struts (as in case of a staging for overhead tanks), it is
I I
I
I
M the clear distance between the consecutive struts in each vertical plane, provided two such struts
e
:.:. :~u j p I
p '
p shall meet the columns at approximately the same level and the internal angle betwe:eu vt:rtical
I "~'II
11, /i (i)
(if) planes through the struts does not exceed 135°. Such· struts are expected to have sufficient rigidity
I; .to restrain the column against lateral deflection. Fig. 11.2.1c.
{J L
lr(.' ~! Fig. ll.l.la Functions of Longitudinal Reinfllrcement (d) In columns restrained laterally by struts or beams with brackets used at the junction, it is
,/:: " taken equal the clear distance between the floor and the lower edge of the bracket, provided that
r ;I {c) Transverse Reinforcement :
' ;''1:
1
. I' I. To' prevent buckling oflongitudinal bars. Fig. 11.1.1b (i)
the bracket width equals that of the beam strut and at least half that of the column. Fig. 11.2.1d.

!.--~(~,1
r - - - - Flat slab - - - - - .
2. To prevent longitudinal splitting of CO!'"rftte. Fig. 11.1.1b (ii) Next higher floor level
3. To resist diagonal tension due to transverse shear. Fig. ll.l.Jb (iii)
·--,-:
:•') 4. To confine the concrete. Fig. ll.l.Jb ( iv)
:)~~ts 5. To hold the longitudinal reinforcement in position. drop
"'1(,,;
; 6. To prevent or delay sudden collapse and impart necessary ductility to the members.
.'f'
longnudinal
·;,,'
il;;:
I
-bars-
[T ,. I
;,,/
I
a:' ~ate~
I (a) ( bl (d)
ill I
ties 1 f
h·-
!~
I
I
I 1 9.135° ~
I · ~Column
I I J

J
I
I
I
I I Fig. 11.2.1 Unsupported Length for Columns I Struts Cc) PLAN
I
I
•/
II . 7
j
11.2.2 Slenderness Limits for Column
j
The unsupported length between end restraints shall not exceed 60 times the least lateral
(I) Buckling of l-Bar Prevented ( ii) long~udinal Splitting Arrested ( IH) Diagonal Tension Resisted ( lv) Concrete Confined
1 dimension of the column. If, in a given plane, one end of a column is unrestrained, its unsupported
.I
Fig.ll.l.lb Functions of Transverse Reinforcement length L shall not exceed 100 ll I D, where b is the width of cross-section, and Dis depth of
cross-section measured in the plane under consideration.·
j Design ofa R.C. column, therefore, involves determination ofsize ofconcrete section and the
amount and arrangement oflongitudinal and transverse reinforcement.
11.2.3 Minimum Eccentricity
11.2 RELATED DEFINITIONS FOR_~OLUMN A column can be said to be truly axially loaded only when the load actually acts along the
centroida! axis of the column as a whole. But in practice, the load is hardly ever axial bec11use of
U.l.l Unsupported Length the following reasons : .
1. Due to lack ofhomogeneiey_oftbe material the true centroid of sections at different levels
The unsupported length L ofa·compression member
end restraints., > ·
is defined as clear distance between the
· · ·· may not be collinear, and the centroid may nQt c:Oincide with geometric centre of the cross section
where ~ lOad ~.:supposed.
to• act,. ~. ..i$;;~0re
-· .a poSSibility Of Oresence Of inhPr..nt
 ·.~. ,~\
''[ '
i:l.
'l
.;i 558 Column
;:1
'•
Chapter 11 Sect. 11.2 Related Definitions for Column. 559
':i
"I
i:) •-tridty
; upon of the
the length loadcolumn.
of the with "'""'to true oentruid of th•=tion. Eceen"ici!y d"' to this depends
Fot a given lateral dimension h, the maximum
·
unsupported length up to which emrn. = 20 mm can be
. I
obtained as follows :
·~of
iii 2. Loads acting at the ends may not bo truly axial, truly pe.-pendicular to the saction "thoy
may not bo collinaa., on misalignment eith., of the cclrunn or of the load due to bad _£_ + - h
== 20mm
.---"-
,:1 500
dimension h. or· Jllaciical ·<mi!Cultlas. Eccentricity due to ihis varies directly with the lataraJ
W<lrl<mans!rip 30
:;
j; :. L == 500 (20- h /30) ...... .( 11.2.2 )
ii
/!
u eitherCoda
of thetakes
principal axes in designboth
into COIISidenition thesa 8Specjs
of columns jlreSCri!J._,
and below
as given : a miniliuun '""""icily about For a value of L less than that given by Eq. 11. 2. 2, emrn. == 20 mm and for L greater than
given by Eq. 11. 2. 2, emin > 20 mm.
•.., "st- + 3~-
I.

but j: 20mm ...... (11.2.1a)

where, L == Maximum unsupported lengths up to which emin =20 mm is given in Table 11.2.1 for differ-
unsupported lengtllt of the column, en·
-h ==
lateral dimension of the column perpendicular to the axis ofbending.
Table ll.l. 1 Unsupported Lengths up to which emill = 20 mm.
Fora col- ofrectaogula,.:ros.s section the lataraJ dimension can bo eith" the width 'b 'or
the depth 'D 'of the column depending on the axis of bending. h inmm 150 200 230 250 300 350 380 400 450
Soma of the u.p.,.,.,
points, which should be noted for coinputaton of minimum
eccentricity, unsupported length, and axis o:-hllnding, are given below : L- in meters 1.50 6.67 6.17 5.83 5.00 4.17 3.67 3.33 2.50
I. The axis Ofbon<Jiog is •lraosverse axis P<l]lendicul" to the planenfbeoding.
Remarks : It will be observed from above table that· t, ·r
. 2. The piaOe ofbendiog is a plane ofthe frame or •meJnberin which lOads and loogitudJnal axis elllin = 20 mm goes on decreasing as the lateral dimension of the column goes on increasing. And therefore,
lie and in which the deflection profile can be seen. ·
if it is desired that emn1 shall not exceed 20 mm, lateral dim~nsion shall be reduced. to value given in
3. The ' ofthe member is the length of the member contained In the plane
W!SIIJlPOrted length
of bending. ·Table JJ.2.1 to suit the given unsupported length.

The
4. bending ~ yi: - of Inertia, deflec:tion, stifffiess ,,... Cilc:oJMed about the -of 11.2.4 Effective Length
Effective length of a column is a length between points' of zero bending moments or
5. The major axisofbendiog x- x. is taken as an axis bisecting the depth of the col,.,., or in . between the points of contrajlexure of a buckled column. It depends upon the end conditions
other words the depth of the column shall be contained in .the plane of 'bending. The minor as regards restraint against rotation and that against transverse displacement . The theoretical
axis of bending y- y is one which bisects the width of the column. values of the effective length can be obtained from theory of elastic columns in theory of
Thus,
the miulmum
column eccentricity,
Dis given by : e..,. for bonding shout major axiS:i~x bisecting the depth of structures. However, in actual practice, ideal end conditions considered in the theory hardly ever
exist. Code, therefore; recoinmends modifi~s values of effective length, in terms of unsupported
LX D . length, slightly on the conservative side.
eminx == 500 + 30 'F 20 mm
...... ( 11.2.Ib )· TheiheoreticaleffectivelengthsofcohmmsareshowninFig.JJ.2.2 .:.-i'
/
And minimum
column ecc.ntricity,
b is· given by: , , for lieoding about minor axis y -y bisecting the width of the
emmy
.f .. 2-. 5 6
·~·.
7
~ b -
I

500 + 30
n
-F 20 mm

~J:_ ,.1l~lt11=L
eminy == ...... ( 11.2.Ic)
where, L, and L, are the oosn- langfb<of!be oo!"""" fur bending about x andy "'"
respectively. -- , ·_!:_..••. 1
t.e_=2L

~--
.,_
. When minimum eccentricity requirements control, the bending only about one axis at a t:me
shall be considered and NOT as a case of biaxial bending. ·
• It maybe rioted thai x' iS used here as suffix of 'e 'indicating eccentricity of load from
.tr' 1 · ·I
.... ,
.·

·notanx~~;-.
x ;\.:
·axis or eccenlricity for bending · -' ,._ · ·It is not
-·· ·abQutx.·axis; -· alongx- axis. It\is also
· the distance ) '
i.
Fig. 11;2.2 : .Theoretical Effective Lengths of Columns - Genelial
,
Related Definitions fo'r Column 561

560 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.2

required to be defined in terms of the degree of end restraint against position and direCtion

The theoretical and recommended values of effective lengths of compression members are given (i.e; against transverse displacement and rotation) .
.·Wood (74n) observes that one of the greatest uncertainties in design procedures laid down
in Table 11.2.2 . . . by the Codes is in specifying the effective lengths of contin-·colmnnS. This is becaDsC of the
Table 11. U:> eiteetive tiqth of Compmsloa Memben difficulties in determining the stability indices or factors for slender columns. He, therefore, presents
cootprebensive charts foc derennination of effectivetongth of column .,;.,.ton the local <!epee of
(· ' '
Case End condition · Theoretical Recommended ·rotational and translational restraints at both ends of a column. These have also been adopted by
No. ·va}ue of length value of Elf. Length L S. Code while recommending the effective lengths of columns in frames.
For this, the columns in elastic frames \U'e divided into two categories. Those which are held
1 Effectively held in position and restrained O.S.L 0.6SL in position at both ends, i.e. those columns in which the relative movement transverse to the
against rotation at both ends longitudinal axis is prev<nted i.e. noit- sway columns come under fue fust categO<Y of broced
columns, and those which are not held in position at one or both ends come under the second
-;:·1:. 2 Effectively held in: position at both ends and 0.7 L 0.80 L category of unbraced columns. The columns in the second category are more susceptible to
/1]:;
restrained against. rotation at only one end elastic instability and, therefore, require special attention.
r\·.
!' ~ .. 3 Effectively held in position but not restrained l.O L l.OO L
against rotation at both ends
:
;
..
J'·'

jl'

':;"li:) 4 Effectively held in position and restrained 1.0 L l.20L

1:: against rotation at one end, and at the other
end restrained against rotation but not held in
lJ~~ position
,I-1:.'_.. 5 ·Effectively held in position and restrained - l.SOL

;1;.·:
;

J
II

,Jii
6
against rotation at one end, and at the other
end partially restrained against rotation but
not held in position

Effectively held in position at one end but not 2.0L 2.00L

'~~

t.·\} restrained against rotation and at the other

end restrained against rotation but not held
in: position
I
{ _/ 7 Effectively held in position and restrained 2.0L 2.00L
against rotation at on~ end but neither held
.in position nor restrained against rotation at 02 . 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
Fixed
the o.ther end
Fixed liz ----- Hinged . ..

where, L = unsupported length of the member Fig. 11.1.3 EfreetiVe Length Ratios of a Column In a Fraine Without Sidesway ·
- I. S. Code gives two separate figures for determining the effective lengths of columns in
11.2.5 Columns in Elastic: Frames . . above two categories. Fig. 11.2.3 gives the ratio Leffl L for braced ~olumns, and Fig.JJ.2.4 gives
As seen earlier, the effective length of column length depends on the end conditions of the the same for unbraced columns. This ratio depends on the degree of restraint against rotational and
column as regards to restraint against rotation and restraint against transverse displacement. Since ·linear displacement at both ends. The basic slope- deflection relations in theory of structures sb.ow
columns in elastic fraffies, with rigid joints, have an end restraining condition varying between .that the degree of restraint is a function of stiffnessof the member - stiffer the member, greater is
various standard ideal end conditions given in Table 11.2.2,the effect cif"actual end conditions is
 --....
_..-.,

!] 'II 1
'\! '' 562 Column Chapter 11
·!,
Sect. 11.2 Related Definitions for Colu
mns 56J
,, ,/~·.Z>

;I the restraint. The ratio Leff f L has, therefore, been made the function of the degree of flexural .(2) In unbraced frames,-since the beam bend in double curvature, the beam stiffness sh ld
! restraint ( at both ends) defined by the rotation release factor ~. · modified as : ou be
'f.k . 3 I
~ = r, kc : r, kb .kb = 2T
~nts
. : In the case of unbraced frames
. the beam bends into double curvature and the dist~J 0·
Where 'f. K
c
= flexural stiffness of column= Ic I Lc pQirl/ of contrajlexure occurs at L I 2 from the joint. Thus . J the
!: K6 = flexural stiffness of beam = f/ LB k
3
=-x--=--
I 3 I

Lc = length of column (centre to centre distance between columns ), 6 4 L/2 2 L

The factor ~ is applied because of the zero moment (hinged) condition at the point of contrqfl
(3) For determining ~ and ~ the limited substitute
1 2 frame consisting. of column under cons1·'..~e
L6 == length of beam (centre to centre distance between beams). ,;;~
. extll'e.
~~~~ .:~· • 41 ration w·
Ic ,lb = moment of inertia of column and beam respectively connecting beams and columns fixed at their far ends shauld be used lth
Jl~ ~~'

!:···I'' '. ~has two values, ~~ and P2 at the two ends (top and bottom of column respectively). .1$
"";?~
(4) When the lateral displacement is not prevented values obtained from Fig. 11.2.4 i.e. L 1 L
be takert less than 1.2. · eJI may not
I, i:: Hinged 1.0 ~Cb
.·,-tl

~~
)! ~ l:i
·.".· A column in a storey whether it is a sway or a non - sway column, is detemiined fr
!J''
ill~
stability index. ( 7417,77/12) om the
For braced frame or non-sway frame, Q~ o.04
:~:
For un - braced frame or sway frame, Q > 0.04
~~~~
! I'' r,pt,
·~:~
where, Q = H~
h ...... ( 11.2.5)
:::: u s
:··:"·· r. P. = sum ofthe axialloads on all columns in the storey,
11:::: 6 u = elastically computed first order lateral deflection. ,
w~:~,
':;::: p1 H. = total lateralforce ac.~ing within the storey, '. ~
\
II' I

'1':: hs = height of the storey. •

For normal use assuming idealised conditions, the effective lengths L~ff of a given plane ma b
taken as per Table 11.2.2 . · · . Ye
Remarks : J.S. 456 does not defined specifically the flexural stiffness k. Theoretically, J; vari
4~UL en~ ~embe~
0111
to 3EUL depending. upon the condition whether the far o! the is fvced or hi:se:
srmply supported). Assummg far ends of all members as fixed, as it rs consrdered m above definitig · (or
stiffness becomes 4EI/Lfor all members and the term 4E gets eliminated in the expression for b. The~;of 1r,
.
Fixed 0'1::' 1,\ 1 \ 1 \ I \ I ~ \I \ I \ \I \ I ~
~.
can then be defined as !fL. While calculating length of column ( L ) is taken equal to centre t iffness
distance between the joint for simplicity. The torsional stiffness of beams which are perpendicu; centre
1
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 plane of bellf]ing is ignored. !1 the
Iffar tnd of beam or column meeting at a joint is hinged, the stiffness ofthe member will be taken
~
p2 - - - -
k=~ (IlL)· , .as
Fig.11.2.4 Effective Length Ratios for a Column in a Frame with Sidesway
· Bx. 11.2.1· . A.R.C. column is 3,2
· m long between two floor levels. At ton, ..... 0.~
l" a ber- :1 uepth
J

Note : For using the charts in Fig.J 1.2.3 and Fig.ll.2.4 the following points shoulcl be noted (83/3) D fo'0111es. on to one side
, ·of column 'and·another beam of depth D 2·frames on to onn 0
~ ~es~.• 't .
of the column in the' same plime. Determine the unsupported length of the column in the pl~
1

·(l) For braced frames, the beam stiffness should be taken as kb = 2 x

I
Ll contained by the lleam and· the col'f""'t when ·
(a) D = D = 400 mm, (b) D, = 380 mm, D., = 530 mm.
1 2
 ·Sect.. Jf2.. Related Definitions for Column 565
Chapter ·JJ · Fe>r unsupported length in (xy) plane perpendicular to wall, the bending is about z _axis
Solution : (a) L = 3200-400 = 2800 mm. L, =3500-depth ofB (i.e. 600 mm)== 3500..,. 600=2900 mm. '
.\' 1
(b) L = 3200-380 = 2820 nun. i.e. D1 or D2·whichever is less i.e. 380 mm.
\
--t
,.. """""'*" ,.g.l<irpo/WIWl brocing SJ<'Ie"' at a,emcaJ d/st""" afl m. !f ~' <kp~ aff>,,:!
:~
. · .&. iJ.2,4 A staging of an dverhead water tank 9 m high above footing level is provided .
Ex 11.2.2 A corner column between two floors 3.6 m apart connects a beam B1 300 mm
\ deep in one plane and a beam B2 , 450 mm deep in a plane at right angles at the same level.. ;~ i$ 25() ntm; detennine the unsupported length ofthe column for bending about y axis ( rad· g
. . the internal.angle e between the .bracing members, and about axis perpendi'cuIar to!a!1t
\\ ' I

Determine the unsupported lengths of the column for bending about both principal ~es . bikecting
···dXJS_
• ) X
·Solution: (i.e. tongeniiol atis) if the number ofcolumns 1s (a) 6, (b) 10
Let the plane of B1 and the column be x y plane, and the plane.of B2 and the column bey z plane.
Solution:
(a) For 6 COLUMNS: the internal angle between the adjacent bracings e "' uoo < nso
For bending about z- axis the plane of bending is x y plane therefore the unsupported length in
x y plane is to be considered. ::) · The struts can be assumed to give effective lateral restraint about both x andy axis.
,, Lz = 3600- depth B1 inx y plane (i.e. 300 mm) = 3600-300 = 3300 mm. L = 3000 - 250 == 2750 mm. '(
·.l;i:.\ For bending about x- axis the plane of bending is y z plane, therefore the unsupported length
"1 {\)) ForlOCOLUMNS: e ==144°>135° I
. ·. . :. The struts cannot be assumed. to offer effective lateral support to each other. There,~ore l
'\!l\'_i':''h in y z plane is to be considered. . .
1l;:, Lx = 3600- depth of B2 in y z plane (i.e. 450 mm )= 3600-450 = 3150 mm. ~parate radtal bracmgs are also requtred.
g{t ·lit
l\i!:\13
1··:•,1: 1,' Comments : The depth of beam B1 does not affect the unsupported length in yz plane even though it -~~·
When no such radial bracing is provided,
'\_:;..: ~ I ,_
1 L == 9000-250 = 8750 mm for bending about x- axis.
' i:~ is shallower. %"
~·~~ l =3000-250 =2750 mm for bending about y- axis.
_/ r' Ex. 11.2.3 An edge column in a side wall of size 250 mm x 250 mm is 3.5 m long between Remarks ~ Jn practice the radial bracings are provided and therefore the check for bend·mg about
·1·!,:~.,, the floors. It carries a beam B1 60Q '!lm deep at right angles to the plane of the wall, and beams x- axis is not taken. ·
'l::; B2 and B3 500 mm and 550 mm deep-respectively in the plane of the wall on opposite sides· of . Ex. 11.2.5 A single storey rectangular frame of a gymnasium hall has column 8 h' h
D ~g.
I: ' ~
i.,:l

r
:; the column. Neglecting the lateral support offered by the wall, determine the unsupported and a beam 12m between centres of columns, all having uniform cross section alonm
lengths. Determine the effective length of columns for bending about an axis perpe,J. t ;'r
.,
I. ~
i:,
I' \

~ ~: '\·
length of the column in the plane of the wall and at right angle to it.
Solution : Let the plane of the wall be yz plane and the vertical plane at right angles to the wall be to the plane of the frame for ( i ) vertical symmetrical loading ( ii ) horizontal loadi~cu ar
l1,
I'·

li::' '•
Xy plane. (see Fig. 11.2.5 ) ( iii ) vertical unsymmetrical loading, where ( a ) the base of column is hinged, (b) thg
·· h b bl .1 · • ere IS
an~ 1_',,

wide footing at t e ase capa e o1 rwstmg moment.

e~
Solution : Since horizontal beam at top is not rigid but an elastic one, it is \iab\e to b d'
Therefore, the deflected shapes under different loading and base conditions will be requi

[1_
mg.
examined. for. deciding the end conditions and, hence, effective lengths of columns · Threeseto are
be

~·
62
-· shownmFzg.JJFl2.6.
. I _____ ,.... I
I \ I
~--,
n--r-.- I
I
----
1
I
I
I . I I 1
1
I I
3500 I I I I I I
FR-----,-x . (I) (II) . (IIi)
I'
([Ll
, .
62
(150x500) I

:~\
( a l Hinged Ends

,.1----
!.<-""'

T1 ,
Plan
II
To offloor z I
I
I I I
Fig. 11.2.5

For unsupported length in yz plane of the wall, the bending is about x- axis, and yz is the plane
ofbending.
1. . . 1 (I}
(U)
I b) Fixed Ends
\
.(ill)

L:z = 3500-depth of shallower beam out ofB2 and B3in the plane of wall ( i.e.500 mm) Fig. 11.2.6
~·

=
=3500..;.. 500 3000 '""'
 ,..-_
'
f'~
.: ~
c-"

Related Definitions for Column. 567

566 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.2 /--,

( iii) Unsymmetrical-loading : In this ~ also, the frame undergoes sway condition as

. ~

,j ( a ) Base hinged
( i) Vertical symmetrical loading : shown Fig. 1i2.6b (iii) and the end oondition are ~e as those Part- (b) ( ii) above .;:,,.'

When there is only vertical symmetrical load, and the columns are of same size, length and :. Leff = 1.5 x 8 =12m. ri}~
have the same end conditions and beam section is also uniform , the columns do not undergo any
sway* ( i.e. no lateral displacement ), and thus, the columns are held in position at both ends. Ex. 11.2.6 For the columns supporting a rigid overhead tank at the top 4m above the
However, the ends are ·not restrained against rotation and, therefore, the frame deflects as shown base as shown in Fig. 11.2. 7 determine the effective length of the column for (i) vertical
in Fig. I I.2. 6a ( i ). Thus this case corresponds to Case - 3 of Table I I.2.2 loading and (ii) horizontal loading when the column is (a) fzxed at the base, (b) hinged at
:.Leff = 1.0 L = 8 m. the base. The connection between the tank and the column may be assumed to be rigid.
'\·I
-- !•
w w " _·:~
Remarks : * For the case of no sway, all the following conditions should be satisfied. (II.
(a) Symmetry ··of loading, (b) Symmetry of end conditions of the columns, ! \\
~';1:1'·' J
,
:1:1
(c) Symmetry of geometry of the frame as regards to :
( i) lengih of columns, (They should be equal.) ( ii) Size of columns. (Variation i
H
i ,\
!

I:,•

Ji
r·,
of cross -section along the height should be the same for all columns),
(iii) Variation of cross - section of the beam along the length should be the same on two ll 1, \
1
\
\
I
I
(j.:\:
\) \i
\ I I
r· I
1!,,
sides of line of symmetry, I \ I \ I _.-,~ I
\ 4m I I
(d) Symmetry of physical properties of the frame. i.e. grades of concrete, elastic- modulus of 4m I I I I I
i';:i I

l l
I I I I
concrete of all columns should be the same.

l~
I I I
I I I
\ I
Strictly speaking, L is the unsupported length in the above expression. However, since depth of beam is not
~
,Ill
·_:·'
'.\ \ I T)
1,:
".\
given, centre to centre length of column is taken in place of unsupported length If depth of beam is ~
·-;:, assumed as say 900 mm, the unsupported length L becomes 8000- 900 I 2 = 7550 mm and, hence, ( b ) Hinged Base ( c ) Fixed Base ( d ) Hinged Base
::, ( a ) Fixed Base
',\ effective length will be 7550 mm instead of8000 mm.
,,, Fig. 11.2.7
u
'.\
( ii) Horizontal loading : The deflected shape of the frame under this type of loading is
Solution : In this case, since the tank held at top is quite rigid, it can be assumed that it will not
,;
•;
,:
1::~ shown in Fig. 11.2.6 a ( ii) which indicates that the frame sways laterally. The columns are held
Jl,l deflect or bend in vertical plane and the deflected shapes of columns will be as shown in
"·I in position but not restrained against rotation at the base and they are neither held in position nor
·~';!)\ restrained against rotation at top. This does not fit in any end condition given in Table 11.2. I. It has Fig. 11.2. 7
i1l an effective length even greater than 2 L and can be determined only after knowing the sizes and
hence, stiffrtesses of beam and columns. This condition has, therefore, been separately attempted I. VERTICAL LOADING:
in Ex. 11.2.8.
(a) Base fixed: The columns do not sway (See Fig. 11.2. 7a). They are held in positioa and
(iii) Unsymmetrical Vertical load : In this case also, the frame under - goes sway due to restrained in direction at both ends. Therefore, it corresponds to end condition No.I in Table 11.2.1 -
non- symmetry ofloading, as shown in Fig. 11.2.6a (iii) The effective length of column in this
case is, therefore, same as that in Part- (a) ( ii) above. · giving, L eff = 0.65 L == 0.65 x 4 = 2.6 m.
(b) Hinged base : The columns do not sway .in this case too (See Fig. 11.2.-'fli) but now
( b ) Base having wide moment - resistant footing the columns are held in position at both ends but restrained against rotation only at top. This
( i) Vertical symmetrical loading : In this case also, frame does not undergo any sway* as
corresponds to end condition No.2 in Table 11.2.2 giving, Leff = 0.81 = 0.8 x 4 = 3.2 m.
in Part - (a) ( i) above. The deflected shape of the frame is shown In Fig. ll.2. 6b ( i) which
indicates that the columns are fixed in position and direction at the base but are fixed in position only
II. HORIZONTAL LOADING :
( not in direction i.e. not against rotation ) at top. This condition corresponds to Case-2 in
Table I I.2.2 :. L iff = 0.8L = 0.8 x 8 = 6.4 m. (a) Base fixed: The frame gets laterally displaced under this l~ading (See Fig. 1U. 7c).
( ii) Horizont;l/oading: In this case, frame deflects laterally as shown in Fig. I2 6b(ii)I The columns are now restrained against rotation at both ends but they are held in position only at
the base, not at the top. This corresponds to end condition No.4 in Table, 11.2.2, giving,
the column is effectively rl)strained in position and direction at bottom but not held in position and
partially restraitied against rotation at top. This corresponds to Case-S of Table I I.2.2 giving Leff = 1.2 L = 1.2 x 4 = 4.S m.
Leff = 1.5L = 1.5 x 8 = 12.0 m.
 568 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.3 Analysis of Axially Loaded Short Column 569
(b) Hinged base: The frame sways laterally as shown in Fig. 11.2. 7d The columns are- End restraint factor at top
. now held in position but not restrained in direction at bottom, and restrained in direction but not held r~ , = kc l(kc + k b ) = 292,970/1892,970 = 0.155 At bottom f32 == 1 as bottom is hinged
...
in~sition at top. This corresponds to end condition No.6 in Table 11.2.2,Leff = 2 x 4 = 8 m.
From Fig.Jl.2.4,for p1 = 0.155 and P2 =l.O, Leff!L=2.15.
Ex. 11.2. 7 Two vertical cantilever poles 6 m high fixed at the base, hold a horizontal :. Leff = 2.15L = 2.15 x 8 == 17.2 m.
cable at top to catry a vertical load Determine the effective length of columns.
Comments : Effective length of column of this frame for vertical loading (jor no sway condition) can
Solution: similarly be obtained from Fig. 11.2.3.
For no sway condition ,
The columns are effectively restrained in both in position and direction at the base but is
~ 1 =292970/826300=0.355
3
_ neither held in position nor restrained in direction at top. Therefore, this corresponds to end condi- kh =(1/2) x//L =533,330 mnf,kc =(314)1/L =292,970mm , Lk = 826,300mnf,
\,;' For PI = 0.355, and ~2 = 1, Left' L = 0.775 from Fig. Jl.2.3.
• J ~ /l
tion No.7 in Table 11.2.2 givingLeff = 2 L = 2 x 6 = 12m.
IV /<1:; :. Leff= 0.775 x 8 = 6.20 m. .
~~i.~:: ~ :1 . Ex.l.'.2.8 Determine the effective length of columns hinged at their bases if As against this, the Left obtained i~ Ex. 11.2 .5 (~) ( 1) assuming both ends not restrained against
' ( 1 ii
columns are 300 mm wide and 500 mm deep, and beam 300 mm wide and 800 mm deep as rotation but held in position in 8 m. Ejfect1ve length obtamed above happens to be less, because the column
1!!ik
. IJI:! shown in Fig. 11.2.8. The width of the beam and column is perpendicular to the plane of the is not truly hinged at top. it does get some partial restraint by beam against rotation and .the actual end
frame. The columns are subjected to horizontal loads. condition, therefore, lies between Case- 2 and 3 of Table 11.2.2.
11\:!!.~
':/''
' 11.3 ANALYSIS OF AXIALLY LOADED SHORT COLUMN
l
l!li ;'~
t'ti,:, r-,-· -·-·-·-·-·-· aao·-·1 :I

··~ffi;,i) I t I
11.3.1 Basic Assumptions
(!l.·,,,;i1!1;:\ 12000 ··Behaviour and strength of a R. C. member under axial compression at collapse is based on
I I the following assumptions. ··,
!/- !1:\'ri'\"•
'I
500 . !- ' I (i) The limit state of collapse in axial compression is said to have reached when the
8000 1

maximum compressive strain in concrete reaches a value equal to 0.002;

'\r+J,:•
.,J,'
I i:
·i~::! This...is evident from the idealised stress- strain curve for concrete, that at a strain of0.002, ,i.

\lllii~
I
Li.
j I
~
stress in concrete reaches its maximum value and remains constant till failure and the concrete is
incapable of taking any more load.
.£300 (ii) Strains in concrete and steel are equal i.e. sec= sse·
0
(iii) Behaviour of concrete is governed by the characteristic stress~ strain curve, which
\111!
-1 !Isoo according to I.S. Code is that shown in Fig. 2.2.4
~J~j Fig. 11.2.8 (iv) Stress in steel is governed by the characteristic stress- strain curve of steel in compression ..
According to assumption ( i) above, the maximum allowable stress in steel is that
111~ Solution; corresponding to maximum value of0.002.
Moment oflnertia I(mm 4 } L(mm) (v) The stress- strain curves (and hence, the moduli of elasticity) of steel in compression is
'1~r
I Column : 300 x 5003 I 12 = 3125 X 106 8000 the same as in tension.

·r Beam : 300 x 8003 I 12 128.00 X }06 12000

6
(vi) The column is short when Leffl h < 12. else it is called long column,
The maximum allowable values of Lefffor various values of D for a column to be short are

r Since the column is hinged at the base, k = -

: c
3
4 L
I
3 x 3125 x lO =292970 mm3
4 X 8000
given in Table 11.3.1 below:
" '

to be Short
r
.Table 11.3.1 : Maximum Value of Leff for a Column
_I
=1600000m~
3 I _ 6
· For a sway condition, 3
12800 X }0
kb = 2£ 2 X 12000
X
hinmm 150 200 230 250 300 350 380 400 '

(kb + kc) = -1892970mm~, . Lef! inm 1.80 2.40 2.76 3.00 3.60 4.20 4.56" 4.80
---------- - - --
't:i.,:·,
~ :!

;,il
·.I
:, I 570 Column
,:!
~ ' ! Chapter 11 Sect. 11.3 Analysis of Axially Loaded Short Column 571
'!)
The behaviour and strength of a R.C. member under axial compression also depends upon the R.C. member are totally different from what is assumed in the modular ratio approach. Even for an
:j type oflateral reinforcement whether lateral ties or helical reinforcement. The mel]lbers under the unloaded R.C. members, as concrete shrinks, steel gets compressed and it restrains concrete from
two categories have, therefore, been dealt with separately. shrinking fully. Thus, the phenomenon ofshriUkage produces compression in steel and tension in
concrete which equilibrate each other. On application of the load, the sustained dead load produces
.r-
11.3.2 Column With Lateral Ties creep strains at constant stress, thus reducing the value of Ee and increasing the value of modular
The earlier developments in the study of behaviour and strength of axially loaded short ratio m == Es IEc with time. This increases the compressive stress in steel and, hence, the load
.compression members are worth noting. During the early ages, when the ultimate load concept carried by steel, while that carried by concrete reduces (because the total load on the section remains
. was not developed and the elastic theory or the linear analysis was the order of the day, the constant). Thus, there is a continuous transfer ofload from concrete to steel under constant load.
strength in axial compression was obtained on the following lines.
This process of redistribution on forces across a cross-section clearly established the no:-.-applicability
,f\it According to basic assumption given in Sect. 11.3.1 above a ==a . of the elastic theory or the modular ratio approach. If at all the modular ratio concept wa!J to be
l!i:ji cc sc
_.r ~.,

'II.,
,
! .,;r
I q.
I ~. where , aX == strain in steel in compression, and a~ ==strain in concrete in compression,
According to old assumption oflinear stress- strain relation :
used, it necessitated determination of the modified modular ratio, accounting for the effects of
creep and shrinkage because load on column is largely a sustained load. However, these being time
--;
-\'
'
::.h: and load dependent phenomena, it has been difficult to establish a single value ofmodular ratio.
~ 'I I •~
.~q
asc I Es and ace = cre IE
== crs c cc
Nevertheless, most of the Codes, including the I.S. Code specifies modular ratio of 1.5 m instead
i 1: ·.~: where, cr~ == stress in steel in compression, cr~ == stress in concrete in compression, of 'm _' to take into account partially the effect of creep and shrinkage.
.·'\.
j"'···.··.·•· Es == modulus of Elasticity of steel in compression. Accordingly, P == crec {A g + (1.5 m- I) Ase } ...... (11.3.2)

,;:
: ,;,H
.
;\,
Ec == modulus of Elasticity of concrete in compression. This is still a modular ratio approach except that it is a modified one.
. . crse IE's == crec IEe or crse == ( Es IEe ) crec == m cree , where m == Es IEe

I!1 :::i·•''
'\. Also, P == P + P
e
aeee.
s
4 + crsese
A A + m cr-eese
== creee A
With further research, inadequacy of modular ratio approach concept became evident
because of the realization of the fact that the stress - strain relation of concrete is not linear up to
collapse, and therefore, the above equation based on linear stress strain relation i.e. the elastic
theory does not at all represent the real strength ofR.C. columns. This gave momentum to go in for
~.·
\''·''
',·.~

1,,,
'·I•· cree (A e +.mAse )
1'\
,,:;,: where,P ultimate strength concept and determination of the ultimate load based on experimental results. The
Total axial load carried by R.C. section, large number of tests carried out during 1930-33 (33/1) on axially loaded columns revealed that
;:;; p ~-
/Jli:: e Axial load carrier by concrete in compression, the phenomenon of redistribution of forces between steel and concrete further increases the load
p carrying capacity of the section (because ofthe reduction of stress in concrete and ample reserve
s Axial load carried by steel in compression,
A- strength of steel ). The experiments on columns sHowed that the lo~ carrying capacity of an
se Area of steel in compression.
A
axially loaded R.C. member at collapse ( Pu) is made up of ultimate strength of concrete (Puc)·
e Area of concrete in compression. plus the ultimate strength of steel in compression ( P ) . Thus,
. ~
Since Ae
(A g -Ase ) where, Ag is area of gross concrete section p u == pue + p ~ == 0.85 X f' e Ae + fy Ase ...... ( ll.3.3a)
p
cree (A g -A'se + mA sc ), :. P == cree {A g + ( m- 1) A.c)
• .. .... ( 11.3.1) where, f 'e = cylinder strength of concrete in compression.
Pue = ultimate load carried by concrete 'l'
Thus, according to this theory, the stress in steel was considered to be only modular ratio times
the stress in surrounding concrete. This approach -was, therefore, known as Modular Ratio P = ultimate load carried by steel
~
Approach.
Taking, f 'e == 0.8 fck then 0.85 f 'e == ·0.85 X· 0.8 fek == 0.68 fek
As an illustration, for M20- Fe 415 combination of concrete and steel the permissible stress :. Pu = 0.68fekAc +fy Ase ...... ( llJJb)
in concrete in axial compression (==ace) is 5 Nlmllf and modular ratio 13and even though the Now adopting partial safety fac_tor ym for conc.rete and sttlel to account for uncertainty of
permissible stress in st~l in axial compression is 190 Nlmm 2, this approach ~JSsumes a stress in material strength, the theoreticalor the design collap:~e load PuD is giv~ by :
steel equal to mcree == 13 X 5 = 65 Nlmllf-only. Thus, a large margin of reserve strength of steel
PuD = ( 0.68 JJ y ) Ac +(f.ymsc Iy )A
remains unutilized and.the design is obviously uneconomical. _c~~.m

The knowledge about the properties of creep and shrinkage of concrete has established_ the =
Taking. ym 1.5 for concrete and -1.15 for steel as prescribed by I.S. Code.
fallacyofthe above modular • ratio approach. It ShOWI'n th<>t <>rofnnl 1..-L--L p = l n {9. ·l I 1 c \ J .1.1 .f' /1 1 c.\ '.4"' ~ 1\. A~ .r ~ n· n"" 1' ..
I
 Analysis of Axially Loaded Short Col., S1J,
\( 572 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.3

!( Comments: LS. Code adopts same value ofym = 1.5 for concrete for strength in axial compression as Since Ac = ,.I Ag- Asc ), where Ag = area of gross cross
.
- section
.
li. well as in bending. However, the condition of concrete in column is in a large way different from those of Pu = 0.4fk (A -A ) + 0.67 f. A
~·~1 . c g sc y sc
if: concrete in a beam as shown below.
or Pu= 0.4fckAg + (0.67fy -OAfck) Asc· ...... (11.3.1b)
i!.' (i) Casting of concrete in narrow and deep formwork is d[fjicult and the resulting concrete quality
:~ ',
or Pu={0.4fck + (0.67.fy- 0.4,fck)p} Ag,wh~re,p=A1/A8 (11.3.7e)
r cannot have that reliability of soundness. ......
(ii) Reduction in quality of concrete in column significantly affects the strength of column in
comparison with its effect on the strength of an under - reinforced beam. Eq. 11.3. 7b is very useful when Asc and sectional dimensions (and hence A ) are known
while Eq. 11.3. 7c gives the axial strength of column for some assumed percentage of ~inforcement.
(iii) Consequences of failure of column in a multistorey building, and its-effect on the performance
of the struct~re as a whole, are more serious than those of beam or a slab:
t~ lnspite of this, l.S. Code adopts the same value of ymfor axicl and bending compression, though the and the column size.
[ : recommended value ofym = 1.5 is considered to be very high for beams though satisfactory for columns. Comments : The ultimate load capacity of an ideally axially loaded column with lateral ties is reached
l.;j'i:;. when it attains maximum strain of 0. 002 as per assumption ( i ). At this stage the uniform stress distribution
li!l 'l; With the advent ofhigh yield strength deformed bars, it was further observed that the stress in of 0.446 fu. (= 0.45 fck) occurs in concrete. The corresponding stresses induced in mild steel and HYSD bars
n;J:.:~
\ [iji:•
such bars does not at all reach yield stress as assumed in Eq. 11.3. 3 or Eq. 11.3. 4.lt was found can be obtained from the stress - strain curves at strain of 0.002.
that the stress in these bars, corresponding to a strain of 0.002, was less than the yield stress. For mild steel the stress- strain T)elation is linear. Therefore, the stress at 0.002 strain is given by:
:·~·.;':·.J:~::
These equations were, therefore, modified replacing' the stress fy in steel by ftc corresponding to f. = 0.002 x 2 x 10 5 < 0.87fy :. f.= 0.87 fy. because in mild steel design stress is reached.
I','·' '
111
L::l: maximum strain of 0.002 considered for collapse. The ultimate load carrying capacity of a R.C. for HYSD
. =
bars, from stress- strain curve f s 0. 75 fy (See Table .4.10.1)
Jfl'
•!) ,:::
I••
member under truly axial compression (with zero eccentricity) is, thus given by The ultimate load carrying capacity of column at zero eccentricity with mild steel and HYSD bar can be
,jJ_ ~ ·. ;.·
Puz = Puc + Pus = 0.45 fk c Ac + f sc Asc ...... (11.3.5) written as :
...... ( 11.3.6d)
if11:;: For mild steel, ' PUZ =0.45/k AC +0.87fA
y .fC = 0.45fk+(0.87f.-0.45j_.) ASC
Jtw::)·,. where .Puc= ultimate load carried by concrete at an axial strain of 0.002. C C y L:A

...... (Eq.l 1.3.6a)

ForHYSDbars,. PUZ =0.45f,. AC +0.75f.A
y SC = 0.45/,.,. Ac...+0.75f y AtiC
Pus = ultimate load carried by steel at an axial strain of0.002.
'!I·'.r·'•.I·:~
t.ll. (.:1\

I,,

It f sc = compressive stress in steel at an axial strain of0.002. The decrease in stresses d~~-io.mintmum-eccentricity i~ obtained by reducing the capacity of the column by
:~-,<'
', ,~ = 0.87/y' 0.79f ,0.15fy for steel of grade Fe 250, Fe415 and Fe 500 respectively, 11%. The equation for axially lotided column with minimum eccentricity is obtained as :
(For details see discussio~ in Sect. 2.6.5) For simplicity, I.S. Code adopts only the lowest +0.67 f.ysc
'.~· ForHYSDbars, Pu = 0.4/_.A A ...... (Eq. 11.3.7a).
(;Ac .
Far Fe 250: Pu = 0.4fu.Ac + 0.77 fy A,,.= 0.4fck + (0. 77 fy,.- 0.4fu.) p] Ax
l,.~r''. . value of steel stress (which is for steel of grade Fe 500). Also I.S. Code uses symbol P to ...... ( 11.3.7d}

e · But the code has given only one Eq.Il.3.6 and Eq./1.3.7 bOth for mild ~tee/ and HYSD bars and no
. ~

indicate zero eccentricity, and the Code gives an expression,

separate equation for mild steel. -
c c + 0.75 f.ysc
Puz = 0.45 fkA A ...... (ll.3.6a)
It may be noted that according to I.S. Code Eq.JJ.3. 7may be used for axially loaded column; .
\~ or Puz= 0.45 fck Ag + (0.75 fy- 0.45fck) Asc ...... (11.3.6b)
or Puz= [0.45fk+(0.75f.-0.45fck) Ascg
/A ] xAg ...... (ll.3.6c}. provided emin i> 0.05 h or emin :I> h'/20 ...... ( 11.3.8~) ·
\· c y
L h (See Sect. 11.2.3)
Since an ideal condition of axial loading hardly ever exists, there is always certain inherent But, emin = 500 + 3o or 20 mm
minimum eccentricity in the column. To account for the increase in stresses due to this minimum
eccentricity up to a value of0.05 h where his the dimension perpendicular to the axis of bending, where, L =unsupported length and
·about 11% reduction in strength is allowed by the Code. The strenith of concrete is reduced from h ,;, dimension ofthe column perpendicular to the axis oibending (it is eiilierb or D)
0.45 jck to 0.89 X 0.45 fck = 0.4005 jck say 0.4 fck and that Of steel is reduced from (i) when e . =20 mm, then 20 mm* 0.05 h or h 4::400 mm ...... (ll.3.8b)
mm
, 0.75/. to 0.89 x 0.75 f =0.667fsay0.67fy,thusgivingtheultimateloadcarryirigcapacity (ii) when emm. > 20 mm,'then
· of an ~lly loaded short kC memtk under the minimum eccentricity (not exceeding 0. 05 h)
asfollows:
Pu = 0.4 fck Ac + ·0.67 f Asc ...... (11.3.7a) emin =
L
500
h
+ 30 t * 0.05 h i.e. * 2o h

The abQve equation can be ~lightly tnodified so as to be more useful in practi~al4esign.

 I

Analysis of Axially Loaded Short Column 575

~T rr' $'14. Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.3
The lower limit of 0. 8% of steel has been kepi on account of the following r~asons :
. L f-h h) h •comments:
or _500 *\20 - 30 i.e } 6o or h 1: 0.12L ...... ( 11.3.8c) 1. Shrinkage of concrete effects in redistribution of the load from concrete to steel reinforcement
therefore unless a lower limit is placed on steel ratio even under service load, the steel may reach '!''

This means that when h (i.e. either b or D as the case may be) is less than 400 mm or 0.12 L the 2. the
Theyield li~it.protects columns in structural frames againstf.ailure in tension when, for example,
lowerstress.
Eq. JJ. 3. 7 is not applicable. In such a case the axially loaded column should be designed for axial the surroundmg floors near the column are unloaded above but ~eavily loaded below or when
'-\
oompression and uni-axial bending ( Mu.mm. = Pu x emm. ) either about x - axis or y - axis which- -~
the structural frame is subjected to uneven settlement.
.
ever is critical. 5!j
:~%!
(b) Minimum number oflongitudinal bars
]i = 4 for rectangular columns
Karve's Reduction Factor Approach
Since, in practice column of a residential or an office buildirlg up to three storey height mostly = 6 for circular columns
. : '~' have a smaller lateral dimension ofthe column less than 400 mm (normally 230 mm or 300 mm), and =No. of comers in polygonal or other shapes.
~''I'.
·')j\i since the design of eccentrically loaded columns from first principles is very laborious and time.
I:l ~~ (c) Diameter oflongitudinal steel{ 12 mm

I1\'', ,:,1]~:P:
'ji:t!,
'ir \~·
l
.\ 1\·

11' ::li:
consuming, and therefore, requiring the use of design aids, charts or short computer programs.'
Karve (81/6) has presented in. his Handbook (97/6) Table No. 6.11 which <lirectly gives the
·ultimate load carrying capacity of a rectangular column for various grades of concrete and steel,
varioils sizes (b x D) ofcolumns and standard numbers (4,6,8) oflongitudinal bars for a minimum
eccentricity of 20 mm. Readers will find this table extremely helpful in design of axially loaded
:~1

;~.1
(d) For longitudinal reinforcing bar nominal cover shalt not be less than 40 mm or less than
the diameter of such bar. For concrete grade M30 and above the nominal cover shall be as

specified in Table 2.2.3

(e) Spacing of longitudinal bars measured along the periphery of the column* 300 mm
!1111. (f) In columns where longitudinal bars are offset at a splice (at the junction of two columns)
;i :"
:i 1.1.
columns with lateral dimension less than 400 mm.
'! ) ~
Based on the results of this table some reduction factors have been proposed (8116) to enable the slopes of the inclined portion of the bar with the axis of the column shall not exceed
'\!·:::;: l in 6, and the portion of the bar above and below the offsets be para\lel to the axis of the
·1 If the practical designer to use Eq. 11 .3. 7 even for a section having width less than 400 mm allowing
,\;{
~ ; , 1I for a minimum eccentricity of20 mm about minor ( i.e. y) axis (which happens to be gr~ater than columns and provided with adequate lateral ties excepting in the sloping part as shown
i[.:i: 0.05 b) The ultimate load allowing eccentricity of20 mtn is given by:
!r::r. in Fig. 8.10.11 b
.,1\'II."i'.1.
I 111
P~ = 1{ 0.4jckAc + 0.67 fy Asc} .. .... ( 11.3.9a) Where column faces are offset 75 mm or more, the longitudinal bars in the column below
i ~j Pu = 1[0.4jkA .. .... ( ll.3.9b) should be tenninatod at the floor slob ond separate dowels uSed " shown in Fig. 8.1 0. II<
1,( . c g +(0.67/.y -0.4jk)A
c. scJ1
:i\' ~I,: j Pu/1 = [0.4fck+(0.67f.y -0.4jk)
c
p]Ag ...... ( ll.3.9c )
.For Fe 250, · tB1 Transverses Reinforcement
Pu =1[0.4jkA +(0.77£ ...... ( ll.3.9d) (a) General: Areinforcement concrete compressi<l'n member shall have transverse or helical
c g -ly -0.4jk)A
c sc ]
The values of reduction factor A. may be taken equal to 0.7 and 0.9 for column width ofl50 mm and reinforcement so placed that every longitudinal bar nearest to the compression face has effective
230mm lateral support against buckling subject to provision of arrangement of bars given in ( b ). The
effective latera\ support is given by transverse reinforcement either in the form of circular rings
11.3.3 Requirements of Reinforcement · capable of taking up ciroum!erential teus.ion or by polygonal links (~I
ti")with intomal angle ,r

not exceeding 135° (Fig. 11.3.la). The ends of such transverse reinforcement shall be properly
(A) Longitudinal Reinforcement
·anchored.
·(a) The~ros.s- ~tional area of longitudinat'reinforcement:
.. .'f· 0.8% of. gross cross. ~ sectionalarea of concrete (b) Arrangement of Transverse Reinforcement .~:_~'\

·: f 6 % of gross cross-sectional area of concrete \

'•'
(i) Ifthe longitudinal bars spaced at a distance not more than 75 mm on either side,transverse
. · :t 4 %'preferably . . reinforcement need only. to go round comer and alternate bars for providing effective
However, to avoid ci>ngestiori of bars, especially when the bars are to be lapped percentage Iatma101pport (Fi~ 11.3.1b ). Any smgle !ongitudinalbo<JnaY""'ain untkd -..""Iy
· .of .steel shall not exceed 4%. In any column that has a cross- sectional area greater than that i~
at right angles only if it _spaced at Distance<:: 7? mm from the adjacenttied bar.
· req~·to support the lo8d the minimum percentage of steel shall be based on the area of concrete
required to resisfthe direct stress and not on the actual area. · !
\~1:: Analysis of Axially Loaded Short Column 577
!/!
l
-(i 576 Column Chapter 11
Sect. 11.3
(ii) Pitch : The pitch of the lateral ties shall not be more than the least of the following:
JJ - The least lateral dimension (b) of the compression member;
_) (ii) If the longitudinal bars spaced at a distance of not exceeding 48 times the diameter of the " Sixteen times the smallest diameter ofthe longitudinal reinforcement bar to be tied;
., tie are effectively tied in two directions, additional longitudinal bars in between these bars ·
/
need to be tied in one direction by open ties as shown in Fig. 11.3.1c - 300mm ·
(d) Diameter and Pitch of helical reinforcement
Main
~ (i) Diameter : The diameter of the helical reinforcement shall not be less than 5 mm nor less

~
bars

_TI:~1
) -~
-! than one-fourth of the diameter ofthe largest longitudinal bar.
·.._, Ties &I & ·.-1
] (ii) Pitch: Helical reinforcement shall be continuous going round the longitudinal bars with
0
ji uniform spacing along the length of the column and its ends shall be properly anchored
:Q,.
..~-~:
·[i; by providing one and a half extra turns of the spiral bar. ,.,
(a) Where an increased load of 5% is a)lowed for, the pitch of the helical turns shall satisfy Ill
ri~i the following requirements: \:'~\
l'•
- Pitch-:j-(75 mm or I/6 x core diameter of column) whichever is less· I
J'·i: 1: i: (25 mm or 3 x diameter of helical bar) whichever is greater !:~
\',~
\.
Ex. 11.3.1 For a column 230 mm x 400 mm in section and reinforced with 6 Nos ~16 mm
d
\'1
f ' 1'-
i·,,'
of grade Fe 250, determine the ultimate strength in axial compression for concrete of grade
r:
)' •,1,' (b)
•''
I;
1,;)'
'1'1·
M20, if unsupported length of column is (a) 3.0 m, (b) 3.6 m. 2 I.
I
Given: b=230mm, D =' 400mm, Asc = 6-"'I6mm, 'f fk=20Nfm,Jl,
c f y =250 N/mm
1 :~
,~,·'

~tr Required: Ultimate strength of column

~;~: Solution
Area:of section Ag = 230 x 400 = 92000 m,Jl, Area of steel A~ = 6 x 201 =· 1206 mm
2

.::',)
\1~;: (e) ( a) L = 3.0 m . = 3000 mm. .
II~. I

,.'"') Bending about x - axis (perpendicular to 400 mm)

Arrangement of Transverse Reinforcement e . = L/500+D/30=3000/500+400/30=(6.0+13.33)<20mm :.e. = 10mm.
):~ mmx
. = L/500+b/30=3000/500+230/30 =(6.0+7.67)<20mm :. emmy
emmy
mmx
. = 20mm.
(iii) Where the longitudinal reinforcing bars in compression member are placed in more than .
one row, effective lateral support to the longitudinal bars in the inner rows may be assumed e . ID = 20 /400 = 0.05, e . /b = 20 /230 = 0.087 > 0.05, ( = e , I D)
mmx mmy mmx
to have been provided if: :. Eq.J1.3. 7 will not be applicable. Strength will be governed by buckling abouty- axis.
transverse reinforcement is provided for the outermost row as started above and no bar Since, e . = 20 mm Eq. 1J.3.9b will be used,
of the inner row is closer to the nearest compression face than three times the diameter mrny ·
Pu = A.{0.4fck A + (0.67fy- 0.4fck)A 8c}
of the largest bar in the inner row (Fig. 11.3.Jd) 1
Taking 'A = 0.9 forb= 230 mm. for bending about y- axis .
(iv) Where the longitudinal bars in a compression merriber are grouped (not in contact) and
.". p u = 0.90 {0.4 X 20 X 92000 + ( 0.67 X 250-0.4 X 20) X 1206 }/ 1000 = 835.5
6.~16,
each group adequately tied ·with transverse reinforcement in accordance with
') Sect. 11.3.3(b ), the transverse reinforcement for the compression member as a whole Given : b = 230mm,D = 400mm, A~ =' fc1c = 20N/mrrf, f y = 250 N/mrtt
may be provided on the assumption that each group is asingle longitudinal bar for purpose ( b)L = 3.6 m ·
_) ' of. determining the pitch and diameter of the transverse reinforcement in accordance Required: Ultimate strength of column
with Sect. 11.3.3(B),Jhe dian1etcr cf ~uch transverse reinforcement need not, however,
exceed 20 mm(see Fig. 11.3.1e.) Solution:
emrnx
.
(c) Pitch and diameter of lateral ties e . ~ 3600/500 + 230/30 = 7.2 + 7.67 = 14.8"/ mm < 2{) mm
mmy
e . /IY= 20.53/400 = 0.0513 > 0.05
mill% .
1 (i) Diameter :The diameter ofthe polygonal links or lateral ties shall be not less than one-forth
/
· e . lb* 20/230 = 0.087 > 0.05
of the diametf-r of the largest longitudinal bar, and in no case less than 5 mm. · mmY. ·
1"?

Sect. 11.3 Analysis of Axially Loaded Short Column 579 f

578 Column Chapter 11 The test results (33/1) have revealed that the strength of axially loaded helically f

remforced column is given by :

Eq. 11.3. 7 will not be applicable. pu = p uk + pus + push = O.SSj'c Ak +fisc+ 2 fysh Ab ...... ( 1\.3.9) r.
Also since values of emzn. are different for bending about two axes, only one equation. will not
be applicable for both the cases. where, f' = Cylinder strength of concrete,
As e.mmx
. happens .to be· greater than 20 mm the value of Pu.for bending about x - axis will be Akc = Cross- sectional area of concrete core excluding the area of longitudinal ('.
• • .
reqmred to be obtamed py theory of combmed bendmg and axial force fore 1. = 20.53 mm. steel A measured to the outside diameter of the helix ( Dk) (Fig. 11.3.3)
sc ~
Since emmy . = 20 mm, Pu for bending abouty axis can be obtained :Sing Eq. 11.3.9b
Ab = Volume ofhelical steel per unit length of column,
pu = H0.4fkA
' c g + ( 0.67 f- y
0.4fk)A
c sc } r
Taking A. = 0.9 for b = 230 mm f h = yield stress of helical steel,
pu = 0.90 X { 0.4 X 20 X 92000 + ( {).67 .X 250- 0.4 X 20) X }206 }/J 000 ys
..J
~ I ·~
= 835.5 kN same as that for part- (a) above. ~
1
I
i, I~ .. D
, l1i I Actual allowable axial load shall be Jesser of the two values obtained for bending aboutx- axis and
,·~11H' ~~ Dk
Il•!,11:1 bending about y - axis. I .
I
1: r:1i;l I I
1¥:·!
:·: ... I I (
~)
11.3.4 Column with Helical Reinforcement
'i'!!.i'·:
IP.'I' l
',',. I Columns reinforced with helical steel behave, in the earlier stages of loading, in the same 1~1
I I
I 1 ,:,;•)

II '• ,, manner as the columns with lateral ties till the concrete cover outside the concrete core(i.e. outside I I.
··r '':II the helical steel) spalls off at a load predicted by Eq. 11.3.2. Once the concrete cover outside the
11 !:( l I
core gets crushed, the load is then transferred to helical steel and is resisted by hoop strength of I !
helical steel. If the volume of helical steel is adequate to compensate for the loads sustained by I
cover prior to crushing, the column continues to carry additional load till helical steel yields in hoop I
'i 'Ji:
;::jill
"•·1 I
tension~ The increased load carrying capacity is due to confinement of concrete by helical steel.
As the column shortens, it also expands laterally due to Poission' s effect bringing into action the
I
.1-
:/:·(:
;! ~:~; : hoop resistance in the helical steel and the increase in strength of column is possible till the helical
1/'/; steel is in the elastic condition and that too at the expense oflarge vertical strains which, in fact,
'1~.'·~1·.
i cannot be allowed in actual columns, because they put the supported beams and slabs in distress
Fig. 11.3.3 Helically Reinforced Column (
I! ':i'
l
If'
,,
and even, at times lead to premature failure. The Codes, therefore, do not show an increase in a
strength by more than 5 % and that too, provided the volume of helical steel is sufficient to Let ultimate strength of cover be =A. Puc = 0.85 f' c (A g - Ak)
compensate for the Joss of strength due to spalling of concrete cover.
However, the merit of the helically reinforced column lies in the fact that they have a large 1t 2
Now , Ak = -
4D k -A sc
amount of ductility which is very necessary in design (See Fig. 11.3.2) to prevent the cohimn
from failing suddenly. On the other hand, the column with lateral ties fails suddenly with a pyramidal where, Dk = diameter of concrete core measured to the outside diameter of helix
failure of the concrete between two lateral ties like fa~Jure of a concrete prism.
= D-2 x Clear cover
c
~ sh = diameter of helical steel.
Also strength contribution ofhelical steel is given by
Push = 2/ysh Ab(Because vertical split along the load cuts the helical tie at two sections)

where, Ab = 1t DkAs/ s , s = spacing fnh~:~:hs~eL !

2
:. push =2 fysh x 1t l),k x As/ s = 2!yshAk\ Aks -} = 1rsh Akpsh
\",

Volume of helk:al·stee1 per pitch length

Deformalion 1t DkAsh . . .

where, Psh Volume of concrete core per pitch length

load deformation curve lor columns:
OA •Ccmmon lor tied and heflcaly reinbreed coklmn 8 • Sudden laiklre of tied collrnns
A,l
AC -large ductirrty of hellcally reinforced cqtJmns before laiure at 9
 Sect. 11.3 ~ Analysis of Axially Loaded Short Column 581

Given: b=400mm, Asc = 8-~20=2512mm

2
'
580 Column Chapter 11
~ , fy =250N/mrrt, fk=20N/,mm2
mt,;
Now, Ph<
us P' uc. · s , < 0.85 f' (A -Ak)
:. 2/.ysh Ak.p" ~cg
... ... (11.3.10) Clear cover = 40 mm .
c

Required : Ultimate strength of column in axial compression

1\' I
The right hand side of the expression represents the assumed, ultimate strength of shell(cover), Solution :
Diameter of column D = 400 mm, emm. = 20 mm, emm. I D =0.05
r having area equai to ( Ag- Ak) which spalld off.
Eq. 11.3.7 wiU beapplicab\e. 1

r
2
(Ag-Ak) f'c Area of section, A = 1t I 4 x 400 = 125664 mm
,'•., :. Psh f0.425 A
k
x fysh Area of steel , A = 8 x 314
g-
= 2512mm
2

sc 37,1
Pu = 0.4/kAc c + 0.67/. A
y sc = c g + (0.67fY -0.4/k)
0.4/kA c Asc (Eq • 11 .• I
ACI Code provides an additional factor of safety by increasing the coefficient 0.425 to 0.45
{ 0.4 X 20 X 125 664 + ( 0.67 X 250- OA X 20) 2512} /1000
~-~i to assure that the spiral effect exceeds shell capacity.
~~ -dl ·,l \ Taking/' = 0.8f k and taking constant 0.45 instead of 0.425 and removing the suffix 'sh 'fromf h 1406 kN.
"-)I~,,
' 'll'
,l.:\
~ c· c ~

I' IIlli\':i:l (a) For pitch of helical ties s = 60 mm , Diameter of helical ties~ sh = 8 mm
I\ (A - Ak) fck
~k
~
psh {0.45 x 0.8 x -f.-
l::: ;~ Diameter of core "" Dk = D- 2 x clear cover "" 400-2 x 40 = 320 mm
·. !.:ll:i
rrr·,: '
n~ ·~
•
.. Psh
· .1-
1' 0.36 ~ -
lAg ]JT
fck y
... ( 11.3.11) Area of core
A = 1tD 2 I 4 = 1t x 3202 I 4 = 80425 mrrt
k k
2
.
ifl:/1 A = 1t I 4 x 82 = 50 mm
Area of helical ties sh
~~1~~~~;!\
lf:::l where, p =
1t DkAsh Volume of helical steel per pitch length
= Volume of concrete core per
~ 1t Dk Ash = 1t X 320 X 50 =
\rm'·.:~ sh Ak.s pitch length 0.0104 ·'

com- J
h;:~:: This is the condition prescribed by I.S. Code under C/. 39.4.1 Psh As
k.
80425 X 60 '.,I•,,
'l
~
\!: - ~lj
i' The spacing of helical ties shall be so designed as to satisfy the requirements of Eq.. Jl.3.11 i~
\lF~
~0.36 250 ~
~u~t:a From Eq. 11.3.11 fk Q25664 20 •'•'·\
l; 1tDk Ash Ag l f'ck l Now, 0.36 ;, l 0.016 :·

l
'
"'
~:-~:: Psh A .. s -!:0.36 L~-lJT ......
(ll.3.l2a)
'I
;!,

t or 1tDkAsh
s f 0.36 (A g -Ak)f'c/fy ...... ( 11.3.13)
:.Psh = 0.0104<0.016.:_

(b) For pitch of helical ties s == 30 mm :

ph= 1t X 320 X 50
::· S%increaseinthestrengthwillnotbeallowed. :. Pu

'
= 0.020> 0.016 :. 5% increaseinstrengthwillbeallow d
= 1406kN.
I

.. s :t
1t DkAshfy
0.36 (A -A ) f s 80425 x 30 ~ e
g ck k
G ,', p~ = 1.05 X 1406 = 1476.3 kN.
When this condition is. satisfied, Pu = 1.05 x Pu given by Eq. 11.3. 7.
_J Ifthis condition is not satisfied, Pu =Pu given by Eq. 11.3. 7. and not 1.05 Pu~ Maximum permissible spacing to take advantage of strength of helical ties is given by :

'.._/ Comments : ACI. Code gives additional capacity reduction factor of 0. 75 for helically reinforced 'It DkAsh = 0.016
column while l.S. Code~ does not.
Ak.s
·~
·~ Ex. 11.3.2 · Calculate the ultimate strength in axial compression of a column 400 mm in 1t D A
1t X 320 X 50
= say 39mm
ksh~
,_; ,diameter and reinforced with 8 Nos. ~ 20 mm of grade Fe 250 when the column is helically ·s=
80425 X 0.016
.. Ak 0.016
~~reinforced by· 8 + mmbars at (a) 60 mm pitch, (b) 30 mm pitch Assume concrete of grade
X

~ i;~l20. Ass'ume clear cover equal to 40 mm.

'"--"'
 -,
,... ~

Design of Axially Loaded Short Column 583

582 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.4
It will be obvious from Table 11.4 .1, that Eq. /1.3. 7 cannot be used for any value of design
rs 1CDkAsh J;, _ 1t x 320 x 50 x 250 _ , load less than the minimumP u given in Table 11.4.1. This means that for a lesser value of design
0.36 ( Ag- Ak) fck- 0.36 (125664 - 80425) x 20 - say 39 mm
0
1' load, the sides of the column will be less than 400 mm and column will be required to be designed
:\~ either by reduction factor approach of Eq. 11. 3. 9 or an eccentrically loaded column.
11.4 DESIGN OF AXIALLY LOADED SHORT COLUMN
In design of an axially loaded R.C. Column, the unsupported length, end conditions or effeetive (e) Criterion of limiting minimum eccentricity to 20 mm ~,

length and the design load are given and it is required to detennine (a) the section, (b) the When reduction factor approach is to be used, it will be necessary to see that emm. does not
longitudinal or main reinforcement, and (c) the transverse or lateral reinforcement.
11.4.1 Section exceed 20 mm. .:._,
Fore. -<.20mm :.(L!500+h!30):t20mm.
Column of rectangular section are very common in field practice on a account of its · mm 'I
adaptability to walls coming at right angles or on opposite sides. Since masonry walls are in module :. h:t30(20-LI500) or h:t(600-0.06L)
:. b or D :t (600- 0.06 L) ...... ( 11.4.3 )
: .,, of3 inches according to old FPS system of units still prevailing in practice on account of9" size of
~~~r~ This condition need not be applied when reduction factor is not used.
/·\~ available bricks, the column dimensions are also usually in module of3". In modem practice, the ·
I~ Ill'
i.! ~ sizes may be in module of 50 mm. The design of column sizes is governed by criteria of slenderness
I;]''il and design for axial load allowing minimum eccentricity as explained below .
Ex. 11.4.1 Calculate the area of steel required for a short RC.column 400 mm x 450 mm
in cross : section to carry an ultimate axial load of 1680 leN. Assume concrete of grand,M 20
.1\F;:t
~ l:"r)t!
(a) Criterion for the column to be short :
~~ d'lid steel ofgrade Fe 250.

\>'li,~'l1.~1
For the column to be short, Le,u.«I hmmT
. -1. 12, Given : b=400mm, D=450mm, Pu =1680kN, jk=20N/mrtf,
c f=250N!mrtf-
y

. ! I lo~ Least lateral dimension hmin =hi: Leff I 12 ...... ( 11.4.1 )

: 1'1)1
.Required : Asc
W,hen effective lengths in two principal directions are different, Solution : Gross area of concrete section Ag = 400 ·x 450 = 180000 m,Jl
~ D.'(.Leffxl12 and b {Leffyl12 (\680 X 103 - 0.4 X 20 X 180000) (Eq.ll). 7b)
~~
1tri P -0.4jkA
~~ (b) Criterion of designing the column as axially loaded : A = u c g (0.67 X 250 - 0.4 X 20) 0'"1
J~ For use of Eq. 11.3. 7, sc 0.67 fy - 0.4fck
~~
b and D J-l'. 400 mm when emm. = io mm or band D 1:0.12 L when emm. > 20 mm (Eq.11.3.8)
~ ,~,,
(

~~ :. A = 1505 mrtf-
~~ This means that band D {(400 mm or 0.12 L) which~·ver is greater ...... ( 11.4.2) sc

I+~
j~ where, L =unsupported length of the column. . Provide.4 Nos- 22 mm giving A~ ="1520 mrtf or 8 Nos. 16
. mm giving A~ = 1608 mrtf-
I,'
As this requirement necessitates column sides to be equal to or greater than 400 mm, it is
Lateral Ties: 6mm at spacing:t 300 mm, orl6 x 16 = 256 mm. :.Provide 6 mm at 250 mm clc
interesting to know the limitations of designing the.column as axially loaded column using ·
1
Eq. 11.3. 7. The minimum axial ultimate load carrying capacity of the smallest pennissible
Design the section for an axially loaded R C. column for the following data
section 400 mm x 400 mm for use of Eq. 11.3. 7 with minimum of0.8% steel for different grades Ex. 11.4.2
of concrete and steel are given in Table 11. 4.1. Effective length of the column is 2. 75 m
~ Table 11.4.1 Ultimate St~..n~" ' 400x400mm I _(a)
P = 2100 leN,
u
Pu = 1500 leN,
M20- Fe 415.
M25- Fe 250
Ij av .*A I 1000 Asc in mttil
for 0.8% steel Nlmnrl PuIn. kN =j avg ·
(a) Given
(b)"

: jk='lON!mrtf,
c f.y =4\SN/mrtf, . Pu =2100kN, L.«=2.15m
eJJ
M20 Fe·250 9.28 1484 say 1480 · 1280mttil
Fe 415 10.16 1625 say 1620 1280mttil Required : Design of column
Solution : To begin with, it will be required to be decided whether the lateral dimensions of
M2S Fe 250 I 11.26 I
1801 say 1800 1280• ,an axially loaded oohmnt sball be less thm> 400 mm or greatorthm> 400 mRI.This is becaUse, if1he
Fe.415 12.14 1943 say 1940 1 1280mttil slte of1he column is less than 400 mm column is required to be designed for axial load and minimum
. ·" ,•.

Maximum allowable L _ fo~.. short

· column= 4.8 m (See Table 11.3.1)
eJJ
·moment M:. :..,'"{ =:= J'.; x e;,;,) .
*f av = c + (0.67 f-
0.4jk· y
0.4jk)
. c
x 0;008 .(See Eq. 11.3.7c) ·
 ~ll.~

Design of Axially. Loaded Short Column 585

I
584 Column Chapter .l.J Sect. 11.4
~'\ Ex. 11.4.3 Design a short R.C. Column using M20 coJ:r~te and Fe 250 grade.s_te;tro.
Load carrying capacity of the column section 400 mm x 400 mm with 0.8% steel is:
0.:'
carry. an ultimate axial load of 2800 kN, when ·.
p u 400 = (0.4 X 20 + (0.67 X 415 ~ 0.4 X 20) X 0.008} 400 X 400/1000 Lx =6m and Leffx =5nt and LY=3m .and L =.25a
·ejfy':
= l625kN.<Pu (=2100kN) Given : fck ""20 Nlmrt?- , fy "'250 N I mu?-, Pu = 2800 kN.
Since the size of the column> 400 mm
Lx=6m' Leffx=Sm ' LY=3m, Leff"=2.Sm
Leff I b = 2.75 x 1000/400 = 6.9 < 12 :.Column is short
Solution : First of all, it will~ decided whether column can be designed as axially toadod; .Si
Assiune 1.5% steel, :. p = 0.015 · Required : Design of Column Y
2100 X 1000 secondly, whether the lateral dimensions shall be greater than 400 mm or less.
Ag ( 0.4 X 20 +(0.67 X 415 ~ 0.4 X 20) X 0.015 }~ 17426~ m~ (Eq. lJ.J. ?c) Since given load Pu= 1800 kN is greatet: than axial load carrying capacity (equal tO 1480 kN
:. Sizeofsquarecolumn=~l74263'= 417.4 mm see Table 11.4.1) for the smallest section 400 mm x 400 mm for M2o·- Fe250, the (i()\umn can bo ,,
,II~
designed as axially loaded using Eq. 11.4.5 withlateral dimensions 400 mm and above.
.r 'I~.,
;'
I
Provide column size of 420 mm X 420 m~. 'Ag = 420 X 420 = 176400 mnr
''Jl;) For the column to be short,
td.l~~ (2100 X 1000 ~ 0.4 X 20 X 176400) b{Le Y/12 i.e. 2500/12=208mm and ~D-fLeff) 12i.e. 500()/12=417mm. ..~1·
'i]r:'r.lj~
>:i . ASc = (0.67 X 415- 0.4 X 20) =2550.6 m~ (Eq. 11.3. 7b) From Eq. fi.4.2, b and D {400 mm or 0.12 L\Vlitchever greater },appropriate value of L beinl
I
I f·t,\
,I:,\~
Provide 6 - # 25, Area provided= 2945 m~ taken for each dimension. ...... (Eq..lJA.2)
'~~~::I
I,,.
!:,:,1
,-A
Lateral Ties: 6 mm at spacing *( 300 mm or 16 x 25 mm) :. Provide 6 mm at 300 mm c/c
b 4:: {400 mm or 0.12 LY (i.e. 0.12 x 3000 = 360 mm) whichever is gteater }.
b i:400 mm. . .. ;H(a)
'1•·1.·,
~~\ "') Given : fk=25N/m~, f=250N/mm 2
, P =1500kN ,L,/T=2.15m
Similarly, D{ {400 mm or 0.12 L) i.e. 12 x 6000 = 720 mm) whichever is greater}.
I": c y u e.u
.,
~~·'!! Required : Design of column D -f 720 mm ... H (b)
\.···,:.::, Solution : Section shall be cliosen_f!atisfying conditions I, II ..

l·. l.11
1
Load carrying capacity of the column of size 400 mm x 400 mm for M25 -Fe 250 with 0.8% Try 400 mm x 750 mm · - ,. A;,; 40~ x 750 =300000 mnil
"1 1
;·~~
steel is: 2800 X 1000 - 0.4 X 20 X 300000
~~ ... ~.. (Eq. Jl..3. 7bi
~~~~;·
/
Pu 400 =(0.4 X 25+(0.77 X 250~ 0.4 X 25)x 0.008] X 400 X 400/1000= 18341cN (Eq.Jl.3.7d) Required Asc = (0.67 x 250- 0.4 x 20) = 2507 m,i2
,·1,,
Since given Pu ( =1500 kN) is far less than the axial strength of a section 400 mm x 400 mm
tr;~ for M25- Fe 250 ( = 1800 leN), the section will have width less than 400 mm. For a section having
A
&~
. = 0.008 x 300000 .= 2400 m,jl < A
sc
width less than 400 mm, since emm. = 20 mm exceeds 0.05 b, the column. is either required to be . .
.
designed by reduction factor approach using Eq. 11.3.9. or it is to be designed as an eccentrically Provide 8 Nos.~ 20 mm giving Asc = 2510 m.~
\, _/ loaded column.
Assume I% steel, p =0.01. Lateral Ties: 6 mm at spacing::j-{400 mm, or 300 mm or 16 x 20= 320mm}
:. Provide 6 mm lateral ties at 300 mm c.c. ·
A8 = Pu/[0.4fck+(0.71fy~0.4fck)xp} (Eq.l1.3.7d)
= 1500 X 10001 [ 0.4 X 25 + (0.77 X 250-0,4 X 25) X 0.0J] = 126850 m~ Ex.ll.4.4 Design .a short R.C. column using concrete ojgrade M2' and steel of yjodt ·•
Assume width of column= 230 mm, :. D = 126850 I 230 = say 550 mm Fe 415 to carry an ultimate load of 1050 kN when · . · · -.· ·.·
Assuming reduction factor of0.9, ·
(a) L = 4.15 m, Le j= 0.~5 L. (b) L = 5.1 m, Leff = 0.65 L.
Pu = ;\. [ 0.4-fckAg + (0.77 fy- p.4fck) Asc] ...... (Eq. 11.3.9d) 1
3
Given : fck =25 N I mrt?-, f.= 415 N I mrt?-, L = 4.15m, Leff = 0.65 x L, Pu=1050 AN.m
1500 X 10 = 0.9[0,4"x 25 X 126500 + (0.77 X 250 -'-0.4 X 25)Asc]
Required: Designofshortcolumn. ·
:.Asc· = 220lm~ . Solution: Assuming minimum 0.8% Steel, maximum area will be ob~ed to know appi:oxiinatelt •
Provide 6- 22 mm , · Area provided= 2280 m~ the maximum·dimetisiQns ofthe column. · ·.
. 1050 )( 1000 ' .,
Lateral Ties :
~6 mm at spacing :t(300 mm or 230 ~ orl6 x 22 m1zt). :.Provide $6 mm at 230 mm clc
~
Ag= 0.4 x 25 ·+ (0.67 x 415 0.4 x 25) ><0.008 =
86460
m,i2 · ... ... (Eq. 11.3. 7c)
 <,11:·

~86 Column Chapter 11 ·} Sect. 11.4 Design of Axially Loaded Short Column 587
" ~
APproximate size will be 300 mm x 300 mm with 0.8% steel. Ex. 11.4.5 Design a short helically reinforced column of unsupported lel;Jgth 3. 75 m to
-:If the percentage of steel is increased the size will reduce.
fj
carry an axial service load of 1100 kN. Assume effective length equal to unsupported length.
·Now since given load is far less than the axial load carrying capacity of 400 mm x 400 mm
section ( = 1940 leN) for 25 Fe 415, as obtained from Table 11. 4.1, width of section shall be less Use concrete M20 and steel of grade Fe 250.
Given : fck = 20 N I mrt?, f = 250 N I mm2, L = Leff= 3.75 m , P = 1100 kN.
than 400 mm. Also since forb< 400 mm, emm. = 20 mm exceeds 0.05 b, the section shall be
designed either as an eccentrically loaded column See Ex. 11.6.1 or using the reduction factor Required: Design of a circu\ar~olumn
approach and Eq. 11.3.8. Design here will be done by the latter approach. Solution:
Effective lengthLeff = unsupported length (L) = 3.75 m= 3750 mm.
(a) L *' 4.15m, Leff = 0.65 L. Leff = 0.65 x 4.15 =2.7 m.
! For the column to be short, diameter D of circular section{ Leff /12 = 3750/12 i.e. 313 mm
For the column to be short, band D{ Leff /12 (= 2700/12 i.e. 225 mm) ... I
I
l .,.,
·1,1'
For emm. not to exc'lled 20 mm, from Eq. I 1.4.3 ~ For the column to be designed as axially loaded column,
D 'f (400 mm or 0.12 L) whichever is greater D 'f ( 400 mm or 0.12 x 3750 i.e. 450 mm)
~~ll1~ #and D :j-{(600- 0.06 L) i.e. (600- 0.06 x 4150)} :. b or D *: 351 mm ... II
ltl!.
')ill · Select a section satisfying upper and lower bounds given by I and II. :. D 1: 450 mm.
iji·;:l Provide a circular section of diameter 450 mm.
il'i.•l Try 230 mm x 300 mm
i 1:::;1: Provided A = 1t D 2 /4 = 1t x 451f /4 = 159043 mrt?
\ !:~ ~ A ·: =230 x 300 =69000 mm2 g
:. ::;1·~ g ' ... 2 Taking load factor= 1.5, Pu = 1.5 x 1100= 1650 kN
/···~.
I,, k This is less than the maximum.area = 86460 m11r calculated above. Assuming that helical reinforcement shall be so designed as to give additionalSo/o strength in
::li:~: Since b =230 mm, A.= 0.9
:;:;~
,,,,,.,
axial compression. ·
Pu IA.=0.4jkA c g +(0.67!.y -0.4jk)A ...... (Eq. I1.3.9b) . Pu = .1.05 [0.4jkA c Asc 1
c g +(0.671,y -0.4/k)
c sc
:·}~
:::::~ 1650 X 1000 = 1.05 ( 0.4 X 20 X 159043 + (0.67 X 250 -0.4 X 20) Ascl
•i'·~o (P u/ 'J.-.- OA f'ck"Ag) 1050 x 1000 I 0.9-0.4 X 25 x. 69000 . ___
•'I'
'•'•!,.
'~~~
A
SC
= (0.67 f.y - 0.4jk)
= ( 0.67 X 415 ' - 0.4 X 25)
= 1778 m11r2 :.Required, A = 299084.5 I ( 0.67 x 250-0.4 x 20) = 1875 mrtt
::j!~ sc ,....-- ~
Provide 6 Nos.~ 20 mm giving Asc = 1884 mn?
c
"l!n
::~~~
:~i~: ·. Provide 6- # 20 mm giving area Asc = 1885 mn?
:f~
~.·~
f[ Lateral Ties : +6 mm at spacing~ {430 mm, 300 mm and 16 x 20 =320 }. ~ sh = 8 mm, Ash = 1t x 82 I 4 =50 mrtt ,
Helical Steel :
Clear cover =40 mm assumed I
(.(;i:;
:. Provide +6 mm at 230 mm c/c
/ ....
•'
Diameter of core, Dk = D- 2 x clear cover= 450- 2 x 40 = 370 mm
Areaofcore,Al= 1tDk2 14-ASe: =1t x37ifl4-1875 ==105646mrif
Comments : The same problem has been solved as an. eccentrically loaded column for given axial
compression and minimum moment equal to 21 kN.m ( =Pu x emin) and works out to be safe. (see Ex. tl. 7.1) From Eq. 11.3.12a.
Therefore, the approximate method using reduction factor method can be used to avoid tedious
J 20 i.e. 'f .0.0145
0.36~: -3
calculations. fck [159043
P,. {
7; 1:0.36 [ 105646- j25o
(b) L, = 0.65 L, L =5.1 m, :. Leff= 0.65 x 5.1 = 3.315 m.
11 0.55
Forthecolumntobeshort, bandD'f {Le 112 i.e.. 3315/12 = 277 mm}. 1tDkAsh 1t X 370 X 50 =-
11 But p = = -_.;...~~ s
Foremrn. not to exceed
, 20 mm (for
. 11Sing die
reduction factor approach); sh Ak. x s 105646 X S
b and D ~( 600- 0.06 L} i.e. ( 600-0.06 x 51 00) i.e~ 294 mm.
:. 0.55/s -F 0.0145 or s<O.SS /0.0145 i.e. 38 mm
. ·Theoretieally, the size of col~ can be between 277 mm and 294 mm say 280 mm x 28Q mm. Provide spacing s =35 nun .
But, it will not be a prlmCaJ. solution. If any other dimension say 230 mm or 3.00 mm is to be
adopted,itcannotbedesignedasanaxiallyloadedco~eitherbrusingEq.ll.4.I orEq. Il.4.2. Check for allowable spacing : . .
In that ease, it will have 4) be designed as eccentrically loaded column only. · s < (75 mm or D / 6i.e. 370/6 ;:~: 61 mm) whichever is less i.e. s < 61 mm
· <'·"> f?t; ,..,. nr l ':>l R =?A ,...;.\ ...1-:,.~o-•- :., _._ :;. .. ..,_ ')C - -
1
 Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 589
588 Column Chapter ·11 Sect. 11.5
Since centre to centre spacing of wall is considered the self weight of column is not taken.
Ex. 11.4.6 Design an internal R.C. short <:oiumn R for a three storeyed building shown in 'The differen~e between the density of concrete and masonry is neglected.
Fig. 11.4.1 for the following data :
Live load = 4 kN I m1, · Floor finish = 1 kN I m2 , Floor to floor hcig.lJt =3 m Assuming roofload to be equal to floor load. The total load on the column at the plinth level will be
Height of plinth above G.L. = 0.5 m , Depth offoundation below G.L. = 1.25 m
thickness of wall= 250 mm, density of masonry= 20 kN 1m3 due to three floors.
Ultimate load on the column at plinth leve\==3 x 484 == 1452 leN.
Width of column= 250 mm, Thickness of slab= 120 mm
Assuming the depth of the footing equal to 500 mm,
Materials used- concrete M20 and steel grade Fe 415 Selfwt. of column below plinth, = 1.5(25 x 0.25 x 0.5 x ( 0.5 + 1.25-0.5) 1= 6 leN.
Neglect the requirements of minimum eccentricity of 0. 05 D. Total load on column 'R' at top offooting == 1452 + 6 =1458 leN.
Add allowance of 10% for unforeseen variation in loads and approximations involved,
i
·),·/;; 11 Design ax.iallbad =1.1 x 1458,= say 1610 kN = P
:~The
.... column
. u kN , Assuming 1.5% steel,
is designed for lUl axial load of 1610
•!\l~t:
/~ 1:!
vi
1 ~ P = [1).4 x 20 + (0.67 x 415-0.4 x 20) 0.0151 A = 1610 x 1000 :.A = 133602
u ' g g
m~
,, ,1\
I ·• ·
ill~1 rl
II,_._,4 D = 1 133602 I 250 = 535 mm say 550 mm
S,Ction of the ool-provided" 250 mm x 550 mm :.A," 131500 mni'

rt 2
~ ~:

·~~::::t '1610x l000=0.4x20x 137500+(0.67x415-'0:4x20)A sc :. Asc == 1889mm

tl·,·;~
IY Provide 6- # 20 mm + 2- # 12 mm with 3 - # 20 mm along the short side and 2- # 12 mm
'J\!;;!!:
'·(~ 8 along the long side one on each face, so that the distance between the longitudinal steel is less
.than 300 mm. Area Provided= 2111 m~ > 1889 mm
II)
1

11':1··~1 ~
l
,!,!~~:
irn·.
!J,
~ ~ u u ul Lateral ties : ~IT :> 20 I 4 or 5 mm
\1·'·1·
.m, 1-- 450;' 4· 450()+_: ~5~0 ·l· 4500 --1 Use 6 mm lateral ties of grade Fe 250
Spacing < (250 mm or 300 mm or 16 x 20 == 320 mm )
' Fig. 11.4.1 :; Provide~ 6 mm lateral ties@ 250 mm c/c.
\r~,/
\
Solution :The actual load on the column can best be obtained by calcuiating the loads on bea.ti:; ::nd \ Comments: The allowance of 0 to 10 %for interior columns is added to account for the effect of moments
~\ ~· . their end shears. Then, the total load on any column at each floor level is the algebraic sum of the
shears at the end ofall beams supported by the column. Thus, the axial load on the column at !Uly.floor. l due to partial fixity between beams and column. It is a safety factor for approximate method and can be
decided by individual designer, based on his experience.
level is equal to the load coming from upper floors plus selfweight ofthe colwnn However, sufficiently · l In practice, this method of computation of load is important when the design offooting and column
accurate load on the column can be obtained by considering the floor ~a supported by the colUf!lll. is required prior to carrying out detailed design, due to· urgency of the work.
The area of slab transferring the load to the column 'R' is obtained from the intersection of lines .
-~\y' drawn from the mid-points of the beams and is shown by hatclted lines in Fig. 11.4.1. To this floor , 11.5 COLUMN IDoillER AXIAL COMPRESSION AND UNl-AXIAL BENDING
load, appropriate wall load between floor to floor height !Uld self weight of the column is added to.
obtain load on the column at each floor level. This estimation ofload is stiffic~ently accurate for an
interior column which is not subjected to moment. The details are given as under:
As discussed in Sect.l 1.2.3,.load.on colmnn is rarely axial. There~:; always some 6inimum
11.5.1 Introduction
oj
Assessment of unit loads : ·
Slab load== LF(25 D+ LL + FF) = 1.5 ( 25 x 0.12 +4 + 1 }= 12 kN 1m2 . inherent eccentricity on account of nonhomogeneity of material, imperceptible crookedness of the
Wall load per meter length == LF (density of masonry x thickness x height) member, inaccuracies in loading !Uld cdnstruction, lateral deflection of column etc. Besides, many
= 1.5 ( 20 ~< 0.25 x 3) = 22.5 kN I m titne~, column is subjected to end moments on account of monolithic connection of beams and
Assume section of column = 250 x 500 mm. Column load area = 4.5 x 5 = 22.5 nil i~
. colunins,1n such a case, the column subjected to combilled action of axial load Pu and bending
Load on colUinn at each storey .rilom~nt Mu. This loading system can be re~uced to a single resultant load Pu acting at an
= (slab load) x column l<iad area+ wall load I m x length of the wall
= (l2x~2.5)+[22.5x2(4.Sl2+5/2)] = 484kN · · · eceentrlci:'ty· e =M. UI I!;U. '
 ,111' .•
~. :·

1~
590 Column )
r41v:
r f·. J
·;~

I!
I ;,
I Chapter 11
The behavio"' of>uch a mombe, depends upon the amount of =<ntrie;ty "' the magnitude
:f,
,:@
Sect. 11.5 Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 591
' !I ofthe beorung moment in relotion to the rudalload The no""" axis moy be at difforentJoootio.,
doponding on tho OCcentrieity of lood. The linUt;ng '""s are, zoro oocentr;e;ty 'Osulting in The depth of neutral axis has though a finite value now, the neutral axis still lies outside the
'!i 1/' different
-ontriecases"""areload
discussed. · floxurol eondition. AU th,.,
Wid Yoty httge oooenfrieity tendU.g to pure section. The stress - distribution is rectangular from highly compressed edge to a depth where the
;
strain is 0.002 and it is parabolic over the remaining region where & is less that 0.002.
>! .Case - I Concentric load or zero Eccentricity
;I,, CilSe - III Neutral Axis lying along the Edge ( xu = D)
iJ Whon tlio load is "truly ax;" O.e. zero bending momen"t1 the entire eros_,;on ;s tinde, direct When eccentricity goes on increasing, the depth of neutral axis goes on reducing and the
.!J
::/. ·?
~HI'(i
,· eompres,ion ond the distribution ofs!rnin ond s""s oeross tlie depth is rectrutgnJ., witli maximum
strnin U. eoncrete equ" to 0.002 and tlio sn.ss oqu" to 0.4 f.,. os shown U. Fig. 11. 5. 1 (ta.e - ~ stage reaches when the neutral axis just lies along an edge on opposite side of the load, giving

'
'i/ J:r
~!<· Cos. -II NeulwJJ axis lying Outside the S"tlnn (i.• x. >D)
xu =D. For
· this condition, the strain diagram across the depth is triangular withEmax now equal to

I,.ll'.:,/i i:.~.·
0.0035 along highly compressed edge (on the load side) and Emm. = 0 along the opposite side as
; '1'
hendmg moment ( p"' u
~
When tlio load (P ) is acting at a .."1-;ty ( e), tlie tens;!, stres., produced due to
e ) are l"s than tlio ax;" eompres,;y, stresses wtt1t tho resuh the
.
whole
shown in Fig. 11.5.1. (Case-III). The stress-diagram is rectangular-parabolic with rectangular
part over a depth 3D/7 from the highly compressed edge and parabolic over the remaining depth
flilh'· f
I., ..
section;, suJ!iected to coml>'ess;ve stresses lind the ueutraJ ax;, lies nuts;do the section.
4D/7 from the neutral axis .Let the eccentricity correspondingto this condition bee I'
i ).\~t The straW ;s compress;vo throughout the section buttlie strom distrllrution oeross the section
:,1r:J.
'N: h not l"eCtangu!a,. hat tropezo;dal w;tli onlU.ote e_ along the edge n...., to load ,;de and •.. Case - IV Neutral Axis Lying within the Section ( x <D)
!H: "ong tlieedge oppo,;te to the load s;de " shoWJUn Fig. 1J.5. 1 (C<ae -I/) {h) u '
As the eccentricity goes on increasing further, the bending action goes on becoming

I.
<~;:
::1):/
fj!,l•·
:::~1';':
,:.r,;
r-+--
1
B 1- -1
-10.002
r----. 81
0.446fck
r---'-.
1- predominant causing the neutral axis to shift inside the section and the strain diagram is double
triangular as shown in Fig. 11.5.1 (Case-IV) withEmax = 0.0035 a~' the highly compressed edge.
·:r··~·.. I In this case, the compressive strain is acting over part of the section having depth xu and the
l V·i
:il~; cr~-- distribution of stress is rectangular - parabolic over the depth xu as in the case of beams.
;:o~ 1 0
H·i! I Xu>D
0 Strain Distribution Diagram for x u ·> D
,:11~

lWJ~W. ,
I A It will be observed that, as the eccentricity goes on increasing from zero to e1 corresponding
ll
I·
At
(a)
(b) to xu =D the maximum strain Em(JX along the highly compressed edge also goes on· increasing· from
(c) ·~i
tr 2 I 0.002 to 0.0035. The relation between Emax and the minimum strain Emili at the opposite edge for
N L ___ -- ..!t
_f.J I __
/ A
i t:"emin the case of xu > D is obtained as under.
(a)
Case - I (Xu = OO) (b)
(c)
On superimposing strain diagrams of Case - I and Case - III, the two diagrams intersect each

/- b -j.. ~.ooas--1 - / o.44stck j.- p*

Case • II (Xu>D) other at point '0' which by properties of similar triangles, happens to be at a distance 3DI7 from
the highly compressed edge, as shown in Fig. 11.5.1 (Case- II). For this intennediate Case- II
P* .

Ge
:T
I
8
1
I BWB3DT
vo :002
·
_
lQ_
1
.!._ r ~.1:.
I
with xu lying between ex:> and D, the stratn
. . diagram is assumed to pass through fulcrum 0 for all
strain distribution lines with the depth of neutral axis xu greater than D.
In Fig.11.5.1 Case- II( b), lineA 1.0B1 is for Cti$e- I,A 2 OB2 is for Case -II aitdA3 OB3

: l ..,-.._ 1 ~-
0
for Case - Ill
Since point ( 0 ) lies on A1 , OB1 the strain at '0' is 0.002 which is constantfor all
(a) diagrams.
(II).
(c) A4 A From similar triangles OA 1A3 tmd_()B 1B3 ,

I
(a)
(b)
Case ·IU lxtrD) Case ·IV (Xu<D) (c)
OA 1 . A1 A3 AA.(:-AA 1 0.0035-0.002 O.tl015 3
Fig.ll.S.l : Column. under Combined Axial Compression and· Bending OB =. B B = BB = 0.002 0.0020 = 4
1 1 3 1 3
 ., f·l f
;;i Sect. 11.5 Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 593

~·l.1 1,
I
$92 Column Chapter 11 with zero value at N.A. and maximum value at point' 0'. The stress is, thus, ABCDF, as shown in
Fig. 11.5.2. The properties of the stress block will now be derived from this figure.
1 !:,
OAI 3 3
But OA 1 + OBI = D :. OA 1 =' 3D/7
';i OA 1 + OB 1 3+4 7
I 0,0035.\
\ nHf\L. \
~

ll
-!:
1--- ,b-1 0.002

. r:
~~
For Case- II '7T B c
___ _/,:

1 .I:
1'1"\:!'
&max = AA 2 = AA 3 - A2 A3 where, AA 3 = 0.0035

I -1 f ~u=kuD ,
I' + o
l I 30
,,, -7-
o
c2 o

'••" c,lolfo

\T1-~
Putl 2
Now A~/ B!3 = OA/ OBI = 3/4 .. A2 A3 = (3/4) B!3 = 0.75 &min 0
ri!
ttl . . ~~~-,:
:. &max = AA3 - A2 A3 = 0.0035-0.75 &min .. .... ( 11.5.1 ) 0 JQ.
7 \X 40
.Iill"I'~·fr~
'"

/l-7
-

\1
•H jll,

~< ~~~
[11~~
I !~):;
. · v)·t.
This relation leads to the recommendation of I.S.Code under C/: 39.1(b) that for a
.member subjected to axial compression and bending, when there is no tension on the section, the
maximum compressive strain s max at the highly compressed edge shall be 0.0035 minus 0. 75 times
l \ -
~
I }--&
II
- _,

min
.
1 A
fc

F _] E
\-4fmln '\ g I
I 1I
,, .....-;
I
l (xu= _2Q_ )

l 7

·rr{·'i the strain emm. at the least compressed extreme edge. However,. in this equation emax is not II I I
·!l{:r.
c·{~•: independent by itself but is a function of &min which is function of xu· A relation independent ofxu Ji_~_A_ _ ~--.l_
~fmax-\
jl[i:~f: can however be obtained.
:ll ·I/ It may be recalled that while deriving Eq. 11.5.1, point ' 0' has been considered as a Fig. 11.5.2 : Stress -block Parameters for Combined Bending and Axial Compression for x0 > D
·~~~:~':
1 '1
1
fulcrum for aU strain distribution lines for Case - I to Case - III. As a result, ordinate OC at this

/.1" 1~'.t;'.;·.1,
.· :
fulcrum point has a constant value equal to 0.002 for any value of xu. The location of this point
below highly compressed edge also remains fixed at 3D 11 for any value ofxu· The above relation
Letx
.. u =kD u ' g=EF=(fmax-f.) mm
where, f . = stress at the least compressed edge.
v··y
Nowmm . at Dandy- axis as an axis of symmetry for the
the equation of parabola DF, with vertex
!!f;i~: prescribed by the Code interrelating
· &max with &mm. can, therefore , be replaced by a statement that
:-~·~~~ &
m~
shall be such that strain at a depth
, 3D /7 from the highly compressed edge shall always. be parabolic curve is given by :
r.r,., 0.002. This condition defines the strain diagram when the neutral axis lies outside the section. y = ail
where, x is a distance measured from the vertex D at which the parabola is tangential to CD.
For obtaining the value of the constant 'a' we use the boundary conditions.
f"
',=
11.5.2 Stress Block Parameters
While analysing a section under combined bending and axial load, it is necessary to know the y = f max at x = (x u - 3DI7) i.e. ( ku D- 3DI7 ) 2
() :. f = a(k D-3D!7l :. a=f I (k D-3DI7)
total compression and its moment about the geometric centre. This requires determination of the max u max u
properties of stress- block, namely, the area giving total compression per unit width and the position
of this total compression (i.e. the centroid ofthe stress- block) from the highly compressed edge
(Fig. 11.5.2. ) ' = fmax x2 At X==~ • Y =g
It has been observed earlier that the type of stress - block depends upon the fact whether Y (k D - 3D I 7 )2 ' 7 2

I I l
2
N.A.lies outside the section or inside the section. The prope!:lies of the stress- block, in terms of
. u 4D/7 ] 4

\_/
stress - block)mrameters, will, therefore, be obtained separately for the two cases. .
g = fmax ~uD- 3D t7J = fmax[7ku -3J
(a) Neutral Axis lying outside the sections ( xu >D) ' '
According to the basic assumption for combined bending and axial compression Substituting/, = 0.446 f k prescribed by I.S. Code,
~~) max c
discussed in Sect. 11.5.1, the strain E is equal to 0.002 at a distance 3DI7 from the highly

t
2
compressed edge. Therefore, from the properties of stress • strain .curve ofconcrete, the streSs is ·
c.onstant equal tof max and, hence, the stress • block is rectangular over a section where & > 0.002
i.e. upto a point '0 '. The stress distribution is parabolic on the remaining part where, t < 0.002
g = 0.446 fck 7 ku- 3 .
J4
j '
 ~~,

?'
594 Column
Chapter 11 Sect. 11.5 Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 595
Area of stress - block,
A == AreaABCE- area DEF
==fm~ D- (113).g (4DI7) ==Jm~ D- 4gDI2I.
_ t0.5 ..:. C3 17
:. X = .
1.0- c3 16
j X D , · Putting x = c2 x D.

~ 0.446J., D-0.446!, ~7k:_ j; ' 4D

21 :. C2=
c0.5- c3 17)
{ 1.0- c3 16)
...... ( I 1.5.2c)

~ 0446 ;;,n f-; 1 ( 7k~3J ] Thus, C2 defines the position of C.G. of the stress- block and hence, that of the total
compression Puc. It corresponds to stress- block parameter ''2
lr of the beam theory.
:----

P.tting C3 ~ +& 4
k, - 3 J ... ... ( I 1.5.2a)
The values of C1 and C2 for different values of ku are given in Table 11.5.1. Though the
values of cl and c2 have been given for values of ku upto 10, the value upto ku = 1.2 are
considered quite adequate for the usual practical cases .
Table 11.5.1 : Stres~- block Parameters for Neutral Axis Lying Out- side the Section xu> D
:. A == { 0.446 (1- C3 I 6) }.~k D == C ~k D
where, C1 == { 0.446 (I - C I 6) } 1 ku ct ci ku ct c2 ku ct c2
3
...... ( I l.5.2b) ··1.00
1.01 ,,
0.361 0.416 --- ---- --- ---- ---- ----
The stress - block parameter C1 defines the average compressive stress giving the area of 0.364 0.419 1.16 0.394 0.453 1.35 0.413 0.472
str~ss- block and, hence, the total compression Puc· It corresponds to stress block parameter k in
ultimate strength theocy of bending (See Sect. 4.4).
1.02 0.367 0.42l., 1.17 0.396 0.454 1.40 0.417 0.475
1 . 1.03 0.369 0.426 ' 1.18 0.397 0.456 1.45 0.419 0.477
For locating the centroid of the stress- block, let us take moment of the stress- block area 1.04' 0.372 0.429 1.19 0.398 0.457 1.50 0.422 0.479
about the highly compressed edge. 1.05 ·0.374 0.431 1.20 0.399 0.458 [60 0.426 0.483
1.06 0.376 0.434 1.21 o.401 0.459 1.70 0.429 0.486
A%- == Area of ABCE x - D - area DEF x ( D - - I 4D )
x ---..:...._ 1.07 0.378 0.436 1.22 0.402 0.461 1.80 0.431 0.488 .,
2 4 7 1..08 0.381 0.439 1.23 0.403 0.462 1.90 0.433 0.489
1.09 0.383 0.441. 1.24 0.404 0.463 2.00 0.435 , 0.491
:: (0.446 f
ck
X D) X --D
2
(I
-X
3 g>4D)( D- ~)
1.10
1.11
0.384
0.386
0.443
0.445
I 1.25
1.26
0.405
0.406
0.464
0.465
2.50
3.00
0.440
0.442.
0.495
0.497
'\

D4 8 1.12 0388 0.447 1.27 0.407 0.466 4.00 0.444 0.498

/"'·,
:: 0.446j - · - - g jjl 1.13 0.390 0.448 1.28 0.408 0.466 5.00 0.445 0.499
ck 2 49
1.14 0.391 0.450 . 1.29 0.409 0.467 10.00 0.446 0.500

~ 0.446f., D'f.s - !9 ( 7k,4- 3) ] 1.15 ji.39J ... 0.452 lJO . 0.409 0.468 00 0.446
Stress fc in. concrete at different bar levels is required to be obtained from known &.
0.500

From Eq. 11.5.2a It is given by the following equation for the parabolic part ofthe idealized stress- strain cuC:e
for concrete. See Fig. 11.5.2 and Eq. 2.2.3 .
:..AX== 0.446 ~k Jil co.s - c 1 7) ~E ( E· ~] 0.446f.
. fc=0.446fcklx0.~02- ·0.0~2) = 0.002ck (2~c-500&/)forec<0.002
3
AX 2 .
:.x ==-- = 0.446fck D ( 0.5- C ! 7)
3
A· 0.446fck D (1.0...: C/ 6) ::fc: {446&;; (1-250&c} fck = k1fck fouc < 0.002 } ...... (ll. 5.2d)
. · j_ - 0.446J:.~, for &c ~ 0.002
 Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 597
F'j'\,
)'
596 Column Chapter 11.
Sect. 11.5
On the other hand, when the eccentricity ofthe load, and hence, the bending moment, is large
~~
":·.\ I the section is subjected to large flexural action causing neutral axis to lie inside the section as in the
The values of k and ,fc for different values of E~are given in Table 11.5.2 bel case of beam. In this case, the steel in the column gets divided into compression steel and tension
WI' 1
steel. The modes offailure for column in this case are the same as those of beams, compression

(~r~,\1
Table 11.5.2 : Stress in Concrete • fc; in N!mn?-
failure, balanced failure and tension failure. Compression failure or over-reinforced failure occurs
-/[1 I
fer inN lmm 2 f.Cl inN/m~ by crushing of concrete (when maximum compressive strain reaches ecu"" 0.0035) prior to yielding
of tension steel. Tension failure (or under-reinforced failure) is initiated by yielding oftension
till\\ E.
I kl M20 M25 E.
I kl M20 M15
steel prior to crushing of concrete. While the balanced failure is by crushing of concrete and
. ..·II
1.':1 0 0 0 0 0.00110 0.356 7.11 8.89 yielding of steel simultaneously. This occur for a specific value of eccentricity (called eb) giving··
9.,1
1I' ~JI
' '· 0.00010 0.043 0.87 1.09 0.00120 0.375 7.49 9.37 specific value of x - x b' For actual eccentricity e < eb, x > x band the load is controlled by
~~ u u u u
Ill\' 0.00020 0.085 1.70 2.12 0.00130 0.391 7.83 9.78 compression failure. For actual eccentricity e < eb ,xu <xub and the load is governed by tension
;.:~
·""~.
. i, \',r'i~i~
0.00030 0.124 2.48 3.09 0.00140 0.406 8.12 10.15

~'i•\jij:;
1
0.00040 0.161 3.21 4.01 0.00150 0.418 8.36 10.45 failure. See Fig. 11.5.3.
• jl,f
0.00050 0.195 3.90 4.88 0.00160 0.428 8.56 10.70
· . l'~l''
l .',. ' \
·1.•
·~~~l:;
0.00060 0.227 4.55 5.69 0.00170 0.436 8.72 10.90
11.5.4 Pu- Mu Interaction Diagram ~ a moment Mu, an axial load Pu
A given reinforced concrete section can resist, in presence of
less than the pure axial load Pw it can carry when Mu=0. Similarly, the section will resist a moment
one.q~antity
0.00070 0.258 5.15 6.44 0.00180 .
0.442 8.83 11,04

1'! ~:.·~~·:J:!:
Mu less than Mub in presence of Pu >Pub' Thus the effect of is to reduce the other
0.00080 0.285 5.71 7.14 0.00190 0.445 8.90 11.12 u
·-· 0.00090 0.311 6.22 7.78 0.00200 0.446 resistance. Thus, for a given section, there is always one particular value of allowable load P
8.92 11.15
0.00100 0.335 6.69 8.36 >0.002 0.446 8.92 accompanying a given moment Mu. A diagram showing allowable axial loads Pu for different
ltf:\ ;,;;; 11.15
values of Mu is known asP u· Mu interaction diagram. It helps to determine one quantity when the

b.;~~:·~~;
· r:~·~: ~
j I·~;'
(b) n (xu <D)
In this case, the stress • block is the same as that for the beam except that in the case of
other is given. A typical Pu· Mu interaction curve is shown in Fig. 11.5.3 for an eccentrically
loaded column. The variation of Pzi_and Mu can be critically studied with the help of strain
column, the entire depth (D) of the column can be effective ( i.e. xu = D in limiting case ). ·
diagrams shown in Fig_. 11.5.4 ·
Therefore, the depth of neutral 'axis xu is related to total depth D and not to effective depth ( d) as xy Axis of bending
- taken in beam.

It+-lt'"
Puz Dl Xu="'
:.xu = ku D.
G
Area of stress block = 0.36fckxu = 0.36fck ku D =C1 fck D ...... ( ll.5.3a) I xr-e-1
where, cl = 0.36 ku = kl ku' .5I
.,Et t--0--1
Similarly, the distance ofcentroid of stress block from highly compressed edge ul
"'I .S' xu= D, Em in= o, Em ax= 0.0035
= 0.416 Xu = 0.416ku D= k2ku D=C2D
where, c2 = 0.4i6 ku = k2 ku ...... ( 11.5.3b)
o\.,
II II
I
I
Note f Constants C1 a;d C2 relate the respective properties with D while constants k and k relate ::> I
1 2 11. I ~:pression failure
the same toxu I
I
11.5.3 Types of Failures I
I ,.,."")~-'' xu=Xub
The discussion in earlier sections have shown that practically every compression member is I ~l'!g.--
~.... I Tension tanure
subjected to a bending moment Mu accompanying direct compressive load Pu due to I ,.,.,.,. I
eccentricity e. When the axial load is large and the eccentricity is small, compression prevails over ""_.,,. A
e=« Muo Mub
the entire section and the neutral axis falls outside the section. In this case, failure occurs by 0
crushing of concrete when the strairi in it reaches t f. max given by Eq. 11.5.1. This type offailure Mu-
is known as compression failure. It is sudden and does not give any· warning and, hence it is . Fig.11.S.3 :/Pu- Mu Interaction Curve: Types of Failnres
disastrous.

I
 ..,r--.,

fi.~ .·
Sect. 11.5 Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 599 /"-
I'
I.
598 Column Chapter 11
'_I·\
:_j
of the section is reduced ( i.e. if the section is not required to resist full Mub but Mu < Mub )·
i 'Let us start with
"
zero axial load ( Pu = 0 ) but Mu existing (Mu = Muo ). This corresponds to Reduction in moment is equivalent to applying moment ofopposite nature which induces compressive
:\l i
strain in bottot\1 fibre and tensile strain in top fibre. The effect of this opposite moment is to reduce
d· point A on the curve in Fig. 11.5.3. For Pu =0, the section acts like a doubly reinforced beam with
•\i strains in concrete as well as steel giving a scope to increase the axial load. The strains due to
;_\I its moment capacity equal to Muo . A section reinforced with nearly equal steel on both (tension
'i
ij and compression)faces is invariably an under reinforced section in which the moment resisting !iddition of opposite moment (i.e. due to reduction of actual Mu) is shown in Fig. 11.5.4 (d)( i)
;:,'\ and that due to additional load 8P beyond P b is shown in Fig. 11.5.4 (d)(ii), The final resultant
i rcapacity Mu is governed by yielding of tension steel ( i.e. a tension failure). The initial strain u u
/
:\\., diagram for this case is shown by line- 1 in Fig. 11.5.4 (a). Any increase in axialloadPu induces strain diagram is shown in Fig.. Il.5.4 (e). (.0035> Ecmax >0.002)
·ii additional compressive strain &ca shown in Fig. 11.5.4. (b).(i). This results in increase of compressive ~b3>f:cal . t _, ~.002
•:i . r-c.oo3~ p--\ ~
\;.
strain from &cb1-to-( &cbl + &ca) and corresponding reduction in tensile strain in steel from its yield - ,. . .,
r-;-tca
,--, q; 0.002
j-to.0015 1"'1
r:iJ
·\
il 1•• value~; to ( & - ~; ):The resultant strain diagram is shown in Fig. 11.5.4. (a) by line- 3. The
+ I ( ~
i 1 ! -l~
1
.!JI .!JI ca · I
1 I
1 reduction of tensile strain in steel due to additional compressive load ( oPu) increases the moment
';l.1\'' !;:~
!t.'
\t!i\1. ~
carrying capacity of the section provided the total maximum compressive strain in concrete
+ = + =
t\l !~i~:~
!-I : I. •·
( & hi+ & ) is less than & ( = 0.0035 ). Consequently, the section can resist additional sagging
c ca c.max
j\l',iU:\ moment ( oMu) till the resultant maximum compressive strain in concrete reaches a value ec. max .+
ll'"
"\ and the maximum tensile strain in steel reaches yield strain. The additional moment ( OM" )
I '''!"
l:~./~
&sb3 8ca &c.min \---&sy-1 For
. ··;,:t induces additional c!'mpressive strain &cbl in the top fibre aild tensile strain &sbl =: &cain the Pu=Pul.
iW. \---Esy-1 >&ca
oueto
oueto PolntB'in
lig.11.5.3
oueto-Mub
and (P uz-P ubl
Point 01n
bottom fibre (shown in Fig. 11.5.4 (b) ( ii) which when added to the strains due toMu + oPu Pu =Pub lipu fig 11.5.3
\ .,.~...
:,JrJ\
',1'~::: ' /
Mu=Mub
-liMu
( d )(li.) (e)
(d){lii) (I)
\ i;f i~ gives resultant strain shown in Fig. 11.5.4 (c). The same effect is shown byline- 2 in Fig. 11.5.4 (d) (i)
(c)
I :·~\'
'! ·~ (a) in which the variation of strain due to additional moment Mu is added to line - 3. Point Bin
l: :~
Fig. 11.5.3
,:; i'
'\.\•;! ~b2 · Fig. 11.5.4 : Strain Diagrams for Eccentrically Loaded Columns
,;~!,
'.l·l~
'\?j:l This corresponds to any point on the portionBD ofcurve in Fig. 11.5.3. Ifthe moment on the
ti·J,~
+ ,":.!?'
( section is reduced
.
to zero, the section can carry its full ideal axial resisting capacity P~. This
'

condition is shown by Fig. 11.5.4 (/) and is represented by point D on the interaction curve in
+ I : Fig. I 1.5.3.1t is interesting to note that maximum compressive strain E c.max in concrete is equal
to 0.0035 only upto B' on the interaction curve in Fig. 11.5.3 corresponding to the case of
neutral axis just lying at the face farther from the load. For any increased in load Pu beyond
I +
__, ~
point B', the value of& goes on reducing from 0.0035 to 0.0020 at pointDwhereM =0. This /"
'I
i
•I
Eca...j ~y-~a) 1-1 (Es1J2=~a) r-tsr-J c.rnax
·. will also be evident from Figures 11.5.4 (e) and (f). Thus pointsA,B,B',C, Dare some of the
u

!*Esy--\ o~folipu . DuetoliMu PointBinfig.11.5.3

important points on the interaction curve defining its characteristics.
,~

(a) (b)(i) (b)(ii) (c)

Fig. 11.5.4
In Fig. 11.5.3,
is a point representing pure moment resisting capacity of a doubly reinforced section
· . : :A_~ this stage, the compressive strain reaches its maximum limitof0.003S and the steel attains corresponding to zero axial load ( Mu =M~0 • Pu=0 ). •
Point A
·the:Jj~ld level simultaneously and·. th!l' condition of a balanced or critical action is said to have
reached ( i.e. Pu = Pub and Mu = Mub.).. This is shown by point- B on the interaction· curve in · is a point corresponding t6 the balanced condition. It gives maximum moment carrying
Fig. 11.5.3. Now both the materials are fully strained and the section is incapable of carrying any PointB
dmacitv for the section
.additional moment }he section is, however, able tocarry higher axial load only if external moment
 ;··~

1 '600 Column
HI Point B' is a point corresponding to xu =D i.e. at which Ec.max =0.0035.
~li
I!
Pointe is a point corresponding to maximum allowable axial. load PII under the presence of
minimum eccentricity prescribed by the Code. Load corresponding to this point is given
by Eq. 11.3.. 7 for emm. < O.OSD.
Point D corresponds to a maximum ideal axial load PllZ for zero moment.
.
For design according to Code, the curve ECBA is only useful for design.
Sect. JJ.S Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 601
Chapter 11
The basic equations for Puand Mu are derived applying the conditions ofequilibrium to internal
and external loads and moments. They can, therefore, be made applicable to sections of any shape,
and distribution of reinforcement and for any grade of concrete and steel. However, since internal
forces depend upon the strain 4istribution across the section which in tum depends upon the
position of neutral axis whether outside the section or inside the section the equations are different
for the two cases. The same have, therefore, been obtained separately for the two cases. Also for
discussion, a rectangular section of dimension 'b' parallel to the axis ofbending and the dimension
'D' perpendicular to the axis of bending is considered.
.,
11.5.5.1 Neutral Axis Lying Outside the Section (xu >D) :\
'I

il,_ The characteristic of the interaction curve can be best studied by observing the values of P11
The diagrams showing variation of compressive strains and stresses across the section are il
)./\'
~ -rv lr shown in Fig. 11.5.5
til:· •;l; M11 e I D ,js.m1n._, Ec.max and 8c.mm. at these points. These are summarised in Table 11.5.3 below.
I f:~,:
'· i!: For equilibrium, equating the external axial load to the internal axial resistance of the section,
fl"'' ,.
)' )l\'
~ r~.~:!: Table 11.5.3 : Cbaraeteristits of P11 - M11 Inter aetion Curve
~{ we get, ·n
;lrdJ Point p M II e/D 8 8' . Puc+ 'f, P usi ...... (ll.5.4a)
!l'l·, II
X
II fs.min c. max c.mm p "'
J

.: ,. .~:r u i=l
A 0 M110 CX) - 0.87fy <0.0035 -8 elttl)mal axial compressive load,
,,.•
..:.:.\.;/'\'
'j ;::
xu.DR sy
where, Pu
111,~·,· B pub Mub xub >1.0 - 0.87fy 0.0035 -&sy p
axial compressive resistance offered by concrete,
·1:,):
::~~:~;
uc
area of stress block x b
1-~-i~-
B' p
Mui D 1.0 0 0.00~5 0 =
...... {11.5.4b)
.. ·ul ..
<··
c~.;r c p ·M . .. Dto l.lD 0.05 <0.0035 <0.002 "' Cifck bD
:.: 1 '·~ u.max 11.mm fsc
I n
number of rows of bars
D p
IIC
0 CX) 0 fsc 0.002 0.002
::Itt n
'f,p . = total resistance given by steel at different levels.
':~~~!
-'- ve indicates tension i=I USI
The stress _block parameter C gives the average compressive stress over the entire section in
'i!! x II.DR = depth of neutral axis of a Doubly Reinforced section. _ 1
'
terms of fck'
The interaction diagram is a function of the properties of section and differs with diffet:_ent ..· For rectangular section CI= 0.446 ( 1 - C 3 /6) ...... (Eq. 11.5.2b)
sections. It can be dra~ ( See Ex. 11. 6. 6 and Ex. 11. 6. 7) by using basic equilibrium equations for . \
PII and MII derived in subsequent section.
where, C
3
"' +S d k: _
2

. .. (Eq: 11.5.2a)
11.5.5 Analysis of Section
j
Analysis of given reinforced concrete section of a column involves calculation of either the Alternatively, values of CI can be obtained from Table 11.5.1 . .
ultimate load carrying capacity PII of the section for given. MII or e, or· calculation.. of ultimate
moment resisting capacity MII for given PII .The values of PII and MII are functions of the 1:n p . =Total aXial compressive resistance offered by steel at different levels in the section.
J following: -i=I
( i )_ Shape and. size of section.
USI
= p~ I+P us2+ .... +Pusn .

_) {i i) Distribution of reinforcement with respect to the axis of bending. n ...... (11.5.4c)

(iii) Grade of concrete and steel. ' = (J,i- fci) 'f. Asi
i.=l
( iv ) The position of neutral axis.
'''i
Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 60J
602 Column Chapter II Sect. 11.5

in which i = serial number of the row of reinforcement, Thus, fmally, n

pU =P UC + ~p USI. or PU == C1jkbD* +~(f . .,. f.**)"
~si
...... (\ 1.5 .Sa)
n = total number of rows of reinforcement, C j=/ Sl Cl

Asi = cross- sectional area of reinforcement in the i throw, n p.

fs; = stress •n reinforcement in the i throw; compression being taken positive and
tension being taken negative. - pu
fckbD
c +~
I i=l
__!.,_
\00
(fsi - Jci } ...... (ll.S.Sb) /~-,

f Cl. = compressive stress in concrete at the level of i th row of reinforcement. \OOAs;

where, P; == fck bD
~·,1
The values off.Sl and. f.Cl are obtained corresponding to &.I at the i throw of reinforcement The compressive stress fc at the i th row of reinforced is given by :
from the respective stress-strain curve of ste.el and concrete. For obtaining f:i at any level of . == 446 &.I ( l-250E.)I JkC = k1 jkC for E.< 0.002
E;~
',/VI
!l i~·
,~I,,,,.
reinforcement, the reference strain is taken equal to 0.002 at a depth 3D/7 from the highly
f Cl == 0.446/ck
fci for
I
0.002
}
(Eq, 11.5.2d)
i ill~
..,:!:11'
,., compressed edge (See Fig. 11.5.5) and is expressed~ : The value of k andfci for different values ofE; are given in Table 11.5. 2
lh.:
... ;:'· 1.
Similarly, for equilibrium equating the external moment with the moment of ·memal£·
f:. = 0.002 x./ ( x - 3D/7) ... :.. (11.5.4d) t 0
if ~:r I I U

::;:H where, x.'I = distance of i th row of bars from the neutral axis. about the centroidal axis , 1'Ces
•ii·
/i~b n
..~ .... ...... (\1.5~6)
!',;·;,;~ Note : This mode of serial numbering of rows has been adopted suitable for preparing computer program M==M+'LM.
U UC i=/ USI
::·~ j'.~: andfor sections with steelonly on opposite faces, N > 2 become equal to zero.
'J ./~
;:~:~l where Mu = Pu.x e ==external moment ofload Pu (having .. eccentricity e tirom thecentro'd
1
:~~·<~ -axis ) about the centroidal axis. · a\
:,.~!;·
·l~t
Muc = moment of resistance offered by concrete in compression
I-- .0035-l
:ii·::
:jlt
(.0035·0.75 EminJI
,. •I I
\ = Puc (0.5D-C D) = Puc D(0.5-C 2)= C1fk
2
c bD2 (05 · - C)2 · (ll.5.o6a)
1
~~~ \-b -1 -1 I- The stress - block parameter C represents the ratio of the depth of com presstve
. for ,:n
nIt .. -r _T 1 :,
~lie
'-~~· ,....oo2--l o.4461ck
2
'j,.111
'1~
,. from the highly compressed edge to the total depth D. ce

· -*Pu
30
-7
1/
t: I
'/
]Q..
7

l~_l-:::.~7_1
0/2
. 0.5-C3 !1
... (Eq. 11.5.2c)

l ._1.-~.--i+-x t
t Xf Forrectangularsectton, C2 = \.O-C316
1_ _ ·us, ! Puc
x-D-
The value of C can also be obtained from Table 11.5.1.
~ Xu=kuD

U. • .
2
. xa n .
r, M .= Algebraic sum of the moments of reststance offered by steel at different levels
~-1 i=l
USI •

n ... ... (F..q. l1.5.6b)

,,
1
--rfi-.Emin I IF. = L Pusfxi
I i=l
II I I
I
N .J -A -N_j,~ n
= 'f. Asi (fsi- J,) X;
(a) Section ( b ) Strain Diagram (c) Stress Diag~m
· area Ag 0,~ the sectron.
~
i=l
I
* For sections other than rectangular section,. bD. will be replaced
d' by gross
* * This term accounts for the loss oftompresnon m concrete rsp1aced by the reir!forcement. It is
Fig. 11.5.5 Stress and Strain Distribution Diagrams for N.A. Lying Outside the.Seetion (xu> D) limP.< ionfll'"d fnr .dmnlicitv. ' /11/JJtu
 604 Column Chapter 11
Sect. 11.5 · Column Under Axial Compression and Uniaxial Bending 605
where, x1 = distance of the bars in i throw from the centroid of the section, positive towards
· highly compressed edge and negative towards the least compressed edge. For equilibrium of forces parallel to the axis, equating external axial load to algebraic sum of
Co1M!ents: Authors have chosen to use
symbol xi (and not Y; as adopted by SP( 16) ( 198014) for the the internal resisting forces,
distance ofi th row from the heutral axis in the direction of depth so as to be consistent with the symbol xu n
used for the distance of the neutral axis to the highly compressed edge ( ill the direction of the depth ). pu '=Puc + i=J
LP .
1/S/
•.. ... (Eq. 11 .5.4a)
n n }i:
iC MU = MUC +:EM1/S/.=PUC (0.5D-C2D)+ L pUS/. X.I
,.
'f:C\1
where, Puc = axial compressive resistance offered by concrete
.~~f} ~/ ~I
.;:·~
:iF'
II.. ,._ = area of stress block x b
! _I ,t' ~l'r'
'.·,.·,.:'~ir:=
~·~
f ll.!:~ n
.~
~~
n = 0.36fckxub = 0.36kufckbD ...... (ll.S.7a)
!I
·M'·
I'
r.,,.. l__

·.'~"
or Mu = C1 J;,k biY ( 0.5- C2 ) + :E (is
i=I
1
- 1;, J
1
A
81 ...... (II.5.6c)
and l:P . =Total axial compressive resistance offered by steel at different levels in the section
i=/ US/ '
: ,-~.~
tllj.Jf n
,.
.. ·.~
~~.!~:!: + p us2 + · · · + p usn ~1 (is;- fc;) ...... (Eq.1 1.5.4c)
M p. = pus/ = Asi
or_::_~ c (0.5 -c)+ :E -f.)~
n
.,- (f. x,
I·/t- )·.~~">·
r.
1.ck b:DJ I 2 i=/ Sl Cl }00 x-
D ...... (II.5.6d) The stresses f.n.and f.a.in steel and concrete respectively. at the i th row of reinforcement are
!.
;7j:•
1.1./~
IOOA,1 obtained corresponding to strain E; at that level from the respective stress- strain diagram ofthe
' ··~
where, P1
,;i:t;-; jkbD , C1 = 0.446 ( I - C/ 6 ) , material. The strain E; is obtained from Ecu =0.0035 at the highly compressed edge given by relation
2
iJt)
,;;: c2 --
c
( 0.5 - C3 1 7)
( I - C3 I 6) '
c3 - s- ~ 4
- 7 7 ku- 3
y. E; = 0.0035 X/Xu ...... (ll.5.7b)

:ill~
,t,. . ./
· where, x; = distance of bars in the i throw from the neutral axis with positive.value for the
.li.,. Eq. 11.5.5b and Eq. 11.5.6d are useful for drawing P-M interaction charts. distance above the neu~al axis and- negative value for the distance below the
•jt~ u u neutral axis.
!-..___,I
11.5.5.2 Neutral Axis Lying Within the Se~tion Thus, finally, · n
!1
The diagrams
in Fig. showing
11.5.6. variation of stresses and strains across the section for this case are
shown pu = 0.36J;,k b • Xu+ L (is;- J;,; ) Asi
It may be noted that in this case, the reference strain is E = E = 0.0035 /•I
n
c.max .. cu
b X ( kU X D) + L (f..- f. ) ASl.

·r •·1L, •·-TTr
'·-""

1-: ~r l
·or pU = 0.36 fk X ... (ll.S.8a)

n -1 C Sl . C/
j...0034j

-:=J1-____f
/=I
I··
·~
'
0.446fck P n A. · n p.
or - " - = 0 36 k + L (1• -1 )
1ckbD · u si ci 1ck bD =CI + L
81
(1•si-1ci ) ~
1001 ...(ll.S.8b)
Pusl 0.416xu 1•1 i=l · ck
el.
0
-~j
x1012
"1 )(D/2

1
puc Asi
where,C1 = 0.36ku, P; =~x 100

• II ~
.
• -Lx2 Similarly, considering the equilibrium of moments, following rellttion is obtained by equating
I
--
j.- ~pus4
the external moment about the centroidal axis with the moments of internal forces about the same
axis. n
·I
(a)Section pus2 M=M+'IM.
u uc U.S/ . ~ ..... (Eq.JJ.5.6)
(.b) Strain Diagram ( c ) Stress Diagram I•I

'--o::s'/ Fig. 11~ Stress • S~n Diagram f~r Neutral Axis Lying Within tbe sfttion ( x, < b ) where, Mu = Pu;e = ~xtemal moM,ent of load Pu (having eccentricity e ~m the centroidal axial)
· . about the centro)dal ~s.
 --
l'rl' F' ·"""
:.;
\.; ·606 Column Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 607
Chapter 11
--~ Sect. .11.6
'
.'~ ,.-rom Fig. 11. 5. 7 the equilibrium condition of forces can be written as :
n ·,:;J

LMUS/.= algebraic sum of moments of resistance of steel at different levels

i=J -
n n ...... (11.5.10)
n
p11 = puc + L pusi = 0.3 6 fckbD + L (,fsi- fe) Asi
i=/ i=l

= ~~Pusixi = L (~i - f'ci) Asi xi Similarly, the equilibrium condition ofthe moments is obtained by equating the external moment
...... (Eq.11.5~6h) with the moment ofintemalforces taken about the centroidal axis (i.e. about D I 2) ofthe column,
Thus,
n n n
thus: n
= pllC ( D I 2- 0.416 D) + L p~- X.I
MU = MU + L MUS/. = p UC ( 0.5D- 0.4 I 6 XU ) +· L pUS/. X.I M=Pe= MllC +'LM. i=l
U ll . USI
M n N j:::J
or n ...... ( 11.5.11)
M = P D(0.5-0.416k)+L(f.-f.)A.x.
or , M = 0.36 fck h!J_ ( D I 2 - 0.416 D) + ~/ fsi- fci ) Asi
X X.
I
U UC U i=l Sl C/ Sl I
11
or. 2
n Note :-In all these equ~tions once Ei is calculated using Eq. 11.5.2d or Eq.JJ.5. 7b as case may be, the
M = 0.36k fkhD (0.5- 0.416k) + L (f..-- f.) A. X.
U U C U I=/ Sl C/ S/ l ... (I I.S.9a) value offsi and fci are obtained as under.
Mu (
n p.
f bD 2
- c1 (0 ·5 - c2 )+ L =
(f
si
-f )
ci
___!__
lOOf
X
X.
~
{i) Computation of. f.Sl
ck 11 ck /
D ...... (l l.S.9b) (a) For Fe 250
For E; > 0.87 !yl Es ( i.e. 0.87 x 250 I ( 2 x 10~) i.e. 0.0010875 ) ,
\):.,

100 A. 2 (11.5.12a)
f. = 0.87 f = 0.87 x 250 = 217.5 Nlmm ~·~
where, pi = bD Sl ' c, = 0.36ku ' c2 ;:: 0.416 ku ...... (ll.5.9c) ·.J, Sl y (11.5.12b)
~ .For Ei < 0.87 fy I E5 i.e. 0.00101875 , fsi = Ei Es ·:-.

Eq; 11.5.5b, Eq. 11.5.6d, Eq. 11.5.8b and Eq. 11.5.9b are used for preparation of
'i

0.8fy~
non- dimension charts for columns subjected to axial compression and bending. In these equa- ., (b) For Fe 415 or Fe500
tions the term f m. representing the deduction for concrete replaced by steel can. be neglected. For Ei > IEs (i.e.> 0.8 x 0.87 f/Es) ...... (11.5.12c)
. -
However, a constant value corresponding to concrete grade M 20 giving value of 8.92 N/mm 2 is f. = the value obtained from respective stress - strain curve of steel
normally used, so that the error is negligibly small over normally used concrete mixes. -~
or from Table 4.10.1.
'

11.5.5.3 Neutral Axis Lying Along the E!)ge ( X ~D)

The bifurcating case- between the two cases namely11x > D and x < D is x = D
·For Ei <0;8fyd/Es( i.e. <0.8 x0.87 f/ E) ,fs; = Ei Es ...... (11.5.12d) .~.
u u u

J;l

j!i
I·
:i!
ilij

11:

J'.!1l
~!j
·
r r/
rt-·,
. j ~~-
•
.•
"*--
3.x1
r b ---,

t
_, 0.0035 r-
.rr
t!l lT
_,

D/2
r--
0.446fck

uc
(ii) fc; ::It obtained corresponging toE; as under.
For. E.I ~·o.oo2 . ·,

.
Fot E. < 0.002 ,

ForE.I <·Oi.e:negativef.~ =0

·1u ANALYSIS OF ECCENTRICALLY LOADED SHORT COLUMN

f.=
Cl

~
0.446fk
C .
f _is obtained from Eq. JJ.5.2d. or Table 11.5.2
-' ,<f\'\

1-1 Xu=D

ii 4
1I x··
x2 11.6.1 Analysis . by Using Equations.
el . It can be observed from ~e above derivation thatthe value's of P11 and M11 de~nd on x11 or kil
4Dn
i/1 I
which are unknown in the beginning therefore, the analysis p,roc~~ure is always, therefore, of trial

I
Pus4
!! + •. PUS2
N- ~----A .and error. Now since, the equations for neutral axis lying outside the section ( x > D or k > 1 )
Section Strain Diagram . StreSs Diagram .are different from those of neutral axis lying inside the section ( xU < D or kII < ; ), one do:s not
Fig. u.s.t Stress~ strain Diagram for N.A. LYin! on the F.d.... , ... ~ n I
 ,~,."
·:~ ·;.'
.:] :
'';:.; Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 609
608 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.6
i;f,t'
Effective cover= d' = 40 + 6 + 16/2 =54 mm \
knoW in the beginning from which equations one should start with. For this, the following ~D: Let row- 1 of bars be near the highly compres~ed edge and row _2
compressed edge. , ofbars be near the least
procedure may prove to be useful. ·
( 1 ) Assume xu:= D (i.e. ku = IJ or N.A.lying, on the edge opposite to the load. x = 23072-54 = 61 mm:
·:t~ All = 2 X 201 = 402mm', 1
Obtain Pul and Mul using Eq. l.l.5.10 ~d Eq. fl.5.11 = 402mnf, x = 61 mm.
A,2 = 2 X 201 2
( 2 ) Compare Pui with given Pu when.Pu is given.
u , actualxu < D. If given Pu. > PI.'
If given Pu <PI u actualx
. u >D.
-tM~- 380
..
~;

,)!
( 3 ) Carry out the second trial With revised value of xujudging the difference between given_ T~
Pu and Pui • Obtain now Pu2 using appropriate equations.
( 4) Compare the values Pu2 of the second trial with the corresponding given value.Ifthe given 230 'I
I'
value tallies with the calculated v;due, it indicates that this trial gives correct position ofN. A.. and
the values of PU and MU corresponding
·
to this value of xU gives the correct·
PU.- MU combination.
Having known the correct combination, required Mu corresponding to given P u or required P11
' ..

•
lL I
( I ) cross section
~ (ii) Strain diagram (iii) Stress diagram
t
\
I

corresponding to given Mu is obtained. i

Fig. 11.6.1 (Ex.U.6.1)

. : Sinc;e Pu is a function of e/h and not merely the eccentricity 'e' therefore, .in the analysis
Comments
problems the_ value of e/D or elb whichever is maximum governs the value of Pu.For details see The position of neutral axis corresponding to emin= 20 mm will now be obtained by trial and
Ex. J/.6.1 (b) error.
Ex. Jl.6.1 A short concrete column 230 m711.x -380 mm in section of grade M20is Trial-1:
.;, D = 230 mm, i.e. ku = 1 (See Fig. 11.6.1)
reinforced with 4 bars ..of 16 mm diameter of grade Fe 415 at four cornercCalculate the Assume x.u
maximum allowable ultimate axial load on the column if, = p UC + ~ p
~USI
. andM = M + l: M ·
pu U· U US!

(a) unsupported length L is not given; ( b ) unsupported length L is 6. 16 m. p

~
= 0361 b.X : 0.36 X 20 X 380 X 230 /J000 =: 629 ,28 kN
~ u '.
Assume mild exposure condition . = p ( O.SD- 0.416 X ) = 629.2 8 ( 0·5 X 23 0- 0.416 X 230) /1000 = 12.157·
M uc uc. u . . .
Remarks : Since both the dimensions of the column section are less than 400 mm, the minimum eccentricity kN.m ' l:P usi = L (fsr fci) Asi .' fs; ts o~tamed corresponding to strain Ei
of 20 mm happens to be greater than 0. 05 D, and the a!lowable ultimate axial load will have to be obtained· Strains&. at different levels of rows of bars will be obtam~d fromthe s_l:rain diagram with
from the theory. of eccentrically loaded columns corresponding to the minimum eccentricity.
& ' = o.oo3s at highly compressed edge as the reference strain. ·
(a} Given:fck= 20N/mnr, iy=415W!mmi A8 =4-#16, column'=230mmx330mm. m:l .= 0.0035 (xu-d')lxu = 0.0035(230-54)/230 == 0.00268
Required : Pu & = 0.0035 (xu- D + d') I xu = 0·0035 ( 230 -230 + 54) /230 = 0.00082
2
Solution: For Fe 415,/. is obtained corresponding to&;= 0·00268 from Table 2.6.1 by linear interpolation
81
(a} Since the unsupported length of the column is not_gjv.en emin = 20 mm. . ·. 1. =349.74N/mnr from Table 2 ·6·1 by linear interpolation for .E.= 0.00268
f 1 = 0.00082 x 2 x lQ5 = 164 Nlmrrr as E2 < 0.00] 44 .
I -·2 I
Also, because there is no external beqding moment acting on the column, bucking may take
place about the minor axis y-y which is perpendicular to. the shorter dimensiQn. Th~inimum I2 . E
f. is ·obtained from Table 11.5.2 or usmg q. ll.5.2d.
eccentricity shall be from y- axis. The dimension parai!el to the axis ofbending.is designated as b
and is equal to 3_80 mni .and the dimension perpendicular to axis ofbending is termed as D which is er = 0•446 f ck =0.446• x . 20 = 8.92 Nlmtn 2 for E,·. > 0·002, .and.
f c1
equalto 231Hnm in this case. . fci := 446 &; ( I -: 250 Ei) fck for Ei < 0.002
·b = 380 mm, D = 230 mm, . f . ;.. 446 x 0.00082 (l -250 x 0.00082) x 20 ==·5.8 Nlmmz
The~minimum nominal cover for mild exposure as. per Table 2.2.3 Note-3 is 40 inm. · •• c2:
As~uming dl_amete~ of link equal to 6 inm. . .
 Analysis of ECcentricf;al_ly Loaded Short Colinttn 611 ./--'

Sect. 11.6
..,_, .. '61'0 Column Chapter 11

~
I Trial- 1:
\ n Assume xu = D = 380 mm
i.e. ku = 1 ,~n~
i ~pusi = pi!Sl + Pus2 = As1 ( fsz -fez)+ As2 (,fs2-fc2) _ pUC 230 X 380/1000"' 629.28 kN.m
= 0.36 X 20 X
I .
'= 1 = {402(349.74-8.92) + 402(164-5.8)}/lOOO= 1no + 63.59 =200.S9.W Muc = 629.28 (0.5 x 380 -0.416x380)11000 = i0.09kN.m
\;\1 i n g = 0.0035 (xu - d') I xu ,; 0,.003?(380 ~ 54)/ 380' ==- 0.00303 > 0;002
H Ii=1M1/Sl. = MliS1 + Mus2 = Pus rx1 + Pus1 x2 = [137 x 61+ 63.59 (-61)] /1000 = 4.48 kN.m e1 = 0.0035 (xu - D + d') I xu = 0.0035 (380 -380 +54} /380 = 0.000497
! 2 = 354.16 Nlmnr from Table 2,6.4 by linear interpolation for e1 = 0.00303,
,,!! pU = pUC + LPUSI'= 629.28 + 200.59 = 829.87 kN -
j 11 = 0.000497 x 2 x 105 = 99.4N/mnr as &2 < 0.00144
Mu = Muc
+ L Musi :. Mul = 12.157 + 4.48 = 16.637 kN.m
82
fcl = 8.92 N/mnr and fc = 3.90 N/mm2 from Table 11.5.2 for the above values
:i\1 :. e = MulPu = 16.637 x 1000/829.81 20.04mm:: 20mm =
il~:''.cl ', t•' ' · 2 of s 1 and e2.
'"I
,, . dj''' .Since· this -eccentricity works out to be equal to 20 mm, axial load required is 829.87 W
:\t 1\lt_:.i.
., ...
LPIISi = (402(354.16-8.92):+-402(99.4-3.90)111000= 138.78+38.39 = 177.17 leN
I!' v:! Reduction Factor Approach : "":" 136 )]/1000 = 18.87 -5.22

)'}:
1 LMilsi = 138.78 X 136 + 38.39 X ( = 13.65 kN

~ ~\,~ H_! P-u = A.{0.4jkA

· c Asc }
c g +(0.67/.y -0.4/k) p~ ·<= puc + L pIISi :;: 629.28 + 177.17 := 806.45 kN

! . 11..:'
l 'll~·l
I'~.
:H~·
l'ir
~~)': p
u
0.90 forD = 230 mm
:::: 0;9 { 0.4 X 20 X 230 X 380 + ( 0.67 X 415 • 0.4 X 20) X 4 X 201 } /1000
-
·
M
e
U
= M + IM . = 20.09 + 13.65 = 33.74 kN.m
UC USI -
= M I P = 33.74 x 1000/806.45 = 41.84 mm
u u happens to be appreciably greater than the actuai'value of 25 .mm, .P·u
Since this eccentricity
Pu = 824.69 kN which is slightly less than the theoretical value calculated above
IW:
i~,/''.!
,·;·l must increase i.e the depth of neutral axis will be required to be quite than D for the ~eater
~~~~:: This load can also, therefore, be taken without detailed ·calculations. Table 6.11 of the
second triai so as to increase
-- the -----of p
- - value - u-and. _reduce
. 'e.'.
-;:!'I~i'i·_:,~: ~ Handbook ( 97 /6) which directly gives Pu =839/cN nearly equa! to th!l()reticalload calculated above.
:: il
·_~- ! ;:: Trial- 2: lJ5 X 380 = 437 mm.-
"~'
II
t
',
'
Ex. JJ.6.1b
xu= l.l5D
;, X "'
u
II~-
.,~,. Given :f.ck= 20 Nlmm2, f.y = 415 Nlmm2, As = 4 #. 16 mm, Column i30 mm 380 mm, L = 6; 16m Assume ku = 1.15
hat: -
i:n~·l .Required : Pu
1,,,
li\ 'Solution : In this case, unsupported length being given, emin will be required to be determined. =
Pus1 137.92.kN
d! \I, ·For bending aboutx- axis,
ii /\
II eminx = L/500 + D/30 = 6160./500 + 380/30 = 25mm Puc=6!17\(N ', ~/

-I· ,for bending about y- axis,

il ()
H e••mmy
. = L/5000+ b /30 = 6160/SOo-+ 230/30 =20mm
"' ~:;,
l/;.
if 383'
.\1:
lt
i
Now PJor¢ min= 20 mmfor bending about y - axis has already been calculated in Part- (a)
to
above. However, itwiU be necessary obtain Pu for an eccentricity of 25 mm aboutx~ axis as it
L I ... -
1$
..i.._.
54·
274J~
r·; ·_ ,-•· -r_-
t:1
u··. -. ...J-Pu~2c.61kN
-
)( ,.

I
(~
T
i
. II·
; .
happens-to be greater than 20 mm · - . 11 • I /

I ·For bending:about x - axis, b = 230 mm and D = 3.80 mm.

A11, A82 t:emain unchanged because bars are only 4 in number.at 4 comers.
x 1 =(380/2)-54.= 136mm, x2 = -136mm,/
(:I l Cross S&.ctlon ·
N _l--A- .i. ·•
{ll}Straln o1agt8.m
·' "
( lH ) Stress_ Olagl'alll

Fig, 1:-U~ (Ex. tL6.1)

P-U =P. UC +~P. and M=M +"i'..M.
1 liSI U UC USI .
!
l'
l]'l, 612 Column Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 613
;nrn l Sect. 11.6
:iliJ!
. ,:,,, . C,ter ~~ i
,·i
Now since the neutral axis lies outside the sectio~; I ·i
minor· axis, still the allowable load'is governed by bending about minor y- axis, because P, is a function
'·:~
Puc = C1,fckbD , C1 = Q.393 from Table ll.S.i for k = 1.15. of e/D and not merely of 'e '. In this case, _
,j'
~ . I b = 20 /230 = 0.087
emmy >e . ID
11
f'tll p = 0.393 X 20 X 230 X 380 /}000 = 687 /eN. while eminx I D = 25/380 , = 0.066 - mmx
}it! ~ ' . ·-·
Muc = Puc (0.5D-C
. D) Therefore, computation_ of Pu for Mu should be done only for the case in which the ratio of
2 ...... (Eq. 11.5.6a)
Pi I C2 = 0.452 from Table 11.5.1 for ku = 1.15 eccentricity to appropriate lkpth ( e! h) is maximum.
· Muc = 687 x ( 0.5 x_ 380 -0.452 x 380) /1000 = 12.53 Ex. 11.6.2 Determine the maximum allowable ultimate axial load on a short R.C.column

~ji1>[,;· l~il.
lcN.m.
For neumil axis outside the section by Eq. 11.5.4d 380 mm x 450 mm in section and reinforced with 4 bars of 16 mm diameter at jour corners
: i"'' and 2 bars of 16 mm diameter at middle of longer sides. Unsupported lengths about x - axis
&1 = 0.002 (xu- d')/(xu -3D/7)= 0.002( 437..,.54 )I( 437-c:Jx l80n)=0.00279
= -0.002 (xu -D + d)!1 (xu - 3D 11 ) and y- axis are equal to 6 m and 3.2m respectively. Grade of steel is Fe 250
.,.,,a/j!fP.·li : &2

• IH'~·
,:,1, ··~:,, = 0.002 (437-380+54)/(437 -3X380/7) = 0.0008} Assume moderate environment.
'll'!(l~~~~~
ld£1 l·-~-~ ''
,,

-_"r.J'"''i
.y ~
fs 1 = 352 Nlmrtf from Table 2.6.1 by linear interpolation for E =0.00279,
1 Givrh : Fo~ moder~te environment minimum grade of concrete is M25 and nomil;1al cover for
0.00081 x 2 x JOS = 162 Nlmrtf as ~ < 0.00144.
-~-~~~:·:Jr.::
''I"';
. :i1d
·fs2 = 2 ...~
y
.E;
·• column equal to 40 mm. (See Table 2.2.3)
fcl= 8.92 Nlmrtf, and ,fc2= 5.16 N/mrtf from Table 11.5.2 1
i· 2 A + +
4 - 16 + 2 16,
=
b]fl·ijil!
p:lW(.... J;
J k -• ;:: 25 N/mm 1 , f.y 250 Nlmm
= , s
"£p . ={402 (352'-8.92)+ 402 (162 -5.76)}/1000 = 137.92 + 62.81 = 200.73 N.
US/ . c '
L .. 6.0 and L .. 3.2 m.
,. 'ii~;li b. .. 380mm , D .. 450mm X y
1
J"'I1 "£ MUS/: = 137.92 x 136 + 62.81 ( -136). } /1000 = 10.2/cN.m .
I ; 1:1/
11_'.l!n Reqnired ,j : Pu

~~l il~~i:~li
PU = P + 'LP . = 687 + 200.73 = 887.73 leN.
UC US/
Solniion : ·
Mu = Muc + L Musi = 12.53 + 10.2 = 22.73 lcN.m
Unsupported Lengths Lx .. 6.6 m and LY .. 3.2·m.
:. e = M/P~ = 22.73 x 1000/887.73 = 25.6 mm.
~ml,i: --~
e . ,;; L I 500 + D I 30 = 6000 I 500 + 450 I 30 .. 27 mm
MIIIX X .
eminy .. L/ sop + b 13'0 .. 3200 I 500 + 380 I 30 .. 19.07 mm < 20 mm
J..
l-'

':i_ Since the value of eccentricity obtained ~bove is nearly equal to the required value of e.= 25 mm,
. . eininy .. 20 mm
th¢ actual depth ofneutral axis corresponding toe= 25;tnm, may be obtained by linear interpolation

~
·!
e . I D = 27 I 450 .. 0.06 and e . .-1 b .. 20 I 380 .. 0.0526
i without resorting to the third trial. m1nx . y.mm
As e . I D > e . I b, bending about x - axis governs the load. (See comments given above)
xu (inmm) Pu (inkN) e.{in mm) MIIIX m1ny
J/· .
Weh~vefor , 380 806.45 41.84 For bending about x- axis, b .. 380 mm, D .. 450 mm.,
437 887.73 25.6 d' .. 40 + 6 + 16 I 2 = 54 mm
41.84 - 25.00 The number of rows of bars are also three
For e = 25 "!m , Pu = 806.45 + · 41.84 ~ . (887.73 - 806.45) = 890.73 leN
25 6 Let row- 1 be the row nearer to highly compressed face,

'I'b_~;f~re~;,;= 25 mm , P = 890.73 leN. and for

11 eminy = 20 mm, P = 829.87 kN. x = 450 I 2 "" 54 = 171 mm
1
· Therefore, allowable ultimate axialloadP =829.87/cN. 11 row- 2 be the row at mid • depth nearer to the least compressed face,
11
:.x3 =0
Ctniil.uts : It mdy (Je noted from this example. that though minimum ~ccentricityof 25 mmjor row-3be therow, :.~2 =171mm
. .. ... #bout.major
-h«nding "' axis hizppens
. . to be greater than minintwn .eccentricity of 20 nrm for bending abilut 2
A = A .= A = 2 x 201 = 402 mm •
sl . s2 s3 , ·
 ~

~
Sect. 11.6 Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short co1umn 615
;1 614 Column Chapter 11
!i
·~
x > D and xU < D is xU = D . The ftrst
=0.446x 25 =11.15 NI mnr as P 0.002
Since bifurcating case between trial will be taken for xII =D. f.cl . I
.

Trial- 1 : xu =D =450 mm
"-._ .,-
fd ={446 x 0.00175 (1-250 x 0.00175)] x 25 =10.97 N !mml/ (Eq. 11.5.2d)
.f·
c2
=[446 x 0.00042 (l-2SO. x 0.00042)] x 25 = 4.19 NI mJ
I
-!.- 300 ~ ~--"·""'-! ~--.-..--~ 3 .
/

T , /- ~ ---- r-~ -"t--Pus1 L Pus·

i=t
= Asl (fsl - fc1 ) + As2 (fs2- fc2) +As3 (fs3- f{3)

+ "" \ •~ T
I /'
As1 II)

-i-Puc
L pliSi = pusl + p us2 + pus3 .
I = (402(217.5-11.15)+402(84-4.19)+402(217.5-10.97)]/1000= 82.95+32.08+83 .r··

- • - As3 ---e- ~ -. = 198.05 kN .· -02 -~·

~ ~
"i~
I/' t:~

l /'~'"--- . - ll
2;16
Ht:l 1n 10
L Musi · = Mus/ + Mus2 + Mus3
\'1ld
he:. =Pusl xx 1+Pus xx +Pus3 x0=(82.95x171+32.08x(-171)+830 2xo] llooo
.o.H:~! 2 . .
~~;:::
_1_ 2

l Jf~
~ ~ = 8.7 kN.m
:~l:·::
\:i~::·
T t ( iii ) Stress Diagram
P = P t'EP . =
U
1539 + 198.05
UC/ US/
= 1737.05 kN

i ,o•l
( i ) Cross Section · ( ii ) Strain Diagram M = M, +'LM . = ., 58.17 + 8.7 = 66.87 kNm
··~.:It U US/ UC '
l1~:1t
+'it
Fig. 11.6.3 ( I<;x. 11.6.2) e =MIP
./ u u
= 66.87xlOOO!l737.05=38.5mm :;
1,/!:
•il SinceU\i~
,- value of 'e' is far greater thane mm. = 27 .mm. requiredx uwill be increased ctOrsecond . ;---.1\
- .~(
· ~11 Rrom Eq: 11.5-7a and·Eq. 11.5-7b
•it1 = 1.1 I' I
Trfi:Jl - 2 x = 1.1 D = l.l x 450 "" 495 mm k tnal /-tl
·~·it!
,, 3 3
/ u u
~ii / ./ Since N.A.lies outside the section ,
j. di P=P+LP.
·u uc us1 Mu = Muc +L Pusi. X; (Eq. 11.5.4 and Eq. 11.5.6)
~I:
~1;
i=J i=J .'
j_ 1-- = b 380 ~ r- 0.0035--\
r-o.446fck..j

T\ \ ., I \\ E~
,T,! 1

' p uc = 0.36 fie b D 0.36 X 25 X 380 X 450 I 1000 = ·1539 kN

+
X X
*I: c I
tl; \' Muc = Puc(D/2-0.416xx) i 539x (450/2 -"0.416 x 450) /1000 = 58.17 kN. m
i
. ., u
2. +16 1 0.002
3
Puc ~~~

·-- -· ~ i ~
3 3
\! pusi = p IJSJ + p us2 + p us3 =r <is;-fc;)As;
As3 0 &3- .
\i=l i=l ' ~
·1 f.- 2·+16 ~ .
- II
f . is obtained corresponding to strain e.I ~ .r

-r-l' ,_, . JL!_ i l .,

,SI
. &2 ' .
for Fe 250 , f.= e .I .£ but :} 0.87 f.y ( = 0.87 x 250 =2115N I mm2)
· S/ S j_ As2 . !,
\
)Strains at different levels ofrows of bars will be obtained from strain distribution diagram .
I."'/
e1 = 0.0035 (xu- d') I xu = 0.0035 (450- 54) /450 = 0.0030& ....
Strain Diagram Sl!ess Oiagmm
e3 = 0.003}( x,r Df_l') !xu = 0.0035 (450 /2)/450 = 0.00175 sediOn

.e2 ;: 0.0035 ( x - D + d' ) I xu/= 0:.-0035 (450....; 450 +54) /450 = 0.00042 ~ tt.6.4 ( EL U.U)
' 11 .

The stress in steel is obtained corr~spO'nding to the strain using Eq: 11.5.12
fs 1 = 0.00308 x 2 x 19?/.· = 616N/m,il:tz11.5N!m,Jl :. J;1= 211.5N/m,il P~ =· P~ + LP~. andM
.· II
=M~ +'LM~.
P =C/a bD + LAn Ui;-fc;) (Eq, lJ.S..~ro\
fsr = 0.00175 x .2·x 105 = 350N/m,!l:t 211.5N/m,il :. fs 3 = 211.5N/m,il 11
f;2 = O.OOJ>42 x 2 x 105 = 84 N / m,Jl /
 'I
) ~~~Column

)~ Chapter II Sect. 11.6 Analysis of Eccentrically Loiidetl Short Coilltnn •

From Table 11.5.Jfor k11 == 1.1 , C == 0.384 and C ;, 0.443 617
tllf 1
p uc == 0.384 X 25 X 380 X 45011000== 1641.6kN 2 .. fore= 27 ,
\1lj ( 38.5-27.0) .
. 'i
;I!/
and Muc == Puc (O.SD- C2 D) == 1641.6 ( 45012- 0.443 x 450) 11000 == 42.1 kN.m P = 1737.05 + X {1857.27 -1737.05) = l845,2kN
- 3' .u ( 38.5-25.7)
Ii=/ P. 'Ex. JJ.6.J : A RCC column 250 mm x 450 mm is to be provided in severe envir0111Pie
WI
\,~{.~·>~
US/ 1
== PUS + PUS2 + PUS3 is obtained corresponding to strain&.I (Eq. 11.5.4c)· exposure c6nditions. It is reinforced equally on· two short sides by 4 bars of 20 mtn dianr'IIQ/
&I
r.M
•IU
== 0.002(xu -d')l(xu -3DI7)==0.002(495-54)1(495-3x45017)
==0.0029 on each side. The grade of concrete is M30 and that of steel is Fe 500. The cover to eter
centre of steel is 60 mm. Calculate the ultimat,e load and ultimate moment the colll.tnn the
2
0.002 (xII-D + d') l(xII -3D I 7) == 0.002 (495- 450 +54) I (495- 3 x 45017) resist if it is just on the verge of cracking ( kII = 1) · ca,
lff ·.
,·:· &
==== 0.00065
llfldtl
1 .
l'tll'it"~
UI
r l•ll
f'$
&
3
0.002(xu -DI2)1(xu -3DI7)==0.002(495-225)1(495-3x450!7)
==== 0.00178
Comments : The minimum grade of concrete required for severe environmental exposure condition i
and nominal 'cover of 45 mm. (see Table 2.2.3), Thus . with 20 mm diameter bar and 5 mm linlc.
cover = 45 + 5 + 2012 = 60 mm. which is correctly given in data.
At~o
ec11Ve
e; \\>

)illjlr-! !;,
· '.d,v·,H == 0.0029 x 2x JOS== 580Nimm 2 'f217.5Nimm 2 :. J; ==2175Nimm
1;2 == 0.00065 x 2x 105 == 130Nimm2 2 . Given: ~k= 30 N I mm2 , fy = 500 Nlm~, b = 250 mm , D = 450 mm , d' :::. 60 , ,

'~
!l ,.·~~
1 ·,·
~.~J~:;¥
.,/I 1;3 2 Asl = As2 = 4- # 20 = 1256 mm 2 ' ku = I r
== 0.00178x 2x J05==356Nimm 'f2175Nimm 2 :. J; ==217.5Nimm
.lmri'.'~:~
·l':lj
~I 3 2
.Required : Pu and Mu
t:!H! == 0.446 x 25 == 11.15 N I mml as E> 0.002 (Eq. 11.5.2dj
•, .'tri ~2 Solution : Since the column is jus,t on the verge of cracking means neutral axis lies along the ed
== [ 446 x 0.00065 ( I -250 x 0.00065) Jx 25 == 6.07 N I mm 2 (Eq. 11.5.2d)
I~,~~'"'•
.
l~idiii• 1 ~3
== f 446 X 0.00178 ( 1 - 250 X 0.00178)] X 25 == 11.0 N I mm2 (£q. ll.5.2d)
with the result the whole sectiollis under compression with zero stress atthe edge i.ei k, = ge
xu = kuD= lx 450 = 450 mm, x1 =225-60 = 165 mm, ~ =.-(225- 60)==-1 65 "'"'
1
1:.
I;!
3 ;!'

l
gl5ii 2
lll~ll LPusi
p. +L.P' ·US/.. = 0.36 fkbD +· L(f:S/. .::.f.) A.
•i'
II.
i=J
"" Pus/ + Pus2 + Pus3 ==Asl (fsl -!·,cl ) +As2 (js2 - j c2 ) +As3 (js3 - jc3 ) fu ( Eq. li.S.Jo J
1
11
~~: UC
- i=l ..
C C/ S/
'I.
r~~~Y
L"it~ • 402 ( 217.5-11.15) +402 ( 130- 6.07) +402 ( 217.5 -11.0)] /1000
LPusi == 82.95 + 49.82 + 83.0 =: 215.77kN
>/ I.,

l,rv·i NowP uc = 0.36 x 30 x 250 x 450 I 1000 = 1215 kN. •/

il
t~
p
··;.
u ""pUC +l,p. US/ ==1641.6+215.77 ==1857.37kN
~ Pusi
~
= Pus/ + Pus2 = (fsl -j
·. cJ ) As/ + (js2 -fc2 )
As2 ::::
j. and/.. corresponding to strain E. at different levels of rows will be obtained from strain dt'a
Sl C/ I . graltl
3 .
with &~ax = 0.0035 at highly compressed edg~
LM. ""LP
US/
I= I US/ I
.x.::pUS 1
xx1 +PUS2 xx"2+PUS3 xx3==[82.9hl71+49.82x(-171)+0]11000
"" 5.67 kN.m.
= 0.0035 (xu- d') I xu . = 0.0035 ( 450 - 60) M50
&I = 0.00303
&2 = 0.0035 (xu- D +d)! xu= 0.0035 (450 -450 + 60)/450 "" 0.00047
MU ""MUC + LM'. US/ = 42.1 + 5.67"" 47.77 kN.m.
For values of&.>
I
0.00174 ' f.S/ = &.I X ES '
~r_/ e ;,. Mu IPu ""47.7ix 100011857.37 ""25.72mm For. &.I = 0.00303 from Table 4.10.1
Jr
h>~;
~ very· nearly equal., 27 -
423.9-413 . .
ji
Theby
value of e obtained Thenifore the value of Pu will l>io !.] = 413 + . X (0.00303 - 0.00277 ) = 421.1 N I tn~'
Iii obtained interpolation :. s (0.00312- 0.00277) ,-
'lij
I'·
xu p
u e
fs2 = &
2 X E8 =0.00047 X 2 X 105 = 94 Nlinml
li j
450 1737.05 For &i > 0.002,fc; = 0.446fck.
38.5
1-!;jl·.
,,<I:,:) 495
:. f..Cl = 0.446 x 30= 13.38Nim~
.
1857.37 25.7
'
For &i < 0.00~ , ~~ = 446_ &1 (1- 250 E1) fck (Eq.JJ.S.2d)
= 446 x 0.00047 { I -'25o x 0.00047) x 30 = 5.55/N 1m~
,· __/

: . . fc 2
\~)
 618··column.
•
1
1l
~ '· .. ~~
:ji~ 2 Chapter U Sect. JJ.6 Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 619
Vjl~
tpw~·=
': il
i11 Pusl + p ris2 = As/ (f'sl -fcJJ + As2 Ua -/ci) . f.z · = 0.000829x 2 x 105 = 165.8 N I mrri < 217.5 N I mrri
t<il
·I·''
!lil
:;
;!
i
t-1 * [1256(42l.I-13.38)+t256 (94-5.55)JitOOo= sQ.:t+ nu J.1 = 0.00181 x 2 x los = 362 N lmrrr 217.5 N lmrrt *
.•·! = 623.2 kN
£1•1
t\1< ( . PII =P UC + l,pIISI. = 1215 + 623.2 = 1838.2 kN
:. I~ = J,J=217.5Nimrrr andfs2== 165.8Nimrrr
: jjJ :
'l'l MII = MUC + LM. is ob~ from Eq. 11.5.2d ,
fc;
:.:1 liS/
Jd .'.M, =Puc (O.SD- 0.416 xu)+ (Pus x +Pus x )
fcl = 0.446 X 30 == 13.38 NI mrri

ll'[I ' = l2IS( 0.5

1 1 2 2
450- 0.416 X 450)11000+ (512.1 (225 -60)+ lll.I X ( -165 )]/1000
8 < 0.002 , :. fc == {446 x 0.000829 (I - 250 x 0.000829)} x 30
2 = 8.8 N 1mml
1r
rr1
X
= 45.93 + 66.16 = ll2.1 kN.m.
2
fs 3 == {446 x o.oot81 (1-250 x o.oot8I)} x 3o == 13.25 Nlmwr
Ji •'\ pll = 1838.2 kN and Mu = I 12.1 kN.m '£,Pusi == [628 (217.5- 13.38) + 628 (165.8- 8.8) + 628 (217.5 -13.25)1/1000 ,.,.,.,
!1_. , ~, Ji~
.f, ~"~
·:~-
= 128.2 + 98.6 + 128.27 == 355.07 kN
r~·
'''HI'~
. :)Jf$ ·.·~ 11.6..( :A RC.C column 300 mm x500 mm is reihforced with 6 Nos. of 20 mm diameter P
II
= P UC + D liS/. = II97 + 355.07 == 1552.07 kN
! IIi it:~
,,:fJ.r..\
bars of mild steel placed in three rows; parallel to the short side, with each row containing MII = MUC + LMUS/.
·II''•
~~~.;.,\D
.tWo bars. The end two rows tire provided with an effective cover of 60 mm and the third row Puc ( D I 2 - 0.458 D) + Pus1 ( D I 2 - 60 ) - Pus2 ( D I 2 - 60 ) + P~• x 0
I',;J~~· .at the mid - section. The concrete used is of grade M20. Calculate the ultimate load and its :;: [ ll97 (•250- 0.458 X 500) + 128.2 ( 250- 60)- 98.6 ( 250 ~ 60) 1I 1000
'.R:·/-ir
·:i •'' eccenJri'cityfrom the centre of the column for an uncracked section with neutral axis at 1.20 = 25.14+ 24.36-18.73 = 30.77 kN.m.
,:/l'-~'AI .·Jif!bin the highly compressed edge. The area of stress block is 0.399 fck D and its C. G.
I'
;·1.;!1 eccentricity~fload =e = M/Pu = 30.77 x 100011552.07 = 19.82mm
l 1 !1 ~i~l J.iiilng at 0.458 D from the highly compressed edge.
l:llj·~'
it'~' Ex. 11.6.5 A RC.C. ciJlumn 230 mm x 400 mm is equally reinforced on tWo short faces
...1'1~-~jl
Given:Jck=20N!mm ,fy = 250N!m~. b==300mm, D ==500mm,d1 = 60,xu=·t.20D,
"·· 2
,::1 ~·,··
·I with 2 bars of20 mm di4meter ofsteel Fe 500 on eachfac~. The concrete is of grade M30. The
i' ,:11
·x1 = 500-60. =440mm ,x2 ==-440mm,x ==o ,C =0.458 column·~ sulJjecte~ IQ an ~ialload with. certain ~c:entricity sue~ ih:J:.,the neutral: axis is at
'l:i~·f
1)1 \1 3 2 · 0.8 D. Fmd the ultimate ax1alload and the eccentriCity. The e.ffectwp cover to stee/1s 50 mm.
i,...:~ ~;
As/ = As2 = As3 = 2 - $ 20 = 2 x 1t x 202 I 4 == 628 mml
64qulred
. . : PII and e Given: fck = 30Nimrrr , J, = SOONimrrf , . ~-=:__l30 mm//fi=400mm_, d' = 5Q 19m,
xu= 0.8 D =0.8 x 400 = '320 mm , A~1 = A82 /:;:128 mrrt,
·, I
I '
I' Sol11tion : _This case corresponds to xu> D · ·. / ·
'fi 3
x == 40012-50
1
= I50mm '
x = .:.'(200-50)= -150mm··
. ' 2
"I·
if P =P-+l,P. Required : Pu and e ' / //
il' . II·. UC . i=J US/
'I· This case corresponds to xu < D. , See Fig/11.5.6
I' = Area of stress
P
c)·. ··uc . block x. b = 0.399 x 20 x 5{)0 · x 300 I I000 = 1197 kN. ~
jl Solution : ,P =.P. + D . Sin~'.i < D the neutral axis lies within the sectiori.
).·· ~:p =· Asl (f.·sl -f.cl ). + As2 (f.s2 -f.c2 ) + As3 (fs3 - f.c3 )
4J. iiSi.
. u
= 0.36fck'
.·uc
b.xII +/ S
us1
(,f.1.- jC1 )A8
// 11

. ,_% aru!f'c; are obtained corresponding to E; PU

p
,
= 0.36
1-. O)A S2
30X230 X 320 I 1000 = 794.88 kN.
(/. 2 -
I

~~E; at different levels ofrows of bars will be obtained using Eq.l1.5. 4d

X
.. uc ·1 // . ·
j f..n and J.~ are obtained froin strain ··e.1 ·
•' ~~ . -~ l~O D ~ 1.20 X 500 = 600 mm [. •
/ ---
El = 0.0035 X (320-50)1320 = 0.00295 ...... (Eq.11.5.12)
•;. ·=·o:~(600-60)1(600-3x500I7) = 0.0028 I'
i E{ ... = 0.0035 X (x -D + d')IX = 0.0035 (320-400+ 50)1320 = -0.000328
. i~.i O;QOz(~;,-D+tl)l (xu-3DI7)
;,·. 1
f
11 11
= 413 + (423.9-413).x 0.0001810.00035 = 418.6 N/m~ (fable4.10~1)
., . ,·~; 0.002 ( 600- 500+ 60) I (600- 3 X 500 I 7) = 0.000829
JJ
I 31
Ec3'.· .= o.~2.(x Since t < ·( 0.8-x 0~87 fyl Es) .
' .. II.-DI2)1(x -3DI7) 2
~-.
lOS = ( -) 65~6 HI-
. II ( .... --,.
,;;,;};:•' (te)02 ( 600-250 )I ( 600-3 X 500 I 7) = 0.00181 f 12 . = ( -) 0.000328 X X

J../.}'~-0:0028 x .2 x lOS. . ·= 560N!m~

:t (=217.5Niinml) minus sign indicates that the ~ars irl tension. are
-£ = n AAI: ·v 'ln :... .. t'l .;o u/.;..:.J. · .. ·
 620 Column
Chapter ·JJ Sect. ll.6 Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column ..621
D IISi= [628 ( 418.6-13.38 )-628 X 65.61 I 1000= 254.47 ~41.20 = 2i3.211cN.
-Jo.ooasl- 'r
l-2so-l
j"t:/.1
+j0.446fck
pU = pIIC + L p1/Sl. = 794.88 + 213.2-7 = 1008.1HN.

1~ t
I

MU = MIIC+ 'L M1/SI. = PIIC ( D I 2 - 0.416 xu.) + PliS x + PliS· x T ~~1 ~~

~Pus1

f. ···~ f~
. . . ·.
1 1 2 2
[794.88 (200-0.416 X 320) + 254.47 X (200-50)-41.20(-1SO)J 1()"3 -..&.-puc

ilj• = 53.16 + 38.17 + 6.18 = 97.51 kN.m

ll': e 200 o"'
0

M/Pu· = 97.51 X 100011008.15 :::i 96.72mm

1 ..m·
4·.20

. I
0
2
l\/ T iT
0 II

.,..
U)
&s
.iU: Ex. 11. 6. 6 Draw the Pu- Mu interaction curve for a short R. C column of rectangular section·
'":'')
JL~f lL I ~
J'( l' 250 mm wide x 500 mm deep reinforced\vith 8 bars of 20 mm diameter with 4 bars placed
llkl~* --;·
''il , parallel to the width of column on each face for bending about the axis bisecting the depth of
.~Jlf~lt:
Section Strain Diagram S,tfilrss Diagram
u·~1'1 the column. Assume concrete grade M20 and mild steel reinforcement , and effective cover Fig. 11.6.5 : A Lylng_Oatilde the $eetlon (I8 > D)
)u~!ff equal to 0.1 D
]li!Jltv
·. JA
. :1/·.ji~
2
Given : fek = 20 Nlmm2, fy = 250 N I mm , b = 250 mm, D = 500 mm, d' = 0.1 x 500 = SO mm
Asf =As2 = 4 x 202 I 4 = 1256 mmf.
c.." =-
8 ( 4 7= -
2
·
8 . · ( _.4
x . . = 0.627~2 ...... (Eq. 11.5.2a)
j1,.,.1~ r'
. 7 7k-3
u 7 7xl.2-3 . · ·
As =Asl +As2 = 2512 mm2•
.m~;.~~J;.JI
JW·•
~::.1
c1 = 0.446 (I- c3 /6 > = 0.3994 ...... (Eq. JJ.5.2b)
p% = 100 X 25121(250 X 500)=2%, p/fck = 2/20 = 0.1 C2 . = (0.5- 0.627 /7) I (I - 0.627 /6) = 0.4583 ...... (Eq. JJ.5.2c)
ID~;IJ
,,!tJ~,,
.Required : Pu-Mu i~t~ractive curve
.: = 0.002x1 1(x11 - 3D 11) = 0.002 (600- 50)/ (600- 3 x50011)
. :~I
~solution :x1 ~· -2SOmm
1
~~~~ = Dl2-d'= 250.:50 = 200mm, x = DI2-D +d'
2
= 0.00285
pd~l = 0.002 (X11 - D + d)! (600- 3 X 500/7) =0.002(600- 500 +50)/(600- 3 X 500n)
.fck bD = 20 X 250 X 500 = 25 xJOS N, fek bD 2 = 2500000 X 500 =125 X 10 1 N.mm .- E2
DA
~~~_ ., (a) Axial load with zero eccentricity
J, 1
= 0.000778
. = 0.00285 x 2 x lOs = 570.4 Nlmml't 0.87 1y :. f,1 = 217.5 Nlmm2
· Puz = 0.446fck Ag +(0.87fy-0.446J;k )Asc ... ... (Eq.IJ.3.6d)
1 ::li
I.
:.Puzl(fckbD) = 0.446 + (0.87 x 250-0A46 x 20)2512/(25x lOS)= 0.655
J,2
~c;
= 0.00078 x 2 x lOs = 155.5 Nlmm2
= ~.446 x 20 = 8.92Nlm,j
{b) Axial load with minimum eccentricity e . > 0.05D ( =D I 20)
mm \' fc 2 · = 446 X 0.000778,. (1 - 0.000778 X 250 ) X 20 ';,.)-;59N/,( ... (Eq. 11.5.2d)

or
Pu = 0.4fck Ag + (0.77fy-0.4fck)A3c
P/ (fekbD) = 0.4 ;'" ( 0.77 X
:.... ... (Eq.JJ.J.7d)
250 ~ 0,4 x 20) 2512 12Sxto5 ;i:. 0.585
P,, fck bD.= 0.3994 +[(217.5- 8.92) x 1256/25ooooo+ (155.5~5.59) t2S6t2sooooo
= 0.3994 + ( 0.1048 + 0.0753) = 0.5795 . .. .... (Eq. 11.5.5b)
M/ (.fck hU) =(Pu x emin) I ( feiU) = (I;u x D I 20 ) I (feiU) =(Pfl.fcibp) 00
= 0.585 x. I 120 = 0.0293 \ ' / I Mil . ~ A,; X;
.1 -
bD-
2 = .cI (0.5-C2) +4. . ~
. ( /,; - JCI) 1 bD XD- ... ~.. (Eq. 11.5.6d)
ck . . 1•1 ck . .
!r.! Comments : · If Eq.JJ.3.6a is used instead of Eq.ll.3.6d, P,/~k bD works 0111 to be tqti~/to 0.62s"\ .. . . (217.5- 8.92) 1256 250 (155.5- 5.59) X 1256 (-250)
~k. ·= 0.3994(0.5 -0.4583)+ . · + . .
I fc hD '1:: OAS6 an!' . x-.-
1
ittstead of 0.655. While if Eq 1!.3. 7a) is used insiead of Eq.JJ.J. 7d) P X -
. . ·. 20 X 250 X 500 500 20 X 250 X 500 500
Ill'. II C . II ··
11
M 1fk bd = 0.028, These .values do not match with the .f •M interae'tion Chan
II
1 28 ofsP·· '16. .,
-\ . = 0.0314
II) (c) Neutral axis lying outside the .section i.e. x > D (Fig. 11.6.5) (d) . Neutral axis lybig at tlie bottom of the section i.e. XII= D or kll = 1
)
Assume = xII · = 1.2 D =1.2 x·· 500 = 600
11
mm/where, kII =.J.2 Pu =.· p1/1: !.PIIJI + ,~
t
'?~:.~
.
Puc·· =·(),36fckbD=0.3~ X 20·x 2SOxSOOI1000 = ~kN
Iii"'
 ---~?j/

fm·/.. 1' ·.~ •.

;~; .~·.

:u~~
.~
hJ ,,. 622 Column
·!Jill Chapter 11 Sect. 11.6 . Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 623
·:iU ·, :;~:
Calculate' 8.
I
at different levels. .~I
·,-.!:'
4,
w: -~: (f) Neutral axis lying with the sectiqn ( x11 < D) and
... 8/ = 0.0035 (SOO....; so) I soo = 0.003IS ' 82 = 0.003S X so I soo = 0:0003S ~I
= 0.002 + 0.87 /;y IEs
fs1 ~1S x (2 x lOs) = 630 Nlmm2 :f. 2I7.S Nlmm2, :.J, = 2l7.5Nimm2,
~ !~ : Strain in the outer most layer of steel
''I:
:lj fc 1 = 0.446fck. = 0.446 x20 = 8.92 Nlmm2 1
'?_:__

r 250 --1 j_ --t .0035 j4- ~ 0.¥6fck I -

1,2 = 0.0003S = 70 Nlmm2
Tfls1 IT
x ( 2 x lOs)

T I ..... IT
lf) ~50
f.~·~
i

:tj
n = 446 8. I (I - 2SO 8.I )fk
C = 446 x 0.0003S (I -250 x 0.00035) x 20 =2.85 Nlmm2
. Puc
~~

I!-~-
i>l \:':,c
J D u; = (f[/,1) A,1 + Cf.., -J.,J A.,= (217.5-8.92 ) X 125611000 +(70-2.85) 1256/1000.
ffj'~I tl >
= 261.98 + 84.34 = 346.32 kN.
G
l r··

·"" Q lL.
•

~~~~
(D·0.41. Xu.max)
:. P.u = 900. + 346.32 = 1246.32 kN ' fk
c hD = 20 X 250 X 500 = 2500000 N

'~' :' •
l,!p :.P/fciD= 1246.32 X I000/2500000 = 0.498 }:
'"i!!U:

11 'rltJ:
ll:~f
:·~1::l;
,:il)J,
'"'!
MII= MUC + LMUS/. = PUC (0.SD-0.4I6D) + PUS x + PUS~.~x
1 1
= 900 x 500 (0.5-0.4I6)1IOOO+ 261.98 x (0.5x500-50)IIOOO
- 84.34 X (0.5 X 500-50) II00 = 73.326 kN.m
:. ¥/feiiY = ·73.326 X I06 I ( 2SOO?OO X 500 ) = 0.05866
2 1 .
Section
so
T
1• .
s
Strain Diagram
..1

Stress Diagram
Pus2

r·

l!l_!.d'lt
:~ ~ !
t.f~'l' Fig. 11.6.6 Neutral Axis Lying Within the Section
:q··
,;,;~·
r:<,'ii'-

11Ji:Y~~-I
.
(e) Axial load corresponding to the condition of maximum strain of 0. 0035 in concrete and ·
For balanced section, xu.mw; = 0.531 x 450 = 2)9 mm , ku = xu / D = 0.418
lil,?,l t::
I, I
tensile strain of 0.002 in the outermost layer of steel. ku =xu I D =0.57 . . · .. ··
1: J' ·I pu =puc +(Pusi+ pus2) .
Jil'·l: Depth of neutral axis from strain diagram. xJ(d-xu) = 0.0035 I 0.002 = 714 .p = 0.361 fkb X . = 0.361 X 20 X 250 X 239/1000 = 413.395 kN
'l' II':
,'I xu.b =' 7 III x d = 7 III x 450 = 286.36 mm uc c u.max

~~
= 0.0035 ( X _max- d') I xu.max = 0.0035 (239- 50) I 239
pU = pUC + LPUS/. E
1 11 ~

0.00277 > 0.8'1 /;IE

y s. (= 0.00187) .j

~;r Puc = 0.36fck :bxu.cb = 0.36 X 20 X 250\x 286.3611000 = SI5.4 kN.

(·
:. f s = .0.87 /; = 217.5 Nlmrrt, f 1 = 0.446 X 20 = 8.92 Nlmrrt
·8 1 = 0.0035 X (286.36 -50) 1286.36 = 0.0029 · 1 y c ·:---.,

•:if The bottom bars ar~ in tension , :. fs2 = 217.5 N I mrrt

;I·:., /, 1 = 0.00~9 X 2 X 105 = 577.7 N I mm2 :Si 2I7.5Nimm2 Pus! = (fs - fc1) Asi = (2I7.5- 8.92)l256 /IOOO = 261.98 kN.
iol.
.· :.J,1 =217.SN1/rzm2 1
:r,'t_•
Pus2 = (-) fs A = (-) 217.5 X 1256 /IOQ? = (-) 273.18 kN.
l'j'_:'_l
fc1 = 0.446xi20= 8.92Nimm2
P
2 52
= P + };;P . = 431.395+261.98-273.lll = 420.195/cN.
I
:1·_,
,. /,2 = 0.002 x 2 x i OS= 400 Nlmm2< = 217.5 Nlmm2 . u uc usr

.. ·. f~ =217.SN1mm2, f~ = 0. .
Pj(fciD) = 420.195 X 103 I 2500000 = 0.168
1!' ~~- \·C~
..
. .
= MUC + (PUS 1 x x1 + PUS2 x x2 )
~
M
_.JI
LPus;.= (217.5 -8.92)'X 125611000....:2t7.S X 125611000 = 262-273.18 = - 1i.t8 kN = 431.395(250-0.416 X 239)/1000 + 261.98 X 200/1000 + 273.18 X20011000
! :. Pu = 515.~ -1l.l8 ~\04.22 kN
M~ = 171.99 kN.m.
P/fckbD= 504.22x I00012S00000_=~~2 . ,
Mj( fck bJY) = 171.99 X 106 ~~ 2500000 X500 ) = 0.1376
·· ,M 11
= [51S.4(250.:'0.4l6~286;3_6)+262xi00+(-273.18)x:(...;200)J!IOod ,''·.. .,1.

= 67.45 + 52.4 + 54.64 ='l74A9 kN. m,

(g) Case of· Pure Flexure (Pu = 0) (Fig. 11.6. 7)
Mjfck biY = 174.49 X 106 1( 2500009 -~- soo) = 0.139
- .
This case is the same as a doubly reinforced section.
' ... ·. .
•
 Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 625
'til: 624 Column Chapter II
Sect. 11.6
ly=250n/mm2 \ d'/d=0.10
-t
Fl' I-
0.7 "ID I 1-o- D= 500 mm~

.... t- -l !+-0.446fck
~
ku;1
250-1 I 0.416 xu /.T2Lmm
~7- T-
(1st ·let) Ast o. , b(O.o293P.58Sl / ~H20~
,0.031P~ku=
1 22
· I

T 1 As 1 =4-,20
=
c0 0.361ckbx0 ku=1.2 . I ~d'l4- ~
:;_,5 1
·'"i
t o.5, d(o.05866P.4981,ku = 1.0
j! -
c I
I
g ;ij. .o I
Pifck=0.1
500 400 '<t .P. I
.,
II ~ 0.4 I
·\-J :i I
I

1
I

1
,~-],

l
0. I
i -~/ ' I
i i· =0.871y. As2
:-;;
I

;.t1,;~....~
1
Tu I
~
50 --4 > 0.002 + 1- 02 I
I (0.1376,0.168) ,ku=0.478

. f,:!
!·.•

Section
T o.B7 lylEs
Strain Diagram Stress Diagram I
I

o.H e,'
Jrd.'
i!Jil:'
\,!-./~~~: Fig.11.6.7 Pure Flexure I
ffj)~·' I
~~.~.,~#'. 01r""' o.62 o.O!Oo.oso.os Mil" o.1o
\:((ij' Compressive stress .in steel, .Mu I (fckbDl -
• 'j'

':i'.r"lj'
~ 1'J \
f s1 = 8sI X Es ·= (2 X 105 ) X 0.0035 (x u -50)/xu = (700-35000lx) . u Fig. 11.6.8 P"- M" Interaction curve
·J'L~j ~
fc1 .= 0.446 Ick = 0.446 x 20 = .8.92 N I mm2 Ex. 11.6. 7,: Obtain an interaction curve between axial compression Pu and bending moment
)pJI;
l;!""'''',
Uil' For equilibrium, Total compression= Total tension M at ultimate 'state in a non-dimensional form for a short R.C. column of rectangular
0.36jck h;,+ (f's 1-fc1) A81 = 0.87 f,Asz ~· (b x D ),reinforced with steel of grade Fe. 415 placed equally near. opposite short
-section
'i:f•IJI':
.'1:1ili\!:·' 0.36 X 20 X 250 X Xu+ [ ( 700 - 35000/ Xu)- 8.92) X 1256 = 0.87 X 250 X 1256 faces with an effective cover of 0.15 D. Assume ratio of perce11tage of steel to grade of
lrn~l:
l'•ll!!·
xII2 + 330.45 xU - 24422 = 0 :. xU = .62.2 mm, kU =xU I D = 0.124
concrete = 0.1
flji!UI
esl = 0.0035 (XII- d') I xu = 0.0035 ( 62.2-50) /62.2 = 0,00686 Given :fy = 415 N /mm2 , Effective cover= 0.15 Dbr d'l D = 0.15 , p./fck =0.1
r!/1.
·:;1 fs 1 = 0.000686. x 2 x 105 = P?·~ Nlmm 2, fc 1 = 0.446 x 20 = 8.92 N/mm 2 Required = Pu , Mu'interaction curve
fC·· SoiKiio• : For a col- with only tw<J rows on opposite faces : Eq. 11.5.5a can be written as :
M will be obtained by taking moment of eompressive forces about C.G. of steel.
!(
i
u
MU = 0.36fkbr'{D-d'-0.416x )+ (f
'·
-jC) A (D- 2d')
Pu . = Cj
I ck
. bD +Asl (fsl -fci ) +AsZ (·fs2 -fc2 )
C II U S1 1 · S1 ·

l~t-.
I~ '
= [ 0.36 X 20 X 250 X 62.2 (500-' 50-.0.416 X 62.2) . pbD pbD
t ~· + ( 137.2 • '8.92 )1256 X ( 500-2 X 50)] X 10-6 = ll1.93 kN.m =CJckbD + 200 (fsi-fcl) + 200 Usz-"-fc2)

\r M/fckbd = .lll.93 X 106 /(2500000.x 500)= 0.0895-

PI fck = 0.1 .. f
p
bD U·
= cl+ loOT
p {(fs]-fcl)+(Js2-fcz)}.

r
The resultS are'sumniarised as under : For d'l D = O.l
• ck ck
ku =Xu I D 0.124 ,' 0.478 0.57 1.0 L2 1.22 00
''
In this particular case pI fck = O.l ·
PJfckbD 0 0.168 0,20 0.498 - 0.5795 0.585 {).655 '0.1
~v
pu =C, + ToO {(jsl- fcl) + (fs2- fez)}

rj
\

Mu/fckbd 0.0895 0.1376 0.139 0.05866 0.0314 0.0293 0 ·. fckbD

--- p .J 1
The Pu- Mu interaction curve is shown in Fig.J1.6.8. It matches with Chart 28 of SP- 16 • ':" cl +: 2000 {(/sl- fcl )+ (fsz- fez)}

1'j
,,
I
corresponding top Ifck = O.l
f ck bD
\
 r: ! , I'

_,..--~

Sect. 11.6 Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column. 626

Sect. 11.6 Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 627
From Eq. 11. 5. 6d and for two rows of bars on opposite faces.
~ ~5
-~\'''\

M p ' bd = 0.399 (0.5- 0.458) + 2000 ( 341.85 -175.15) == 0.0459

:. f b~ 2 == cl ( o.s - c2) + 2007~ , Xj x
~ xu~s~-fc1J n + r~s2-fe2J 7.i > 2
fck .

In this particular case pIJ;,k == 0.1 (iQ · For ku = 0.4

M e1 =0.0035 (0.4- 0.15) I 0.4 =0.00219
:. ~
J;,k bd
I · x
==Cl (0.5-C2)+2000 [(fs}-1;,]) D
1
+ (f's2-J;,2J
x
D2 1 fs 1 =334.72N/m~ , fcl =446 x 20 == 8.92 N I mm2
,/~···
i £
2
== 0.0035 (OA -0.85) I 0.4 =0.00395
:r;j~ where, x1 == ( 0.5D- 0.15 D)== 0.35 D, Thus , x I D == 0.35
fs 2 ==-360.90Nim~, fc2
!If~.
=0 ...... (Table 4.10.1)
M
1 and x2 I D =- 0.35
'~I; !. --!!._ 0.35 for ku<1 . cl = 0.36 ku and c2 = 0.416 ku
,. r ..
~~~~ ' f ck bD1 cl (o.s- c2) + 2000
!} J!J(, I,
{(~~-!;,}) .+ (~2 ~!;, 2) } p u I (fkbD)
c
= 0.36 X 0.4 + {( 334.72-8.92) + ( -360.90 )} '/2000
v~J::
,.('.' For ku .S I, = 0.144 + ( 325.8 + (- 360.9) I 2000 = 0.1265
iJl~'
l•H·!3'!~'
M/ (fck bff) = 0.36 X 0.4 + { (0.5 - 0.416 X 0.4) + 0.35 ( 325.8 - 360.9) /2000 = 0.1682
C1 == 0.36ku' C2 ==0.4I6ku
(cl!l £. == 0.0035(kU D-O.l5D)IkU D==0.0035(kU -O.I5)1kU The values ofC1 ,C2 , E;• E2 .~l'~l, ferfc 2 , and non-dimensional parameters P/ (fek bD )and
~~·.·: £2
I

''•·'/1 == 0.0035 ( k D- 0.85 D) I k D == 0.0035 ( k - 0.85) I k

u u u u
Mu I (fk
c
bd) have been worked on the same lines for different values of ku as per the example
('
:l!l'ffl..· For ku > I, C1 and C2 are obtained from Table 11.5.1. given above, and the same are tabulated below.
gii.
1:11;: f:. == 0.002(k.0-0.15D)I(k D-3DI7) == 0.002(kU -0.15)1(kU -317). >~·.\

~:
I U ·. U ·
2 ku 0.4 0.5 0.75 1.00 1.20 1.50 00
--<' ..

£ == 0.002(kuD-0.85D)l (kuD-3DI7) == 0.002(ku-0.85)1(ku-3!7)

~;:
f./,r, f S == £.I ES == f: x 2 x 10 5 for f: .S 0.00144
cl 0.144 0.180 0.270 0.361 0.399 0.422 0.446 1.~
!' ',
~ == the value given by Table 4.10.lfor f: > 0.00144
0.208 . 0.416 0.458
c2 0.1664 0.312 0.479 0.500 "
For f: ~ 0.002,
f:l 0.00219 0.00245 0.00280 0.00298 0.00272 0.00252 0;00200
f c == 0.446 fkc == 0.446 x 20 == 8.92 Nlm'rrzl
£2 -0.00395 -0.00245 O.mf467 0.000525 0.00091 0.00121 0.00200
For f: < 0.002 , f c ==value given in Table 11.5.2
For f: < 0 , J;, == 0. 343.83 352.15 353.72 350.77 345.63
~I 334.72 327.74
#For example ( i) for ku,;; 1.2 , C == 0.399, C == 0.458 ,
-360.90 -343.83 -93.40 105.00 181.40 242.60
1 fs2 327.74
f:i -~ 0.002(1.2-0.15)1(1.2-317)=0.00272, / ,·
2 (Table ll.5.J)
1 fcl 8.92 8.92 8.92 8.92 8.92 8.92 8.92
!'s1 == 350.77 N/mm. , / ! c == (.446 x 20) == 8.92N!mml
1
£2 == 0.002 (1.2- 0.85) I (1.2- 317) ==0.000907. fc2 0 0 0 4.06 6.25 7.53 8.92
:. ~2 5
== 0.000907x2x 10 == l81.4N!min2 andJ;, ==6.25N!mm2 P/fckbD 0.1265 0.1755 0.3949 0.5829 0.6575 0.7079 0.7648
2
Now p/fk== 0.1
~ p Mu /fkbD 2
0.1682 . 0.1713 0.1272 0.0729 O.Ot59 0.0266 0:0
c
:. fek b~ == 0.399 + {(350.77- 8.92) + (181.4- 6.25)} I 2000 .
The interaction curve for P~ and M-u in non-dimensional form for the given sectio~lobtained by
== 0.399+ ( J.ll.85 + 175. 15) I 2000 == 0.6575 · plotting the values of parameters PJ(fck bD) and M/fck bd. These value~ agree with the
... - .• -'···- !- l"'l.n,.. 'l'l ~+~D 11 {;\ +"n~ ]:;'.,A 1 <; fnr ,/'/f)= ll 1 <; ~nrl n / f =I) 1
 \11: i Analysis of Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 629
lil,:: :
~~~~.J! i
·rl.
I
628 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.6
The dotted radial lines in these charts give stress in bars near the face farther from the load
rr:~~~.! 'f;
' .!: ;I~; 11.6.2 Analysis Using Charts :~~ (i.e. tension face or least compressed edge).
~"I- !ii
~;

It has been observed in earlier seCtions that the analysis of an eccentrically loaded columns . ,:?!1: The lower-most line f =f. d indicates that the tensile stress in the outermost row reaches the
I'·: s y
I·_. , from basic principles is laborious and time consuming. Therefore, design aids, in the form of charts design yield strength. The points below this line indicate primary tension failure. Those above this
'' "{f--
and tables, are prepared for practical design. The charts consist of interaction diagrams for Pu and £
-line indicate compression failure. The line for 1= 0 indicates that the bars in outerffiost row on
"~

Mu in non-dimensional form. They are drawn, as outlined in Sect 11.5.4 using basic equations of _tension side are subjected to zero stress which in other words means that neutral axis lies at this
~1 equilibrium given in Sect 11.5.5.The construction of such a chart has already been illustrated in outermost row near the opposite face. For all points above this line, the neutral axis lies outside the
! ~~~
Ex.JJ.6.6 and Ex. Jl.6.7 The elaborate charts in non-dimensional fomi are given in SP:l6 ·.?~
) section and the entire section is under compression.
j (80/4). Karve ( 97/6) presented these tables to cover wide range of given sections.
1' Interaction charts for rectangular section for the ratio ofd'l D and for normally used Fe 415
·~-< 11.6.2.1 Basic Pan,lmeters For Charts _ grade 'steel are given in Appendix - C. The interaction chart, for circular section for d'ID and
I• i· It will be observed from basic equilibrium equations in Sect 11.5.5 and illustrative examples Fe415 grade of steel are given in ~ppendix D.

~'l i¥1~~~~_:
1••":.1
·''·'·j·
11.6.6 and 11.6.7tha~ the charts forPu- Mu interaction depend upon following parameters:
(a) Shape of section, (b)Arrangementofreinforcement, (c) Grade of Steel (d)Ratio d' I D

Separate charts are drawn for each of the above parameters for standard values used in practice.
·q
Steps for Analysis Problems :
( a) Calculation of M11 for given section and Pu
(I) Calculate d'l D, pIf cK P/ (f ck bD) forrectangular section or P/ (fck rY) for circularsection.
Jl The range of variables covered in the charts presented by, SP (16) are as follows:
'"l'
/il'fl; (2) A Select apprQpriate chart corresponding to fy and d'ID
r~~ ~.~r: (a) Rectangular and Circular sections.
(3_) Draw a horizontal line from calculated value of P/ (fck rY) or P/ (fck bD) to cut the cul!'e
\!TI~f
(b) Steel placed on opposite sides and steel uniformly spaced all around the periphery of the
section. for calculated value of (or visually interpolated value of) pIfck'
~~·1.1· (c) Steel grades Fe 250, Fe 415, Fe 500. _(4) Drop the perpendi_~u!ar from the located point ofjntersection on x ~axis to get M/ (jck brY)
1:1:~~-
., (d) Ratios d'ID =0.05, 0.10, 0.15 and 0.20.
(or MuI f.ck d) fro~ wliich cakiilate Mu. .J·".

m
I
I :·
If a given and assumed section does not fit in any particular chart, two nearest charts are used and
:(.;) _the desired value obtained by interpolation (except of course for different shapes of section.) (b) Calculation of Pu for given section and M11
The procedure remains the same excepting draw a vertical line corr~spohding to calculated
H'_,Jli:
if.r·::
Comnients : ( 1) The charts for rectangular sections have been given for reinforcements on two opposite _value ofM/ (fck biY) [or M/ (fck JY ) for circular section] to cuttlie cilrVe for coriesponding
1~1(: short faces (charts 27 to 38) and for sections with 20 bars distributed equally on a/lsitk$ (chaits 39 to SO):
i:J value ofpIf Cf and from the located point draw a horizontal to cut y- axis to getP/ (fck bD) from
;.-' The charts for the latter case can be used without significant error for any number ojbars .greater tliafl 8 ·
j( when the bars are distributed equally on the four sides. The chart.s for circular sictlon (Charts si to 62) can
·1n be used with any number of bars but not less than 6. The chOrts referred above are from SP_: 16 (8014j. . .Pu.
-which coinpute
( 2) From th,' durability considerations the requirement of nominal coverfor s~ , very sever anJ · (c). Calculation of eccentricity t for given section-· and PII or MII
extreme environment the req'!jrement of nomin(Jl cover have been specified to be greater than· 40 mm with, a
It can be-seen from the chart that any straight line drawn from the origin has a slope with the
1: the result for minimum width of column of 200 mm and·even in some other cases, the ratio ofd'l b will be
more than 0.2. But these charts are not available in SP, :16 . _The same haVe been developed by the cmthor vertical, and is given by:

r
~ ~~~;. '
and included in this book M)(fctbiY) e _eiD (:. M·'!I ;:;... P.;,x e)
tan a = .P/ (jckbD) -
D
= __,..-
1•.
·....
., 11.6.2.2 Parameters For Interaction Curves

I
il_/ The non-dimensional parameters used for interaction curves areP I (fckbD ),M I (fkbiY)
' u u c . Thus, calculatep Ifck, e I/), and from approp~te-chartdraw a line from th~ ~rigin ba~ing
_
and pifck for rectangular sections.For circular sections, the same are used asP/f ck!Y, M/f ckd e
stope with the vertical equal to e I D(i.e. Une joining 1J,orizontallerigtb equal to I D and l'ertical·
and plfck respectively. The ratio ofp Ifckranging from 0 to 0.26. _ ordinate equal to n,·-~~g the appropriate cur.ve ofp jf ~·The coordinate of the point will
For rectangular sections, b' is a dimension of the section parall~l to axis ofbendingwhile D is
M1 l_(j4,1J'pfJ~:.-~P/(ftkbD)
_/

a dimension perpelldicular to l!XiS of bending. In the _case of circular sections, D 'obviously :give - . . .
represent~ the diameter. The proced~·exi:italtied abov~ has been ill~ted ih £x; 11. 6.~ ( ~)
 ,.-.

fU ·I!,! l I ,,I Design of an Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 631

;_j
;•'
\i. 630 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.7
.,.
,,:

iil Ex. 11.6.8 For a short RC.Column 230mm wide and 530 mm deep, and reinforced with
(b) Given: Mu == 130 kN.m, to obtain Pu.
Mu = 130 x 1000 kN. mm and fckbD = 3047.5 kN as obtained in part(a) above
:: 8 bars of 20 mm diameter with 4 bars equi-spaced along 530 mm sides /)etennine :
-~: (q) i}tt: bending moment M~ about an axis. bisecting the depth, ~· P~ • 801H:N.
. 'Mu = 130 X 1000
=0.08
-;;
;;
(lfj'Pu when Mux =1JO kN.m, fck biY 3047.5 X 530
:),;
;.'. ex
(c) pu when eccentricity = 80 mm.. ( e% referring to eccentrkily from l . axis).
,, Assume steel grade Fe 415 and moderate . . conditi(m From Chart 2 and Chart 3 given in Appendix C.
'·•:!
For d'l D =0.10 and 0.15, for pI f ck == 0.082 and MuIfckbd = 0.08, we get
f;
·\ ~ . SolUtion: For mOderate expo$uie condition from Tal!le 2:2.3 the minimum grade ofconcrete p
n:
,. d' ID P/fciD u
•,
. is M 25 and nominal cover is 40 mm. .
\j 0.52 X 3047.5 = 1584.7 kN
\: /1 Assuming diameter oflink equalto 6mm and diattleter of main steel20 mni, . 0.10 0.52 _,,;
'1·-~1 d' =40+6+20-/2 =S6mm :. d'lD=56/S30= 1.06 0.5 X 3047.5 = 1523.75 kN I
~~~~t \ fckbD =25 x 230 X 530:: 3047500 N = 3047 500/1000 =3047.5 kN
0.15 0.5

th1i \!,
')1:'\
I . As = 8 X 314 = 2512 mnf .., Ford'ID= 1.06, bylinearinterpolation,Pu =1577.4kN
'·illlJ/"
p lOOA·S 100 X 2512
'''jiij'tt":
1,~ -~
= - --~-
3047.5 X llP =0.082 ·
(c) Given e = 80 mm , to obtain Pu•
e/D =80/530=0.15, d'ID=O.l06: 0.1
,~~-

fck fekbD
,ft,:
df l,J,J\l (a) Given : Pu = 800 kN, to obtain Mu
Take the chart d' I D =0.1 and . f. == 415 Nlmni. Draw a line through the origin having
slope with the vertical equal to 0.15 or ~keO.l5 ( = el D) alongx- axis and 1 alongy- axis to get
I,J,
' the intersection point and join it with the origin. Extend the sloping line {if required) till it intersects
;:;~:
,d
~= 800. =0.262 the curve of pI fck =0.082
Hl
t\~" fck bD 3047.5 By visual interpolation. they • coordinate of the point is 0.522 = P/ f}D
i;~·!
1:\ r.:
~,.,~t.: The given bar arrangement falls neither in the category of all b~ placedequally on opposite sides
,', pu = 0.522 X 3047.5 = 1590.8 kN I
I'~
lf \
~~ t
parallel to the axis of bending , nor that of all bars placed uniformly all along the periphery. Since
/'
1\hil number of bars are not greater than 8 the former arrangement will be used.
illil Check:
''!)
:.~r.
:, Using Chart No. 2 and Chart No. 3 in Appendix C· The~ .. coordinate Ofthe point is 0.079
;t
;I •. M;;= 0.079 x (fck bD) X D = 0.079 X 3047.5 x 530 I iOOO = 127.6 kN.m.
i\·
~ ll d'l D =O.l and0.15 obtainthefollowmgvaluesforM"/ (fetbd) co~spondingto
.. e, =M lP =127.6x1000/1590.8=S0.2mm:80mm
It\.
1\l
plfck = 0.082 and P/(fc1bD) = 0.262 as· '
11
·" problem cannot be solved by using Tables in the Handbook because the tables
This type 'of '
'''I
d'l~ ~ MJ (fck blY)
I
., M.U in kN.m. do not give iuiy combination with the value of e.
II:i\ ,,

0.1 o:t57 0:157 X 3047.5 ~ 530 I 1000 =253.58 · 11.7 · DESIGN OF· AN ECCENTRICALLY LOADED SHORT COLUMN
\li
!1\ 0.15 0:14 .0.14
.
x3047.5x 530/1000~ l26.12 ' -lJNIAXIAL ·BENDING
..
I,
:11
ford'/ p 1.'00:·, tt.7J j).~ign ot Column' by Using Equations.
,\· .
. The. design: of. eccentrically loaded short R.C, column involves determination of
o.~s ... oJo · dimensions b-, D based on the longitudinal reinforcement its arrangement, effective ~ver 4' for
6
1\
Mii 1 "' +
M"·. . ..i>~~ . (-253 s· a.- 226··,·t2··>•,..C'A:"'•i.,..ii""'·•' · " 4o·}it.( ·;,, .
I
o.t.s. ... o.to.· - · · · ·:~~~-"''""Jifi~~~ ·"-"~·~,.
·! ·
given Pu'.Mu.fck.andf andeffectiye1engths< the steps for design are as under:
il · M. =·zsokN.m·
•• ' l i . ' . '
1
i\
l
 Design of an Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 633
632 Column Chapter 11 Sect. ll. 7
ll. 7.2 Design of Column using Charts
1. Dimensions of Section The design of eccentrically loaded columns using equations involves the meth~ Qf
Decide dimensions b, D from the given effective length for the C0ndition that the column
1 assume a~d check. The whole process is very ti~esome ~nd le?gthy. But the exerci~e is very UsefUl·
should be short. b < (L 112) and D < (L 112). for preparmg the program. The manual calculattons are mvartably performed by usmg tables Ottb
And from practic:f6'onsiderations, wi~ b-f width of supported beams,
lo
~p
using design charts. These charts are given by 16 or "Handbook ofR.C. Design by the auth e·
book~. Handbo?~ giv~ depths:~
r/
(97 /6) or o_ther similar hand_ The tables _in directly all possible
2. Effective cover. column sectiOn for 230 mm wtdth wtth steel varymg from mtmmum to maxtmum. · .
lt\
,j;;)i
From exposure conditions obtain nominal cover from Table. 2.2. 3
Effective cover= nominal cover+ diameter oflink say 6 mm +half diameter of bar say 20 mm
';·

:~ The steps involved in design are :

(a) For bending about x- axis bisecting the depth of the column
ir•:. ,j
~:;:.

Thus, Effective cover= nominal cover+ 16 mm (6 + 20 /2 ) =nominal cover+ say 20 mm 1. Assume the size of column b x D
2. Calculate Pu I (f ck bD) and Mu I (f ck brY)
'\li ,·1· 3. For arrangement of bars the following hints may be useful.
.?}

3. Calculated' I D
·lli:~ 'il\ For large eccentricity ( e = MuI Pu) i.e. bending action greater than axial force, provide 4. Select the appropriate chart for corresponding to' d'ID, grade of steel and I,
\j!JJ),!Jfl
' ••!l:!
equal steel on opposite faces parallel to the axis of bending so that the contribution of distribution of reinforcement. Obtain the point of intersection of P/ (fck b[)) a~,
moment of resistance given by steel will be maximum.
M I (f brY) I ,•
For small eccentricity provide reinforcement spaced pniformly all round. u ck
. 'i'l·l
·~.·~·{''~:\ 5. Interpolate the value of pI fck
'lf1·
' ,., ·~· 4. Assume the section and arrangement of reinforcement. 6. Calculate A ==total area of ste~l required A5 = fck ( pbD 1 100)
;IJII!'
~ .j;li:·
5
Then assume, ku = I and
'
calculate,
(b) For bending about y - axis bisecting the width of the column.
~~·,;''~·~ pul=Puc +LPusi=0.3 6 fckbD + L(_fs;-fcJAsi ...... (Eq. 11.5. 7a) In this case the chart to be referred to is having value of d'/b and use expression
'',, I
and compare it with given value of Pu
,
M/fck b2D. Rest of the procedure is the same as given in (a) above.
~·'1\ If Pu > ( Pu1 ) i.e. eccentricity is small or the compressive resistance of the section needs
' The use of charts and tables is illustrated in the following examples
.I to be increased by increasing the depth of the neutral axis i.e. ku greater than unity. Obtain
.. , ' the

.\
·~~1~; revised approximate value of ku assuming linear variation. Ex.ll. 7.1 Design the column from first principles to carry an axial ultimate load of
Assume kU =PU x 1 I PU1 and repeat the process till PU = ( PU + "LPUS/. ) 1050 kN. The unsupported length of the column is 4.15 m and eff~ctive length is 0.65 times
·

If Pu < Pu1 the unsupported length in both directions . Take width of column equal to 230 mm . Assume.
Then the compressive resistance of concrete is required to be reduced by decreasing the depth of steel grade Fe 415 and moderate environment. · · ·
neutral axis (i.e. ku< 1). Therefore , assume ku = Pu I Pu 1 and repeat the process till '
Given : For moderate environment from Table 22.3 fck = 25 N I m11f
PU = PUC + LP . This fixes the depth of neutral axis.
USI
and minimum nominal cover= 40 mm
Note: For larger difference between Pu imd Pul take ku more than the value obtained above by fy =415Nim11f, P"=1050kN, b=230mm, L=4.1Smm,
·judgement. Leff=0.65L =0.65 X 4.15 = 2.7m
Required: Design of the column fromftrst principles.
· 5. Calculate ultimate moment of resistance= ( M +I. M .)
UC USI
Solution : Assume Depth of the column= D =300 mm.
If M < (M + LM . ), the section is safe. Otherwise the section and I or reinforcement is Leff I b = 2.7 x 1000/230 =11.7 < 12 :. The column is short.
" ' uc ~ .
Since the size of the column is less than 400 mm minimum eccentricity of 20 mm ~eeds to be
changed till both these equilibrium conditions are satisfied.

RemiJI'ks : A generalised program for the design of column subjected to axial compression and uni ~ axial considered . ·
bending ha.s been developed by· the author and given in Ref (98/3) based on equations. The output from the :. emmx
, =20mni·
eminx = Lx/500 + D /30=4150/500+ 300/30 <20 mm
program are always accurate and results obtained in few seconds. With the adveni of computer, readers .-. e . :;:20 mm
eminy = LY /500 + b /30= 4150 I 500 + 230 I 30 < 20mm m.my
,;y ·should develop prolftams, using basic programs given in the book, for their own use.
.I'
 0
634 Column
/ ,.,
..

tli
i:.j
~'l'.·.,· . :
.1·
Now emmx
. I D = 20/300 =.0.066 and eltlli!JI
. I b == 20/230 = 0.086
Chapter /J Sect. 11:7 Design of an Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 635
/~,

HII smee' . IIIII!JI . ID,IIrerefure, ' "''I.!JI I b will go- tho design
I b > ' mmx (see -.uenu ;, &ct.ll.4) fs 1 fs 3 =305.75NI11111f, fs2 = 0.000686x200000= 137.2NIInnt
= 346.4NI11111f ,
'If/ :.Mu = Muminy = Pu X elllii!JI = 1050 X 20/1000 = 21 kN.m. /ci =lLISN!mml , fc3 = I0.75Nimml, fc2 = 6.34N!mml
.l. /1' Assume 6 - # 20 mm bars with l bars of 20 mm provided on each short side.
l' puc ":' 0,36 X 25 X 300 X 213.9/1000 = 577.53 /eN
Assuming 8 mm links, effective cover= d' = 40 + 8 + 2012 ='53 mm (,
ill i
For bending about y- axis, LPusi = (628.3 ( 346.4-11.15) + 628.3( 305J5 -10.75) + 628.3 ( 137.2 -~.34 )] /1000
iii i
= 210.64 +185.35 + 82.22 = 478.21 leN
r~u
jl, ,i
b " 300 """ and D" 230 mm with numbor of rows oquaJ to 3 with ""h row containing
2 No.of 20 mm dia bars . .. Pu = 577.53+478.21=1055.7/cN:IOSO
!~ .
·~ ., y\• x1 = 57mm , x2 =-57mm,and x =o
~ -·,; ;l,li~.~~ 3
· 577.53 ( 115-0.416 X 213.9) · .
~~~~~, Mlic ;= 1000 · = 15.03 kN.m (-)
k = 1. :. xu == 230 mm = D
Trial-1 Assume ·u
wl,'H.fl'·i'
'I!:·
1.

E1 = 0.0035 (230- 58) 12JO = 0.00262 l'.M:US/. = [ 210.64 x 57 + 0-82.22 x57 ]/1000 = 7.32 kN.m
if,v.;i (.J
/;;u E2 = 0.0035 X 58/230 = 0.000883 .. Mu = Muc + LM,;; = 15.03 + 7.32 = 22.35 kN.m > 21 kN.m .. O.K.
'tfl., Comments :As mentioned earlier that when e . I b > ·e . I D , then e . I b governs the design . This
'!I~'' E3 = 0.0035x 115/230==0.00175 . IIIII!JI mmx IIIII!JI· .
stat~meill
is now· Verified as under .:

!·f'-~~l' n
From Table 4.10.1 For Bending about x- axis Assume ku = I
.;_.f ..It'
•~ ~ II

::v~:!
l:li '1
''r~· I, ~~ =
342 8
· +
(351.8 - 342.8 ) (0.00262- 0.00241)
(0.00276-0.00241) = 348 ·2 N!mnfl
Puc
E I
= 621 kN as obtained earlier.
= 0.003S X 242 I 300 = 0.00282 ' "2 =0.0035 X 58 I 300 =0.00068
.i,'.}
, II ~2 = 0.00088Jx2.x 105 = 176.6Nim!il. /
81
= 352.32 N I Timt , f 82 = 0.00068 x 200000 = 136 N I mrrt c~
'-'':;;
~3
2 2
fc1 = 11.75 Nlmm , jc2 = 6.29 Nlmm
II): = 306.7+ 18.1 X 12129'=314.19N!mnfl
= [ 942.5 ( 352.32-11.15) + ( 136:... 6.29) X 942.5] I 1000. = 321.-55-122.3 = 443.85/cN -)
!~<:l fc 1 = 0.446 x 25 = 1LIS N I mnfl p ••
M. = 621 + 443.85 = 1064.85 which is marginally greater than given P: ( = 1050/cN)
:,
;·:~
fcJ == 446x 0.00175 ( 1-250x 0.00175) 25= 10.97 N/mnfl M. = 621 ( 0.5 - 0.4U) x 300 I 1000 = 15.65 W.m
~2
1
I
L M113;= [ 321.55 ( 150- 5B)- 122:3 ( 150-58) ]/ 1000
... = 446 X 0.000883 ( 1-250 X 0.000883) X 25 = 7.67 N I inirf
D .= 628.3( 348.2-1 1.15) + 628.3 ( 3i4.19 -10.97) +628.3 ( 176.6-7.67)
US/ . .
M_
.
. = 15.65 + 18.33
, = 33.98 lcN.m which is much greater than 22.35 lcN.m
Therefore, does not govern the design.
= 18.33/cN.m

~\
1'
/

,; 211.77+90.51 + 106.09 = 508.36kN

Puc = 0.36 X 25 X 230 X 300 X 10 -J = 621 leN
.. p = 621+ 508.36 = 1129.36 leN> 1050 kN:
u '
Approximate value of revised ku = 1050 x 1/1129.36 = 0.929 =say 0.93
Ex. 11. 7.2 : Design the column from first principles to carrj an ultimate load of1270 kN and the
ultimate moment of 58 kN.m. about an axis dividing the depth of the column. The Unsupported
:.k < 1
and e.ffectiYf! lengths of column about its both axes are 4.5 m aM 2. 75 m respectively. The grade
u
of concrete used is M20 and steel grade Fe 415. Width of column is 230 mm. ·

Trial-2 Given.: Pu = l270kN , Mux =58 kN.m , .b = 230 mm,, .Lx = LY,;,. 4.5 m,.

Try ku = 0.93 :. xu = 0.93 x 230 = 213.9 mm

f-effx=Leffy~2.7Sm , fck = 20Nimml· , !v = 415Nimm' I
E1 = 0.0035x (213.9-58)/213.9 =0.00255, Requfi'e.d: · To design the column.
r·
.J
E3 = 0.0035 X (213.9-115)/213.9 = 0.00162 =
. Solution,: Assume dt:pth of colunin =D 400 mm and reinforcement consisting of 4- # 20 mm
2 provided on each short side. .
E =0.0035 X (xu-D/2 -x2 )!xu = 0.0035 (213.9-115 -57 )/213.9 =0;000686 b · = 230 mm , , D = 400 mm ···
T II. = 'l'/.<;:11 I '1'111 - t t n,r
 636 Column Chapter 11
Both are less than 12 :. Therefore the column is short. Sect. 11.7 Design of an Eccentrically Loaded Short Column 637
Assuming diameter oflinks = 8 mm Effective cover= 40 + 8 + 2012 = 58 mm The fmal section. is 230 mm x 400mm reinforced with 4 bars of20 mm on each short side.
x1 = 40012 -58 = I42 mm , x = -I42 mm. Percentage of steel =2513.3 x IOO I (230 x 400) =2.73%
2

Trial- 1 Assume ·k = I, x = k .D = I x 400 = 400 mm

u u u . . Design of ·link. ',
"
puc' = 0.36 X 20 X 230 X 400 I 1000 = 662.4 leN. =
Dia.oflink 20/4 =Say 6 mm
" _/ ·. E1 . ,; 0.0035'(400- 58) I 400 = 0.00299 E = 0.0035 x 58 I 400
From Table:- 4.10.1 2
PitCh =lesser of ( 230 mm or 16 x 20 or 300 mm ) = 230 mm
Provide 6 mm links at 230 mm clc.
f:
/--
\__,'rio' 2
fs 1 = 353.8Nimm , fs2 = 0.0005 x 200000 = IOONimml Comments :As per the computer program given in our book (98/3) the value of ku = 1.048 ,
;i/·{llq·
(ll fcl ~2
= 0.446 X 20 = 8.92 NI mml == 446 X 0.0005 (1- 250 X 0.0005) X 20 = 3.9 N I nznr2 P. provided= 1270.9 kN , and Mu provided= 59.029 kN.m. The output from the program will always be
:p;:l. USI
LP . = [I256.6 (353.8-8.92) + I256.6 (100- 3.9)] I IOOO = 433.38 + I20. 76 = 554.I4kN ai:curate and results obtained within few seconds.
.,\~~:i·
pu = 662.4'+
' 554.I4kN= I216.54 kN < 1270 kN
~~im:i :. kl! > l Ex. 11. 7.3 Design, using charts, the reinforcement of grade Fe 415 for a short R.C. column
: 'i':; Trial- 2 Approximate value of ku = 127011216.54 = 1.044 - 2.f0 mm wide 400 mm deep to resist an ultimate axial load of 1270 liN and an ultimate
'r/1 .
'I ~I bending moment of 58 kN.m about major axis bisecting depth of the column. Unsupported.
ilil
1 - -,·,~ ; Try.ku= 1.05 , xu = 1.05 x 400 = 420 mm

c J2 c
length ofColumn is 4.5 m, and effective length of 2. 75 m. Grade of concrete used is M20.
·ri:
:j ?. ; . 8 4 8 4. v2 Given : b = 230 mm · , D = 400 mm , Pu = 1270 kN , Mux = 58 kN.m
C3 -
- -7 7 ku- 3 = -.
7 (7 X 1.05- 3) = 0966
. L = 4.5 m , Leff = 2.75 m
[Uf ... ": (Eq. 11.5.2a)
fk = 20Nim~. f.y = 415Nimm
2

c ~ 0.446 (I - C3 16 > ~ 0.446 (I ~ .96616) ~ 0374

1 c

I~.~·:
f ...... (Eq. 1 J.5.2b)
c, ~ (o.s -c,t 7)1 (l-c,t 6)~(o.s -0.96611)I(I-jj.966f6 >· 0.432 (Eq.JJ.5.2c)
1.'

Required :Area of steel.

Solution: Assuming 8 mm diameter link and diameter of main steel of20 mm
mF._;~
E
1
0.002 x X/ (xu- 3D I 7) = 0.002
= 0.0029I
= X {420- 58) I (420 ":' 3 X 400 I 7)
Effective cover = d' = 40 + 8 + 20/2 = $8 mm

£
2
~
0.002 (x,-D+ d') I ( x,- 3D 17) 0.002 ( 420- 400+ 58) I ( 420 c 3 x 40017)
.=" 0.00063
. = 4500/500 + 400/30 = 22.3nim > 20 mm
emmx
['-'' emmy
. = 4500/500 +· 230/30 = 16.7 mm < 20 mm , :. emmy . = 20 inm
I
From Tab/, 4.10./ 1
. = I270 x 22.3/1000 = 28.32 kN.m · < given Mux. (=58 kN.m)
Mux.mm. = Pu x em111x
/;J ~1 = 353.8 N I mm
2
fs2 = 0.00063 x 200000 = I26 N I mm2
~ 0.446 W" 8.92 N/nun. fa< 446 (I- 250 0.0(}(){;>) 0.01)063 2"4.73 Nflnm'
, Bending about -x - axis : b = 230 mm, D = 400 mm
'I 1
i . f. X X X X fck bD = 20 x 230 x 4001 looo = 1840 kN
I' ;
P ~ ." C 1,. bD 0.374 x 20 x 230 x 400 11 ooo ~ 688.16 .tN rrabk l1.5.IJ
1
P/ ifc;k bJ?) = 1270/1840 = 0.69
LP"' =~ .r585.76
<'
/_; 1256.6 (353.8 - 8.92) + 1256.6 (126 - 4. 73)] it ooo - 433.37 + 152.39 Mu l(fkbU)= 58 x 10001(1840.x 400) = 0.079
kN '. :~
c
d'l D = 58 I 400 = 0.145
~jj PU' = 688.I6 + 585.76 = I273.9 kN > 1270 kN

M~ = P~ x (D/2- C2 D) = 688.16 X(40012-. 0.43I x 400)./1000 = 18.99kN.m From Charts 2 and Chart 3 Appendix C, for d'/ D = 0.1 a.11d d'/ D = 0.15
Mus I = 433.37 x ( ioo- 58) /1000 = 61.54 kN.m
for d'ID = 0.1 and P/f'ck bD = 0.69 and M/fcid = 0.079 , P/fck = 0.13
.'._) Mus2 = - I52.39 (200- 58 ) I 1000 = - 21.64 kN.m Similarlyfordi'D= 0.15 pIfck"" .0.138
LMIISI.= 61~54 - 21.64 = 39.9 kN.m ford'ID = 0.145, p/fck= 0.13 + 0.008 x 0.04510.05 r= 0.137
Mii = M~ + Mus; =18.99 + 39.9 == 58:89 kN.m >58 kN.m .:. O.K :. -P = 0.137 X 20 = 2.74%
or As =
:;:: 2.74 x 230 ~ 400/100 2520 mml
,,·
 Sect. ns ~ollCEI' coLIJMII. stcriON
.s lJNgYMMJ!fl"c,ILLY •""'alcy sytnm'<tncallY rerofo"'eil "'·"""' • oolumn i
r•

··~~
Chapter 11 1

~
'"' •'le thC lJ<Ilditlll'"""""'
~
:n''
Provide 8 - # 20 11
The colum• secti••'. 1\oad"'l'\ .
""'lllll-
. is ollen'dduen.to tempotarl
th loods ••'

perl1 ~tU '""""'~-to

I.
sobieete<l to penD"""'"" ·u sill" 011 anY m •· .,...-, .,. ,.. -
: :I
i~
~n :( , =
Area provided= 2513 mm2 2520 mm2 wjn6lo:A wbioh is !ikell'to')lallS'1 ent ,..,.ent os in the ..,. of oanopi" or e6i,e "''""""
..~7f> . . .

~ ;f \
\H I
Comments : (i) Visual estimation of p I let. is very rough and can affect the result appreci~b!y because the cases of column subjected to provltle ,......,...... ""len ·"'
·~
:~ '1
value ofp gets magnified bylet. times. (ii) The same problem was solvedfr<lmfirst principles (See Ex. 11. 7.2) • loB""" ' """
~ \t \ \>Widitlll !tame<· For••'""' .,..1..
{orf and JY)u side- . .
"'"~ell
'lj·' stde greater than that .on catnPf "db mbSect
.1 are the same as•those obtamed t .11.5.5. However

~
;ii\' Check for bending about y- axis e basi• eqWIII"' ' a .., th• geometnc. centro• d "' . l wuat
'f a. ou t' . " """""'
·nu as
110
\,r\i ~
· ~ ~ ·~
b = 400 , 'D = 230 , d'ID = 58/230 = 0.25, the ,-ents sboo\6 ent ·d of a """"' ,.ct>"" "" "' un• """ F as " condition .
Th
i) i
~) \
fckbD = 20 X 230 X 400 /1000 = 1840 kN
Muy, = 1270 x 20 I 1000 =25.4 kN.m _,e~ereachitlll'"'..."' cent"'' si"" .... in of 0.002
'plastic .,....oiJ'. It Is thC"""'cottlPres
-~"'
...... the
"f all"""' l \ sectinD-
ad
ptasnc centroid maY~ unall , o.o02) ••" the"'""'""'""'" ,.ct>•~· ~.,os,' • a P>ic-
. wed to "''"""""
r . ...... , ....-
lnodother W<mlsWith
•.
'the
'"f'k· •h'-•unil
l onn
mmum,.. coroP"""'" ,.... ( bOot the was th,.ug\1 plostW centtotA"
; '

~as""'
'J
.· 'I .fV .!'.i wo. equal to
~~l·l~~:: P,/ fck bD = 0.69 as obtained earlier ofthe"'""""" of resi,.;ug fol"';.,.etticaiiY ,.\nfurc<d _,etc ..,non of o<>lumn.lhe pi .

\
l~tt,{l Mjfck.b~ Thus, ,W.lle i """ 5£<1.11.5.5 at<"'"" ,.\th oo\)' differeBCCihat mo:'"
\ ~~~~~·
•'.·t;.l
= 25.4 X 1000 I (1840 X 230) = 0.06
centtoid is -puted anti ell,¢1°8 g th<"ugh lh• plastic -old ual tbt 6jstanee$ x of ent
·•l'·· From ChartS (Appendix- .C) ford' I D= 0.25, Pu lfkbD=dJ.69 and Mu IDbiY .= 0.06
i~\h:
'i 1!'1
1·1·1
c . c.. M is talren about an #l""lllll •oren"' to that a>is- The fo\\OVIitlll .,..mple mustr, lhe
11 Wegetplfck . . =0.135 :. p =O.l35x20=_2J% < 2.74% :. OK !" . .... with "'' •s th
!dh:i
·w~ With the available charts in SP : 16, the value of p/ fc~~., is required, to be extrapolated from the ,..,r•.,...ent,... alsO.,....· 1 · ..,.. of a ca1tol'Y ··~ 300 """ .,.;de and 450 mm de '.
~" e~;
11:j~·i•''_
'i 1l .~ values obtained from d'ID = 0.15 and d'ID = 0.20 ·
analysis of sud> type of 1""' ""' ·
:4~i:
'I ·" ~~
i ;I
~~.t ,:
Ex. 11.7.4 Design a circular short RC.column to carry a working axial load of 450 kN _Ex- JJ.&l 'J. •hafl Jt cj 1 ,p2 ... dla"'kr """ "" .........., and 2 bors
""'"" JUs reinft>""l.,;Jll j<l< • jJie ''"""' hal to ,arry an axwl load of 200 0 ulh~ c

the.~of,. ;,. . ~ ra~£

at minimum eccentricity. Assume concrete- M 20 and steel- Fe-250. The unsupported length ,
~~ 'i 60 ""' if concrete " o'
5 l·t ,an cOfi'Y •abOill the ..m<!/or
mm diameter on compreSS1011...... kN.
, !!>'ad
is 4.0 m and the effective length is 0.85 times the unsupported length.

~ ,~'l1'1:J"'
idi
'iJ::'f Delermi
U:O and..steel 41 s.• 450"""
gtt>l' F• D effecl""'
, d:"""
• 60 -• d •"""
D-d' • 451l- 6\l 3%,. '

~
.,.: Given : P = 400 kN , fck=20 N I m.,, , fy = 250 N I mm2 , L = 4.0 , Leff =L x 0.85,
R\1).'
~·
. Required: Design of circular column. · ·
G!"'"-'- lr dOO""" • A • 4- #tJ."""· f.{' 7JJ N!!l..f, f(4\5N tnmi ,P
~f.~
"li,_>L

1" Solution : Pu =1.5 x 450 = 675 kN , L eff= 0.85 x 4=3.4 m = 3400 mm

~~l.'I SoloJ/IJR: 2-i'JJJ
Referritlll A.:: •Fig JJ.&I... ' • 628 ,;.m',. A, • 4 x JSO • 1520 ,.,1 kN
Required Dmm. = 3400112 = 283 mm for col. to be short. :. · ProvideD= 300 mm. 4

r--==\!00~
e_mm. =4000/500+300/30= 18mm<20mm :. emm.. =20mm A ==A :::o2>'31
s1 ·SC
, l-f'T
Mu.mm. = Pu x emm. = 675 x 20{.1000 = 13.5 kN.m~
t L .'up. .xu·
P11 l(j"~)=615x
c 1000/(20x3002 ):.0o.375
.· Mj(fckiY)= 13.5 X 106 t(20 X 3003 )=0.025 \
Assuming diameter oflink = 6 mm and main steel20 mm diameter, effective cover
d~ =40+6+20/2=56mm
ft
.

"' 1'
'-.?..fl-O

l: --;::::::::-.. .. ". 1 I
....... -·-··0 ~
X1
?.25
250

Fi:om Chart 54 of SP : 16 for PuI fck ~ = 0.375 and Mu !fck IY =0.025 f ,~...;.
ford'/ D = 0.15 , pIfck = i>.07 , d'l D = 0.20 , P/fck = 0.07
:. ford'/D =0.17, plfc~; =0.07
ds0 1.----
tt~·ttl Geome\!\C a~s •
_ p1as\ic c~lfOidal axiS
p = 0.07 X 20 =1.4 o/o
. .
11
11 ..o ~euual a"liS
d ...... "'"""" .... _ __ . , ""'"""'
.
c•
0
1t· .
A,= 1.4 x4x 30ol/100 = 990 mnr
"" "·"·" ............ I>"' •• •-
Provide minimum 4 - +20 mm giving ,, A,= 1256 mm2
·li'''-'/'•

~'I
!'}~i
\_/I
''l'
Sect. 11.9. Analysis of Circular Column 641
:lfi
/1~,!

'"'"'
l,r
Trial-2:
i!t
:it_ ~t x11 =234.2mm
::) pIIC =0.36 X20 X 300 X 234.2/1000 =505.87 kN
!!1
EI =0.0035 X (234.2-60)/234.2 =0.00260 .
E2 = 0.0035 X (2J4.2- 3~0) /234.2 = - 0.00233
1,1 ~347.69N,Imm2 , .1;2 =339.86 Nlmrrt ...... (Table 4.10.1)
r
J

fcl = 8.92 N I mrrt as e1 > 0.002 , ~2 = 0 as e2 is negative.

{~~:·~~t'
u4t(tl =
L Pusi [628 (347.69- 8.92) + 1520 (-339.86)] /1000 = 212.75-516.59 =-303.84 kN
1~M111 P11 =Puc+ L Pusi =505.87 '- 303.84 = 202.03 kN := 200 kN. :. OK
. 'II,)1,1'
Ill:!I! l' .'. Puc= 505.87 kN, Pusl =212.75 kN , Pus]= 516.59 kN
~~~ji
The moment Mup about the plastic centroid can be easily obtained.
m:rf,il
~-· ·~~~; Mup = Mucp + L Muspi

1:·~7~)-~
=Pucup
(x -0.4I6xu)+Pus1 xx1P· +PusZ'xx2:p
=[505.87 ( 250-0.416 X 234.2) + 212.75 X 190-516.59 (-140)] /1000
',) •t:l
Mup =77.18 + 40,42 + 72.32 = 189.92 kN.m.
1 11 1
.~~~~
1

lfti!ii 11.9 ·ANALYSIS OF CffiCULAR COLUMN SECTION

1'1~
~~·-,)~
:l 'I

IJ~j )

,.Ir.
:,!
,rl ..
•
Circular column sections are efficient in use of form-work and elegant in appearance: They
are arialysed using principle of statical equilibrium of forces on the same lines discussed in
!!i'l.

Sect 11.5.5 However, calculations become tedious on a account of

. geometrY of the compression zone (segment of a circle),
'lII"j
l
Trial-1: circular arrangement of bars, and
the geometry of the stress - block, especially the rectangular parabolic stress block
Let x, =0.6D=0.6 x450=270mm. i
'Ill:) adopted by LS. 456 acting over a segment of a circle.
Puc= 0.36~k bx, = 0.36 X 20 X 300 X 270/1000 = 583.2 kN
·.The Computation of total compressive force and deterlnination of its centroid is required to be '
l®"~u 1
& ="0.0035 (270- 60) 1210 = 0.00212 e = 0.0035 (270- 390)/270 =::-·o.OOI55 done by integratio~ technique. To avoid this, some shnplified pr~cedures have been proposed for
~}fsj -~3!:}.77 N lmm2
. -c-_-
j,!, 2
· for e 1 = 0.00272 ......-(!'.able 4.10.1) prac~ical tfesi~. These are 'as follows : · .·
l'!j , :' fa ~ 299.12 N I mm' fur 0, - - 0.00155
~2Nimm'ase1 >M02,
...... (Table 4./QJ)
II~
t,.•O.,e is-live, . . instead ofrectangular ~ parabolic ~iress block, rectangular stress block has been adopted
~ ~A;J -J) +A~~
--------- (fs1
=214~68- 454.66 =- 239.98 kN.
c 2 - /.c2 ) :
.1 ( / .S, {
2
628(350.77- 8.92) + 1520 (-299.12)} IIOOo" as given below :
I.- a·· Rectangular stress- block of q~pth x, with average stress equal to 0.36 fck for xu< D and
__) pil ·=puc + LPuri = 583.2 - 239.98 = 343.2 kN C1.Dforx11 > D(value ofC1 given in Table 11;5.1) is used. SeeFi$. 11.9.1 (a).
Since this
. calculated
. . of Pu ( = 343;2 kN) ismore than given value of Pu ( =200 leN),
value
I
j second trial-will
.
be taken decreasing .xu. n - a Rectangular stress block ofV¥idth 0.45 fck and depth a= 0.85 x, is used .
' This Stress block
.
is adopted by ACI
~ .
Code See Fig. ·11.9.1 (b).
 :·}.<j;:
""P
...--...,
642 Column

Chapter 11 Sect. ll.9 Analysis of Circular Column . 643

"4 0.36fci~ r-f:j O.B5f'c(in psi)

.Tljl
.

rDTQ\1~~-
0/2
(------\

a::o.as~~u :f- J:;a

*
11u \ o

012
-A I ,J . 1 1 j .::_ 1=1 '•, ia t._,

~
_j_ (~
J \ 1-¥" _,.--:\

(i) (ii)
m - m centroidat axis
n - n neutral axis (a) As= Total area of reinforcement.
(b)
( i ) = Equivalent section for compression failure. ( ii ) = Equivalent section for tension failure.
Fig. 11.9.1 : Circular Section ; (a) Assumed stress- block according to Practice- I Fig. 11.9.2 Whitney's Stress - block and Equivalent Sections
( b) Assumed stress - block according to Practice - II Ifany one ofthe simplified versions ofstress block is used, the analysis requires computation of
the geometric properties of a circle, namely, the area, the moment aboutthe centroidal axis, and the
Fo, xU > xU.Cr" i.o. wheo comp...,;on oontroh tho dosign, PU ;,
· furth., app•oxUnated by. moment of inertia about the centroidal axis (for calculation of stiffuess), which are obtained by
""""ing Hn"" voriation ofP and M ma.;, reg;on be'-o P Odoally axW load forM "0) and integration. The coefficients for these properties of circular segments are given in Fig. 11.9.3 for
u u ~ u
P"" ( load fo, bai"""<J -on ). Refoning to Fig. /I.J/. 4, and """"Wg ACE to be Sltlright Uno ready reference, and the underlying equations are given below (84/5) :
for simplicity, from similar triangles,
(I.Q...sin 6 j- ~1 ~~
·_12 ~
-
Ma
Mub
==
p·- p
uz
p - p
·ub
...... (I)
-o'll'-/~
.)6

!"11"
I
0.60

0.50I
/
v
"
~ u 0 '-... '- I kO
l_

:._ pu == pub +
M-M
ub
M
a
( p ~- pub)
dx= 2 -sin6 d6..f: ' ,

~"f'f
0
. 0.40)

D. 0.3 )
v
v -)
,---,

l
0.2' )
ub
012 . 0. )

Replacing Ma by Mu From Eq. ( I ) L K- 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7

- Ac= ~10 2
Mu == M
ub
(P~ -Pu)I(P~ - p ub )
(i) (ii)
~2 ~3
Ill- Whitney (42/I) Proposed an approximate alternative simple method according to which a
ci"""' column ofd;,ote< D mth st.el along poriph"'Y ;, replocod by an eqWvalent rectaogular
...... (11.7.1)
0.85

0.80 I/
0.027

0.026
,,
column ofdopth 0.8D and tho to1>1 amount of!Oog;rudinaJ reiDf""""ent is placodhaifon oach""' 0.75 I """ i\ 0.02 j ,.., 1/
of the centroid at a di""'ce D, I 3 from tho centroid wh...., D, is the d;.,...,. of a cin:le 0.7 1 I I \ 0.02 I v
ckcumscribing '"""" ofreU!forcement ;, tho Ol'ig;nal cttcul" column. 'l'h;, "''ulvaic:nt colllllUl f
"'~
0.6: ' 0.02 l
(85!5), Whitney also - 1/
--l:ootrols~
g;• ., results that are ;, good agreoment mth the that - · 0.6 1 I 0.0: ~
equivalont column""' be used for tho"" of smalloccontricltl., (whore
For doslgn controllod bylonsion, he recommends to uso clrcui., -on itselffur ofPr~ K= 0..3 0.4 . 0.5 0.6 0.7
and the g;ven st"l ;, "'Piaoed by placing 4!l% of total st.el on oach sido of the centroid at~.
K= 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
.
a· Acx= ~2o3 Ic= ~3o4
distance 3Ds I 8. See Fig. 11.9.2 (iv)
/ (iii)
 '
· A~alysis of Circular Column ·645
·i
'·'l'' i/ Sect. 11.9
-il
•)
644 Column Chapter 11
For the problem under consideration,
= 300mm, d'== SOmm. Ds == D-2d' == 300-2x50
1'.-T.I
~\1 D2fa . D2 ,'i:;'
.:if
D . == 200mm.
), Area of segment =A c = 2 . sin29 d9 =T (a- sin a cos a ) ...... ( 11.9.2)
d = 300 - 50 = 250 mm
'1~;! 0
lrr! A ==area of bar near highly compressed edge (Say top face)
1 Moment of segment
a~outthecentroidalaxis= Acx =
IY
T
fasin·29 ~~sa d9 = IY sin3 a/12
· ...... (11.9.3)
81 == 1x314 ==314mnt,x ==DI2 s =200/2=100mm
.
<lf i .·~ 1
I
0 As = area of bars near the bottom edge
~ Momentofinertia _ _
o'( 1the se~ent .about - Ic -
!!_fa·
sm2ecos2 9 d9 -
_ n4(4a- sin 4a) .
...... (11.9.4)
2
::: 1 x 314 = 314mnt, x2 =-100mm
8 256 A == area of bars in next lower row above centroidal axis
~ the~entr01dal ax1s 0 •
83 = 2>< 314 = 628mnt, x =(D8 !2) cos 60°=100/~= SOmm
J :.~v~ whe~ 2a = Angle subtended by the chord of segment of the circle at its centre.

•
.r; 3
~· \
As = area of bars in next row below centroida! axis
Th'iNmalysis of a circular column can be best illustrated by a numerical example rather than 4
~ by derivih~complica~ed equations. The followiDg problem is solved using rectangular stress block · = 2 x 314 = 628 mnt, x4 = -50 mm.
1~."$
~~,.
~I
given in Practice !Iabove.
~~
·'il' I Ex. 11.9.1 :A short R.C. column of circular section of diameter 300 mm is reinforced
(a) Bala)lced Section :
' 1 Yf,.~~;
For balanced section for steel of grade Fe 415,
x 0.48d* == 0.48 x 250 = l20mm , a= 0.85 x x = 0.85 x 120 = 102mm
~~~ with 6 bars of 20 mm diameter of grade Fe 415 equi~spaced along the circle with an effective ==
.. t'l
u.max u
rthj ~
cover of 50 mm. Determine -
k' == aiD ::: 102 I 300 :::0.34
' (a) Pu and MJor a balanced section. , . u
~~~.1 cos a = 1 - 2k'u = 1 - 2 x 0.34 = 0.32,
:.~~~ ·' . (b) Pu that can be allowed when Mu = 50ii:N.m,. sin. a ·={1".:.. (0.3i)2 = 0.9474, a= 1.245 radians.
~·
I~J
(c) Pu that can be allowed at a minimum eccentricitY. of 20 mm. A, • D'(~ s~
- .i; coi ~)/4
• 3oo' (1.245 - 0.9414 X 0.32) 14 • 21191 mm'
3
Assume concrete grade of M20.
x = IY (sin3 a )/12 == 3003 x 0.94743/12 = 1913298 mm
•• A
I

Solution:
~
r·, · .The algorithm for analysis is as follows. pc. c = 0.45 f. k A = 0.45 X 20 X 21119111000 = 190.719 kN.
uc c c
~
r:f - Calculate. Asl , As2 , As3 , x1 , x2 , x3 etc. · Muc = 0.45fcr4c:Xc = 0.45 X 20X 1913298X 10-6= 17.22kN.m
r'
~ - Taking , P , A . :X and Muc
a trial. value of xu, calculate Acuc·cc ., • OJl035 I x,- d') I X' • 0.0035 (120 - 50) /120 • 0.002042
,
Assuming equivalent rectangular stress block of value 0.45 ,fck & • 0.0035 I x,- D12 + x ) I x, • 0.0035 (120 - 150 + 50Y120 • 0.000583
3
a = 0.85 x u=x'u = k'uD •,3 c o:Oo35 1x.- D12 - x,J 1x, • o.0035 (120- 150 - 50) 1120 c- o.002333
k'u =aiD= 0.85 ku = 0.85 xJD & • 0.0035 I x,- D + d') I x, • 0.0035 ( 120-300 +50) 1120 • -0.003192

a =Semi - vertical angle made at the centre by the base of concrete segment in 2
fsl ,;, h9.2S Nl mm2 from Table 4.10.1 for s 1 = 0.002042
compression expressed in radians. f = E K = 0.000583 X 2 x 105 = ll60.60 N/mnf as &3 < 0.001444
cosa =l-2x'uID = (l-2k'u ). ' . a= '
cos-1 (1~2k')
. u .
~­ s
/ 3
. s s
= -'·33?.98 NI mm2 from Table 4.10.1 for &4 = -0.002333
Ac '= sin a. cosa. ) I 4 , .Ac.xc =. Ji3 (sin3 a) /12
IY ( a.. - \ f84 = -360.83 N I mm2 from Table 4.10.1 for s 2 == - .003792
P.UC = 0.45 fk. AC , MUC. = 0'.45 fk (A C. x)
C · C C fc82 = fci = 0 as &
4
and &2 are negative.
"f:.pusf , L. Musi and Mu are 'Obtained as in the case of reetangular section.
, Pu , 4
I I,p us1> · Asl (fsl -f.cl ) +
· As3 (fc3 -f.c3 ). + As4 (f's4 -f.c4 ) +· As2 (fs2 -f.c2-)
Note: Jn case
.
a rectangular stress distribution
'
of value 0.36 f..
i;A-
is assumed over a depth xII (as in ={314(329.2S-9P0)+628(116.6-9.00)+62S( -339.98)+314( -360.83)}/1000-
Method- 1 explained in Sed. 11.9) take ku in place of ku and xu in place of
k =x!D, a =cos- 1 (J-2k) .
'a' = 10057 + 67.57 ,...213.51-113.30 7 -,158.67 kN .::: ~
u u u
 c
Sect. 1].] 0 Column Subjected to Axial Compress ion nd B. .
646 Column Chapter 11 . a 1ax1al Bendin 647
If analysis is carried out accordmg to- Practice - I by as .
summgre g -
'£Musi= p ustxl + p us3'x3 + p us4'x4 + p us2.x2 of value 0.36 f ck over a depth x ; the vaJues obtained ctangular stress distribution
{ 100.57 X 100 + 67.57 X 50 - 213.51 (-50) -113.30 (-100)}/1000 . . u. . are as foil -
Practtce- II are also gtven for companson. ows. Values obtained by
10.057 + 3.380 + 10.675 + 11.33 = 35.442 kN.m.
PU = PUC +I: PUS/. = 190.719- 151!.67 = 35.442 kN.m
MU = MUC + '£MUS/. = 17.22 + 35.442 = 52.662 kN.m Mu in kN.m
52.662 52.662
:. e = . x 1000 = 1643 mm
32 049
18.149
(b) Given: Mu = 50 kN.m,
to obtain Pu.
This will have to be obtained by trial and error approach. - Additional Remarks :
The section under consideration can also, (as anothe ...
Trial-1: .Let xu == 175 mm, a = 0.85 x 175 = 148.75 mm say 150 mm. orientation, in which two bars are in a ho.rizo?talline at top, ~o~stbdrty:) be taken with different
On proceeding according to above steps, assuming a stress 0.45 fck over a depth 0.85 x .11 we get in a horizontal line at bottom as shown mFlg.ll.9.4 (ii). arsatdtametral axis and two bars (~\
Pu = 444.43 kN. and Mu = 52.143 kN.m, e = 117.32 mm. The calculations. for this
.
orientation
p . I
according to Practtce-I
. · th -
Values for former ortentatlon for ractlce- are also given by th .giVe e following results.
e stde for comparison.
The reader may verify the same as per the above procedure. The result shows necessity of

-e- e-
-,\
bne more trial.

Trial- 2 : Let xu = 300 mm, a = 0.85 x 300 = 255 mm.

Following the steps given above, we get Pu = 1066.81 kN and Mu = 18.149 kN.m, e = 17.01 /)

- We may obtain the value ofP corresponding to M = 50 kN.m. approximately by interpolation ( i) ( ii)
u u '
-·.because the given value of Mu = 50 kN.m. is nearer toMu = 52.17 kN.m,for xu = 175 mm.
·;f Fig. lt9.4
p !{~·
Trial xu inmm, u in kN Mu in kN.m e inmm
New Orientation
Former Orientation
1 175 444.43 52.143 117.32 PU' in leN _Mu in kN.m
Pu in- kN Mu in kN.m
43.72 ·50.953
2 300 1066.81 18.149 17.01 x
u
= 120mm 31.33 50.68

For Mu = 50 kN.m
- 52.143 - 50.00
pu = 444.43 + ;.1 _ .1 (1066.81 - 444.43)= 483.66 kN
I This shows'that the former orientation gives lower values of p and M and hence that
.
orientatio~ is critical.
II U

!
X
5 43 18 49
llJO COLUMN SUBJECTED TO AXIAL COMPREsSION AND BIAXIAL BENDING
(c) Given : e = 20 mm, to obtain Pu.
11.10.1 Introduction
Since given eccentricity is nearer to eccentricity e = 16.8 mm for trial- 2 for Xu= 300 mm, tlie
value of P,Jor e = 20 mm, may be approximately obtained by linear interpolation between The condition ofbiaxial bending and axial co.mpressio .
due to monolithtc constru~tion o CO umns w ea.ms in two diffe · . ~n WI column in R.C.
. . fI1 ithb ntsverycomm 'th
· Trial- 1 and Trial- 2 ~suits given in (b) above.
true for coiT!er column m [fcun~s, edge column with unequ rent direCttons. This is especially
1
adjacent spa?s; ~d even for an mtemal column with unequat.m?ans or. unequ~ loading i~ two
P =' 1066.81 -
20 0 17 0
· - · X ( 1066.81 - 444.43) - = 1048;26 kN orthogonal dtrecttons. -· - . · · · - .men~ m oppostte beams m two
II 117.32 - 17.01 - . . 1
·~'~Jfi. Column Subjected to Axial Compression and Biaxial Bending 649
Chapter 11 ~t.1l.t6
!·'I

··j 648 Column

Pu
:U:. The theoretical approach, essentially consists ofdetennining1the COll\lCt position and Orientatioo Pu

of the inclined neutral axis for the given sectional properties, physical properties ofthe constituent
materials and the accompanying interactive forces Pu·. Mux and Muy . This can only be done by
'assume' and 'verify' approach. However, any attempt to derive some formula or equation for
.--' design would be in vain because of sheer complexity of the problein which arises on account of 0~ '1
i number of variables involved.
_)·

m
i The cumbersome nature of the trial and error approach has already. been noticed in the ~ ~-

~
~~
problem ofcombined compression and uniaxial bending. Even in the process oftrial and error, main X
.
J.x .:
~~ difficulty arises due to irregular shape of the portion of concrete in compression and calculation of

~~~
rif~·
total compression Cu due to rectangular- parabolic stress distribution over this irregular shape. As
in circular sections many times approximations are made by either assuming an equivalent
(a)

~ rectangular block of width 0.45 _fckand depth 0.85 x0 or an equivalent stress block of width 0.36-fck
·~· over full depth
-
X with total compression acting at 0.42 X from the highly compressed edge. In
. u . u . (a) Pu...alnleraction Curve lor Column subjected to Unilixial Bendilg.
spite of these approximations, the problem still,. remains complex and the manual computations : ( b) Pu• 8x • ey Interaction Surfa!lG tor Column subjected to Biaxial Bending
. !

~ ·become
.
practically impossible. With the availability of computer facility
. now, the design engineers
·should not find it difficult to prepare programs for ~uch problems. Very generalised prograin
Fig.lt.tO.l: (a) P -e Interaction Curve fo~ Column subjected to Uniaxial Bending.
~ e ·- t Interaction Surf~ee for ColumnsubJ'eeted to Biaxial Bending
~i
8
. (b) P
software for a column_ subjected to axial compression; axial compression with uniaxial bending, •: " 1 . i .

I~ biaxial bending along with siender column is available with the author. Attempts have been m8(je
to simplify the assumptions to arrive at a simple procedure suitable for practical design with
·~r minimum acceptable deviation from the theoretical or test results.
·· In the case of pr~~lem of uniaxial bending, the interaction curves between Pu and e or Pu and
Mu are obtained as shown in Figs. 11.10.1 (a) and 11.10.3 (a) respectively. For the case of
biaxial bending and compression such interaction curves are obtained for different inclinations of
It -
axis of bending varying from 0 to 90° with one of the principal axes. The interaction curves of all ·
I .
such inclinations; between the two limits, form what is known as interaction surface and shown
~-;\ .
The secOnd type uses liP . e and e as the variables giving a failure surface as shown in
II X y
Fig. 11.10.2. [The idea of taking .reciprocal of Pu might have come frbm the fact thatPu comes
in the denominator in e (= M I P } and e ( = M I P }]. The third type offailure surface is
obtained as three- dimension~ extension of the P11 ~ M~ interaction curves of uniaxial bending and
x """ y uyu
axial compression as shown in Fig. 11.10.3 (b). The shape of type - 2 failure surface is like a
quadrant of a 'bowl' while that of type - 3 is like a quadrant of an 'onion'; The shapes of these
failure surfaces depend upon the physical and geometrical properties of the section and obviously
~ey are different for different column sections. However, attempts have been made by different
in reSearChers ( 60/4, 60/5, 61/4, 63/6, 66/6, 66n, 6618 } to identify and define the nature of these

Fig. 11.10.1 (b) and Fig. 11.10.3 (b). Because this interaction surface represents bourids for surfaces in. terins of Pu , M"" , M and the sectional properties. The second type· of failure
P u' Mux and Muy to avoid failure, it is also known as failure surface. Each point on or inside this surface developed by Bresler ( 60/3) and used by .Russian Code is helpful for analysiS while the
I/
!(
interaction. surface represents a set of PU , MUX and MU)' combination or PU , eX and e·y combination
. •
third type adopted by .many ofthe other Codes including I.S.. Code is suitable for design.
that is admissible for safety. _ 11.18.2 Bresler's ~eciproeal Surface ·Approach
·Principally three concepts emerge out from the various r~sear.ch WQrks carried out in this field · Bresler. defmed a reciprocal surface shown in Fig. 11.10.2 as an inverse of the P-e ·
·interaction surface with l/P , e_x and e as the interacting variables. The shape looks like that of a
ofbiaxial bending and compression. Bresler (60 I 3) and PanneU (63 I 5) have presented three types •·· bQwl u·mentioned earlier. 11Since; obtJ'ining an equation for a point on such a curved surface is
.ex
· of failure surfaces. The first type is obtained from interaction curves of Pu and eyas shown in diffic1,llt, B~ler attempted ~approximate the surface by an inclined skew plane passing through
Fig. 11.10.1( b). , ·~ _ . ' . J)aints.ACB in Fig. 11.10.2 (j,ust on the lines ofapproximating a curve by·a straight Iine·in the
region of interest in Fig. 11.io.i (b) }. · .
 ''IJ':"' \'!f.~

650 Column
.
~
I

Chapter II \
Sect. 11.10 Column Subjected to Axial Compression and BiaXial Bendmg 6J 1 ~~

Pu
Pu PJPtil.
.1.0
Pu Mu Interaction Curve

y
D
"----

-~~~·~,· (f.;""
•'•tl ,.·
1/IJ{~I~ Mu
If! I c """'C' I I ' -x Pu = Mu Interaction Curve
Muy
Mux

I\',~:.I:'
I
lly
{a)
{b)
Mux = Pu ex ' Muy = Pu lly
1!i! (a) (b) (c)

~
IJ~~ Fig.11.10.2: Bresler's Reciprocal surface for Biaxial Bending of Columns
I
Fig. 11.10.3: (a) P0 - M0 Interaction for column Subjected to Uniaxial Bending.
I
I
He obmined equations for a pointE whieh lies either below or above pointE'on this plane, whkh (b) P0 - M0 Interaction Surface for Column subjected to Biaxial Bending
~I approximates pointE on the true surface, and is of the following form: (c) Interaction Curves in Non-dimensional form for Biaxial Bending
-I == -I + - I __ I
I
I

.!., P. p p p
I X y Z
I ...... Ol.IO.l)
I It may be noted that interaction contour for a given value of Pu will be a circle for a sectiOJl ""'
I
II
'{' where, P. = approximate load obtained by Eq. II.IO.lfor the point E. symmetrical about diagonal axis (square section, or a circular section with uniformly spaced
j-i Pn = actual load corresponding to pointE' reinforcement), whil~ it will be an ellipse for an unsymmetrical sections. The effects ofvarious
il p
~I p
X
= P corresponding to·uniaxial eccentricity e from x- axis (e =0).
·parameters, namely, ratio of distance betweeri the opposite reinforcement to corresponding
·r' , y dimensions ofthe column , the ratio of dimensions bID, r~inforcement index Pi/fck , strengths of
p = P corresponding to uniaxial eccentricity eX from y- axis (ey =0). concrete and steel (fck·fy) were studied with t~e aid of computer by Parme(66/6) and it was /
z = Pure axial strength when e =e =0. y X --\

y '·
. .. that the shape of the curve is primarily a function of PuI P reinforcement index and
observed
X
~

strength of reinforcement.
It bas been. shown by B"'Jer and Pannell thatEq. 1U 0.1 gives neady.eolTeet -Its within
Parme obtained the interaction curve in terms of ,non-dimensional parameters
I 0% accurney " -pared to """'a! test "'ulb, up to a range o£P, I P, > 0.06.
PU I P , M.UX I MUX 1 and MU I MU)l 1 calling them 8's 'relative loads' and 'relative. moments-' i.e~
indi<>~te<~
~

~
It bas been_ 6y Pannell this foumaJI valoos of1ixiaJ loads with Pu I P < 0.06, the loads in relation to strengths; Pu, Mux and Muy. being the values of forces for biaxial·benditig while ·
values
. obtained by using Eq. 11.10.1 may be incorrect.
Puz is strength in axial compression
. forMux =Muy =0,
The surface is obtained for these non-dimensional parameters.
Use ofth...,_equation, netes•i- derennination ofP, and P, """'Ponding to two,_ of
uniaxia) bending and therefore, it eotresponds to two problem, of uniaxial bending. The equation for such an inter- action surface is given ey,
11.10.3 Bresler's Load - Contour Approach
)an + ( _2L
M )a.·n = 1
I.

~
·(_ux_
M ...... (11.10.2) ~-.
In this. approach, the in!eraetion "'rlilee is obtained between Variables P,, M and M., by M · M
~"'Sing
ux1 . uyl
obtaining P,- M, intenction <urve (Fig. 11.11Ba ). A horizontal Plane through '""h an
iDten.etion
known ouface
as Load - contours. • betwe.n
giv., an interaction curve M~ and M., foi: given P,. s..,h curves are value of an= 1 shows a square interface while an= 2 gives a circle: Bresler has also suggested c. :"
that .in practical design, it is sati~factory
.
to take values of an between
.
1.15 to 1.55 for rectangular
. ..
"'"
~•

·~o.-t:""" <ln·tl 1 'i to 2 for souare sections.- ....

 ~~!Il)
'iF'
652 Column.
·~:rfU Chapter 11
\~:·,'11 J;S. C()de has also adopted this
Eq. ll.J0.2 shall not exceed I.
app~oach. According to I.S. 456 the left hand side of the Sect. 1J.JO .Column Subjected to Axial Compression imd Biaxial Bending 653
·..i.'ll.~ i ; -~ Required: To check safety.
:.: i~
l ;

r,~ il
'. 1 M )an ( M )an
ie. ( M ux + Mil)' ~ 1 ...... (II.IOJ)
Solution :Puz = 0.45 fkA
c g + ( 0.751·-0.45/k)
y c Asc
uxl 11)11 · = {0.45 X20 X230 X300 +(0.75 X 415-0.45 X20)X 1256} X 10-- 3
= 100o.6 kN.
. •·where, •Aluxi = uniaxial strength for bending about x-axis for given Pu when MIIJ' "" 0, and
MII)'1 = uniaxial strength for bending abouty-axis
· ·
for given PU when M11X = 0. pu - 340 = 0.34 X 1 + 1 ::, 1.23 (Fig. I 1.10.4)
i-'11
p 1000,6
uz
'-y{r.
l,,1(,, It further relates an to the ratio PuI Puz. The Code recommends to take an varying linearly
.
from
I.Oto2.0forvalues ofP,/Puz varying from 0.2to0.8respectively. For P,/PliZ <0.2, an= l.O,and p 1256 X 100
= 0~09 , fck bD = 20 x 230 x 300 x 10-3 = 1380 kN.
If:''
Jll''
~ ·l'\'
. ' I
=
for Pu I PliZ > 0.8, an 2.0. This is shown graphically in Fig. ll.1 0.4
fck 20 X230 X 300

"r
J~1~
1 ,2 pu 340
r/\' 1380 = 0·246 say 0.25
:{ <Xn1 fekbD
(

fff.
'
bend' .bout x-axis. d'ID = 60/300 =0.2 ·
iJij
0.2 o:4 0.6 0.8 Chart No. d'ID p 1fck pu I( fckbD) Mj(fekblY)
~I PuiPuz~
4 0.20 0.09 0.25 0.133
_..
rr
-:_-:.....-

Fig. 11.10.4 Variation of a,. witb P I P

.. . ~
1 U liZ . . Mutl = 0.133 X 1380 X 300 I 1000
~
g SP {16)(80121 gives in-.;on curveS of Mm IMul and M,.tM., for dl1ferent vaJollit;,r .
a, 'b 60 f 230 = 0.26
. whkh can be reodily usod in solution of the pmblem. In P~is axialioadaturo eccentricity given
' -by:
or
PliZ= 0.45,fckAc + 0.75fyAsc
PliZ = 0.45 Asc
1

...... ( Eq. 11.3.6)

Chart No.
4.
d'lb
0.20
plfck
0.09
P,/ (,fckbD)
0.25
:. M,/ (feiz D)
0.133
' fkA
c g + (0;751-y
0.45 fk)
c -
5. 0.25 0.09 0.25 . 0.115.
Ex,.JJ.JO.I A. R C. column rectangular in section 230 mm wide and 300 mm deep is
r,eiriforced with 4 bars of 20 mm one at each comer with an effective cover of 60 mm. It is - 0.26 0.09 0.25 0.1114 byexttapolation
subjected to. an ullimate tU:_ial load of 340 kN, ultimate bending moment ofMux = 30 leN. m Mil)'/ = O.lll4 X 1380 X 0.23 35.36 kN.
. about x-axis bisecting the depth and an ultimate moment of M = 18 kN; m about y-axis
(
. bisecting the width _of the column. Assume concrete of grade M 20 and ofgrade Fe 415, st~e/ MI« )an + ( MII)' jan
M~ ~ JO IN.m mid M., ~ lBIN.m
. <1
(a) Ch.ck tk "!fo1y Of!he<»!- if P, •. 340 IN, (
Mutl .· . MIIJ'I '
· (/J) Determine M~« , if MIIJ' = 10 lcN.m for the same value of Pu = 340 leN
~y (c) Determine MIIJ',. if M~« = 20 leN. m for the same value ofP =340icN Left (han: sid\:~ give(n b; \
3 1.2J
if 0 8
::;
(d) Find Mut,
.. · Solution::
Pu:,; 425 kN,_MIIJ' =;: 18/cN. m
. . , ·
11
. . 55 .1 J
+ 35 .36 J . =0.909 < I :. safe.

"----")
··(a'
l . GlvenP=340icN,
U

·A
. sc
M11X =30/cN.m ,MII)' =18/cN.m,
=4#20=Ii56mnt
: . .'
. ·.

1ck =20NI;n,nl. :~·t,=4ISN!mlil

. . . ,, : y . '
b'=230nvh;~·D·=300mm
d:=i!"mm
, vv .
(b) Given·: Pu = 34Q A;N , ¥~ = 10 ~lh- ; b 230 mm, [)
fck
As
=20 !VI~ •. 1y = 415 Nlm171
= l25611111f
= =300 mm , d' = 60 mm.
:. p = 1256.X 100 I (230 X 300) . """ l..U:.%
I
~
 r·
!!!""
654 Column

Required : Mux Chapter II Sect. JI.JO Column Subjected to Axial Compression and Biaxial Bending 655
Solution:
Benditig .aiJ out y- axis
Since Punaltered.
remain U , d'!D, d'!b, plfu
CK isthesame,MUX andMuy theuniaxialstren d' lb = 60/230 = 0.26 ".'S",
1 1

~ M
55.1ux
~1. +
3 35.36
-
t
10 ~1.23
2

=1
~ M ~1.23'"'(1-0
,:,---.!!!__
55.1
!bout two axes

I
Chart No.
4
5
d'! b
0.20
0.25
plfck
0.09
0.09
PulfciD
0.31
0.31
:. M/fciD2
0.12
0.105
:. Mux = 45.4 kN. m - 0.26 0.09 0.31 0.102 By extrapolation
·a,···,·
:fjl (c) Given : Pu = 340 kN, Mux = 20 kN m. 102 X 1380 X 230/1000 = 32.37 kN. m
Required : To find Muy )

'lli~'
n··
~0 j \

~ ~ ~ (I - 0.446)111375
1.375 ( 18 1.375 -
!I!
,,'l'l
Solin \' ll+ ( -!!"'-.__s 2l
.}
...
- +
32.37
. -1 .. _ ( ::8

\~ 55.I
-(3~~~ ~ (
'

j
~ii / ,- 35.36 / ·~
-~
1-0-28 ",. :.Mux = 32.33 kN m
I :. Muy = 35.36 x 0. 759 = 26.84 kN. m
111.23
.,
. using Chart- 25 of Handbook or Chart - 64 of SP 16
~ (d) Given : P. = 425 kN
u
uy I = 18 I 32.37 = 0556 and Pu I P = 0.425 ~ ~~

f f'y = 415.N!mm
.
2
Muy = 18kNm
fck = 20N!m.
:.Mux I Mux 1 = 0.651 -,

d' = 60mm
b = .230mm :. Mux = 0.651 X 49.68 = 32.34 kN. m
IJ D = 300mm.
1'1
[1' Required : Mux Asc = 1256mm2
~ a multistoreyed building a comer column is subjected to an axial ultimate load L·)
i
l'
Solution:
and an ultimate moment of 85 kN.m bisecting the depth of the column .The ultimate
,-~~Ig
In this case it~ required to obtain
M;_1, a. ,.d then ""' i._.on equation to ge ling the width of the column is 35 kN.m. The effective length of the column about
i. uz axis are 5m and 3 m respectively. The unsupported length about both axes is -,
p =[ 0.45 X20 X230 X 300+(0.75 X 415-0.45 X 20) X 1256) /1000 = t vironmental condition is severe. The steel grade used is Fe500 . Design the short
p )0.6 kN,.
-2_.
p. 425 ( 0.425 - 0.2 ) '
.>

~
I

uz = 0.425 , an = ( 0. _ 0. ) xI+I = 1.375

8 2 ,r--.)

fck bD = 20x 230x 300/IOOO = l380kN, P/(J::khD) = 42511380 =0

=601300=0~2
~,

d'!D , p= I256xiOOI(230x300) =1.82%

. :. P/fck = 1.082 I 20 = 0.09

Bending about x - axis

6~
Chart No. d'!D
pIJ::~c PJ(fckbD) :. M l(f* h!Y) )
4 .
0.2 0.09 u c
0.31 0.12
·. M.~~ ·= 0.12 x l'llln "' """, OAA-

.49;68 kN. m
 656 Column (:
Chapter 11 Sect. 11.11 Slender Column 657
4500 500 ' .
e =- the column is small, the displacementJs negligible and it can be taken care ofby, some part of the
minx 500 + 3() =25.67mm
minimum eccentricity prescribed by the Code for axially loaded eolumns and s~h a colwnn is defined.
M ux.mm. 2IOO x 25.67/1000 = 53.9 kN.m < 85 kN.m as short. According to I.S. Code, a column is said to a.short- column if Lejh is lessthanorcqual
M .
uy.mm 2IOO x 20 I 1000 = 42 kNm > 35 kN.m to 12. If Lejh exceed I2, the column is said to be long or slender column. The analysis and design
i :. Muy = 42kNm.
PI f;;k I. 2 I 30 = 0.04 of sl.ender column, requires special consideration. .
f;;kbD Pij P Pu

p 30 X 300 X 50011000 = 4500 kN ' p u I (fk c

bD) = 2IOO I 4500 = 0.47
uz Mi= PJte
( 0.45 X 30 + (0.75 X 500-0.45 X 30) X 0.0I2) .x 300 X 500/1000 = 2675.7 kN
I • \·

:r.l'···· ·
ui" :.PIP I
;:'<~! u uz 2100 I 2675.7 = 0.785 , an= I +(I x 0.585) I 0.6 = 1.975 I

l~l.
d'ID = 61/500 = 0.122 and d'l b = 61/300 = 0. 2 I
I
~HH1··.
I. )lo·
I
I
Chart No. d'ID __..61_ ea = 6.

1rm1 · P/fck pu l(f;;k bD) I

from SP-16 :.Mu I (fk
c biY) I
'r·~~]
/·11 ~ 36 0.10
I
I
~~··I 0.04 0.47 I
37 0.055 \
0.15 0.04 Mi = Puxe
1 0.47
fflf:i'
,· --- 0.122
0.050
by interpolation /" Pu p p
4mr 38 .0.00528 \ . ~........... u u
iltll ' 0.20 0.04 (a ) Bucking ~i'~i~oaded Slender Column
0.47 (b) Bucking of Eccentrically Loaded Column

JP:r~'.
0.048
Fig. 11.11.1 Buckling of Axially Loaded Slender Column

'!
·' .J.;·~·
'.'
'·
Mux1 =0.0528x J;;kbiY = 0.0528 x 30 x 300
2
x5002 x10· 6 =II8.8kN.m
Muy/"' ,0.048 x J;;k b D = Q.048 x 30 x. 300 2 x 500 x 10 · 6 = 64. 8 kN.m 11.11.2 Slenderness Effect
A slender column under the action of axial compression deflects appreciably necessitating

~~( 85 jt.~s ( j 1.975

42 separate consideration of the eccentricity and, hence, that of the bending moment due to lateral
( 118.8 J 64.8 J = 0.94 < I :. safe displacement of the column. The axial compression due to axial load may be called as Primary
''N-!" I
effect while the bending due to load becoming eccentric may be c~lled the Secondary effect.
Many. times, the external load P~ Itself is eccentric ori the coiumn (by an amount say e) inducing a
r) Area of steel = 1.2 x 300 x 500 I I00 = I800 mml
Provide 6- # 20 in'm, Area provided= I885 mm2
.
bending moment initially= Pu x e or at times the external axial load Pu is accompanied by external
Transverse .Reinjorc~ment moment M.I In such cases, the primary effect .is axiai compression plus initial bending moment PU.e
r·
Diameter of lateral ties < ~ I 4 < 20 I 4 say 6 mm or Mu. A slender column is then subjected to additional eccentricity eaand additional moment
i{'J Pitch :t ( b or I6 x 20 or 300 mm) whichever is less Ma = Pu.ea due to lateral displacement ea as shoWn in Fig. ll.JJ.Jb which is called the
Provide ~ 6 inm lateral ties at 300 mm clc . Secondary effect. Thus, the effect of slenderness is to give rise to this secondary effect. Analysis
of slender column therefore involves consideration of the effect of slenderness on its Strength.
'i<
r-)
11.11 SLENDER COLUMN
11.11.3 Behaviour and Strength of a Slender Column Failure Modes
)
11.11.1 Introduction The behaviour of a slender c~lumn can be best studied from the Pu- Mu interaction diagram
A colu~ under the action of axial compression deflects laterally causir·g maximum lateral for the column. A typical Pu- Mu interaction. curve for a compression
. member is shown in
deflection at the centre as shown in Fig. 11.11.1. This makes the load eccentric at the centraf Fig. JL l1.2a. It has already be.en observed earlier in Sect. 11.5 that in compression controlregion
section of the column by a distance A subjecting the section to bending moment equt>l toP6in of the Pu- Mu interaction curve, increase inberiding moment Mu on the column reduces the load
·,_,/ addition to axial load P . This displacement is a function ofthe length ofthe column. Ifthe length of carrying ci!,pacity of the colu~n. In case of a short column,. the maximum lateral displacement·
 Pr)I .

·'!)'I
., . li58 Column
i Chapter . IJ
l t~ !bo odditional """'lricRy '•) ~negligible and therefore;, load catryDtg capacRyP, ;, Ja.ge.,
Sect. ll.JJ Slender Column 659

~ interaction curve, corresponding to initial moment~- The segment

i:
sbQWn by point Bon the. Pu- (iii) Initial moments or eccentricities eI and e2 ofthe load at two ends including their magnitude
ABO is thils for a short column. In the case of long column, a secondary moment Ma = Pu. e of and sign. Slenderness effect is maximum fore I =ei = e occurring on the same. side of the
'~iabtemagnitude is Dtduced maddition 1o initial'->entM; giving1olaJ momentA(, M, +M,
· .
i
i!
column producing single curvature. See Fig. 11.11.5a. The effect is maximum in double ·.)
0
curvature when column is unbraced because additional displacement occurs at the ends
Pu only due to side sway. See Fig. 11.11.6.
A (iv) Amount and disposition ofreinforcement.
Material failure (v) Grades of concrete and steel.
short column
Mode· 1 Material failure
(vi) Amount and duration of sustained load. Creep causes increased additional displacement.
'"\liM~\( ~lender column
-,_.XC
Pu B1
,Pu • Mu Curve for The effects ofvarious parameters ·have been studied by Mac- Gregor (70/7). They have also
Long Column
presented the methods for modification of moments and forces in slender columns due to each
factor.
('
E
0 11.11.4 Design Methods
Mu- . E
OB • Mi line lor short column It has been observed earlier in Sec. 11.11.3 that the effect of slenderness is to cause
(a) Pu • M0 Interaction Curve for a Column OC • Mi + Ma line lor long column
additional moment M and consequently, reduce the load carrying capacity corresponding to total
(b) Pu. M0 Interaction Curve for a Long Column a '
design
•
moment M1 = M.1 + Ma. The analysis of slender column therefore necessitates 6~
Fig. 11.11.2 Pu- Mu Interaction Curve determination of lateral displacements. As the behaviour of R.C. column at ultimate state is
~ ~
The increase in moment from to lowers the point on the curve from B to C. The effect neither truly elastic nor truly plastic as in the case of steel columns, the usual elastic and plastic
ofadditional moment~is thus to reduce the load carrying capacity ofa column from that given by theories well established for steel columns are not applicable to R.C. columns. Besides actual
pointB on the interaction curve1o that given by point C. Besides the lateral d~placement
',(and
determination of lateral displacement by elastic theory also involves second-order analysis.
Because oflack of exactness of the behaviour ofR.C. column at ultimate state, it is not considered
hence the additional moment At )
does not vary linearly with the load but at a higher rate (OC does · necessary to use exact second order theory for the analysis. Instead, approximate design methods
not t(lerefore represent a straight line in Fig. 11.11.2 ). This non - linearity reduces the load further. are evol:ved to suit practical design ofR.C. slender columns. These are as follows:
In both these cases, failure of column is by failure of column material (i.e. crushing of concrete). (i) Moment Magnifier Method .It magnifies the primary moment M.I by a magnifying
This mode offailure is known as material failure. Such failure is common in braced columns.
factor. This approach is used by ACI- 318.(95/1)
If the column is too slender, the lateral displacements and hence secondary moments are
(ii) Additional Moment Method It calculates lateral displacement i.e the additional
large, (as in the case ofunbraced columns) and the column tends to buckle prior to failure of
eccentricity and hel).ce additional moment by first order curvature analysis taking help of the actual
material. This is shown by curve ODin Fig. 1J: 11.2. The failure ofsuch as column is by buckling.
curvatures observed on number of test columns ( 72 I 6 ). This has been adopted by B S : 8110 and . '
or elastic instability and, tlierefore, known as instabilityfailure. This is called Mode - 2 failure. Atl
I.S. 456. This will be discussed in subsequent sections at length.
infmitesimal increase in axial compression produces suddenly large lateral displacement disturbing (iii) Reduction factor Method: It consists of applying a reduction factor to the strength of .· ,,
the equilibrium and leading to sudden and catastrophic collapse.
short columns to get the reduced strength oflong columns. The reduction factor is obviously made
From this behaviour ofslender column shown by curve ACOin Fig. I U 1.2, the Interaction
a functi01i of slenderness ratio. this method is crude and does not take into account fully all the ·
curve11,11.2;(h).
Fig. for slender columns for different slenderness ratios can be obtained as shown in
factors affecting strength oflong columns. It was used by many Codes including I.S.Code in their
earlier versions. But it has now been obsolete.
The behaviour and strength of a column depends upon the following factors.
(i) SlendemessratioLe.ff/h. · . .· . 11.11.4.1 Additional M~ment Method

I
In this method, the additional eccentricity occurring as a result of lateral displacement of
r~straints. Unbraced column has sreatcr ~!ffective length ·
slendem~ss
(Ji) · Degree ofrotational and lateral column is calculated based on first order analysis i.e. linear relation between curvature and the
.·and.... -...!
·'..:...tr large~~-·lateral
also____ . ,. displacement
.. itt -the ends. In case ofbtaced columns, the displacement. The curvature distribution is aSsumed on the basis of experimental test results
on large number ofcolumns. since the curvature happens to be maximum for balanced section, the' -
 660 Column
Sect. 11.11 Slender Column 661
Chapter 11
Consider a braced column pinned at both ends and subjected to an axial load P • Maximwtt 2 2 2
PuL e PuL e PuD ( Le )
deflection occurs at mid height. Since the lateral deflection is a function of curvature 11distributioa
along the length of member, it is obtained from the curvature diagrainusing Mohr's theorem. The
:. Ma = Pu x ea and Mb = ---w;:- = 1820D = 1820 "J}

curvature distribution for RC. column can be assumed to lie between un-conservative triangular This expression is further approximated by l.S. Code to a simplified form as :
•'
distribution (as in the case of central transverse point load}implying single critical section at
mid-height and a conservative rectangular distribution {as in case ofequal and opposite moments
· PDu (L)- e
Ma = 2000 D
2

...... (ll.ll.l)
Mat both ends) implying infinite number of critical sections along the length. See Fig. 11.1 1.3.
It niay be of interest to note that Eq. 11.11.1 adopted by Code is in fact a simplified form of
the expression given by Cranston ( 72/6 ) based on his experimental investigations.
~(r\
Actual
Rectangular conservative
Accord~g to Crans:on, ( Le ) .
1mi. ~Triangular unconservative
-,. = -.-- I - 0.0035 x -D for balanced condition and e = L2 · /10 r .
• ti 175D . . a e u
~ill': 2 2
PuL-.e PuL e ( Le )
:.P xe = - - . -
lOr.
:. M = 1150D
_I-0.003Sx-
D·
uw,· u a
u
a
'i"')
For common values of LeI Dvarying from 15 to 40, the corresponding values of 1/ ruvaries
l~
. ' Curvature Diagram froni l/185D to 11203 D. I.S.Code takes a value 1/ r u = 1/200 D and recommends,
'
11 Fig. 11.11.3 Curvature Diagram for Additional Moments Method
Ma =
PD
20~0
(L )
De
2

. ...... (11.11.1)
~: Deflection at the centre (ea) is given by moment of.the curvature diagram between the centre
and column end about the column end. ·
For rectangular distribution ea =. L2e I 8 ru 11.11.4.2 Reduction Factor Method.
--
tr;.,
For triangular distribution e = L2 I 12 r
For parabolic distribution
x e
ea = L 2e I (
9.6 ru ) and
u
It may be noted that Eq JJ.J 1.1 corresponds to additional moment Mub due to maximum
curvature which occurs when the load Pu on the column is equal toPub for the condition of maximum
. -~--
For sinusoidal distribution e = L2 1( 1t2 r ) tensile strain of0.002 in the outermost layeroftensioti steel. For any value of Pu less than Pub the
· a e u . curvature, and hence, the additional eccentricity ea, is bound to be less. Since this reduction is quite
where, Le =Length
. .
of column between pinned ends i.e. effect_ive length of column.
tv 1 I ru = .curvature
. at the centre.
appreciable, both I.S.Code and BS : 8110 ailow reduction ofadditional eccentricity ea by a reduction
factor given by : P - P
~I As suggested by Cranston ( 72/6) and adopted by B.S. 8110 ( 85 I 4 ), I.S. Code also takes
k = p uz _ / ...... ,(11.11.2a)
pi average value of ea ='L2e!l0 'u· uz ub

J( balan~<ed condition.
Pu
Now the curvature would be maximum where strains are maximum as for

T:l .
··e +e
1( r ~
d
e +.e
=
...:!-
..
sy for simphctty.
U,
'-.c
r· I.S.Code prescribes one constant value. of esy = 0.002 in place of esy for aU giades of steel, ~
. ~-----+-a

rj
r~ ~- ~
and defmes that condition as balanced condition when ecu ':= 0.0035 and esy = .002

1r;' --=.
'u
0.003S + 0.002
D
. =----182D. / 0 B Mu
1/
·· Fig. ll.lM :. ~eduction Factor to be applied to Additional Moment
 ~,·

662 Column /~"<"-

Chapter II Sect. ll.J I · Slender Colwnn 663

I.S. Cod~ uses symbol Pb instead of Pub' This reduction factor can be obtained from Table 11.11.1 Values of k1 , k2 for Calculation of P06 for Slender Columas
Fig. ll.ll.4 as follows. When the initial moment is zero, the interaction curve in Fig. I U I.4 will
represent for additional moment only. In this figure : (a) Values. of k 1
OA = Puz for zqro eccentricity
d'/D
OC1 =Actual load Pu, Section 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20·
C1C = Actual Ma corresponding to Pu ,
Rectangular :
OE1 = Load Pub
pub = ( kl + k2p I fck) fckbD 0.219 0.207 0.196 0.184
El = Mub corresponding to Pub'.
Assuming linear variation in the region AE, . Circular :
... ,.
_M_a_ = _Ac_1_= _o_w_-_o_-'-c1 Puz - Pu p - p pub = (kl + k2p/fckJfcP
2
0.172 0.160 0.149 0.138
Mub AE1 OA - OE k = uz u
p - p
1 uz ub Puz-Pub·
(b) Values of k
Puz = 0.45jkc Ac + 0.75jy Asc
= 0.45fckAg + ( 0.75J;, - 0.45,fck)Asc ...... (Eq. 11.11.2b)
Section f.y in d'ID
Nlm1ff 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 {--\
= [0.45fck +(0.75iy -0.45,fck) p] Ag ...... (Eq.11.11.2b)
Pub =axial load corresponding to the maximum compressive strain of0.0035 in concrete Rectang~lar 250 -0.045 -0.045 -0.045 -0.045
- Equal reinforcement. 415 0.096 0.082 0.046 -0.022
and tensile strain 0.002 in outermost layer of tension steel. on the opppsite sides 500 0.213 0.173 0.104 ' -0.001
Value ofPub can be obtained from firstprincipletakingE s =0.002
Rectangular 250.--. 0.2'15 0.146 0.061 .. -0,011
pub =(kl + k2p!,fck)fciD = ki.fciD + (k2As x100) ..... , (11.11.2c) -Equal reinforcement 415. 0.424 0.328 0.203 0.028
:where, p = 100 tV (b D) on the all sides. 500 0.545 0.425 0.256 0.040
Circular 250 0.193 0.148 0.077 -0.020
It ~ay be noted that as the factor k depends upon the actual load capacity Pu. It indirectly 415 0.410 0.323 . 0.201· 0.036
takes into account the long term effect due to creep which is also a function of P . It may also be 500 0.543 0.443 0.291 0.056
mention~;:d that if the failure is of tension type, in such a case the reduction factor
u
may not.be Note : k1 is a dimensionless coefficient ~hile 100 k2 gives stress ( N I mm2 )
considered.
Thus, with the intr.oduction of reduction factor k, actual additional moment reduces to

M·
a
p D_ _ _
= _u
·2000
e(L )2
D
xk
...... (11.11.3)
11.11.4.3 Initial Moments and Total Design Moments
As seen in Sec.ll.ll.3, the total momentM; is summation of initial inoment ~and additional
.o,f,

moment Ma' For design, one is interested in maximum total moment which may not be at a section
Since this equation involves k which is a function of Pub and since Pub cannot be obtained
where additional moment is m~mum. Therefore, it becomes necessary to investigate the position
without knowing percentage steel p, the process of design again reduces to assume and try
approach. and amount of maximum total moment.
It depends upon-
(i) the ratio of initial end moments M1 1Uld M2,
SP (16) (80/4) gives·tables for calculating Pub' Vahies of k and k are given in Table 11.11.1
1 2 (li) sign of M1 _and M2 i.e. ~nding of column into single or dotible curvature, and
_....·
(iii) .Whether the C()llimn is laterally braced or unbraced.
 · Slender Column 665
664 Column Chapter 11 Sect. 11.11
(2) Braced Column - Double Curvature See Fig. 11.11.5 (b) :
Pu Pu
~Mu2 -1 Column bends into double curvature when initial moments at the ends Mul and Muzare such
r---1
as to cause opposite types of bending. The eccentricities e1 and ez are of opposite sign. In this
case, total moment happens to be maximum in the middle of the point of contraflexure towards the
end with larger moment Mu •The total moment is also less because initial moment of a particular
t· 2
sign acts only over part of the length. In certain cases, M.1 + Ma may be. less than Mu2. In such
0.6L
cases design moment isM.
. I
+M(I or MU2 whichever is greater .

:\n,:
j;J'
-l Mu1 1-
1 -1 Mu1 f--
According to l.S. Code,
Mu = M.+M but{Mu2
...... (ll.ll.4b)
Mu1 Pu 1 . a ...... (ll.ll.Sb)
.{ll'n
~Ill! Pu where, M.I =0.6MU2 -0.4MU1 but 1:0.4MU2
cc 1 = 0.4Mul cc2 = o.6Mu2 c 1 ~=M;
tli!i
C2C3=Ma C1Cs=M;+Ma
(3) Unbraced Column: (Relative lateral displacement of ends of members not prevented ),
( a ) Braced Column - Single Curvature ( b ) Braced Column - Do~ble Curvature
lffil::' See Fig. 11.11.6 (c).
The columns subjected to sway normally bend to double curvature because of
;~~· Fig.ll,ll.S Initial Moments, Additional Moments and Total Design Moments for Slender Columns
. ) displacement of column end with higher initial momentMu2
Based on above, following cases arise. \.--1 ,
~t
Pul """\
1

(1) Braced Column (No relative Displacement of ends of members) M,_..._ \ Ma M; \

~~ Single Curvature: (Fig. ll.l1.5 a)

r :.
Column bends into single curvature when initial moments at the ends M1 and M2 are such as
to cause the same type of bending. Eccentri:cities e1 and e2 have the same sign. In this case, total
moment consists of initial moments due to eccentricities plus additional moments due to lateral
~

;f.-": deflection. The secondary additional moment gets added to the initial moment near mid height.
.::.·

'
According to I.S. Code, total ultimate design moment ( M1 =M) is given by: (d)
Pu (c)
·'' ...~. . )

Mu = M; + Ma but { Mu2 ...... (1 Lll.4a) Fig. 11.11.6 Unbraced Column

where, Ma = additional moment due to slenderness,
When column bends into single curvature, the total deflection is maximum neither at mid .
M.I = initialmomentatpointofmaximumtotalmoment = 0.6 MU2 + 0.4 MU1 ...... (ll.ll.Sa)
height nor at supports. Also the total moment may not b~ greater than Mu2. So design moment shall
. .

Mu 2 = larger end moment and Mu 1 is smaller end moment.

be taken equal to Mu2 or Mu whichever is greater.
The coefficient 0.6 for Mu2 comes from the fact that for a member subjected to Mu2 only
( Mul =0 ), the maximlJ1D·deflection oecurs at a distance 0.423 L from the end where Mu2 acts as
shoWn in Fig. 11.11.6 (d). Code takes this as OAL for simplicity. Therefore, the moment at 0.4L
lI In this case, design moment is given by Mu = Mu2 + Ma but { Mu2

Remarks.:
...... (ll.ll.6c)

( 1) It is. r~ot possible to represent correct realistic end conditions for column. Even in the laboratory the
due to Mu2 will be equal to o.6 Mu2 = CC2 shoWil in Fig. ll.l1.5a. Again when a member is true tr~nifer. of concentric load is not possible. Therefore we recommend that do not encourage
subjected to Mul only (Mu2 =0) the moment at OAL = cp
= 0.4 Mur Thus the total initial
slender cqlumn (0013).
cp
·moment duet~ Mu2 and Mul = Af; = 2 = 0.6 Mu2 + 0.4 Mu 1 as given by Eq. 11.11.5a. The \ (2) Do not use columns of 150 mm width. Minimum width of column should be 200 mm
additional moinent due to slenderness= Ma = cp
shown in Fig. 11.1 1.5a and total morp.ent is (3) Avoid providing jl~ating columm~ The columns resting on beams with no supporting column below
3
are called floating columns. They float on floor without having supporting column from below.
equaltoC
. 1 C3. -

'I
I
 ------ -------~-----

~r ·':'T:

i' l Ii
H 666 Coluinn
Slender Column 667
j,J
Chapter 11 Sect. JJ.JJ
1:il
11.11.5 Design Procedure
= (P ~ P ) I (P - p ) . = (1395.43 - 800) I (1395.43 - 259.9) = 0.524
U!l
·~ i I k liZ II liZ ub .,
iiii· o \[Lff'/S
While designing a slender column, the following procedure may be adopted. ~·-· .t

u:'p oD
.

·il
>fill'•
t:u!:
1r i•il·
,~. (i) Determine whether column is short or long.
(ii) Determine M.l from given Mu1 and Mu using Eq. 11.11.5
M, - ' k " 2000
800 0 3X
·- (20}' x 0.524 " 25.15 kN.m
:.~
1
2
:j;\l!· (iii) Calculate emm. and Mu.mm. and compare it with M.1 and take greater of the two for
calculation of M .
M• = M . =P e . = 800 x 21 !1000 = 16.80 kN.m
ldj:l·· u
M
1
11.m111
= M; + M = 25.15 + 16.80
11. mm
= 41..95 kN.m

l
II , ~

'i• l ~I (iv) Assume percentage of steel p and arrangement of reinforcement. Obtain Pub using 11 0
Eq. 11.11.2c and Table 11.11.1, or from first principles corresponding to the condition P/ fckd = (800 X 1000) I (20 X 3oif) = 0.444
of maximum compr~ssive strain of0.0035 in concrete and tensile strain of 0.002 in the M/ fclj ::: (41.95 X 106) 1(20 X 3W) = o.o78
:!ilil outermost layer of tension steeL Calculate Puz from Eq. 11. 11.2b and hence k using
iiWjr
[lit.
Eq.l1.11.2a. Finally calculateMa using Eq. 11.11.3
(v) Calculate total moment Mu using Eq. 11.11.4
From Chart . 4 ( Appendix - C)
for d'ID =0.2, P/fckd =0.444 and M/fckd=0.078 , p!fck = 0.177
\jii!IL·'· (vi) Check the safety of assumed column section, for P and M. Required p = 0.177 x 20 = 3.54% < 3.55% :. O.K.
u u
)'
Notes: Ex. 11.9.2 A braced R.C. column circular in section of 400 mm diameter having
( 1) It is necessary to check whether a column is long or short for bending about both the principal axes unsupported length 8 m with one end hinged and other fixed has to carry an axial load '~

{2) It is necessary to calculate emill for bendingabout both axes.

II.,. Pu =900 kN. If concrete grade is M20,
(3) Initial moment M; will be calculated for bending about both axes and they will be compared with the (a)· Calculate the area of reinforcement required if the steel of grade Fe 415 is provided
'I corresponding bending moment due to minimum eccentricity.
( 4) When external moments are absent bending moment due to minimum eccentricity will be added to with an effective cover t?f 60 mm.
additional moment about the corresponding axis . (b) If Pu is reduced to 600 leN, what maximum ultimate moment the column will be able to
.I' Ii 1
carry? ,
·1,
:'
'
I;
"
II·
:
. Ex.ll.II.l A concrete column circular in section with diameter 300 mm and reiriforcement
with 8 bars of 20 mm diameter is braced and hinged at both ends 5.5 m apart. The column
I Solution : / ··
./

I'
I
I
;i:l

iliiWJ,,,
·I1! 1
" carries an axial ultimate load of Pu = 800 kN. Check the safety of section assuming concrete
of grade M20 and steel of grade Fe 415 and effective cover 60 mm. Il (a) For column with one end hinged and the other ftxed, recommended effective 1engt\1 from

Table 11.2.1 is, .

L •0.8L" 0.8 x 8 •6.4 m , L,/ D• 64(J0/400" !6 > !2. :. Theoohunn is slender.
Given: D = 300 mm As = 8 # 20 = 2512 mm 2 , Pu = 800
.
kN. J 4
2 L D 8000 400
f ck =20N/mm fy
=415N/mm· 2
d'=60 L =5.5m 1,j
'
Required: To check the safety of the column
' ' e . = - +- = - +- = 29.3 mm
mm 500 30 500 30 .
Solution : Since the column is hinged at both ends :. Leff= L Since there is no external end moment; M; = Mil. min= p II ?( emin
Leff = L = 6 m = 6000 mm , Leff/ D = 6000130 = 20 > 12. M; = 900 x 29.311000 = 26.37 kN.m , d'ID = 601400 = 0.15
~~I , :. ~olumn is slender Ag ~ {_1C 14) X 400Z = 125664 ntnf ,~

L D 5500 300
emm. -- +- +- - 21 mm Hint : Determination. oj approximate quantity of steel. 1200 kN.
500 30 500 30 Equivalent .axialload_taking bia;:ial bendin;; i1'.!C consideration == 1.3S P• = 1.33 x 900 ==
A~ = 8 x 314 = 2512 mm2,Ag = (7t 14)x 3002 70686 mm2 1200 X 1000 = 0.4 /-cl Ag + (0.67 fy - ,0.4 ftk) Asc .
p = 2512 X 100 I 70686 = 3.55% ' d'! D = 60 I 300 = 0.2 :: 0.4 X 20 X 125664 + (0.67 X 415 - 0.4 X 20) A,.
From Table 11.11.1 for d'/ D = 0.2 , : •• A,;., := 72lmwt .
k1 =: 0.138 and k2 = 0.036
Try 10 Nos 12-mm diameterbarS· Asc= 10 x 113 =113'0mnf
P = 113(} X lOOii25~!i~ = 0~9%,
pub . = (0.138 + 0.036 X 3.55 120) X 20 X 3002 /1000 = 259.9 /eN.
;. Plfck= 0.9/20 = 0.045
Puz = {0.45 x 20 x.70686+(0.75x 415-0.45 x 20)x2512l/1000 = 119:'i.4HN
 Slender Column 669

668 Column Chapter 11 Sect. JJ.ll

Column ends are fixed but the column is unbraced in both the principal directions.
From Table 11.11.1 for d'l D = 0.15 )Jetermine the area of reinjorce-t •equked .....,.mg concrete grad£ M20 and sand grad£
k 1 = 0.149 and k2 = 0.201 , Pub= (k1 + k2 p!fck) fckiY Fe 250. Assume 12 mm bars and effective cover 46 mm.
2
Pub = (0.149 + 0.201 X 0.045) X 20 X 400 I 1000 = 505.7 kN. . b =230 mm , D =450 nun , d' = 46 mm
:
Puz = {0.45x 20 x 125664 +(0.75 X 41.5-0.45 x 20)x 1130}11000= 1472.5 kN. Given : f ck =20 N/m~ ·, f.y =250 Nlm~
L =3.75 m
puz - pu 1472.5 - 900.00 _ Mux = 60 kN., Mux 1=30 kN.m
0592 2
ki = p - p b = 1472.5 - 505.7 = Required: Asc
uz u
2 L , ff ~ 1.2 L 1.2 x 3.75 ~
Solution :For column direction fixed but position free at both ends,
4.5 m. ~ .•.... (I able J/.2.2)

L'r/ D ~ ~
Pp ( Lef!J 900 0.4
M - -- --
2000 D
-
k - ~~~~
X
I \•
( 6'
0
X 0.592 27.3 kN.m 4500 /450 10 < 12. Col- is short for bending about X-""'
L, r/ b ~ ~
a -

ndl:
1
4500 /230 19.56 > 12 Column is long for bending aboUt axis y-
Mu = ~ + Ma = 26.37 + 27.3 = 53.67 kN.m
Iiiii!· M lfkiY= 53.67 X 106 1(20 X 40tP) = 0.042 p/f 0.045
eminx = 3750 I 500+ 450 I 30 = 22.5 mm,
u c M m· = 600 x 22.5 I 1000 = 13.5 kN.m. :. e = 20mm.
11ffif y.mn
1
ux. m 3750 I 500 + 230 I 30 = 15.17 mm < 20 mm.
Chart No. d'/D Mu/ fckiY plfck :.P/fckiY emmy
.
\~lll!. ·
_Muy.mm.
600 x 20 I 1000 =· 12 kN.m
·i1rJ 3 (Appendix C) 0.15 0.042 0.045 0.3
"lll!:l
lk:!
l Bending about x- axis: (Axis perpendicu1ar·to 450 mm).

'tfir~ Column being short in this case, design moment shall be greater ofthe two-column

.lI
:. p u . = . 0.3 X 20 X 4002 I 1000 = 960 kN > 900 kN.
moments i.e. 60 kN.m or M . (13.5 kN.m) whichever is greater i.e. 6{) kN.m.
i_nw· ux.mm·
.1\fW,J~ :. Reinforcement assumed Is suffiCient.
= 0.0644
~ ~ 0.1 ~
1 Mjfckbd= 60 X 106 I ( 20 X 230 X 45o2)
(b) for Pu= 600 kN,
P/fck!Y = 600 X 1000 I (20 X 4002) = 0.19
I
I
d'/ D 46/450 , P/fiD 600 X 11100 /(20 X !30 X 450) ;, 0.29.

From Chart 28 ofSP: 16.

k = 1472.5 - 600.00 = 0.902 ford'/ D =0.1, M/fid=0.0644 and P/fckbD = 0.29, required p/fcl = 0,03.
1472.5 - 505.7
Ma = (600 X 0 .412000) _x (16i x 0.902 :.Required p = 0.03 x 20 = 0.6% < minimUm 0.8%.·

Chart No. ' d'/D P1 ick Pu!flY :.M/fckiY Bending about y - axis : The colwnn is slender about y - axis
c
.' ' Since there is no external moment abOut y • axis,
3 ( Appendix C) 0.15 0.045. 0.19 0.057 M. = M . = l2kN.7il. , d'ID = 461230 = O.l.
I 11)1.111111 ·
Assuming (eduction factor kfor first trial = 0.7
400j x 1o-o
=72.96 kN.m
J',..b . · (!it_jz • .600 X 0.23
M.1 = Mu - Ma =72.96-27.71 =45.25 kN.m.
:. External allowable moment =45.25 kN.m.
.
. M, ~ ,~:, , i, k~ --·· -
.. . ·•
(t9.56l': xO' • '!UUN.m

.. Mu ·t;'U.r:fMa ~ 12 + 18.48..; 30.48 fiN.m

Ex. 11.11.3 R.C. Column ·230 mm x 450 mm in cross section has to carry an ultimate
axial load of 600 leN. and ultimate bending moments of 60 kN.m and 30 kN.m. about the M,/Jclli},f{~··8 X,. 10 /(20 6
X 23ol X 450) =-.0.064.'
. •·.. ·· .. . /1
major axis bisecting the depth, at its ends. The unsupported length of column is 3. 7~ m.
 ,;· ". :}

i
'~?

:'r:ftf''\

[ Slender Column 671

670 Column Chapter 11
ll1 Sect. 11.11
:i!ll'
,;II,lj Ftom €hart No. 30 ofSP: 16 for Fe 250 steel with reinforcement oil two sides, for d'l b, = 0.2,
2
(iii) Additional moments due to slenderness.
2
1 . Mlfk b D = 0.064 and PUICfk bD =0.29., required pIfk = 0.03 or
\111:
UC·
. p = 0.03 X 20 = 0.6 % <minimum .S%
C
. P X b (Leffy) 1000 X 0.25 X 16
'II
J! oi·
·;It Fork = 1' May = _!L-x
2000 ----
b = 2000 = 32kNm
.
~--

·:i'l,
ii'
,;:!'
Provide minimum steel Asc = 0.8 x 230 x 450/100 = 828 mnt
:· ~ :!' ! Provide 8 bars of 12 mm giving 904 m~ Max =0 as the column is short for bending aboutx- axis.
Now for this steel, actual coefficient k and M will be obtained.
a
p = 904 X 100 I( 230 X 450) = 0.87 %. ·(iv) ·Assuming
Reduction pfactor k and equal reinforcement on two opposite sides.
=1.88%
From Table 11.11.1, ~ ~
plf,. 1.88/20 0.094 • J,.bD 20 X 210 X40011000 ~ ~ 2000kN.
kj = 0.184 and k2 = -0.045 for reinforcement en two sides.
d'l b = 561250 = 0.22 say 0.2
Pub =:= ( 0.184 -· 0,045 X 0.87 I 20) X 20 X 230 X 450/1000 = 376.8 kN.
Puz = {0.45 x 20 x230 x450 + (0.75 x 250-0.4Sx 20)x,904}11000= 1092.86 kN.
Fromk Table I 1.1 ~
1.1.
0.184 ~
- 0.022 for equahteel on two opposite sides
and k .
2
1 = ( 0.184- 0.022 X .094) X 2000 = 364 kN.
~ ~ 0.45 ~ 14<;
pub

~ ~
1092.86 - 600.00 p X 2000+ {(0.11 X 415-0.41 X 20}>< 1.88 X 250 X 400/100)/1000
k 0.69 < assumed k = 0.7. ·;
1092;86 - 376.8 ~1

k (1468 - 1000)/(1468-364) M24 SIN. (,

·~.,
Actua1M0 = 0.69 x 18.4810.7 = 18.22 kN.m < 18.48 kN.mandnearlyequal. = 32 x 0.424 = 13.6 kN.m, Max= 0.
Muy
Another trial need not be taken 8 bars of 12 mm is the de8ired answer.
M~ moments
~ M,. + and
M~ Axial
~ 26 Load:
+ 0 ~ 26 IN.m < M., (~ 30IN.m) :. M~ ~ 30 k
~ ~ ~ ~
(v) Design
Ex.ll.9.4 Design the reinforcement for aRC. column 250 mm x 400 mm in cross -section
for the following data M M. + M 20.3 + 13.6 33.9 kN.m .nd P 1000 IN N.m
uy I}' ay u ·
Pu = 1000 kN. , L = 6 m , L e!'";;x = 4.8 m , Le!'f..y = 4.0 m.
M~2= 30 kN.m at top and , M~1 = 20 kN.m at bottom. , f.y =. 415 Nlmml . (vi) Check for biaxial bending :
P/f. . - ·- ''""" ii.S, pff.:k ~ ~ 0.094 , d'l D~ 56/400 ~ 0.14 )
Muy = 10 kN.m at top and
. bottom. Column is braced and bends into single curvature.
'~
P/fck :.Mux1 / ( fck b])2) /"\
_,
Assume mild environment. Pu ljkbD
c
Appendix -C d'l D ---:___
Solution: ·0.094 0.10
Chart No. 0.5 0.09
Formild exposure conditionsfck = 20 N I mml, nominal cover= 40 mm (minimum) (Table .2.2.3) 2 0.1 ' 0.094
0.5 0.092
Assuming diameter of main steel as 20 mm and diameter of link equal to 6 mm, 3
0.15 0.094
Effective cover= d' = 40 + 6 + 20 /2 =56 mm · 0.14
0.5,. ----.....:
·(i) Check for slenderoess --- --" M,nn v 1\ .n = 0.0375, '·~~~.

Le!Jj/D = 4800 /400 = 12. Column is short for bending about x- axis. Mux lfckbJJ= 0.092 , Muxl fckbd
1
Leffy/b = 4000/250 = 16 > 12 Columnisslenderforbendingabouty-axis. · Muxl Mux = 0.0375 I 0.092 == 0.407
1
Muy lfckb2D = 33:90 I (2000 x 0.25) = 0.0678 kN.m
(ii) Initial Moments: (a) Moments due to minimum eccentricity. Far P,!f_.bD; O.S , pIfa ~ 0.094 and d'l b ~ 02.,
. = 6000/500 +400 I 30 ..:o; 25.3 mm , Mux.mm. = 1000 x 25.3 I 1000 = 25.3 kN.m
.· emrnx from Chilrt- 4 from Appendix- C Muy1/fdc1J2D = 0.079
. e. =:=6000/500+250/30 =20.3mm, M . =IOOOx20.3/1000=20.3kN.m
. ~. ·~ Muyl Muy = 0.06781.0.079 = 0.858
1 0.681 - .0.2
(b) Initial Moments due to end moments.
a. = 1.0 + = 1.8
Mix =. 0.6 Mu2. + 0.4 Mu1 = 0.6 x 30 + 0.4 x 20 = 26.0 kN.m > M~~.
'1. pPu =
1000 .
1468 t =~.681, n 0.8 - 0.2
· .M;
o/
=10 kN.m.< M •~
. :.M.
w
= Mw~ . = 20.3kN.m 'I
uz ·'
Wt~/
iff(l
nJ 672 Column
Chapter 11 Sect. 11.11 Slender Column 67 3
,' 'il

\M: )a \M;
(M )a
\ I'

·tw.
'lFi! (M
n: + (0.407) !.
8
+ (0.858) t. 8 = 0.96 < I :. safe .,,
.',;1
Mwc.min
Muy.min
= pu X eminx
= pu X eminy
2000 x 36 /1000
2000 x 29.33/1000 = 58.7 kNm
= 72 kN m

-~:
(b) Momtmts due to external end moments .
:. p = 1.88% is adequate. :. As = 1.88 x 250 x 400 I 100 = 1880 mni
Mix = 0.6Mu +0.4Mul = 0.6x220+0.4 X 170 =200kN.m> M _
:. Provide 6 bars of20 mm giving area = 1884 mni 2
· M. = 0.6 X 120 + 0.4 X 70 = 100 kN.m > M (_ 58 ux.min(- 72 kN.m)
1y · uy.min.. - .7 kNm)
Ex. 11.11.5 Design a !bi-cixially e-ccentrically loaded braced rectangular column deforming .. M.IX = 200 kN and M. = 100 kN
1)1
into single curvatwefor the following data.
iihl''(''
. ;! Factured axial load= 2000 kN · (3) Additional moments due to slenderness .
at
~&~·
Factured moment acting parallel to longer direction·:· Assume percentage of reinforcement= 2.5 % with equal reinforcement alon .
g penphery .
Larger end moment at top =220 kN.m, Smaller end moment at bottom = 170 kN.m
-~ Factored moment aCting parallel to shorter direction : p 2.5
= 0.1 ' f ck bD = 25 400 600/1000 = 6000 kN
l
X X
25
Larger end moment at top = 120 kN.m , Smaller end moment at bottom=70 kN.m f ck
r Unsupported length = 8 m
=
Effective length in long direction 7.5 m, Effective length in short direction = 6 m.
Reduction factor k ,for d'/ D = 60 /600 = O.l ' kl = 0·207 • k2 = 0.32.8
X
p =(k +k p/f )xf kbD =(0.207+0.328x O.l)x6000
(Table ]]JJ
=1
• .J)

~.
Column section b = 400 mm,D = 600 mm ubx I ·2 ck c . 4388 · kN
Grade of steel Fe 415 , Environment- moderate pu z = (0.45 X 6000 + (0.75 X 415- 0.45 X 25) X 0.025 X 400 X 600 /1000] =: /eN
4500

-f
i

~0
Given: Pu
M ~2
=2000k:N ,Mux2
= 120 kN.m , M ~ 1
= 220kNm
= 70 kNm
!.,..,_Muxl = 170kN.m,
;-- L. = 8 m,
·kX
4500-2000 = 0.817
4500- 1438.8
f1i
Leffx = 7.5 m, Leffy = 6m , fy = 415 N lmni
~l
2000x 600 · 2
Max = 2000 X 1000 x (12.5) X 0.817 = 76.59 kNm.

r
fck = 25 Nlmni for moderate environment nominal cover= 40 mm (See Table 2.2.3.)
b =400mm , D = 600mm
Required: Design of column . Reduction factor ky'' d'l b= 60 /400 = 0.15 , k1 = 0.196 , k2 = 0.203
...(Table ll.JJ.J)
Solution : Assuming 22 mm diameter oflongitudinal steel, and 8 mm diameter oflinks, p b = ( 0.196 + 0.203 X 0.1) 6000 =:' 1297.8 /eN
~­ U!)'
~~ effective cover= 40 + 8 + 22 I 2 = say 60 mm
d'ID=601600=0.1andd'!b = 601400=0.15
=
/
~/ k 4500-2000
I .. y 4500-1297.8 =0.78
r / (1) Check for slenderness :
ill
1 Leffx I D = 1.5 X 1000 I 600 = 12, 5> 12 , LeiJJ/ b = 6 X 1000 I 400 = 15 > 12
~/ :. Column is long in both directions. I M _
ay -
:iooo x 400 2
2000 x!OOO x (15) x 0.78 = 70.2 kN.m.
I' (2) Initial moments : I
r~.;
il"
/!.,< .
(a) Moments due to minimum eccentticity
I (4) Design moment and axial load
Mwc =Mix+ Max= 200 + 76.59 =276.59 kN.m.

l'--
!
L D
500 30
8000
500
600
eminx = - + - = - + - =36mm>20mm
30 I~
~
M =M. +M = 100+70.2"" 170.2 kN.m
uy 1)1
p = 2000 kN.
ay

. ~· L · ·· b
emmy. _8000 400 (5) Check for biaxial bending':
-500 +30 = 500 +_~ ='=29.33 mm>20mm
P/ fck hD = 2000 X 1000 I ( 25 X 400 X 600) = 0.:33
 ~r
. Iii
; Ji.:li
'i 1.1''!i1'
~ ! I -~I
,, I

.,,. '
,I,.
.. 1
'·
' I! 674 Column
1
Id ,!
Chapter 11 Sect. 11.12 Axial Tension and Bending
iii
Appendix- C d'/D 675
plfck Pu If~: -~~ account whatever limited strength the concrete has in tension.
Chart No. c bD Mw:l fck biY
2 0.1 lJ When a R.C. structural member is subjected to tensile forces, concrete being Weak.
0.1 cracks at low levels of loading. At this low stress level, which is in working stre ~n tension
i
!:
!_1)
3 0.15 0.1
0.33
0.33
0.135
0.121
J service ability limit state of a cracking governs the design rather than strength aspect. In~~ r~ges,
method, reinforcement is designed for limit state of collapse to carry ultimate tension fully lll1~ state
1

i i ~
Mw:I = 0.135 X 25 X 400 X 6002 X 10"6 = 486 kN.m concrete section is designed for limit state of cracking. 'While the
!L' Muyl 2
= 0.121 X 25 X 400 X 600 X 10"6 = 290.4 kN.m Thus, for the case of pure tension , Required area of steel = Ultimate tensile load
1
~1····
p 2000 c For structural members in which effects of cracking are not of serious consequenc 0-87j.
r'' ' -.lL
p ·=- 0.44, 0.44-0.2 allows to design the R.C. section by using permissible tensile stresses on transfonnect see, _Is : 4~6
uz 4500 an= LO+ = 1.4 values given in Table. 11.12.1 ction to the
0.8-0.2

f
.ti
(
Mux )an ( M )an
-+-!Z_=
Mw: 1 Muy 1
276.59)1.
( - .486 +
4
( 170.2
~
290A
)1. 4
=0927<1
. :. safe.
1'.,
~~

1Grade of concrete
Table 11.12.1 Permissible Tensile Stress act in Concrete,

j
when Full Tension is Taken by Reinforcement alone.

M20 M25
rd~
.\·

I
MIS
Area of steel= 2.5 x 400 x 600 I 100 = 6000 mm 2 •
2
Provide 10- # 28 mm , Area provided = 6157 mm 2 Cc1 inNimm 2.0 2.8 3.2
2
--,
0" cbc in N I mm 5.0 7.0 8.5 J
(6) Transverse reinforcement
I
Diameter of lateral tiesf 28 I 4 = 7mm , Hence provide lateral ties of# 8 mm Actual tensile stress shall be given by:
f
i. Spacing :} (400 mm or 16 x 28 or 300 mm) _
I
' '' Provide# 8- inm lateral ties at 300 mm Ci~. Ft Ft

tI The details of the reinforcement are shown in Fig. 11.11. 7 fst = A + mA = -A-_-+-(m---l)_A_
c st g st ······01.12.1) r-)-
•;:.,:..
where F1= total tension to be resisted,
Ag = gross sectional area,
Ac area of concrete excluding area of reinforcement, Ag - A•

Tr
= =

Ast = Cross - sectional area of reinforcement

I J "tfno-. m = modular ratio = 280 I 3 cr cbc ,

crcbc = permissible stress in concrete in bending compression

It is recommended that for concrete members in tension, concrete of grade bel

r- soo
l
I steel of grade above Fe 415 should not be used to avoid cracking.
The above provisions, however, do not apply to members of water retaining st
ow M2o and

Fig.ll.ll.7 .Cross- Sectional Details. such members limit state of cracking is to be strictly adhered to, since absolute contro~ctures. For
has to be ensured. They shall be designed to IS: 3370- 1965 (65/5) till revised versio on cracking
11.12 AXIAL TENSION AND BENDING is available. n of this Code

11.12.1 Members under Axial Tension

Ex. 11.12.1 Design the reinforcement for aRC. tie member.230mm x 230rnrn . . ·
Concrete is basically very weak in tension. Its tensile strength is only Ill 0 to 1115 of its·
cdmpressive strength. Hence, it is a convention to nel!;lect concrete in tension 7ilnP.IIntf 11"""m'" tJ..at
resist an axial tension of 100 kN. Assume concrete of grade M20 and steel of gr:;
section to
e Fe 415.
 ' ;•:~1

~\·II
:~m.·· ..jl,/1/
676 Column Chapter 11
,.. , I r! ~'1

lri!/li/i Required As1 = Tu I 0.87f y = 150000 I ( 0.87 x 415) = 415.5 mm2

,,,,
/···I:·· Provide 4 bars of 12 mm diameter to give area= 452 mml
l'jiifl'i'
lifi, Ii
CHAPTER-12
I ''I Check for Concrete section :
FOUNDATION
' ' Table 1J:J 2.1 for M20 concrete; cr c1 = 2.8 Nlmml, and crcbc
From = 7 Nlmml
m ;,. 280 I 3 crcbc = 2801(3 x 7) = 13.33 say 13. 12.1 INTRODUCTION
Aeq = Ag + (m- · 2
I) Ast = 230 + (13- 1) x 452 = 58324 mml ''A. building generally consists of a superstructure above the ground and a substructure which
·r~~~·:r forms the foundation. The loads from a structure's columns and walls are transferred through the ..
Actual stress.f.1 = F1 I A = 100 x 1000 I 58324 = 1.715 Nlmml < cr
J·!UH' ·· = 2.8 Nlmml foundation to the under lying soil. It is necessary to ensure that the safe ,earing capacity of the soil ·
. •II
Jr
:. Safe . ~ d
1

should not be exceeded otherwise excessive settlement may occur resulting in· damage to the
Hii!
!HI/.• ·r;.. building and its services such as water mains, drainage lines etc. Foundation failure can also affect
1Ll2.2 Combined Bending and AXial Tension ·-.~ the overall stability of the structure so that it is liable to slide or even overturn.
nur1 .ffi
The earth under the foundation is susceptible to large variations compared to the materials
Wll,
' The analysis and design of members under combined bending and· tension is based on the
~
.that are used in construction of a structure. Even under one small building the soil may vary from a
same equilibrium and strain compatibility principles used in analysis of members under combined soft clay to a hard murum. Also the nature and properties of the soil may change with season and
co~pression.
1mr1
ff)~\ bending and SP (I 6) (80 I 4) have developed number of charts for such members as weather. Some <;layey soils (e.g. Black Cotton soil) are susceptible to shrinkage ~d cracking in
J
"::·;
b~
in the case of columns. These charts can used with ease and advantage, as illustrated in the
fol!bwing example.
dry and hot weather, and swelling in wet whether. Increase in moisture content results in
substantial loss of bearing capacity in the case of certain types of soils which may lead to
jli/, differential settlement. The permissible differential settlements and tilts of shallow foundation in
:lf.lt:
soil (86/7) are given in Table-D2.It is necessary to conduct a survey in. the area where!a proposed
(T.:.· •·i
Ex. 11.12.2: A.RC member 250 mm x 600 mm in cross- section is under the action of structure is to be constructed to determine the variations in the state and soil prop~trfies. Drill holes
axial tension of 120 kN and a bending moment of 60 kN.m Design the reinforcement or trial pits should be.t*.en, in situ plate load te~t(S.l/4) may be performed and samples of soil
'I assuming concrete of grade M20 and steel of grade Fe 250. Tak~ load factor = 1.5 mid tested in the laboratory. The-information helps to determine the safe bearing capacity of the soil.
: II effective cover 60 mm. (81/5). The representative values of the safe bearing capacities of typical soils have been given in
~,/ Appendix-D , Table D-1 ·

~~r ..
Solution:

d'/ D = 60 I 600 = 0.10,

pu = 1.5 X 120 = 180kN ' pulfkbD
c
\

f"ciD = 20 X 250 X 600 I 1000 = 3000 kN.

= 18013000 = 0.06
12.2 . TYPES OF FOOTINGS
The choice of the footing to be provided under a structure depend·s on the depth at which the
bearing strata lies, the soil condition, and the type of superstructure.
The most common types of footing used for concrete structures are one of the following :
~ ' Mu = 1.5 X 60 , = 90 kN.m , M,/fck bd = 90 I ( 3000 X 0.6) = 0.05 (a) Isolatedfooting :(Fig. 12.2.1) Isolated footing are provided under each column. These .
'I
~- Assuming reinforcement distributed equally on all sides, using Chart No. 76 ofSP (16), trtay he square, rectangular or circular in plan. '
Ill- for P,/fckbD = 0.06, M,/ fcid = 0.05 and d'/ D = 0.10, required pIfciD = 0.08. (b) Combinedfooting: Conibin~ footing support two or more column loads. These may be
/[ A81 = 0.08 x 20 X 250 x 600 I 100 = 2400 mml. continuous, with rectangular or trapezoidal in plan as shown in Fig. 12. 2.1 b.
I( Provide 12 bars of 16 mm diameter giving area= 2413 mm2• The combined footing becomes necessary-under the following circumstances :
( i ) When the isolated footirigs overlap,
·I .
( ii ) When the exterior column is close to the property lirie with the result symmetrical
isolated footing cannot be provided.
(c) Strap footing :
A strap footing or a cantilever footing is one of _the types of combined footing.
It consists of an isolated footing of two columns connected by a beam called strap beam. The
strap beam does not remain in contact with the soil ati.d thus does not ~ansfer any load to the soil.
These are better suited when one 6f the columns is· on the property line. The strap footing is shown
in Fig. 12.2.lc; . .
 Pressure Distribution under Footing 6.79 " • .J

678 Foundation Chapter -12 Sect. 12.3

When a rigid footing rests on loose cohesionless soil, the soil grains at the outer edges having
no lateral restraint displace laterally, where as in the centre the soil is relatively confined. The
"'
.s
..J
pressure distribution in such a case is shown in Fig. 12.3.1 a.
~
p
e"'
a.
ll.

( a ) Isolated Footing

CJ 0 0
-- --....... ( c ) Assumed Uniform Pressure
( b ) Clayey or Cohesive soil
( a ) Sandy or Cohesionless soil
Fig. 12.3.1 Soil Pressure Distribution under Footings.
For the footings on the cohesive or clayey soils the edges are able to sustain large pressure
( b ) combined Footing
and the pressure distribution in the remaining part of the footing is parabolic as shown in
~,

nl I Fig. J2.3.1b
If the footing is flexible the contact pressure distribution is uniform irrespective of the type of
illt,
0 0 0 0 soil, Fig. 12.3. I c. Since the footings are neither completely flexible nor rigid, the actual distribution
Strap Beam, I I I D 0 0 0
_;:

is intermediate between the two.

It is a practice to disregard these non-uniformity because their influence on the
;7'>;,
1.'-r.~\~

I I I I I 0 0 0 0 magnitudes of bending_ moments and shearing forces in.R.C. footing under study is relatively small.·
Therefore, the pressure· distribution under the footing is assumed to be unifonn as shown in

( c ) Strap Footing ( d ) Mat Foundation

Fig. 12.3.lc.
'I
\i Fig. 12.2.1 Various Types of Footings. 12.4DEPTH OF FOUNDATION
The depth of foundation is measured from the ground level to the bottom surface of lean
:j ',
(d) Mat foundcllion: When the soil is having very low bearing capacity and/or column loads concrete. A lean concretll. of grade Ml 0 from thickness 100 mm to 1SO mm may be provided to
'1 are heavy, the required footing area becomes very large and uneconomical. In such a case raft or level the surface on the soil. The depth of foundation depends on the nature of soil. The depth of
·'I
mat foundation consisting of a solid reinforced concrete slab covering entire area beneath the foundation is calculated by the Rankine's formula, 2
flt structure and suppotti~columns is provided (Fig. 12.2.1d). Such a foundation due to its own
.
h .= -;- p [(1-
sin~) ]
(1 +sin~) ·
...... (12.4.1)
rigidity minimizes differential settlement.
'
12.3 PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION UNDER FOOTING where, = depth in meters below ground level
h
3
ji.! Both ·from observations as well as analytical studies, it has been observed that the w = unit weight of soil in kN/m
11
pressure distribution beneath symmetrically loaded footing is not uniform. The pressure ~ = angle of repose
i! intensities depend on the rigidity ofthe footing, the type of soil and the condition of soil. P = column load in kN.
.,·• The correct aSsessment of stresses in the structure cannot be made without considering the The following general guide lines are given for depth offoundation (86/7).
,,,..
l~

interaction between the structure and the'Soil medium (77/3). The building frames with many 1. On rock or such other weather resisting natural ground, top soil should be removed and
H
,: provided with proper bearing to prevent slipping. In such a case depth of foun4ation
I! storeys with many bays and those with stiffer columns than beams have very strong effects of
1:
!I soil"structure Interaction. The maximum change in bending moments of comer column in building should be 300 mm. . -- (
frame occurs due to the effect of soil-structure interaction (91/6, 91/7, 99/5). The soil-structure 2. Minimum depth of foundation for other soils { 500 mm
lIf interaction aspect becomes more important in the case of foundation structure made of plate and . 3. In the casJ of granular& clayt:ysoilonsloping ground, a line drawn between the lower
' ,.· ·• • .· _,_ ~····,__ ..:._L L~.:..- .;.. . . .+ ......... ..;.. ..... _ ... 1......... o. t.J..n.., ..,...;,o uori;f'l'l"J tn
shell elements which have comparatively very sinall thickness and are not very rigid.
 Design of Isolated Footing 681
680 Foundation Chapter-12 Sect. 12.7
Ifthe axial load (working) on column is P then,
two horizontal. But when retaining wall is provided for lateral support or when factor of safety Area offooting = A = 1.1 PI fb = L x B1 ...... (12.7 .l)
against shearing is not less than four, the above mentioned requirements should not be applied. 1 1
4. The minimum horizontal spacing between existing and new footings shall be equal to the where, L = LengthofFooting, B1 = Breadth of Footing,
width of the wider one. · 1
fb = safe Bearing capacity of soil
Once the area of footing is known the size of footing gets fixed. The shape of the footing
12.5 PAD FOOTING AND SLOPED FOOTING may be square or rectangular or circular. The size of the rectangular base is selected such that the
A pad footing has the same depth at the face of the column and at its ends.
cantilever projections of the footing from the faces of the column are equal. This gives
A sloped footing consists of a deep sections at the face of the column reducing towards the approximately the same depth for bending aboutx and y-axes. The length or breadth of the footing

~(•
ends as the shear force and bending moment become small. The minimum depth at the end shall
not be less than ISO mm. Sloped footings are economical than pad footings. But when the depth at based on equal projection is obtained as under :
the face of the column is large and minimum at the end the proper consolidation of concrete cannot Cantilever projection offooting for bending about x - axis = Cx = (L1 - D ) /2

~~)
..
be made. Therefore, it is considered that the slope preferably should not exceed 45°. The offset at
the face of column is required from practical consideration for seating of column fonn work. The
Cantilever projection of footing for bending about y - axis = CY = ( B1 - b ) /2
For equal projections, ( L - D )/2 = ( B1 - b )12 or B1 = L1 - D + b
I!~. . minimum value of offset shall be 40 mm.
1
1
Substituting the value of B in Eq. 12. 7.1 and solving the quadratic equation in L1we get,
1
'l( 12.6. PLAIN CONCRETE PEDESTAL

~2b]2 +AI
Pedestal js a compression member the effective length of which is not greater than three ...... (12.7.2a)
ill(
~t~
time's the least lateral dimension. Pedestals are usually provided at the column bases to widen the Lf = D2b +
base for transferring the load over a larger area and to reduce the effective cantilevers of footing
r) and also to reduce the depth of.the footing to obtain economical design. In the case of plain
Select the length of footing by rounding out the value of L1
concrete pedestals, the angle a between the plat}e passing through the bottom edge of pedestal and ...... (12.7.2b)
Recalculate, Cx = (L - D)l2 and C;, = (B1 - b)/2
~ the corresponding junction edge of the column with pedestal and the horizontal plane (Fig. 12. 6.1) 1
~ shall be governed by the expression : where, breadth of the footing = Bf = b + 2 x Cx
.,~.. ~
tt~ ~~ and L and B are the length and breadth offooting pr<fided.
.. .
1 ...... (12.7.2c)
tana.f. 0.9 -~ ---y:--
- + 1 ... (12.6.1)
. 1ck
1/ ~~~~c;o'"'" 1 For square footing, L1 = B1 = A1
. .
\! "-· Area offooting provided = A1 = L1 x B1
where, q0 · = calcJJlated maximum bearing pressure ...... (12.7.3)
t/
.I
Upward factored soil reaction = wu = Pu I A1
!/ at thihase of pedestal in.Nfm,Jl.
'-...________ Fig. 12.6.1 where, Pu = Load factor x axial force = 1.5 x P
i
In case of pedestals in which longitudinal reinforcement is not taken in account in strength
J
Calculations nominal longitudinal reinforcement not less than 0.15% of cross-sectional area shall be :
~mmmu
(1) In calculating the. upward factored .soil reaction the self weight of the footing is not considered
.I provided. because the dead load of the footing acts in the opposite direction of soil pressure and hence does not

12.7 DESIGN OF ISOLATED FOOTING
The footing for an axially loading column of size b x D is designed as an inverted cantilever .
.outstanding from column and loaded with unifonn upward soil pressure. The various steps
{in'olved in the design are given beiow.
., . ;_ · · 12.7.1 Proportioning of Base Size (Fig. 12. 7.1)
../
· "lil~ially suitable footing dimensions are required to be selected to ensure that under
:.,Y~ility c:onditions (i.e. under working load) the soil bearing pressure is not exceeded. The
'·-la~Nmloa4transferred to the soil is equal to axial load on column plus selfweight of the footing.
Sfnce'th~ $izeoftlle footing is unknown, its self weight is assumed to be equal to 10% of the axial
·-J()ad on the ~oltimn. · · ·
induce any moment or shear in the footing.
(2) The value of w will work out.to be-greater than the bearing capacity of the soil. But this is not
unsafe .because the comparison
v can be made. with the upward working soil reaction which can be obtained
by dividing wv by the load factor of 1.5. Then it will be seen that the value of working soil reaction so
obtained ( wv 11.5) will be less that the bearing capacity of the soil.
12.7.2 Depth of Footing from Bending Moment Considerations
The maximum bending moment is calculated at the face of the column or pedestal by.
passing through the section a vertical plane which extends completely across the footing and·
computing the moment of forces~cting over the entire a(ea offooting on one side of the_ said plane.
 ·~'

~82 Foundation
Chapter • JZ ·
Bending moment at the column face parallel to x- axis is : Sect.l2.7 Design ofIsolated Footing 683
-.~ .~.~. ~~~~.~.
1
M = wU Bf C 2X /2
' UX Note:
;J/·1 f,i
n :1 Bending moment at the column face parallel toy - axis is : .•. ;;. (12.7.4a) (1) In pad footing full width of footing is available for resisting bending moment while for sloped
1.. , I!~ ••

1~~ I 1i 1
Muy = wu L'j C 2y /2 footing the resisting width at top is equal to column size plus twice the offset given at.the top.
...... (12.7.4b) (2) In order to place the form work for column some top portion of the footing is kept leveled
Required effective depth for bending about x- aX:is :
fll''!\/i !I (called offset). The value of the offset depends upon the thickness of the form work which may be

11~ fl
!IIIIi, I
' I'J'
fij:!:
dx = .y R M: b
u.max . I ...... (l2.7.5a)
taken 40 mm or more.
12;7,3 Depth of Footing for Two- way Shear
A column supported by footing slab, tends to punch through the slab because of the shear
Required effective depth for bending alone y- axis :

!!'If'
.I ,,,
d
y
-
-
y Muy
Ru.max x Dl ... .:. (l2.7.5b)
stresses which act in the footing around the perimeter of the column. Iffracture occurs, it takes the
form of the truncated pyramid as shown in Fig. 12. 7.2a. Test results indicate that the critical
section can be taken at a distance d/2 from the face of the column (Fig. ·12. 7.2b) ·
11,··.1 where,
I ! b1 = b + 2e and D1 = D + 2e, /~

\
i I
!
I'
b = width of column, D = depth of column _____ _;_I .!_
I I ~

f-
e : offset provided at the top of footing for seating column form work.

~I 1--
l8:T
I I
,i
I
ex ld -AI'- cy
'----...,--
·I
I.
--lfl-
/i
):
( a ) Truncated Pyramid Type Failure ( b ) Critical Section lor Two-way Shear
I_:/.I . Fig.l2.7.2 Two-way Shear Failure
''I'
r,i:':

·iii Since the effective depth dy is less than the effective depth dX , the critical section is taken at
. a distance dy I 2 from the periphery of the column. (Fig. 12. 7.1 a)
Section y-y
dy = effective depth for upper layer of steel for bending about y • axis.
d'y = effective cover for upper layer of steel for bending about)- axis.
dX = effective depth for lower layer of·steel for bending aboutx- axis.
II
'i
·
dx' = effective cover for low~r layer of steel for bending aboutx ·axis.
c

~
~~ Perimeteratthecriticalsection =2[b +dy )+(D+dy )]=. 2(b+D+2d) .......(12.7;6a)
,,
L ,
if y :. effective depth at peripheral section = D2 = D - y2 - d' ....:. SI2.7.6b)
lj 1
It where, y2 = (d/2-e)y11x1 y 1 = D - Dfminx! = (L - D-2e)l2 = (C,~-e)
,,J 1 1
l Area resisting two -way shear = A2 =·perimeter x effective depth at the section
. = 2 ( b + D + 2d1 ) x D2 ...... (l2.7.6c)
I ,-----
L Shear resisted by concrete ;, Vucl = tuc2 x A2 ...... (12.7.6d)

( a ) Two - way Shear

where, tuc2 . = k8 t'uc and k8 = ( 0.5 + -bID) :/- 1 ·, t' uc = 0.25 VJ;;
Design shear tO which the coi)Jllln is subjected
Fig.l2.7.1 Rectanl!ular Slnn..tl l?nn•:"- TT - ,., rT D _/n,l.-1\ /J.-1-J \l· fl? 71':;..\
 lf' Design oflsolated Footing 685
684 Foundation Chapter.: 12 Sect. 12.7
,If the development length requirement is not satisfied, it can be made to satisfy by three
If ·Vuc2 > VllD2 the section is safe else revise the section.
alternative methods :
The minimum thickness of the footing at the edge shall not be less than 1SO mm.
(i) Decrease the bar diameter,
(ii) Increase the width or length ofthe footing such that the projection of the footing
11.7.4 Area of· Steel and Check for Development Length from the face of column ( i.e. Cx or CY) is not less than the required development length
Required area of steel for bending about x - axis plus cover,
(iii) Provide 90° bend at the edge of footing,
- - [ 1- {:~M
A =O.Sfck
six
1- ux
f.Y
. Required area of steel for bending about y axis
jbd2
ck I X
J . •..... (12.7.7a} ·
h 1 dx -4: A stx~m (iv) Increase the area of steel so that the stress in bar will get reduced and the modified
development length ( Ldm) is approximately given by :
As.reqd
0.5/ck [ ~.6xM Ldm = A X Ld
A = -- 1- I- !IY JD dy f Asty.min ...... (12.7.7b) s.provided
S!JI f.Y ·
I ck DI d2 1
y Check that clear spacing between the bars is not less than SO mm.
where, b1 = b + 2e and D1 = D + 2e, 12.7.5. Check for One-way Shear for Bending about y-axis
Astx.min = (0.85 b1 d) fly , AJ'ty,min = (0.85 D1 dy) Ify One-way shear should be checked for- bending about both x andy- axes. Since the effectiv e

~or
As the footing is designed as wide beam, minimum reinforcement as specified above sh8U be depth d is less than dx, shear for bending about y- axis is normally critical. The check£
provided. Y • · d h l' · h fb
· one - way shear ts carne out on t e same mes as m t e case o eam.
In rectangular footing the reinforcement parallel to the long direction shall be distributed Critical secti?n f~r qne - w~y shear abo~ y - axis is ~en at a dist~c~ d from ~he face of
1~1
I ~'
' .I
uniformly across the width of the footing. In short direction, since the support provided to the
footing by the column is concentrated near the middle, the moment per unit length is largest i.e. the
the cohm•~Iflbe """'"""' portton of tho foohng. (o< ""'dmg aboutY- ax>s " {o,. th"!' tho do th
·~I curvature of the footing is sharpest immediately under the column and decreases with the
of the footmg one - way shear check IS not necessary. p
The check for one- way shear can be carried out using following steps :
lfl!_;',l! increasing distance from the column. For this reason larger steel area is needed in the central band
·~
~_:r:
,, .in the short direction and is determined in accordance with the equation given below :
Depth of footing above rectangular portion at critical section (see Fig. 12. 7.1)
I I Dl = Y1 - ( dy- e) yll XI ...... (12.7.8a)

·~->1 Reinforcement in central band width B

1
= - -2 ......(12.7.7c) . where, y = Df- Dfmin , x 1 = Cy- e

t
1 ...... 02.7.8b)
Total reinforcement (Asty) in short direction L1 I B1 +1 Widthofthefootingatcriticalsection = B2 = D + 2dy
The remainder ofthe reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed in the outer portion of the footing. Area of footing at critical section= Trapezo~dal area + rectangular area
...... (12.7.8c)
tf Required development length for bending aboutx- axis:

( Ld)reqd = Ldx = (0·87 iyf 4 tbd) ~x ' ( Ld)available = Cx

Ay = [(B + L ). D1] /2 + ( Dfmin- d) L1
2 1
where, dy . := effective cover for bars at top layer= d'x + Y +
Percentage of steel = pty = 100 A I A
Required. development length for bending about y- axis : - Design shear stress is calculatedsfroniTable 5. 7.1
... ,.. (12.i.8d)
= Ldy = < 0 · 81 iy 14 thd)~y ' (Ld)available = Cy
. (Ld)reqd Shear resisted
. by concrete =Vucy ='t ucy x Ay
...... (12.7 .8e)
Sheartowhichcolumnissubjected = VuDy = w"L1 (Cy- dy)
IJ-' Where, +X and +y = diameter Of bar-for bending about X - axis andy- axis respectively
I If v > vu.Dy the section is safe.
ucy
!L:
I'~·':>
If ( Ld)avar'lab'.e > ( Ld)requ_, the check-for development length is satisfied.
. ·
. If vucy < vuDy' the. section is unsafe, then either in.crease the steel or change the section of
footmg and process repeated. · the
'L,., The check for development length .may become critical in the case of soil having large Not~ : If the difference betwee~ the shear r~sistanc_e of concrete section and design shear is less
t~
_-·

larJ!I~.
~-> bearing capacity. In that case the size of the footing required works out to be small resulting in shear res1sta'!ce r;;,{ concrete can be mcreased by mcreasmg the percentage of tension steel. However . '
. lesser cantilever projection. difference is the depth of the footing should be increased. if this
I
'
!--_...-' ----
 ~
•'i!'
Jrf:J
>,•,:'
,; I'd! $"'· 11. 7 D"ign of Jso\a"d Footi"g 687 ®
t )'l'

:l !H,
'I !lr,i
: 1~ 1 r 686 Foundation Chapter - 12 ~
When the exceS' foree tr"".ferred by the \O"git"dinsl oolumn hi><' into the looting, the
:!Iii
r q ,i development length of the rein!oroement sha\1 be s"ffioient to tmns!'« the oompression or tension
~ l:I ( 11.7~6. Check for One - way Shear for Bending about x - axis
-.,·.··. - The. critical section
.
is taken at a distanc·e dX from the column. If CX < dX , one-way shear .to the supporting member.
check· is not required. The procedure for carrying out the check is similar to the one given
Sect. 12. 7.5
:i·; ,~

Depth of footing above rectangular portion of footing

:;. D3 = y1 - ( dx- e) y 1 / x1 ...... (12.7.9a) t
Df
Where, yl = Df- Dfmin and XI = ex- e
_L
Width at the top of footing= B3 = b + 2 dx /.--·.,

Areaoffootingatcriticalsection =Ax= {B 3 + B ) D3 12 +(Dfmin- d'x)B ...... (l2.7.9b)

Percentage of steel = ptx = 100 Astx I Ax
1 1 ~ D+4Dt --1 .)
~ - Lt
Design shear stress
. t ucx is calculated from Table 5.7.1 Fig. 12.7.3
Shear resisted by concrete= Vucx = tucx x Ax Extended }ongitudin•l reinloroement or dowels of ot \eost 0.5% of'"'"- sectionol ores of
Shear to which footing is subiected = VUD!X = wU.B· ( CX - dJl ) ... ... (12.7.9c) the supported column or pedestal ""d • minimum of 4 hatS sh.Ul be providol. Where dowels"'
J
1 ·

If Vucx > VuDJl the section is safe, else change the section or increas€i. the steel.
Col- b!IIS of diruneter ~
.used, their diameter shall not exceed the diameter of column bars by more than 3 mm.
tlmn 36 - in oomp"'sion ooly oan be dowdlol ot the

d~- !oorin~
12.7.7 Check for Bearing. Pressure at Column Base footings with OOrs of sma\\er size of neccssorY "''·The dowel shsll cxt>nd into the oolumn, •
When the column rests on the footing it transfers its load only to the p~ area of footing. The equal to the development length ofthe ool"mn OOr ""d into the • disbnoe cq"'l to
"t\) .' adjacent concrete of footing provides lateral support to the directly loaded part of concrete. This the development length of the dowe\. The details are shown in Fig. 12. 7.4
!i .causes- increase in the strength of concrete which is loaded directly under the column. .--- Column bars \

iii· . T!Jis effect is taken into account and the code provides.,that : The compressive stress in
['_1'), c9ncrete at the base of a column or pedestal shall be considered· as being transferred by bearing to T Starter bars
''I'~ the top of th~e supporting pedestal or footing. D
:
Based on this the code provides that :
Ji Actual Bearing stress on the loaded area < Permissible bearing stress x ..JA 11A2 1
1
1-b-\
~Ej,_,
1',
j_ i.e.Pul(bD) < (0.45fck) x ..JA 1 1A2 and..JA/A2 t 2 ...... (12.7.10}
A 1 = Supporting area for bearing of footing, which in sloped or stepped footing, may be
~! -taken as the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid or cone
"(! contained wholly within the footing and having for its upper base, the area actually
;);
!i loaded and having side slope of one vertical to two horizontal (see Fig. 12. 7.3) Starter bars
1j
I'
.I = [L x B or ( b + 4D )( D + 4D ) whichever is less _ESKicker
ll
•I
!I
1 1 1 1
or = Lp x Bp (where, Lp , Bp being the. length and breadth. of pedestal) 1 G.L.
rn:.vn
~~ A2 = Loaded area at the column base ii" bx D
I

G ?.-"'--"n.
0
I 0
.,
I Eq. 12. 7.10 prevents crushing of concrete at contact surfaces of column base and top ;l Ill

1
.
I. ;
-!:JTr .. ,
L~
_surface offooting. Thefactor ...J.4 / A2 takes into aceount the increase in bearing capacity due to &
I!
I

confmement of concrete under the loaded area by the stirrounding concrete. Fig. 12.7.4 Dowel Details.
. When the actua.Ibearing stress is greater than the p(mt:lissible bearing stress~ reinforcement It
shall be:provide4 for developing the excess force, either bv extenclina th.. lnnnit...o~:"ftlt..--- '-•- ·•
 688 Foundation
Chapter- 12
12. 7.8 Illustrative Examples .Sict 12.7 Design ofIsolated Footing 689

Required effective depth for bending about y - axis

~m{i/1 ·
t._,,1:;I'
Ex. 12. 7.1 Design an isolated rectangular sloped footing for the column of size 230
dy =~ MII)' I (R *""..D ) ...... (Eq.12.7.5b)
mm x 650 mm, reinforced Wi!h 6 bars of 20 mm diameter and carrying an axial load of 1200 ··14-.•..... 1

~"11/'.i fi kN. The bearing capacity of the soil is 300 kN!m 2• Use concrete grade M20 and steel grade = ~33_6.9 x 106((2.76 x 750) = 404 mm.
wll/!1 Fe 415.
equal to Effective
50 mm. cover for bottom steel is 60 mm. Take offset from the face of the column
·. -II· Provide total depth.of' 680 inm and minimum thickness at the end equal to Dfmin = 200 mm
if/]iJ·i
.'· •:/: Comments : The depth required from shear considerations are normally more than that required
lrm:rtr~f'·;..
2
li ,1
Given : fk
C
= 20 Nlmm , fy = 415 Nlmm 2, P = 1200 kN, b = 230 mm, I
from bending ·moment considerations and hence more depth is assumed than the

m
:·'.~.·~:1:'. 1.:/:
1
D = 650 mm, effective cover= 60 mm , A = 6 - # 20 mm , e = 50 mm,
sc
required depth from B.M. considerations.
'(f ~ ~ = 300 kNim 2.
• l j:. . Effective cover for .bottom steel= d' X = 60 mm
;· '•).· . Required : Design the sloped footing.
Solution : Effective depth for bending about x- axis= dx = 680- 60 = 620 mm
lftllil· Assuming diameter of bar of 10 mm, effective depth about y- axis
(A) Proportioning of base size: Load transferred from column P = 1200 kN.
mr! = d = 620-10 = 610mm and d' = 60+ 10=70mm
lflll:rr
, '.1
,
·I
Self weight of footing at 10% x P = 120 kN.
(c) Check thf depth of footing for .two-way shear .;
t li :i Area of footing required = A = 13201300 = 4.4 m2 Total load = 1320 kN.
1lu:1 1 Critical section is taken at distanced 12 from the periphery of the column.
Assuming equal projection in two orthogonal directions, required length offooting, .Perimeter at critical section = 2 ( 2fo + 650 + 2 X 610) = 4200 mm ...... (Eq. 12. 7. 6a)
r/'"1

t),ll
i.

L1 (650-230)12 + (650-230)2 14 + 4.4 x 106

=; ... ·... (Eq. 12.7.2a) . Effectiv~ depth D2 at peripheral section:
= 2Jl8·mm. say 2350"'mm. · x1 = (2350-650-100)/2=800mm, y1 =680-200=480mm
' :<I .;i
Projection of the footing aboutx- axis from the face of the column.
Y2 = (d/2-e) y11x1 = (610/2-50)(480/800) = 153mm
·~rrr = Cx = ( ~ - D) I 2 = ( 2350- 650) I 2 = 850 mm = 0.85 m :. D2 = 680-153-70 = 451mm ...... (Eq.12.7.6b).
Breadth of the footing= Bf = b + 2 ex = 230 + 2 X 850 = 1930 min.
Area resisting shear= A2 = 4200 x 457= 1919400 m~
/

Adopt the size offooting = 2350 mm x 1930 mm . ...... (Eq. 12.7.6c)

if
Area of footing provided= 2.35 x 1.93 = 4.535 > 4.4 ~
Shear resisted by concrete :
~~:
,.·'! Upward factored soil pressure= wu = l.S x 1200 I 4.53 = 396.9 kNinfl
t' = 0.25 ...f20. = 1. i 18 Nlmm 2 ,
ks = 0.5 + 230/650
· = 0.854 < 1
)•. uc . . - ·-
II (B) Depth offooting from bending moment considerations : tuc2 = k1 t'uc = 0.854 x 1.118 = 0.955 N/m~ ...... (Eq.l2.7.6d)

r· Ultimate moment at CQlumn face parallel to x- axis

2
MUX = wU B1 CX I 2 = 396.9 x 1.93 x 0.85 2 I 2 = 276.7 kN.m
vuc2. = tuc2 X A2 = 0.955 X i919400 /1000 ;.. 1833 kN.

i· +
Width of the footing attop = b1 = b 2e = 230 + 2 x 50 = 330 mm Design shear ··
lt. Required effective depth for bending about x- axis ·v1102 = 396.9 x [(2350x1930)-(650+610)x(230+610)] x 10-6 · _
~ -.J M~ I ( R•- b ·= 1380 leN. ... ;., (Eq. 12.7.6e)

r
d, 1) •••••• (J!q. 12. 7.5a)
vuc2 > vuD2 :. safe
= Y276.7 6
x 10 / (2.76 x 330) = 551 mm
Ultimate moment at column face parallel toy~ axis . (d) Area of steel and check for development length :
2
= w L1 C = 396.9 x 2.35 x 0.85 2 /2 = 0,5 X 20 [ 4.6 X 276.7 X 106
J x 330 x 620 (Eq. 12. 7. 7a)
~f ~iection
M I2 336.9 kN.m .
Lengfh foo,;;;g at ,q,,
With 50 mm level beyood column &co oo albides. A.a = 415 .. 1 - 1 - 20 x 330 x 62o2
D1 = D + 2e\= 650 + 2 x SOmm = 750mm = 1450 ·11),;. i '

A*'mill·= [0~85 x ·330 x 620] /415 = ·419!11~ <Am = (1450 , ( )

'')!1!'
"! '\.,___.....

: l.1 ;.
~ ~ ~ '! ill
~i / l)esign of Isolated Footing 691 _.
Sect. 12.7 I
\ _/
':[[!tl 690 Foundation
Chapter-12 Percentage of steel, ply = I00 x 1728 I 609340 =. 0.28%
:!jJil 2
Provide 19 Nos. # 10 mm diameter bars. ( = 1450 ~m 2 ) Design shear stress from Table. 5.7.1, t ucy = 0.374 Nlmm
.:::1
'· Area provided = 1492 mm2 >A (= 1450 mm2 ) Shear resisted by concrete= Vucy = 0.374 x 609340/1000 == 228 kN.
stx
Design Shear= V ·or= wL'f (C - d) = 396.9 x 2350 (850- 610) x 10-6 = 223.8 kN
Development length required = Ld =
4 16
~-g; ; 1 ~ ) x 10 = 470 mm'
vucy > v udy
u u
:.
y
safe
y

( Ld) avma
'l ble = Cx = 850-50 = 800 mm > Ld(= 470 mm) :. Safe
(f) Check for one - way shear for bending about x - axis :
Clear distance between bars which are to be provided parallel to x- axis D = y -(dx-e)y lx =480-(620-50)480/800 = 138mm ... (Eq.l2.7.9a) .-
1 1
= Sx = [(B1 -end clearance-N~)I(N-1)] 3 1

= (1930-120-19x 10)1(19-1) = 90mm Width attop offooting at critical section = B3 = b + 2dx = 230 + 2 x 620 = 1470 mm r"\

The reinforcement in the long direction shall be distributed uniformly across the full width of Area of footing at critical section
the footing.
Ax = (B + B ) D 12 + (Dfmin- dx')B1 ...... (Eq.l2.7.9b)
Required area of steel for bending about y - axis. 3 1 3 2
· :. A· = (1470 + 1930) 138 I 2 + (200- 60) 1930 = 504800 mm

A
sty
= 0.5 X 20[1
415
- "'
'III - 4.6 X 336.9 X 106
20 X 750 X 6102
J X 750 X 610 (E. 12.7.7b)
q t
X
Percentage of steel ptx
0.38 Nlmm2 =
= 100 x 1492 I 504800 = 0.29 %
··I"-

= 1655 mm2 ucx

Shear resisted by concrete = Vucx = 0.38 x 50480011000 = 191.8 /eN;
.
Asty.mm. = [0.85 x 750 x 610] I 415 = 937 mm 2 <Asty _ Shear to which footing is subjected
Provide 22 Nos. # 10 min diameter bars, Area provided = 1728 mm2 > 1655 mm2 VuDx =' wJJ _[Cx- dx) = 396.9 X }930.('850- 620) X 10-6 = 176.2 kN.
The development length requirements for these bars will be satisfied because the diameter of v > vuD1 .-:· ·sare . . ~·· ·""'
ucx ~
the bar and the projection of footing parallel to y - direction ( i.e. CY ) are the same as for · ·\
x - direction. (g) Chec/c for bearing pre,ssure at column base :
Actu~l bearing stress = P I bD = (1.5 x 1200) x 103 /( 230 x 65.0)
.... .... .. u .
= i2 Ntm,il
.
Clear distance between bars = ( 2350- 120- 22 x 10 ) I ( 22- 1 ) = 96 mm A = [ ( L x B )·or ( b + 4D )( D + 4D )] whichever is less
No. of bars in. the central band equal to the width of the footing 1 1 1 1 1
= [ (2350 X 1930) Or ( 230 + 4 X :680 )( 650 + 4 X 680))

= [(2350; 930 +1)] x 22 = 20No. .. .... (Eq.l2.7.7c) .=. ( 4535500 m,il or 9941500 mm2) whichever is less

This reinforcement in the short direction shall be distributed uniformly across the central band ..4 = 45.3 x 105 m,il, 42 = b x D.,~ 230 x 650 = 149500 ".',;
of the footing. , 1
vA tA = v4sJx105 11495oo = s.s :f. 2 : .. vA 1tA2 = 2
1 2
Permissible bearing pressure for limit state method of design is given by
= 0.45 fck vAl I A2 = 0.45 X 20 ~ 2 = 18 Ntm,il > 12 Ntm,il :. safe
(e) Check for one - way shear for bending about y - axis :
'i
Depth of the footing above rectangular portion at critical section, ( see Fig. 12. 7.1 )
!I
H
!I
Dj = y1 - (dy- e) y 1 ! x1 ...... (Eq, 12.7.8a) · ,(h) SummarY:
jl yI =· Df - Dfmm. = 680.:.. 200 = 480 mm ' Detaifs of sloped footing are as under :
Size = 1930 mm x 2350 mm at bottom and 750 mm x 330 mm at top.
rf
x1 = CY-e = 850-50 = 8~0mm, D1 = 480-[(610-S0)480/80Q=144mm· Depth offooting = 680 mm ,·Thickness at the edge 200 mm = · .
I Width of the footing at critical section
Reinforcement for bending about · .
! = B2 = D + 2dy = 650+2 x 610 = 1870mm ...... (Eq, 12.7.8b) x ~.axis; 19 Nos.# 10 mm ~parallel to the length of footing ,
y- aXis :·22 Nos.# .1 0 pun bars parallel to the breadth offooting with 20 Nos. in the eentiat .
I Area of footing at critical section,
band width of1930 mm ' .
il A.. = (B_ +L _) n I ? + t n A' \ r
 Design of Isolated Footing 693
Sect. 12.7
.692 Foundation ...:%~ ......
_-....: -
Chapter-12
Ex. 12.7.2 Design pad footing for data given in Ex._ 12. 7.1 .
The details of reinforcement of slopedfooting are shown in Fig. 12. 7. 5
Note : Since· the area of steel and Asty > Astx' ·the corresponding number of bars required in y • direction Given: fk·=20Nimm1,f. =415N/mm1 , P= 1200kN., b=230mm,D=650mm,
c y
(i.~. 22- # 10 mm) hm•e been shown in bottom layer qnd those in x ·direction (i.e. 19- # 10 mm) haw A = 6 - # 20 mm , e = 50 mm , J,b =300 kN/m2, effective cover = 60 mm
been shown in top layer in Fig. 12.7.5. st
Required: Design the pad footing.
Column 230 x 650

Footing 2350 x 1930 o-\ 1- I IF - 6 -#20 Solution :

T~----5-
-r 480
(A) Proportioning of base size :
For pad footing the size offooting for equal projection and
M , M as obtained in Ex. 12. 7.1. will be the same.
sso 2
if;i: .. ux uy
1
{IM·;t'
l II i I IJ",
\
• 8 i
~.••••••11200
-~ 8 8 8
1
W •
i.e. L = 2350 mm and B = 1930 mm., Area provided A1 = 4.53 m
1
Cx1 = Cy = 850 mm wu = 396.9 kN!m1, Mux =276.7 kN.m., Muy 336.9 kN.m.
(B) Depth of footing from bending moment consideration :
=
Required effective depth for bending about x • axis
d = ~ M I (R . B ) = i..-27-6-.7-x-10-6 /-(-2-.76-.x--1-93-0) = 228 mm
x ux u.max 1
Required effective depth for bending about y - axis~--------------
~
9·#10
d = ~ M I ( R .L ) = {336.9 x 106 / (2.76 x 2350) = 228 mm.
y uy u.max 1
I Assume total depth of 600 mm
effective depth, dX = 600- 60 = 540 mm. , dy = 540- I0 = 530 mm .
0,. 1-
~n
~

- ll II
(C) Check for two way shear :
22. #10 Critical section is at a distancedy 12 from the column periphery.
~ Perimeter at critical section = 2 [( b + dy) + ( D + dy)] = 2 [(230 + 530) + (650 + 530)]
= 3880 mm
1
Area resisting shear = 3880 x 530 = 2056400 mm
t' = 0.25 Fo = 1.118 Nlmm1, k = 0.5 + 230/650 = 0.854 < 1
,- Central Band = 1930 •I ~ s
;l-
Fig. 12.7.5 Details of Reinforcement Sloped Footing Shear resisted by concrete = V = ( 0.854 x 1.118) x 2056400 /1000 = 1963 kN
R. uc2
~~~j; Note : In case the permissible bearing stress is less than the actual bearing stress, the load transfer Design shear = Vu = wu [ L'f x B1 - .( b + dy ) ( D + dy ) ]
02
~­ is effected by provision ofdowel bars. · · = 396.9 [ 2350 X1930- ( 230 + 530 )( 650 + 530)] X10--{i
For example; if the permissible bearing stress for limit state design is 7 N/mm (in place of0.45 x 20)
2
~- then the load transfer can be effected by provision of dowels.
= 1444 kN

· Minimum are~ of dowels required "' 0.5 % of area of supported column Vue] ( = 1963 kN) > VuD] ( = 1444 kN) .'. safe.
~~ -~
= 0.5 X 230 X 650//00 = 748 m~ Area of steel and check for development length :
Assume minimum 6 No. of dowel bars of 22 mm diameter [Dia. of dowel bar :r 23 mm ( =20 + 3)]
Capacity of concrete and dowel bars
· = permissible bearing stress x Ac + area of dowel bars x permissible stress
Astx
. Qj X20
= 4J5 ~ -
r.
Required area of steel for bending about x- axis :
..---4-.6-X-2-76-.7-X-}-06-
1 - 20 x 1930 x 54if
J x 1930 x 540
~[7{230 x~50-6 x380) +0.87 x4J5 x 6 x380]/ 1000 =.1853kN> 1800kN(= 1.5 x 1200)

The de~ils of dowei bars including requirements of development length are shown in Fig. 12. 7.4 = whmm1
., '"'.'·
\I'
.\
JJP
Sect.12.8
Moment Resisting Isolated Footing
697
l(: .:·~

· 696 Foundation Chapter -12 1~··

:!ill
::\ill 12,$,~·· ·. Unifol.'m Soil Pressure Distribution (Eccentric Footing)
>~
~I
:· 1
'! i I ·
' : II
iil In theease at
of soil with large bearing capacity, the tendency of the column to rotate the base p
'1111 1
is prevented and the footing is required to be designed for axial force and moment even though the
: i:;
'!I! II T · - ___ (\'.
magnitude of moment is small.
·'l'ri
•J

.~!J! ::
~ l:
The compressive force ( P) and the moment ( M) transferred by the column to the footing
+~ I .. .
....: I 1 1 1n=d~T
can be replaced by a single force P' acting at an eccentricity e = M I P. If the size of the footing ..i
·.:;,:_!:
:;!t!!i ·and its orientation is selected such that the reactive force 'R' from the soil coincides with a single
•!:f:l'l
force P acting at an eccentricity e, the soil pressure distribution wi.II be uniform but the footing will ..i
;llt i: 1

be eccentric with respect to the centre of column as shown in Fig. 12.8.1 I

·.uj.'
~H~ 'I~'
The length of the footingL;equired to satisfy the equilibrium condition thatP =R is given by:
til\,. I. L 12 = e+D/2 +offset or L = 2(e+D/2+offset) ...... (12.8.1) X
ijli.·ff'.· 1 1
li!!T and B = A I L where, ~ = Area of footing = 1.1 P Safe bearing capacity ofsoil 1- Lf/2. ±=Lf/2 -1
1 1 1 I

1
· •:1
.1·:
I! Note : The eccentric footing may workout to be cheaper when the moment is greater than 0.5 times
j.-o.jl __ _
l:! • I the axial load
_ebb
I

:1
~·
; .. '
s, ----~r .
If: I . 12.8.3 Uniformly Varying Soil Pressure Distribution (Concentric Footing)
I
I'l ,1;
I'l :
'I','
!,),::
•.!i
When the column is subjected to axial load and moment and if a concentric footing is to be
designed then under serviceability conditions the pressure distribution will vary linearly and two
· possible stress distribution under the base of the footing can occur.
1 . •I
:·,Ui
,;
(a) Base fully in compression
(b) Tension developing at the rear of the base. X

Fig. 11.8.2 Moment Resisting Concentric Footing Base in Compression)

(a) Footing Base fully in Compression: . ... 'file minimum value of the stress at the rear of the footing should be equal to zero
Fig. 12.8.2 shows the distribution of compressive stresses under the base due to the action str.ess condition required to be satisfied is given by : . . and the
of axial compression P and a moment M acting about x- axis~ __!._.;__ M =O.
If the safe bearing capacity of the. soil is~, then the stress condition required to be satisfied L1 B BI L}l6 ...... (12.8.2d).
at the highly compressed edge of the footing is given by :
1 \'

p M or _!!__L B - (Px B i 2e) 16 · = 0 ...... (12 8.2e)

'''i
LiJ + B L2 16 ~ ~· ...... (12.8.2a)' 'If. '1'1 .
'If f'!
1\,
In th~ limiting condition the maximum stress is equal to~ and then the solution of this
or r, = 6e
-·~·

This equation has been obtain~ by forcing minimum stress equal to zero neg) .
1!I
li11 quadratic equa~ion in L gives : . constrained given by Eq. 12.8.2a. The design based on Eq. J4,8.2d and satisfying Eectlng the
l 1
obta~ned
.'J'G2 fb B J2
can be but it may not necessarily result inan economic solution. · q. l2,8.1 a
p ... p 6 ...... (12.8.2b)
l!I
1'1 Ll = 2 fb B + + fb B ,
1 1 1
(b) Tension developing at the rear of the base :

r~ ~e axt~l
If the size of the footing is less than the corresponding size required for resistin . . __
I In order that the base shall be fully under compression the minimum stress at the rear of the
fol'ce and moment, tension will developat the of the base and only part ofthe footing
base shall be greater than or equal to zero i.e. 1
contact ~th add~~ll
the soil, In su.ch a case the equilibrium c.ondition must be satisfied and in be •.n .
p M the ~mn _,pressiV~ ..-DM
'""'' .at the edge mmt ·~ ~ the":.'"~
!!"'1m than ,
Ljl6 ; : : 0 where,M=Pxe ...... (12.8.2c)
(~}.Flg.IJ.8.3 pres~dtstf1bution
I
L B - B capacttyofthe sod shows the sod under the footing::
1 1 1
\
 698 Foundation Chapter -12 Moment Resisting Isolated Footing 699
Sect. 12.8
tension develops under the base. The portion of the base AC ( = Z) is in contact with the soil.
12.8.4 Illustrative Examples.
Let t4e)'~sultant pressure act at distance x2 from A and the stress at highly compressed edge be f Ex. ]2,8.1 Design an eccentric footing for the following data :
FtirequilibriumfZ B/ 2 = P = R but Z = 3x2 Size of the column = .300 mm x 570 mm reinforced with 4 bars of 25 mm diam eerand
t
f ___]!__ two bars of 12 mm dwmeter -
f 3x2 B 11
1
p =
3x2 B Ultimate load transferred from the column at the base = 300 kN
1 Ultimate moment bisecting the depth of the column at column base = 19l.S kN
But x2 L 11- e
1 Safe bearing capacity the soil = 400 kN/ -~
.. Length offooting in contact with soil= Z = 3 (L 11 - e) Concrete grade M20 and steel grade Fe 415 is used. m
1
1P Given : 20 N/mm2, f y .= 415 Ntmd, b = 300 mm, D
c =
fk = 570 mm,
.. 1 = -::-----===---- ...... (12.8Ja)
M_;... ~ 3(Lfl2- e)xBf ~ fb P = 300 kN, M == 192.5 kN.m., !,6 = 400 kN!m
2

\i'! li u ux

In the Limiting condition i.e. when f = fb Required : Design the eccentric footing.
il,. 2M 4P
...... (12.8.3b) Solution :
Lf = p + """3Jif Working load transferred from column to the base== P == P/ L.F = 300 11.5 = 200 kN
[ 1 f b
(a) Proportioning of base size : ·
·t:'
'; .ji~'•]
p· Ultimate load transferred from column = Pu == 300 kN. i

Assume self weight offooting \0% x Pu == 30 kN.

·.·.··'.'
1\'

il. r-x2 1 Total ultimate load == 330 kN.

'v:!'
,:r
{ Jl 1)~,
!; .
T
o,
_L Al 1 ~ I y 1 :;;>"Li I
Working load = 330 I \.5 = 220 kN.
Safe bearing capacity of soil = f 6 == 400 kNim.
Area offooting required = A = PI fb = 220 I 400 = 0.55 m
1
2

Bending moment at the column base= e == Mux I Pu = 192.5/300 = 0.64 1n

z ___, 0

\nJ! Provide offset of 100 mm for seating ofform work for column and plain concrete ed
' = 500 mm x 770 mm x 300 mm deep. P estal
'!J'
!J. ;_:,-,
'----r= T -~Lf
..!:L---1
2 An;a provided by concrete pedestal = Ap = 0.5 x 0.77 = 0.385 d.

r ___lbm
~

Ia,- I
I tan a = 0.9
100 q
- + l

r
'
! ~D!
__ L
.L I

--J
--.::---

-~
. fck
where, a = Angle between the edge of pedestal and the corresponding junction ed
column with pedestal. ge of the

1I ~ X
q == Calculated maximum bearing pressure at the base of the· pedestal'tn Nlmm2
= PI AP = 200 I ( 0.385 x 1000) = 0.519 N!mm
2
!: Fig. 12.8.3 · Moment Resisting Concentric Footing (Tension at Rear of Base)
j.
tana 1. 0.9~100 x 0.519/20 + 1 = 1.7
The footing in which tension develops at the rear of the base will be uneconomical since only
(tan a) ._, d = 300/100 = 3 > 1.7 :. safe
_part length of the footing is in contact with the soil resisting the forces. prowue
Provide the eccentric footing such that the C.G..•,fthe load from the column coi 'd .
Thus, concentric footing subjected to axial force and a moment should. preferably be.
the C.G. offooting resulting in uniform pressure distribution. net es wtth
··.l. designed to ~tisfy Eq. 12.8.2a and 12.8.2c. It may b:e mentioned that the definite guide lines to
find the ratio of length to width of the footing giving economical design are not known. The only . Provide the width of.footing' equal to the width of pedestal = B1 = 500 mm.
recourse left is to Use'trial and error meflwd. ·
Lengthofthe footing reqnired =A/ B1 = 0.55/0.5 =·u m
 .~Ill'!!
·~1Tl
·'P
·~j,r
~~I il•:
.,....-·

lm [~I
r'l
Iii
700 Foundation
::r
ra l
n Chapter- 12
/

::{: !:r Sect./2.8 Moment Resisting Isolated Footing 701

r-.•11' 1
.. !1! i;,1 Minimum length of footing to effect unifonn pressure distribution
,,rNJI~::'..., Provide total depth of 660 mm
/
·~'"
;Ill. : 1 = I;= 2 ( e + D/2 + offset) = 2 (640 + 57012 + 100) = 2050 mm ...... (Eq. 12.8.1)
!f]l !· Provide footing of size 500 mm x 2250 mm Effective depth provided =. d = 600 - 60 = 540 mm
;!·.'1'.1
Area for footing provided = ~ = 2.25 x 0.5 = 1.125 m2 > 0.55 ~
!''.I
CIJnunents : The depth of the footing in many cases is governed by shear criteria and hence effective
tf'lll depth pr()Vided ( = 540 mm) is taken which is much more than the depth required (= 303 mm) from the
;:.i Ii
:.iii! Comments : Alternately, a rectangular footing can be provided with linearly varying pressure
distribution viz.
· bending moment criteria.
if.!! . (i) For no tension condition ·at the base :
HH : (c) Check for Two - way Shear .r--
1:1:) Length of the footing required = 6e = 6 x 0.64 = 3.84 m. s = iJ.5m Critical section at d I 2 ( = 270 mm) from the face of pedestal

ru:··.·; .~
Minimum size of the footing = 3.9 m x 0.5 m 1 Perimeter at critical section= width of footing= 500 mm
The ultimate stresses at the base are :
Area resisting shear = 500 x 540 =270000 mm2
.. . ·r·.· -p+ M = =300
--+ 192.5
3.9 x 0.5- 0.5 x 3.~16
Lr s, - BJ L/16
Shear resisted by concrete=
. 't
uc = t' uc x ks
. r:
·r •. 2
where, uc = 0.25 ff.k
c = 0.25 --120= 1.118Nimm
~~stress
:i 153.87 + 151.87
= t'
;•'
2
:; ?.
:. = 1.98 kN!m and Maximt-;, stress= 305.72 kN!m 2 ks = 0.5 + 500 /770 > I :. ks = 1
Areaof footing = 1.665 m2 > 0.55 m2
,'i t = t' uc ks = 1.118 x 1 = 1.118N!md
uc
·!I
,rl
Since the area of footing required is much more and the pressure distribution being non - uniform
this type offooting will be uneconomical. Shear resisted by concrete= Vuc = 1.118 x 270000 x 10-3 = 301.9 kN.
:ii Design Shear = VuDZ = wu (Cx- d I 2) B = 266.7 x (L38- 0.27) x 0.5
(ii) If lhe tension is permilled to be developed at the rear end, then length of the footing required is 1
obtained using Eq. 12.8.3b as: · = 148 kN < Vuc ( =301.9 kN) :. safe
LJ =· 2M.lPII + 4 P,f ( 3 X 1.5 X J;,. X BJ)
( .. \
8 05 . 2. X /92.5 4 X 300 '-.1:

for r = · m, LJ = 300 + 3 x 1.5 x 0.50 x 400 = 2·616 m Pu

1-4----1125
Lengthofthefootingincontactlviththesoi/ = 3(LJ12-e) =3 (2.51!2-0.615) = 1.92m I
= 3 (2.61612-0.64) =2m : Lr.,,n~-~~ ::J.. T
Area of the footing= 2.0 x 0.50 = I m2 > 0.967 m2 I
I
This footing in which tension develops at the rear of the base will be the most uneconomical since ·
only part length of the footing, equal to 2 m will be in contact with the soil and in addition to this pressure 1380
distribution will be non- uniform and the maximum compressive stress using Eq. 12.8.3a will be
399 kNim 2 < 400 kN!m 2 660

Projection of the footing-beyond pedestal at rear end :

= L I 2 - e - D I 2 - I00 = 2250 I 2 - 640 "" 570 I 2 - I00 = I00 mm.
1
Maximum pro/ection of the footing beyond the face of pedestal · .
1
Cx = f;12+(e-D12-100)=!125 +(640-57012-100) = 1380mm.
Ultimate intensity of soil pressure = w = 300 I 1.125 = 266.7 kNim2 ,-L '~~\>
u
(b) Depth offooting from bending moment considerations

1~1I I ++-~11!++HI
I~i.+H}I ~~I:I?-rt.:l@j t 111
500
Bending moment at the face of pedestal.
+-+-J
Mux ·= wu x B1 xC/12 = 266.7x0.5xJ.3S 2 12 = 127 kN.m.
Required effective depth = :V M I (R x B~) ·~840 lA
. w: u.mm: ·· •
/
(~

~~1"t"7·· .... tn.6,,,.._; I ----

_.. _ --1-~•-. -• ·e..:. ... _-.._._ 17......41...
 A)ecr. .u.?J Moment .!\es1sung 1su•u•eu roonng 703
Chapter -12
(fJ) Area of steel and check for development length.
Required area of steel Details of footing :

== 0.5
4J5
X

== 688 mm 2
20 [1 :_ .y I - 4.6 X 127 X 106
20 X 500 X 54o2
j' X 500 X 540
Size of pedestal = 770 mm x 500 mm x 300 mm deep
Size offooting = 2250 mm x 500 mm x 660 mm deep
Main steel = 5- # 16 mm , Distribution steel = # 8 mm @ 125 mm c!c
The details of the footing are shown in Fig./2.8.4
Provide 4 - # 16 mm , Area provided == 804 mm 2 > 688 mm2
I~ ir !
Clear distance between bars assuming end cover of 60 mm_ Ex. 12.8.2 Design a footing for a column carrying an ultimate load of 260 kN and
:•:·1
I i•/ ultimate moment of 64 kN.m about an axis bisecting the depth of the column at its base. The
== (500-2 x 60)1(4-1)-16== l14mm.
D I size of the column is 250 mm x 600 mm reinforced with 6 bars of 20 mm diameter . The safe
I . d == '4X(T2~
. 0.87 X 4J5
l''
_>
. !i.
],i,{_,f
h
eve opment engt require !.6) x 16 == mm
752 bearing capacity of soil is 200 kN!m 2; Use concrete grade M20 and steel grade Fe 415.
!llii. :.
. .' ~.~ ' (Ld) avm.lable == 870 m > 752 mm :. O.K. Given : fck = 20 Nlmm 2 , fy = 415 Nlmm 2 , b = 250 mm , D = 600 mm,
2
111!1_': i
Pu = 260 kN, Mu = 64 kNm , j,b = 200 kN!inm
I Ui·~ r (e) Check for one - W0J shear :
Required: Design the footing.
$,;,:\ j:
l~~r:;_r~·_,-_,. .1
Critical section at distance d from the face of pedestal = 540 mm Solution :

,,i: Design
· Shear Shear
resisted)Jy ,= VUD ==: wU B1 (CX -d) = 266.7 x 0.5 (1.38- 0.54) = 112 kN.
concrete
,Working load transferred from column = Pu I L.F. = 260/1.5 = 173 kN

1 I!·
:,,
I

p == 100 x 804 I ( 500 x 540) == 0.3% , t ~ = 0.384 Nlmm

(a) Proportioning of base size : ·
Working load transferred from column = P = 173 kN.
d/* Shear resisted byI concrete

,
1 2 Self weight of footing 10 %of P = 17 kN.
~dl
uc Total working load = 190 kN.
")/II' V == 0.384 x 500 x 54011000 == 103.7 kN-< VuD (== ll2kN)· :. unsafe.
Increase area of steel, i.e. Provide 5- # 16 mm. Area offootingrequired = Jl_ lfb = 1901200 ~ 0.95 ,(-
lii/1, 2 Eccentricity of column at base. = e ':= Muxl Pu = 64 I 260 = 0.246 m.
Area provided = 1005 mm , p1 = 100 x 1005 I (500 x 540) = 0.37 %,
~JJ'J Minimum length of footing for no tension condition= 6 e = 6 x 0.246 = 1.476 m.
(Tab!~ 5. 7.1)
uc 2
•ff;/ .t == 0.4176 Nlmm ...... Select the size of the footing such that there is no tension at the base and the-safe bearing
;1. uc
V == 0.4176 x 500x54011000 = ll2.7kN>VuD (=112kN) :. safe . .capacity of the soil is not exceeded. .
1c') (/) Dish'ihutlon •ted .· / Provide footing of size 0.8 m x 2 m ,
Area of the footing provided = 0.8 x .2 = 1.6 i2 > 0.951if-
· Area required = 0.12 x 500 x 660 I 100 = 396 mm2
Provide# 8 mm@ 125 mm clc, Area provided= 402 mm2 Checkfor·intensity ofpress~re a~ the base:
f.'- 285 .64 2' .·.
Pu.max = .0.8 x 2 +0. x 2j = 178.1 + 120 = 298.1 /cN/1tr < 300 kN/,?- (.;,1.5 Jb)
(g) Check for the bearing pressure at top ofpedestal : 8 2 6
Pu.min = 178.1-120 = 58.1 kN!d > 0 :. safe
Actual u'1timate bearing pressure == 300 x 1000 I ( 300 x 570) == 1. 75 N!mm2
Ultimate upward ui.tensity of soil pressure is given by (Fig. 12.8. 5)
Since ( h + 4 x 300) > B and ( ~ + 4 x 300) > 770 mm 260
. .
64 . .
1
~ 0.8 X 2 + 0. X 2 . 162.5 + 120 :::: 282.5/cN/,il
8 2 16
AI = 0. 77 X 0.5 = 0.385 m2 ' A2 = 0.3 X '0.57 = 0.171 fii2
VA/;;;;::: V0,385/ 0.171 = 1.5 } 2 :. vAI I;; ~ 1.5 fz
260 ·-64 .
= 0.8 x 2 - 0.8 x 2216 ~ 162.5 '- 120 = 42.5 lcNIM" .
. . 2
_
Pennissib1e ultimate bearing stress = 0.45 x 20 x 1.5 IntensitY: of pressureat the face of column = _(282.5 - 42.5) x 1.3/2 + 42:S:.
=. 198.5 lcN/,il
·;,. 13.5 Nlmm2 > 't.7SN!mm2 :. safe
c· ·=
Jl .
·(2000-600)12=
. .
100mm, cy = (800,...,.2.50)i2 =27Sm,h
. --- . . . ·i
 704 Foundation

{h) Depth offooting from B.M. considerations. Chapter-12

Sect. 12.9 Combined Footing 705
Ultimate moment at face of column,

M~ = (198.5 '0.8' 0. 7)' 0.7/2 + (84, o. 7, 0.8/2)' (2< 0.7/3) = 49.9 kN.m.
M =Average stress x L x c 2; 2
Design shear = VuD = (282.5 + 233.3) x (0.8 x 0.41) /2 = 84.59 kN.
p1 = lOOx603/(800x290)=0.26%,\c = 0.365Nimm2 (Table5.7.1)
~ . f y
(282.5 + )98.5) 2 X 0.2752 Shear resisted by com;rete = B x d = 0.365 x 800 x 290/1000
'tuc
~= 18.l8kN.m;
1
=- 2 - x = 84.68 kN > VuD ( = 84.59 kN) :. safe /.~"'.

Required ellective depth = ~ = 269 mm Since the critical section in y- direction lies outside the footing the check for one- way shear

~ 350- 60 = 290 mm.

in y direction iri not required.
(c) .Check twodepth
ProvidefortoW - wayof350 .., :. Efl"ective depth provided d
shear ......-r
Column (250 x 600)
600 _ ,
Critical section at d 12 ( = t45 mm ) from the face of columo
St!>ss at the C<itical section = 42.5 + ( 282.5 _ 42.5) ' 1.44512 = 2t5.9 kN!.l
Perimeter at the critical section= 2 ' ( 250 + 600 + 2 ' 290) 2860 mm ~ tt' Pu
1--700

. Area resisting shear = 2860 x 290 == 829400 mm

2
Shear strength of concrete

0.25 {20 == l.I 18 Nlmm2, k == 0.5 + 250/600 = 0.917

t'uc =
0.917 x 1.1 18 == 1.025 Nlmm 28
tuc =
Shear resisted by concrete =Vuc2 == 1.025 x 829400/1000 = 850 kN.
i Stress distribution

I 1300 ~
1445
Unifonn intensity of pressure = w, = P,fA = 260/1.6 = t62.5 kN!.l 1590
Design Shear = VuD2 == wu [( x B 1) - b x D] 1;
~verage
-,.
The design shear stress is obtained based on stress.

(d) Area of steel

v..., r
= t62.s 2 'o.8- o.zs., o.6J = 235.6 kN < v., :. ·sate-· 1g /'"""-..,,,

'

~·],
0.5 X 20 [
Astx =~ I
..
' , )

A
~-mm
.
Y
-
20 X800 X2902 800:290:· 499mm'
·
• 475 mm' < 499 mm'
: 0.85 bd/f = 0.85 ' 800 ' 290 14t5 Aj...290-t
J
Provide 3 bars of# 16 mm, Area -ded = 603 mm' · . ·-
....
L 2000

~ ~.
AA • Crftlcal section for One-way shear

Fig.lU;S
ASly • 9?•io
.4}5 ll ·- . 18.8 X290
20 X X2000x 106 }2000
2
. X 290;; 181 mrtfl.
· Details . bjfooting :
ASly.min = 0.85
. x 2000 x· .290!415
· ;,. 1188 mn? Sizeoffooting2000mm x 800mm x 350mm.
Provide 6- # 16 mm bars , Area 'provided = 1206 mm Steelparalleltolength(i.e.Asir) = 3~# l6mm.
2
(e) Check for one - way shear ahout x - axis . Steel parallelto breadth (i.e. ASIJI) ,= 6 -# 16 mm.
Critical section i .at~ d ( = 290 """) fiom the face ofthe column..
~ ~ 410 mm
12.9 COMBINED FOOTING
=
Stl>sslitcriticalsection- 42.5_ + (282.5~42.5)
Distance of the critical section fiom the edge offooling = c -' d 700 290
1.59"/2 ,; 425 + 190.8 ·.
Whenever the load carried by the internal column ( Pint) i~ greater .than the load carried by
·the exterio~ c:Oluinn ( P~1 ) or when theiso~a~ footings overlap,~ rectangular combined footing
,;:;~~
.
= 233.3 kN!n? (see Pier_ 11 R n
can be used. A rectangular shape of footing can also be used when limited space for footing is
·- -... !.. ..__1!__ • . .
 ;8~1' ll·''
, , 1,. 706 Foundation
, "I
lfll),;,1 Chapter -12 Combined Footing 707
. 'I
Sect.12. 9
If the exterior column near the property line is canying larger load than the interior column or
HIJ/i when the length of footing is limited trapezoidal footing is used. The parallel sides of trapezium are 12.9.2 Column Transferring Load to Soil through Longitudinal Beam
:Hh'
' ·,1 kept at right angles to the line joining the centres of two columns. The greater width of the and Footing Slab.
!iii li trapezium is provided near the heavier column. In this case the load from the column is transferred to longitudinal beam and then to the soil
.}!1.iJI When the column is on the property line a strap footing is provided. The details of the strap thr~ugh the footing slab: The longitudinal beam is provided along the full length ofthe footing
footing are given in Sect. 12.9.3 joining the two columns (see Fig. 12.9.5). In such a case, the slab on both sides of beam acts as a
"ttl'
ljji I' I'
./~~\!; The combined footing is designed such that the centroid of the footing area coincides with the cantilever, subjected to an upward soil reaction and transmits the total pressure to the beam through
resultant of two column loads, so that it is subjected to uniform upward pressure from soil over the shear. The beam transfers the pressure to the columns and balances their loads. Thus, the beam is
1Ill!'
~1111
:;j entire area. The footing bends in the longitudinal and transverse directions as shown in Fig. 12. 9.1 considered to be supported by column and loaded by an upward load transferred by the slab.
If the sagging moments (producing tension at bottom) in the cantilever portion of the beam
!1~;•.,,1 p1 p2
are more, the web of the beam should project below the footing slab so that the footing slab lies in
).)

::~I,
the compression zone with respect to bending of the beam and hence acts as T- beam. In such a
case in the hogging moment region between the columns, it acts as a rectangular beam. On the
other hand if the hogging moments (producing tension at top) between the columns are excessive,
i' .Diagonal tension cracks the web should project at the top of the slab, so that the footing slab lies in the compression zone
and the beam will act as T- beam (and will appear as inverted' 1' section) while in the cantilever
1 ;!
( a ) Longitudinal Bending
portion it will behave as a rectangular beam;

~r·: .· r · 1
··;·'\. 1
Ex. 12.9.1 Design a combined footing connecting two columns A and B, 4 m centre to
centr~, carrying an ultimate axial load of 1001! kN and 1400 kN respectively. The boundary
Q) oColumns
lil,li.l !!!
g!, b line 'of the property is 400 mm from the outer face of the column A. Column A is
360 mnf' -x 360-mm and column B is 420 mm x 420 mm. The bearing capacity of the soil
~11:
(/)
c:
~ obtained from plate load test is 106 kN/m2. Use M20 mix and Fe 415 grade steel. Assume
·effective cover equal to 60 mm.
llf Fig. 12.9.1 Rectangular Combined Footing Given: f ck = 20 Nlmm2 ' f y = 415 Nlmm. 2 '
•
Jb
= 106 kN!m2
There are mainly three alternative methods for design of rectangular footings : =.
Column A 360 mm x 360 mm , Column B = 420 mm x 420 mm ,
tm' (i) Column transferring load to the soil directly through footing slab. PuA.,;, 1000 kN, PuB = 1400 kN. c/c spacing between columns= 4 m

r (ii) Column transferring load to the soil through the longitudinal beam and footing slab
(iii) Strap footing.
Property line .400 mm from outer face of.column A.
Required: Design of q'ombined footing. . '
}f 12.9.1 Column 'Fransferring Load to the Soil directly through Footing Slab.
Solution : (a) Proportioning of base size/
Ultimate axial load on column A = I000 kN
lll
When the column load is transferred to soil directly through footing slab then in the . Ultilnate axialload on column B = 1400 kN
!H" ·longitudinal direction the footing is treated as an upward loaded beam spanning between the Centre of gravity of the loads from the property line,
columns and cantilevering beyond the collimns (see. Fig. 12.9.1). Since this beam is considerably y = [1000 x ( OAOO + 0.360 I 2) + 1400 ( 4.58)] I ( 1000 + 1400) = 2.91 m
/IC
' )
wider than the columns, the column loads l!fe also distributed in the transverse direction. -The load · Length of the footing:required = L = ~ x 2.91 = 5.82 m say 5.85 m
can be assumed to spread outwards froni the column into the footing at a slope of I to I. This 1
II/! means the effective width in the transverse direction can be taken equal to the width of the column Note : ~ince the length ,tJ[ ihe footing provided is slightly more than the required length, there will be
1 plus t! on either side. of the column, d being the effective depth of the footing small eccentricity (If 5.85- JB2 = 0.03 which. will cause a moment_ of 2400 x 0.003 I 1.5 = 48 kN.m
lrr (i.e. effective width= b +U). (for details see Ex. 12.9.1) with respect to the centroid of the footing. But this effect can be neglected and pressure distribution can be
assumed to be uniform.
I/I ii/

Total ultimate load .from columns = P--u = 2400 kN ·

'
Self weight offooting>'IO% x Pu = 240 kN
,W'
!J;·
Tota~ ultimate load = 2640 kN
 ~

708 Foundations CombmedFoohn,g 109

Chapter-12 Sect. 12.9
Safe bearing capacity of soil = ~ = 106 kNim2 Then Mx = IOOOx- 410.4(x + 0.58)2 /2 =0, :. x = 0.093m or3.62mfromco!umnA
Required area of footing = working loads from column I~ B.M under column B = MuB = 41 OA x 1.2il 2 = 331 kN.m
. . 264011.5
Area offootmg required = A = = 16.6 ~ The.B.M. and S.F. diagrams are shown in Fig. 12.9.3
1 106
Required effective depth = ~ 638 x I06 / (2.76 x 2850) = 285 mm
Width of footing = B/ = A/
L = 16.615.85 = 2.84 m
1 Provide total depth of 450 mm :. effective depth provided = d 7 450- 60 = 390 mm
Provide footing size o 5.85 m x 2.85 m

~
Area offooting provided = A = 5.85 x 2.85 = 16.67 m2 > 16m2 4000
1 -!sao 1210-l
The plan of the footing is shown in Fig. 12.9.2 C A E D
r------ 5850 I 410.4 kN/m

r
~t,J·~~/360
~x420
( a ) Loading Diagram
878.8 kN

rr
X 360
i{J- i-
1
I B
I G
..L
.. I I
-j5ao 4000 .,... 1270-+1
521.2 kN
Fig. 12.9.2 Plan of Combined Footing 724 kN ..:'1\~
762 kN ( b ) Shear Force lliagtam
(b) Depth offooting from bending moment considerations :
.'1 Upward intensity of soil pressure = PJ ~= 2400116.67 = 144 kNim2
·~l Intensity of soil pressure under working loads , 1-2440
2 I
= .2400 I ( 1.5 x 16.67) = 96 kNim < ~ ( = 106 kNim2 ) :. safe I
__ /

·1! I
1 Net upward soil pressure I m = wu = 144 x 2.85 = 4 I0.4 kNim I :~·-,

Shear force and Bending moment (Fig. 12.9.3) : I j

ill Shear for at column A 1 -A\ If - . Y 'll D

I C~/F !E GK! 7
I VAC = 410.4 x 0.58 = 238 kN, , VAB = 238-1000 = -762 kN
V8D = 4I0.4 ,x 1.27 = 521.2 kN, V8A = 1400-521.2 = 878.8 kN. 331 kN.m
i'
j: Let x be the point of zero shear from left end C, where B.M is maximum, Fig. 12.9.3 B.M. and S.F. Diagram
x = IOOOI410.4 = 2.44m
Bendingmoment under column A, MuA = 410.4 x 0.58 2 I 2 = 69.03 kN.m· (c) Check for two - way shear
Maximum· bending moment occurs atE at a distance 2.44 m from C The two- way shear is critical under column B which is carrying larger axial load of I400 kN.
Critical section is at a distanced 12 from the face of the col~inn.
. MuE =410.4 x 2.44 I 2 -: ~00 ( 2.44 :-0.58 ) = 638 kN.m
2

(i) Column - B
Comments : It will be seen that the maximum B.M. computed at the same section from right side Shear stress resisted by concrete= 't uc2 ='t' uc x k.s
works put to 610 kN.m. This is due to slight eccentricity of the resultant of two footings. The larger value , 2
is taken for computation of depth and reitiforcemin.t. where, t'uc = 0.25 ..JJ;;.=
0.25 ..J2F= 1.118Nimm.
ks = 0.5.. +
' ' = 1.5 :} 1
420/420
. . . ks = l
Let the point ofeontraflexure
.
be .at a.distaitcex
. .
:from the centre ofeoiumnA
. : ' .. . ... . .. ·..
:·· '[ _ = Lll8 x l ='l.lt8N/m~
Ir -~~ !

:l
~IU,;
,,:, ..
1
710 ·. Foundations
Width at the critical section = b + 2 x d I 2 = b + d = 420 + 390 = 810 mm
.Perimeter a~ the critical section = 2 x (810 + 810) = 3240 mm
Area resisting shear = 3240 x 390 = 126300 mm2
Chapter -12 Sect. 12.9
(ii) Area of steel for sagging B.M (= 331 kN.m)
A
s/
= 0.5 x 20 [1-
415
CombinedFooting 7]]

~1-_--4-.6-x_3_3_1_x-10-6~-Jx 2850 x 390

20 X 2850 X 3902 .
Ill:~~
. 'I Design shear = VuDl = Column load- upward intensity of soil pressure x area at critical se~ion
· = 2465 mrrt
'>11[(,1
1 . - = 1400- i44 X 0.81 X 0.8I = I305.5 /cN . ~ Provide 13 Nos. # 16 mm diameter bars at the bottom offooting.
IJj l,i 3 2
Actual shear stress= 13055 x I0 1 I263600= 1.033 Nlmm < tuc (= I.II8Nimm ) :. safe 2 Area provided = 2613 mm2 > 2465 mm2 , p1 = 100 x 26311 (2850 x 390) = 0.235%
2
:111111!' Check for development length at the point of contraflexur~
·!I (d) Area of reinforcement
( M ) ri = 261.6 kN.m. as obtained for ( i)
(i) Areaofreinforcementformaximum hoggingmoment MuE (=638kN.m.) 1 req .
i!mllii.ll No. of bars required = 13 x 261.61331 = 11 Nos.

J
l
Hence, extend all 13 bars of# 16 mm at bottom of footing beyond the point of contraflexure by
llll:·!
U_ ,,!! A = 0.5 X 20 [I - l - 4.6 X 638 X I06 X 2850 X 390 distanced(= 390 mm) and then curtail? bars and continue remaining 6 bars for supporting stirrups.
,tS··j' Sl 415 20 X 2850 X 3902 i!i
''c'.•fi!r i'
ll. ,If 'if
!-•
= 5000m~ (iii) Area of steel for sagging Moment MuA ( = 69.00 kN.m)

l
Using 16 mm bars, No. of bar = 5000 I 20I = 25 Nos.
I111!J!
Jln,l! Provide 25 bars of# 16 mm diameter distributed over a width of2.85 m
A
s/
= 0.5 x 20 [ 1 -
415
I - 4.6 x 69 x 106
20 X 2850 X 3902
]··x 2850 x 390
., df
lin Area provided = 5026- = 495 mrrt
2

l
Minimum area required = 0.12 x 2850 x 450/100 = 1539 mm A81 = 1539 mm2

•i~~l Note : The check for development length at the point of contrajlexure is required even though ·the , :.
reitiforcement is a negatiVe moment reinforcement rather than positive moment steel as prescribed in Provide 8 bars of# 16 mm diameter, Area provided= 1608 mrrf
IS : 456 clause 26.2.3.3 (c). In this case the footing may be visualised as an inverted beam loaded by soil
pressure and supported by columns. This situation is similar to the positive moment requirement in the Check for development length :
sense that bending moment decreases while shear force increases and therefore, the embedment is required Shear force at the point of contraflexure i;e. 0.093 m from A
~. into the support (column ) rather than out of the span for the negative moment requirement in ordinary
continuous beam, in which case shear goes on decreasing as bending moment reduces.
V = 762-410.4 X 0.093 = 724 /cN
(M )- d = V x (Ld- L) = 724 x (752-390)1 1000 = 262kN.m
1 req o ·
Jif:: At the second point of contraflexure at 0.38 m from centre of column B the shear force is :
2
'Required A = 495 x 262 I 69 = 1879 mm (i.e. 10 bars of# 16 mm)
81

-~I;:
- .,
v = 878.8-410.4 ( 0.38) = 722.8 kN. Therefore, provide 10 bars of# 16mm and continue all bars by 390 mm beyond the poiitt of
contraflexure and then curtail4 bars and continue 6 bars at bottom for supporting stirrups.
(M1 ) > (Ld'- L0 ) V
....,. (Eq.6.5.1) (

!l!j L0 = d or l2 ~which is greater i.e. 390 mm or I2 x 16 = 390 mm

(e) Check for one - way shear: :
• (i) Cantilever portions : In the cantilever portion since the column is under compression
dfl shear force is considered at a distanced(= 390 mm) from the face of the column. '
DH'I Ld. = [ 0.87.f/ ( 4 tbd) H = [0.87 X 415/(4 X 1.2 X 1.6)] ~ = 47 ~-
Shear is maximum under column B = 52 i .2 kN
]~ I
= 47 x 16 = 752 mm
VuD. = 521.2 - 410.4 ( 420 I 2 + 390) /1000 = 275 kN
2
·'-!)
M1 = V,(Ld- L0 ) = 722.8(752-390)11000 = 261.6kN.m. tu = VuD I (b x d) = 275 x 103 I (2850 x 390) = 0.25 Nlmm < 0.28 Nlmm2
'' ~ -~ 'j No. of bars provided to resist B.M of -638 kN.m = 25 Nos. where, 0.28 Nlmrrt corresponds to 0.15% reinforcement which is less than 0.235 %provided.
~~· No. of bars required for resisting B.M of.261.6kN.m. = 25 x 261.6/638 =II No. Shear reinforcement is not required only provide minimum stirrups.

(ii) Between portion AB :

!~ However, all25 bars are taken up to the outer face of both the columns. Out of total of 25
. _The diagotu11 tension crack for sagging B.M can occur at distanced ( =390 mm) at bottom
bar_s, I9 bars are stopped at the outer face of columns and 6 bars are taken right up to the edge of
footing. These bars are used to provide support for stirrups. - · fa'7 offooting{i.e. 570 m'!' from,tentreof column) or at top offooting ~i.e. for ~oggingB.Af.) at
II pomt of contrafleX1lre at dtstanCfe 380 mm from the centre ofcolumn whtchever ts less. ·
f'li
I

~-
. Charpte,.. 12
712 Foundations .011 jad ofthefqoting. In the central Combined Footing 7JJ
Sect. 12.9
"e te11stt.e fiooting provided the tension e. . Portio,
/r• _/' /r• ,/' h 'XISts
Note : Diagonal tension crack always starts on ce f/J riJe at top 0J t e footing from the at or
the crack will form at a distance d from the bottolfl fa "" e!fle 1'nl either at distance d or at th Point Of
vur.mm. = 511.3 + 444.6 = 955.9 kN > v D (= 722.8 kN)
'
-,,i · u
;·t
beyond that pomt..
The crack due.· to hogging momenI c..t}le po 1·
. 10 utagona 1 ·
tens1on crack and eh Poin1 Of :. only minimum shear reinforcement is required.
inflection proceeding towards the mid"span. Therefore, fVe f e0 ;nt of contraf/exure whichever is ;~:e the
15
Using 12 mm diameter 4 -legged stirrups
·contraj/exure whichever is nearer to the column wtll!attneP e,. to spacing,s = 0.87 f. A I (0.4 b) = 0.87 x 415 x (4 x 113) I (0.4 x 2850)
check for one - way shear should be carried out at d 0 y sv
the column (see Fig. 12.9.1) rf = 722 8kN b . = 140 mm clc .
. of co_ntraflexure is more
S.F. at the pomt ltJfllrl
JJ,;:::'uD _ · asotamed; earher. -- ·Similarly minimum shear reinforcement will be sufficient near column A
· - en · 1' - 0.456 Nlmm 2 (I; bl -. :. Provide# 12 mm diameter 4 -legged stirrups@ 140 mm clc for the whole length.
:. ShearforceatpointofcontraflexurefrOW"'~ 5o/ll · · uc a e 5.7.J)
P1 == IOOxS0261(2850x 390) "",;::: st1.3.KJ'
4 . . , o. "
t_Af <_
uD
=: 722 8 kN)
•
v ( ·(f) Transverse Reinforcement (
The footing bends in the transverse direction in the vicinity of the column. The transverse
vue =: 0.456 X 2850 X 390 I 1ooo 44·6 kfl.
4 reinforcement under each column should be provided within a band width equal to width of the
vusv.mm. =: 0.4 X 2850 X 390 I 1000
. :;::: column plus twice the effective depth. :. Band width= b + 2d
For column A, band width = 360 +2 x 390 = 1140 mm ~~
~actored upward pressure for columnA= PuA/ B1=1000/2.85 = 350.88 kN/m.
· ' Cantilever projection= ( 2850-360) I 2 = 1245 mm.
2
J B.M at the face of column = 350.88 x 1.245 I 2 = 271.9 kN.m
Ij Effective depth = 450 - 60 (eff. cover) - 16 (bar) = 374 mm
0
I A = 0.5 X 20 [ 1 - 1- 4.6 X 271.9 X 106 IX 1140 X 374
tl sl 415 · 20 X 1140 X 3742 .

11[
I
7
0
= 2264 mm
2

Provide 12 Nos. of# 16 mm dia in a width of 1.14 m , Area provided = 2412 mm

2
r'
I

"'
110

"'I Factored upward pressure for column B = 140012.85 = 491.2 kNim

~I
,.. I I I
Cantilever projection = ( 2850 :... 420 ) I 2 = 1215 mm (':;
2
'II B.M at face of column= 491.2 x 1.215 I 2 = 362.6 kN.m
For column B, band width= 420 +2 x 390 = 1200 mm.
il
...-1---4-·6_x_3 -62-·6_x_1_0~---~ x 1200 x 374
...ent
,jJ ·ntorc8'" R uired A = 0·5 x 20 [ 1 -
:1!,
( b ) Plan showing ToP flOI . . . - - - 2000 --I
r __....-: eq ' s/ 415 20 X 1200 X 374
lil
tll:'
Iii
'
= 3143 mrJ-
frovide 16 Nos. of 16 mm diameter in width of 1.2 m Area provided = 3216 ,(-
ltlili -._/''
For remaining portion of the provide distribution steel.
lj_:,
I: A = 0.12 X 1000 X 450 I 100 = 540 ,(-
. st .
Spacing ofl2 mm bars= 1000 x 113 I 540 = 200 mm
II'
II 6
Provide 12 mm bar at 200 mm c/c.
The details of reinforcement are shown in Fig. 12.9.4
16 EX. 12.9.2 Two interior column A and B carry 700 kN and 1000 kN loads respectively.
1140- 11-#16 - 111 ent · . (Ex.12.9.l)
. . ( c ) Bottom Reinforce • d footiPg Colrmm A is- 350 mm x 350 mm. and column B is 400 mm . x 400 mm in section. The centre to -
centre spacing between co1Uln11i ~ _4,6 m. The soil on which the footing rests is capable of
. CoJIIbJPe . I .

Fig. 12.9.4 Details of Reinforcemeot. ·

 Jtli !i
<i u'~i:! • 714 Foundations
Chapter- 12 Sect. 12.9 CombinedFooting 715
ilK~ i'!
'

j!Wf

l'mil::l
'•I

,[~ll i .
(i

- I! ~ I '
2
providing resistance of 130 kN!m . Design a combined footing by providing a central beam
joining the two columns. Use concrete grade M25 and mild steel reinforcement.
Given : /,;k = 25 Nlmm , .~y· = 250 Nlmm 2, ~ = 110 kNim 2
2

Column A = 350 mm x 350 mm , Column B = 400 l(!m x 400 mm

0.825m
Column 350 x 350

•
Longitudinal beam
0·8 m
Column 400 x 400
1
',:;i
cl ~ + D

1
0.4m

IHi!'~i~.lii
clc spacing of columns = 4.6 m, · '"' '· . 2m
1
PA = 700 kN, P8 = 1000 kN .j.-
l~Jii:
1.9m

Required: To design combined footing with central bea~ joining two columns. 4.E m
4.6
1.~{5:: Jii! Solution:
II~~~ .
. ,.tl, p uA = 1.5 X 700 = 1050 kN,
Urn ~
puB = 1.5 1000 = 1500 kN Fig. 12.9.5 Rectangular Footing with Central Beam.
mi (a) Proportioning of base size:
X

~_li•jfri Cantilever projection of the slab = 1000 - 35012 = 825 mm

]·~:n'-~!"
The footing shall be proportioned such that the maximum cantilever sagging moment is Maximum ultimate moment = 177 x 0.825 2/2 = 60.2 kN.m.
,II approximately equal to maximum hogging moment between the columns. Ifthe.moments are 2 ·--. .
unbalanced to some extent the larger moment should be in the region where the beam acts as a For M25 and Fe 250, Ru.max = 3.71 Nlmm and ku.max = 0.53 ...... (Table 4.5.1)
flanged section.
lllti!
lIW•i! Requiredeffectivedepth =~ 60.2x 106 /(3.71 x 1000) = 128mm
Working load carried by columnA = PA = 700 kN Since the slab is in contact with the soil clear cover of 50 mm is assumed. ·

l~il /1 Working load carried by column B = P = 1000 kN

Selfweightoffooting10% x(PA+ P ) = 170kN
8

i
Using 20 mm diameter bar~
Required total depth = 128 + 20 I 2 + 50 = 188 mm say 200 mm
!(Ill 8
Total working load = 1870 kN Provided effective depth = ' d = 200- 50- 2012 = 140 mm

~
·;I
'ji
'
Required area offooting = A = 1870 I 130 = l4.38 m2
1
Let the width of the footing = Bf = 2 m
Reuired
q '
A
st
·-~O.Sx
250
25 [T- i -· 4·6 x 60 ·2 x 106 JxlOOOx140
25 X J000 X 1402
f!
Required length of footing = L = A I B = 14.38 I 2 = 7.19 m
1 2384 mm2
=
1 1
. Provide footing of size 7.2 m x 2m , A = 7:2 x 2 = 14.4 m2 Use ~20 mm diameter bar at spacing= 1000 x 314 I 2384 say 130 mm
1
For uniform pressure distribution the C. G. of the footing should coincide with the C. G. ofcolumn. Area provided = 1000 xJ14 I no= 2415 mm2
Let x be the distance of C. G. from the centre line of column A
. . \
Check the depth for one - way shear considerations :
Then x = (P8 x 4.6)1(PA +P8 ) = (1000 x 4.6)/(1000 +700) = 2.7mfromcolumnA.) p1 = 100 x 2415 I (1000 x 140) = 1.7%, tuc = 0.172Nim~ ... ;.. (Table 5.71)
If the cantilever projection offooting beyond columnA is 'a' then, a + 2. 7 = L_rl 2 = 7.2/2. Value of kfor 200 mm thick slab = 1.2 ...... (Table 9.4.2)
:. a= 0.9 m. , 2
Permissible shear stress = 1.2 x 0.772 = 0.926 Nlmm
· Similarly if the cantilever projection of footing beyond B is 'h' then; shear resisted by concrete = Vuc = 0.226 x 1000 x 140 I 1000 = 129.6 leN
h + (4.6-2.7) = L1 ! 2 = 3.6m, :. h = 3.6- 1.9 = 1.7m Design shear at distanced = 140mmfrom the face of column
The details are shown in Fig. 12.9.5 VD
u
= 177x(O.S25-0.140) = 121W, V~ > Vu .. (=12lkN) :. safe
0
Total ultimate load from columns = Pu = 1.5 (700 + 1000) = 2550 kN. The depth may be reduced uniformly to 150 mm at the edges.
Upward intensity of soil pressure Pu I A = 2550/14.4 = 177 kNim 2 Check for development length
1
(h) Design of slab_: Ld = [0.87x2501(4x 1.4)]~ = 39~ = 39x20 = 780mm ... (Table6.2.2)
Intensity ofupward pressure = w = 177 kN/~ Modifieddevelopmentlength.
· ·
= Ldm = Ld x (A)
sreq
d I (A) . .sp~rw
u .
Consider one meter width of the slab(h = 1 m) = 780 x238412415 = 710mm
Load perm n,in of slab.= 177 x. 1 = 177 kN!in Available length of bar :P 825-50 +90° hOQkallowance (= 8~)= 825:... 50+ 8 x 20
= 935 mm > 770mm :. safe · · ·
 rr11
-·:ji
,,"-'liI'
,;;;,l_·
:li:1 ~ i
'li 1'1
;iql/' }!6. Folllldatio111
Chapter- 12 ~~ct. }2;9 Combined Footing 717
.1/i!!) 7ran.rVer~e reinforcement :
Shear Force and Bending Moment (Fig. 12.9.6)

~il !.
., ReqUired A,, = 0.15 bD I ,100 = 0.15 x 1000 x 200/100 = 300 mnf VAC = 354 x 0.9 = 318.6/cN , VAB = 1050-318.6 = 731.4/cN
/-~

Using+ 8 nim bars. Spacing = 1000 x SO I 300 = 160 mm

VBD = 354 X 1.7 = 601.8kN ' VBA = 1500-601.8 = 89~.2/cN,
,,~ ,1,,, Provide distribution steel of~ 8 mm at 160 mm ck
Point of zero shear from left end C
!{ltij;;
:lt!/1' .Note : In the computation of transverse steel the effect of reduction in effective depth due to variation x1 = 1050/354 = 2.97 m from C or x2 = 7.2.- 2.97 = 4.23 m from D
:!f!{ ,!.: in thickness ofslab is neglected for simplicity. , . ·· Maximum B.M. occurs atE at a distance of 4.23 m from D
(;!:;:
(c) Design of Longitudinal Beam : MuE = 354 x 4.23 2 /2-1500 ( 4.23-1.7) = - 6_28 kN.m
:ilill Two columns are joined by means of a beam monolithic with the footing slab. The load form BendingmomentundercolumnA = MuA = 354 x 0.92 /2 = 143.37 kN.m
~~·ifi the slab will be transferred to the beam. ·
Bending moment under column B = MuB = 354 x 1.72 = 511.5 kN.m.
y!

~I'· As the width of the footing is 2m, the net upward soil pressure per meter length of the beiUn
Uij.j'· Let the point of contraflex!lre be at a distance x from the centre of column A
_}ij/ :r = wu = 177 x 2 = 354/cNim
.m ...
~.ffi
,!p
i,ild ~0.9m '*m
J..
,
. .. . 1.7 m --j I
150(1 kN.
Then, MX = 1050x-354(x+0.9)2 /2 = 0
x = 0.206 m and 3.92 m from column A i.e. 0.68 m from B.

r:ii
4.6 m . . r • ·

f't
cf f f f f f I..Lf354idlllrn
8
t't f f' f f f 1 1111111'
Comments:
(I) It will be seen that the maximum B.M. computed at the same section from left side works out to
612 kN.m instead of 628 kN.m This is due to rounding out. The large value is taken for
:
.;:.._...

( a ) Loading Diagram computation of depth and area of steel.

(2) Ideally the projections should be such that the sagging bending moment is equal to hogging
898.2 kN moment. This is truly possible when the columns carry the same axial load

. .----1'"·''" ·~.· Since the negative moment (producing tension at top) is greater than the sagging moment and
further the region of negative moment is larger than the positive (i.e. sagging) moment the beam

~· .• ·. ·c;::---:' will be provided above the slab. In such a case the footing slab will lie in the compression zone with
r~pect to the bending of the beam and will act as an inverted T- beam between the points of
!"I 7314kN
I
72m
•
.. I 601.8 kN I contraflexures. In the cantilever portion tension will be at the bottom and the beam will be designed
as rectangular section.
2.97m 4.23m (i) Depth of beam from B.M Considerations :
0
( b ) Shear For~agram The width of beam is kept equal to the maximum width of-the column i.e. 400 mm.
Determine the depth of the beam where T- beam action is not available. The beam acts as a
\
.·rectangular section in the cantilever portion, where the maximum positive moment = S11.5 kN!m. ·-D:~
d = ~511.5 6
x 10 /(3.71 x 400) = 587 mm
Provide total depth of 750 mm. Assuming two rows of bars effective cover of 70 mm.
=
effective depth provided d = 750- 70 = 680 mm
:.•·
''I "-"AT.
,
'
1
I

..
l~ 1 \:
\
'eJ-.;...1.5m
I
=::J0
(ii) Check the depth for Two - way Shear : \
The column B can punch through the footing only if it shears against the depth of the beam .J

along its two opposite edges, ahd along the depth of the slab on the remaining two edges. The
_I
critical section for tWo - way shear is taken at distan.:e d 11 ( i.e. 680 /2 mm ) from the face of the
4.23m
I~ I _column. Therefore, the ~ritical section will be taken at a distance halfthe effective depth of the slab
( ds I 2 ) on the other side as shown in Fig. ·12.9. 7 .
,fil Fig. l:Z.9.6 Bending Moment and' Shear Force Diagram (Ex. t:z.9.:z)
In this case b =D = :;WO mm, db= 680 itJm, J~·= 140 mm
 '\'I
J[i 718 Foundations
~
[(i'l
,.1,
!!'I Chapter· 12 Sect. 12.9 , Combined Footing 719
I
Failure plane for
two wa~hear l_ Curtailment :· 1
B.M at 0.8 m from cantilever end= 354 x 0.8 2 I 2 = 113.3 kN

Beam
--. ~,
v.· .A
s/
0.5 X 25 [.~-
=
250 .
1 - 4.6 X 113.3 X 106
25 X 400 X 6802
J
X 400 X 680

----...1
-J D / - = 789 mm2
,.._ D+db --f It is propose to curtail3- ~ 32 mm, TPC = 800 mm and APC = 800-680 = 120 mm.
Slab
':···"./
Since this distance is very small no advantage will be gained in curtailing the bars in the
.cantilever portion. Therefore, all bars will be continued up to the end of cantilever. These bottom bars
jL~ Fig. 12.9. 7 Critical Section for Two- way Shear
Area resisting two - w~y shear of3 - 4> 32 will be curtailed at a distanced(= 6~0 mm) from the point'of contraflexure (A. = 680 mm)
!i·nlt. in the portion BE with its distance from the centre of support equal to 1360 mm from B.
Cantilever portion AC: . •· ,,.:. •·< ·. , /
~
=··
= 2(bxdb+dxd)+2(D+db)d
s s s

'.·.··-~ length of cantilever from the face.Q~cpi~J11n. = 900-350 I 2 = 725 mm

l;ji
!T
= 2 ( 400 X 680 + 140 X 140) + 2 (400 + 680) {40
_=: ..885600 mrrf- Ultimate moment = 354 x o.725 2/f','f:·.93 kN.m.
m!' Shear stress resisted by concrete = t
' ~2
= t' x k
~ s
A = 0.5 x25 [1 - ,-1-_-4-.6-x_9_3_x_1_06--Jx 400 x 680
25 X 400 X 6802
ill(
'\
where, t' uc = 0.25 {J:"k
c = 0.25 {25 = 1.25 Nlmrrf-
Sl 250
= 644 mm 2
ks = 0.5 + dID = 0.5 + 400 I 400 = 1.5 :J. I :.. k = I
i/( =I x 1.25 = 1.25 Nlmm2__
:. · tuc2 1 · ,.. · Provide 4 - 4> 16 mm at bottom face, Area provided = 804 mm2
,.r.
;~ I
Shear resisted by concrete
vuc2
· Continue all4 bars of 16 mm diameter through out at bottom.
Ji In region AB between points of contratlexures the beam acts as an isolated T- beam.
i\
= 1.25 X 885600 IIOOO = 1107 kN.
Design shear L0
llf
il ' = VuD2 = column load- wu x area at critical section bf + bw ...... (Eq. 4.12.2)
(L f b)+ 4
= (IOOO- 177 X (h+d8 ) X (D +db) _
~If
0

= 1000-I77x(400+I40) x(400+680)Jx to-6 where, L0 4.6-0.206-0.68 = 3.714 m = 3714 mm

~~~~~?
~m = 897 kN < Vuc2 ( = 1107 kN) :. Safe b actual width of flange = 2000 mm , bw = 400 mm
jlt,
l',!'' 3714
(iii) Area ofReinforcement : Cantilever portion RD. · bf ( 371412000) + 4 + 400 = 1034 mm < 2000 mm
fill
I ) Length of cantilever from the face of column = 1. 7- .4 /2 = ·I .5 m.
moment ~t the face of column = 354 x 1.52 /2 = 398.25 kN.m.

j'/~t'-,
Ultimate D1 . = 200 mm . , Mu = 628 kN.m. /
1
2 Moment of resistimce M ur 1, of a beam for xu = D is :
Mur.max = 3.71 x 40Q x 680 x J0-6 = 686 kN.m > 398.25 kN.·m. .
. . Section is singly reinforced. 1
/1 \ ( Muri) . = [0.36 x 25 x 1034 x 200 (680 - 0.42 x 200)] x 10--(j·
1

!1 ,, A x
= 0.5 25[1 _ .y 1 _ 4.6 x 398.25 x I0 6 Jx x
•• x:l < D
= 1109 kN.m > M~ ( = 628 kN.m.)

r~M. , _,
st 250 . . .. 25 X 400 X 680 2 400 680 1
. = 3032 mm 2 - .

Provide 3 - +32 mm + 4- ~ 16 mm at bottom face, Area provided = 3217 mrrl- Ast

= 0.5 x25 [l _
250
4.6 x 628x 10
1 - 25 X } 034 X 6802
6
Jx 1034 x 680 = 4542 mm2
j
I!'\
i
Ld = 39 x.32 = 1248 mm Provide 5 bars of ~32 mm and 3 bars of ~ 16 mm ,
.

...... (Table 6.2.2) · Area pr~vided = 4021 + 6{)3 = 4624 mrt?- > 4542 m~2
/
p1 = roo· x 46241 <4oo x 680 r= 1.7%
 J~jli
"•jl :!
t\ld
!-~':]
~-/1 720 Foundations
1/t.d
;:II•!
:-('
•:H'11--'i Curtailment : Chapter· 12 Sect. 12.9 Combined Footing 721 ~
1J!i Consider that 2- ~ 32 mm are to be curtailed
= 4624 mm2 , p 1 =
~
~.tii.j Area of steel available 100 x 46241 (400 x 680) = 1.7%
No. of bars to be con_ tinued =3 .:. . 16 +3 - $32 giving area = A = 3016 mm 2
·fifJ:i, moment of resistance of continuing bars st
2 't uc = 0.772 Nlmm
2}~ xx
4~~ 16 10-~ = 396.6 kNm
!iii/ Vuc =0.772x400x680x10=210kN, Vur.mm. = 108.8+210=318.8kN<VuD
Mur = [o.87 x 250 x 30!6 ( 680 - )x
"'i/11,'Illu
f~i
vUS\1 = 658.5-210 = 448.5 kN
I
Let the theoretical point of curtailment be at a distance x from the free end C , then Using 12 mm diameter 4 -legged stirrups
2
Muc = Mur :. -354xx 12+1050(x-:-0.9) = 396.6 Spacing,s = 0.87 x 250 .x (4 x 113) x 680 I (448.5 x 1000)
iiir'
·r1
~- 5.93x + 7.58 = 0, :. x = 4.06 m or 1.86 m from C = say 140 mm clc
,rf,ll Actual point of curtailment = 4.06 + 0.68 = 4. 74 m from C or 1.86-0.68 = 1.18 m from C Zone of shear reinforcement.
H; 1i'
r:u: Lsi ,: (731.4- 318.8)1354 = 1.16m
' -t,l'I" Terminate 2-$32 mm bars at a distance of280 mm (= 1180- 900) from the columnA and
r.;
_.1, +
760 mm (• 5500 - 4740) from colomu B. Rema;u;ug b"' 3 - 32 shall 00 coutUmo<J beyoud the For portion between two columns provide 12 mm diameter 4 -legged stirrups at spacing of
.:1/J
II ~
point of inflection for a distance of 680 mm i.e. 460 mm from column A and up to the outer face of
. column B. Remaining bars of 3 - 16 continued in the cantilever portion.
120 mm clc from column B for distance of 1. 72 m and from column A at 140 mm clc for a distance
of 1.16 m.
'Fl/' (iii) Design of shear reiriforcement :
./ For the remaining central portion of 1.88 m provide minimum shear reinforcement using
!ill 12 mm _diameter 2 -legged stirrups at " (
!U Portion between column z:e. AB
Spacing , s = 0.87 x 250 x (2 x 113) I (0.4 x 400) = 300 mm clc. < 0.75d

~I
lo litis -the crack doe to d;agooal teos;oo wm ""'"'at the po;ut ofcontrnflexure because I

the d;stance
d( =680 mm). of the po;ot of coutrnlloxure from the colomn ;, less than the effective depth Cantilever portion BD :
V!l_max = 601.8kN, VuD = 601.8-354(40012 + 680)/1000 = 190.28kN.
(i) Maximum shear force at B = Vu.max = 898.2 kN
Shear at the point of contraflexure = VuD = 898.2-354 x 0.68 = 657.48 kN
II.
Area of steel available 3- ~ 16 + 3- ~ 32, As = 3016 mm2 1- 900 r::i4" ____. . . --- . --- 4~00
t'ioo~
. ,./
1
p1 = 100 x 3016/ ( 400 x 680) = 1.1%
ill''
'II 't
uc
= 0.64 + 0.06 x 0.1 10.25 = 0.664 Nlmm 2 ...... (Table 5. 7.1)
_~-h:~r resisted by concrete = Vue = \cbd = 0.664 x 400 x 680 11000 = 180.6 kN.
Ill'
,I;!
Shear resisted by minimum stirrups V . = 0.4 bd = 0.4 x 400 x 68011000 = 108.8 kN
1'1/ usv.mm ·
;jll
Vur.mm. = 180.6 + 108.8 = 289.6 kN < VuD ( = 657.48 kN) ~-

li. .·. Design shear reinforcement is required. .:::::j

I Using 12 mm diameter4-Iegged stirrups,

~
Sheano 00 res;sted by st;rrups • v.., • V'" - V • 657.48 - I 08.8 ~ 548.68· kN -1 400 t-
-1-
-t 400 I-
-'~~
Spacing s = 0.87 x 250 x ( 4 x 113) x 680 I ( 548.68 x 1000)
Zone of shear reinforcement
= say 120 mm
;;:;;:;:]._ 5 • +32
3·+16
12 4·1egged
stirrups at 140c/c ·
T
:so
[1·+16_+12·21eg
_ Stiruup@300c/c

1. .
Ls 1 =;: Vur.mm. )I wu =
( Vu.max - , (898.2 - 289.6) 1354 l.. .